JP7208572B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine having advantageous sections .

In a conventional game machine, it is known to provide an advantageous interval in which an instruction function can be activated, and to set the end condition of the advantageous interval to 1500 games or 3000 payouts (see Patent Document 1, for example).

Japanese Patent No. 6112524

A problem to be solved by the present invention is to appropriately output a test signal in a game machine having advantageous sections .

The present invention
having a predetermined lamp that can be lit when a game medium can be betted;
As a game section, it has a normal section and an advantageous section,
In the normal section, there is no case of a predetermined game state,
In the advantageous section, the predetermined game state may occur,
If the value related to the total number of differences in the advantageous section exceeds a specific value, the advantageous section ends ,
Processing of outputting an advantageous interval signal indicating an advantageous interval as a test signal when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is not stopped and displayed in the game that satisfies the transition condition for shifting from the normal interval to the advantageous interval. and, after executing a process of outputting a replay lottery state identification signal indicating the lottery state of the internal lottery means as a test signal , executing a process of storing lighting information for lighting the predetermined lamp ,
Based on the fact that the lighting information for lighting the predetermined lamp is stored, a process of outputting a signal indicating that it is possible to bet a game medium as a test signal is executed.
It is characterized by

According to the present invention, it is possible to appropriately output the test signal .

3 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of the slot machine in this embodiment; FIG. It is a figure which shows accumulation|storage number display LED, advantageous area display LED, acquisition number display LED, a settlement switch, etc. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a main control board accommodated in a board case, (a) showing Example 1 and (b) showing Example 2; It is a figure explaining the detail of a digit and a segment. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of a reel. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing display windows (transparent windows) provided in the slot machine, positional relationships among reels, activated lines, and the like; It is a diagram (1) showing combinations of combination types, payout numbers, and symbols. It is a diagram (2) showing combination types, payout numbers, and symbols. It is a diagram (3) showing combinations of combination types, payout numbers, and symbols. FIG. 4 is a diagram (4) showing combination types, payout numbers, and symbols. FIG. 5 is a diagram (5) showing combination types, payout numbers, and symbols. FIG. 6 is a diagram (6) showing combinations of combination types, payout numbers, and symbols. It is a diagram (1) showing the relationship between the condition device, its winning combination, and the pushing order. It is a diagram (2) showing the relationship between the condition device, its winning combination, and the pushing order. It is a diagram (3) showing the relationship between the condition device, its winning combination, and the pushing order. It is a diagram (4) showing the relationship between the condition device, its winning combination, and the pushing order. It is a figure (1) which shows a numerical table. It is a figure (2) which shows a numerical table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a pressing order instruction number table; It is a figure which shows the relationship between a pushing order instruction|indication number, an advantageous pushing order, and display content. It is a figure which shows a production|presentation group number table. It is a figure explaining transition of RT. It is a figure which shows the lighting process of advantageous area display LED. 4 is a timing chart (Example 1 and Example 2) showing the flow of processing of the main control board, acquisition number display LED, and image display device; 10 is a timing chart (examples 3 and 4) showing the flow of processing of the main control board, acquisition number display LED, and image display device; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the flow of display of the pressing order instruction information by the obtained number display LED and notification of the correct pressing order by the image display device; It is a part of RWM, and is a figure which shows the storage area regarding an advantageous area and the total number of games. It is a part of RWM and shows a storage area related to the total number of coins to be paid out. It is a part of RWM and is a diagram showing a storage area related to the payout number at the time of continuous accessory activation. It is a part of the RWM and shows a storage area related to the number of payouts upon activation of the accessory. FIG. 10 is a diagram (modification) which is a part of RWM and shows a storage area related to the payout number at the time of continuous accessory activation. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process which updates the number of games, etc. using a register. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing a specific example 1 in steps S109 to S114 of FIG. 32; FIG. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing a specific example 2 in steps S109 to S114 of FIG. 32; FIG. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing a specific example 3 in steps S109 to S114 of FIG. 32; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process which updates the number of games, etc., without using a register. 9 is a flow chart showing the flow of calculation processing for an advantageous section ratio; It is a figure explaining the information displayed on management information display LED. It is a figure which shows the example which displays management information on storage number display LED. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of displaying management information on an acquired number display LED; 2 is an external perspective view showing a base portion 1 of the slot machine 10. FIG. In the second embodiment, it is a diagram showing a main control board accommodated in a board case, (a) shows an example 1, (b) shows an example 2. FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing processing (example 1) on the main control board side in the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing processing (example 2) on the main control board side in the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing processing (example 3) on the main control board side in the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing processing (example 4) on the main control board side in the third embodiment; FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing processing (example 5) on the main control board side in the third embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing processing (example 6) on the main control board side in the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing processing (example 7) on the main control board side in the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing processing (example 8) on the main control board side in the third embodiment; FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing processing (example 9) on the main control board side in the third embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing processing (example 10) on the main control board side in the third embodiment. 14 is a flow chart showing processing (example 1) on the sub-control board side in the third embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing processing (example 2) on the sub-control board side in the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing image display examples (examples 1 to 4) of the image display device by the sub-control board regarding the addition during AT (third embodiment). In 3rd execution form, it is the figure which explains the increase of AT game frequency and the change and the like of production. 10A and 10B are time charts (examples 1 and 2) of external signals in the fourth embodiment; FIG. 11 is a time chart (example 3) of an external signal in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing RT transition in Example 1 of the fifth embodiment; FIG. 11 is a time chart showing the relationship between RT transition and AT in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing Example 2 ((a) to (c)) of the fifth embodiment; It is a figure which shows RT transition in 6th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the relationship between the type of replay group D drawn in RT3, the winning combination, the pressing order, and the display combination in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 14 is a time chart showing examples 1 and 2 of the eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a time chart showing Example 3 of the eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a time chart showing examples 4 and 5 of the eighth embodiment; FIG. It is a figure explaining the flow of the game in 9th Embodiment. FIG. 13 is a time chart showing examples 1 and 2 of the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a time chart showing examples 3 and 4 of the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a time chart showing an ending effect and the like in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a number table (2) of the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a time chart showing extension of an advantageous section in the fourteenth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a time chart showing the relationship between the advantageous section and freeze in the fifteenth embodiment; (a) is a diagram showing winning number definition (1) in the sixteenth embodiment, (b) shows example 1, and (c) shows example 2. FIG. 74(a) is a drawing showing the winning number definition (2) in the sixteenth embodiment, following FIG. 74(a), (b) showing example 1, and (c) showing example 2; , (d) shows Example 3, and (e) shows Example 4. (a) is a diagram showing the winning number conversion data definition in the sixteenth embodiment, (b) shows example 1, (c) shows example 2, (d) shows example 3, (e ) shows Example 4. (a) is a diagram showing a winning number conversion table in the 16th embodiment, (b) shows a description of "DEFB", (c) shows Example 1, and (d) shows Example 2. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing the winning number lottery data definition in the 16th embodiment, and (b) shows the meaning of each identifier. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an all-RT common lottery table (1) in the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an all-RT common lottery table (2) in the sixteenth embodiment, following FIG. 79 ; FIG. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing an all-RT common lottery table (3) in the sixteenth embodiment, following FIG. 80 ; (a) is a diagram showing an all-RT common lottery table (4) in the sixteenth embodiment and is a diagram following FIG. 81, and (b) is a diagram showing a non-RT time lottery table in the sixteenth embodiment. There is, and (c) is a diagram showing an RT1 time lottery table in the sixteenth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an RT2 o'clock lottery table in the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an RT3 o'clock lottery table in the sixteenth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an RT4 o'clock lottery table in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a 1BBA o'clock lottery table in the 16th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the lottery table at 1BBB in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of lottery processing, such as a condition device number, in 16th Embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing the flow of processing of internal lottery 1 in the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing the flow of lottery determination processing in the sixteenth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing the flow of processing for condition device number set 1 in the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of lottery processing, such as a condition device number, in the modification of 16th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the flow of processing when all reels are stopped in a modified example of the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing the flow of processing for condition device number set 2 in a modified example of the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. (a) shows winning number definition (3) in the seventeenth embodiment, (b) shows example 1, (c) shows example 2, and (d) shows winning number conversion data definition. FIG. 10 shows. (a) is a diagram showing a winning number conversion table in the 17th embodiment, (b) shows example 1, (c) shows example 2, and (d) shows all RT common lottery table (5). FIG. 10 shows. FIG. 94D is a diagram showing an all-RT common lottery table (6) in the seventeenth embodiment, following FIG. 94(d). FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an all-RT common lottery table (7) in the seventeenth embodiment, following FIG. 95 ; (a) is a diagram showing a two-stage lottery address table in the seventeenth embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing a two-stage lottery table 1, (c) is a diagram showing a two-stage lottery table 2, (d) is a diagram showing a two-stage lottery table 3, (e) is a diagram showing a two-stage lottery table 4, and (f) is a diagram showing a two-stage lottery table 5. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of lottery processing, such as a condition device number, in 17th Embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the flow of processing for conditional device number set 3 in the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the flow of two-stage lottery processing in the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the flow of lottery processing without setting difference in the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of lottery processing, such as a condition apparatus number, in the modification of 17th Embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the flow of processing for a condition device number set 4 in a modified example of the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing the winning number lottery data definition in the eighteenth embodiment, and (b) shows the meaning of each identifier. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an all-RT common lottery table (8) in the eighteenth embodiment; FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an all-RT common lottery table (9) in the eighteenth embodiment, following FIG. 105 . FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an all-RT common lottery table (10) in the eighteenth embodiment, following FIG. FIG. 107 is a diagram showing an all-RT common lottery table (11) in the eighteenth embodiment, following FIG. 107 ; It is a flowchart which shows the flow of lottery processing, such as a condition device number, in 18th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the flow of processing for obtaining an advantageous section number in the eighteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the flow of processing for condition device number set 5 in the eighteenth embodiment; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing the winning number definition (4) in the 19th embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing the winning number conversion and advantageous section transition determination data definition, and (c) shows Example 1. , (d) shows Example 2. (a) is a diagram showing a winning number conversion table in the nineteenth embodiment, (b) shows example 1, and (c) shows example 2. FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an all-RT common lottery table (12) in the nineteenth embodiment; FIG. 114 is a diagram showing an all-RT common lottery table (13) in the nineteenth embodiment, following FIG. 114 ; FIG. 115 is a diagram showing an all-RT common lottery table (14) in the nineteenth embodiment, following FIG. 115 . (a) is a diagram showing an advantageous section transition determination random number table in the nineteenth embodiment, (b) shows an explanation of "DEFW", (c) shows Example 1, and (d) shows Example 2. . It is a flowchart which shows the flow of lottery processing, such as a condition device number, in 19th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a process flow of internal lottery 2 in the nineteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the flow of processing for conditional device number set 6 in the nineteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing the flow of processing for an advantageous section transition lottery in the nineteenth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of lottery processing, such as a condition apparatus number, in the modification of 19th Embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the flow of processing for conditional device number set 7 in a modified example of the nineteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating more detailed configurations of a main CPU, ROM, and RWM in the twentieth embodiment; (A) is a diagram showing various LEDs on the display substrate in the twentieth embodiment. (B) is a diagram more specifically showing management information display LEDs in the twentieth embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating details of digits and segments in the twentieth embodiment; FIG. It is a figure which shows the data table memorize|stored in ROM. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing output ports 2 to 5 provided on a main control board in the twentieth embodiment (also showing a reference example); FIG. 20 is a diagram showing wiring of electrical signals on the main control board in the twentieth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing wiring of electrical signals on the main control board in the twentieth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing wiring of electric signals on the display substrate in the twentieth embodiment; (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between an interrupt, an LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP), and an output signal in the twentieth embodiment. (B) is a diagram showing an LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP). 4 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR) by a main control board (main CPU); 20 is a flowchart showing LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in the twentieth embodiment; 20 is a flow chart showing ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT) in the twentieth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing unrecoverable error processing 1 (SS_ERROR_STOP1); 10 is a flowchart showing unrecoverable error processing 2 (SS_ERROR_STOP2); FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the configuration of an output port in the twenty-first embodiment; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between digits and segments in the twenty-first embodiment. (B) is a diagram showing an LED display counter of the twenty-first embodiment. 19 is a flowchart showing LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in the twenty-first embodiment; 19 is a flowchart showing ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT) in the twenty-first embodiment; (A) is a diagram showing various LEDs on a display substrate in a twenty-second embodiment. (B) is a diagram more specifically showing management information display LEDs in the twenty-second embodiment. (C) is a diagram showing a set value display LED in the twenty-second embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits and segments in the twenty-second embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing output ports in the twenty-second embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a circuit diagram showing wiring of electrical signals on a main control board in the twenty-second embodiment; FIG. 20 is a circuit diagram showing wiring of electrical signals on a main control board in the twenty-second embodiment; FIG. 20 is a circuit diagram showing wiring of electric signals on the display substrate in the twenty-second embodiment; (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between interrupts, LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP) values, digit signals, and segment signals in the twenty-second embodiment. (B) is a diagram showing an LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP). FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in the twenty-second embodiment; FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT) in the twenty-second embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing output ports 2 to 6 in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits and segments in the twenty-third embodiment; (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between interrupts, LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP) values, digit signals, and segment signals in the twenty-third embodiment. (B) is a diagram showing an LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP). FIG. 22 is a diagram showing output ports 2 to 7 in the twenty-fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits and segments in the twenty-fourth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing Example 1 of an LED display counter in the twenty-fourth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing Example 2 of an LED display counter in the twenty-fourth embodiment; 24 is a flowchart showing LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in the twenty-fourth embodiment; FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing a ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in the twenty-fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a number table (1) in the twenty-fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a number table (2) for non-RT in the twenty-fifth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a number table (2) at RT1 in the twenty-fifth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a number table (2) at RT2 in the twenty-fifth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a number table (2) at RT3 o'clock in the twenty-fifth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a number table (2) at RT 4 o'clock in the twenty-fifth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a numerical table (2) at the time of 1BBA operation in the twenty-fifth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a numerical table (2) at the time of 1BBB operation in the twenty-fifth embodiment; (a) is a diagram showing the presence or absence of advantageous interval transition and advantageous interval display LED lighting when a rare role is won in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the advantageous interval transition when a rare role is won in the twenty-fifth embodiment. and the presence or absence of advantageous section display LED lighting. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing 1BB winning probabilities and advantageous section transition probabilities at the time of 1BB winning for each set value in the twenty-fifth embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing the flow of instruction function activation processing in the twenty-fifth embodiment. In the twenty-fifth embodiment, it is a time chart showing an example of activating the instruction function at the time of winning the first push order bell after shifting to the advantageous section having no instruction game section. Time chart showing an example of canceling the operation of the instruction function by winning a special combination before the operation of the first instruction function after shifting to the advantageous section having no instruction game section in the 25th embodiment. be. In the twenty-fifth embodiment, in an advantageous section having no designated game section, it is a time chart showing an example of activating the instruction function when the first push-order bell is won after the one-time instruction operation condition is satisfied. In the twenty-fifth embodiment, it is a time chart showing an example of canceling the operation of the instruction function by winning the special role before the one-time instruction operation condition is satisfied in the advantageous section having no instruction game section. In the twenty-fifth embodiment, in an advantageous section having no designated game section, after completing the number of games in the advantageous section (after the count value of the advantageous section counter becomes "0"), an instruction function is performed when the winning order of the bell is won. It is a time chart showing an example of activating and ending an advantageous section. In the twenty-fifth embodiment, by winning a special combination before the number of games in the advantageous section is consumed (before the count value of the advantageous section counter becomes "0") in the advantageous section having no designated game section, 4 is a time chart showing an example of canceling the operation of the instruction function; Information on the RWM cleared by the initialization process (first initialization process) at the end of the advantageous section in the twenty-fifth embodiment, information on the RWM retained even after the initialization process at the end of the advantageous section, and when changing the setting FIG. 10 is a diagram showing information on RWM cleared in initialization processing (second initialization processing); (a) shows a modified example of the number table (1) in FIG. 160, and (b) shows the presence or absence of advantageous interval transition and advantageous interval display LED lighting at the time of winning a rare combination in FIG. 168 (b). It is a figure which shows the modification of. (a) shows a modified example of the number table (1) in FIG. 160, and (b) shows the presence or absence of advantageous interval transition and advantageous interval display LED lighting at the time of winning a rare combination in FIG. 168 (b). It is a figure which shows the modification of. (a) shows a modified example of the number table (1) in FIG. 160, and (b) shows the presence or absence of advantageous interval transition and advantageous interval display LED lighting at the time of winning a rare combination in FIG. 168 (b). It is a figure which shows the modification of. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing management information displayed by management information display LEDs in the twenty-sixth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a storage area (1) of RWM 53 in the twenty-sixth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a storage area (2) of the RWM 53 in the twenty-sixth embodiment; FIG. 24 is a diagram showing blinking display conditions for identification segs and ratio segs in the twenty-sixth embodiment. 19 is a flow chart showing program start (M_PRG_START) in the twenty-sixth embodiment. 29 is a flow chart showing setting change processing (M_RANK_SET) in the twenty-sixth embodiment. 29 is a flow chart showing power return processing (M_POWER_ON) in the twenty-sixth embodiment. 29 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the twenty-sixth embodiment; (a) is a flow chart showing the update of the number of payouts in the twenty-sixth embodiment. (b) is a flow chart showing an interrupt wait (C_INTR_WAIT) in the twenty-sixth embodiment. 29 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR) in the twenty-sixth embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing rate set processing (S_RATE_SET) in the twenty-sixth embodiment. 29 is a flow chart showing count upper limit check (S_LIMIT_CHK) in the twenty-sixth embodiment. 29 is a flow chart showing a game number count (S_GAME_CNT) in the twenty-sixth embodiment. 29 is a flow chart showing count up (S_CNT_UP) in the twenty-sixth embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an advantageous zone game number count (S_ATGAME_CNT) in the twenty-sixth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing payout number count (S_PAYOUT_CNT) in the twenty-sixth embodiment. 29 is a flow chart showing a payout number set (S_PAYOUT_SET) in the twenty-sixth embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a ring buffer set (S_RINGADR_SET) in the twenty-sixth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a character product payout number count (S_BNSPAY_CNT) in the twenty-sixth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing a continuous bonus payout number count (S_RBPAY_CNT) in the twenty-sixth embodiment; FIG. In the twenty-sixth embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing a ratio calculation RWM address table (TBL_ADR_CAL) stored in a ROM, and (B) is a diagram showing specific ROM storage areas (addresses and data). FIG. 4 is a diagram showing; 29 is a flow chart showing a ratio calculation process (S_CAL_SET) in the twenty-sixth embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing a calculated value set (S_VALUE_SET) in the twenty-sixth embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing ratio calculation execution (S_CAL_EXE) in the twenty-sixth embodiment. 29 is a flow chart showing ring buffer number update (S_RINGNO_SET) in the twenty-sixth embodiment. 29 is a flow chart showing ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) in the twenty-sixth embodiment. 29 is a flow chart showing flashing request flag generation (S_LED_FLASH) in the twenty-sixth embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flashing/non-corresponding item determination value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH) in the twenty-sixth embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing rate display timer update (S_RATE_TIME) in the twenty-sixth embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT) in the twenty-sixth embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flashing bit check count table (TBL_FLASH_CHK); FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a rate setting process (S_RATE_SET) in the twenty-seventh embodiment (1); FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) in the twenty-seventh embodiment (1); FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing ratio calculation management (S_CAL_CTL) in the twenty-seventh embodiment (1); FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a ratio calculation process (S_CAL_SET) in the twenty-seventh embodiment (1); 29 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the twenty-seventh embodiment (2); FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a rate setting process (S_RATE_SET) in the twenty-seventh embodiment (2); FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing setting change processing (M_RANK_SET) in the twenty-seventh embodiment (3); FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing power-on ratio calculation (S_CAL_PWON) in the twenty-seventh embodiment (3). 29 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the twenty-seventh embodiment (3); FIG. 203 is a flow chart showing another example of processing after step S2400 in FIG. 202 (modification of the twenty-sixth embodiment). FIG. 22 is a diagram showing addresses, labels, and contents of data stored in RWM usage areas in the twenty-eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing LED segment tables 1 and 2 stored in a ROM usage area in the twenty-eighth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing data and addresses of LED segment tables 1 and 2 in the twenty-eighth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing addresses of a pressing order instruction number table in the twenty-eighth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing setting change processing (M_RANK_SET) in the twenty-eighth embodiment; 29 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the twenty-eighth embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing a pressing order instruction number setting process (M_ORD_INF) in the twenty-eighth embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing a medal payout number update process in the twenty-eighth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a medal payout process (MS_WIN_PAY) by winning in the twenty-eighth embodiment; FIG. (1) is a diagram showing a state in which "88" (setting change in progress) is displayed on the acquisition number display LED, and (2) is a diagram showing a state in which "=1" (left first stop) is displayed on the acquisition number display LED. (3) is a diagram showing a state in which "dE" (front door is open) is displayed on the acquisition number display LED, and (4) is a diagram showing a state in which "E1" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED ( (5) shows a state in which the stored number display LED displays the stored number "50" and the acquired number display LED displays the acquired number "9". It is a diagram. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing addresses, labels, and contents of data stored in RWM usage areas in the twenty-ninth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the relationship among setting value data, setting value display data, and setting value display in the twenty-ninth embodiment; 29 is a flowchart showing setting change processing (M_RANK_SET) in the twenty-ninth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing set value display data set processing in the twenty-ninth embodiment; FIG. (1) is a diagram showing a state in which set values "1" to "6" are displayed in digit 4, and (2) is a diagram in which "=1" (left first stop) is displayed on the acquired number display LED. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a state, and (3) is a diagram showing a state in which the acquired number of cards "9" is displayed on the acquired number display LED. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the relationship between the pressing order instruction number, the pressing order instruction information, and the advantageous pressing order in the modifications of the twenty-eighth and twenty-ninth embodiments; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the relationship between segments A to G and bits 0 to 6 in modifications of the twenty-eighth and twenty-ninth embodiments; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the relationship between the pressing order instruction numbers, display data, digit display and advantageous pressing order in modifications of the twenty-eighth and twenty-ninth embodiments; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the relationship among next operation instruction information, display data, display of digits, and a stop switch to be operated next in modifications of the twenty-eighth and twenty-ninth embodiments; FIG. 20 is a diagram exemplifying the conditional device number, display data, display of digits, and advantageous pressing order relationships for conditional device numbers 11 to 22 in modifications of the twenty-eighth and twenty-ninth embodiments; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing setting change processing (M_RANK_SET) in a modified example of the twenty-ninth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing RWM storage areas relating to the thirtieth embodiment; 29 is a flowchart showing main processing in the thirtieth embodiment; FIG. 244 is a flow chart showing a game start set (M_GAME_SET) in step S2701. FIG. 245 is a flow chart showing advantageous section setting (M_ADV_SET) in step S2724. FIG. 246 is a flow chart showing a 2-byte countdown (M_W_CNT_DOWN) in step S2742. FIG. 246 is a flow chart showing RWM initialization (M_RWM_CLEAR) in step S2746. FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing advantageous section type updating in step S2703 in FIG. 244 ; FIG. 244 is a flow chart showing the push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF) in step S2704. FIG. 250 is a flow chart showing updating of the maximum payout notification flag in step S2793. FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing game end check processing (M_GAME_SET) in step S2705. FIG. 253 is a flow chart showing advantageous section end preparation (M_ADVEND_STNBY) in step S2823 in FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram (slump graph) for explaining the concept of the difference counter value in the thirty-first embodiment, (a) showing example 1 and (b) showing example 2; FIG. 20 is a diagram (slump flag) showing the relationship between the difference counter value and the advantageous interval in the thirty-first embodiment, where (a) shows example 1 and (b) shows example 2; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing storage areas of RWM 53 related to the thirty-first embodiment; FIG. In the 31st embodiment, (a) Example 1 is a diagram showing a calculation method based on the idea that the number of automatic bets is not the number of payouts, and (b) Example 2 is the number of payouts that is the number of payouts based on the number of automatic bets. It is a figure which shows the calculation method. FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining the update timing of the difference counter value in the thirty-first embodiment, (a) showing example 1 and (b) showing example 2; 258 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the computation of the difference counter value and the number of bytes of each data in the thirty-first embodiment; (a) Example 1 shows a case where computation is performed as in Example 1 of FIG. 258; b) Example 2 shows the case of calculating like Example 2 in FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the relationship between the difference number counter value and the sub-display in the 31st embodiment; FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of different notification modes in the thirty-first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the progress of a game and the lighting timing of the advantageous zone display LEDs in the thirty-second embodiment; It is a diagram showing the transition of the main game state of the 32nd embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram (patterns 1 and 2) showing the relationship between the transition of the main gaming state, the advantageous interval, and the advantageous interval display LEDs in the thirty-second embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram (patterns 3 and 4) showing the relationship between the transition of the main game state, the advantageous interval, and the advantageous interval display LEDs in the thirty-second embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram (patterns 5 and 6) showing the relationship between the transition of the main game state, the advantageous interval, and the advantageous interval display LEDs in the thirty-second embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram (patterns 7 and 8) showing the relationship between the transition of the main game state, the advantageous interval, and the advantageous interval display LEDs in the thirty-second embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram (patterns 9 and 10) showing the relationship between the transition of the main game state, the advantageous interval, and the advantageous interval display LEDs in the thirty-second embodiment; FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of a slot machine, which is an example of a gaming machine, in a thirty-third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a front view for explaining how a medal inserted from the medal slot passes through an insertion sensor in the thirty-third embodiment; FIG. 20 is a time chart for explaining a voltage drop when a power failure occurs in the thirty-third embodiment (A); FIG. 32 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the insertion sensor and the passage of medals in the thirty-third embodiment (B); FIG. 32 is a diagram for explaining on/off of the insertion sensor with a time chart in the thirty-third embodiment (B); In the thirty-third embodiment (C), it is a schematic diagram when medals are discharged from the medal payout device. In the thirty-third embodiment (C), it is a schematic diagram showing the state of ON (detection) / OFF (non-detection) of the payout sensor when medals are delivered from the medal payout device. In the thirty-third embodiment (C), it is a diagram showing on/off of the dispensing sensor in a time chart. FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view showing an outline of a main control board and a board case in the thirty-fourth embodiment; In the thirty-fourth embodiment, (a) is a plan view showing a board case containing a main control board. (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA showing Example 1 of the gate mark. (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A--A showing example 2 of gate traces. FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating the flow of processing when disconnection occurs between the main control board and the sub-control board in the thirty-fifth embodiment; In the thirty-sixth embodiment, it is a cross-sectional view (schematic view) explaining the movement of the stop button of the stop switch, (a) shows a no-load state, (b) is when the detection sensor is turned on from off. (c) shows the state when the stop button is pushed all the way down, and (d) shows the state when the stop button is released and the detection sensor turns off from on. In the thirty-sixth embodiment, it is a time chart showing the relationship between the movement of the stop button and the excitation state of the motor, (a) showing example 1 and (b) showing example 2. FIG. FIG. 12A is a time chart showing the relationship between power on/off and voltage level in the thirty-seventh embodiment, where (a) shows power off after starting the main program, and (b) shows before starting the main program; Indicates power off. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of electrical connection between a slot machine and a test-firing tester in the thirty-eighth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a diagram showing data and the like stored in RWM described in the thirty-eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing data and the like stored in RWM described in the thirty-eighth embodiment; FIG. In the thirty-eighth embodiment, (a) is a time chart showing ON/OFF of the closing request lamp signal, the closing switch signal, the startable lamp signal, and the reel start switch signal. (b) is a time chart showing on/off of a closing request lamp signal and a closing switch signal. 19 is a time chart showing ON/OFF of a replay state identification signal in the thirty-eighth embodiment; In the thirty-eighth embodiment, it is a time chart showing the output of the condition device signal, showing a method of time-divisionally outputting the condition device signal once. In the thirty-eighth embodiment, it is a time chart showing the output of the condition device signal, showing a method of time-divisionally outputting the condition device signal twice. FIG. 20 is a time chart showing ON/OFF of a signal during an advantageous section in the thirty-eighth embodiment; FIG. In the thirty-eighth embodiment, it is a time chart showing the on/off of the signal during continuous operation device for the first class special accessory. 14 is a time chart showing the relationship between the minimum game time, the fastest game time, and the setup time in the thirty-eighth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the occurrence of power failure and test signals in the thirty-eighth embodiment; In the thirty-eighth embodiment, (a) is a flowchart showing main processing, and (b) is a flowchart showing interrupt processing. 29 is a flow chart showing processing at the time of game start in the thirty-eighth embodiment. 29 is a flow chart showing medal acceptance start processing in the thirty-eighth embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing processing when a start switch is accepted in the thirty-eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing processing at the end of a game in the thirty-eighth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing advantageous section clear counter management processing in the thirty-eighth embodiment; 29 is a flowchart showing power-off processing in the thirty-eighth embodiment; 29 is a flowchart showing timer measurement in the thirty-eighth embodiment; 29 is a flow chart showing LED display in the thirty-eighth embodiment; 29 is a flowchart showing test signal management in the thirty-eighth embodiment; 304 is a flowchart showing test signal management in the thirty-eighth embodiment, and is a flowchart (example 1) following FIG. FIG. 304 is a flowchart showing test signal management in the thirty-eighth embodiment, and is a flowchart (example 2) following FIG. 303 ; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing advantageous section clear counter management, which is Modification 1 of the thirty-eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing processing at the time of game start, which is Modification 2 of the thirty-eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing test signal management, which is a modification 2 of the thirty-eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing standby processing without interrupt processing, which is a modification 3 of the thirty-eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing example 1 of advantageous section clear counter management of the thirty-ninth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing example 2 of advantageous section clear counter management in the thirty-ninth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing example 3 of advantageous section clear counter management of the thirty-ninth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing example 4 of advantageous section clear counter management of the thirty-ninth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing Example 1 of a test pattern for a ratio indicator in the fortieth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing Example 2 of a test pattern for a ratio indicator in the fortieth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a diagram showing Example 3 of a test pattern of a ratio indicator in the fortieth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing Example 4 of a test pattern for a ratio indicator in the fortieth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing Example 5 of a test pattern for a ratio indicator in the fortieth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing Example 6 of a test pattern of a ratio indicator in the fortieth embodiment;

In this specification, the meanings of terms are as follows.
"RT" means that the type (number) of condition devices (1BB, replay, small combination) to be drawn and the probability of winning is a unique drawing state, and "RT transition" means one By shifting from one RT to another RT, it means that the winning probability of at least one condition device (for example, replay) to be the lottery target changes. Therefore, the winning probability for each type of replay in one RT is a value specific to that RT, and it is impossible that the winning probability for each type of replay is the same between one RT and another RT. Absent. However, there is no problem if one RT and another RT have the same total replay winning probability.

RT includes non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, and RT4 in this embodiment (FIG. 22 described later).
Note that "non-RT" does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, but is equivalent to "RT0". Therefore, when "RT" is referred to herein, it includes non-RT.
In this embodiment, the non-internal medium is non-RT, RT1, RT2, or RT3, and the internal medium is RT4. The types (number) of replays to be selected by lottery and their winning probabilities differ between non-internal and internal.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, 1BBA operation and 1BBB operation are provided as RT during special games. In this embodiment, both 1BBA and 1BBB operations draw at least one replay.
A "hand" refers to a lottery target, and in the present embodiment, a lottery is drawn for a conditional device, and the conditional device is set to include at least one hand. Therefore, when one of the condition devices is won, at least one winning combination is won (has at least one winning combination).

The lottery condition devices include a "accessory condition device" including any "special award (accessory)" and a "winning and replay condition device" including either a small winning combination or a replay. .
The "accessory condition device" includes any of the special roles. When a special role is won, SB (single bonus), RB (first type special role; regular bonus), CB (second type special role; challenge bonus), which is a device that facilitates small role winning, 1BB (first-class continuous action device; first-class big bonus) and 2BB (second-class continuous action device; second-class big bonus) operate.

Here, the first-class role product continuous operating device (1BB) refers to a device capable of continuously operating the first-class special role product (RB).
Similarly, the second-class role continuous operation device (2BB) refers to a device capable of continuously operating the second-class special role (CB).
In this embodiment, only 1BB is provided as a special role, and there are two types (1BBA and 1BBB) to be described later.
During the operation of 1BB, RB is terminated when either two wins or two games are satisfied, and after that, RB is activated again on the condition that the termination condition of 1BB operation is not satisfied. .
Also, in this embodiment, SB, CB, and 2BB are not provided.

On the other hand, the "win and replay condition device" includes either a small win or a replay in which the winning information is not carried over to the next game or later.
In this embodiment, the winning and replay condition device numbers "0" to "30" are provided.
On the other hand, the "accessory condition device" includes any of RB, 1BB, and 2BB that can carry over the winning information to the next game or later, or SB or CB that does not carry over the winning information to the next game or later. In this embodiment, only 1BB (1BBA and 1BBB) that can carry over winning information to the next game or later is provided.

When the winning information is won in the role condition device including any of the special roles that can be carried over to the next game or later, the winning information of the special role is displayed until the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role stops on the effective line. is carried over to the next game.
A game in which the winning information is not won in the accessory condition device including any of the special combinations that can be carried over to the next game or later is referred to as "non-internal". On the other hand, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning special combination has not yet stopped on the effective line even though the winning condition device has been won, that is, the game carrying over the winning information of the special combination is "internal". It says. In the present embodiment, the game in which the accessory condition device is won is included in "non-internal", but the game in which the accessory condition device is won may be included in "internal".

The "advantageous operation mode" of the stop switch means that in a game in which the game result (combination of symbols that stop on the active line) is advantageous or disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch, the winning combination with the highest number of payouts wins. Alternatively, it refers to an operation mode in which a combination that shifts (promotes) to an advantageous RT or does not shift (falls) to a disadvantageous RT wins. The "advantageous mode of operation" is also referred to as the correct mode of operation.

In addition, the "operation mode" is a concept indicating the pressing order of the stop switch and/or the operation timing (timing of pressing the stop switch for stopping the target symbol on the activated line).
In the present embodiment, the "game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch" means the game when the bell is won in the pressing order (small win group B, small win group C), duplicate replays (replay group B, replay group C). ) corresponds to the game at the time of winning.

In addition, when the press order bell is won, the bell (small role) that wins when the stop switch is operated in the correct order It is sometimes referred to as a bell (small winning combination) in which the display of the combination of symbols, such as the largest number of small winning combinations, is the most advantageous for the player.
On the other hand, when the stop switch is operated in the order of pushing the wrong answer when the winning order of the bell is won, there is a case where the cheap bell wins or a case where the winning combination is lost according to the operation timing of the stop switch. In the present embodiment, the stop appearing symbols (combination of symbols on the active line, also referred to as "lost symbols") displayed when a winning combination is lost are called "pattern symbols", and have pattern symbols 01-03.

On the other hand, when the replay wins are duplicated (replay B group, replay C group wins), different combinations of symbols are stopped and displayed according to the order in which the stop switches are pressed. ”).
In this case, the combination of symbols that are advantageous to the player, for example, the combination of symbols that shifts to an RT with a higher probability of winning a replay, or the combination of symbols that maintains an RT with a higher probability of winning a replay, are displayed in a stopped order. Also referred to as "push order" or "elevated push order".
On the other hand, the pressing order in which symbol combinations that shift from advantageous RTs (for example, RTs with a high replay winning probability) to unfavorable RTs (for example, RTs with a low replay winning probability) are stopped and displayed for the player is called an "incorrect answer." Also referred to as "Push Order" or "Falling (Relegation) Push Order".

The "instruction function" means a function of displaying (notifying) the above-described "advantageous operation mode" to the player.
In other words, "instruction function" refers to a device that facilitates winning. On the other hand, if the "instruction function" is a device for facilitating the winning of small wins, the "instruction function" displays the correct pushing order for winning the correct pushing order (high bell) when the pushing order bell wins. This does not include displaying the order of pressing correct answers for winning an advantageous replay (a replay for shifting to an advantageous RT or a replay for maintaining an advantageous RT) when multiple replays are won.

In the following embodiments, the ``instruction function'' refers to the function of displaying an ``advantageous operation mode'' to the player, and the ``activation of the instruction function'' refers to displaying the correct pressing order when the pressing order bell is won. , and displaying the order of pressing the correct answers to win an advantageous replay when the replay is won multiple times.
It should be noted that showing the content of the 'instruction' to the player is 'display', and informing the player of the content of the instruction is 'informing'. Therefore, the "instruction function" is both a "display function" and a "notification function".
Also, "instruction" is a concept that has the meaning of "instruction", but the player will not be penalized for not following the "instruction". However, if you do not follow the correct pressing order displayed by the operation of the instruction function, the higher bell may not win when the bell is won in the order of pressing the bell, or a disadvantageous replay may be awarded when the replay is duplicated.

In addition, "instruction function operation game" means a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (a conditional device having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (small win group B, small win group C, replay group B, replay C It means a game that activates the instruction function in the game that won the group). Therefore, the instruction function activation game is one game. The instruction function operation game may also be referred to as an information game.
Also, even if the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, the game is not an instruction function activation game when the instruction function is not activated.

In this embodiment, the "game section" includes a "normal section", a "standby section", and an "advantageous section".
First, the "normal section" is a signal related to the instruction function, specifically, a pushing order instruction number and a winning and replay condition device number (information that can determine the correct pushing order) to be described later. It is a game section that prohibits transmission to the board) and does not affect the performance related to the instruction function at all (does not operate the instruction function). In other words, the normal section is a game section in which the instruction function cannot be operated, and a game section in which an advantageous operation mode cannot be displayed. However, in addition to the lottery of the condition device (role), it is possible to determine whether to move to the advantageous section (lottery etc.).
Since the instruction function must not be activated in the normal section, it is not possible to display the push order instruction information on a predetermined display device (LED, etc.) electrically connected to the main control board. Since such a signal is not transmitted to the peripheral board, it is also impossible to display (notify) an advantageous operation mode by an image display device electrically connected to the sub-control board, which will be described later.

In the normal section, when making a transition decision to an advantageous section, it is necessary to make a transition decision by associating (tying) with the winning condition device.
Here, determining whether to shift to the advantageous section in association with the winning condition device means the case of determining whether to shift to the advantageous section at the same time as the lottery of the condition device, and the fact that the specific condition device has been won. There is a case where a lottery is separately performed as to whether or not to move to the advantageous section under the condition of.

In this embodiment, it is set to determine whether or not to move to the advantageous section at the same time as the lottery for the condition device. Also, the length of the advantageous section (the number of games played) to be determined (winning) differs depending on the winning condition device. For example, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section when winning 1BB, which will be described later, as an initial value, it becomes an advantageous section of 50 games counted from the end of the 1BB game, and when the small winning combination E1 is won alone. When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, it may be an advantageous section that only executes one instruction function activated game (excluding games won in small combination C group, replay group B, and replay group C). be.

Furthermore, in determining the transition to the advantageous section in association with the winning condition device, the condition device that can be determined to transition to the advantageous section , a conditional device that is a condition for performing a lottery) is set so that the conditional device does not have a setting difference in the probability of winning.
Here, the "set value" determines the degree of advantage of the player, and the higher (or lower) the set value is, the more advantageous it is for the player (the higher the expected value of the ball output). ) is set. The set values are provided in six stages, for example, setting 1 to setting 6. FIG.
And, "a conditional device with no setting difference in winning probability (common setting)" refers to a conditional device in which the winning probability is the same for all settings.

In addition, it is only possible to determine the transition to the advantageous section in association with the winning of the condition device that does not have a set difference in the winning probability, and when the condition device that does not have a set difference in the winning probability is won , it does not mean that you always have to move to the advantageous section or that you always have to draw a lottery to move to the advantageous section. Of course, it is also possible not to make any decision regarding the advantageous section even when a condition device that does not have a set difference in the winning probability is won.

On the other hand, "a conditional device (by setting) having a setting difference in the winning probability" means that the winning probability is not the same for all settings. For example, if the winning probabilities are different for all setting values, or if the winning probabilities for some setting values are different from the winning probabilities for some other setting values (for example, setting 1 to setting 5 winning probabilities is "x" and the winning probability of setting 6 is "y (≠x)").

In addition, the "advantageous section" is a game section having performance related to the instruction function (in which the instruction function may be operated). Specifically, when the instruction function is operated, the instruction content (advantageous operation mode) refers to a game section in which a signal relating to the instruction function can be transmitted to the sub-control board only when the pressing order instruction information is displayed so that the (advantageous operation mode) can be identified. In other words, the advantageous section is a game section in which the instruction function can be operated (the instruction function may be operated) and a game section in which an advantageous operation mode can be displayed (may be displayed). A game during an advantageous section may also be referred to as a reportable game. Conversely, games during the normal interval and games during the standby interval may be referred to as non-reportable games.
However, the sub-control board cannot output an effect that is contrary to the instruction content issued by the main control board or the signal related to the received instruction function.

In the advantageous section of the present embodiment, the maximum number of payouts (“9”) corresponding to the specified number (“3”) in the game in which the instruction function activation game can be executed (when the accessory is not activated) can be acquired. In a game in which a conditional device (small winning combination B group) having an advantageous operation mode is won, at least one game or more is performed by instructing the operation mode of the stop switch for winning the winning combination (small winning combination 01) related to the maximum number of payouts. It is necessary.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, a small winning combination B group and a small winning combination C group are provided as so-called pressing order bell condition devices.
In the small combination B group, when the pressing order is correct, the small combination 01, which is a 9-card combination, always wins, and when the pressing order is incorrect, a 1-card combination can be won (there is a possibility that the winning combination is lost).
On the other hand, in the small winning combination C group, when the pressing order is correct, the small winning combination 02, which is a three-card winning combination, always wins, and when the pressing order is incorrect, a single winning combination always wins.

Then, the game when the instruction function activation game is executed is when the accessory is not activated (normal game), and the specified number (the number of medals to be inserted) in this normal game is "3".
Furthermore, the maximum number of payouts when the specified number is "3" is "9" (at the time of winning a minor winning combination of 01).
For this reason, in the advantageous section of the present embodiment, by activating the instruction function when a conditional device (minor winning combination B group) that allows the winning of the minor winning combination 01 is won, the correct pressing order for winning the minor winning combination 01 is determined. It is necessary to execute at least one game to be displayed.

Further, during the advantageous section, in a game in which a conditional device having an advantageous operation mode is won, the instruction function may always be operated to display the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
On the other hand, even in a game in which a conditional device having an advantageous operation mode is won during the advantageous section, the instruction function does not need to be activated.

Furthermore, the "standby section" refers to a game section when the transition to the advantageous section has not yet been made after the decision to shift to the advantageous section has been made. A waiting section may or may not be provided. That is, the normal section may be transitioned to the advantageous section, the normal section may be transitioned to the standby section, and the standby section may be transitioned to the advantageous section. In addition, it is not possible to shift from an advantageous section to a standby section, and after the advantageous section ends, it always shifts to a normal section. The waiting section can be shifted to the advantageous section only when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the conditional device that includes the special role that can carry over the winning information to the next game or later, and corresponds to the special role. A game in which a combination of symbols is displayed must always end. Of course, the game may end before the game in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is displayed.
Further, in the standby section, the main control board cannot operate the instruction function or transmit a signal related to the instruction function to the sub control board. When the main control board activates the instruction function and transmits a signal related to the instruction function to the sub control board, it is a condition that it is in the advantageous section.

In the advantageous section of the present embodiment, one instruction function operation game (excluding the game won in the small win group C, replay group B, and replay group C) is executed, and the game is executed a predetermined number of times. have
In an advantageous section in which a predetermined number of games are played, basically, when a conditional device having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is won, the instruction function is activated.
It should be noted that the condition for ending the advantageous section is not to determine the number of games described above, but, for example, to perform an end (puncture) lottery at a predetermined timing and terminate the advantageous section when the lottery is won. may

Alternatively, the instruction function operation game execution condition is not satisfied just by shifting to the advantageous section, and whether or not to execute the instruction function operation game is determined by lottery or the like on the condition that the instruction function operation game is in the advantageous section, When it is decided to execute the instruction function operation game, the instruction function operation game is executed until a predetermined end condition is satisfied.
Further, during the advantageous interval, it is determined (lottery or the like) whether or not to add (add) the (remaining) number of games in the advantageous interval.
In addition, the upper limit number of games is set in the advantageous section, and when the upper limit number of games is reached, even if there is a remaining number of games in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is always ended at that point (limiter operation) and shift to the normal section.

Furthermore, when the maximum number of games is reached, even if you have never won a conditional device (small win group B) that has an advantageous operation mode that allows you to acquire the maximum payout number (9), or you will not win. However, even if you have never instructed the operation mode of the stop switch that wins the winning combination (small winning combination 01) related to the maximum payout number, the advantageous section is always ended at that point (limiter operation), and normal Move to section.

Although the content partially overlaps with the above, the advantageous section in the present embodiment is defined as follows.
a) In the normal section, the lottery (even if it is decided at the same time as the lottery for the conditional device) to determine whether to move to the advantageous section must be tied to the conditional device that has no set difference. That is, the transition probability to the advantageous section should not differ according to the set value.
b) The setting value must not be referred to for the additional lottery for the advantageous section (even if the lottery is decided without a lottery). When adding an advantageous section based on the winning condition device, it must be tied to a condition device that has no set difference.

c) Special role in the normal section (meaning a special role that carries over winning. Hereinafter, the same applies in this paragraph.) During the internal or special role operation, the transition lottery of the advantageous section (It may be decided at the same time as the lottery of the condition device ) shall not be performed. Also, during the special role, even if it is in the advantageous section, the additional lottery for the advantageous section (it may be decided without performing the lottery) should not be performed. Furthermore, when you win a condition device with a set difference that includes a special role in an advantageous section and the special role is in operation, an additional lottery for the advantageous section during the operation of the special role (decide without performing a lottery) ) shall not be performed.
Here, conventionally, since it was common to perform an AT lottery even after being inside the inside, even if it was inside inside, without winning a special role, while maintaining inside the inside, waiting for AT winning. was possible. Recently, however, it is considered desirable not to conduct lotteries for ATs internally. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is determined that when a special combination is won in a normal section and becomes inside, the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section must not be performed within that section. Furthermore, when winning a special role in an advantageous section and becoming inside, it is stipulated that the advantageous section must not be added in the inside.

d) When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, as a general rule, the next game is shifted to the advantageous section, and until the advantageous section starts (in this embodiment, betting for the next game is allowed). ), it must be displayed to the player that it is an advantageous section from the next game (lighting of a lamp indicating that it is an advantageous section, etc.).
Here, conventionally, when an AT is won, it is common to consume a certain number of games (via an omen) from the time the AT is won until the player is notified of the AT win. rice field. Further, for example, in the case of lottery of AT based on the winning of a rare role, if the player fails to win the rare role in the game, the player will be notified that the rare role has been won and that the AT has been drawn based on the rare role. Therefore, even if the AT is won by winning the rare role, the game may be stopped before the AT winning is announced. After that, when someone else plays a game on that machine, there is a problem that the other person may enjoy the benefit of the AT (which the previous player has won). However, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, as a general rule, until the advantageous section starts (in this embodiment, until betting for the next game becomes possible), it is displayed that it is the advantageous section from the next game. Therefore, the above problem does not occur.
As described above, conventionally, AT winning is notified after AT winning (especially after AT's omen is passed through). , in that the advantageous section is displayed before the advantageous section starts.
Furthermore, the conventional AT winning notification was only performed as part of the effect, but in this embodiment, it is displayed to the player that it is an advantageous section from the next game (a lamp indicating that it is an advantageous section) lighting, etc.) is different in that it is performed to solve the above problem.

In addition, the advantageous section ratio refers to the ratio of staying in the advantageous section to the total game section (normal section + standby section + advantageous section). Specifically, for example, when the number of games played in all game sections is "1000" and the number of games played in the advantageous section therebetween is "700", the advantageous section ratio is "70%".
As will be described later, in the present embodiment, the advantageous interval ratio is displayed, but the displayed advantageous interval ratio is a numerical value obtained by truncating decimal places as a result of calculation.

The pull-in rate (PB) is the probability that the desired pattern can be stopped on the active line from the moment the stop switch is operated until the reel stops (maximum number of moving frames). show.
Then, if the stop switch is not operated at an appropriate reel position (at an operation timing that allows the target symbol to be stopped on the effective line within the maximum number of moving frames), the target symbol is stopped on the effective line (until the effective line The fact that it is impossible to pull in is referred to as "PB (pull-in rate) ≠ 1".
On the other hand, regardless of the position of the reel at the moment the stop switch is operated (regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch), it is possible to always stop (pull) the target symbol on the effective line. = 1”.

And "PB=1" has a case where all reels are like that and a case where only specific (part of) reels are like that.
In this embodiment, the maximum number of moving frames is set to "4", and when the target symbols are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols or less, "PB=1", exceeding 5 symbols (6 symbols or more). When they are arranged at intervals, "PB≠1". In particular, the number of symbols on the reel in this embodiment is set to "20", and if four symbols are arranged at intervals of five symbols, the symbol will be "PB=1".

``N-1'' game, ``N'' game, ``N+1'' game, . When it is a number, the game of the "N"th game is called "this time game". Also, the game of the "N-1"th game is referred to as the "previous game".
On the other hand, the "N+1"th game is called the "next game".

"Ball output rate" is a value calculated by the expected number of medals to be paid out / the number of inserted medals. When it is "1", the status quo is maintained. state, and when it is less than "1", it is a state in which the number of medals decreases.
Further, the "expected number of tokens to be paid out" is calculated by summing "probability of winning the combination x number of tokens to be paid out" for all the combinations to be selected by lottery in the game.

Furthermore, the "number of difference" is a value calculated by "the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals actually paid out or the expected number of medals to be paid out) - the number of inserted medals". When the number of inserted medals is "3" and the number of paid out medals (expected value) is "3", the difference is "±0", and when the number of paid out medals (expected value) exceeds "3", The number of difference exceeds "0", and when the number of medals to be paid out (expected value) is less than "3", the number of difference is less than "0".

A “bet” is a bet of medals (game media) to play a game. In the present embodiment, the number of bets that can be played (regular number) is set to three when the accessory is not activated (during a normal game). On the other hand, while the accessory (1BB) is in operation, the number of bets that can be played (prescribed number) is set to two. To bet medals, the player either inserts actual medals from the medal slot or operates a bet switch to bet the stored medals.
The "game medium" is medals in this embodiment, but electronic information is used as the game medium in the case of, for example, an enclosed game machine. It should be noted that "electronic information" means that, for example, when money (banknotes) is inserted into a lending machine, it is converted into electronic information corresponding to the money, and part or all of the electronic information is used to play a game on a gaming machine. It can be stored in the game machine as a game medium for performing.
In addition, since the display of the character ratio, etc., which will be described later, can be applied not only to the slot machine but also to the pinball game machine, the "game medium" includes not only medals but also game balls. be

"Reserve" refers to crediting medals inside the slot machine 10, unlike the above-mentioned "bet". "Reservation" may be used in a sense including betting, but in this specification, "reservation" is used in a sense that does not include "betting." In this embodiment, the maximum (limit) number of coins that can be stored is set to "50" regardless of the gaming state or the like. When a small win is won and medals are paid out, the medals are stored. Also, when the medals are inserted from the medal slot and the maximum number has already been bet, the inserted medals are stored. Therefore, when the medals are inserted from the medal slot, there are cases where the medals are betted and cases where the medals are stored.

It should be noted that the fact that the slot machine 10 "pays out" medals to the player is equivalent to the fact that the player "earns" medals. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the slot machine 10 side, it is "payout of medals", and from the viewpoint of the player side, it is "acquisition of medals". Therefore, there is a case of calling "payout (number of coins)" (for example, payout means 67) and a case of calling "acquisition (number of cards)" (for example, winning number display LED 78), but both have the same meaning.

In this specification, numbers (especially 8-bit numbers) with "B" at the end are binary numbers. Similarly, numbers ending with "H" mean hexadecimal numbers. Specifically, for example, a numeric value indicating "16" in decimal is expressed as "00010000 (B)" in binary and as "10 (H)" in hexadecimal. Numerical values representing decimal numbers are written as "16(D)" as necessary.
However, when it is clear whether it is a binary number, a decimal number, or a hexadecimal number, the suffixes "B", "D", and "H" may be omitted.

An embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings and the like.
<First embodiment>
FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of the slot machine 10 in this embodiment.
A main control board 50 and a sub-control board 80 are provided as representative control boards provided in the slot machine 10 .
The main control board 50 has an input port 51 and an output port 52, and is equipped with an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, etc. (not meant to include only those shown in FIG. 1).

In FIG. 1 , a main control board 50 and peripheral devices for game progress including operation switches such as the bet switch 40 are electrically connected via an input port 51 or an output port 52 . The input port 51 is a connection portion to which signals such as operation switches are input, and the output port 52 is a connection portion to transmit signals to peripheral devices such as the motor 32 .
In FIG. 1, input peripherals are indicated by arrows from which signals from the peripherals are directed to the main control board 50, and output peripherals are indicated by arrows from the main control board 50 to the peripherals. (The same applies to the sub-control board 80).

The RWM 53 is a storage medium capable of storing (updating) various data (variables) based on the progress of the game. Data (total number of games played, etc.) necessary for displaying management information, which will be described later, is stored in the RWM 53 .
The ROM 54 is a storage medium for storing programs and various data (for example, data table) necessary for progressing the game.

The main CPU 55 is a CPU provided on the main control board 50, and executes a program necessary for the progress of the game, performs calculations, and more. payout, etc.
The main CPU 55 incorporates registers. Especially in this embodiment, a plurality of registers (for example, A register to L register, a transmission register, etc.) are provided.

Also, on the main control board 50, an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55 and an MPU including registers are mounted. It should be noted that the RWM 53 and ROM 54 may be provided externally in addition to being mounted inside the MPU.
An MPU including an RWM 83, a ROM 84, and a sub CPU 85 is mounted on the sub control board 80, which will be described later. It should be noted that the RWM 83 and ROM 84 may be provided externally instead of being mounted inside the MPU.

In FIG. 1, the medal inserted from the medal slot 43 is sent inside the medal selector.
The medal selector, as shown in FIG. 1, includes a passage sensor 43a, a blocker 45, and an insertion sensor 44 (but not limited to these), and is electrically connected to the main control board 50. FIG.
When a medal is inserted from the medal slot 43, it is first detected by the path sensor 43a.

Furthermore, a blocker 45 is provided downstream of the passage sensor 43a. The blocker 45 permits/disallows insertion of medals, and when the insertion of medals is not permitted, forms a medal passage for returning the medals inserted from the medal insertion port 43 from the payout port. do. On the other hand, when the insertion of medals is permitted, a medal passage is formed to guide the medals inserted from the medal insertion port 43 to the hopper 35 .

Here, the blocker 45 prohibits insertion of medals during the game (from the start of rotation of the reels 31 until all the reels 31 stop, and when the payout corresponding to the winning combination is completed in the case of a winning combination). do. That is, the blocker 45 permits insertion of medals at least when no game is played.

Further downstream of the blocker 45, an input sensor 44 (a plurality of optical sensors) is provided. Therefore, the medal inserted from the medal slot 43 is detected by the path sensor 43a and then detected by the insertion sensor 44. FIG.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 includes a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a (left, middle, right) stop switch 42, and a settlement switch 46 as operation switches operated by the player. properly connected.
The bet switch 40 (40a or 40b) is a switch operated by the player when betting the accumulated medals for the current game. In this embodiment, a 1-bet switch 40a for inserting one medal and a 3-bet switch 40b for inserting three (maximum number or specified number) medals are provided.
Note that a bet switch for betting two cards may be provided without being limited to this.

In addition, the specified number in this embodiment is set to 3 when the accessory is not activated and 2 when the accessory is activated. can be inserted, and three medals can be inserted by operating (pressing) three times. Further, when the accessory is in operation, operating the 3-bet switch 40b makes it possible to insert two medals (a prescribed number) at a time.

Also, the start switch 41 is a switch operated by the player when starting the reels 31 (all of the left, middle, and right reels).
Furthermore, three stop switches 42 are provided corresponding to the three (left, middle, and right) reels 31, and are switches operated by the player when the corresponding reels 31 are to be stopped.
Further, the settlement switch 46 is a switch operated by the player when paying out (paying out) the medals betted and/or stored (credited) inside the slot machine 10 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a display substrate 75 is electrically connected to the main control substrate 50 . In practice, a relay board is provided between the main control board 50 and the display board 75, and the main control board 50 and the relay board, and the relay board and the display board 75 are connected. 1, illustration of the relay board is omitted. As described above, the main control board 50 and the display board 75 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, but another board may be interposed between them.
Furthermore, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected to each other by a harness or the like, but may be connected via another board (relay board or the like). For example, one or more other boards (relay boards, etc.) may be interposed between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 .

The display board 75 is equipped with an accumulated number display LED 76 , an advantageous section display LED 77 and an acquired number display LED 78 . These LEDs 76 to 78 are provided in the vicinity of operation switches operated by the player, and are provided at positions where the player can always visually recognize them. It is not necessary to provide all the LEDs 76 to 78 on one display substrate 75. For example, a plurality of display substrates 75 such as display substrates 75A, 75B, . . . Any one of the LEDs 76 to 78 may be provided in the .

FIG. 2 shows the actual positional relationship (arrangement) of the accumulated number display LED 76, the advantageous section display LED 77, the winning number display LED 78, the settlement switch 46, the 1-bet switch 40a, and the 3-bet switch 40b on the front side of the slot machine 10. It is a top view.
In addition, in FIG. 2, a display substrate 75 (indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 2) is arranged inside the slot machine 10 below the reserved number display LED 76, the advantageous section display LED 77, and the acquired number display LED 78. ing.

The stored number display LED 76 is an LED that displays the number of medals stored inside the slot machine 10, and is composed of a digit 1 that displays upper digits and a digit 2 that displays lower digits. That is, the stored number display LED 76 displays two digits.
Here, "digit" means a display unit (display), and particularly in this embodiment, it consists of a seven-segment LED (so-called seven-segment) and a segment DP (decimal point, a dot-shaped LED that displays a decimal point). It is
As shown in FIG. 2, the number of digits mounted on the display board 75 is four digits 1 to 4, but in this embodiment there are nine digits, and the other digits are mounted on the main control board. 60 (details will be described later).

The stored number display LED 76 displays the number of stored medals, and in this embodiment, displays a number between "00" and "50" (integer).
For example, when no medals are betted or stored, the display of the stored number display LED 76 is "00". Here, when one medal is cleaned, the one medal is betted for the game. When two more medals are inserted, three medals are bet for the game (when the prescribed number is three). Therefore, when the number of cleaned medals is up to three, the medals are betted and not stored. As the medals continue to be maintained, the medals are stored inside the slot machine 10 and the number of stored medals is displayed by the stored number display LED 76 .

In this embodiment, up to 50 medals can be stored. Therefore, when the number of stored medals reaches 50 (when "50" is displayed on the stored number display LED 76), no more medals are stored. In this state, if tokens are taken out from the token insertion slot 43, the tokens cleaned up are returned from the payout slot by the blocker 45.例文帳に追加

Here, when a winning combination with a medal payout (excluding replay) is won and medals corresponding to the winning combination are paid out, the medals are placed inside the slot machine 10 prior to the actual payout of medals from the payout port. Medals are saved. For example, when the accumulated number of coins before winning a winning combination is "10", the display of the accumulated number display LED 76 is updated from "10" to "19" when a winning combination of 9 coins is won.

Furthermore, when the number of stored coins exceeds "50" when a winning combination is won, the amount exceeding "50" is actually paid out from the payout port. For example, when the number of accumulated medals is "47" before winning a role, and 9 medals are paid out by winning a winning role of 9, 3 medals are accumulated and the number of accumulated medals becomes "50", exceeding "50". Six coins are paid out from the payout port.

Furthermore, when winning a replay, medals are not stored or paid out, and the same number of medals that have been bet in the relevant game are automatically bet for the replay. For example, the game is played with 3 bets (3 medals), and when a replay wins, 3 medals are automatically bet. Since the automatic bet based on the win in the replay is the insertion of medals for replaying the game, the medals cannot be settled even if the settlement (return) operation is performed after that.

In addition, according to the "Regulations Concerning Certification and Model Testing of Gaming Machines (hereinafter simply referred to as "rules")", when the combination of symbols corresponding to replay stops on the active line, the conditional device for replaying It is interpreted as an act and not a "winning". However, in the present application (this specification, etc.), replay is also treated as one of the winning combinations (replay winning combination), and stopping the combination of symbols corresponding to the replay on the activated line is referred to as "replay winning".

Also, the advantageous section display LED 77 is composed of the segment DP of the digit 2 . The advantageous section display LED 77 is controlled to be off during the normal section and the standby section, but is controlled to be on during the advantageous section. Therefore, by confirming the ON/OFF state of the advantageous section display LED 77, the player can determine at a glance whether or not the player is currently staying in the advantageous section.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 2, the advantageous section display LED 77 is located near the adjustment switch 46. FIG. Therefore, when the player ends the game and has accumulated medals (for example, when "10" is displayed in the accumulated number display LED 76), the player operates the settlement switch 46. At that time, It is possible to easily confirm that it is not in the advantageous section by checking the off state of the advantageous section display LED 77 . Furthermore, in this embodiment, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, in principle, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the adjustment switch 46 becomes operable. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from ending the game against his will even though it is in the advantageous interval (or the advantageous interval from the next game).

Furthermore, the winning number display LED 78 is an LED for displaying the payout number (the player's winning number) when a winning combination is won, and is composed of a digit 3 that displays the upper digit and a digit 4 that displays the lower digit. ing. Therefore, the acquisition number display LED 78 displays two digits like the stored number display LED 76 .
When there are no medals to be paid out, the display of the winning number display LED 78 is "00". From "00" to "09".
Note that the acquired number display LED 78 may be controlled to be extinguished when there are no medals to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digit (digit 3) may be extinguished and only the lower digit (digit 4) may be displayed as "0".

Also, the acquisition number display LED 78 normally displays the acquisition number, but functions as an LED that displays the content (type) of the error when an error occurs. For example, when the front door of the slot machine 10 is opened and a door open error is detected, the win number display LED 78 displays an error number "dE".
Furthermore, the acquisition number display LED 78 functions as an LED that displays an advantageous operation mode (push sequence instruction information) when the instruction function is activated. Therefore, the acquisition number display LED 78 in this embodiment is an LED that also serves as a display of the acquisition number, error details, and an advantageous operation mode based on the operation of the instruction function. The image display device 23 connected to the sub-control board 80 also informs of the advantageous pressing order when the instruction function is activated.

Here, in this specification, the display of the pressing order by the main control board 50 using the acquired number display LEDs 78 is referred to as "operation of the instruction function", and the display of the pressing order by the sub-control board 80 is referred to as "notification of the pressing order". called.
Further, as shown in FIG. 20, which will be described later, a number corresponding to an advantageous pressing order is called a "pressing order instruction number."
Furthermore, information such as "=1" in FIG. 20, which is the pressing order displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 by the operation of the instruction function, is referred to as "pressing order instruction information". That is, by operating the instruction function, the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 .

FIG. 3 is a plan view showing other digits (digits 5 to 9) mounted on the main control board 50. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 3, (a) shows Example 1 and (b) shows Example 2. As shown in FIG.
The main control board 50 is accommodated and sealed in a transparent board case 16 for its security. The main control board 50 cannot be accessed (the board case 16 cannot be opened) unless the crimped portion 16a of the board case 16 is destroyed. In FIG. 3, the main control board 50 (50A and 50B) is illustrated so as to be seen through the board case 16 without being blocked. Note that the crimped portion 16a may also be referred to as a sealing member.

On the board case 16, seals indicating that it is a regular main control board 50, a manufacturing number, a record of opening of the caulked portion 16a, etc. are pasted. Digits 5 to 9 are mounted on the main control board 50 so that they are not.
A digit 5 is a set value display LED 73, which displays the current set value when confirming or changing the setting. The set value display LED 73 does not necessarily have to be mounted on the main control board 50. For example, the set value display LED 73 can also be used as the storage number display LED 76 or the acquisition number display LED 78 on the back side of the front door.

Digits 6 to 9 are management information display LEDs 74 . In order to ensure the visibility of the management information display LED 74, for example, for each digit housing,
It is preferable to design the size of width m1×vertical width n≧36 square millimeters. Alternatively, when the management information display LED 74 is one horizontally long (width m2) digit case,
It is preferable to design the size so that width m2×vertical width n÷4 (number of digits)≧36 square millimeters.

In FIG. 3, although there is one main control board 50 in Example 1 of (a), the main control board 50 is not limited to this, and the main control board 50 is composed of a plurality of separate boards as in Example 2 of (b). Alternatively, each substrate may be connected by a harness or the like. However, even if the main control board 50 is composed of a plurality of separate boards, it is necessary to house the whole in the board case 16 and seal it.
In the example of FIG. 3B, the main control board 50 is made up of two main control boards 50A and 50B, connectors are provided on each of the main control boards 50A and 50B, and the connectors are connected by harnesses. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a connector that can directly connect the main control boards 50A and 50B may be used without using a harness (the same applies to FIG. 42(b), which will be described later).
Also, the set value display LED 73 is provided on the main control board 50A side, but the management information display LED 74 is mounted on the main control board 50B. That is, the main control board 50B also serves as a display board on which the management information display LED 74 is mounted.

Further, the management information display LEDs 74 may be arranged in one horizontal row as shown in Example 1 of (a), or may be arranged such that digits 6 and 7 are arranged in one upper row as shown in Example 2 of (b). , digits 8 and 9 may be arranged in the bottom row.

FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits 1-9, segments A-G, and segment DP.
As described above, each digit is composed of seven bar-shaped segments A to G and one dot-shaped segment DP, and the segments A to G (seven pieces) constitute so-called seven segments. .

As shown in FIG. 4, among digit 1, for example, segments A to G constitute seven segments of the upper digits of the stored number display LED 76, and segment DP is unused.
In addition, among the digits 2, segments A to G constitute seven segments of lower digits of the stored number display LED 76, and segment DP is used as an advantageous section display LED 77. FIG.
Furthermore, segments A to G of digits 3 and 4 constitute seven segments of the upper and lower digits of the acquisition number display LED 78, respectively, and segment DP is unused.

Furthermore, among the digits 5, segments A to G constitute seven segments of the set value display LED 73, and segment DP is an LED that lights up during setting change. That is, when only the 7 segment of the set value display LED 73 is lit, it indicates that the setting is being checked, and when the 7 segment and the segment DP are lit, it indicates that the setting is being changed. Note that the segment DP of the set value display LED 73 is not necessarily limited to such usage. For example, the segment DP of the setting value display LED 73 may be a segment that lights up when the setting value is confirmed during setting change.

Segments 6 to 9 constitute a management information display LED 74, and segments 6 and 7 display information types of the management information. Segments 8 and 9 display numerical values corresponding to the information types displayed in segments 6 and 7 of the management information. Segment DP of digits 6-9 is unused. However, when lighting the management information display LED 74, it is also possible to light the segment DP of the digit 7. FIG. Also, by lighting the segment DP of the digit 7, the boundary between the digits 6 and 7 indicating the information type and the digits 8 and 9 indicating the numerical value can be clarified and confirmed easily.

FIG. 4 also shows the configuration of segment data. For example, to display "0" in digit 1, segments A to F are lit and segments G and DP are extinguished, so the segment data is "00111111(B)".
Also, when the digit 2 is displayed as "1" and the segment is in the advantageous section, the segments B, C and DP are lit, so that the segment data becomes "10000110 (B)". That is, by setting the most significant bit (8th bit) of the segment data of digit 2 to "0" or "1", the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off or on. Thus, by determining whether the 8th bit of the segment data of digit 2 is "0" or "1", it is possible to determine whether or not it is in the advantageous section.

In FIG. 1, the main control board 50 is electrically connected to the motor 32 and the like of the pattern display device.
The symbol display device includes (three in this embodiment) reels 31 that display symbols, motors 32 that drive the respective reels 31 , and reel sensors 33 that detect the positions of the reels 31 .

The motor 32 is for rotating the reels 31, is connected to the center of rotation of each reel 31, and is controlled by reel control means 65, which will be described later. Here, the reel 31 is composed of a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31. A stop switch 42 operated when the left reel 31 is stopped is the left stop switch 42, and when the middle reel 31 is stopped, a stop switch 42 is operated. The stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42 , and the stop switch 42 to be operated when stopping the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42 .

The reel 31 is ring-shaped, and a reel tape printed with a plurality of types of patterns (designs forming a combination of patterns corresponding to roles) is attached to the outer peripheral surface thereof. The specific arrangement of symbols on the reels 31 will be described later.
Also, each reel 31 is provided with one (or two or more) index. The index is provided, for example, in a convex shape on the peripheral side surface of the reel 31, and is used when detecting whether or not the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether or not it has made one revolution, and the like. Each index is detected by the reel sensor 33 . A signal from the reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50 . Then, when the index detects (turns off) the reel sensor 33, the input signal is input to the main control board 50, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

In addition, the symbols on the reference position at the instant when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 are stored in the ROM 54 in advance. As a result, it is possible to detect the pattern on the reference position at the moment the index is detected.

A medal payout device is electrically connected to the main control board 50 . The medal payout device includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 driven when the medals of the hopper 35 are paid out from the payout port, and a payout for detecting the paid out medals from the hopper motor 36. A sensor 37 is provided.

Medals received from the medal insertion slot 43 are stored in the hopper 35 through a predetermined passage (also referred to as a "chute section").
The payout sensor 37 is a pair of optical sensors arranged at a predetermined distance, and is configured to be detected by the other payout sensor 37 after a predetermined time has passed since one of the payout sensors 37 detected the medals. It is Then, based on the timing at which the pair of payout sensors 37 are turned on/off, it is determined whether or not the medals have been correctly paid out.

For example, when the signals from both payout sensors 37 are both off even though the hopper motor 36 is being driven, it is determined that no medals have been paid out, and a hopper error (no medals) is detected. be done.
On the other hand, when at least one of the signals from the payout sensor 37 remains on, it is detected that a medal jam has occurred.

Also, the power switch 11 is a switch for turning on/off the power of the slot machine 10 .
The setting key switch 12 is turned on when the setting key is inserted from the setting key insertion opening and rotated 90 degrees to the right (clockwise), and is turned on when confirming or changing the setting.

The setting switch 13 is a switch that is operated when changing the setting value. For example, the setting value is incremented by "1" each time the button is operated during setting change. In this embodiment, the set values have settings 1 to 6. During the setting change, each time the setting switch 13 is operated, the set value changes from "1"→"2"→...→"6"→ Switches from "1" to . . . One of the set values is displayed while the settings are being changed, and when the start switch 41 is operated, the displayed set values are confirmed.

When the reset switch 14 is turned on and the power switch 11 is turned on, the reset switch 14 is reset, that is, an initialization process is performed, and predetermined data stored in the RWM 53 is cleared.
A door switch 15 is a switch that is turned on when a front door (not shown) of the slot machine 10 is opened, and is for detecting whether the front door is opened or closed.

Furthermore, an external signal (outer end signal) to the external collective terminal board 100 is output from a part of the output port 52 .
Here, the "external signal" is a signal to be output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (hall computer 200, data counter installed in the hall, etc.) via the external common terminal board 100. FIG. In this embodiment, an external signal (1BB signal, RB signal, advantageous zone signal), an external signal indicating that an error occurred in the slot machine 10 or power failure, etc., indicates opening of the front door of the slot machine 10. An external signal, a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, etc. are provided.

In FIG. 1, the sub-control board 80 controls the selection, output, etc. of effects (information) during the game and during the game standby.
Here, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (control command transmission means 71 described later) is unidirectionally connected to the sub-control board 80 by parallel communication. Sends information (control commands) necessary for outputting effects.
The main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, and may be connected using optical communication means. Furthermore, both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to parallel communication, and may be serial communication, or both serial communication and parallel communication may be used.

Like the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like.
The sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to performance peripheral devices such as the following performance lamps 21 as shown in FIG. However, the peripheral devices for presentation are not limited to these.
The RWM 83 is a storage medium that can temporarily store data and the like taken in when the sub CPU 85 controls the effect.
In addition, the ROM 84 is a storage medium for storing a program, various data, etc. for performing a lottery related to an effect as data for effect.

The effect lamps 21 are made up of LEDs, for example, and light up in a predetermined pattern when predetermined conditions are met. The effect lamps 21 are arranged on the inner peripheral side of each reel 31 and are used to illuminate the patterns displayed on the reels 31 (three patterns that are vertically continuous and visible from the display window 17) from behind. Fluorescent lamps that illuminate the symbols on the reels 31 from the top of the slot machine 10, frame lamps that are arranged in front of the front door of the slot machine 10 and blink when winning a winning combination, and the like are included.

Also, the speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when a predetermined condition is satisfied in order to perform various effects during the game.
Furthermore, the image display device 23 is composed of a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, etc., and various effects images (correct answer order, effects corresponding to the lottery result of the condition device, etc.) during the game, It displays game information (such as the number of games played during the operation of the accessory, the number of games won during the advantageous section, etc.).
Also, the cross key 24 and the menu button 25 are used to display information intended by the player (including a two-dimensional code that is the game history of the player) and to change various settings by the hall manager (store manager, etc.). It is used when

Next, the winning combination, symbol combination, etc. of the present embodiment will be described.
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the pattern arrangement of the reels 31 in this embodiment. In FIG. 5, the symbol numbers are also illustrated. For example, on the left reel 31, the symbol of symbol number 0 is "Bell A".
As shown in FIG. 5, in this embodiment, each reel 31 is equally divided into 20 frames, and each frame displays a predetermined pattern.
In the figure, "blank" does not mean that no pattern is displayed, but a predetermined pattern corresponding to "blank" is displayed.
"Bell A", "Bell B", and "Bell C" are similar in appearance, but different.

FIG. 6A shows the display window (transparent window) 17 provided on the front door (not shown) of the slot machine 10, the positional relationship between the reels 31, and the effective lines (symbols). It is a diagram showing a display line that displays a combination).
In this embodiment, three reels 31 (a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31) are provided in parallel in the horizontal direction. Furthermore, each reel 31 is arranged so that three patterns that are continuous vertically can be seen from the display window 17 . Therefore, a total of nine symbols (frames) are arranged so that they can be seen from the display window 17 of the slot machine 10 . In addition, the number at the lower right of each pattern indicates the pattern number.

Also, FIG. 6(B) illustrates designations of symbol positions in this specification. In this specification, for each reel 31, the symbol positions when stopped, which can be seen from the display window 17, are referred to as "upper row", "middle row", and "lower row" in order from the top. ”, “middle left”, and “lower left”.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 6(A), valid lines are set for the nine symbols visible through the display window 17 .

Here, the "effective line" is a line of symbols arranged when the reels 31 are stopped, and is a symbol combination line (display line) for forming a combination of symbols, and a symbol corresponding to one of the winning combinations. This is the winning line for that hand when the combination stops on that line. In this embodiment, one valid line (a straight line passing through the "lower left" - "middle middle" - "upper right") is defined, and the other symbol combination lines are all invalid lines. there is

An invalid line is a line that is not set as an active line among symbol combination lines, and even if the combination of symbols corresponding to any combination stops on that line, a profit is given according to that combination. This line does not perform (medal payout, etc.). In other words, an invalid line is a line that is not subject to a combination of symbols in the first place.

Further, conventionally, there has been known a slot machine in which the number of effective lines varies according to the number of inserted medals. For example, when the number of inserted medals is 1, the number of effective lines is set to 1, when the number of inserted medals is 2, the number of effective lines is set to 3, and when the number of inserted medals is 3, the number of effective lines is set to 5. and so on. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the game is played by inserting three or two medals, and in all games, one line shown in FIG. There is no change in the number of effective lines due to the number of inserted medals. Therefore, in this specification, the term "effective line" refers to the line shown in FIG. 6(A).

7 to 12 are diagrams showing the types of winnings (eg, winnings included in the condition devices drawn by the winning winnings lottery means 61, which will be described later), the number of payouts, and combinations of symbols in the present embodiment. FIG. 12 shows pattern symbols 01 to 03 (numbers “101” to "120").

The winnings of this embodiment are roughly divided into special winnings, replays (replay winnings), and small winnings.
A combination of symbols corresponding to each combination and the number of payouts at the time of winning are determined. When all the reels 31 are stopped and a combination of symbols corresponding to any combination stops on the activated line (the combination wins, the same shall apply hereinafter), the number of medals corresponding to the combination is paid out.
However, the payout number at the time of winning the special combination is set to 0. Also, in the replay, medals are automatically inserted (replay).

In FIGS. 7 to 12, the "specified number 3" displayed in the number of payouts, etc. indicates the number of payouts, etc. when the specified number is 3 (when the accessory is not activated, that is, the number of inserts during normal game). , "regular number 2" indicates the number of payouts when the prescribed number is 2 (the number of coins inserted during operation of the accessory, that is, during the special game). For example, Replay 01 with the number "3" indicates that a replay will be performed with the specified number of 3 cards, and "-" with the specified number of 2 indicates that the lottery will not be made.

In FIG. 7, numbers "1" and "2" correspond to special roles (accessories). In this embodiment, only 1BB is provided as a special role, and 1BB has two types (1BBA and 1BBB).
A special role is a role to shift from a normal game to a special game.
When 1BB is won, no medals are paid out in the current game, but the next game shifts to a 1BB game corresponding to a special game (operation of the accessory).
During the 1BB game (when the accessory is activated), the ball output rate is set to exceed "1", so that the player can expect to obtain more medals than when the accessory is not activated, which is an advantageous game for the player. .

Further, replay (replay role) is a role that allows a replay in which the number of medals inserted in the current game is maintained (medals are automatically bet).
The replays of this embodiment include replays 01 to 06 (numbers "3" to "13"), as shown in FIG.
Replays 02 and 03 are replays that are shifted to other RTs when a specific RT wins. These replays are therefore also referred to as transitional replays.

More specifically, when replay 02 wins in RT2, the next game is shifted to RT3 (RT advantageous to the player). Therefore, replay 02 is also referred to as a promoted replay.
Also, when replay 03 wins in RT3, the next game is shifted to RT2 (an RT more disadvantageous to the player than the previous RT). For this reason, replay 03 is also referred to as a drop (downgrade) replay.

In addition, replays 04 and 05 are firstly used as control replays for the purpose of increasing the types of conditional devices by winning multiple replays, and in this embodiment, in the conditional devices described later, Replays included in replays B2, B3, C2, C3, or E. When replay B2, B3, C2 or C3 is won, replay 04 or 05 as control replay does not stop on the active line.

In addition, replays 04 and 05 are secondly used as rare replays and included in replay E of the conditional device described below. When replay E is won in an advantageous section, the addition of the advantageous section is executed. It should be noted that the addition lottery may be performed instead of always executing the addition.
Replay 06 is a replay that is drawn during the operation of 1BB, and is included in replay D of the condition device to be described later. When the replay D is won during the advantageous section, the addition of the advantageous section is executed. It should be noted that the addition lottery may be performed instead of always executing the addition.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 7 to 11, the minor winning combination includes minor winning combinations 01 to 40 (numbers "14" to "100"). The small wins 01 and 02 are small wins (small wins corresponding to higher bells) that are won in the correct pressing order when the bell is won in the order of pressing the bell, which will be described later. Further, the small wins 03 to 34 are small wins (small wins corresponding to the standard bell) that can be won (PB≠1) in the order of pressing the wrong answer when the bell is won in the order of pressing the bell.
Furthermore, the small wins 35 to 38 are rare small wins (small wins corresponding to watermelon or cherry).
Further, the small winning combinations 39 and 40 are the small winning combinations that can be won only when the predetermined number is two, that is, when the accessory is activated.

As described above, pattern symbols 01 to 03 are not the roles themselves, but appear when the winning combination is lost (when the winning combination is not awarded) when the pressing order is incorrect when the pressing order bell is won. It is a combination of patterns. Furthermore, the pattern symbol is a specific RT (non-RT, RT1, or RT3 in this embodiment), when the combination of the symbols stops on the effective line, the RT is shifted (shifted to RT2 in this embodiment). combination. In this embodiment, pattern symbols 01 to 03 always appear when a winning combination is lost (when a winning combination fails to win) when the pushing order is incorrect when winning a minor combination B group. However, other combination of symbols (not the role itself) may appear.

In each of the above-mentioned roles, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the role does not stop on the active line in the game in which the role is won, the role to be carried over to the next game and thereafter and the role not to be carried over are determined. .
The hand carried over is 1BB in this embodiment. When 1BB is won, in the game until 1BB is won, the winning information of 1BB is controlled to be carried over to the next game and thereafter.

On the other hand, winning of 1BB is carried over, but small wins and replays other than 1BB are not carried over. In the lottery of the conditional device, when a small combination or replay is won, the winning combination is valid only in the current game, and the winning is not carried over to the next game or later. That is, in a game in which one of these winning combinations is won, the reels 31 are controlled to be stopped so that the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination can be won. , the rights related to the winning role shall be extinguished.

When starting a game, the player inserts medals stored in advance by operating the bet switch 40 (stored bet), or manually inserts medals from the medal insertion slot 43 (repair bet). When the start switch 41 is operated with a specified number of medals bet, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50 . When receiving this signal, the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65, which will be described later) performs a winning lottery by the winning lottery means 61, drives and controls all the motors 32, and controls all the reels. 31 is controlled to rotate. As the reels 31 are rotated by the motor 32 in this way, the symbols on the reels 31 are moved up and down within the display window 17 at a predetermined speed.

By pressing the stop switch 42, the player stops the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50 . Upon receiving this signal, the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 to be described later) drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to the stop switch 42 so as to correspond to the combination lottery result of the combination lottery means 61. Stop control of the reel 31 related to the motor 32 is performed so that the reel 31 is stopped.

Then, the game result of the current game is displayed by the combination of symbols when all the reels 31 are stopped. Furthermore, when the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations stops on the activated line (when the winning combination is won), the payout of medals corresponding to the winning combination is performed.

Next, a specific configuration of the main control board 50 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 1, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 is provided with the following combination lottery means 61 and the like. Each means below in this embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the means shown in this embodiment.

The combination lottery means 61 performs a lottery (decision, selection) of a conditional device (winning combination). Therefore, the combination lottery means 61 is also called condition device determination (lottery or selection) means, winning combination determination (lottery or selection) means, and the like.
In addition, "conditional device winning" is also called role lottery result, lottery result, winning number, winning result, and the like.

The combination lottery means 61 includes, for example, a lottery random number generation means (hardware random number, etc.), a random number extraction means for extracting the random number generated by the random number generation means, and a random value extracted by the random number extraction means. A determining means for determining whether or not a conditional device has been won and the conditional device that has been won is provided.

The random number generating means generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, "0" to "65535" in decimal). The random number is, for example, a random number in which a counter that counts once every 200 n (nano) seconds continues to count the range of "0" to "65535" as one cycle. continue to count.

The random number extraction means extracts the random number generated by the random number generation means at a predetermined time, in this embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player. The determining means determines the conditional device corresponding to the region to which the random number belongs by collating the random number extracted by the random number extracting means with a conditional device lottery table to be described later. For example, if the extracted random number belongs to the winning and replay condition device number "1" (replay A), it is determined that replay A is won.

13 to 16 are diagrams showing the types of conditional devices drawn by the combination lottery means 61 and the contents of the winning combination included in each conditional device.
In the following explanation, the condition device will be mainly explained, and the details of the stop control of the reel 31 based on the pressing order and operation timing of the stop switch 42 when each condition device is won will be explained in the reel control means 65. do.

As described above, the condition device of the present embodiment includes the "accessory condition device", which is a condition device that includes any of the special combinations that can carry over the winning information to the next game, and the condition device that does not carry over the winning information to the next game. It consists of a "win and replay condition device" which is a condition device that includes either a small winning combination or a replay.
Winning the accessory condition device corresponds to winning 1BB in this embodiment, and has accessory condition device numbers “1” and “2”.
Accessory condition device number "0" corresponds to non-winning of a special role, Accessory condition device number "1" corresponds to winning 1BBA, and Accessory condition device number "2" corresponds to winning 1BBB. Equivalent to.

Further, for example, when replay A is won, the accessory condition device number is "0", and the winning and replay condition device number is "1".
On the other hand, when 1BBA is single-won, the accessory condition device number is "1" and the winning and replay condition device number is "0".

Furthermore, in this embodiment, there is a case where 1BB and a small winning combination are won. becomes "26".
When 1BB and a small winning combination or a replay are won in duplicate, the winning of the small winning combination or the replay is given priority in this game (the order of priority can be arbitrarily set). Winning of a small winning combination or replay is effective only in the current game, so the winning is not carried over to the next game, but the winning information of 1BB is carried over to the next game unless winning a prize.

The winning and replay condition device will be described below.
The condition device number "0" corresponds to non-winning of the combination (so-called loss).
Replay A with the condition device number "1" is a single winning replay 01. When replay A is won, replay 01 wins regardless of the pressing order (any pressing order).

Replays B1 to B3 with condition device numbers "2" to "4" (hereinafter collectively referred to as "replay B group"), replays C1 to C3 with condition device numbers "5" to "7" (hereinafter collectively will be referred to as “replay group C”.) are duplicate wins of a plurality of types of replays, and are duplicate wins including at least one of replay 01 or 02. The types of winning replays are set to differ according to the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed.
For example, in replay B1 with the condition device number "2", replay 02 wins in the pressing order of left first stop, and replay 01 wins when other than left first stop (middle or right first stop).

In addition, in the case of replay double winning, the replay (replay role) wins regardless of the pressing order, so there is no concept of higher/lower payout of medals or the like. However, for example, when replay B1 is won in RT2, RT is promoted (shifted from RT2 to RT3) by winning replay 02 in the left first stop. On the other hand, except for the left first stop, RT2 is maintained by winning replay 01.
Also, when replay C1 is won in RT3, RT3 is maintained by winning replay 01 in the left first stop. On the other hand, other than the left first stop, by winning the replay 03, RT is lowered (downgraded) (shifted from RT3 to RT2).

Replay D of the condition device number "8" is a single winning replay 06. When replay D is won, replay 06 wins regardless of the pressing order.
Similarly, replay E with the condition device number "9" is a double winning of replays 04 and 05. When replay E is won, replay 04 or 05 wins regardless of the pressing order. These replays 04 and 05 have a role as rare replays. In particular, in this embodiment, lottery is held at RT1, and if replay E is won during RT1 and the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added. It should be noted that the addition lottery may be performed instead of always executing the addition.

In FIG. 14, a small winning combination A with a conditional device number of "10" is placed on a so-called common bell, and a small winning combination of 01 is won alone. When the small winning combination A is won, the small winning combination 01 always wins regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42 (PB=1).
In FIGS. 14 and 15, small wins B1 to B12 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "small win group B") with condition device numbers "11" to "22" correspond to so-called push-order bells. , small win 01 (9 bells, 9 wins) and at least one of the small wins 03 to 34 (1 win).

When these conditional devices are won, according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42, when the pressing order is correct, "PB=1" and the high bell (9 bells, 9 bells), a small combination 01 wins. On the other hand, when it is the wrong answer pressing order, according to the operation timing of the stop switch 42 (the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated), a small winning combination 03 that is a cheap bell (one-piece winning combination) There is a case where 1 to 34 wins and a case where none of the small wins wins (a case where pattern symbols are displayed due to a dropout).

In FIG. 16, small wins C1 to C3 with condition device numbers "23" to "25" (hereinafter collectively referred to as "small win group C") are so-called "push It corresponds to a regular bell, and is a duplicate winning including a small winning combination 02 (three bells, three winning combination) and small winning combinations 03 to 10 (one winning combination).
When these conditional devices are won, according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42, when the correct pressing order is "PB=1", a small win 02 with a high bell (3 bells, 3 bells) is won. On the other hand, when the incorrect answer is pressed, "PB=1" and one of the small wins 03 to 10, which is a cheap bell (one-card win), wins. Therefore, when the small winning combination C group is won, there is no case where pattern symbols are displayed (dropped), unlike when the small winning group B is winning. It should be noted that the case is not limited to this, and there may be a case where none of the small wins is won.

When the small combination B group is won, 9 coins are paid out when the high bell is won, so when the pressing order is correct, 3 coins are put in (number of coins inserted) and 9 coins are out (number of coins paid out). The number of sheets becomes "+6 sheets". Therefore, when the pressing order is correct, the number of medals increases, and when the pressing order is incorrect (the number of payouts is 1 or 0), the number of medals decreases.
On the other hand, in the small winning combination C group, 3 coins are paid out when a high-level bell is won. The difference number of sheets is "±0 sheets". Therefore, when the pushing order is correct, the number of medals remains at the current state, and when the pushing order is incorrect (the number of payouts is 1), the number of medals decreases.

The reason for providing both the pushing order bell for paying out 9 balls and the pushing order bell for paying out 3 balls in the correct pushing order is to adjust the payout rate. In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, when the pressing order is incorrect when winning a small combination B group, the probability of winning a one-piece combination is 25%, and the other 75% are pattern symbols. is set to be displayed (no payout when displaying pattern patterns). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16, when the pressing order is incorrect when the small combination C group is won, "PB=1" wins the one-piece combination. In this way, two types of push order bells are provided with different payout numbers depending on whether the push order is correct or incorrect, and the probability of winning is appropriately set, so that the ball payout rate can be set within an appropriate range. become.

The small winning combination D with condition device number “26” corresponds to a rare small winning combination (watermelon). The small winning combination D is a single win of the small winning combination 35, and is set to "PB≠1".
Further, the small winning combination E1 with the conditional device number "27" and the small winning combination E2 with the conditional device number "28" correspond to the rare small winning combination (cherry), like the small winning combination D1. The small winning combination E1 is a duplicate winning of the small winning combination 36 and 38, and the small winning combination E2 is a multiple winning combination including the small winning combination 37 in addition to the small winning combinations 36 and 38 described above. When a small winning combination E1 or E2 is won, a double winning combination (a small winning combination of 36 or 38) is won regardless of the pressing order.

The small combination F of condition device number "29" is a combination that is drawn only during 1BB operation (during 1BB game), and small combinations 01 to 39 are repeatedly won. When the small combination F is won, the small combination 39 with 10 cards wins with "PB=1".
The small combination G of the condition device number "30" is a combination drawn only during 1BB operation (during 1BB game), and the small combination 40 is won alone. When the small combination G is won, the small combination 40, which is a 9-card combination, is awarded with "PB=1".

17 and 18 show winning probabilities determined by the lottery table when condition devices are drawn by the role lottery means 61, and show the set numbers of the accessory condition devices and winning and replay condition devices for each RT. It is a diagram. If the numerical values shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 are divided by "65536", the winning probability is obtained. For example, the set numbers for single winning of 1BBA are set to "20" and "10" ("30" in total) for both non-RT and RT1 to RT3. Therefore, the single winning probability of 1BBA is "30/65536".

FIG. 17 is a setting number table of a condition device that is common to settings and can be determined to move to an advantageous section, or that performs an addition of an advantageous section (or can perform an addition lottery).
Here, "common setting" means that there is no setting difference, that is, setting 1 to setting 6 have the same numerical value.
And when you win the setting common condition device, you can always decide to move to the advantageous section (determine to add during the advantageous section), or whether to move to the advantageous section ( It may be determined by lottery (whether or not to be added during the advantageous section). Alternatively, a condition device that decides to shift to an advantageous section (determines to add during the advantageous section) and a condition device that determines not to shift to the advantageous section (determines not to add during the advantageous section) may be provided.

In this embodiment, the setting common condition device shown in FIG. 17 is provided with a condition device for deciding to shift to the advantageous section and a condition device for deciding not to shift to the advantageous section. Furthermore, during the advantageous section, the condition device is set to always decide to add the advantageous section.
In FIG. 17, in the normal section, "O" means that it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, and "X" means that it is decided not to shift to the advantageous section. In the advantageous section, "Δ" means that it is decided to add the advantageous section, and "X" means that it is decided not to add the advantageous section.
In FIG. 17, "○" indicates that it is decided to move to the advantageous section, and "△" indicates that it is decided to add the advantageous section. It means that a lottery is made to determine whether or not to move to an advantageous section, and "△" may mean to draw a lottery to determine whether or not to add an advantageous section.

Moreover, FIG. 18 shows condition devices and their setting numbers for which it is not decided to move to the advantageous section and not to decide to add the advantageous section.
In this embodiment, the condition device for determining to move to the advantageous section or to add the advantageous section is limited to when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 is won, and the condition device shown in FIG. In winning, none of them decides to shift to the advantageous section and decides not to add the advantageous section.
In FIG. 18, setting values 1 and 6 are shown representatively. A number is defined for each value.

In FIGS. 17 and 18, conditional devices containing 1BBA or 1BBB are drawn only in non-inside, so they are drawn in non-RT, RT1-RT3. In addition, 1BBA and 1BBB have a case of winning alone and a case of winning with a minor combination D, E1 or E2. On the other hand, the minor combination D, E1 or E2 may be won alone. A conditional device including 1BBA or 1BBB that is drawn in RT4 is treated as a single winning of a small combination D, E1 or E2. Therefore, the total number of set numbers for winning the small winning combination D in RT4 is "580" to "585", and the total number of setting numbers for winning the small combination E1 in RT4 is "1030". The set numbers for winning the small win E2 alone in RT4 are "310" to "370" in total.
In addition, 1BBB is set as a winning combination when a condition device with a set difference is won, and based on the winning of 1BBB, it is decided to shift to an advantageous section or to add an advantageous section. never

Also, replay D is selected by lottery only while 1BB is in operation. Furthermore, Replay E is drawn only at RT1. Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, after the operation of 1BBB is completed, the process proceeds to RT1. Then, if replay E is won in this RT1, an advantageous section is added (limited to the advantageous section). Therefore, in order not to appear in other RTs, replay E is drawn by lottery only in RT1.
Furthermore, the small wins D and E1 are drawn only when the accessory is not activated, and are not drawn when the accessory is activated.
On the other hand, the small wins F and G are not drawn when the accessory is not activated, but are drawn only when the accessory is activated.

Also, in FIG. 17, the total number of entries for single winning of 1BBA is "30", but in this embodiment, the number "20" determined to move to the advantageous section in the normal section and the number "20" in the advantageous section and the number "10" which decides not to transition. That is, in the case where 1BBA is single-won, if the set number "20" is won, if the game is in the normal section, the advantageous section will be won at the same time. On the other hand, in the case where 1BBA is single-won, if the number "10" is won, the advantage section is not won.

In addition, when one BBA is won alone during the advantageous section, it is decided to add the advantageous section regardless of whether the set number is "20" or "10".
Similarly, the set numbers that result in a single winning of the small winning combination E1 are "1000" in total. and the number "750" that determines not to transition to .

However, this is not the only option, but when the single win E1 number is set to one number "1000" (the number "250" and the number "750" are not divided) and the small win E1 is won. In addition, a separate lottery may be used to determine whether or not to move to the advantageous section. For example, there is a 25% probability of deciding to move to the advantageous interval, and a 75% probability of not deciding to move to the advantageous interval. In this way, it is permissible to set a number that wins in the advantageous section and a number that does not win in the advantageous section from the beginning, but the number itself is one value, and when the number is won, the game moves to the advantageous section. A lottery (two-stage lottery) may be conducted to determine whether or not to do so.
Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, when RT4 (inside middle), there is no case where it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section is not added. Therefore, even if a small winning combination D or E1 is won, when it is RT4, it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section is not added ("*3" in FIG. 17). .

In FIG. 18, when 1BBB is single-won, and when 1BBB and a small combination D are double-won, no decision regarding the advantageous section is made. However, as will be described later, after the end of the operation of 1BBB (after transition to RT1), an opportunity to add an advantageous section is provided.
The small winning combination E2 may be double-won with 1BBB or may be single-won. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17, when the small winning combination E1 is won, there is a case where the advantageous section is determined for both the single winning of the small winning combination E1 and the double winning with 1BBA.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 18, each condition device of replay A, replay B group, and replay C group is set in common, but it is not decided to move to the advantageous section, and it is added during the advantageous section not decide.
However, not limited to the examples of FIGS. 17 and 18, when these replay condition devices are won, it is decided to move to the advantageous section (including lottery) or to add an advantageous section (including lottery) ) may be provided. Alternatively, in FIG. 18, in replay A, replay B group, and replay C group, setting 1 and setting 6 are slightly different (for example, "1"), replay A, replay B group, And the replay C group may be set separately.

In FIG. 18, replay A is drawn at all RTs when the accessory is not activated. In addition, the replay B1 group is drawn by lottery only in RT2. Furthermore, Replay Group C is drawn only at RT3. Small winning combination A, small winning combination B group, and small winning combination C group all have setting differences between setting 1 and setting 6, but the numbers are the same for all RTs.

In addition, as shown in the table of "special winning combination and small winning combination" in FIG. Therefore, setting 6 is more advantageous than setting 1 in this respect.
Furthermore, as shown in the "replay" table, RT3 has the highest probability of winning the replay. Then, in the advantageous section, it is basically set to stay at RT3, so not only the medals are increased by the operation of the instruction function when the winning order of the bell is won, but also the medals are reduced less by winning the replay. .

In addition, the small win A, the small win group B, and the small win group C are all set as condition devices having a setting difference. Here, the number difference between setting 1 and setting 6 for small win A is "250", and the difference between setting 1 and setting 6 for small win group B (whole) is "240 (20×12) ”. Therefore, the small winning combination A has a larger set number difference than the small winning combination B group. As a result, the set number of the minor winning combination A, which does not have a winning difference according to the pressing order, is set to a larger value, so that the difference in the payout rate according to the set value can be reliably provided.
Also, since the combination of symbols that can be won when the minor win A is won and the symbol combination that can be won when the pressing order is correct when the minor win group B is won are set to be the same (described later), the minor win A can be won. It is not possible to guess the setting value by counting the number of winnings (winning prizes).

Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the probability of winning the small win group B is set higher than the probability of winning the small win group C. Here, the maximum number of payouts when the prescribed number is 3 is 9, and during the advantageous period, at least 1 instruction function activation game in which the number of payouts is 9 (maximum number of payouts with the prescribed number of 3) is played. need to run times. Therefore, in the advantageous section, it is necessary to execute the instruction function activation game at least once when the minor combination B group is won. Therefore, by setting the winning probability of the small win group B to be higher than the winning probability of the small win group C, one indication function operating game (winning the small win group C, replay group B, replay group C) It is possible to reduce the expected value of the number of games in the advantageous section that ends only in the game except for the game that has been played. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the advantageous section cannot be finished because the small win group B is not won even once during the predetermined number of times even though the advantageous section ends after the predetermined number of games are executed. be able to.

Returning to FIG.
The winning flag control means 62 controls ON/OFF of the winning flag corresponding to each winning combination based on the result of the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 . In this embodiment, a win flag is provided for each role for all the roles. Then, when one of the condition devices is won in the lottery by the combination lottery means 61, the win flag of the combination included in the condition device is turned on (the win flag is set).

For example, in a non-internal game, when replay B1 is won, the two winning flags of replay 01 and replay 02 included in the conditional device are turned on, and the winning flags of other combinations are turned off.
Similarly, in the non-internal middle game, when the small winning combination B1 is won, the small winning combination 01, the small winning combination 03, the small winning combination 10, the small winning combination 11, the small winning combination 18, the small winning combination 19, and the small winning combination included in the condition device The seven winning flags for the combination 26 are turned on, and the winning flags for other combinations are turned off.

Furthermore, as described above, winnings of minor wins other than 1BB and replays are not carried over, so even if a minor win or replay is won in the current game and the winning flags for these wins are turned on, the current game ends. Sometimes the winning flag is turned off.
On the other hand, since winning 1BB is carried over, when 1BB is won in the game this time and the winning flag associated with the winning 1BB is once turned on, the state is maintained on until the 1BB wins. It is turned off when 1BB is won.

Further, for example, when 1BBA and a small combination D are won in duplicate by the combination lottery means 61, the winning flag of the small combination 35 corresponding to 1BBA and a small combination D is turned on, and both combinations are not won in the game. Therefore, for example, when 1BBA does not win, regardless of whether the minor winning combination 35 wins or does not win, the winning flag for 1BBA is maintained ON and the winning flag for the minor winning combination 35 turns OFF.

Furthermore, for example, when 1BBA is won alone in the role lottery means 61, the winning flag of 1BBA is turned on in this game, and when 1BBA is not won in the game of this time, the winning flag of 1BBA is kept turned on. .
Further, when the small winning combination A1 is won in the next game, the win flag for the small winning combination 01 is turned on in addition to the 1BBA which carries over the winning. is maintained on, and the winning flag for the small winning combination 01 is turned off.

The pushing order instruction number selection means 63 selects a pushing order instruction number based on the lottery result of the condition device by the combination lottery means 61 . FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a pressing order instruction number table.
Note that the pressing order instruction number selection means 63 may select the pressing order instruction number in either the advantageous section or the normal section. The pressing order instruction number may be selected. In such a case, the push order instruction number is always "A0" during the normal section.
Also, the selected push order instruction number can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 only during the advantageous section (except for sending the push order instruction number "A0" during the normal section). Therefore, even if a pressing order instruction number is selected by the pressing order instruction number selection means 63 in the normal section, the pressing order instruction number is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80 .
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, each condition device is provided with a unique pressing order instruction number. For example, the pressing order instruction number corresponding to replay A is "A0", and the pressing order instruction number corresponding to replay C3 is "A3". The pressing order instruction number has "A0" to "A3".

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the relationship between the pressing order instruction number, the pressing order corresponding to the pressing order instruction number, and the display contents 1 and 2. As shown in FIG. The pressing order instruction number "A0" does not have an advantageous pressing order for the player (the pressing order does not give an advantage/disadvantage, that is, the pressing order does not matter).
Further, each of the pressing order instruction numbers "A1" to "A3" has a pressing order that is advantageous to the player. For example, the advantageous push order corresponding to push order instruction number "A2" is middle first stop.

The pressing order corresponding to the pressing order instruction number in the replay B group is set to the pressing order for winning the replay 02 (the pressing order for promoting the RT).
Further, the pressing order corresponding to the pressing order instruction number in the replay C group is set to the pressing order for winning the replay 01 (maintaining RT).
Similarly, the pressing order corresponding to the pressing order instruction number in the small winning combination B group is set to the pressing order for winning the small winning combination 01 (9 pieces).
Further, the pressing order corresponding to the pressing order instruction number in the small winning combination C group is set to the pressing order for winning the small winning combination 02 (three pieces).

Further, in FIG. 20, "display content 1" indicates the content displayed by the operation of the instruction function (control of the main control board 50). showing. In this embodiment, the pressing order instruction numbers "A" and "0" to "3" respectively correspond to the indications of "=" and "0" to "3" of the LED (7 segment). When "=" is displayed, segments D and G in FIG. 4 among the seven segments are lit (see FIG. 26, which will be described later). Further, when the pressing order instruction number is "A0", no display (no segment is lit) may be used.

Furthermore, "display content 2" indicates the content displayed under the control of the sub-control board 80, and in this embodiment, it is the correct keystroke order displayed on the image display device 23. FIG.
Note that "activation of the instruction function" means display by the main control board 50 using the acquired number display LED 78, and display by control of the sub-control board 80 corresponds to "operation of the instruction function" of the present invention. is not included.
For example, when the winning and replay condition device "11" is won in the advantageous section, the push order instruction number "A1" is selected, and the operation of the instruction function causes the winning number display LED 78 to display "=1". be. In addition, the image display device 23 displays an image such as "1 XX" that allows the player to understand that the first stop is on the left.

In FIG. 19, the pressing order instruction numbers (*1) when winning a minor combination A are as follows.
When the small winning combination A is won, the small winning combination 01 wins regardless of the pressing order, so there is no advantageous pressing order. However, during the advantageous section, one of "A1" to "A3" is selected as the dummy pushing order instruction number. The selectivity is "1/3" respectively. By setting in this way, when a small winning combination A is won in an advantageous section, the instruction function is activated and the pressing order instruction information is displayed. As a result, the player cannot determine whether the player has won the minor winning combination A or the minor winning group B in the game. The reason for this setting is as follows.

As shown in FIG. 18, the probability of winning the minor winning combination A (set number) is higher with the setting 6 than with the setting 1. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the set value can be estimated by counting the number of times the small combination 01 wins in a game in which the instruction function does not operate during the advantageous interval. In order to avoid such a strategy, when a small winning combination A is won in an advantageous section, an instruction function is activated to display dummy pushing order instruction information. Of course, by counting the number of times the minor winning combination 01 wins in games in which the pointing function is activated, it is not impossible to estimate the set value, but the number of times the minor winning combination 01 has won in games in which the pointing function is not activated is possible. This requires more trials than counting and guessing the set value.

Furthermore, in FIG. 19, the pressing order instruction information (*2) when winning the minor wins E1 and E2 is as follows.
As shown in FIG. 17, when the small winning combination E1 is won in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added. However, as described above, if 1BB is won during the advantageous section and it becomes inside, the advantageous section is not added. For this reason, in the advantageous section and inside (during the game section in which the advantageous section is not added), the small winning combination E1 is won, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the small winning combination E1 (a combination of symbols that expects to add the advantageous section) If a certain middle cherry is stopped, there is a risk of giving the player the impression of a wasteful draw. Therefore, when the small winning combination E1 is won during the advantageous section and inside, the pushing order instruction number "A3" is selected, the instruction function is activated, and "right first stop" is displayed.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the right first stop when the small win E1 is won, the so-called middle stage cherry does not stop, as shown in FIG. This makes it difficult to notice the winning of the small winning combination E1. Since the number of payouts of the small combination 36 or 38 that can be won when the small combination E1 is won is two, even if the right first stop is instructed, the player will not be disadvantaged.

Furthermore, as described above, the upper limit number of games is set for the advantageous section, which is set within 1500 games in this embodiment. Therefore, even if there is a remaining number of games played in the advantageous section, when the number of games played since the start of the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated unconditionally.
In the case of having such game characteristics, for example, when the small winning combination E1 is won near the 1500th game in the advantageous section and the cherry in the middle is displayed, the player expects the advantageous section to be added. Therefore, in the present embodiment, after 1400 games or more have been played from the start of the advantageous section, even if the small winning combination E1 is won, the middle stage cherry is not displayed in the same way as when winning inside. , activate the indicator function to display the right first stop.

In addition, when the small winning combination E2 is won, as shown in FIG. 18, the advantageous section is not determined. However, when the small winning combination E2 is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated with the left or middle first stop, the middle stage cherry may be displayed. Therefore, if the middle stage cherry is displayed during the inside or when the number of games has reached 1400 or more from the start of the advantageous section, there is a risk of misleading the player. , to see the first stop on the right.
However, it is not limited to this, and when a small winning combination E2 is won, since no decision regarding the advantageous section is made in the first place, the indication function as described above may not be operated, and the middle stage cherry may be displayed.

In FIG. 1, the effect group number selection means 64 selects the effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device and the number to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 .
It is also conceivable to send the winning prize and the replay condition device number itself to the sub-control board 80 as a result of lottery for the condition device. However, in this embodiment, the prize winning and replay condition device numbers themselves are not transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . As a result, the sub-control board 80 side cannot know the prize-winning and replay condition device numbers that have been won in the game this time.

On the other hand, on the side of the main control board 50, the effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device is determined in advance. After the lottery for the condition device, the performance group number corresponding to the winning condition device is selected, and the performance group number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.例文帳に追加When receiving the effect group number selected in the game this time, the sub-control board 80 can select and output the effect corresponding to the effect group number.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an effect group number table.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, each conditional device has a unique effect group number. For example, the effect group number corresponding to the winning of the small winning combination A, the small winning group B, and the small winning winning combination C group is determined as "5". The effect group numbers corresponding to the winning of the small winning combination A, the small winning combination group B, and the small winning combination group C may be different, such as "5", "6", and "7", respectively.

Therefore, the main control board 50 selects "5" as the effect group number when winning the small win A, the small win group B or the small win group C as a result of the lottery of the condition devices. Then, information on the selected effect group number “5” is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 .
When the sub-control board 80 receives the information that the effect group number is "5", it can know that any one of the small win A, the small win group B, or the small win group C has been won in the game this time. can. As a result, it is possible to output the winning effect of the bell.

However, even if the sub-control board 80 receives the information indicating that the effect group number "5" has been won, even if the player wins, for example, one of the small wins of group B in the game, the correct answer is pressed. You cannot know the order. In this embodiment, the pressing order instruction number corresponding to the correct pressing order is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 during the advantageous period, but is not transmitted during the normal period or the standby period. Therefore, during the advantageous section, the sub-control board 80 can output the fact that the minor winning combination A, the minor winning group B, or the small winning winning combination C group has been won, and the correct pressing order corresponding to the pressing order instruction number as an effect. can. On the other hand, during the normal section and the standby section, the sub-control board 80 only produces an effect indicating that one of the minor winning combination A, the minor winning group B, or the small winning group C (bell) is won, and the correct pressing order is displayed. cannot be output as a production.

Also, even if the same pressing order instruction number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, different effects can be output due to different effect group numbers. For example, when the replay B1 is won, the pushing order instruction number is "A1" (left first), and when the minor win C1 is won, the pushing order instruction number is "A1" (left first). In both cases, the same push order instruction number is sent to the sub-control board 80 .

However, when the replay B1 is won, the effect group number "2" is transmitted, and when the minor win C1 is won, the effect group number "5" is transmitted. For this reason, when effect group number "2" is transmitted, for example, the blue color indicating replay can be used to notify the order of pressing correct answers, and when effect group number "5" is transmitted, for example, a bell It is possible to notify the correct pressing order by using the yellow color indicating .

In FIG. 1, the reel control means 65 is configured to start rotating all (three) reels 31 when receiving a command to start rotating the reels 31, particularly when the start switch 41 is operated in this embodiment. to control. Further, the reel control means 65 refers to ON/OFF of the winning flag in the current game after the lottery for the condition device is performed by the winning lottery means 61, and refers to the stop position determination table corresponding to the ON/OFF of the winning flag. is selected, and when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the timing when the stop switch 42 is operated, and the motor 32 is driven The reel 31 is controlled to stop at the determined position.

For example, in a game in which at least one winning flag is ON, the reel control means 65 selects a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning combination (a combination in which the winning flag is ON) within the range of stop control of the reels 31. The reels 31 are controlled to stop so that they can be stopped on the effective line, and the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to the combination other than the winning combination (the winning flag is turned off) is not stopped on the effective line. .

Here, "within the range of stop control of the reel 31" means the time from the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 actually stops, or the amount of rotation of the reel 31 (the number of moving frames (symbols)). means within range.
In this embodiment, the reel 31 is rotated at a constant speed of about 80 times per minute.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set within 190 ms. Thus, in this embodiment, the maximum number of frames that can be moved from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to four frames.

For example, in FIG. 5, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the number 1 "Replay" on the left reel 31 is positioned in the lower left stage (on the effective line), the number 5 "Bell B" is a symbol that can be stopped in the lower left row. Therefore, at the above-described operation timing, the symbols No. 1 (stop biting) to No. 5 (4-frame belly) are symbols that can be stopped at the lower left row.

However, not limited to the above, it is also possible to set the maximum moving frame number to 4 frames from the pattern next to the pattern positioned on the activated line at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated. In this case, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the number 1 "replay" of the left reel 31 is positioned at the lower left row, the next symbol, that is, the number 2 "blank", Up to the 6th "Replay", which is the symbol 4 frames ahead, is a symbol that can be stopped in the lower left row. Therefore, at the operation timing described above, the symbols No. 2 to No. 6 are symbols that can be stopped at the lower left row.
In the following explanation, the maximum number of moving frames is assumed to be 4 from the symbols positioned on the effective line at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated.

First, at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, if any of the symbols within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 is a symbol to be stopped on a predetermined effective line, the stop switch 42 is operated. Then, the symbol is controlled to stop on a predetermined effective line.

That is, when the reels 31 are stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, if the symbols related to the winning combination do not stop on the predetermined effective line, the reels 31 are stopped until the reels 31 are stopped. By controlling the rotational movement of the reel 31 within the range of , the symbols related to the winning combination are controlled to stop on the predetermined effective line as much as possible (pull-in stop control).

Conversely, if the reels 31 are stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination that has not been won stops on the effective line. By controlling the rotational movement of the reels 31 within the range of the stop control of 31, the combinations of symbols corresponding to winning combinations are controlled so as not to stop on the effective line (kicking stop control).
Furthermore, in a game in which a plurality of winning combinations are won, the priority of winning combinations is determined in advance according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and the operation timing of the stop switch 42. The pull-in stop control of the pattern with the highest priority is performed.

Furthermore, the reel control means 65 detects the pressing order (operating order) of the stop switch 42 . The reel control means 65 detects which one of the left, middle, and right stop switches 42 is operated when the stop switch 42 is operated by the player.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal indicating that the stop switch 42 has been operated is input to the reel control means 65 . By discriminating this signal, the reel control means 65 detects which stop switch 42 has been operated. Then, stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is executed.

Further, the reel control means 65 has a stop position determination table for each condition device. The stop position determination table defines the stop position of the reel 31 with respect to the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. In each stop position determination table, for example, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the moment the number 1 symbol ("replay" for the left reel 31) passes the lower left stage (on the effective line), what The stop position is determined in advance such that only the pattern is controlled to move (by how many frames) and the number of the pattern is stopped in the lower left row.

Here, the pattern arrangement in this embodiment will be described.
First, as shown in FIG. 5, on all the reels 31, four "replays" are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols. Thus, the "replay" of all reels 31 is the "PB=1" arrangement.
Similarly, on the left reel 31, either "Bell A" or "Bell B" are arranged four at intervals of five symbols. As a result, the combination of these two symbols results in a "PB=1" arrangement.
Also, on the middle reel 31, four "Bell C" are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols. As a result, the "Bell C" of the middle reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement.
Furthermore, on the right reel 31, either "Bell A" or "Bell B" are arranged four at intervals of five symbols. As a result, the combination of these two symbols results in a "PB=1" arrangement.

Furthermore, on the right reel 31, four "cherries" are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols. As a result, the "Cherry" on the right reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement.
Also, on the left reel 31, four of either "black 7" or "watermelon" are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols. As a result, the combination of these two symbols results in a "PB=1" arrangement.
Similarly, on the middle reel 31, four of either "blue 7" or "cherry" are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols. As a result, the combination of these two symbols results in a "PB=1" arrangement.
Further, similarly, on the right reel 31, any one of "black 7", "blue 7", "blank" or "red 7" is arranged at intervals of 5 symbols. As a result, "PB=1" arrangement is obtained by adding these four symbols.

On the other hand, on the left reel 31, "Cherry" is arranged at Nos. 3, 8, and 13, so it is not arranged at "PB=1".
Similarly, for "Watermelon", the left and middle reels 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement, and the right reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement.

The stop position determination table corresponding to each conditional device will be described below with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16 described above.
First, the stop position determination table at the time of prize winning and replay condition device winning will be described.
The non-winning table is used in a game when a winning combination is not won, and determines the combination of symbols when the reels 31 are stopped so that the combination of symbols corresponding to any combination does not stop on the effective line.

The replay A table is used when replay A is won (single win of replay 01). 31 stop positions are determined. The symbols on each reel 31 relating to replay 01 and replays 02 to 06, which will be described later, are "PB=1" on all reels 31. FIG. Therefore, when a replay wins, the winning replay always wins (when multiple replays win multiple wins, one of the replays winning multiple wins) always wins.

The replay B1 table is used in a game when the replay B1 is won, and within the range of stop control of the reel 31, the replay 02 is stopped on the effective line when the reel 31 is stopped at the first left (when the pressing order is correct), and the first stop on the left is made. Except for time (when the pressing order is incorrect), the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the replay 01 is stopped on the effective line (see FIG. 13).

First, in a game using the replay B1 table, at the first left stop, "Black 7" or "Watermelon" is stopped in the lower left row ("PB=1" as described above). In this case, the "replay" stops in the upper left row.
Next, at the middle second stop, "replay" is stopped at the middle middle stage. At the right third stop, "cherry" is stopped at the upper right stage. In this case, the "replay" stops in the lower right row. As a result, "black 7/watermelon"-"replay"-"cherry" stops on the active line, and replay 02 wins. Furthermore, "replay"-"replay"-"replay" stops at "upper left"-"middle middle"-"lower right".

On the other hand, in a game using the replay B1 table, at the middle first stop, "blue 7" or "cherry" is stopped at the middle middle stage ("PB=1"). In this case, "replay" stops in the upper middle row. After that, when the left reel 31 is stopped, "black 7" or "watermelon" is stopped at the lower left stage ("PB=1"). At this time, as described above, "replay" stops at the upper left.
Also, when the right reel 31 is stopped, "replay" is stopped in the upper right row ("PB=1"). As a result, "black 7/watermelon" - "blue 7/cherry" - "replay" stops on the active line, and replay 01 wins. In addition, “replay”-“replay”-“replay” stops at “upper left”-“middle upper”-“upper right”.

In a game using the replay B1 table, the same control as that during the middle first stop is performed at the right first stop.
Further, as for the replay B2 table when replay B2 is won and the replay B3 table when replay B3 is won, replay 02 is awarded when the pushing order is correct and replay 01 is awarded when pushing order is incorrect by the same control as above.

The replay C1 table is used in a game when the replay C1 is won, and within the range of stop control of the reel 31, the replay 01 is stopped on the effective line when the reel 31 is first stopped (when the pressing order is correct), and the first left stop. Except for time (when the pressing order is incorrect), the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the replay 03 is stopped on the effective line (see FIG. 13).

First, in the game using the replay C1 table, the control for stopping the replay 01 on the active line at the first left stop is the same as that of the replay B1 table, so the explanation is omitted.
Also, in a game using the replay C1 table, at the middle first stop, "replay" is stopped at the middle middle stage ("PB=1"). After that, when the left reel 31 is stopped, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the lower left stage ("PB=1"). In this case, "Replay" stops in the middle left row. Further, when the right reel 31 is stopped, "watermelon" is stopped on the upper right stage ("PB=1"). In this case, "replay" stops in the middle right row. As a result, "Bell A/Bell B"-"Replay"-"Watermelon" stops on the active line, and Replay 03 wins. Further, at "middle left"-"middle middle"-"middle right", "replay"-"replay"-"replay" stops.

In a game using the replay C1 table, the same control is performed at the right first stop as at the middle first stop.
Furthermore, with respect to the replay C2 table when replay C2 is won and the replay C3 table when replay C3 is won, replay 01 is won when the pressing order is correct, and replay 03 is awarded when pressing order is incorrect, by the same control as above. .

The replay D table is used in a game when the replay D is won, and determines the stop position of the reel 31 so as to stop the replay 06 on the activated line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42. It is determined. Replay 06 is "PB=1".
Further, the replay E table is used in a game when the replay E is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the replay E table is set so as to stop the replay 04 or 05 on the activated line. 31 stop positions are determined. In this case, either replay 04 or 05 can be stopped at "PB=1".

The small winning combination A table is used in a game when the small winning combination A is won, and the reel 31 stops the small winning combination 01 on the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42. It defines the stop position. The symbol combination of the small winning combination 01 is “Black 7/Watermelon”-“Bell C”-“Replay”, and all the reels 31 have “PB=1”. Also, when "Black 7/Watermelon" stops at the lower left stage, "Bell A/Bell B" stops at the middle left stage. Furthermore, when "Replay" stops in the upper right row, "Bell A/Bell B" stops in the middle right row. Therefore, when the small winning combination 01 is won, ``Bell A/Bell B'' - ``Bell C'' - ``Bell A/Bell B'' stops at ``left middle row'' - ``middle middle row'' - ``right middle row''.

The small winning combination B1 table is used in the game when the small winning combination B1 is won. Except for the first stop (when the pressing order is incorrect), one hand included in the winning hand (when winning a small hand B1, any of the small hand 03, 10, 11, 18, 19, 26) The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop the reel 31 on an active line or to stop one of the pattern symbols 01 to 03.

The left first stop (when the pressing order is correct) in a game using the small combination B1 table is the same as the small combination A table, so the explanation is omitted.
It should be noted that even when the following small winning combination B2 table to small winning combination B12 table are used, the same stop control as in the small winning combination A table is performed when the pressing order is correct.
As a result, when the small winning combination A is won and when the pressing order of the small winning group B is correct, the small winning combination 01 always wins, "Bell A/Bell B" - "Bell C" - "Bell A/Bell B" stops. Therefore, even if the minor winning combination 01 is won in a game in which the instruction function is not activated, the player cannot know whether the winning of the minor winning combination A or the pressing order of winning the minor winning group B is correct.

Further, even during the advantageous section, when the small winning combination A is won, if the instruction function is activated by the dummy as described above, the player can determine whether the small winning combination A or the small winning combination B has been won. I don't know.
As described above, in the present embodiment, since there is a set difference in the winning numbers of the minor winning combination A, it is possible to estimate the set value by counting the number of wins of the minor winning combination A. However, if the stop numbers are set to be the same when the minor combination A is won and when the pressing order is correct when the minor combination B is won, it becomes impossible to count only the number of winnings of the minor combination A. Therefore, the set value is set. cannot be guessed.

Further, in the game using the small combination B1 table, more specifically, the following stop control is executed.
First, when the small winning combination B1 is won, seven small winning combinations 01, 03, 10, 11, 18, 19 and 26 are won as shown in FIG. 14, and the combinations of symbols are as follows.
Small role 01: "Black 7 / Watermelon" - "Bell C" - "Replay" (9 cards)
Small role 03: "Bell A" - "Bell A" - "Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 10: "Bell B" - "Bell B" - "Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 11: "Bell C" - "Bell A" - "Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 18: "Red 7" - "Bell B" - "Red 7" (1 piece)
Small role 19: "Bell C" - "Blue 7" - "Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 26: "Red 7" - "Red 7" - "Bell B" (1 piece)

Then, the following method can be mentioned as the stop control of the reels 31 when a plurality of small wins with different numbers of payouts are repeatedly won.
As a first priority, when all the symbols (of the relevant reel 31) constituting the winning symbol combination can be stopped on the activated line, the reel 31 is stopped at that position.

Next, when it is not possible to ``stop all of the symbols that make up the combination of winning symbols on the active line'' (when the first priority cannot be adopted), as the second priority, ``number priority ' or 'number priority' to stop the reel 31 .
Here, "number priority" means to preferentially stop (pull in) the symbol of the relevant reel 31, which constitutes the combination of symbols with the largest number of payouts, among the combinations of symbols that have been repeatedly won. Say. Therefore, when the small winning combination B is won, the small winning combination 01 corresponds to the combination of symbols with the largest number of payouts (9 symbols).
On the other hand, "number priority" means that the symbols of the relevant reel 31 are stopped on the activated line so that the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped on the activated line is the largest.

For example, when a small winning combination B1 is won and the middle first stop is made, all the middle reels 31 related to the winning winning combination cannot be stopped on the active line at the same time. This is because there are a plurality of types of symbols on the middle reel 31 of the winning small winning combination, but only one type of symbol can be stopped on the activated line because there is only one activated line.

Therefore, when the minor combination B group is won, the reel 31 is controlled to be stopped by either the number priority or the number priority. In this embodiment, when the pressing order is correct, the reels 31 are controlled to stop based on the number priority, and when the pressing order is incorrect, the reel 31 is controlled to stop based on the number priority. When the reels are controlled to be stopped based on the number priority, the small combination 01 (9-piece combination) is not won, and the one-piece combination can be won (there is a possibility that the winning combination may be lost).
In this way, the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is such that the number priority is given in a specific pressing order (correct pressing order in this embodiment), and the number priority is given in another pressing order (wrong pressing order in this embodiment). Priority is given to the number of sheets or priority to the number of sheets.

In the above example, when performing the number priority at the first stop of the middle (when the pushing order is incorrect), if either "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped on the effective line, it will stop on the effective line. The maximum number of combinations of possible symbols is two. For example, if "Bell A" is stopped on the active line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, a small winning combination of 03 or 11 can be won. Since "Bell A" or "Bell B" on the middle reel 31 is "PB=1" in the sum of two symbols, either "Bell A" or "Bell B" is always stopped when the middle reel 31 is stopped. can be made
Here, it is assumed that "Bell A" is stopped when the middle reel 31 is stopped. In this case, at this point, a small win 03 or 11 can be won.

Next, when stopping the left reel 31, priority is given to stopping "Bell A" or "Bell C" on the activated line. As shown in FIG. 5, on the left reel 31, "Bell A" is arranged at Nos. 15 and 0, and "Bell C" is arranged at No. 18. Therefore, when the symbols on the left reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated are 11th to 19th and 0, "Bell A" or "Bell C" can be stopped on the effective line, When it is No. 1 to No. 10, "Bell A" or "Bell C" cannot be stopped on the active line.

Therefore, when the left reel 31 is stopped at random (without aiming at a specific symbol), "Bell A" or "Bell C" will stop on the activated line with a probability of "1/2". In particular, in this embodiment, "Bell A" can be stopped without stopping "Bell C". , always stop "Bell A" on the active line.
The reason why "Bell A" is stopped without stopping "Bell C" is that if a winning combination is lost at the time of the third stop, a pattern pattern, which will be described later, can be displayed. This is because the pattern symbols cannot be displayed if the "Bell C" is stopped when the left reel 31 is stopped.

On the other hand, when "Bell A" cannot be stopped on the effective line when the left reel 31 is stopped, control is performed to stop any of the pattern symbols on the effective line. As shown in FIG. 12, among the pattern symbols in which the symbol on the middle reel 31 is "Bell A", the symbol on the left reel 31 is "Black 7" or "Watermelon". Since "black 7" or "watermelon" on the left reel 31 is "PB=1" in the sum of the two symbols, any one of these symbols can always be stopped.

Therefore, at the middle first stop and left second stop, it will be "Bell A" - "Bell A" - "Rotating", or "Black 7 / Watermelon" - "Bell A" - "Rotating". .
Furthermore, before the right third stop, if "Bell A" - "Bell A" - "Rotating", when the right reel 31 stops, if "Bell A" can be stopped on the effective line, " Stop Bell A. As shown in FIG. 5, in order to stop "Bell A" on the effective line, "Bell A" is stopped if the symbols on the effective line at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated are within the range of Nos. 4 to 13. "Bell A" cannot be stopped outside this range. Therefore, when the right reel 31 is stopped at random, "Bell A" will stop on the activated line with a probability of "1/2". When "Bell A" is stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped, the result is "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A", and a small win 03 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of "Bell A" - "Bell A" - "Rotating", if "Bell A" cannot be stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped, "Cherry" is on the effective line. Stop ("PB=1"). As a result, the combination of symbols on the active line becomes "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Cherry", and the pattern symbol 03 is stopped.
In the case of "black 7/watermelon" - "Bell A" - "rotating", when the right reel 31 is stopped, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped on the active line ("PB = 1"). ). As a result, the combination of symbols on the activated line becomes "black 7/watermelon"-"bell A"-"bell A/bell B", and the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, it is assumed that "Bell B" is stopped on the activated line at the time of the middle first stop (when the pressing order is incorrect) when the minor winning combination B1 is won. In this case, at this time point, a small winning combination of 10 or 18 can be won.
Next, when the left reel 31 is to be stopped, the symbol "Bell B" or "Red 7", which is the symbol associated with the small win 10 or 18, is stopped on the activated line with priority. As shown in FIG. 5, on the left reel 31, "Bell B" is arranged at Nos. 5 and 10, and "Red 7" is arranged at No. 7. Therefore, when the symbols on the left reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated are 1 to 10, "Bell B" or "Red 7" can be stopped on the effective line. Sometimes "Bell B" or "Red 7" cannot be stopped on the active line.

Therefore, when the left reel 31 is stopped at random (without aiming at a specific symbol), "Bell B" or "Red 7" will stop on the activated line with a probability of "1/2". Especially in this embodiment, since "Bell B" can be stopped without stopping "Red 7", when the symbols on the left reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated are 1 to 10 will always stop "Bell B" on the valid line.

On the other hand, when "Bell B" cannot be stopped on the effective line when the left reel 31 is stopped, control is performed so that any pattern symbol is stopped on the effective line. As shown in FIG. 12, the pattern symbol for which the symbol of the middle reel 31 is "Bell B" is "Black 7" or "Watermelon". Since "black 7" or "watermelon" on the left reel 31 is "PB=1" in the sum of the two symbols, any one of these symbols can always be stopped.

Therefore, at the middle first stop and the left second stop, it will be "Bell B" - "Bell B" - "Rotating", or "Black 7 / Watermelon" - "Bell B" - "Rotating". .
Furthermore, before the right third stop, if "Bell B" - "Bell B" - "Rotating", when the right reel 31 is stopped, if "Bell B" can be stopped on the effective line, " Stop Bell B. As shown in FIG. 5, in order to stop "Bell B" on the effective line, the symbols on the effective line at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated must be in the range of numbers 14 to 18 or numbers 19 to 3. "Bell B" can be stopped if it is in a range other than that, "Bell B" cannot be stopped. Therefore, when the right reel 31 is stopped at random, "Bell B" will stop on the activated line with a probability of "1/2". When "Bell B" is stopped on the activated line when the right reel 31 is stopped, the result is "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B", and a small combination of 10 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of "Bell B" - "Bell B" - "Rotating", if "Bell B" cannot be stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped, "Cherry" is on the effective line. Stop ("PB=1"). As a result, the combination of symbols on the active line becomes "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Cherry", and the pattern symbol 03 is stopped.
In the case of "black 7/watermelon" - "Bell B" - "rotating", when the right reel 31 is stopped, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped on the active line ("PB = 1"). ). As a result, the combination of symbols on the active line becomes "black 7/watermelon"-"bell B"-"bell A/bell B", and the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

As described above, when the small win B1 is won, the middle reel 31 can stop the symbols related to the single win with "PB=1", and the left and right reels 31 are both "1". /2", the symbols relating to the one-card role can be stopped. Furthermore, the pattern symbols can be stopped whenever the symbols relating to the one-piece combination cannot be stopped. Therefore, at the time of the middle first stop (when the pushing order is incorrect) when winning the small win B1,
1 card role: win with a probability of 1/4 Pattern pattern: stop with a probability of 3/4
In addition, when winning a single role,
"Bell A" - "Bell A" - "Bell A" (small role 03)
"Bell B" - "Bell B" - "Bell B" (small role 10)
be either

Next, the case of the right first stop when winning a small winning combination B1 will be described. When the number priority is given when the right reel 31 is stopped, if either "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped on the active line, the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped on the active line is two. becomes the maximum. For example, if "Bell A" is stopped on the active line when the right reel 31 is stopped, a small winning combination of 03 or 19 can be won. Since "Bell A" or "Bell B" on the right reel 31 has "PB=1" in the sum of the two symbols, "Bell A" or "Bell B" can always be stopped when the right reel 31 is stopped. can.
First, it is assumed that when the right reel 31 is stopped, "Bell A" is stopped on the active line. In this case, at this time point, a small winning combination of 03 or 19 can be won.

Next, when the left reel 31 is to be stopped, the symbol "Bell A" or "Bell C" associated with the small win 03 or 19 is preferentially stopped on the activated line. Here, similarly to the above, priority is given to stopping "Bell A". "Bell A" can be stopped with a probability of "1/2". Also, when "bell A" cannot be stopped, "black 7" or "watermelon" is stopped ("PB=1" in the sum of the two symbols).

Therefore, at the first stop on the right and the second stop on the left, "Bell A" - "Rotating" - "Bell A" or "Black 7/Watermelon" - "Rotating" - "Bell A" .
Furthermore, in the case of "Bell A" - "Rotating" - "Bell A" before the middle and third stop, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, if "Bell A" can be stopped on the effective line, " Stop Bell A. As shown in FIG. 5, in order to stop "Bell A" on the effective line, if the symbols on the effective line at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated are in the range of 5 to 14, "Bell A" is stopped. "Bell A" cannot be stopped outside this range. Therefore, when the middle reel 31 is stopped at random, "Bell A" will stop on the activated line with a probability of "1/2". When "Bell A" is stopped on the active line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the result is "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A", and a small win 03 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of "Bell A" - "Rotating" - "Bell A", if "Bell A" cannot be stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "Blue 7" or "Cherry ” is stopped on the active line (“PB=1” in the sum of the two symbols). As a result, the pattern design 02 stops on the active line.
In the case of "black 7/watermelon" - "rotating" - "Bell A", when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped on the active line ("PB = 1"). ). As a result, the pattern design 01 stops on the active line.

It is also assumed that "Bell B" is stopped on the activated line when the right reel 31 is stopped for the first time. In this case, at this time point, a small winning combination of 10 or 26 can be won.
Next, when the left reel 31 is to be stopped, the symbol "Bell B" or "Red 7", which is the symbol associated with the small win 10 or 26, is stopped on the active line with priority. Here, priority is given to stopping "Bell B". "Bell B" can be stopped with a probability of "1/2". Also, when "Bell B" cannot be stopped, "Black 7" or "Watermelon" is stopped ("PB=1" in the sum of the two symbols).

Therefore, at the first stop on the right and the second stop on the left, "Bell B" - "Rotating" - "Bell B" or "Black 7/Watermelon" - "Rotating" - "Bell B". .
Furthermore, in the case of "Bell B" - "Rotating" - "Bell B" before the middle and third stop, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, if "Bell B" can be stopped on the effective line, " Stop Bell B. Here, when the middle reel 31 is stopped at random, "Bell B" will stop on the activated line with a probability of "1/2". When "Bell B" is stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the result is "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B", and a small combination of 10 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of "Bell B" - "Rotating" - "Bell B", if "Bell B" cannot be stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "Blue 7" or "Cherry ” is stopped on the effective line (“PB=1” in the sum of 2 symbols). As a result, the pattern design 02 stops on the active line.
In the case of "black 7/watermelon" - "rotating" - "Bell B", when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped on the active line ("PB = 1"). ). As a result, the pattern design 01 stops on the active line.

As described above, the right reel 31 can stop the symbols related to the one-handy with "PB=1" at the right first stop when the small win B1 is won, and the left and right reels 31 are both "1". /2", the symbols relating to the one-card role can be stopped. Furthermore, the pattern symbols can always be stopped when the symbols relating to the one-piece combination cannot be stopped. Therefore, at the time of the right first stop (when the pushing order is incorrect) when winning the small win B1,
1 card role: win with a probability of 1/4 Pattern pattern: stop with a probability of 3/4
In addition, when winning a single role,
"Bell A" - "Bell A" - "Bell A" (small role 03)
"Bell B" - "Bell B" - "Bell B" (small role 10)
be either
The winning rate and the stop rate of the pattern symbols are the same as those at the time of the middle first stop.
Therefore, when the small winning combination B1 is won, the small winning combination 01 is won with "PB=1" when the left first stop (when the pressing order is correct). On the other hand, at the time of middle or right first stop (when the pushing order is incorrect), the winning combination is 1/4 with a probability of 1/4, and the pattern pattern stops with a probability of 3/4. .

When the small winning combination B2 is won, a small winning combination B2 table is provided as in the case of winning the small winning combination B1. The winning hand included when winning a small hand B2 is
Small role 01: "Black 7 / Watermelon" - "Bell C" - "Replay" (9 cards)
Small role 04: "Bell A" - "Bell A" - "Bell B" (1 piece)
Small role 09: "Bell B" - "Bell B" - "Bell A" (1 piece)
Small role 12: "Bell C" - "Bell A" - "Red 7" (1 piece)
Small role 17: "Red 7" - "Bell B" - "Blue 7" (1 piece)
Small role 20: "Bell C" - "Blue 7" - "Bell B" (1 piece)
Small role 25: "Red 7" - "Red 7" - "Bell A" (1 piece)
is.

Then, at the time of left first stop (when the pressing order is correct), the small winning combination 01 is won.
Next, at the time of the middle first stop (when the pressing order is incorrect), "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped on the effective line by number priority.
First, when "Bell A" is stopped during the middle first stop, stopping either "Bell A" or "Bell C" is prioritized during left stop. Here, if "Bell C" can be stopped, "Bell A" can be stopped, so "Bell A" is stopped without stopping "Bell C". Also, when "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7/Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, either "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Rotating" or "Black 7/Watermelon"-"Bell A"-"Rotating".

When "Bell A" - "Bell A" - "Rotating", "Bell B" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell B" when stopping right. As a result, the small winning combination 04 is won. Also, if "Bell B" cannot be stopped at right stop, "Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern design 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7/watermelon"-"Bell A"-"Rotating", "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at right stop. As a result, the pattern design 01 is stopped.

Next, it is assumed that "Bell B" is stopped at the middle first stop. In this case, when stopping on the left, priority is given to stopping either "Bell B" or "Red 7". Here, if "red 7" can be stopped, "bell B" can be stopped, so "bell B" is stopped without stopping "red 7". Also, when "bell B" cannot be stopped, "black 7/watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, either "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Rotating" or "Black 7/Watermelon"-"Bell B"-"Rotating".

When "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Rotating", "Bell A" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell A" when stopping right. As a result, the small winning combination 09 is won. Also, if "Bell A" cannot be stopped at right stop, "Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern design 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7/watermelon" - "bell B" - "rotating", "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at right stop. As a result, the pattern design 01 is stopped.

Next, when the small winning combination B2 is won and the first stop on the right side (when the pressing order is incorrect), the "Bell A" or the "Bell B" is stopped on the effective line by giving priority to the number.
First, when "Bell A" is stopped at the first right stop, stopping either "Bell B" or "Red 7" is prioritized at the left stop. Here, if "red 7" can be stopped, "bell B" can be stopped, so "bell B" is stopped without stopping "red 7". Also, when "bell B" cannot be stopped, "black 7/watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, either "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell A" or "Black 7/Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell A".

When "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell A", "Bell B" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell B" during medium stop. As a result, the small winning combination 09 is won. Also, when "Bell B" cannot be stopped during medium stop, "Blue 7/Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern design 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7/watermelon" - "rotating" - "Bell A", "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped during medium stop. As a result, the pattern design 01 is stopped.

Next, assume that "Bell B" is stopped at the right first stop. In this case, when stopping on the left, priority is given to stopping either "Bell A" or "Bell C". Here, if "Bell C" can be stopped, "Bell A" can be stopped, so "Bell A" is stopped without stopping "Bell C". Also, when "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7/Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, either "Bell A"-"Rotating"-"Bell B" or "Black 7/Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell B".

When "Bell A"-"Rotating"-"Bell B", "Bell A" is stopped when it is possible to stop it during medium stop. As a result, the small winning combination 04 is won. If "Bell A" cannot be stopped during medium stop, "Blue 7/Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern design 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7/watermelon" - "rotating" - "Bell B", "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped during medium stop. As a result, the pattern design 01 is stopped.

From the above, when winning a small combination B2, when the pushing order is incorrect,
1 card role: win with a probability of 1/4 Pattern pattern: stop with a probability of 3/4
In addition, when winning a single role,
"Bell A" - "Bell A" - "Bell B" (small role 04)
"Bell B" - "Bell B" - "Bell A" (small role 09)
be either

When the small winning combination B3 is won, a small winning combination B3 table is provided as in the case of winning the small winning combination B1. The winning hand included when winning a small hand B3 is
Small role 01: "Black 7 / Watermelon" - "Bell C" - "Replay" (9 cards)
Small role 05: "Bell A" - "Bell B" - "Bell A" (1 piece)
Small role 08: "Bell B" - "Bell A" - "Bell B" (1 piece)
Small role 13: "Bell C" - "Bell B" - "Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 16: "Red 7" - "Bell A" - "Red 7" (1 piece)
Small role 21: "Bell C" - "Red 7" - "Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 24: "Red 7" - "Blue 7" - "Bell B" (1 sheet)
is.

Then, at the time of left first stop (when the pressing order is correct), the small winning combination 01 is won.
Next, at the time of the middle first stop (when the pressing order is incorrect), "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped on the effective line by number priority.
First, when "Bell A" is stopped during the middle first stop, priority is given to stopping either "Bell B" or "Red 7" during left stop. Here, "Bell B" is stopped without stopping "Red 7" in the same manner as described above. Also, when "bell B" cannot be stopped, "black 7/watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, either "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Rotating" or "Black 7/Watermelon"-"Bell A"-"Rotating".

When "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Rotating", "Bell B" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell B" when stopping to the right. As a result, the small winning combination 08 is won. Also, if "Bell B" cannot be stopped at right stop, "Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern design 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7/watermelon"-"Bell A"-"Rotating", "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at right stop. As a result, the pattern design 01 is stopped.

Next, it is assumed that "Bell B" is stopped at the middle first stop. In this case, when stopping on the left, priority is given to stopping either "Bell A" or "Bell C". Here, "Bell A" is stopped without stopping "Bell C" in the same manner as described above. Also, when "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7/Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, either "Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Rotating" or "Black 7/Watermelon"-"Bell B"-"Rotating".

When "Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Rotating", "Bell A" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell A" when stopping to the right. As a result, the small winning combination 05 is won. Also, if "Bell A" cannot be stopped at right stop, "Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern design 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7/watermelon" - "bell B" - "rotating", "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at right stop. As a result, the pattern design 01 is stopped.

Next, when the small winning combination B2 is won and the right first stop is made (when the pressing order is incorrect), the "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped on the effective line by giving priority to the number.
First, when "Bell A" is stopped at the first stop on the right, stopping either "Bell A" or "Bell C" is prioritized at the time of left stop. Here, "Bell A" is stopped in the same manner as above. Also, when "bell A" cannot be stopped, "black 7/watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, either "Bell A"-"Rotating"-"Bell A" or "Black 7/Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell A".

When "Bell A"-"Rotating"-"Bell A", "Bell B" is stopped if it is possible to stop it during medium stop. As a result, the small winning combination 05 is won. Also, when "Bell B" cannot be stopped during medium stop, "Blue 7/Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern design 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7/watermelon" - "rotating" - "Bell A", "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped during medium stop. As a result, the pattern design 01 is stopped.

Next, assume that "Bell B" is stopped at the right first stop. In this case, when stopping on the left, priority is given to stopping either "Bell B" or "Red 7". Here, "Bell B" is stopped in the same manner as described above. Also, when "bell B" cannot be stopped, "black 7/watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, either "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell B" or "Black 7/Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell B".

When "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell B", "Bell A" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell A" during medium stop. As a result, the small winning combination 08 is won. Also, when "Bell B" cannot be stopped during medium stop, "Blue 7/Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern design 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7/watermelon" - "rotating" - "Bell B", "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the time of medium stop. As a result, the pattern design 01 is stopped.

From the above, when winning a small combination B3, when the pushing order is incorrect,
1 card role: win with a probability of 1/4 Pattern pattern: stop with a probability of 3/4
In addition, when winning a single role,
"Bell A" - "Bell B" - "Bell A" (small role 05)
"Bell B" - "Bell A" - "Bell B" (small role 08)
be either

When the small winning combination B4 is won, a small winning combination B4 table is provided as in the case when the small winning combination B1 is won. The winning hand included when winning a small hand B4 is
Small role 01: "Black 7 / Watermelon" - "Bell C" - "Replay" (9 cards)
Small role 06: "Bell A" - "Bell B" - "Bell B" (1 piece)
Small role 07: "Bell B" - "Bell A" - "Bell A" (1 piece)
Small role 14: "Bell C" - "Bell B" - "Red 7" (1 piece)
Small role 15: "Red 7" - "Bell A" - "Blue 7" (1 piece)
Small role 22: "Bell C" - "Red 7" - "Bell B" (1 piece)
Small role 23: "Red 7" - "Blue 7" - "Bell A" (1 piece)
is.

Then, at the time of left first stop (when the pressing order is correct), the small winning combination 01 is won.
Next, at the time of the middle first stop (when the pressing order is incorrect), "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped on the effective line by number priority.
First, when "Bell A" is stopped at the middle first stop, priority is given to stopping either "Bell B" or "Red 7" at the left stop. Stop "Bell B". Also, when "bell B" cannot be stopped, "black 7/watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, either "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Rotating" or "Black 7/Watermelon"-"Bell A"-"Rotating".

When "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Rotating", "Bell A" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell A" when stopping to the right. As a result, the small winning combination 07 is won. Also, if "Bell B" cannot be stopped at right stop, "Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern design 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7/watermelon"-"Bell A"-"Rotating", "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at right stop. As a result, the pattern design 01 is stopped.

Next, it is assumed that "Bell B" is stopped at the middle first stop. In this case, when stopping on the left, priority is given to stopping either "Bell A" or "Bell C". Here, "Bell A" is stopped in the same manner as above. Also, when "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7/Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, either "Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Rotating" or "Black 7/Watermelon"-"Bell B"-"Rotating".

When "Bell A" - "Bell B" - "Rotating", "Bell B" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell B" when stopping to the right. As a result, the small winning combination 06 is won. Also, if "Bell B" cannot be stopped at right stop, "Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern design 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7/watermelon" - "bell B" - "rotating", "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at right stop. As a result, the pattern design 01 is stopped.

Next, when the small winning combination B4 is won and the right first stop is made (when the pressing order is incorrect), the "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped on the effective line by giving priority to the number.
First, when "Bell A" is stopped at the first right stop, stopping either "Bell B" or "Red 7" is prioritized at the left stop. Here, "Bell B" is stopped in the same manner as described above. Also, when "bell B" cannot be stopped, "black 7/watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, either "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell A" or "Black 7/Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell A".

When "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell A", "Bell A" is stopped if it is possible to stop it during medium stop. As a result, the small winning combination 07 is won. If "Bell A" cannot be stopped during medium stop, "Blue 7/Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern design 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7/watermelon" - "rotating" - "Bell A", "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped during medium stop. As a result, the pattern design 01 is stopped.

Next, assume that "Bell B" is stopped at the right first stop. In this case, when stopping on the left, priority is given to stopping either "Bell A" or "Bell C". Here, "Bell A" is stopped in the same manner as above. Also, when "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7/Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, either "Bell A"-"Rotating"-"Bell B" or "Black 7/Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell B".

When "Bell A" - "Rotating" - "Bell B", "Bell B" is stopped if it is possible to stop "Bell B" during medium stop. As a result, the small winning combination 06 is won. Also, when "Bell B" cannot be stopped during medium stop, "Blue 7/Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern design 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7/watermelon" - "rotating" - "Bell B", "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the time of medium stop. As a result, the pattern design 01 is stopped.

From the above, when winning a small combination B4, when the pushing order is incorrect,
1 card role: win with a probability of 1/4 Pattern pattern: stop with a probability of 3/4
In addition, when winning a single role,
"Bell A" - "Bell B" - "Bell B" (small role 06)
"Bell B" - "Bell A" - "Bell A" (small role 07)
be either

Hereinafter, the detailed description of the small winning combination B5 table to the small winning combination B12 table when winning the small winning combination B5 to B12 will be omitted, and only the outline thereof will be explained.
In the small winning combination B5 table used when the small winning combination B5 is won, the small winning combination 01 wins at the middle first stop when the pressing order is correct, and the small winning combination 03 or small winning combination has a probability of "1/4" when the pressing order is incorrect. A winning combination of 10 is won, and the pattern symbols stop with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pressing order is incorrect is the same as when winning the small winning combination B1.
In addition, in the small winning combination B6 table used when the small winning combination B6 is won, the small winning combination 01 is won at the middle first stop when the pressing order is correct, and the small winning combination 04 is won with a probability of "1/4" when the pressing order is incorrect. Alternatively, a small winning combination 09 wins, and the pattern symbols stop with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pressing order is incorrect is the same as when winning the small winning combination B2.

Furthermore, in the small winning combination B7 table used when the small winning combination B7 is won, the small winning combination 01 wins at the middle first stop when the pressing order is correct, and the small winning combination 01 wins with a probability of "1/4" when the pressing order is incorrect. 05 or a small winning combination 08 wins, and the pattern symbols stop with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pressing order is incorrect is the same as when winning the small winning combination B3.
Further, in the small winning combination B8 table used when the small winning combination B8 is won, the small winning combination 01 is won at the middle first stop when the pressing order is correct, and the small winning combination 06 is won with a probability of "1/4" when the pressing order is incorrect. Alternatively, a small winning combination 07 is won, and the pattern symbols are stopped with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pressing order is incorrect is the same as when winning the small winning combination B4.

In the small winning combination B9 table used when the small winning combination B9 is won, the small winning combination 01 wins at the right first stop, which is when the pressing order is correct. A winning combination of 10 is won, and the pattern symbols stop with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pressing order is incorrect is the same as when winning the small winning combination B1.
In addition, in the small winning combination B10 table used when the small winning combination B10 is won, the small winning combination 01 wins at the right first stop, which is when the pressing order is correct, and the small winning combination 04 wins with a probability of "1/4" when the pressing order is incorrect. Alternatively, a small winning combination 09 wins, and the pattern symbols stop with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pressing order is incorrect is the same as when winning the small winning combination B2.

Furthermore, in the small winning combination B11 table used when the small winning combination B11 is won, the small winning combination 01 wins at the right first stop, which is when the pressing order is correct, and the small winning combination 01 wins with a probability of "1/4" when the pressing order is incorrect. 05 or a small winning combination 08 wins, and the pattern symbols stop with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pressing order is incorrect is the same as when winning the small winning combination B3.
Further, in the small winning combination B12 table used when the small winning combination B12 is won, the small winning combination 01 wins at the right first stop, which is when the pressing order is correct, and the small winning combination 06 wins with a probability of "1/4" when the pressing order is incorrect. Alternatively, a small winning combination 07 is won, and the pattern symbols are stopped with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pressing order is incorrect is the same as when winning the small winning combination B4.

As is clear from the above, when the pressing order is incorrect when winning the small win group B, the winable single wins are the 03 to 10 small wins. Therefore, small wins other than the above included in each condition device do not win. This setting is related to a one-piece combination that can be won when a minor combination C group is won, which will be described later.

The small winning combination C1 table is used in a game when the small winning combination C1 is won. Except for the first stop (when the pressing order is incorrect), the single hand included in the winning hand (when winning the small hand C1, any of the small hand 03 to 10) is stopped on the effective line. It defines the stop position of the reel 31 .

When winning the small winning combination C1 (the same goes for small winning combinations C2 and C3, which will be described later), if the pressing order is correct, the small winning combination 02 (three-hand winning combination) will be won in the same way as when the small winning group B is won, with priority given to the number of sheets. Control. The combination of symbols corresponding to the small win 02 is, as shown in FIG. . Therefore, when the pressing order is correct, the small winning combination 02 can always be won.

In addition, when the small combination C1 is won, if the pressing order is incorrect (middle or right first stop), control is performed so that the one-piece combination (small combination 03 to 10) is awarded based on the number priority. Here, as shown in FIG. 8, the combination of symbols for the small wins 03 to 10 is a combination of "Bell A" or "Bell B" symbols on each reel 31. FIG. Furthermore, among the combinations of symbols of the small wins 03 to 10, all the reels 31 have 4 "Bell A" and 4 "Bell B", and either "Bell A" or "Bell B" is selected. Even if it is stopped, it satisfies the condition of number priority. In particular, when the small winning combination C2 and the small winning combination C3 are won, the small winning combination 21 and the small winning combination 22 are included, respectively. Further, in all the reels 31, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is "PB=1" in the sum of the two symbols. Therefore, any one of the small winning combinations 03 to 10 can always be won.

From the above, when the small winning combination C1 is won, if the pressing order is correct, the small winning combination 02 (3 pieces) wins ("PB = 1"), and if the pressing order is incorrect, one of the small winning combinations 03 to 10 (1 ("PB=1") is won ("PB=1"), and there is no dropout (stopping of pattern symbols) as in the case of winning the small win group B.

The small combination C2 table and the small combination C3 table used when the small combination C2 is won and when the small combination C3 is won are the same as the small combination C1 table. As shown in FIG. 16, when the small win C2 is won, the middle first stop is the correct pressing order, and when the small win C3 is won, the right first stop is the correct pressing order. The stop control for winning the small winning combination 02 or the small winning combination 03 to 10 is the same as when the small winning combination C1 is won, so the explanation is omitted.

Therefore, there is a single hand (small hand 03 to 10) that can be stopped if the pushing order is incorrect when winning the small hand group B, and a single hand that can be stopped when the pushing order is wrong when the small hand group C is won ( Small wins 03-10) are the same. As a result, it is not possible to determine which of the small win group B or the small win group C has been won in the game only by seeing the wins of the small wins 03-10.

The small combination D table is used in a game when the small combination D is won, and defines the stop position of the reel 31 so that the small combination 35 is stopped on the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 . In the small combination D table, the pressing order of the stop switch 42 is irrelevant. As shown in FIG. 9, the combination of symbols for the small winning combination 35 is "watermelon". “Watermelon” has a “PB≠1” arrangement on the left and middle reels 31 and a “PB=1” arrangement on the right reel 31 . Therefore, in a game using the small combination D table, if the stop switch 42 is operated at the timing at which the "watermelon" stops on the activated line, the "watermelon" will stop on the activated line on the left and middle reels 31. When the stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the "watermelon" does not stop on the effective line, the "watermelon" does not stop on the effective line and the small win 35 is lost.

The small winning combination E1 table is used in a game when the small winning combination E1 is won, and defines the stop position of the reel 31 so as to stop the small winning combination 36 or 38 on the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. is. Here, as shown in FIG. 16, when the stop switch 42 is operated for left or middle first stop, so-called middle stage cherry stop type ("cherry" stops at left middle stage). It defines the stop position of the reel 31 . On the other hand, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the right first stop, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the middle stage cherry does not stop.

The winning of the small winning combination E1 includes the small winning combinations 36 and 38 (and the small winning combination 37 when winning the small winning combination E2, which will be described later). The number/number priority is not applied, and the reel 31 can be stopped by predetermined arbitrary stop control. Therefore, control is performed so that the winning of the small winning combination 36 is prioritized during the left or middle first stop, and the winning of the small winning combination 38 is prioritized during the right first stop.

In FIG. 5, the "cherries" on the left reel 31 are No. 3, No. 8, and No. 13 ("PB≠1"). Then, when "Cherry" is stopped in the middle left row, "Blank" or "Red 7" is stopped in the effective line, which is the lower left row. Therefore, in this case, the symbols related to the small win 36 are stopped for the left reel 31 .

For example, when the number 7 "red 7" is stopped at the lower left stage ("cherry" stop at the middle left stage) at the first stop on the left, "blue 7" or "cherry" is valid when the middle reel 31 is stopped. The line is stopped ("PB=1"), and when the right reel 31 is stopped, either "Black 7", "Blue 7", "Red 7", or "Blank"("PB= 1”) to stop on the valid line. As a result, the small winning combination 36 is won.
Also, when the left reel 31 is stopped and the 2nd or 12th "blank" is stopped at the lower left stage ("Cherry" is stopped at the middle left stage), similarly to the above, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the " Blue 7" or "Cherry" is stopped on the effective line, and when the right reel 31 is stopped, either "Black 7", "Blue 7", "Red 7" or "Blank" is stopped on the effective line. . As a result, the small winning combination 36 is won.

Stop control is performed in the same manner as described above for the middle first stop. Therefore, the middle and right reels 31 have "PB=1" and the symbols related to the small combination 36 stop, and the left reel 31 has a case where "red 7" or "blank" stops and a case where it does not stop ( "PB≠1").
However, if "Red 7" or "Blank" cannot be stopped in the lower left row at the first left or middle stop, "Bell A" or "Bell B" will be stopped. "Bell A" or "Bell B" can be stopped at "PB=1". In this case, the stopping form is "Bell A/Bell B"-"Blue 7/Cherry"-"Black 7/Blue 7/Red 7/Blank", and 38 small wins are won.

On the other hand, in the game using the small winning combination E1 table, the winning of the small winning combination 38 is prioritized during the right first stop. Therefore, in this case, "Bell A/Bell B" - "Blue 7/Cherry" - "Black 7/Blue 7/Red 7/Blank" stops, and the small combination 38 wins with "PB=1". .
Furthermore, at the first stop on the right, even if "cherry" can be stopped at the middle left stage when the left reel 31 is stopped, "bell A" or "bell" is not stopped at the middle left stage, and "bell A" or "bell" is not stopped at the middle left stage. B" (in this case, "Cherry" non-stop in the middle left row).

The small winning combination E2 table is used in a game when the small winning combination E1 is won. It defines the stop position of
Therefore, since the small winning combination E2 table can perform the same stop control as the small winning combination E1 table, it is possible to use the same stop position determination table.

Alternatively, in the case of the left first stop, only when "Red 7" or "Blank" can be stopped in the lower left row (at the time of middle row cherry stop), "Replay" is set to the effective line for the middle reel 31 It may be stopped (“PB=1”), and for the right reel 31, either “black 7”, “blue 7”, “red 7” or “blank” may be stopped. As a result, the small winning combination 37 wins. If the stop control is performed in this manner, it becomes possible to determine whether the small winning combination E1 or the small winning combination E2 is won when the middle stage cherry is stopped.

The small combination F table is used in a game when the small combination F is won, and the stop position of the reel 31 is set so as to stop any of the small combination 01 to 39 on the active line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. It is determined.
In this embodiment, the small winning combination F is drawn only during 1BB operation.
In addition, the small win F table performs stop control by giving priority to the number of coins regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. As a result, the small winning combination 39 is always won. On the left reel 31, the sum of the two symbols of "Cherry" or "Bell C" is "PB=1", so the small combination 39 wins with "PB=1".

The small combination G table is used in a game when a small combination G is won, and determines the stop position of the reel 31 so as to stop the small combination 40 on the effective line within the range of stop control of the reel 31. . Since the small winning combination 40 consists of a combination of symbols arranged at "PB=1" for all the reels 31, the small winning combination 40 can always be won in the game.

The 1BBA table is used in a game when the accessory condition device number "1" is won (single 1BBA is won), or when 1BBA is won in the previous game and is not won in the current game, and the stop control of the reels 31 is performed. The combination of symbols when the reels 31 are stopped is determined so that the symbol combination corresponding to 1BBA is stopped on the active line and the symbol combination corresponding to the combination other than 1BBA is not stopped on the active line within the range of . It is a thing.
Since the symbol of 1BBA is "Red 7" on all the reels 31 (PB≠1), "Red 7" cannot be stopped on the effective line without eye pressing.

Similarly, the 1BBB table is used in the game when the accessory condition device number "2" is won (single win of 1BBB), or when 1BBB was won in the previous game and the game is not won in the current game. Within the range of stop control, the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBB is stopped on the activated line, and the combination of symbols corresponding to a combination other than 1BBB is not stopped on the activated line. It defines the combination.
The symbol of 1BBB is "PB≠1" on all reels 31 as well as 1BBA, so "Red 7" and "Black 7" cannot be stopped on the effective line without eye pressing.

Although the detailed explanation is omitted, in the game in which 1BB and a small winning combination or replay were won repeatedly, or in the game in which 1BB was won before the previous game and a small winning combination or replay was won in the game this time, the following stop control is performed. is mentioned.

For example, first, priority is given to stopping both the symbols of the winning 1BB and the small win or replay on the active line, and when both symbols cannot be stopped on the active line, the winning small win There is a stop control that gives priority to stopping symbols for a winning combination or a replay on an active line. The stop control for stopping both 1BB and small winning combination or replay symbols on the effective line is up to the second stop. No role may be won more than once.
Secondly, the winning 1BB and the small combination or replay symbols are both stopped on the active line, and when both symbols cannot be stopped on the active line, the winning 1BB. stop control (opposite to the above) that gives priority to stopping the symbols on the effective line.

Furthermore, thirdly, although the priority is given to stopping the winning small winning combination or replay symbols on the active line, when stopping the winning small winning combination or replay symbols on the active line, When the winning 1BB symbols can be stopped on the effective line at the same time, there is a stop control to stop them at that position.

In addition, when 1BB ("PB ≠ 1") and a small combination or replay of "PB = 1" are duplicated (when they are elected at the same time), the winning 1BB pattern and the small combination or replay It is not necessary to perform control to stop both symbols and symbols on the activated line, and it is also possible to perform control so that only symbols of a small winning combination of "PB=1" or replay symbols are stopped on the activated line. Therefore, since the small wins E1 and E2 are "PB=1", when 1BBA and the small win E1 of this embodiment are won, or when 1BBB and the small win E2 are won, only the small win E1 or E2 It is also possible to execute stop control to win a prize.

Returning to FIG.
When the reels 31 are stopped, the winning determination means 66 determines whether the combination of symbols on the reels 31 stopped on the activated line matches the combination of symbols corresponding to any combination (whether any combination has won a prize). or not). The winning judgment means 66 judges the symbols on the pay line by detecting the angle of the motor 32 when it is stopped, the number of steps, and the like.

When the prize determination means 66 determines that the combination of symbols stopped on the active line when the reels 31 are stopped matches the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations, the payout means 67 wins the winning combination. Depending on the winning combination, a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player, or processing such as addition of credits is performed. Also, when winning a prize in replay, control is performed so that the number of medals inserted in the current game is automatically inserted without paying out medals.

The RT control means 68 determines whether or not the RT transition condition is satisfied at every game, when all the reels 31 are stopped, and controls to perform the RT transition when determining that the RT transition condition is satisfied. It is.
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an RT transition diagram in this embodiment. RT of this embodiment includes non-RT, RT1 to RT4, 1BBA operation (1BBA game), and 1BBB operation (1BBB game), as described above. Then, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the type (number) of lottery condition devices and the winning probability differ for each RT.

In the present embodiment, the RT transition timing is set at the time of stop display of the combination of symbols or the winning of the RT transition combination, that is, at the time of full stop (when all the reels 31 are stopped). Therefore, for example, during RT1, when the pattern symbols stop when all the reels 31 stop, RT shifts from RT1 to RT2 at the time when all the reels 31 stop. The transition from non-RT, RT1 to RT3 to RT4 may be performed based on the winning of 1BB, or may be performed based on the fact that 1BB did not win in the game in which 1BB was won. good too. In this embodiment, the game proceeds to RT4 based on the fact that 1BB is not won in the game in which 1BB is won.

Non-internal games correspond to non-RT, RT1, RT2, and RT3. Also, the internal middle game corresponds to RT4.
In addition, during the advantageous section, the slot machine 10 is controlled to basically stay at RT3, but if the player makes a mistake in the pressing order of the stop switch 42, etc., the player may stay at RT2. be. In the case of an advantageous section ending with only one instruction function activating game (excluding games won in small win group C, replay group B, and replay group C), it is not necessary to stay at RT3. That is, in RT2, one indication function activation game (excluding games won in small win group C, replay group B, and replay group C) may be performed, and the advantageous section may end. Of course, you may make it stay in RT3 fundamentally.

In the non-RT, non-inside games of RT1 to RT3, a lottery for the accessory condition device is performed. Then, when 1BB is won in these RTs and 1BB is not won, the RT control means 68 determines that the conditions for transitioning to RT are satisfied, and shifts to RT4 corresponding to an internal middle game.
Also, when 1BB is won in a game in which 1BB is won, the operation of 1BBA or 1BBB is started when the current game is completely stopped, so RT4 (internal middle game) is not passed in this case.

RT4 is continued until the winning 1BB wins. When the RT control means 68 determines that 1BBA or 1BBB is won in RT4, it determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and shifts to 1BBA operation (1BBA game) or 1BBB operation (1BBB game), respectively.
When 1BBA is in operation, it continues until the 1BBA operation end condition is met. In this embodiment, the condition for ending the operation of 1BBA is set to the number of payouts exceeding 150.

The RT control means 68 determines whether or not more than 150 medals have been paid out during the operation of 1BBA every game, and when it is determined that more than 150 medals have been paid out, the condition for ending the 1BBA operation is set. is determined to be satisfied, and control is made to shift to non-RT from the next game.

The 1BBB operation is similar to the above. If the transition is made during 1BBB operation, it continues until the 1BBB operation end condition is satisfied. In this embodiment, the end condition of 1BBB operation is set to the payout of more than 200 medals.
The RT control means 68 determines whether or not more than 200 medals have been paid out in each game, and when determining that more than 200 medals have been paid out, determines that the 1BBB operation end condition is satisfied, From the next game, it is controlled to shift to RT1.

Note that replays are not included in the count of 150 or 200 shots during 1BB operation. As shown in FIG. 17, during 1BB operation, replay D may be won, but the automatic bet at the time of winning the replay is not counted in the number of payouts. Therefore, the number of games during 1BB operation increases as the replay D is won. In particular, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, the winning probability of replay D during 1BBA operation is set to 10 times that during 1BBB operation. It will be more than the expected value of the number of games in the middle.

During operation of 1BBA and 1BBB, RB is continuously operated as described above. The RB ends when either winning two hands or playing two games is satisfied, and after that, the RB is activated again on the condition that the end condition of the 1BB operation is not satisfied.
Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the winning probability of the small winning combination E2 during 1BBA is set higher at setting 6 than at setting 1. In FIG. The number of coins to be paid out when the small winning combination E2 is won and the small winning combination 36 or 38 is won is two. As a result, the number of games played until reaching the end condition (exceeding 150 cards) during one BBA operation is greater in setting 6 than in setting 1. - 特許庁Therefore, during the operation of 1BBA in the advantageous section, setting 6 has a higher expected value for winning the replay D than setting 1, so the probability that the advantageous section is added increases. The details of this point will be described in the control of the advantageous section, which will be described later.

When the RWM 53 is initialized, the game is started from non-RT. However, not limited to this, RT may be maintained even when the RWM 53 is initialized. Here, for example, when the RWM 53 is initialized while the winning of 1BB is carried over, the winning of 1BB is also maintained (carried over).

The RT control means 68 continues the non-RT until the pattern design is displayed in the non-RT. In the non-RT mode, a small winning combination B group is drawn, and if one of the small winning combinations B is won and the winning small winning combination is lost, a pattern pattern is displayed. The RT control means 68 determines that the condition for transition to RT is satisfied when the pattern symbol is displayed in non-RT, and shifts to RT2 from the next game.
In RT1, RT1 is maintained until a pattern design is displayed like non-RT. Then, when the pattern design is displayed at RT1, the process proceeds to RT2.

RT2 is the RT with the highest stay rate in the normal section. In RT2, when replay B group is won and replay 02 wins, it is determined that the condition for transition to RT is satisfied, and the next game is shifted to RT3.
On the other hand, in RT3, pattern symbols are displayed, or replay C group is won, and replay 03 is continued until winning. In RT3, when a pattern symbol is displayed or when replay 03 wins, it is determined that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and the next game is transitioned to RT2.

As described above, in the normal section (and in the non-internal section), most people go back and forth between RT2 and RT3, but RT2 has the highest stay rate in probability. As described above, when 1BB is won in RT2 or RT3 (including non-RT and RT1), the next game is shifted to RT4 (inside).

In addition, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section during the normal section, if the game decided to shift to the advantageous section is RT3, in order to maintain RT3, an instruction function is provided when the replay C group is won. to display the order of pressing correct answers for winning Replay 01. This prevents falling to RT2. Further, when the small winning combination B group is won, the order of pressing the correct answer for winning the small winning combination 01 is displayed by activating the instruction function. Similarly, when the minor winning combination C group is won, the correct pressing order for winning the minor winning combination 02 is displayed by activating the instruction function.

On the other hand, when the game determined to shift to the advantageous section is RT2, the correct answer is to win replay 02 by activating the instruction function when the replay B group is won while activating the instruction function as described above. Display the pressing order and control to shift to RT3.
Also, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section when it is non-RT or RT1, the transition to the advantageous section is made even during non-RT or RT1, but until the pattern pattern is displayed, the instruction function is operable (for example, when a small winning combination B is won), the instruction function is not operated and the pattern symbols are displayed. Then, pattern symbols are displayed in non-RT or RT1, and when shifting to RT2, the instruction function is operated in the same manner as described above.

Advantageous section control means 69 is a means for executing transition from a normal section to an advantageous section (including a standby section), determination as to whether or not to end the advantageous section, addition during the advantageous section, operation control of the indicating function, and the like. be.
First, the advantageous section control means 69 determines whether or not to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section and non-inside game.
In addition, the advantageous interval control means 69 determines whether or not to add the number of games in the advantageous interval in the advantageous interval and non-inside game.

Whether or not to shift to the advantageous section during the normal section, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. Decide to move. Also, when it is decided to shift to an advantageous section, it is limited to non-internal driving, and it is not decided to shift from a normal section to an advantageous section during internal driving.

In addition, as described above, if the transition to the advantageous section is determined according to the combination lottery result (the winning condition device), the winning of the condition device having a set difference cannot be the condition.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, there is a case where the normal section shifts to the advantageous section under the condition that the common setting condition device is won.

As shown in FIG. 17, for example, when 1BBA is won alone, there are cases where it is decided to shift to the advantageous section and cases where it is not decided to shift. When a random number included in the range of "20" among the numbers "30" assigned to the single winning of 1BBA is extracted, it is decided to move to the advantageous section, and the number "10" When a random number within the range of is extracted, it is decided not to move to the advantageous section. The same applies to single winning of "1BBA+small win D", "1BBA+small win E1", and small win E1.

In addition, when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 is won during the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added. It should be noted that it is also possible to perform an additional lottery instead of uniformly adding an advantageous section when winning one of these conditional devices, or to perform a lottery as to whether or not to perform an additional lottery. However, in this embodiment, for simplification of explanation, the addition of the advantageous section is performed uniformly.

When it is decided to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section, an advantageous section with a predetermined number of games may be set, or the number of games in the advantageous section may be determined by lottery or the like. Alternatively, instead of determining the end condition of the advantageous section based on the number of games played, the end conditions other than the number of games (for example, the number of payouts, the difference number, the number of times a small win group B is won, the number of times the instruction function is operated, etc.) may be set. good. In this embodiment, when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 is won in the normal section, the game moves to the advantageous section in which the end conditions are set as follows.
Specifically, for example, it can be defined as follows.
When 1BBA wins alone (set number "20"): Initial value counts after the end of 1BB game and shifts to the advantageous section of 100 games When 1BBA + small combination D wins multiple times (set number "5"): Initial value is 1BB Count after the end of the game and shift to the advantageous section of 250 games When 1BBA + small hand E1 double winning (number "20"): Initial value counts after the end of the 1BB game and shifts to the advantageous section of 200 games Small When the role D is won alone (set number “50”): Advantageous section with initial value of 150 games When small combination E1 is won alone (set number “250”): Advantageous section with initial value of 100 games, or one small combination Either one of the advantageous sections that ends with the operation of the instruction function when winning the B group (which one to choose may be determined by lottery. When extracting the random number value, the initial value is the advantageous interval of 100 games, and when extracting the random number value included in the range of the set number "130", the instruction function at the time of winning one small win group B It may be an advantageous section that ends with operation)

Since the probability of winning the small winning combination D is lower than the winning probability of the small winning combination E1, in order to give a sense of premium when winning the small winning combination D, the number of games in the advantageous section when winning the small winning combination D is set to a small number. It is set more than when winning the role E1. The number of games in the advantageous section when winning the small winning combination E1 may be set higher than when winning the small winning combination D.
Also, when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 is won during the advantageous section, for example, when 1BBA is won alone, the number of games in the advantageous section is increased by "30", ), the number of games is increased by 50, and when a small winning combination E1 is won alone (set number is 750), the number of games is increased by 20, and so on.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 17, in the normal section, it is decided to shift to the advantageous section with a probability of "1/4"("250" out of "1000") when a small winning combination E1 is won alone. do.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18, setting 6 is set higher than setting 1 for the single winning probability of small combination E2.

Therefore, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance ratio of the middle cherries.
In other words, the player can be given the impression that there is a set difference even though there is no set difference in the probability of deciding to shift to the advantageous section.
Contrary to the present embodiment, setting 1 may be higher than setting 6 for the single winning probability of small winning combination E2 in FIG.
In this way, the lower the setting, the higher the probability of appearance of the middle cherry, but the lower the probability that the transition to the advantageous section when the middle cherry appears will be made.
In addition, during the advantageous section, when the small winning combination E1 is won alone, the advantageous section is always added. On the other hand, when the small winning combination E2 is won alone in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is not added. Therefore, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance ratio of middle cherries. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that there is a setting difference even though there is no set difference in the probability that the advantageous section is added.

In addition, 1BBA is a special combination in which winning numbers are set in common (except when 1BBA and small combination D are repeatedly won), and 1BBB is a special combination having different winning numbers.
In this case, when the common 1BBA is won during the advantageous section and the 1BBA is in operation, the advantageous section can be added during the operation of the 1BBA. On the other hand, when 1BBB with a set difference is won in the advantageous section and 1BBB is in operation, it is determined that the advantageous section cannot be added during the operation of 1BBB. When 1BBA and a small combination D having a set difference in the advantageous section are repeatedly won and 1BBA is in operation, it is determined that the advantageous section cannot be added during the operation of 1BBA.

On the other hand, when setting 1 and setting 6 are compared during 1BBA operation, setting 6 has a lower winning probability of minor win A than setting 1, and setting 6 has a lower winning probability of minor win E2 than setting 1. higher than For this reason, the condition for ending the operation of 1BBA is set to a payout exceeding 150 coins, so that setting 6 has a larger number of games (expected value) during 1BBA operation than setting 1. - 特許庁
So, for example, if you set it to add an advantageous section when winning Replay D, the expected value of the number of times you win Replay D during 1BBA is higher with setting 6 than with setting 1, so the higher the setting Advantageous sections can be easily added.

Furthermore, during the operation of 1BBA, when the number of games reaches a predetermined number of times, the advantageous section may be added.
As described above, during 1BBA operation, the expected value of the number of games during 1BBA operation is greater with setting 6 than with setting 1.
As described above, the condition for ending the operation of 1BBA is set to the fact that more than 150 coins have been paid out. On the other hand, the expected payout number per game during one BBA operation is about "8.664" at setting 1 and about "8.557" at setting 6. Therefore, the expected value of the number of times the game is played at which the number of payouts reaches 150 is approximately "17.3" for the setting 1 and approximately "17.5" for the setting 6.
Therefore, when the number of games reaches, for example, the 18th game during 1BBA operation, if it is unconditionally decided to add the advantageous section, the higher the set value, the easier it is to add the advantageous section. be able to.
Furthermore, during the 1BBA operation, it may be set so that an advantageous section is added each time a certain number of games have been played. Also in this way, the higher the set value, the easier it is to add the advantageous section.

On the other hand, since 1BBB is a special role having a setting difference, it is not possible to add an advantageous section while 1BBB is in operation.
Further, as shown in FIG. 22, after the operation of 1BBA is completed, the robot shifts to non-RT, and when it shifts to non-RT, it stays in non-RT until the pattern design is displayed, and when the pattern design is displayed. goes to RT2. That is, after the operation of 1BBA is completed, RT1 is not routed.

On the other hand, after the operation of 1BBB is completed, it shifts to RT1 and stays at RT1 until the pattern design is displayed. In RT1, replay E is drawn by lottery, and as shown in FIG. 17, if RT1 is in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added when replay E is won. As a result, after the 1BBB operation ends, the probability of adding an advantageous section becomes higher than after the 1BBA operation ends. By setting the number of additional games in the advantageous section at the time of winning the replay E to an appropriate value, it is possible to balance after the operation of 1BBA and after the operation of 1BBB is completed.

Then, when the advantageous section is maintained and the transition to RT1 is made, the instruction function is not operated in a game in which the instruction function can be operated (for example, when winning the minor winning group B) until the pattern symbol is displayed, and the pattern symbol is not operated. Wait until is displayed. Then, the pattern design is displayed in RT1, and when it shifts to RT2, the instruction function is activated. When moving to RT1 while maintaining the advantageous section, during the advantageous section, by activating the instruction function when the small winning group B is won, the small winning combination 01 wins (unless there is a pushing order error) pattern. No pattern is displayed. Therefore, when shifting to RT1 during the advantageous section, it is possible to make the player stay in RT1 until the advantageous section ends. A game ( For example, when winning a small winning combination of B group), the instruction function may not be activated and the player may wait until the pattern symbols are displayed.

Further, when it is determined to shift from a normal section to an advantageous section, the advantageous section control means 69 controls so that the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before a predetermined timing arrives. section or standby section), control is performed so that the advantageous section display LED 77 is extinguished.
Firstly, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section control means 69, after the end of the game determined to shift to the advantageous section (when all the reels 31 are stopped and there is a payout, medals The advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on until it becomes possible to insert (bet) medals in the next game (after payout), and before the operation of the settlement switch 46 (calculation processing operation) becomes possible when there are stored medals. to control.

Secondly, when it is determined to shift to an advantageous section based on the winning of a conditional device including 1BB that can carry over the winning information to the next game or later, until the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BB stops, Control is performed so that the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit.
Therefore, if it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the conditional device including the special role, the special role is a special role that carries the winning information to the next game, such as 1BB, 2BB, and RB, for example. If there is, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on before the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination stops (limited to the case where a waiting section is provided).

On the other hand, if the special role is a special role such as SB or CB where winning is valid only in the winning game and the winning information is not carried over to the next game, the winning of the conditional device including only small winnings and replays is possible. Based on this, it is necessary to light up the advantageous interval display LED 77 until the next game medal insertion (betting) becomes possible and the adjustment switch 46 becomes operable. be.

FIG. 23 is a diagram showing timing 1 and timing 2 as timings for lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 .
In this embodiment, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the lighting timing of the advantageous section display LED 77 is set as follows: "From the time when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, after the end of the current game (all Until the reel 31 stops and the medals for the next game can be inserted (bet) after the medals are paid out if there is a payout, and the settlement switch 46 can be operated (hereinafter, this timing is referred to as "predetermined timing"). )”, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on. Then, when the start switch 41 for the next game is operated, the advantageous section starts. That is, in this embodiment, in principle, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit before the start of the advantageous section. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game unknowingly after deciding to shift to the advantageous section.

In FIG. 23, timing 1 shows an example of this case. In this example, when the minor winning combination E1 is won (single) and it is determined to shift to the advantageous interval based on the winning of the minor winning combination E1, the advantageous interval display LED 77 is lit by a predetermined timing. As in this example, it is always applied when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of a conditional device that does not include 1BB that can be carried over to the next game or later in the winning information.

Secondly, when it is determined to shift to an advantageous section based on the winning of a conditional device including 1BB that can be carried over to the next game or later, a combination of symbols corresponding to 1BB is displayed. By then, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on. Then, when the start switch 41 for the next game of the game in which the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BB is displayed is operated, the advantageous section starts. In this embodiment, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the advantageous section starts.
In FIG. 23, timing 2 shows an example of this case. In this example, when 1BBA and a small winning combination E1 are repeatedly won and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on this overlapping winning, the advantageous section is displayed by the time the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBA is displayed. LED 77 is lit. Therefore, as long as the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBA is displayed, the lighting timing may be before that, for example, timing 1 (in the case where no waiting section is provided).

Therefore, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device that includes the special combination that can be carried over to the next game or later, the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is uniformly displayed. It may be determined that the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit when the section is displayed. Alternatively, even if it is a transition to an advantageous section based on the winning of a conditional device that includes the special role, it is decided to uniformly move to the advantageous section based on the winning of a conditional device that does not include the special role. The advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on by a predetermined timing in the same manner as when.

Alternatively, when it is determined to shift to an advantageous section based on winning of a conditional device including a special combination that can be carried over to the next game or later, the lighting timing may be determined by lottery or the like.
Also, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the conditional device including the special combination that can be carried over to the next game or later, the winning information can be transferred to the advantageous section other than timing 1 and timing 2 shown in FIG. 23, for example, In the next game of the game in which the special role is won, when the start switch 41 is operated, at least part of the reels 31 are rotating, or when the third stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of whether or not the particular role is won), etc. may be

In that case, when the start switch 41 of the next game of the game is operated, the advantageous section starts (the waiting section ends in the next game of the game in which the special role is won). In addition, when the start switch 41 is operated after the next game of the game in which the special role is won, in the game in which the special role can be won, at least a part of the reels 31 rotates. It may be during operation, or when the third stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of whether or not the winning combination is won). In that case, when the start switch 41 of the next game of the game is operated, the advantageous section will start (the standby section will end with the game that has made it possible to win the special combination) ).

Here, for example, when the small winning combination E1 is won, the 59th "red 7"-"cherry"-"red 7" (FIG. 9) of the 36 small winning combinations can be stopped. Then, it is assumed that "Red 7"-"Rotating"-"Red 7" stopped as a result of pinching in a game when 1BBA was won. Next, when the player aims for "cherry" when the middle reel 31 stops, but "cherry" does not stop on the effective line (kicking control), the small winning combination E1 is won in the game. I know it's not. In this case, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, the player will know that 1BBA is single winning, and the 1BBA symbol will be displayed in the next game after the game at the time of 1BBA winning. It becomes possible to highlight the combination of In other words, the lighting of the advantageous section display LED 77 functions as notification of the winning of 1BBA. This is because it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section when losing (when not winning). Conventionally, when 1BB is won, there is a tendency to perform continuous effects (effects to incite whether 1BB is won or not), and then to announce 1BB wins, but the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned off by a predetermined timing. If the lights are turned on, such a continuous effect will be wasted.
Therefore, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device including the 1BB that can be carried over to the next game or later, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not lit until the winning 1BB wins. to have

On the other hand, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of "1BBA+small winning combination E1", if the winning of the small winning combination E1 is prioritized in the game, 1BBA is not won in the relevant game.
On the other hand, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the single winning of the small winning combination E1, it is necessary to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 by a predetermined timing (because a waiting section cannot be provided). ).
Therefore, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of "1BBA + small winning combination E1", if the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on until the winning 1BBA wins, the small winning combination E1 will result. When winning a prize, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up by a predetermined timing, so that the player knows that 1BBA has not been won repeatedly.

Therefore, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of "1BBA + small win E1", the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit by a predetermined timing (timing 1 shown in FIG. 23) and a predetermined A case (timing 2 shown in FIG. 23) in which the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on even after the timing has passed is provided. Which one to adopt is, for example, sorted by the set number at the time of winning "1BBA + small hand E1", or when winning "1BBA + small hand E1" (limited to when it is decided to move to the advantageous section) The advantageous section For example, a lottery (two-step lottery) as to whether or not the display LED 77 should be turned on immediately (whether or not a waiting section should be provided) may be performed. As a result, even if the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by the predetermined timing, it does not mean that 1BBA is not repeatedly won, and the expectation of the player can be continued.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the small winning combination E1 is set to "PB=1", so regardless of whether "1BBA+small winning combination E1" is won or when the small winning combination E1 alone is won, the A small winning combination E1 (small winning combination 36 or 38) is won in the game.
However, it is also possible to set the minor winning combination included in the conditional device of the minor winning combination E1 to "PB≠1". Then, when the small winning combination included in the conditional device for the small winning combination E1 is set to "PB≠1", when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section when "1BBA + small winning combination E1" is won, the small winning combination E1 When winning a prize, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit by a predetermined timing, but when the minor winning combination E1 is not won, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not lit even after the predetermined timing.

However, not limited to the above, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the conditional device that includes a special combination that can carry over the winning information to the next game or later, the advantageous section display LED 77 is always displayed by a predetermined timing. may be turned on (always at timing 1 shown in FIG. 23), or the advantageous section display LED 77 may be always turned off even after a predetermined timing has passed (always at timing 1 shown in FIG. 23). Timing 2).

In addition, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section when the small winning combination D is won alone and when the small winning combination E1 is won alone, it is necessary to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 by a predetermined timing (a waiting section is provided). Therefore, it becomes a so-called immediate announcement and cannot arouse the player's expectations.
Therefore, as described above, when the small winning combination E1 is won alone, there are two advantages: an advantageous interval that continues until the predetermined number of games are played, and an advantageous interval that ends with the operation of the instruction function when one small winning combination B is won. set the type. Then, after the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, until the first small win group B is won, an effect that raises expectations (the final result is whether or not the advantageous section continues until the predetermined number of games are played) If a continuous effect indicating whether or not the game is to be played is output, even if the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, it is possible to arouse the expectations of the player even after that. This is because, even if the advantageous interval display LED 77 lights up, it is not known at the time when the advantageous interval is continued until the predetermined number of games is played.

Even when the small winning combination E1 is won alone, the advantageous section display LED 77 does not light up when the advantageous section is not entered. Absent.
In addition, when the condition device is won, instead of setting the winning of the small winning combination B once (one instruction function operating game) or the predetermined number of games, the instruction function at the time of winning the small winning combination B is set. It is also possible to determine the number of times of actuation by lottery, for example, within the range of 1 to 50 times.

As a specific process for lighting the advantageous section display LED 77, the 8th bit of the segment data for displaying the digit 2 is changed from "0" to "1". Since the segment data for displaying digit 2 is stored in the RWM 53, the segment data is changed. For example, data obtained by performing an OR operation on segment data up to that point and "10000000" may be stored in the RWM 53 as new data. As a result, in the segment data of digit 2, the value corresponding to segment DP becomes "1".

Further, as described above, the digits of the present embodiment are provided with a total of nine digits 1 to 9. Methods for lighting these digits include the following control.
The main control board 50 executes an "interrupt process" every 2.235 ms in parallel with the "(game progression) main process" which is a process that is repeated every game. In this interrupt processing, lighting control of the LED, drive control of the reel 31, transmission processing of external signals, and the like are performed. In this embodiment, dynamic lighting is performed for digits 1 to 9 by lighting one digit for each interrupt process. For example, only digit 1 is lit in the current interrupt process, and digit 2 is lit in the next interrupt process. By repeating this, one digit is lighted once in nine interrupt processes. In addition to such dynamic lighting, static lighting in which a signal line is connected for each digit may be performed.

Therefore, the segment data is changed as described above when the timing for lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 comes. After the change, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up when the lighting timing of the digit 2 comes due to interrupt processing.

In addition, the advantageous interval control means 69 activates the instruction function separately from the notification of the correct pressing order by the sub-control board 80 to be described later in the game in which the instruction function should be activated during the advantageous interval. The push order instruction information is displayed on the display LED 78 . For example, when a small winning combination B1 is won, the winning number display LED 78 displays the pressing order instruction information "=1" corresponding to the pressing order instruction number "A1". This control corresponds to "activation of the instruction function" in this embodiment.

The instruction function operation game during the advantageous section is
1) Non-RT and RT1: When a small win group C wins (When a small win group B win wins, it is desired to display the pattern pattern, so the instruction function is not activated.)
2) RT2: When replay group B wins, when minor win group B wins, and when minor win group C wins 3) RT3: When replay wins group C, when minor win group B wins, and when minor win group C wins .

Furthermore, as described above, when the minor winning combination A is won, the indicating function is operated as a dummy. When the small winning combination A is won, the small winning combination 01 is won regardless of the pressing order. shall not prejudice the fairness of
Specifically, when winning the small winning combination A, any one of the pushing order instruction numbers "A1" to "A3" may be selected by lottery using random numbers or the like.

Further, when the small winning combination E1 is won while the upper limit of the advantageous interval is approaching, the advantageous interval control means 69 selects the pushing order instruction number "A3" and displays the pushing order of right first stop. As a result, it is possible to prevent the middle stage cherry from appearing when the upper limit of the advantageous section is approaching.

In this embodiment, when the minor winning combination E1 is won in the advantageous interval, the advantageous interval is added, and when the minor winning combination E2 is won, the advantageous interval is not added. , showing the right first stop so that the middle cherry is not shown. In particular, when the small winning combination E1 is won in the advantageous interval, the advantageous interval is always added, so that the display of the cherry in the middle stage can give the player the impression that the advantageous interval is added. Therefore, when it is not desired to display the cherry in the middle row in a game in which the advantageous section is not added (when the small winning combination E2 is won), the right first stop is displayed.

In addition, for example, when the upper limit of the advantageous section is approaching (when the advantageous section cannot be added), in order to prevent the display of the cherry in the middle row, the winning of either the small winning combination E1 or the small winning combination E2 is performed. Also, by operating the indication function, the right first stop is displayed and the middle cherry is not displayed.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of games played in the advantageous section is set to "1500 games". For this reason, for example, when the number of games played from the start of the advantageous section reaches "1400 games" or more and the small winning combination E1 (and E2) is won, the right first stop is displayed by activating the instruction function. .
As described above, the "operation of the instruction function" in the present invention refers to the display of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 that is advantageous to the player. The display of the pressing order is also included in the "operation of the instruction function". Of course, the pressing order may be displayed only on the image display device 23 without including such a case in the "operation of the instruction function".

In the present embodiment, an advantageous interval counter 69a and an upper limit counter 69b are provided as counters for counting the number of games related to the advantageous interval (see FIG. 1).
The advantageous interval counter 69a sets an initial value of the number of games (for example, "100") determined at that time when it is decided to shift to the advantageous interval. Then, the count value is decremented each time one game is played, and when it becomes "0", the advantageous section is terminated. Incidentally, the decrementation may be performed from the game shifted to the advantageous section, or after the end of the 1BB game. Further, the advantageous interval counter 69a does not need to set the initial value of the number of games determined at that time (for example, "100") when it is decided to shift to the advantageous interval, and after the 1BB game ends, An initial value may be set.
Furthermore, when an advantageous section is added to an advantageous section, a value corresponding to the added value is added to the current count value of the advantageous section counter 69a.

For example, when the count value of the advantageous interval counter 69a is "55", it is decided to add an advantageous interval, and when the number of games added is "30", the count value is changed from "55" to " 85”. Then, each time one game is played, the number is decremented by one game, such as "84", "83", and so on.

In addition, when 1BBA is in operation (excluding those based on duplicate winning of 1BBA and small combination D), the counting by the advantageous section counter 69a is continued, but when 1BBB is in operation, the advantageous section counter 69a interrupts counting by The reason for this setting is that in this embodiment, during 1BBA operation (excluding those based on duplicate winning of 1BBA and small hand D), it is possible to add an advantageous section, but during 1BBB operation, the advantageous section is allowed to be added. Since the addition is not executed, the above setting is made in order to balance the two (so that the player is not more disadvantageous during 1BBB operation in the advantageous section than during 1BBBA operation). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous interval counter 69a may continue to count during either 1BBA or 1BBB operation, or the advantageous interval counter 69a may continue counting during either 1BBA or 1BBB operation. Counting by 69a may be interrupted.

On the other hand, after winning 1BBA or 1BBB during the advantageous interval, the counting by the advantageous interval counter 69a is continued until 1BBA or 1BBB is won respectively (inside). It should be noted that when 1BB is won or when it is notified that 1BB is won, the counting by the advantageous interval counter 69a may be interrupted at that time. Even if the counting by the advantageous interval counter 69a is interrupted when the 1BB is won, the number of remaining games in the advantageous interval displayed on the image display device 23 is displayed until the 1BB is announced. , may be decremented one game at a time.

In addition, there is a case where a condition device including 1BB is won in the normal section (such as duplicate winning of 1BBA and minor hand E1), and the transition to an advantageous section is made based on the winning of this condition device. In this case, the waiting section starts from the next game (limited to the case where the waiting section is provided), and the inside of 1BB.
On the other hand, when a conditional device including 1BB in the advantageous section is won, it is in the advantageous section and inside the 1BB, and the advantageous section is not added during the inside of the 1BB in the advantageous section.

Therefore, if you have won a conditional device that includes 1BB in the normal section and have not yet moved to the advantageous section due to the transition to the standby section, a longer fan effect (Notify whether or not you have won 1BB It is considered that outputting a continuous effect over a plurality of games, for example, is not so disadvantageous to the player. This is because the waiting section is not an advantageous section, so counting (decrementing) by the advantageous section counter 69a and counting (decrementing) by the upper limit counter 69b, which will be described later, are not performed.
On the other hand, if you win a condition device that includes 1BB in the advantageous section and become internal, even after becoming internal, the advantageous section counter 69a will continue to count (decrement) and the upper limit counter 69b will be described later. is counted (decremented). In this case, since an advantageous section cannot be added, it is preferable to promptly announce the winning of 1BB without performing an unnecessarily long fan effect.
Specifically, for example, the average number of games of the former fanning effect is set to 4 games, and the average number of games of the latter fanning effect is set to 2 games.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the small winning combination E1 is won singly, and it is determined to shift to the advantageous section in which the instruction function is activated when the minor winning group B is won once, the advantageous section counter 69a counts. Don't set the value. In this case, regardless of the count value of the advantageous interval counter 69a, the advantageous interval continues until the minor combination B group is won. Then, when the minor winning group B is won and the instruction function is activated, it is determined that the condition for ending the advantageous interval in the current game is satisfied, and the advantageous interval is terminated.

When the number of operations of the instruction function at the time of winning the small winning group B is provided in advance as the end condition of the advantageous interval, a counter (decrement counter) for counting the number of games at the time of winning the small winning group B is provided, and this counter is used. May be set to "1". Then, when the instruction function is activated once when the small winning group B is won, the count value becomes "0", and it can be determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied.

By providing something like an advantageous section flag and setting it to "ON" during the advantageous section, it is possible to determine whether or not the current game is in the advantageous section.
However, in this embodiment, the 8th bit in the segment data of digit 2 plays the role of the advantageous section flag. As described above, when it is determined that the condition for ending the advantageous interval is satisfied in the current game, or when the count value of the advantageous interval counter 69a becomes "0", the eighth bit in the segment data of the digit 2 is "0". ” is executed.

In addition, when it is decided to win the small winning combination E1 alone and to shift to the advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section with a fixed number of games, or by activating the instruction function at the time of winning one small winning combination B group. A lottery will be held to decide whether to transition to an advantageous section (so-called fake advantageous section) that will end. Here, it is arbitrary how to allocate probabilities between the former and the latter.

Then, for example, when it is decided to win the small winning combination E1 alone and shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, and an effect is output to encourage which advantageous section the shift has been made. (The game may be continued until the small win group B is won). Next, when a small win group B is won, after activating the instruction function in the game, if it is an advantageous section that ends with one operation of the instruction function, the advantageous section ends with this game (advantageous section) section display LED 77 is turned off). On the other hand, when transitioning to the advantageous interval for the predetermined number of games, the advantageous interval is continued after the next game (the advantageous interval display LED 77 is kept lit).
In the above example, it is assumed that the small win group B is won before the predetermined number of games has been reached from the start of the advantageous section.

In addition, the upper limit counter 69b always starts counting when the advantageous interval starts (sets "1500" when it is decided to shift to the advantageous interval or at the start of the advantageous interval). The count value is decremented by "1" for each game without interrupting the count until the interval ends. Also, for example, the count is continued even during 1BB operation. This point is different from the advantageous section counter 69a. Note that the advantageous interval counter 69a and the upper limit counter 69b may increment the count value by "1" from "0" for each game.

Then, when the value of the upper limit counter 69b becomes "0", the advantageous interval control means 69 controls the advantageous interval in the game this time ( (the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a is updated to "0"), and the advantageous section display LED 77 is extinguished (the 8th bit in the segment data of digit 2 is updated to "0"). Thus, the count value of the upper limit counter 69b has the highest priority in the advantageous interval, and when the count value of the upper limit counter 69b becomes "0", the advantageous interval ends even if 1BB is in operation.

Also, during the advantageous section, it is necessary to execute at least one instruction function activation game in which the number of payouts is 9 (the maximum number of payouts with the prescribed number of 3). Therefore, in the advantageous section, it is necessary to execute the instruction function activating game at least once when the small winning combination B group is won. Even if the instruction function activating game is not executed when the group is won, or even if the small win group B is not won even once, the advantageous interval is (forcibly) ended in the current game and the advantageous interval display LED 77 is displayed. turn off the
Also, the number of remaining games or the number of completed games may be displayed on the image display device 23 by referring to the values of the advantageous interval counter 69a and the upper limit counter 69b.

In FIG. 1, the external signal transmission means 70 transmits an external signal to the external centralized terminal board 100 . This external signal is a signal indicating the start of the advantageous section, the end of the advantageous section, the start of the 1BB operation, the end of the 1BB operation, or the like.
The main control board 50 executes a game end check process every game, and updates the external signal control number at the time of the game end check process.
The "external signal control number" in this embodiment is a number that takes a different value according to the start of the advantageous section, the end of the advantageous section, the start of 1BB operation, and the end of 1BB operation.

Also, when the start switch 41 is operated, the external signal flag is updated so as to have a value corresponding to the external signal control number. After updating the external signal flag, the external signal transmitting means 70 transmits the external signal corresponding to the external signal flag from the output port 52 . When this external signal is input to the external common terminal board 100 , it is transmitted to the hall computer 200 . The external signal is then output to, for example, a data counter.

The control command transmitting means 71 transmits information (control commands) necessary for the effects output by the sub-control board 80 to the sub-control board 80 .
A control command consists of, for example, a first control command and a second control command. Both the first control command and the second control command are, for example, 8-bit 1-byte data. One control command is a pair of the first control command and the second control command. Furthermore, the first control command is data indicating the type of control command, and the second control command is data indicating a parameter (variable).

For example, if the control command indicates RT, the first control command is "33 (H)" (00110011 (B)) in this embodiment. Also, the parameter of RT is "00000001 (B)" in this embodiment when it is RT1, for example. Therefore, the 2-byte data "00110011/00000001"("/" indicates the space between the first control command and the second control command and is not actually present) is the RT control command. , is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 .
As for the pressing order instruction number (only during the advantageous section), the performance group number, and the accessory condition device number, the first control command is the type data, and the second control command is RWM53 is the data stored in

Note that the control command transmitting means 71 does not transmit the winning and replay condition device numbers to the sub-control board 80 . This is because, for example, when winning the push order bell, there is a risk that the correct push order will be known based on the winning and replay conditions device number due to fraudulent activity. On the other hand, there is no risk of fraudulent activity as described above with respect to the accessory condition device number. Therefore, for example, when 1BBA is won, the accessory condition device number “1” is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 .

Further, when a conditional device having a correct pressing order is won during an advantageous section, a pressing order instruction number corresponding to the correct pressing order is acquired and stored in the RWM 53 . On the other hand, when winning a conditional device that does not have a correct pressing order in an advantageous section, acquisition of the pressing order instruction number and storage in the RWM 53 are not performed. Here, at the start of each game, the data of the pressing order instruction number of the RWM 53 is cleared, but the data after clearing is "A0". Therefore, the data of the pressing order instruction number of the RWM 53 is "A0" except when the conditional device having the correct pressing order is won in the advantageous section.
Further, during the normal section or the standby section, even if a conditional device having the correct pushing order is won, the pushing order instruction number is neither acquired nor stored in the RWM 53 .

Then, when the conditional device having the correct pressing order is won during the advantageous section, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits the pressing order instruction number to the sub-control board 80 .
Also, except when a conditional device having a correct pressing order is won in an advantageous section, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits information of "A0" as a pressing order instruction number.
Furthermore, the control command transmitting means 71 does not transmit the pushing order instruction number to the sub-control board 80 when it is not in the advantageous section. It is conceivable that the control command transmitting means 71 uniformly transmits the pressing order instruction number of "A0" when it is not in the advantageous section. The number is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80. FIG.

In FIG. 1 , the sub CPU 85 of the sub control board 80 is provided with effect output control means 91 .
As described above, the effect output control means 91 controls each control command transmitted from the main control board 50, specifically, the RT number, the pushing order instruction number, the effect group number, the accessory condition device number, and the like. Based on the command, at what timing (when the start switch 41 is operated, when each stop switch 42 is operated, etc.), what kind of effect is output (how the lamp 21 is lit, blinked or extinguished) , what kind of sound is to be output from the speaker 22, what kind of image is to be displayed on the image display device 23, etc.) are determined by lottery.

Then, the effect output control means 91 controls outputs of the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23 according to the determination. In addition, during the 1BB operation or during the advantageous section, the obtained number, the number of games played (the number of remaining games or the number of completed games), etc. are displayed as images. Furthermore, during the advantageous section, when the instruction function is activated, the correct pressing order is notified (image display). For example, when winning a small winning combination B1 in a game in an advantageous section and receiving a control command corresponding to the pressing order instruction number "A1", the correct pressing order "left first stop" or "1-○" is received. −○”, etc., which allows the player to easily know the order of pressing the correct answer. It should be noted that when the pressing order instruction number of "A0" is received during the advantageous section, the pressing order is not notified.

Furthermore, the control command for the effect group number does not contain information about which condition device is actually won, but it can be said that it contains rough winning information. For example, when a control command corresponding to the performance group number "5" is received, the sub-control board 80 side cannot know which of the small winning combination A, the small winning combination group B, or the small winning combination group C is won. . However, it is possible to know whether any of the small winning combination A, the small winning group B, or the small winning group C is won. Therefore, it is possible to output effects such as displaying a "bell" pattern or lighting a frame lamp in "yellow" corresponding to "bell".

Here, when the small winning combination A is won, the small winning combination 01 always wins regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is operated, so immediately after the start switch 41 is operated, that is, the first stop switch It is possible to perform a bell (yellow) effect before is operated.
On the other hand, when winning the small win group B or small win group C during the normal section, the bell (yellow) effect can be performed at the time when the winning of the small win 01 is confirmed, that is, after the first stop switch 42 is operated. preferable. Of course, it may be after operating the second stop switch 42 or after operating the third stop switch 42 .

However, if there is a difference between the output timing of the effect when the minor win A is won and the output timing of the effect when the minor win group B or the minor win group C is won, based on the difference in timing, the minor win A will be displayed. Since it is possible to determine whether the player wins or wins the small winning combination B group or the small winning combination C group, the number of winning times of the small winning combination A can be counted, and the set value can be estimated.
Therefore, when the small winning combination A is won in the normal section, the output of the bell effect is started at the same timing as when the pressing order is correct when the small winning group B or the small winning group C is won, for example, immediately after the first stop switch 42 is operated. By doing so, it is possible to make it impossible to determine which of the small winning combination A, the small winning combination group B, or the small winning combination group C is won. In particular, in this embodiment, when winning any of the small win A, the small win group B, or the small win group C, a control command corresponding to the same effect group number "5" is transmitted. . In this way, the effect group numbers of the small win A, the small win group B, and the small win group C are set to be the same ("5"), and the sub-control board 80 that receives the effect group number operates, for example, the first stop switch. If it is designed so that the effect is output at the timing immediately after the operation of 42, the effect group numbers of the small win A, the small win group B, and the small win group C are set to be different ("5" to "7"). (In the latter case, when any of the effect group numbers "5" to "7" is received, the effect is output at the timing immediately after the first stop switch 42 is operated, for example. It is inefficient because it must be designed to

24 and 25 show the timing of transmitting the control command for the push order instruction number, effect group number, and accessory condition device number, and the display of the push order instruction information by the acquisition number display LED 78 (operation of the instruction function (operation of the instruction function on the main side). )), and notification of the order of pressing the correct answer by the image display device 23 (notification on the sub-side). 24 and 25 show four examples 1 to 4. FIG.
In FIGS. 24 and 25, first, when the player operates the start switch 41, the combination lottery means 61 draws a lottery for the condition device, and the effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device is determined. Also, when it is in the advantageous section, the pushing order instruction number corresponding to the winning condition device is determined.

Furthermore, the main control board 50 transmits to the sub-control board 80 a control command for the pressing order instruction number (only during the advantageous section), the performance group number, and the accessory condition device number. The sub-control board 80 notifies the correct pushing order based on the received pushing order instruction number when it is in the advantageous section. On the other hand, the main control board 50 displays the push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number by operating the instruction function during the advantageous section.

In "Example 1" of FIG. 24, when the pressing order instruction number is determined, first, the pressing order instruction information is displayed by operating the instruction function of the main control board 50. FIG. After that, the pushing order instruction number is transmitted, and then the production group number and the accessory condition device number are transmitted. Next, when the accessory condition device number is received, the sub-control board 80 determines that the start switch 41 has been operated, and notifies the correct pressing order based on the received pressing order instruction number. Both the display of the pressing order instruction information and the notification of the correct pressing order are performed until the reel 31 reaches a constant rotation speed.

Further, when the correct pressing order is the so-called three options (first stop) as in the present embodiment, the correct pressing order is notified by the image display device 23 when the first (first) stop switch 42 is operated. Until On the other hand, for example, when the correct pressing order is the so-called 6 choices, the image display device 23 notifies the correct pressing order until the third (last) stop switch 42 is operated. Even if the correct pressing order is the so-called three options as in the present embodiment, the correct pressing order may of course continue to be notified until the third (last) stop switch 42 is operated. be.

In this embodiment, when the first stop switch 42 is operated, the control command is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 as described above, so the sub control board 80 receives this control command. Thus, it can be determined that the first stop switch 42 has been operated. Then, when the first stop switch 42 is operated, the image display device 23 terminates the notification of the correct pressing order. Of course, effects other than the order of correct keystrokes, such as image display (character display, etc.) peculiar to the advantageous section, can be continued.

Furthermore, the display of the pressing order instruction information by the winning number display LED 78 is until the main control board 50 determines the winning. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the correct pressing order has three options as in the present embodiment, the pressing order instruction information may be displayed until the first stop switch 42 is operated.
After the push order instruction information is displayed, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is "00" (higher digits and lower digits display "0"), "*0" (higher digits are extinguished (*), lower digits are "0" is displayed), "**" (higher and lower digits are turned off), and "--" (only segment G is turned on for both upper and lower digits).

In "example 2" of FIG. 24, after the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number to the sub control board 80, the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 by operating the instruction function, and then the effect group Send the number and accessory condition device number. The sub-control board 80 notifies the correct pressing order after receiving the performance group number and the accessory condition device number.

In addition, in "Example 3" of FIG. After that, at the moment (or just before) when the reel 31 rotates at a constant speed, the main control board 50 operates the instruction function to display the pushing order instruction information. In Examples 1 and 2 above, the operation of the instruction function (display of the pressing order instruction information) by the main control board 50 is performed at an earlier timing than the notification of the correct pressing order by the sub control board 80. . On the other hand, in Example 3, the notification of the correct pressing order by the sub-control board 80 is performed at an earlier timing than the activation of the instruction function (display of the pressing order instruction information) by the main control board 50 .

In "Example 4" of FIG. 25, the main control board 50 operates the instruction function (display of the pressing order instruction information) and the sub-control board 80 notifies the correct pressing order at almost the same timing. . When controlling in this way, for example, the instruction function is activated after "N" ms has passed since the main control board 50 sent the push order instruction number or the accessory condition device number to the sub control board 80 (press order instruction The sub-control board 80 controls to start reporting the correct pressing order after 'N' ms has elapsed after receiving the pressing order instruction number or the accessory condition device number. Things are mentioned.

Although four examples are shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, it is preferable that the operation of the instruction function (display of the push order instruction information) is performed after the start switch 41 is operated and before the reel 31 rotates at a constant speed. . Further, it is preferable that the sub-control board 80 side performs the pressing order notification after the operation of the instruction function by the main control board 50 side. By setting in this way, when the main control board 50 transmits an incorrect pressing order instruction number to the sub-control board 80, the sub-control board 80 notifies a pressing order different from the received pressing order instruction number. Even if this is the case, since the main control board 80 has already displayed the push order instruction information, the player will not notice the error in the information given by the sub control board 80, and the player will not suffer any disadvantages. Absent.
Also, the operation of the instruction function (display of the push order instruction information) by the main control board 50 is performed until the winning judgment is made, but it may be performed until the third reel 31 stops.

Next, a more specific description will be given of the operation of the instruction function (display of the pressing order instruction information) and the notification of the correct pressing order. FIG. 26 is a diagram for explaining the flow of the game (flow from top to bottom in the figure), the display of the winning number display LED 78, and the notification example of the image display device 23. In FIG. Note that the example in FIG. 26 is timing corresponding to “Example 1” in FIG. 24 .

In the instruction function activation game during the advantageous section, first, when the start switch 41 is operated, the main control board 50 activates the instruction function and displays the pressing order instruction information on the winning number display LED 78 . The example of FIG. 26 shows an example of winning a small winning combination B1. Therefore, the acquired number display LED 78 displays the pressing order instruction information corresponding to the pressing order instruction number "A1", that is, "=1".
Then, before the reel 31 reaches a constant rotation speed, the image display device 23 notifies the correct pressing order. The example of FIG. 26 shows an example of displaying "1 ◯◯".

Next, when the first (first) stop switch 42 is operated and the left stop switch 42 is operated, that is, when the correct pressing order is selected, the image display device 23 displays the correct pressing order. is output (correct answer). On the other hand, when the pressing order is incorrect, the image display of the correct pressing order is erased.
In this embodiment, the correct/incorrect pressing order is determined by the operation of the first stop switch 42. Therefore, when the first stop switch 42 is operated, the notification (image display) regarding the correct pressing order is ended. When there are 6 options, the correct pressing order is continuously notified until the second stop switch 42 is operated or the third stop switch 42 is operated.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 26, the operation of the instruction function (the display of the pushing order instruction information) continues until the winning determination is made (the same applies to example 1 of FIG. 24). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the incorrect answer pressing order is reached, the operation of the instruction function (the display of the acquired number display LED 78) may be terminated in the same manner as the notification of the correct answer pressing order by the image display device 23. . Further, as in the present embodiment, when the correct pressing order has three options, when the first stop switch 42 is operated, the instruction is given (even if the first stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order). Activation of the function may be terminated.

However, it is desirable to end the operation of the instruction function after stopping the notification by the image display device 23 . This is to avoid notification of the pressing order on the sub-control board 80 side even though the instruction function is not activated on the main control board 50 side. However, of course, the operation of the instruction function may be terminated at the same time as the notification by the image display device 23 is terminated, or the operation of the instruction function may be terminated before the notification by the image display device 23 is terminated.

It goes without saying that even if the pressing order is incorrect, the image display device 23 may continue to notify the correct pressing order.
However, if the notification of the pressing order by the image display device 23 is stopped when the pressing order is incorrect, it is possible to switch to another effect.

When all the reels 31 stop, winning determination is performed. Here, when the minor win 01 wins and 9 medals are paid out, the display of the winning number display LED 78 indicates that 9 medals have been paid out from the display of the pressing order instruction information "=1". changes to "09" shown. When a one-card winning combination is won due to an error in the pressing order or the like, "01" is displayed, and "00" (or "**") is displayed when the winning combination is lost. In addition, from the display of the push order instruction information "=1" to the display of the number of medals to be paid out "09", "=1" → "00" (in order to reset the display, "00" is displayed) )→“09” may be displayed.

Alternatively, it may be displayed as "=1"→"**" (higher digits and lower digits are extinguished to temporarily reset the display)→"09".
Further, when the player operates the bet switch 40 or inserts the medals and bets the medals, the display content is changed to "00" in order to clear the content of the winning number displayed on the winning number display LED 78. ("**" may be used).

In FIG. 1, the management information control means 72 is means for controlling (storing, calculating, displaying, etc.) the management information displayed on the management information display LED 74 .
In this embodiment, the information to be displayed on the management information display LED 74 is
(1) Advantageous section ratio (cumulative)
(2) Consecutive accessories ratio (6000 games (total of 15 sets))
(3) Accessory ratio (6000 games (total of 15 sets))
(4) Consecutive accessories ratio (cumulative)
(5) Accessory ratio (cumulative)
(see FIG. 38 described later).

First, the “advantageous section ratio (advantageous section stay rate)” is the ratio of advantageous sections to all game sections (normal section + waiting section + advantageous section). percentage). For example, in a game section with the number of games played "10000", when the number of games played in the advantageous section is "7000", the advantageous section ratio is "70(%)".
Also, in this embodiment, one set is defined as "400" games. Then, the total of 15 sets, that is, the number of "6000" games is set as the "total", and each ratio at the number of "6000" games is calculated.

Furthermore, the "cumulative total" refers to the total sum of the numbers that have been counted up to that point, and in the present embodiment, the count is aimed at reaching at least "175000" games. When the total number of games is less than "175000", the total value is displayed by, for example, blinking display, and when the number of games is more than "175000", the total value is displayed by, for example, lighting display. Even after the cumulative number of games reaches "175000" or more, the cumulative total continues to be added until it reaches a value (upper limit) that can be stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53 .

"Continuous accessory ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of won medals when the first class special accessory (RB) is activated to the total number of won medals. Therefore, in this embodiment, "refers to the number of medals obtained during 1BB operation with respect to the total number of medals obtained.
For example, when the number of medals obtained in the number of games played is "6000" is "2000", and the number of medals obtained when the "first class special bonus (RB)" is activated is "500", "continuous role Product ratio (6000 games)” becomes “25 (%)”.

In addition, the "accessory ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of medals obtained when the accessory is activated to the total number of medals obtained. Here, the "accessories" are, in addition to the above-mentioned first-class special accessories, second-class special accessories (CB), 2BB (second-class continuous operation device, CB is continuously operated), SB (single bonus) is included.
In this embodiment, since CB, 2BB, and SB are not provided, the character ratio is the same value as the continuous character ratio.

27 to 31 (FIG. 31 shows a modified example of FIG. 29) are diagrams showing a partial storage area of the RWM 53 controlled by the management information control means 72. FIG. In the figure, a four-digit numerical value beginning with "F" indicates the address of the RWM 53. FIG. A 1-byte (8-bit) data buffer (storage area) is provided for each address.

First, FIG. 27 shows a buffer for storing data relating to advantageous sections. As information on the advantageous interval, there are three storage areas of advantageous interval game count corresponding value, total game count, and advantageous interval ratio. The storage area for the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section is 4 bytes ("F004" to "F001"), the storage area for the total number of games is 3 bytes ("F007" to "F005"), and the advantageous section ratio is 1 byte ("F008").

In this embodiment, the total number of games played is updated so that the value of the total number of games played is incremented by "1" each time one game is completed.
On the other hand, during the advantageous interval, every time one game is played, the value obtained by multiplying the value of the number of games played in the advantageous interval by 100 (referred to as "value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous interval") is updated. Therefore, a 3-byte storage area is provided for the total number of games played, and a 4-byte storage area is provided for the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section.

This embodiment aims to store at least "175000" times or more as the total number of games played. This is for displaying the advantageous section ratio, the continuous role ratio, and the role ratio when the total number of games played is "175000" or more.
Here, since "175000 (D)" has "18" digits in binary, it can be stored in 3 bytes of "24" digits.

In addition, when it is assumed that all of the total number of games played "175000 (D)" is an advantageous section, the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section is "175000 x 100" (D), which in binary is "25 digits , 3 bytes of "24" digits are insufficient, but 4 bytes of "32" digits can be stored.
For the above reasons, the storage area for the total number of games is 3 bytes, and the storage area for the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section is 4 bytes.

As for the total number of games played, "1" is added for each game. good too.
On the other hand, since the maximum value of the advantageous section ratio is "100 (D)", the value is "7" digits in binary, and can be stored with a storage capacity of 1 byte.

The total number of games is updated every game, and when the 3-byte storage area reaches the upper limit (3 bytes full, that is, "FFFFFF (H)", about 16,780,000 in decimal), that At this point, the count is terminated, and the number of games played is not updated from the next game.
The value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section is incremented by "+100" for each game played during the advantageous section. It is possible to count up to Then, when the counting of the total number of games is finished, the counting of the value corresponding to the number of games in the advantageous section is also finished.

The advantageous interval ratio is a value calculated by "advantageous interval game number corresponding value/total number of games played" (actually subtracted, not divided, as will be described later). Since the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous interval is a value obtained by multiplying the number of games played in the advantageous interval by 100, the ratio itself can be calculated by the above calculation. The main CPU 55 of this embodiment uses an assembler, cannot handle a decimal point, and cannot perform division using a value exceeding 2 bytes. It is possible to calculate by
Also, the advantageous section ratio is stored as an integer in this embodiment, and rounded down to the decimal point. For example, when the total number of games played is "1100 (D)" and the advantageous section game number corresponding value is "56000 (D)", the advantageous section ratio is "50 (D)", and "F008" contains " 00110010(B)” is stored.

In addition, the advantageous interval ratio can be updated for each game, but for example, when there is a request to display the advantageous interval ratio, the advantageous interval ratio is calculated from the advantageous interval game number corresponding value and the total game number, It may be stored in "F008". Then, a decimal value based on the value stored in "F008" is displayed as the advantageous section ratio.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a buffer for storing data regarding the total number of payouts. When medals are paid out by winning a small winning combination, the value stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 is updated.
As shown in FIG. 28, a ring buffer is provided with 15 storage areas (01 set to 15 sets) consisting of 2-byte data (for example, "F012 (upper digit)" and "F011 (lower digit)").
Each 2-byte data stores the number of payouts for 400 games. For example, when a 9-card combination is won and 9 coins are paid out, "9 (D)" is added to the total number of payouts.
Here, in slot machines under regulations, the maximum number of payouts in one game is set to be "15" or less. becomes. Since "6000 (D)" has 13 digits in binary, it can be stored in 2 bytes (16 digits).

Furthermore, from the 1st game to the 400th game, when there is a payout, the number of payouts is stored in the 01st set ("F012" and "F011"). From the next 401st game to the 800th game, the number of payouts is stored in the 02nd set (“F014” and “F013”).
In this way, 400 games are treated as one set, and values are stored in different buffers for each set.

In addition, a storage area (3 bytes) for the total number of payouts for 15 sets (6000 games) is provided (“F031” to “F02F” in FIG. 28). This storage area is for storing 15 sets, that is, the total number of payouts for 6000 games.
Assuming that 15 coins have been paid out in all 6000 games, it is necessary to store the value up to "90000 (D)". It can be stored in 3 bytes (24 digits).

For example, up to the first 15th set, the total number of payouts for the number of games played less than 6000 games is stored in "F031" to "F02F".
Then, when the 6000th game is reached, the number of payouts for the number of 400 games is stored in all the buffers of the 01st set to the 15th set (each 2 bytes), so the total number of payouts for the total of 15 sets (6000 games) is also stored. Moreover, it becomes the total value for 6000 games.
Next, when the game shifts to the 6001st game, the 01st set of 2-byte data ("F012" and "F011") is cleared, and the total number of payouts from the 6001st game to the 6400th game is stored in this buffer. go. From the 6000th game to the 6399th game, the total number of payouts (3-byte data) for the total of 15 sets is maintained without change.

Then, at the 6400th game, when the addition to the 01st set of 2-byte data is completed, the total number of payouts for 15 sets is calculated (each 2-byte data from the 01st set to the 15th set is added), The calculated total payout number for the 15 sets is updated.
After the 6401st game, the 2-byte data ("F014" and "F013") of the 02nd set are cleared in the same manner as described above when moving to the 6401st game. The total number of payouts up to is stored.
In the above method, the total number of payouts for the 15 sets is updated every 400 games. You can update it to that value.

The total payout number (total) (“F034” to “F032”) is a 3-byte storage area for storing the total number of payouts. The reason why the total number of payouts is obtained is to calculate each ratio (continuous role product operation ratio, etc., which will be described later) when 175,000 games or more are played. However, this cumulative number of payouts continues to be stored even after 175000 games have been played, and when the storage capacity of 3 bytes reaches the upper limit (3 bytes full), updating is terminated.
Assuming that 15 medals are paid out for each game played 175,000 times, the binary number is 22 digits, which can be stored with a storage capacity of 3 bytes.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a buffer in the RWM 53 that stores data regarding the number of payouts related to the continuous bonus.
As shown in FIG. 29, a ring buffer is provided with 15 storage areas each consisting of 3-byte data (for example, the 01st set is "F043 (most significant digit)" to "F041 (least significant digit)"). .

Each 3-byte data stores a value obtained by multiplying the payout number of medals by 100 (referred to as "payout number corresponding value") at the time of continuous accessory operation. For example, when a 10-card hand is won and 10 coins are paid out when a continuous role product is activated, "+1000" is added as the value corresponding to the number of payouts.
The reason for storing the value multiplied by 100 instead of the value of the number of payouts itself is the same as the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous zone. This is for the purpose of calculating

Further, each 3-byte data stores a value corresponding to the number of payouts for continuous accessory operation for 400 games. Specifically, from the 1st game to the 400th game, when there is a payout number at the time of continuous accessory operation, the payout number corresponding value is stored in the 01st set ("F043" to "F041"). do. From the next 401st game to 800th game, the payout number corresponding value is stored in the 02nd set (“F046” to “F044”).
In this way, 400 games are treated as one set, and values are stored in different buffers for each set.
Assuming that 15 medals are paid out every game in 400 consecutive games, the value corresponding to the number of payouts is "600000 (D)". can be stored in

In addition, a storage area (3 bytes) is provided for a value corresponding to the number of payouts during continuous accessory activation for a total of 15 sets (6000 games) (“F070” to “F06E”). This storage area is a storage area for storing 15 sets, that is, values corresponding to the number of payouts for 6000 games.
In addition, assuming that 15 medals are paid out every game in 6000 games, the value corresponding to the number of payouts is "9000000 (D)". Memorable.

For example, up to the first 15th set, "F070" to "F06E" store the value corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of continuous accessory activation in the number of games played less than 6000 games. Then, when the 6000th game is reached, the values corresponding to the number of payouts for the 400th game are stored in all the buffers of the 01st set to the 15th set (3 bytes each). In addition, the value corresponding to the number of payouts during continuous accessory activation for the total of 15 sets (6000 games) is the total value for 6000 games.
Then, when it shifts to the 6001st game, the 01st set of 3-byte data ("F043" to "F041") is cleared, and the number of payouts from the 6001st game to the 6400th game is stored in this buffer when the continuous accessory is activated. The corresponding values are stored. It should be noted that, from the 6000th game to the 6399th game, the value corresponding to the payout number at the time of continuous accessory activation for the total of 15 sets is maintained without being changed.

Then, when the 6400th game is reached and the 3-byte data of the 01st set is confirmed, the value corresponding to the number of payouts when the continuous role product is activated for the total of 15 sets is calculated (Each 3-byte data from the 01st set to the 15th set is calculated. addition), and updates the value corresponding to the payout number at the time of continuous accessory activation for the total of the calculated 15 sets.

After the 6401st game, the 3-byte data ("F046" to "F044") of the 02nd set is cleared in the same manner as above when the game is shifted to the 6401st game, and the 6401st game to the 6800th game are stored in this buffer. 3-byte data of the 02nd set is updated until
In the above method, the value corresponding to the number of payouts during continuous accessory activation for the total of 15 sets is updated every 400 games. The value corresponding to the number of payouts when the accessory is activated may be calculated and updated.

The accumulated value corresponding to the number of payouts during continuous accessory activation (“F074” to “F071”) is a storage area for storing the cumulative total of the corresponding value for the number of payouts during continuous accessory activation. is for calculating the continuous accessory actuation ratio when the number of games played is 175,000 or more. However, the accumulated value corresponding to the payout number at the time of continuous accessory activation continues to be stored even after 175,000 games have been played, and updating is terminated when the storage capacity of 4 bytes reaches the upper limit (4 bytes full).
Assuming that 15 medals continue to be paid out every game, "1500 (D)" continues to be added every game, so with 4 bytes, it is possible to store up to about 2.86 million games.

In addition, the continuous bonus action ratio (6000 games) ("F075") is "value corresponding to the number of payouts during continuous bonus action in 6000 games ("F070" to "F06E")/total number of payouts in 6000 games (Fig. 28 This is a buffer that stores the values of "F031" to "F02F" in the middle.

In addition, the continuous bonus action ratio (cumulative) ("F076") is "cumulative value corresponding to the number of payouts during continuous bonus action ("F074" to "F071")/cumulative total payout number (in FIG. 28, "F034 ” to “F032”).
The above ratio can be stored in 1 byte since the maximum decimal value "100 (D)" is stored.
It should be noted that the continuous role product operation ratio (6000 games) and the continuous role product operation ratio (total) can be updated every game, but for example, calculation is performed when there is a display request for these ratios. , the calculation result may be stored in each storage area ("F075" or "F076") and the value thereof may be displayed.

FIG. 30 shows a buffer in the RWM 53 that stores data relating to the number of payouts of the bonus. As is clear from a comparison between FIG. 30 and FIG. 29, a buffer for storing the value corresponding to the number of paid-out symbols is provided in the same manner as the buffer for storing the corresponding value corresponding to the number of paid-out symbols. The buffer for storing the value corresponding to the number of paid-out bonuses and the like has the same configuration as the buffer for storing the corresponding value for the number of consecutive bonuses to be paid-out.

That is, for every 400 games, a storage area for 15 sets capable of storing each 3-byte data as a payout number corresponding value when the accessory is activated and a payout number corresponding value when the accessory is activated for a total of 6000 games (15 sets) are stored. It has a 3-byte buffer for storing and a 4-byte buffer for storing the total payout number corresponding value at the time of operation of the accessory. Further, as a buffer (1 byte) for storing the role product operation ratio, there are two types, one for 6000 games and one for cumulative total.
Since the method of storing these data in each buffer is the same as when the continuous role product is operated, the explanation is omitted.

Incidentally, since the continuous role corresponds to 1BB (including RB) in this embodiment, when medals are paid out during 1BB operation, it is stored in the value corresponding to the number of payouts during continuous role operation shown in FIG.
When medals are paid out during the operation of all the accessories including the continuous accessories, the accessory is stored in the value corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of accessory activation shown in FIG.
Here, in this embodiment, only 1BB (and RB), which is a continuous role, is provided as the role, so in such a case, the value stored in the buffer shown in FIG. is the same value as the value stored in the buffer shown in .

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a modified example of the ring buffer, and this example shows a modified example of FIG.
In FIG. 29, a ring buffer consisting of 3 bytes each for the 01st set to the 15th set is provided, and the total value of 15 sets is stored.
On the other hand, the example of FIG. 31 is similar to FIG. 29 in that the total value of 15 sets is calculated, but 16 sets are provided as a ring buffer.

In FIG. 31, from the 1st game to the 6000th game, the values corresponding to the number of payouts are stored in each of the 3 bytes of the 01st set to the 15th set, which is the same as in FIG.
Here, when the value corresponding to the total number of payouts from the 1st game to the 6000th game is to be calculated, each 3-byte data of the 01st set to the 15th set is added.

Next, the values corresponding to the number of payouts from the 6001st game to the 6400th game are stored in the 16th set of 3-byte buffers (“F070” to “F06E”).
Then, when it comes to the 6401th game, the 01st set of 3-byte data ("F043" to "F041") is cleared, and the value corresponding to the number of payouts from the 6401st game to the 6800th game is changed to the 01st set of 3-byte data. I will remember.

When calculating the payout number corresponding value for the total of 6000 games (15 sets) between the 6401st game and the 6800th game, each 3-byte data of the 02nd set to the 16th set is added.
Furthermore, when the 6800th game is reached, when calculating the payout number corresponding value for the total of 6000 games (15 sets), each 3-byte data of the 1st set to the 15th set is added.
In this way, one of the 16 sets of 3-byte buffers is used as the 3-byte buffer currently being updated, and the other 15 sets of 3-byte buffers are used to calculate the payout number corresponding value for the total of 15 sets. Used when

The data stored in the storage area of the RWM 53 shown in FIGS. 27 to 30 are not initialized only by turning on/off the power switch 11, but are maintained.
Further, even when the predetermined storage area is initialized (at the time of RAM clearing) at the time of setting change, the storage area of the RWM 53 shown in FIGS. be. Here, in order to shift to the setting change mode, it is necessary to turn on the power switch 11 under the condition that the setting key switch 12 is turned on (rotated to the right by 90 degrees) while the power switch 11 is off. can be migrated. Further, the initialization of the predetermined storage area at the time of setting change is executed before the setting value becomes changeable (setting change mode) based on the operation of the setting switch 13 .

However, if an unrecoverable error occurs, the above data will be initialized when the error is recovered. On the other hand, when a recoverable error occurs, the data is maintained without being initialized.
Here, the "unrecoverable error" refers to a serious error that cannot be recovered unless the power is turned off and the operation for shifting to the setting change mode described above is performed. for example,
1) If the read setting value is not within the range of setting 1 to 6 (setting value error),
2) When a symbol that should not be displayed (kicking away symbol) is displayed as a result of judging the stop symbol (abnormal symbol combination error),
3) random number update abnormality determined for each interrupt process;
4) When power failure recovery data is not a normal value.

When an unrecoverable error occurs, the power switch 11 is turned off, the setting key is inserted and rotated clockwise by 90 degrees to turn on the setting key switch 12, and then the power switch 11 is turned on. As a result, a predetermined range of the RWM 53 (data in each buffer in FIGS. 27 to 30, set value information, RT information, winning condition device information) is cleared. Then, the setting value is set, and if there is no other error, the recovery process is performed.

On the other hand, a “recoverable error” refers to an error that can be recovered without turning on/off the power switch 11 . For example, medal clogging error, medal retention error, medal illegal passage error, path sensor 43a abnormality, insertion sensor 44 abnormality, payout sensor 37 abnormality, medal abnormal insertion error, and the like can be cited.
When a recoverable error occurs, the contents of the error are displayed and the main processing is stopped. However, if the hall clerk executes an error cancellation operation (removes the error factor) and operates the reset switch 14, the error is canceled. If it is determined that the error has been resolved, the process is resumed.

Next, the processing for updating the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section and the total number of games played will be described. In the flowcharts of FIGS. 32 to 37 below, the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section is abbreviated as "value corresponding to the advantageous section".
FIG. 32 is an example of updating the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section and the total number of games played using a register. 33 is a flow chart showing a specific example 1 of the part surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. 32, FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing a specific example 2 of the part surrounded by the dotted line, and FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a specific example 3 of a part; Also, FIG. 36 is an example of updating the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section and the total number of games played without using a register.

FIG. 32 is executed every game, for example, at the end of the game. In the method using registers, the chip of this embodiment can use the A, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers (seven registers) at the time of calculation. In particular, the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section (“F004” to “F001”) is 4 bytes, and the total number of games played (“F007” to “F005”) is 3 bytes. The number of registers matches the number of bytes.

In FIG. 32, in step S101, the upper 1 byte of the total number of games played (data of "F007" in FIG. 27) is set in the A register. In the next step S102, the lower two bytes of the total number of games played (data "F006" and "F005" in FIG. 27) are set in the DE register.
Further, in step S103, the upper two bytes of the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section (data "F004" and "F003" in FIG. 27) are set in the BC register. In the next step S104, the lower two bytes of the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section (data "F002" and "F001" in FIG. 27) are set in the HL register.

In step S105, "1" is added to the total game count lower 2-byte register, that is, the DE register value in this example. In the next step S106, it is determined whether or not overflow has occurred in the lower two bytes of the total number of games due to the addition of "1" in step S105. For example, if the lower 2-byte data is "FFFF(H)" before the start of this flow chart, the addition of "1" in step S105 causes an overflow (flag register (F register) built in the main CPU 55 ) becomes “1”). When it is determined that an overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S107, and when it is determined that an overflow does not occur (carry flag ≠ "1"), the process proceeds to step S109. After adding "1" in step S105, it is determined in step S106 whether or not an overflow has occurred. ”.
In this embodiment, the "0" bit of the F register (flag register) is set as a carry flag. The carry flag is a flag that becomes "1" when a carry occurs or a carry (also called overflow) occurs due to an operation using a register.

In step S107, "1" is added to the total number of games upper 1 byte register, that is, the A register value in this example. In the next step S108, it is determined whether or not the total number of games has reached the upper limit. Here, the "upper limit" means the upper limit of the count. Since the total number of games played in this embodiment is counted in 3 bytes, when the 3 bytes are full, specifically when the value becomes "FFFFFF (H)", no more additions can be made. , it is determined that the upper limit has been reached. After "1" is added to the A register value in step S107, it is determined that the upper limit has been reached when the A register value actually overflows (when the carry flag is "1"). be. Note that this can also be rephrased as when the A register value is "0" (when the zero flag is "1"). When it is determined that the upper limit has been reached, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated, and when it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S109.

Therefore, when the total number of games in this embodiment becomes 3 bytes full, or about 16,780,000 in decimal number, the total number of games is not added any more. However, even when 3 bytes are full, the flow of FIG. 32 is executed for each game, but every game, it is determined "Yes" in step S108, and this flow chart ends.

When proceeding from step S106 or step S108 to step S109, it is determined whether or not the current game is in the advantageous section. By providing an advantageous section flag that is turned on when the advantageous section is in progress and judging whether the advantageous section flag is on or off, it is possible to determine whether or not the current game is in the advantageous section. Further, in this embodiment, as described above, it is possible to determine whether or not the segment data of digit 2 is in the advantageous section by determining whether or not the 8th bit of the segment data of digit 2 is "1". is.
When it is determined in step S109 that it is in the advantageous section, the process proceeds to step S110, and when it is determined that it is not in the advantageous section, the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section is not updated, and the process proceeds to step S114.

In step S110, "100 (D)" is added to the lower 2-byte register value of the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous interval, that is, to the HL register value in this example. Then, in step S111, it is determined whether or not an overflow has occurred. In this embodiment, since "100 (D)" is added in increments of "100 (D)" during the advantageous interval, overflow occurs in two bytes when "FFDC (H) (65500 (D))" is added to "100 (D) )” is added, resulting in “0040 (H) (65600 (D))”. When it is determined that the overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S112, and when it is determined that the overflow has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S112, "1" is added to the high-order 2-byte register of the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section, that is, the BC register in this example. Then, in step S113, the updated BC register value and HL register value are written to "F004" to "F001" in FIG. As a result, the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section (RWM53) is updated. In the next step S114, the updated A register value and DE register value are written to "F007" to "F005" in FIG. As a result, the total number of games played (RWM53) is updated. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

In addition, in the flowchart of FIG. 32, the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section does not become 4 bytes full before the total number of games reaches 3 bytes full. As described above, about 16.78 million games can be counted for the total number of games played. This is because it does not reach 4 bytes full. Therefore, in step S112, even if "1" is added to the upper 2-byte register value of the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section, it is possible to realize correct arithmetic processing without determining whether or not an overflow has occurred. is possible, and simplification of arithmetic processing can be realized.

Further, in the flowchart of FIG. 32, each data of the RWM 53 is set (copied) in the register and the calculation is executed. The processing according to this flow chart ends without returning the set register value to the RWM 53 . Therefore, the total number of games stored in the RWM 53, that is, the 3-byte data stored in "F007" to "F005" of the RWM 53 remains "FFFFFF (H)". There is no change in the data of the total number of games played.

Next, a specific example of the processing of steps S109 to S114 in FIG. 32 will be described.
FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing a specific example 1 of the steps during this period. In FIG. 33, steps S109 to S112 are the same as in FIG. Note that in FIG. 33, when it is determined "No" in step S109, the process proceeds to step S123.

After step S112, when the process proceeds to step S121, the value of the upper two bytes of the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section is updated. Specifically, the value of the BC register is written to "F004" and "F003" in FIG. In the next step S122, the value of the lower two bytes of the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section is updated. Specifically, the value of the HL register is written to "F002" and "F001" in FIG.
Next, when proceeding to step S123, the total number of games is updated by 3 bytes at once. Specifically, the A register value and the DE register value are written to "F007", "F006", and "F005" in FIG. 27, respectively.

FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing a specific example 2 of steps S109 to S114 in FIG. In FIG. 34, steps S109 to S112 are the same as in FIG. Note that in FIG. 33, when it is determined "No" in step S109, the process proceeds to step S123.
After step S112, when the process proceeds to step S131, the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section is updated by 4 bytes at once. Specifically, the BC register value and the HL register value are written to "F004", "F003", "F002", and "F001" in FIG. 27, respectively. Then, when proceeding to step S123, the total number of games played is updated by 3 bytes as in the first specific example.

FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing a specific example 3 of steps S109 to S114 in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 35, when it is judged as "No" in step S109, it progresses to step S141.
Each step in FIG. 35 is the same as in FIG. In FIG. 35, the difference from FIG. 34 is that even when it is determined in step S109 that the game is not in the advantageous section, the process proceeds to step S131 to update the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section. That is, in this case, the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section is not incremented by "100 (D)", but in FIG. , "F004", "F003", "F002", and "F001" in FIG. In this case, the same value as in the previous game is written again.

The above examples of FIGS. 32 to 35 are examples in which the total number of games played and the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous zone are updated via (using) the register.
On the other hand, FIG. 36 shows an example of updating the total number of games played and the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous zone without using the register in principle.
In FIG. 36, in step S201, "1" is added to the lower two bytes of the total number of games played. Specifically, "1" is added to the data of "F006" and "F005" in FIG.

In the next step S202, it is determined whether or not an overflow has occurred in the addition in step S201. That is, it is determined whether or not the carry flag becomes "1" by adding "1" to the data of "F006" and "F005". It should be noted that the determination may be made based on whether or not the data of "F006" and "F005" have become "0000(H)". When it is determined that the overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S203, and when it is determined that the overflow has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S207.

In step S203, "1" is added to the upper 1 byte of the total number of games played. Specifically, "1" is added to the data of "F007" in FIG. In the next step S204, it is determined whether or not the total number of games has reached the upper limit. The determination here is whether or not the addition of "1" in step S203 causes overflow to "F007" and the carry flag becomes "1". It is judged that the upper limit has been reached. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not the data of "F007" has become "0 (H)", and if it has become "0 (H)", it may be determined that the upper limit has been reached. When it is determined that the upper limit has been reached, the process proceeds to step S205, and when it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S207.

In step S205, "1" is subtracted from the upper byte of the total number of games played. When the process proceeds to step S205, the addition in step S203 also causes an overflow in the upper 1 byte, resulting in "0 (H)", so by subtracting "1" from this value, The data before adding "1", that is, "FF(H)" is restored.
Next, in step S206, "1" is also subtracted from the lower two bytes of the total number of games played. As a result, the values of "F006" and "F005" become "FFFF(H)". Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

On the other hand, when proceeding from step S202 or step S204 to step S207, it is determined whether or not the current game is in the advantageous section. This determination is the same as step S109 in FIG. Then, when it is determined that the game is not in the advantageous section, there is no need to update the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section, so the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is in the advantageous section, the process proceeds to step S208. In step S208, "100 (D)" is added to the lower two bytes of the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section, that is, "F002" and "F001" in FIG. Here, since the assembler cannot directly add the value of "100(D)" to the RWM 53, the data of "F002" and "F001" are first stored in the HL register. Then, by storing the result of adding the value of "100(D)" to the HL register in "F002" and "F001", the data of "F002" and "F001" are updated.

In the next step S209, it is determined whether or not an overflow has occurred in the calculation of step S208. Here, it is determined whether or not the carry flag has become "1", and when the carry flag has become "1", it is determined that an overflow has occurred.

When it is determined in step S209 that the overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S210, and when it is determined that the overflow has not occurred, the processing according to this flow chart ends. In step S210, "1" is added to the upper two bytes of the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section, that is, "F004" and "F003" in FIG. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

Next, the calculation processing of the advantageous section ratio will be described.
In the present embodiment, since the total number of games played and the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section are stored, in order to calculate the advantageous section ratio, simply "value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section divided by the total number of games". can be calculated. However, in the slot machine 10, a chip that satisfies the rules can only operate with 2 bytes, and cannot perform division of numbers of 2 or more bytes. Therefore, the ratio is calculated by the subtraction shown below.

Specifically, when the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section=x and the total number of games played=y, "x/y" can be calculated by repeating the following subtraction.
x−y=a (>0)
a−y=b(>0)
by=c(>0)
cy = d (<0)
In this way, as a result of repeating the subtraction of the total number of games y, the number of times “>0 (greater than “0”)” is “3”, so the quotient of “x÷y” is “3”. It can be calculated that there is Further, in the present embodiment, since the numbers after the decimal point are rounded down, the advantageous section ratio is calculated as "3" in the above example.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing processing for calculating the advantageous section ratio.
First, in step S301, the data of the RWM 53 is acquired in the register. Note that, as in the above case, seven A, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers are used.
In this step S301, each data of "F001" to "F007" shown in FIG. 27 is stored in the register. Specifically, it is as follows.
A register: Stores "F007" data D register: Stores "F006" data E register: Stores "F005" data B register: Stores "F004" data C register: Stores "F003" data H register: Stores "F002" data L register: Stores "F001" data

Next, the process proceeds to step S302 to initialize the advantageous section ratio (RWM53). This process clears (sets to "0") the data stored in "F008" in FIG.
Then, the process advances to step S303 to perform subtraction of the lower byte. This process subtracts the data stored in the DE register (lower 2 bytes of the total number of games played) from the data stored in the HL register (lower 2 bytes of the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section), and obtains the calculation result. Store in HL register.

Next, the flow advances to step S304 to determine whether or not a digit has been digitized. If the result of the calculation in step S303 (the result of subtracting the DE register value from the HL register value) does not set the carry flag (when the carry flag is not "1"), it is determined "No".
If it is determined that the carry flag has been set (there is a digit-down), the process proceeds to step S305, and if it is determined that there is no digit-down, the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S305, it is determined whether or not the upper two bytes of the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section, that is, the BC register value is "0". If it is "0", the process according to this flow chart is terminated because subsequent subtraction cannot be performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S306.
In step S306, "1" is subtracted from the upper byte of the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section. Specifically, "1" is subtracted from the BC register value, and the calculation result is stored in the BC register.

In the next step S307, the upper byte is subtracted. Specifically, the A register value (upper 1 byte of the total number of games played) is subtracted from the BC register value (upper 2 bytes of the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section), and the result of the calculation is stored in the BC register. Then, proceeding to step S308, it is determined whether or not the calculation result of step S307 is less than "0", that is, whether or not the carry flag is set by the calculation of step S307. When the carry flag is set, it is judged as "Yes" in step S308, and since the subtraction cannot be performed any more, the processing according to this flowchart is finished. On the other hand, when it is determined "No" in step S308, the process proceeds to step S309.
In step S309, the HL register value is stored in the stack area (part of the storage area of the RWM 53).

In the next step S310, the data (advantageous section ratio) stored in "F008" is stored in the HL register, and "1" is added to the data stored in the address (F008) indicated by the HL register. Then, in step S311, the data stored in the stack area in step S309 is stored in the HL register. After step S311, the process returns to step S303 to repeat the above process (subtraction).
By the above processing, the total number of games played is subtracted from the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section, and the advantageous section ratio is incremented by "1" for each subtraction. Therefore, after the processing of FIG. 37, the advantageous interval ratio calculated from the advantageous interval game count corresponding value and the total game count stored in “F001” to “F007” is stored in “F008”.
As is clear from the above, the advantageous section ratio is incremented by "1" each time the processing of steps S303 to S311 in FIG. 37 is executed once. That is, the number of executions (number of repetitions) of steps S303 to S311 is the advantageous section ratio.

In the above, the quotient of the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section (value obtained by multiplying the number of games played in the advantageous section by 100) and the total number of games was calculated as the advantageous section ratio (%). By (repeated subtraction), the continuous accessory ratio (6000 games (15 sets)), the accessory ratio (6000 games (15 sets)), the continuous accessory ratio (total), and the accessory ratio (total) are calculated. be able to.

Specifically, the value corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of continuous accessory activation for 6000 games (15 sets) ("F070" to "F06E" in FIG. 29) and the total number of payouts for 6000 games (15 sets) (in FIG. 28) , "F031" to "F02F"), the same subtraction as above is repeated to calculate the quotient of "value corresponding to the number of payouts during continuous accessory activation in 6000 games/total number of payouts in 6000 games", and The value is stored in "F075" in FIG. 29 as the continuous role product operation ratio (6000 games).

In addition, from the cumulative number corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of continuous accessory activation ("F074" to "F071" in FIG. 29) and the total number of payouts ("F034" to "F032" in FIG. 28), " Calculate the quotient of "cumulative value corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of continuous accessory activation/cumulative total number of payouts", and store this value in "F076" in FIG. 29 as the continuous accessory activation ratio (cumulative).

Similarly, from the value corresponding to the number of payouts when the accessory is activated in 6000 games (“F0B0” to “F0AE” in FIG. 30) and the total number of payouts in 6000 games (“F031” to “F02F” in FIG. 28) , the quotient of "the value corresponding to the number of payouts when the accessory is activated in 6000 games/total number of payouts in 6000 games" is calculated, and this value is stored in "F0B5" in FIG. 30 as the role product activation ratio (6000 games). .

In addition, from the cumulative value corresponding to the number of payouts when the accessory is activated ("F0B4" to "F0B1" in FIG. 30) and the total number of payouts ("F034" to "F032" in FIG. 28), the "total The quotient of the value corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of accessory activation/total total number of payouts" is calculated, and the value is stored in "F0B6" in FIG. 30 as the role product activation ratio (cumulative).

FIG. 38 shows the "advantageous section ratio", "continuous role ratio (6000 games (15 sets))", "accessory ratio (6000 games (15 sets))", "continuous role ratio" calculated as described above. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of "ratio (cumulative)" and "accessory ratio (cumulative)". These five pieces of information are displayed by information type and numerical value, and are displayed on the management information display LED 74 .
Note that the five pieces of information shown in FIG. 38 are only examples, and the information is not limited to these pieces of information. Information only may be displayed. Moreover, the display order is not limited to that shown in FIG. 38, and the display order is arbitrary.

The reason for displaying the management information as described above is as follows.
Amusement machines that pass the type test stipulated by the Amusement Business Law are permitted to have halls. Here, in the model test, it is determined that the character ratio and the continuous character ratio when 6000 games are executed do not exceed a predetermined value (70% for the character ratio and 60% for the continuous character ratio). There are regulations.
In addition, at the time of the model test, a document stating the average value of the ratio of function parts and the ratio of consecutive functions of the applied game machine is to be attached (In the future, the average value of the advantageous section ratio will also be included.) may be requested).

In this case, it is necessary to ensure that hall staff and third parties can easily confirm whether or not the gaming machine installed in the hall has the same specifications as the one that conforms (whether or not it has been tampered with). It is desired to be
For example, there is a possibility that a gaming machine with a numerical value that deviates from the conforming gaming machine may differ from the conforming gaming machine.In this case, request the manufacturer to confirm the gaming machine. Therefore, fraud etc. can be confirmed at an early stage.
Therefore, if a function of calculating and displaying management information is provided as in the present embodiment, it becomes possible to easily and reliably confirm whether or not there is a match with a suitable one.

In this embodiment, when the front door of the slot machine 10 is opened (the door switch 15 is thereby turned on), the setting key is inserted and rotated 90 degrees clockwise, the setting key switch 12 is turned on. . This state is a so-called setting check in progress. Therefore, the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73 . It should be noted that the setting value is not changed even if the setting switch 13 is operated because the setting confirmation is different from the setting change.

In this embodiment, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once during confirmation of the setting, the "advantageous section ratio" is displayed in digits 6 to 9 in FIG. First, digits 6 and 7 indicate the type of information. In the example of FIG. 38, the advantageous section ratio is displayed as "U7". Also, in this example, it is assumed that the advantageous section ratio is "50(%)", and the digits 7 and 8 are displayed as "50". Therefore, "U750" is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9).
When numerical values of management information are displayed, they are expressed in decimal notation.

Next, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once more, "Continuous Accessory Ratio (6000 games (15 sets))" is displayed, and "y6" is displayed as the type of this information. (%)” is displayed.
Further, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once again, the display is "Ratio of 6000 games (15 sets)", and "y7" is displayed as the type of this information. )” is displayed.

Similarly, when the setting switch 13 is pressed again, the display of "consecutive character ratio (total)" is displayed, and "A6" is displayed as the type of this information, and in this example, the ratio is "48 (%)". it's shown.
Furthermore, similarly, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once more, the display of "Ratio of characters (total)" is displayed, and "A7" is displayed as the type of this information, and in this example, the ratio is set to "52 (%)". it's shown.
Further, when the setting switch 13 is pressed again, the display returns to the initial display and the advantageous section "U750" is displayed.
Moreover, the display of the management information may be turned off when the setting switch 13 is not operated for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds). After turning off the light, pressing the setting switch 13 displays the first display, the advantageous section ratio "U750".

While the door switch 15 detects that the front door is open, the management information continues to be displayed (digits 6 to 9 continue to light), and the door switch 15 detects that the front door is closed. Digits 6 to 9 may be extinguished at times.
In this case, when the opening of the front door is detected by the door switch 15, the advantageous section "U750" may be displayed before the setting key switch 12 or the setting switch 13 is turned on. The advantageous section "U750" may be displayed when the setting key switch 12 and the setting switch 13 are turned on without illuminating the digits 6 to 9 only when the opening of the front door is detected.

Further, regardless of whether or not the opening of the front door by the door switch 15 is detected, after the power switch 11 is turned on, a predetermined period (for example, about every 3 seconds (interrupt processing is performed every 1500 interrupts) is performed. )), the display contents shown in FIG. 38 may be sequentially displayed on the management information display LED 74. FIG.
Here, the management information shown in FIG. 38 includes information whose ratio depends on a set value such as a continuous accessory ratio.
On the other hand, when the hall is open for business (when players can play), there is a high possibility that the front door will be opened if:
a) an error that occurs when it is determined that the medals in the hopper 35 are empty;
b) An error that occurs when it is determined that medals are stuck in the medal selector,
c) an error that occurs when it is determined that medals have accumulated in the payout port of the hopper 35;
d) An error that occurs when the hopper 35 is full of medals (the sub-storage box that is provided next to the hopper 35 and stores medals overflowing from the hopper 35 is full) (all of which are recoverable as described above). errors belonging to errors), and the like.

If a person involved in the hall opens the front door when such an error occurs, there is a risk that the management information will be seen by the player and that the set value will be guessed. In order to solve this problem, when all of the above errors a) to d) or at least one of the errors a) to d) occurs, the management information display LED 74 does not perform lighting display. It is desirable to configure so as to (turn off). It should be noted that the errors are not limited to the above-described errors a) to d), and it is possible to configure the management information display LED 74 not to perform lighting display even when other errors occur.
In addition, if the above-mentioned unrecoverable error occurs, the credibility of the management information to be displayed is doubtful. Therefore, it is desirable not to display it.

In order to see the management information displayed on the main control board 50, the front door must be opened, and if the front door is opened, a door open error will always occur. Information may be displayed.

In addition, the above information types "U7", "y6", "y7", "A6", and "A7" are examples, and arbitrary display is performed by two-digit alphabets, symbols, numerical values, or combinations thereof be able to.
In addition, in the above example, different numerical examples are shown for the continuous role material ratio and the role material ratio. becomes.

When the above display is performed, for example, when the door switch 15 is turned on, the setting key switch 12 is turned on, and the setting switch 13 is turned on, the management information display mode is entered and "U7 (advantageous section Read the segment data displaying "%" and display in digits 6 and 7. Specifically, if "U7" is displayed, the segment data will be "00111110(B)" and "00100111(B)".

Furthermore, when displaying a numerical value, for example, if it is an advantageous section ratio, the data of "F008" in FIG. 27 described above is read and converted into segment data. When the advantageous section ratio is "50(D)", the data stored in "F008" is "00110010". When the value is converted into segment data, it becomes "01101101(B)" and "00111111(B)".

Also, when displaying the advantageous section ratio, the total number of games ("F007" to "F005") is read, and it is determined whether or not the total number of games has reached "175000 (D)". When it is determined that the total number of games played has not reached "175000" games, the numerical value of the advantageous section ratio is displayed blinking. On the other hand, when it is determined that the total number of games played has reached "175000" games, the numerical value of the advantageous section ratio is lit and displayed. Thus, the display pattern is varied depending on whether or not the total number of games has reached "175000 games".

As a specific example of blinking display, for example, it is displayed in a pattern that repeats turning off and turning on at intervals of "0.5 seconds", or repeating turning off time "0.5 seconds" and turning on time "1 second". It can be displayed in a pattern. Compared to setting the lights-out time and the lights-on time at the same time, setting the lights-on time longer than the lights-out time makes it possible to lengthen the display time of the management information, and the lighting in the hall, etc. is dim. Visibility can be improved even under certain conditions.
It should be noted that the display pattern may be changed so that it can be determined whether or not "175000" games have been played. 175000" games or more), for example, "U1" (less than "175000" games) may be displayed. Alternatively, when the number of games played is less than "175000", "U7" may be flashed and the numerical value may be lit.

Similarly to the above, when displaying the continuous role ratio (6000 games) and the role ratio (6000 games), when the total number of games played has not reached "6000" games, the continuous role ratio and The numerical value of the character ratio is displayed blinking. On the other hand, when the total number of games played has reached "6000" games, the numerical values of the continuous role ratio and the role ratio are lit and displayed.
Therefore, when displaying the continuous role ratio (6000 games) and the role ratio (6000 games), the value of the total number of games ("F007" to "F005") in FIG. It is read, it is determined whether or not "6000" games have been played, and the display pattern is changed according to the result.

Furthermore, in the same way, when displaying the continuous role ratio (cumulative) and the role ratio (cumulative), if the total number of games played has not reached "175000" games, the continuous role ratio (cumulative) and The numerical value of the character ratio (cumulative) is displayed blinking. On the other hand, when the total number of games has reached "175000" games, the values of the continuous role ratio (total) and the role ratio (total) are lit and displayed.
Therefore, when displaying the continuous accessory ratio (cumulative) and the accessory ratio (cumulative), read the value of the total number of games played (“F007” to “F005”) in FIG. It is determined whether or not it has reached, and the display pattern is changed according to the result.

In particular, by displaying the advantageous section ratio, continuous accessory ratio, and accessory ratio so that it can be determined whether it is 6000 games or more and whether it is 175000 games or more (by changing the display mode, etc.) , has the following advantages:
For example, when judging whether or not the gaming machine is fraudulent based on the currently displayed management information such as the advantageous section ratio, the continuous role ratio, and the role ratio, it is necessary to determine how many times the management information has been played. By referring to whether the value is for , it becomes possible to more accurately determine whether or not the gaming machine is an illegal gaming machine.

For example, it is assumed that the design value (average value) of the advantageous section ratio was 55 (%) at the time of applying for the model of the gaming machine.
At this time, for example, when the advantageous interval ratio in 1000 games is 80 (%) and when the advantageous interval ratio is 80 (%) in 175000 games or more, the judgment of whether or not it is fraud is different. . It is quite possible that the value of the advantageous interval ratio in 1000 games has not yet converged. On the other hand, the advantageous section ratio in 175000 games is a value for a sufficient number of games played, so it is considered that the value has converged. Therefore, it can be determined that the possibility of fraud is high in the latter case.

In this way, even if the value is the same, as the number of games played increases, the numerical value converges to the design value. You can make more accurate decisions.
As described above, when the total number of games has not reached the predetermined number of games (6000 games or 175000 games), the blinking display is performed, and when the predetermined number of games has been reached, the lighting display is performed. Conversely, when the total number of games played has not reached the predetermined number of games, the display may be lit, and when the number of games has reached the predetermined number of games, the display may be flashed.

In the above example, digits 6 to 9 are mounted on the main control board 50, and the management information display LED 74 is provided. It is possible. With this setting, there is no need to separately provide the digits 6 to 9, resulting in cost reduction.

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of displaying management information using the stored number display LED 76. As shown in FIG.
The example of FIG. 39 shows an example of having 9 medals as credits. Therefore, the display of the stored number display LED 76 is "09" at first.
Even when the front door is opened and the door switch 15 is turned on, there is no change in the display of the stored number display LED 76 (because the door open error is indicated by the obtained number display LED 78, which will be described later).

Then, when the setting switch 13 is pushed once, the stored number display LED 76 displays "U7" indicating the advantageous section ratio. Then, after a certain period of time (for example, two seconds) has passed, the numerical value of the advantageous section ratio "50" is displayed. If this state is left as it is, "U7" and "50" are alternately displayed every two seconds.

Then, when the setting switch 13 is pushed next time, the stored number display LED 76 displays "y6" indicating "continuous role ratio (6000 games)". Then, when the predetermined period of time has passed, the numerical value "45" of the "continuous accessory ratio (6000 games)" is displayed. Then, similarly to the above, if this state is left as it is, "y6" and "45" are alternately displayed every two seconds.
In the example of FIG. 39, an arrow is shown to move from the display of "50" to the display of "y6". (The same applies to other figures).

Further, when the setting switch 13 is pressed while "y6" or "45" is being displayed, the stored number display LED 76 displays "y7" indicating "accessory ratio (6000 games)", When the predetermined time has passed, the numerical value "60" of the "accessory ratio (6000 games)" is displayed. Then, similarly to the above, if this state is left as it is, the alternate display of "y7" and "60" is repeated every two seconds.

Furthermore, when the setting switch 13 is pressed while "y7" or "60" is being displayed, the stored number display LED 76 displays "A6" indicating the "continuous accessory ratio (total)". , when the predetermined time has passed, the numerical value "48" of the "continuous accessory ratio (total)" is displayed. Then, in the same manner as described above, if this state is left as it is, "A6" and "48" are alternately displayed every two seconds.
Furthermore, similarly, when the setting switch 13 is pressed while "A6" or "48" is being displayed, the stored number display LED 76 displays "A7" indicating "Ratio of role items (total)". , when the predetermined time has passed, the numerical value "52" of the "accessory ratio (total)" is displayed. Then, similarly to the above, if this state is left as it is, "A7" and "52" are alternately displayed every two seconds.

Further, when the setting switch 13 is further pushed in this state, the display returns to the initial advantageous section ratios "U7" and "50".
When the front door is closed and the door switch 13 is turned off while the above display is being performed, the display of the stored number is switched to "09".

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example of displaying management information using the acquired number display LED 78 .
The example in FIG. 40 shows an example in which "09" is displayed as the acquired number.
Then, when the front door is opened and the door switch 15 is turned on, a door open error is detected. As a result, the acquisition number display LED 78 displays "dE" indicating a door open error. In this state, when the setting switch 13 is pushed once, "U7" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, which indicates the advantageous section ratio. Then, after a certain period of time (for example, two seconds) has passed, the numerical value of the advantageous section ratio "50" is displayed. If this state is left as it is, "U7" and "50" are alternately displayed every two seconds.

Thereafter, as in the example of FIG. 39, each time the setting switch 13 is operated, predetermined management information (information type and numerical value) is displayed. Next, when the front door is closed and the door switch 15 is turned off, the error content "dE" is displayed again (the door open error cannot be resolved by simply closing the front door). Then, in order to eliminate this error display, an error cancellation operation is performed. For example, the error is cleared by inserting the door key into the keyhole provided in the front door and turning the door key counterclockwise, for example. When the error cancellation operation is performed in this manner, the acquired number display LED 78 again displays the acquired number "09" before the display of "dE".

In the examples of FIGS. 39 and 40, when the continuous role ratio (6000 games) and the role ratio (6000 games) are less than the total number of games "6000", at least one of the information type and the numerical value blinks. indicate. Similarly, when the continuous role ratio (cumulative) and the role ratio (cumulative) are less than the total number of games played "175000", at least one of the information type and the numerical value is blinked.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described.
In the second embodiment, the management information display LEDs 74 (digits 6 to 9) mounted on the main control board 50 (the main control board 50B if divided into the main control boards 50A and 50B) are always , is lit.
There are various ways to display the five pieces of information shown in FIG. 38 in the case of constant lighting. For example, the management information to be displayed may be updated every five seconds. Specifically, "U750" (displayed for 5 seconds)→"y645" (displayed for 5 seconds)→..."A752" (displayed for 5 seconds)→"U750" (displayed for 5 seconds)→... Things are mentioned. A digit extinguishing time of about 0.5 to 1 second may be provided between each information display.

41 is an external perspective view showing the base portion 1 of the slot machine 10. FIG. In FIG. 41, illustration of the front door is omitted. 41, the front door opens/closes the front surface of the base portion 1 with a "front door opening/closing axis" (left side in the figure) as a support axis. Also, although FIG. 41 is used in the description of the second embodiment, the structure of the first embodiment is also the same as that of FIG.
As shown in FIG. 41, a power supply unit including a power switch 11, a medal payout device including a hopper 35, a symbol display device including three reels 31, and the like are housed inside the base portion 1. FIG.
Further, the sub-control board 80 is attached to the inner left side surface of the base portion 1 . On the other hand, the board case 16 and the main control board 50 accommodated therein are attached to the inner rear surface of the base portion 1 . Furthermore, the board case 16 and the main control board 50 are mounted above the pattern display device so that the condition of the caulked portion 16a of the board case 16 can be easily visually confirmed when the front door is opened. In order to do so, it is attached at a relatively easy-to-see position within the base portion 1 .
Therefore, the management information display LED 74 mounted on the main control board 50 can also be visually confirmed relatively easily.

In the specifications of the slot machine 10, in addition to the system in which the hopper 35a is automatically replenished with medals when the hopper 35 runs out of medals, the hall clerk opens the front door every time the hopper 35 runs out of medals. A method of replenishing the hopper 35 with medals is known.
However, when the front door is opened, the management information is always displayed on the management information display LED 74 mounted on the main control board 50, so that the player can see the management information. . As a result, it is possible to know the advantageous section ratio of the machine on which one is currently playing, the continuous accessory ratio, and the like. Therefore, there is a risk that the setting values can be guessed based on these values.
Therefore, in the second embodiment, the management information is always displayed on the management information display LED 74 mounted on the main control board 50, but is made invisible to the player.

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the board case 16 and the main control board 50 (50A and 50B) in the second embodiment, which corresponds to FIG. 3 of the first embodiment. In FIG. 42, Example 1 of (a) shows an example in which the main control board 50 is composed of one piece, and Example 2 of (b) is composed of two main control boards 50A and 50B. An example is shown (this point is the same as FIG. 3 of the first embodiment).
42(a), the management information display LED 74 is arranged as far to the left as possible when viewed from the front of the main control board 50, which is different from the first embodiment. In FIG. 41, the opening/closing axis of the front door is provided on the left side when viewed from the front. , become less visible to the player.

In the example of FIG. 3B, the arrangement of the main control boards 50A and 50B is reversed from that of FIG. 3B. Although the management information display LED 74 is mounted on the main control board 50B, it is located on the left side in the board case 16. As shown in FIG.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the interval (distance) between the management information display LED 74 and the crimped portion 16a is increased. Assuming that the management information display LED 74 is positioned to the left in FIG. is the right end of the board case 16 .
In this way, even if the crimped portion 16a is destroyed to access the main control board 50 (50A and 50B), the management information display LED 74 will not be damaged or damaged when the crimped portion 16a is destroyed. It is possible to prevent more effectively.

The crimped portion 16a is for breaking when the substrate case 16 is unsealed. may be provided. At this time, when removing the board case 16 from the game machine, it is necessary to destroy the crimped portion of the main body. Even in this case, similarly to the crimped portion 16a, the main body crimped portion is provided at the first position in order to prevent the management information display LED 74 from being accidentally damaged or damaged when the main body crimped portion is destroyed. position (for example, the upper end of the board case 16), the position to provide the management information display LED 74 is a second position away from the first position (for example, the lower part, the right side of the center of the main control board 50 as a reference). side or left).

As described above, by arranging the management information display LED 74 in a position direction different from the position direction in which the crimped portion 16a and/or the main body crimped portion are provided, it is possible to effectively prevent damage or the like of the management information display LED 74. can.
Although the crimped portion 16a is positioned at the right end, it is not limited to this, and can be designed at the upper end, for example. At this time, since the management information display LED 74 is located at the lower part, the right part, or the left part with respect to the central part of the main control board 50, the management information display LED 74 is erroneously damaged when the crimped part 16a is broken. or damage can be prevented.

Although one embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) The upper limit of the number of games played in the advantageous section is set to 1500, but it is not limited to this. It is also possible to set using a variable other than the total number of games, such as 100 times of games. Alternatively, it is possible to set a plurality of conditions, such as 1500 games or 3000 sheets, and determine that the upper limit has been reached when either one of the conditions is satisfied.

(2) The segment DP of the stored number display LED 76 is used as the advantageous section display LED 77, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, if existing LEDs can be used as in the above embodiment, the cost can be reduced.
Here, the advantageous section is managed by the main control board 50 (main management), and the sub-control board 80 does not manage the advantageous section. Therefore, the lamps that indicate the advantageous section must be electrically connected to the main control board 50. For example, the effect lamp 21 that is electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 indicates the advantageous section. Can't be a lamp
However, even a lamp disguised as a kind of performance lamp can be used as a lamp for indicating an advantageous section as long as it is controlled by the main control board 50 .

Further, although the advantageous section display LED 77 is composed of the segment DP of the digit 2 of the stored number display LED 76, it may be composed of the segment DP of the digit 4 of the number of acquisition display LED 78, for example.

Furthermore, when the player ends the game, the menu button 25 may be operated in order to display the game history (two-dimensional code). Therefore, by arranging an advantageous section display LED near the menu button 25, it is possible to make the player aware that the advantageous section is in progress at the end of the game. For example, even if the stored number display LED 76 (the segment DP of the digit 2 is used as the advantageous section display LED 77) or the obtained number display LED 78 (the segment DP of the digit 4 is used as the advantageous section display LED 77) near the menu button 25 good. Of course, as shown in FIG. 2, it is also effective to provide an advantageous section display LED 77 in the vicinity of the adjustment switch 46. FIG. Furthermore, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, by lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 before the menu button 25 becomes operable, the menu button 25 can be displayed without the player noticing the shift to the advantageous section. can be prevented from operating (displaying the game history (two-dimensional code)).

(3) When the power switch 11 is turned off while the advantageous interval display LED 77 is lit, when the power switch 11 is turned on again, the advantageous interval control means 69 turns the power on/off. In order to maintain the advantageous section before and after , the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up again. Therefore, for example, when the hall closes with the advantageous section display LED 77 lit, and the advantageous section display LED 77 is to be extinguished at the start of business the next day, the setting is changed (including resetting of the same set value). Things are mentioned. By changing the setting, the predetermined area of the RWM 53 is initialized, and the display data (advantageous section data) of the stored number display LED 76 is also initialized. ”.

(4) During the advantageous section, the instruction function is operated in a game in which a conditional device capable of operating the instruction function is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is not always necessary to activate the instruction function even in a game in which a conditional device capable of activating the instruction function is won during the advantageous section. Advantageous intervals are game intervals in which the operation of the instruction function is “allowed”. Therefore, after shifting to the advantageous section, whether or not to execute the instruction function operation game and the number of times of the instruction function operation game are determined by lottery or the like, and the instruction function operation game is executed only for the determined number of games. good too. Even after the number of games is completed, if the conditions for continuing the advantageous section are satisfied, it is possible to continue to stay in the advantageous section and determine the number of games to execute the instruction function operation game again by lottery or the like. is. Furthermore, during the advantageous section, the lottery that falls from the advantageous section to the normal section is based on winning each game or a specific condition device (for example, a common setting such as a single winning of a small winning combination D or a small winning combination E1). to decide.

(5) In the present embodiment, the value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous section is a value obtained by multiplying the number of games played by 100. Similarly, the value corresponding to the number of payouts during continuous accessory activation and the value corresponding to the number of payouts during accessory activation are each stored as a value obtained by multiplying the number of payouts by 100. However, not limited to this, it is also possible to store the number of games per se and the number of payouts per se without multiplying by 100, depending on the calculation method (CPU used) of the advantageous section ratio, continuous accessory ratio, and accessory ratio. , and is not necessarily limited to storing a value multiplied by 100.
Similarly, although the value of the total number of games is the number of games itself, it is not limited to this. number corresponding value) may be stored.
In this case, when calculating the advantageous section ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and the accessory ratio, the data in the storage area in which the number of games played and the number of payouts are stored are multiplied by 100, and the subtraction process described above is repeated. Calculation is possible by executing the process (for example, FIG. 37).

(6) The advantageous section ratio, the continuous accessory activation ratio, and the accessory activation ratio are calculated for each game or for each predetermined number of games regardless of whether or not the management information is displayed, and stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53. You can leave it. On the other hand, the advantageous section ratio, the continuous accessory operating ratio, and the accessory operating ratio are calculated when the management information is displayed (when there is a display request), and the calculation result is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53, and the calculation is performed. You can display the results.

(7) In the above embodiment, each time the setting switch 13 is pressed, the management information is displayed in order. However, other switches such as the bed switch 40 may be used instead of the setting switch 13, or a switch dedicated to displaying management information may be provided separately.
Also, in the present embodiment, the setting switch 13 and the reset switch 14 are provided separately, but it is conceivable to configure the setting switch and the reset switch from one switch as the setting change/reset switch. In this case, if the operation of the setting change/reset switch does not overlap with the reset (initialization) operation, it is possible to display the management information by operating the setting change/reset switch. In the case where the setting switch 13 and the reset switch 14 are separately provided as in the present embodiment, the same is true when the management information is displayed by operating the reset switch 14 .

Specifically, when an error is detected, the management information display mode is not entered, and the management information display mode is entered only when no error occurs.
For example, among the recoverable errors, when a medal retention error occurs in the medal selector, the mode is not shifted to the management information display mode unless the error is removed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the management information is displayed each time the setting switch 13 is pressed. That is, even if the operator releases the operation switch 13 after turning on the setting switch 13, the management information remains displayed. Alternatively, the management information may be displayed only while the setting switch 13 is being pressed, and the display of the management information may be terminated when the operator releases the setting switch 13. FIG. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 3, when the setting switch 13 is first pressed, the first management information "U750" is displayed. 9 is extinguished). Next, when the setting switch 13 is pressed, the second management information "y645" is displayed, but when the setting switch 13 is released, the display can be terminated. Even when the switch for displaying the management information is a switch other than the setting switch 13, the same control as above is possible.

As described above, there are various variations as to which switch is used to display the management information, and how the relationship between the operation of the switch for displaying the management information and the display pattern (display time) is to be established. is conceivable, and it is not limited to what is shown in this embodiment.
Furthermore, for example, when the management information display LED 74 is mounted on the main control board 50, the display pattern of the management information is as follows.
a) A display pattern in which the management information is always displayed b) A pattern in which the management information is displayed when the front door is opened (when the door switch 15 is turned on) c) The front door is opened and a predetermined switch is displayed d) A pattern in which the management information is displayed when the front door is opened, the setting key is inserted to turn on the setting key switch 12, and a predetermined switch is operated. be done.
However, when an operation to shift to the setting change mode is performed and the mode is shifted to the setting change mode, the shift to the management information display mode is not performed, and the management information is not displayed. That is, in the setting change mode, digit 5 is lit, but digits 6 to 9 are extinguished.

(8) In this embodiment, the total number of games is counted until the count value of the total number of games becomes 3 bytes full ("FFFFFF (H)"). However, not limited to this, for example, when the cumulative total reaches a predetermined value, the counting may be terminated even if the upper limit of the storage capacity is not reached.
Further, when the total number of games has reached a predetermined value, the data value of the total number of games may be cleared, and counting of the total number of games may be started again.
The above is the same for the total payout number.

(9) The slot machine 10 of the present embodiment is designed so that the advantageous section ratio is "70" (%) or less. Therefore, it is not assumed that the advantageous section ratio will exceed "70" (%) in the market. However, it cannot be denied that the advantageous section ratio may exceed "70" (%), for example, when cheating or the like is performed. Therefore, for example, the data value of "F008" that stores the advantageous section ratio is monitored, and when the value exceeds "70 (D)", some kind of warning is output or the advantageous section ratio is displayed. One example is to make it different from normal (to display that it is abnormal). For example, in the display of the information type "U7" of the advantageous section ratio, the upper digit "U" and the lower digit "7" are alternately flashed at high speed.

Similarly, when the upper limit of the design value for the continuous accessory ratio and the accessory ratio is set to, for example, "60 (%)", when the continuous accessory ratio and the accessory ratio exceed the upper limit of the design value, some kind of Examples include a method of outputting a warning or displaying the display of the information type in the same manner as described above.
Alternatively, the external signal transmission means 70 can be used to transmit information such as the advantageous interval ratio to the hall computer 200, and for example, when the advantageous interval ratio exceeds "70" (%), information related to warning can be sent. mentioned.

(10) As described above, if the advantageous section ratio is set to be "70" (%) or less with respect to all game sections, the rest can be set relatively freely.
Further, the winning of the advantageous section from the normal section may be set to less than "1/32".
Furthermore, as described above, during the advantageous section, the indicating function may always be activated when a conditional device capable of activating the indicating function is won. The instruction function may be activated when a lottery to determine whether to activate the function is won. Alternatively, when transitioning to an advantageous section, choose whether it should be an advantageous section in which the instruction function is always activated, or whether it should be an advantageous section in which the instruction function is activated only when a lottery to determine whether or not to activate the instruction function is won. may be determined by lottery or the like.

Furthermore, the transition from the advantageous section to the normal section (the end of the advantageous section) may be made when a predetermined number of games has been played at the time of transition to the advantageous section, or the number of games may not be set. A lottery for shifting (falling) from the advantageous section to the normal section may be performed every game or when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the lottery is won, the advantageous section may be shifted to the normal section. However, when the count value reaches the upper limit by the upper limit counter 69b, it is unconditionally controlled to end the advantageous section and shift to the normal section.

(11) In FIG. 3, the management information display LED 74 provided on the main control board 50 is composed of four digits, but may be composed of, for example, two digits. For example, as shown in the examples of FIGS. 39 and 40, when the setting switch 13 is pressed, the information type "U7" is displayed, and after a predetermined period of time, the numerical value "50" is displayed, and after that, a predetermined period of time is displayed. "U7" and "50" may be alternately and repeatedly displayed each time the time elapses.

(12) Since the advantageous section ratio, continuous role product ratio, and role product ratio are rounded down to the nearest decimal point, they are not necessarily displayed as accurate values. In that sense, the advantageous section ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the character ratio are the values corresponding to (equivalent to) the advantageous section ratio, the values corresponding to (equivalent to) the continuous character ratio, and the character ratio. ).
In addition, the advantageous section ratio, continuous role ratio, and role ratio are not limited to the numbers rounded off after the decimal point, the numbers rounded off after the decimal point, the numbers rounded up after the decimal point, and the last digit "5" or " Numerical values or the like converted into increments of 10″ may be used.

(13) In the present embodiment, the combination of symbols to be stopped on the active line is the same when the small winning combination E1 is won and when the small winning combination E2 is won. For example, when a small winning combination E1 or E2 is won, a stop roll of a middle cherry (a winning of a small winning combination of 36) is possible at the first left or middle stop, and a stop roll in which a middle cherry does not appear at the first right stop. (winning a minor role of 38). Therefore, regardless of the presence or absence of the appearance of the middle stage cherry, it was not possible to determine which of the small wins E1 and E2 was won.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the cherry in the middle stage is not to appear, instead, the stop roll may be changed.
For example, when the minor winning combination E1 or E2 is won, the middle cherry appears when the first stop is left or middle, and when the middle cherry appears, the player determines whether the small winning combination E1 or E2 has been won. make it impossible.

On the other hand, when the small winning combination E1 or E2 is won, if the right first stop is reached, control is performed in the same manner as described above so that the middle stage cherry does not appear, and instead of not causing the middle stage cherry to appear, the small winning combination E1 or E2 is executed. For example, it is possible to make a stop result appear so that the player can determine which one has been won.

Specifically, for example, the following control can be mentioned.
First, the small wins included in the winning of the small win E1 are the small wins 36 and 38 as in the above embodiment.
On the other hand, the small wins included in the winning of the small win E2 are the small wins 36 and 41 (the small win 41 is newly added).
When the small winning combination E1 or E2 is won, the small winning combination 36 (middle stage cherry) can be stopped when the small winning combination E1 or E2 is won, and when the small winning combination E1 or E2 is won, the small winning combination 36 (middle stage cherry) can be stopped. On the other hand, the small winning combination 41 is stopped at the right first stop when the small winning combination E2 is won.

A combination of symbols for the small win 41 is, for example, "Bell A/Bell B"-"Replay"-"Black 7/Blue 7/Red 7/Blank". As a result, the symbols on the middle reel 31 are different between when the small winning combination 38 is stopped and when the small winning combination 41 is stopped. "Replay" does not stop on the middle reel 31 when the small winning combination 38 stops, but "replay" always stops on the middle reel 31 when the small winning combination 41 stops. Thereby, it is possible to determine whether the small winning combination 38 (small winning combination E1) or the small winning combination 41 (small winning combination E2) is won.

Further, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the small winning combination 38 is stopped when the middle cherry winning combination is not stopped when the small winning combination E1 is won, and the small winning combination 41 is stopped when the middle cherry winning combination is not stopped when the small winning combination E2 is won. may In this way, it is possible to determine whether the small winning combination E1 or the small winning combination E2 has been won when the middle stage cherry is not stopped even at the time of left or middle first stop.

Other methods include, for example, the following methods.
The small wins included in the winning of the small win E1 are the small wins 36 and 38 as in the above embodiment. Further, the small winning combination included in the winning of the small winning combination E2 is also the small winning combination 36, and the small winning combinations 37 and 38, as in the above embodiment. When the small winning combination E1 or E2 is won, the small winning combination 36 (middle stage cherry) can be stopped when the small winning combination E1 or E2 is won, and when the small winning combination E1 or E2 is won, the small winning combination 36 (middle stage cherry) can be stopped. When the small winning combination E2 is won, the small winning combination 38 is stopped by the operation timing of the stop switch 42 at the right first stop.
When the minor winning combination E1 or E2 is won and the small winning combination 38 is lost, the combinations of different symbols are stopped. In this way, it may be determined whether the small win E1 or E2 is won.

(14) When 1BBA+small win E1 is won and the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the predetermined timing of the next game is reached, the effect (continuous effect, etc.) indicating whether or not to shift to the advantageous section is not output. is preferred. This is because the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, so the player knows that the transition to the advantageous section is in progress. However, it is possible to output a continuous effect as to whether or not 1BBA (special combination) is won. In addition, when it is determined to win 1BBA + small hand E1 and to move to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is always not lit even after a predetermined timing (always in the figure At the timing 2) indicated by 23, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the arrival of the predetermined timing of the next game of the game in which the minor winning combination E1 was won, so that the small winning combination E1 is solely won and the advantageous section is entered. In such a case, it is not necessary to output an effect or the like inciting whether or not the player has won the 1BB.

(15) In the present embodiment, if the pushing order is incorrect when winning the small combination B group, it is possible to win the one-piece combination. However, the invention is not limited to this, and the number of small wins that can be won when the pushing order is incorrect when the small win group B is won may be any number. Furthermore, the dropout rate when the pressing order is incorrect when winning the small winning group B is set to 75% in the present embodiment, but it is not limited to this and can be set variously such as 50%.
Furthermore, it is also possible to set such that even if the pressing order is incorrect when winning the small win group C, the winning combination will be missed with a certain probability as in the case of winning the small win group B.

(16) In the above embodiment, during 1BBA operation, the number of games (expected value) of setting 6 is set to be larger than that of setting 1. For example, when the number of games during 1BBA operation reaches a predetermined number, it is advantageous. I tried to add the section.
However, on the contrary to the above, during 1BBA operation, setting 6 is smaller than setting 6 by increasing the winning probability of setting 6 for minor hand A and lowering the winning probability of setting 6 for small hand E2. It may be the number of times (expected value). In this case, for example, when the operation of 1BBA is completed with a small number of games (setting 6 is easier to achieve than setting 1), an advantageous section may be added.

(17) In this embodiment, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section when a conditional device that does not include a special role that can be carried over, for example, when a small winning combination E1 is won alone, the advantageous section is displayed by a predetermined timing. We decided to light the section display LED 77 . Here, the "predetermined timing" is not limited to the timing shown in the above embodiment, and can be set variously. For example, in the game when the minor winning combination E1 is won, when the winning determination is finished, when the payout of medals is finished in the game, when the payout of medals is finished.

Also, although it does not occur in the present embodiment, for example, when it is decided to shift to an advantageous section in a game in which a replay wins, when the automatic bet ends based on the replay win, or the next game (replay) starts For example, when the switch 41 is operated, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit.

(18) When "1BBA+small winning combination E1" is won, the small winning combination 36 can be won by operating the stop switch 42 with the left or middle first stop, so the middle stage cherry can appear. However, when the winning flag is only the small winning combination E1, the middle stage cherry can appear, and when the winning flag of 1BBA is also set, the middle stage cherry does not appear in any pressing order (all small winning combinations 38 are won). Stop control may be performed as follows.
When controlled in this way, there is a demerit that when "1BBA+small win E1" is won, even if it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the cherry in the middle stage cannot be displayed to arouse the player.

On the other hand, even when the small winning combination E1 is won alone after reaching the inside of 1BBA, the standing winning flag is "1BBA+small winning combination E1", so the same stop control as above can be employed.
As described above, it is not possible to decide to move to the advantageous section while inside. , I have the impression that I wasted a lot. On the other hand, if the stop control as described above is performed, the middle cherries will not appear at all inside, so that the player will not be given the impression that the player has made a wasteful draw.

In particular, as a combination of symbols for the small win 38, there is "Bell A/Bell B"-"Cherry"-"Black 7/Blue 7/Red 7/Blank" (Fig. 11). The pattern 02 "Bell A/Bell B"-"Cherry"-"Bell A/Bell B" is similar. Therefore, by making the combination of the symbols of the minor winning combination 38 appear, it is possible to make it look like a winning combination of the minor winning group B (not to look like a rare winning combination).
The above is the same when winning "1BBA + small hand E2", when winning the small hand E1 alone after being inside 1BBB, or when winning the small hand E2 alone after being inside 1BBB is.

(19) As shown in FIG. 17, non-RT and RT1 have the same probability of winning a replay (set number is "8978"). However, without being limited to this, the winning probability of the RT1 replay may be set higher than the winning probability of the non-RT replay.

(20) In the present embodiment, after the 1BBB operation is completed, the process is shifted to RT1, a lottery for replay E is performed in RT1, and an advantageous section is added if the replay E is won. However, not limited to this, when shifting to RT1 during the advantageous section, it is possible to set the advantageous section to an additional specialized zone (a state in which the frequency of addition is high, a state in which the number of times of addition is increased). Then, pattern symbols are displayed, and the addition specialized zone is continued until the transition to RT2, and every time a predetermined condition is met in this RT1 (not limited to the winning of replay E), the addition of the advantageous section is executed. good too.

(21) In the present embodiment, RT after 1BBA operation is completed is defined as non-RT, and RT after 1BBB operation is completed is defined as RT1. However, instead of moving to different RTs in this way, they may be moved to the same RT. For example, it may be shifted to non-RT after the end of 1BBB operation. In this case, after the 1BBB operation in the advantageous section is completed, the advantageous section may be set as an additional specialized zone.

(22) In this embodiment, as management information, the advantageous section ratio (total), the continuous role ratio (6000 games and total), and the role ratio (6000 games and total) are displayed. It is also possible to calculate and display management information such as a payout rate.
Methods for calculating the payout rate include, for example, the following methods.
a) "Total number of payouts x 100" ÷ "Total number of games excluding replays after winning a replay"
b) "(total number of payouts + number of replay wins x 3) x 100" ÷ "total number of games played"
When a) is employed, each buffer is provided for storing "total number of payouts x 100" and "total number of games excluding replay after winning replay". Also, when b) is employed, a buffer for storing "(total number of payouts + number of replay wins x 3) x 100" is provided. It is also possible to provide separate buffers for "total number of payouts x 100" and "replay winning times x 300" and add the values of both.

It should be noted that "3" in "Replay winning times x 3" means the number of bets on the game when the replay wins. For example, if the number of bets varies depending on the game state, etc., the value is not limited to "3", but the value bet on the game when the replay wins (for example, "2" or "1"). There may be games to play.
In addition, a storage area for storing the total number of games played, the total number of payouts per se, and the number of replay wins per se (may be "the number of wins in replay x the value bet on the game when the replay wins") is provided, and the payout rate is determined. When calculating, the value may be multiplied by 100 before calculation.

Furthermore, as for the calculation methods of a) and b), a method of repeating subtraction is adopted in the same manner as the calculation method described above.
By displaying the payout rate as one piece of management information and comparing it with the designed payout rate, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine is fraudulent. Furthermore, in this case as well, if the lighting mode is changed according to whether the total number of games played is 6000 games or more or 175000 games or more, it is possible to more accurately determine whether the gaming machine is illegal. It is possible to determine whether
Any type of information indicating the payout rate may be displayed as long as it can be distinguished from other management information. For example, digit 6 is displayed as "P." to display the payout rate (three-digit numerical value).

(23) In the present embodiment, it has been explained that the upper limit counter 69b is a decrement counter and may be an increment counter. Here, adopting an increment counter as the upper limit counter 69b has the following merits.
When the count value of the upper limit counter 69b reaches the upper limit value, for example, when the count value becomes "1500" in the case of an increment counter, the advantageous interval is forcibly ended. default value). The parameters to be initialized include, for example, the advantageous interval counter 69a, the upper limit counter 69b, the number of times of the instruction function activated game (when the instruction function is activated when winning the minor winning group B), and the like. "0" is optimal as the value at the time of initialization. Furthermore, it is preferable that the addresses of the RWM 53 storing the parameters to be initialized are consecutive. Specifically, for example, "F100", "F101", "F102", and so on.

This is similar to the initialization process of the RWM 53 accompanying a setting change, and the process of inserting "0" into the address of the RWM 53 within a predetermined range can be repeatedly performed while shifting the address by 1, so the initialization can be simplified. This is because it can be executed in a standardized process. It should be noted that the parameters that are cleared when the advantageous section is the upper limit value are also initialized when the settings are changed.
Note that the addresses of the RWM 53 that store the parameters to be initialized are assigned with regularity (for example, "F100", "F102", "F104", etc.), and "0" is assigned to the addresses. Even when the process of inserting is repeatedly performed while shifting the address by a predetermined value ("2" in the above case) for initialization, the process can be simplified.

Here, when the upper limit counter 69b is a decrement counter, when the count value is "0", it may be "0" due to initialization, or the advantageous section is the upper limit value (1500 games). ) and become "0" cannot be determined from the count value. Therefore, when judging whether or not the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached based on the count value of the upper limit counter 69b, the count value of the upper limit counter 69b and data indicating whether or not it is the advantageous section (in a predetermined area of the RWM 53). stored).
On the other hand, when the upper limit counter 69b is an increment counter, the count value of the upper limit counter 69b is read, and if it is "1500", it can be determined that it is the upper limit of the advantageous section. That is, it is possible to determine whether or not the upper limit is reached based only on the count value of the upper limit counter 69b.

(24) The updating of the data of the RWM 53 shown in FIGS. 27 to 30 and the processing of FIGS. 32, 36, and 37 are executed at the end of each game, more specifically, after winning determination processing. .
On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the management information such as the advantageous section ratio is always displayed. Therefore, for example, the same management information (for example, the advantageous section ratio) may be displayed multiple times during one game. .
It is also conceivable that the advantageous section ratio and the like are calculated each time they are displayed.
As described above, it is possible that the same management information (for example, the advantageous section ratio) is calculated multiple times during one game.
(25) The above embodiment and various modifications are not limited to being implemented independently, and can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

Next, the third embodiment and subsequent embodiments of the present invention will be described.
In the third and subsequent embodiments, terms have the following meanings.
"Instruction game section" refers to a game section in which the instruction function operation game is always executed in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, or the execution frequency is increased.
The "instructed game section" is similar to conventional AT (abbreviation for "assist time";"ART" when AT is executed at RT with a high replay winning probability).
In the following description, the "instructed game section" will be referred to as "AT" as necessary.

"Always execute the instruction function activation game" means a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, specifically, when replay group B is won, when replay group C is won, and when small combination B is won. , and when a small win group C is won, the instruction function must be activated.
In addition, since the AT of this embodiment is basically executed at RT3 (high replay probability), it is basically "ART", but it may fall to RT2 due to the player's mistake in operating the stop switch. Continue AT even if you fall from RT3 to RT2. Furthermore, AT may be executed at RTs other than RT3 and RT2. Therefore, an AT at an RT that does not have a high replay probability, such as RT3, is not strictly an "ART". Also, when the player falls from RT3 to RT2 during AT, the instruction function is operated to return to RT3 when the replay B group is won, and the correct pushing order is displayed by the operation of the instruction function.

On the other hand, ``increase the frequency of execution'' means, for example, not activating the indication function at ``100%'' when winning the small win group B or minor win group C, for example, activating the indication function at 95%. It is a concept that includes the case of
As will be described later, it is conceivable that during the instruction game period, when a small win group B is won, a lottery is held as to whether or not to activate the instruction function, and when the lottery is won, the instruction function is activated. In such a case, it is not necessary to "always operate the instruction function", so it is defined as "execution frequency is increased".

As described above, since the instruction game section is a game section in which the instruction function operation game is executed, it is necessary to be an advantageous section as a premise. Therefore, the indicated game section is always an advantageous section, and if the indicated game section is a normal section or a waiting section (hereinafter, the normal section and the waiting section may be collectively referred to as "unadvantageous section"). no.
Also, the start and end of the instructed game section can be arbitrarily set. For example, the instructed game section may be started simultaneously with the start of the advantageous section. Alternatively, even if the advantageous interval is started, the instructed game interval may be started when the condition for starting the instructed game interval is satisfied in the advantageous interval without immediately starting the instructed game interval.

Furthermore, the end condition of the instructed game section may be determined at the start of the instructed game section, or the end condition may not be determined at the start of the instructed game section.
In the case where the condition for ending the designated game section is determined by the start of the designated game section, the designated game section may be extended after starting the designated game section.
Here, various parameters (variables) can be used to define the instructed game section. For example, firstly, the end condition of the designated game section may be set by the number of games played. Specifically, at the start of the designated game section, the number of games played in the designated game section may be set to, for example, "50" games or "100" games.

Secondly, the end condition of the instructed game section is set by the number of payouts. If it sets in this way, it will become the end conditions similar to a special game. Specifically, the end condition of the instructed game section may be set to, for example, "the number of payouts exceeds 300".

Furthermore, thirdly, the end condition of the designated game section is set by the number of difference. Specifically, the end condition of the instructed game section may be set to "the number of difference exceeds 200".
Furthermore, fourthly, the end condition of the indicated game section can be set by the number of operation of the indicated function when the small win group B and the small win group C (or only the small win group B) are won. Specifically, the end condition of the instruction game section is set to ``the number of operation of the instruction function when winning the small winning combination B and the small winning combination C is 50'', and the number of operation of the instruction function is set to 50 times. Ending the instructed game section can be mentioned.

In the designated game section determined as described above, when extending the designated game section, the parameters defining the designated game section are changed (also referred to as "extension", "addition", and "addition").
For example, in the designated game section of 100 games, when the designated game section is extended at the 50th game and the number of games is added by 30 games, the remaining number of games in the designated game section is changed from 50 games to 80 games. Be changed.
In the case of setting the instructed game section by the number of payouts, the difference number, or the number of operation of the instruction function, similarly to the above, when extending the instructed game section, the value to be added to these parameters is determined, and the remaining parameters are determined. Add (add) the value obtained.

Moreover, based on the transition of the game state, the instruction game section (AT) may be started and ended.
Here, the "game state" can include a control state controlled by the main control board 50 in addition to the RT (lottery state) described above. That is, the game state is a concept including both the lottery state and the control state.
Also, the "control state" is a game state that can be determined independently of the RT (as will be described later, there may be a control state linked to the RT).
Control states include concepts such as omen, CZ (abbreviation for “chance zone”), AT, and normal, for example. More specifically, as the control state performed in the advantageous section, the state (high probability state) or low state (low probability state) with a high probability of transition to the instructed game section (AT), or the instructed game section (AT) As the control state, there are various control states in consideration of game characteristics, such as a state where the added winning probability of the designated game section (AT) is high (such as a special zone for adding) or a state where the probability is low.
The control state of the normal section is normal, and the control state of the advantageous section is omen, CZ, or AT.

For example, the control state is changed from "normal" to "foreshadow" at the same time as the transition to the advantageous section. This portent has a case of transition (promotion) to CZ and a case of transition (fall) to normal. When the condition for transition to CZ is satisfied during the precursor, the transition is made to CZ, and when the condition for transition to normal is satisfied, the transition is made to normal.
In addition, when shifting to CZ, there are cases where it shifts (promotes) to AT and cases where it shifts (falls) to omen or normal. When the condition for transition to AT is satisfied in CZ, the transition is made to AT, and when the condition for transition to precursor or normal is satisfied, the transition is made to precursor or normal respectively.

In the present embodiment, when shifting to AT, when the same RT shift (FIG. 22) as in the first embodiment is performed, control is performed so that the user stays at RT3. For example, when it is decided to shift to AT in RT2, when the replay B group is won, the instruction function is operated to display the correct pressing order for shifting to RT3. Furthermore, after the shift to RT3, the correct order of pressing for maintaining RT3 is displayed by the operation of the instruction function when the replay C group is won in order not to fall from RT3.

Also, for example, a finite RT may be provided, and AT may be used while staying at the finite RT. In this case, the AT terminates when transitioning from its finite RT to another RT.
Note that "limited RT" means that the player stays at that RT until a predetermined number of games are played, and when the predetermined number of games is played, the condition for ending the RT is satisfied and the player moves to another RT.
For example, when shifting to finite RT after the end of a special game, AT is executed in this finite RT. Then, when the predetermined number of games is consumed in the finite RT, it shifts to the RT corresponding to the normal section, and the AT, that is, the instructed game section and the advantageous section are ended.
In addition, as in the first embodiment, when winning a special role moves to RT4 (internal RT), for example, when winning a special role in limited RT, the RT may be switched. In this case, the finite RT ends when the special combination is won, and after the special game ends, it is possible to start from a predetermined RT (for example, non-RT in FIG. 59) different from the finite RT.
On the other hand, in the case of specifications that do not shift to RT when a special role is won, even if a special role is won during the limited RT, the limited RT is not ended, and after the special game is finished, the game has been running until then. It is possible to restart from the middle of the finite RT.

In addition, since the signs and CZ are executed in the advantageous section, they are game sections in which the instruction function can be activated. Therefore, it is arbitrary whether the indicating function is activated or not, but since it is during AT that the indicating function is always or frequently activated, the indicating function is not activated during omen or CZ as much as during AT. During an omen or during a CZ, there are cases where the instruction function is operated at a small rate, and where the instruction function is operated only once. It should be noted that, with the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, it shifts from normal to omen, and before moving from that omen to CZ or AT, it may fall to normal (normal section). section), it is necessary to execute the instruction function activation game at least once.

In particular, when moving to an advantageous section, in order to quickly achieve "at least one instruction function activation game is executed in the advantageous section", the instruction function is activated when the first minor combination B group is won. .
Also, since it is assumed that the AT is in an advantageous section, the AT also ends when the advantageous section ends. Therefore, for example, when the AT has the number of remaining games, and the upper limit of the advantageous interval of 1500 games is reached, the advantageous interval and the AT are terminated.

"Freeze" means to suspend the progress of the game for a predetermined period of time to delay it. It is to put the function related to (receipt of stop operation of the reel 31) in a temporary stop state. While executing such a freeze, outputting various effects during this freeze period can be mentioned.
Freezing is performed, for example, at the end of AT. On the other hand, when only CZ is executed (when AT is not executed) after transition to the advantageous section, freezing is not executed. Therefore, after shifting to the advantageous section, freezing may or may not be executed at the end of the advantageous section.

<Third Embodiment>
The third embodiment is characterized in that the number of AT games can be increased.
As described above, there are various AT parameters, but in the third embodiment, the AT end condition is determined by the number of games played.
In the third embodiment, the processing on the main control board 50 side will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 (example 1) to 52 (example 10).
Also, examples 1 (FIG. 53) and 2 (FIG. 54) will be described as processing on the sub-control board 80 side.
Also, in the following example, AT is started at the same time as the start of the advantageous section. Then, the advantageous section ends at the same time as the AT ends. That is, "AT=advantageous section".
However, as in the first embodiment described above and the fourth embodiment described later, etc., it is of course possible to have a case where it is an advantageous section but a non-AT period (for example, a sign, CZ, pullback period, special game, etc.) (more on this later).

Furthermore, the upper limit counter described in the following example corresponds to the upper limit counter 69b of the first embodiment. Furthermore, in Examples 1 to 10 below, an AT counter, an add-on counter, an advantageous section counter, etc. are provided (this does not mean that these three counters are always provided in all examples).
In the flowcharts of FIGS. 43 (Example 1) to 52 (Example 10), the same step numbers are given to the same processes. The description of the step numbers that are the same as the step numbers that have already been described will be omitted as appropriate.
Also, the count value by the counter is abbreviated as "counter value".
Furthermore, "clearing" the counter value means initializing the counter value (setting the counter value to "0" in the case of an increment counter).

In the third embodiment, when the condition device corresponding to the addition of the advantageous section in the first embodiment (the condition device shown in FIG. 17) is won during AT, the number of AT games is increased. The number of games to be added may be predetermined according to the condition device, or the number of games to be added may be determined by lottery when the condition device to be added is won.
For example, in FIG. 17, when winning the small winning combination E1 with the set number "250", the number of additional games is determined to be "50" (50%), "100" (40%) or "200" (10%). to do. Further, when winning the small winning combination E1 with the set number "750", the number of additional games is determined to be "30" (50%), "50" (30%) or "100" (20%). be done.
In addition, regardless of the above example, even if the number of AT top-up games is predetermined based on the control state and the condition device, or the number of AT top-up games is drawn based on the control state and the condition device. good. In this case, for example, even if the same condition device is won, the number of added games determined or drawn can be varied depending on the control state during execution.

In the third embodiment, as described above, "AT=advantageous interval", and the upper limit of the advantageous interval is 1500 games as in the first embodiment. Therefore, the maximum number of ATs is 1500 games.
Here, when the AT is started, the initial value of the number of AT games is determined, and during the AT, the (remaining) number of AT games is added according to the winning condition device.
When the number of AT games is added, the total number of AT games (meaning the sum of the number of completed AT games and the remaining number of games. The same shall apply hereinafter.) Regardless of whether or not it exceeds "1500", it is unlimited. There are a case where addition is executed and a case where addition exceeding "1500" is not executed.
As a result of adding the number of AT games, even if the total number of AT games exceeds "1500", the number of AT games to be executed is limited to "1500".

Furthermore, when adding the number of games during AT, a method of executing the addition under the same conditions from the beginning to the end, and making it difficult to add as the upper limit of 1500 games is approached (the expected value of the number of additions decreases ) method. To give an example of the latter, the initial value of the number of games played by the AT is, for example, "100". The number of additions "100" is selected with a probability of 80%, but when the total number of AT games played is "1000" or more, when the same condition device as above is won, the addition is made with a probability of 80%. Such is the case when the number "50" is selected.
In the case of controlling in this way, there are cases where the addition is continued even if the total number of AT games played exceeds "1500", and where the addition is stopped.
Furthermore, when the addition is continued even if the total number of AT games exceeds "1500", a method of storing the value even when the value exceeds "1500" and a method of storing the value exceeding "1500" and how to clear the value.

The following FIG. 43 (example 1) is an example in which even if the total number of AT games exceeds "1500" (regardless of the total number of games played), addition is executed (added to the counter) without any limitation.
44 (Example 2) to FIG. 46 (Example 4) are examples in which addition is not executed (not added to the counter) when the total number of AT games exceeds "1500". In this case, if the additional lottery itself is not executed, or if the additional lottery itself is executed, after the additional lottery, it is determined whether or not the total number of AT games played exceeds "1500", and if it exceeds "1500", A case of clearing the additional lottery result is mentioned. The latter is adopted in FIGS. 44 (example 2) to 46 (example 4).

In addition, when it is decided to add, freeze may occur. This is for generating a freeze and outputting an additional effect (the number of games to be added, etc.) during that time.
However, if it is decided to add the number of games, and after the freeze occurs, if the total number of games played by AT exceeds "1500" and the additional number is cleared, the addition will be made even if the freeze occurs. There will be things that are not done.
For this reason, for example, after winning the condition device to be added in the game this time, as a result of performing the addition lottery, it is decided to add the addition, and after confirming that the number of additions will be added to the remaining number of games of AT, For example, in the next game, there is a control that causes a freeze along with an additional effect.

Furthermore, in FIGS. 47 (Example 5) to 49 (Example 7), when the total number of AT games played becomes “1000” or more (that is, when it approaches the upper limit “1500”), the expected value of the number of additions is reduced. This is an example of Here, when the expected value of the additional number is to be reduced, it is possible to reduce the additional winning probability, to reduce the additional number, or to perform both of these.

Furthermore, in FIGS. 50 (Example 8) to 52 (Example 10), when the total number of AT games played reaches "1000" or more (that is, approaches the upper limit "1500"), the winning combination (the winning condition device) This is an example of performing an additional lottery by lowering the grade of . Here, "lowering the grade of the winning combination" means, for example, the following method.
As shown in the first embodiment, a small winning combination E1 with a registered number of "250" and a small winning combination of "750" are provided as shown in FIG. shall be provided.
Here, the small winning combination E1 with the registered number "250" is a conditional device that is less likely to be won than the small winning combination E1 with the registered number "750". In such a case, the expected value of the added number when winning the small winning combination E1 with the registered number "250" is x1, and the expected value of the added number when winning the small winning combination E1 with the registered number "750" is x2 ( x2<x1).
In addition, as an example of changing the expected value of the number of additions, a method of providing a plurality of types of lottery tables in advance and changing the lottery table used in the addition lottery is adopted.

Then, when the AT total number of games played is less than "1000", when the small winning combination E1 with the registered number "250" is won, an additional lottery is performed with the expected value x1, and the small winning combination E1 with the registered number "750" is won. When, an additional lottery is performed with the expected value x2.
Next, when the AT's total number of games played is "1000" or more, both when the small winning combination E1 with the registered number "250" and the small winning combination E1 with the registered number "750" are won, An additional lottery is performed with the expected value x2.
As a result, when the small winning combination E1 with the registered number "250" is won, the grade is lowered to the small winning combination E1 with the registered number "750", and the additional lottery is performed.

Alternatively, when the total number of games played by the AT is "1000" or more, if the small winning combination E1 with the registered number "250" is won, an additional lottery is performed with the expected value x2, and the small winning combination E1 with the registered number "750" is won. When winning, an additional lottery may be performed with an expected value x3 (x3<x2).
The expected values x1 to x3 are assumed to be values exceeding "0", but may be "0", for example. An additional lottery with the expected value of the added number "0" means, for example, setting the winning probability of the added lottery to "0", or winning the additional lottery itself, but winning the added number "0". .

Further, for example, it is assumed that the expected value of the number of additions when winning the minor combination E1 is x11, and the expected value of the number of additions when winning the minor combination D is x12 (x12<x11).
In this case, when the AT's total number of games played is less than '1000', when the small winning combination E1 is won, the additional lottery is performed with the expected value x11, and when the small winning combination D is won, the additional lottery is performed with the expected value x12. .
Next, when the total number of games played by the AT is "1000" or more, when the small winning combination E1 is won, the winning of the small winning combination D is replaced and an additional lottery is performed with the expected value x12.
Even if the winning combination is replaced with a winning combination of a lower grade in order to lower the grade of the winning combination, the winning combination itself is not changed.

Also, in the above example, the threshold value of the total number of games played by the AT at which the expected value of the add-on number is changed is set to "1000", but it is not limited to "500", "800", "1200". ”, “1300”, “1400”, etc. can be set in accordance with the specifications of the slot machine.

(Example 1)
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example 1 of control processing on the main control board 50 side.
First, the main control board 50 includes, as counters, an AT counter for counting the number of games completed during AT and an upper limit counter for counting the upper limit number of games "1500" in the advantageous section.
In the third embodiment, "100" is given as an initial value (the number of games played) at the start of AT. Therefore, "100" is set in the AT counter at the start of AT. Then, each game is decremented by "1" (decrement counter).

The upper limit counter is set to the initial value "1500" at the start of AT. Then, each game is decremented by "1" (decrement counter).
From the above, when the AT counter or the upper limit counter becomes "0", the end condition of AT is satisfied.
If 1BB is won during AT, the AT counter is not updated (counting is interrupted) until the end of the 1BB game. On the other hand, the upper limit counter is updated every game even during a 1BB game. That is, since the AT counter is not updated during the internal game and the 1BB game, after the 1BB is finished, the AT counter value at the time of winning the 1BB is restarted.
Furthermore, the advantageous section flag corresponds to the 8th bit in the segment data of digit 2 in the first embodiment. is set.

In FIG. 43(a), in step S401, the main control board 50 (main CPU 55) performs command transmission processing at the time of game start to the sub control board 80. FIG. This process is the process shown in (b) in the figure, which will be described later. Next, the process proceeds to step S402 to execute control when the start switch 41 is operated. In step S402, it continues to detect whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to the next step S403.

In step S403, an internal lottery process is executed. This process is the same as the winning combination lottery performed by the winning combination lottery means 61 in the first embodiment. In the next step S404, an additional lottery is performed. Here, the "addition" is an increase in the number of AT games played. Therefore, when the game is not in AT (in a normal section and in an advantageous section but not AT), the additional lottery in step S404 is not executed. The additional lottery in step S404 is the process shown in (c) in the figure.
In addition, in this embodiment, when winning the conditions device shown in FIG. 17 of the first embodiment, an additional lottery for AT is executed.
Also, it is assumed that the number of additions and the winning probability thereof are defined in a lottery table to be described later.

Next, in step S405, the main control board 50 transmits a command to the sub control board 80 when the start switch 41 is operated. This process is the process shown in (d) in the drawing, which will be described later.
In the next step S406, it is continuously determined whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped, and when it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S407. In step S407, variable update processing is performed as processing at the end of the game. This process is the process indicated by (e) in the drawing. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

When the process proceeds to step S401 of FIG. 43(a), the game start command transmission process of FIG. 43(b) is executed.
First, in step S411, the AT counter value is transmitted. In the next step S412, the upper limit counter value is transmitted. Furthermore, in the next step S413, the value of the advantageous section flag is transmitted. As for the value of the advantageous section flag, "1" is transmitted when it is in the advantageous section, and "0" is transmitted when it is not in the advantageous section. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends. Through the above processing, the main control board 50 transmits the three parameters of the AT counter value, the upper limit counter value, and the value of the advantageous section flag to the sub control board 80 .

If it progresses to step S404 of Fig.43 (a), the addition lottery of the same figure (c) will be performed.
First, in step S421, a lottery table is set. This lottery table is stored in advance in the ROM 54, and defines the number of additions corresponding to the winning combination and the winning probability thereof. Specifically, for example, when winning the set number "250" when winning the small win E1 alone, the probability of determining the number of additions to "50" is 60%, and the probability of determining the number of additions to "40" A setting of 40% may be mentioned. In addition, when winning the set number "750" when winning the small winning combination E1 alone, the probability of determining the number of additions to "30" is set to 50%, and the probability of determining the number of additions to "20" is set to 50%. Things are mentioned. Winning probabilities and additional numbers are defined for other conditional devices as well.

In the next step S422, an additional lottery is performed using the lottery table set in step S421. Then, in step S423, the lottery result (determined additional number) in step S422 is added to the AT counter value. For example, when the AT counter value up to that point is "50" (remaining number of games played) and the addition number is determined to be "20", the AT counter value is updated to "70". Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

When the process proceeds to step S405 in FIG. 43(a), the command transmission at the time of start switch operation in FIG. 43(d) is executed.
Here, in step S431, the AT counter value is transmitted. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends. Therefore, although the AT counter value is transmitted at step S411 at the start of the game, the AT counter value is transmitted again at step S431. When it is not decided to add the number of AT games in the game, the same value is transmitted in steps S411 and S431.

On the other hand, when it is decided to add the number of AT games, in step S431, the updated AT counter value is transmitted. After receiving the AT counter value in step S411, the sub-control board 80 receives the AT counter value again in step S431. Rewrite to AT counter value.
In addition, before step S431, it is determined whether or not AT is added in the game, and only when AT is added, in step S431, the AT counter value for the second time in the game is transmitted. good too.

If it progresses to step S407 of Fig.43 (a), the variable update process of the same figure (e) will be performed.
First, in step S441, "1" is subtracted from the AT counter value. Next, in step S442, "1" is subtracted from the upper limit counter value. In the next step S443, it is determined whether or not the upper limit counter value is "0". When it is determined to be "0" (that is, when the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit of "1500"), the process proceeds to step S445 and subsequent steps in order to end the AT and the advantageous section. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S444.

In step S444, it is determined whether or not the AT counter value is "0" and the number of executions of the instruction function actuation game is "1" or more. Here, when the AT counter value is "0", it means that the number of AT remaining games is "0".
Further, in order to determine whether or not the number of executions of the instruction function operation game is "1" or more, for example, an instruction function operation counter or an instruction function operation flag may be provided.
The instruction function actuation counter can be, for example, an increment counter that is incremented by "1" each time the instruction function is operated. It can be determined to be "1" or more.

Further, the instruction function operation flag is turned off when no instruction function operation game is executed after the advantageous section and AT are executed, and is turned on (even after) when the first instruction function operation game is executed. flag. When this instruction function operation flag is ON, it can be determined that the number of executions of the instruction function operation game is "1" or more.

In addition, as explained in the first embodiment, when the transition to the advantageous section occurs, at least one instruction function operation game (a game having an advantageous pressing order of the stop switch 42) is won with the highest number of payouts. The advantageous section cannot be ended unless the game of time (in the first embodiment, the game when winning the minor combination B group; the same shall apply hereinafter) is executed. In this way, executing at least one instruction function activation game during the advantageous section takes precedence over the end condition of the AT.

However, when the upper limit of the advantageous interval of 1500 games is reached without executing the instruction function activated game even once, the advantageous interval can be ended (refer to the eleventh embodiment (FIG. 69) to be described later). ). Therefore, in Example 1 of FIG. 43, it is first determined in step S443 whether or not the upper limit counter value is "0". is trying to terminate.

In step S444, when it is determined that "the AT counter value is '0' and the number of executions of the instruction function activated game is '1' or more", the advantageous section and the end condition of the AT are satisfied, so the process proceeds to step S445. move on. On the other hand, when it is judged as "No" in step S444, the processing according to this flowchart is ended (AT and the advantageous section are continued in the next game as well).

In step S445, the AT counter value is cleared (set to "0"). Next, in step S446, the upper limit counter value is cleared (set to "0"). Further, the process proceeds to step S447 to clear the value of the advantageous section flag (to "0"). Thus, when the advantageous section ends, it is necessary to clear (reset) all parameters relating to the advantageous section. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

(Example 2)
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example 2 of control processing on the main control board 50 side. Example 2 of FIG. 44 includes an AT counter (initial value “100”, decrement counter), an add-on counter (initial value “0”, increment counter), and an upper limit counter (initial value “1500”, decrement counter) as counters. . Furthermore, as in Example 1, an advantageous section flag is provided.
The addition counter adds the number of additions each time the number of games is added during AT.

In FIG. 44, (a) and (b) are the same as Example 1 in FIG.
In addition, in the addition lottery process of FIG. 44(c), after the addition lottery is executed in step S422, the process proceeds to step S451 to determine whether or not the addition counter value has exceeded a specified number. Here, the prescribed number is set to "1400". That is, "100" is set as the initial value of the number of AT games played, and when the number of additional AT games reaches "1400", the total number of AT games becomes "1500", reaching the upper limit of the advantageous section. reach. For this reason, it is set so as not to add more than the number of games "1400".

In step S451 of FIG. 44(c), when it is determined that the add-on counter value has exceeded the specified number ("1400"), even if the add-on number is determined in the lottery of step S422, the add-on number is not added. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S451 that the add-on counter value is equal to or less than the specified number, the process proceeds to step S452. In step S452, the lottery result (determined addition number) in step S422 is added to the addition counter value. The processing of the next step S423 is the same as in example 1 described above. From the above, for example, when the AT counter value before the addition lottery = "50", the addition counter value = "200", and the determined number of additions is "30", the AT counter value after addition is "80". The counter value becomes "230".

In addition, in the command transmission process when the start switch is operated in FIG. In example 1, the AT counter value is sent to the sub-control board 80, but in example 2, the added counter value is sent. When the add-on counter value reaches "1400", the sub-control board 80 can determine that the add-on has been performed up to the upper limit of the advantageous interval.
Furthermore, in FIG. 4(e), steps S441 to S447 are the same processing as in FIG. 43 (example 1). After step S447, the process proceeds to step S471 to clear the add-on counter value. This is to clear all parameters relating to the advantageous section at the end of the advantageous section.

(Example 3)
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example 3 of control processing on the main control board 50 side.
In the example 3 of FIG. 45, the AT counter (initial value "0" is set as a counter, and an increment counter that adds "1" each time the AT is played one game), the addition counter (initial value "100") , increment counter) and an upper limit counter (same as example 1). Furthermore, the specified number is set to "1500", which is the upper limit number of games played in the advantageous section.

In FIG. 45, (a) and (b) are the same processes as in FIG. 43 (Example 1).
Also, in FIG. 4C, steps S421 and S422 are the same processes as in example 1. FIG. After step S422, the process advances to step S451 to determine whether or not the add-on counter value has exceeded a specified number ("1500"). In Example 3, the fact that the add-on counter value exceeds the prescribed number "1500" means that the total number of AT games has exceeded "1500". Therefore, when the add-on counter value exceeds the specified number "1500", even if the add-on number is determined in step S422, the add-on number is not added, and the processing according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S451 that the add-on counter value is equal to or less than the specified number, the process proceeds to step S452 to add the determined add-on counter value to the add-on counter value. Note that step S423 (addition of the number to be added to the AT counter value) shown in Example 1 of FIG. 43 is not performed. In Example 3, the AT counter is only for counting the number of games played during AT.

44(d) is the same processing as in FIG. 44 (example 2).
Furthermore, in FIG. 4E, in step S481, "1" is added to the AT counter value. During AT, the AT counter value is incremented. In subsequent steps S442 and S443, the same processing as in Example 1 is performed. In the next step S482, it is determined whether or not the AT counter value is greater than or equal to the addition counter value. In Example 3, when the number of AT games is greater than or equal to the number of additional games, it is determined that the end conditions for the AT and the advantageous section are met.

In Example 3 of FIG. 45, the initial value of the AT counter value is "0" and the initial value of the add counter value is "100". Then, when the AT game count reaches "100" without the AT game count being added even once, the AT counter value becomes "100", the add-on counter value becomes "100", and the "AT counter value ≧Addition counter value” is satisfied. If "Yes" is determined in step S482, the process proceeds to step S483. On the other hand, when it is determined to be "No", the advantageous section and AT termination conditions are not satisfied, so the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S483, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the instruction function activation game is "1" or more. If it is equal to or greater than "1", the advantageous section and AT end conditions are satisfied, so the process proceeds to step S445. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is not equal to or greater than "1", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated because the AT and the advantageous section are continued in the next game.
The processing after step S445 is the same processing as in FIG. 44 (example 2).

(Example 4)
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example 4 of control processing on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 4 of FIG. 46, the counters are an add-on counter (an increment counter set to an initial value of "100"), an advantageous section counter (set to an initial value of "0", and during AT and an advantageous section, every game, It has an increment counter that is incremented by "1".
Note that in Example 4, no AT counter is provided. The number of AT games played is counted by an advantageous section counter. That is, the advantageous section counter of Example 4 has the same function as the AT counter (increment counter) of Example 3.
Further, in Example 4, the upper limit counter provided in Example 1 and the like is not provided. In Example 4, the advantageous section counter also serves as the upper limit counter. Also, the specified number is "1500" as in Example 3.

In Example 4 of FIG. 46, (a), (c) and (d) are the same processes as in FIG. 45 (Example 3).
Also, in FIG. 4B, when step S401 is started, the advantageous section counter value is transmitted to the sub-control board 50 in step S491. Next, in step S413, the value of the advantageous section flag is transmitted to the sub-control board 50 in the same manner as in Example 1 and the like.

Furthermore, in step S501 in FIG. 4E, "1" is added to the advantageous section counter value. In the next step S502, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section counter value is "1500" or more. When it is determined that the advantageous section counter value is equal to or greater than "1500", it means that the upper limit of the advantageous section has been reached. On the other hand, when it is determined that the advantageous section counter value is not "1500" or more, the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S503, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section counter value is greater than or equal to the add-on counter value. Similar to step S482 in FIG. 45 (example 3), when the advantageous section counter value is equal to or greater than the add-on counter value, it means that the AT does not have the remaining number of games. If "Yes" is determined in step S503, the process proceeds to step S483, and if "No" is determined, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated (the next game will also continue the advantageous section and AT).
Step S483 is the same processing as in FIG. 45 (Example 3). If "Yes" is determined in step S483, the process proceeds to step S504, and if "No" is determined, the processing of this flowchart is terminated.
When proceeding to step S504, the advantageous section counter value is cleared. The next steps S447 and S471 are the same processes as in FIG. 45 (Example 3).

(Example 5)
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example 5 of control processing on the main control board 50 side.
In example 5 of FIG. 47, the counters are AT counter (set to initial value "100" and decrement counter that decrements by "1" during AT), addition counter (set to initial value "0" and add An increment counter that adds an extra number every time) and an upper limit counter (a decrement counter that is set to the initial value "1500" and is decremented by "1" every game during the advantageous section). Furthermore, the specified number is set to "1000".

In Example 5 of FIG. 47, (a) and (b) are the same processes as in FIG. 43 (Example 1).
In addition, in FIG. 4(c), two types of lottery tables A and B are provided for the lottery for the additional number. The lottery table is not limited to two types, and three or more types (for example, ultra-high probability, high probability, normal, low probability, etc.) may be provided.

The lottery table A is a lottery table in which the probability that the number of AT games is added is set to a normal probability or a high probability. On the other hand, the lottery table B is a lottery table in which the probability of adding the number of AT games is set lower than that of the lottery table A. - 特許庁
Note that this is not restrictive, and the lottery table A may have the expected value of the additional number set to x1, and the lottery table B may have the expected value of the added number set to x2 (x2<x1).
Furthermore, by combining the two, the lottery table A has a high additional winning probability and a medium to large expected value of the additional number, and the lottery table B has a low additional winning probability and an expected value of the additional number. It may be set to be small.

In FIG. 10C, first, in step S511, a lottery table A is set as a standard lottery table for addition. In the next step S451, it is determined whether or not the add-on counter value is equal to or greater than a specified number ("1000"). If it is determined that the add-on counter value is not equal to or greater than the specified number, the process proceeds to step S422, and if it is determined that the add-on counter value is equal to or greater than the specified number, the process proceeds to step S512.

At step S512, the lottery table A set at step S511 is reset to the lottery table B. Then, the process proceeds to step S422. By this processing, when the added number is less than '1000', the additional lottery is performed using the lottery table A, and when the added number is '1000' or more, the additional lottery is performed using the lottery table B. Therefore, the number of additions "1000" is set as a threshold, and the ease of addition is changed.
The processing after step S422 is the same processing as in FIG. 44 (example) 2. FIG. 44(d) and (e) are the same processes as in FIG. 44 (example 2).

(Example 6)
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example 6 of control processing on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 6 of FIG. 48, the counters are AT counter (set to initial value "0", increment counter that adds "1" during AT), addition counter (set to initial value "100" and add An increment counter that adds an extra number every time) and an upper limit counter (a decrement counter that is set to the initial value "1500" and is decremented by "1" every game during the advantageous section). Furthermore, the specified number is set to "1000" as in FIG. 47 (Example 5).

Comparing Example 6 of FIG. 48 with Example 5 of FIG. 47, the following points are different.
As in FIG. 45 (example 3), the AT counter is an increment counter with an initial value of "0", so when the extra lottery is held, the extra number is not added to the AT counter.
In example 6 of FIG. 48, (a) and (b) are the same processes as in FIG. 47 (example 5).
Further, in FIG. 48(c), after the addition lottery in step S422, the process proceeds to step S452, the addition number is added to the addition counter value, and the processing according to this flow chart ends (step S423 in FIG. 47 (example 5) no processing).
47(d) is the same processing as in FIG. 47 (Example 5). 45(e) is the same process as in FIG. 45 (example 3).

(Example 7)
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example 7 of control processing on the main control board 50 side.
In example 7 of FIG. 49, the counter does not have an AT counter as in FIG. counter), and an upper limit counter (an increment counter that is set to the initial value "0" and is incremented by "1" every game during the advantageous section). Furthermore, the specified number is set to "1000" as in FIG. 47 (Example 5).
In Example 7 of FIG. 49, the upper limit counter also serves as an AT counter (a counter that counts the number of AT games played).

In Example 7 of FIG. 49, (a), (b), and (d) are the same processes as in FIG. 46 (Example 4). FIG. 48(c) is the same processing as in FIG. 48 (Example 6).
Furthermore, in the same figure (e), in step S521, "1" is added to the upper limit counter value. Next, proceeding to step S522, it is determined whether or not the upper limit counter value is equal to or greater than "1500". When it is determined that the upper limit counter value is equal to or greater than "1500", the upper limit of continuation of the advantageous section has been reached, so the process proceeds to step S446 in order to end the advantageous section and the AT.

On the other hand, if "No" is determined in step S522, the process proceeds to step S523. In step S523, it is determined whether or not the upper limit counter value is greater than or equal to the add counter value. The upper limit counter is a counter that adds "1" every game during the advantageous section, while the add-on counter is a counter that adds the number of additions to the initial value "100", so the "upper limit counter value ≧Additional counter value” means that the AT does not have the number of remaining games. When it is judged as "Yes" in step S523, the process proceeds to step S483, and when it is judged as "No", AT is continued in the next game, and the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

At step S483, it is determined whether or not the instruction function activation game has been executed once or more, as described above. On the other hand, when it is determined to be "No" in step S483, the process according to this flowchart is finished because the AT is continued in the next game.
The processing of steps S446, S447, and S471 is the same processing as in FIG. 47 (example 3). Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

(Example 8)
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example 8 of control processing on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 8 of FIG. 50, the counters include an AT counter, an add-on counter, and an upper limit counter similar to those in FIG. 44 (Example 2). Also, the specified number is set to "1000" as in FIG. 47 (Example 5).
In example 8 of FIG. 50, in the flowchart of (a), after the internal lottery of step S403, the process proceeds to step S531, and the condition device group setting process is performed. The rest of the processing in (a) is the same processing as in FIG. 43 (Example 1).
44(b) is the same processing as in FIG. 44 (example 2).

FIG. 4(c) is a flow chart showing the condition device group setting process in step S531.
First, in step S541, "0" is set as the condition device group number.
Here, the "conditional device group number" is a number given to each group by dividing the conditional devices targeted for the additional lottery among the plurality of conditional devices drawn in the internal lottery.

In this example, two conditions device group numbers "0" and "1" are illustrated. And it has a lottery table for additional lottery for each condition device group number.
Further, the lottery table A corresponds to the condition device group number "0", and the lottery table B corresponds to the condition device group number "1".
Also, the lottery table B is set so that the expected value of the added number is smaller than that of the lottery table A.

Specifically, for example, in the first embodiment, the expected value of the add-on number when winning the small combination E1 alone is set to "x1", and the expected value of the add-on amount when winning the small combination D is set to "x2". Suppose it is Then, it is assumed that "x1>x2" (the expected value of the number of additions is higher when winning a small winning combination E1 than when winning a small winning combination D).
In this case, the condition device group number corresponding to the minor winning combination D is "1", and the conditional device group number corresponding to the minor winning combination E1 is "0".

Therefore, when the small combination D is won, the lottery table B is set because the condition device group number is "1". On the other hand, when the small winning combination E1 is won, the lottery table A is set because the condition device group number is "0".
Then, the expected value of the added number when the additional lottery is performed using the lottery table A is "x1", and the expected value of the added number when the additional lottery is performed using the lottery table B is "x2". .

Returning to FIG. 50(c).
If the condition device group number "0" is set in step S541, the process proceeds to step S542. In step S542, it is determined whether or not the add-on counter value is equal to or greater than a specified number ("1000"). When it is determined that the number is not equal to or greater than the prescribed number, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the add-on counter value is equal to or greater than the specified number, the process proceeds to step S543 to set the condition device group number "1". Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

Therefore, in the above example, when the small winning combination D is won, the conditional device group number corresponding to the small winning combination D is originally "1", so "1" remains. On the other hand, when the small winning combination E1 is won, in principle, the condition device group number "0" is set, but when the addition counter value is "1000" or more, the condition device group number "1" is reset. set.

In the additional lottery shown in FIG. 4(d), first, in step S551, a lottery table corresponding to the condition device group number is set. In the above example, the lottery table A (expected value "x1") is set when the condition device group number is "0", and the lottery table B (expected value "x2") is set when the condition device group number is "1". be. The subsequent processing after step S422 is the same processing as in FIG. 44 (example 2).
In example 8 of FIG. 50, (e) and (f) are the same processes as (d) and (e) of FIG. 44 (example 2), respectively.

In the above example, two types of condition device group numbers, ie, "0" and "1" are given, but three or more types may be provided. For example, if the expected value of the added number is "x1>x2>x3", and the added counter value is less than "1000", the lottery table with the expected value "x1" is used, and the added counter value is "1000" or more and less than "1200". , the lottery table with the expected value "x2" is used, and the lottery table with the expected value "x3" is used when the add-on counter value is "1200" or more.

In this way, in FIG. 50 (Example 8), when the small winning combination E1 is won, the additional lottery is conducted so as to correspond to the expected value of the small winning combination E1. , the additional lottery is performed so as to correspond to the expected value of the small winning combination D. That is, when the number of additional games increases and approaches the upper limit value of the advantageous section "1500", the grade of the winning combination is lowered and an additional lottery is performed.

(Example 9)
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example 9 of control processing on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 9 of FIG. 51, the counters include an AT counter, an add-on counter, and an upper limit counter similar to those in FIG. 45 (Example 3). Also, the specified number is set to "1000" as in FIG. 47 (Example 5).
In FIG. 51, the processes (a), (b), (e), and (f) are the same as (a), (b), (d), and (e) in FIG. 45 (example 3), respectively. processing.
In addition, the processing of (c) in FIG. 51 is the same processing as (c) of FIG. 50 (Example 8).
Furthermore, the processing of (d) in FIG. 51 differs from (d) of FIG. 50 (example 8) in that it does not have step S423. Others are the same processing as (d) in FIG. 50 (Example 8).

(Example 10)
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example 10 of control processing on the main control board 50 side.
In example 10 of FIG. 52, the counter comprises an add-on counter similar to that of FIG. 49 (example 7) and an upper limit counter (no AT counter). Also, the specified number is set to "1000" as in FIG. 49 (example 7).
In FIG. 52, the processes (a), (b), (e), and (f) are the same as (a), (b), (d), and (e) in FIG. 49 (example 7), respectively. processing.
In addition, the processing of (c) in FIG. 52 is the same processing as (c) of FIG. 50 (Example 8).
Furthermore, the process (d) in FIG. 52 is the same process as in FIG. 51 (example 9).

43 (Example 1) to FIG. 52 (Example 10) have been described above. An upper limit counter (advantageous section counter) that counts the upper limit "1500" of the section is provided.
Also, these counters may be incremented or decremented.
Furthermore, the AT counter may not be provided as shown in FIG. 46 (example 4) and FIG. 49 (example 7). In this case, substantially, the number of AT games is counted with another counter.
Furthermore, in Examples 1 to 10 above, an additional lottery is performed according to the winning condition device. Here, when a conditional device to be added is won, a predetermined number may be added unconditionally without performing a lottery.

Moreover, when performing the addition lottery, the number of additions may be determined regardless of the number of additions up to now, as shown in FIG. 43 (example 1).
On the other hand, when an additional lottery is performed, as shown in FIG. 47 (example 5) and FIG. 50 (example 8), the additional number may be determined in consideration of the additional number up to now.
“Considering the number of additions” means that the more the number of additions is, the smaller the number of additions will be in subsequent addition lotteries (the expected value of the number of additions will be smaller). As a result, the rate of increase in the number of additions that accompanies the progress of the game can be moderated.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 43 (example 1), it is also possible to perform unlimited additions. If the addition is executed without limit, for example, the AT's remaining number of games may become "2000", "3000", or the like. However, even if such a number of games is reached, the upper limit number of games "1500" in the advantageous section is given priority (step S443 in FIG. 43(e)), and the AT ends at that point.

However, in the case where the number of AT games is unlimitedly added as shown in FIG. It may report the number. In this case, the player may misunderstand that the game can be played over the maximum number of times of playing "1500".
Therefore, the sub-control board 80 performs various controls as shown below regarding the notification of the number of AT games and the number of additions, corresponding to the above points.

FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing an example 1 of control processing relating to the advantageous section and AT on the side of the sub-control board 80 and addition.
In Example 1 of FIG. 53 , (a) is processing for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 50 .
For example, taking FIG. 43 (example 1) as an example, the process of receiving the command transmitted in steps S411 to S413 of FIG. 43(b) and step S431 of FIG. 43(d) is executed.
Although the AT counter value or the added counter value is transmitted in Examples 1 to 10 above, the AT counter value and the added number are transmitted in the examples of FIGS. 53 and 54 .

In FIG. 53(a), in step S601, a process of receiving the AT counter value is executed. This process is a process of receiving the AT counter value and storing it in the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80 . In the next step S602, a process ((b) in the drawing) for receiving the additional number is executed. In the next step S603, processing for receiving the advantageous section flag is executed. This process is a process of receiving the value of the advantageous section flag (“0” or “1”) and storing it in the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80, as in step S601. Furthermore, in the next step S604, a process ((d) in the drawing) for receiving the effect group number (see FIG. 21) is executed.

When proceeding to step S602, the process of (b) in the figure is executed.
First, in step S611, the received add-on number is added to the add-on counter. This add-on counter is provided on the sub-control board 80 side. Next, proceeding to step S612, it is determined whether or not the add-on counter value exceeds a specified number. Here, the prescribed number is set to "1500". Therefore, in this example, similarly to FIG. 45 (example 3), when the add-on counter value exceeds "1500", it is determined that the upper limit of the advantageous section has been reached. When it is determined in step S612 that the add-on counter value exceeds the specified number ("1500"), the process proceeds to step S613, and when it is determined that it is equal to or less than the specified number, the process proceeds to step S614.

In step S613, "1" is set to the addition production|presentation suppression flag. Then, the process proceeds to step S614. Here, the ``additional effect suppression flag'' means that when the added number is already ``1500'', the added effect is not output, and when the added number is ``1500'' or less, the added effect can be output. , is a flag for making that determination.
In step S614, the number of additions in the game is saved (in the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80). Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

Further, when proceeding to step S604, the process of (c) in the figure is executed.
First, in step S621, it is determined whether or not the game has an additional number. This judgment is made by judging whether or not the added number saved in step S614 is "0". When it is determined that there is an additional number, the process proceeds to step S622, and when it is determined that there is no additional number, the process proceeds to step S625.
In step S622, it is determined whether or not the addition effect suppression flag is "1". When it is determined to be "1", the process proceeds to step S623, and when it is determined not to be "1", the process proceeds to step S624.

At step S623, an effect without an additional effect is selected. That is, even if the number of additions has reached the prescribed number ("1500") and the addition lottery is won in the game, the number of additions cannot be increased beyond the present, so control is performed so as not to output the addition performance. The effect selected here outputs the normal effect or the effect corresponding to the received effect group number (for example, when the replay is won, the effect (blue, etc.) suggesting the replay win) is output. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined as "No" in step S622 and the process proceeds to step S624, the effect with additional effect can be selected. For example, there is an effect that notifies all or part of the number of additions in the game. In addition, in the game in which the number of additions is determined, it is not always necessary to select an effect with an additional effect, for example, by shifting to a continuous effect, and then selecting an effect with an additional effect after completing a number of games. good too.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S621 that the game does not have an additional number and the process proceeds to step S625, the normal effect is output. As the normal effect, as described above, an effect corresponding to the winning combination (effect group number) in the game is output. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing an example 2 of control processing relating to the advantageous section and AT on the sub-control board 80 side and the addition.
In Example 2 of FIG. 54 , (a) is the process of receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 50 . First, in step S631, a process of receiving a ball output suppression flag is executed. Here, the ball output suppression flag is a flag (command) transmitted from the main control board 60 to the sub control board 80, and when it is "1", it means that the additional effect is suppressed. 0” means that the additional effect is not suppressed. That is, when the ball output suppression flag "1" is transmitted from the main control board 50, it is a command to suppress the additional effect.
In Example 1 of FIG. 53, as shown in (b), the sub-control board 80 side performs the setting processing of the additional effect suppression flag. On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 54, the main control board 60 determines whether or not to suppress the additional effect, and the determination result is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 as a ball output suppression flag.

As a method for the main control board 50 to transmit the ball output suppression flag, for example, the following method can be used.
Taking FIG. 44 (Example 2) as an example, when it is judged as “Yes” in step S451 in FIG. Then, in FIG. 44(d), after step S461, a ball output suppression flag is transmitted.

Example 2 of FIG. 54 is the same as Example 1 of FIG. 53 except for steps S631 and S632.
In step S631, the process of (b) in the figure is executed.
First, in step S641, when the ball output suppression flag is received, it is determined whether or not its value is "1". When it is determined to be "1", the process proceeds to step S642, and when it is determined not to be "1", the process proceeds to step S643.

In step S642, "1" is set to the additional effect suppression flag stored in the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, if it progresses to step S643, "0" will be set to the addition production|presentation suppression flag, and the process by this flowchart will be complete|finished.
Therefore, when the received ball output suppression flag is "1", the additional effect suppression flag on the sub control board 80 side is set to "1", and when the received ball output suppression flag is "0", the additional effect suppression flag is set. to "0". Therefore, in Example 2 of FIG. 54 , the add-on effect suppression flag is switched according to the information transmitted from the main control board 60 .

In FIG. 54(c), as in FIG. 53 (example 1), it is not necessary to determine whether or not the value of the add-on counter exceeds the specified number. In S614, the number of additions is saved.
Also, the effect group number reception process of (d) in the figure is the same process as in FIG. 53 (example 1).

In the case where the sub-control board 80 outputs an additional effect, for example, when the added number determined in the game is "200", the entire added number ("200") may be notified in the effect of the game. However, it is also possible to notify in small increments (indicate by dividing the number of additions) in a plurality of games including the game (for example, continuous performance). Specifically, when the number of additions is "200" in the game, the number of additions "100" is reported in the game, "50" is reported in the next game, and "50" is reported in the next game. and the like.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an image display example of the image display device 23 by the sub-control board 80 regarding the addition during AT, and is a diagram showing Examples 1 to 4. FIG.
First, in Example 1, the image display device 23 before the addition has 1200 "consumed G (meaning 'the number of games completed by AT')" and 300 "remaining G (meaning 'the number of remaining games played by AT')". ” is displayed. Therefore, since "the number of completed AT games + the remaining number of games = 1500", the number of executable AT games has already reached the upper limit.
In this case, in example 1, even if 500 games are added internally (meaning, for example, step S423 in FIG. 43(c)), the display change of the number of additions and the effect related to the addition are performed. Absent. Therefore, the display after the addition remains the display before the addition.

It is of course possible to add "500" to a counter (AT counter, add-on counter, etc.) provided on the sub-control board 80 side when adding 500 games. The number of AT games and the number of additions may be managed by a counter as real numbers, and only the display may be performed as in Example 1. For such control, an internal counter and a display counter are provided on the sub-control board 80 side.
Alternatively, even if 500 games are added, the counter may not be updated.
If the image display is controlled as in example 1, it is possible to suppress the effects related to unnecessary additions.

In example 2, when the number of AT games completed is 1200 games and the remaining number of games is 200 games, when 500 games are added internally, the correct number of remaining games (the remaining number of games after adding ) is not displayed, and the display is switched to another display. In example 2, the remaining number of games may be displayed as "celebration" or "congratulations". Another example is displaying like "?".

In example 2, when the sum of the number of completed AT games and the remaining number of games is "1500" or less, the remaining number of games is displayed. 1500", the number of remaining games is not displayed so that the player can grasp it. When the display of the remaining number of AT games is changed from a specific numerical value to a display other than a numerical value, the player can understand that the addition has been made. However, since no specific numerical value is displayed for the remaining number of AT games, the player cannot grasp the remaining number of AT games.

In addition, in the case where the number of completed games of AT is "1200" and the number of remaining games is "200" before addition, when "500" is added, the remaining number of games of AT may be set to "700" on the counter. , or "300".
In addition, if the display of the remaining number of AT games is "Congratulations" or "Congratulations", if the specification confirms that the AT will continue up to the upper limit of 1500 times, "1500-AT's consumption game By calculating the "number of times" by the player, it is possible to grasp the number of remaining AT games.
Furthermore, the display of "Congratulations" or "Congratulations" informs the player that the total number of AT games played has exceeded "1500", and plays the role of indicating that no more additions will be made. becomes.

Example 3, like Example 2, shows an example in which "500" is added when the AT's number of games played is "1200" and the number of remaining games is "200". Then, in example 3, the number of remaining AT games is increased by "+100" (not shown in FIG. 55) to become "300". That is, the total number of AT games has reached "1500" due to the addition this time.

In Example 3, when the total number of AT games played reaches "1500" or more, the display of both the number of completed AT games and the remaining number of AT games is stopped and replaced with an ending effect (movie). The ending effect continues at least for a plurality of games (for example, several tens of games), and is executed until the number of times AT has completed the game reaches "1500". When the final video of the ending performance prepared in advance is reached before the number of games consumed by the AT reaches '1500', the final video is continued to be displayed or the ending performance is returned to the beginning and the video is repeated. method.
By outputting the ending effect, it is possible to play a role of informing the player that the number of games played will not be added.

In example 4, as shown in example 2, when only the number of AT consumed games is displayed and the remaining number of games is displayed as "celebration" or the like, as described above, the player can display the remaining AT. Although the number of games played cannot be grasped, for example, when the remaining number of games played by the AT is "10", the game information indicating that the AT will not be played beyond 1500 games, such as "It will end in 10 more games", is displayed. to display. It should be noted that "remaining 10 games" shown in Example 4 is an example, and the number of remaining games to start displaying the game information is arbitrary. By displaying game information to the effect that the number of AT games will not be played exceeding "1500", the player can know the remaining number of AT games.
Note that Example 4 can also be used in combination with Examples 1 to 3.

In addition, when an additional performance exceeding 1500 games occurs, the additional effect itself may be displayed as "Congratulations", "Congratulations", or the like.
Furthermore, when an addition exceeding 1500 games occurs, a privilege image that can be displayed only when an addition exceeding 1500 games occurs may be displayed.
Furthermore, the mission in the Myslo game may be set to "occurrence of addition exceeding 1500 games". For example, when "occurrence of extra over 1500 games" occurs a predetermined number of times, the mission is accomplished, and some privilege is given to the player.

In this way, even if an extra game exceeding 1500 games is generated, the extra game cannot be played, but instead, a privilege (profit) is set to prevent the player's motivation from decreasing. It is preferable to keep
In particular, when the number of games played exceeds 1500, it is assumed that a rare role is won, but when the rare role is won, no effect is output for the reason that the total number of games played is "1500" or more. It is unnatural not to.
It should be noted that "my slot game" is, for example, as described in paragraph number "0680" of "Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-104442".

FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining how the effects and the like change as the number of AT games increases in the third embodiment.
In addition, in the third embodiment, "AT=advantageous section" is used, so the number of acquired coins continues to increase during the advantageous section (AT). In the example of FIG. 56, for the sake of simplification of the graph, the AT continues from "0G" to "1500G" and the number of wins continues to increase.
In FIG. 56, (a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of AT games and effects.
In FIG. 56, the horizontal axis indicates the number of AT games played, and the vertical axis indicates the number of wins. The example of (a) is an example in which 500 games are added when the number of completed games in AT (advantageous section) reaches "1200" as shown in Example 2 of FIG.

When the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, the AT ends simultaneously with the end of the advantageous section even if it has the remaining number of games at that time.
Also, the addition performance is performed up to 1200 games, but when winning the addition of 500 games, the addition performance for the winning is not performed. Further, even if a further addition is won after that, the addition effect is not performed.

On the other hand, the effect relating to AT during AT continues until the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games. Also, the display of the number of completed AT games and the remaining number of games is performed up to the 1200th game. , or stop displaying both the number of AT games completed and the remaining number of games as in Example 3 of FIG. (such as the ending effect shown).

FIG. 56(b) shows an example in which (1) the additional lottery probability is gradually lowered (indicated by a solid line in the figure) and (2) with the digestion of the number of AT games when the AT continues the "1500" game. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example (indicated by a dotted line in the figure) in which the instruction frequency is gradually decreased;
In the above (1), for example, as shown in FIG. 47(c), the lottery table A is used until the number of AT games is less than "1000" games, and when it becomes more than "1000" games, the lottery table B Or, as shown in FIG. 50(c), until the number of AT games is less than "1000" games, an additional lottery is performed with a grade corresponding to the winning combination, but if it becomes "1000" games or more This corresponds to an example in which the grade of the winning combination is lowered and an additional lottery is performed.

Also, in the example of (1), when the number of AT games is less than "500" games, the additional lottery probability is set to a high probability, and when the "500" game or more and less than "1000" games, the additional lottery probability is normal probability. When "1000" games or more are played, the additional lottery probability is set to a low probability. It should be noted that even if the AT addition probability is gradually reduced as the number of games is consumed, as long as there is a remaining number of AT games, the increase rate of the number of acquired sheets with respect to the number of games does not change, so the graph is , is the same as in FIG. 56(a).

On the other hand, the example of (2) is controlled so that the instruction frequency is gradually lowered according to the number of AT games played.
Here, the "instruction frequency" means how often the instruction function is operated when the small win group B or small win group C (push order bell) is won during AT (correct order of push) display). For example, when the number of AT games played is less than "500" games, the instruction frequency is set to 100% (instruction frequency "high"). frequency "medium"), and when "1000" games or more are played, the instruction frequency is set to 80% (instruction frequency "low").

For example, when the instruction frequency is 90%, a lottery (90% probability of winning) is executed to determine whether or not to activate the instruction function in the small winning group B or the small winning group C (push order bell). To operate an instruction function when winning a lottery.
In addition, when the instruction frequency is less than 100%, when the replay overlap winning to promote or maintain the RT, the correct pushing order may always be instructed, or the pushing order is the same as when winning the bell. The frequency may determine whether or not to instruct.

If the instruction function does not operate at the time of replay duplicate winning, it may fall to a disadvantageous RT. For example, in the first embodiment (FIG. 22), when replay group C is won during RT3, replay 03 is displayed and the player falls to RT2.
Also, as in the first embodiment, when the pattern design is displayed at RT3, the player falls to RT2. Therefore, in an example such as the first embodiment, if the instruction function does not operate when the winning order of the bell is won, the player may fall to a disadvantageous RT.
If the instruction frequency is gradually reduced as the number of AT games is consumed, the number of cases where the push order is incorrect when the push order bell is won gradually increases, so the increase in the number of acquisitions is less than when the instruction frequency is 100%. increase, making it difficult to increase. (2) in FIG. 56(b) shows this state.

In the third embodiment, "AT=advantageous section" is used.
On the other hand, as in the above-described first embodiment, the later-described fourth embodiment, etc., the advantageous section but the non-AT period (precursor, CZ, pullback period, special game, etc.; hereinafter the same.) To have, of course.
For example, the AT is started after the advantageous section is started and the above-mentioned non-AT period is executed for "n" games.
In this case, when the AT starts, the advantageous section has already completed "n" games.
In this case, when displaying the number of completed games, etc. as an image as shown in FIG. (Example 2) The completion of the n' game is reflected in the internal counter (such as the upper limit counter shown in FIG. 43, etc.), but the image display is not performed (example 2).
In the case of example 1, the specification is to display to the player the number of games played in part or all of the advantageous sections other than the AT, and in the case of example 2, the specification is to display to the player only the number of games played in the AT. Become.
Furthermore, in the case of example 1, a) a case where only the number of games completed in the advantageous section is displayed (the number of games completed by AT is not displayed), and b) both the number of games completed in the advantageous section and the number of games completed by AT are displayed. For example, it may be displayed.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 56(b), when the number of games is less than "500", the additional lottery probability is set to a high probability, and when the number of games is "500" or more and less than "1000", the additional lottery probability is set. The probability is normal probability, and the additional lottery probability is low probability when the number of games is "1000" or more.
Here, as in the above case, it is assumed that AT is started after a non-AT period of 600 games after shifting to the advantageous section.
It should be noted that when the instruction function activated game was hardly executed from the start of the advantageous section to the 600th game, the graph in FIG. Become. Then, when the AT is started from the 600th game, the graph (upper right) shows that the number of acquired coins turns to increase after the 600th game.

In the above example, since 600 games have already been played in the advantageous section at the start of AT, the maximum number of remaining games in the advantageous section at the start of AT is 900 games. Therefore, if this example is applied to FIG. 56(b), for example, if the AT digested game count is less than "300", the additional lottery probability is set to a high probability, and if the AT digested game count is less than "300" or more and "600", the add-on lottery The probability is set to a normal probability, and when the number of AT consumption games is "600" or more, the additional lottery probability is set to a low probability.

Furthermore, in the same manner as described above, when AT is started after a non-AT period of 600 games after shifting to the advantageous section, for example, in the "(c) addition lottery" in FIG. '("Yes" in step S451), the lottery table B may be set.
Here, the prescribed number is set to "600" because, as described above, when the maximum number of remaining games in the advantageous section at the start of the AT is "900" games, the number of games is "2/3". is set as the threshold.
Thus, if the advantageous section is not necessarily AT, for example, AT is not started at the start of the advantageous section, and AT is started after a predetermined number of games, the expected value of addition (additional lottery probability, etc.) is set to AT game When changing based on the completion of the number of times, it is necessary to make a setting that takes into account the number of remaining games in the advantageous section.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described.
As shown in FIG. 1, in the first embodiment, the main control board 50 includes an external signal transmission means 70, which transmits an external signal (sometimes referred to as an "outer end") to the external collective terminal board 100. to send. Specifically, the fourth embodiment is characterized by what kind of external signal is output and at what timing it is turned on/off.
Also, BB in the fourth embodiment is 1BBA, 1BBB, etc. in the first embodiment, and BB games are 1BBA games, 1BBB games, and the like.

FIG. 57 is a diagram showing example 1 (upper stage) and example 2 (lower stage) of time charts of external signals in the fourth embodiment. Also, FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an example 3 of the time chart of the external signal.
In the example of FIGS. 57 and 58, an external signal 1 indicating that BB is in operation (BB game is in progress) and an external signal 2 indicating that AT is in progress are output as external signals. In addition to these external signals, it is also possible to provide an external signal indicating that the player is in an advantageous state (for example, a signal that turns on when either AT or special game is satisfied). is.

In the third embodiment, the AT is started at the same time as the start of the advantageous section, and the advantageous section is finished at the same time as the AT is finished. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, even if the advantageous section starts, the AT does not necessarily start immediately, and for example, when the AT start condition is satisfied during the advantageous section, the AT is started. However, it is the same as the third embodiment in that when the AT ends, the advantageous section ends.

In example 1 of FIG. 57, AT is started after a predetermined number of games have been played after starting the advantageous section. When the AT is started, it turns on the external signal 2, which means the AT signal. Then, it is assumed that BB is won during AT and the BB game is started. With the start of the BB game, an external signal 1 indicating that the BB game is in progress is turned on. Note that the AT is interrupted based on the start of the BB game, and the AT is resumed after the BB game ends. However, the external signal 2 remains on during the BB game.
When the BB game ends, the external signal 1 is turned off. After that, when the AT ends, the external signal 2 is turned off. With the end of AT, the advantageous section also ends (advantageous section display LED 77 turns off). In this example, the AT and the advantageous section are terminated before reaching 1500 games, which is the upper limit of the advantageous section.
When the upper limit of the advantageous interval of 1500 games is reached, the advantageous interval and the AT are terminated even if the AT has the remaining number of games at that time.

Example 2 of FIG. 57 is the same as Example 1 in that the AT is started after the predetermined number of games have been played after starting the advantageous section. Also, the shift to the BB game during AT is the same as in Example 1. Example 2 is an example in which the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied during the BB game. Therefore, the BB game is not finished yet when the end condition of the advantageous section is reached. Then, the BB game ends after the end condition of the advantageous section has passed.

In this case, both the external signal 1 indicating that the BB game is in progress and the external signal 2 indicating that the AT is in progress are turned on until the BB game ends. Then, when the BB game ends, the external signal 1 and the external signal 2 are turned off. Since the advantageous section ends when the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section display LED 77 is also extinguished when the advantageous section ends. Also, since the AT is executed within the advantageous section, the AT also ends when the advantageous section ends.
As described above, in Example 2, the AT ends when the end condition of the advantageous section is reached, but the external signal 2 is turned on even after the end condition of the advantageous section has passed. This can prevent the output of the external signal 2 from being turned off at an unnatural timing.

In addition, as in example 2, as an example of satisfying the termination condition of the advantageous section during the BB game, for example, first, the number of AT games is set in advance at the start of the AT, and the number of games is set during the BB game. There is a case where it is subtracted even if Secondly, there is a case where the upper limit of the advantageous section (1500 games) is reached during the BB game. For example, when the number of AT games is set to "50" and AT is started, when the AT is shifted to the BB game, the counting of the number of AT games may be interrupted. However, the counting of the upper limit "1500" games of the advantageous interval is continued even during the BB game.

Example 3 shown in FIG. 58 is an example in which AT is started after a predetermined number of times of games have elapsed after the start of the advantageous section, as in Example 1 of FIG. When AT starts, external signal 2 is turned on. In Example 3, it is assumed that the BB is not won (the BB game is not entered) during the advantageous section.
Further, Example 3 is an example in which the number of games is added during the AT, and the AT has the remaining number of games even when 1500 games, which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, is reached. Even if the AT has the remaining number of games when reaching 1500 games, which is the upper limit of the advantageous interval, the advantageous interval and the AT are ended. Based on this, the external signal 2 is turned off when 1500 games, which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, is reached.

It should be noted that, in the case of winning a special role just before the end of the advantageous section, when the 1500 games of the advantageous section are completed while the special role is in progress, during the special game in which the special role is won and transitions, the "advantageous section It is not possible to output an effect such as "How many times the special game is played". This is because the data relating to the advantageous section is reset when the advantageous section reaches 1500 games. However, although the actual advantageous interval ends, it is possible to output an effect as if the advantageous interval (AT) continues even during the special game in terms of appearance of the effect.

At the end of the advantageous interval, the data relating to the advantageous interval stored on the main control board 50 side is cleared, but the data relating to the advantageous interval stored on the sub-control board 80 side (transmitted from the main control board 50) is cleared. Data stored based on incoming commands) may be cleared or not cleared.
If it is not cleared, during the special game, it is also possible to display a numerical value exceeding "1500" for the number of games played during the advantageous section.
Also, when winning a special role just before the end of the advantageous section, if a performance such as an ending performance is output, the ending performance may be stopped and the winning of the special role may be announced immediately.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, AT is started or terminated with the transition of the game state (RT or control state). In the fifth embodiment, examples 1 and 2 below will be described.
FIG. 59 is a diagram showing RT transition in Example 1 of the fifth embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 22 of the first embodiment.
In Example 1 of the fifth embodiment, the advantageous section is started at the same time as the start of the BB game. Therefore, in the figure, during 1BBA operation and during 1BBB operation are advantageous sections.
Also, both when the 1BBA operation ends and when the 1BBB operation ends, it shifts to non-RT (this is different from the first embodiment).

Non-RTs maintain the advantage interval. Also, in non-RT, a lottery for replay A alone is not performed, and a lottery for replay C group is performed (as in RT3 of the first embodiment). When the replay C group is won, the instruction function is not activated. Therefore, depending on the player's operation (luck) of the stop switch 42, Replay 01 or Replay 03 wins. Then, when the replay 01 wins, the game shifts to RT5 (RT newly provided in the fifth embodiment), and when the replay 03 wins, the game shifts to RT2.

Incidentally, when the replay C group is won in non-RT, the instruction function does not always have to be activated, and the instruction function may be always activated (the pressing order for winning the replay 01 is displayed). Alternatively, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to activate the instruction function when the replay C group is won.
Alternatively, when transitioning to non-RT based on the end of operation of 1BBA, the instruction function is activated when replay C group is won, and when transitioning to non-RT based on the end of operation of 1BBB, the instruction function is performed when replay C group is won. may not be activated.

RT5 is a finite RT and continues for 50 games. When 50 games have been played in RT5, the game shifts to RT2.
Then, in the fifth embodiment, RT5 is the advantageous section and AT is executed. On the other hand, when it shifts from non-RT or RT5 to RT2, it is set as a normal section (non-AT).
Therefore, when the replay 01 wins in the non-RT (advantageous section and non-AT), the next game is shifted to RT5, and the advantageous section and AT (50 games) are executed. Then, when 50 games have been completed, the game shifts to RT2 (normal section and non-AT).
On the other hand, when replay 03 wins in non-RT (advantageous section and non-AT), the next game is shifted to RT2 (normal section and non-AT).
Then, in RT2, a lottery for the advantageous section and AT is performed.

FIG. 60 is a time chart showing the relationship between the above RT transition and AT. (a) shows an example of shifting to AT. Incidentally, the example of FIG. 60 shows an example of winning 1BB in RT2 and shifting to 1BB game without going through RT4 (inside). When the RT2 shifts to the 1BB game, the advantageous section starts. Then, when the 1BB game ends, it shifts to non-RT, and when replay 01 wins in this non-RT, it shifts to RT5. In RT5, AT of 50 games is executed. When the AT of 50 games is finished, the advantageous section and AT are finished, and the process proceeds to RT2.
On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 4(b), the 1BB game is completed, the game is shifted to non-RT, and Replay 03 wins in this non-RT. In this case, it does not shift to RT5 (AT), it shifts to RT2, and the advantageous section ends.

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing example 2 ((a) to (c)) of the fifth embodiment.
In the fifth embodiment, as described above, the start and end of the advantageous section and AT are RT (lottery state) or a control state controlled and managed by the main control board 50 (regardless of whether the RT is different or the same). In Example 1 of FIG. 60 described above, the advantageous section and AT start with the RT transition, and the advantageous section and AT end with the RT transition.
On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 61, the advantageous section and AT are started by the control state transition, and the advantageous section and AT are ended by the control state transition.

In FIG. 61, (a) has control states of states 1 to 3. FIG. In this example, states 1 and 2 are advantageous sections, and state 3 is a normal section.
State 1 to state 3 are mainly the state when going back and forth between RT2 and RT3 in the first embodiment (FIG. 22). State 3 is the so-called normal state, state 2 is the premonition or pullback period after the end of AT, and state 1 is AT.

In state 3 (normal), a lottery for an advantageous section is executed. The lottery for the advantageous section is similar to that shown in the first embodiment, for example. Then, when the advantageous section is won in state 3 and the game shifts to the advantageous section, the game shifts to state 2, which is an omen. Therefore, when it shifts to a sign, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up.
The omen corresponds to the preparation period until the AT is started. For example, when the state 3 is changed to the state 2, the omen's number of games is determined, and the omen in the state 2 stays until the number of games is completed. do. Note that the indication function does not operate during the omen. Then, when the number of games in state 2 (precursor) is exhausted, the state shifts to AT, which is state 1, from the next game. During State 1 (AT), the indication function is active.

Also, state 1 (AT) continues until the condition for ending state 1 (AT) is met. The number of games played in state 1 (AT) may be fixed, such as "50", or may be added as shown in the third embodiment.
Then, when the termination condition of state 1 (AT) is satisfied, the state shifts to the pullback period of AT which is state 2 . During this withdrawal period, the maximum number of games is predetermined (for example, "20" games).

If a predetermined condition is met during the period of state 2 (pullback period) (for example, when winning a rare role, or when winning an AT lottery executed when winning a rare role, for example), state 1 ( AT). On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is not satisfied during the retraction period of state 2, the state shifts to normal of state 3. Then, at the same time as the transition to state 3, the advantageous section ends and the normal section is entered.
As described above, the state 3, which is normal, is set as a normal section, and the other states 1 and 2 are set as advantageous sections. Transition to AT (state 1) or transition to state 2 (AT withdrawal period).

In the example of FIG. 61(a), it is also possible to set an upper limit to the number of AT transitions. For example, when the upper limit number of times of AT is set to "5", the state 1 is shifted to the state 3 without shifting to the AT withdrawal period (state 2) after the fifth AT is completed. It is also possible to terminate the AT and the advantageous section.

FIG. 61(b) has AT, CZ (chance zone), omen, and normal as control states.
Then, normal is a normal section, and signs, CZ, and AT are advantageous sections.
First, during normal operation, a lottery for transition to the advantageous section is performed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. The number of omen is 32 games at maximum (the number of omen games is determined by lottery). Then, after the number of times of playing the sign is consumed, the game shifts to CZ. CZ is executed until a transition condition to AT is met or a termination condition for CZ is met. When the conditions for shifting to AT are satisfied during CZ, shift to AT. Also, when the end condition of CZ is satisfied before the condition of transition to AT is satisfied during CZ, the process shifts to normal.

Specifically, the conditions for shifting to AT during CZ are, for example, (a) when winning the transition lottery according to the winning hand, (b) when winning the transition lottery performed for each game regardless of the winning hand, (c) if a predetermined special role is won, (d) if the number of times the predetermined special role is won exceeds the specified number of times, (e) if a specific RT is entered, (f) a predetermined Various transition conditions can be determined in accordance with game characteristics, such as when winning a special combination.
Similarly, the conditions for ending CZ are as follows: (a) if the conditions for transition to AT are not satisfied during CZ, (b) if a specific falling hand is won, (c) regardless of the winning hand, every game Various termination conditions can be determined according to game characteristics, such as when the falling lottery is won.
Furthermore, the transition condition to AT in CZ and the end condition of CZ mentioned here may be set as mutually opposite conditions.

AT is performed in the same manner as in (a) above. Then, when the end condition of AT is satisfied, the process shifts to CZ. CZ after the end of AT is positioned in the pullback period of (a) above. If the conditions for shifting to AT are satisfied again during this CZ, the shift to AT can be made. However, when the termination conditions for CZ are satisfied without satisfying the conditions for shifting to AT, the shift is made normally. At the same time as this shift to normal, the advantageous section ends and shifts to the normal section.

It should be noted that, as a general rule, the instruction function activation game is executed during AT, but during state 2 in FIG. 61(a) or during CZ or omen in FIG. It is possible to run an active game.
In particular, since it is necessary to execute at least one instruction function activation game after shifting to the advantageous section, in the example of FIG. A game in which the combination B group is won is set as an instruction function operation game.
Similarly, in the example of FIG. 61(b), among the 32 omen games, the game in which the small win group B is first won is set as the instruction function actuating game.

FIG. 61(c), like FIG. 61(b), is an example having control states of normal sign, CZ, and AT. However, unlike (b), this example shows an example in which the transition to AT was not possible.
As shown in (c) in the figure, when the game shifts from normal to omen, the game shifts to CZ after a predetermined number of games (up to 32 games). If the conditions for shifting to AT are satisfied during this CZ, the shift to AT is made as shown in (b), but when the end conditions for CZ are satisfied before the conditions for shifting to AT are satisfied (for example, a predetermined number of games (32 games) are met. ) digestion) shifts to the pullback period. In the pullback period, again, a lottery for transition to CZ is performed, and when the conditions for transition to CZ are satisfied before the conditions for transition to normal (for example, digestion of a predetermined number of games (32 games)) are satisfied, transition to CZ ( (c) in the figure shows an example of shifting to CZ again (an example of successful pullback).

During CZ, a lottery for transition to AT is performed as described above, but when the conditions for ending CZ are satisfied before the conditions for transition to AT are satisfied, the period shifts to the pullback period again. Then, in the example of (c) in the figure, in the second pullback period, the CZ end condition (for example, completion of a predetermined number of games (32 games)) is satisfied (pullback failure) before the transition condition to CZ is satisfied (pullback failure), This is an example of normal transition.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, it is possible to control the start and end of the advantageous section along with the transition to RT, and to freely perform AT and the like during the advantageous section.
Alternatively, a plurality of control states not related to RT are provided, a control state corresponding to normal is set as a normal section, a lottery for transition to an advantageous section is performed during this normal period, and when the lottery for transition to an advantageous section is won, an advantageous section is selected. Transition to any control state corresponding to the interval. Then, in the control state corresponding to the advantageous section, the end condition is set (for example, the completion of a predetermined number of games), and the control state is shifted to another control state corresponding to the advantageous section, or the advantageous section is terminated. Shift to the control state corresponding to the normal section.

In the example of FIG. 61, when AT is executed, ART can be executed by executing AT with RT having a high replay probability. Therefore, for example, in the case of realizing the example of FIG. 61 in the RT transition of the first embodiment, when the conditions for the transition to AT are satisfied, the instruction function is activated when the replay B group is won in RT2, and the replay 02 is started. For example, the pressing order to be displayed is displayed, and the process proceeds to RT3.

In this way, by arbitrarily determining the end condition of the advantageous interval, it is possible to freely design a plurality of control states (precursor, CZ, AT). In addition, it is possible to combine all of these without being limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 . Furthermore, it is also possible to set a plurality of end conditions for one advantageous section, and by doing so, it is possible to design a wider variety of game characteristics.
For example, the example of FIG. 60(a) indicates that the advantageous interval ends when the number of RT5 games executed during the advantageous interval reaches 50 games.
Also, the example of FIG. 60(b) shows that the advantageous section ends by shifting from non-RT to RT2 by displaying replay 03 during non-RT. That is, in the example of FIG. 60, two conditions are set as the conditions for ending the advantageous section: "Finish 50 games in RT5" and "Move from non-RT to RT2". In other words, non-RT is positioned like CZ either promoted to AT (RT5) or dropped to normal (RT2). As a general concept, it is a specification that terminates the advantageous section with a specific RT transition as a trigger.

Furthermore, the example of FIG. 61 shifts between the advantageous section and the normal section according to the control state regardless of which RT the user is staying.
In the example of FIG. 61(a), state 1 and state 2 (precursor or AT pullback period) are advantageous sections, and state 3 is set as a normal section. The advantageous section starts when the state 3 changes to the state 1 or 2, and the advantageous section ends when the state 1 or 2 changes to the state 3. FIG.
Similarly, in the examples of FIGS. 61(b) and (c), the control state normal is the normal section, and the control state precursor, CZ, and AT are the advantageous sections. It also shows that the advantageous section starts by shifting from normal to omen, CZ, or AT, and the advantageous section ends by shifting from omen, CZ, or AT to normal.

Thus, in the example of FIG. 61, the normal section is executed when the control state is normal, but the advantageous section is executed when the control state is different from normal. However, AT is not executed in the sign, CZ, etc. even in the advantageous section, and in order for the AT to be executed, it is necessary to satisfy the AT transition condition in the sign, CZ, etc. On the other hand, even if it falls from AT to CZ (FIG. 61(b)) or falls from CZ to the withdrawal period (precursor) (FIG. 61(c)), the advantageous section does not end. The advantageous section ends when the control state transitions to normal.

In addition to the examples described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, the following examples can be given.
(1) An example in which the first finite RT (20 games) and the second finite RT (60 games) are provided, and the termination condition of the advantageous section is set to the completion of the first finite RT or the second finite RT Such an advantageous section By setting the termination condition of, for example, a case of shifting from non-RT in an advantageous section to a first finite RT of 20 games and a case of shifting to a second finite RT of 60 games, profit to the player can be different.
More specifically, a specific replay is drawn by lottery in the non-RT during the advantageous section, and the symbol combination that shifts to the first finite RT or the symbol combination that shifts to the second finite RT is displayed according to the pressing order when the specific replay is won. Let Then, when a specific replay is won, by shifting to the first finite RT of 20 games or the second finite RT of 60 games according to the pressing order operated by the player, about 3 It is possible to have a game property that can generate a double profit difference.

Also, when a specific replay is won during non-RT, the main control board 50 may notify the player of the pressing order. In that case, it is conceivable to consider the winning combination and the game situation before the specific replay winning during non-RT, and decide whether to announce the pushing order to shift to the first finite RT or the second finite RT. be done. At this time, the probability of winning the specific replay may or may not have a set difference.
Furthermore, the end condition of the advantageous interval may be set so that only the completion of the first finite RT is performed, and the advantageous interval is not terminated by the completion of the second finite RT. As a result, when shifting from non-RT to the second finite RT of 60 games, the advantageous section is not terminated even after consuming the 60 games, and by shifting to non-RT again, the second finite RT and non-RT It is possible to think of a game property such as looping.

In this case, if the non-RT shifts to the first finite RT, the advantageous section ends when the 20-game finite RT is consumed, but if the non-RT shifts to the second finite RT, the 60-game finite After digesting RT, the anticipation of transitioning from non-RT to second RT again can be given. As described above, by winning a combination with a set difference in the advantageous section, it is not possible to add an advantageous section. However, there is no problem because it only serves as a transition role to a finite RT with a different number of games played. In this way, by devising the end condition of the advantageous section, the actual 20 games or 60 games are added by the winning combination with the set difference (shift to the first finite RT of 20 games, or the second of 60 games transition to finite RT) can be realized.

(2) An example in which the end condition of the advantageous section is set to the digestion of CZ or the transition from non-RT to RT1 after the end of the special game By setting such an end condition of the advantageous section, for example, during the advantageous section A maximum of 32 games of CZ are executed at this time, and the clearing condition of this CZ is set to win a special combination. When 32 games are completed without winning the special role during CZ, the advantageous section ends. On the other hand, if you win a special role during CZ, after finishing the special game, move to non-RT. Depending on the order, the symbol combination to shift to RT1 or the symbol combination to shift to RT2 is displayed.

Then, ``transition from non-RT to RT1 after the end of the special game'' is set as the termination condition of the advantageous section. Therefore, when the specific replay is won, the advantageous section ends when the key moves to RT1 according to the pressing order. On the other hand, after the end of the special game, when the transition from non-RT to RT2, AT is started. Here, depending on the control state and the winning combination, it is possible to notify the pressing order to shift to RT2 when a specific replay that does not have a set difference is won. This means that the special combination won during the CZ is not limited to the special combination with no set difference, but may be the special combination with the set difference. During the CZ in the advantageous section, by winning the special role regardless of the presence or absence of the setting difference, the game property that can substantially give AT (the specific winning during non-RT after the special game In the replay, it is possible to notify the pressing order in which the symbol combination to be shifted to RT2 is displayed).

Furthermore, in the above examples (1) and (2), RT is used as the control state, but various control states may be used instead of RT. For example, in the example of (1), non-RT and two types of finite RT (first finite RT and second finite RT) with different number of games are adopted. It may be replaced with state 3. Here, the game state is a control state that is executed during the advantageous period, and includes the above-described CZ, AT, etc. However, unlike RT, the winning probability of replay does not change.
By this replacement, it is possible to have a game state 1 in which the instruction function does not operate in the advantageous section, a game state 2 of 20 games in which the instruction function operates in the advantageous section, and a game state 3 of 60 games in which the instruction function operates in the advantageous section. . Also, unlike RT, there are no restrictions on the transition conditions (for example, display of a specific combination of symbols, winning a special role, winning a special role, ending a special game, digesting the number of games, etc.). can be set to
Specifically, taking the above (1) as an example, conditions such as "win the bell 5 times within 20 games" or "win the bell 3 games in a row" in the game state 1 in the advantageous section It is also possible to design so as to shift to the game state 2 when the is achieved.

<Sixth embodiment>
In the sixth embodiment, when the upper limit of 1500 games of the advantageous interval is approached during the advantageous interval and AT, the advantageous interval is ended before the upper limit of 1500 games is reached, and after the advantageous interval is finished, the advantageous interval is relatively advantageous. By providing a situation in which it is easy to win the section and AT, it is possible to repeatedly execute the advantageous section and AT that do not reach the upper limit number of games. As a result, it becomes possible to create a more advantageous state than the advantageous section and AT that are executed up to the upper limit of 1500 games.

FIG. 62 is a diagram showing RT transition in the sixth embodiment, corresponding to FIG. 22 of the first embodiment. The RT transition diagram of the sixth embodiment differs from that of the first embodiment in that RT6 is provided. RT6 is a finite RT and ends when 50 games are completed.
RT6 can be transferred only from RT3. Furthermore, after the end of RT6, it shifts to non-RT.

In the sixth embodiment, a lottery for transition to the advantageous section is performed during the normal section for any RT except for the inner section (RT4). In addition, the lottery for transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is executed regardless of whether the condition device is won. That is, the lottery for the advantageous section is executed without being tied to the winning of the conditional device that does not have the set difference. The winning probability is "1/32" common to all RTs.

Also, after 1BBA operation and 1BBB operation are completed, it has the right to execute AT. After the operation of 1BBA is completed, it shifts to non-RT, and after the operation of 1BBB is completed, it shifts to RT1. Moreover, when the pattern design is displayed in non-RT or RT1, it shifts to RT2. After that, it goes back and forth between RT2 and RT3 (here, the rare case of accidental transition from RT3 to RT6 shall not be considered).

In the above, in non-RT, RT1, RT2, and RT3, the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is executed with a winning probability of "1/32". Under the circumstances where we have the right to run the AT based on the activation, we start the advantageous section and the AT. In addition, since AT can be executed under the condition that it is an advantageous section (because it is necessary to activate the instruction function), even if it shifts to non-RT or RT1 after the operation of 1BBA or 1BBB is completed, it is advantageous Before winning the section, the AT does not start even if it has the right of AT.

When the AT is started in the advantageous section in the non-RT or RT1, the instruction function is not activated when the minor winning group B is won until the pattern symbols are displayed. This is to display the pattern design and shift to RT2 as early as possible. In addition, when a minor combination C group is won, an instruction function is operated. After the transition from non-RT or RT1 to RT2, the instruction function is activated both when the small winning combination B group and the small winning combination C group are won. Also, when the replay group B is won in RT2, the instruction function is operated so as to shift to RT3. In this way, the AT is executed until the termination condition of the AT is satisfied.

In the sixth embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, at RT3, instead of the replay group C, the replay group D is selected by lottery. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing the relationship between the type of replay group D drawn in RT3, winning combination, pressing order and display combination, and corresponds to FIG. 13 of the first embodiment.
The replay D group includes replays D1 to D3, and replays D1 to D3 include replays 01, 03, and 06, respectively.
When one of the replays D is won, replay 01 wins in one push order, replay 03 wins in another push order, and replay 06 wins in another push order. is set to win.

Here, when replay 01 is displayed in RT3, RT3 is maintained, and when replay 02 is displayed, RT2 is entered, as in the replay C group of the first embodiment. On the other hand, when Replay 06 wins in RT3, the game moves to RT6 (see FIG. 62).
In the sixth embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the replay 06 lottery is not performed during 1BBA operation and 1BBB operation. In the sixth embodiment, Replay 06 is included only in Replay D group.

In the sixth embodiment, when staying in RT3, in the advantageous section and AT, when the number of games played in the advantageous section is less than "1400", when the replay D group is won, replay 01 is won. The order of pressing to keep RT3, ie, the order of pressing to maintain RT3, is displayed by the operation of the indicating function.
On the other hand, when staying in RT3, when the advantageous section is AT and the number of games played in the advantageous section is "1400" or more, that is, when the advantageous section remains "100" games or less In the subsequent game in which the replay D group is won, the pressing order for winning the replay 06 is displayed by the operation of the instruction function.

As a result, replay 06 is won in the game, so the next game is shifted to RT6. The transition from RT3 to RT6 is set as the advantageous section and AT end condition. Therefore, the advantageous section and the AT end with the transition to RT6.
As described above, since the replay group D is a duplicate winning replay that has the possibility of moving the RT, it is desirable that there is no set difference (of course, there should be a set difference in the winning probability of the replay group D). (This does not prevent you from using the

RT6 is a finite RT, and 50 games are executed. When 50 games have been completed in RT6, it is determined that the end condition of RT6 is satisfied, and the game shifts to non-RT.
Also, as described above, in RT6, as in other RTs, the lottery for the advantageous section is performed with a winning probability of "1/32". Then, when winning the advantageous section in RT6, the right to execute AT is granted. That is, when the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches “1400” or more in RT3 and the transition to RT6 is made, the advantageous section and AT are terminated, and “winning the lottery for the advantageous section in RT6” is the execution (restart) of AT. ) condition.
In RT6, the probability of winning the advantageous section is "1/32" and the number of games played is "50", so the probability of winning the advantageous section during RT6 is about 79.6%.

When the advantageous section is won in RT6, it becomes the advantageous section from the next game and satisfies the AT execution condition. In this case, the AT may start at any time. For example, AT may be started while staying in the next game of the game in which the advantageous section is won, that is, RT6. Alternatively, it may start from non-RT when transitioning to non-RT, or even start AT after transitioning from non-RT to RT2. Here, for the sake of simplification of explanation, it is assumed that AT is started from the next game of the game in which the player wins in the advantageous section.

In RT6, when the advantageous section and the AT are simultaneously started from the next game of the game won in the advantageous section, the AT can be continued up to the limit of 1500 games, which is the upper limit number of games of the advantageous section. can be done. Since the count of 1500 games in the advantageous section is performed even in the control state such as omen and CZ performed during the advantageous section, compared to the game nature in which AT is performed via such a control state, AT It can run for a long time.

When RT6 ends, it shifts to non-RT. Non-RT continues until the pattern design is displayed. Then, when the pattern design is displayed in the non-RT, it shifts to RT2. When the lottery for the advantageous section is won in RT6, in RT2, the instruction function is operated when the replay group B is won, and the pushing order for shifting to RT3 is displayed.

Then, when AT is won in RT6, when shifting to RT3, AT is executed while maintaining RT3. AT is executed up to a predetermined number of games. When the AT is finished a predetermined number of times, the AT is finished, the advantageous section is finished, and the next game is shifted to the normal section.
The initial value of the number of AT games is determined when the AT is won, and the number of games is added by the above-described addition during the execution of the AT. Then, during execution of AT, when 1400 games or more have been played after the start of the advantageous section, the game is shifted to RT6 in the same manner as described above.

On the other hand, during the normal section, a lottery for the advantageous section is performed with a winning probability of "1/32" also in RT2 and RT3. That is, in the sixth embodiment, even when staying in any RT except RT4, the lottery for the advantageous section is performed with a probability of "1/32", and if the lottery for the advantageous section is won, the advantageous section from the next game transition to

In RT2 and RT3, when the game is only shifted to the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated when the first minor combination B group is won. This satisfies the condition that the advantageous interval can be ended, ie, "execution of the instruction function activated game at least once".
Therefore, in RT2 or RT3 (normal section) that does not go through 1BBA game or 1BBB game, an advantageous section is drawn with a winning probability of "1/32", and when the advantageous section is won, the advantageous section starts from the next game, and the advantageous section When the instruction function activating game is executed once in the section (when winning the small winning combination B group), the game is shifted to the normal section from the next game, and this is repeated.
In addition, not limited to this, when the game is shifted to the advantageous section, the predetermined number of games (for example, 32 games) may be continued, and after the predetermined number of games is completed, the transition to the normal section may be performed. In this case, it is necessary to execute at least one pointing function activation game in the predetermined number of games.

Also, in RT2 and RT3 (so-called normal), AT lottery is executed separately. Then, when the AT lottery is won, the player has the right to execute the AT. For example, when winning the small winning combination E1 shown in the first embodiment, the player has the right to execute AT. Alternatively, when the small winning combination E1 is won, a lottery may be used to determine whether or not to grant the AT execution right, and when the lottery is won, the AT execution right may be granted.
As for the number of AT games, an initial value is set first, and then, as shown in the third embodiment, an additional lottery is performed to add the number of games.

Furthermore, if the game in which the AT is won is an advantageous interval, it becomes possible to start the advantageous interval and AT from the next game. It should be noted that the AT may be started from the next game of the game in which the AT is won, or as shown in the fifth embodiment, the AT may be started after passing through the signs and CZ. After AT is started, AT is executed while staying at RT3 in the same manner as described above (ART). When the AT is continuing even after 1400 games have been played after shifting to the advantageous section, the game is shifted to RT6 in the same manner as described above.
On the other hand, if the game in which the AT has been won is in the normal section, it waits for winning in the advantageous section while retaining the right to execute the AT. Then, when the advantageous section is won, AT is executed after that.

Further, when the AT lottery is performed as described above during the stay of RT2 or RT3, it is possible to set the AT start condition to go through RT6.
Therefore, in RT2 and RT3, the "right to execute AT" is granted based on winning the small win E1 or the like. When this right is won, if it is not an advantageous section, it waits to win an advantageous section, and when it becomes an advantageous section or if it is an advantageous section, the instruction function is activated, and if it is RT2, replay group B Display the pressing order to shift to RT3 when winning. Further, when it is RT3, the pressing order to shift to RT6 when replay D group is won is displayed. When moving to RT6, the advantageous section ends as described above. Then, when the advantageous section is won during the 50 games of RT6, the conditions for starting AT are satisfied. The flow after the AT start condition is satisfied at RT6 is the same as described above.

The lottery for the advantageous section is not limited to the above, and a special role with a winning probability of "1/32" may be drawn in all RTs, and the advantageous section may be started based on winning the specific role. . It should be noted that the specific combination in this case is a combination that does not have a setting difference, as described in the first embodiment.

When the above sixth embodiment is rearranged, it has the following features (including effects).
(1) By intentionally ending the advantageous section before reaching the upper limit of the advantageous section (1500 games) and shifting to a re-lottery state for the advantageous section, the upper limit of the advantageous section of 1500 games is effectively reached. It becomes possible to execute the advantageous section beyond. For example, a game such as "advantageous section (1200 games)→non-advantageous section (50 games)→advantageous section (1200 games)" is possible.
In particular, since the transition to RT6 (limited RT) is set as the end condition of the advantageous section, although the advantageous section ends at the time of transition from RT3 to RT6, during the 50 games of RT6, the replay winning probability A high advantage can be maintained.
(2) Also, during normal times, every game, a lottery for transition to an advantageous section is performed with a winning probability of "1/32". In particular, as an opportunity to move to the advantageous section, a transition opportunity that does not have a setting difference is required, but in both RT6 and normal time, the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is always with a winning probability of "1/32". You can achieve it by doing

Furthermore, depending on the design, "start of AT=start of advantageous section" can be set as in the third embodiment. of AT can be realized (except for the case where AT is started with the winning of a special role as a trigger).
(3) It is possible to determine whether or not to execute AT by referring to the RT being executed when transitioning to an advantageous section. A transition lottery for the advantageous section is performed with a winning probability of ``1/32'' every game, but when winning the transition lottery, refer to the RT staying at the time of winning (whether it is RT6 or not). , it can be determined whether or not AT is to be executed at the time of transition to the advantageous section.

<Seventh Embodiment>
In the seventh embodiment, even when the total number of AT games exceeds "1500" as a result of the addition of the number of games played during the AT, the player can benefit from It is characterized in that the greater the number of times the number of games has been added over "1500", the more merits are brought to the player.

In the seventh embodiment, a "over 1500 counter" is provided for counting the number of times the total number of AT games played exceeds "1500" due to the addition during AT. In the advantageous section and at the start of AT, the over 1500 counter value is "0".
Further, in the seventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44 (example 2) of the third embodiment, as a result of the addition lottery, when the total number of AT games played exceeds "1500", the determined addition number is It shall be cleared without addition.

Therefore, when the total number of AT games played is "1500" or less, the over 1500 counter remains "0". Here, for example, when it is determined in step S451 of FIG. 44(b) that the added number exceeds the specified number, the "over 1500 counter" changes from "0" to "1". Similarly, if it is determined in step S451 of FIG. 44(b) that the additional number exceeds the specified number, the "over 1500 counter" changes from "1" to "2". In this way, every time the AT's total game count exceeds "1500", the over 1500 counter is incremented.

On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, after the start of AT in the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated in the game when the first minor combination B group is won. After that, when the over 1500 counter is "0", that is, when the AT's total number of games has never exceeded "1500" due to the extra lottery, whether to operate the instruction function when winning the minor winning group B. A lottery will decide whether or not.
Here, the ratio of activating the instruction function when winning the small win group B is referred to as "instruction function activation rate".

When the over 1500 counter is "0", the indication function activation rate is set to "95%". Therefore, in the advantageous section and during the AT, a lottery (a lottery with a 95% chance of winning) is carried out to determine whether or not to activate the instruction function when a small win group B is won. This results in a 95% probability that the pointing function will work and a 5% probability that the pointing function will not work. Assuming that the win rate of the small win group B when the command function is activated is 100% and the win rate of the minor win group B when the command function is not activated is "1/3", the command function activation rate is 95%. , the winning rate of the small win group B is about 96.7%.

Next, it is assumed that the total number of AT games has exceeded "1500" as a result of addition during AT. Then, it is assumed that the over 1500 counter becomes "1". Here, the indicator function activation rate when the over 1500 counter is "1" is set to "97.5%". Therefore, in the advantageous section and during the AT, when the small winning group B is won, the indicating function works with a probability of 97.5%, and the indicating function does not work with a probability of 2.5%.

After that, when the AT total game number exceeds "1500" again as a result of further addition, the over 1500 counter becomes "2". The indicator function activation rate in this case is set to "98.75%". Therefore, in the advantageous section and during the AT, when the small winning group B is won, the indicating function operates with a probability of 98.75%, and the indicating function does not operate with a probability of 1.25%.
As described above, for counter values exceeding 1500=“0”, “1”, “2”, . , . . .

With the setting as described above, as the total number of AT games played exceeds "1500", that is, as the counter value exceeding 1500 increases, the indication function activation rate approaches 100%. Here, even if the total number of AT games played exceeds "1500", the upper limit of the advantageous section is actually "1500", so it is certain that the game exceeding "1500" cannot be executed. is. However, according to the seventh embodiment, when the AT total number of games played exceeds "1500", it is more advantageous to the player than before the addition (expected number of wins) higher value).

<Eighth embodiment>
In the eighth embodiment, winning of BB which does not have a set difference in the winning probability Winning), when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section is started after that. In addition, there is a case where AT is started after the BB game is finished.
Furthermore, the following examples 1 to 5 can be given for the end of the advantageous section.
(1) Example where the advantageous section ends before the end of the 1BB game (Example 1)
(2) Example where the advantageous section ends at the end of the 1BB game (Example 2)
(3) Example in which the advantageous section does not end when the 1BB game ends, AT starts after the 1BB game ends, and the advantageous section ends when the AT ends (Example 3)
(4) An example in which the advantageous section does not end when the 1BB game ends, and the advantageous section ends after a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games) have elapsed after the 1BB game ends (Example 4)
(5) An example in which the advantageous section does not end when the 1BB game ends, and after the lapse of a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games) after the 1BB game ends, the AT starts, and the advantageous section ends when the AT ends (Example 5)
Then, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, at the same time it is decided in which of Examples 1 to 5 the advantageous section ends. Of course, it is not necessary to decide from five examples 1 to 5, for example, it may be decided from three examples 1 to 3, or from two examples 2 and 3 You may

64 to 66 are time charts showing Examples 1 to 5 above.
Example 1 of FIG. 64 is an example in which, after winning 1BBA, the advantageous section starts at the start of 1BBA game (at the time of 1BBA operation). The start timing of this advantageous interval is at the start of the 1BBA game, but as described in the first embodiment, from the start of the next game of the game in which the 1BBA was won, to the start of the next game of the game in which the 1BBA was won ( The advantageous section may be started at any timing until the start of the first game of the 1BBA game. Furthermore, as described in the first embodiment, when starting an advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.
In addition, although the advantageous section is started simultaneously with the start of the 1BBA game, AT is not started because 1BBA is in operation (in the first place, AT is not started during the advantageous section in Example 1).

Then, in Example 1, before the end of the 1BBA game, for example, at the end of the previous game of the final game of the 1BBA game, or at the start of the final game of the 1BBA game, the advantageous section ends.
Furthermore, in this example 1, the output of the continuous effect is started from the middle of the 1BBA game. As in the first embodiment, the continuous effect is a series of effects over a plurality of games (effects that arouse expectations as to whether or not AT will be executed after one BBA game is finished), and at the end of the continuous effect, After the end of the 1BBA game, an effect is output for informing the player whether or not AT is to be started. Also, the advantageous section ends when the continuous effect ends.

Therefore, in Example 1, in the middle of the final game of the 1BBA game or in the previous game, the continuous production is ended (finally, it is notified that AT is not started), and at the end of the game where the continuous production is completed, or continuously When the performance ends, the advantageous section ends. In addition, in Example 1, the advantageous section is ended before the end of one BBA game, and the AT is not started after the end of one BBA game.
However, at the start of the 1BBA game, even if it was decided to end the advantageous section before the end of the 1BBA game, such as winning a rare hand (for example, a small hand D) during the 1BBA game, etc. When the advantageous interval extension condition (also referred to as the advantageous interval change condition; hereinafter the same) is satisfied, the advantageous interval may not be ended before the end of the 1BBA game, and the advantageous interval may be continued after the end of the 1BBA game. good. Of course, AT may be started after the end of 1BBA game. For example, changing the end of the advantageous section from Example 1 to Example 3 can be mentioned.

Example 2 in FIG. 64 is an example in which the end of the 1BBA game and the end of the advantageous section are matched. In this example 2, as in example 1, the continuous effect is started from the middle of the 1BBA game, and at the end of the final game of the 1BBA game (it may be when the last stop switch 42 is operated), the 1BBA game It is informed whether or not the AT game is started after the end of. In example 2, since the advantageous section ends simultaneously with the end of 1BBA game, the AT is not started after the end of 1BBA game. Therefore, at the end of the continuous effect, it is notified that the AT will not start.

As in Examples 1 and 2, when the advantageous interval ends before the end of the special game (1BBA game), the advantageous interval is terminated even if the instruction function activation game has not been played even once. making it possible. This is because many medals have already been obtained during the special game (1BBA game), so there is no need to extend the end of the advantageous section just to perform one instruction function activation game. Rather, the delay may increase player dissatisfaction.
Further, as in Example 1, even if it was decided to end the advantageous interval at the end of the 1BBA game at the start of the 1BBA game, when the condition for extending the advantageous interval is satisfied during the 1BBA game ( For example, when a rare combination is won), the advantageous interval may not end when the 1BBA game ends, and the advantageous interval may continue even after the 1BBA game ends. Of course, AT may be started after the end of 1BBA game. For example, changing the end of the advantageous section from Example 2 to Example 3 can be mentioned.

In example 3 of FIG. 65, like example 2, the continuous effect is started in the middle of one BBA game. Example 3 is an example in which AT is started after the end of 1BBA game. In this case, at the end of the final game of the 1BBA game (or when the last stop switch 42 is operated, etc.), it is notified that the AT will start after the end of the 1BBA game. Then, the AT is started from the next game after the final game of the 1BBA game. Of course, AT does not have to be started immediately after the end of 1BBA game. For example, the AT may be started from the next game of the game that has moved to RT3, the next game of the game that has moved to RT3, or the next game of the game that won any of the replay B groups. In this case, it is preferable to operate at least the instruction function for shifting to RT3 even before starting AT.
Note that the AT ends when the conditions for ending the AT, such as the completion of a predetermined number of games, are satisfied, and when the AT ends, the advantageous section also ends at the same time. However, even if the AT ends, the advantageous section may be continued thereafter.

It is not known at the start of the 1BBA game whether it is one of the above examples 1, 2, or 3, but at the start of the 1BBA game, the advantageous interval display LED 77 lights up, so it is possible to shift to the advantageous interval. When it is determined, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up (it is decided to shift to the advantageous section) or does not light up (advantageous section It is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous, which arouses anticipation just because it is decided not to shift to 1BBA, and to arouse the anticipation of the player even during the 1BBA game.

Example 4 of FIG. 66 continues the advantageous section even after the end of the 1BBA game, starts the continuous effect after the end of the 1BBA game, and determines whether or not to start AT from now on in the continuous effect (the advantageous section continues). This is an example of notifying whether or not to After one BBA game is finished, the continuous performance is started, and Example 4 shows an example in which five games of the continuous performance are performed. Of course, any number of games may be performed in the continuous performance. Then, in the final game of the continuous performance, it is informed whether or not to start AT. Example 4 shows an example of not starting AT. Then, the advantageous section ends with the game at the end of the continuous performance. Of course, the continuous effect may be started from the next game after the end of the 1BBA game, or may be started from the one after another game.

Thus, in Example 4, the advantageous section is continued even after the end of one BBA game, and the advantageous section is executed for 5 games during the normal game (the game after the end of one BBA game).
On the other hand, as described above, it is necessary to "execute the instruction function activation game at least once during the advantageous section".
Here, based on the winning of the BB, it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, and in the case where the advantageous section starts at the same time as the start of the BB game (of course, it does not have to be at the same time), the BB game ends. After that, when ending the advantageous section after a few games, the following control can be considered.

(1) When the small win group B is not won even once during the 5 games, the advantageous section is terminated without executing the instruction function activating game even once.
(2) When winning a small win group B during 5 games, the instruction function actuation game is executed in that game.
(3) Terminate the advantageous section without executing the instruction function activating game even when the small winning combination B is won during the 5 games.
(4) If the small win group B is not won even once in the 5 games, the advantageous interval is extended until the minor win group B is won first, and the instruction is given when the minor win group B is won first. A function activation game is executed, and the advantageous section is ended in the game.
Any of the above controls may be used.
As described above, it is necessary to "execute the instruction function activation game at least once during the advantageous section", so the control of (1) to (3) may seem unfavorable, but in Example 4 Thus, when the BB game is played during the advantageous section, many medals have already been obtained during the BB game. This is because it is considered that there is no need to extend it. Rather, the delay may increase player dissatisfaction.
In example 4 of FIG. 66, the two-dot chain line indicates the case where an instruction is given (an instruction function actuation game is executed) during five games.

In Example 5 of FIG. 66, as in Example 4, the advantageous section is continued even after the end of one BBA game, and after the end of one BBA game, a continuous effect is started, and whether AT is to be started in the continuous effect is determined. This is an example of notification. Then, in Example 5, it is notified that AT will be started in the final game of the continuous effect. Then, the AT is started from the next game. When the AT ends, the advantageous section also ends. Of course, AT does not have to be started from the next game. For example, the AT may be started from the next game of the game that has moved to RT3, the next game of the game that has moved to RT3, or the next game of the game that has won any of the replay B groups. In this case, it is preferable to operate at least the instruction function for shifting to RT3 even before starting AT.
It is not known at the start of the 1BBA game whether it is the above example 4 or 5, but at the start of the 1BBA game, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, so during the 1BBA game and after the end of the 1BB game It is possible to arouse the player's expectations.

In the eighth embodiment, whether or not AT is executed (examples 1 to 5) and the initial number of AT games are determined before the start of 1BBA game (for example, when 1BBA is won) or when 1BBA game is started. It may sometimes be decided by a lottery or the like, or whether or not to execute AT may be decided based on the condition device won during the 1BBA game. For example, when 1BBA is won, Example 1, Example 2, or Example 4 is decided, and it is decided whether to change to Example 3 or Example 5 based on the condition device won during 1BBA game. . Further, for example, when "1BBA+small winning combination E1" in the first embodiment is won, AT may be determined (example 3 or example 5).
Furthermore, based on the conditions satisfied during one BBA game, whether or not to execute AT and the number of initial AT games may be determined. After deciding to run AT (in example 3 or example 5), the number of AT games may be increased based on winning of the condition device during 1BBA game or AT.
Furthermore, at the start of the 1BBA game, it was determined as in Example 4, but during the 1BBA game or during the continuous performance period of 5 games after the end of the 1BBA game, when the extension condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (for example, Winning a rare role) may be changed to example 5 (executing AT).

At the start of the 1BBA game, it is not necessary to decide whether or not to execute the AT after the 1BBA game is finished. In this case, it is determined whether or not to execute AT after the end of the 1BBA game depending on whether or not the condition for extending the advantageous interval is satisfied during the 1BBA game.
When determining whether or not to execute AT after the end of the 1BBA game during the 1BBA game, the end of the advantageous section is set at the end of the 1BBA game as in example 2 of FIG. When it is decided to execute AT during the 1BBA game, the end of the advantageous section is extended (changed), and the advantageous section is continued even after the end of the 1BBA game, and AT is executed.

<Ninth Embodiment>
The ninth embodiment defines when to start the advantageous section (timing to start the advantageous section) when starting the advantageous section based on the winning of the conditional device including the special combination (for example, 1BBA). In particular, the advantageous section is started from the game in which the winning special role can be won.
In the ninth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the advantageous section is started based on the fact that the condition device including the winning of the special role (1BBA) is won and it is determined to shift to the advantageous section. Here, in the first embodiment, when it is determined that a conditional device including a special combination is won and it is determined to shift to an advantageous section, a bet possible state and a settlement possible state occur in the next game of the winning game. By the time it becomes, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, or until the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role stops (or, bet is possible in the next game of the game in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role has stopped) state and even when the settlement becomes possible), the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.

In addition, the advantageous section is started when the next game of the game that wins the condition device including the special role is started (when the start switch 41 is operated), or when the first game of the special game (for example, 1BBA game) is started ( when the start switch 41 was operated). Therefore, in the latter case, when the advantageous section is started based on the winning of the special combination, the start timing has a range.
Then, in the ninth embodiment, when it is determined that a conditional device including a special combination is won and it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section is started from the game in which the special combination can be won. do.

Therefore, in the first embodiment, for example, when 1BBA is won alone, the advantageous section starts from the game because 1BBA can be won in the game.
On the other hand, when "1BBA+small winning combination E1" is won, the winning of the small winning combination E1 is prioritized in the game, and the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBA cannot be stopped, so the advantageous section is started in the relevant game. do not do. In particular, in the first embodiment, in a game in which "1BBA+small winning combination E1" is won, the winning of the small winning combination E1 is given priority over 1BBA, and the small winning combination E1 is "PB=1". 1BBA never wins. 1BBA won in the game is carried over to the next game.

Furthermore, when "1BBA+small winning combination D" is won, the winning of the small winning combination D is prioritized in the game, but the small winning combination 35 (watermelon) corresponding to the small winning combination D is "PB≠1". Therefore, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the symbol ("watermelon") associated with the small combination 35 cannot be stopped and the timing when the symbol associated with 1BBA ("red 7") can be stopped, 1BBA can be achieved in the game. Winning is possible. For example, in FIG. 5, the middle stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the middle first stop is made and the number 3 "red 7" can be stopped on the effective line.

However, when the stop switch 42 is operated at a position where both symbols of the 1BBA and the small winning combination 35 can be stopped, stopping the symbol relating to the small winning combination 35 is prioritized. For example, the right stop switch 42 is operated at a timing when both the 2nd "red 7" and 5th "watermelon" symbols can be stopped on the effective line with the right first stop.
On the other hand, at the left first stop, even if the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the number 7 "red 7" can be stopped on the effective line, the number 4 or 9 "watermelon" is stopped on the effective line. The number 7 "Red 7" does not stop on the active line because it has priority.
Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the above timing, the stop control is executed so that the number 7 "red 7" is not stopped on the effective line. As a result, the game when "1BBA+small win D" is won in the first embodiment is set so as not to fall under the "game where 1BBA can be won". Of course, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the middle first stop is made and the third "red 7" can be stopped on the effective line, 1BBA can be won in the game, so "1BBA may be referred to as "winable games".

In the case where it has been decided to win a conditional device including a special role and move to an advantageous section, if the game does not correspond to a game that can win a special role, in the lottery of the conditional device in the next game, for example When the prize is not won, the special combination that has been overtaken can be won, so the advantageous section is started from the game. In the above example, when the start switch 41 is operated in the next game, the lottery for the condition device is performed and the winning is not won, so the start switch 41 is operated and the advantage section immediately after the lottery for the condition device is performed. (At the same time or just before that, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up).

On the other hand, if a small winning combination or a replay is won in the next game, and the winning of the small winning combination or the replay is given priority, the advantageous section is not started in the game in which the special winning combination cannot be won.
In addition, for example, in a game in which the winning of a special role is carried over, if a small role of "PB ≠ 1" is won and the small role cannot be won, the special role that is carried over can be won. , As in the case of winning "1BBA+small win D" described above, the advantageous section does not start in the game. Of course, in a game in which a special winning combination can be won, the advantageous section may be started in the game.

FIG. 67 is a diagram explaining the flow of the game in the ninth embodiment. In the example of FIG. 67, "1BBA+small win E1" is won in the "N" game, and 1BBA is won in the "N+3" game.
First, when "1BBA+small winning combination E1" is won in the "N" game, only the small winning combination E1 can be won in this game, and 1BBA cannot be won, so the advantageous section does not start in this game.

Next, after the "N+1" game, the winning of 1BBA is carried over. In the "N+1" game, an example of winning replay A is shown. When replay A wins, replay 01 wins with "PB=1", and 1BBA carrying over winning cannot win a prize, so the advantageous section does not start in the game.

Next, in the "N+2" game, an example is shown in which the combination lottery by the combination lottery means 61 is not won. Therefore, in the game, 1BBA, which has carried over winning, can win. Therefore, the advantageous section starts from the "N+2" game. Here, at the start of the "N+2" game, that is, the start switch 41 is operated, and as a result of the lottery of the condition device, it is advantageous based on the non-winning (1BBA can be won) Since the section starts, lighting of the advantageous section display LED 77 also starts when the start switch 41 is operated.

A player who wins 1BBA in the "N+2" game can eliminate useless consumption of the number of games during the advantageous section. A player who wins 1BBA in the "N+2" game, as described above, is an internal medium game that cannot be added (including a lottery for whether or not to execute AT in the eighth embodiment). You don't have to start the advantageous section. Further, as described above, the advantageous interval is set to the upper limit of the number of games played (for example, 1500 games). The number of games played in the section is reduced by the amount consumed in the internal game. For example, when 10 games are played in the internal medium game, 1 game is played in the game that wins 1 BBA, and 16 games are played in the 1 BBA game, in the game after the 1 BBA game is finished, only 1473 games at maximum can be played in the advantageous section. can't do

However, the player who won 1BBA in the "N+2" game did not spend any money in the internal game (0 games in the internal game, 1 game in the game in which 1BBA was won, 16 games in 1BBA game). When the 1BBA game is finished, a maximum of 1483 games can be played in the advantageous section in the game after the 1BBA game is finished), so the number of players who could not win 1BBA in the “N + 2” game , may be advantageous. On the other hand, a player who has failed to win 1 BBA in the "N+2" game continues the internal middle game while starting the advantageous section. The example of FIG. 67 shows an example in which 1BBA could not be won in the "N+2" game.

Furthermore, in the "N+3" game, similarly to the "N+2" game, there is shown an example in which the combination lottery by the combination lottery means 61 was not won. Therefore, in the game, 1BBA, which has carried over winning, can win. Then, an example is shown in which 1BBA can be won in the "N+3" game. As a result, one BBA game is started from the "N+4" game.

Here, for example, if the advantageous section is uniformly set to start at the start of the 1BBA game, the number of times the game is played varies depending on the skill of the player from the time the 1BBA is won until the prize is won (consumption of medals). There is a difference in the number of coins), but there is no difference in the length of the advantageous section after the end of the 1BBA game.
On the other hand, by setting as in the ninth embodiment, the player's skill (whether or not he noticed the winning of the special role, and when he knew that the special role was won, he could play the special role without making a mistake in hitting). The number of games in the advantageous section that is wasted varies depending on whether or not the player has been able to press the button so as to stop the combination of corresponding symbols on the effective line.

For example, if the special combination can be won in the first game in which the special combination can be won, the advantageous section will not be wasted in the internal middle game after the advantageous section is started.
On the other hand, in the first game in which the special role can be won, if the special role cannot be won due to a failure of the blind pushing or the like, the special role can be won again in the next game or later. have to wait until However, since the advantageous section starts from the first game in which the special role can be won, the advantageous section is wasted during that time.
In this way, it is possible to vary the substantial number of games played in the advantageous section (the number of games played after the end of the special game) according to the skill of the player.

Examples of modifications of the ninth embodiment include the following.
(Modification 1)
When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the special combination (or when shifting to the standby section), the number of games played until shifting to the advantageous section is determined by lottery or the like. Then, at the time of the game that has consumed the number of games, the next game, or the start of the special game (the next game of the game in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination has stopped), whichever is earlier, the transition to the advantageous section is made. .
(Modification 2)
When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the special combination (or when shifting to the standby section), the number of games played until shifting to the advantageous section is determined by lottery or the like. Then, the game is shifted to the advantageous section in whichever is earlier, the game in which the number of games has been consumed, the next game, or the first game in which the winning special role can be won.

(Modification 3)
Even if the advantageous section starts from the first game in which the winning special combination can be won, the conditions for ending the advantageous section may not be affected.
For example, it is assumed that, based on the winning of a special role, the player wins the advantageous section in which the AT of 50 games is executed after the special game ends. In this case, for the AT of 50 games after the end of the special game, 50 games are counted simultaneously with the start of the AT. Therefore, even if the advantageous section starts from the first game in which the winning special role can be won, the AT 50 game starts counting at the same time as the AT starts after the special game ends. On the other hand, the number of "1500" games, which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, is counted from the first game in which the winning special role can be won. By doing so, as the number of games played in the advantageous section approaches 1500 games (as the number of AT games is increased, etc.), the skill of the player is affected.

(Modification 4)
In the ninth embodiment, when a conditional device including a special combination is won and it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section is started from the game in which the special combination can be won. The advantageous interval may be started from the next game of the game in which the special role can be won (the advantageous interval display LED 77 lights up by the time the bet is possible and the settlement is possible in the next game. ). By doing so, when the special role is won in the first game in which the special role can be won, the game in which the special role is won is not counted as a game in the advantageous section, so a skilled player may provide an additional advantage over a less skilled player.

In the ninth embodiment, a game that wins a conditional device (for example, 1BBA + small role E1) including winning a special role (1BBA), or a continuous effect (special role ( 1BBA) is an effect to arouse whether or not the player has won, and an effect indicating that the special combination (1BBA) has been won in the last game) may be output. Of course, a game that wins a conditional device (for example, a small role E1) that does not include the winning of a special role (1BBA), or a continuous effect over multiple games (for example, 3 games) from the next game (a special role (1BBA) is won It is an effect to arouse whether or not it is, and it is necessary to output an effect indicating that the special combination (1BBA) has not been won in the last game.

Then, when the continuous effect is output (especially, before the effect indicating that the special combination (1BBA) is won is performed, for example, when the continuous effect over 3 games is output from the next game, 2 games When it becomes possible to win 1BBA in the second (that is, "N+2" game), the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up in the game, so that the player knows that 1BBA has been won. Therefore, instead of this continuous effect, an effect indicating that 1BBA has been won may be output. When it is the last game of the continuous performance, the continuous performance may be output until the end as it is, or instead of the continuous performance, the performance indicating that 1BBA is won may be output.

Alternatively, during a plurality of games in which continuous effects are output, even if 1BBA can be won, the advantageous interval may not be started and the advantageous interval display LED 77 may not be lit. Specifically, a game that wins a condition device (for example, 1BBA + small win E1) including the winning of a special role (1BBA), or a game of a predetermined number of times (the same number or more as the number of games that output continuous effects) from the next game During this period, even if the special combination (1BBA) becomes possible to win, the advantageous section is not started (the advantageous section display LED 77 is also not lit), but after a predetermined number of games, the special combination (1BBA) can be won first. The advantageous section may be started (the advantageous section display LED 77 may also be turned on) when it becomes.

<Tenth Embodiment>
In the tenth embodiment, when 1BBA is won during execution of AT (that is, during the advantageous section) and transition to 1BBA game, after completion of the 1BBA game, shift from RT2 to RT3 (return to AT) It is characterized by making it possible to add the number of AT games (that is, the number of games in the advantageous section) at times.
In the tenth embodiment, the RT transition diagram is the same as in the first embodiment (FIG. 22).
Here, when AT is being executed in RT3 (for example, when it is decided to shift to the AT of 100 games (that is, the advantageous section) when winning a small winning combination E1, and when AT is being executed), Assume that 1BBA is won (either 1BBA single win or 1BBA and small win E1 double win). If 1BBA is won and 1BBA is not won in the game, the game moves to RT4 (internal middle). Then, when 1BBA is won, the game shifts to 1BBA in operation (1BBA game). When the conditions for ending 1BBA in operation (1BBA game) are met, the game moves to non-RT.

When the 1BBA game ends and shifts to non-RT, the AT is restarted from that point, or the AT is in preparation (for example, the game shifted to RT3, the next game of the game shifted to RT3, or the replay B group) The AT is restarted from the next game of the winning game, etc. For this reason, it is preferable to operate at least the instruction function for shifting to RT3 during the AT preparation even before the AT is started. Of course, AT preparation is also an advantageous section.). When the AT is set to start from that point, when the pattern design is displayed in the non-RT, the process shifts to RT2. When one of the replays B group is won in RT2, the instruction function is operated to display the pushing order for winning the replay 02. - 特許庁When replay 02 wins in RT2, the game moves to RT3. After that, AT is continued while maintaining RT3. Note that when the AT preparation is set up to RT2, the AT is basically restarted after shifting to RT3.

Here, based on the shift from RT2 to RT3, it is possible to add the number of AT games played (that is, the advantageous section). This addition may be performed all the time, or may be determined by lottery. As a trigger for adding, the winning of the replay B group (that is, even if it does not move from RT2 to RT3, it will be added. Of course, when AT is being prepared, AT can be started from this point. preferred), winning a prize in replay 02, and transition from RT2 to RT3.

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, it is possible to execute an addition based on (done) shifting from RT2 to RT3 via non-RT after the end of 1BBA game. Therefore, winning of 1BBA, execution of 1BBA game, or non-RT stay is stored. For example, it can be stored using a flag. Then, when shifting from RT2 to RT3 (it may be when replay B group wins or when replay 02 wins), it is determined whether the flag is on, and it is determined that it is on. As a condition, it is made possible to add the number of AT games. Also, when an additional lottery or an additional lottery is executed, the flag is turned off from on.

In this way, if the flag is used to determine whether or not it is possible to add, for example, the state of only going back and forth between RT2 and RT3 When moving to RT3 again), since the flag is off, there is no addition when moving from RT2 to RT3.

In the above example, 1BBA was taken as an example, but even when winning 1BBB, that is, a conditional device including a special role with a setting difference, it is possible to execute the addition as described above.
In the same manner as above, winning of 1BBB, execution of 1BBB game, or stay of RT1 is stored in the flag. After the end of the 1BBB game, when shifting from RT1 to RT2, and further shifting to RT3 (when the replay B group is won or when the replay 02 is won), the addition can be executed. . Thereby, even when winning 1BBB having a set difference that should not be added during winning or during BB game (when shifting to 1BBB game), the player is expected to be added. can be done.

Also, addition may be made executable based on transition from non-RT or RT1 to RT2. For example, it may be possible to execute addition based on winning the small win group B in non-RT or RT1, displaying pattern symbols, or shifting from non-RT or RT1 to RT2.
As shown in FIG. 22, the transition to non-RT is also made when the RWM 53 is initialized, but as the above flag is turned off as the RWM 53 is initialized, the transition is made from non-RT to RT2 and further from RT2 to RT3. Even if it does, no markup will be performed. Also, in the first place, if it is a normal section, the addition is not executed.
Also, when 1BBA or 1BBB is won during execution of AT and the game shifts to RT4 (inside), the number of AT games is not added in RT4.

Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment (first embodiment), after one BBA game ends, the game moves to non-RT, and after one BBB game ends, the game moves to RT1. However, the method is not limited to this, and the following method is also possible.
After the end of 1BBA game and the end of 1BBB game, the game is shifted to RT5 (newly added). Then, in RT5, a lottery is drawn for a plurality of replay conditional devices, the conditional device is won, and the transition from RT5 to RT3 is made possible based on the winning of a predetermined replay. Alternatively, it is possible to shift from RT5 to RT3 based on the pattern design being displayed. In addition, non-RTs, RT2, and RT3 are set so as not to shift to RT5.
In this way, the transition from RT5 to RT3 (that the condition device was won at RT5, that a predetermined replay was displayed, that the small winning group B was won at RT5, and the pattern pattern was displayed or the transition from RT5 to RT3), it is possible to increase the number of AT games played and eliminate the need to provide the flag as described above.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, as a single winning of the small winning combination E1, a small winning combination E1 (number "250") that shifts to the advantageous interval when winning in the normal interval, and A small winning combination E1 (set number “750”) is provided which does not shift to the advantageous section.
On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, if any small winning combination E1 is won in the normal section, the game shifts to the advantageous section. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, the small winning combination E1 with the registered number "250" is called "small winning combination E1a", and the small winning combination E1 with the registered number "750" is called "small winning combination E1b".
Furthermore, the small winning combination E2, 1BBA and the small winning combination E2 are deleted.
By doing so, in the game in which the minor winning combination 36 is won, the next game always shifts to the advantageous interval (by then, the advantageous interval display LED 77 lights up).

Further, the advantageous section when winning the small winning combination E1b is an advantageous section that can be finished by executing the instruction function operation game only once (for example, the instruction function operation game is completed after 5 games are executed after the instruction function operation game is executed once). be. Among AT precursors, such an advantageous section may also be referred to as an AT false precursor.
On the other hand, the advantageous interval when winning the small winning combination E1a is an advantageous interval in which AT is executed after the AT precursor, and the number of games played is after the AT precursor (Incidentally, the AT precursor is one instruction function activation game. It is set to 50 games (ends after 5 games after execution). The counting of 50 games may be started immediately after the AT sign, or may be started when moving to RT3 (or the next game), or when the replay B group is won (or the next game). or with staying at RT3 (or its next game). Further, during the 50 games, when a conditional device having an advantageous operation mode (small win group B, small win group C, replay group B, or replay group C) is won, an instruction function operation game is executed in principle.

Further, hypothetically, there is a small winning combination E1 (set number "250") that transitions to the advantageous section, a small winning combination E1 (set number "750") that does not transition to the advantageous section, and a small winning combination E2 that does not transition to the advantageous section. , when winning a small winning combination E1 (set number "250") that shifts to an advantageous section, when shifting to an advantageous section where the AT of 50 games can be executed, the game in which the small winning combination 36 won or the next game is started. , there is no point in outputting a continuous effect for arousing the player's expectations as in the past. This is because it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section by seeing whether or not the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up. The eleventh embodiment is conceived for outputting a continuous effect to arouse the player's expectations as in the conventional case.

FIG. 68 is a time chart showing the advantageous sections and the like when the small winning combination E1b (example 1) and the small winning combination E1a (example 2) are won in the eleventh embodiment.
In Example 1 of FIG. 68, when the minor winning combination E1b is won, the advantageous interval starts from the next game (the advantageous interval display LED 77 lights up). Then, the player waits until the small winning group B is won. After the start of the advantageous section, in the game in which the first small winning combination B is won, the instruction function is operated to display the advantageous pushing order (execution of the instruction function operation game). From the next game of this instruction function operation game, a continuous performance is output (even during the continuous performance, the AT sign is in progress). Of course, you may output a continuous production from the instruction function operation game. In this example, 5 games are executed in the continuous effect. Then, in the fifth game, an effect as to whether or not the advantageous section (AT) continues thereafter is output. When the small winning combination E1b is won, the advantageous section (AT precursor) can be finished in one instruction function operating game, so the advantageous section (AT precursor) is finished in the game in which the continuous performance is finished, and shifts to the normal section. .
In addition, when the small win group B is won among the five games during the continuous production, the instruction function operation game may be executed, but in this embodiment, the instruction function operation game is not executed.

On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 68, when the minor winning combination E1a is won, the advantageous section starts (lights up the advantageous section display LED 77), and the instruction function operating game is executed in the game in which the first small winning combination B group is won, A continuous effect (5 games) from the next game is output (the above is the same as when the small winning combination E1b is won). Then, when the minor winning combination E1a is won, in the fifth game of the consecutive effects, an effect is outputted which means that the advantageous section (AT) is continued thereafter. Then, the AT is started from the next game after the end of the continuous performance.
Further, when the small winning combination B group is won during the five games during the continuous performance, the instruction function operation game is not executed as in the case of winning the small winning combination E1b. Of course, during the 5 games during the continuous performance after winning the minor winning combination E1b, when the minor winning group B is further won, the instruction function activation game is executed, after winning the small winning combination E1a. It is preferable that the instruction function operation game is executed during the 5 games during the continuous performance and also when the small win group B is won. The reason why this is done is that whether or not the instruction function activating game is executed during the continuous effect is different between when the small winning combination E1b is won and when the small winning combination E1a is won. This is because it can be determined whether or not to continue the advantageous section (AT) after that.

Here, when the small winning combination E1a is won, AT of 50 games is to be executed. Alternatively, the advantageous interval (AT without AT sign) may be ended at the 50th game from the start of the advantageous interval (the next game when the minor winning combination E1a is won). Alternatively, after the shift to the advantageous section, the 1st instruction function activation game may be counted as the 1st game (the previous game of this game is an AT precursor, and the AT is started from this game).
Also, 50 games may be counted from the next game of the game in which a winning combination (replay B group including replay 02) that can shift to a specific RT (for example, RT3 in FIG. 22) is won. When 50 games are played from the next game that wins a replay that can shift to a specific RT, the game that wins a replay B group informs the pushing order for shifting to a specific RT. Furthermore, even if the player does not follow the notification in the game in which the replay B group is won (even if the replay 02 is not displayed), the AT of 50 games will be executed from the next game. Become. As a result, it is possible to prevent a strategy such as a player intentionally performing a stop operation so as not to move to a specific RT.

Furthermore, in the specification that the advantageous section starts from the next game of the game in which the minor winning combination E1a is won, if the minor winning combination E1a is won under the condition of staying at a specific RT, another Notification for maintaining a specific RT when a winning combination (pattern symbols 01 to 03, or a winning combination capable of displaying replay 03) that may shift to RT (for example, RT2 in FIG. 22) is won. may be performed. Then, the AT count may be started from the game in which the notification for maintaining the specific RT is performed, or a predetermined game (the next game may be played after the notification for maintaining the specific RT is performed). ). By setting in this way, after once shifting to another RT, it is possible to reduce the number of games until shifting to a specific RT again. It is possible to increase opportunities to give games.

In the above example, both the small winning combination E1a and the small winning combination E1b are won, and the continuous effect is set to 5 games. It is good also as a game (1 game) which outputs the production|presentation of whether to perform. Also, the number of AT games is not limited to 50 games, and may be determined by lottery or the like.
Furthermore, when a small win E1b (set number "750") is won, an advantageous interval (AT after AT sign) is performed for 50 games AT after the AT sign, and when a small win E1a (set number "250") is won, 1 It is good also as an advantageous section (AT precursor) which can be completed by the instruction function operation game of the time.

Further, when the minor winning combination E1a is won, the AT's number of games "m" is determined, and when the minor winning combination E1a and the minor winning combination E1b are won, the number of games "n" until the first indication function activation game can be executed is determined. It will be decided by lottery. Then, when the number of games 'n' is determined, the instruction function is not activated until the number of games 'n' has passed, even when the small win group B is won. After the number of games "n" has passed, the instruction function actuation game is executed in the game when the first minor combination B group is won.
Also, as the determined number of games "n", there are, for example, "n1" and "n2"(n1<n2), and when the determined number of games of AT is "m1" when the minor win E1a is won. , "n1" is likely to be determined, and "n2" may be likely to be determined when the number of games of the determined AT is "m2", which is larger than "m1". Also, when the small win E1b is won, "n1" may be easily determined. Further, when the minor winning combination E1a is won, "n1" may be more likely to be determined when the minor winning combination E1b is won than when the determined number of AT games is "m1".
In this way, the longer the number of games "n" until the first instruction function activated game is executed after shifting to the advantageous section, the higher the possibility that a larger AT number of games has been determined. can be expected. Of course, the shorter the number of games "n" until the first instruction function activation game is executed, the higher the possibility that the number of games with a larger AT has been determined.

In the eleventh embodiment, the continuous effect is output from the next game when the first minor combination B group is won. This is because the continuous effect is output from the next game of the game in which the small winning combination E1a or the small winning combination E1b is simply won, as in the conventional case (5 games are executed in the continuous production). , the advantageous interval (AT) when winning the small win E1a may be such that the AT after the AT sign (by the way, the AT sign ends after 5 games) ends after 50 games. Even if the advantageous section (AT precursor) when E1b is won is set to end in 5 games, if the instruction function activation game is not executed even once during the 5 games, the 5th game of the continuous effect is performed. This is because there is a possibility that the advantageous interval (AT sign) does not end even though the effect indicating that the advantageous interval (AT) is not continued after that is output.

Further, even if the advantageous section (AT precursor) when winning the small winning combination E1b is to be terminated in one instruction function activation game, the instruction function activation game is always executed in the fifth game of the continuous effect. However, there is a possibility that the advantageous section (AT precursor) will end in the third game of continuous production, or that the advantageous section (AT precursor) will not end even after the fifth game of continuous production. because there is Of course, even if the advantageous section (AT precursor) when winning the small winning combination E1b ends in 5 games after the execution of the instruction function operation game once, the instruction function operation game is always executed in the first game of the continuous effect. This is because there is a possibility that the advantageous section (AT precursor) does not end even after the fifth game of the continuous effect, because it is not always possible.

However, the advantageous section (AT) when winning the small winning combination E1a is assumed to end after 50 games of the AT after the AT sign (by the way, the AT sign ends with one execution of the instruction function activated game). When the advantageous interval (AT precursor) when winning the small winning combination E1b is to be terminated in one instruction function operating game, the continuous performance is started from the game in which the advantageous interval was started regardless of the winning. , the continuous effect is continued until the first small win group B is won, and when the first small win group B is won, the instruction function is operated, and in the game or the next game, the advantageous section (AT ) may be notified whether or not to continue.
When this is done, since the number of games played until the first small win group B is won is indefinite, an effect image indicating that the continuous effect used in the game in which the continuous effect is continued continues, and an advantageous interval. An effect image indicating that (AT) is not continued and an effect image indicating that the advantageous section (AT) is continued may be prepared to output a continuous effect.
In addition, when winning a small winning combination E1a (small winning combination E1b is also possible) during an advantageous interval (AT precursor) based on winning a small winning combination E1b (for example, during continuous production), AT of 50 games after the AT precursor. may be changed to execute (continue the advantageous section).

FIG. 69 is a time chart showing examples 3 and 4 of the eleventh embodiment.
As described above, when the minor winning combination E1 is won, the continuous presentation is not output until the first minor winning group B is won, and the continuous presentation is output from the next game when the minor winning group B is won.
On the other hand, in example 3 of FIG. 69, when the minor winning combination E1 is won, the continuous effect is not output until the first minor winning group B is won, and from the next game when the minor winning group B is won. This is an example of starting an advantageous section which ends when AT of 30 games is executed from the next game when winning the small winning combination E1 without outputting a continuous effect. Of course, the termination condition of the advantageous section in example 3 is not limited to this, and after the AT sign (by the way, the AT sign may end after 5 games, etc.), AT is executed for 30 games (the number of games is free). In addition, the termination conditions of various advantageous sections described above may be applied. Of course, it is also possible to start advantageous sections with different ending conditions depending on whether the minor winning combination E1a is won or the minor winning combination E1b is won.

Further, when winning the small winning combination E1, the advantageous interval may be started and the advantageous interval may not be started. In example 3 of FIG. 69, after starting the advantageous interval, the small win group B is never won until the first set end condition of the advantageous interval (for example, AT of 30 games is executed) is reached. This is an example. If, before reaching the end condition of the advantageous interval, the minor winning group B is won and the instruction function activation game is executed, the advantageous interval is reached as indicated by the chain double-dashed line in example 3 of FIG. When the termination condition is reached (when AT of 30 games is executed), the advantageous section is terminated.

On the other hand, when the end condition of the advantageous section is reached, if the instruction function activation game has not been executed even once (such as when the small winning combination B group has not been won even once), after that, the small winning combination B At least the advantageous section is extended until the group is won and the instruction function activation game is executed. Example 3 of FIG. 69 shows an example in which the advantageous interval is extended, then the instruction function activation game is executed (winning the minor combination B group), and the advantageous interval is ended in the game. Incidentally, in Example 3, the advantageous section ends in less than 1500 games from the start of the advantageous section.

On the other hand, in example 4 of FIG. 69, after the start of the advantageous interval, the instruction function activation game is not executed even once (the small win group B is never won), and the upper limit of the advantageous interval is 1500. This is an example of reaching a game. In other words, when the conditions for ending the advantageous section have been met, but the upper limit has been reached because the advantageous section has been extended, or there is an increase in the advantageous section, and the conditions for ending the advantageous section have not been met and the upper limit has been reached. This is an example of when it reaches.
In a rare case such as example 4, unlike the case of example 3, the advantageous section ends when the upper limit is reached even if the instruction function activation game is not executed even once. This means that "when the upper limit of the advantageous section (1500 games) is reached, the advantageous section ends" is prioritized over "executing at least one instruction function activated game during the advantageous section". It is for This is because, as in Example 3, even if the advantageous interval is extended when the upper limit of the advantageous interval has not been reached, if a rare hand such as a small hand E1 is won during that interval, the advantageous interval will be extended. It is also possible to add more (of course, it is not necessary), but as in example 4, when the upper limit of the advantageous interval is reached, even if the advantageous interval is extended, the rare combination won during that time , Since the advantageous section cannot be added, etc., the normal section is more advantageous for the player (if a rare role is won during the normal section, a new advantageous section will start) because there is).

<Twelfth Embodiment>
In the twelfth embodiment, when the advantageous section continues up to the upper limit of 1500 games (for example, when a small winning combination E1 is won, an addition is made during the started advantageous section, and it is confirmed to continue Or, when it is decided to continue due to the fact that a 1BB game or the like is performed during the advantageous section, for example, from the 1450th game (when the upper limit is approached), outputting the ending effect Characteristic (output of ending effect is the same as example 3 in FIG. 55 (third embodiment)). It should be noted that it is not limited to the 1450th game, and various settings such as the 1400th game and the 1470th game can be set.
The ending effect starts from the 1450th game and ends at the 1500th game. Here, the "ending effect" is, for example, a moving image, also called a movie image, which is not separated for each game (moving image whose time is set in advance rather than switching images for each unit game). .

Incidentally, the length of the ending effect is set so that even if the player plays the shortest game, the game can be seen to the end after exactly 50 games (the game in which the advantageous section ends). When it reaches the end, it repeats from the beginning or displays the last image as a still image. In this way, it is preferable to set the length of the ending effect so that even if the player plays the shortest time, the player can see the end until the end of the advantageous section. At the end of the ending effect (at the end of the 1500th game), the total number of medals acquired in the advantageous section, the difference between the total number of medals acquired and the total number of medals inserted, and the total number of games (1500 games) are displayed. indicate. Of course, the total number of medals acquired in the advantageous section (total number of medals acquired), the difference between the total number of medals acquired and the total number of medals inserted (total number of medals acquired), and the total number of games played (1500 games) It may be displayed as another effect that is output after that (during the freeze that is executed at the end of the advantageous section (at the end of the 1500th game), etc.) .

FIG. 70 is a time chart showing an example of starting the ending effect from the 1450th game, ending the ending effect at the 1500th game, and ending the advantageous interval in the advantageous interval.
In FIG. 70, (a) shows an example in which 1BB (1BBA, 1BBB, etc. in the first embodiment) is won in the middle of the advantageous section and a 1BB game is executed. In the example of (a), at the end of the 1BB game, the 1450th game of the advantageous section has not been reached. In such a case, the execution of the 1BB game does not affect the end of the ending effect. Therefore, the ending effect is started from the 1450th game, and the ending effect is ended at the 1500th game (the ending effect is ended at the end of the advantageous section).

On the other hand, (b) in FIG. 70 shows an example in which the ending effect is started from the 1450th game in the advantageous section, and then the 1BB is won at the 1490th game and the 1BB game is executed. Then, an example is shown in which the 1500 games, which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, is exceeded at the end of the 1BB game.
Even in such a case, there are no exceptions to the upper limit of the advantageous interval, so the advantageous interval ends after 1500 games have been played (the advantageous interval display LED 77 turns off). By the way, even when the advantageous section ends, the freeze is not executed. Therefore, the advantageous section ends in the middle of the 1BB game, and the 1BB game continues even after the advantageous section ends (normal section).

In such a case, the ending effect in this embodiment ends when the 1BB game ends (not when the advantageous section ends). Because, as in (a), when the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is reached when not in the 1BB game, at the end of the ending production or during the freeze at the end of the advantageous section, the advantageous It is necessary to display the total number of games played in the section, the total number of wins, etc. (particularly, the number of sets of AT executed in the advantageous section, the total number of games played during AT, the total number of wins during AT, etc.). On the other hand, as in (b), when the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is reached during the 1BB game, the 1BB game is executed thereafter (normal section), so the ending effect is finished at this point. In this way, the freeze is executed at the end of the ending effect or at the end of the advantageous section, and the total number of games played in the advantageous section and the total number of winnings are displayed in the effect output during the freeze. This is not preferable because it interferes with the game.

In the first place, when the 1BB game is finished, the freeze is executed at the end of the production during the 1BB game or at the end of the 1BB game, and the production output during the freeze determines the total number of games played during the 1BB game and the total number of games played during the 1BB game. Since the acquired number is displayed, in the case of (b), even when the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is reached, the ending effect is not finished at this point, and when the 1BB game is finished, The ending production is ended, and the freeze is executed at the end of the ending production or at the end of the 1BB game. , the number of AT sets executed in the advantageous section, the total number of games played during the AT, the total number of wins during the AT, etc.) are considered preferable.

In addition, since the 1BB game after reaching the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is a 1BB game in the normal section, strictly the total number of games played in the advantageous section, the total number of acquisitions, etc. (especially, If you want to display the number of AT sets, the total number of games played during AT, the total number of wins during AT, etc.), it is better not to include the total number of games played and the total number of wins during that period (normal section and 1BB game). However, if the strict display is not required, the total number of games played during the period (during the normal section and during the 1BB game) and the total number of wins may be included in the display. The player's satisfaction is higher when it is included and displayed. For example, in the advantageous section, only 1,500 games can be played, but since 1,500 games have been played on the display, there is a sense of satisfaction.

Furthermore, during the 1BB game, along with the ending effect, when the total number of games played and the total number of acquisitions during the 1BB game are displayed, the total number of games played during the advantageous section, the total number of acquisitions, etc. , the number of AT sets performed, the total number of games played during AT, the total number of wins during AT, etc.), the display is during 1BB game after reaching the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section also continue. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55 (example 3) described above, when outputting the ending effect, the total number of games played and the total number of acquired numbers during the 1BB game, the total number of games played and the total number of acquired numbers during the advantageous section, etc. (especially, When not displaying the number of AT sets executed in the advantageous section, the total number of games played during AT, the total number of wins during AT, etc.), during 1BB games after reaching the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section, those No display.

Also, the length of the ending effect is generally set so that even if the player plays the shortest time, the game can be seen to the end by the end of the advantageous section. repeat from the beginning or display the last image as a still image), but when outputting the ending effect even after the advantageous section ends as in the example of (b), repeat the ending effect from the beginning, or Continuing to display the last image of the ending effect as a still image can be mentioned.
The ending effect is not one in which the image is switched for each unit game (separated for each game), but a moving image with a predetermined time, a moving image that is separated for each predetermined number of games, a still image that is not separated for each game, or Any of a still image or the like that is segmented every predetermined number of games may be used.

<Thirteenth Embodiment>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the same RT transition as in FIG. 22 shown in the first embodiment is performed.
The thirteenth embodiment is characterized by the following points.
(1) Make sure that the winning probabilities of conditional devices (replay B group, replay C group, small winning combination B group) relating to RT shift do not have set differences.
(2) Add (make possible) an advantageous section based on winning in the replay group B in RT2 which is transferred from non-RT or RT1. On the other hand, when shifting from RT3 to RT2, when shifting from RT2 to RT3, the addition of the advantageous section is not executed.
(3) Set the winning probability of replay A to have a set difference.
(4) The winning probability of the small combination D is set to have a set difference.

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing the number table (2) of the thirteenth embodiment, which corresponds to FIG. 18 of the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, a conditional device for "small win D" was provided in FIG. ). In the thirteenth embodiment as well, the number table (1) similar to that of FIG. 17 shown in the first embodiment is provided (there is no small combination D).

As in the first embodiment (FIG. 22), when shifting from non-RT or RT1 to RT2, it is necessary to win the small win group B and display pattern symbols. Here, in order to display the pattern symbols, it is necessary to win the small combination B group. Then, when there is a set difference in the winning probability of the small win group B, the ease of shifting from non-RT or RT1 to RT2 will differ depending on the set value (the ease of shifting from RT3 to RT2 will also differ) ). Therefore, in the thirteenth embodiment, in the non-RT and RT1, the winning probabilities of the small win group B are set so as not to have a set difference. In the example of FIG. 71, the set numbers of the small winning combination B1 to small winning combination B12 are set to "770" in common for all settings (the value is not limited to this value). In order to make the appearance rate of each of the small wins B1 to B12 the same, all the small wins B1 to B12 have the same number.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 71, the replay group B is drawn only in RT2, and the number of replays B1 to B3 is "2800" which is common to all settings. Furthermore, the replay C group is drawn only in RT3, and the set number of replays C1 to C3 is "12000" which is common to all settings. These points are the same as in the first embodiment.
Further, in the thirteenth embodiment, in non-RT or RT2 shifted from RT1, when replay B group is won (may be when replay 02 is displayed or when RT2 is shifted to RT3), an advantageous section is added. Note that the addition of the advantageous section may be always added, or whether or not to add it may be decided by lottery. Also, the number of games to be added may be a predetermined fixed number of games, or the number of games may be determined by lottery.

It should be noted that "addition of advantageous section" can be replaced with "addition of AT" in all the embodiments. For example, when winning a special role during AT (for example, the number of remaining games of AT is "5"), and winning a replay group B in RT2 shifted from non-RT or RT1 after finishing the special game, An additional lottery for increasing the number of remaining games of AT is executed, and when the lottery is won, the number of remaining games of AT can be increased (for example, the number of remaining games of AT game is set to "25").

It should be noted that in the non-RT or RT2 shifted from RT1, when the replay B group is won, adding an advantageous section is similar to the tenth embodiment described above.
In the thirteenth embodiment, the replay B group is a condition device that does not have a set difference in the winning probability (set number), so it is possible to add an advantageous section by linking the winning of the condition device. As a result, it is possible to eliminate setting differences in the probability of addition.
Also, as in the tenth embodiment, when moving from RT3 to RT2, at that RT2, even if the replay B group is won (even if replay 02 is displayed or RT2 moves to RT3) , Do not add the advantageous section.
Furthermore, in RT2, when the replay B group is won, RT2 is maintained or shifts to RT3. Therefore, the replay B group becomes a conditional device capable of transferring RT. Since the replay B group is a condition device that does not have a setting difference in winning probability, it is possible to have a setting difference in the probability (ease of transition) of shifting from RT2 to RT3.

In RT3, when replay C group is won, RT3 is maintained or shifts to RT2. Therefore, the replay C group becomes a conditional device capable of transferring RT. Since the replay C group is a conditional device that does not have a setting difference in winning probability, it is possible to have no setting difference in the probability (ease of transition) of shifting from RT3 to RT2.

Similarly, when a small win group B is won in non-RT, RT1, or RT3 and pattern symbols are displayed, the process proceeds to RT2. Therefore, the minor combination B group becomes a conditional device capable of transferring RT. And since the small win group B is a conditional device that does not have a setting difference in the winning probability, it should not have a setting difference in the probability (easiness of transition) of shifting from non-RT, RT1, RT3 to RT2. can do.
In addition, since the small winning combination C group does not correspond to a conditional device capable of transferring RT, it may or may not have a setting difference. The example of FIG. 71 has a setting difference.

As described above, the RT transition rate is not affected by the setting difference by not giving the setting difference to the winning probability in the condition device (condition device related to the RT transition) that allows the RT to transition. can do.
However, RT4 (internal) that shifts based on the winning of a special role is excluded. For example, as shown in FIG. 71, the winning probabilities of "1BBA + small winning combination E2", 1BBB, and "1BBB + small winning combination D" have set differences, but RT4 (internal middle ) is an exception (may be affected by setting differences). This is because RT4 (internal middle) shifts based on the winning of a special combination, and does not shift according to the player's pressing order, and is different in nature from the above. Furthermore, RT4 (inside) is intended to stay only for a short period of time until 1BB is won, so it is different in nature from the above. In addition, RT4 (inside) cannot decide to move to the advantageous section even if it is in the normal section in the first place, and even if it is in the advantageous section, it cannot be added to the advantageous section. This is because there is no setting difference in the probability of transition or the probability of addition.

Furthermore, in the thirteenth embodiment, there is a setting difference in the winning probability (number) of replay A. Note that the replay A has different winning probabilities (numbers) for each RT. Since the RT does not shift when the replay A is won, the setting difference does not affect the RT shift rate. In this way, the higher the winning probability of replay A, the higher the probability of replaying. get higher
In the example of FIG. 71, the winning probability of replay A is set higher in setting 6 than in setting 1. In FIG. For this reason, setting 6 can lower the non-winning probability (probability of losing) than setting 1, so that the payout rate can be increased accordingly.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, as a single winning of the small winning combination E1, a small winning combination E1 (number "250") that shifts to the advantageous interval when winning in the normal interval, and A small winning combination E1 (set number “750”) is provided which does not shift to the advantageous section. Hypothetically, when a small winning combination E1 with a set number of “250” is won, an advantageous section for executing AT of 50 games (counting of 50 games may be started immediately, and when it shifts to RT3 (or the next game ), may start when the replay B group is won (or the next game), or may start when staying at RT3 (or the next game) Suppose that it is decided to transfer (in addition, the termination conditions of various advantageous sections described above may be applied). Even with the same 50-game AT, new medals are inserted when replay A has a higher winning probability (lower non-winning probability) than when replay A has a lower winning probability (higher non-winning probability). Since it is not necessary to (consume), the ball output rate is increased accordingly. In this way, even if there is no set difference in the probability of deciding to shift to the advantageous section, it is possible to add a set difference to the ball payout rate in the advantageous section.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 17, the minor combination D is a conditional device that does not have a set difference. On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, a condition device having a setting difference is used. Further, although not shown in FIG. 71, the payout number is set to 15 (5 in the first embodiment) when winning the small winning combination D and winning the small winning combination 35 (watermelon). Therefore, the small combination D is the small combination having the maximum number of payouts among the small combinations.

In addition, since the small winning combination 35 related to the small winning combination D is "PB≠1", the small winning combination 35 cannot be won unless the eyes are pressed. For this reason, when the small winning combination D is won, for example, an effect suggesting that the small winning combination D has been won may be output, such as a green notification. Here, outputting an effect suggesting the winning when the combination of "PB.noteq.1" is won by the conditional device is not "activation of the instruction function". It is true that there are cases where the small winning combination 35 wins and cases where the small winning combination 35 does not win at the timing of the eye-pushing. If the stop switch 42 is operated at the operation timing, it is a combination that can always win a prize. In this respect, it is different from the small wins, such as the small win group B of the present invention, in which the winning rate varies depending on whether or not the instruction function is activated. For example, in order to win the small winning combination 01 when the small winning combination B1 is won, if the operation is always left first, the small winning combination 01 cannot be won when the small winning combination B5 is won.

For example, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the 4th, 9th or 14th "watermelon" in FIG. If the middle stop switch 42 is operated at a timing at which the 8th or 13th "watermelon" can be stopped on the effective line (on the right reel 31, the "watermelon" is "PB=1", so any timing is acceptable), The small win 35 can always win (even without any notification).
In the present invention, there is no combination of "PB ≠ 1" other than the small combination 35 (not including when the pressing order is incorrect when winning the small combination B group), so every game is stopped at the above timing. If the switch 42 is operated, the small win 35 will not be missed.
As described above, the game when winning the small combination D does not correspond to the "game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch" in the present invention.

As a result, when an advantageous section is started, it is necessary to activate the instruction function at least once during the advantageous section when the condition device that will result in the maximum payout is won by the operation of the instruction function. "Conditional device for maximum payout" is not the small combination D, but the small combination B group.
Although not shown in FIG. 71, as in the first embodiment, a small winning combination E1 (2 payouts) is provided as a conditional device that does not have a set difference.

From the above, in the thirteenth embodiment,
Probability of winning a small combination D: Has a set difference (15 payouts)
Winning probability of small hand B group: No set difference (when the pushing order is correct, the number of payouts is 9)
Winning probability of small hand E1: No set difference (2 payouts)
Then, the size relationship of the number of payouts is
Small win D> Small win group B (when pushing order is correct)> Small win E1
becomes.

Supposing that the game at the time of winning the small combination D corresponds to the "game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch" in the present invention (a small combination with a different winning rate depending on whether or not the instruction function is operated) case), the ``conditional device for maximum payout due to the operation of the instruction function'' is not the small winning combination B group, but the small winning combination D. In that case, since the winning probability of the small winning combination D is low, it may frequently happen that the small winning combination D is not won before the condition for ending the advantageous interval is reached (the advantageous interval cannot be ended even though it is desired to end). However, if the winning probability of the small winning combination D is increased (higher than the winning probability of the small winning combination B), there is a high possibility that the small winning combination D will be won twice with 1BBB (rare combination). (This is because most of the single wins of the small hand D cannot be expected to be double wins with 1BBB).

For this reason, the number of coins to be paid out when the small winning combination D is won must be smaller than the number of winning coins to be paid out when the pressing order of the small winning combination B group is correct. In that case, even if there is a set difference in the winning probability of the small combination D, the ball payout rate will not change significantly (because you will have to do it). However, if there is a setting difference in the winning probability of the small combination B group, which has a large number of payouts when the pressing order is correct, then there will be a setting difference in the easiness of transition to RT.
Therefore, in the thirteenth embodiment, a small combination D with a large number of payouts is used, and the ball payout rate differs according to the set value (the higher the setting, the higher the ball payout rate). change)) and RT transitions can be made immune to setting differences.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the small combination D is "PB≠1". You will be able to win prizes regardless of your skill.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 71, the small winning combination D has a possibility of winning more than 1BBB. Therefore, the higher the setting, the easier it is for the small winning combination 35 to appear. be able to. Specifically, when the set value is set to "1", the probability that 1BBB is won at the time when the minor winning combination 35 appears is "20/520" = "0.038 (approximately 3.8% )”, and the set value is set to “6”, the probability that 1BBB is won when the small winning combination 35 appears is “25/625”=“0.040 (approximately 4.0% )”. Therefore, when the small win 35 appears, the higher the set value is, the higher the possibility of winning 1BBB is. can also

In addition, although it can be said for all embodiments, in FIGS. If the conditional device does not have a setting difference and is not the one that wins only at a specific RT (RT4, 1BBA game, 1BBB game is excluded), it is free to put "○" in the place, and "X" It is free to change the marked part to "△" as long as the condition device has no setting difference.

<14th Embodiment>
In the fourteenth embodiment, after the advantageous section starts and before the advantageous section ends (before the end condition is reached), the condition for changing the advantageous section ending condition (advantageous section extension condition) is satisfied. is characterized by extending the advantageous section.
For example, at the start of an advantageous section (for example, the previous game was a winning of a small combination D in the first embodiment), if the number of games (initial value) in the advantageous section is 30 games, an advantageous period is reached during the advantageous section. When the interval extension condition (for example, winning the minor winning combination E1 in the first embodiment, etc.) is satisfied, the number of games played is further added to extend the advantageous interval. In the fourteenth embodiment, the end condition of the advantageous interval is set to 30 games, but in addition, various other end conditions of the advantageous interval described above may be applied.

FIG. 72 is a time chart for explaining the fourteenth embodiment.
In Example 1 of FIG. 72, when the advantageous section is started, the instruction function activation game is executed in the game when the first minor combination B group is won. In Example 1, the number of games in the initially set advantageous section is 30 games. Example 1 shows an example in which the condition for extending the advantageous section is satisfied during the 30 games, and the number of games is increased by "50". When the extension condition is not satisfied during the first 30 games of the advantageous section, the advantageous section ends at the 30th game as indicated by the two-dot chain line in the figure. On the other hand, in example 1, since the condition for extending the advantageous section is satisfied, the number of games played in the advantageous section is extended by 50 games.

In this case, at the end of the first 30 games, if at least one pointing function actuation game has been executed, in the subsequent 50 games, even if the minor winning group B is never won, that is, 1 The advantageous section can be ended without executing the instruction function activation game even once. This is because one pointing function activation game is executed in a total of 80 games.

On the other hand, in FIG. 72, in Example 2, similarly to Example 1, the number of games in the initially set advantageous section is 30 games, and during the 30 games, the advantageous section extension condition is satisfied, and the 50 games are extended. shows an example.
In Example 2, in the first 30 games and the extended 50 games (total 80 games), the small win group B was never won (that is, the instruction function activation game was not executed even once). For example. In such a case, even if the condition for ending the advantageous interval is satisfied (80 games have been played), the advantageous interval is not terminated.

In Example 2 of FIG. 72, when winning the small winning combination B group during the extended 50 games and executing the instruction function operating game (in the figure, two-dot chain line A), the extended 50th game is an advantageous section. can be terminated (chain double-dashed line B in the figure).
On the other hand, when the total number of games is 80, that is, when the instruction function activation game has not been executed even once from the start of the advantageous section, the winning of the small winning combination B group is waited for, and when the small winning combination B group is won, the instruction function is activated. Execute the game. Then, the advantageous section ends.

In the example of FIG. 72, the number of games in the first advantageous section is 30 games, and the number of games in the extended period is 50 games. If the transition condition is not satisfied, the game ends after 32 games (the number of games is free), or the instruction function is activated once (the number of times is free), etc.) Even if not satisfied, after 32 games (the number of games is free), AT of 50 games (the number of games is free, and the start timing of counting the number of games may be applied to the various timings described above), etc.) , CZ (for example, if the conditions for transition to AT are not satisfied, 10 games (the number of games is free) are completed, or 1 time (the number of games is free) of the instruction function activation game, etc., and a fake AT Compared to the omen, it is easier to meet the conditions for transition to AT), AT (if the extension conditions are not met, 30 games (the number of games is free, and the start timing of counting the number of games is also applied to the various timings described above) It can be provided in a variety of ways, such as one that ends with good).

For example, at the start of the advantageous section, it shifts to CZ (equivalent to "30" game in FIG. 72), and when the condition for shifting to AT (equivalent to "extension condition") is satisfied during this CZ, AT ("50 ” corresponding to the extension of the game) (extending the end condition of the advantageous section). On the other hand, if the transition conditions to AT are not met during CZ, the advantageous section ends when the CZ end conditions are met, and the normal section (normal for CZ, AT, etc.) 1, two-dot chain line).

Furthermore, in addition to the above,
(1) The first advantageous section is CZ (for example, one that ends in 30 games), and when the conditions for extending the advantageous section are satisfied during this CZ, a CZ with a longer number of games (add "20" to the number of games ).
(2) The first advantageous interval is defined as "advantageous interval (fake AT precursor or CZ) that ends after a predetermined number of times (for example, once) of instruction function activation games", and the advantageous interval before the execution of the first instruction function activation game. (CZ transition condition or AT transition condition, for example winning a small winning combination E1) is satisfied, CZ (predetermined number of games or instruction function operation game ends in a predetermined number of times), Or change to AT (which ends after a predetermined number of games).
(3) The first advantageous interval is defined as "advantageous interval (fake AT precursor or CZ) that ends after a predetermined number of times (for example, once) of instruction function activation games", and the advantageous interval before the execution of the first instruction function activation game. When the extension condition (extension condition or CZ transition condition) is satisfied, "advantageous section that ends with a predetermined number of times or more (for example, 3 times) instruction function operation game (gase AT precursor, or CZ)" change to
(4) The AT of 30 games is set as the first advantageous interval, and when the condition for extending the advantageous interval is satisfied during this AT, the AT is changed to 100 games (the number of games is added by "70").
etc.

In FIG. 72, when the first 30 games in the advantageous section are CZ, the instruction function activating game is executed only when the first small winning group B is won, and after that (30 games from the first game), the small winning group B It is not necessary to execute the instruction function activation game even if the player wins the prize.
On the other hand, during CZ (between 30 games), two or more pointing function activation games may be executed.
Further, even when the conditions for shifting to AT are satisfied during CZ, if the instruction function actuation game has already been executed once during CZ, the instruction function actuation game will not be executed in the subsequent AT. may In addition, the same is true when the conditions for transition to CZ or AT are satisfied during a false AT sign. In other words, it suffices that one pointing function activation game is executed during the period from the start of the advantageous section to the end thereof.

<Fifteenth Embodiment>
The fifteenth embodiment is characterized by having a case where freezing is executed and a case where it is not executed when the advantageous section ends.
FIG. 73 is a time chart showing the relationship between the advantageous section and freezing in the fifteenth embodiment.
In the fifteenth embodiment, when it is decided to run the advantageous section (for example, when winning a small winning combination E1), CZ is started at the beginning of the advantageous section. Then, when the conditions for shifting to AT are satisfied during CZ, AT is started after CZ ends. Of course, it is not limited to this. Some may start CZ as the beginning of the advantageous section, and others may start AT from the beginning.

In FIG. 73, in the first CZ (advantageous section), the conditions for transition to AT are not satisfied, and the advantageous section ends only in CZ. In the next CZ (advantageous section), the conditions for shifting to AT are satisfied, and after the CZ ends, AT is executed, and the AT and the advantageous section are finished. When the conditions for transition to AT are satisfied during CZ, CZ may be ended immediately and AT may be executed, or AT may be executed after waiting until CZ is completed (this is the same as the 15th embodiment).
Although not shown in FIG. 73, even if the game ends only with CZ, it is necessary to execute the pointing function activation game at least once because the transition is made to the advantageous section.
In the fifteenth embodiment, at the end of the first CZ (at the end of the advantageous section without executing AT after the end of CZ), the freeze is not executed (chain double-dashed line in the figure). On the other hand, when shifting from CZ to AT, freeze is executed at the end of AT (advantageous section).
In addition, at the time of freezing, at least the total number of AT games played, the total number of winnings, etc. are displayed as images. Of course, the image display may include the total number of games played and the total number of wins during the CZ, and when shifting from the CZ to the AT via the AT precursor, during the CZ and/or during the AT precursor An image including the total number of games played and the total number of winnings may be displayed.

In this way, it is determined in advance which advantageous sections are to be frozen at the end and which advantageous sections are to be frozen at the end.
For example, as the expected value of the total number of games played in the advantageous section, the total number of winnings, etc., the first end condition (for example, the end of the advantageous section only with CZ (gase AT precursor)) and the expected value than the first end condition is a large second end condition (for example, when AT is executed after CZ, or when only AT is executed), when the advantageous section ends with the first end condition, freeze is not executed, and the advantageous section is terminated with the second termination condition, freezing is executed. This is because even when the expected value of the total number of games played in the advantageous section and the total number of acquisitions is small (for example, the total number of games played is 10 games, the total number of acquisitions is 12, etc.), the freeze is executed, and the total number of games played at that time , the total number of wins, etc., is likely to increase the player's sense of disappointment (decrease interest).
Even if it is an advantageous section, unlike AT, there are some that do not aim to give a lot of medals to the player (to increase the total number of acquisitions), such as fake AT precursor, AT precursor, and CZ. , it is not preferable to uniformly freeze at the end of the advantageous section.

It should be noted that, for example, a freeze flag may be provided as a determination as to whether or not to freeze. This freeze flag remains off only at the start of CZ, but is turned on when AT is executed. Then, at the end of the advantageous section, it is determined whether or not the freeze flag is on, and when it is on, the freeze is executed, and when the freeze is executed, the freeze flag is turned off. It should be noted that, immediately before the end of the advantageous section, it is determined whether the freeze flag is on or not. It may be initialized.

By controlling in this way, it is possible not to freeze at the end of an advantageous section which does not bring much merit to the player, such as when the advantageous section is started but ends with only CZ.
In addition, information specifying the type of advantageous section (CZ, guise AT precursor, AT precursor, AT, etc.) For example, "0" is a normal section, "1" is CZ, "2" is a false AT precursor, "3" is an AT precursor, "4" is an AT, etc.). Then, at the end of the advantageous section or immediately before the advantageous section ends, this information may be determined and the freeze may be executed.

Also, the freeze is not limited to one time. For example, when the AT executes 50 games as one segment, the freeze is executed every 50 games (for example, even if the AT is 100 games), and during the execution of the freeze, the AT continues after the next game. For example, outputting an effect of whether or not to perform. Also, every 50 games, the total number of games played and the total number of winnings at that time can be image-displayed, and an effect can be output as if the advantageous section had ended (it was AT of 50 games).

In addition, when the upper limit of 1500 games, which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, is reached while AT is being executed, freezing is executed, and during the freezing, the total number of games played during AT, the total number of wins, etc. are displayed as an image. .
Also in this case, when CZ or AT precursor is executed before AT is executed, an image including the total number of games played and the total winning number during CZ and/or AT precursor may be displayed. good.
In addition, even when the upper limit of the advantageous section of 1500 games is reached while performing CZ or AT sign, freeze is executed, and during the freeze, during the advantageous section (part of the advantageous section such as CZ or all) may be displayed as an image.

However, as shown in FIG. 70(b), when 1500 games, which is the upper limit of the advantageous section during 1BB operation, is reached (for example, 1BB is activated while AT is running, and during 1BB operation When reaching 1500 games, etc.), the freeze is not executed when reaching 1500 games (because it is in the 1BB game), and the freeze is executed at the end of the 1BB game (during the freeze, at least the total number of games during AT and image display of the total number of acquisitions, etc.).
When freezing is executed, the advantageous section display LED 77 is extinguished after the freezing is finished. Of course, the advantageous interval display LED 77 may be extinguished before the freeze is executed, or the advantageous interval display LED 77 may be extinguished during the execution of the freeze. The timing of initialization is also the same as the timing of turning off the advantageous section display LED 77 .

Also, in FIG. 73, it is possible to provide a condition device in which the advantageous section ends only with CZ and a condition device in which it is determined that both CZ and AT are executed. For example, in FIG. 17 of the first embodiment, when a small winning combination E1 with a set number of "750" is won alone, the advantageous interval ends with only CZ, and when a small winning combination of E1 with a set number of "250" is won alone, CZ and AT It is possible to set it as an advantageous section to execute. By setting in this way, it is possible to decide to execute AT without conducting a lottery as to whether or not conditions for shifting to AT are satisfied during CZ.
Of course, even in this case, a lottery may be performed during the CZ to determine whether or not the condition for shifting to AT is satisfied (this may be performed only in the advantageous section ending only in the CZ). Moreover, it is also possible to output a continuous effect as to whether or not to execute AT from several games before the end of CZ. Also in this case, whether or not to freeze is as described above.

Although the third to fifteenth embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the third embodiment (FIGS. 43 to 52), examples of information (commands) transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 were given, but the main control board is not limited to this. 50 may transmit parameters (the number of completed games, the number of remaining games, the number of additions, the number of wins, the number of operation of the instruction function, etc.) necessary for the display during the advantageous section (AT) on the side of the sub-control board 80. .

(2) In addition, in FIGS. 43 to 52, in order to manage the advantageous interval (AT) by the number of games, parameters related to the number of games (AT counter value, additional counter value, upper limit counter value, etc.) were transmitted, but the advantageous interval If the upper limit of (AT) is managed by, for example, the number of acquired coins (for example, 3000), information on the number of acquired coins is transmitted every game.
Also, every game, the main control board 50 transmits information indicating that it is in the advantageous section and information indicating that it is in the AT, and counts the number of games in the advantageous section and AT to the sub-control board 80 side. It is also possible to provide a counter and count the number of games on the sub-control board 80 side.

(3) In FIGS. 47 to 49 of the third embodiment, lottery tables A and B are provided as lottery tables used in the additional lottery, and the lottery used depending on whether or not the threshold is equal to or greater than the specified number "1000" switched tables. However, the lottery table is not limited to this, and any number of types of lottery tables may be provided. Also, although the specified number "1000" was exemplified as the threshold, it is not limited to this.
For example, four types of lottery tables A>B>C>D are provided as lottery tables with different expected values to be added. Then, when the specified number (AT game count) is less than 500, use the lottery table A, when the specified number is 500 or more and less than 1000, use the lottery table B, When the specified number is 1000 or more and less than 1300 , the lottery table C is used, and when the specified number is 1300 or more, the lottery table D is used.

(4) As shown in Examples 1 to 3 of FIG. 55, when the total number of games played in the advantageous section (AT) reaches the upper limit, a special Although the information is displayed, it is not limited to these examples 1 to 3,
a) A display that allows the player to recognize that the total number of games played in the advantageous section (AT) has reached the upper limit b) A display that is different from the display before the total number of games played in the advantageous section (AT) reaches the upper limit It is not limited to the display contents of Examples 1 to 3.

(5) In addition, in Example 1 of FIG. 55, when the total number of games played by AT exceeds 1500 games due to the addition, the display of the number of games completed and the number of remaining games is not changed. By changing the display font of the remaining number of games, changing the character size, changing the display color, etc., the information itself of the number of completed games and the remaining number of games is not changed, but the display mode is changed. may notify the player that the total number of AT games has exceeded 1500 games.

(6) In Example 4 of FIG. 55, when the advantageous section (AT) is almost left, a message such as "End in 10 more games" is displayed, but when the advantageous section (AT) starts, , ``You cannot play more than 1,500 games in this advantageous section (AT),'' or the like can be given in advance.

(7) In the fourth embodiment, the AT signal is transmitted as the external signal 2. However, if the slot machine has specifications in which the advantageous interval and the AT do not match, for example, the advantageous interval and the AT can be distinguished. An external signal may be sent. For example, using two external signals, it is possible to transmit an external signal capable of distinguishing between "non-advantageous section (non-AT)", "advantageous section and non-AT", and "advantageous section and AT".

(8) In the fourth embodiment, the BB is won just before the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, and the BB game starts when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached (1500th game from the start of the advantageous section) or immediately after reaching the upper limit (for example, the advantageous When it is the 1501st game from the start of the section), the BB game is started in the non-advantageous section, only the external signal 1 (BB) is turned on, and the external signal 2 (AT) is turned off (advantageous section and AT end).
Also, when the BB game ends when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached (1500th game from the start of the advantageous section) or just before reaching the upper limit (for example, the 1499th game from the start of the advantageous section), the external at the end of the BB game Turning off signal 1 (BB) and simultaneously turning off external signal 2 (AT) (ending the advantageous interval and AT) can be mentioned.

(9) In the fifth embodiment, the control states controlled by the main control board 50 are AT, CZ, omen, and normal. can also be provided. This additional special zone continues, for example, until a predetermined number of games are played, or until a predetermined number of times is won in a predetermined combination. , increasing the number of AT games played.

(10) In the fifth embodiment, in FIG. 61, in the example of (a), after the AT (state 1) ends, the AT pullback period (state 2) is entered, and the AT cannot be pulled back in state 2. was shifted to normal (state 3). Also, in the example of (b), after the end of AT, it was shifted to CZ, and when AT could not be pulled back in this CZ, it was shifted to normal. Furthermore, in the example of (c), after the end of the CZ, the transition is made to the CZ pullback period, and when the CZ cannot be pulled back during this CZ pullback period, the normal shift is made.
However, the state transitions described above are illustrative and not limiting.

For example, in FIG. 61(a), after the end of AT (state 1), the state may be shifted to normal (state 3) without going through the AT withdrawal period (state 2).
Further, in FIG. 61(b), the transition may be normal→CZ→AT, or normal→prediction→AT. After the end of AT, the transition may be from AT to normal, or from AT to precursor (CZ pullback period) to normal.
Furthermore, in FIG. 61(c), normal may be shifted to CZ without going through the precursor. Furthermore, it may be shifted from CZ to normal without going through the pullback period.

(11) In the eighth embodiment, the output of the continuous effect is started near the end of the 1BBA game. You may continue outputting the production|presentation which stirs up whether it starts or not.
Further, the output of the continuous effect may be started from the start of the 1BBA game, and the effect of finally notifying whether or not to start AT may be output until the first half of the 1BBA game. Alternatively, an effect may be provided in which the execution of AT is determined when the effect is output during the continuous effect, and the effect may be output during the continuous effect.
In addition, in 8th Embodiment, continuous production|presentation is not necessarily required production|presentation. Therefore, it is optional whether or not to output the continuous effect. Also, for example, it is possible to output an effect as to whether or not to continue the advantageous section for only one game.

(12) In the ninth embodiment, when the advantageous section is started based on the winning of the conditional device including the special hand, for example, in RT4 (internal medium), when the minor hand B group is won, the instruction function may be activated. . When the instruction function is activated at RT4, the ball payout rate at RT4 exceeds "1". In such a case, it is necessary to start the advantageous section from the start of RT4, which is the next game of the game in which the special combination is won.
On the other hand, even if it shifts to RT4, when not operating an instruction|indication function, it should just start an advantageous area by the time of the start of a special game.

(13) In the third embodiment, when the upper limit value of the advantageous interval is approaching, the design is made so that the winning probability of the AT addition lottery on the main control board 50 is lowered, or the addition effect on the sub control board 80 is suppressed. By doing so, even if the upper limit value of the advantageous section is approaching, it is possible to keep the player from being discouraged as much as possible.
Another method is to change the execution probability of the freeze effect based on the number of times the game is executed in the advantageous section, so as not to discourage the player as much as possible. For example, in FIG. 17, when winning the small win E1 with the set number "250", the number of additional games is set to "50" (50%), "100" (40%), or "200" (10%). It is set so that the possibility of execution of freeze performance increases as the number of additional games increases.

In such specifications, when the number of games in the advantageous section is less than a predetermined value (for example, 1300), if "200" is determined as the number of additional games, the probability X (including 100%) Freeze production When the number of games in the advantageous section is equal to or more than the predetermined value, and "200" is determined as the number of additional games, the freeze performance is executed with a probability Y (including 0%) lower than the probability X. - 特許庁
By constructing in this way, when the upper limit value of the advantageous section is approaching, the execution probability of the freeze performance can be lowered, and the freeze performance can prevent the player from being excessively stimulated. That is, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged as much as possible when the freeze effect is executed.
(14) Each embodiment described above is not limited to being carried out independently, and can be carried out in combination with a plurality of embodiments as appropriate.

<Sixteenth Embodiment>
Next, a sixteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
In this embodiment, there are "advantageous section 1" and "advantageous section 2" as advantageous sections. Then, when the advantageous section 1 is won (decided to shift), the game state shifts to a fake game state that does not have the right to shift to ART. Omen) to transition to ART.

Moreover, although the content partially overlaps with the first embodiment, the meanings of the terms in the present embodiment are as follows.
A “conditional device” is a lottery target consisting of one or more winning combinations. If one condition device is won, the combination included in the condition device is won.
A conditional device related to a special role (accessory; bonus) is called a "accessory conditional device", a conditional device related to a small combination is called a "winning conditional device", and a conditional device related to replay is called a "replay conditional device". . Also, the winning condition device and the replay condition device are collectively referred to as "winning and replay condition device".

"Conditional device number" is a number for identifying a conditional device, and is determined for each conditional device.
The number for identifying the accessory condition device is called the "accessory condition device number", the number for identifying the winning condition device is called the "winning condition device number", and the number for identifying the replay condition device is It is called "replay condition device number". Also, the winning condition device number and the replay condition device number are collectively referred to as "winning and replay condition device number".
A “winning number” is a number determined based on a random number obtained from a random number generator. One winning number is determined based on one random number.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the combination lottery means 61 is means for performing lottery (decision or selection) of the condition device (winning combination). Therefore, the role lottery means 61 is also referred to as condition device lottery (determination or selection) means, winning combination lottery (determination or selection) means, and the like.
In addition, as in the first embodiment, the combination lottery means 61 includes random number generation means and random number acquisition means for acquiring the random number generated by the random number generation means.
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the combination lottery means 61 includes winning number determination means for determining a winning number based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means, and condition device for determining a condition device number based on the determined winning number. and number determination means.

The random number generating means generates a random number within a predetermined range (eg "0" to "65535" in decimal). For example, the range of "0" to "65535" is defined as one cycle, and a counter that performs one count in 200n (nano) seconds can be provided, and the count value of this counter can be a random number. This counter keeps counting random numbers while the slot machine 10 is powered on. This point is the same as in the first embodiment.

The random number acquisition means acquires the random number generated by the random number generation means when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player. This point is the same as in the first embodiment.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on), the random number obtaining means obtains (latches) the random number from the counter and stores it in the random number register.
Here, the random number register is a register built into the main CPU 55, and is a register that is not writable but only readable by the program.
Also, when the program reads the random value stored in the random value register, the random value register is cleared.

The winning number determining means determines a winning number based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means.
In the present embodiment, the winning number determining means corresponds to internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination processing in FIG. 88, which will be described later.
The condition device number determination means determines the condition device number based on the winning number determined by the winning number determination means.
In this embodiment, the conditional device number determination means corresponds to processing of the conditional device number set 1 in FIG. 89 to be described later.

FIG. 74(a) is a diagram showing the winning number definition (1) in this embodiment. FIG. 75(a) is a diagram showing the winning number definition (2) in this embodiment, and is a diagram following FIG. 74(a).
The winning number definition defines the correspondence relationship between the winning number and the condition device number.
As shown in FIG. 74(b), "@NB_REP_A EQU 1; replay A condition device number" indicates that "@NB_REP_A" indicates "replay A condition device number" and "replay A condition device number" is "1 , and that the winning number corresponding to '@NB_REP_A' is '1'.
Then, when the winning number is determined to be "1", it becomes a single winning of "replay A condition device". Winning numbers “2” to “9” are similar to winning number “1”.

Further, as shown in FIG. 74(c), "@NB_WIN_A EQU 10; small winning combination A condition device number" indicates that "@NB_WIN_A" indicates "small winning combination A condition device number", "small winning combination A condition device number" is "10", and the winning number corresponding to "@NB_WIN_A" is "10".
Then, when the winning number is determined to be "10", it becomes a single winning of the "minor combination A condition device". Winning numbers “11” to “30” are similar to winning number “10”.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 75(b), ``@BBA_WIN_E2 EQU 31; ' means that the winning number corresponding to ' is '31'.
Then, when the winning number is determined to be "31", the "1BBA conditional device" and the "minor combination E2 conditional device" are won in duplicate.

Further, as shown in FIG. 75(c), "@BBB EQU 32; 1BBB single winning" means that "@BBB" indicates "1BBB single winning", and the winning number corresponding to "@BBB" is "32" number.
Then, when the winning number is determined to be "32", it becomes a single winning of "1BBB condition device".

Further, as shown in FIG. 75(d), "@BBA EQU 34; 1BBA single winning + addition" indicates that "@BBA" indicates "1BBA single winning and advantageous section addition", and "@BBA". means that the winning number corresponding to is "34".
Then, when the winning number is determined to be "34", it is determined that "1BBA conditional device" is won alone, and the number of games played in the advantageous section is added.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 75(e), "@AT1_BBA_WD EQU 44; 1 BBA + small hand D duplicate winning + advantageous section 1" is such that "@AT1_BBA_WD" is "1 BBA and small hand D duplicate winning and advantageous section 1 Winning" means that the winning number corresponding to "@AT1_BBA_WD" is "44".
Then, when the winning number is determined to be "44", it is determined that "1 BBA condition device" and "small combination D condition device" will be repeatedly won, and that the transition to the advantageous section 1 will occur.

As shown in FIGS. 74(a) and 75(a), in this embodiment, winning numbers are determined from "1" to "52". Then, the winning number determining means determines one of the numerical values "0" to "52" as the winning number.
Also, as shown in FIG. 74(a), the winning numbers "1" to "9" correspond to the replay condition device numbers "1" to "9", respectively, and the winning numbers "10" to The number "30" corresponds to the winning condition device numbers "10" to "30", respectively.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 75(a), the winning numbers "31" to "33" are for single winning of the accessory condition device, or multiple winning of the accessory condition device and the prize and replay condition device. Correspondingly, the winning numbers "34" to "42" correspond to the addition of the advantageous section, the winning numbers "43" to "47" correspond to the transition to the advantageous section 1, and the winning number " Numbers 48” to “52” correspond to the transition to the advantageous section 2.

In the present embodiment, if the winning number is determined to be "34" to "42" during the advantageous interval, the number of games played in the advantageous interval is added, but the present invention is not limited to this. .
For example, when ART is executed during the advantageous section, when the winning number is determined to be "34" to "42", the game that can execute ART during the advantageous section uniformly or by lottery You can increase the number of times.

Also, for example, when a fake game (a game state in which the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit although it does not have the right to shift to ART) is being executed during the advantageous zone, the winning number is "34" ~ When "42" is determined, the right to move to ART may be granted uniformly or by lottery.
In this way, instead of increasing the number of games played in the advantageous section, the game state (performance of the advantageous section) in the advantageous section may be changed so as to be advantageous to the player.

Note that "when the winning number is determined to be '34' to '42'" means that the winning number is determined to be any of '34' to '42'.
In addition, the number of games to be added to the number of games in the advantageous interval and the change in the game state in the advantageous interval (performance in the advantageous interval) can be appropriately set according to the type of the determined winning number.

FIG. 76(a) is a diagram showing the winning number conversion data definition.
The winning number conversion data definition defines the definition of the data used when judging the condition device number from the winning number.
As shown in FIG. 76(b), "@NB_TRNS EQU @BBA_WIN_E2; conversion start number" indicates that "@NB_TRNS" indicates "conversion start number" and that the value corresponding to "@NB_TRNS" is "@BBA_WIN_E2". means that
As shown in FIG. 75(a), "@BBA_WIN_E2"="31".
Therefore, "@NB_TRNS" = "@BBA_WIN_E2" = "31".
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is equal to or greater than the "conversion start number", the winning number conversion table is used to determine the condition device number from the winning number.

Also, as shown in FIG. 76(c), "@NB_TRNS_AT EQU @AT1_BBA; advantageous section conversion start number" corresponds to "@NB_TRNS_AT" indicating that "@NB_TRNS_AT" indicates the "advantageous section conversion start number". It means that the value is "@AT1_BBA".
As shown in FIG. 75(a), "@AT1_BBA"="43".
Therefore, "@NB_TRNS_AT" = "@AT1_BBA" = "43".
Then, when the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is equal to or greater than the "advantageous section conversion start number", the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 is won (determined to shift).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 76(d), "@NB_1BBA EQU 1; 1BBA condition device number" indicates that "@NB_1BBA" indicates "1BBA condition device number", and the value corresponding to "@NB_1BBA" is It means "1". That is, it means that the "1BBA condition device number" is "1".
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 76(e), "@NB_AT1 EQU 1; advantageous section number 1" indicates that "@NB_AT1" indicates "advantageous section number 1", and the value corresponding to "@NB_AT1" is " 1”.

FIG. 77(a) is a diagram showing a winning number conversion table.
The winning number conversion table is a table defining data used when judging the condition device number from the winning number, and is stored in the ROM 54 of the main control board 50 .
As shown in FIG. 77(a), when the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is "31" to "52", the winning number conversion table corresponds to the determined winning number. It is used when determining the condition device number and the advantageous section number.
Here, "DEFB" is a pseudo-instruction in assembly language that "reserves a 1-byte (8-bit) area in memory and stores data therein".
When a DEFB line contains multiple data separated by commas, a plurality of 1-byte areas are secured in the memory in order of address, and each data separated by commas is sequentially stored in each secured area. It means going.

As shown in FIG. 77(c), "DEFB @NB_1BBA, @NB_WIN_E2, 0; Winning number 31" stores "@NB_1BBA" at address ###0 (for example, address 1600 (H)), and stores "@NB_1BBA" at address # It means that "@NB_WIN_E2" is stored in ##1 (for example, address 1601(H)) and "0" is stored in address ###2 (for example, address 1602(H)).

As shown in FIG. 76(a), "@NB_1BBA"="1", and as shown in FIG. 74(a), "@NB_WIN_E2"="28".
Therefore, "1" is stored in address ###0 and "28" is stored in address ###1.

i.e.
Address ###0 (1600 (H) address) 1: Accessory condition device number Address ###1 (1601 (H) address) 28: Winning and replay condition device number Address ###2 (1602 (H) address ) 0: Advantageous section number.
Each data stored from address ###0 to address ###2 is used when the winning number is determined to be "31".

Also, as shown in FIG. 77(d), "DEFB @NB_1BBB, 0, 0; winning number 32" stores "@NB_1BBB" at address ###3 (for example, address 1603(H)), It means that "0" is stored at ###4 (eg, address 1604(H)) and "0" is stored at address ###5 (eg, address 1605(H)).
As shown in FIG. 76(a), "@NB_1BBB"="2".
Therefore, "2" is stored in address ###3.

i.e.
Address ###3 (address 1603 (H)) 2: Accessory condition device number Address ###4 (address 1604 (H)) 0: Winning and replay condition device number Address ###5 (address 1605 (H) ) 0: Advantageous section number.
Each data stored from address ###3 to address ###5 is used when the winning number is determined to be "32".

FIG. 78(a) is a diagram showing the winning number lottery data definition.
The winning number lottery data definition defines the data used when determining a winning number from a random number in lottery determination.
"Winning number identifier" is an identifier indicating that the data includes winning number data.
"Winning number data" is data indicating a winning number determined in the lottery determination.

'@LT_NUM EQU 10000000B; Winning number identifier' means that '@LT_NUM' indicates the 'winning number identifier' and that the data corresponding to '@LT_NUM' is '10000000(B)'.
Also, in '@BT_NUM EQU 7', the bit corresponding to the winning number identifier is 'bit 7', the winning number identifier is ON when bit 7 is '1', and the bit 7 is '0'. Sometimes it means the winning number identifier is off.

The “repeat count identifier” is an identifier indicating that the data includes repeat count data.
The “repetition count data” is data indicating the number of times the win/loss determination process is repeated in the lottery determination.
"@LT_LOP EQU 01000000B; repeat count identifier" means that "@LT_LOP" indicates the "repeat count identifier" and that the data corresponding to "@LT_LOP" is "01000000(B)".
Also, "@BT_LOP EQU 6" indicates that the bit corresponding to the repeat count identifier is "bit 6", the repeat count identifier is ON when bit 6 is "1", and the repeat count identifier is ON when bit 6 is "0". means that the repeat count identifier is off.

“Identifier by setting value” is an identifier indicating that probability data is defined for each setting value.
"Probability data" is data indicating the winning range within the entire range of random numbers.
Therefore, winning probability=“probability data/total range of random numbers”.
For example, when the total range of random numbers is "65536" and the probability data is "125", the winning probability is "125/65536".
Note that the probability data may also be referred to as a judgment value, judgment data, numerical values, or numerical data.

"@LT_RNK EQU 00100000B; identifier by setting value" means that "@LT_RNK" indicates "identifier by setting value" and that the data corresponding to "@LT_RNK" is "00100000(B)". do.
In addition, in "@BT_LOP EQU 5", the bit corresponding to the identifier by setting value is "bit 5", and when bit 5 is "1", the identifier by setting value is ON, and bit 5 is "0". means that the repeat count identifier is off.

"2-byte data identifier" is an identifier indicating that the probability data is 2-byte data.
"@LT_WRD EQU 00010000B; 2-byte data identifier" means that "@LT_WRD" is a "2-byte data identifier" and that the data corresponding to "@LT_WRD" is "00010000(B)". do.
Also, in "@BT_WRD EQU 4", the bit corresponding to the 2-byte data identifier is "bit 4", and when bit 4 is "1", the 2-byte data identifier is on, and bit 4 is "0". means that the 2-byte data identifier is off.

“1-byte data identifier” is an identifier indicating that probability data is 1-byte data.
"@LT_BYT EQU 00001000B; 1-byte data identifier" means that "@LT_BYT" is a "1-byte data identifier" and that the data corresponding to "@LT_BYT" is "00001000(B)". do.
In "@BT_BYT EQU 3", the bit corresponding to the 1-byte data identifier is "bit 3", and when bit 3 is "1", the 1-byte data identifier is on, and bit 3 is "0". means that the 1-byte data identifier is off.

The "determination end identifier" is an identifier indicating that the lottery determination is to be terminated.
"@LT_END EQU 00H" means that "@LT_END" is the "determination end identifier" and that the data corresponding to "@LT_END" is "00H".

FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an all-RT common lottery table (1). FIG. 80 is a diagram showing the lottery table (2) common to all RTs, and is a diagram following FIG. Furthermore, FIG. 81 is a diagram showing the lottery table common to all RTs (3), and is a diagram following FIG. Further, FIG. 82(a) is a diagram showing an all-RT common lottery table (4), and is a diagram following FIG.

Also, FIG. 82(b) is a diagram showing a non-RT lottery table. Furthermore, FIG.82(c) is a figure which shows a lottery table at RT1. Furthermore, FIG. 83(a) is a diagram showing a lottery table for RT2. FIG. 83(b) is a diagram showing a lottery table at RT3. Furthermore, FIG. 84(a) is a diagram showing an RT 4 o'clock lottery table. Furthermore, FIG. 84(b) is a diagram showing a lottery table for 1BBA. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a lottery table for 1BBB.
These lottery tables are used in an internal lottery (a lottery for determining winning numbers from random numbers), and are stored in the ROM 54 of the main control board 50 .

Also, the all-RT common lottery table is commonly used for non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, and RT4. In other words, the all-RT common lottery table is a lottery table used to determine the winning number regardless of the RT state, except when 1BB (first-class accessory continuous operation device; first-class big bonus) is activated. means Furthermore, the non-RT lottery table is used for non-RT, the RT1 lottery table is used for RT1, the RT2 lottery table is used for RT2, and the RT3 lottery table is used for RT2. The table is used in RT3, and the RT4 lottery table is used in RT4.

At the time of non-RT, lottery determination is first performed using a lottery table common to all RTs. At this time, when the winning number is determined to be "00(H)", next lottery determination is performed using the non-RT lottery table.
On the other hand, if the lottery determination using the lottery table common to all RTs determines the winning number to be a value other than "00(H)", the internal lottery ends without using the non-RT lottery table.
Although the details will be described later, the fact that the winning number is "00 (H)" in the lottery determination using the all-RT common lottery table means that the lottery number is not determined in the lottery determination using the all-RT common lottery table. means that
In addition, if the lottery determination using the common lottery table for all RTs reveals a winning number other than "00 (H)", it means that one of the winning numbers has been determined in the lottery determination using the common lottery table for all RTs. means that

At RT 1, RT 2, RT 3, or RT 4, lottery determination is first performed using the all-RT common lottery table, similarly to the non-RT time. At this time, when the winning number is determined to be "00(H)", next lottery determination is performed using a lottery table corresponding to RT.
On the other hand, when the lottery determination using the lottery table common to all RTs determines that the winning number is a value other than "00 (H)", the internal lottery ends without using the lottery table corresponding to RT. .
Also, at 1BBA, lottery determination is performed using the lottery table for 1BBA, and at 1BBB, lottery determination is performed using the lottery table for 1BBB.

"TBL_LOT_DAT1" in FIG. 79 indicates a lottery table common to all RTs.
Also, when the lottery table common to all RTs is set as the lottery table, first, the winning/losing determination is performed using "1BBA+small combination E2 condition device lottery data". At this time, if the winning lottery wins, the winning number is determined to be "@BBA_WIN_E2"(="31"), and the lottery determination ends.
On the other hand, if it is not won in the success/failure determination using the "1BBA+small combination E2 condition device lottery data", then the success/failure determination is performed using the "1BBB condition device lottery data".

In addition, "1BBB condition device lottery data" is used to determine whether a lottery wins or not.
On the other hand, if the success/failure determination using "1BBB condition device lottery data" results in non-winning, next, the success or failure determination is performed using "1BBB+small combination D condition device lottery data".
In addition, when winning number data is included like "1BBA+small win E2 condition device lottery data", the winning number data is used to determine whether the winning number is right or wrong.
Furthermore, when the winning number data is not included, such as "1BBB condition device lottery data", the data obtained by adding "1" to the winning number data used in the previous win/fail judgment is used to determine the current success/failure. make a judgment.

In this way, when the winning number data are consecutive numbers, the data obtained by adding "1" to the winning number data used in the previous win/fail judgment can be used for the current win/fail judgment. Since it is not necessary to determine the winning number data in each case, the amount of ROM 54 used by the lottery table can be reduced.
In addition, when the winning number data are not consecutive numbers, the winning number data is determined in the lottery table, and the winning number data is used to determine whether the winning number data is consecutive or not. or back), you can get the appropriate lottery results.

"1BBB + small winning combination D condition device lottery data" is the same as "1BBA + small winning combination E2 condition device lottery data" and "1BBB condition device lottery data".
Then, when it reaches "end of judgment" without judging winning, the lottery judgment using the common lottery table for all RTs ends.

In addition, "DEFB @LT_NUM OR @BBA_WIN_E2; Winning number identifier;; + Winning number data" in FIG. E2 condition device lottery data" is stored in the first line.
Here, as shown in FIG. 78, "@LT_NUM" indicates a winning number identifier and its value is "10000000 (B)".
Also, as shown in FIG. 75(a), "@BBA_WIN_E2" indicates the winning number corresponding to 1BBA+small win E2 double winning, and its value is "31" (binary number "00011111(B)"). be.

Furthermore, when performing an OR operation of "@LT_NUM" and "@BBA_WIN_E2",
10000000 (B): @LT_NUM
00011111 (B): @BBA_WIN_E2
10011111 (B): Data after OR operation.
In other words, “DEFB @LT_NUM OR @BBA_WIN_E2” indicates that “10011111 (B)” is stored in a predetermined 1-byte storage area on the ROM 54 .

Thus, the winning number identifier and winning number data can be represented by one 8-bit data. In this case, of the 8-bit data, bits 0 to 6 indicate winning number data, and bit 7 indicates a winning number identifier.
Also, the comment "; winning number identifier ;; + winning number data" indicates that the data includes the winning number identifier and winning number data.
When bit 7 is "1", such as "10011111 (B)", it is determined that the winning number identifier is ON, and that the data includes winning number data. Bit 6 is used as winning number data.

In addition, "DEFB @LT_BYT OR @LT_RNK; 1 byte data identifier;; + setting value identifier" in FIG. It is shown that it is stored in the second line of "Minor combination E2 condition device lottery data".
Here, as shown in FIG. 78, "@LT_BYT" indicates a 1-byte data identifier and its value is "00001000(B)".
"@LT_RNK" indicates an identifier by setting value, and its value is "00100000 (B)".

Furthermore, when ORing "@LT_BYT" and "@LT_RNK",
00001000 (B): @LT_BYT
00100000 (B): @LT_RNK
00101000 (B): Data after OR operation.

In other words, “DEFB @LT_BYT OR @LT_RNK” indicates that “00101000(B)” is stored in a predetermined 1-byte storage area on the ROM 54 .
As a result, the 1-byte data identifier and the setting value-specific identifier can be represented by one 8-bit data.
The comment "; 1-byte data identifier ;; + setting value-specific identifier" indicates that the data includes a 1-byte data identifier and a setting value-specific identifier.

When the probability data is 1 byte, the data with the 1-byte data identifier turned on (bit 3 is set to "1") is stored, and when the probability data is 2 bytes, the 2-byte data identifier is turned on. (bit 4 is set to "1") is stored.
In this way, data is stored with either one byte data identifier or two byte data identifiers on, but not data with both one byte data identifiers and two byte data identifiers on.
When probability data is defined for each setting value, the data with the identifier for each setting value turned on (bit 5 is set to "1") is stored, and common probability data is defined for all setting values. When this is the case, the data with the set value-specific identifier turned off (bit 5 set to "0") is stored.

In this way, when the probability data differs among the settings 1 to 6, the probability data for each setting value is determined in the lottery table, and the data with the setting value-specific identifier turned on is stored. As a result, the lottery for the winning numbers can be performed with different probabilities for each set value.
Also, when the probability data is common to setting 1 to setting 6, one probability data is defined in the lottery table, and the data with the set value identifier turned off is stored. As a result, it is sufficient to set one probability data in the lottery table, so the amount of ROM 54 used by the lottery table can be reduced.

Further, "DEFB 10; probability data (setting 1)" in FIG. 79 indicates that "10" (binary "00001010 (B)") is stored as probability data used when setting 1. showing.
In practice, probability data is defined for each setting value of setting 1 to setting 6, but FIG. Illustration of the data is omitted. “:” in FIG. 79 means that the probability data of setting 2 to setting 5 are omitted. The same applies to the lottery tables shown in FIG. 80 and after.

and based on whether the 1-byte data identifier or the 2-byte data identifier is on, whether the setting value-specific identifier is on or off, and if the setting value-specific identifier is on, based on the setting value, The address of the probability data to be used is calculated (designated), and the probability data corresponding to the calculated (designated) address is used to determine whether the data is correct or not.
A method of obtaining the probability data will be described later.

Here, in this embodiment, the information about the setting value is stored in a predetermined storage area (setting value data storage area "_NB_RANK") of the RWM 53 .
Also, as information about the set value, one of "0" to "5" is stored in the set value data storage area "_NB_RANK".
When "0" is stored in the set value data storage area "_NB_RANK", "1" is displayed on the set value display LED 73, and "5" is stored in the set value data storage area "_NB_RANK". When the setting value display LED 73 is set, "6" is displayed.

That is, when "N" (N is an integer) is stored in the setting value data storage area "_NB_RANK", the main control board 50 controls the setting value display LED 73 so that "N+1" is displayed. be.
Therefore, descriptions of setting values such as setting value "1" and setting value "6" are numerical values displayed on the setting value display LED 73, and are not necessarily information stored in the setting value data storage area "_NB_RANK". is not limited.
Of course, the setting value data storage area "_NB_RANK" may be configured to store any one of "1" to "6" as information on the setting value.

In addition, "DEFB @LT_LOP OR 12; repeat count identifier;; + repeat count data" in FIG. It shows that the data obtained by the calculation is stored in the first line of "small win B1 condition device lottery data -small win B12 condition device lottery data".
Here, as shown in FIG. 78, "@LT_LOP" indicates a repeat count identifier and its value is "01000000 (B)".

In addition, ORing "@LT_LOP" and "12(D)"("00001100(B)" in binary) yields
01000000 (B): @LT_LOP
00001100 (B): 12 (D)
01001100 (B): Data after OR operation.
In other words, “DEFB @LT_LOP OR 12” indicates that “01001100 (B)” is stored in a predetermined 1-byte storage area on the ROM 54 .

As a result, the repeat count identifier and repeat count data can be represented by one 8-bit data. In this case, of the 8-bit data, bits 0 to 5 indicate repetition count data, and bit 6 indicates a repetition count identifier.
Also, the comment ";repeat count identifier;;+repeat count data" indicates that the data includes the repeat count identifier and repeat count data.
When bit 6 is "1", such as "01001100(B)", it is determined that the repeat count identifier is on, and that the data includes repeat count data. Bit 5 is used as repeat count data.

FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing the flow of lottery processing for condition device numbers and the like.
In step S1001, the main CPU 55 continues to determine whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated while the specified number of game media is bet (bet). Then, when it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to the next step S1002.
In step S1002, the main CPU 55 acquires (latches) a random number value from the random number generator (counter) and stores (stores) the acquired random number value in the random number register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1003.
After proceeding to step S1003, the main CPU 55 controls the blocker 45 so that insertion of medals is prohibited. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1004.

In step S1004, the main CPU 55 executes internal lottery 1 (FIG. 87). The internal lottery 1 is a process of determining a winning number from random numbers. After the internal lottery 1 is executed, the process proceeds to the next step S1005.
In step S1005, the main CPU 55 executes condition device number set 1 (FIG. 89). The condition device number set 1 is a process of determining the condition device number and the advantageous section number from the winning number. Then, when the condition device number set 1 is executed, the process proceeds to the next step S1006.
When the process proceeds to step S1006, all the reels 31 start to rotate, and the rotating reels 31 can be stopped by operating the stop switch 42 by the player. Then, when all the reels 31 stop rotating, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

FIG. 87 is a flow chart showing the flow of internal lottery 1 processing.
Further, the internal lottery 1 is a process of determining a winning number from random numbers. The internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination processing in FIG. 88, which will be described later, correspond to winning number determination means.
Proceeding to internal lottery 1 in step S1004, first, in step S1011, the main CPU 55 stores the random number stored in the random number register in the DE register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1012.

In step S1012, the main CPU 55 stores the leading address of the lottery table corresponding to the operation state of the role (when 1BBA is activated, when 1BBB is activated, or when the accessory is not activated) in the HL register.
Specifically, when 1BBA is activated, the top address of the lottery table for 1BBA (TBL_LOTDAT_1BBA) shown in FIG. 84(b) is stored in the HL register. That is, the address indicating the data storage area of "DEFB @LT_NUM OR @NB_REP_D" in FIG. 84(b) is stored in the HL register.

Also, when 1BBB is activated, the head address of the lottery table for 1BBB (TBL_LOTDAT_1BBB) shown in FIG. 85 is stored in the HL register. That is, the address indicating the data storage area of "DEFB @LT_NUM OR @NB_REP_D" in FIG. 85 is stored in the HL register.
Furthermore, when the accessory is not activated, the top address of the lottery table common to all RTs (TBL_LOT_DAT1) shown in FIGS. 79 to 82(a) is stored in the HL register. That is, the address indicating the data storage area of "DEFB @LT_NUM OR @BBA_WIN_E2" in FIG. 79 is stored in the HL register.

In the next step S1013, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not it is time to activate the accessory.
Here, "_FL_ACTION" is a 1-byte storage area on the RWM 53 that stores a flag indicating the operating state of the character.
Also, when the value of a predetermined bit (for example, bit 2) of "_FL_ACTION" is "1", it indicates that the character is activated, and when it is "0", it indicates that the character is not activated.

Then, in step S1013, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the value of a predetermined bit in the storage area "_FL_ACTION" of the RWM 53 is "0", thereby determining whether or not the role product is activated.
Here, when the value of the predetermined bit of "_FL_ACTION" is "0", the main CPU 55 determines that it is not the time when the role product is activated (No), and proceeds to the next step S1014.
On the other hand, when the value of the predetermined bit of "_FL_ACTION" is "1", the main CPU 55 determines that the role product is activated (Yes), skips steps S1014 to S1016, and proceeds to step S1017. move on.

At step S1014, the main CPU 55 executes lottery determination (FIG. 88) using the lottery table set at step S1012. Lottery determination is a process of determining whether or not a prize is won using probability data. Then, when the lottery determination is executed, the process proceeds to the next step S1015.
After proceeding to step S1015, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the lottery has been won.
Here, at the end of the lottery determination, a value indicating the winning number is stored in the C register. Also, when the value stored in the C register is "00(H)", it indicates that the lottery was not won, and the value stored in the C register is other than "00(H)". When , it indicates that the player has won the lottery.

Then, in step S1015, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the value stored in the C register is "00 (H)", thereby determining whether or not the lottery has been won.
Here, when the value stored in the C register is "00 (H)", the main CPU 55 judges that the lottery was not won (No), and proceeds to the next step S1016.
On the other hand, when the value stored in the C register is other than "00 (H)", the main CPU 55 determines that the lottery has been won (Yes), skips steps S1016 and S1017, The processing according to this flowchart ends.

Proceeding to step S1016, the main CPU 55 stores the top address of the lottery table corresponding to the RT state (non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, or RT4) in the HL register.
Specifically, in the non-RT time, the top address of the non-RT time lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_RT0) shown in FIG. 82(b) is stored in the HL register. That is, the address indicating the data storage area of "DEFB @LT_NUM OR @NB_REP_A" in FIG. 82(b) is stored in the HL register.

At RT1, the top address of the RT1 lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_RT1) shown in FIG. 82(c) is stored in the HL register. That is, the address indicating the data storage area of "DEFB @LT_NUM OR @NB_REP_A" in FIG. 82(c) is stored in the HL register.
RT2, RT3, and RT4 are the same as non-RT and RT1.
Then, when the head address of the lottery table corresponding to the RT state is stored in the HL register, the process proceeds to the next step S1017.

After proceeding to step S1017, the main CPU 55 executes lottery determination (FIG. 88) using the lottery table set in step S1012 or S1016.
Specifically, when the role is activated, the lottery determination is executed using the lottery table set in step S1012, and when the lottery determination in step S1014 is not won when the role is not activated, step S1016. Lottery determination is executed using the set lottery table. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

In this way, when the accessory is not activated ("No" in step S1013), the lottery determination is performed at least once in step S1014, and the lottery determination is performed twice in steps S1014 and S1017 at most. .
On the other hand, when the accessory is activated ("Yes" in step S1013), the lottery determination is performed only once in step S1017.

Also, when the role is not activated, in step S1014, the first lottery determination is performed using the all-RT common lottery table. is used to perform the second lottery determination.
In this way, in any of non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, and RT4, the probability data is defined in the lottery table common to all RTs for condition devices with the same winning probability. As a result, the lottery table can be shared, so that the usage of the ROM 54 by the lottery table can be reduced.

FIG. 88 is a flow chart showing the flow of lottery determination processing.
Lottery determination is a process of determining whether or not a prize is won using probability data.
Proceeding to the lottery determination in step S1014 or S1017, first, in step S1021, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number identifier is ON (data including the winning number identifier).
Here, at the start of the lottery determination process, the head address of the lottery table corresponding to the operating state of the accessory is stored in the HL register (step S1012 in FIG. 87). For example, when the role product is inactive, the HL register stores an address indicating the data storage area of "DEFB @LT_NUM OR @BBA_WIN_E2" in FIG.

When bit 7 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is "1", it indicates that the winning number identifier is ON, and when bit 7 is "0", the winning number identifier is OFF. indicates that
Then, in step S1021, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the bit 7 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is "1", thereby indicating that the winning number identifier is ON (including the winning number identifier). data).

Here, when bit 7 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is "1", the main CPU 55 determines that the winning number identifier is ON (Yes), and proceeds to the next step S1022.
On the other hand, when bit 7 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is "0", the main CPU 55 determines that the winning number identifier is not ON (No), skips step S1022, and skips step S1022. Proceed to S1023.
Also, when "No" in step S1021, the main CPU 55 maintains the value of the C register. Note that the value stored in the C register at this time is, for example, the value updated in step S1028, which will be described later. Also, the value stored in the C register is determined as the winning number when it is determined as winning (Yes) in step S1027, which will be described later.

After proceeding to step S1022, the main CPU 55 acquires winning number data from the lottery table.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 sets bit 7 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register to "0" and stores it in the C register.

For example, the data of "DEFB @LT_NUM OR @BBA_WIN_E2" in FIG. 79 is "10011111(B)".
Bits 0 to 6 of "10011111(B)" indicate winning number data, and bit 7 indicates a winning number identifier.
Then, the main CPU 55 sets bit 7 of "10011111(B)" to "0" and stores "00011111(B)" as winning number data in the C register.
After that, the main CPU 55 adds "1" to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register. That is, the value of the HL register (the address of data for lottery) is updated. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1023.

Proceeding to step S1023, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the repeat count identifier is ON (data including the repeat count identifier).
Here, when bit 6 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is "1", it indicates that the repeat count identifier is on, and when bit 6 is "0", the repeat count identifier is off. indicates that there is
Then, in step S1023, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the bit 6 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is "1", thereby indicating that the repetition number identifier is ON (including the repetition number identifier). data).

Here, when bit 6 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is "1", the main CPU 55 determines that the repetition number identifier is ON (Yes), and proceeds to the next step S1024.
On the other hand, when bit 6 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is "0", the main CPU 55 determines that the repeat count identifier is not ON (No), skips step S1024, and skips step S1024. Proceed to S1025.
If "No" in step S1023, the main CPU 55 sets "1" to the B register. It should be noted that "1" set in the B register at this time indicates that the number of times (the number of repetitions) of the success/failure determination is one.

After proceeding to step S1024, the main CPU 55 acquires repetition count data from the lottery table.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 sets bit 6 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register to "0" and stores it in the B register.

For example, the data of "DEFB @LT_LOP OR 12" in FIG. 81 is "01001100(B)".
In "01001100(B)", bits 0 to 5 indicate repetition count data, and bit 6 indicates a repetition count identifier.
Then, the main CPU 55 sets bit 6 of "01001100(B)" to "0" and stores "00001100(B)" in the B register as repetition count data. In other words, data indicating 12 repetitions is stored in the B register.
Also, "0" is stored in the A register as an initial value.
After that, the main CPU 55 adds "1" to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register. As a result, the value of the HL register is an identifier (1-byte data identifier or 2-byte data identifier) indicating how many bytes the probability data is, and an identifier (setting It indicates the address of the storage area where the data including the identifier by value) is stored. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1025.

After proceeding to step S1025, the main CPU 55 acquires probability data from the lottery table.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 first saves the value of the HL register and the value of the BC register in the stack area of the RWM 53 .
Next, data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is stored in the B register. As a result, the B register stores an identifier (1-byte data identifier or 2-byte data identifier) indicating how many bytes the probability data is, and an identifier (setting value Identifier) is stored.

After that, "1" is added to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register. As a result, the value of the HL register indicates the top address of the storage area in which probability data is stored.
After that, based on the data stored in the B register (data indicating whether the probability data is 1-byte data or 2-byte data, and whether the probability data differs according to the set value), the probability data is calculated (designated), probability data corresponding to the calculated (designated) address is acquired from the lottery table, and stored in the HL register or A register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1026.

Here, a method for obtaining probability data will be described in more detail.
As described above, a predetermined storage area (set value data storage area "_NB_RANK") of the RWM 53 stores any value from "0" to "5" as information on the set value.
In addition, "0" is stored in the A register as an initial value.

Example 1) When the 1-byte data identifier is on and the set value identifier is off Add the value of the A register (“0”) to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register. In this case, the value of the HL register is maintained (unchanged). Then, the value of this HL register is used as the address of the probability data, and the probability data corresponding to this address is obtained from the lottery table.
When the probability data is 1-byte data, the acquired probability data is stored in the A register.

Example 2) When the 1-byte data identifier is ON and the identifier by setting value is ON Since the identifier by setting value is ON, the value of the setting value data storage area "_NB_RANK" is stored in the A register. As a result, "N" (N is a value corresponding to the set value; any value from "0" to "5") is stored in the A register.
After that, the value of the A register (“N”) is added to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register.

Here, when "0" is stored in "_NB_RANK" (when the set value is "1"), the value of the HL register is maintained (not changed). As a result, the value of the HL register indicates the address of the storage area where the first probability data is stored. For example, in the case of data for 1BBA+small combination E2 condition device lottery in all RT common lottery table (1) in FIG. 79, the address of "DEFB 10 ; probability data (setting 1)" is indicated.

Also, when "5" is stored in "_NB_RANK" (when the set value is "6"), "5" is added to the value of the HL register. As a result, the value of the HL register indicates the address of the storage area where the sixth probability data is stored. For example, in the case of 1BBA+small win E2 condition device lottery data in all RT common lottery table (1) in FIG. 79, the address of "DEFB 20; probability data (setting 6)" is indicated.
Then, the value of this HL register is used as the address of the probability data, and the probability data corresponding to this address is obtained from the lottery table.
Storing the acquired probability data in the A register is the same as in the first example.

Example 3) When the 2-byte data identifier is on and the set value identifier is off Add the value of the A register (“0”) to the value of the HL register to create a new value of the HL register. is added with the value of the A register ("0") to obtain a new value of the HL register. That is, adding the value of the A register to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register is repeated twice. In this case, the value of the HL register is maintained (unchanged). Then, the value of this HL register is used as the address of the probability data, and the probability data corresponding to this address is obtained from the lottery table.
When the probability data is 2-byte data, the acquired probability data is stored in the HL register.

Example 4) When the 2-byte data identifier is ON and the identifier by setting value is ON Since the identifier by setting value is ON, the value of the setting value data storage area "_NB_RANK" is stored in the A register. As a result, "N" (N is a value corresponding to the set value; any value from "0" to "5") is stored in the A register.
Furthermore, the value of the A register ("N") is added to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register, and the value of the A register ("N") is further added to the value of the new HL register. be the value of That is, the process of adding the value of the A register (“N”) to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register is repeated twice.

Here, when "0" is stored in "_NB_RANK" (when the set value is "1"), the value of the HL register is maintained (not changed). As a result, the value of the HL register indicates the address of the storage area where the first probability data is stored. For example, in the case of data for minor combination A condition device lottery in all RT common lottery table (3) in FIG. 81, the address of "DEFW 1000; probability data (setting 1)" is indicated.

Also, when "5" is stored in "_NB_RANK" (when the set value is "6"), "10" is added to the value of the HL register. As a result, the value of the HL register indicates the address of the storage area where the sixth probability data is stored. For example, in the case of data for minor combination A condition device lottery in all RT common lottery table (3) in FIG. 81, the address of "DEFW 1250; probability data (setting 6)" is indicated.
Then, the value of this HL register is used as the address of the probability data, and the probability data corresponding to this address is obtained from the lottery table.
Storing the obtained probability data in the HL register is the same as in Example 3.

In this way, the HL register stores the top address (the address of the first probability data) of the storage area in which the probability data is stored, and the value stored in the A register is used as an offset value. By adding to the value of , the probability data corresponding to the set value is obtained.

Here, when the set value identifier is off, the initial value ("0") stored in the A register is added as an offset value to the value of the HL register.
When the set value identifier is on, the value of the set value data storage area "_NB_RANK" is stored in the A register, and the value of the A register is added as an offset value to the value of the HL register.
As a result, processing can be shared when the probability data is common to all set values and when the probability data varies depending on the set values, so that the usage of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

When the probability data is 1-byte data, the value of the A register is added to the HL register once, and when the probability data is 2-byte data, the value of the A register is added to the HL register twice.
This simplifies the process of calculating (designating) the address of the probability data, thereby reducing the usage of the ROM 54 by the program.

After proceeding to step S1026, the main CPU 55 performs a win-or-fail decision.
Here, when the lottery determination is performed using the probability data of 2-byte data and the random number value, the main CPU 55 first subtracts the value of the HL register from the value of the DE register to obtain a new value of the DE register. .
Also, when the lottery determination is performed using the probability data of 1-byte data and the random number value, the main CPU 55 first subtracts the value of the A register from the value of the DE register to obtain a new value of the DE register.
Thus, the value of the DE register is updated.
As described above, the DE register stores a random value (step S1011 in FIG. 87). Then, in step S1026, the probability data is subtracted from the value of the DE register to obtain a new value of the DE register.

After that, the value of the HL register and the value of the BC register saved in the stack area of the RWM 53 are restored.
As a result, the value of the HL register is an identifier (1-byte data identifier or 2-byte data identifier) indicating how many bytes the probability data is, and an identifier (setting It indicates the address of the storage area where the data including the identifier by value) is stored. Also, the value of the B register indicates the number of repetitions, and the value of the C register indicates the winning number.

In the next step S1027, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the prize has been won.
By subtracting the probability data from the value of the DE register, when the value of the DE register becomes smaller than "0" (when a carry occurs), the carry flag of the flag register is set to "1". That is, the carry flag is set. Also, "a carry occurs" means that the carry flag is set to "1".
Then, in step S1027, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the lottery is won by determining whether or not the carry flag is set to "1".

Here, when the carry flag is not set to "1", the main CPU 55 determines that the lottery has not been won (No), and proceeds to the next step S1028.
On the other hand, when the carry flag is set to "1", the main CPU 55 determines that the lottery has been won (Yes), skips steps S1028 to S1033, and ends the processing according to this flowchart.
Also, the value stored in the C register when "Yes" is determined in step S1027 indicates the winning number determined by the lottery determination.

At the next step S1028, the main CPU 55 updates the winning number data.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 adds "1" to the value of the C register to obtain a new value of the C register. That is, it updates the value of the C register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1029.
After proceeding to step S1029, the main CPU 55 updates the repeat count data.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 subtracts "1" from the value of the B register to obtain a new value of the B register. That is, it updates the value of the B register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1030.

After proceeding to step S1030, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the number of repetitions has ended.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 determines whether the value of the B register is "0".
Here, when the value of the B register is "0", it indicates that the number of iterations has ended, and when the value of the B register is not "0" (greater than "0"), the number of iterations has ended. indicates no
Then, in step S1030, the main CPU 55 determines whether the number of repetitions has ended by determining whether the value of the B register is "0".

Here, when the value of the B register is "0", the main CPU 55 determines that the number of repetitions has ended (Yes), and proceeds to the next step S1031.
On the other hand, when the value of the B register is not "0", the main CPU 55 determines that the number of repetitions has not ended (No), and returns to step S1025.

Further, when "No" in step S1030, the value of the HL register is maintained, so the same probability data as the previous time is used to perform the determination of whether or not step S1026 is correct again.
In this way, since the same probability data as last time is determined to be repeatedly used, it is not necessary to repeatedly determine the same probability data in the lottery table, so the usage of the ROM 54 by the lottery table can be reduced.

After proceeding to step S1031, the main CPU 55 sets the address of the next lottery data.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 updates the value of the HL register according to the following examples 1) to 4).
Example 1) When the 1-byte data identifier is on and the set value identifier is off Add “1+1” (=“2”) to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register.

Example 2) When the 1-byte data identifier is on and the set value identifier is on Add "6+1" (= "7") to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register.
Example 3) When the 2-byte data identifier is on and the set value identifier is off Add "1 x 2 + 1" (= "3") to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register. do.
Example 4) When the 2-byte data identifier is on and the set value identifier is on Add "6 x 2 + 1" (= "13") to the HL register value to create a new HL register value. do.

As described above, in step S1026, the value of the HL register saved in the stack area of the RWM 53 is restored.
Therefore, when proceeding to step S1031, the value of the HL register contains an identifier (1-byte data identifier or 2-byte data identifier) indicating how many bytes the probability data is, and whether the probability data differs according to the set value. It shows the address of the storage area where the data containing the identifier (setting value-specific identifier) indicating whether or not is stored.

Then, when the 1-byte data identifier is on and the set value identifier is off, the lottery data (for example, 1BBA condition device lottery data in the all RT common lottery table (1) in FIG. 79) The number of bytes of probability data is 1 byte.
Therefore, by adding "2" to the value of the HL register, the new value of the HL register becomes the next lottery data (for example, 1BBA+small win D condition device in all RT common lottery table (1) in FIG. 79). lottery data) (for example, the address of the storage area where the data of "DEFB @LT_BYT; 1-byte data identifier" is stored).

Also, when the 1-byte data identifier is on and the set value identifier is on, the lottery data (for example, 1BBA + minor combination E2 condition device lottery in all RT common lottery table (1) in FIG. 79) data) is 6 bytes.
Therefore, by adding "7" to the value of the HL register, the new value of the HL register becomes the next lottery data (for example, the 1BBB condition device lottery data in the all RT common lottery table (1) in FIG. 79). ) (for example, 'DEFB @LT_BYT OR @LT_RNK; 1-byte data identifier;; + set value identifier' data is stored).

Furthermore, when the 2-byte data identifier is on and the identifier by setting value is off, the lottery data (for example, the small combination D condition device lottery in the all RT common lottery table (1) in FIG. 79) data) is 2 bytes.
Therefore, by adding "3" to the value of the HL register, the new value of the HL register becomes the next lottery data (for example, the minor combination E1 condition device lottery in the all RT common lottery table (1) in FIG. 79). data) (for example, the address of the storage area where the data of "DEFB @LT_WRD; 2-byte data identifier" is stored).

Furthermore, when the 2-byte data identifier is on and the identifier by setting value is on, the lottery data (for example, data for minor combination A condition device lottery in all RT common lottery table (3) in FIG. 81 ) is 12 bytes of probability data.
Therefore, by adding "13" to the value of the HL register, the new value of the HL register becomes the next lottery data (for example, the small winning combination B1 to small winning combination in the common lottery table (3) for all RTs in FIG. 81). B12 condition device lottery data) storage area head address (for example, the address of the storage area where the data of "DEFB @LT_LOP OR 12; repetition number identifier" is stored).

In the next step S1032, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is the determination end identifier (“00(H)”).
Here, when the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is "00 (H)", the main CPU 55 determines that it is the determination end identifier (Yes), and proceeds to the next step S1033.
On the other hand, when the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is not "00(H)", the main CPU 55 determines that it is not the determination end identifier (No), and returns to step S1021.

In the next step S1033, the main CPU 55 sets non-winning data.
Here, when proceeding to step S1033, the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is "00(H)" (determination end identifier). Then, in step S1033, the main CPU 55 stores "00(H)", which is data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register, in the C register as non-winning data. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

Also, the value stored in the C register at the end of this flow chart (lottery determination) indicates the winning number determined by the lottery determination.
When the process proceeds to step S1033, the value stored in the C register at the end of this flowchart becomes "00(H)". In this case, it will not be won (none of the conditional devices will be won).

Thus, by setting the data of the determination end identifier indicating the end of the lottery determination process to "00 (H)", when the lottery determination process does not win any of the conditional devices, the player is not elected. Winning number "0" indicating (losing) is stored in the C register, and this flow chart ends. Winning numbers less than "31" match the winning and replay condition device numbers.
In other words, it is possible to store the winning number indicating non-winning in the C register by acquiring the data of the determination end identifier without newly setting the winning number indicating non-winning.
On the other hand, when "Yes" is determined in step S1027, the value stored in the C register at the end of this flowchart is other than "00(H)". In this case, one of the condition devices is won (decided to be a winning number other than "0").

Here, for example, like a small winning combination B1 condition device to a small winning combination B12 condition device, a lottery result (also referred to as a small winning combination in the pressing order) with different degrees of advantage (number of payouts) depending on the operation mode (pressing order) of the stop switch 42 , Like the replay B1 condition device to the replay B3 condition device, regarding the lottery result accompanied by RT transition depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, the degree of advantage and the ratio of RT transition are not biased depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42. It is preferable to In other words, it is preferable not to bias the appearance frequency of correct answers depending on the pressing order.

For this reason, it is preferable to determine the same probability data so that advantageous operation modes corresponding to the types of lottery results (condition devices) are uniform for each operation mode. That is, it is preferable to determine the same probability data so that the frequency of appearance of correct answers is uniform for each pressing order.
In such a case, by determining the number of repetitions and repeatedly using the same probability data to perform the lottery determination, the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the lottery table is reduced, and the appearance frequency of correct answers is made uniform in each pressing order. Therefore, a greater effect can be achieved.

Furthermore, as described in step S1028, since the process of updating the winning number data is included in the lottery determination process, there is no need to store the winning number data in the lottery table.
Then, by determining the winning number using the number of repetitions and the same probability data, a related condition device (for example, a small win B1 condition device to a small win B12 condition device, or a replay B1 condition device to a replay B3 condition device device), consecutive winning numbers (the winning number from the minor win B1 condition device to the minor win B12 condition device is "12" to "22", and the winning number from the replay B1 condition device to the replay B3 condition device is "2" number "4") can be obtained.

As described above, in this embodiment, winning numbers less than "31" match the winning and replay condition device numbers.
Also, at least in the normal section, the winning and replay condition device number is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80 but is transmitted as the effect group number.
In such a case, for related conditional devices (for example, small winning combination B1 conditional device to small winning combination B12 conditional device), continuous winning numbers (eg, "12" to "22") are obtained. By doing so, the performance group number can be determined by determining to which range the acquired winning number belongs when executing the process of converting the winning number into the performance group number.
Therefore, since it is not necessary to have a table for determining which performance group number the acquired winning number is, the amount of usage of the ROM 54 can be further reduced.

FIG. 89 is a flow chart showing the flow of processing for condition device number set 1 .
Also, the condition device number set 1 is a process of determining the condition device number and the advantageous section number from the winning number. The processing of conditional device number set 1 corresponds to conditional device number determination means.
Proceeding to condition device number set 1 in step S1005, first, in step S1041, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number determined by internal lottery 1 and lottery determination is smaller than the conversion start number.

Here, at the start of the processing of conditional device number set 1, a value indicating the winning number determined by the internal lottery 1 and the lottery determination is stored in the C register.
Also, in step S1041, the main CPU 55 first stores the value of the C register (winning number) in the A register, and then subtracts "@NB_TRNS" from the value of the A register. As shown in FIG. 76(a), "@NB_TRNS" indicates the conversion start number and its value is "@BBA_WIN_E2". Also, as shown in FIG. 75(a), "@BBA_WIN_E2" indicates that 1BBA and a small winning combination E2 have been won twice, and its value is "31". Therefore, "@NB_TRNS" = "31".

Then, the main CPU 55 subtracts "31" from the value of the A register, and if a carry occurs as a result of the subtraction, determines that the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number (Yes), and skips steps S1042 to S1046. , the process proceeds to step S1047.
On the other hand, the main CPU 55 determines that the winning number is equal to or greater than the conversion start number (No) when no carry occurs due to the subtraction, and proceeds to the next step S1042.
In step S1041, "31" is subtracted from the value of the A register (winning number) to determine whether or not a carry has occurred. That is, even after the subtraction, the value of the A register indicates the "winning number".

In step S1042, the main CPU 55 acquires the condition device number and the advantageous section number from the winning number.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 first stores the calculation result of “TBL_CNDNO_DAT”−“@NB_TRNS”×3 in the HL register.
Here, "TBL_CNDNO_DAT" indicates the head address of the winning number conversion table (FIG. 77(a)).
For example, "TBL_CNDNO_DAT"="1600(H)" address.
Also, as described above, “@NB_TRNS”=“31”.
In this case, the value of the HL register is
"1600 (H)" - "31 (D)" x 3
= "1600 (H)" - "5D (H)"
="15A3(H)"
becomes.

Next, the main CPU 55 repeats three times adding the value of the A register to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register.
For example, assume that the value of the A register (indicating the winning number) is "32".
Also, "32(D)"="20(H)".
In this case, the value of the HL register is
"15A3 (H)" + "20 (H)" = "15C3 (H)" (first time)
"15C3 (H)" + "20 (H)" = "15E3 (H)" (second time)
"15E3 (H)" + "20 (H)" = "1603 (H)" (third time)
becomes.
As a result, "the address of the condition device number and the advantageous section number corresponding to the winning number" is set in the HL register.

Next, the main CPU 55 stores data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the C register.
For example, when the value of the HL register is "1603(H)", the data corresponding to this address is "@NB_1BBB"(="2"). In addition, this data indicates the "accessory condition device number" (FIGS. 77(a) and (d)).
In this case, the main CPU 55 stores "2" in the C register. As a result, "2" indicating the "accessory condition device number" is stored in the C register. Thereafter, the value of the C register is maintained until this flow chart (conditional device number set 1) ends.
After that, the main CPU 55 adds "1" to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register. As a result, the value of the HL register becomes "1604 (H)".

Next, the main CPU 55 stores data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the A register.
For example, when the value of the HL register is "1604 (H)", the data corresponding to this address is "0". This data also indicates the "win and replay condition device number" (FIGS. 77(a) and (d)).
In this case, the main CPU 55 stores "0" in the A register. As a result, "0" indicating the "win and replay condition device number" is stored in the A register. Thereafter, the value of the A register is maintained until this flow chart (conditional device number set 1) ends.

After that, the main CPU 55 adds "1" to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register. As a result, the value of the HL register becomes "1605 (H)". Thereafter, the value of the HL register is maintained until this flow chart (conditional device number set 1) ends.
When the value of the HL register is "1605 (H)", the data corresponding to this address is "0". This data also indicates the "advantageous section number" (FIGS. 77(a) and (d)).

In step S1043, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the accessory condition device number is "0".
Here, "_NB_CND_BNS" is a 1-byte storage area on the RWM 53 that stores the role item condition device number.
Also, when the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is "0", it indicates that the prize condition device has not been won, and when it is other than "0", it indicates that the prize condition device has been won.

Furthermore, the previous game was a non-internal game, and when winning the accessory condition device in the current game, the main CPU 55 stores the accessory condition device number in "_NB_CND_BNS" in step S1046 to be described later.
Furthermore, when the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination included in the winning accessory condition device stops on the activated line, the main CPU 55 clears the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" (sets it to "0").

Therefore, the previous game was a non-internal game, and when winning the accessory condition device in the current game, the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is "0" in step S1043.
Also, in step S1043, when the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is other than "0", the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination included in the winning role condition device which was won in the previous game before the game. has not yet stopped at a valid line. That is, it means that it is an internal game that carries over the winning information of the special combination.

Then, in step S1043, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the value of the storage area "_NB_CND_BNS" of the RWM 53 is "0", thereby determining whether or not the prize condition device has been won. That is, it determines whether or not it is inside.
Here, when the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is "0" (Yes), the main CPU 55 determines that the prize condition device has not been won, and proceeds to the next step S1044.
On the other hand, when the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is other than "0" (No), the main CPU 55 determines that the prize condition device is won, skips steps S1044 to S1046, and skips step S1047. proceed to

In step S1044, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the advantageous section number is "0".
Here, "_NB_CND_AT" is a 1-byte storage area on the RWM 53 that stores the advantageous section number.
In addition, when the value of "_NB_CND_AT" is "0", it indicates that the advantageous section has not been won (decided to move), and when it is "1", it indicates that the advantageous section 1 has been won. When it is "2", it indicates that the advantageous section 2 is won.

Furthermore, the previous game was a normal section game, and when the advantageous section 1 or advantageous section 2 was won in the current game, the main CPU 55 stores the advantageous section number in "_NB_CND_AT" in step S1045 to be described later.
Further, when the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 is won, the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 is entered, and then the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 ends and the main CPU 55 returns to the normal section. Clear the value of "_NB_CND_AT" (to "0").

Therefore, the previous game was a normal section game, and when advantageous section 1 or advantageous section 2 was won in the current game, the value of "_NB_CND_AT" is "0" in step S1044.
Further, in step S1044, when the value of "_NB_CND_AT" is other than "0", the advantageous section 1 or advantageous section 2 was won before the previous game, and the advantageous section 1 or advantageous section 2 was shifted based on this winning. has not finished yet. That is, it means that it is a game in the waiting section, the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2.

Then, in step S1044, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the advantageous section 1 or advantageous section 2 is won by determining whether or not the value of the storage area "_NB_CND_AT" of the RWM 53 is "0". do.
Here, when the value of "_NB_CND_AT" is "0" (Yes), the main CPU 55 determines that the advantageous section 1 or advantageous section 2 has not been won, and proceeds to the next step S1045.
On the other hand, when the value of "_NB_CND_AT" is other than "0" (No), the main CPU 55 determines that the advantageous section 1 or advantageous section 2 is won, skips step S1045, and skips step S1045. Proceed to S1046.

In step S1045, the main CPU 55 saves the advantageous section number.
Specifically, when the process proceeds to step S1045, a value indicating the address of the advantageous section number is stored in the HL register.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53 . This saves the advantageous section number.

In step S1046, the main CPU 55 saves the accessory condition device number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1046, a value indicating the accessory condition device number is stored in the C register.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the C register in the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53 . As a result, the accessory condition device number is saved.

In step S1047, the main CPU 55 saves the winning and replay condition device numbers.
Here, when "Yes" is determined in step S1041 and the process proceeds to step S1047, the value indicating the "winning number" is stored in the A register. Also, when "Yes" is determined in step S1041 (when the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number), as shown in FIG. stipulated in Therefore, when the result of step S1041 is "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S1047, the value of the A register indicates the "win and replay condition machine number".

Also, in step S1042, a value indicating the "win and replay condition device number" is stored in the A register. Therefore, even when proceeding to step S1047 through step S1042, the value of the A register indicates the "win and replay condition device number".
Thus, at the time of proceeding to step S1047, the A register stores a value indicating the winning and replay condition device number.

"_NB_CND_NOR" is a 1-byte storage area on the RWM 53 that stores the winning and replay condition device numbers.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the A register in the storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of the RWM 53 . This saves the winning and replay condition device numbers.
In this way, when "Yes" is obtained in step S1041 and the process proceeds to step S1047, and when "No" is obtained in step S1041 and the process proceeds to step S1047 via step S1042, the winning and replay condition machine numbers are determined. The process of storing in "_NB_CND_NOR" can be shared, and the usage of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.
It should be noted that the main CPU 55 clears the value of "_NB_CND_NOR" (to "0") at the end of the game or before it becomes possible to accept the operation of the start switch 41 in the next game.

As described above, in condition device number set 1, it is determined whether or not the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is "0" before the timing of storing the role product condition device number in "_NB_CND_BNS" (step S1046). (step S1043).
As a result, even if there is no flag indicating whether it is inside or not, it is possible to determine whether it is inside ) can be determined, so the usage of the RWM 53 can be reduced accordingly.

Further, in the condition device number set 1, it is determined whether or not the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is "0" (step S1043). (step S1044), after that, the role condition device number is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS" (step S1046), and the winning and replay condition device number is stored in "_NB_CND_NOR" (step S1047).
As a result, it is possible to decide to shift to the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 without requiring complicated processing in the game in which the accessory condition device is won.

Also, in the game, when the winning number is determined to be "31" to "36", "43" to "45", or "48" to "50", the accessory condition device will be elected.
In this case, when it is determined in step S1043 that "0" is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS", the process proceeds to step S1044, so the values of "_NB_CND_BNS" and "_NB_CND_AT" can be updated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1043 that a value other than "0" is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS", steps S1044 to S1046 are skipped, so the values of "_NB_CND_BNS" and "_NB_CND_AT" are maintained. It will be done.

Thus, when "0" is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS", the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" and the value of "_NB_CND_AT" can be updated, and a value other than "0" is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS". At this time, the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" and the value of "_NB_CND_AT" are maintained.
As a result, it is possible to appropriately process the winning of the accessory condition device and the decision to shift to the advantageous section within the range of the constant usage of the RWM 55 without requiring complicated processing.

Also, in the game, when the winning number is determined to be "43" to "47", the winning section 1 is won (decided to shift), and the winning number is "48" to "52". When it is determined to be the turn, it is elected (determined to shift) to the advantageous section 2.
In this case, when it is determined in step S1044 that "0" is stored in "_NB_CND_AT", the process proceeds to step S1045, so the value of "_NB_CND_AT" can be updated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1044 that a value other than "0" is stored in "_NB_CND_AT", step S1045 is skipped, so the value of "_NB_CND_AT" is maintained.

Thus, when "0" is stored in "_NB_CND_AT", the value of "_NB_CND_AT" can be updated, and when "_NB_CND_AT" stores a value other than "0", "_NB_CND_AT" keep the value of
As a result, it is possible to appropriately process the decision to shift to the advantageous section within the range of the constant usage amount of the RWM 55 without requiring complicated processing.

In this embodiment, by skipping the processing (step S1044) of storing the advantageous section number in "_NB_CND_AT" or skipping the processing (step S1046) of storing the accessory condition device number in "_NB_CND_BNS", The value of "_NB_CND_BNS" and the value of "_NB_CND_AT" were maintained.
However, not limited to this, for example, by storing (overwriting) the same advantageous section number in "_NB_CND_AT" or storing (overwriting) the same role condition device number in "_NB_CND_BNS", "_NB_CND_BNS" value or the value of "_NB_CND_AT" may be maintained.

Also, in the game this time, when the winning number is determined to be less than "31", the result is "Yes" in step S1041, and the process proceeds to step S1047. At this time, the winning number is stored in the A register. Then, in step S1047, the value of the A register is stored in "_NB_CND_NOR" as the winning and replay condition device number.
That is, when the winning number is less than "31", it is determined that "winning number"="winning and replay condition device number".

Then, only when the winning number is "31" or more, the condition device number is determined from the winning number by using the winning number conversion table that defines the correspondence between the winning number and the conditional device number.
Therefore, for numbers less than "31", it is not necessary to define the correspondence relationship between the winning number and the condition device number in the winning number conversion table, so that the usage of the ROM 54 by the winning number conversion table can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, a lottery for transition from a normal section to an advantageous section has been described. Even if the A lottery may be performed and the value of "_NB_CND_AT" may be changed according to the result.

For example, "1" is stored in "_NB_CND_AT" and the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" (storage area for machine condition device number) is "0", and the winning number is determined to be "37". , a control process such as storing "2" in "_NB_CND_AT" may be executed.
In addition, in the situation where "_NB_CND_AT" is stored as "1" and the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is "0", based on the fact that the winning number is determined to be "37", a lottery for adding an advantageous section may be executed.

In addition, the winning numbers "43" to "52" were treated as a lottery related to the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, but even if these winning numbers are determined in the advantageous section, the advantageous section A lottery may be carried out regarding the addition of the section.
As described above, when the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is "1" (so-called internal medium), for example, even if the winning number is determined to be "37", the lottery for adding the advantageous section is not executed.

<Modification of 16th Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the sixteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
The modification of the sixteenth embodiment differs from the sixteenth embodiment in the processing of the condition device number set.
In the processing of the conditional device number set 1 of the 16th embodiment, the advantageous section number is stored in "_NB_CND_AT", and then the accessory conditional device number is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS".
On the other hand, in the condition device number set 2 of the modification of the 16th embodiment, the role product condition device number is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS", and then the advantageous section number is stored in "_NB_CND_AT".

FIG. 90 is a flow chart showing the flow of lottery processing for condition device numbers and the like in the modification of the sixteenth embodiment.
Steps S1001 to S1004 and step S1006 are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
Further, in this embodiment, when the internal lottery 1 is executed in step S1004, the process proceeds to step S1051.

Furthermore, when proceeding to step S1051, condition device number set 2 (FIG. 92) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1006.
Furthermore, in step S1006, rotation of all the reels 31 is started, and the spinning reels 31 can be stopped by operating the stop switch 42 by the player. Then, when all the reels 31 stop rotating, the process proceeds to step S1052, and all reel stop processing (FIG. 91) is executed.
Then, in step S1052, when all the reels stop processing is executed, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 91 is a flow chart showing the flow of processing when all reels are stopped in the modification of the sixteenth embodiment.
Further, the all-reels-stopped process is a process for controlling on/off of an internal middle flag indicating that winning information of a special combination is carried over after all the reels 31 stop rotating.
Proceeding to step S1052 when all reels are stopped, first, in step S1061, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination has stopped on the activated line.

Here, when it is determined that the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination has stopped on the activated line (Yes), steps S1062 and S1063 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S1064.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is not stopped on the active line (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1062.

In step S1062, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the accessory condition device number is "0".
Specifically, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the prize condition device is won by determining whether or not the value of the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53 is “0”.
Here, when the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is other than "0" (No), the main CPU 55 determines that the prize condition device is won, and proceeds to the next step S1063.
On the other hand, when the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is "0" (Yes), the main CPU 55 determines that the prize condition device has not been won, and terminates the processing according to this flowchart.

In step S1063, the main CPU 55 turns on the internal medium flag.
Here, "_FL_PRD_LOT" is a 1-byte storage area on the RWM 53 that stores an internal medium flag.
In addition, the "internal flag" is a flag indicating that it is an internal game in which winning information of a special role is carried over.
Furthermore, when the value of "_FL_PRD_LOT" is "FF(H)", it indicates that the internal medium flag is on, and when it is "0", it indicates that the internal medium flag is off.

Then, in step S1063, the main CPU 55 stores "FF(H)" in the storage area "_FL_PRD_LOT" of the RWM 53. FIG. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
In step S1064, the main CPU 55 clears the internal medium flag.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 sets the value of the storage area “_FL_PRD_LOT” of the RWM 53 to “0”. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1065.
In step S1065, the main CPU 55 clears the accessory condition device number.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 sets the value of the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53 to “0”. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing the flow of processing for condition device number set 2 .
Also, the condition device number set 2 is a process of determining the condition device number and the advantageous section number from the winning number.
Proceeding to condition device number set 2 in step S1051, first, in step S1071, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number.
Further, the specific contents of the processing in step S1071 are the same as in step S1041 of FIG.

When it is determined in step S1071 that the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number (Yes), steps S1072 to S1074 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S1075.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1071 that the winning number is equal to or greater than the conversion start number (No), the process proceeds to next step S1072.
In step S1071, "31" is subtracted from the value of the A register (winning number) to determine whether or not a carry has occurred. That is, even after the subtraction, the value of the A register indicates the "winning number".

At step S1072, the main CPU 55 acquires the condition device number and the advantageous section number from the winning number.
Here, in step S1042 of FIG. 89, the value indicating the "accessory condition device number" is stored in the C register.
On the other hand, in step S1072, the value indicating the "accessory condition device number" is stored in the E register.
In the conditional device number set 2, the value of the C register (winning number) is used in steps S1071 and S1076, so that the value of the C register (winning number) is not destroyed in step S1072.
Other than that, the specific contents of the processing in step S1072 are the same as in step S1042 of FIG.

In step S1073, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the accessory condition device number is "0".
Further, the specific contents of the processing in step S1073 are the same as in step S1043 of FIG.
Then, in step S1073, when it is determined that the accessory condition device number is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1074.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1073 that the accessory condition device number is other than "0" (No), step S1074 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1075.

In step S1074, the main CPU 55 saves the accessory condition device number.
Specifically, when the process proceeds to step S1074, the E register stores a value indicating the accessory condition device number.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the E register in the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53 . As a result, the accessory condition device number is saved.

In step S1075, the main CPU 55 saves the winning and replay condition device number.
Here, when "Yes" is determined in step S1071 and the process proceeds to step S1075, the value indicating the "winning number" is stored in the A register. Also, when "Yes" is determined in step S1071 (when the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number), as shown in FIG. stipulated in Therefore, when "Yes" is determined in step S1071 and the process proceeds to step S1075, the value of the A register indicates the "win and replay condition machine number".

Further, in step S1072, the A register stores a value indicating the "win and replay condition machine number". Therefore, even when proceeding to step S1075 through step S1072, the value of the A register indicates the "win and replay condition machine number".
Thus, at the time of proceeding to step S1075, the A register stores a value indicating the winning and replay condition device number.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the A register in the storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of the RWM 53 . This saves the winning and replay condition device numbers.

In this way, when "Yes" is obtained in step S1071 and the process proceeds to step S1075, and when "No" is obtained in step S1071 and the process proceeds to step S1075 via step S1072, the winning and replay condition machine numbers are determined. The process of storing in "_NB_CND_NOR" can be shared, and the usage of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

In step S1076, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number is smaller than the advantageous section conversion start number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1076, a value indicating the winning number is stored in the C register.
Also, in step S1076, the main CPU 55 first stores the value of the C register (winning number) in the A register, and then subtracts "@NB_TRNS_AT" from the value of the A register. As shown in FIG. 76(a), "@NB_TRNS_AT" indicates the advantageous section conversion start number, and its value is "@AT1_BBA". Also, as shown in FIG. 75(a), "@AT1_BBA" indicates a single winning of 1BBA and winning of advantageous section 1, and its value is "38". Therefore, "@NB_TRNS_AT" = "38".

Then, the main CPU 55 subtracts "38" from the value of the A register, and when a carry occurs as a result of the subtraction, determines that the winning number is smaller than the advantageous section conversion start number (Yes), and skips steps S1077 to S1079. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
On the other hand, when no carry occurs as a result of subtraction, the main CPU 55 determines that the winning number is equal to or greater than the advantageous section conversion start number (No), and proceeds to the next step S1077.

In step S1077, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the advantageous section number is "0".
Further, the specific contents of the processing in step S1077 are the same as in step S1044 of FIG.
When it is determined in step S1077 that the advantageous section number is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1078.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1077 that the advantageous section number is other than "0" (No), steps S1078 and S1079 are skipped and the processing according to this flowchart ends.

In step S1078, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the internal flag is ON.
Specifically, in step S1078, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the value of the storage area "_FL_PRD_LOT" of the RWM 53 is "FF (H)" to determine whether or not the internal medium flag is on. to judge.
Here, when the value of "_FL_PRD_LOT" is "FF (H)" (Yes), the main CPU 55 determines that the internal medium flag is ON, skips step S1079, and executes the processing according to this flowchart. finish.
On the other hand, when the value of "_FL_PRD_LOT" is "0" (No), the main CPU 55 determines that the internal medium flag is off, and proceeds to the next step S1079.

In step S1079, the main CPU 55 saves the advantageous section number.
Specifically, when the process proceeds to step S1079, a value indicating the address of the advantageous section number is stored in the HL register.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53 . This saves the advantageous section number. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

As described above, in condition device number set 2, it is determined whether or not the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is "0" (step S1073). is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS" (step S1074), and then the advantageous section number is stored in "_NB_CND_AT" (step S1079).
Therefore, in the condition device number set 2, even if it is determined whether or not the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is "0" in the step before storing the advantageous section number in "_NB_CND_AT", It is not possible to determine whether the player has won the game or whether the accessory condition device has been won before the previous game.

Therefore, in condition device number set 2, in step S1078 before storing the advantageous section number in "_NB_CND_AT", it is determined whether the internal medium flag is on (whether the value of "_FL_PRD_LOT" is "FF (H)"). By judging , it is determined whether the accessory condition device has been won in the current game or whether the accessory condition device has been won in the previous game.
Then, when the internal medium flag is off (the value of "_FL_PRD_LOT" is "0"), it is determined that the character condition device has been won in the current game, and the advantageous section number is stored in "_NB_CND_AT" (step S1079). ).

Here, in condition device number set 2, in step S1072, the value indicating the "accessory condition device number" is stored in the E register, and the value indicating the "winning and replay condition device number" is stored in the A register. After that, in step S1074, the E register value (role item condition device number) is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS", and in step S1075, the A register value (winning and replay condition device number) is stored in "_NB_CND_NOR".
Therefore, even if the value of the E register is destroyed after step S1074, the accessory condition device number will not be lost. Conditional device numbers are never lost.

Also, in step S1076, the value of the C register is stored in the A register, and then "@NB_TRNS_AT"(="43") is subtracted from the value of the A register so that the winning number is smaller than the advantageous section conversion start number. or not.
Therefore, even if the value of the C register is destroyed after step S1076, there is no problem with the process of storing the advantageous section number.

As described above, in condition device number set 2, the E register can be used for other processing after step S1074. Similarly, after step S1075, the A register can be used for other processing, and after step S1076, the C register can be used for other processing.
In addition, as another process, for example, an AT (instructed game section) in the advantageous section can be added to the lottery.

Further, in the condition device number set 2, in step S1078, it is determined whether or not the internal medium flag is ON (whether or not the value of "_FL_PRD_LOT" is "FF (H)"). It is determined whether the device has been won or whether the accessory condition device has been won before the previous game.
However, it is not limited to this. In this embodiment, during the inside, it shifts to RT4. For this reason, for example, in step S1078, by judging whether or not it is RT4 corresponding to the inside, it is determined whether the accessory condition device has been won in the current game or whether the accessory condition device has been won before the previous game. You can judge whether

<Seventeenth Embodiment>
Next, a seventeenth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
FIG. 93(a) is a diagram showing the winning number definition (3) in this embodiment.
Here, the winning number definition (3) in FIG. 93(a) shows the winning number definition for the winning numbers "31" to "42".
The winning number definitions for the winning numbers "1" to "30" are the same as the winning number definition (1) of the sixteenth embodiment shown in FIG. 74(a).

As shown in FIG. 93(b), "@BBA EQU 38; 1BBA single winning + transition lottery" indicates that "@BBA" indicates "1BBA single winning" and "execution of transition lottery", and "@BBA ' means that the winning number corresponding to ' is '38'.
Then, when the winning number is determined to be "38", it becomes a single winning of "1BBA condition device", and whether or not to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section, and whether to shift from the normal section to which type of advantageous section A transition lottery can be executed to determine whether
Advantageous section 1 and advantageous section 2 are provided as types of advantageous sections. Then, when the advantageous section 1 is won (decided to shift), the game state shifts to a fake game state that does not have the right to shift to ART. Omen) to transition to ART.

As shown in FIG. 93(c), "@BBA_WD EQU 39; 1BBA+small win D duplicate winning + shift lottery" is such that "@BBA_WD" is "double win of 1BBA and small win D" and "execution of shift lottery". indicates that the winning number corresponding to "@BBA_WD" is "39".
Then, when the winning number is determined to be "39", it becomes a duplicate winning of "1BBA condition device" and "small combination D condition device", and whether to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section or not from the normal section A transition lottery for determining which type of advantageous section to transition to can be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 74(a) and 93(a), in this embodiment, winning numbers are determined from "1" to "42". Then, the winning number determining means determines one of the numerical values "0" to "42" as the winning number.
Also, as shown in FIG. 93(a), in the present embodiment, the winning numbers "31" to "33" are single winnings of the accessory condition device, or the combination of the accessory condition device and the winning and replay condition device. Winning numbers "34" to "37" correspond to the addition of advantageous sections, and winning numbers "38" to "42" correspond to the execution of the transition lottery. .

It should be noted that winning numbers "38" to "42" may also correspond to the addition of the advantageous section. Then, when the winning number is determined to be "38" to "42", it is possible to make it possible to execute the transfer lottery and also to make it possible to add an advantageous section.
Also, "when the winning number is determined to be '38' to '42'" means that the winning number is determined to be any of '38' to '42'.
In addition, the number of games to be added to the number of games in the advantageous interval and the change in the game state in the advantageous interval (performance in the advantageous interval) can be appropriately set according to the type of the determined winning number.

FIG. 93(d) is a diagram showing the winning number conversion data definition in this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 93(d), "@NB_TRNS EQU @BBA_WIN_E2; conversion start number" indicates that "@NB_TRNS" indicates "conversion start number" and that the value corresponding to "@NB_TRNS" is "@BBA_WIN_E2". means that As shown in FIG. 93(a), "@BBA_WIN_E2"="31". Therefore, "@NB_TRNS" = "@BBA_WIN_E2" = "31".
When the winning number determined by the winning number determination means is equal to or greater than the "conversion start number", the winning number conversion table is used to convert the winning number into the accessory condition device number and the winning and replay condition device number. is acquired (stored).

Further, as shown in FIG. 93(d), "@NB_TRNS_UP EQU @RE; add-on conversion start number" indicates that "@NB_TRNS_UP" indicates the "add-on conversion start number" and that the value corresponding to "@NB_TRNS_UP" is It means "@RE". As shown in FIG. 93(a), "@RE"="34". Therefore, "@NB_TRNS_UP" = "@RE" = "34".
Then, when the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is equal to or greater than the "additional conversion start number", an advantageous section may be added.

Also, as shown in FIG. 93(d), "@NB_TRNS_AT EQU @BBA; advantageous section conversion start number" corresponds to "@NB_TRNS_AT" indicating that "@NB_TRNS_AT" indicates the "advantageous section conversion start number". It means that the value is "@BBA". As shown in FIG. 93(a), "@BBA"="38". Therefore, "@NB_TRNS_AT" = "@BBA" = "38".
Then, when the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is equal to or greater than the "advantageous section conversion start number", a shift lottery may be executed to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section.

FIG. 94(a) is a diagram showing a winning number conversion table in this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 94(a), when the winning number determined by the winning number determination means is "31" to "42", the winning number conversion table corresponds to the determined winning number. It is used when determining the "accessory condition device number" and the "winning and replay condition device number".

As shown in FIG. 94(b), "DEFB @NB_1BBA, @NB_WIN_E2
Winning number 31" stores '@NB_1BBA' in address ###0 (for example, address 1600(H)) and stores '@NB_WIN_E2' in address ###1 (for example, address 1601(H)). means that As shown in FIG. 93(d), "@NB_1BBA"="1", and as shown in FIG. 74(a), "@NB_WIN_E2"="28". Therefore, "1" is stored in address ###0 and "28" is stored in address ###1.

i.e.
Address ###0 (address 1600 (H)) 1: Accessory condition device number Address ###1 (address 1601 (H)) 28: Winning and replay condition device number.
The data stored at addresses ###0 and ###1 are used when the winning number is determined to be "31".

As shown in FIG. 94(c), "DEFB @NB_1BBB, 0; winning number 32" stores "@NB_1BBB" at address ###2 (for example, address 1602(H)), and address ###3. It means to store "0" at (for example, address 1603(H)). As shown in FIG. 93(d), "@NB_1BBB"="2". Therefore, "2" is stored in address ###2.

i.e.
Address ###2 (address 1602(H)) 2: Accessory condition device number Address ###3 (address 1603(H)) 0: Winning and replay condition device number.
The data stored at addresses ###2 and ###3 are used when the winning number is determined to be "32".
The winning number lottery data definition is the same as the winning number lottery data definition of the sixteenth embodiment shown in FIG. 78(a).

FIG. 94(d), FIG. 95, and FIG. 96 are diagrams showing all RT common lottery tables in this embodiment.
FIG. 94(d) is a diagram showing an all RT common lottery table (5). Also, FIG. 95 is a diagram showing the lottery table common to all RTs (6), which follows FIG. 94(d). Furthermore, FIG. 96 is a diagram showing the lottery table common to all RTs (7), and is a diagram following FIG.
The non-RT lottery table, RT1 lottery table, RT2 lottery table, RT3 lottery table, RT4 lottery table, 1BBA lottery table, and 1BBB lottery table are the same as in the 16th embodiment.

Also, at non-RT time, RT 1 time, RT 2 time, RT 3 time, or RT 4 time, lottery determination is first performed using the all-RT common lottery table. Next, lottery determination is performed using a lottery table corresponding to RT, and when the winning number is determined to be a value other than "00 (H)", the internal lottery is terminated without using the lottery table corresponding to RT. are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
Further, lottery determination is performed using the lottery table for 1BBA during 1BBA, and determination is performed using the lottery table for 1BBB during 1BBB, as in the 16th embodiment.

FIG. 97(a) is a diagram showing a two-stage lottery address table. 97(b) is a diagram showing a two-stage lottery table 1, FIG. 97(c) is a diagram showing a two-stage lottery table 2, and FIG. 97(d) is a two-stage lottery table 3. 97(e) is a diagram showing a two-stage lottery table 4, and FIG. 97(f) is a diagram showing a two-stage lottery table 5. FIG.
Here, the two-stage lottery address table and the two-stage lottery tables 1 to 5 are used in the two-stage lottery shown in FIG. 100 and the lottery without setting difference shown in FIG. ing. Also, in the two-stage lottery and the lottery without setting difference, it is determined whether or not to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section. That is, the transition lottery for determining whether or not to transition from the normal section to the advantageous section corresponds to the two-stage lottery and the lottery without setting difference.

Also, the two-stage lottery address table determines which one of the two-stage lottery tables 1 to 5 is to be used.
As shown in FIG. 97(a), when the winning number is determined to be "38", "TBL_2NDAT_LOT1" (two-stage lottery table 1) is used.
Similarly, when the winning number is determined to be "39", "TBL_2NDAT_LOT2" (2-stage lottery table 2) is used, and when the winning number is determined to be "40", "TBL_2NDAT_LOT3" (2-stage lottery table 2) is used. Lottery table 3) is used.
Also, when the winning number is determined to be "41", "TBL_2NDAT_LOT4" (two-stage lottery table 4) is used, and when the winning number is determined to be "42", "TBL_2NDAT_LOT5" (two-stage lottery table) is used. Use table 5).

The two-stage lottery table 1 is used when the winning number is determined to be "38", and defines winning data and probability data.
"DEFB 2; winning data" on the first line indicates that the winning data is "2".
"DEFB 85; Probability data (winning data 2)" on the second line indicates that "85" is defined as the probability data, and when winning using this probability data, the winning data is "2". is determined by

"DEFB 85; Probability data (winning data 1)" on the third line indicates that "85" is defined as the probability data. is determined by
The fourth line ";//DEFB 86 ; probability data (winning data 0)" is a comment indicating that the probability that the winning data is determined to be "0" is "86/256". is not stored as
The two-stage lottery tables 2 to 5 are similar to the two-stage lottery table 1.

FIG. 98 is a flow chart showing the flow of lottery processing for condition device numbers and the like in the seventeenth embodiment.
Steps S1001 to S1004 and step S1006 are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
Further, in this embodiment, when the internal lottery 1 is executed in step S1004, the process proceeds to step S1101.
Further, when proceeding to step S1101, condition device number set 3 (FIG. 99) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1006.
Then, in step S1006, all the reels 31 start to rotate, and the spinning reels 31 can be stopped by operating the stop switch 42 by the player. Then, when all the reels 31 stop rotating, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

FIG. 99 is a flow chart showing the flow of processing for condition device number set 3. FIG.
Moreover, the condition device number set 3 is a process of determining (obtaining, storing, and determining) the condition device number and the advantageous section number from the winning number.
Proceeding to condition device number set 3 in step S1101, first, in step S1111, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number.
Further, the specific contents of the processing in step S1111 are the same as in step S1041 of FIG.

When it is determined in step S1111 that the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number (Yes), steps S1112 to S1118 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S1119.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1111 that the winning number is equal to or greater than the conversion start number (No), the process proceeds to next step S1112.
In step S1111, "31" is subtracted from the value of the A register (winning number) to determine whether or not a carry has occurred. That is, even after the subtraction, the value of the A register indicates the "winning number".

In step S1112, the main CPU 55 acquires the condition device number corresponding to the winning number from the winning number conversion table of FIG. 94(a).
Specifically, the main CPU 55 first stores the calculation result of “TBL_CNDNO_DAT”−“@NB_TRNS”×2 in the HL register.
For example, "TBL_CNDNO_DAT"="1600(H)" address.
Also, as shown in FIGS. 93(a) and (d), "@NB_TRNS"="@BBA_WIN_E2"="31".
In this case, the value of the HL register is
"1600 (H)" - "31 (D)" x 2
= "1600 (H)" - "3E (H)"
="15C2(H)"
becomes.

Next, the main CPU 55 repeats twice adding the value of the A register to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register.
For example, assume that the value of the A register (indicating the winning number) is "32".
Also, "32(D)"="20(H)".
In this case, the value of the HL register is
"15C2 (H)" + "20 (H)" = "15E2 (H)" (first time)
"15E2 (H)" + "20 (H)" = "1602 (H)" (second time)
becomes.
As a result, "the address of the condition device number corresponding to the winning number" is set in the HL register.

In other words, the address stored in the HL register (“15C2(H)” in this embodiment) is used as the reference address, and the winning number stored in the A register is used as the offset value (in this embodiment, stored in the A register). By setting the value obtained by doubling the determined winning number as an offset value, it is possible to calculate (specify) the address where the condition device number corresponding to the determined winning number is stored.
Here, the value of the A register is added twice (the value obtained by doubling the winning number is used as the offset value). and the winning and replay condition device numbers) are stored in the winning number conversion table.

As in the 16th embodiment, for one winning number, three pieces of data (data indicating the accessory condition device number, data indicating the winning and replay condition device number, and data indicating the advantageous section number) are provided. When stored in the winning number conversion table, the condition device number corresponding to the winning number is stored by adding the value of the A register three times (three times the winning number as the offset value). It is possible to calculate (specify) the address that is

Next, the main CPU 55 stores data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the E register.
For example, when the value of the HL register is "1602(H)", the data corresponding to this address is "@NB_1BBB"(="2"). In addition, this data indicates the "accessory condition device number" (FIGS. 94(a) and (c)).
In this case, the main CPU 55 stores "2" in the E register. As a result, "2" indicating the "accessory condition device number" is stored in the E register. Thereafter, the value of the E register is maintained until this flow chart (conditional device number set 3) is terminated.
After that, the main CPU 55 adds "1" to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register. As a result, the value of the HL register becomes "1603 (H)".

Incidentally, in step S1042 of FIG. 89, the value indicating the "accessory condition device number" is stored in the C register.
On the other hand, in step S1112, the value indicating the "accessory condition device number" is stored in the E register.
In condition device number set 3, the value of the C register (winning number) is used in steps S1111 and S1115, so that the value of the C register (winning number) is not destroyed in step S1112.

Next, the main CPU 55 stores data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the D register.
For example, when the value of the HL register is "1603(H)", the data corresponding to this address is "0". This data also indicates the "win and replay condition device number" (FIGS. 94(a) and (c)).
In this case, the main CPU 55 stores "0" in the D register. As a result, "0" indicating the "win and replay condition device number" is stored in the D register. After that, the value of the D register is maintained until this flow chart (condition device number set 3) ends.

In step S1042 of FIG. 89, the value indicating the "win and replay condition device number" is stored in the A register.
On the other hand, in step S1112, the value indicating the "win and replay condition device number" is stored in the D register.
In conditional device number set 3, the A register is used in step S1115, which will be described later. Therefore, the value indicating the winning and replay condition device number is not lost before the winning and replay condition device number is saved in step S1119 described later.

In step S1113, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not "0" is stored in the "_NB_CND_BNS" (storage area for the role product condition device number) of the RWM 53.
In other words, it is determined whether or not the current game is a game within the bonus.
When "0" is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS" of RWM 53, it is determined that the current game is a game during non-bonus, and when a value other than "0" is stored, the current game is determined. is determined to be a game within the bonus.
Of course, other information such as the RT number may be referenced in order to determine whether or not the current game is a game within the bonus.

Further, the specific contents of the processing in step S1113 are the same as in step S1043 of FIG.
Then, in step S1113, when it is determined that the accessory condition device number is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1114.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1113 that the accessory condition device number is other than "0" (No), steps S1114 to S1117 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S1118.

In step S1114, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the advantageous section number is "0".
Further, the specific contents of the processing in step S1114 are the same as in step S1044 of FIG.
Then, when it is determined in step S1114 that the advantageous section number is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1115.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1114 that the advantageous section number is other than "0" (No), steps S1115 and S1116 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S1117.

In step S1115, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number is smaller than the advantageous section conversion start number.
Specifically, when the process proceeds to step S1115, a value indicating the winning number is stored in the C register.
Also, in step S1115, the main CPU 55 first stores the value of the C register (winning number) in the A register, and then subtracts "@NB_TRNS_AT" from the value of the A register. As shown in FIGS. 93(a) and (d), '@NB_TRNS_AT'='@BBA'='38'.

Then, the main CPU 55 subtracts "38" from the value of the A register, and if a carry occurs as a result of the subtraction, determines that the winning number is smaller than the advantageous section conversion start number (Yes), and skips step S1116. , the process proceeds to step S1117.
On the other hand, when no carry is generated by the subtraction, the main CPU 55 determines that the winning number is equal to or greater than the advantageous section conversion start number (No), and proceeds to the next step S1116.
In step S1115, "38" is subtracted from the value of the A register (winning number) to determine whether or not a carry has occurred. That is, even after the subtraction, the value of the A register indicates the "winning number".

After proceeding to step S1116, the main CPU 55 executes a two-stage lottery (FIG. 100). Then, when the two-stage lottery is completed, the process proceeds to the next step S1117.
In step S1117, the main CPU 55 saves the accessory condition device number.
Specifically, when proceeding to step S1117, the E register stores a value indicating the accessory condition device number.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the E register in the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53 . As a result, the accessory condition device number is saved.

In the next step S1118, the main CPU 55 moves the winning and replay condition device number.
Here, in step S1112, a value indicating the "win and replay condition device number" is stored in the D register. Therefore, when proceeding to step S1118 via step S1112, the value of the D register indicates the "win and replay condition machine number".
Thus, at the time of proceeding to step S1118, the D register stores a value indicating the winning and replay condition device number.
Then, in step S1118, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the D register in the A register.

In the next step S1119, the main CPU 55 saves the winning and replay condition device numbers.
Here, when "Yes" is determined in step S1111 and the process proceeds to step S1119, the value indicating the "winning number" is stored in the A register. Also, when "Yes" is determined in step S1111 (when the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number), as shown in FIG. stipulated in Therefore, when "Yes" is determined in step S1111 and the process proceeds to step S1119, the value of the A register indicates the "win and replay condition machine number".

Also when proceeding from step S1118 to step S1119, the value of the A register indicates the "win and replay condition device number".
Then, in step S1119, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the A register in the storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of the RWM 53. FIG. This saves the winning and replay condition device numbers.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

As described above, in the condition device number set 3, in step S1118, the value of the D register (indicating the win and replay condition device number) is stored in the A register.
In this way, when "Yes" is obtained in step S1111 and the process proceeds to step S1119, and when "No" is obtained in step S1111 and the process proceeds from step S1118 to step S1119 via step S1112, the winning and replay conditions are determined. The process of storing the device number in "_NB_CND_NOR" can be shared, and the usage of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

FIG. 100 is a flow chart showing the flow of the two-stage lottery process.
Also, the two-stage lottery is a process of obtaining an advantageous section number from the winning number.
When proceeding to the two-stage lottery in step S1116, first, in step S1121, the main CPU 55 sets a two-stage lottery table.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 first stores the calculation result of "TBL_2NDDAT_ADR"-"@NB_TRNS_AT" in the HL register.

Here, "TBL_2NDDAT_ADR" indicates the head address of the two-stage lottery address table (FIG. 97(a)).
For example, "TBL_2NDDAT_ADR"="1700(H)" address.
Also, as shown in FIGS. 93(a) and (d), "@NB_TRNS_AT"="@BBA"="38".
In this case, the value of the HL register is
"1700 (H)" - "38 (D)"
= "1700 (H)" - "26 (H)"
="16DA(H)"
becomes.

Next, the main CPU 55 adds the value of the A register (winning number) to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register.
As described above, in step S1115 of FIG. 99, "38" is subtracted from the value of the A register (winning number) to determine whether or not a carry has occurred. maintain without That is, even after the subtraction, the value of the A register indicates the "winning number". Therefore, even at the time of proceeding to step S1121, the value of the A register indicates the "winning number".

For example, assume that the value of the A register (winning number) is "39".
Also, "39 (D)"="27 (H)".
In this case, the value of the HL register is
"16DA(H)" + "27(H)" = "1701(H)"
becomes.

In other words, by using the address indicated by the HL register ("16DA(H)" in this embodiment) as the reference address and the winning number stored in the A register as the offset value, the " It is possible to calculate (designate) the address of the address designation data.
"Address designation data" is data stored in the two-stage lottery address table, and is data for calculating (designating) the top address of the two-stage lottery tables 1-5.

"DEFB TBL_2NDAT_LOT1-$; win number 38" on the two-stage lottery address table of FIG.
Similarly, "DEFB TBL_2NDAT_LOT2-$; winning number 39" is address designation data for calculating (designating) the top address of the two-stage lottery table 2, and "DEFB TBL_2NDAT_LOT3-$; winning number 40" is 2 This is address designation data for calculating (designating) the top address of the step lottery table 3 .
In addition, "DEFB TBL_2NDAT_LOT4-$; winning number 41" is address designation data for calculating (designating) the top address of the two-stage lottery table 4, and "DEFB TBL_2NDAT_LOT5-$; winning number 42" is two-stage. This is address designation data for calculating (designating) the head address of the lottery table 5 .

Next, the main CPU 55 stores data (addressing data) corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the A register.
For example, when the value of the HL register is "1701 (H)", the data (addressing data) corresponding to this address is "DEFB TBL_2NDAT_LOT2-$; winning number 39", as shown in FIG. 97(a). is.

Here, "TBL_2NDAT_LOT2" indicates the leading address of the two-stage lottery table 2 (FIG. 97(c)).
For example, "TBL_2NDAT_LOT2"=address "1708(H)".
Also, "$" indicates the current address. As mentioned above, the current address is "1701(H)".
In this case, the value of the A register is
"TBL_2NDAT_LOT2" - "$"
= "1708(H)" - "1701(H)"
= "7 (H)"
becomes.

Next, the main CPU 55 adds the value of the A register to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register.
When the HL register value is "1701 (H)" and the A register value is "7 (H)", the new HL register value is
"1701 (H)" + "7 (H)"
="1708(H)"
becomes.

"1708(H)", which is the value of the HL register, indicates the top address of the two-stage lottery table used in the lottery without setting difference in the next step S1122.
The address "1708(H)" indicates the top address of the two-stage lottery table 2 in FIG. 97(c).
Thus, in step S1121, a two-stage lottery table is set. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1122.

After proceeding to step S1122, the main CPU 55 executes a lottery without setting difference (FIG. 101). Then, when the lottery without setting difference is completed, the process proceeds to the next step S1123.
In step S1123, the main CPU 55 saves the winning value in the no set difference lottery as the advantageous section number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1123, the winning value in the lottery with no set difference is stored in the A register.
Then, in step S1123, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the A register in the storage area "_NB_CND_AT" of the RWM 53 as the advantageous section number. This saves the advantageous section number.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

Here, the advantages of calculating (designating) the top address of the two-stage lottery table using the two-stage lottery address table are as follows.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 97(b) to (f), each of the two-stage lottery tables 1 to 5 stores 3-byte data.
Therefore, the top address (“1705(H)”) of the two-step lottery table 1 and the top address (“1708(H)”) of the two-step lottery table 2 are separated by 3 bytes.

Similarly, the top address (“1708(H)”) of the two-step lottery table 2 and the top address (“170B(H)”) of the two-step lottery table 3 are separated by 3 bytes.
The top address (“170B(H)”) of the two-step lottery table 3 and the top address (“170E(H)”) of the two-step lottery table 4 are separated by 3 bytes.
Furthermore, the top address (“170E(H)”) of the two-step lottery table 4 and the top address (“1711(H)”) of the two-step lottery table 5 are separated by 3 bytes.

In such a case, for example, from the top address (“1705 (H)”) of the two-stage lottery table 1, “72 (H)” which is a value obtained by multiplying “@NB_TRNS_AT” (“26 (H)”) by three )” is subtracted to calculate “1693(H)”, which is stored in the HL register as a reference address. The reason for multiplying "@NB_TRNS_AT" by 3 is that the data stored in each two-stage lottery table is 3 bytes. When N bytes of data are stored in each of the two-stage lottery tables, "@NB_TRNS_AT" is multiplied by N.
Then, by adding a value obtained by multiplying the winning number data stored in the A register by three to the reference address, the address of the two-stage lottery table corresponding to the winning number is calculated (specified). can also When N bytes of data are stored in each of the two-stage lottery tables, a value obtained by multiplying the winning number data by N is added.

That is, the operation result of "1705(H)"-"@NB_TRNS_AT"×3 is stored in the HL register as a reference address.
In this case, the value of the HL register is
"1705 (H)" - "@NB_TRNS_AT" x 3
= "1705 (H)" - "26 (H)" x 3
="1693(H)"
becomes.

Next, the main CPU 55 repeats three times adding the value of the A register to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register.
For example, assume that the value of the A register (indicating the winning number) is "39".
Also, "39 (D)"="27 (H)".
In this case, the value of the HL register is
"1693 (H)" + "27 (H)" = "16BA (H)" (first time)
"16BA(H)" + "27(H)" = "16E1(H)" (second time)
"16E1 (H)" + "27 (H)" = "1708 (H)" (third time)
becomes.
As a result, "the address of the condition device number and the advantageous section number corresponding to the winning number" is set in the HL register.

However, during the development stage of the slot machine 10, the contents of the two-stage lottery tables 1-5 may be changed.
For example, for the two-step lottery table 1, the winning probability of the advantageous section number "1" may be set to 0%, and the winning probability of the advantageous section number "2" may be set to 100%.
In this case, in the two-stage lottery table 1, the number of winning advantageous section numbers is one, so that the interval between the top addresses of the two-stage lottery tables 1 to 5 is no longer 3 bytes.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 97(a), by providing a two-stage lottery address table for designating the top address of the two-stage lottery table corresponding to the winning number, the two-stage lottery address table can be provided at the development stage of the slot machine 10. Even if the intervals between the top addresses of the tables 1 to 5 are no longer equal, the top address of the two-stage lottery table can be specified, so that it is possible to flexibly cope with the specification change.

Also, the head address of the corresponding two-step lottery table can be designated from the determined winning number without using the two-step lottery address table.
However, in this case, in step S1121 of FIG. 100, first, it is determined whether or not the winning number is "38". is designated as "1705(H)", and if it is determined that the winning number is not "38", then it is determined whether or not the winning number is "39".

Also, when it is determined that the winning number is "39", "1708 (H)", which is the top address of the two-stage lottery table 2, is specified, and when it is determined that it is not "39", the next step is performed. , determines whether or not the winning number is "40".
Such processing is repeated until the top address of the two-stage lottery table corresponding to the winning number is specified.

For this reason, the process until the top address of the two-stage lottery table is specified becomes long.
Also, a program for designating the top address of the two-stage lottery table is required.
On the other hand, if the head address of the two-stage lottery table is designated using the two-stage lottery address table, the processing up to designating the head address of the two-stage lottery table can be shortened, and the head of the two-stage lottery table can be shortened. Since there is no need to define a program for specifying addresses, the usage of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the flow of lottery processing without setting difference.
The lottery without setting difference is a process of determining the advantageous section number based on the two-step lottery table set in step S1121 of FIG.
When proceeding to the lottery without setting difference in step S1122, first, in step S1131, the main CPU 55 acquires a random number value.
In this embodiment, a counter is provided that counts the range from "0" to "255" as one cycle. Then, the main CPU 55 acquires a 1-byte random number value from this counter for use in a lottery without setting difference, and stores it in the A register.
Note that the lower 1 byte of the 2-byte counter may be obtained as a random value.

Proceeding to the next step S1132, the main CPU 55 acquires winning data from the two-stage lottery table.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 stores in the B register data in which bit 7 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is set to "0". At this time, the data itself corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is the data before bit 7 is set to "0".
Here, in the two-stage lottery tables 1 to 5 of FIGS. 97(b) to (f), "2(D)" is defined as winning data.

However, if the winning data is determined as "2", "10000010(B)" can be determined as the winning data.
Similarly, when the winning data is determined as "1", "10000001 (B)" can be determined as the winning data.
In this case, of the 8-bit data, bits 0 to 6 indicate winning data, and bit 7 indicates "winning confirmed data".
Also, the "winning confirmation data" is data indicating that the winning data is to be confirmed as a winning value.

Proceeding to the next step S1133, the main CPU 55 determines whether winning confirmation data is included.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 determines whether bit 7 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is "1".
Then, when bit 7 is "1", it is determined that winning determination data is included (Yes), steps S1134 to S1138 are skipped, and the process proceeds to step S1139. As a result, bit 0 to bit 6 (winning data) of the 8-bit data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register are determined as the winning value.
On the other hand, if the bit 7 is "0", it is determined that the winning determination data is not included (No), and the process proceeds to the next step S1134.

In step S1134, the main CPU 55 acquires probability data from the two-stage lottery table.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 adds "1" to the value of the HL register. As a result, the value of the HL register indicates the address of the probability data.
Proceeding to the next step S1135, the main CPU 55 makes a win/fail decision.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 subtracts the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register from the value of the A register, and stores the subtraction result in the HL register.

Proceeding to the next step S1136, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the prize has been won.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not a carry has occurred due to the subtraction in step S1135.
Here, when a carry occurs as a result of the subtraction, it is determined that the player has won (Yes), steps S1137 and S1138 are skipped, and the process proceeds to step S1139.
On the other hand, when no carry is generated by the subtraction, it is determined that no winning is made (No), and the process proceeds to the next step S1137.

In step S1137, the main CPU 55 subtracts "1" from the winning data.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 subtracts "1" from the value of the B register to obtain a new value of the B register.
Proceeding to the next step S1138, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning data is "0".
Specifically, the main CPU 55 determines whether the value of the B register is "0".

Here, when it is determined that the value of the B register is not "0" (No), the process returns to step S1134.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the B register is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1139.
In step S1139, the main CPU 55 acquires winning data as a winning value.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the B register in the A register. In this way, the winning data is stored in the A register as a winning value. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

As described above, in the condition device number set 3, when the winning numbers determined by the internal lottery 1 and the lottery determination are numbers "38" to "42", the answer is "No" in step S1111 of FIG. Therefore, the two-stage lottery and the lottery without setting difference (transition lottery) can be executed.
In this case, when a value other than "0" is stored in "_NB_CND_AT"("No" in step S1114 of FIG. 99; when an advantageous section number is stored), steps S1115 and S1116 are executed. Since the process skips and proceeds to step S1117, the two-stage lottery and the lottery without setting difference are not executed.
As a result, it is possible to appropriately perform the processing related to the transition to the advantageous section within the range of the constant usage amount of the RWM 55 without requiring complicated processing.

When "No" is determined in step S1114 of FIG. 99 (when "_NB_CND_AT" stores a value other than "0"), steps S1115 and S1116 are skipped, thereby changing from the normal section to the advantageous section. It simply does not perform the lottery for the transition (two stage lottery and no set difference lottery).
Then, even when "No" in step S1114 of FIG. 99 (when "_NB_CND_AT" stores a value other than "0"), the advantageous section is added (the game state during the advantageous section is It is possible to change the performance so that it is advantageous to the player, or increase the number of AT games played during the advantageous section).

In addition, when the winning number determined by the internal lottery 1 and the lottery judgment is "38" to "42", when a value other than "0" is stored in "_NB_CND_AT" (advantageous section number is stored), the process may proceed to step S1116 in FIG. 99 to execute a two-stage lottery and a lottery without setting difference. In this case, step S1123 in FIG. 100 is skipped. This maintains the value stored in "_NB_CND_AT".
Even in this way, it is possible to appropriately perform the processing related to the shift to the advantageous section within the range of the constant usage amount of the RWM 55 without requiring complicated processing.

Further, as described above, when the winning numbers determined by the internal lottery 1 and the lottery determination are numbers "38" to "42", the two-stage lottery and the lottery without set difference can be executed. In this case, when a value other than "0" is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS"("No" in step S1113 of FIG. 99; when the accessory condition device number is stored), steps S1114 to Since S1117 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1118, the two-stage lottery and the lottery without set difference are not executed.
As a result, it is possible to appropriately perform the processing related to the transition to the advantageous section within the range of the constant usage amount of the RWM 55 without requiring complicated processing.

In addition, when the winning number determined by the internal lottery 1 and the lottery judgment is "38" to "42", when a value other than "0" is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS" (accessory condition device number is stored), the process may proceed to step S1116 in FIG. 99 to execute a two-stage lottery and a lottery without set difference. In this case, step S1123 in FIG. 100 is skipped. This maintains the value stored in "_NB_CND_AT".
Even in this way, it is possible to appropriately perform the processing related to the shift to the advantageous section within the range of the constant usage amount of the RWM 55 without requiring complicated processing.

In addition, when the winning number determined by the internal lottery 1 and the lottery judgment is "38" to "40", it is possible to win the accessory condition device and to execute the two-stage lottery and the lottery with no set difference. Become. In this case, a two-stage lottery and a lottery with no setting difference are executed (step S1116), and then the accessory condition device number is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS" (step S1117).

Furthermore, when the winning number determined by the internal lottery 1 and the lottery judgment is "39" or "40", it is a double winning of the accessory condition device and the winning condition device, and there is no difference between the two-stage lottery and the setting difference. A lottery can be executed. In this case, a two-stage lottery and a lottery with no setting difference are executed (step S1116), then the accessory condition device number is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS" (step S1117), and the winning condition device number is stored in "_NB_CND_NOR" ( step S1118).
As a result, in the game in which the accessory condition device is won, the processing relating to transition to the advantageous section can be executed without requiring complicated processing.

<Modification of 17th Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
The modification of the seventeenth embodiment differs from the seventeenth embodiment in the processing of the condition device number set.
In the process of the condition device number set 3 of the 17th embodiment, a two-stage lottery is performed and the advantageous section number is stored in "_NB_CND_AT", after that the role product condition device number is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS", and winning and The replay condition device number was stored in "_NB_CND_NOR".

On the other hand, in the condition device number set 4 of the modification of the 17th embodiment, the role product condition device number is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS", and the winning and replay condition device number is stored in "_NB_CND_NOR", and then, A two-stage lottery is performed and the advantageous section number is stored in "_NB_CND_AT".

FIG. 102 is a flow chart showing the flow of lottery processing for condition device numbers and the like in the modification of the seventeenth embodiment.
Steps S1001 to S1004 and step S1006 are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
Also, step S1052 is the same as in the modification of the sixteenth embodiment.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the internal lottery 1 is executed in step S1004, the process proceeds to step S1141.
Then, in step S1141, condition device number set 4 (FIG. 103) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1006.

FIG. 103 is a flow chart showing the flow of processing for condition device number set 4 .
Also, the condition device number set 4 is a process of determining the condition device number and the advantageous section number from the winning number.
Proceeding to condition device number set 4 in step S1141, first, in step S1151, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number.
Further, the specific contents of the processing in step S1151 are the same as in step S1041 of FIG.

When it is determined in step S1151 that the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number (Yes), steps S1152 to S1154 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S1155.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1151 that the winning number is equal to or greater than the conversion start number (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1152.
In step S1151, "31" is subtracted from the value of the A register (winning number) to determine whether or not a carry has occurred. That is, even after the subtraction, the value of the A register indicates the "winning number".

After proceeding to step S1152, the main CPU 55 acquires the condition device number from the winning number.
Here, in step S1112 of FIG. 99, the value indicating the "win and replay condition device number" is stored in the D register.
On the other hand, in step S1152, the value indicating the "win and replay condition device number" is stored in the A register.
Other than that, the specific contents of the processing in step S1152 are the same as in step S1112 of FIG.

In addition, in condition device number set 3 in FIG. 99, before storing the winning and replay condition device number in step S1119, in step S1115, a value indicating the winning number is stored in the A register. Therefore, in order not to lose the value indicating the winning and replay condition device number, in step S1112, the value indicating the winning and replay condition device number is stored in the D register instead of the A register.

In step S1153, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the accessory condition device number is "0".
Further, the specific contents of the processing in step S1153 are the same as in step S1043 of FIG.
Then, in step S1153, when it is determined that the accessory condition device number is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1154.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1153 that the accessory condition device number is other than "0" (No), step S1154 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1155.

In step S1154, the main CPU 55 saves the accessory condition device number, and in the next step S1155, the main CPU 55 saves the winning and replay condition device number.
Further, the specific processing contents of step S1154 are the same as those of step S1074 in FIG. 92, and the specific processing contents of step S1155 are the same as those of step S1075 of FIG.

It should be noted that the winning and replay condition device number is set to "_NB_CND_NOR" when "Yes" is obtained in step S1151 and the process proceeds to step S1155, and when "No" is obtained in step S1151 and the process proceeds to step S1155 via step S1152. , and the usage of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

Proceeding to step S1156, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number is smaller than the advantageous section conversion start number.
The specific contents of the processing in step S1156 are the same as in step S1115 of FIG.
Then, when it is determined in step S1156 that the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number (Yes), steps S1157 to S1116 are skipped, and the processing according to this flowchart ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1156 that the winning number is equal to or greater than the conversion start number (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1157.

After proceeding to step S1157, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the advantageous section number is "0".
The specific contents of the processing in step S1157 are the same as in step S1044 of FIG.
Then, when it is determined in step S1157 that the advantageous section number is other than "0" (No), steps S1158 and S1116 are skipped, and the processing according to this flowchart ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1157 that the advantageous section number is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1158.

Proceeding to step S1158, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the internal flag is on.
The specific contents of the processing in step S1158 are the same as in step S1078 of FIG.
Then, when it is determined in step S1158 that the internal flag is ON, step S1116 is skipped and the processing according to this flow chart ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1158 that the internal medium flag is off, the process proceeds to the next step S1116.

After proceeding to step S1116, the main CPU 55 executes a two-stage lottery (FIG. 100). Then, when the two-stage lottery ends, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
The details of the two-stage lottery process in step S1116 are the same as in the seventeenth embodiment.

As described above, in the condition device number set 4, when the winning number determined by the internal lottery 1 and the lottery determination is "38" to "40", the prize condition device is won, and 2 A staged lottery and a lottery with no setting difference can be executed.
In this case, when the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is "0"("Yes" in step S1153), the role condition device number is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS" (step S1154), and the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is "0"("No" in step S1153), the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is maintained (step S1154 is skipped).

In addition, when the winning number determined by the internal lottery 1 and the lottery judgment is "39" or "40", it is a double winning of the accessory condition device and the winning condition device, and there is no difference between the two-stage lottery and the setting difference. A lottery can be executed.
In this case, depending on the value of ``_NB_CND_BNS'', the role condition device number is stored in ``_NB_CND_BNS'', or the value of ``_NB_CND_BNS'' is maintained, and then the winning condition device number is stored in ``_NB_CND_NOR'' ( step S1155).

Thereafter, when the value of "_FL_PRD_LOT" is "0"("No" in step S1158), a two-stage lottery and a lottery with no setting difference (transition lottery) are executed (step S1116), and the value of "_FL_PRD_LOT" is is "FF (H)"("Yes" in step S1158), the two-stage lottery and the lottery without setting difference are not executed (step S1116 is skipped).
As a result, in the game in which the accessory condition device is won, the processing relating to transition to the advantageous section can be executed without requiring complicated processing.

Also, in the condition device number set 4, when the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is "0"("Yes" in step S1153), the role product condition device number is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS" (step S1154), After that, a two-stage lottery and a lottery without set difference are executed (step S1116).
For this reason, in the condition device number set 4, even if it is determined whether or not the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is "0" in the step before executing the two-stage lottery and the lottery without setting difference, the accessory condition in the game this time It cannot be determined whether the player has won the device or whether the accessory condition device has been won before the previous game.

Therefore, in the condition device number set 4, in step S1158 before executing the two-stage lottery and the lottery with no set difference, it is determined whether or not the internal middle flag is ON, so that the accessory condition device is won in the game this time. or whether the accessory condition device was won before the previous game.
Then, when the internal medium flag is off, it is determined that the accessory condition device has been won in the game this time, and a two-step lottery and a lottery with no set difference are executed (step S1116).

Also, in condition device number set 4, in step S1152, a value indicating "accessory condition device number" is stored in the E register, and a value indicating "winning and replay condition device number" is stored in the A register. After that, in step S1154, the value of E register (role condition device number) is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS", and in step S1155, the value of A register (winning and replay condition device number) is stored in "_NB_CND_NOR".
Therefore, even if the value of the E register is destroyed after step S1154, the accessory condition device number will not be lost. Conditional device numbers are never lost.

Also, in step S1156, the value of the C register is stored in the A register, and then "@NB_TRNS_AT" (= "38") is subtracted from the value of the A register so that the winning number is smaller than the advantageous section conversion start number. or not.
As described above, in condition device number set 4, the E register can be used for other processing after step S1154. Similarly, after step S1155, the A register can be used for other processing, and after step S1156, the C register can be used for other processing.
In addition, as another process, for example, an AT (instructed game section) in the advantageous section can be added to the lottery.

Further, in condition device number set 4, in step S1158, it is determined whether or not the accessory condition device is won in the current game, or whether the accessory condition device was won in the previous game or not by judging whether or not the internal medium flag is on. However, it is not limited to this, for example, by judging whether it is RT4 corresponding to the inside, it is determined whether the accessory condition device was won in the game this time, or whether the accessory condition device was won in the previous game. You can judge whether you won the election.

In the present embodiment, a two-stage lottery and a lottery with no set difference were described as the transition lottery from the normal section to the advantageous section. Even if a value other than "0" is stored, the addition of the advantageous section (the performance is changed so that the game state during the advantageous section is advantageous to the player, or the AT game is played during the advantageous section). (including increasing the number of times) may be executed, and the value of "_NB_CND_AT" may be changed according to the result.

For example, "1" is stored in "_NB_CND_AT" and the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" (storage area for machine condition device number) is "0", and the winning number is determined to be "37". , a control process such as storing "2" in "_NB_CND_AT" may be executed.
In addition, in the situation where "_NB_CND_AT" is stored as "1" and the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is "0", based on the fact that the winning number is determined to be "37", a lottery for adding an advantageous section may be executed.

In addition, the winning numbers "38" to "42" were treated as a lottery for transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, but even if these winning numbers were determined in the advantageous section, the advantageous section A lottery may be conducted for the addition of .
As described above, when the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is "1" (so-called internal medium), for example, even if the winning number is determined to be "37", the lottery for adding the advantageous section is not executed.

<Eighteenth Embodiment>
Next, an eighteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
Winning number definitions for the winning numbers "1" to "30" are the same as the winning number definition (1) of the sixteenth embodiment shown in FIG. 74(a).
Winning number definitions for the winning numbers "31" to "42" are the same as the winning number definition (3) of the seventeenth embodiment shown in FIG. 93(a).
Furthermore, the winning number conversion data definition is the same as the winning number conversion data definition of the seventeenth embodiment shown in FIG. 93(d).
Furthermore, the winning number conversion table is the same as the winning number conversion table of the seventeenth embodiment shown in FIG. 94(a).

FIG. 104(a) is a diagram showing the winning number lottery data definition in this embodiment.
The winning number identifier, repeat count identifier, setting value identifier, 2-byte data identifier, 1-byte data identifier, and determination end identifier are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
The “advantageous section number 1 identifier” is an identifier indicating that the advantageous section 1 has been won (determined to move).

The “advantageous section number 2 identifier” is an identifier indicating that the advantageous section 2 has been won (determined to move).
The advantageous section number 1 identifier and the advantageous section number 2 identifier are collectively referred to as "advantageous section number identifier".
"Advantageous section number mask data" is data for masking (setting to "0") bit data (bits 3 to 7) corresponding to identifiers other than the advantageous section number identifier.

'@LT_AT1 EQU 00000001B; advantageous section number 1 identifier' indicates that '@LT_AT1' indicates the 'advantageous section number 1 identifier' and that the data corresponding to '@LT_AT1' is '00000001 (B)'. means
Also, "@LT_AT2 EQU 00000010B; advantageous section number 2 identifier" indicates that "@LT_AT2" indicates the "advantageous section number 2 identifier" and that the data corresponding to "@LT_AT2" is "00000010 (B)". means
Furthermore, "@MSK_AT EQU 00000111B; advantageous section number mask data" indicates that "@MSK_AT" indicates "advantageous section number mask data", and data corresponding to "@MSK_AT" is "00000111(B)". means that

105 to 108 are diagrams showing all RT common lottery tables in this embodiment.
FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an all-RT common lottery table (8). FIG. 106 is a diagram showing the lottery table common to all RTs (9), and is a diagram following FIG. Furthermore, FIG. 107 is a diagram showing the lottery table common to all RTs (10), and is a diagram following FIG. Furthermore, FIG. 108 is a diagram showing the lottery table common to all RTs (11), and is a diagram following FIG.
The non-RT lottery table, RT1 lottery table, RT2 lottery table, RT3 lottery table, RT4 lottery table, 1BBA lottery table, and 1BBB lottery table are the same as in the 16th embodiment.

Also, at non-RT time, RT 1 time, RT 2 time, RT 3 time, or RT 4 time, lottery determination is first performed using the all-RT common lottery table. Next, lottery determination is performed using a lottery table corresponding to RT, and when the winning number is determined to be a value other than "00 (H)", the internal lottery is terminated without using the lottery table corresponding to RT. are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
Further, lottery determination is performed using the lottery table for 1BBA during 1BBA, and determination is performed using the lottery table for 1BBB during 1BBB, as in the 16th embodiment.

Here, "DEFB @LT_BYT OR @LT_AT1; 1-byte data identifier;; + advantageous section number 1 identifier" in FIG. It shows that it is stored in the second line of "1BBA condition device lottery data".
Here, as shown in FIG. 104(a), "@LT_BYT" indicates a 1-byte data identifier and its value is "00001000(B)".
Also, as shown in FIG. 104(a), "@LT_AT1" indicates the advantageous section number 1 identifier, and its value is "00000001(B)".

Furthermore, when performing an OR operation of "@LT_BYT" and "@LT_AT1",
00001000 (B): @LT_BYT
00000001 (B): @LT_AT1
00001001 (B): Data after OR operation.

In other words, “DEFB @LT_BYT OR @LT_AT1” indicates that “00001001(B)” is stored in a predetermined 1-byte storage area on the ROM 54 .
As a result, the 1-byte data identifier and the advantageous section number 1 identifier can be represented by one 8-bit data.
The comment "; 1-byte data identifier ;; + advantageous section number 1 identifier" indicates that the data includes a 1-byte data identifier and an advantageous section number 1 identifier.

Furthermore, if the AND operation of "00001001(B)" and "@MSK_AT" is performed,
00001001 (B): @LT_BYT OR @LT_AT1
00000111 (B): @MSK_AT
00000001 (B): Data after AND operation.
As a result, "00000001(B)"="@LT_AT1" (advantageous section number 1 identifier) can be acquired.

When the probability data is 1 byte and winning the advantageous section 1, data including a 1-byte data identifier and an advantageous section number 1 identifier is stored in the lottery table.
Further, when the probability data is 1 byte and winning the advantageous section 2, data including a 1-byte data identifier and an advantageous section number 2 identifier is stored in the lottery table.

Furthermore, when the probability data is 2 bytes and the advantageous section 1 is won, data including the 2-byte data identifier and the advantageous section number 1 identifier is stored in the lottery table.
Furthermore, when the probability data is 2 bytes and winning the advantageous section 2, data including a 1-byte data identifier and an advantageous section number 1 identifier is stored in the lottery table.

Also, the decision to move to the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 must be tied to a condition device with no setting difference. That is, the probability of shifting to the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 should not differ according to the set value.
Therefore, one piece of 8-bit data containing the set value identifier and the advantageous section number 1 identifier is never stored in the lottery table.
Similarly, one piece of 8-bit data containing the set value identifier and the advantageous section number 2 identifier is not stored in the lottery table.

In the all RT common lottery table (8) of FIG. 105, "1BBA condition device lottery data" is defined, and in the all RT common lottery table (9) of FIG. 106, "1BBA condition device lottery data" is defined. "1BBA condition device lottery data" is also defined in the all RT common lottery table (10) in FIG.
Here, when the "1BBA condition equipment lottery data" in FIG. 105 is used, "@BBA"="38" is set as the winning number data, and "10" is set as the probability data. At this time, if it is determined that the winning lottery is won, the winning number is determined to be "38", but since the advantageous section number identifier is not determined, the advantageous section is not won.

Also, when the "1BBA condition equipment lottery data" in FIG. 106 is used, "@BBA"="38" is set as the winning number data, and "10" is set as the probability data. At this time, if it is determined that the player wins the lottery, the winning number is determined to be "38" and the advantageous section number 1 identifier is determined, so that the advantageous section 1 is won.
Further, even when the "1BBA condition device lottery data" in FIG. 107 is used, "@BBA"="38" is set as the winning number data and "10" is set as the probability data. At this time, if it is determined that the player wins in the winning/failing determination, the winning number is determined to be "38" and the advantageous section number 2 identifier is determined, so that the advantageous section 2 is won.

Thus, in this embodiment, the all-RT common lottery table associates the winning number data "38" with the probability data "10", and does not associate the advantageous section number identifier. Figure 105), 1BBA condition device lottery data (Figure 106) that associates winning number data "38", probability data "10", and advantageous section number 1 identifier, winning number data "38" and probability data "10 ” and the advantageous section number 2 identifier are defined as 1BBA condition device lottery data (Fig. 107).
That is, a plurality of probability data are defined corresponding to one winning number data. Then, among a plurality of probability data corresponding to one winning number data, one probability data is associated with data indicating transition from the normal section to the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2, and the other one Probability data is not associated with data indicating a transition from a normal interval to an advantageous interval.

For this reason, as described above, even if the winning number is determined to be the same number "38" (single winning of 1BBA condition device), when not winning in the advantageous section and in the advantageous section 1 There is a time of winning and a time of winning in the advantageous section 2. - 特許庁
Regarding "1BBA + small winning D condition device lottery data", "1BBA + small winning E1 condition device lottery data", "small winning D condition device lottery data", and "small winning E1 condition device lottery data" 1BBA condition equipment lottery data”.

In addition, in FIG. 105, "1BBA condition device lottery data", "1BBA + small combination D condition device lottery data", "1BBA + small combination E1 condition device lottery data", "small combination D condition device lottery data", And regarding the "minor combination E1 condition device lottery data", those that do not win in the advantageous section are defined as a group.
Furthermore, in FIG. 106, "1BBA condition device lottery data", "1BBA + small combination D condition device lottery data", "1BBA + small combination E1 condition device lottery data", "small combination D condition device lottery data" , and "data for small combination E1 condition device lottery", those that will be won in the advantageous section 1 are defined as a group.

Furthermore, in FIG. 107, "1BBA condition device lottery data", "1BBA + small combination D condition device lottery data", "1BBA + small combination E1 condition device lottery data", "small combination D condition device lottery data", And regarding the "minor combination E1 condition device lottery data", those that will be won in the advantageous section 2 are defined as a group.
In this way, the order is "a group of lottery data that does not win in the advantageous section" → "a group of lottery data that wins in the advantageous section 1" → "a group of lottery data that wins in the advantageous section 2". By defining the data in the lottery table, it is sufficient to determine the winning number data only in the "1BBA condition device lottery data", so the amount of ROM 54 used by the lottery table can be reduced.

Specifically, the winning number definition for the winning numbers "31" to "42" in this embodiment is the same as the winning number definition (3) of the 17th embodiment shown in FIG. 93(a).
That is, the winning number corresponding to "1BBA single winning" is "38", the winning number corresponding to "1BBA + small winning combination D multiple winning" is "39", and corresponding to "1BBA + small winning combination E1 multiple winning". The winning number is "40", the winning number corresponding to "minor win D single win" is "41", and the winning number corresponding to "minor win E1 win alone" is "42".

In this way, the winning numbers corresponding to "single winning of 1BBA" to "single winning of small hand E1" are continuous.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 105, if "@BBA" (= "38") is defined as winning number data for "1BBA condition device lottery data", "1BBA + small win D condition device lottery data", the winning number data ("39") obtained by adding "1" to the winning number data ("38") of the "1BBA condition device lottery data" can be used as the winning number data.

Similarly, for "1BBA + small winning E1 condition device lottery data", the value obtained by adding "1" to the winning number data ("39") of "1BBA + small winning D condition device lottery data"(" 40”) can be used as winning number data.
In addition, for the "small win D condition device lottery data", the value obtained by adding "1" to the winning number data ("40") of "1BBA + small win E1 condition device lottery data"("41 ) can be used as winning number data.
Furthermore, for the "small win E1 condition device lottery data", the value ("42") obtained by adding "1" to the winning number data ("41") of the "small win D condition device lottery data" can be used as winning number data.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 105, if the winning number data is determined only for "1BBA condition device lottery data", "1BBA + small combination D condition device lottery data", "1BBA + small combination E1 condition device lottery Data", "small win D condition device lottery data", and "small win E1 condition device lottery data" do not need to determine the winning number data, so that the amount of ROM 54 used by the lottery table is reduced. can be done.
From "1BBA condition device lottery data" in FIG. It is the same as 105 "1BBA condition device lottery data" to "small win E1 condition device lottery data".

For example, "1BBA condition device lottery data that will not win in the advantageous section" → "1BBA condition device lottery data that will win in the advantageous section 1" → "1BBA condition device lottery data that will win in the advantageous section 2" ” can be set in the lottery table.
However, in this case, it is necessary to determine winning number data for each lottery data, so the lottery table consumes more ROM 54 accordingly.

Specifically, for example,
; 1BBA condition equipment lottery data DEFB @LT_NUM OR @BBA ; Winning number data identifier
+ Winning number data DEFB @LT_BYT ; 1-byte data identifier DEFB 10 ; Probability data (common to all settings)

; 1BBA condition equipment lottery data DEFB @LT_NUM OR @BBA ; Winning number data identifier
+ winning number data DEFB @LT_BYT OR @LT_AT1 ; 1 byte data identifier
+ Advantageous section number 1 identifier DEFB 10 ; Probability data (common to all settings)

; 1BBA condition equipment lottery data DEFB @LT_NUM OR @BBA ; Winning number data identifier
+ winning number data DEFB @LT_BYT OR @LT_AT2 ; 1 byte data identifier
+ Advantageous section number 2 identifier DEFB 10 ; Probability data (common to all settings)
, three types of "1BBA condition equipment lottery data" can be determined continuously.

Then, for example,
; 1BBA + small win D condition device lottery data DEFB @LT_NUM OR @BBA_WD ; winning number data identifier
+ Winning number data DEFB @LT_BYT ; 1-byte data identifier DEFB 5 ; Probability data (common to all settings)

; 1BBA + small win D condition device lottery data DEFB @LT_NUM OR @BBA_WD ; winning number data identifier
+ winning number data DEFB @LT_BYT OR @LT_AT1 ; 1 byte data identifier
+ Advantageous section number 1 identifier DEFB 2 ; Probability data (common to all settings)

; 1BBA + small win D condition device lottery data DEFB @LT_NUM OR @BBA_WD ; winning number data identifier
+ winning number data DEFB @LT_BYT OR @LT_AT2 ; 1 byte data identifier
+ Advantageous section number 2 identifier DEFB 3 ; Probability data (common to all settings)
, three types of "1BBA+small combination D condition device lottery data" can be determined continuously.
However, in this case, it is necessary to determine winning number data for each lottery data, so the lottery table consumes more ROM 54 accordingly.

FIG. 109 is a flow chart showing the flow of lottery processing for condition device numbers and the like in the eighteenth embodiment.
Steps S1001 to S1004 and step S1006 are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
Further, in this embodiment, when the internal lottery 1 is executed in step S1004, the process proceeds to step S1201.

Furthermore, when the process proceeds to step S1201, the advantageous section number acquisition (FIG. 110) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1202.
Furthermore, when proceeding to step S1202, condition device number set 5 (FIG. 111) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1006.
When the process proceeds to step S1006, all the reels 31 start to rotate, and the rotating reels 31 can be stopped by operating the stop switch 42 by the player. Then, when all the reels 31 stop rotating, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing for obtaining an advantageous section number.
Advantageous section number acquisition is a process of acquiring an advantageous section number from the data defined in the lottery table.
Proceeding to obtaining the advantageous section number in step S1201, first, in step S1211, the main CPU 55 obtains data corresponding to the winning number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1211, the HL register stores a value indicating the address of the data on the lottery table used in internal lottery 1 (FIG. 87) and lottery determination (FIG. 88).

For example, when the "1BBA condition equipment lottery data" in FIG. 105 is used, it is assumed that the lottery is determined to be winning in the winning/failing determination. In this case, when the process proceeds to step S1211, a value indicating the address of "DEFB @LT_BYT" is stored in the HL register.
Also, it is assumed that when the "1BBA condition equipment lottery data" in FIG. In this case, when the process proceeds to step S1211, the value indicating the address of "DEFB @LT_BYT OR @LT_AT1" is stored in the HL register.

Furthermore, it is assumed that when the "1BBA condition device lottery data" in FIG. In this case, when the process proceeds to step S1211, the value indicating the address of "DEFB @LT_BYT OR @LT_AT2" is stored in the HL register.
108, and it is determined that the prize is not won. In this case, when the process proceeds to step S1211, a value indicating the address of "DEFB @LT_END" is stored in the HL register.

Then, in step S1211, the main CPU 55 stores data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the B register.
For example, when the value indicating the address of "DEFB @LT_BYT" in FIG. 105 is stored in the HL register, "DEFB @LT_BYT"="00001000(B)" is stored in the B register.
Also, when the value indicating the address of "DEFB @LT_BYT OR @LT_AT1" in FIG. 106 is stored in the HL register, "DEFB @LT_BYT OR @LT_AT1"="00001001(B)" is stored in the B register. .

Furthermore, when the value indicating the address of "DEFB @LT_BYT OR @LT_AT2" in FIG. 107 is stored in the HL register, "DEFB @LT_BYT OR @LT_AT2"="00001010(B)" is stored in the B register. do.
Furthermore, when the value indicating the address of "DEFB @LT_END" in FIG. 108 is stored in the HL register, "DEFB @LT_END"="00(H)" is stored in the B register.
Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1212.

After proceeding to step S1212, the main CPU 55 generates an advantageous section number from the obtained data.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 performs an AND operation on the data in the B register and "@MSK_AT" (advantageous section number mask data = "00000111(B)"), and transfers the resulting data to a new B register. data.

For example, when the data in the B register is "00001000(B)", "00000000(B)" is obtained by ANDing "00001000(B)" and "00000111(B)". Then, the obtained "00000000(B)" is stored in the B register. In this case, it will not be won in the advantageous section.
Also, when the data in the B register is "00001001(B)", "00000001(B)" is obtained by performing an AND operation on "00001001(B)" and "00000111(B)". Then, the obtained "00000001(B)"(="@LT_AT1": advantageous section number 1) is stored in the B register. In this case, it will be elected (determined to shift) to the advantageous section 1.

Furthermore, when the data in the B register is "00001010(B)", "00000010(B)" is obtained by ANDing "00001010(B)" and "00000111(B)". Then, the obtained “00000010(B)” (=“@LT_AT2”: advantageous section number 2) is stored in the B register. In this case, it will be elected (determined to shift) to the advantageous section 2.

Furthermore, when the data in the B register is "00(H)", "00000000(B)" is obtained by performing an AND operation on "00(H)" and "00000111(B)". Then, the obtained "00000000(B)" is stored in the B register. In this case, it will not be won in the advantageous section.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
In this embodiment, regardless of whether the winning number is determined by the internal lottery 1 or the lottery determination, the advantageous section number acquisition of FIG. , which is stored in the B register.

FIG. 111 is a flow chart showing the flow of processing for condition device number set 5 .
Proceeding to condition device number set 5 in step S1202, first, in step S1221, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number.
Further, the specific contents of the processing in step S1221 are the same as in step S1041 of FIG.

When it is determined in step S1221 that the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number (Yes), steps S1222 to S1226 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S1227.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1221 that the winning number is equal to or greater than the conversion start number (No), the process proceeds to next step S1222.
In step S1221, "31" is subtracted from the value of the A register (winning number) to determine whether or not a carry has occurred. That is, even after the subtraction, the value of the A register indicates the "winning number".

After proceeding to step S1222, the main CPU 55 acquires the condition device number from the winning number.
Here, in step S1112 of FIG. 99, the value indicating the "accessory condition device number" is stored in the E register, and the value indicating the "winning and replay condition device number" is stored in the D register.
On the other hand, in step S1222, the value indicating the "accessory condition device number" is stored in the C register, and the value indicating the "winning and replay condition device number" is stored in the A register.
Other than that, the specific contents of the processing in step S1222 are the same as in step S1112 in FIG.

Proceeding to step S1223, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the value stored in "_NB_CND_BNS" (storage area for the role product condition device number) of the RWM 53 is "0".
In other words, it is determined whether or not the current game is a game within the bonus.
When "0" is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS" of RWM 53, it is determined that the current game is a game during non-bonus, and when a value other than "0" is stored, the current game is determined. is determined to be a game within the bonus.

Further, the specific contents of the processing in step S1223 are the same as in step S1043 of FIG.
Then, in step S1223, when it is determined that the accessory condition device number is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1224.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1223 that the accessory condition device number is other than "0" (No), steps S1224 to S1226 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S1227.

Proceeding to step S1224, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the value stored in the "_NB_CND_AT" (storage area for the advantageous section number) of the RWM 53 is "0".
In other words, it is determined whether or not the current game is a normal section game.
In addition, when "0" is stored in "_NB_CND_AT" of RWM 53, it is determined that the current game is the game in the normal section, and when "1" is stored, the game this time is in the advantageous section 1. It is determined that it is a game, and when "2" is stored, it is determined that the current game is a game in the advantageous section 2. - 特許庁

Further, the specific contents of the processing in step S1224 are the same as in step S1044 of FIG.
Then, when it is determined in step S1224 that the advantageous section number is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1225.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1224 that the advantageous section number is other than "0" (No), step S1225 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1226.

After proceeding to step S1225, the main CPU 55 saves the advantageous section number.
Specifically, when the process proceeds to step S125, a value indicating the advantageous section number is stored in the B register.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the B register in the storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53 . This saves the advantageous section number.

After proceeding to step S1226, the main CPU 55 saves the accessory condition device number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1046, a value indicating the accessory condition device number is stored in the C register.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the C register in the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53 . As a result, the accessory condition device number is saved.

After proceeding to step S1227, the main CPU 55 saves the winning and replay condition device numbers.
Here, when "Yes" is determined in step S1221 and the process proceeds to step S1227, the value indicating the "winning number" is stored in the A register. Also, when "Yes" is determined in step S1221 (when the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number), as shown in FIG. stipulated in Therefore, when "Yes" is determined in step S1221 and the process proceeds to step S1227, the value of the A register indicates the "win and replay condition machine number".

Also, in step S1222, the value indicating the "win and replay condition device number" is stored in the A register. Therefore, even when proceeding to step S1227 through step S1222, the value of the A register indicates the "win and replay condition machine number".
Thus, at the time of proceeding to step S1227, the A register stores a value indicating the winning and replay condition device number.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the A register in the storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of the RWM 53 . This saves the winning and replay condition device numbers.

In this way, when the result of step S1221 is "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S1227, and when the result of step S1221 is "No" and the process proceeds to step S1222 via step S1222, the winning and replay condition machine numbers are determined. The process of storing in "_NB_CND_NOR" can be shared, and the usage of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

In the present embodiment, a lottery for transition from a normal section to an advantageous section has been described. Even if the A lottery may be performed and the value of "_NB_CND_AT" may be changed according to the result.

For example, under the condition that "1" is stored in "_NB_CND_AT" and the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" (storage area for accessory condition device number) is "0", a lottery for adding an advantageous section may be executed. .
In addition, under the condition that "1" is stored in "_NB_CND_AT" and the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is "0", a lottery regarding the addition of the advantageous section is executed, and according to the result, "2" is set in "_NB_CND_AT". You may perform control processing which memorize|stores.
In addition, when the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is "1" (so-called internal middle), the lottery for adding the advantageous section is not executed.

<Nineteenth Embodiment>
Next, a nineteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
FIG. 112(a) is a diagram showing the winning number definition (4) in this embodiment.
Here, the winning number definition (4) in FIG. 112(a) indicates the winning number definition for the winning numbers "31" to "36".
The winning number definitions for the winning numbers "1" to "30" are the same as the winning number definition (1) of the sixteenth embodiment shown in FIG. 74(a).

As shown in FIGS. 74(a) and 112(a), in this embodiment, winning numbers are determined from "1" to "36".
Also, as shown in FIG. 112(a), in this embodiment, the winning numbers "31" and "35" correspond to single winning of the accessory condition device, and the winning numbers "32" to "34" ” and “36” correspond to multiple wins of the accessory condition device and the winning and replay condition device.

FIG. 112(b) is a diagram showing data definitions for winning number conversion and advantageous section transition determination in this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 112(c), "@LOT_TRNS_AT1 EQU 167+@LOT_TRNS_AT2; advantageous section 1 transition determination random number" corresponds to "@LOT_TRNS_AT1" indicating "advantageous section 1 transition determination random number" and "@LOT_TRNS_AT1". It means that the value to be used is "167+@LOT_TRNS_AT2".
Also, "@LOT_TRNS_AT2"="178".
Therefore, "@LOT_TRNS_AT1"="167+178"="345".

As shown in FIG. 112(d), "@LOT_TRNS_AT2 EQU 178; advantageous section 2 transition determination random number" is a value corresponding to "@LOT_TRNS_AT2" indicating "advantageous section 2 transition determination random number" and "@LOT_TRNS_AT2". is "178". That is, "@LOT_TRNS_AT2"="178".
The advantageous section 1 transition determination random number and the advantageous section 2 transition determination random number are collectively referred to as "advantage section transition determination random number".

FIG. 113(a) is a diagram showing a winning number conversion table in this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 113(a), when the winning number determined by the winning number determination means is "31" to "36", the winning number conversion table corresponds to the determined winning number. It is used when determining the "accessory condition device number" and the "winning and replay condition device number".

As shown in FIG. 113(b), "DEFB @NB_1BBA, 0; winning number 31" stores "@NB_1BBA" at address ###0 (for example, address 1600 (H)), and address ###1. It means storing "0" in (for example, address 1601(H)). As shown in FIG. 112(b), "@NB_1BBA"="1". Therefore, "1" is stored in address ###0 and "0" is stored in address ###1.

i.e.
Address ###0 (1600 (H) address) 1: Accessory condition device number Address ###1 (1601 (H) address) 0: Winning and replay condition device number.
The data stored at addresses ###0 and ###1 are used when the winning number is determined to be "31".

As shown in FIG. 113(c), "DEFB @NB_1BBB, @NB_WIN_D
Winning number 32" stores "@NB_1BBB" at address ###2 (for example, address 1602(H)) and stores "@NB_WIN_D" at address ###3 (for example, address 1603(H)). means that As shown in FIG. 112(b), "@NB_1BBB"="2". Also, as shown in FIG. 74, “@NB_WIN_D”=“26”. Therefore, "2" is stored at address ###2 and "26" is stored at address ###3.

i.e.
Address ###2 (address 1602(H)) 2: Accessory condition device number Address ###3 (address 1603(H)) 26: Winning and replay condition device number.
The data stored at addresses ###2 and ###3 are used when the winning number is determined to be "32".

The winning number lottery data definition is the same as the winning number lottery data definition of the sixteenth embodiment shown in FIG. 78(a).
114, 115, and 116 are diagrams showing the lottery table common to all RTs in this embodiment.
FIG. 114 is a diagram showing an all-RT common lottery table (12). FIG. 115 is a diagram showing the lottery table common to all RTs (13), and is a diagram following FIG. Furthermore, FIG. 116 is a diagram showing an all-RT common lottery table (14), and is a diagram following FIG.
The non-RT lottery table, RT1 lottery table, RT2 lottery table, RT3 lottery table, RT4 lottery table, 1BBA lottery table, and 1BBB lottery table are the same as in the 16th embodiment.

Also, at non-RT time, RT 1 time, RT 2 time, RT 3 time, or RT 4 time, lottery determination is first performed using the all-RT common lottery table. Next, lottery determination is performed using a lottery table corresponding to RT, and when the winning number is determined to be a value other than "00 (H)", the internal lottery is terminated without using the lottery table corresponding to RT. are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
Further, lottery determination is performed using the lottery table for 1BBA during 1BBA, and determination is performed using the lottery table for 1BBB during 1BBB, as in the 16th embodiment.

FIG. 117(a) is a diagram showing an advantageous section transition determination random number table.
The advantageous interval transition determination random number table is used in the advantageous interval transition lottery shown in FIG. 121, which will be described later. In addition, "@LOT_TRNS_AT1" is defined as a criterion for determining winning in the advantageous section 1.
Then, when the random number value obtained from the random number generating means (counter) is smaller than "@LOT_TRNS_AT2" (= "178"), it is determined that winning is in the advantageous section 2, and from "@LOT_TRNS_AT1" (= "345") If it is smaller, it is determined that the advantageous section 1 is won.

Here, "DEFW" is an assembly language that means "reserve two 1-byte (8-bit) areas in the memory in order of address, store the lower 1 byte of the 2-byte data at the first address, and store the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte data in ".
As shown in FIG. 117(c), "DEFW @LOT_TRNS_AT2; advantageous section number 2" is stored at address ###0 (for example, address 1700(H)) with "@LOT_TRNS_AT2"(="178(D)"="00B2(H)"), and stores "00(H)", which is the upper 1 byte of "@LOT_TRNS_AT2", at address ###1 (for example, address 1701(H)). )” is stored.

As shown in FIG. 117(d), "DEFW @LOT_TRNS_AT1; advantageous section number 1" is stored at address ###2 (for example, address 1702(H)) with "@LOT_TRNS_AT1" (="345(D)"=" 0159 (H)”), and stores “01 (H)”, which is the upper 1 byte of “@LOT_TRNS_AT1” at address ###3 (for example, address 1703 (H)). )” is stored.

i.e.
Address ###0 (address 1700 (H)) B2 (H): Lower 1 byte Address ###1 (address 1701 (H)) 00 (H): Upper 1 byte Address ###2 (1702 (H) Address) 59 (H): Lower 1 byte Address ###3 (1703 (H) address) 01 (H): Upper 1 byte

FIG. 118 is a flow chart showing the flow of lottery processing for condition device numbers and the like in the nineteenth embodiment.
Steps S1001 to S1003 and step S1006 are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
Also, in this embodiment, in step S1003, when the blocker 45 is controlled so that the insertion of medals is not permitted, the process proceeds to step S1301.

Furthermore, when proceeding to step S1301, internal lottery 2 (FIG. 119) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1302.
Furthermore, when proceeding to step S1302, condition device number set 6 (FIG. 120) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1006.
When the process proceeds to step S1006, all the reels 31 start to rotate, and the rotating reels 31 can be stopped by operating the stop switch 42 by the player. Then, when all the reels 31 stop rotating, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

FIG. 119 is a flow chart showing the flow of internal lottery 2 processing.
Proceeding to internal lottery 2 in step S1301, first, in step S1311, the main CPU 55 saves the random number in "_BF_RAND" (random number buffer).
Here, "_BF_RAND" is a 2-byte storage area on the RWM 53 that stores random values.
Then, when proceeding to step S1301, the main CPU 55 first stores the random value stored in the random value register in the HL register, and then stores the random value stored in the HL register in the storage area "_BF_RAND" of the RWM 53. ”. This saves the random value in the random number buffer. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1312.

Proceeding to step S1312, the main CPU 55 stores the random number value.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 stores the random value stored in the HL register in the DE register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1313.
After proceeding to step S1313, the main CPU 55 sets a lottery table corresponding to the operating state of the role (when 1BBA is activated, when 1BBB is activated, or when the accessory is not activated).
Further, the specific contents of the processing in step S1313 are the same as in step S1012 in FIG. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1314.

After proceeding to step S1314, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not it is time to activate the accessory.
Further, the specific contents of the processing in step S1314 are the same as in step S1013 of FIG.
When it is determined that the accessory is activated (Yes), steps S1315 to S1317 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S1318.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the accessory is not activated (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1315.

After proceeding to step S1315, the main CPU 55 executes lottery determination (FIG. 88) using the lottery table set in step S1313. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1316.
After proceeding to step S1316, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the lottery has been won.

Further, the specific contents of the processing in step S1316 are the same as in step S1015 of FIG.
Then, when it is determined that the winning lottery has been won (Yes), steps S1317 and S1318 are skipped, and the processing according to this flowchart ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery has not been won (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1317.

In step S1317, the main CPU 55 sets a lottery table corresponding to the RT state (non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3 or RT4).
Further, the specific contents of the processing in step S1317 are the same as in step S1016 in FIG. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1318.
After proceeding to step S1318, the main CPU 55 executes lottery determination (FIG. 88) using the lottery table set in step S1313 or S1317. Specifically, lottery determination is performed using the lottery table set in step S1313 when the accessory is activated, and lottery determination is performed using the lottery table set in step S1317 when the accessory is not activated. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 120 is a flow chart showing the flow of processing for condition device number set 6 .
Proceeding to condition device number set 6 in step S1302, first, in step S1321, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number.
Further, the specific contents of the processing in step S1321 are the same as in step S1041 of FIG.

When it is determined in step S1321 that the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number (Yes), step S1322 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1323.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1321 that the winning number is equal to or greater than the conversion start number (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1322.
In step S1321, "31" is subtracted from the value of the A register (winning number) to determine whether or not a carry has occurred. That is, even after the subtraction, the value of the A register indicates the "winning number".

In step S1322, the main CPU 55 acquires the condition device number corresponding to the winning number from the winning number conversion table of FIG. 113(a).
Further, the specific contents of the processing in step S1322 are the same as in step S1222 of FIG. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1323.

After proceeding to step S1323, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not it is time to activate the accessory.
Further, the specific contents of the processing in step S1323 are the same as in step S1013 of FIG.
When it is determined that the accessory is activated (Yes), steps S1324 to S1327 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S1328.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the accessory is not activated (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1324.

In step S1324, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the value stored in "_NB_CND_BNS" (storage area for the role product condition device number) of the RWM 53 is "0".
In other words, it is determined whether or not the current game is a game within the bonus.
Further, the specific contents of the processing in step S1324 are the same as in step S1043 of FIG.

Then, when it is determined in step S1324 that "0" is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS" of the RWM 53 (Yes), it is determined that the current game is a game during the non-bonus period, and the process proceeds to the next step S1325. .
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1324 that a value other than "0" is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS" of the RWM 53 (No), it is determined that the current game is a game within the bonus, and step S1325. ˜S1327 are skipped and the process advances to step S1328.

In step S1325, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the value stored in the "_NB_CND_AT" (storage area for the advantageous section number) of the RWM 53 is "0".
In other words, it is determined whether or not the current game is a normal section game.
Further, the specific contents of the processing in step S1325 are the same as in step S1044 of FIG.

When it is determined in step S1325 that "0" is stored in "_NB_CND_AT" of the RWM 53 (Yes), it is determined that the current game is a normal section game, and the process proceeds to the next step S1326.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1325 that a value other than "0" is stored in "_NB_CND_AT" of RWM 53 (No), it is determined that the current game is a game in an advantageous section, and step S1326 is executed. Skip to step S1327.

After proceeding to step S1326, the main CPU 55 executes an advantageous zone transition lottery (FIG. 121). Then, when the advantageous section transition lottery is executed, the process proceeds to the next step S1327.
In step S1327, the main CPU 55 saves the accessory condition device number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1327, a value indicating the accessory condition device number is stored in the C register.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the C register in the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53 . As a result, the accessory condition device number is saved. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1328.

After proceeding to step S1328, the main CPU 55 saves the winning and replay condition device number.
Here, when "Yes" is determined in step S1321 and step S1322 is skipped to proceed to step S1328, the value indicating the "winning number" is stored in the A register. Also, when "Yes" is determined in step S1321 (when the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number), as shown in FIG. stipulated in Therefore, when the result is "Yes" in step S1321, skipping step S1322 and proceeding to step S1328, the value of the A register indicates the "win and replay condition machine number".

Further, when the result of step S1321 is "No" and the process proceeds to step S1322, the value indicating the "win and replay condition machine number" is stored in the A register. Therefore, when the result is "No" in step S1321 and the process proceeds to step S1328 via step S1322, the value of the A register indicates the "win and replay condition machine number".
Thus, at the time of proceeding to step S1328, the A register stores a value indicating the winning and replay condition device number.

Then, in step S1328, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the A register in the storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of the RWM 53. FIG. This saves the winning and replay condition device numbers.
In this way, when "Yes" is obtained in step S1321, skipping step S1322 and proceeding to step S1328, and when "No" is obtained in step S1321 and proceeding to step S1328 via step S1322, a prize is won. And the process of storing the replay condition device number in "_NB_CND_NOR" can be shared, and the usage of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 121 is a flow chart showing the flow of the advantageous section transition lottery process.
In addition, the advantageous section transition lottery uses a random value obtained from a random number generating means (counter), and "@LOT_TRNS_AT1" (advantageous section 1 transition determination random number) and "@LOT_TRNS_AT2" (advantageous section transition determination random number) defined in the advantageous section transition determination random number table 2 transition determination random number) to determine whether to transition to the advantageous section 1, to the advantageous section 2, or not to the advantageous section.

When proceeding to the advantageous section transition lottery in step S1326, first, in step S1331, the main CPU 55 sets the initial value of the number of determinations.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 stores "2" in the B register as the initial value of the determination count. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1332.
Proceeding to step S1332, the main CPU 55 sets the address of the advantageous section transition determination random number.

Specifically, the main CPU 55 stores the head address of "TBL_AT_RAND" (advantageous section transition determination random number table) in the HL register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1333.
In step S1333, the main CPU 55 obtains a random number value.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1333, the random number obtained from the random number generator (counter) is stored in the storage area "_BF_RAND" (random number buffer) of the RWM 53 . Then, the main CPU 55 stores the random value stored in "_BF_RAND" in the DE register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1334.

After proceeding to step S1334, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the acquired random number value is smaller than the advantageous section transition determination random number.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 subtracts the data (advantageous interval transition determination random number) corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register from the data (random number) of the DE register, and determines whether or not a carry has occurred due to the subtraction. do.

Here, when it is determined that a carry is generated by subtraction, it is determined that the random number is smaller than the advantageous section transition determination random number (Yes), steps S1335 to S1337 are skipped, and the process proceeds to step S1338.
On the other hand, when it is determined that no carry has occurred by subtraction, it is determined that the random number is equal to or greater than the advantageous section transition determination random number (No), and the process proceeds to the next step S1335.
In step S1334, it is determined whether or not a carry has occurred by subtracting the data (advantage section transition determination random number) corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register from the data (random number) of the DE register. However, the data in the DE register is maintained without being updated. That is, the data in the DE register still indicates a "random value" after the subtraction.

After proceeding to step S1335, the main CPU 55 updates the address of the advantageous section transition determination random number.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 repeats twice to add "1" to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register. That is, "2" is added to the value of the HL register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1336.
After proceeding to step S1336, the main CPU 55 updates the determination count.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 subtracts "1" from the value of the B register to obtain a new value of the B register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1337.

In step S1137, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not to end the determination.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 determines whether the value of the B register is "0".
When it is determined that the value of the B register is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1338.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the B register is not "0" (No), the process returns to step S1334.
As a result, in the first time, it is determined whether or not a carry has occurred by subtracting the advantageous section 2 transition determination random number from the random value, and in the second time, the advantageous section 1 transition determination random number is subtracted from the random value and the carry is determined. Determine whether it has occurred.

After proceeding to step S1338, the main CPU 55 saves the number of determinations as an advantageous section number.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the B register in the storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53 . This saves the advantageous section number.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

As described above, in this embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (not when the accessory is activated (“No” in step S1323 in FIG. 120) and not inside (“Yes” in step S1324) ) and when it is not an advantageous section ("Yes" in step S1325), an advantageous section transition lottery is executed (proceeds to step S1326).

In addition, in the advantageous section transition lottery, when the random number obtained from the random number generating means is smaller than "@LOT_TRNS_AT2" (advantageous section 2 transition determination random number = "178"), the advantageous section 2 is won (determined to transfer) ).
That is, when the random number value obtained from the random number generating means belongs to the range of "0" to "177", the advantageous section 2 is won.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 114, total "probability data" for "small win D condition device and advantageous section number 2 lottery data" to "1BBA + small win E1 condition device and advantageous section number 2 lottery data" Then, "30"+"125"+"10"+"3"+"10"="178".
Therefore, in the condition device lottery, when the random number value obtained from the random number generating means belongs to the range of "0" to "177", as shown in FIG. Single winning of E1 conditional device, single winning of 1BBA conditional device, double winning of 1BBA conditional device and small winning combination D conditional device, or double winning of 1BBA conditional device and small winning combination E1 conditional device.

In addition, in the advantageous section transition lottery, when the random number obtained from the random number generating means is smaller than "@LOT_TRNS_AT1" (advantageous section 1 transition determination random number = "345"), the advantageous section 1 is won (determined to transfer) ).
However, as described above, when the random number value obtained from the random number generating means belongs to the range of "0" to "177", the advantageous section 2 is won.
Therefore, when the random number value obtained from the random number generation means belongs to the range of "178" to "344", the advantageous section 1 is won.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 114, total "probability data" for "small win D condition device and advantageous section number 1 lottery data" to "1BBA + small win E1 condition device and advantageous section number 1 lottery data" Then, "20"+"125"+"10"+"2"+"10"="167".
Furthermore, the sum of the "probability data" from "small win D condition device and advantageous section number 2 lottery data" to "1BBA + small win E1 condition device and advantageous section number 2 lottery data" is "178". If "167" is added to , "345" is obtained.

Therefore, in the condition device lottery, when the random number value obtained from the random number generating means belongs to the range of "178" to "344", as shown in FIG. Single winning of E1 conditional device, single winning of 1BBA conditional device, double winning of 1BBA conditional device and small winning combination D conditional device, or double winning of 1BBA conditional device and small winning combination E1 conditional device.

In addition, the all-RT common lottery table is commonly used for non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, and RT4, and when this all-RT common lottery table is used, the minor combination D condition device Single winning, single winning of small combination E1 condition device, single winning of 1BBA condition device, double winning of 1BBA condition device and small combination D condition device, or double winning of 1BBA condition device and small combination E1 condition device.
Therefore, in this embodiment, although there are non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, and RT4 with different winning probabilities of the replay condition device, the random number obtained from the random number generation means is within the range of "0" to "344". The conditional device that wins when it belongs is the same whether it is non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, or RT4.

In the present embodiment, a lottery for transition from a normal section to an advantageous section has been described. Even if the A lottery may be performed and the value of "_NB_CND_AT" may be changed according to the result.

For example, under the condition that "1" is stored in "_NB_CND_AT" and the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" (storage area for accessory condition device number) is "0", a lottery for adding an advantageous section may be executed. .
In addition, under the condition that "1" is stored in "_NB_CND_AT" and the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is "0", a lottery regarding the addition of the advantageous section is executed, and according to the result, "2" is set in "_NB_CND_AT". You may perform control processing which memorize|stores.
In addition, when the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is "1" (so-called internal middle), the lottery for adding the advantageous section is not executed.

<Modification of 19th Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the nineteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
The modification of the nineteenth embodiment differs from the nineteenth embodiment in the processing of the condition device number set.
In the processing of the conditional device number set 6 of the 19th embodiment, an advantageous interval transition lottery is performed, the advantageous interval number is stored in "_NB_CND_AT", and then the accessory conditional device number is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS", and a prize is won. And the replay condition device number is stored in "_NB_CND_NOR".

On the other hand, in the condition device number set 7 of the modified example of the 19th embodiment, the role product condition device number is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS", and the winning and replay condition device number is stored in "_NB_CND_NOR", and then, An advantageous section transition lottery is performed and the advantageous section number is stored in "_NB_CND_AT".

FIG. 122 is a flow chart showing the flow of lottery processing for condition device numbers and the like in the modification of the nineteenth embodiment.
Steps S1001 to S1003 and step S1006 are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
Further, step S1301 is the same as in the nineteenth embodiment, and step S1052 is the same as in the modification of the sixteenth embodiment.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the internal lottery 2 is executed in step S1301, the process proceeds to step S1341.
Then, in step S1341, condition device number set 7 (FIG. 123) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1006.

FIG. 123 is a flow chart showing the flow of processing for condition device number set 7 .
Proceeding to condition device number set 7 in step S1341, first, in step S1351, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number.
Further, the specific contents of the processing in step S1351 are the same as in step S1041 of FIG.

When it is determined in step S1351 that the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number (Yes), steps S1352 to S1354 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S1355.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1351 that the winning number is equal to or greater than the conversion start number (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1352.
In step S1351, "31" is subtracted from the value of the A register (winning number) to determine whether or not a carry has occurred. That is, even after the subtraction, the value of the A register indicates the "winning number".

When proceeding to step S1352, the main CPU 55 acquires the condition device number corresponding to the winning number from the winning number conversion table of FIG. 113(a).
Further, the specific contents of the processing in step S1352 are the same as in step S1222 of FIG. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1323.

In step S1353, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the accessory condition device number is "0".
Further, the specific contents of the processing in step S1353 are the same as in step S1043 of FIG.
Then, in step S1353, when it is determined that the accessory condition device number is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1354.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1353 that the accessory condition device number is other than "0" (No), step S1354 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1355.

In step S1354, the main CPU 55 saves the accessory condition device number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1354, a value indicating the accessory condition device number is stored in the C register.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the C register in the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53 . As a result, the accessory condition device number is saved. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1355.

After proceeding to step S1355, the main CPU 55 saves the winning and replay condition device numbers.
Here, when the result of step S1351 is "Yes" and step S1352 is skipped to proceed to step S1355, the value indicating the "winning number" is stored in the A register. Also, when "Yes" is determined in step S1351 (when the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number), as shown in FIG. stipulated in Therefore, when the result is "Yes" in step S1351, skipping step S1352 and proceeding to step S1355, the value of the A register indicates the "win and replay condition machine number".

Further, when "No" is determined in step S1351 and the process proceeds to step S1352, a value indicating "win and replay condition device number" is stored in the A register. Therefore, when the result is "No" in step S1351 and the process proceeds to step S1355 via step S1352, the value of the A register indicates the "win and replay condition machine number".
Thus, at the time of proceeding to step S1355, the A register stores a value indicating the winning and replay condition device number.

Then, in step S1355, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the A register in the storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of the RWM 53. FIG. This saves the winning and replay condition device numbers.
In this way, when the result of step S1351 is "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S1355, and when the result of step S1351 is "No" and the process proceeds to step S1352 via step S1352, the winning and replay condition machine numbers are determined. The process of storing in "_NB_CND_NOR" can be shared, and the usage of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

Proceeding to step S1356, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not it is time to activate the accessory.
Further, the specific contents of the processing in step S1356 are the same as in step S1013 of FIG.
When it is determined that it is not the time when the accessory is activated (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1357.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the accessory is activated (Yes), steps S1357 to S1326 are skipped and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

Proceeding to step S1357, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the internal flag is on.
The specific contents of the processing in step S1357 are the same as in step S1078 in FIG.
Then, when it is determined that the internal flag is off (No) in step S1357, the process proceeds to the next step S1358.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1357 that the internal flag is ON (Yes), steps S1358 and S1326 are skipped, and the processing according to this flowchart ends.

Proceeding to step S1358, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the advantageous section number is "0".
The specific contents of the processing in step S1358 are the same as in step S1044 of FIG.
When it is determined in step S1358 that the advantageous section number is "0" (Yes), the process advances to the advantageous section transition lottery (FIG. 121) in step S1326.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1358 that the advantageous section number is other than "0" (No), the advantageous section transition lottery (FIG. 121) in step S1326 is skipped, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. .

After proceeding to step S1326, the main CPU 55 executes an advantageous zone transition lottery (FIG. 121). Then, when the advantageous section transition lottery ends, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
It should be noted that the content of the advantageous section transition lottery process in step S1326 is the same as in the nineteenth embodiment.

Here, in the condition device number set 7, when the winning numbers determined by the internal lottery 2 and the lottery determination are numbers "31" to "36", the winning of the accessory condition device is achieved.
In this case, when the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is "0"("Yes" in step S1353), the role condition device number is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS" (step S1354), and the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is "0"("No" in step S1353), the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is maintained (step S1354 is skipped).

In addition, in the condition device number set 7, when the role product is activated (the value of "_FL_ACTION" is not "0"), the internal medium flag is on (the value of "_FL_PRD_LOT" is "FF (H)" Yes), and when the advantageous section number is not "0" (the value of "_NB_CND_AT" is not "0"), the advantageous section transition lottery is not executed (step S1326 is skipped).
Then, when the role is not in operation (the value of "_FL_ACTION" is "0"), the internal flag is off (the value of "_FL_PRD_LOT" is "0"), and the advantageous section number is When it is "0" (the value of "_NB_CND_AT" is "0"), an advantageous section transition lottery is executed (proceeds to step S1326).
As a result, the processing related to the advantageous section transition lottery can be executed without requiring complicated processing.

In addition, in the condition device number set 7, when the winning numbers determined by the internal lottery 2 and the lottery judgment are the numbers "31" to "36" that win the role condition device, the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is "0"("Yes" in step S1353), the accessory condition device number is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS" (step S1354), and then the advantageous section transition lottery is executed (step S1326).
Therefore, in the condition device number set 7, even if it is determined whether or not the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is "0" in the step before executing the advantageous section transition lottery, the accessory condition device is won in the game this time. It is not possible to judge whether the player has won the accessory condition device before the previous game.

Therefore, in the condition device number set 7, in step S1357 before executing the advantageous section transition lottery, it is determined whether or not the internal middle flag is on, so that whether the accessory condition device was won in the game this time or the last time It is determined whether or not the accessory condition device is won before the game.
Then, when the internal medium flag is off, it is determined that the accessory condition device has been won in the game this time, and the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed (step S1326).

In addition, in the condition device number set 7, in step S1352, the value indicating the "accessory condition device number" is stored in the C register, and the value indicating the "winning and replay condition device number" is stored in the A register. After that, in step S1354, the value of the C register (role condition device number) is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS", and in step S1355, the value of the A register (winning and replay condition device number) is stored in "_NB_CND_NOR".

Therefore, even if the value of the C register is destroyed after step S1354, the accessory condition device number will not be lost. Conditional device numbers are never lost.
Therefore, in condition unit number set 7, the C register can be used for other processing after step S1354, and the A register can be used for other processing after step S1355. can.
In addition, as another process, for example, an AT (instructed game section) in the advantageous section can be added to the lottery.

In the condition device number set 7, it is determined whether or not the internal medium flag is turned on in step S1357 to determine whether the accessory condition device has been won in the current game or whether the accessory condition device has been won in the previous game. decided whether it did.
However, not limited to this, for example, in step S1357, by determining whether or not it is RT4 corresponding to the inside, it is determined whether the accessory condition device was won in the game this time, or whether the accessory condition device was used before the previous game. You can decide if you won.

Furthermore, in the condition device number set 7, it is when the accessory is not in operation ("No" in step S1356), the internal medium flag is off ("No" in step S1357), and the advantageous section number is "0 ("Yes" in step S1358), the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed (step S1326).
However, not limited to this, for example, when the accessory is activated, when the internal medium flag is ON, and when the advantageous interval number is not "0", the advantageous interval transition lottery may be executed. In this case, even if the advantageous section transition lottery is executed, the advantageous section number is maintained by skipping step S1338 in FIG. 121 (the value of "_NB_CND_AT" is maintained).

Although the 16th to 19th embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the 16th to 19th embodiments, two types of advantageous section 1 and advantageous section 2 are provided as advantageous sections. Also, in the normal section, it was determined whether to shift to the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2. Then, when the advantageous section 1 is won (decided to shift), the game state is shifted to a fake game state that does not have the right to shift to ART. Omen) was transferred to ART. However, it is not limited to this.

For example, only one type of advantageous section may be provided, and in the normal section, it may be determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section.
Then, when the advantageous section is elected (decided to shift), it may be uniformly shifted to the advantageous section of 1500 games, which is the upper limit.
In this case, the value of "_NB_CND_AT" is, for example, "00000000 (B)" in a normal section and "00000001 (B)" in an advantageous section. Thereby, whether it is a normal section or an advantageous section can be managed with 1-bit data.

Furthermore, in the game of the advantageous section, the conditions for falling to the normal section (for example, the number of times the ART execution game has reached a specific value, the fall lottery has been won, the predetermined number of games have been executed, etc.) are met. You may make it transfer to a normal area when it is.
Further, for example, three types of advantageous sections 1 to 3 may be provided as advantageous sections, and in the normal section, it may be determined which of the advantageous sections 1 to 3 to shift to. Then, when the advantageous section 1 is won, it is shifted to the advantageous section of 500 games, when the advantageous section 2 is won, it is shifted to the advantageous section of 1000 games, and when the advantageous section 3 is won, it is shifted to the advantageous section of 1500 games. good too.

(2) In the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, it is determined whether or not to add the number of games played in the advantageous section. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, when ART is executed during the advantageous section, when the winning number corresponding to the addition of the advantageous section is determined, the number of games in which ART can be executed during the advantageous section is increased uniformly or by lottery. You may let

Also, for example, when a fake game (a game state in which the advantageous interval display LED 77 is lit although it does not have the right to shift to ART) is being executed during the advantageous interval, the winning corresponding to the addition of the advantageous interval When the number is determined, the right to transfer to ART may be granted uniformly or by lottery.
Thus, instead of increasing the number of games played in the advantageous section, the game state (performance of the advantageous section) in the advantageous section may be changed to be advantageous to the player.

(3) In the normal section, when winning (determined to shift) to the advantageous section, the next game may be shifted to the advantageous section, or the next game may be shifted to the waiting section, and then the waiting section You may shift from to the advantageous section.
That is, in the 16th to 19th embodiments, "winning in the advantageous section" is not limited to shifting from the next game to the advantageous section, but from the next game to the waiting section, and then from the waiting section It is a concept that includes moving to an advantageous section.
Also, when shifting from a normal section to a waiting section, information indicating that it is a waiting section is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53, and when shifting from a waiting section to an advantageous section, information indicating that it is an advantageous section. may be stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 .

(4) In the 16th to 19th embodiments, when the value of bit 2 of "_FL_ACTION" is "1", it indicates that the character is in operation, and when it is "0", it indicates that the character is not in operation. showed that
Further, when the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is "0", it indicates that the prize condition device is not won, and when it is other than "0", it indicates that the prize condition device is won.
Furthermore, when the value of "_NB_CND_AT" is "0", it indicates that the advantageous section has not been won (decided to shift), and when it is "1", it indicates that the advantageous section 1 has been won. , "2" indicates that the advantageous section 2 is won.

Further, when the value of "_FL_PRD_LOT" is "FF(H)", it indicates that the internal medium flag is on, and when it is "0", it indicates that the internal medium flag is off.
However, the value of "1"/"0" of bit 2 of "_FL_ACTION" can be set as appropriate to indicate when the role product is active/when the role product is not in operation.
Similarly, winning/non-winning of the accessory condition device, winning/non-winning of the advantageous section, and ON/OFF of the internal middle flag can be appropriately set without being limited to the above mode.

(5) In the 16th to 19th embodiments, a 1-byte storage area on the RWM 53 is secured as "_NB_CND_AT". However, the storage area for storing the advantageous section number is not limited to a 1-byte storage area.
As described above, for example, only one type of advantageous section can be set, and in a normal section, it can be determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section. In this case, a specific bit (for example, bit 0) of the 1-byte storage area on the RWM 53 can be used as a storage area for storing the advantageous section number. That is, the 1-bit storage area may be used as a storage area for storing an advantageous section number or information indicating that the current game section is an advantageous section.

Similarly, "_NB_CND_BNS" is not limited to a 1-byte storage area.
For example, of the 1-byte storage area on the RWM 53, a specific bit (for example, bit 0) is used as a storage area for storing the advantageous section number, and a predetermined bit (for example, bit 1) is used as a storage area for storing the role condition device number. can be a region.
This makes it possible to reduce the usage of the RWM 53 by the program.

(6) In the 16th embodiment, when it is determined in step S1043 of FIG. 89 that a value other than "0" is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS", steps S1044 to S1046 are skipped so that "_NB_CND_BNS" value and the value of "_NB_CND_AT". However, it is not limited to this.

For example, when "_NB_CND_BNS" stores "00000001 (B)" and "_NB_CND_AT" stores "00000001 (B)", "_NB_CND_BNS" is overwritten with "00000001 (B)", and The value of "_NB_CND_BNS" and the value of "_NB_CND_AT" may be maintained by overwriting "_NB_CND_AT" with "00000001(B)".
Thus, in the 16th to 19th embodiments, when maintaining the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" and the value of "_NB_CND_AT", the same value is overwritten not only by skipping (not updating). may be maintained by

(7) In the sixteenth embodiment, winning numbers are determined as shown in FIGS. 74(a) and 75(a). In the seventeenth embodiment, winning numbers are determined as shown in FIGS. 74(a) and 93(a). Furthermore, in the eighteenth embodiment, winning numbers are determined as shown in FIGS. 74(a) and 112(a). These have the following regularity, and thereby have the following effects.

A. As shown in FIG. 74(a), for the winning numbers less than "31", the "winning number" and the "winning and replay condition device number" are determined to match. 30" number is determined to be continuous.

In this way, for winning numbers less than a specific value (for example, "31"), by setting the "winning number" and the "winning and replay condition device number" When it is determined that the number is less than a specific value, the "winning number" determined by the lottery determination can be stored in a predetermined storage area ("_NB_CND_NOR") of the RWM 53 as the "winning and replay condition device number". .
Therefore, it is possible to simplify the process of storing the "win and replay condition device number" in "_NB_CND_NOR", so that the usage of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

B. As shown in FIG. 74(a), for the winning numbers less than "31", the "winning number" and the "winning and replay condition device number" are determined to match. As shown, for the winning numbers of "31" and above, the lottery results include the accessory condition device (single winning of the accessory condition device, or double winning of the accessory condition device and the winning and replay condition device ) is defined.
In this way, for winning numbers less than a specific value (for example, "31"), the "winning number" and the "winning and replay condition device number" are determined to match. A lottery result including the accessory condition device can be determined.

In this case, it is determined whether or not the winning number determined by lottery determination is less than a specific value.
When it is determined that the value is less than the specific value, the "winning number" determined by the lottery determination is stored in a predetermined storage area ("_NB_CND_NOR") of the RWM 53 as the "winning and replay condition device number".
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is equal to or greater than the specific value, for example, using the "winning number conversion table" shown in FIG. "Device number" and "Winning and replay condition device number" are obtained. Then, the acquired "character condition device number" is stored in a specific storage area ("_NB_CND_BNS") of the RWM 53, and the acquired "prize and replay condition device number" is stored in a predetermined storage area ("_NB_CND_NOR") of the RWM 53. ).

In this way, the winning numbers that match the prize winning and replay condition device numbers and the winning numbers that result in the lottery result including the accessory condition device are separately determined based on the specific value, so that the winning numbers equal to or greater than the specific value Only the winning number conversion table needs to be determined, so the usage of the ROM 54 by the winning number conversion table can be reduced.
Further, by judging whether or not the winning number determined by the lottery determination is less than a specific value, it is possible to determine whether or not the winning number requires the winning number conversion table. can be simplified, the amount of ROM 54 used by the program can be reduced.

Furthermore, by lottery determination, by determining one winning number based on one random number, a lottery result of winning a prize and a single winning of the replay condition device, a lottery result of single winning of the accessory condition device, and It is possible to obtain a lottery result of double winning of the accessory condition device and the winning and replay condition device. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the lottery determination process (the process of determining a winning number from a random number), so that the usage of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

C. As shown in FIG. 75(a), the winning numbers "34" to "42" are determined so as to be able to execute the process of adding the advantageous section.
In addition, in FIG. 75(a), for the winning numbers "43" to "52", it is determined so that the processing related to the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section (advantageous section 1 or advantageous section 2) can be executed. However, it is also possible to set it so that when the winning number is determined to be "43" to "52" in the advantageous section, the process for adding the advantageous section can be executed.

In addition, adding to the advantageous section means adding (adding, increasing) the number of games played in the advantageous section. increase), and when a fake game (a game state in which the advantageous interval display LED 77 is lit although there is no right to shift to ART) is being executed during the advantageous interval, transition to ART during the advantageous interval It is a concept that includes making

In this way, it is possible to execute the processing related to the addition of the advantageous section for winning numbers of a predetermined value (for example, "34") or more. When it is determined that there is, it is possible to execute a process related to adding an advantageous section.
Therefore, by judging whether or not the winning number determined by the lottery judgment is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, it is possible to judge whether or not to execute processing relating to the addition of the advantageous section, thereby simplifying the program. Therefore, the usage of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

D. As shown in FIG. 75(a), for the winning numbers "43" to "52", it is determined to be able to execute the processing related to the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section (advantageous section 1 or advantageous section 2). ing.
Also, if you win the advantageous section 1 (decide to move), you will move to a fake game state that does not have the right to move to ART, and if you win the advantageous section 2, you will be able to move to the ART state (ART Omen) to transition to ART.

In this way, for winning numbers equal to or greater than a specified value (for example, "43"), it is possible to execute the processing related to the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section. When it is determined that the value is equal to or greater than the specified value, it is possible to execute processing relating to the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section.
Therefore, by determining whether or not the winning number determined by the lottery determination is equal to or greater than the specified value, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the processing related to the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section. Since the program can be simplified, the amount of ROM 54 used by the program can be reduced.

(8) In the 16th to 19th embodiments, first, all RT common lottery tables (for example, FIGS. Lottery determination was performed using FIG. 82(a)). Then, when the winning number was determined to be "00(H)" by lottery determination using the all-RT common lottery table, lottery determination was then performed using the lottery table corresponding to the RT state.

Specifically, at non-RT, lottery determination is performed using the non-RT lottery table (Fig. 82 (b)), and at RT1, lottery determination is performed using the RT1 lottery table (Fig. 82 (c)). rice field.
Also, at RT2, lottery determination is performed using the RT2 lottery table (Fig. 83 (a)), at RT3, lottery determination is performed using the RT3 lottery table (Fig. 83 (b)), and at RT4, RT4 Lottery determination was performed using the time lottery table (FIG. 84(a)).

In this respect, for example, a lottery address table by RT status (TBL_LOT_RTTBL) as shown below is provided, and using this table of lottery address by RT status, the head address of the lottery table corresponding to the RT status is calculated (specified). be able to.
TBL_LOT_RTTBL:
Lottery table at non-RT time DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT1 - $ ; Lottery table at RT1 time DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT2 - $ ; Lottery table at RT2 time DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT3 - $ ; Lottery table at RT3 time DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT4 - $

Here, the lottery address table by RT state can be stored in the ROM 54 of the main control board 50, for example.
"TBL_LOTDAT_RT0" indicates the top address of the non-RT time lottery table, and "TBL_LOTDAT_RT1" indicates the top address of the RT1 time lottery table.
Similarly, "TBL_LOTDAT_RT2" indicates the head address of the RT2 lottery table, "TBL_LOTDAT_RT3" indicates the head address of the RT3 lottery table, and "TBL_LOTDAT_RT4" indicates the head address of the RT4 lottery table.

Also, "$" indicates the current address.
Therefore, "TBL_LOTDAT_RT0-$" indicates the difference (number of data, number of bytes) from the current address to the head address of the non-RT lottery table.
Similarly, "TBL_LOTDAT_RT1-$" indicates the difference from the current address to the top address of the RT1 lottery table, and "TBL_LOTDAT_RT2-$" indicates the difference from the current address to the top address of the RT2 lottery table. .
"TBL_LOTDAT_RT3-$" indicates the difference from the current address to the head address of the RT3 o'clock lottery table, and "TBL_LOTDAT_RT4-$" indicates the difference from the current address to the head address of the RT4 o'clock lottery table.

Also, information about the RT state can be stored, for example, in a predetermined storage area (RT state data storage area “_NB_RT”) of the RWM 53 .
Furthermore, as information about the RT state, one of "0" to "4" is stored in "_NB_RT".
Specifically, "0" is stored in "_NB_RT" at non-RT time, and "1" is stored in "_NB_RT" at RT1 time.
Also, "2" is stored in "_NB_RT" at RT2, "3" is stored in "_NB_RT" at RT3, and "4" is stored in "_NB_RT" at RT4.

Calculation (designation) of the head address of the lottery table according to the RT state can be performed as follows.
First, "TBL_LOT_RTTBL" is stored in the HL register. As a result, the head address of the lottery address table classified by RT status is stored in the HL register.
Next, store the value of "_NB_RT" in the A register. As a result, a value indicating the RT state is stored in the A register.

Next, the value of the A register (the value indicating the RT state) is added to the value of the HL register (the leading address of the lottery address table classified by RT state) to obtain a new value of the HL register. As a result, the HL register stores the address of the "addressing data" corresponding to the RT state.
Here, the "address designation data" is data stored in the lottery address table by RT state, and is data for calculating (designating) the top address of the lottery table for non-RT to the lottery table for RT4. .
Specifically, "TBL_LOTDAT_RT0-$" is address designation data for calculating (designating) the head address of the non-RT lottery table.

Similarly, "TBL_LOTDAT_RT1-$" is address specifying data for calculating (designating) the head address of the lottery table at RT1, and "TBL_LOTDAT_RT2-$" is calculating (designating) the head address of the lottery table at RT2. This is addressing data for
"TBL_LOTDAT_RT3-$" is address specifying data for calculating (designating) the head address of the RT3 lottery table, and "TBL_LOTDAT_RT4-$" is used to calculate (designate) the head address of the RT4 lottery table. addressing data for

Next, data (addressing data) corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is stored in the A register. As a result, the "addressing data" corresponding to the RT state is stored in the A register.
Next, the value of the A register is added to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register. As a result, the head address of the lottery table corresponding to the RT state is stored in the HL register.

Here, it is assumed that the head address of the lottery address table by RT state (TBL_LOT_RTTBL) is "1500 (H)". In this case, the address of "DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT0-$; lottery table for non-RT" is also "1500 (H)".
Further, the address of "DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT1-$; RT1 o'clock lottery table" is set to "1501(H)", and the address of "DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT2-$; RT2 o'clock lottery table" is set to "1502(H)".
Furthermore, the address of "DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT3-$;RT3 o'clock lottery table" is set to "1503 (H)" and "DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT4
- $ ; RT 4 o'clock lottery table" address is set to "1504 (H)".

Also, the start address of the non-RT lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_RT0) is set to "1505 (H)".
In this case, as shown in FIG. 82(b), since 5-byte data is stored in the non-RT lottery table, the start address of the RT1 lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_RT1) is "1505 (H)". + "5 (H)" = "150A (H)".
Further, as shown in FIG. 82(c), 9-byte data is stored in the RT1 lottery table. Therefore, the head address of the lottery table at RT2 (TBL_LOTDAT_RT2) is "150A(H)"+"9(H)"="1513(H)".

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 83(a), 9-byte data is stored in the RT2 lottery table. Therefore, the top address of the RT3 time lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_RT3) is "1513(H)"+"9(H)"="151C(H)".
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 83(b), 10 bytes of data are stored in the RT3 time lottery table. Therefore, the top address of the RT4 lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_RT4) is "151C(H)"+"A(H)"="1526(H)".

Calculation (designation) of the head address of the lottery table according to the RT state will be described in more detail below, taking RT3 o'clock as an example.
First, the head address of "TBL_LOT_RTTBL"="1500 (H)" is stored in the HL register.
Next, the value of "_NB_RT"="3(H)" is stored in the A register.
Next, the A register value "3 (H)" is added to the HL register value "1500 (H)" to obtain a new HL register value "1503 (H)".

Next, "TBL_LOTDAT_RT3-$" corresponding to the value "1503(H)" of the HL register is stored in the A register.
Here, "TBL_LOTDAT_RT3"="151C(H)".
Also, when the value of the HL register is "1503(H)", "$"="1503(H)".
Therefore, the value stored at the address corresponding to the value "1503(H)" of the HL register is "19(H)"(="151C(H)"-"1503(H)")."19(H)" is the value of the A register.

Next, the value "19 (H)" of the A register is added to the value "1503 (H)" of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register.
Here, "1503(H)"+"19(H)"="151C(H)".
Therefore, the new HL register value is "151C(H)".
The HL register value "151C(H)" indicates the top address of the RT3 lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_RT3).
In this way, the top address of the lottery table corresponding to the RT state can be calculated (designated) based on the value of the RT state-specific lottery address table (TBL_LOT_RTTBL) and the RT state data storage area "_NB_RT".

In addition, the lottery address table by RT state defines which of the lottery tables (non-RT lottery table to RT 4 o'clock lottery table) according to the RT state. "Address designation data" for calculating (designating) the top address of the lottery table is defined.
For this reason, the lottery address table by RT state is sometimes called an "address designation data selection table" or an "address designation data table".

The two-stage lottery address table of the seventeenth embodiment determines which one of the two-stage lottery tables 1 to 5 is to be used, and calculates (specifies) the head address of the two-stage lottery tables 1 to 5. It defines "addressing data" for
For this reason, the two-step lottery address table may also be referred to as an "address designation data selection table" or an "address designation data table" in the same way as the RT state-specific lottery address table.

It is also possible to specify the top address of the lottery table according to the RT state from the value indicating the RT state without using the RT state-based lottery address table.
However, in this case, first, it is determined whether or not the value indicating the RT state is "0". is specified, and if it is determined that it is not "0", then it is determined whether or not the value indicating the RT state is "1".

When it is judged that the value indicating the RT state is "1", "150A (H)", which is the top address of the RT1 time lottery table, is designated. , determines whether the value indicating the RT state is "2".
Furthermore, when it is judged that the value indicating the RT state is "2", "1513 (H)" which is the head address of the RT2 time lottery table is designated, and when it is judged that it is not "2", the next First, it is determined whether the value indicating the RT state is "3".

Furthermore, when it is judged that the value indicating the RT state is "3", "151C (H)" which is the head address of the RT3 hour lottery table is designated, and when it is judged that it is not "3", the RT4 hour Designate "1526 (H)" which is the top address of the lottery table.
Since such processing is performed, the processing until the start address of the lottery table corresponding to the RT state is specified becomes long.
Also, a program for designating the leading address of the lottery table corresponding to the RT state is required.

On the other hand, if the head address of the lottery table corresponding to the RT state is designated using the lottery address table classified by RT state, the processing until the head address of the lottery table corresponding to the RT state is designated can be shortened. In addition, since there is no need to define a program for designating the top address of the lottery table according to the RT state, the usage of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

(9) In the 16th to 19th embodiments, first, all RT common lottery tables (for example, FIGS. Lottery determination was performed using FIG. 82(a)). Then, when the winning number was determined to be "00(H)" by lottery determination using the all-RT common lottery table, lottery determination was then performed using the lottery table corresponding to the RT state. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, the lottery determination may be performed using a lottery table corresponding to the RT state, except when 1BB is activated. Then, when the winning number is determined to be "00 (H)" by lottery determination using a lottery table corresponding to the RT state, then lottery determination may be performed using the all-RT common lottery table. .

(10) In the 16th to 19th embodiments, when "0" is stored in "_NB_CND_AT" (advantageous section number storage area) at the start of the current game, a lottery for transition from the normal section to the advantageous section When winning (determined to move to the advantageous section), a value other than "0" was stored in "_NB_CND_AT". That is, the value of "_NB_CND_AT" is updated. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, even if a value other than "0" is stored in "_NB_CND_AT" at the start of the game this time, the advantageous section is added (the performance is changed so that the game state in the advantageous section is advantageous to the player, or (including increasing the number of AT games played during the advantageous interval) may be executed, and the value of "_NB_CND_AT" may be changed according to the result.

For example, under the condition that "1" is stored in "_NB_CND_AT" and the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" (storage area for accessory condition device number) is "0", a lottery for adding an advantageous section may be executed. .
In addition, under the condition that "1" is stored in "_NB_CND_AT" and the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is "0", a lottery regarding the addition of the advantageous section is executed, and according to the result, "2" is set in "_NB_CND_AT". You may perform control processing which memorize|stores.
In addition, when the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is "1" (so-called internal middle), the lottery for adding the advantageous section is not executed.

(11) For example, as shown in FIG. 79, in the 16th to 19th embodiments, the lottery data for the accessory condition device (1BBA, 1BBB, etc.) is defined in the lottery table common to all RTs.
However, not limited to this, the lottery data related to the accessory condition device may be defined only in the lottery table corresponding to the RT state, not in the all-RT common lottery table.
More specifically, since the RT 4 o'clock lottery table is a lottery table used in RT 4 (inside), the lottery data related to the accessory condition device is not defined in the all RT common lottery table and the RT 4 o'clock lottery table. It may be determined only in the RT1 time lottery table, the RT2 time lottery table, and the RT3 time lottery table.

(12) For example, when the probability data differs for each set value, it is preferable to align the number of bytes of each probability data.
For example, in the lottery table (1) common to all RTs in FIG. 79, the probability data differs for each set value in the 1BBA+small combination E2 condition device lottery data. Each probability data is set to 1 byte.
In addition, in the data for the minor combination A condition device lottery in the all RT common lottery table (3) in FIG. 81, the probability data differs for each set value. Each probability data is set to 2 bytes.

In this way, when probability data differs for each set value, each probability data is set to 1 byte or 2 bytes, and 1-byte probability data and 2-byte probability data are mixed. Do not set to
As a result, the lottery determination process can be simplified, so that the usage of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

(13) In the 16th to 19th embodiments, the range of "0" to "65535" is defined as one cycle, and a counter that performs one count in 200n (nano) seconds is provided, and the count value of this counter is used as a random value. .
However, not limited to this, for example, a value obtained by calculating (for example, adding or subtracting) a predetermined value (for example, another random value or a specific value) from the count value obtained from the counter may be used as the random value. good.

(14) In the 16th to 19th embodiments, the carry flag is turned on ("1") by storing the random value in a predetermined register and subtracting the probability data from the value of the predetermined register ( A carry occurred), and when the carry flag was turned on, it was determined that the winning was won.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a random value may be stored in a predetermined register and probability data may be added to the value of the predetermined register to determine whether or not the carry flag is turned on. good.

Then, when the carry flag is turned on, it is determined that the prize is won.
On the other hand, when the carry flag is not turned on, the value obtained by adding the probability data to the value of the predetermined register is stored as a new value of the predetermined register. That is, it updates the value of a predetermined register. Then, by adding new probability data to the value of the updated predetermined register, it is determined whether or not the carry flag is turned on, and this process is repeated until the carry flag is turned on.
As described above, judging whether or not a prize is won based on the value stored in a predetermined register and the probability data is sometimes referred to as a comparison operation.

(15) How to determine the winning number, how to determine the conditional device number, correspondence between the winning number and the conditional device number, correspondence between the conditional device number and the conditional device (winning combination) shown in the 16th to 19th embodiments Relationship, type of conditional device (winning hand) corresponding to the winning number, correspondence between the winning number and probability data, probability data of winning (determined to move) in the advantageous section, winning (moving to the advantageous section) Winning numbers that will be decided on), winning numbers that will be won (determined to be added) on top of the advantageous section, etc. are only examples, and can be set as appropriate according to the game content.
For example, when winning the 1BBA condition device, there is a 100% chance of winning the advantageous section (determined to move), etc. When winning a predetermined winning number, the winning section has a 100% probability of winning. As such, probability data and the like can be defined.

(16) In the flowcharts shown in the 16th to 19th embodiments, the order of processing is not limited to the order shown in the drawings, and if the order of processing can be changed, the order of processing can be changed. is also possible.
(17) In the 16th to 19th embodiments, the lottery related to the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section was described, but the lottery other than the lottery related to the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section (for example, the role lottery, the condition device lottery, AT lottery, and RT transfer lottery).
(18) In the 16th to 19th embodiments, the slot machine 10 was used as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to pinball gaming machines, enclosed gaming machines, and the like.
(19) The 16th to 19th embodiments and various modifications described above are not limited to being implemented independently, and can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

<Twentieth Embodiment>
Next, twentieth to twenty-fourth embodiments of the present invention will be described.
The twentieth to twenty-fourth embodiments relate to lighting control of LEDs such as the management information display LED 74 .
FIG. 124 is a diagram illustrating more detailed configurations of the main CPU 55, ROM 54, and RWM 53 in the twentieth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 is provided with a main CPU 55, an RWM 53, and a ROM .

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 20, a one-chip microprocessor (hereinafter simply referred to as "chip") is mounted on the main control board 50. In this chip, the main A CPU 55 is provided. Further, the main CPU 55 has a built-in memory, and this built-in memory has a (built-in) ROM 54 and a (built-in) RWM 53 . The addresses of the ROM 54 and the RWM 53 are consecutive.

The storage capacity of the ROM 54 is set to "16 KB or less" in this embodiment, and has a use area with a capacity of "7.5 KB or less" and other non-use areas. Further, the used area has a control area with a capacity of "4.5 KB or less" and a data area with a capacity of "3.0 KB or less".
Here, the "used area" refers to a storage area in which information other than information necessary to prevent unauthorized modification or other changes is stored or will be stored (same for ROM 54 and RWM 53).
Further, the "control area" refers to a storage area other than the data area among the used areas, and various programs executed by the main control means 50 are stored. The control area may also be referred to as the "program area".
Furthermore, the "data area" refers to a storage area in which only information other than programs is stored or is to be stored, and data used during program execution is stored.

Furthermore, the "outside the used area" consists of a control area and a data area, like the used area. The control area within the use area may be referred to as the first control area, and the control area outside the use area may be referred to as the second control area. A control area (second control area) outside the use area stores programs unrelated to the progress of the game (for example, programs used during testing, programs for fraud prevention, etc.). This point will be described later.
Further, the storage capacity of the RWM 53 is "1,024 KB or less" in this embodiment, and has a used area with a capacity of "512 KB or less" and other areas outside the used area.
Both the used area and the non-used area comprise a working area and a stack area. An LED display counter and the like, which will be described later, are stored in the use area of the RWM 53 .

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 124, the ROM 54 has a program management area and the like as other areas in addition to the used area and the non-used area.
Furthermore, the RWM 53 has an unused area as other areas in addition to the used area and the non-used area.
In addition, among the storage areas of the internal memory as a whole, areas other than the ROM 54 and the RWM 53 include an internal register area, an unused area, and the like.
The built-in register area is provided with, for example, the A to L registers, a transmission register, and the like, as described above.

FIG. 125(A) is a diagram showing various LEDs on the display substrate 75 in the twentieth embodiment, and FIG. 125(B) is a diagram more specifically showing the management information display LED 74 in the twentieth embodiment. . 125A is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 2 of the first embodiment, and FIG. 125B is a diagram corresponding to the management information display LED 74 shown in FIG. 3A of the first embodiment. .

In FIG. 125(A), in the twentieth embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, the stored number display LED 76 composed of digit 1 (upper digit) and digit 2 (lower digit) and digit 3 (upper digit) and an acquisition number display LED 78 composed of digit 4 (lower digit).
However, unlike the first embodiment, digits 1 to 4 each use a 7-segment display that does not have dot segments (segments DP (hereinafter simply referred to as "segments P")). 2, the segment P of the digit 2 does not constitute the advantageous section display LED 77. In the twentieth embodiment, the advantageous section display LED 77 is provided independently. , the explanation of this point is omitted.

Also, seven LEDs are mounted on the display substrate 75, and these seven LEDs are collectively referred to as status display LEDs 79. As shown in FIG.
First, the 1-bet display LED 79a to the 3-bet display LED 79c are LEDs for displaying the number of medals betted at that time, respectively. When one medal is bet, only the 1-bet display LED 79a lights up. When two medals are bet, the 1-bet display LED 79a and the 2-bet display LED 79b light up. When three medals are bet, the 1-bet display LED 79a, the 2-bet display LED 79b, and the 3-bet display LED 79c are all lit up.

The game start display LED 79d is an LED that lights up when medals are inserted and the start switch 41 becomes operable. Therefore, it does not light up when medals are not bet (or replay is not automatically inserted).
The insertion display LED 79e is an LED that lights up when medals can be inserted. That is, after the game is over, it lights up before medals are inserted for the transition to the next game, indicating a so-called bet waiting state. It should be noted that even after the replay is activated, it lights up when it is possible to bet according to the number of stored coins.

The replay display LED 79f is an LED that lights up when a replay win is made, and when an automatic bet is made based on the replay win, the replay display LED 79f lights up to notify the player of the automatic bet state.
The effect display LED 79g is an LED used when displaying various effects, and may also be used as a settlement display LED (an LED that lights up during settlement processing).

In FIG. 125(B), the four digits 6 to 9 used for the management information display LED 74 are different from the digits 1 to 4 described above, and each is a 7-segment display provided with dot segments (segment P). Digits 6 to 9 are the same as in the first embodiment in that they indicate the upper information type, the lower information type, the upper numerical value, and the lower numerical value, respectively.
In addition, segment P of digit 7 (information type lower order) functions as a digit separator display LED. The digit separator display LED is used to clarify the separator between the information type and the numerical value.

Also, segments P of digits 6, 8, and 9 are LEDs that light up when an unrecoverable error occurs. Unlike digits 1 to 4, digits 6 to 9 are provided with segments P. When such segments are physically provided, they are required to be lit at some timing. Therefore, in this embodiment, when an unrecoverable error occurs, control is performed so that all segments P of digits 6 to 9 are lit.

FIG. 126 is a diagram explaining details of digits and segments in the twentieth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 4 of the first embodiment.
In the twentieth embodiment, as described above, the seven segments of digits 1 to 4 themselves are composed of segments A to G, and no dot segment (segment P) is provided.
However, segments P of digits 1, 3, and 4 constitute any one of the status LEDs 79 described above. As shown in FIG. 126, for example, segment P of digit 1 constitutes game start LED 79d.
Also, the segment P of the digit 3 constitutes an input display LED 79e.
Furthermore, segment P of digit 4 constitutes replay indication LED 79f.

Although not shown, in the twentieth embodiment, the set value display LED 73 (digit 5) uses a 7-segment display without dot segments (segment P) like digits 1-4. The segment P of the digit 5 constitutes an effect display LED 79g.
Note that segment P of digit 2 is unused in the twentieth embodiment.
Furthermore, segment P of digits 6-9 is as described above.

FIG. 127 shows a data table stored in the ROM 54. As shown in FIG. The data table is a table that stores display data and display offset data when digits 1 to 9 are lit.
As shown in FIG. 127, the data table consists of a data table within the use area stored in the data area of the ROM 54 (address "1200H-" in FIG. 124) and a data area outside the use area of the ROM 54 (see 124, and an out-of-use area data table stored at addresses "2300H-").

The used area data table includes an LED segment table 1 (TBL_SEG_DATA1) and an LED segment table 2 (TBL_SEG_DATA2).
The LED segment table 1 is a table for storing display data (alphabetic data) used when error information is displayed on the acquired number display LEDs 78 (digits 3 and 4).
Also, the LED segment table 2 is a table that stores data for displaying "=" when displaying numeric display data and pressing order instruction information.
In FIG. 127, "DEFB" indicates storage of 1-byte (8-bit) data in assembler language.

In FIG. 127, for example, "C" display data is "00111001B". That is, segments A, D, E, and F are "1 (on; lit)", and segments B, C, and G are "0 (off, extinguished)." Therefore, in FIG. 126, when segments A, D, E, and F are lit, "C" is displayed by 7 segments.
Also, the “=” display data is “01001000B”. That is, in FIG. 126, segments D and G are set to "1 (on; lighting)", the middle and lower horizontal segments are lit, and "=" is displayed by 7 segments.

LED segment table 1 (TBL_SEG_DATA1) and LED segment table 2 (TBL_SEG_DATA2) are stored at consecutive addresses. For example, assuming that the top address of the "C" display data is "1811", each display data of the LED segment table 1 is stored in order from "1811". In this case, the top address of the LED segment table 2 is "1816", and each display data of the LED segment table 2 is stored in order from "1816".

As a result, each display data in the LED segment table 1 can be represented by an offset value from the head address "1811". Similarly, each display data in the LED segment table 2 can be represented by an offset value from the head address "1816".
For example, when reading the display data of the LED segment table 2, specify the start address "1816", and if the content to be displayed is "5", the address obtained by adding the offset value "5" to the start address "1816" That is, if data of "181B" is read, display data of "5" can be read.

On the other hand, the out-of-use area data table is a data table storing data for displaying the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9). ) and The identification segment offset table and the ratio display segment data table are stored at consecutive addresses in the same manner as the LED segment tables 1 and 2 described above.
Note that "identification segment" is used as an abbreviation for "information type".

In the identification segment of the twentieth embodiment, alphabetic characters and numerical values are reversed with respect to the information types shown in FIG.
in particular,
Advantageous section ratio: U7 → 7U
Continuous accessory ratio (6000 games): y6 → 6y
Accessory ratio (6000 games): y7→7y
Continuous role ratio (cumulative): A6 → 6A
Role ratio (cumulative): A7 → 7A
and

For example, the display offset data of "7U" indicating the identification segment of the advantageous section ratio is "07AH" as shown in FIG. , "A" indicates the offset value of the lower digit (digit 7; 100 digits). Furthermore, the offset value here indicates the offset value from the top address of the ratio display segment data table.
Therefore, the offset value "7" specifies "7" display data (for ratio), and the offset value "A" specifies "U" display data.
In order to distinguish "7" displayed on the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9) from "7" displayed on the digits 1 to 5, the display data are made different. "7" displayed in digits 6 to 9 is data determined to turn on segment F in FIG. 126 (the fifth bit is set to "1").

As described above, the numeric display data are the same data as in the LED segment table 2 except for the display data "7". In spite of this, the reason why the data table within the used area and the data table outside the used area are stored separately is as follows.
The lighting display of the stored number display LED 76 (digits 1 and 2), the acquired number (or error) display LED 78, and the set value display LED 73 (digit 5) is controlled within the use area. For this reason, control data to be performed within the use area is stored in the data area within the use area.
On the other hand, the lighting display of the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9) is controlled outside the use area. Therefore, data for control performed outside the use area is stored in a data area outside the use area.

FIG. 128 is a diagram showing output ports 2 to 5 provided on the main control board 50 and respective signals in the twentieth embodiment. In FIG. 128, the left column shows the twentieth embodiment, and the right column shows "reference example" before the present invention.
The "reference example" is an example in which digits 6 to 9 are not provided, and is an example described for comparison with the twentieth embodiment, and means a known technique or a known technique for the present invention. not a thing
In addition, in FIG. 128, output ports 2 to 5 are shown as output ports, but actually more output ports are provided. Illustrations of other output ports are omitted (the same applies to drawings of output ports of other embodiments).
As shown in FIG. 1 of the first embodiment, the main control board 50 is provided with an input port 51 and an output port 52 .

Input ports 51 include, for example, input ports 0 to 2 (actually, other input ports are also provided).
The input port 0 is a port to which each signal of the settlement switch 46, the bet switch 40, the start switch 41, and the stop switch 42 is input.
The input port 1 is a port to which signals from the path sensor 43a, the setting key switch 12, the setting switch 13, the reset switch 14, the (left, middle, right) reel sensors 39, etc. are input.
Furthermore, to the input port 2, a power failure signal (a signal output when power failure occurs), the input sensor 44, the payout sensor 37, and other signals are input.

As information processing for progressing the game, a main process is provided which is performed once per game. In the main processing, detection of inserted medals, winning processing after all the reels 31 are stopped, and the like are performed.

During this main process, the main process is temporarily exited and an interrupt process (timer interrupt process) is executed (I_INTR in FIG. 133 to be described later). In the interrupt process, the process of detecting the input ports 0 to 2 (step S1407 in FIG. 133) is executed, and after the process is executed, the process of returning to the main process is periodically performed. The interrupt time interval is 2.235 ms in this embodiment. That is, the data of the input ports 0 to 2 are obtained for each interrupt process at intervals of 2.235ms.

Then, based on the acquired data, for each of the input ports 0 to 2, level data (data indicating the ON/OFF of each bit), rising data of the input port (off at the previous interrupt, on at the current interrupt) Data indicating which bit is the data that was turned off) and input port falling edge data (data indicating which bit is the data that was on at the time of the previous interrupt and turned off at the time of this interrupt) and memorize. Therefore, these data are updated every 2.235 ms.

For example, output ports 0 to 10 are provided as the output ports. Of these output ports, FIG. 128 shows output ports 2 to 5 related to the twentieth embodiment.
A feature of the output ports of the twentieth embodiment is that there are two output ports (digit ports) for transmitting digit signals (output ports 2 and 4) and one output port (segment port) for transmitting segment signals. (output port 3).

First, output port 2 is a port that outputs three bet indication signals and digit 1-5 signals. The 1-bet display signal to 3-bet display signal are signals for lighting the 1-bet display LED 79a to 3-bet display LED 79c, respectively.
Digit 1 signal to digit 5 signal are drive signals for digit 1 to digit 5, respectively.
For example, when the signal "01111001" is output from the output port 2, it means that the drive signal of digits 1 to 4 and the 1 bet display signal are output.

The output port 3 is a port for outputting the segment A signal to the segment P signal. For example, as shown in FIG. 127, when displaying "0", "00111111" is output.
The segment signal of the output port 3 is a segment signal that serves all of the digits 1-9.
The output port 4 is a port for outputting driving signals of digit 6 signal (D0) to digit 9 signal (D3).
Therefore, the signal output from the output port 2 or 4 determines which digit is lit, and the signal output from the output port 3 determines which segment is lit.

Here, the output port of the present embodiment is capable of simultaneously outputting signals of two consecutive output ports (each 1 byte, 2 bytes in total). Therefore, the signals of the output ports 2 and 3 can be output simultaneously, and the signals of the output ports 3 and 4 can be output simultaneously. Therefore, the output ports 2 and 4 are set as ports for outputting digits 1 to 5 and digits 6 to 9, respectively, and the output port 3 therebetween is set as a port for outputting segment signals. .

As a result, for example, when outputting a signal indicating digit 1 as "1", the signal output from output port 2 is "00001000" (assuming signals other than digit 1 to be "0"). The signal output from 3 is "00000110". Therefore, output ports 2 and 3 output "00001000/00000110" ("/" indicates the boundary between the signal output from output port 2 and the signal output from output port 3).

The output port 5 outputs external (outer end) signals to the external centralized terminal board 100, and in this embodiment, external signals 1 to 5, data strobe signals, medal insertion signals, and medal payout signals are output.
Here, the "external signal" is a signal to be output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (hall computer 200, data counter installed in the hall, etc.) via the external common terminal board 100. FIG. Specifically, for example, an AT, a specific RT, external signals 1 to 3 indicating that a specific special game is in progress, an external signal 4 indicating that an error or power failure has occurred in the slot machine 10, slot An external signal 5 is provided to indicate that the front door of the machine 10 is open.

A data strobe signal is a signal to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . Upon receiving the data strobe signal, the sub-control board 80 performs control to acquire the sub-control data signal from the buffer provided in the sub-control board 80 based on the rising edge of the data strobe signal.
From the output ports other than the output ports 2 to 5 described above, for example, the signal of the motor 32, the signal of the blocker 45, the drive signal of the hopper motor 36, the condition device signal (so-called winning number), the sub control data signal, the test signal, etc. output.

129 to 131 are circuit diagrams showing electrical signal wiring of the main control board 50, display board 75, digits 1 to 9, and status display LEDs 79. FIG.
129 and 130 show electrical signal wiring on the main control board 50, and FIG. 131 shows electrical signal wiring on the display board 75. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 125, the digits 1 and 2 that make up the stored number display LED 76, the digits 3 and 4 that make up the acquired number display LED 78, and the seven status display LEDs 79 are mounted on the display substrate 75. there is On the other hand, the set value display LED 73 (digit 5) and the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9) are mounted on the main control board 50 as shown in FIG. 3 of the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 129, a main CPU 55 and three ICs (IC2, IC3 and IC4) are mounted on the main control board 50 . Although the main control board 50 is actually provided with ICs other than these three ICs, illustration thereof is omitted in the present embodiment.
The output from the D0 to D7 output terminals of IC2 to IC4 continues until the input to the clock input terminal changes from on to off.

IC2 is an IC for controlling a bet display signal and digit 1 to 5 signals, and IC3 is an IC for controlling a segment signal. IC4 is an IC for controlling digit 6-9 signals.
Each of IC2 to IC4 has a clock signal input terminal. On the other hand, the main CPU 55 has XCS2, XCS3, and XCS4 output terminals, the XCS2 output terminal is connected to the clock input terminal of IC2, the XCS3 output terminal is connected to the clock input terminal of IC3, and the XCS4 output terminal is connected. and the clock input terminal of IC4 are connected.

The main CPU 55 also has D0 to D7 output terminals. The D0 to D7 input terminals of the IC2 and the D0 to D7 output terminals of the main CPU 55 are connected.
Furthermore, the D0-D7 output terminals of the main CPU 55 are connected to the D0-D7 input terminals of the IC 3, respectively.
Furthermore, the D0-D3 output terminals of the main CPU 55 and the D0-D3 input terminals of the IC 4 are connected, respectively. The D4 to D7 input terminals of IC4 are connected to the ground.

The IC2 has an output port 2 (see FIG. 128) consisting of D0 to D7 output terminals, and the D0 to D7 input terminals correspond to the D0 to D7 output terminals, respectively. The 1-bet display signal line to the 3-bet display signal line are output from the D0 to D2 output terminals, respectively. In FIG. terminal) and the 3-bet display signal line (terminal 18).
Digit 1 signal line to Digit 5 signal line are respectively output from D3 to D7 output terminals of the output port 2, and these five signal lines are connected to the display substrate 75 (No. , and the digit 5 signal line is connected to the drive signal line for the digit 5 (set value display LED 73 ) mounted on the main control board 50 .

The IC 3 has an output port 3 (see FIG. 128) consisting of output terminals D0 to D7, and the input terminals D0 to D7 correspond to the output terminals D0 to D7, respectively. Segment A signal line to segment P signal line come out from D0 to D7 output terminals, respectively, and these signal lines are firstly connected to segment A to segment P, respectively, of digit 5, and secondly, to digit 6 to 9 are connected to segments A to P, respectively (FIG. 130), and thirdly connected to the display substrate 75 (8th to 15th terminals in FIG. 131).
Furthermore, the IC 4 has an output port 4 (see FIG. 128) consisting of D0-D3 output terminals, and the D0-D3 input terminals correspond to the D0-D3 output terminals, respectively. As shown in FIGS. 128 and 129, D4 to D7 output terminals of output port 4 are unused (NC).

Digit 6 signal lines to digit 9 signal lines are output from D0 to D3 output terminals, respectively, and these signal lines are connected to digit 6 to 9 drive signal lines, respectively.
In FIG. 129, for example, the signal lines from output terminals D0 to D2 of output port 2 and the signal lines from D0 to D7 of output port 3 are connected to digits and display substrate 75 via transistors and resistors. Although connected, illustration of these transistors and resistors is omitted in FIG.

In FIG. 130, the Digit 6 to Digit 9 signals are connected to the drive signal lines for Digits 6 to 9, respectively.
Also, digits 6-9 each have eight LEDs (the LEDs that make up segments AG and P). The LEDs forming segments A to G and P of digits 6 to 9 are connected to segment A to G and P signal lines, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 131, the display substrate 75 is provided with digits 1-4. The output terminals (3rd terminal to 6th terminal) of the digit 1 signal line to the digit 4 signal line of the display substrate 75 are connected to the driving signal lines of the digits 1 to 4, respectively.
Also, each of digits 1 to 4 has seven LEDs (the LEDs forming segments A to G), like digit 5 described above. The LEDs of segments A to G of digits 1 to 4 are connected to the output terminals (8th to 14th terminals) of the segment A to G signal lines, respectively.

Further, as shown in FIG. 131, the display board 75 has seven LEDs (see FIG. 125) constituting the state display LED 79, specifically, a 1-bet display LED 79a, a 2-bet display LED 79b, and a 3-bet display LED 79c. , a game start display LED 79d, an input display LED 79e, a replay display LED 79f, and an effect display LED 79g.

The game start display LED 79d, the insertion display LED 79e, the replay display LED 79f, and the effect display LED 79g are connected to the output terminal (15th terminal) of the segment P signal line.
Further, the game start display LED 79d is connected to the output terminal (3rd terminal) of the digit 1 signal line, the insertion display LED 79e is connected to the output terminal (5th terminal) of the digit 3 signal line, and the replay display LED 79f is connected to the digit 4 signal. The effect display LED 79g is connected to the output terminal (seventh terminal) of the digit 5 signal line.

As shown in FIG. 131, the output terminals (16th terminal to 18th terminal) of the 1st to 3rd display signal lines of the display substrate 75 are connected to the 1st to 3rd display LEDs 79a to 79c, respectively. there is Further, +5V power supply voltage terminals (terminals 1 and 2) of the display substrate 75 are connected to the 1st to 3rd bed display LEDs 79a to 79c.

In the above configuration, in FIG. 129, the main CPU 55 normally applies a high level (approximately 5 V; the same shall apply hereinafter) to the XCS2 to XCS4 output terminals, and the high level to low level (approximately zero V) voltage is applied to the XCS2 to XCS4 output terminals. The same applies hereinafter) (the voltage is changed by a switch (circuit) provided in the main CPU 55), it becomes active. For example, when it is desired to drive (select or designate) IC2, the XCS2 output terminal is activated. As a result, an active signal (chip select signal) is output from the XCS2 output terminal and input to the clock input terminal of IC2. As a result, the IC2 enters a driving state (also referred to as a selected state or a specified state). By activating the XCS3 and XCS4 output terminals in the same manner as described above, IC3 and IC4 are driven.

A low level voltage is normally applied to the D0 to D7 output terminals of the main CPU 55, and a high level voltage is applied when data "1" (data signal) is output.
For example, when a data signal of "1" is output from the D0 output terminal of the main CPU 55, data signals are input to the D0 input terminals of IC2 to IC4, respectively. The data signal is input to the D0 input terminal of .

Furthermore, normally, a high level voltage is applied to the output port 2 of the IC2, and a low level voltage is applied to the output terminal corresponding to the input terminal to which the data signal is input. For example, when a data signal of "1" is output from the D7 output terminal of the main CPU 55, and at this moment the XCS2 output terminal is active, the data signal is input to the D7 input terminal of IC2. Then, when the D7 output terminal of IC2 is brought to a low level, current can flow through the LEDs of segments A to G of digit 5. FIG.

Furthermore, when the data signal "1" is output from the D0 and D1 output terminals of the main CPU 55 and the XCS3 output terminal is activated, the data signal is input to the D0 and D1 input terminals of the IC3.
A high level voltage is normally applied to the output port 3 of the IC3. When a high level voltage is applied, the circuit after the transistor (not shown) in FIG. 129 is in high impedance (neither low nor high state).

Then, when the D0 and D1 output terminals of IC3 are set to low level, a current flows from the emitter to the collector of the transistor connected to the high level (+5V) along with the change in the current between the emitter and the base, and the segment A and B signal lines current flows.
Therefore, as described above, when the D7 output terminal of IC2 is set to a low level and current is allowed to flow through the LEDs of segments A to G of digit 5, D0 and D1 of IC3 are set as described above. When the output terminal is set to a low level, current flows through the segment A and B signal lines, causing the segment A and B LEDs of digit 5 to light.

In other words, although a current flows through the segment A and B signal lines of all digits, since a voltage of about 5 V is applied to digits other than digit 5, no potential difference occurs and digits 1 to 4 and 6 to 9 do not. LEDs in segments A and B corresponding to do not illuminate. In other words, a current flows only to the digit 5 to which approximately 0 V is applied, and the LEDs of the segments A and B of the digit 5 are lit.

Also, for example, the D3 output terminal (digit 1 signal) of IC2 is set to low level.
Furthermore, when the D7 output terminal (segment P signal) of IC3 is set to low level, current flows from the emitter connected to the high level to the collector along with the change in the current between the emitter and the base, and the current flows to the segment P signal line. As a result, the game start display LED 79d lights up in FIG.

In other words, although a current flows through the segment P signal lines of all digits, since a voltage of about 5 V is also applied to digits other than digit 1, no potential difference occurs and the digits other than digit 1 are associated with each other. The input display LED 79e, the replay display LED 79f, and the effect display LED 79g are not lit. In other words, a current flows only to the digit 1 to which approximately 0 V is applied, and the game start display LED 79d associated with the digit 1 lights up.

Further, a low level voltage is normally applied to the D0 to D7 output terminals of the output port 2 of the IC2. When a high level voltage is applied to any of the D0 to D2 output terminals of IC2, a current flows from the collector to the emitter of the transistor, and the collector side of the transistor becomes low level.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 131, a high level voltage is always applied to the power supply voltage terminals (terminals 1 and 2) connected to the upstream side of the 1st to 3rd bet display LEDs 79a to 79c. there is Therefore, in FIG. 129, for example, if the D0 output terminal of IC2 is set to high level, the 16th terminal of the 1-bet display signal becomes low-level in FIG. do.

In this embodiment, only one of the digits 1 to 9 is set to be lit. Here, in order to individually light up all digits, it is necessary to provide independent wiring for each digit and each segment. However, such setting increases the number of wires, increases the cost, and increases the assembly load.
On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 129 to 131, for example, in the case of segment A signals, the number of wirings can be reduced by adopting a circuit configuration in which all digits 1 to 9 of segment A signals are connected.

Even with the circuit configuration of this embodiment, if the digits to be lit are sequentially switched for each interrupt processing, there is practically no change from the state in which all the digits are lit at the same time. (as if you were doing it).
Also, if different LEDs are lit for each interrupt process, power consumption can be suppressed and LED burn-in can be suppressed.
Furthermore, the brightness can be increased by repeating point light emission as compared with an LED that is always lit.

FIG. 132A is a diagram showing the relationship between interrupts, LED display counters (_CT_LED_DSP), and output signals in the twentieth embodiment.
In addition, FIG. 4B is a diagram showing the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP).
As described above, in the present embodiment, interrupt processing is executed once every 2.235 ms in parallel with main processing.
On the other hand, a storage area for an LED display counter is provided at a predetermined address in the used area of the RWM 53 . The LED display counter is 1-byte data and is a counter that is continuously updated for each interrupt.

The LED display counter of the twentieth embodiment takes a value of "00000001" as an initial value. Then, for each interrupt process, update is performed by shifting the bit "1" to the left by one digit. When this update is continued, in FIG. 132, when the interrupt "8" changes to "9", the bit "1" overflows and becomes "00000000". When the LED display counter value becomes "00000000", initialization processing of the LED display counter is executed in the next interrupt processing. This initialization process is to set the D0 bit to "1", that is, to set the LED display counter to "00000001". Therefore, as shown in FIG. 132, it continues to be updated in the order of "1"→"2"→...→"9"→"1"→... for each interrupt process. Therefore, the LED display counter is a counter with 9 interrupts per cycle.

First, when the LED display counter value is "00000001", the output signals are the 1-bet display signal and the digit 6 signal, so the 1-bet display LED 79a and the digit 6 are to be lit (this At this point, the LED display request flag, which will be described later, is not taken into consideration (the same shall apply hereinafter). Therefore, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value becomes "00000001", a signal of "00000001" is output from the output ports 2 and 4. FIG. As a result, a 1-bet display signal is output from the D0 output terminal of the output port 2, and a digit 6 signal is output from the D0 output terminal of the output port 4. FIG. Therefore, the 1-bet display LED 79a and the digit 6 can be lit.

In FIG. 132, "within use area" and "outside use area" are programs and data for controlling lighting of 1-bet to 3-bet display LEDs 79a to 79c and digits 1 to 5. is stored in the ROM 54, and the programs and data for controlling the lighting of the digits 6 to 9 are stored outside the ROM 54. The inside and the outside of the use area are displayed separately.

Similarly, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value becomes "00000010", a signal of "00000010" is output from the output ports 2 and 4. As a result, the D1 output terminal of the output port 2 outputs the 2 bet indication signal, and the D1 output terminal of the output port 4 outputs the digit 7 signal. Therefore, the 2 bet display LED 79b and the digit 7 can be lit. In addition, when the digit 7 is lit, the segment P (digit division display LED) is also lit.
For digits 6, 8 and 9 other than digit 7, segment P is not lit in the interrupt process. A segment P of these digits is illuminated during non-recoverable errors where interrupt processing is inhibited (more on this point later).

Next, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value becomes "00000100", the signal "00000100" is output from the output ports 2 and 4. FIG. As a result, the D2 output terminal of the output port 2 outputs the 3-bet display signal, and the D2 output terminal of the output port 4 outputs the digit 8 signal. Therefore, the 3-bet display LED 79c and the digit 8 can be lit.
Also, in interrupt processing when the LED display counter value becomes "00001000", a signal of "00001000" is output only from the output port 2 (no output from the output port 4). As a result, a digit 1 signal is output from the D3 output terminal of the output port 2 . Therefore, the digit 1 and the game start display LED 79d corresponding to the segment P of the digit 1 can be lit.

Furthermore, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value becomes "00010000", the signal "00010000" is output only from the output port 2. FIG. As a result, the digit 2 signal is output from the D4 output terminal of the output port 2 . Therefore, digit 2 can be illuminated. Note that there are no LEDs assigned to segment P of digit 2 (FIG. 126).
Furthermore, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value becomes "00100000", the signal "00100000" is output only from the output port 2. FIG. As a result, the digit 3 signal is output from the D5 output terminal of the output port 2. FIG. Therefore, the digit 3 and the input display LED 79e corresponding to the segment P of the digit 3 can be lit.

Also, in the interrupt process when the LED display counter value becomes "01000000", the signal "01000000" is output only from the output port 2. FIG. As a result, the digit 4 signal is output from the D6 output terminal of the output port 2 . Therefore, the digit 4 and the replay display LED 79f corresponding to the segment P of the digit 4 can be lit.
Furthermore, in the interrupt process when the LED display counter value reaches "10000000", the signal "10000000" is output only from the output port 2. FIG. As a result, the digit 5 signal is output from the D7 output terminal of the output port 2. FIG. Therefore, the digit 5 and the effect display LED 79g corresponding to the segment P of the digit 5 can be lit.

Next, in interrupt processing when the LED display counter value becomes "00000000", a signal of "00001000" is output only from output port 4 (no output from output port 2). As a result, the digit 9 signal is output from the D3 output terminal of the output port 4. FIG. Therefore, the digit 9 can be illuminated.
The LED display counter is 8-bit data, and if 8-bit data manages 9 digits, 1 digit cannot be assigned to each bit, resulting in a shortage of 1 bit. . Therefore, in this embodiment, when the LED display counter is "0", the output timing of the digit 9 signal is set.

The LED display request flag shown in FIG. 132(B) is a flag indicating which LED is requested to be lit. stored in
Digits 1 to 5 and digits 6 to 8 corresponding to each bit of the LED display request flag are set to the same bits as the LED display counter. Also, the D0 to D2 bits of the LED display request flag correspond to 1-bet to 3-bet.
Note that there is no bit corresponding to digit 9 in the LED display request flag. This is because, as described above, no bit corresponding to digit 9 can be provided.

In the LED display request flag, for example, during normal operation (playing and waiting), the set value display LED 73 (digit 5) can be extinguished, and 1 bet to 3 bets and digits 1 to 4 and 6 to 8 can be lit. Therefore, it becomes "011111111". Bit "1" of the LED display request flag indicates that lighting is possible, and bit "0" indicates that lighting is not possible.
Also, during the setting change, the set value is displayed in digit 5, so the D7 bit becomes "1", and the D3 and D4 bits become "0" because the digits 1 and 2 (stored number display LED 76) are not displayed. Since "88" indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed in digits 3 and 4 (acquisition number display LED 78), the D5 and D6 bits become "1". Therefore, the LED display request flag during setting change is "11100000B".

Furthermore, during setting confirmation, the set value is displayed in digit 5 in the same way as during setting change, so the D7 bit becomes "1". In addition, "8" is displayed for digits 1-4. Therefore, the LED display request flag during setting confirmation becomes "11111000B".

When LED display control ("I_LED_OUT" to be described later) is actually performed in interrupt processing, an AND operation is performed on the LED display counter and the LED display request flag, and a digit signal corresponding to the result of the calculation is output ( light the digit).
For example, as shown in FIG. 132(A), in the case of interrupt "4", the LED display counter is "00001000", and if the time is normal, the LED display request counter is "01111111". Therefore, if both are ANDed, the result is "00001000", so the signal to be output during the interrupt process is only the digit 1 signal (higher digit of the stored number display LED 76).
In the case of the interrupt "8", the LED display counter is "10000000", and if the time is normal, the LED display request counter is "01111111". Therefore, if the both are ANDed, the result is "00000000", so no signal is output during the interrupt process.

FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR) by the main control board 50 (main CPU 55). As described above, the main control board 50 performs the interrupt processing shown in FIG. 133 at a cycle of 2.235 ms (but not limited to this cycle) in parallel with the main processing.
First, when the process shifts to interrupt processing in step S1401, in step S1402, as initial processing, register value saving and duplicate interrupt prohibition processing are performed. Here, since the registers of the main CPU 55 used in the main processing are used in the interrupt processing, the current register values are saved in the stack area of the RWM 53 . Furthermore, the interrupt disable flag is turned on so that the next interrupt processing is not started during the interrupt processing. This is because, for example, an execution request for interrupt processing may be made during execution of power-off processing.

In the next step S1403, it is determined whether or not power interruption has been detected. Here, a voltage monitoring device (power failure detection circuit) (not shown) provided on the main control board 50 outputs a power failure detection signal to a predetermined bit of a predetermined input port when the power supply voltage drops below a predetermined value. is input, it is detected whether or not that signal has been input.
Then, when power interruption is detected, the process advances to power supply interruption processing in step S1419, and when power interruption is not detected, the process advances to step S1404.

In step S1404, the interrupt counter value is updated.
In the next step S1405, timer measurement is performed. This process is a process of subtracting the time set in the main process. Specifically, for example, whether or not the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) has passed can be mentioned.
Next, the process advances to step S1406 to perform LED display control (I_LED_OUT; FIG. 134). Here, the processing is to light LEDs (digits 1 to 5) according to the state of the slot machine 10. FIG. The details of this processing will be described later.

Errors that occur in the slot machine 10 include non-recoverable errors and recoverable errors. For non-recoverable errors, an error display is output by the main processing as will be described later. This LED display control is performed every hour.

Next, the flow advances to step S1407 to perform read processing of the input port 51. FIG. As a result, whether or not the bed switch 40, start switch 41, stop switch 42, etc. have been operated, switch signals, and input signals from various sensors are read, and data based on the input port 51 (level data, rise data, falling edge data) is generated and stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53 .

In the next step S1408, it is determined whether or not the set value is within the normal range. Here, the set value data stored at the predetermined address of the RWM 53 is read, and it is determined whether or not the set value range is normal (within the range of "1" to "6"). If it is determined that the set value is within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S1409, and if it is determined that the set value is not within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S1420 to shift to unrecoverable error processing 2 (FIG. 137 described later). The error in this case is called an "E6" error in the present embodiment, and the fact that it is "E6" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 .

Here, recoverable errors and unrecoverable errors will be described.
A recoverable error is an error that can be recovered without turning on/off the power supply.
On the other hand, an unrecoverable error is an error that cannot be recovered unless the power is turned off and then turned on again. Specific non-recoverable errors include the following. However, it is not limited to these unrecoverable errors.
"E1" error: when it is determined that recovery from power failure is not normal "E5" error: when it is determined that a display (stop symbol) error has occurred when the reel 31 is stopped "E6" error: step S1408 "E7" error: When it is determined that a random number error has occurred in step S1410

Furthermore, in this embodiment, E1 and E5 errors are referred to as unrecoverable error 1, and E6 and E7 errors are referred to as unrecoverable error 2.
A program for determining unrecoverable error 1 is stored in the used area. Furthermore, a program (SS_ERROR_STOP1 in FIG. 136 to be described later) for when unrecoverable error 1 occurs is stored in a control area within the use area of the ROM 54 . For this reason, the processing is also referred to as processing within the used area.
On the other hand, the program for judging unrecoverable error 2 is stored outside the use area. This corresponds to a program for executing steps S1408 and S1410 in the interrupt processing described above. Further, program processing (SS_ERROR_STOP2 in FIG. 137 to be described later) when an unrecoverable error 2 occurs is stored in a control area outside the use area of the ROM 54 . For this reason, the processing is also called out-of-use area processing.

Return to the description of the flowchart.
In step S1409, internal random number check processing is performed. In this embodiment, a flag is provided that turns on when an error occurs in the internal random numbers, and it is determined whether or not this flag is on.
Specifically, for example, when an abnormality in the clock frequency of the random number for the combination lottery (such as when the random number update is slow) is detected, the error flag is turned on.
Then, in step S1410, it is determined whether or not an error has occurred in the internal random number (whether or not the error flag is ON). If it is determined that an error has occurred, the process advances to step S1420 to shift to unrecoverable error processing 2. FIG. The content of the error display at this time is "E7".

In step S1411, drive control of the reel 31 is performed. This control is performed for each reel 31 (left, middle, right), and includes stop, constant speed, acceleration, deceleration, start of deceleration, and standby depending on the operating state. When the drive control of the reel 31 is completed, the flow advances to step S1412 to perform port output processing. In this process, the excitation output of the (reel) motor 32 and the hopper motor 36 and the excitation output of the blocker 45 are performed.

In the next step S1413, input error check processing is executed. This processing is processing for determining whether or not there is an abnormality in various sensors.
In the next step S1414, control command transmission processing is performed. This process is a process of transmitting the set control command (the untransmitted control command stored in the command buffer of the RWM 53 ) to the sub-control board 80 .
Specifically, when the control command is set in the command buffer, in the subsequent interrupt processing (if the command buffer is empty, in principle, the next interrupt processing after that time), this step S1414 A control command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by .

In the next step S1415, the data for the external signal stored in RWM 53 is stored in the register. Then, in the next step S1416, by writing (setting) data to the output port 5, an external signal is output (a signal is transmitted to the external centralized terminal board 100).
Next, the flow advances to step S1417 to perform random number update processing. In the next step S1418, the register value saved in step S1402 is restored, and the next interrupt is permitted. Specifically, the register data stored at the start of interrupt processing is restored, and the interrupt prohibition flag is turned off so that the next interrupt processing can be started. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

As shown in the above processing, the interrupt processing every 2.235 ms controls the turning on/off of the stored number display LED 76, the acquired number display LED 78, the status display LED 79 (79a to 79g), and the set value display LED 73.
Furthermore, for each interrupt processing, if a control command that has not been transmitted to the sub-control board 80 is stored in the command buffer, the transmission processing is performed.

Note that interrupt processing is not performed during unrecoverable error processing (interrupt processing is interrupted until normal recovery is performed).
An unrecoverable error is a serious error that cannot normally occur, and processing based on abnormal data (data update of the RWM 53 based on data from the input port, transmission of control commands to the sub-control board 80, etc.) is executed. In order to prevent this, the interrupt itself is prohibited.
If an unrecoverable error occurs and an unsent command is stored in the control command buffer, the command is not sent to the sub-control board 80 . This is because the control command stored in the buffer may not be correct.

FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S1406 of FIG.
First, in step S1431, output ports 2 and 3 are turned off. Output port 2 is an output port corresponding to digit 1 signal to digit 5 signal, and output port 3 is an output port corresponding to segment A to segment P signal. By outputting "00000000" for these output ports 2 and 3, the output of digits 1 to 5 is temporarily disabled. As a result, when switching the display of the LEDs, it is possible to prevent different LEDs from appearing to light up at the same time (overlaid display) even for a moment (prevention of afterimage).

In the next step S1432, output port 4 is turned off as in step S1431. Output port 4 is an output port corresponding to digit 6 signal to digit 9 signal. By outputting "00000000" for this output port 4 as well, the output of the management information display LED 74 is temporarily disabled. This provides the same effect (prevention of afterimage) as described above.

In the next step S1433, the LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP) is updated. Updating the LED display counter is a process of shifting the bit "1" to the left by one place. This updated value is stored in the RWM 53 at a predetermined address. Then, the process proceeds to step S1434.
In step S1434, it is determined whether or not the LED display counter has been updated nine times. Here, when the LED display counter before update is "00000000", it is determined that the update has been performed 9 times. When the LED display counter before updating is "00000000", the process proceeds to step S1435. On the other hand, when the LED display counter is not "00000000", the process proceeds to step S1436.

In step S1435, an LED display counter is initialized. Here, the LED display counter value is set to "00000001" and stored in the RWM 53 at a predetermined address. Then, the process proceeds to step S1436.
In step S1436, an LED display counter and an LED display request flag are acquired. Both the LED display counter and the LED display request flag are stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53 . Then, the value of the LED display counter is stored in the E register, and the value of the LED display request flag is stored in the A register.
Next, the flow advances to step S1437 to set the segment display confirmation of the digit to be displayed this time. In this process, an AND operation is performed on the LED display request flag value and the LED display counter value to create data for the LED to be lit this time.

for example,
LED display counter value: 00001000B
LED display request flag value: 01111111B
After AND operation: 00001000B
becomes.
Or, for example,
LED display counter value: 10000000B
LED display request flag value: 01111111B
After AND operation: 00000000B
becomes.
Then, the calculation result is stored in the A register. Furthermore, the value stored in the A register is stored in the D register.

Next, proceeding to step S1438, it is determined whether or not the A register value (the value obtained by ANDing the LED display counter value and the LED display request flag value) is "0". When it is determined to be "0", it is determined that there is no display request, and the process proceeds to step S1456. On the other hand, if it is determined not to be "0", it is determined that there is a display request, and the process proceeds to step S1439.
In step S1439, error display data is obtained. When an error occurs, the error display data is stored at the address indicating the error display data in the RWM 53, so the data is read and stored in the B register.
In the next step S1440, LED segment table 2 is set. LED segment table 2 is "TBL_SEG_DATA2" shown in FIG. The head address of this data is read and the value is stored in the HL register.

Next, the process advances to step S1441 to acquire set value display data. Here, the current set value stored at the predetermined address of the RWM 53 is read and stored in the A register. Next, the flow advances to step S1442 to determine whether or not there is a set value display request. This determination is made by determining whether or not the D7 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 5) of the AND-operated value stored in the D register is "1" ("10000000B"). If it is "1", it is determined that there is a set value display request, and the process proceeds to step S1455. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no set value display request, the process proceeds to step S1443.

In step S1443, the stored number data stored at the predetermined address of the RWM 53 is obtained and stored in the A register. In the next step S1444, the upper digit offset is obtained. This process is a process of dividing the stored number data acquired in step S1443 by "10 (decimal number)", storing the quotient value in the A register, and storing the remainder value in the C register.
In the next step S1445, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display the upper digits of the stored number. This process determines whether or not the D3 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 1) of the AND-operated value stored in the D register is "1", and determines "Yes" if it is "1". do. If it is determined that there is a request to display the upper digits of the stored number, the process proceeds to step S1455, and if it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S1446.

In step S1446, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display the lower digits of the stored number. This process determines whether or not the D4 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 2) of the AND-operated value stored in the D register is "1", and determines "Yes" if it is "1". and proceeds to step S1454. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no request to display the lower digits of the stored number, the process proceeds to step S1447.

In step S1447, the display data during setting change, the acquired number data, or the pressing order instruction number are acquired and stored in the A register. This process is a process of reading the winning number data stored in the predetermined address of the RWM 53 and storing it in the A register. At the timing of displaying the winning number, the winning number data is stored in the predetermined address, and at the timing of displaying the pressing order instruction number in the ART, the pressing order instruction number is stored at the predetermined address. there is Further, data indicating "8" is stored when the setting is being changed.

In the next step S1448, it is determined whether or not it corresponds to the error display. In this process, it is determined whether or not the B register value is "0", and if it is "0", "No" is determined in step S1448. If it is determined that an error is being displayed, the process advances to step S1449.

In step S1449, LED segment table 1 ("TBL_SEG_DATA1" in FIG. 127) is set. This process executes the process of storing the top address of the LED segment table 1 in the HL register.
The flow then advances to step S1450 to obtain the offset for the upper digits. In this process, if no error has occurred, the obtained number data or the push order instruction number stored in the A register at this time is divided by "10 (decimal number)", and the quotient is calculated. Store in the A register and store the remainder in the C register. On the other hand, when an error occurs, the B register value is divided by "10 (decimal number)", the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is stored in the C register.

In the next step S1451, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display the upper digits of the acquisition number display LED78. This processing determines whether or not the D5 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 3) of the AND-operated value stored in the D register is "1". I judge. When it is determined that there is a display request, the process proceeds to step S1455, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S1452.

In step S1452, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display the lower digits of the acquisition number display LED78. This processing determines whether or not the D6 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 4) of the AND-operated value stored in the D register is "1". to decide. When it is determined that there is a display request, the process proceeds to step S1454, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S1453.

In step S1453, bet signal data is obtained. This process is a process of performing an AND operation on the LED display counter and bet number display data, and acquiring the operation result.
Here, the bet number display data is stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53 and is as follows.
When 0 bet: 00000000B
When betting 1 card: 00000001B
When 2 cards are bet: 00000011B
When 3 cards are bet: 00000111B
Therefore, for example, when the LED display counter value is "00000100B" and the bet number display data is "00000111B", the AND operation of the two results in "00000100B", and the D2 bit (the bit corresponding to the 3 bet display LED) is Data that is "1" is created. Then, the process proceeds to step S1456.

If "Yes" in step S1446 or "Yes" in step S1452 and proceeds to step S1454, the offset for the lower digit is acquired. This process is a process of storing the data stored in the C register in the A register.
The flow then advances to step S1455 to acquire segment output data. In this process, the data stored in the HL register (head address of the LED segment table 1) and the data stored in the A register (offset value corresponding to the display data) are added, and the address after the addition corresponds to This is the process of storing data in the D register.
for example,
HL register value = 1816H (before addition)
A register value = 1H
HL register value = 1817H (after addition)
D register value=00000110 (B): "1" display data.
It should be noted that when the pressing order instruction number is stored in the acquired number data, "=" display data is acquired.

The flow then advances to step S1456 to determine whether or not there is a segment P display request. Here, data indicating ON/OFF of the status display LEDs 79d to 79g is stored in the RWM 53 at a predetermined address. Specifically, it is as follows.
D0 bit: Not used D1 bit: Not used D2 bit: Not used D3 bit: "1" when game can be started, otherwise "0"
D4 bit: Not used D5 bit: "1" when medals can be inserted, otherwise "0"
D6 bit: "1" when winning a replay, other "0"
D7 bit: "1" when effect display is possible, otherwise "0"
The relationship between the bits and the status display LEDs 79 is the same as that shown in FIG. 132(A).

This data is read and stored in the A register, and the AND operation is performed on the value and the value (LED display counter) stored in the E register. When the result of the operation is "0", it is determined that there is no display request. . If it is determined that there is a segment P display request, the process proceeds to step S1457, and if it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S1458.

In step S1457, segment P output data is set. This process is to set the D7 bit (the bit corresponding to the segment P) of the data (display data) stored in the D register to "1". The flow then advances to step S1458 to output the LED digits and segment signals from output ports 2 and 3. FIG. Specifically, the data (digit data) stored in the E register is output from the output port 2 and the data (segment data) stored in the D register is output from the output port 3 . Then, the process proceeds to the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in step S1459.

FIG. 135 shows the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in step S1459.
"Ratio" is an abbreviation of the management information displayed by the management information display LED 74 in this embodiment, and is displayed by digits 6-9.
The interrupt processing shown in FIG. 133 and the LED display control program shown in FIG. 134 are stored in the ROM 54 . On the other hand, the program for the ratio display processing in FIG. 135 is stored outside the use area of the ROM 54.
In FIG. 134, when proceeding to step S1458 in the LED display control which is the program within the use area, the process proceeds to the ratio display process which is the program outside the use area. Return to end the LED display control (step S1460).

In this way, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is executed by a program stored in the ROM 54 used area, while the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) is executed by a program stored outside the ROM 54 used area. This is because lighting control of digits 1 to 5 is executed by a program within the use area, and lighting control of digits 6 to 9 (management information (ratio)) is executed by a program outside the use area. Further, as shown in FIG. 127, the data used for LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is also stored in the data area within the use area of the ROM 54, and the data used for the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) is stored in the ROM 54. It is stored in the data area outside the used area.

In FIG. 135, in step S1471, an LED display counter is acquired. This process is the same as the LED display counter acquisition process in step S1436. The LED display counter obtained here is stored in the D register.
In the next step S1472, it is determined whether or not there is a ratio display request. Here, it is determined whether or not there is a display request for any of the digits 6-9. Specifically, the AND operation is performed on the LED display counter value stored in the D register and "11111000". If the result of the AND operation is not "0", it is determined that there is no ratio display request, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated (that is, the process proceeds to step S1460 in FIG. 134 to return to the processing within the use area). On the other hand, when the AND operation result is "0", it is determined that there is a ratio display request, and the process proceeds to step S1473.

in particular,
LED display counter value: 00010000 (digit 2 signal is on)
After AND operation: 00010000 (≠“0”)→No ratio display request.
or,
LED display counter value: 00000001 (digit 6 signal is on)
After the AND operation: 00000000→ratio display request.

In the next step S1473, it is determined whether or not the LED display counter value stored in the D register is "0". If it is determined to be "0", the process proceeds to step S1474, and if it is determined not to be "0", the process proceeds to step S1475.
In step S1474, a ratio (one digit) display request is set.
Here, the management information display LED 74 displays four digits of digits 6 to 9 as shown in FIG.
Digit 9's place: Ratio (1 digit)
Digit eight place: ratio (10 digits)
Digit 7's place: ratio (100 digits)
Sixth digit: ratio (1000 digits)
called.

As shown in FIG. 132, when the D0 bit of the LED display counter is "1", the digit 6 signal is "1", when the D1 bit is "1", the digit 7 signal is "1", and the D2 When the bit is "1", the digit 8 signal is "1". Also, when the LED display counter is "0", the digit 9 signal is on.
However, since the 9 digits 1 to 9 are managed by an 8-bit LED display counter, even if the digit 9 signal is on, all bits become "0" data, and digit 9 is supported. It does not become data whose bit is "1". Therefore, when the LED display counter is "00000000B" (when the digit 9 signal is on), the digit data "00001000B" with the D3 bit set to "1" is created in order to assign the digit 9 signal to the D3 bit. . In step S1474, this processing is executed, and "00001000B" is stored as this digit data in the D register. Then, the process proceeds to step S1475.
In step S1471 or S1474 described above, the digit data in which any one of the digit 6 (D0) to digit 9 (D3) signals is "1" (on) is stored in the D register.

In the next step S1475, a ratio display number is obtained. Here, the ratio display number refers to the numbers "1" to "5" shown in FIG. Since the switching display is executed at predetermined time intervals from the advantageous section ratio of No. 1 to the accessory ratio of No. 5 (cumulative total), in this interruption, it is possible to select which number of management information to display. get. The obtained ratio display number is stored in the E register.
The flow then advances to step S1476 to set the identified segment offset table. This process is a process of storing the top address of the identification segment offset table (“TBL_SEGID_DATA” in FIG. 127) in the HL register. In the next step S1477, an identification segment offset value is obtained. Specifically, this is a process of reading the offset value corresponding to the ratio display number stored in the E register in step S1475 from the identification segment offset table. For example, the display offset data is "7U" when the ratio display number is "1", and the offset value at this time is "07AH". The display offset data is "6y" when the ratio display number is "2", and the offset value at this time is "06BH". This identification offset value is obtained and stored in the A register.

In the next step S1478, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display the ratio (1000 digits) (request to display digit 6). Here, it is determined whether or not the D0 bit of the value stored in the D register is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that there is a display request. Specifically, for example, an AND operation is performed on the D register value and "00000001", and if the result of the operation is "0", it is determined that there is no display request, and if not "0", it is determined that there is a display request. If there is a request to display the ratio (1000 digits), the process proceeds to step S1482, and if there is no request to display it, the process proceeds to step S1479.

In step S1479, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display the ratio (100 digits) (request to display digit 7). Here, it is determined whether or not the D1 bit of the value stored in the D register is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that there is a display request. Specifically, for example, an AND operation is performed on the D register value and "00000010", and if the result of the operation is "0", it is determined that there is no display request, and if not "0", it is determined that there is a display request. When there is a request to display the ratio (100 digits), the process proceeds to step S1483, and when there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S1480.

When the process proceeds to step S1480, there is no request to display the ratio (1000 digits) or the ratio (100 digits), that is, when there is no request to display the identification segment (information type). Therefore, in step S1480, ratio data is obtained. Here, the “ratio data” corresponds to “50 (%)” of the advantageous section ratio in the example of FIG. 38, for example.
In this step S1480, the numerical value corresponding to the ratio display number stored in the E register is obtained. For example, when the ratio display number obtained in step S1475 is "1", the ratio data of the advantageous section ratio is obtained. Since the method of obtaining the ratio data is the same as that of the first embodiment, the explanation is omitted.

Next, the flow advances to step S1481 to determine whether or not there is a request to display the ratio (one digit) (request to display digit 9). This process is to determine whether or not the D3 bit of the value stored in the D register is "1". Specifically, the D register value and "00000100" are ANDed, and if the result of the calculation is "0", it is determined that there is no display request, and if not "0", it is determined that there is a display request. If there is a request to display the ratio (1 digit), the process proceeds to step S1483, and if there is no request to display it, the process proceeds to step S1482.
When there is no ratio (1-digit) display request in step S1481, it means that there is a ratio (10-digit) display request.

Through the above processing, when there is a request to display the ratio (1000 digits) or (10 digits), the process proceeds to step S1482, and when there is a request to display the ratio (100 digits) or the ratio (1 digit), the process proceeds to step S1483. .
In step S1482, the upper digit offset is set. At this point, the A register stores the identified segment offset value (step S1477) or ratio data (step S1480). Then, the upper digits are stored in the A register and the lower digits are stored in the C register. For example, assuming that the A register stores the distinguishing segment offset value "07AH" of the advantageous section ratio, the processing of storing "7" in the A register and "A" in the C register is executed.
When "50" is stored as the ratio data in the A register, "5" is stored in the A register and "0" is stored in the C register. Then, the process proceeds to step S1483.

In the next step S1483, a ratio display segment data table (TBL_SEGRATE_DATA) is set. This process is a process of storing the start address of the ratio display segment data table in the HL register in FIG.
The process then advances to step S1484 to acquire segment output data. This process adds the value stored in the HL register (the top address of the ratio display segment data table) and the value stored in the A register, and stores the data corresponding to the address of the ratio display segment data table after addition. This is the process of storing in the E register.

Specifically, for example,
HL register value = 1810H (before addition; start address value of ratio display segment data table)
A register value = 5H
when
HL register value = 1815H (after addition)
E register value=01101101B: "5" display data.

The flow then advances to step S1485 to determine whether segment P is displayed. In this embodiment, when digits 6 to 9 are displayed, segment P (dot) of digit 7 is always displayed. Therefore, when there is a request to display a ratio (100 digits), it is determined that segment P is to be displayed. . On the other hand, when there is a request to display the ratio (1 digit), the ratio (10 digits), and the ratio (1000 digits), it is determined that the display of the segment P is not requested.
Here, for example, it is determined whether or not the D1 bit of the value stored in the D register is "1". determines that there is no display request for segment P.
If it is determined that there is a display request for segment P, the process proceeds to step S1486, and if it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S1487.

In step S1486, output data corresponding to segment P is set. Since the segment P corresponds to the D7 bit of the 8-bit data, the segment data (E register value) obtained in step S1484 is ORed with "10000000" to obtain the result of the OR operation, which is stored in the E register. Remember.
In the next step S1487, the segment signal is output from the output port 3 and the digit signal is output from the output port 4 in order to output the digit signal and the segment signal. At this point, the D register stores data corresponding to the digit signal, and the E register stores data corresponding to the segment signal. Port 4 outputs the D register value.
After executing step S1487, the flow returns to the flowchart in FIG. That is, the process advances to step S1460 to end the LED display control.

Next, unrecoverable error processing will be described. This embodiment has unrecoverable error processing 1 and unrecoverable error processing 2 as unrecoverable error processing.
As described above, the types of unrecoverable errors (not limited to the errors exemplified here) are:
"E1" error: when it is determined that recovery from power failure is not normal "E5" error: when it is determined that a display (stop symbol) error has occurred when the reel 31 is stopped "E6" error: step S1408 "E7" error: when it is determined that a random number error has occurred in step S1410.

Then, even if any unrecoverable error occurs, the error number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 . For example, when an "E1" error occurs, display an "E" on digit three and a "1" on digit four. The same is displayed for other unrecoverable errors.

Furthermore, it is during the "program start processing (stored in the used area of the ROM 54)" (not shown) that it is determined that the recovery from the power failure is not normal and that an "E1" error occurs.
It is during the "main process (stored in the used area of the ROM 54)" (not shown) that it is determined that a display (stop symbol) error has occurred and that an "E5" error has occurred.

On the other hand, the "E6" error is an error when it is determined that the setting value is out of the normal range in step S1408 during interrupt processing, but the actual program in step S1408 (setting value error (setting value out of range) ) discrimination program) is stored outside the use area of the ROM 54 . In FIG. 133, when proceeding to step S1408, the setting value error (out of setting value range) determination program stored outside the use area is executed, and then the process returns to step S1408.

Similarly, the "E7" error is an error when it is determined that the random number value is an error in step S1410 during interrupt processing. Stored outside the used area. When proceeding to step S1410, the random number abnormality check program stored outside the use area is executed, and then the process returns to step S1410.

When the program in the used area determines that the error is unrecoverable, unrecoverable error processing 1 is executed. Execute process 2.
FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing unrecoverable error processing 1 (SS_ERROR_STOP1). FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing unrecoverable error processing 2 (SS_ERROR_STOP2).
The program for unrecoverable error processing 1 is stored in the available area of the ROM 54 , and the program for unrecoverable error processing 2 is stored outside the available area of the ROM 54 .
Further, in the unrecoverable error process 1, only digits 3 and 4 (acquisition number display LED 78) are controlled to turn on. On the other hand, in the non-recoverable error process 2, the segment P of digits 3 and 4 (acquisition number display LED 78) and digits 6 to 9 (management information display LED 754) is controlled to light up.

In FIG. 136, in step S1491, error display data (lower digit) is set. In this process, data (01000000B) with only digit 4 set to "1" is stored in the H register. This value corresponds to data in which the D6th bit of the output port 2 is set to "1".
The process then advances to step S1492 to set the upper digits as error display data. In this process, data (00100000B) with only digit 3 set to "1" is stored in the D register. This value corresponds to data in which the D5th bit of output port 2 is set to "1".

Furthermore, in this step S1492, the E register stores the segment data indicating the upper digit "E" of the unrecoverable error, namely "01111001B".
Before proceeding to unrecoverable error processing, segment data indicating the lower digits of the current unrecoverable error is stored in the L register. For example, if the current unrecoverable error is an "E1" error, the lower digit is "1", so the segment data, that is, "00000110B" is stored.
In the following example, it is assumed that the unrecoverable error 1 this time is the E1 error.

From the above, the D, E, H, and L register values are, at this point,
D register value: Data (00100000B) in which only the upper digit (digit 3) of the unrecoverable error is set to "1"
E register value: display data (01111001B) indicating the upper "E" of unrecoverable errors
H register value: Data (01000000B) in which only the lower digit (digit 4) of the unrecoverable error is set to "1"
L register value: display data (00000110B) indicating the lower "1" of the current unrecoverable error
becomes.

In the next step S1493, the output port address and the number of output ports to be cleared are set. In this embodiment, the output ports to be cleared by the unrecoverable error process 1 are output ports 0 to 6, and an address is set for each port. set.
In the next step S1494, the output ports 0 to 6 are sequentially turned off. Specifically, all "0"("00000000") are output from each address indicating output ports 0 to 6, one output port at a time. In step S1495, the next output port address is set. That is, the address indicating the output port is incremented by "1". For example, when the address of output port 0 is "0F1H", the address of output port 1 "0F2H" is set as the next address.
The flow then advances to step S1496 to determine whether all output ports have been processed, ie, whether output port 6 has been processed. When it is determined that the processing has not ended, the process returns to step S1494, and when it is determined that the processing has ended, the process proceeds to step S1497.

As described above, by turning off all the output ports 0 to 6, the active signal output before the processing is executed is turned off. This can prevent burn-in of the LED, burn-in of the motor 32, and swallowing of medals. For example, if a power failure occurs while a blocker signal is being output, the state where the blocker 45 is turned on (the state where the medal flow path is formed) will continue unless the relevant processing is executed (medal detection The medal is swallowed because no processing occurs).
Also, if the power supply is interrupted while the excitation signal for the motor 32 is being output, the excitation signal for the motor 32 will continue to be output until the reset signal is input unless this process is executed.

In the next step S1497, display data is output from the output ports 2 and 3 in order to display error upper digits. The output port 2 outputs the data stored in the D register, and the output port 3 outputs the data stored in the E register.

Next, the process advances to step S1498 to execute standby (wait) for flicker prevention of the LED. Here, how long to wait depends on the performance of the LED, but for example, it may be set to about "0.1 ms". Here, for example, a predetermined value (for example, "255") is stored in the B register, and this value is subtracted by, for example, the internal system clock. When the B register value becomes "0", it is determined that the waiting time has elapsed. and advances to the next step S1499.
In step S1499, "0" is output from output ports 2 and 3. This process is a process for preventing afterimages, like step S1431 in FIG. 134 described above.

Next, the process advances to step S1500 to execute standby (wait) for flicker prevention of the LED. This is a process for surely extinguishing the LED after outputting "0" from the output ports 2 and 3. FIG. Next, the process advances to step S1501 to switch between the upper digits and the lower digits.
Specifically, the DE register value and the HL register value are exchanged. This will
<Before replacement>
D register value: Data in which only the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error is set to "1" E register value: Display data indicating the upper "E" of an unrecoverable error H register value: Lower unrecoverable error Data in which only the digit (digit 4) is "1" L register value: Display data indicating the lower "1" of the current unrecoverable error <After replacement>
D register value: Data in which only the lower digit (digit 4) of the unrecoverable error is "1" E register value: Display data indicating the lower "1" of the current unrecoverable error H register value: Unrecoverable error Data in which only the upper digit (digit 3) is "1" L register value: display data indicating the upper "E" of an unrecoverable error.

Then, in step S1502, display data is output from output ports 2 and 3 in order to display the error lower digits. As in step S1497, output port 2 outputs the D register value, and output port 3 outputs the E register value. As a result, the output port 2 outputs "01000000" in which the digit 4 signal is "1", and the output port 3 outputs display data "00000110" indicating "1".
The process then advances to step S1503 to wait for flicker prevention. This process is the same as step S1498. Next, the process advances to step S1504 to output "0" from the output ports 2 and 3 as in step S1499. Furthermore, in the next step S1505, standby for flicker prevention is executed. This process is similar to step S1500. Then, the process returns to step S1497.

As a result of the above processing, for example, when an "E1" error occurs, the display of "E" by digit 3 and the display of "1" by digit 4 are alternately and repeatedly displayed at predetermined time intervals.
As described above, the LED display control (and ratio display processing) is executed within the timer interrupt processing. Unrecoverable errors are displayed by arithmetic processing using registers and hardware configuration.

Next, unrecoverable error processing 2 (SS_ERROR_STOP2) in FIG. 137 will be described. The unrecoverable error process 2 is, as described above, executed when an unrecoverable error is determined by a program outside the available area of the ROM 54 (for example, "E6" error or "E7" error). .
In FIG. 137, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG.
Steps S1491 to S1505 are the same as in FIG.
The unrecoverable error process 1 is a process of displaying an error number on digits 3 and 4 (acquisition number display LED 78). On the other hand, the unrecoverable error process 2 includes a process of displaying an error number on the digits 3 and 4 (acquisition number display LED 78) and displaying predetermined information on the management information display LED 74 as well.

In FIG. 137, after step S1505, the process proceeds to step S1506. In step S1506, the process of lighting segment P of digit 6 is executed. Specifically, the output port 3 outputs a signal of "10000000B" (only segment P is on), and the output port 4 outputs a signal of "00000001B" (only digit 6 is on). Next, the process advances to step S1507 to execute flicker prevention standby processing. This process is the same process as step S1498 and the like. Next, the process advances to step S1508 to output a signal of "0" from output ports 3 and 4. FIG. This process is similar to step S1499.

Next, the process advances to step S1509 to execute flicker prevention standby processing. This process is similar to step S1500.
The above process is repeated for digits 7-9. i.e.
(1) Output a signal of "10000000B" (only segment P is on) from output port 3, and output a signal with the corresponding digit turned on ("1") from output port 4. (2) Flicker prevention Standby processing (3) Turn off output ports 3 and 4 (output "0")
(4) Execute standby processing for flicker prevention.
By the above processing, the segments P of digits 6, 7, 8 and 9 are lit up in sequence. After the processing of step S1521, the process returns to step S1497.

<21st embodiment>
FIG. 138 is a diagram showing the configuration of an output port in the twenty-first embodiment, corresponding to FIG. 128 in the twentieth embodiment.
A characteristic point of the output ports of the twenty-first embodiment is that, assuming that the digit 5 is not provided, there is one output port (digit port) for transmitting digit signals (output port 3) and an output port for transmitting segment signals. The point is that there is one port (segment port) (output port 4).
In the twenty-first embodiment shown in FIG. 138, unlike the twentieth embodiment, output port 2 is not assigned a digit signal (neither is it assigned a segment signal, of course).

The output port 3 is set as an output port dedicated to digit signals. The 8 bits of the output port 3 are assigned digits 1-4 and digits 6-9.
Therefore, the digit 5 signal is not assigned to the output port 3. When the number of digits is nine including the digit 5, if it is attempted to assign it to an 8-bit signal, one bit will be short. Therefore, the digit 5 is not provided, or if the digit 5 is provided, it is assigned to another port (for example, the output port 5), and the digits 1 to 4 and 6 to 9 signals are assigned to one output port 3. Even when digit 5 is provided, digit 5 is a digit that does not need to be illuminated during normal operation (other than during setting change or setting confirmation). 9 signals are set to be managed by one output port 3.

Output port 4 is an output port dedicated to segments, and is the same as output port 3 of the twentieth embodiment.
In the 21st embodiment, when the digit 5 is not provided, the setting value is changed during setting change or setting confirmation by the stored number display LED 76 (either digit 1 or 2) or the acquired number display LED 78 (digit 3 or 4). ). In this way, there is no need to allocate a bit dedicated to the digit 5 signal to the output port. In this case, the D5 bit of output port 5 in FIG. 138 becomes an unused (empty) bit.
However, when the setting value display LED 73 (digit 5) is provided as in the twentieth embodiment, and the digit 5 signal is output, it can be assigned to the D5 bit of the output port 5, for example, as shown in FIG. .

Also in the twenty-first embodiment, since the output port 3 for outputting the digit signal and the segment output port 4 for outputting the segment signal are used as continuous output ports, the digit data and the segment data (2 bytes in total) can be output at once. can be output.
If the set value display LED 73 (digit 5) is not provided, the number of digits 1 to 4 and 6 to 9 is eight in total. It has the advantage that the number of output ports for outputting signals can be reduced to one and the management becomes easier.

FIG. 139(A) is a diagram showing the relationship between digits and segments in the twenty-first embodiment, and FIG. 139(B) is a diagram showing an LED display counter in the twenty-first embodiment. The example in FIG. 139 shows an example in which digit 5 is not included.
In the twenty-first embodiment, the assignment of digits to segments is the same as in the twentieth embodiment (Fig. 126), except that it does not have digit 5. Therefore, in the twenty-first embodiment, the effect display LED 79g is not provided among the status display LEDs 79. FIG. If an effect display LED 79g is provided, it can be assigned to the segment P of the digit 2.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2B, the signal assigned to the bit of the LED display counter and the signal assigned to the bit of the output port 3 are matched. In the same figure (B), when the bit "1" is shifted to the left by one digit at the time of the interrupt following the interrupt "8", the LED display counter becomes "0". Initialize the LED display counter to "00000001". As a result, the LED display counter becomes a counter with 8 interrupts per cycle.
Furthermore, unlike the 20th embodiment, the 1-bet display signal to the 3-bet display signal are not assigned to the LED display counter. In the twenty-first embodiment, the 1-bet display LED 79a to the 3-bet display LED 79c perform static lighting instead of dynamic lighting.
As described above, since the bet number display data is stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53, this data can be read periodically and the bet display signal can be output from the output port 2 at all times.
Furthermore, the allocation of segments P to digit signals is the same as in the twentieth embodiment.
In the twenty-first embodiment, illustration of the circuit wiring diagrams (FIGS. 129 to 131) shown in the twentieth embodiment is omitted.

FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in the twenty-first embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 134 in the twentieth embodiment. In the flowcharts described below, the same step numbers are assigned to steps that execute the same processes as in the twentieth embodiment, and overlapping descriptions are omitted. In addition, step numbers with different contents from those of the twentieth embodiment are underlined.
First, step S1531 corresponds to step S1431 in FIG. 134. Here, output port 3 (digit port) and output port 4 (segment port) are turned off. By outputting "00000000B" from these output ports 3 and 4, digits 1 to 4 and 6 to 9 are temporarily prevented from being output. As in the twentieth embodiment, this is to prevent, even for a moment, different LEDs from appearing to light up at the same time (overlaid display) when switching the display of the LEDs (prevention of afterimages). ).

In the next step S1433, the LED display counter is updated. Here, as described above, a process of shifting the "1" bit to the left by one digit is executed. Next, proceeding to step S1532, it is determined whether or not the LED display counter is "0". If it is determined to be "0", the process proceeds to step S1435, and if it is determined not to be "0", the process proceeds to step S1436.
In step S1435, an LED display counter is initialized. Here, a process of setting the LED display counter to "00000001" is executed.

Steps S1435 to S1446 are the same as in FIG. 134 (twentieth embodiment). However, in the twenty-first embodiment, there is no processing of steps S1441 and S1442 in FIG. In the twentieth embodiment, it is determined whether or not there is a display request for digit 5 (set value display LED 73). , the set value display data is obtained in step S1533.
After step S1446, the process advances to step S1533 to acquire set value display data, acquired number data, and a pressing order instruction number. If the setting is being changed, the set value data acquired in step S1533 is displayed in digit 3 or 4 (whichever is optional).

Further, in the twenty-first embodiment, the 1-bet display LED 79a to 3-bet display LED 79c perform static lighting, so the processes of steps S1452 and S1453 in FIG. 134 are not performed.
In FIG. 140, when "No" is determined in step S1451, it is determined that there is a request to display the acquired lower digit (digit 4), and the process proceeds to step S1454.
In step S1534, which corresponds to step S1458 in FIG. 134, the digit signal is output from output port 3 and the segment signal is output from output port 4. Then, the process advances to step S1535 to proceed to ratio display processing.
Other than the above, it is the same as the twentieth embodiment.

FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing the ratio display process in the twenty-first embodiment, and is a flow chart corresponding to FIG. 135 of the twentieth embodiment.
FIG. 141 differs from FIG. 135 in that it does not have steps S1473 and S1474. That is, after step S1472, the process proceeds to step S1475.
The LED display counter of the twenty-first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 139, is a counter having eight interrupts per cycle. These steps are not required since it is not determined that there is a specific ratio display requirement.
Other than the above, it is the same as the twentieth embodiment.

<22nd Embodiment>
FIG. 142(A) is a diagram showing various LEDs on the display board 75 in the twenty-second embodiment, and FIG. 142(B) is a diagram showing more specifically the management information display LED 74 in the twenty-second embodiment. FIG. 7(C) is a diagram showing the set value display LED 73 in the twenty-second embodiment. This FIG. 142 is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 125 of the twentieth embodiment.
In the twentieth embodiment (similar to the first embodiment), each LED was divided into digits 1 to 9, but in the twenty-second embodiment, the relationship between the digits and the LEDs is as follows.
Digit 1a: Upper digit of stored number display LED 76 Digit 2a: Lower digit of stored number display LED 76 Digit 3a: Upper digit of acquired number display LED 78 Digit 4a: Lower digit of acquired number display LED 78 Digit 5a: Status display LED 79
Digit 1b: Management information display LED 74 (upper information type (1000 digits))
Digit 2b: Management information display LED 74 (information type lower order (100 digits))
Digit 3b: Management information display LED 74 (higher order digits (10 digits))
Digit 4b: Management information display LED 74 (lower numerical digit (1 digit))
Digit 5b: Set value display LED 73
Furthermore, as will be described later, the segments of digits 1a-5a are referred to as segments 1A-1P, and the segments of digits 1b-5b are referred to as segments 2A-2P.

As shown in FIG. 142(A), digits 1a-4a are all 7-segment displays having dot segments (segment 1P) in 7-segments (in this respect, digits 1-4 in the twentieth embodiment are similar to digits 1-4). different). Thus, in the twenty-second embodiment, digits 1a-4a and 1b-5b can use the same 7-segment display.
Furthermore, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the digit 2, that is, the dot segment (segment P) of the lower digit of the stored number display LED 76 is used as the advantageous section display LED 77 . On the other hand, in the twenty-second embodiment, the dot segment (segment 1P) of the digit 4a indicating the lower digits of the acquisition number display LED78 is used as the advantageous section display LED77.

Also, in the management information display LED 74, the dot segment (segment 2P) of the digit 2b functions as a digit separator display LED as in the twentieth embodiment.
Furthermore, the dot segment (segment 2P) of digits 1b, 3b and 4b functions as an unrecoverable error display LED as in the twentieth embodiment.

FIG. 143 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits and segments in the twenty-second embodiment.
As noted above, segments of digits 1a-5a are segments 1A-1P and segments of digits 1b-5b are segments 2A-2P.

In FIG. 143, segment 1P of digits 1a-3a is unused. On the other hand, the segment 1P of the digit 4a (the digit indicating the lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78) is used as the advantageous section display LED 77 as described above.
Further, digit 5a constitutes a status display LED 79, and segments 1A-1G and 1P of digit 5a, as shown in FIG.
Segment 1A: 1 bet display LED 79a
Segment 1B: 2 bet indicator LED 79b
Segment 1C: 3 bet indicator LED 79c
Segment 1D: Game start display LED 79d
Segment 1E: Input indicator LED 79e
Segment 1F: Replay display LED 79f
Segment 1G: unused Segment 1P: unused are assigned.
Therefore, for example, when the digit 5 signal is output and the segment 1A signal is output, the 1 bet display LED 79a lights up.
Also, segment 2P of digit 5b (setting value display LED 73) is unused.

FIG. 144 is a diagram showing output ports in the twenty-second embodiment.
A feature of the output ports of the twenty-second embodiment is that there is one output port (output port 2) for transmitting digit signals, and there are two output ports (output ports 3 and 4) for transmitting segment signals. is.
Therefore, the points different from the twentieth embodiment and the like described above are the output port for transmitting the segment signal of the management information display LED 74 (digits 1b to 4b) and the segment signal of the storage number display LED 76 etc. (digits 1a to 4a). is provided separately from the output port for transmitting the

First, for output port 2, digit 1 to 5 signals are assigned to bits D0 to D4, respectively. Here, the digit 1 signal includes both the digit 1a signal and the digit 1b signal, and the same applies to the digit 2-5 signals. Therefore, for example, when a "1" signal is output from the D0 bit of output port 2, both digit 1a (stored number display LED 76 (upper digit)) and 1b (management information display LED 74 (information type upper)) are driven. A signal is provided.

Also, in output port 2, bits D5 to D7 are unused.
Output port 3 is an output port for segment 1A-1P signals, and segment 1A-1P signals are assigned to D0-D7 bits, respectively.
Similarly, output port 4 is an output port for segment 2A-2P signals, and segments 2A-2P signals are assigned to bits D0-D7, respectively.
The output port 5 is the same as in the twentieth embodiment.

145 to 147 are circuit diagrams showing wiring of electrical signals of the main control board 50, the display board 75, and the digits 1 (1a, 1b) to 5 (5a, 5b), respectively, showing the twentieth embodiment. 129 to 131 are diagrams corresponding to FIG.
Note that in FIG. 145, illustration of transistors and the like is omitted, as in FIG. 129 of the twentieth embodiment.
145 and 146 show electrical signal wiring on the main control substrate 50, and FIG. 147 shows electrical signal wiring on the display substrate 75. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 146, the main control board 50 is provided with a digit 5b forming a set value display LED 73 and digits 1b to 4b forming a management information display LED 74. FIG.
Further, as shown in FIG. 147, on the display substrate 75, there are six digits 1a and 2a constituting the stored number display LED 76, digits 3a and 4a constituting the acquisition number display LED 78, and digit 5a. A status display LED 79 is mounted.

As shown in FIG. 145, a main CPU 55 is provided on the main control board 50, and IC2 to IC4 having output ports 2 to 4, respectively, are provided. Although the main control board 50 is actually provided with ICs other than these three ICs, illustration thereof is omitted in the present embodiment.

IC2 is an IC for controlling digit 1-5 signals, and IC3 is an IC for controlling segment 1A-1P signals. IC4 is an IC for controlling the segment 2A-2P signals.
IC2 to IC4 are the same as in the twentieth embodiment in that they each have a clock signal input terminal, so description thereof will be omitted.

Digit 1-5 signal lines are output from D0-D4 output terminals of output port 2, respectively.
Segment 1A to 1P signal lines are output from D0 to D7 output terminals of the output port 3, respectively, and these signal lines are connected to the display substrate 75. FIG.
Furthermore, segment 2A-2P signal lines are output from D0-D7 output terminals of output port 4, respectively, and these signal lines are connected to digits 1b-5b of main control board 50. FIG.

In FIG. 146, the digit 1-5 signals are connected to the drive signal lines for digits 1b-5b, respectively.
Also, digits 1b-5b are LEDs each having eight segments (segments 2A-2G and 2P). The LEDs forming segments 2A to 2G and 2P of digits 1b to 5b are connected to segment 2A to 2G and 2P signal lines, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 147, the display substrate 75 is connected with digits 1a to 5a. The output terminals of the digit 1 signal line to the digit 4 signal line of the display substrate 75 are connected to the respective drive signal lines of the digits 1a to 4a.
Also, each of the digits 1a-4a, like the digits 1b-5b, is an LED having seven segments (segments 1A-1G and 1P). The LEDs of the segments 1A-1G of the digits 1a-3a are connected to the output terminals of the segments 1A-1G signal lines, respectively. Each segment 1P of digits 1a to 3a is unused and therefore not connected to the segment 1P signal line.
On the other hand, segments 1A-1G and 1P of digit 4a are connected to output terminals of segment 1A-1G signal lines.
Furthermore, six status display LEDs 79, specifically, 1-bet display LED 79a, 2-bet display LED 79b, 3-bet display LED 79c, game start display LED 79d, insertion display LED 79e, and replay display LED 79f are connected to the digit 5 signal line. It is

The 1-bet display LED 79a is connected to the output terminal of the segment 1A signal line, the 2-bet display LED 79b is connected to the output terminal of the segment 1B signal line, and the 3-bet display LED 79c is connected to the output terminal of the segment 1C signal line. there is
The game start display LED 79d is connected to the output terminal of the segment 1D signal line, the insertion display LED 79e is connected to the output terminal of the segment 1E signal line, and the replay display LED 79f is connected to the output terminal of the segment 1F signal line.

In the above configuration, for example, when a data signal of "1" is output from the D0 output terminal of the main CPU 55, data signals are input to the D0 input terminals of IC2 to IC4, respectively. At this moment, the XCS2 output terminal is active. At that time, the data signal is input to the D0 input terminal of IC2.
As a result, the digit 1 signal is output, and the drive signal is supplied to both the digit 1a (higher order digit of the stored number display LED 76) and the digit 1b (higher order information type of the management information display LED 74).

Also, when the digit 1 signal is being output as described above, for example, when a data signal of "1" is output from the D0 and D1 output terminals of the main CPU 55, and at this moment the XCS3 output terminal is active, The data signal is input to the D0 and D1 input terminals of IC3. This causes segment 1A and 1B signals to be output to display substrate 75, allowing current to flow through segments 1A and 1B of digit 1a.
Of course, even if the segment 1A and 1B signals are output, the segments 2A and 2B of the digit 1b are not illuminated.

On the other hand, when the digit 1 signal is being output as described above, for example, a data signal of "1" is output from the D0 and D1 output terminals of the main CPU 55, and at this moment the XCS4 output terminal is active, The data signal is input to the D0 and D1 input terminals of IC4. This outputs the segment 2A and 2B signals to digit 1b, allowing current to flow through segments 2A and 2B of digit 1b.
Of course, even if the segment 2A and 2B signals are output, the segments 1A and 1B of the digit 1a are not illuminated.

Also, for example, if a digit 5 signal is output from the D4 output terminal of IC2, and segment 1A, 1B and 1C signals are output from the D0, D1 and D2 output terminals (segment 1A, 1B and 1C signals) of IC3, then 1 bet. The display LED 79a, the 2-bet display LED 79b, and the 3-bet display LED 79c can be lit.
Even if the digit 5 signal is output, the digit 5b (set value display LED 73) does not light unless the segment 2A to 2G signals are output.
As described above, in the twenty-second embodiment, the digit 1 to 5 signals, the segment 1A to 1G and 1P signals, the segment 2A to 2G and 2P signals, nine 7 segments, and six status display LEDs 79 Control lighting.

FIG. 148A is a diagram showing the relationship between interrupts, LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP) values, digit signals, and segment signals in the twenty-second embodiment. In addition, FIG. 4B is a diagram showing the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP). This FIG. 148 is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 132 of the twentieth embodiment.
In FIG. 148(A), the LED display counter of the 22nd embodiment changes bit "1" of the LED display counter value as it progresses from interrupt "1"→"2"→... (for each interrupt). It is updated so as to shift right by one digit. Then, in the interrupt following the interrupt "5" in the figure, the LED display counter becomes "00000000" by shifting it to the right by one digit. Set to "00010000". As a result, the LED display counter repeats the values "5"→"4"→...→"1"→"5"→"4"→... for each interrupt process. That is, five interrupts constitute one cycle.

From the above, the LED display counter value is
"N" interrupt: 00010000
"N+1" interrupt: 00001000
"N+2" interrupt: 00000100
"N+3" interrupt: 00000010
"N+4" interrupt: 00000001
"N+5" interrupt: 00000000→00010000 (initialization; same value as "N" interrupt)
"N+6" interrupt: 00001000
:
becomes.

In the twenty-second embodiment, five interrupts constitute one cycle, and digits 1a to 5a and digits 1b to 5b are lit. Specifically, in FIG. 148(A), for example, when the interrupt is "1", that is, when the LED display counter value is "00010000", the digit 5 signal is output, and the status display LED 79 and the set value display LED 73 are turned on. Lighting is possible. At the time of the next interrupt "2", the LED display counter becomes "00001000", a digit 4 signal is output, and the lower digits of the acquired number display LED D78 and numerical lower digits of the management information display LED 74 can be illuminated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2B, the LED display request counter has 8 bits corresponding to the digit 1 signal at the D0 bit, the digit 2 signal at the D1 bit, and the digit 5 signal at the D4 bit. Data. Each bit of the LED display request counter is matched with the bit of output port 2 .
The LED display request counter differs from the twentieth embodiment in that the D4-th bit (the bit corresponding to digit 5) is "1" even during normal operation. This is to output the segment 1A to 1G signals of the digit 5a and light the status display LED 79 during normal operation.
In the twentieth embodiment, since one period includes five interrupts, the time during which the LED is turned off can be shortened, and the flickering of the LED can be further reduced.

For example, if the LED display counter is "00010000" and the LED display request flag is "00011111 (normal)", the result of the AND operation is "00010000" and only the digit 5 signal is turned on. However, during normal operation, only the segment 1 signal is output so that the status display LED 79 can be lit, but the segment 2 signal is not output and the set value display LED 73 (digit 5b) is controlled not to be lit.

On the other hand, during the setting change, for example, at the interrupt timing when the digit 5 signal is turned on (the LED display counter is "00010000"), the segment 2 signal is output to enable lighting of the set value display LED 73 (digit 5b).
During the setting change, for example, at an interrupt timing when the digit 3 signal is turned on (the LED display counter is "00000100"), the segment 1 signal is output for the digit 3a (higher digit of the acquisition number display LED 78), and "8 ” is displayed.

Furthermore, when the segment 1 signal is generated at the interrupt timing when the LED display counter is "00001000" (interrupt "2" in the figure), it is determined whether or not it is in the advantageous section. Whether or not it is in the advantageous section is determined, for example, by determining whether an advantageous section flag is turned on during the advantageous section (the advantageous section flag is stored at a predetermined address in the RWM 53). Then, when it is determined that it is in the advantageous section, the value obtained by ORing the generated segment 1 signal and "10000000" is output from the output port 3 as the segment 1 signal. As a result, the segment 1P (advantageous section display LED 77) of the digit 4a can be lit during the advantageous section.

FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in the twenty-second embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 134 of the twentieth embodiment. As described above, steps different from the twentieth embodiment are underlined with step numbers. Also, the same step numbers are assigned to steps that execute the same processing as in the twentieth embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted.
In FIG. 149, step S1541 turns off LED digit and segment 1 (output ports 2 and 3). This processing is processing in common with step S1431 in FIG. In the next step S1542, segment 2 (output port 4) is turned off. This process is also a process of outputting "00000000B" from the output port 4 in the same manner as the above process.

In step S1453, the LED display counter is updated. In the twenty-second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 148, updating is performed by shifting bit "1" to the right by one digit.
In the next step S1544, it is judged whether or not the LED display counter is "0". .
In step S1545, an LED display counter is initialized. In other words, when the LED display counter is "00000000" in the judgment of step S1544, the processing to set it to "00010000" is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S1436.

Step S1436 is the same processing as in the twentieth embodiment. In the next step S1546, error display data, LED display data, and bet signal data are obtained. Acquisition of error display data is the same as the processing in step S1439 in FIG. Also, the LED display data is data indicating ON/OFF of the status display LED 79 and is stored at a predetermined address within the use area of the RWM 53 . Specifically, the data are as follows.
D0: Not used D1: Not used D2: Not used D3: "1" when game can be started, "0" when game cannot be started
D4: "1" when medals can be inserted, "0" when medals cannot be inserted
D5: "1" when replay winning, "0" when replay not winning
D6: Not used D7: Not used

In the above data, bits D0 to D7 correspond to segments 1A to 1P of the status display LED 79 shown in FIG. 143, and these values are obtained.
Also, the bet signal data is the same as the data obtained in step S1454 in FIG.
When 0 bet: 00000000
When betting one card: 00000001
When 2 cards are bet: 00000011
When 3 cards are bet: 00000111
is stored at a predetermined address in the used area of the RWM 53, so that value is acquired.

Next, proceeding to step S1547, the LED display data and the bet signal data are synthesized, and the data for the output port 3 is set. This process is a process of ORing LED display data and bet signal data and storing the result of the OR operation.
The flow then advances to step S1548 to clear segment 2 data for output port 4. FIG. This process is a process of clearing the register for setting the segment 2 data.
Steps S1438 to S1455 are the same as in FIG. However, FIG. 149 does not have step S1439 in FIG. This is because the error display data has already been obtained in step S1546.
If it is determined in step S1451 that there is no request to display the upper digits of the acquired number, it means that there is a request to display the lower digits of the acquired number.

After step S1455, the flow advances to step S1549 to set segment 2 data for output port 4. FIG. The data set here are the segment 2 data (segments 2A to 2G) corresponding to the set value display data. This is because the segment 2 data of the digits 1b to 4b are not set in this flow chart because the digits 1b to 4b are lit in the ratio display process to be described later.
Next, proceeding to step S1550, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display digit 5b (set value display LED 73). Here, the display request for the digit 5b is made when the LED display counter value is "00010000" and the setting is being changed or confirmed. If it is determined that there is a request to display digit 5b, the process proceeds to step S1554, and if it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S1551.

In step S1551, segment 1 (1A to 1G) data for output port 3 is set. Segment 1 data for output port 3 was stored in a predetermined register in step S1547. Next, the process advances to step S1552 to set the data for the advantageous section display LED 77. FIG. Here, whether or not the game is in the advantageous interval is determined by, for example, an advantageous interval flag that is turned on during the advantageous interval. Then, when it is determined that it is in the advantageous section, it is determined whether or not the digit lit up in this interrupt processing is digit 4. When the LED display counter value is "00001000", it is determined that digit 4 is lit. In this case, segment 1 data set in step S1551 and data obtained by performing an OR operation of "10000000" are set as segment 1 data for output port 3. FIG. As a result, the data enabling the segment 1P of the digit 4a to light up is set.

Next, proceeding to step S1553, the segment 2 data for output port 4 set in step S1549 is cleared. This is to prevent the digit 5b from lighting when there is no request to display the digit 5b (set value display LED 73) ("No" in step S1550).
Then, in step S1554, the digit signal is output from the output port 2, and the segment 1 signal is output from the output port 3. The process then advances to step S1555 to output the segment 2 signal from the output port 4. FIG. Here, when the segment 2 data is cleared in step S1553, the output port 4 outputs "00000000". Then, the process advances to step S1556 to shift to a ratio display process for the area outside the use area.

FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing ratio display processing in the twenty-second embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 135 of the twentieth embodiment.
Comparing FIG. 150 and FIG. 135, the difference is that steps S1473 and S1474 are not provided.
Also, in step S1561, the digit signal is output from the output port 2, and the segment 2 signal is output from the output port 4. FIG.
Points other than the above are the same as those of the twentieth embodiment.

<Twenty-third embodiment>
FIG. 151 is a diagram showing output ports 2 to 6 in the twenty-third embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 144 in the twenty-second embodiment.
In the twenty-third embodiment, as in the twenty-second embodiment, there is one output port (output port 3) for transmitting digit signals, and there are two output ports (output ports 4 and 6) for transmitting segment signals. be. .
The output port 2 of the twenty-third embodiment is a port for outputting a bet indication signal and a data strobe signal.
In the twenty-second embodiment, the 1-bet display LED 79a to the 3-bet display LED 79c are included in the digit 5a to perform dynamic lighting. On the other hand, in the twenty-third embodiment, the 1-bet display LED 79a to the 3-bet display LED 79c are statically lit as in the twenty-first embodiment.

FIG. 152 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits and segments in the twenty-third embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 152, the twenty-third embodiment has digits 1-5 as described above, which are divided into digits 1a-5a and digits 1b-4b.
The digit 1a consists of a stored number display LED 76 (upper digit) and a game start display LED 79d, the former being composed of segments 1A to 1G and the latter being composed of segment 1P.
The digit 2a consists of a stored number display LED 76 (lower digit) and an input display LED 79e, the former being composed of segments 1A to 1G and the latter being composed of segment 1P.

The digit 3a consists of an acquisition number display LED 78 (upper digit) and a replay display LED 79f, the former being composed of segments 1A to 1G and the latter being composed of segment 1P.
The digit 4a consists of an acquisition number display LED 78 (lower digit) and an advantageous section display LED 77, the former being composed of segments 1A to 1G and the latter being composed of segment 1P.
The digit 5a consists of a set value display LED73. Segment 1P of digit 5a is unused.
Digits 1b to 4b, on the other hand, are the same as in the twenty-second embodiment (FIG. 143). Note that the digit 5b is not provided in the twenty-third embodiment.

FIG. 153A is a diagram showing the relationship between interrupts, LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP) values, digit signals, and segment signals in the twenty-third embodiment. In addition, FIG. 4B is a diagram showing the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP). This FIG. 153 is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 148 of the twenty-second embodiment.
In the 23rd embodiment, an LED display counter that cycles once every five interrupts is used. As in the 22nd embodiment (FIG. 148), this LED display counter shifts the bit "1" to the right by one digit for each interrupt, and when it becomes "0", the initial value "00010000" ”. As a result, as in the 22nd embodiment, the counter has one cycle for five interrupts.

As shown in FIG. 153(A), when the interrupt is "1", the digit 5 signal is output and the set value display LED 73 becomes the LED to be lit.
When the interrupt is "2", a digit 4 signal is output, and the lower digits of the acquired number display LED 78 and the numerical lower digits of the management information display LED 74 are to be lit.
Furthermore, when the interrupt is "3", a digit 3 signal is output, and the upper digits of the acquisition number display LED 78 and the numerical upper digits of the management information display LED 74 are to be lit.
Furthermore, when the interrupt is "4", a digit 2 signal is output, and the lower digits of the stored number display LED 76 and the lower information type of the management information display LED 74 are to be lit.
Further, when the interrupt is "5", a digit 1 signal is output, and the upper digits of the stored number display LED 76 and the upper information type of the management information display LED 74 are to be lit.

Furthermore, as described above, among the status display LEDs 79, the 1-bet display LEDs 79a to 3-bet display LEDs 79c perform static lighting, and therefore are not LEDs to be lit during interrupt processing. Of the state display LEDs 79, the game start display LED 79d is assigned to the upper digit segment 1P of the stored number display LED 76, and the insertion display LED 79e is assigned to the lower digit segment 1P of the stored number display LED76. Further, the replay display LED 79f is assigned to the segment 1P of the upper digits of the acquisition number display LED78. Also, the advantageous section display LEDs 77 are assigned to the segments 1P of the lower digits of the acquired number display LEDs 78, as in the twenty-second embodiment (FIG. 143). Further, in the twenty-third embodiment, similarly to the twenty-second embodiment, the effect display LED 79g is not provided.

As described above, if the status display LED 79 and the advantageous section display LED 77, excluding the 1-bet display LED 79a to 3-bet display LED 79c, are assigned to the segment 1P of the digits 1a to 4a, an LED display counter with 5 interrupts per cycle can be used. , the status display LED 79 and the advantageous section display LED 77 can be dynamically lit.

<24th Embodiment>
FIG. 154 is a diagram showing output ports 2 to 7 in the twenty-fourth embodiment, which corresponds to FIG. 128 in the twentieth embodiment.
In the twenty-fourth embodiment, two output ports (output ports 3 and 6) for outputting digit signals are provided, and two output ports (output ports 4 and 7) for outputting segment signals are provided. characterized by
In the twenty-fourth embodiment, digits 1 to 9 are provided as in the twentieth embodiment.
Also, the segments of digits 1 to 5 are assumed to be segments 1A to 1P.
Furthermore, the segments of digits 6-9 are referred to as segments 2A-2P.
Note that the digit 5 may or may not be provided as in the twenty-third embodiment, and if the digit 5 is not provided, the D4 bit of the output port 3 becomes an empty bit. In this case, one of the digits 1 to 4 is used as the set value display LED, as described above.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the 1-bet indication signal to the 3-bet indication signal are assigned to the D0 to D2 bits of the output port 2, as in the twentieth embodiment.
The digit port consists of an output port 3 for outputting digit 1-5 signals and an output port 6 for outputting digit 6-9 signals.
The segment port consists of an output port 4 for outputting segment 1A-1P signals corresponding to digits 1-5 and an output port 7 for outputting segment 2A-2P signals corresponding to digits 6-9.

Therefore, when lighting digits 1 to 5, for example, the digit signal is output from output port 3 and the segment 1 signal is output from output port 4. FIG.
When lighting digits 6 to 9, the digit signal is output from the output port 7 and the segment 2 signal is output from the output port 6. FIG.

FIG. 155 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits and segments in the twenty-fourth embodiment. The relationship between digits 1-5 and segments 1A-1P is the same as the relationship between digits 1a-5a and segments 1A-1P in the twenty-third embodiment (FIG. 152).
The relationship between digits 6-9 and segments 2A-2P is the same as the relationship between digits 1b-4b and segments 2A-2P in the twenty-third embodiment (FIG. 152).

FIG. 156 is a diagram showing Example 1 of the LED display counter in the twenty-fourth embodiment. This LED display counter is similar to the LED display counter of the twenty-third embodiment shown in FIG.
For example, an interrupt "1" outputs a digit 5 signal, and an interrupt "2" outputs a digit 4 signal and a digit 9 signal. In interrupt "3", the digit 3 signal and the digit 8 signal are output. Furthermore, at interrupt "4", the digit 2 signal and the digit 7 signal are output. In addition, the interrupt "5" outputs a digit 1 signal and a digit 6 signal.

FIG. 157 is a diagram showing example 2 of the LED display counter in the twenty-fourth embodiment. In Example 2, an LED display counter 1 is provided within the use area of the RWM 53 and an LED display counter 2 is provided outside the use area of the RWM 53 .
The LED display counter 1 is a counter for outputting a digit 1 signal to a digit 5 signal for each interrupt, and is a counter with 5 interrupts per cycle.
On the other hand, the LED display counter 2 is a counter for outputting a digit 6 signal to a digit 9 signal for each interrupt, and is a counter with 4 interrupts per cycle.
Thus, an LED display counter for lighting digits 1-5 and an LED display counter for lighting digits 6-9 may be provided independently. Also, since one cycle of the LED display counters of the two is different, the lighting timing of digits 1 to 5 and the lighting timing of digits 6 to 9 are different. It should be noted that there is no particular problem even if the lighting timing is different.

FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in the twenty-fourth embodiment, which corresponds to FIG. 134 in the twentieth embodiment.
It is assumed that the LED display counter is that of Example 1 (FIG. 156).
First, in step S1571, "0" is output from the output ports 3 and 4 in order to turn off the output ports 3 and 4. FIG. This is because the digits 1 to 5 are completely extinguished once.
Next, in step S1572, "0" is output from the output ports 6 and 7 in order to turn off the output ports 6 and 7. This is because the digits 6 to 9 are completely extinguished once.

In step S1573, the value is updated so that bit "1" of the LED display counter is right-shifted by one digit. In the next step S1574, it is determined whether or not the LED display counter is "0". If it is determined not to be "0", the process proceeds to step S1436, and if it is determined to be "0", the process proceeds to step S1475. In step S1475, an LED display counter is initialized. That is, as shown in FIG. 156, the value is "00010000". Then, the process proceeds to step S1436.

Steps S1436 to S1451 are the same as in FIG. 134 (twentieth embodiment).
In the twenty-fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 156, the 1-bet display LEDs 79a to 3-bet display LEDs 79c perform static lighting, and therefore do not have the process of step S1453 in FIG.
Further, when the determination in step S1451 is "No", there is a request to display the acquired lower digits, so there is no branch for determining whether or not there is a request to display acquired lower digits, and step S1454. proceed to Steps S1454 to S1457 are the same as in FIG. 133 (twentieth embodiment).
After step S1457, the process advances to step S1576 to output a digit (one of digits 1 to 5) signal from output port 3 and output a segment 1 signal from output port 4. FIG. Then, the process proceeds to step S1577.

FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT) in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 135 in the twentieth embodiment.
If it is determined in step S1472 that there is a ratio display request, the process proceeds to step S1475 as in the twenty-first embodiment (FIG. 141).
The processing from step S1475 to step S1486 is the same as in FIG. 135 (twentieth embodiment). After step S1486, the process advances to step S1581 to output the digit signal from the output port 6 and output the segment 2 signal from the output port 7. FIG. Then, the process returns to step S1460 in FIG.

Although the twentieth to twenty-fourth embodiments have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and the following various modifications are possible.
(1) In the above embodiment, the program for LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is stored within the use area, and the program for ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT) is stored outside the use area. The reason for setting in this way is to prevent the capacity in the used area from being compressed. Therefore, if there is enough space in the used area, it is possible to store the ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT) program in the used area.
Similarly, the out-of-use area data table shown in FIG. 127 can also be stored within the use area.
That is, the program and data for controlling lighting of the management information display LED 74 do not necessarily have to be stored outside the use area.

In general, a program for preventing fraud may be stored outside the usage area. Since it can be said that the display of the management information such as the ratio of the advantageous section is for fraud prevention, it is stored outside the use area in the above embodiment.
In addition to the above programs stored outside the use area, in FIG. Examples include a check program and a backflow check program for medal selectors.

(2) Taking the twentieth embodiment as an example, for example, as shown in FIGS. 134 and 135, LED display control (I_LED_OUT) (illumination control of digits 1 to 5) is first executed, and then ratio display processing is performed. (S_LED_OUT) (lighting control of digits 6 to 9) was executed, but the order is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to shift to LED display control (I_LED_OUT), which is lighting control within the use area, after executing ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT), which is lighting control outside the use area.

(3) Segment P (or segment 2P) of digits 6 to 9 (digits 1b to 4b in the 23rd embodiment) is a segment that lights up when an unrecoverable error occurs.
However, it is not limited to this, and may be set to a segment that lights up when a predetermined condition other than an unrecoverable error is satisfied. Alternatively, the segment may physically exist but be unused.

<25th embodiment>
In the twenty-fifth embodiment, when a specific combination of symbols (combination of symbols in which "Cherry" stops in the left middle stage when the left reel 31 stops: middle stage cherry) results in a stoppable lottery result (small winning combination E1 won). always shifts to the advantageous section and displays the advantageous section by the advantageous section display LED 77 .

Further, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, when 1BBA is won, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section, and when 1BBB is won, it is not possible to shift to the advantageous section. Furthermore, the winning probability of 1BBA is set to be the same for all set values, and the winning probability of 1BBB is set to increase as the set value increases. As a result, the lower the set value, the higher the probability of transition to the advantageous section when 1BB (sum of 1BBA and 1BBB) is won.

Furthermore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, when the advantageous section ends, the first initialization process (initialization process at the end of the advantageous section) is executed, and when the setting value is changed, the second initialization process (Initialization processing when changing settings) is executed. Further, in the first initialization process, the RT at the end of the advantageous section is maintained while shifting to the normal section, and in the second initialization process, the transition is made to the non-RT and then to the normal section. Furthermore, in the first initialization process and the second initialization process, the information regarding the advantageous section is cleared. As a result, when the first initialization process is executed and when the second initialization process is executed, the information regarding the advantageous section is shifted to the normal section in the same state.

Furthermore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, it is possible to end the advantageous section when the indicating function is operated at least once during the advantageous section. Also, in an advantageous section, if 1BB (1BBA or 1BBB) is won before the first instruction function is activated, the advantageous section can be terminated without activating the instruction function. After the shift to the advantageous section, until the specific condition is satisfied, the instruction function is activated even if the game (the game when the bell (small combination B) is won) has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 (the game when the bell (small combination B) is won)). don't let

160 to 167 are diagrams showing the set numbers of the accessory condition device and the winning and replay condition device for each RT, and correspond to FIGS. 17 and 18 in the first embodiment.
The winning probability is obtained by dividing the numerical values shown in FIGS. 160 to 167 by “65536”. For example, in FIG. 160, the set number for single winning of 1BBA is set to "70" for both non-RT and RT1 to RT3. Therefore, the probability of winning a single 1BBA is "70/65536".

FIG. 160 is a set number table of a condition device that is common to settings and can be shifted to an advantageous section, and corresponds to FIG. 17 of the first embodiment.
Here, "setting common" means that there is no setting difference, that is, setting 1 to setting 6 have the same number, which is the same as in the first embodiment.
In addition, in FIG. 160, in the normal section, “○” means that the transition to the advantageous section, “×” means that it does not shift to the advantageous section, and in the advantageous section, “△” is the game in the advantageous section. As in FIG. 17 of the first embodiment, it means that the number of games can be added, and "x" means that the number of games played in the advantageous section cannot be added.

In FIG. 17 of the first embodiment, 1BBA has a time when it wins alone, a time when it wins with a small winning combination D, and a time when it wins with a small winning combination E1. It is only possible to win a single win, and there is no possibility of winning multiple wins with minor wins. As shown in FIG. 160, the set number for single winning of 1BBA is "70" in common.
In addition, in FIG. 17 of the first embodiment, the small winning combination E1 has a case where it wins alone and a case where it wins in combination with 1BBA. , There is no case of winning duplicates with special roles.

Furthermore, in FIG. 17 of the first embodiment, when the small winning combination E1 is won, there are times when the normal section transitions to the advantageous section and times when the normal section does not transition to the advantageous section. When the winning combination E1 is won, the normal section always shifts to the advantageous section. As shown in FIG. 160, the set number for the single winning of the minor winning combination E1 is "1000" in common. Then, in the normal section, when the small winning combination E1 is won, the game always shifts to the advantageous section.

Further, the small combination D is divided into numbers that shift from the normal section to the advantageous section and numbers that do not shift from the normal section to the advantageous section, as in FIG. 17 of the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 160, the total number of entries for a single winning of the small win D is "550", of which the number of entries that shift from the normal section to the advantageous section is "50", and the normal section to the advantageous section. The number that does not migrate is "500". That is, in the normal section, in the case of a single winning of the small combination D, if the number "50" is won, the transition to the advantageous section is made, but if the number "500" is won , do not move to the advantageous section.

FIGS. 161 to 167 are numerical tables of condition devices that do not shift to the advantageous section and do not add the advantageous section, and correspond to FIG. 18 of the first embodiment.
In FIG. 18 of the first embodiment, setting numbers of setting 1 and setting 6 are shown representatively.
In addition, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the transition to the advantageous section or the addition of the advantageous section is limited to when the condition device shown in FIG. 160 is won, and when the condition device shown in FIGS. Also, do not shift to the advantageous section and do not add the advantageous section.

FIG. 161 illustrates the setting numbers for setting 1 to setting 6 during non-RT. Similarly, FIG. 162 illustrates the numbers of settings 1 to 6 at RT1, FIG. 163 illustrates the numbers of settings 1 to 6 at RT2, and FIG. 164 shows setting 1 at RT3. FIG. 165 shows the numbers of settings 1 to 6 at RT4.
Also, FIG. 166 shows the numbers of setting 1 to setting 6 during 1BBA game (when 1BBA is activated), and FIG. 167 shows the number of setting 1 to setting 6 during 1BBB game (when 1BBB is activated). showing.

In FIG. 18 of the first embodiment, 1BBA is repeatedly won with the minor winning combination E2 at different probabilities for each set value. In addition, 1BBB has a time when it wins alone and a time when it wins with a minor combination D at different probabilities for each set value.
On the other hand, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 160, 1BBA is common to all settings and can only be won singly. Not at all. In addition, 1BBB, as shown in FIGS. 161 to 164, only wins a single win with a different probability for each set value, and does not have a case of winning multiple wins with minor wins.

As described above, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the numbers of the accessory condition device and the winning and replay condition device for each RT are determined as shown in FIGS. 160 to 167. FIG.
For this reason, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, when a small winning combination D (watermelon) is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the advantageous interval is entered, and the advantageous interval display LED 77 lights up (indicating that it is an advantageous interval). ) and a time when the advantageous interval display LED 77 does not light up (ie, the advantageous interval is not displayed).
On the other hand, when the small winning combination E1 (middle stage cherry) is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning section always shifts to the advantageous section and the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up.

Further, when a small winning combination D is won by the combination lottery means 61, the transition is made to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, there are cases when the designated game section is selected and when the designated game section is not selected. have
Further, when the small winning combination E1 is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the transition is made to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, there are cases where the designated game section is shifted and when the designated game section is not shifted. have

FIG. 168(a) is a diagram showing transition to the advantageous interval and lighting of the advantageous interval display LED 77 when a rare role is won in the first embodiment, and FIG. 168(b) is a diagram when a rare role is won in the twenty-fifth embodiment. is a diagram showing the presence or absence of transition to an advantageous section and lighting of an advantageous section display LED 77. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 168(a), in the first embodiment, when the small winning combination E1 (middle stage cherry) is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, there is a probability of ``250/65536'' to shift to the advantageous section, and Although the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up, there is a probability of "750/65536" that the transition to the advantageous section does not occur and the advantageous section display LED 77 does not light up.

Similarly, in the first embodiment, when the small winning combination D (watermelon) is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, there is a probability of "50/65536" that the transition to the advantageous interval occurs and the advantageous interval display LED 77 lights up. , with a probability of "500/65536", the transition to the advantageous section does not occur and the advantageous section display LED 77 does not light up.
Here, in the game in which the small winning combination E1 is won, when the left reel 31 is stopped, "cherry" (ie, "middle stage cherry") can be stopped in the left middle stage. In addition, when the minor winning combination E1 is won, there is a case where the player moves to the instructed game section thereafter. Therefore, when the middle cherry stops, the player expects a shift to the instructed game section. In this way, the minor combination E1 is a rare combination that is highly expected to shift to the designated game section.

However, when a minor winning combination E1 is won, if there is a transition to the advantageous section and a non-advanting section transition, in the game in which the minor winning combination E1 is won, depending on whether or not the advantageous section display LED 77 is illuminated, the advantageous section is entered. The player will know whether to transfer or not. In this case, it is not possible to maintain the player's expectation for the transition to the indicated game section by winning the small winning combination E1.
On the other hand, when the small winning combination E1 is won, the game is always shifted to the advantageous section, and in this advantageous section, the game is always shifted to the designated game section. It becomes monotonous.

Therefore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 168(b), with a probability of "1000/65536", the small winning combination E1 (middle stage cherry) is won by the winning combination lottery means 61. , and the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up.
Furthermore, by winning the small winning combination E1 in the combination lottery means 61, the transition to the advantageous section and when the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up, the transition to the indicated game section (AT) is made with a probability of "64/256". However, with a probability of "192/256", it does not shift to the designated game section. As a result, the probability of transition to the designated game section (AT) when the middle stage cherry can be stopped is 25%.

In this way, when the small winning combination E1 (middle stage cherry) is won, the transition is always made to the advantageous section and the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on. Since it is not possible to know whether or not the game is to be played, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for the transition to the designated game section over a plurality of games.

Further, as shown in FIG. 168(b), when a small winning combination D (watermelon) is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, there is a probability of "50/65536" that the transition to the advantageous interval occurs, and the advantageous interval display LED 77 is turned on. Although it lights up, there is a probability of "500/65536" that the transition to the advantageous section does not occur and the advantageous section display LED 77 does not light up.
Further, when a small winning combination D is won by the combination lottery means 61, the transition is made to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, the designated game section (AT) is selected with a probability of ``32/256''. However, with a probability of "224/256", it does not shift to the designated game section.

In this way, when the small winning combination D (watermelon) is won, the player can be informed of whether or not to shift to the advantageous section by whether or not the advantageous section display LED 77 is illuminated. Further, when the small winning combination D is won, when the transition to the advantageous section and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, it is in a state where it is not known whether the transition to the instructed game section will be made or not, so there is a sense of expectation for the transition to the instructed game section. can be given to the player over multiple games.

In addition, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, when the small winning combination E1 (middle stage cherry) is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the AT determines whether or not to shift to the instructed game section (AT) separately from the winning combination lottery means 61. A lottery (two-stage lottery) will be conducted.
Furthermore, when winning the small winning combination D (watermelon) with the set number "50", the AT lottery is conducted in the same manner as when winning the small winning combination E1.
In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the main control board 50 is provided with an AT lottery counter that counts the range from "0" to "255" as one cycle. Then, an AT lottery is performed using the 1-byte random number obtained from the AT lottery counter.

Also, when winning the small winning combination E1, when winning by AT lottery (decided to shift to the instructed game section), after shifting to the advantageous section, until the predetermined number of games (for example, 32 games) is consumed, the instructed game section When the prescribed number of games is consumed without shifting to the designated game section. That is, after transitioning to the advantageous section, it is in the premonition (main premonition) until the predetermined number of games is completed, and when the predetermined number of games is completed, the AT is entered.
On the other hand, when the small winning combination E1 is won, if the AT lottery does not win (it is decided not to shift to the instructed game section), the advantageous section can be terminated by operating the instruction function at least once. It becomes possible. That is, it becomes a so-called false sign.

Also, when the player wins the small winning combination D with the set number "50" and wins the AT lottery, the same as when winning the small winning combination E1 wins the AT lottery, after shifting to the advantageous section, the predetermined number of games is played. After going through the omen (main omen), it rushes into AT.
Furthermore, when winning the small winning combination D with the number "50" and failing to win the AT lottery, it is the same as when winning the small winning combination E1 and failing to win the AT lottery. becomes.

In this way, for a winning combination (small winning combination E1) with a high degree of expectation for shifting to the designated game section (AT), the advantageous section display LED 77 is always turned on at the time of winning, regardless of whether or not there is a shift to the designated game section. By designing to play a game in an advantageous section (a real sign or a fake sign), it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the shift to the instructed game section over a plurality of games.
On the other hand, for a winning combination (small winning combination D) with a low degree of expectation for shifting to the designated game section (AT), the advantageous section display LED 77 is designed so that it may or may not be illuminated when winning. , it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations for the transition to the instructed game section.

In addition, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, when the player wins the small win D with the set number "50", the shift to the indicated game section is made according to the result of the AT lottery, in the same way as when the small win E1 is won. However, it may be designed so that when the player wins the small winning combination D with the set number "50", the transition to the indicated game section is made without fail.
In this case, the advantageous section display LED 77 is always turned on when winning, and the advantageous section display LED 77 at the time of winning is a small winning combination E1 that can prompt the transition to the instructed game section in the game in the advantageous section (real sign or false sign). The role of the small combination D which can immediately determine whether or not to shift to the instructed game section by the presence or absence of the lighting of is made clearer, and it is possible to design a well-balanced game.

FIG. 169 is a diagram showing the 1BB winning probability for each set value and the advantageous zone transition probability at the time of 1BB winning in the twenty-fifth embodiment.
In the twenty-fifth embodiment, there are two types of special roles, 1BBA and 1BBB.
Further, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, when 1BBA is won in the normal section, the game always shifts to the advantageous section. On the other hand, when 1BBB is won in the normal section, it does not shift to the advantageous section.

Furthermore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 160, the set number for winning 1BBA is commonly set to "70" for both non-RT and RT1 to RT3.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 169, the winning probability of 1BBA is "70/65536" for both non-RT and RT1 to RT3. That is, the winning probability of 1BBA is set to be the same for all set values.

Furthermore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 161 to 164, the set number for winning 1BBB is “80” for setting 1 and “80” for setting 2 in both non-RT and RT1 to RT3. is set to "88" for setting 3, "96" for setting 4, "104" for setting 4, "112" for setting 5, and "120" for setting 6.
Therefore, the winning probability of 1BBB is as shown in FIG. 169, and increases as the set value increases.

In addition, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the combined value of the numbers for winning 1BB, that is, the numbers for winning 1BBA and the numbers for winning 1BBB are "150" for setting 1 and "158" for setting 2. , "166" for setting 3, "174" for setting 4, "182" for setting 5, and "190" for setting 6.
Therefore, the winning probability of 1BB (the winning probability of 1BBA and 1BBB combined) is as shown in FIG. 169, and increases as the set value increases.

Therefore, the probability of transition to the advantageous section when winning 1BB is (70÷150×100≈) “46.7”% when the setting is 1. Similarly, 44.3% for setting 2, 42.2% for setting 3, 40.2% for setting 4, and 38.5% for setting 5. , setting 6 is "36.8"%.
That is, the probability of transition to the advantageous section when winning 1BB increases as the set value decreases.

Here, in the slot machine 10, as the set value increases, the winning probability of the special combination (1BB) generally increases.
However, when a special role is won, in addition to being able to shift to a special game, if it is possible to shift to an advantageous section, the difference in the player's advantage between the low setting and the high setting increases. There is a risk of overdoing it.

Therefore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 169, the winning probability of 1BBA that can shift to the advantageous section is set to be the same for all set values, and the winning probability of 1BBB that does not shift to the advantageous section is set higher. I'm trying to raise it according to.
As a result, the winning probability of 1BB, that is, the winning probability of the sum of 1BBA and 1BBB, increases as the set value increases, and the probability of transition to the advantageous section when winning 1BB increases as the set value decreases. Become. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the difference in the player's advantage from becoming too large between the low setting and the high setting.

Also, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of winning 1BB, but the lower the set value, the higher the probability of transition to the advantageous section when winning 1BB. It is possible to give the player the impression that there is a set difference in the probability of transition to the advantageous section even though there is no set difference.

Furthermore, it is possible to allow the player to guess the set value from the probability of transition to the advantageous section at the time of winning 1BB. That is, it is possible to provide the player with an element for guessing the set value.
Furthermore, the decision not to move to the advantageous section would originally disappoint the player. Therefore, even if it is decided not to shift to the advantageous section at the time of winning 1BB, the player can expect that the set value is high, so that the player will not be disappointed.

Further, when the instruction function is operated at least once in the advantageous section, the advantageous section can be terminated. In particular, in an advantageous section that does not shift to the instructed game section (AT), the instruction function is activated at least once in order to be able to finish the advantageous section.
Here, the "operation of the instruction function at least once" is a conditional device (minor combination B group) that can obtain the maximum number of payouts ("9") among games having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42. It must be done in the game you won.
Therefore, even if the instruction function is activated when the small combination C group is won (up to 3 cards), it does not correspond to "at least one operation of the instruction function".
Hereinafter, when the order bell for the small winning combination B is meant, it will be described as "push order bell (small combination B group)".

It should be noted that the operation of the instruction function at least once, which is required to enable the end of the advantageous section having no designated game section, is sometimes referred to as "guarantee navigation" or the like.
Furthermore, when winning the special combination (1BBA or 1BBB) before the first indication function is activated, the advantageous section can be ended without activating the indication function.
In addition, in the 25th embodiment, only 1BB (first type role product continuous operating device) is provided as a special role, and 2BB (second type role product continuous operating device) is not provided, but the first instruction function Even when 2BB is won before activation, the advantageous section can be ended without activating the instruction function.

Further, the "one-time instruction determination flag" is a flag indicating that at least one instruction function has been operated to enable the end of the advantageous section.
A storage area is provided on the RWM 53 for storing a one-time instruction determination flag.
When the one-time instruction determination flag is on, "1" is stored in the one-time instruction determination flag storage area on the RWM 53, and when the one-time instruction determination flag is off, "0" is stored. .

FIG. 170 is a flow chart showing the flow of instruction function activation processing in the twenty-fifth embodiment.
170, first, in step S2001, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the pressing order bell (minor combination B group) is won. Here, if it is determined that the winning order Bell (small win group B) is won, the process proceeds to the next step S2002. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pressing order bell (small win group B) has not been won, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

In the next step S2002, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the player is staying in an advantageous section. Here, if it is determined that the user is staying in the advantageous section, the process proceeds to the next step S2003. On the other hand, if it is determined that the vehicle is not staying in the advantageous section (staying in the normal section), the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
When proceeding to step S2003, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the player is staying in the designated game section (AT). Here, when it is determined that the player is staying in the instructed game section, the process proceeds to the next step S2004. On the other hand, when it is determined that the player is not staying in the instructed game section, the process proceeds to step S2007.

In step S2004, the main CPU 55 displays push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 by activating the instruction function. At this time, on the sub-control board 80 side, the image display device 23 notifies the order of correct keystrokes. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2005.
After proceeding to step S2005, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied. Specifically, the number of games played in the advantageous section has been exhausted (the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a becomes "0"), and the instruction function has been operated at least once (the correct order has been notified at least once). ) or a special role (1BBA or 1BBB). Here, when it is determined that the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied, the process proceeds to the next step S2006. On the other hand, if it is determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are not satisfied, step S2006 is skipped and the processing according to this flowchart ends.

In step S2006, the main CPU 55 executes initialization processing (RAM clearing processing) at the end of the advantageous section. In the initialization process at the end of the advantageous section, the information stored in the storage area of the RWM 53, which is the information regarding the advantageous section, including the one-time instruction determination flag, is cleared. Then, when the initialization process at the end of the advantageous section is executed, the process according to this flowchart ends.
In step S2007, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not a special combination (1BBA or 1BBB) is won. Here, when it is determined that the special combination has been won, the process proceeds to the next step S2008. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special combination has not been won, the process skips step S2008 and proceeds to step S2005.

In step S2008, the main CPU 55 turns on the one-time instruction determination flag. Specifically, in step S2008, the main CPU 55 does not operate the instruction function, but sets "1" in the storage area of the one-time instruction determination flag on the RWM 53. FIG. Then, the process proceeds to step S2005.
In step S2009, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the storage area value of the one-time instruction determination flag on the RWM 53 is "1". Here, when it is determined to be "1", that is, when it is determined that the one-time instruction determination flag is ON, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, if it is "0", that is, if it is determined that the one-time instruction determination flag is off, the process proceeds to the next step S2010.

In step S2010, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not a specific condition (one-time instruction operation condition) is satisfied.
Here, the "one-time instruction activation condition" is a condition that permits the operation of the instruction function at least once to enable the end of the advantageous section.
In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the "one-time instruction activation condition" is defined as "having completed a predetermined number of games (for example, '15 games') after shifting to the advantageous section".
In addition, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the main control board 50 is provided with a completed game number counter for counting the number of games played after shifting to the advantageous section.

Then, in step S2010, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the count value of the number-of-games counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, "15"). It is determined that the operating conditions are satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S2011. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is less than the predetermined value, it is determined that the one-time instruction operation condition is not satisfied, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

When proceeding to step S2011, the main CPU 55 displays push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 by activating the instruction function. Also, the operation of the instruction function in step S2011 is for enabling the end of the advantageous section. At this time, on the sub-control board 80 side, the image display device 23 notifies the order of correct keystrokes. Then, when the instruction function is activated, the process proceeds to the next step S2012.
In step S<b>2012 , the main CPU 55 sets “1” in the storage area of the one-time instruction determination flag on the RWM 53 . Then, the process proceeds to step S2005.

FIG. 171 is a time chart showing an example of activating the instruction function when the first push-order bell (minor combination B group) is won after shifting to an advantageous section having no instruction game section (AT).
An advantageous section having no instruction game section can be terminated when the instruction function is operated at least once or when a special winning combination is won before the operation of the instruction function for the first time.
As shown in FIG. 171, before the transition to the advantageous section, the instruction function is not activated even if the pushing order bell (small combination B group) is won. After the shift to the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated in the game in which the pressing order bell (small combination B group) is won first. At this time, on the main control board 50 side, the one-time instruction determination flag is turned on, and on the sub-control board 80 side, the image display device 23 notifies the correct pressing order.

Further, once the one-time instruction determination flag is turned on, the one-time instruction determination flag is maintained in the on state until the end of the advantageous section.
Furthermore, when the one-time instruction determination flag is in the ON state, the instruction function is not activated even if the winning order of the bell (small combination B group) is won.
Then, when the conditions for ending the advantageous interval are satisfied, the advantageous interval is ended, and the one-time instruction determination flag is turned off by executing initialization processing (RAM clearing processing) at the end of the advantageous interval.

FIG. 172 is a time chart showing an example of canceling the operation of the instruction function by winning a special combination before the operation of the first instruction function after shifting to the advantageous section having no instruction game section.
As shown in FIG. 172, before the shift to the advantageous section, the instruction function is not activated even if the winning order bell (minor combination B group) is won. Then, in FIG. 172, after the shift to the advantageous section, the special combination is won before the pressing order bell (small combination B group) is won for the first time, that is, before the first indication function is activated. At this time, the instruction function is not activated, but the one-time instruction determination flag is turned on. After that, the one-time instruction determination flag remains on until the advantageous section ends.

Also, when the special role is won, the winning information of the special role is turned on, and when the winning special role is won, the winning information of the special role is turned off. Furthermore, from the time when the special role is won until the prize is won, the state is internal, and the winning information of the special role is kept on.
Furthermore, when the one-time instruction determination flag is in the ON state, the instruction function is not operated even if the winning order of the bell (small combination B group) is won.
Then, when the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied, the advantageous section is ended, and the one-time instruction determination flag is turned off by executing initialization processing (RAM clearing processing) at the end of the advantageous section.

FIG. 171 shows an example in which the instruction function is activated when the first push-order bell (minor combination B group) is won after shifting to an advantageous section having no instruction game section (AT).
Here, in order to be able to finish the advantageous section without the instructed game section at an early stage, after shifting to the advantageous section without the instructed game section, at the earliest possible stage, when the pushing order bell (minor combination B group) is won , preferably to activate the indicating function.

However, from the viewpoint of payout design, in order to pay out as many game media (medals) as possible in the advantageous section having the designated game section, the payout of game media should be suppressed as much as possible in the advantageous section having no designated game section. is preferred.
In other words, the advantageous section having no instructed game section is a game section in which a guess sign is performed that does not require medals to be paid out to the player when the push-order bell (small win group B) is won, and collateral navigation is executed in that game section. This means that the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out in the advantageous section having the instructed game section must be set lower accordingly.
Therefore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, after shifting to an advantageous section having no designated game section, until a specific condition (one-time instruction operation condition) is satisfied, even if the winning order bell (small combination B group) is won, I'm trying not to activate the indication function. In addition, as the "one-time instruction operation condition", "a predetermined number of games (for example, "15 games") have been completed after shifting to the advantageous section" is defined.

Here, as shown in FIG. 172, in an advantageous section having no designated game section, if a special role is won before the first instruction function is activated, the advantageous section ends without activating the instruction function. It is possible to
For this reason, after shifting to an advantageous section having no designated game section, until a specific condition (one-time instruction activation condition) is satisfied, the instruction function is not activated even if the push-order bell (small combination B group) is won. By doing so, it is possible to increase the probability of winning the special combination before the operation of the first instruction function. As a result, it is possible to increase the probability that the advantageous section can be ended without activating the instruction function, and furthermore, it is possible to suppress the payout of game media as much as possible in the advantageous section having no instructed game section. can.
In this way, by suppressing the payout of game media at unnecessary timing (advantageous section without instructed game section: fake sign), medals can be expected to be paid out at appropriate timing (instructed game section: AT). Ball design becomes possible.

Also, the number of games played in the advantageous interval (the initial value of the advantageous interval counter 69a) can be set as the number of games played under the one-time instruction operation condition. For example, "32 games" can be set as the number of games played in the advantageous section, and "15 games" can be set as the number of games played in the one-time instruction operation condition.
In this case, when winning the special combination before completing the number of games of the one-time instruction operation condition, the advantageous section can be ended without activating the instruction function.
In addition, if the push-order bell (small win group B) is won after completing the number of games of the one-time instruction operation condition and before completing the number of games in the advantageous section, the instruction function can be operated at this time. Therefore, the advantageous section can be ended at the same time as the number of games played in the advantageous section is consumed.

FIG. 173 is a time chart showing an example of activating the instruction function when the first push-order bell (minor combination B group) is won after satisfying the instruction operation condition once in the advantageous section having no instruction game section. .
As shown in FIG. 173, before transitioning to the advantageous section, even if the winning order bell (small win group B) is won, the instruction function is not activated. Further, even after the transition to the advantageous section, the instruction function is not operated until the one-time instruction operation condition is satisfied (predetermined number of games is completed) even if the pressing order bell (small winning combination B group) is won.

Then, after the one-time instruction activation condition is satisfied, the instruction function is activated in the game in which the pressing order bell (small combination B group) is first won. At this time, the one-time instruction determination flag is turned on. After that, the one-time instruction determination flag remains on until the end of the advantageous section.
Further, when the one-time instruction determination flag is in the ON state, the instruction function is not operated even if the winning order of the bell (small combination B group) is won.
Then, when the conditions for ending the advantageous interval are satisfied, the advantageous interval is ended, and the one-time instruction determination flag is turned off by executing initialization processing (RAM clearing processing) at the end of the advantageous interval.

FIG. 174 is a time chart showing an example of canceling the operation of the instruction function by winning the special role before the one-time instruction operation condition is satisfied in the advantageous section having no instruction game section.
As shown in FIG. 174, before transitioning to the advantageous section, even if the winning order bell (small win group B) is won, the instruction function is not activated. Further, even after the transition to the advantageous section, the instruction function is not operated until the one-time instruction operation condition is satisfied (predetermined number of games is completed) even if the pressing order bell (small winning combination B group) is won.
Then, in FIG. 174, after shifting to the advantageous section, the special role is won before the one-time instruction operation condition is satisfied. At this time, the instruction function is not activated, but the one-time instruction determination flag is turned on. After that, the one-time instruction determination flag remains on until the advantageous section ends.

Also, when the special role is won, the winning information of the special role is turned on, and when the winning special role is won, the winning information of the special role is turned off. Furthermore, during the period from the winning of the special role to the winning of the prize, the state is internal, and the winning information of the special role is maintained in the ON state.
Furthermore, when the one-time instruction determination flag is in the ON state, the instruction function is not activated even if the winning order of the bell (small combination B group) is won. In FIG. 174, when the one-time instruction determination flag is ON, the pressing order bell (small combination B group) is won three times, but the instruction function is not activated in any case.
Then, when the conditions for ending the advantageous interval are satisfied, the advantageous interval is ended, and the one-time instruction determination flag is turned off by executing initialization processing (RAM clearing processing) at the end of the advantageous interval.

It should be noted that the "one-time instruction activation condition" is not limited to "playing the predetermined number of games after moving to the advantageous section". For example, "the number of games in the advantageous section has been completed (the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a has become "0")" can be defined as the "one-time indication operating condition".
Here, in the advantageous section having no instructed game section, the number of games in the advantageous section is consumed (the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a becomes "0") and the instruction function is operated at least once, or If the special role is won before the first instruction function is activated, the game can be terminated.
Also, as the number of games in the advantageous section having no designated game section, for example, "32 games" can be set.

FIG. 175 shows an example in which, in an advantageous section having no designated game section, after playing the number of games in the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated when the winning order bell (minor combination B group) is won, and the advantageous section ends. It is a time chart.
As shown in FIG. 175, before shifting to the advantageous section, even if the winning order bell (small win group B) is won, the instruction function is not activated. Also, even after shifting to the advantageous section, until the number of games in the advantageous section (for example, "32 games") is exhausted, the instruction function is not activated even if the winning order bell (small win group B) is won.

Furthermore, in FIG. 175, when the number of games in the advantageous section is exhausted, the instruction function is not activated and the special role is not won, so even if the number of games in the advantageous section is exhausted, the advantageous section do not terminate.
Then, in FIG. 175, after playing the number of games in the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated in the game in which the pressing order bell (small win group B) is won first. At this time, the one-time instruction determination flag is turned on. When the instruction function is activated, the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied. Turn off the judgment flag.
In this case, when the instruction function is activated (the correct pressing order is notified), the advantageous section ends, so the player plays the game expecting that the correct pressing order will not be notified. can be provided.

FIG. 176 is a time chart showing an example of canceling the operation of the instruction function by winning a special combination before the number of games in the advantageous section is completed in the advantageous section having no designated game section.
As shown in FIG. 176, before shifting to the advantageous section, even if the winning order bell (small win group B) is won, the instruction function is not activated. Also, even after shifting to the advantageous section, until the number of games in the advantageous section (for example, "32 games") is exhausted, the instruction function is not activated even if the winning order bell (small win group B) is won.
Then, in FIG. 176, after shifting to the advantageous section, a special winning combination is won before the number of games in the advantageous section is completed. At this time, the instruction function is not activated, but the one-time instruction determination flag is turned on. After that, the one-time instruction determination flag remains on until the advantageous section ends.

Also, when the special role is won, the winning information of the special role is turned on, and when the winning special role is won, the winning information of the special role is turned off. Furthermore, during the period from the winning of the special role to the winning of the prize, the state is internal, and the winning information of the special role is maintained in the ON state.
Furthermore, when the one-time instruction determination flag is in the ON state, the instruction function is not activated even if the winning order of the bell (small combination B group) is won. In FIG. 176, when the one-time instruction determination flag is ON, the pressing order bell (small combination B group) is won twice, but the instruction function is not activated in either case.

Then, in FIG. 176, since the special role is won before the number of games in the advantageous section is completed, the completion condition of the advantageous section is satisfied when the number of games in the advantageous section is completed. For this reason, when the number of games in the advantageous interval is exhausted, the advantageous interval is ended, and the one-time instruction determination flag is turned off by executing initialization processing (RAM clearing processing) at the end of the advantageous interval.
In this way, by setting "the number of games in the advantageous section has been completed" as the "one-time instruction activation condition", the probability of being able to finish the advantageous section without activating the instruction function is reduced as much as possible. can be higher.

Here, setting and changing of set values will be described, although the content partially overlaps with the first embodiment. A power switch 11, a setting key switch 12, and a setting switch 13 are used to set and change setting values.
Specifically, when the power switch 11 is turned on while the power switch 11 is turned off and the setting key switch 12 is turned on (the setting key is rotated 90 degrees clockwise), the main CPU 55 indicates that the setting is being changed. , that is, to shift to the setting change mode. At this time, the main CPU 55 executes initialization processing (RAM clearing processing) at the time of setting change. In addition, normal start-up processing is not performed.
The execution timing of the RAM clearing process is not limited to the time of transition to the setting change mode (when the power switch 11 is turned on while the setting key switch 12 is turned on).
For example, RAM clear processing may be executed when setting values are determined (when the start switch 41 is turned on in the setting change mode), and when the setting change mode ends (when the setting key switch 12 is turned off in the setting change mode). The RAM clearing process may be executed at time).

In the setting change mode, the main CPU 55 displays the current set value on the set value display LED 73 .
In addition, in the setting change mode, each time the setting switch 13 is operated (turned on), the main CPU 55 causes the setting value display LED 73 to display the setting value by . 3”→“4”→“5”→“6”→“1”→“2”→ . . .

Furthermore, in the setting change mode, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on), the main CPU 55 determines the set value displayed on the set value display LED 73 . At this time, the main CPU 55 stores setting value data corresponding to the determined setting value in the setting value data storage area (_NB_RANK) on the RWM 53 .
For example, when the setting value is "1", the setting value data "0" is stored in the setting value data storage area (_NB_RANK). That is, when the set value is "N" (N is an integer from "1" to "6"), set value data "N-1" is stored in the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK). As a result, the set value data "0" to "5" are stored in the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK).

In the setting change mode, when the setting key switch 12 is turned off (the setting key is rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees), the game can be played with the changed setting values.
When the setting key switch 12 is turned on (the setting key is rotated 90 degrees clockwise) while the power switch 11 is on, the main CPU 55 is confirming the settings, that is, shifts to the setting confirmation mode. In this way, turning on/off the power switch 11 is unnecessary when only confirming the set value. During setting confirmation, the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73 in the same manner as during setting change.

Further, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the main CPU 55 executes the first initialization process when the advantageous section ends, and executes the second initialization process when the set value is changed.
Furthermore, in the first initialization process, while maintaining the lottery state (RT state) at the end of the advantageous section, it shifts to the normal section, and in the second initialization process, changes to a predetermined specific lottery state (non-RT). and then move to the normal section.
Then, in the first initialization process and the second initialization process, the information about the advantageous section stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 is cleared. As a result, when the first initialization process is executed and when the second initialization process is executed, the information regarding the advantageous section is shifted to the normal section in the same state.

FIG. 177 shows information on the RWM 53 that is cleared in the initialization process (first initialization process) at the end of the advantageous section, information on the RWM 53 that is retained even after the initialization process at the end of the advantageous section, and initial settings when changing settings. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing information on the RWM 53 cleared by initialization processing (second initialization processing);
A predetermined storage area on the RWM 53 stores information about advantageous sections.
The information on the advantageous section stored in the RWM 53 includes, for example, an advantageous section counter value, an AT counter value, an upper limit counter value, an additional counter value, an advantageous section flag, and a one-time instruction determination flag.

The advantageous section counter value indicates the number of games played in the advantageous section. When it is decided to shift to the advantageous interval, the number of games determined at that time is set in the advantageous interval counter 69a on the RWM 53 as the advantageous interval counter value. Also, every time one game is played in the advantageous interval, the advantageous interval counter value is decremented. Then, when the advantageous section counter value becomes "0", the advantageous section ends.
Further, when the number of games played in the advantageous section is added in the advantageous section, a value corresponding to the added number is added to the advantageous section counter value.

The AT counter value indicates the number of games played in the designated game section (AT). When it is decided to shift to the instructed game section, the number of games determined at that time is set as the AT counter value. Also, the AT counter value is decremented each time one game is completed in the instructed game section. Then, when the AT counter value becomes "0", the instruction game section is terminated.
Also, when the number of games in the designated game section is added in the designated game section, a value corresponding to the added number is added to the AT counter value.

The upper limit counter value indicates the upper limit number of games played in the advantageous section. At the start of the advantageous section, the upper limit counter 69b on the RWM 53 is set to "1500" as the upper limit counter value. Also, the upper limit counter value is decremented each time one game is played in the advantageous section. Then, when the upper limit counter value becomes "0", the advantageous interval and the instructed game interval are ended regardless of the advantageous interval counter value and the AT counter value.
The add-on counter value indicates the add-on number for the number of games played in the designated game section. Every time the number of games in the designated game section is added, the added number is added to the added counter value.

The advantageous section flag is a flag indicating that the section is in an advantageous section.
A storage area for storing the advantageous section flag is provided on the RWM 53 .
When the advantageous section flag is on, "1" is stored in the advantageous section flag storage area of the RWM 53, and "0" is stored when the advantageous section flag is off.
Then, when transitioning to the advantageous section, the advantageous section flag is turned on. After that, the advantageous section flag remains on until the advantageous section ends, and the advantageous section flag is turned off at the end of the advantageous section.

The one-time instruction determination flag is a flag indicating that at least one instruction function has been operated to enable the end of the advantageous section.
A storage area is provided on the RWM 53 for storing a one-time instruction determination flag.
When the one-time instruction determination flag is on, "1" is stored in the one-time instruction determination flag storage area on the RWM 53, and "0" is stored when the one-time instruction determination flag is off. .
Then, in the advantageous section, when the first instruction function is activated, or when the special role is won before the first instruction function is activated, the one-time instruction determination flag is turned on. After that, the one-time instruction determination flag remains on until the end of the advantageous section, and the one-time instruction determination flag is turned off at the end of the advantageous section.

In addition, in a predetermined storage area on the RWM 53, as information other than the information on the advantageous section, for example, stored number data, set value data, RT state data, internal medium flag, accessory condition device number data, and accessory operation State flags and the like are stored.
The stored number data is data indicating the number of stored sheets.
On the RWM 53, there is provided a storage area for stored sheet number data. Data indicating the number of reserved cards (for example, "15" when the number of reserved cards is 15) is stored in the storage area for the number of reserved cards.

The set value data is data indicating a set value.
As described above, the set value data is stored in the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK) on the RWM 53 .
The RT state data is data indicating the RT state (lottery state).
Here, a storage area (_NB_RT) for RT state data is provided on the RWM 53 .
Then, in the RT state data storage area (_NB_RT), data corresponding to RT, for example, "0" for non-RT, "1" for RT1, and so on are stored.

The internal flag is a flag indicating that it is an internal game in which winning information of a special role is carried over.
Here, the RWM 53 is provided with an internal medium flag storage area (_FL_PRD_LOT). When it is inside, "FF (H)" is stored in the storage area (_FL_PRD_LOT) of the inside flag, and when it is not inside, "0" is stored.

The role product condition device number data is data indicating the role product condition device number, that is, the type of the winning role product condition device (special combination).
Here, on the RWM 53, there is provided a storage area (_NB_CND_BNS) for role item condition device number data. Then, when no role product condition device is won, "0" is stored in the storage area (_NB_CND_BNS) for the role product condition device number data, and when any of the role product condition devices is won, A value (other than "0") corresponding to the accessory condition device number is stored.

The role product operation state flag is a flag indicating the operation state of the role product.
Here, on the RWM 53, there is provided a storage area (_FL_ACTION) for a role product operating state flag. Then, when any role is activated, the bit of the storage area (_FL_ACTION) of the role product operating state flag corresponding to that role becomes "1", and when that role is not operated, the bit becomes "0". becomes.

As shown in FIG. 177, at the end of the advantageous section, the main CPU 55 executes first initialization processing. At this time, among the information stored in the storage area of the RWM 53, the information on the advantageous section (advantageous section counter value, etc.) is cleared, but the predetermined information other than the information on the advantageous section (RT state data, etc.) is cleared. Hold without.
Further, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, "to clear the information stored in the storage area on the RWM 53" means to set the value of the storage area on the RWM 53 to "0".

Therefore, when the first initialization process (initialization process at the end of the advantageous section) is executed, the advantageous section counter value on the RWM 53, the AT counter value, the upper limit counter value, the additional counter value, the advantageous section flag, and the one-time instruction The values of the determination flag storage areas are all "0".
On the other hand, even if the first initialization process is executed, the storage area for the stored number data, set value data, RT state data, internal medium flag, accessory condition device number data, and accessory operating state flag on the RWM 53 is retained without being cleared.

Therefore, when the advantageous section ends and the first initialization process is executed, the RT state at the end of the advantageous section is maintained while shifting to the normal section. For example, if the player stays in RT3 at the end of the advantageous section, when the advantageous section ends and the first initialization process is executed, RT3 is maintained and the vehicle shifts to the normal section.
Processing corresponding to the first initialization processing is also performed in the third embodiment (FIGS. 43 to 52). For example, the processing of steps S445 to S447 in FIG. 44(e) corresponds to the first initialization processing.

As shown in FIG. 177, when changing settings, the main CPU 55 executes a second initialization process. At this time, among the information stored in the storage area of the RWM 53, the information on the advantageous section (advantageous section counter value, etc.) is cleared, and the predetermined information other than the information on the advantageous section (RT state data, etc.) is also cleared. .

Therefore, when the second initialization process (initialization process at the time of setting change) is executed, the advantageous section counter value on the RWM 53, the AT counter value, the upper limit counter value, the additional counter value, the advantageous section flag, and the one-time instruction determination The values of the storage areas of the flags are all "0". In addition, the stored number data, set value data, RT status data, internal medium flag, role item condition device number data, and role item operating state flag storage area values on the RWM 53 are all "0".
Therefore, when the set value is changed (including re-setting of the same set value) and the second initialization process is executed, the RT state shifts to non-RT and shifts to the normal section. For example, if the user stays at RT3 before changing the set value, when the set value is changed and the second initialization process is executed, the vehicle is shifted to non-RT and to the normal section.

In addition, in both the first initialization process executed at the end of the advantageous section and the second initialization process executed at the time of setting change, the information on the advantageous section stored in the storage area of the RWM 53 is cleared.
Therefore, when the first initialization process is executed and when the second initialization process is executed, the information regarding the advantageous section is shifted to the normal section in the same state.
In addition, the "normal section in which the information on the advantageous section is in the same state" means the advantageous section counter value, AT counter value, upper limit counter value, additional counter value, advantageous section flag, and one-time instruction determination flag on the RWM 53. It means a normal section in which all the values in the storage area are '0'.

Here, each time the advantageous section ends, the ease of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is changed. Differentiating the easiness of transition to , may impair fairness among players.
Therefore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, in both the first initialization process executed at the end of the advantageous period and the second initialization process executed at the time of setting change, Clear information.
As a result, every time the advantageous section ends, the ease of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section can be made the same. Since the easiness of transition from the section to the advantageous section can be made the same, fairness among the players can be ensured.
<Modification of 25th Embodiment>

Although the twenty-fifth embodiment has been described above, it is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the twenty-fifth embodiment, whether or not to shift to the designated game section (AT) is determined by an AT lottery (two-stage lottery). However, it is not limited to this.
For example, when a predetermined condition is met, such as the number of wins of a predetermined role has reached a specified number, or the number of winnings of a specified role has reached a specified number after winning a minor role E1 and moving to an advantageous section. Then, it may be decided to move to the instructed game section.

(2) In FIG. 160, 1BBA wins alone with a probability of "70/65536" in common setting, and does not have a case of winning multiple wins with minor wins. In addition, the small winning combination E1 is single-won with a probability of "1000/65536" in common setting, and there is no possibility of double winning with the special winning combination. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, a single win in 1BBA with a probability of "40/65536" in common settings, a duplicate win in "1BBA + small hand E1" with a probability of "30/65536" in common settings, and a probability of "1000/65536" in common settings It is also possible to make a single win for the small winning combination E1 with a probability.

Here, when the small winning combination E1 is won alone, the middle stage cherry can be stopped. Also, when "1BBA+small win E1" is won in duplicate, the middle stage cherry can be stopped. In other words, both the single winning of the small winning combination E1 and the double winning of "1BBA+small winning combination E1" are lottery results in which the middle stage cherry can be stopped.
When the minor winning combination E1 is won alone, the transition is always made to the advantageous interval, and the advantageous interval display LED 77 is turned on. , and the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.

In addition, when the small winning combination E1 is won alone and the transition is made to the advantageous section, the medals for the next game can be inserted (bet) and the operation of the settlement switch 46 becomes possible (hereinafter, this timing is referred to as "predetermined timing"). )”, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on (timing 1 in FIG. 23).
On the other hand, when "1BBA+small win E1" is repeatedly won and shifts to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on by a predetermined timing, and a combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBA is displayed. The advantageous section display LED 77 may be lit until the time is reached (timing 2 in FIG. 23).
Therefore, when the small winning combination E1 is won alone and when the "1BBA+small winning combination E1" is repeatedly won, the lighting timing of the advantageous section display LED 77 may be the same or different.

Furthermore, when the small winning combination E1 is won singly and the transition is made to the advantageous section, and when the "1BBA+small winning combination E1" is repeatedly won and the advantageous section is made, both when the designated game section is selected and when the designated game section is selected. To have a time when not shifting to a game section.
Even in this way, when a lottery result in which the middle cherry can be stopped is obtained, the advantageous section is always entered and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit. Then, although it is known that the game will shift to the advantageous section, it is not known whether it will shift to the designated game section or not, so that the player can be given a sense of expectation for the shift to the designated game section over a plurality of games.
When "1BBA+small win E1" is repeatedly won and the game shifts to the advantageous section, for example, at the end of the 1BBA game, it is possible to notify whether to shift to the instructed game section.

(3) Fig. 178(a) shows a modification of the number table (1) in Fig. 160, Fig. 178(b) shows an advantageous section transition and It is a figure which shows the modification of the presence or absence of advantageous area display LED77 lighting.
In FIG. 160, the set number for single winning of small winning combination E1 is commonly set to "1000", and the setting number for single winning of small winning combination E2 is not set. The set number for winning is commonly set to "500", and the set number for single winning of the minor winning combination E2 is also commonly set to be "500". In addition, in FIG. 178(a), when the minor winning combination E1 is won, the normal section is always shifted to the advantageous section, and when the minor winning combination E2 is won, the normal section is always shifted to the advantageous section.

Here, when the small winning combination E1 is won alone, the middle cherry can be stopped, and when the small winning combination E2 is won alone, the middle cherry can be stopped. That is, both the single winning of the small winning combination E1 and the single winning of the small winning combination E2 are lottery results in which the middle stage cherry can be stopped.
Then, as shown in FIG. 178(b), when the minor winning combination E1 is won, the game always shifts to the advantageous section and the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up.
Further, by winning the small winning combination E1, the transition to the advantageous section and when the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up, there is a probability of "128/256" that the transition to the indicated game section (AT) is made, but "128". /256", it does not shift to the instructed game section. As a result, the probability of transition to the designated game section (AT) when the middle stage cherry can be stopped is 25%.
It should be noted that, when the small winning combination E1 is won, whether or not to shift to the instructed game section (AT) is determined by an AT lottery (two-stage lottery).

Also, as shown in FIG. 178(b), when the minor winning combination E2 is won, the winning section always shifts to the advantageous section and the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up, similarly to when the minor winning combination E1 is won.
Furthermore, by winning the small winning combination E2, the game moves to the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up, the game does not move to the instructed game section.

In this way, when the minor winning combination E1 and minor winning combination E2 are won, the game is always shifted to the advantageous section and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit. Further, when the small winning combination E1 is won, there are times when it shifts to the designated game section and when it does not shift to the designated game section, and when the small winning combination E2 is won, it does not shift to the designated game section.
Even in this way, when the result of the lottery is such that the middle cherry can be stopped, it is known that the game will shift to the advantageous section, but it is not clear whether or not the game will shift to the designated game section. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the transition of the game over a plurality of games.

(4) FIG. 179(a) shows a modification of the number table (1) in FIG. 160, and FIG. 179(b) shows an advantageous interval transition and It is a figure which shows the modification of the presence or absence of advantageous area display LED77 lighting.
In FIGS. 178 and 179, the contents of the table (1) of (a) are the same, but the contents of (b) regarding the transition to the advantageous interval when winning a rare combination and whether or not the advantageous interval display LED 77 is lit are different.

As shown in FIG. 179(b), when the minor winning combination E1 is won, the game always shifts to the advantageous section and the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up.
Further, by winning the small winning combination E1, the transition to the advantageous section and when the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up, the transition to the indicated game section (AT) is made with a probability of "64/256", but "192". /256", it does not shift to the instructed game section.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 179(b), when the minor winning combination E2 is won, the game always shifts to the advantageous section and the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up.
Furthermore, by winning the small winning combination E2, when the transition to the advantageous zone and the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit, the indicated game zone ( AT), but with a probability of "192/256", it does not move to the instructed game section. As a result, the probability of transition to the designated game section (AT) when the middle stage cherry can be stopped is 25%.
Whether or not to shift to the designated game section (AT) is determined by an AT lottery (two-step lottery) both when the small winning combination E1 and the small winning combination E2 are won.

In this way, when the minor winning combination E1 and the minor winning combination E2 are won, the transition to the advantageous zone is always made, and the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit. , when shifting to the designated game section and when not shifting to the designated game section.
Even in this way, when the result of the lottery is such that the middle cherry can be stopped, it is known that the game will shift to the advantageous section, but it is not clear whether or not the game will shift to the designated game section. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the transition of the game over a plurality of games.

(5) FIG. 180(a) shows a modification of the number table (1) in FIG. 160, and FIG. 180(b) shows an advantageous interval transition and It is a figure which shows the modification of the presence or absence of advantageous area display LED77 lighting.
In FIG. 180(a), the set number for the single win of the minor winning combination E1 is commonly set to "250", and the set number for the single winning of the small winning combination E2 is set to be "750" in common. In addition, in FIG. 180(a), when the minor winning combination E1 is won, the normal section is always shifted to the advantageous section, and when the minor winning combination E2 is won, the normal section is always shifted to the advantageous section.

Also, as shown in FIG. 180(b), when the minor winning combination E1 is won, the transition is always to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit. In addition, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up.
Further, by winning the small winning combination E1, the game moves to the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up, the game always shifts to the indicated game section.
On the other hand, when the player wins the small winning combination E2 to shift to the advantageous section and the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up, the game section does not shift to the indicated game section.
As a result, the probability of transition to the designated game section (AT) when the middle stage cherry can be stopped is 25%.

In this way, when the minor winning combination E1 and minor winning combination E2 are won, the game is always shifted to the advantageous section and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit. When the winning combination E2 is won, the game is not shifted to the instructed game section.
Even in this way, when the result of the lottery is such that the middle cherry can be stopped, it is known that the game will shift to the advantageous section, but it is not clear whether or not to shift to the instructed game section. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the transition of the game over a plurality of games.
168(b), 178(b), 179(b), and 180(b), the transition probability to the designated game section (AT) when the middle cherry can be stopped is It is 25%, and the same effect can be exhibited and the same impression can be given to the player regardless of which mode is adopted.

(6) In FIGS. 161 to 164, 1BBB is single winning, but it is not limited to this.
For example, in FIGS. 161 to 164, instead of single winning of 1BBB, double winning of "1BBA+34 small wins ("Bell B"-"Red 7"-"Red 7": 1 piece)" may be possible.

Specifically, in FIGS. 161 to 164, the number of duplicate winnings of “1BBA + 34 small wins” is set to “80” for setting 1, “88” for setting 2, and “88” for setting 3. is "96", setting 4 is "104", setting 5 is "112", and setting 6 is "120".
Even in this way, the winning probability of 1BB (the sum of single winning and double winning of 1BBA) becomes higher as the set value becomes higher, and the probability of transition to the advantageous section when winning 1BB becomes lower as the set value. can be made higher according to

(7) In FIG. 168(b), when a small winning combination E1 (middle cherry) is won, when the transition to the advantageous section and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, the designated game section ( AT), and with a probability of "192/256", it does not move to the instructed game section. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, in FIG. 168(b), instead of the instructed game section (AT), it may be shifted to the chance zone (CZ).

Specifically, in FIG. 168(b), by winning the small winning combination E1 (middle stage cherry), the transition to the advantageous section and when the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up, the probability is "64/256". , to the chance zone (CZ) and not to the chance zone with a probability of “192/256”.
In addition, when shifting to the chance zone, it has a case where it shifts (promotes) to the designated game section (AT) and a case where it does not shift to the designated game section. For example, in the chance zone, if the conditions for transitioning to the instructed game section are met, the transition to the instructed game section is performed, and if the conditions for transition to the instructed game section are not satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated without transitioning to the instructed game section. Move to normal section.

Further, the conditions for shifting from the chance zone to the designated game section include, for example, that the number of wins of a predetermined combination has reached a specified number, or that the number of winnings of a specified combination has reached a specified number. can.
Even in this way, when the minor winning combination E1 (middle stage cherry) is won, the transition to the advantageous section is always performed and the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on. Since it is not known whether or not to play, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for the shift to the instructed game section over a plurality of games.

(8) In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the "one-time instruction activation condition" is defined as "having completed a predetermined number of games (for example, "15 games") after moving to an advantageous section", but is not limited to this. .
For example, ``Winning or winning a predetermined number of times in a predetermined combination after transitioning to an advantageous section'', specifically, ``Winning or winning a prize five times in the push-order bell (small hand group B) after transitioning to an advantageous section'', ``Advantageous Winning or winning seven times in the replay after transitioning to the section" can be defined as the "one-time instruction operation condition".

Also, for example, ``not winning in the lottery held at a predetermined time after moving to the advantageous section'', specifically, ``50% probability when winning the pushing order bell (small hand B group) after moving to the advantageous section'' A lottery was held to win the lottery, but was not won in this lottery", "After moving to the advantageous section, every time the game was played, a lottery was held with a probability of 70%, and I was not elected in this lottery. , etc., can also be defined as the "one-time instruction operating condition".

Furthermore, for example, ``that the condition determined at the time of transition to the advantageous section has been satisfied'', specifically, ``at the time of transition to the advantageous section, either 10 games, 15 games, or 20 games are decided by lottery and decided The number of games played has been exhausted", "At the transition to the advantageous section, either 5, 7 or 10 times was determined by lottery, and after that, the number of winning times of the pushing order bell (group B) was determined. reaching the number of times" can be defined as the "one-time instruction operation condition".

Furthermore, for example, ``replay duplication after transition to an advantageous section (replay B group, replay C group) when winning has reached three times in the order of incorrect answers'', ``freezing occurred after transition to an advantageous section , etc., can be defined as the "one-time instruction operating condition".
Of course, each of the above conditions can be appropriately combined to define the "one-time instruction operation condition".

(9) In the twenty-fifth embodiment, when changing settings, the second initialization process (initialization process when changing settings) is executed to Cleared the counter value, the advantageous section flag, the one-time instruction determination flag, the RT state data, the stored number data, the internal medium flag, the accessory condition device number data, and the accessory operating state flag. However, it is not limited to this.

For example, when changing the settings, among the RT state data, the stored number data, the internal flag, the accessory condition device number data, and the accessory operating state flag, only the stored number data is cleared, and the RT state data, the internal flag, The role product condition device number data and the role product operating state flag may be held without being cleared.

Here, the "information on the advantageous section" must be cleared at the end of the advantageous section, and must be cleared when the setting is changed.
In addition, "RT state data", "internal medium flag", "accessory condition device number data", and "accessory operation state flag" must be held without being cleared at the end of the advantageous section, and are set When changed, it may be cleared or retained without being cleared.

Furthermore, the "stored number data" must be retained without being cleared at the end of the advantageous section, and must be cleared when the settings are changed.
In this way, the "stored number data" is data on the RWM 53 that is handled differently at the end of the advantageous section and at the time of setting change.

(10) In the flowchart shown in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the order of processing is not limited to the order shown in the drawing, and if the order of processing can be changed, the order of processing can be changed. be.
(11) The twenty-fifth embodiment and the various modifications described above are not limited to being carried out independently, but can be carried out in combination as appropriate.

<26th Embodiment>
Next, a twenty-sixth embodiment will be described.
The twenty-sixth embodiment relates to lighting control of the management information display LED 74 shown in FIGS. 3 and 38 in the first embodiment.
FIG. 181 shows management information displayed by the management information display LED 74 in the twenty-sixth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 38 in the first embodiment.
In the twenty-sixth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the advantageous section ratio (displayed as "advantageous section ratio" in the first embodiment (FIG. 38), but is displayed as "advantageous section ratio" in the twenty-sixth embodiment ), continuous role ratio (6000 times), role ratio (6000 times), continuous role ratio (total), and role ratio (cumulative) are displayed on the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9) in this order. do.

Further, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, unlike the first embodiment (FIG. 38), the "information type" in FIG. 38 is called the "identification segment", and the "numerical value" is called the "ratio segment". The identification seg corresponds to digits 6 and 7 and the "ratio seg" corresponds to digits 8 and 9.
Further, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, as described in the twentieth embodiment, numbers and alphabetic characters are interchanged in the identification segment in the first embodiment (FIG. 38). Also, when the identification segment is displayed, the "dot (DP)" of digit 7 corresponding to the lower digit is illuminated (dots of digits 6, 8 and 9 are not illuminated).
Also, in FIG. 181, the ratio seg values are the same as in FIG.

Furthermore, in the above five items, slot machines that do not have functions corresponding to the items display the ratio segment as "--".
For example, first, if it has a role (BB, RB, CB, etc.), but does not have an advantageous section (for example, it is called a "normal type" that has only a bonus without providing an AT etc. ), when the advantageous section ratio is displayed, the ratio segment is displayed as "--". In other words, when the advantageous section ratio is displayed, "7U." is displayed in the identification segment of the management information display LED 74, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.
Secondly, for example, if "RB (first class special role)" is not provided, there is no continuous role ratio, so when ratio display numbers "2" and "4" are displayed, the ratio Display the segment as "--". In other words, when the continuous role ratio (6000 times) is displayed, the identification segment of the management information display LED 74 displays "6y." Sometimes, "6A." is displayed in the identification segment of the management information display LED 74, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.

182 and 183 are diagrams showing storage areas of the RWM 53 in the twenty-sixth embodiment. Note that FIGS. 182 and 183 show some storage areas used in the description of the twenty-sixth embodiment, and are not meant to be limited to the storage areas shown in FIGS.
As shown in FIG. 124 (twentieth embodiment), the RWM 53 is divided into an inside area and an outside area. "F200(H)" is a storage area outside the used area. In this embodiment, "F200(H)" to "F20F(H)" are so-called "unused areas". This unused area is an area in which game results and the like obtained through the progress of the game are not stored, and is provided to clearly distinguish between addresses within the used area and addresses outside the used area. For example, it is possible to reduce access to RWM addresses outside the use area due to runaway of the main program or the like while executing a program in the use area.

In FIG. 182, an address "F000(H)" is a storage area for storing set value data, and values "0" to "5" are stored as data. Data “0” is data corresponding to setting value 1, data “1” is data corresponding to setting value 2, .
The address "F001(H)" is the storage area of the interrupt counter. The value of the interrupt counter is an increment counter having a range of "0" to "65535 (D)", and the value is updated ("+1") for each interrupt (every 2.235 ms). In the twenty-sixth embodiment, since "0" to "65535 (D)" are used as the values of the interrupt counter, the 2-byte addresses "F001 (H)" (lower 8 bits) and "F002 (H)" (upper 8 bits) is used, but if a range of "0" to "255 (D)" is used, it is also possible to use only the 1-byte address "F001 (H)".
The address "F010(H)" is a storage area for operation status flags, and each character is assigned as shown in FIG.
In this embodiment, only RB (a type in which RB operates continuously during a 1BB game) is provided as an accessory, and when the D3 bit corresponding to RB is "1" (00001000 (B)), When the D3 bit is "0" (00000000 (B)), it is when the character is not activated and when the continuous character is not activated.
Therefore, unlike the present embodiment, if there are other characters such as SB (when SB is provided, it may be assigned to D4 bit, for example), CB (D1 bit), etc., any corresponding character may be used. Whether or not this bit is "1" can be used to determine whether or not the character product is in operation.

The address "F018(H)" is the storage area of the LED display counter. It is assumed that the LED display counter of the twenty-sixth embodiment is the same as that of the twentieth embodiment (FIG. 132). As described in the twentieth embodiment, the LED display counter specifies the digits to be lit during the interrupt process.

The address "F019(H)" is a storage area for storing the LED display request flag. It is also assumed that the LED display request flag is the same as in the twentieth embodiment (FIG. 132). As described in the twentieth embodiment, the LED display request flag is a flag that designates a digit that can be lit according to normal operation, setting change, or setting confirmation.
The address "F020(H)" is a game section flag, which is used to determine whether the game is in a normal section, an advantageous section, or a standby section.
Specifically, the D0 bit corresponds to the advantageous interval flag, and the D1 bit corresponds to the standby interval flag. The D2-D7 bits are unused.
The game interval flag is configured to be updated when the game is set to start (step S2172 in FIG. 188 to be described later).

For example, when winning the advantageous section in the "N" game, the advantageous section starts from the "N+1" game. At this time,
"N" game: game section flag "00000000 (B)"
"N+1" game: game section flag "00000001 (B)"
becomes.
Also, when winning the advantageous section at the "N" game, the standby section starts from the "N+1" game, and the advantageous section starts from the "N+3" game,
"N" game: game section flag "00000000 (B)"
"N+1" game: game section flag "00000010 (B)"
"N+2" game: game section flag "00000010 (B)"
"N+3" game: game section flag "00000001 (B)"
becomes.
Furthermore, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied at the "N+x" game and the normal section is shifted from the "N+x+1" game,
"N+x" game: game section flag "00000001 (B)"
"N+x+1" game: game section flag "00000000 (B)"
becomes.

The address "F024(H)" is the storage area for the advantageous section counter. The advantageous section counter counts the number of games played in the advantageous section. As in the above-described other embodiments, the upper limit of continuation of the advantageous section is set to "1500" games. A 2-byte storage area is provided to count "1500" at the maximum.

The storage area for the payout number data of the address "F040(H)" stores the number of payouts when a small win is won in the game and the number of payouts is determined (step S2188 in FIG. 188 to be described later). storage area. Then, when a small winning combination is won, the medal payout process is executed, and one medal is paid out (adding one to the number of stored medals, or actually paying out one medal (from the hopper 35)). "1" is subtracted each time. That is, it has a role as the number of times the payout process is executed. As a result, when the medal payout process is completed, the payout medal count data becomes "0".

The buffer for the number of medals to be paid out at address "F041(H)", like the number of medals to be paid out data, is paid out when a small win is won in the game and the number of payouts is determined (step S2188 in FIG. 188 to be described later). This is a storage area in which the number of sheets is stored. Here, unlike the medal payout number data, the medal payout number buffer is not decremented for each medal payout process, and the initially stored value is maintained. Then, the value is maintained until the end of the next game. For example, when a small winning combination of 8 payouts is won in the game, "8 (H)" is stored in the medal payout buffer. is overwritten with "0".

The 400 game counter at the address "F210(H)" adds the number of games played at 400 games. This addition is an addition that cycles from "0" to "399(D)", and is added by "1" each time the game is played. Also, for example, when "399 (D)" is stored, adding "1" results in "0".
Contrary to the above, "399 (D)" may be set as the initial value and subtracted by "1" each time the game is played. In this case, when the value becomes "0", it is determined that 400 games have been executed. Also, when "1" is subtracted from "0", "399 (D)" is reset.

The ring buffer number of the address "F212(H)" determines which ring buffer to add the data to when medals are paid out in the game, and updates the number of medals to be paid out. This is for specifying a ring buffer. Specifically, any one of "0" to "14(D)" is stored.
The addresses "F213(H)" to "F230(H)" are storage areas of the total payout ring buffer, and consist of 15 areas. Each total payout ring buffer consists of 2 bytes. For example, total payout ring buffer 0 consists of addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)", where address "F213(H)" is the lower digit and address "F214(H)" is the upper digit. In FIGS. 182 and 183, the lowest address number is displayed for the storage areas with the number of bytes of "2" or more.

The total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 correspond to the 15 ring buffers shown in FIG. 28 (first embodiment) (the addresses are different from those in FIG. 28). One ring buffer stores the total number of payouts for 400 games. For example, the number of payouts from the 1st game to the 400th game are stored at addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)", and the number of payouts from the next 401st game to the 800th game are stored at the address " are stored in "F215(H)" and "F216(H)".
Here, whether or not the 400th game has been played is determined by referring to the 400th game counter at the address "F210(H)". Further, to which ring buffer value the number of payouts is added (the value is updated) in the game is determined by referring to the ring buffer number of the address "F212(H)".

Then, as described above, when the total number of payouts from the 1st game to the 400th game is stored in the total payout ring buffer 0 at the addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)", the 5601st game to The total number of payouts up to the 6000th game is stored in the total payout ring buffer 14 at addresses "F22F(H)" and "F230(H)". Next, at the end of the 6000th game, the data stored in the total payout ring buffer 0 at addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)" is cleared, and the number of payouts from the 6001st game to the 6400th game is cleared. is stored in the total payout ring buffer 0 at addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)".
Each of the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 consists of 2 bytes. As explained in the first embodiment, if the maximum payout number in one game is "15" (in the first embodiment, it is "10" as shown in the small win 39 in FIG. 11, but according to the rules is set to "15" in consideration of the maximum value of ), the maximum number of coins to be paid out during 400 games is 6000, so the storage capacity is 2 bytes.
This point also applies to the continuous bonus ring buffers 0 to 14 and the bonus bonus ring buffers 0 to 14, which will be described later.

Addresses “F231(H)” to “F24E(H)” are storage areas of continuous bonus payout ring buffers 0 to 14. FIG. This corresponds to what is shown in FIG. 29 (first embodiment) (the addresses are different from those in FIG. 29).
Addresses "F24F(H)" to "F26C(H)" are storage areas of the prize payout ring buffers 0 to 14. FIG. This corresponds to what is shown in FIG. 30 (first embodiment) (the addresses are different from those in FIG. 30).

The total number-of-games counter of addresses "F26D(H)" to "F26F(H)" is a counter for storing the number of games played (accumulated), and consists of 3 bytes. As described in the first embodiment, since it is necessary to count "175000 (D)" games as the total number of games played, it consists of 3 bytes. The storage area of the total number of games counter corresponds to the storage areas of "F005(H)" to "F007(H)" shown in FIG. 27 (first embodiment).
In the twenty-sixth embodiment, the counting is continued even after the number of games played exceeds "175000 (D)", and the counting is stopped when 3 bytes are full ("FFFFFF (H)"). Detailed control on this point will be described later.

The number-of-games-in-advantage-section counter at addresses "F270(H)" to "F272(H)" counts the number of games played in the advantageous section. It corresponds to "F004(H)". In the first embodiment, the value obtained by multiplying the number of games played in the advantageous section by "100 (D)" is stored, so a 4-byte storage area is used. Since "1" is added per game, it is set to 3 bytes.

The total payout (6000 times) counter of addresses "F273(H)" to "F275(H)" is a counter that counts the total number of medals paid out during 6000 games. Even if 15 medals are paid out per game in 6,000 games, the total number is 90,000, so it can be counted with 3 bytes. The same applies to the payout (6000 times) counter).
This counter corresponds to the counters "F02F(H)" to "F031(H)" in FIG. 28 (first embodiment).

Similarly, the consecutive bonus payout (6000 times) counter for addresses "F276(H)" to "F278(H)" is a counter that counts the number of payouts when consecutive bonuses are activated during 6000 games.
This counter corresponds to the counters "F06E(H)" to "F070(H)" in FIG. 29 (first embodiment).
In the first embodiment, the value obtained by multiplying the payout number by "100 (D)" is stored, but in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the payout number itself is stored (added). That is, when the payout number is one, "1" is added.
Furthermore, in the same way, the accessory payout (6000 times) counter for addresses “F279(H)” to “F27B(H)” is a counter that counts the number of payouts when the accessory is activated during 6000 games.
This counter corresponds to the counters "F0AE(H)" to "F0B0(H)" in FIG. 30 (first embodiment).
Similarly to the above, in the first embodiment, the value obtained by multiplying the payout number by "100 (D)" is stored, but in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the payout number itself is stored (added).

In the above total payout (6000 times) counter, continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter, and accessory payout (6000 times) counter, when there is a payout while the continuous accessory is not operating and the accessory is not operating , only the total payout (6000 times) counter is updated (added). Further, when there is a payout while the continuous accessory is not activated and the accessory is activated, the total payout (6000 times) counter and the accessory payout (6000 times) counter are updated, and the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter is updated. is not updated.
Furthermore, when there is a payout during continuous accessory operation, the total payout (6000 times) counter, the accessory payout (6000 times) counter, and the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter are all updated.

The values of the total payout (6000 times) counter, the continuous bonus payout (6000 times) counter, and the bonus bonus payout (6000 times) counter are updated every 400 games.
A specific control will be described in a flow chart to be described later, but the outline of the control is as follows.
First, when there is a payout of medals from the first game to the 6000th game, the total payout (6000 times ) counter, continuous bonus payout (6000 times) counter, and bonus bonus payout (6000 times) counter.
At the end of the 6000th game, a continuous role ratio (6000 times) and a role ratio (6000 times), which will be described later, are calculated. After this calculation, each number of payouts in 400 games from before "400 × 15-1" games (5999 games) to before "400 × 15-400" games (5600 games) from the game is the total payout (6000 times) counter value, continuous bonus payout (6000 times) counter value, and bonus bonus payout (6000 times) counter value.

For example, when it is the 6000th game, the total payout ring buffer 0 (F213(H) to F214(H)) value is subtracted from the total payout (6000 times) counter value. Then, the value of total payout ring buffer 0 (F213(H) to F214(H)) is cleared. Furthermore, the number of payouts from the 6001st game to the 6400th game is added to the total payout ring buffer 0 and the total payout (6000 times) counter.
Similarly, when the game reaches the 6000th game, the value of the continuous accessory payout ring buffer 0 (F231(H) to F232(H)) is subtracted from the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter value. Then, the value of the continuous bonus payout ring buffer 0 is cleared. Further, the number of payouts at the time of continuous role payout operation from the 6001st game to the 6400th game is added to the continuous role payout ring buffer 0 and the continuous role payout (6000 times) counter.
Further, similarly, when the 6000th game is reached, the value of the award payout ring buffer 0 (F24F(H) to F250(H)) is subtracted from the award payout (6000 times) counter value. Then, the value of the prize payout ring buffer 0 is cleared. Further, the number of payouts during the operation of the accessory from the 6001st game to the 6400th game is added to the accessory payout ring buffer 0 and the accessory payout (6000 times) counter.

More specifically, for example, the total payout ring buffer stores the number of payouts for the following number of games played.
Total payout ring buffer 0: "1" game to "400" game Total payout ring buffer 1: "401" game to "800" game Total payout ring buffer 2: "801" game to "1200" game Total payout ring buffer 3: "1201" game to "1600" game Total payout ring buffer 4: "1601" game to "2000" game Total payout ring buffer 5: "2001" game to "2400" Game item Total payout ring buffer 6: "2401" game item to "2800" game item Total payout ring buffer 7: "2801" game item to "3200" game item Total payout ring buffer 8: "3201" game item to "3600" game item '' Game total payout ring buffer 9: ``3601'' game to ``4000'' game Total payout ring buffer 10: ``4001'' game to ``4400'' game Total payout ring buffer 11: ``4401'' game to `` 4800" game total payout ring buffer 12: "4801" game to "5200" game Total payout ring buffer 13: "5201" game to "5600" game Total payout ring buffer 14: "5601" game to "6000" game total payout (6000 times) counter: "1" game to "6000" game

Assuming that the 6000th game is completed, all of the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 store the number of payouts for each number of games.
Also, the value of the total payout (6000 times) counter and the sum of the values stored in the total payout ring buffers 0-14 match.
Let Σ1 be the value stored in the total payout (6000 times) counter at this time, and Z1 be the value stored in the total payout ring buffer 0.
Total payout (6000 times) counter = Σ1-Z1
perform the operation of
again,
Total payout ring buffer 0 = 0 (clear)
perform the operation of
That is, the value "Z1" of the total payout ring buffer 0 storing the number of payouts for 400 games from 5999 (400×15−1) to 5600 (400×15−400) is changed to the total payout ( 6000 times) A process of subtracting from the value "Σ1" stored in the counter is executed.
Next, a process of clearing the value "Z1" of the total payout ring buffer 0 storing the number of payouts for 400 games from 5999 (400×15−1) games to 5600 (400×15−400) games. to run.
After such calculation, the 6001st game is started. When there is a payout from the 6001st game to the 6400th game (here, it is assumed that the accessory did not operate from the 6001st game to the 6400th game), it is added to the total payout ring buffer 0, and Add to the total payout (6000 times) counter.

Next, assuming that the 6400th game has been completed, the total payout ring buffer stores the number of payouts for the following number of games.
Total payout ring buffer 0: “6001” game to “6400” game Total payout ring buffer 1: “401” game to “800” game :
Total payout ring buffer 14: "5601" game to "6000" game Total payout (6000 times) counter: "401" game to "6000" game, and "6001" game to "6400" game And , Similarly to the above, if the value stored in the total payout (6000 times) counter at this time is Σ2, and the value stored in the total payout ring buffer 1 is Z2,
Total payout (6000 times) counter = Σ2-Z2
and
and,
total payout ring buffer 1=0
and
After such calculation, the 6401st game is started. When there is a payout from the 6401st game to the 6800th game (here, it is assumed that the accessory did not operate from the 6401st game to the 6800th game), it is added to the total payout ring buffer 1, and Add to the total payout (6000 times) counter. The above processing is repeated.

Also, the total payout ring buffer and the total payout (6000 times) counter have been described above, but the same processing as above is performed when the role product is activated or when the continuous accessory is activated.
Specifically, when the role product is activated, the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 are replaced with the role product payout ring buffers 0 to 14, and the total payout (6000 times) counter is replaced with the role product payout (6000 times) counter. Execute the process. Incidentally, when the accessory is activated, as described above, one of the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 and the total payout (6000 times) counter are also updated.
Similarly, when the continuous accessory is activated, the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 are replaced with the continuous accessory payout ring buffers 0 to 14, and the total payout (6000 times) counter is replaced with the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter. process. In addition, at the time of continuous role product operation, any of the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14, any of the role product payout ring buffers 0 to 14, the total payout (6000 times) counter, and the role product payout (6000 times) counter Also update.

The total payout (cumulative) counter of the addresses "F27C(H)" to "F27E(H)" is a counter that counts the cumulative number of payouts, and counts the total number of payouts during at least "175000 (D)" games. .
This counter corresponds to the counters "F032(H)" to "F034(H)" in FIG. 28 (first embodiment).
Similarly, the continuous bonus payout (cumulative) counter for the addresses "F27F(H)" to "F281(H)" is a counter that counts the total number of payouts when the continuous bonus is activated. At least "175000 (D)" counts the number of payouts at the time of continuous accessory operation during the game.
This counter corresponds to the counters "F071(H)" to "F074(H)" in FIG. 29 (first embodiment).
Furthermore, in the same way, the bonus payout (total) counter for the addresses "F282(H)" to "F284(H)" is a counter that counts the total number of payouts when the bonus is activated. "175000 (D)" Counts the number of payouts when the accessory is activated during the game.
This counter corresponds to the counters "F0B1(H)" to "F0B4(H)" in FIG. 30 (first embodiment).
It should be noted that the above-mentioned three types of payout (6000 times) counters subtract the number of payouts from before 5999 games to before 5600 games every 400 games, but these three types of payout (cumulative) counters subtract values. never do.

In the first embodiment, the value obtained by multiplying the payout number by "100 (D)" is stored, so the total storage capacity consists of 4 bytes. is stored (added), so it consists of 3 bytes.
For example, in 175,000 games, assuming that 15 coins were paid out per game, the value is "175,000×15=2625,000", which is smaller than the value that can be stored in 3 bytes. Therefore, it can be stored with a storage capacity of 3 bytes.

The advantageous interval ratio data at the address "F285(H)" is a storage area for storing the advantageous interval ratio indicating the ratio of the number of games played in the advantageous interval to the total number of games played.
This storage area corresponds to the storage area (advantageous section ratio) of "F008(H)" in FIG. 27 (first embodiment).
The continuous role ratio (6000 times) data at the address "F286(H)" is a storage area for storing the ratio of the number of payouts at the time of continuous role operation to the total number of payouts during 6000 games.
This storage area corresponds to the storage area of "F075(H)" in FIG. 29 (first embodiment).
The role product ratio (6000 times) data at the address "F287(H)" is a storage area for storing the ratio of the number of payouts at the time of operating the role product to the total number of payouts during 6000 games.
This storage area corresponds to the storage area of "F0B5(H)" in FIG. 30 (first embodiment).

Further, the continuous role ratio (cumulative) data at the address "F288(H)" is a storage area for storing the ratio of the number of payouts at the time of continuous role operation to the total number of payouts in the total number of games played.
This storage area corresponds to the storage area "F076(H)" in FIG. 29 (first embodiment).
The role ratio (cumulative) data at the address "F289(H)" is a storage area for storing the ratio of the number of payouts at the time of operating the role to the total number of payouts in the total number of games played.
This storage area corresponds to the storage area of "F0B6(H)" in FIG. 30 (first embodiment).

Next, a method of calculating the ratio and an overview of the correction of the ratio will be described (specific processing will be described later with reference to a flowchart).
In the following example, the advantageous section ratio is given and explained using decimal numbers. Note that the following ratio calculation method is employed for all five types of ratios shown in FIG.
First, it is assumed that the total number of games played is "50000" games and the number of games played in the advantageous section is "13000" games.
In this case, if division is used, the advantageous section ratio can be calculated as "13000/50000=0.26 (26%)". Also, in the ratio calculation of the twenty-sixth embodiment, decimal points are rounded down. Therefore, for example, even if it is "18.9%", it is set to "18%".
On the other hand, the 1-chip microprocessor (FIG. 124) mounted in this embodiment cannot directly divide a large value. Therefore, an operation is performed by replacing division with subtraction.

Here, "Y (dividend)/X (divisor)" is used.
(1) Multiply the number of games in the advantageous section, which is the dividend Y, by 10 (10×Y). Therefore, it becomes "13000×10=130000". Note that the process of multiplying by 10 is executed with a calculated value set (S_VALUE_SET), which will be described later.
(2) Subtract "50000", which is the divisor X, from "130000".
130000-50000=80000 (first subtraction)
Here, when the calculation result is greater than the divisor X, the divisor X is subtracted from the calculation result again, and this is repeated until the calculation result becomes "0" or more and less than the divisor X. The number of repetitions is set to "R1".
i.e.
0≦(10×Y−X×R1)<X
"R1" that satisfies is calculated.
In this example,
130000-50000=80000 (first subtraction)
80000-50000=30000 (second subtraction)
, and at this point, it is greater than or equal to "0" and less than the divisor X.
Then, the number of repetitions of the subtraction here is the tens digit of the ratio. If the tens place of the ratio is "R1", then "R1=2".

(3) Next, let "Y'" be the remainder of the subtraction of "R1". i.e.
10×Y−X×R1=Y′
and
Then, this remainder "Y'" is multiplied by 10 (10*Y'). Therefore, it becomes "30000*10=300000".
(4) Subtract "50000", which is the divisor X, from "300000".
300000-50000=250000 (first subtraction)
Here, similarly to the above, when the calculation result is greater than the divisor X, the divisor X is again subtracted from the calculation result, and this is repeated until the calculation result becomes "0" or more and less than the divisor X. The number of repetitions is set to "R2".
i.e.
0≦(10×Y′−X×R2)<X
"R2" that satisfies is calculated.
In this example,
300000-50000=250000 (first subtraction)
250000-50000=200000 (second subtraction)
:
50000-50000=0 (6th subtraction)
, and at this point, it is greater than or equal to "0" and less than the divisor X.
Then, the number of iterations of the subtraction here becomes the first digit of the ratio. If the ones digit of the ratio is "R2", then "R2=6".
(5) Therefore, the ratio is "10×R1+R2", which is "26".

Also, when "10 x Y - X x R1 = Y'" as described above, it is determined whether or not "Y' = 0", and when it is determined that "Y' = 0" , it is also possible to set "0" as the ones digit ratio and omit the calculation for the ones digit ratio. In this case, the specific ratio is "R1" in the ten's place and "0" in the one's place.

Further, when there is a relationship of "Y (dividend)=X (divisor)" (for example, when the total number of games played matches the number of games played in the advantageous section), the above calculation yields "R1=10 (D)". and "R2=0", that is, the ratio is calculated as "100%". However, as shown in FIG. 125 (twentieth embodiment), since the ratio segment consists of two digits, the ratio can be displayed only up to two digits. Therefore, when the calculated ratio is "100 (D)", the ratio is changed to a correction value of "99" and stored. As a result, "99" is displayed in the ratio segment.
As will be described later, when the ratio is "60" or "70" or more, it is determined that it does not fall within the range of the design value. , there is not much difference in the judgment of the design value.
If "100 (D)" is to be displayed as a ratio, overflow occurs in the third digit and the displayed content becomes "00". When "00" is displayed, it cannot be determined whether the ratio is "0%" or "100%". From this point of view as well, when the calculated ratio is "100(D)", "99" is displayed instead of "00".
However, when the ratio segment is composed of three LEDs and the result of calculating the ratio is "100 (D)", it is of course possible to display "100" in the ratio segment. .

By subtracting the tens digit and the ones digit as described above, the maximum number of subtractions is 20.
On the other hand, as shown in the first embodiment, for example, when the number of games in the advantageous section is multiplied by "100" and the total number of games is continuously subtracted from the number of games in the advantageous section multiplied by "100", the maximum It is necessary to perform 100 subtractions with .
Therefore, in the calculation method of the twenty-sixth embodiment, the time required to calculate the ratio can be significantly shortened.

Moreover, the ratio is not limited to the advantageous interval ratio, and the other four ratios similarly have a 1-byte storage area. Here, when the ratio is stored, the upper 4 bits of the 1-byte storage area are used as the storage area for the tens digit of the ratio, and the lower 4 bits are used as the storage area for the 1's digit of the ratio.
If the ratio is calculated as "26 (D)" as in the above example, the tens digit "2" becomes "10" in binary, and the ones digit "6" becomes "110 (B )”. Therefore, "0010/0110(B)" is stored at the address "F285(H)" for storing the advantageous section ratio. Note that "/" indicates the boundary between the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits. By storing in this manner, the tens digit value of the ratio can be immediately obtained from the upper 4 bits, and the 1 digit value of the ratio can be obtained immediately from the lower 4 bits. "26(D)" becomes "00011010(B)" in binary, but in order to obtain the tens digit of the ratio based on this value, it is necessary to perform a predetermined operation. On the other hand, if the upper 4 bits are stored as the tens place and the lower 4 bits are stored as the ones place as described above, the upper 4 bits "10(B)" can be displayed during the interrupt processing to display the ratio of the upper 4 bits. is used as the offset value, the segment data can be immediately obtained as shown in FIG.

In FIG. 183, the calculation result buffer at address "F28A(H)" is a storage area for temporarily storing calculation results during ratio calculation processing (S_CAL_SET), which will be described later.
The count upper limit flag of the address "F28B (H)" is the total number of games counter (addresses "F26D (H)" to "F26F (H)") or the total number of payouts (cumulative) counter (addresses "F27C (H)" to This flag is turned on when the storage capacity of "F27E(H)") is the upper limit value (3 bytes full, that is, "FFFFFF(H)"). Of the 1-byte (8-bit) data, the "D0" bit is assigned to the upper limit flag of the number of games played, and the "D1" bit is assigned to the upper limit flag of the number of payouts. The 'D2' to 'D7' bits are unused in the twenty-sixth embodiment. For example, when the total number-of-games counter reaches the count upper limit value, the value of the count upper limit flag becomes "00000001 (B)".

The payout number upper limit buffer at the address "F28C (H)" is 3 bytes full when the number of payouts in the game is added to the total payout (cumulative) counter, and the value after the addition exceeds 3 bytes full. is a storage area for storing the value of
For example, when the total payout (accumulated) counter value before payout in the game is "FFFFFE (H)" and the number of payouts in the game is "8 (H)", the counter value is set to "8 (H)". )” will cause overflow. Therefore, in order to prevent the total payout (total) counter value from overflowing, a value for becoming full by 3 bytes is calculated, and the calculation result is stored in the payout number upper limit buffer.
In the above example, "FFFFFE(H)"+"1(H)"="FFFFFF(H)", so "1(H)" is stored in the payout number upper limit buffer.

A specific method for calculating the payout number upper limit buffer value is as follows.
(1) In the above example, add "8(H)" to "FFFFFE(H)". As a result, overflow occurs (zero flag=“1”).
(2) When overflow occurs (zero flag = "1"), "2 (H)" is subtracted from the number of payouts in the game "8 (H)" to obtain "6 (H)". This value becomes the value after the overflow (FFFFFE(H)+8(H)=6(H)).
(3) Add "1 (H)" to "6 (H)" to obtain "7 (H)".
(4) Subtract "7 (H)" obtained in (3) from the number of payouts "8 (H)" in the relevant game. As a result, it becomes "1 (H)". This "1 (H)" is the payout number upper limit buffer value.
Therefore, "FFFFFE (H)" + "1 (H)" = "FFFFFF (H)"
becomes.
When the number of payouts in the game does not exceed the full 3 bytes even after being added to the total payout (cumulative) counter, the number of payouts in the game is stored in the payout number upper limit buffer. For example, when the number of payouts in the game is "8 (H)" when the number does not exceed 3 bytes full, "8 (H)" is stored in the upper limit buffer of the number of payouts.

The blinking request flag at the address "F28D(H)" is a flag for specifying an object that satisfies blinking display conditions when displaying the identification seg and the ratio seg.
FIG. 184 is a diagram showing blinking display conditions for identification segs and ratio segs.
As shown in FIG. 184, the identification segment blinks according to whether the total number of games played is less than "6000" or less than "175000". Specifically, regarding the advantageous section ratio, continuous accessory ratio (total), and accessory ratio (total), when the total number of games played (the value stored in the total number of games counter) is less than "175000" , controls the identification segment to blink. In addition, regarding the continuous role ratio (6000 times) and the role ratio (6000 times), when the total number of games (value stored in the total number of games counter) is less than "6000", the identification segment is Control to blink.

The continuous role rate (6000 times) and the identification seg of the role rate (6000 times) are blinking because these rates are originally the rate for 6000 times, but the game is played less than 6000 times. When the ratio is calculated based on the number of times, it is indicated by blinking.
Similarly, the blinking display of the advantageous section ratio, continuous character ratio (cumulative), and character ratio (cumulative) is because these ratios were originally set between 175,000 games (to reduce variation). However, if the ratio is calculated based on the number of games played in less than 175,000 games, it is indicated by blinking.

Furthermore, the advantageous section ratio and the accessory ratio (both 6000 times and total) blink when the displayed value is "70" or more. Further, the continuous accessory ratio (both 6000 times and cumulative total) is displayed blinking when the displayed value is "60" or more.
The reason why the slot machine of this embodiment is set as described above is that the advantageous section ratio and the character ratio are designed to be less than "70"%, and the continuous character ratio is set to be less than "60"%. When the measured value does not fall within the range of the design value, it is indicated by blinking display.

The description returns to FIG. As shown in FIG. 183, in the blinking request flag, the D0 bit corresponds to the advantageous section ratio blinking flag, the D1 bit corresponds to the continuous role ratio (6000 times) blinking flag, and the D6 bit corresponds to the 175000 times blinking flag. there is
For example, when the calculated advantageous section ratio is "70" or more, the D0 bit of the blink request flag becomes "1". Further, when the calculated continuous role product ratio (6000 times) is "70" or more, the D1 bit of the blink request flag becomes "1". Furthermore, when the total game number counter value is less than "6000", the D5 bit becomes "1", and when the total game number counter value is less than "175000", the D6 bit becomes "1".
For example, when the total number of games played is less than "175000" (however, it shall be "6000" or more) and the advantageous section ratio is "70"% or more, the value of the flashing request flag is " 01000001 (B)", and when the display order is "1" in FIG. 181, both the identification seg and the ratio seg are blinking targets.

The ratio display number at the address "F28E(H)" is a storage area for storing the ratio number displayed in the interrupt process. Here, the "display number" indicates the display order in FIG. 181. For example, when the ratio to be displayed in the interrupt process is the advantageous section ratio, "1 (H)" is stored in this ratio display number. be done.
The blinking switching flag at the address "F28F(H)" is a flag for determining whether it is lit or extinguished when blinking the identification seg or the ratio seg during the interrupt process.
In this embodiment, when the blinking display is performed, it is set to repeat turning on and off about every 0.3 seconds. For about 0.3 seconds during lighting, the blinking switching flag is "0" (value indicating lighting), and for about 0.3 seconds during lighting, the blinking switching flag is "1" (value indicating lighting). is set to be

The display switching time of address "F290(H)" is a counter that counts about 5 seconds, which is the time to display one ratio, and is updated by "1" each time an interrupt process is performed.
In this embodiment, advantageous section ratio display (approximately 5 seconds) → role continuous ratio (6000 times) display (approximately 5 seconds) → ... → role ratio (total) (approximately 5 seconds) → advantageous section ratio display (approximately 5 seconds) → … continues to be displayed repeatedly. Therefore, the display switching time is stored in order to determine whether or not about 5 seconds have elapsed, that is, whether or not the switching time of the ratio display contents has been reached.
The blinking switching time of the address "F292(H)" is a counter that counts about 0.3 seconds when blinking the identification seg or the ratio seg, as described above, and each time the interrupt process is performed is a counter that is updated to "1".

Here, the display switching time and the flashing switching time will be explained.
When the display switching time is 5.0 seconds and the blinking switching time is 0.3 seconds, the blinking cycle is 0.6 seconds. However, even if "0.6" is multiplied by a natural number, "5.0" is not obtained. For example, assume that the count of 5.0 seconds and the count of 0.3 seconds are started at the same time as the display of any ratio is started. In this case, the elapsed time is 4.8 seconds when the blinking cycle (0.6 seconds) reaches 8 times. Therefore, when the display is switched to lighting next time, it reaches 5.0 seconds after the lapse of 0.2 seconds. Therefore, the final lighting time is 0.2 seconds. In this way, when the display switching time does not come when the flickering cycle is multiplied by a natural number, the lighting may be turned on or off for a moment just before the display switching time is reached.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the display switching time is set by multiplying the flickering period by a natural number.
As a prerequisite, it is assumed that a deviation of ±10% or less is allowed in the display switching time of 5.0 seconds. Similarly, it is assumed that a deviation of ±10% or less is allowed for the blinking period of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in this embodiment, the display switching time and the blinking display time are counted using the number of interrupts. Also, the interrupt time is "2.235" ms as described in the first embodiment.
In the above, when the period of the display switching time is T, the blinking switching time is S (therefore, the blinking period is "2 x S"), and the natural number is "n",
T = 2 x n x S
should be established.
At this time,
T = 2.235ms x 2144 = 4791.84ms
S = 2.235ms x 134 = 299.49ms
Then, all are within the range of ±10%.
Also, 134×16=2144
which satisfies that "n" is a natural number.

From the above, the display switching time is set to "2144" as an initial value, and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt, and when it is "0", it is determined that the display switching time has been reached. Also, when it is determined that the display switching time is "0", the initial value "2144" is set at the time of the interrupt processing. As a result, the display switching time cycles from "0" to "2144".
Similarly, the flashing switching time is set to "134" as an initial value, and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt. time, or time to switch from off to on) has been reached. Also, when it is determined that the flashing switching time is "0", the initial value "134" is set at the time of the interrupt processing. As a result, the display switching time circulates from "0" to "134".
Further, from the above, since "n=16", the display switching time is reached when the blinking cycle reaches 8 cycles (2×n).
Furthermore, when any ratio display is started, lighting is started when the ratio display satisfies the flashing condition.
More specifically, when the display is started from the advantageous section ratio of the ratio display number "1", and at least one of the identification seg and the ratio seg of the advantageous section ratio is blinking, the flow is as follows.

(1) Start the display of the advantageous section ratio and start from lighting (at this point, the flashing switching flag is "0" (lighting)). Further, when the display of the advantageous section ratio is started, the counter value of the display switching time is the initial value "2144", and the count value of the blinking switching time is the initial value "134".
(2) When it is determined that the blink switching time count value is "0", the initial value "134" is set as the blink switching time during the interrupt process. Also, the flashing switching flag is updated from "0" (lighted) to "1" (lighted out).

(3) After that, when it is determined that the blink switching time count value is "0", the initial value "134" is set as the blink switching time during the interrupt process. Also, the flashing switching flag is updated from "1" (light off) to "0" (light on).
(4) When it is determined that the count value of the display switching time is "0", the initial value "2144" is set as the display switching time during the interrupt process. In addition, the initial value "134" is set to the blink switching time count value, and the blink switching flag is updated from "1" (light off) to "0" (light on). Furthermore, the ratio display number is updated from "1" to "2".
(5) In the next interrupt process, the display of the continuous accessory ratio (6000 times) of the ratio display number "2" is started. Also, when there is an identification seg or a ratio seg that satisfies the blinking display condition, lighting is started.

Next, information processing by the main control board 50 (main CPU 55) in the twenty-sixth embodiment will be described based on a flowchart.
The flow chart in the twenty-sixth embodiment consists of the following contents.
Figure 185: Program start (M_PRG_START)
Figure 186: Setting change processing (M_RANK_SET)
Figure 187: Power return processing (M_POWER_ON)
Figure 188: Main processing (M_MAIN)
Figure 189: (a) Update number of payouts, (b) Wait for interrupt (C_INTR_WAIT)
Figure 190: Interrupt processing (I_INTR)
Figure 191: Rate set process (S_RATE_SET)
Figure 192: Count upper limit check (S_LIMIT_CHK)
Figure 193: Game count (S_GAME_CNT)
Figure 194: Count up (S_CNT_UP)
Figure 195: Advantageous section game count (S_ATGAME_CNT)
Figure 196: Payout quantity count (S_PAYOUT_CNT)
Figure 197: Payout quantity set (S_PAYOUT_SET)
Figure 198: Ring buffer set (S_RINGADR_SET)
Figure 199: Accessory payout number count (S_BNSPAY_CNT)
Figure 200: Consecutive accessory payout number count (S_RBPAY_CNT)
Figure 202: Ratio calculation process (S_CAL_SET)
Figure 203: Calculated value set (S_VALUE_SET)
Figure 204: Execute Ratio Calculation (S_CAL_EXE)
Figure 205: Ring buffer number update (S_RINGNO_SET)
Figure 206: Ratio Display Ready (S_DSP_READY)
Figure 207: Flashing request flag generation (S_LED_FLASH)
Figure 209: Rate display timer update (S_RATE_TIME)
Figure 210: Ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT)
In the following description, "data (value) stored in a register" is abbreviated as "register value".

FIG. 185 is a flow chart showing the processing (M_PRG_START) when the main control board 50 starts the program.
In FIG. 185, when the program is started in step S2101, the main control board 50 initializes registers in the next step S2102. Specific processing includes, for example, the setting of the communication speed of the serial communication circuit provided in the main CPU 55, the setting of the type of interrupt (for example, setting to maskable interrupt, etc.), and the parity bit to be added to the control command to be transmitted. setting (for example, setting to even parity, etc.). In other words, initial values necessary for normal operation of the slot machine 10 are set in various registers.

Next, proceeding to step S2103, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power-off processing completed flag has a normal value. In this embodiment, a power-off execution processing flag is stored when the power is turned off. This power-off execution processing flag is a flag for determining whether or not the previous power-off was performed normally when the power was turned on. Then, when it is determined that the power-off execution processing flag has a normal value, the process proceeds to step S2104, and when it is determined that the value is not normal, the process proceeds to step S2106.

In step S2104, the checksum of the RWM 53 is calculated. Specifically, the checksum calculation is performed for the same range as the checksum of the RWM 53 executed during the power-off process (for example, the work area used by the program, the unused area, and the stack area). Here, in step S2104, the 1-byte data stored in the RWM 53 is added.
In step S2105, it is determined whether or not the range of the RWM 53 for calculating the checksum has been completed. Specifically, the next address is specified from the address of the RWM 53 where the current checksum is calculated, and it is determined whether or not the next address is the address for which the checksum is to be calculated. If it is determined that the checksum calculation has not ended, the process returns to step S2104 to continue the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the range of the RWM 53 for calculating the checksum is completed, the process advances to step S2106.

Also, in the subsequent processing, when data stored in multiple ranges (addresses) of the RWM 53 are to be initialized, the same processing is executed in the designated range of the RWM 53 in this embodiment.
When it is determined in step S2103 that the power-off execution processing flag is not a normal value, an abnormal value is set as power-off recovery data without executing the checksum calculation of the RWM 53 .

At step S2106, the main control board 50 stores the power-off recovery data in a predetermined register (eg, B register). Here, when it is determined that the power-off execution processing flag is a normal value and the checksum calculation (entire range) of the RWM 53 is normally completed, the normal value is stored as the power-off recovery data. On the other hand, when the power-off execution processing flag has an abnormal value ("No" in step S2103), or when it is determined that there was an abnormality during the checksum calculation (entire range) of the RWM 53 in step S2104, power-off Abnormal values are stored as recovery data.

In the next step S2107, the level data of a prescribed input port is stored in a prescribed register (for example, A register). Next, proceeding to step S2108, it is determined whether or not the designated switch is on based on the level data of the predetermined input port. In this embodiment, the "designated switch" means the signal of the door switch 15, the signal of the setting door switch (if a setting door switch is provided), and the signal of the setting key switch 12 among the predetermined input ports. is one.

Then, the signal of the door switch 15 is on (the front cover (housing) is open), the signal of the setting door switch is on (the setting door is open), and the setting key switch 12 The setting change is permitted only when the signal of is on (when the setting key is inserted). When all three designated switches are on, it is possible to shift to the setting change processing of step S2112, but when at least one designated switch is not turned on, it is not permitted to shift to the setting change processing of step S2112. .
That is, even when the signal of the door switch 15 is off (the front cover is closed) or when the signal of the setting door switch is off (the setting door is closed), the setting key switch 12 Since the signal cannot be turned on and there is a high probability of fraud, the transition to the setting change process is not permitted.

Therefore, when it is determined in step S2108 that all the designated switches are on, the process proceeds to step S2109, and when it is determined that they are not on, the process proceeds to step S2111.
In step S2109, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power failure recovery data is abnormal. This power-off recovery data is the data stored in the register in step S2106.

When it is determined that the power-off restoration data is abnormal, the process proceeds to step S2112 for setting change processing (M_RANK_SET), and when determined not to be abnormal, the process proceeds to step S2110. In step S2110, it is determined whether or not the setting change prohibition flag is ON. Here, the setting change disable flag is one of the data stored in the RWM 53, and is a flag that is disabled from the winning lottery process (step S2180) to the game end check process (step S2196), which will be described later. be. If the setting change prohibition flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S2111, and if not, the process proceeds to setting change processing (M_RANK_SET) in step S2112.
In addition, although the setting change disable flag is provided in the present embodiment, the setting change disable flag does not have to be provided when the configuration is such that the setting change is always possible. In that case, the process corresponding to step S2110 becomes unnecessary.
Furthermore, in the twenty-seventh embodiment (2) (FIG. 216), which will be described later, a setting change flag is provided which is turned on when the setting can be changed, but such a flag may be used.

In step S2111, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power failure recovery data is a normal value. This process is equivalent to step S2109. Then, when it is determined that the power failure recovery data is a normal value, the process advances to step S2113 to perform power recovery processing (M_POWER_ON). On the other hand, when it is determined that the power failure recovery data is not a normal value, an "E1" error occurs, and the process advances to step S2114 to perform unrecoverable error processing 1 (SS_ERROR_STOP1; FIG. 136).

FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing setting change processing (M_RANK_SET) in step S2112.
First, in step S2121, a "predetermined range" is stored in a register as an initialization range within the use area of the RWM 53 ("F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in FIG. 124). Here, the "predetermined range" is the initialization range when it is determined that the power-off process has been executed normally, and includes set value data (address "F000 (H)"), game state (for example, RT state), The initialization range in which flags (address "F010(H)", etc.) related to the combination lottery are not initialized is referred to as "predetermined range".

Next, proceeding to step S2122, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power failure recovery data (the value stored in step S2106) is a normal value. When the power-off recovery data is determined to be a normal value, the process advances to step S2124 to maintain the storage of the "predetermined range" in step S2121. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2122 that the power-off restoration data is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S2123.
In step S<b>2123 , the main control board 50 stores “specific range” in the register as an initialization range within the use area of the RWM 53 . Here, the "specific range" is the range to be initialized when it is determined that the power failure is not normal. set.

Then, in step S2124, initialization of the predetermined range set in step S2121 or the specific range set in step S2123 (within the use area of the RWM 53) is started. In the next step S2125, it is determined whether or not the initialization started in step S2124 has ended. If it is determined that the initialization has ended, the process advances to step S2126.

In step S2126, the AF registers (A register and F register (flag register)) are saved. Although the AF register is originally intended to be saved in the F (flag) register, the AF register is saved for the convenience of the instruction. Then, in step S2127, a predetermined range is stored as an initialization range outside the use area of the RWM 53 (after "F200(H)" in FIG. 124). Here, the "predetermined range" is the range to be initialized when it is determined that the power-off process has been executed normally. The range varies depending on specifications, etc., and is not constant).

In the next step S2128, similarly to step S2122, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery data (the value stored in step S2106) is a normal value. When the power-off recovery data is determined to be a normal value, the process advances to step S2130 to maintain the storage of the "predetermined range" in step S2127. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2128 that the power-off restoration data is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S2129.
In step S<b>2129 , the main control board 50 stores “specific range” in the register as an initialization range outside the use area of the RWM 53 . Here, the "specific range" is the range to be initialized when it is determined that the power-off is not normal, and the entire range outside the use area after the address "F200(H)" is set as the initialized range. Therefore, in this case, the ring buffer and the like are also initialized.
Then, proceeding to step S2130, initialization of the predetermined range set in step S2127 or the specific range set in step S2129 (outside the use area of the RWM 53) is started.

In the next step S2131, it is determined whether or not the initialization started in step S2130 has ended. When it is determined that the initialization is completed, the process proceeds to step S2132.
In step S2132, the AF register saved in step S2126 is restored. In the next step S2133, start setting of interrupt processing is performed. Here, various registers corresponding to the interrupt process specified in step S2102 are set. Since timer interrupt processing is used as interrupt processing in the present embodiment, processing for setting the timer interrupt cycle ("2.235 ms" in the present embodiment) corresponds to this. After the processing of step S2133, interrupt processing is executed. In other words, the interrupt processing is not executed before the "interrupt activation".
In the next step S2134, an output request is set at the start of setting change. This process is a process of setting (storing) a control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in a register in order to inform the sub-control board 80 of starting the setting change process.

Note that "output request setting", which is also executed in the process described below, means the process of setting a control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80, as in step S2134. . Also, the control command here means not only the command to be actually transmitted, but also the command that is the source of the command to be actually transmitted.
Next, proceeding to step S2135, the main control board 50 executes the control command set 1. FIG. This process is a process of storing a control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in the control command buffer (RWM 53).

Next, proceeding to step S2136, the main control board 50 stores in the BC register (a pair register consisting of a B register and a C register consisting of 8-bit 1-byte data) as a register for setting the waiting time. In this embodiment, the number of interrupts "224" (approximately 500 ms) is set as the standby time at the start of setting change. Next, the flow advances to step S2137 to execute 2-byte time waiting processing (wait processing) for starting the setting change. In this embodiment, it waits until the number of interrupts "224" is counted (until the set number of interrupts becomes "0" by subtracting "1" for each interrupt number). This waiting is also called delay processing or waiting processing because the main processing does not proceed. It should be noted that during this waiting time (during 2-byte time waiting processing), the main processing is prevented from proceeding, but the interrupt processing is executed.

In this way, the reason why the two-byte time waiting process (wait process) is executed in step S2137 is that the initialization process of the RWM 53 on the main control board 50 side ends in a relatively short time, whereas the sub control board 80 side Since the initialization process of the RWM 83 takes time, the main control board 50 side executes a two-byte time waiting process. In particular, the main control board 50 side cannot know whether the initialization process has been completed on the sub control board 80 side.

Therefore, while the sub-control board 80 is still in the process of being initialized, the main control board 50 has already completed the initialization process, and the process proceeds to progress the control process of the main control board 50 and the sub-control board. 80 can be prevented from being out of sync with the progress of the control process.
After executing the output request set and the control command set 1 at the start of the setting change, the sub-control board 80 starts the initialization of the RWM 83, and a sufficient time for completing the initialization of the RWM 83 is set as a wait time. do. As a result, after the RWM 83 is initialized on the sub-control board 80 side, the main control board 50 side proceeds to step S2138 and subsequent steps.

Note that the control command for starting the setting change set in steps S2134 and S2135 is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 even during the two-byte time waiting process in step S2137. However, while the 2-byte time wait process is being executed in step S2137, the process after step S2138 does not proceed (the main process does not proceed).

After the end of the 2-byte time waiting process in step S2137, the process advances to step S2138 to perform display control (lighting) of the LED during setting change. As a result, when an interrupt process is executed after this process, the LEDs (set value display LED 73 and acquisition number display LED 78) displayed during setting change can be turned on. In this embodiment, in order to display the current set value on the set value display LED 73 based on the set value data and to display "88" on the acquired number display LED 78, the process of updating the display data value (RWM 53 A process of storing data for displaying "88" in the obtained number data) is executed.
It should be noted that the display data to be displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 is initialized in step S2124, so it is "0" before updating.

Next, the flow advances to step S2139 to execute interrupt wait processing (C_INTR_WAIT). This process is a process of waiting until one interrupt time (2.235 ms) elapses. The reason for providing this processing will be described later. Details of this processing will be described later (FIG. 189(b)). Then, after one interrupt time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2140.
In step S2140, it is determined whether or not the operation of the setting switch 13 has been detected. Here, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 13 has been turned on by determining the rise data of the input port including the setting switch 13 . If it is determined that the operation of the setting switch 13 has been detected, the process proceeds to step S2141, and if it is determined that the operation has not been detected, the process proceeds to step S2142.
In step S2141, the set value data is updated. Specifically, the set value data (address "F000(H)") of the RWM 53 is stored (updated). Further, when the interrupt processing is executed after the set value data is updated, the set value display LED 73 displays the updated value.
Note that the relationship between the operation of the setting switch 13 and the set value is the same as that described in the twenty-fifth embodiment.

In the next step S2142, it is determined whether or not the operation of the start switch 41 has been detected. In this embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated during setting change, the setting value at that time is determined.
When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S2143, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S2139.

In the above processing, step S2139 (interrupt wait) is provided for clearing the rise data of the setting switch 13. FIG.
For example, if the process of step S2139 is not provided and it is determined that the rise data of the setting switch 13 is ON in step S2140, the set value data is updated in step S2141, and the start switch 41 is turned ON in the next step S2142. If it is determined that it is not, the flow advances to step S2140 to determine whether or not the rising data of the setting switch 13 is ON.

After it is determined to be ON in step S2140, if the interrupt process is executed even once, the rising data of the setting switch 13 is turned OFF. However, until the interrupt process is executed, it continues to be determined that the rise data of the setting switch 13 is ON in step S2140. As a result, the set value data continues to increase by "2" or more when the setting switch 13 is operated only once. Therefore, in step S2139, an interrupt waiting process is executed.

In step S2143, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 12 has been turned off. If it is determined that the setting key switch 12 has been turned off, the process advances to step S2144 to perform LED display control (extinguishing) after the setting change is completed. Specifically, first, the set value display LED 73 is turned off. Here, the LED display request flag described in the twentieth embodiment or the like is changed to a normal value. As a result, the set value display LED 73 (digit 5) does not light up (turns off) even if the interrupt process is executed thereafter. Secondly, the stored number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 are displayed as normal. Here, in order to display "00" on the stored number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78, a process of updating the values of the stored number data and the acquired number data of the RWM 53 is executed.
As a result, "00" is displayed on the stored number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 when the interrupt process is executed after this process. Instead of displaying "00", control may be performed so that the stored number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 are extinguished.

Next, in step S2145, similarly to step S2134, an output request setting at the end of setting change is performed. This process is a control command for notifying the sub-control board 80 of the determined setting value (specifically, the setting value data stored at the address "F000(H)") to end the setting change process. is set. Next, proceeding to step S2146, the main control board 50 executes the control command set 1 as in step S2135. Then, the process advances to step S2147 to shift to the main process (M_MAIN).

FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing power recovery processing (M_POWER_ON) in step S2113 in FIG.
First, in step S2151, the stack pointer (SP register) is restored. Here, the stack pointer is an area (stack area) of the RWM 53 that stores data at the time of power failure (eg, register values, instruction processing of main processing before interrupt processing, etc.) when power failure occurs. Of these, it indicates the area (address) to be stacked next.
In the next step S2152, the set value data is read, and whether the range of the set value data is normal (within the range of set values 1 to 6), in other words, to "F000 (H)". It is determined whether the stored value is within the range of "0(H)" to "5(H)". If it is determined that the set value data is within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S2153, and if it is determined that the set value data is not within the normal range, an "E6" error occurs, and the process proceeds to step S2164 to perform unrecoverable error processing 2 (SS_ERROR_STOP2 ; FIG. 137).

Proceeding to step S2153, the initialization range of the unused area in the used area of the RWM 53 is set in the register. Then, in the next step S2154, initialization of the RWM 53 within the range set in step S2153 is executed. Here, it is conceivable that a value may be stored in the RWM 53 due to noise or the like even in an unused area. In the unlikely event that a value is stored in an unused area, it may lead to fraudulent acts, so please initialize the unused area when the power is turned on (usually once a day). there is
In the next step S2155, it is determined whether or not the initialization of the RWM 53 (unused area in the used area) has been completed.
In step S2156, the AF register is saved. This process is the same as the process of step S2126 described above. In the next step S2157, the initialization range of the unused area outside the used area of the RWM 53 is set in the register. Then, in the next step S2158, initialization of the RWM 53 within the range set in step S2157 is executed.
In the next step S2159, it is determined whether or not the initialization of the RWM 53 (unused area outside the used area) has been completed. In step S2160, the AF register is restored. This process is the same as the process of step S2132 described above.

In the next step S2161, a predetermined input port is read. This processing is processing for updating each data (level data, rising data, falling data) of the input port before power-off to the latest data.
The flow then advances to step S2162 to activate an interrupt. This process is, for example, the process of setting the timer interrupt cycle, and is similar to step S2133 described above.
Next, proceeding to step S2163, the power-off processing completion flag is cleared, that is, set to "0". Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

In the above-described power restoration process, after reading the input port (step S2161), the interrupt process is activated (step S2162). The reason is as follows.
In this embodiment, it is configured such that the set value can be confirmed by inserting the setting key while waiting for the game. Here, when the fall signal of the setting key switch 12 becomes "1", it is determined that the confirmation of the set value is finished.
However, for example, it is assumed that the power is turned off during the confirmation of the settings, and the power is turned on by turning off the setting key switch 12 (by removing the setting key) during the power off.

In this case, the fall signal of the setting key switch 12 becomes "1" based on the fact that the setting key switch 12 is off by interrupt processing after the power is restored, so that the fall of the setting key switch is detected. be.
As a result, the state at the time of power failure recovery and the state before power failure become different. Specifically, while the falling signal of the setting key switch 12 is "0" before the power is turned off, the falling signal of the setting key switch 12 becomes "1" when the power is restored.
Therefore, in order to avoid different states before and after power failure, the value of the RWM 53 of a predetermined input port is updated to the latest state when power is restored. Therefore, the interrupt process is activated after executing the predetermined input port read process.

In the above program start processing, setting change processing, and power recovery processing,
(1) In the program start process of FIG. 185, if "No" is determined in step S2103 (power-off processing completion flag abnormal value), or if there is an abnormality in the checksum in step S2104, step S2106 , an abnormal value is stored as recovery data after power failure. In this case, since it is determined "Yes" in step S2109, the process advances to the setting change processing (FIG. 186) in step S2112.
Then, in the setting change process of FIG. 186, since "No" is determined in steps S2122 and S2128, the entire range inside and outside the use area of the RWM 53 is initialized, that is, in FIGS. All data after "F000(H)" and after "F200(H)" are initialized.
In FIG. 183, addresses up to "F293 (H)" are displayed as addresses outside the use area of the RWM 53, but in reality, addresses up to "F3FF (H)" are provided (see FIG. 124), and RWM 53 abnormalities, etc. , when an unrecoverable error occurs, all of the addresses "F000(H)" to "F3FF(H)" are initialized.

(2) In the program start processing, when the power-off processing completed flag is determined to be a normal value and the checksum is performed normally, when the setting change processing is performed, step S2122 and step S2122 in FIG. Since "Yes" is determined in S2128, the process proceeds to steps S2124 and S2130, respectively, and the specified range (within the use area and outside the use area) of the RWM 53 is initialized. When the setting change mode starts up normally, at least the address "F28E(H)" outside the use area is initialized. In particular, in the present embodiment, addresses after address "F28A(H)" outside the use area (including "F28A(H)") are initialized.
Therefore, for example, when the power is turned off while the character ratio (6000 times) corresponding to the ratio display number "3" is being displayed before the setting is changed, and the setting change mode is normally entered, after that, The ratio display starts from the advantageous section ratio (first ratio) corresponding to the ratio display number "1", and the display switching time and blink switching time also start from the initial values.
However, not limited to this, when the setting change mode is normally entered, the ratio display number may not be RWM-initialized, and the display switching time and flashing switching time may be RWM-initialized. Furthermore, when the setting change mode is normally entered, RWM initialization may not be performed for any of the ratio display number, the display switching time, and the flashing switching time.
In other words, the error-related information stored in the RWM storage area outside the use area and the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 are initialized, but the information concerning the lighting control of the management information display LED 74 is not initialized. may have been

(3) In the program start processing, if the power-off processing completion flag is determined to be a normal value and the checksum is also performed normally, and if the setting change processing is not performed, the power restoration processing in step S2113 ( 187). In this case, if the set value is normal in step S2152 in FIG. 187, initialization of the RWM 53 (within the use area and outside the use area) at the time of normal power-on is executed. This initialization is a process of initializing the unused area of the RWM 53 as described above. Therefore, unlike when the setting is changed, for example, when the power is turned off while the character ratio (6000 times) corresponding to the ratio display number "3" is being displayed, and then the power is turned on again, the power In the ratio display after ON, the character ratio (6000 times) corresponding to the ratio display number "3" is started, and the display switching time and flashing switching time are restarted from the point before the power was turned off.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and RWM may be initialized including the ratio display number as in the case of setting change processing. Alternatively, the ratio display number may not be RWM-initialized, but the display switching time and blinking switching time may be RWM-initialized.
Furthermore, it is also possible not to perform the process of initializing the unused area of the RWM 53 when the power is simply turned on.
As described above, when the ratio display numbers are initialized, the ratio display after initialization starts from the advantageous section ratio of the ratio display number “1”. Further, when the display switching time is initialized, in the ratio display after initialization, the ratio to be displayed first is displayed for 5.0 seconds. Furthermore, when the flashing switching time is initialized, when the flashing display is performed in the ratio display after the initialization, lighting is started. Accordingly, information can be displayed on the management information display LED 74 without delay. In addition, when the blink switching time is initialized, it can be arbitrarily set whether to start from lighting or to start from extinguishing (in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the ).

FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) (step S2147 in FIG. 186) in this embodiment. During this main process, an interrupt process (FIG. 190), which will be described later, is performed every 2.235 ms.
In FIG. 188, a stack pointer is set in step S2171. As described above, the stack pointer is an area of the RWM 53 that stores data (eg, register values, instruction processing of main processing before interrupt processing, etc.) at the time of power failure when power failure occurs. Setting the stack pointer is a process of setting the register value to the initial value in the area of the RWM 53 .

In the next step S2172, game start set processing is performed. This process is a process of generating, updating, saving, etc. of the operating state flag.
In the next step S2173, bet medals are read. This process is a process of reading the number of medals betted at the present time.
In the next step S2174, it is determined whether or not there are bet medals based on the number of bets read in step S2173.

When it is determined in step S2174 that there are bet medals, the process proceeds to step S2176, and when it is determined that there are no bet medals, the process proceeds to step S2175 to perform medal insertion waiting processing, and then proceeds to step S2176. In the medal insertion waiting process of step S2175, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 12 is on.
In step S2176, management processing of inserted medals is performed. This process is a process of determining whether or not the medals have been cleaned, whether or not the settlement switch 46 has been operated, and the like.
In the next step S2177, a soft random number update process is performed. This process is a process of updating (for example, adding "1" each time) a processing random number for processing (computing) the random number (hard random number or built-in random number) used by the combination lottery means 61 . A soft random number is a 16-bit random number with a range from '0' to '65535(D)'. As an update method, a process of adding an interrupt count value (a count value (variable) incremented at the time of an interrupt) to the value before updating may be executed.

At the next step S2178, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S2179, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S2173. Even when the start switch 41 is operated, if the number of bets has not reached the prescribed number for the game, it is determined "No" in step S2178.

In step S2179, a process for accepting a start switch is executed. This process is a process of setting a setting change disable flag, setting an output request at the start of reel rotation, and setting the number of times of output for outputting a medal insertion signal as an external signal to a hall computer or the like.
In step S2180, the combination lottery means 61 executes the lottery for the combination at the timing when the start switch 41 is operated, that is, when the operation signal of the start switch 41 is received. The random number at the time of lottery is obtained in step S2179. Then, in step S2180, a process of determining whether or not the obtained random number value corresponds to any winning combination is performed using the combination lottery table.

In the next step S2181, reel rotation start preparation processing is executed. This process is a process of determining whether or not the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) has elapsed.
Next, proceeding to step S2182, the reel control means 65 starts rotating the reel 31. FIG. In the next step S2183, it is checked whether the reel 31 has been stopped. Here, it is detected whether or not the operation signal of the stop switch 42 is received, and when the operation signal is received, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the lottery result of the combination and the position of the reel 31. Control is performed to stop the reel 31 at the determined position.

In the next step S2184, the reel control means 65 checks whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped, and proceeds to step S2185. In step S2185, it is determined whether or not all reels 31 have stopped. If it is determined that all reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S2186, and if it is determined that all reels 31 have not stopped, the process returns to step S2183. .

In step S2186, the display determination of the design is performed. Here, the prize determination means 66 determines whether or not the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination has stopped on the activated line.
In the next step S2187, it is determined whether or not a symbol display error has occurred. If it is determined that a display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S2199. move on.
Here, since the reel 31 is stopped based on the stop position determination table, the reel 31 normally does not stop at a position other than the position determined by the stop position determination table. However, as a result of the symbol display determination, if a symbol (kicking away symbol) that should not be displayed on the active line is displayed, it is determined that there is an abnormality ("E5" error), and the process proceeds to step S2199. Unrecoverable error processing 1 (FIG. 136) is executed.

When it is determined in step S2187 that no display error has occurred and the process proceeds to step S2188, processing for updating the number of medals to be paid out is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 189(a).
In the next step S2189, the payout means 67 pays out medals corresponding to the winning combination. Next, the flow advances to step S2190 to perform interrupt wait processing (C_INTR_WAIT). This process is similar to step S2139 in FIG. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 189(b). In the next step S2191, interrupt processing is prohibited. The processing of steps S2190 and S2191 prohibits the interrupt immediately after the interrupt.

In the next step S2192, the AF register is saved. This process is similar to step S2156 in FIG. Next, the flow advances to step S2193 to execute rate setting processing (S_RATE_SET) (FIG. 191 described later). This ratio set process is a process executed outside the above-described use area (second program).
The ratio set processing, which will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 191, is processing for updating various counter values and executing ratio calculations in order to display five types of ratios. Then, in step S2194, the AF register saved in step S2192 is restored, and the interrupt is permitted (resume) in step S2195. In this way, when the ratio setting process is executed, the AF register is saved and the interrupt process is prohibited.
The reason why interrupt processing is prohibited during execution of ratio set processing is that if an interrupt processing enters while a program outside the usage area is being executed in the main processing, the program inside the usage area and the program outside the usage area are mixed, and the processing becomes complicated.

Next, the process advances to step S2196 to perform game end check processing. In this process, a condition device (winning combination) flag is cleared. Then, in step S2197, an output request is set at the end of the game, and in the next step S2198, a control command is set 1. These processes are similar to steps S2134 and S2135 in FIG. 186, and are processes for setting control command data for transmitting to the sub-control board 80 that one game has ended.
Then, when the process of step S2198 ends, the process returns to the main process (step S2147) again.

FIG. 189(a) is a flow chart showing the process of updating the number of medals to be paid out in step S2188 of FIG.
First, in step S2211, data on the number of medals to be paid out is obtained. Based on the display determination in step S2186 of FIG. 188, the winning combination (combination of symbols) can be identified, and the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the combination of symbols is read from the data table or the like.

In the next step S2212, data on the number of medals to be paid out is saved. This process is a process of saving (storing) the medal payout number data obtained in step S2211 in the address "F040(H)" (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) in the RWM 53. FIG. Since the value of the payout number data of medals is "0" at the time of processing in step S2211, a process of writing new data is executed. For example, at the time of winning a one-card combination, the data value is updated from "0" to "1". It is optional whether or not to perform the process of step S2211 when the winning combination with the medal payout is not won. For example, there are a method of skipping step S2211 and a method of executing the process of step S2211 and writing "0".

In the next step S2213, the medal payout number data buffer is saved. This process is a process of saving (storing) the medal payout number data acquired in step S2211 in the address "F041(H)" (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) in the RWM 53. FIG. Since the value written in the previous game remains in the data buffer for the number of medals to be paid out, the number of medals to be paid out in the game ("0" if no medals are to be paid out) is written (overwritten). .
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

189(a) above, the value of the payout medal count data stored in step S2212 is changed by the medal payout processing for winning in step S2189 in FIG. or the payout of one medal (from the hopper 35) is performed, the value is subtracted by "1", and becomes "0" when the payout of medals is completed. That is, in step S2189 in FIG. 188, when the medal payout number data is not "0", the medal payout process is continued, and when the medal payout number data becomes "0", the medal payout process is terminated. to decide.
On the other hand, the value of the medal payout number data buffer stored in step S2213 is maintained (not changed) until it is updated in the next game, that is, until the process of step S2213 is performed in the next game.

Therefore, in the ratio setting process of step S2193 in FIG. 188, the calculation of the ratio based on the number of medals to be paid out in the game is executed. , the number of medals to be paid out for the game cannot be read from the number of medals to be paid out data. Therefore, when only the payout number data of medals is provided, it is necessary to execute the ratio setting process before the process of step S2188. On the other hand, if a medal payout number data buffer whose value is not subtracted even by medal payout is provided, the number of medals to be paid out in the game can be read from the medal payout number data buffer even after the process of step S2188. , the ratio setting process can be executed after the process of step S2188.

FIG. 189(b) is a flowchart showing interrupt waiting (C_INTR_WAIT) in steps S2139 of FIG. 186 and step S2190 of FIG.
First, in step S2215 for obtaining the interrupt counter value, the interrupt counter value at the address "F001(H)" is stored in the A register. Here, in this embodiment, the interrupt counter value is stored as 16 bits in the two addresses "F001(H)" and "F002(H)". H)” is stored in the A register.

Next, proceeding to step S2216, it is determined whether or not the interrupt counter value (lower 8-bit value stored at address "F001(H)") has changed. Specifically, a process of subtracting the "interrupt counter value stored at address "F001 (H)"" from the "A register value" is executed, and if the operation result is "0" (zero flag = "1") If there is, it is judged as "No". Then, when it is determined that there has been a change, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated, and when it is determined that there has been no change, the processing of step S2216 is continued.

In the main processing of FIG. 188, when an interrupt wait is executed in step S2190, the process advances to step S2191 after execution of the interrupt. Then, the next interrupt timing does not arrive until 2.235 ms has elapsed from that moment. Here, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the processing time is set to be less than 2.235 ms after the interrupt is executed in step S2190 until the process proceeds to step S2195. Therefore, after the interrupt is executed in step S2190, the next interrupt is executed in step S2195 and after.
With this setting, the interrupt timing after step S2195 does not change with respect to the interrupt timing up to step S2190.
On the other hand, when 2.235 ms elapses before proceeding to step S2195 after the interrupt is executed in step S2190, the interrupt timing arrives while the interrupt is prohibited. In this case, the interrupt is entered after the interrupt is permitted in step S2195. Therefore, the interrupt timing after step S2195 may change from the interrupt timing up to step S2190.
Also, in the main processing of FIG. 188, even when the process proceeds to step S2191 without executing the interrupt wait in step S2190, the interrupt timing up to now may arrive before the interrupt is permitted in step S2195. Therefore, similarly to the above, the interrupt timing after step S2195 may change from the interrupt timing before step S2191.

FIG. 190 is a flow chart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR) of the twenty-sixth embodiment. FIG. 190 is a modification of FIG. 133 shown in the twentieth embodiment.
In FIG. 190, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 133, and the description thereof is omitted. 133 are given different step numbers, and the different step numbers are underlined.
FIG. 190 differs from the flowchart of FIG. 133 in that ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) of step S2221 is provided. Others are the same as those of the twentieth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 190, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, after the external signal is output in step S1416, the process advances to step S2221 to execute ratio display preparation processing. This process is the process of FIG. 206, which will be described later, and is a process of generating a flashing request flag, updating a timer related to ratio display, outputting segment data, and the like. The ratio display preparation process is a process executed outside the use area (second program), similar to the ratio setting process described above.

FIG. 191 is a flow chart showing the rate setting process (S_RATE_SET) in step S2193 of FIG.
First, in the stack pointer save in step S2231, the stack pointer (SP register) stored in the stack area is stored in the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 (address "F293(H)").
As described above, the ratio set process is a program that is executed outside the usage area. Restore the stack pointer when returning to

The "stack area" refers to an area of the RWM 53 that can save (store) various registers and program return addresses. The stack area holds data in a last-in, first-out structure.
A "stack pointer" is one type of register that holds data, and is also called an SP register. The stack pointer is for holding the address of the most recently referenced position in the stack area. When data is stored in the stack area, the value of the stack pointer is incremented by the amount of data, and is decremented by the amount when the data is taken out.

For example, when the stack pointer indicates "F200(H)", the data is saved to "F1FF(H)" in the stack area.
In particular, the process of step S2231 stores the "return address" indicating which program should be executed after executing the ratio set process in the stack area, and sets the stack pointer to the stack pointer temporary to acquire the return address. This is the process of storing in the save buffer 2 .

In the next step S2232, a stack pointer (outside the used area) is set. This process is a process of storing "F400 (H)" in the stack pointer (SP register).
The data stored in the RWM 53 can be updated in the storage area of the RWM 53 outside the use area by the processing by the program outside the use area.
In other words, the addresses are different between the stack area where registers and return addresses are saved by processing by a program outside the use area and the stack area where registers and return addresses are saved by processing by a program within the use area.
In this embodiment, the stack area in the used area is set to addresses "F1C0(H)" to "F1FF(H)". Also, the stack area outside the use area is set to addresses "F3EC(H)" to "F3FF(H)".

In the next step S2233, the register is saved. This process is a process of saving various registers to the stack area (outside the used area).
Next, in step S2234, the upper address of RWM 53 is set in the Q register. This process is a process of storing "F2(H)" in the Q register.
This processing is performed because the addresses of the RWM 53 used in the ratio set processing all start with "F2(H)", so the updating of the addresses of the RWM 53 and the read processing instructions can be simplified. Because.

In the next step S2235, a counter upper limit check (S_LIMIT_CHK) is performed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 192, which will be described later, and the count values of the total number of games counter (address "F26D(H)") and the total payout (cumulative) counter (address "F27C(H)") reach the upper limit. This is a process of checking whether or not the status is set (details will be described later).
After execution of this process, the address (F28B(H)) of the RWM 53 storing the count upper limit flag indicating whether the total payout (cumulative) counter value or the total number of games counter value has reached the upper limit value is Stored in the HL register.

Next, proceeding to step S2236, it is determined whether or not the number-of-games upper limit flag is on. This determination is "Yes" when the D0 bit of the data (count upper limit flag) stored at the address (F28B(H)) indicated by the HL register value is "1". When it is determined that the number-of-games upper limit flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S2239, and when it is determined that the number-of-games upper limit flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S2237. That is, when it is determined that the number-of-games upper limit flag is ON, the counting process regarding the number of games in steps S2237 and S2238 is not executed.
At step S2237, the number of games counted (S_GAME_CNT) (FIG. 193) is executed. In the next step S2238, an advantageous section game number count (S_ATGAME_CNT) (FIG. 195) is executed. Details of the processing for counting the number of games played and for counting the number of games played in the advantageous zone will be described later. In the game number counting, a process of adding "1" for each game is executed. Further, in the advantageous section game number count, a process of adding "1" every game during the advantageous section is executed.

In the next step S2239, a payout number count (S_PAYOUT_CNT) (FIG. 196) is executed. Furthermore, in the next step S2240, the number of paid-out bonuses is counted (S_BNSPAY_CNT) (FIG. 199), and in the next step S2241, the number of consecutive paid-out bonuses is counted (S_RBPAY_CNT) (FIG. 200). These processes are processes for updating the total number of payouts, the number of payouts at the time of accessory operation, and the number of continuous accessory payouts, respectively, and the details will be described later.

The flow then advances to step S2242 to update the 400 game counter. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address (F210(H)) of the 400 game counter in the HL register. Specifically, "10 (H)" is stored in the L register, and the data (F2 (H)) set in the Q register (described above) is stored in the H register.
(2) Add "1" to the data stored at the address (F210(H)) indicated by the HL register value.
This addition is a cyclic addition from "0" to "399(D)". For example, when "399(D)" is stored, adding "1" results in "0". . Incidentally, as described above, the 400 game counter may be subtracted.

Next, the flow advances to step S2243 to execute ratio calculation processing (S_CAL_SET) (FIG. 202). This process is a process of calculating the five ratios mentioned above and storing them in a predetermined address of the RWM 53 . The details of this processing will be described later.
Next, the flow advances to step S2244 to execute ring buffer update (S_RINGNO_SET) (FIG. 205). This process determines whether or not 400 games have passed since the previous update of the ring buffer number, and updates the ring buffer number when it is determined that it has passed. The details of this processing will be described later.

The flow then advances to step S2245 to restore the register. This process is a process of restoring various registers saved in step S2233.
In the next step S2246, the stack pointer is restored. This process stores the stack pointer saved in step S2231, ie, the data stored in the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2, in the stack pointer (SP register). Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 192 is a flow chart showing the count upper limit check (S_LIMIT_CHK) in step S2235 of FIG.
First, in step S2251, the number of repetitions and the data for the count upper limit flag are set. This process stores "2(H)" in the B register and stores "0" in the C register. The reason why "2 (H)" is stored in the B register is that the count upper limit check checks the upper limits of the total number of games played and the total number of payouts (accumulated), so that the number of repetitions of steps S2253 to S2257 is This is for setting "2".

In step S2252, the address of the RWM 53 of the total payout (cumulative) counter is set. This process is a process of storing "F27C(H)", which is the address of the total payout (cumulative) counter, in the HL register.
As described above, the total payout (cumulative) counter consists of 3 bytes, where "F27C (H)" is the lower 1st byte (first digit) and "F27D (H)" is the lower 2 bytes. (2nd digit), "F27E(H)" stores the data of the upper 1st byte (3rd digit). Then, in this step S2252, the address "F27C(H)" of the first lower byte is stored in the HL register.

Next, the flow advances to step S2253 to acquire the lower 2 bytes of the target counter. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the E register.
(2) The result of adding "1" to the HL register value is taken as the HL register value.
(3) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the D register.
(4) The result of adding "1" to the HL register value is taken as the HL register value.
By these processes, the DE register stores the lower 2-byte data of the total payout (cumulative) counter (repetition number "1") or total game number counter (repetition number "2").
Further, (4) according to the calculation result, the HL register stores the address where the data of the upper first byte of the total payout (cumulative) counter or the total number of games counter is stored.

In the next step S2254, the high-order 1 byte of the target counter is obtained. This process is a process of storing the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
In the next step S2255, upper limit value check is performed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add "1" to the DE register value, and use the result of the addition as the DE register value. As described above, since the DE register stores the data of the lower 2 bytes, the carry flag becomes "1" when an overflow occurs when "1" is added.
(2) Store the result of adding the carry flag value to the A register value in the A register. As a result of this operation, when the A register overflows, the carry flag is set to "1". When the carry flag is "0" as a result of the operation of (1), there is no change in the A register value.

In the next step S2256, the count upper limit flag data is updated. This process is to rotate-shift the carry flag (CY) and the data stored in the C register to the left. Specifically, the value of the carry flag becomes the value of the D0 bit, and the previous values of the D0 to D6 bits become the values of the D1 to D7 bits, respectively.
For example:
Example 1)
When carry flag = "0" and C register = "00000000 (B)",
C register = "00000000 (B)"
becomes.
Example 2)
When carry flag = "0" and C register = "00000001 (B)",
C register = "00000010 (B)"
becomes.
Example 3)
When carry flag = "1" and C register = "00000000 (B)",
C register = "00000001 (B)"
becomes.
Example 4)
When carry flag = "1" and C register = "00000001 (B)",
C register = "00000011 (B)"
becomes.

In the next step S2257, the address of the RWM 53 of the total number of games counter corresponding to the number of repetitions "2" is set. This process is a process of storing, in the HL register, the address "F26D(H)" in which the data of the least significant digit is stored among the addresses of the total number-of-games counter.
The flow then advances to step S2258 to determine whether or not the number of repetitions has been completed. This process decrements the B register value by "1" and determines whether the B register value is "0". If it is "0", it is determined that the repetition has been completed.
At the first step S2251, "2(H)" is set as the B register value, so the first time is "No" at step S2258, and the process returns to step S2253. By this processing, the upper limit of the total payout (cumulative) counter is checked at the repetition number "1", and the upper limit of the total number of games counter is checked at the repetition number "2". It should be noted that the address of the RWM 53 of the total number of games counter is set in step S2257 also in the "2" repetition number. However, since the determination in step S2258 is "Yes" for the "2" repeat count, the upper limit of the total number-of-games counter is not checked again.

If it is determined in step S2258 that the number of repetitions has been completed, the process advances to step S2259. In step S2259, the count upper limit flag is saved. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address (F28B(H)) of the count upper limit flag in the HL register.
(2) Store the data stored in the C register at the address indicated by the HL register value.
This processing updates the data of the count upper limit flag.
When the D0th bit of the count upper limit flag is "1", it indicates that the total number-of-games counter has reached the upper limit.
Further, when the D1-th bit of the count upper limit flag is "1", it indicates that the total payout (cumulative) counter has reached the upper limit.

FIG. 193 is a flow chart showing the number-of-games count (S_GAME_CNT) in step S2237 in FIG.
First, in step S2271, the address of the RWM 53 of the number-of-games counter is set. This process is a process of storing the address (F26D(H)) where the total number of games counter is stored in the DE register.
In the next step S2272, the addition value "1" is set. This process is a process of storing "1" in the A register.

Next, the process advances to step S2273 to count up (S_CNT_UP). This process is not limited to counting the number of games according to this flowchart, but other counting processes described later (advantageous section game number count (S_ATGAME_CNT), payout number count (S_PAYOUT_CNT), payout number set (S_PAYOUT_SET), accessory payout number count ( S_BNSPAY_CNT), and count the number of continuous payouts (S_RBPAY_CNT)).
This count-up is a process of determining whether or not the count upper limit has been reached, and generating an upper limit buffer, etc., when it is determined that the upper limit has been reached (FIG. 194 described later). By counting up in step S2273, "1" is added to the total number-of-games counter value. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 194 is a flow chart showing the count up (S_CNT_UP) in step S2273, etc. of FIG.
This process is executed because the DE register stores the address of the RWM 53 to be added, and the A register stores the addition value "1", the buffer for the number of medals to be paid out, or the upper limit buffer for the number of payouts. under the circumstances.
First, in step S2281, the lower 2 bytes are added. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the data at the address indicated by the DE register value in the C register.
(2) The data at the address indicated by the data obtained by adding "1" to the DE register value is stored in the B register.
Even if the process (2) is executed, the DE register value remains the same as in (1).
Also, the lower 2-byte data is stored in the BC register by the processes (1) and (2).
(3) Add the A register value to the BC register value.
Here, the A register value differs depending on which module calls it. When overflow occurs due to this addition processing, the carry flag is set to "1".
(4) Store the BC register value at the address indicated by the DE register value.

The flow then advances to step S2282 to determine whether or not there is a carry. In this process, it is determined that there is a carry when the carry flag=“1” as a result of the calculation in step S2281. If it is determined that there is a carryover, the process advances to step S2283, and if it is determined that there is no carryover, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
In step S2283, high-order 1-byte addition processing is performed. This process is a process of adding "1" to the data of the upper byte when overflow occurs in the "lower 2 bytes addition" of step S2281. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) A value obtained by adding "1" to the DE register value is stored in the DE register.
(2) A value obtained by adding "1" to the DE register value is stored in the DE register.
That is, the DE register value becomes "+2" by the processing of (1) and (2) above.
In other words, the DE register stores data indicating the address where the upper byte data of the 3-byte data is stored.
(3) Add "1" to the data at the address indicated by the data stored at the address indicated by the DE register value to update the data at the address.
When this addition causes an overflow, the upper 1-byte value becomes "0" (FF(H)+1(H)=0(H), zero flag="1").

In the next step S2284, it is determined whether or not the count upper limit has been exceeded. Here, when the zero flag=“1” in step S2283 (at the time of overflow), it is determined that the count upper limit has been exceeded. If it is determined that the count upper limit value has been exceeded, the process advances to step S2285, and if it is determined that the count upper limit value has not been exceeded, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

It should be noted that, in the count-up during counting of the number of games in FIG. 193, it is never determined that the count upper limit has been exceeded in step S2284.
In counting up the number of games, "1" is added for each game until reaching 3 bytes full. Until it reaches 3 bytes full, it is judged as "No" in step S2284, so the processing after step S2285 is not executed.
Then, when the total number of games counter value becomes 3 bytes full due to the number of games counted in the game, the number of games upper limit flag is saved in the count upper limit check of step S2235 in the next game ratio setting process (FIG. 191). be. Then, in the next step S2236, it is determined that the number-of-games upper limit flag is ON, so steps S2237 and S2238 are not executed.

At step S2285, the upper 1 byte is subtracted. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the data stored at the address indicated by the DE register value to update the data at that address.
That is, it is a process of performing "0"-"1" and storing "FF(H)".
In the next step S2286, a payout number upper limit buffer is generated.
Here, the "payout number upper limit buffer" is a storage area for storing a value to be added to the total payout (total).
An example will be described below.
Example 1)
When the total payout (cumulative total) is "000010 (H)", when the 8-card combination is won (paid out), even if "8 (H)" is added to the total payout (cumulative), " FFFFFF(H)” (3 bytes full) is not reached, so “8(H)” is stored in the payout number upper limit buffer.
Example 2)
When the total payout (cumulative total) is "FFFFFE (H)" and the 8-card combination is won (paid out), adding "8 (H)" to the total payout (cumulative) gives "FFFFFF ( H)”. Specifically, overflow occurs and becomes "000006 (H)".
In such a case, "1 (H)" is stored in the payout number upper limit buffer so that the value after addition becomes "FFFFFF (H)".

The payout number upper limit buffer generation executes the following processing.
(1) A value obtained by subtracting "1" from the DE register value is stored in the DE register.
(2) A value obtained by subtracting "1" from the DE register value is stored in the DE register.
By the processing of (1) and (2), the address of the least significant byte of the 3-byte data is stored in the DE register.
(3) Add "1" to the C register value.
The process of step S2286 is performed when it is determined in step S2284 that the count upper limit has been exceeded, that is, when the data consisting of 3 bytes has exceeded "FFFFFF(H)". At this time, the C register stores the value that overflows from "FF(H)" due to the arithmetic processing in step S2281. Specific examples are as follows.
Example 1)
When the C register value is "FE(H)" and the A register value (for example, "08(H)") is added, the C register value becomes "06(H)". As a result of this process, "1 (H)" is added to the C register value, so that the C register value becomes "07 (H)".
Example 2)
When the C register value is "F9 (H)" and the A register value (for example, "08 (H)") is added, the C register value becomes "01 (H)". As a result of this process, "1 (H)" is added to the C register value, so that the C register value becomes "02 (H)".

(4) Subtract the C register value from the A register value and store the subtraction result in the A register. As a result, the A register value becomes the data stored in the payout number upper limit buffer.
Specific examples are as follows.
Example 1)
When the A register value is "08 (H)" and the C register value is "07 (H)", "01 (H)" is stored in the A register.
Example 2)
When the A register value is "08 (H)" and the C register value is "02 (H)", "06 (H)" is stored in the A register.

In the next step S2287, the lower 2-byte upper limit value is saved. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store "FFFF(H)" in the BC register.
(2) Store the BC register value at the address indicated by the DE register.
By these processes, the data of the RWM 53 consisting of 3 bytes becomes "FFFFFF(H)".
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 195 is a flow chart showing the advantageous section game number count (S_ATGAME_CNT) in step S2238 in FIG.
First, in step S2291, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is in an advantageous section. Here, the address (F020 (H)) of the game section flag is stored in the DE register, and when the bit (D0) corresponding to the advantageous section among the data stored in the address is judged to be "1", , is determined to be in the advantageous section. If it is determined that it is in the advantageous section, the process advances to step S2292, and if it is determined that it is not in the advantageous section, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

In addition to the above, a method using an advantageous section counter (F024(H)) is conceivable as a method of determining whether or not the vehicle is in an advantageous section.
As described above, the advantageous section counter consists of 2 bytes (“F024(H)” and “F025(H)”) and stores data from “0” to “1500(D)”.
Here, the advantageous interval counter is a counter that is updated at least after counting the number of games played in the advantageous interval, and can be either an addition method or a subtraction method.
At this time, when the advantageous section counter is not "0", it can be determined that the advantageous section is in progress.
In the addition method, the advantageous interval counter is updated from "0" to "1" before the start switch 41 is operated in the game in which the advantageous interval is won or in the next game of the game in which the advantageous interval is won. Also, the game in the advantageous section adds "1" every game. When the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, it is updated to "0" at the end of the game (initialization processing).

In the subtraction method, the advantageous interval counter is updated from "0" to "1500" before the start switch 41 is operated in the game in which the advantageous interval is won or in the next game of the game in which the advantageous interval is won. Also, the game in the advantageous section subtracts "1" every game. When the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, it is updated to "0" at the end of the game (initialization processing).
Furthermore, as described in the first embodiment, whether or not the advantageous interval display LED 77 is lit can be determined from the lighting state of the advantageous interval display LED 77, so that the advantageous interval display LED 77 indicates ON "1"/OFF "0". It is also possible to determine from the value of the storage area that stores the data.

In step S2292, the address of the RWM 53 of the advantageous section game number counter is set. In this process, the DE register stores the address "F270" storing the data of the least significant digit of the advantageous section game number counter (F270(H)).
In the next step S2293, the above-described count up (S_CNT_UP) is performed.
When the count-up is executed, the addition value "1" set by the number-of-games count (S_GAME_CNT) is stored in the A register. By counting up in this step S2293, "1" is added to the advantageous section game number counter value. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 196 is a flow chart showing the payout number count (S_PAYOUT_CNT) in step S2239 in FIG.
At the time this flow chart is executed, the address (F28B(H)) of the count upper limit flag is stored in the HL register.
First, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the payout number upper limit flag is on. In this process, when the D1 bit of the data stored at the address (F28B(H)) indicated by the HL register value is "1", it is determined that the payout number upper limit flag is ON.
When it is determined that the payout number upper limit flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2305, and when it is determined that the payout number upper limit flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S2302.

In step S2302, the address of the RWM 53 of the total payout (cumulative) counter is set. This process is a process of storing the address (F27C(H)) storing the data of the least significant digit among the addresses of the total payout (cumulative) counter in the DE register.
In the next step S2303, a payout number setting (S_PAYOUT_SET) is executed. This process is the process of FIG. 197 to be described later, and is a process of acquiring the number of payouts in the game and adding it to a total payout (cumulative) counter. By this processing, the payout number or the payout number upper limit buffer value is added to the total payout (cumulative) counter value.
The A register value may fluctuate due to the count-up (S_CNT_UP) during the payout number setting.
In the next step S2304, a payout number upper limit buffer is set. This process is a process of storing the A register value in the payout number upper limit buffer (F28C(H)). Here, in the process of step S2303, if the number of payouts in the game is added to the total payout (cumulative) counter and does not exceed the upper limit (3 bytes full) of the total payout, the number of payouts in the game is paid out. It is set in the number limit buffer. On the other hand, when adding the number of payouts in the relevant game to the total payout (cumulative) counter exceeds the upper limit of the total payout, the additional value for making the total payout (cumulative) counter value 3 bytes full is stored in the payout number upper limit buffer. set.

Next, proceeding to step S2305, the address of the RWM 53 of the total payout ring buffer is set. This process is a process of storing the address (F213(H)) storing the lower digit data among the addresses of the RWM 53 of the total payout ring buffer 0 in the DE register.
In the next step S2306, ring buffer setting (S_RINGNO_SET) is executed. This process is the process of FIG. 198, which will be described later, and is a process of acquiring a ring buffer number.

Then, in step S2307, the address of the RWM 53 of the total payout (6000 times) counter is set. This process is a process of storing the address (F273(H)) storing the data of the lower digits in the address of the total payout (6000 times) counter in the DE register. Next, the process advances to step S2308 to execute the above-described count up (S_CNT_UP). By the processing of step S2308, the A register value is added to the total payout (6000 times) counter value. It should be noted that the A register value here is the value set in the payout number set (step S2333 in FIG. 198) in the ring buffer set in step S2306 (FIG. 198 to be described later) (the medal payout at address "F041 (H)"). Number buffer value (for example, when a small winning combination is won in the game, the payout number corresponding to the winning of the small winning combination).
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

As is clear from FIG. 196, when the payout number upper limit flag is ON, the total payout (cumulative) counter is not updated, but the total payout (6000 times) counter is updated.
Similarly, in FIG. 199, which will be described later, when the payout number upper limit flag is ON, the accessory payout (cumulative) counter is not updated, but the accessory payout (6000 times) counter is updated.
Similarly, in FIG. 200, which will be described later, when the upper limit flag for the number of payouts is ON, the continuous accessory payout (cumulative) counter is not updated, but the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter is updated. .

FIG. 197 is a flow chart showing payout number setting (S_PAYOUT_CNT) in step S2303 and the like in FIG.
First, in step S2321, the value of the payout medal buffer is obtained. This process is a process of storing the data stored in the payout medal buffer (F041(H)) in the A register.
Then, the process advances to step S2322 to execute a count up (S_CNT_UP), and then the process according to this flowchart ends.
Therefore, when the number of payouts is set in step S2303 while the number of payouts is being counted in FIG. 196, the total payout (cumulative) counter value is updated.

FIG. 198 is a flow chart showing the ring buffer set (S_RINGNO_SET) in step S2306 etc. of FIG.
When this flowchart is executed, the DE register contains the address of the total payout ring buffer 0 (F213(H)), the address of the consecutive award ring buffer 0 (F231(H)), or the address of the award payout ring buffer 0. (F24F(H)) is stored.
First, in step S2331, a ring buffer number is obtained. This process is a process of acquiring data from the address (F212(H)) where the ring buffer number is stored and storing it in the A register.

Next, in step S2332, the address of the RWM 53 of the corresponding ring buffer is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add the A register value and the A register value, and store the addition result in the A register. That is, this is a process of doubling the ring buffer number. The reason for doubling is that each ring buffer consists of 2 bytes.
(2) Add the A register value to the DE register value, and store the addition result in the DE register. By this processing, the address of the corresponding ring buffer is stored in the DE register.
Therefore, the address of ring buffer 0 is first set, and the address of the corresponding ring buffer is obtained using the ring buffer number as an offset value.

For example, when the data stored in the DE register is "F213(H)" and the data stored in the ring buffer number is "8(H)",
F213(H)+8(H)+8(H)=F223(H)
As a result, the address (F223(H)) of the RWM 53 corresponding to the total payout ring buffer 8 is stored in the DE register.
Next, the process advances to step S2333 to set the number of payouts (S_PAYOUT_SET). This process corresponds to the process of FIG. 197 described above. By this payout number setting, the payout number in the game is added to the corresponding ring buffer set in step S2332. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 199 is a flow chart showing the payout bonus count (S_BNSPAY_CNT) in step S2240 in FIG.
Note that the address (F28B(H)) of the count upper limit flag is stored in the HL register when executing this process.
First, in step S2341, it is determined whether or not the accessory is in operation. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the data of the operating state flag (F010 (H)) in the A register.
(2) A register value and "00001000 (B)" are ANDed, and when the result is "0", it is determined that the accessory is not in operation. In this embodiment, only RB is provided as a role product. Therefore, when RB is in operation (D3 bit is "1"), it is determined that the role product is in operation. to decide.
When it is determined that the accessory is in operation in step S2341, the process proceeds to step S2342, and when it is determined that the accessory is not in operation, there is no need to count (update) the number of payouts when the accessory is activated, so this flowchart end the processing by

In step S2342, it is determined whether or not the payout number upper limit flag is on. This process determines whether the address (F28B(H)) indicated by the HL register value, that is, the D1 bit of the data stored at the address of the count upper limit flag is "0". When determined, it is determined that the payout number upper limit flag is ON.
When it is determined in step S2342 that the payout number upper limit flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S2346, and when it is determined that it is not ON, the process proceeds to step S2343.
As described above, when it is determined in step S2342 that the payout number upper limit flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S2343 and subsequent steps to update the accessory payout (cumulative) counter value, and to perform steps S2346 and subsequent steps to be described later. Proceeding to the process, the relevant accessory payout ring buffer value is updated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2342 that the payout number upper limit flag is ON, the value of the award payout (cumulative) counter value is not updated, but the process proceeds to step S2346 and after, and the corresponding award payout ring Buffer values are updated.

At step S2343, the address of the RWM 53 of the accessory payout (cumulative) counter is set. In this process, the address "F282(H)" in which the least significant digit data is stored among the addresses of the accessory payout (cumulative) counter is stored in the DE register.
In the next step S2344, a payout number upper limit buffer is set. This process is a process of storing the data stored in the payout number upper limit buffer (F28C(H)) in the A register.
Next, the process advances to step S2345 to execute count up (S_CNT_UP). Here, the processing shown in FIG. 194 is executed. By this process, the accessory payout (cumulative) counter value is updated.
In the next step S2346, the address of the RWM 53 of the prize payout ring buffer is set. This process is a process of storing the address (F24F(H)) of the prize payout ring buffer 0 in the DE register.
Next, the flow advances to step S2347 to set the ring buffer (S_RINGADR_SET). Here, the processing shown in FIG. 198 is executed.
As a result, the value stored in the payout medal buffer (F041(H)) is added to the relevant accessory payout ring buffer.

The A register value after the ring buffer setting is completed becomes the value of the medal payout buffer (F041(H)).
The reason for this is that even if count-up is executed, carry-over does not occur due to the "lower 2-byte addition" processing in step S2281 in FIG.
Specifically, since the address of one ring buffer RWM 53 can store 2-byte data (0 to 65535), even if 15 coins are paid out in all 400 games, "15 x 400 = 6000 , and it does not exceed 2 bytes.

In the next step S2348, the address of the RWM 53 of the prize payout (6000 times) counter is set. Here, the address of the least significant digit (F279(H)) of the address of the prize payout (6000 times) counter is stored in the DE register.
Then, the process advances to step S2349 to execute count up (S_CNT_UP). Note that the A register value when executing the count-up is the value of the medal payout buffer (F041(H)) as described in step S2347. By this count-up, the accessory payout (6000 times) counter value is updated. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 200 is a flow chart showing the continuous bonus payout number count (S_RBPAY_CNT) in step S2241 in FIG.
Note that the address (F28B(H)) of the count upper limit flag is stored in the HL register when this process is executed.
199 described above is a process for a role product, whereas the process in FIG. 200 is a process for a continuous role product, and is a similar process.
First, in step S2361, it is determined whether or not RB is in operation. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the data of the operating state flag (F010 (H)) in the A register.
(2) An AND operation is performed on the A register value and "00000100(B)", and when the result is "0", it is determined that RB is not in operation.

As described in step S2341 above, since the D3 bit of the operation state flag indicates the RB state, it is determined whether or not the bit is "1" to determine whether or not the continuous accessory is in operation. can be judged.
In addition, the "continuous accessory payout number" refers to the "payout number during RB operation" in this embodiment, and includes the time of RB operation during a type BB game.
If it is determined that the RB is in operation, the process proceeds to step S2362, and if it is determined that the RB is not in operation, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S2362, it is determined whether or not the payout number upper limit flag is on. Here, it is determined whether or not the address (F28B(H)) indicated by the HL register value, that is, the D1 bit of the data stored at the address of the count upper limit flag is "0". If so, it is determined that the payout number upper limit flag is ON.
When it is determined in step S2362 that the payout number upper limit flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S2366, and when it is determined that it is not ON, the process proceeds to step S2363.
As described above, when it is determined in step S2362 that the payout number upper limit flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S2363 and subsequent steps, in which the continuous accessory payout (cumulative) counter value is updated, and step S2366 and subsequent steps to be described later are executed. , and the corresponding continuous accessory payout ring buffer value is updated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2362 that the payout number upper limit flag is ON, the continuous role payout (cumulative) counter value is not updated. The payout ring buffer value is updated.

In step S2363, the address of the RWM 53 of the continuous accessory payout (cumulative) counter is set. Here, in the DE register, the address "F27F(H)" storing the lowest data among the addresses of the continuous bonus payout (cumulative) counter is stored.
In the next step S2364, a payout number upper limit buffer is set. Here, the data stored in the payout number upper limit buffer (F28C(H)) is stored in the A register. The A register value (upper limit buffer value for the number of payouts) is the value of the number of payouts itself, or the value corrected so that the total payout (cumulative) counter value does not exceed the full 3 bytes as described above. have a case.
In the next step S2365, count up (S_CNT_UP) (processing in FIG. 194) is performed. Through this process, the continuous accessory payout (cumulative) counter value is updated.
In the next step S2366, the address of the RWM 53 of the continuous bonus payout ring buffer is set. Here, the address (F231(H)) of the continuous award payout ring buffer 0 is stored in the DE register.

Next, the flow advances to step S2367 to set the ring buffer (S_RINGADR_SET). As a result, the value stored in the medal payout buffer (F041(H)) is added to the corresponding continuous accessory payout ring buffer.
Note that the A register value after this step S2367 is executed becomes the value stored in the medal payout buffer (F041(H)).
The reason for this is similar to the above explanation, but to explain it again, even if the count-up process is executed, no carry occurs due to the "lower 2 byte addition" process in step S2281 in FIG. be. This is because one address of the RWM 53 of the ring buffer can store 2-byte data, so even if there are 15 payouts in all 400 games, it will be "15×400=6000" and will not exceed 2 bytes. .

In the next step S2368, the address of the RWM 53 of the continuous bonus payout (6000 times) counter is set. Here, the DE register stores the least significant digit address "F276 (H)" in the address of the continuous bonus payout (6000 times) counter. Then, the process advances to step S2369 to execute count up (S_CNT_UP). The A register value when executing this count-up becomes the data of the payout medal buffer (F041(H)) as described in step S2349. Due to this count-up, the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter value is updated. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

Next, the ratio calculation processing (S_CAL_SET) in step S2243 in FIG. 191 will be described. This ratio calculation process is a process for calculating the five ratios shown in FIG.
In addition, in this embodiment, the advantageous section ratio is calculated for each game.
In addition, for other ratios, every 400 games, that is, addition to the ring buffer (total payout ring buffer, continuous role payout ring buffer, and role payout ring buffer) is exactly the 400th game, and is added in this game. When the ring buffer number to be played is "N" and the ring buffer number to be added from the next game is "N+1" (however, when N=14, "N+1"=0), the continuous role ratio (6000 times), role ratio (6000 times), continuous role ratio (total), and role ratio (total).

First, the address table of the RWM 53 and the storage area of the ROM 54 used in the ratio calculation process will be explained.
In FIG. 201, (A) is a diagram showing a ratio calculation RWM address table (TBL_ADR_CAL)) stored in the ROM 54. FIG. (B) is a diagram showing specific storage areas (addresses and data) of the ROM 54. As shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 201(A), the address table includes five tables beginning with "DEFW". The five address tables are address tables for the advantageous section ratio, continuous role ratio (6000 times), role ratio (6000 times), continuous role ratio (total), and role ratio (total).
Also, each address table has a first group, a second group, and a third group.
The first group is a memory area storing dividend data, the second group is a memory area storing divisor data, and the third group is a memory area storing ratio data.
Here, the relationship between the dividend, the divisor, and the ratio will be explained again.
A "dividend" means a number divided when calculating a ratio, and a "divisor" means a number divided when calculating a ratio. i.e.
Dividend/divisor = ratio.

The first to third groups of data for each of the five address tables are stored as shown in FIG. 201(B).
As shown in FIG. 4B, the top address is "230B(H)", and the addresses "230B(H)" to "2310(H)" are storage areas for the advantageous section ratio data. In addition, addresses "2311(H)" to "2316(H)" are storage areas for the data of the continuous role ratio (6000 times), and addresses "2323(H)" to "2328(H)" )” is a storage area for the data of the character product ratio (total).
In addition, in each of these five storage areas, the first group (dividend) storage area (for example, "230B (H)" and "230C (H)" in the advantageous interval ratio), the second group (divisor ) storage areas (for example, “230D (H)” and “230E (H)” for the advantageous section ratio), and storage areas for the third group (ratio) (for example, “230F (H)” and “230F (H)” for the advantageous section ratio) "2310 (H)").

Since the address of the RWM 53 is represented by 2 bytes (for example, "F270(H)") and the address of the ROM 54 can store only 1-byte data, the two addresses of the ROM 54 are used to perform the RWM 53 stores the address of one of the
For example, for the addresses of the first group (dividend) of the advantageous interval ratio, the data (F2(H)) stored in "230C(H)" is higher, and the data (70 (H)) can be expressed as "F270(H)", which is the lower order.
In the RWM 53, data outside the use area has an address starting from "F2(H)". Therefore, as shown in FIG. 201(B), all data corresponding to higher addresses are "F2(H)".

FIG. 202 is a flow chart showing the ratio calculation process (S_CAL_SET) in step S2243 of FIG.
First, in step S2381, the number of calculations is set. This process is a process of storing "5" in the B register. Here, the number "5" is for executing five ratio calculation processes, and is decremented by "1" each time the process corresponding to one ratio calculation process is completed.
Also, after step S2381, although not shown in this flowchart, the BC register value is saved in the stack area in order to protect the B register value.

In the next step S2382, a calculation number is acquired. This process is a process of storing the B register value in the A register. That is, calculation number=number of calculations.
Here, the relationship between the calculation number (the number of calculations) and the corresponding ratio is as follows.
Calculation number “5”: Role ratio (total)
Calculation number “4”: Consecutive accessory ratio (cumulative)
Calculation number “3”: Role ratio (6000 times)
Calculation number “2”: Continuous role ratio (6000 times)
Calculation number "1": Advantageous section ratio

Next, proceeding to step S2383, it is determined whether or not the obtained calculation number is the advantageous section ratio calculation number. In this process, "1" is subtracted from the A register value (calculation number), and when the calculation result is "0", it is determined to be the advantageous section ratio calculation number.
When it is determined in step S2383 that it is the advantageous section ratio calculation number, the process proceeds to step S2385, and when it is determined that it is not the advantageous section ratio calculation number, the process proceeds to step S2384.
In step S2384, it is determined whether or not 400 games have passed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) 2-byte data stored in the 400 game counter (F210(H)) is stored in the DE register.
(2) When the DE register value is "0", it is determined that 400 games have passed.
When it is determined in step S2384 that 400 games have passed, the process proceeds to step S2385, and when it is determined that 400 games have not passed, the process proceeds to step S2407. That is, only when it is determined that 400 games have passed (once in 400 games), four ratios other than the advantageous section ratio are calculated.

In step S2385, a ratio calculation RWM address table is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the B register value in the A register.
(2) An address obtained by subtracting "6 (H)" from the top address (230B (H)) of the ratio calculation RWM address table (TBL_ADR_CAL) of the ROM 54 is stored in the HL register. That is, "2305 (H)" is stored in the HL register. This address is also referred to as a reference address because it becomes a reference address for subsequent program processing (arithmetic processing).
(3) A value obtained by multiplying the A register value by 6 is stored in the A register.
Here, any one of "5 (H)", "4 (H)", "3 (H)", "2 (H)" and "1 (H)" is stored in the A register. This operation is performed on the state. therefore,
6 times "5 (H)" → 1E (H)
6 times "4 (H)" → 18 (H)
6 times "3 (H)" → 12 (H)
6 times "2 (H)" → C (H)
"1 (H)" multiplied by 6 → 6 (H)
becomes.

(4) Add the A register value to the HL register value and store the addition result in the HL register. Here, the first HL register value is "2305(H)". Therefore, the A register value obtained in (3) is added to "2305 (H)" and stored in the HL register. By this processing, the address of the ROM 54 in which the addresses of the first group are stored is stored in the HL register.
in particular,
When adding 6 (H) → 230 B (H)
When adding C(H) → 2311(H)
When adding 12 (H) → 2317 (H)
When adding 18 (H) → 231D (H)
When adding 1E (H) → 2323 (H)
becomes.

The process then advances to step S2386 to set the dividend RWM address. This process is a process of storing the corresponding RWM address of the first group in the DE register from the HL register value. Also, the HL register value is updated to the address of the ROM 54 in which the addresses of the second group are stored after this processing.
Specifically, the following processing is performed in step S2386.
(1) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the E register.
(2) Add "1" to the HL register value and store the addition result in the HL register.
(3) Store the data (F2(H)) stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the D register.
By this processing, the following data (addresses) are stored in the DE register.
When "6 (H)" is added in step S2385 → F270 (H)
When "C (H)" is added in step S2385 → F276 (H)
When "12 (H)" is added in step S2385 → F27C (H)
When "18 (H)" is added in step S2385 → F282 (H)
When "1E (H)" is added in step S2385 → F288 (H)
(4) Add "1" to the HL register value and store the addition result in the HL register.
Here, the HL register stores the addresses of the ROM 54 in which the addresses of the second group are stored. For this reason,
When "230B(H)" before addition → "230D(H)" is stored in the HL register.
When "2311 (H)" before addition → "2313 (H)" is stored in the HL register.
When "2317 (H)" before addition → "2319 (H)" is stored in the HL register.
When "231D(H)" before addition → "231F(H)" is stored in the HL register.
When "2323 (H)" before addition → "2325 (H)" is stored in the HL register.
Also, here, although not shown in this flowchart, in order to protect the HL register, a process of saving the HL register value to the stack area is executed.

In the next step S2387, the lower 2 bytes of the dividend are obtained. Here, the data stored at the address indicated by the DE register value is stored in the C register, and the data stored at the address obtained by adding "1" to the DE register value is stored in the B register. As a result, the lower 2-byte data is stored in the BC register.
In the next step S2388, the upper 1 byte of the dividend is obtained. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add "1" to the DE register value and store the addition result in the DE register.
(2) Add "1" to the DE register value and store the addition result in the DE register.
That is, the process of setting the DE register value to "+2" is executed.
This causes the DE register value to be
F270(H)→F272(H)
F276(H)→F278(H)
F27C(H)→F27E(H)
F282(H)→F284(H)
F288(H)→F28A(H)
becomes.
In other words, an address indicating the upper digit of each 3-byte data is stored.
(3) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the DE register value in the A register.
From the above, regarding the dividend,
The first digit of the 3-byte data is stored in the C register,
The second digit of the 3-byte data is stored in the B register,
The third digit of the 3-byte data will be stored in the A register.

In the next step S2389, a calculation value setting (S_VALUE_SET) (FIG. 203 to be described later) is performed. This process executes a process of multiplying the dividend by 10 and a process of obtaining the divisor in order to calculate the ratio.
When calculating the ratio, if the divisor (denominator value) is "0", the subsequent calculation process is not executed. , the zero flag=“1”.
In the next step S2390, it is determined whether it has a divisor. Here, as described above, when the zero flag="1" in step S2389, it is determined that there is no divisor. If it is determined that there is no divisor, the process proceeds to step S2401, and if it is determined that there is a divisor, the process proceeds to step S2391.
If the process proceeds to step S2391 (ratio calculation execution) without determining whether or not there is a divisor, an infinite loop will occur.

In step S2391, ratio calculation execution (S_CAL_EXE) (FIG. 204 to be described later) is performed. In this process, calculation is performed using each register set in the calculated value set in step S2389, and the tens digit value of the ratio is calculated based on the calculation result.
Further, when it is determined from the result of this operation that carry-down is not possible (the upper two bytes of the number to be divided are "0"), the zero flag is set to "1".
In the next step S2392, it is determined whether or not carry-down is not possible, that is, whether or not the calculation in step S2391 has resulted in zero flag="1". When the zero flag=“1”, it is determined that the carry is impossible. When it is determined that the carry is not allowed, the process proceeds to step S2397, and when it is determined that the carry is not allowed (zero flag ≠ "1"), the process proceeds to step S and step S2393.

In step S2393, an operation of adding the lower divisor to the lower dividend is executed. Here, the DE register value is added to the BC register value, and the addition result is stored in the BC register. When overflow occurs due to this addition processing, the carry flag is set to "1".
This processing is processing (also referred to as correction processing) for restoring the amount that has been subtracted too much in the calculation of the lower digits by executing the ratio calculation. For example, in the process of subtracting the DE register value from the BC register value by performing a ratio calculation:
BC register value: 10 (H)
DE register value: 20 (H)
, the BC register value becomes "F0 (H)" by the processing.
When the ratio calculation process ends in this state,
BC register value (F0 (H)) + DE register value (20 (H)) = BC register value (10 (H)
By doing so, the BC register value can be restored.

In the next step S2394, it is determined whether there is a carry in the calculation of step S2393. In this process, when the carry flag=“1” as a result of adding the DE register value to the BC register value, it is determined that there is a carry. When it is determined that there is a carry, the process proceeds to step S2395, and when it is determined that there is no carry, the process proceeds to step S2396.
In step S2395, "1" is added to the upper two bytes of the dividend. This process is a process of adding "1" to the HL register value.

The process then advances to step S2396 to add the higher divisor to the higher dividend. This process is a process of adding the A register value to the HL register value and storing the addition result in the HL register. This processing is processing (also referred to as correction processing) for restoring the amount that has been excessively subtracted in the calculation of the upper digits by the ratio calculation execution (C_CAL_EXE). Then, the process proceeds to step S2398.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2392 that the carry-down is not possible and the process proceeds to step S2397, the lower part of the divisor is added to the lower part of the dividend. This process is a process of adding the DE register value to the BC register value and storing the addition result in the BC register. This processing is processing (also referred to as correction processing) for restoring the amount that has been subtracted too much in the calculation of the lower digits by the ratio calculation execution (C_CAL_EXE). Then, the process advances to step S2398.

In step S2398, the calculation result buffer is converted into upper digits. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the L register value in the A register.
(2) Store the calculation result buffer address (F28A(H)) in the HL register.
(3) Exchange the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits of the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value. By this processing, the value obtained by the ratio calculation processing is stored in the upper 4 bits. That is, D0 bit and D4 bit, D1 bit and D5 bit, D2 bit and D6 bit, and D3 bit and D7 bit are exchanged in the calculation result buffer.
Specifically, when the data stored at the address (F28A(H)) indicated by the HL register value before the operation in (3) is "00000101(B)", the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits are After the exchange, the HL register value becomes "01010000(B)".

This process stores the value stored in the calculation result buffer (so-called tens digit value of the ratio) in the upper 4 bits (D4 to D7 bits) in step S2391 of the ratio calculation process. The value of the tens digit is a value within the range of "00000000 (B)" to "000001010 (B)" when expressed in binary (the same applies to the value of the ones digit). Therefore, the value is within the range of 4 bits. Then, step S2400 (calculation of the ones digit ratio) is executed while the tens digit value of the ratio obtained by the processing in step S2391 is not cleared and is stored in the calculation result buffer. Then, in step S2400, the one-digit value of the calculated ratio is added to the value stored in the calculation result buffer (the ten-digit value of the ratio). As a result, the upper 4 bits of the calculation result buffer value indicate the tens digit ratio, and the lower 4 bits indicate the ones digit ratio. Further, by adopting the above method, the same processing can be performed for the tens digit ratio calculation (step S2391) and the ones digit ratio calculation (step S2400).

Also, here, although not shown in the flowchart, the following processing is executed.
(1) Execute processing for restoring the HL register value stored in the stack area.
(2) Also, in order to protect the HL register value again, a process of saving the HL register value to the stack area is executed.

Next, the flow advances to step S2399 to execute calculation value setting (S_VALUE_SET) as in step S2389, and in step S2400 to execute ratio calculation (S_CAL_EXE) as in step S2391. Through the processing in steps S2399 and S2400, the ones digit of the ratio is calculated. The ones digit of the ratio is stored in the lower 4 bits of the calculation result buffer address (F28A(H)).
In the next step S2401, a calculation result buffer is obtained. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the calculation result buffer address (F28A(H)) in the HL register.
(2) Store the data stored at the address (F28A(H)) indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
In the next step S2402, the calculation result buffer is initialized. This process stores "0" at the address (F28A(H)) indicated by the HL register value.
Also, here, although not shown in the flowchart, a process for restoring the HL register value stored in the stack area is executed.

In the next step S2403, the ratio data RWM address is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add "1" to the HL register value.
(2) Add "1" to the HL register value.
(3) Store the data at the address indicated by the HL register value in the HL register.
By this processing, the HL register stores the address of the ROM 54 in which the addresses of the third group are stored.
The flow then advances to step S2404 to determine whether the calculated ratio is "100%". In this process, "A0(H)" is subtracted from the A register value, and when there is a carry flag (carry flag="1"), it is determined that the ratio is not "100%". If it is determined that the ratio is "100%", the process proceeds to step S2405, and if it is determined that the ratio is not "100%", the process proceeds to step S2406. In other words, when the value of the A register is "A0(H)", it indicates that the calculation result (ratio) is 100%.

In step S2405, "99%" is set as the ratio. This process is a process of updating (storing) the value of the A register from "A0(H)" to "99(H)".
When winning the advantageous section, the advantageous section starts from the next game, so the advantageous section ratio does not actually reach 100%. On the other hand, the other four ratios may be 100%. However, if the (same) program in FIG. 202 including the calculation of the advantageous section ratio is used, the ratio set processing program can be reduced to one.
The flow then advances to step S2406 to save the ratio data. This process is a process of storing the A register value at the address indicated by the HL register value. As described above, one of the third group addresses is stored in the HL register value at this time. Specifically, when calculating the advantageous section ratio, "F285 (H)" is entered in the HL register. "F287 (H)" in the HL register when calculating the role ratio (6000 times), "F288 (H)" in the HL register when calculating the continuous role ratio (total), "F289(H)" is stored in the HL register when calculating the ratio (total). In other words, this process stores the ratio data in the target RWM address.
Also, here, although not shown in the flowchart, a process for restoring the BC register value stored in the stack area is executed.

In the next step S2407, it is determined whether or not the number of calculations has been completed. Here, the following processing is executed.
Note that when the BC register value stored in the stack area is restored, the BC register value becomes the value saved after step S2381.
(1) Subtract "1" from the B register value.
(2) When it is determined that the B register value is not "0", it is determined that the number of calculations has not been completed.
When it is determined that the number of calculations has been completed, the process according to this flowchart is terminated, and when it is determined that the number of calculations has not been completed, the process returns to step S2382.
By the above processing, the advantageous section ratio is calculated when the current section is in the advantageous section. In addition, although it is not in the advantageous section, when 400 games have passed, 4 ratios of continuous role ratio (6000 times), role ratio (6000 times), continuous role ratio (cumulative), and role ratio (cumulative) are calculated. (steps S2382 to S2407 are repeated four times).

FIG. 203 is a flow chart showing the calculation value set (S_VALUE_SET) executed in steps S2389 and S2399 in FIG.
In this calculated value set, although not shown in this flowchart, first, the data (ratio calculation RWM address table) stored in the current HL register is saved in the stack area in order to protect it.
In addition, although the following explanation overlaps with the above explanation, if explained again,
Dividend: the number to be divided in division (the so-called numerator value)
Divisor: Number to divide in division (so-called denominator value)
Dividend 1st byte: 1st digit (least significant digit) (C register)
2nd byte of dividend: 2nd digit (B register)
Dividend 3rd byte: 3rd digit (most significant digit) (A register)
point to
Also, in this calculated value set, the process of multiplying the dividend to be calculated by 10 and the process of setting the divisor are performed.
Here, as a specific example, it is assumed that "FE(H)" is stored in the C register, "40(H)" is stored in the B register, and "01(H)" is stored in the A register. If this number is expressed in decimal notation,
254 (D) + 16384 (D) + 65536 (D) = 82174 (D)
corresponds to

In step S2411, the third byte of the dividend is multiplied by ten. Here, the data of the 3rd byte of the dividend is stored in the A register before this process. Therefore, the following processing is executed.
(1) Multiply the A register value by 10, and store the result in the HL register.
(2) Swap the HL and DE register values.
As a result, data obtained by multiplying the third byte data of the dividend by 10 is stored in the DE register.
In the above example, "000A(H)" obtained by multiplying "01(H)" by 10 is stored in the DE register.
More specifically, "00(H)" is stored in the D register and "0A(H)" is stored in the E register.
In the next step S2412, the second byte of the dividend is multiplied by ten. Here, the data of the second byte of the dividend is stored in the B register before this process. Therefore, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the B register value in the A register.
(2) Multiply the A register value by 10 and store the result in the HL register.
In the above example, the HL register stores "0280(H)" obtained by multiplying "40(H)" by ten.
More specifically, "02 (H)" is stored in the H register and "80 (H)" is stored in the L register.

In the next step S2413, the first byte of the dividend is multiplied by ten. Here, the first byte data of the dividend is stored in the C register before this process. Therefore, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the C register value in the A register.
(2) Swap the HL and BC register values.
Here, data obtained by multiplying the data of the second byte of the dividend by 10 is stored in the HL register by the processing of step S2412. As a result, the data obtained by multiplying the data of the second byte of the dividend by 10 is stored in the BC register.
In the above example, "0280(H)" is stored in the BC register.
More specifically, "02 (H)" is stored in the B register and "80 (H)" is stored in the C register.
(3) Multiply the A register value by 10 and store the result in the HL register.
Here, the A register value before this process is data of the 1st byte of the dividend. Therefore, by this processing, the data obtained by multiplying the data of the first byte of the dividend by 10 is stored in the HL register.
In the above example, "09EC(H)" obtained by multiplying "FE(H)" by 10 is stored in the HL register.
More specifically, "09(H)" is stored in the H register, and "EC(H)" is stored in the L register.

Proceeding to the next step S2414, the carry value of the first byte is added. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the H register value in the A register.
(2) An operation is performed to add the BC register value and the A register value, and the operation result is stored in the BC register.
In the above example, an operation of adding "0280(H)" and "09(H)" is performed. Therefore, "0289 (H)" is stored in the BC register.
More specifically, "02 (H)" is stored in the B register and "89 (H)" is stored in the C register.
In the next step S2415, the carry value of the second byte is added. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the B register value in the A register.
(2) An operation is performed to add the DE register value and the A register value, and the operation result is stored in the DE register.
In the above example, an operation of adding "000A(H)" and "02(H)" is performed. Therefore, "000C(H)" is stored in the DE register.
More specifically, "00(H)" is stored in the D register and "0C(H)" is stored in the E register.

Next, the flow advances to step S2416 to adjust the lower digits. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the C register value in the B register.
(2) Store the L register value in the C register.
In the above example, "89(H)" is stored in the B register and "EC(H)" is stored in the C register.
By these processes, the data after multiplying the dividend by 10 becomes data of maximum 4 bytes. Then, the data of the lower 2 bytes multiplied by 10 are stored in the BC register, and the data of the upper 2 bytes multiplied by 10 are stored in the DE register.
In the above example, "89EC(H)" is stored in the BC register and "000C(H)" is stored in the DE register.
Expressing this value in decimal,
35308 (D) + 786432 (D) = 821740 (D)
becomes.
Therefore, "82174 (D)" exemplified first is ten times larger.
Also, here, although not shown in the flowchart, the HL register stored in the stack area is restored.

The process then advances to step S2417 to set the divisor RWM address. In this process, the data stored at the address indicated by the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the HL register.
Here, the HL register stores the addresses of the ROM 54 in which the addresses of the second group are stored. By this process, the HL register stores the leading address of the RWM addresses of the second group.
The flow advances to step S2418 to acquire the upper 1 byte of the divisor. This process is a process of storing in the A register the data stored at the address indicated by the data obtained by adding "2" to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.

In the next step S2419, the lower 2 bytes of the divisor are acquired. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the L register.
(2) The data stored at the address indicated by the data obtained by adding "1" to the HL register value is stored in the H register.
(3) Swap the HL and DE register values.
This causes the upper 1 byte of the divisor to be stored in the A register and the lower 2 bytes of the divisor to be stored in the DE register.
Also, the value originally stored in the DE register (higher 2 bytes after multiplying the dividend by 10) is stored in the HL register.

In the next step S2420, it is determined whether or not the lower two bytes of the divisor are "0". Here, it is determined whether or not the DE register value is "0", and when the DE register value is "0", it is determined that the lower two bytes of the divisor are "0". When it is determined that the lower 2 bytes of the divisor are not "0", the flow chart ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lower two bytes of the divisor are "0", the process proceeds to step S2421.
In step S2421, the upper 1 byte of the divisor is checked. This process performs an OR operation on the A register value and the A register value, and sets the zero flag=“1” when the operation result is “0”.
With the above calculated value set (S_VALUE_SET),
The lower 2 bytes of the dividend multiplied by 10 are stored in the BC register,
The upper 2 bytes of the dividend multiplied by 10 are stored in the HL register,
The upper byte of the divisor is stored in the A register,
The lower two bytes of the divisor will be stored in the DE register.
Also, when it is determined that the divisor is "0", the zero flag is set to "1".

FIG. 204 is a flow chart showing the ratio calculation execution (S_CAL_EXE) executed in steps S2391 and S2400 in FIG. When this ratio calculation run is performed, it is preceded by the calculation value set (S_VALUE_SET) described above and, as described above,
BC register: Lower 2 bytes of the value obtained by multiplying the dividend by 10 HL register: Upper 2 bytes of the value obtained by multiplying the dividend by 10 A register: The upper 1 byte of the divisor DE register: The lower 2 bytes of the divisor are stored. be.
Also, in this ratio calculation execution, as described above, the divisor (X) is subtracted from the dividend multiplied by 10 (10×Y), and when the divisor can be subtracted from the calculation result, the divisor is subtracted again. By repeating
0≦(10×Y−X×R)<X
Calculate "R" that satisfies
Then, "R (number of repetitions of subtraction (ratio in that digit))" is stored in the calculation result buffer.

First, in step S2431, the lower divisor is subtracted from the lower dividend. This process is a process of subtracting the DE register value from the BC register value and storing the subtraction result in the BC register. When the result of the subtraction causes a carry-down, the carry flag is set to "1".
In the next step S2432, it is determined whether or not the subtraction in step S2431 causes a carry. When the carry flag=“1”, it is determined that there is a carry-down. If it is determined that there is a lower digit, the process proceeds to step S2433, and if it is determined that there is no lower digit, the process proceeds to step S2435.

In step S2433, it is determined whether or not the upper two bytes of the dividend are "0". Here, it is determined whether or not the upper two bytes of the dividend are "0" by determining whether or not the HL register value is "0". When it is determined that the upper two bytes of the dividend are "0", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. At this time, after storing the zero flag=“1”, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the upper two bytes of the dividend are not "0", the process proceeds to step S2434.
In step S2434, "1" is subtracted from the upper two bytes of the dividend. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the HL register value.
The process then advances to step S2435 to subtract the higher divisor from the higher dividend. This process is a process of subtracting the A register value from the HL register value and storing the result of the subtraction in the HL register. If there is a carry-down as a result of this subtraction, the carry flag is set to "1".

Then, the process advances to step S2436 to determine whether or not the calculation ends. When the carry flag=“1” in step S2435, it is determined that the calculation is finished, and the processing according to this flowchart is finished. On the other hand, when it is determined not to end the calculation (when the carry flag is not "1"), the process proceeds to step S2437.
In step S2437, "1" is added to the calculation result buffer. This process is a process of adding "1" to the calculation result buffer (address "F28A(H)"). Then, the process returns to step S2431.

FIG. 205 is a flow chart showing the ring buffer update (S_RINGNO_SET) in step S2244 of FIG.
First, in step S2441, it is determined whether or not 400 games have passed since the previous 400 games. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the data stored in the 400 game counter (address "F210(H)") in the HL register.
(2) When the HL register value is "0" (when the second zero flag = "1"), it is determined that 400 games have passed.
If it is determined that 400 games have passed, the process advances to step S2442, and if it is determined that 400 games have not passed, the processing according to this flowchart ends. Therefore, the ring buffer update process is executed once every 400 games.

In step S2442, the number of ring buffers is set. This process is a process of storing "3" in the B register. This "3" indicates that the number of ring buffers to be updated is three (total payout ring buffer, continuous prize giveout ring buffer, and prize giveout ring buffer).
In the next step S2443, the ring buffer number is updated. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address where the ring buffer number is stored, that is, "F212(H)" in the HL register.
(2) Add "1" to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.
This addition is an addition (ICPLD) that cycles from "0" to "14 (D)". For example, when "14 (D)" is stored, adding "1" results in "0 ”.

Also, after the processing, although not shown in the flowchart, the following stack area is saved.
(1) Save the BC register value to the stack area in order to protect the current B register value (number of ring buffers).
(2) To protect the current HL register value (ring buffer number), save the HL register value to the stack area.

In the next step S2444, the number of ring buffers is set. This process is a process of storing the B register value in the A register.
The process then advances to step S2445 to generate the offset of the corresponding ring buffer. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Multiply the A register value by "30(D)" and store the multiplied result in the A register.
(2) Add the A register value and the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and store the addition result in the A register.
(3) Add the A register value and the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and store the addition result in the A register.
By these calculations, an offset value for calculating the RWM address of the ring buffer can be obtained.
Note that the multiplication number "30" in (1) above indicates "the number of ring buffers (15) x the number of bytes per ring buffer (2)". Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 182 and 183, the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14, the continuous bonus award ring buffers 0 to 14, and the bonus award ring buffers 0 to 14 have consecutive addresses. .
As a result, the offset values corresponding to the total payout ring buffer, the continuous bonus award ring buffer, and the bonus bonus payout ring buffer can be obtained in the same process by the above calculations (1) to (3).

Specific examples are as follows.
Example 1) When the ring buffer number is "0" and the number of ring buffers is "3".
Processing (1): 3×30=90 (A register)
Processing of (2): 0 (ring buffer number) + 90 (A register) = 90 (A register)
Processing of (3): 0 (ring buffer number) + 90 (A register) = 90 (A register)
Example 2) When the ring buffer number is "1" and the number of ring buffers is "2".
Processing (1): 2×30=60 (A register)
Processing of (2): 1 (ring buffer number) + 60 (A register) = 61 (A register)
Processing of (3): 1 (ring buffer number) + 61 (A register) = 62 (A register)
Example 3) When the ring buffer number is "10" and the number of ring buffers is "1".
Processing (1): 1×30=30 (A register)
Processing of (2): 10 (ring buffer number) + 30 (A register) = 40 (A register)
Processing of (3): 10 (ring buffer number) + 40 (A register) = 50 (A register)
becomes.

The process then advances to step S2446 to set the RWM address of the corresponding ring buffer. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store "F1F5(H)" in the DE register.
(2) Add the A register value to the DE register value, and store the addition result in the DE register.
A specific example of the above processing is as follows.
Example 1) When "90 (D) (5A (H))" is stored in the A register F1F5 (H) + 5A (H) = F24F (H)
As a result, the top address of the prize payout ring buffer 0 is obtained.
Example 2) When "62 (D) (3E (H))" is stored in the A register F1F5 (H) + 3E (H) = F233 (H)
As a result, the head address of the continuous award payout ring buffer 1 is obtained.
Example 3) When "50 (D) (32 (H))" is stored in the A register F1F5 (H) + 32 (H) = F227 (H)
As a result, the head address of the total payout ring buffer 10 is obtained.
That is, the address "F1F5(H)" becomes the reference address, and the value obtained in step S2445 becomes the offset value.

In the next step S2447, the RWM address of the payout (6000 times) counter is set. This process is performed by setting the total payout (6000 times) counter (F273 (H)), the continuous bonus payout (6000 times) counter (F276 (H)), or the bonus payout (6000 times) counter (F279 (H)). This is a process of calculating one of the addresses. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store "F270(H)" in the HL register.
(2) Store the B register in the A register.
Here, the number of ring buffers (one of "1" to "3") is stored in the B register.
(3) Store the data obtained by multiplying the A register value by three in the A register.
(4) Add the A register value to the HL register value and store the addition result in the HL register.

In the next step S2448, the lower 2 bytes of the payout counter are acquired. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the C register.
(2) The data stored at the address indicated by the data obtained by adding "1" to the HL register value is stored in the B register.
In the next step S2449, the upper 1 byte of the payout counter is acquired. This process is a process of storing in the A register the data stored at the address indicated by the data obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value.
By the above processes (1) and (2), data of lower 2 bytes is stored in the BC register and data of upper 1 byte is stored in the A register.

Next, proceeding to step S2450, the corresponding ring buffer is subtracted from the lower two bytes of the payout counter. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Swap the DE and HL register values. This process
DE register: The leading address of the corresponding payout (6000 times) counter RWM address HL register: The leading address of the corresponding ring buffer is stored.
(2) Subtract the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value and the address obtained by adding "1" to the HL register value from the BC register value (lower 2-byte data of the payout (6000 times) counter). If the result of the subtraction causes a carry-down, the carry flag is set to "1".

Next, the flow advances to step S2451 to determine whether or not there is a carry. In the process of step S2450, when the carry flag=“1”, it is determined that there is a carry down.
If it is determined that there is a lower digit, the process proceeds to step S2452, and if it is determined that there is no lower digit, the process proceeds to step S2453.
In step S2452, "1" is subtracted from the upper byte of the payout counter. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the A register value.

In the next step S2453, the relevant ring buffer is cleared. This process clears the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value and the data stored at the address obtained by adding "1" to the HL register value.
That is, in step S2453, the information stored in the address indicated by the DE register value and the next address are cleared, and the information on the next game and subsequent games can be stored. Also, before clearing these information, based on the information before clearing, in steps S2448 to S2452, a total payout (6000 times) counter (F273 (H)), a continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter (F276(H)) or the information of the accessory payout (6000 times) counter (F279(H)) is updated.
Thus, when obtaining the total payout (6000 times) counter value, the continuous bonus payout (6000 times) counter value, and the bonus bonus payout (6000 times) counter value, all 15 ring buffer values are added. It is only necessary to subtract the relevant ring buffer value from the 6000 counter value up to that point, instead of performing calculations to do so. Therefore, the processing time for calculating the counter value 6000 times can be shortened, and the program can be simplified.
Then, the process advances to step S2454 to store the payout (6000 times) counter. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Swap the DE and HL register values. By this processing, the leading address of the corresponding ring buffer is stored in the DE register, and the leading address of the RWM address of the corresponding payout (6000 times) counter is stored in the HL register.
(2) Store the C register value at the address indicated by the HL register value.
(3) Store the B register value at the address indicated by the value obtained by adding "1" to the HL register value.
(4) Store the A register value at the address indicated by the value obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value.
After this process, although not shown in the flowchart, the following process is executed to restore the value saved in the stack area.
(1) Perform processing to restore the HL register value stored in the stack area.
(2) Perform processing to restore the BC register value stored in the stack area.

Next, the flow advances to step S2455 to determine whether or not the number of ring buffers has been completed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Subtract "1" from the B register value.
(2) When the B register value is "0", it is determined that the number of ring buffers has been completed.
When it is determined that the number of ring buffers corresponding to the number of ring buffers has been updated, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the processing for the number of ring buffers has not been completed, the process returns to step S2444.
The above description is the processing during the main processing (M_MAIN).

FIG. 206 is a flow chart showing ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) in step S2221 of FIG. 190 (interrupt processing).
First, in the stack pointer save in step S2461, the stack pointer (SP register) stored in the stack area is stored in the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 (address "F293(H)").
As described above, the ratio display preparation is a program to be executed outside the usage area. When returning to the used area (first program), restore the stack pointer.

In the next step S2462, a stack pointer (outside the used area) is set. This process is a process of storing "F400 (H)" in the stack pointer (SP register).
In the next step S2463, the register is saved. This process is a process of saving various registers to the stack area (outside the used area).
The process then advances to step S2464 to generate a flashing request flag (S_LED_FLASH). This process is the process shown in FIG. 207, which will be described later, and is the process of updating the flashing request flag (address "F28D(H)").

In the next step S2465, a ratio display timer update (S_RATE_TIME) is performed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 209, which will be described later. This is the process of updating the
In the next step S2466, ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT) is performed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 210, which will be described later, and is a process of actually displaying (lighting or extinguishing) the ratio in the interrupt process. Note that in the twentieth embodiment and the like, the ratio display processing when blinking is not taken into account has already been described (FIG. 135 and the like).

The flow then advances to step S2467 to restore the register. This process is a process of restoring various registers saved in step S2463.
In the next step S2468, the stack pointer is restored. This process stores the stack pointer saved in step S2461, ie, the data stored in the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2, in the stack pointer (SP register). In other words, the processing causes the stap pointer to indicate an address within the used area. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 207 is a flow chart showing flashing request flag generation (S_LED_FLASH) in step S2464 of FIG.
First, in step S2481, the number of repetitions and initial values are set. This process stores "5(H)" in the B register and "0" in the C register.
Here, the number of repetitions "5" is a value for determining whether or not to blink the five ratio segments (see FIG. 184).
In the next step S2482, the address of the flashing/non-corresponding item determination value table is set. This process is a process of storing the start address of the flashing/non-corresponding item determination value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH) in the DE register.
FIG. 208 is a diagram showing a flashing/non-corresponding item determination value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH). In this table, predetermined values are defined for each of the ratios of the five items. For example, the advantageous section ratio of "70" means that the display is blinked when the advantageous section ratio is "70" or more (see FIG. 184).
Also, as shown in FIG. 208, the top address of this table is "2500(H)". Therefore, "2500 (H)" is stored in the DE register.

"Non-applicable item" means that the item does not have the ability to display the applicable ratio. For example, when the gaming machine does not have an advantageous section, the advantageous section ratio is not displayed. Thus, when there is a non-applicable item, "--" is displayed in the ratio segment of the advantageous section ratio.
In this embodiment, since the advantageous section and the continuous accessories are provided, the ratios of all five items are displayed. stores "DE(H)".
For example, when the gaming machine does not have an advantageous section, "DE (H)" is stored at the address "2504 (H)" instead of "70 (H)" in FIG.
In this way, any gaming machine that does not have an advantageous section (for example, a so-called A type or a so-called A+ART) can control the lighting of the management information simply by correcting a part of the data in this table. A control process that enables Therefore, the control program can be easily used for other products.
As will be described later, the value corresponding to the non-applicable item is not limited to "DE(H)".

In the next step S2483, the RWM address of the ratio data is set. This process is a process of storing the address (F289 (H)) where the role product ratio (cumulative) data is stored in the HL register.
Next, the process advances to step S2484 to acquire a flashing or non-corresponding item determination value. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the data at the address indicated by the DE register value in the A register.
(2) Subtract "1" from the A register value.
In the next step S2485, it is determined whether or not it is a non-applicable item value. In this process, "DD(H)" is subtracted from the A register value, and when the operation result is "0" (zero flag="1"), it is determined that the item value is not applicable.
That is, when the item is a non-applicable item, as described above, "DE(H)" is stored in the flashing/non-applicable item determination value table, so "1" is subtracted from "DE(H)". After that, if "DD(H)" is further subtracted, it becomes "0" and the zero flag="1".
When a predetermined value other than "DE(H)" is stored as a value corresponding to a non-applicable item, for example, "predetermined value -1 - (predetermined value -1)" is calculated, and the result of the calculation is "0". When (zero flag=“1”), it is judged to be a non-corresponding item value.
In addition, the "predetermined value" may be a value exceeding "70 (H)" in the case of the advantageous section, the role ratio (cumulative), and the role ratio (6000 times), and the continuous role ratio (cumulative), In the case of the continuous role ratio (6000 times), any value exceeding "60 (H)" is acceptable.
If it is determined to be a non-applicable item value, the process advances to step S2487, and if it is determined not to be a non-applicable item value, the process advances to step S2486.

In step S2486, ratio data is acquired. This process is a process of storing the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
In the next step S2487, the ratio data or non-applicable item values are saved. This process is a process of storing the A register value at the address indicated by the HL register value. This process has the following meanings.
If there is a non-applicable item, the data is not stored in the RWM in which the ratio data is stored before the save process. For example, when there is no advantageous section, "00(H)" is stored in the advantageous section ratio data (address "F285(H)"). Although the details will be described later, when displaying the ratio on the management information display LED 74, the ratio is displayed based on the information stored in the address. At this time, if "00 (H)" is stored in the advantageous section ratio data, "00" is displayed in the ratio segment of the management information display LED 74 when displaying the advantageous section ratio. In order to prevent this, the value of the A register obtained in step S2485 ("DD(H)" in this embodiment) is stored as ratio data, so that "--" is displayed. Specifically, when the offset value is "D(H)", the display data is "-" as shown in FIG.
It should be noted that the program processing is incorporated so that this can also be used in common between gaming machines that have non-applicable items and gaming machines that do not have non-applicable items.
In the next step S2488, blinking determination is performed. This process is a process of subtracting the data at the address indicated by the DE register value from the A register value. As a result of the operation, when there is a carry-down, the carry flag is set to "1".
Although the details will be described later, when the carry flag is set to "1", it means that the item is lit without blinking when the item is displayed, and when the carry flag is set to "0", It means that when the item is displayed, it lights up in a blinking manner.
The flow then advances to step S2489 to generate a flashing request flag. This process performs arithmetic processing to rotate-shift the carry flag and the C register value to the left.
Specifically, if the value of the carry flag is "CY" and the value of the C register is "D7, D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0",
"CY", C register value "D7, D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0"
of,
"D7", C register value "D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0, CY"
Calculation is performed as follows.
For example, when the C register value is the initial value "00000000 (B)" as shown in step S2481 and the carry flag = "1" in step S2488,
"1", C register value "00000000 (B)"
of,
"0", C register value "00000001 (B)"
Calculation is performed as follows. Therefore, the C register value is "00000001 (B)". This C register value finally becomes the flashing request flag.
In other words, the processing of step S2488 registers information for determining whether or not to blink the ratio segment of the item by calculation based on the ratio data and the specific value stored in the blinking/non-corresponding item determination value table. (storage area).

In the next step S2490, the RWM address of the next ratio data is set. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the HL register value. For example, the HL register value in the first blink determination is "F289(H)" (accessory ratio (total) data) as described above. Here, when "1" is subtracted, the HL register value becomes "F288(H)" (continuous accessory ratio (accumulated) data) which is the second flashing determination target.
In the next step S2491, the address of the next flashing/non-corresponding item determination value table is set. This process is a process of adding "1" to the DE register value. For example, when "2500 (H)" was initially stored as the DE register value, it becomes "2501 (H)" by this processing.
Here, as shown in FIG. 208, in order of the role ratio (cumulative), the continuous role ratio (cumulative), the role ratio (6000 times), the continuous role ratio (6000 times), and the advantageous section ratio, the address Blinking/unapplicable item determination values are stored in "2500(H)" to "2504(H)".
As a result, loop processing (step S2484 to S2492) allows the target address to be specified, thereby simplifying the processing.

The flow then advances to step S2492 to determine whether or not the repetition has ended. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Subtract "1" from the B register value.
(2) If the B register value is not "0", it is determined that the iteration has not ended.
Here, the B register value is set to "5" in the first step S2481, so the number of repetitions is "5". When it is determined that the repetition has been completed, the process proceeds to step S2493, and when it is determined that the repetition has not been completed, the process returns to step S2484.
As described above, five items of blink determination are performed.

When the blinking determination of the 5 items is completed and the process proceeds to step S2493, the total number of games counter value is acquired. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the value of the lower 2 bytes of the total number-of-games counter (address "F26D(H)") in the HL register.
(2) Store the value of the upper 1 byte of the total number of games counter (address "F26D(H)") in the A register.
As described above, the total number-of-games counter consists of 3 bytes, "F26D(H)" is a storage area for storing the first digit, and the value is stored in the L register.
"F26E(H)" is a storage area for storing the second digit, and the value is stored in the H register.
Furthermore, "F26F(H)" is a storage area for storing the third digit, and its value is stored in the A register.

In the next step S2494, it is determined whether or not the upper 1 byte of the total number of games counter is "0". This process determines whether the A register value stored in step S2493 is "0". If it is determined to be "0", the process proceeds to step S2495, and if it is determined not to be "0", the process proceeds to step S2496.
In step S2495, it is determined whether or not 6000 games have passed. In this process, "6000 (D)" is subtracted from the HL register value (lower 2-byte data of the total number-of-games counter). As a result of the operation, when there is a carry-down, the carry flag is set to "1". When the carry flag is "1", it is determined that 6000 games have not passed, and the process proceeds to step S2497.
On the other hand, when it is determined that 6000 games have passed, the process proceeds to step S2496.

In step S2496, data for blinking request flag is updated. This process is to set the D5 bit of the C register to "1". Here, the C register value is set to a value corresponding to the flashing request flag of address "F28D(H)" (however, the bit is in an inverted state at this time). Therefore, when 6000 games have passed, the process of setting the D5 bit to "1" is executed.
In the next step S2497, it is determined whether or not the upper byte of the total number of games counter is "2" or more. Here, a process of subtracting "3" from the A register value is performed. If there is no carry-down in this subtraction, the carry flag ≠ "1". Then, when the carry flag is not "1", it is determined that the upper byte of the total number-of-games counter is "2" or more.

The reason for doing this is that the upper 1 byte is first compared with "3" in order to determine whether or not the number of games has reached 175,000. Here, "175000 (D)" is "2AB98 (H)" in hexadecimal, so it is inevitable that the A register value exceeds "2" (the A register value is "3" or more). In general, it can be seen that the value of the total number-of-games counter exceeds "175000 (D)".
At step S2497, when the carry flag ≠ "1", it is determined that the upper 1 byte of the total number of games counter exceeds "2", and the process proceeds to step S2500. It is determined that the upper 1 byte of the number-of-games counter does not exceed "2", and the process proceeds to step S2498.

In step S2498, it is determined whether or not the value of the total number of games counter is "2". In this process, "2" is subtracted from the A register value, and when it is determined that it is not "0", it is determined that the value of the total number of games counter is not "2". When the total number of games counter value is determined not to be "2", the process proceeds to step S2501, and when the total number of games counter value is determined to be "2", the process proceeds to step S2499.
In step S2499, it is determined whether or not 175000 games have passed. In this process, "AB98(H)" is subtracted from the HL register value, and as a result of the operation, if there is a carry flag, the carry flag is set to "1". When the carry flag is "1", it is determined that 175000 games have not passed.
If it is determined in step S2499 that 175,000 games have passed, the process proceeds to step S2500, and if it is determined that 175,000 games have not passed, the process proceeds to step S2501.

In step S2500, data for blinking request flag is updated. This processing sets the D6 bit of the C register to "1". The D6 bit of the C register corresponds to the D6 bit (175000 game blink flag) of the blink request flag at the address "F28D(H)". Then, the process advances to step S2501.
In step S2501, a flashing request flag is generated. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store "01111111 (B)" in the A register.
(2) An exclusive OR operation (XOR) is performed on the A register value and the C register value, and the operation result is stored in the A register.

Before execution of the process of step S2501, "0" is stored in the blinking items (bits) of the data stored in the C register, as described above. For example, when 175000 games have been played, the D6 bit is "1" as described above. In other words, when 175000 games have not been played, it is "0".
Therefore, by inverting the bit of the C register value, a flashing request flag is generated so that the flashing item (bit) becomes "1".
In the next step S2502, the flashing request flag generated in step S2501 is saved. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address of the flashing request flag ("F28D(H)") in the HL register.
(2) Store the A register value at the address indicated by the HL register value ("F28D(H)").
As a result, the blinking item becomes "1" and the non-blinking item becomes "0". In this way, the information corresponding to each bit is represented by "1" or "0", and the flashing request flags regarding seven items including whether to flash are stored at the address "F28D(H)". .

FIG. 209 is a flow chart showing the rate display timer update (S_RATE_TIME) in step S2465 in FIG.
First, in step S2511, the display switching time is updated. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address ("F290(H)" which is the leading address) storing the display switching time in the HL register.
(2) Subtract "1" from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and store the result of the subtraction at that address.
This process executes a cyclic subtraction process that circulates between "0" and "2144 (D)" when the display switching time is expressed in decimal notation.
Therefore, if the processing is performed when the display switching time is "0", "2144 (D)" (860 (H)) is stored as the display switching time.
Also, when the flag is "0", the processing is performed, and when "2144 (D)" (860 (H)) is stored as the display switching time, the carry flag becomes "1".
Since interrupt processing is executed every 2.235 ms, the value changes from "0" to "2144 (D)" and the carry flag becomes "1" every approximately 4792 ms.
As a result, the content of the ratio display is switched approximately every five seconds.

In the next step S2512, it is determined whether or not the display switching time has elapsed. This determination is to determine whether or not the carry flag=“1” in the process of step S2511. When the carry flag=“1”, it is determined that the display switching time has elapsed.
If it is determined that the display switching time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2513, and if it is determined that the display switching time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2518.
In step S2513, the blink switching time is saved. In this process, "134 (D) (86 (H))" is stored at the address (blink switching time) indicated by the data obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value (that is, "F292 (H)").
That is, when it is determined that the display switching time has passed, the flashing switching time is saved. A time of "2.235×134=299.49 (ms)" is stored as the flashing switching time.

Next, the process advances to step S2514 to turn off the flashing switching flag. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address of the flashing switching flag ("F28F(H)") in the HL register.
(2) Store "0" at the address indicated by the HL register value.
As described above, when the data stored in the flashing switching flag is "0", it indicates lighting, and when it is "1", it indicates lighting off.
That is, at the timing when the display switching time has elapsed, the flashing switching flag becomes "0" (lit).

The flow then advances to step S2515 to update the ratio display number. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Subtract "1" from the HL register value.
In other words, the address of the RWM 53 ("F28E(H)") corresponding to the ratio display number is stored in the HL register.
(2) Add "1" to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.
This process executes a cyclic addition process that circulates the ratio display number between "0" and "5". Therefore, if the processing is performed when the ratio display number is "5", "0" is stored as the ratio display number. Also, if the process is performed when the ratio display number is less than "5", the carry flag is set to "1".

In the next step S2516, it is determined whether or not the updated ratio display number is "0". Here, when the carry flag=“1”, it is determined that the ratio display number is not “0”. In other words, when the ratio display number is "5" and the process of step S2515 is executed and the ratio display number becomes "0", it is determined that the ratio display number is "0".
When it is determined in step S2516 that the updated ratio display number is "0", the process proceeds to step S2517, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the processing according to this flowchart ends.
In step S2517, the ratio display number is corrected. This process is a process of adding "1" to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value. By this processing, when "0" is stored in the ratio display number, it is updated to "1". As a result, the ratio display number circulates from "1" to "5". Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

If it is determined in step S2512 that the display switching time has not elapsed, and the process proceeds to step S2518, the flashing switching time is updated. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the flashing switching time address ("F292(H)") in the HL register.
(2) Subtract "1" from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and store the result of the subtraction at that address.
This process executes a cyclic subtraction process that circulates between "0" and "134 (D)" when the flashing switching time is expressed in decimal notation.
Therefore, if the processing is performed when the flashing switching time is "0", "134 (D)" (86 (H)) is stored as the flashing switching time.
Also, when the flag is "0", the relevant processing is performed, and when "134 (D)" (86 (H)) is stored as the flashing switching time, the carry flag becomes "1".

Next, proceeding to step S2519, it is determined whether or not the flashing switching time has elapsed. This judgment is made by judging whether or not the carry flag is "1", and when the carry flag ≠ "1", it is judged that the flashing switching time has not elapsed. If it is determined that the flashing switching time has elapsed, the process advances to step S2520, and if it is determined that the flashing switching time has not elapsed, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
In step S2520, the flashing switching flag is updated. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address of the flashing switching flag ("F28F(H)") in the HL register.
(2) Add "1" to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and store the addition result at the address.
This process executes a cyclic addition process in which the flashing switching flag circulates between "0" and "1". Therefore, if this process is performed when the flashing switching flag is "1", "0" is stored as the flashing switching flag.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 210 is a flow chart showing the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in step S2466 in FIG.
In the twentieth to twenty-fourth embodiments, the ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT) without consideration of blinking has been described (FIGS. 135, 141, 150, and 159).
The twenty-sixth embodiment of FIG. 210 is a flowchart based on FIG. 135 of the twentieth embodiment, and the difference from the twentieth embodiment (FIG. 135) is that in FIG. pulling. The processing of step numbers not underlined is the same as in the twentieth embodiment (FIG. 135).

In FIG. 210, first, in step S1471, an LED display counter is acquired. This process is a process of acquiring the value of the LED display counter and storing it in the D register.
In the next step S1472, it is determined whether or not there is a ratio display request. Here, it is determined whether or not there is a display request for any of the digits 6-9. Specifically, an AND operation is performed on the LED display counter value stored in the D register and "11111000 (B)". When the result of the AND operation is not "0", it is determined that there is no ratio display request, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when the AND operation result is "0", it is determined that there is a ratio display request, and the process proceeds to step S1473.

In the next step S1473, it is determined whether or not the LED display counter value stored in the D register is "0". If it is determined to be "0", the process proceeds to step S1474, and if it is determined not to be "0", the process proceeds to step S1475.
In step S1474, a ratio (one digit) display request is set. As described in the twentieth embodiment, when the LED display counter is "00000000 (B)" (when the digit 9 signal is on), the digit 9 signal is assigned to the D3 bit, so the D3 bit is assigned to the D3 bit. Digit data "00001000 (B)" with "1" is created. In step S1474, this process is executed and this digit data "00001000(B)" is stored in the D register. Then, the process proceeds to step S1475.

In the next step S1475, the ratio display number (address "F28E(H)") is acquired. This process acquires the ratio display number, stores it in the A register, and further stores the A register value in the E register.
Here, based on the ratio display number, the number of flashing bit inspections, which will be described later, is determined. For example:
Example 1)
If the ratio display number is "1": The number of blinking bit inspections for the advantageous section ratio is acquired.
Example 2)
The ratio display number is "2": The number of blinking bit inspections for the continuous role ratio (6000 times) is acquired.
Example 3)
The ratio display number is "5": Acquires the number of blinking bit inspections for the role product ratio (total cumulative total).
Also, by executing the process of storing the A register value in the E register, the A register value and the E register value become the same value.

In the next step S2531, the address of the blinking bit inspection frequency table is set. In this process, the HL register stores an address obtained by subtracting "1" from the top address of the blink bit check count table (TBL_FLASH_CHK).
FIG. 211 is a diagram showing a flashing bit check count table (TBL_FLASH_CHK). As shown in FIG. 211, a predetermined value (for example, the value corresponding to the advantageous section ratio is "7(H)") is stored for each ratio.
And the head address thereof is "2510 (H)". Therefore, "250F(H)" is stored in the HL register.

The "blinking bit inspection count" is a value indicating how many bits ahead from the D0 bit in the blinking request flag of the address "F28D(H)" to reach the bit to be inspected.
For example, in FIG. 211, "7 (H)" is stored in the advantageous section ratio, continuous character ratio (total), and character ratio (total). This is a value for determining whether or not the value of the seventh D6 bit counting from the first is "1". The D6th bit is a flag that becomes "1" when the total number of games has not reached 175000 times, and when the D6th bit is "1", as shown in FIG. The identification segs of the ratio, the continuous role ratio (total), and the role ratio (total) are blinking targets.
Also, in FIG. 211, "6 (H)" is stored in the continuous role product ratio (6000 times) and the role product ratio (6000 times). This is a value for judging whether or not the value of the 6th D5 bit is "1". The D5th bit is a flag that becomes "1" when the total number of games has not reached 6000. When the D5th bit is "1", as shown in FIG. The identification seg of the object ratio (6000 times) and the character ratio (6000 times) are blinking targets.

In the next step S2532, the identification segment blink bit check count is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Data obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is stored in the HL register.
(2) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the B register.
For example, when the A register value (ratio display number stored in step S1475) is "3",
250F(H)+3(H)=2512(H) (=HL register value)
6 (H) (=B register value)
becomes.
In other words, "250F(H)" is the reference address, and the data stored in the ratio display number (address "F28E(H)") is used as the offset value to calculate the address of the blinking bit check table and store it at that address. It is possible to acquire the data that is stored.
In the above example, "6 (H)", which is the information for determining whether or not to blink the identification seg at the role product ratio (6000 times) stored at the address "2512 (H)", is acquired. be done.
The flow then advances to step S1476 to set the identified segment offset table. This process is a process of storing the top address of the identification segment offset table (“TBL_SEGID_DATA” in FIG. 127) in the HL register. Although not shown in FIG. 127, the head address is "2520(H)" in the twenty-sixth embodiment, and the value obtained by subtracting "1" from this address (251F(H)) is stored in the HL register. .

In the next step S1477, an identification segment offset value is obtained. This process is a process of reading from the identification segment offset table using the ratio display number stored in the A register in step S1475 as the offset value.
Specifically, the following processing is executed.
(1) Data obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is stored in the HL register.
(2) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
As a result, for example, when the ratio display number is "1", "2520 (H)" obtained by adding "1 (H)" to "251F (H)" is stored in the HL register and stored at the address. The received data "7A(H)" is stored in the A register. When the ratio display number is "2", "2521(H)" obtained by adding "2(H)" to "251F(H)" is stored in the HL register, and the data stored at that address is is stored in the A register.

In the next step S1478, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display the ratio (1000 digits) (request to display digit 6). Here, it is determined whether or not the D0 bit of the value (LED display counter value) stored in the D register is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that there is a display request. If there is a request to display the ratio (1000 digits), the process proceeds to step S1482, and if there is no request to display it, the process proceeds to step S1479.

In step S1479, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display the ratio (100 digits) (request to display digit 7). Here, it is determined whether or not the D1 bit of the value stored in the D register is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that there is a display request. If there is a request to display the ratio (100 digits), the process proceeds to step S1483, and if there is no request to display it, the process proceeds to step S2533.

In step S2533, the ratio segment blink bit check count is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the E register value in the A register.
(2) Store the A register value in the B register.
Here, the E register stores the ratio display number obtained in step S1475. Therefore, the same value is stored in the E register, A register, and B register.
The process then advances to step S1480. When the process proceeds to step S1480, there is no request to display the ratio (1000 digits) or the ratio (100 digits), that is, when there is no request to display the identification segment (when displaying the ratio segment). Therefore, in step S1480, ratio data is obtained.
In this step S1480, the numerical value corresponding to the ratio display number stored in the E register is acquired. For example, when the E register value is "00000001 (B)" corresponding to the ratio display number "1", the advantageous section ratio data is acquired.

Acquisition of specific ratio data is as follows.
(1) A value (“F284(H)”) obtained by subtracting “1” from the address (“F285(H)”) of the RWM 53 where the advantageous section ratio data is stored is stored in the HL register.
(2) Store the data obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value in the HL register.
(3) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
That is, with "F284(H)" as the reference address and the ratio display number as the offset value, the RWM address where the ratio data is stored is calculated (specified), and the data stored at the RWM address is transferred to the register (storage area). can be obtained (stored) in
Through this process, the A register stores the advantageous section ratio data, continuous role ratio data (6000 times), role ratio data (6000 times), continuous role ratio data (total), and role ratio data (total). An offset value is stored for displaying either ratio. This offset value (A register value) is used when acquiring ratio display segment data in step S1484.

Next, the flow advances to step S1481 to determine whether or not there is a request to display the ratio (one digit) (request to display digit 9). This processing is to determine whether or not the D3 bit of the value stored in the D register is "1". If there is a request to display the ratio (1 digit), the process proceeds to step S1483, and if there is no request to display it, the process proceeds to step S1482.
When there is no ratio (1-digit) display request in step S1481, it means that there is a ratio (10-digit) display request.

Through the above processing, when there is a request to display the ratio (1000 digits) or (10 digits), the process proceeds to step S1482, and when there is a request to display the ratio (100 digits) or the ratio (1 digit), the process proceeds to step S1483. .
In step S1482, the upper digit offset is set. This is because the upper digits of the identification seg or the ratio seg are lit when the process proceeds to step S1482. At this point, the A register stores the identified segment offset value (step S1477) or ratio data (step S1480). And here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Replace the lower 4 bits and the upper 4 bits stored in the A register.
For example, if the data before the exchange is "0011/1001 (B)"("/" indicates the boundary between the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits), the lower 4 bits and the upper 4 bits are exchanged. and becomes "1001/0011(B)".
(2) An AND operation is performed on the A register value and "00001111(B)", and the operation result is stored in the A register. This process is a process of masking (setting to "0") the upper 4 bits since the lower 4 bits of the A register are used as an offset value.
As described above, of the 1-byte data of the identification segment offset value and the 1-byte data of the offset value for displaying the ratio, the upper 4 bits correspond to the upper digit offset value, and the lower 4 bits correspond to the lower digit. It corresponds to the offset value. Therefore, by performing the above process, an offset value for obtaining the segment data of the upper digits is generated.

In the next step S1483, a ratio display segment data table (TBL_SEGRATE_DATA) is set. This process is a process of storing the start address of the ratio display segment data table in the HL register in FIG.
Although addresses are not shown in FIG. 127, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the start address is "2530(H)", so "2530(H)" is stored in the HL register.

The process then advances to step S1484 to acquire segment output data. In this process, the A register value (offset value) is added to the HL register value (head address of the ratio display segment data table), and the data corresponding to the address of the ratio display segment data table after the addition is stored in the E register. processing.
Specifically, for example,
HL register value = 2530 (H) (before addition; start address value of ratio display segment data table)
A register value = 5 (H)
when
HL register value = 2535 (H) (after addition)
E register value = 01101101 (B) ("5" display data)
becomes.

The flow then advances to step S1485 to determine whether segment P is displayed. In this embodiment, when digits 6 to 9 are displayed, segment P (dot) of digit 7 is always displayed. Therefore, when there is a request to display a ratio (100 digits), it is determined that segment P is to be displayed. . On the other hand, when there is a request to display the ratio (1 digit), the ratio (10 digits), and the ratio (1000 digits), it is determined that the display of the segment P is not requested.
Here, for example, it is determined whether or not the D1 bit of the value stored in the D register is "1". determines that there is no display request for segment P. Specifically, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store "00000010 (B)" in the A register.
(2) An AND operation is performed on the A register value and the D register value (the LED display counter value stored in step S1471).

If it is determined that there is a display request for segment P, the process proceeds to step S1486, and if it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S2534.
In step S1486, output data corresponding to segment P is set. Since the segment P corresponds to the D7 bit of the 8-bit data, the segment data (E register value) acquired in step S1484 and "10000000 (B)" are ORed, and the operation result is stored in the E register. Remember.

In the next step S2534, a flashing request flag is acquired. This process is a process of storing the data of the flashing request flag (address "F28D(H)") in the A register.
The process then advances to step S2535 to perform a blink bit check. This process is a process of shifting the A register to the right by "1" and storing the overflowed result in the carry flag. That is, the value of the D0 bit before the "1" shift is stored in the carry flag. Therefore, if the value of the D0 bit before the "1" shift is "0", the carry flag is "0", and if the value of the D0 bit before the "1" shift is "1", the carry flag is "1". Become.

In the next step S2536, it is determined whether or not the inspection is finished. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Subtract "1" from the B register value.
(2) When it is determined that the B register value is "0", it is determined that the inspection is finished.
If it is determined that the inspection has been completed, the process proceeds to step S2537, and if it is determined that the inspection has not been completed, the process returns to step S2535.
By the above processing, the value of the flashing request flag is shifted to the right by the number of times stored in the B register first, and the result of the shift and overflow is stored in the carry flag.

For example, when the value of the blink request flag is "01000000 (B)" (175000 times blink flag of D6th bit is ON) and the B register value is "7 (H)",
First time: "01000000 (B)"→"00100000 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 7-1 = 6 (H)
Second time: "00100000 (B)"→"00010000 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 6-1 = 5 (H)
Third time: "00010000 (B)"→"00001000 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 5 - 1 = 4 (H)
Fourth time: "00001000 (B)"→"00000100 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 4 - 1 = 3 (H)
Fifth time: "00000100 (B)"→"00000010 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 3-1 = 2 (H)
Sixth time: "00000010 (B)"→"00000001 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 2-1 = 1 (H)
Seventh time: "00000001 (B)"→"00000000 (B)", carry flag = "1"
B register value = 1 - 1 = 0 (H)
becomes.

In step S2537, it is determined whether or not the flashing request flag is on. In this process, it is determined whether or not the carry flag is "1" when it is determined in step S2536 that the inspection has been completed. When it is determined that the flashing request flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2538, and when it is determined that the flashing request flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S1487.

In step S2538, it is determined whether or not the flashing switching flag is on. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the data of the flashing switching flag (address "F28F(H)") in the A register.
(2) When the A register value is "0" (second zero flag = "1"), it is determined that the flashing switching flag is not on.
If it is determined that the flashing switching flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2539, and if it is determined that it is not on, the process proceeds to step S1487.
From steps S2537 and S2538,
a) If the flashing request flag is off ("No" in step S2537), the process does not proceed to step S2538, so even if the flashing switching flag is on, the light does not turn off.
b) Even if the flashing request flag is on ("Yes" in step S2537), if the flashing switching flag is off ("No" in step S2538), the light is turned on.
c) If the flashing request flag is on (“Yes” at step S2537) and the flashing switching flag is on (“Yes” at step S2538), the process advances to step S2539 to turn off the light.

In step S2539, the segment data are cleared. This process is a process of storing the B register value in the E register.
Here, the B register value is always "0" when it is determined that the inspection has ended in step S2536. Therefore, this process is a process of setting "0" to the E register. That is, when the blink request flag is on (“1”) and the blink switching flag is on (“1”, i.e., extinguished), the interrupt process extinguishes the display to be illuminated. In order to set the data (E register value) to "00000000 (B)", the process of step S2539 is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S1487.

In step S1487, the segment signal is output from the output port 3 and the digit signal is output from the output port 4 in order to output the digit signal and the segment signal. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Swap the DE and HL register values.
Here, a digit signal is stored in the D register. A segment signal is stored in the E register. and,
exchange the data stored in the D register with the data stored in the H register,
The data stored in the E register and the data stored in the L register are exchanged.
This will
A digit signal is stored in the H register,
A segment signal is stored in the L register.
(2) Output the L register value to the output port 3 and output the H register value to the output port 4;
This completes the processing according to this flowchart, and advances to step S2467 in FIG.

<27th Embodiment>
In the twenty-sixth embodiment, the ratio set process is executed in step S2193 during the main process of FIG. 188, and the ratio calculation process is executed in step S2243 in this ratio set process (FIG. 191).
On the other hand, in the twenty-seventh embodiment, one item is calculated by one interrupt for five items of ratio and ring buffer number update (six items in total). Note that in the twenty-seventh embodiment, the term "ratio calculation" includes updating the ring buffer number.

Of course, it is also possible to execute the six-item ratio calculation at one interrupt. However, since interrupt processing includes various processes (see FIG. 190), it is desirable to minimize the time required for ratio calculation. Therefore, in the twenty-seventh embodiment, one item of ratio calculation is executed in one interrupt process.

Three examples (1) to (3) will be given as the twenty-seventh embodiment. Processing corresponding to each embodiment is as follows.
a) 27th embodiment (1)
Main processing (M_MAIN): Same as the 26th embodiment Ratio set processing (S_RATE_SET): Fig. 212
Ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY): Figure 213
Ratio calculation management (S_CAL_CTL): Fig. 214 (processing specific to the 27th embodiment)
Ratio calculation processing (S_CAL_SET): Fig. 215
Ring buffer number update (S_RONGNO_SET): Same as the twenty-sixth embodiment (Fig. 205)
Ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT): Same as the 26th embodiment (Fig. 210)

b) 27th embodiment (2)
Main processing (M_MAIN): Figure 216
Rate set processing (S_RATE_SET): Fig. 217
Ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY): same as the 26th embodiment (Fig. 206)
Ratio calculation management (S_CAL_CTL): Same as 27th embodiment (1) (Fig. 214)
Ratio calculation processing (S_CAL_SET): Same as the twenty-seventh embodiment (1) (Fig. 215)
Ring buffer number update (S_RONGNO_SET): Same as the twenty-sixth embodiment (Fig. 205)
Ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT): Same as the 26th embodiment (Fig. 210)

b) 27th embodiment (3)
Setting Change Processing (M_RANK_SET): Fig. 218
Power On Ratio Calculation (S_CAL_PWON): Figure 219
Main processing (M_MAIN): Figure 220
Rate set processing (S_RATE_SET): Same as the twenty-seventh embodiment (2) (Fig. 217)
Ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY): same as the 26th embodiment (Fig. 206)
Ratio calculation management (S_CAL_CTL): Same as 27th embodiment (1) (Fig. 214)
Ratio calculation processing (S_CAL_SET): Same as the twenty-seventh embodiment (1) (Fig. 215)
Ring buffer number update (S_RONGNO_SET): Same as the twenty-sixth embodiment (Fig. 205)
Ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT): Same as the 26th embodiment (Fig. 210)

<27th Embodiment (1)>
In the twenty-seventh embodiment (1), ratio calculation is executed during interrupt processing.
FIG. 212 is a flow chart showing the rate setting process (S_RATE_SET) of the twenty-seventh embodiment (1), and is a flow chart corresponding to FIG. 191 of the twenty-sixth embodiment.
In the twenty-seventh embodiment (1), in the main process (M_MAIN) of FIG. 188, step S2550 of FIG. 212 is executed instead of step S2193.
In the description of the twenty-seventh embodiment, steps that execute the same processing as in the twenty-sixth embodiment are assigned the same step numbers, and the description thereof is omitted. Steps different from those of the twenty-sixth embodiment are underlined under the step numbers.

As shown in FIG. 212, in the ratio setting process, after updating the 400 game counter in step S2242, the process advances to step S2551 to execute the number of calculations setting. In the twenty-seventh embodiment, the RWM 53 is provided with a storage area called "number of calculations". Then, in step S2551, "6" is set in the "number of calculations" storage area. Note that the storage area for this "number of calculations" is set so as to be outside the range cleared when the settings are changed. By doing so, when the power is turned off before the calculation of the following six items is completed, and the power is turned on while the setting key switch is turned on (setting change mode transition condition is satisfied), the calculation can be executed from the middle without executing the calculation from the beginning. Also, "6" means 6 times of interrupt processing, advantageous section ratio, continuous role ratio (6000 times), role ratio (6000 times), continuous role ratio (cumulative), role ratio (cumulative ), which means performing a 6-item calculation of the ring buffer number update.
Note that if the storage area for "number of calculations" is cleared at the time of transition to the setting mode, there will be an inconvenience that some ratios will not be calculated. For example, when the number of calculations is "4", if the setting change mode is entered and the number of calculations is cleared, the ratio after "3" will not be calculated. See below). Specifically, the latest ratio data for the role ratio (accumulated) and the continuous role ratio (cumulative) are the ratio (6000 times), the consecutive role ratio (6000 times), the advantageous section ratio, And the ring buffer number will not be the latest ratio data.
Therefore, even when the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the "number of calculations" storage area is not cleared.

Especially in this embodiment, the following ratios are calculated according to the number of calculations.
Number of calculations after updating (when subtracting “1”) “5”: Role ratio (cumulative)
Number of calculations after updating (when subtracting “1”) “4”: Consecutive role ratio (cumulative)
Number of calculations after updating (when subtracting "1") "3": role ratio (6000 times)
Number of calculations after updating (when subtracting "1") "2": Continuous role ratio (6000 times)
Number of calculations after update (when subtracting "1") "1": Advantageous section ratio Number of calculations after updating (when subtracting "1") "0": Ring buffer number update Number of calculations before update "0": No calculation 212, unlike the twenty-sixth embodiment (FIG. 191), the ratio calculation process (S_CAL_SET) in step S2243 and the ring buffer number update (S_RINGNO_SET) in step S2244 in FIG. 191 are not provided. Absent. This is because these processes are executed by interrupt processing.

FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) in the twenty-seventh embodiment (1), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 206 in the twenty-sixth embodiment.
In the twenty-seventh embodiment (1), step S2560 in FIG. 213 is executed instead of step S2221 during the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG.
In the ratio display preparation of the twenty-seventh embodiment (1), between saving the register in step S2463 and generating a flashing request flag (S_LED_FLASH) in step S2464, ratio calculation management (S_CAL_CTL) in step S2561 (FIG. 214 to be described later) to run. Others are the same as the twenty-sixth embodiment (FIG. 206).

FIG. 214 is a flow chart showing the ratio calculation control (S_CAL_CTL) in step S2561 of FIG.
First, in step S2571, the number of calculations is updated. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the number of calculations of the RWM 53 described above. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address of the number of calculations in the HL register.
(2) Store the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
(3) Subtract "1" from the A register value.
(4) Store the data stored in the A register at the address indicated by the HL register value.

In the next step S2572, it is determined whether or not the number of calculations before the update in step S2571 is "0". For example, when the A register value in (2) above is "0", it is determined that the number of calculations before update is "0". When it is determined that the number of calculations before updating is "0", the processing according to this flowchart is executed, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the process advances to step S2573.
In step S2573, it is determined whether or not the number of calculations after the update in step S2571 is "0". For example, when the A register value after subtraction in (3) above is "0", it is determined that the number of calculations after updating is "0". When it is determined that the number of calculations after updating is "0", the process proceeds to step S2575 (ring buffer number update), and when it is determined not to be "0", the process proceeds to step S2574 (ratio calculation processing).

In step S2574, the ratio calculation process (S_CAL_SET) (FIG. 215) is executed, and the process according to this flowchart ends.
On the other hand, in step S2575, ring buffer number update (S_RINGNO_SET; FIG. 205) is executed, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
As described above, when the number of calculations before update is not "0" and the number of calculations after update is not "0", one of the five ratios shown in FIG. 181 is calculated once. do. When the number of calculations before update is not "0" and the number of calculations after update is "0", the ring buffer number is updated.

FIG. 215 is a flow chart showing the ratio calculation process (S_CAL_SET) in step S2574 of FIG. In FIG. 215, the steps that are different from the twenty-sixth embodiment (FIG. 202) are underlined as described above.
First, in the process of FIG. 215, unlike the process of FIG. 202, the processes of steps S2381, S2382, and S2407 in FIG. 202 are not performed. This is because, as described above, the number of calculations in the ratio calculation process is one.
Also, after setting the ratio calculation RWM address table in step S2385, the process proceeds to step S2581.

In step S2581, the count upper limit flag (address "F28B(H)") is acquired. Flow then proceeds to step S2582 to check whether a ratio calculation should be performed. In the twenty-seventh embodiment, when it is determined from the count upper limit flag that the number of games has reached the count upper limit value, it is determined not to calculate the advantageous section ratio. Also, when it is determined by the count upper limit flag that the payout number has reached the count upper limit value, it is determined not to calculate the role ratio (6000 times and total) and the continuous role ratio (6000 times and total).
In this point, the twenty-seventh embodiment differs from the twenty-sixth embodiment (in the twenty-sixth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 202, the ratio performed the calculations).
Next, the flow advances to step S2583 to determine whether or not to execute ratio calculation processing. For example, in the case of calculating the advantageous interval ratio in this interrupt process, if the number-of-games upper limit flag of the count upper limit flag is "0", it is determined to execute the calculation of the advantageous interval ratio. On the other hand, when the number-of-games upper limit flag of the count upper limit flag is "1", it is determined not to calculate the advantageous interval ratio.

Also, for example, in the case of calculating the role product ratio (cumulative) in this interrupt process, if the payout number upper limit flag of the count upper limit flag is "0", it is determined to execute the calculation of the role product ratio (cumulative). . On the other hand, when the payout number upper limit flag of the count upper limit flag is "1", it is determined not to execute the calculation of the accessory ratio (total).
When it is determined in step S2583 that the calculation should be executed, the process proceeds to step S2386 and subsequent steps, and when it is determined not to execute the calculation, the process of this flow chart ends.

<27th Embodiment (2)>
In the twenty-seventh embodiment (2), like the twenty-sixth embodiment, the ratio calculation is performed during the main processing.
FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) of the twenty-seventh embodiment (2), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 188 of the twenty-sixth embodiment.
In the twenty-seventh embodiment (2), a setting change flag is provided as a flag stored in the RWM 53 . When the setting change flag is on, it means that the setting can be changed, and when it is off, it means that the setting cannot be changed.
In FIG. 216, after the game start set in step S2172 is completed, the process advances to step S2591 to turn on the setting change flag. Also, when the operation of the start switch 41 is detected in step S2178, the setting change flag is turned off in the next step S2592. As a result, the setting can be changed during the game standby (before the game is started (operation of the start switch 41)), and the setting cannot be changed after the game is started (after the start switch 41 is operated).

The reason for setting in this way is that in the twenty-seventh embodiment, the ratio of one item is calculated in one interrupt process. Specifically, since the ratio calculation (ratio setting processing in step S2593) is performed after medals are paid out during the main processing, the setting change processing is performed before all calculations (6 times) are completed, and the RWM 53 clear processing is performed. If this is done, when the ratio is displayed by subsequent interrupt processing, the calculation of a certain ratio has been completed, but the calculation of another ratio has not been completed, or the ring buffer number has not been updated normally. In order to prevent an abnormality such as not being performed, a setting change prohibition section is provided.
In the example of FIG. 216, the setting changeable section is from after the game start setting to before the start switch 41 is operated, and the setting changeable section is from after the start switch 41 is operated to before the game start setting of the next game. Therefore, even if the power is turned off while steps S2190 to S2594 are being looped, the setting change process is not performed.

In addition, since six calculations are performed after the medal is paid out, after the ratio setting process of step S2593, when interruption is permitted (step S2195), the process proceeds to step S2594 to determine whether the number of calculations is "0". is determined, and if it is not "0", the process returns to step S2190 to execute the interrupt waiting process. Then, when interrupt processing is performed after that, the ratio setting processing (one ratio calculation) is executed again in step S2593. On the other hand, when it is determined to be "0" in step S2594, the process proceeds to step S2196 to execute game end check processing.

FIG. 217 is a flow chart showing the rate setting process (S_RATE_SET) in the twenty-seventh embodiment (2), which is the process of step S2593 in FIG.
In the twenty-seventh embodiment (1), the ratio calculation management (S_CAL_CTL) is not executed in the ratio set processing (S_RATE_SET; FIG. 212), and the ratio calculation is performed in step S2561 in the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) of FIG. Performed administration (S_CAL_CTL).
In contrast, in the twenty-seventh embodiment (2), ratio calculation management (S_CAL_CTL) is executed in the ratio set processing (S_RATE_SET) of FIG. 217 (step S2603). Therefore, ratio calculation control (S_CAL_CTL) is not executed during ratio display preparation. The ratio display preparation of the twenty-seventh embodiment (2) is the same as that of the twenty-sixth embodiment (FIG. 206), as described above.

In FIG. 217, after the process of step S2234, the process advances to step S2601 to determine whether or not the number of calculations is "0". If it is determined that the number of calculations is not "0", the process advances to step S2603 (ratio calculation management). On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of calculations is "0", the process proceeds to step S2235 (count upper limit check).
Also, after the process of step S2242, the process advances to step S2602 to set the number of calculations ("6"), as in the twenty-seventh embodiment (1) (step S2551 in FIG. 212). Therefore, when the number of calculations is determined to be "0" in step S2601, the number of calculations is set to "6" in step S2602.

<27th Embodiment (3)>
In the twenty-seventh embodiment (3), ratio calculation is performed during setting change processing and main processing.
FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing setting change processing (M_RANK_SET) in the twenty-seventh embodiment (3), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 186 in the twenty-sixth embodiment.
The setting change process of FIG. 218 is different from the twenty-sixth embodiment (FIG. 186) in that the power-on ratio calculation (S_CAL_PWON) is executed in step S2611 after completing the initialization (outside the use area) in step S2131. . In this power-on ratio calculation, six items of ratio calculation are performed. Thereafter, the process advances to step S2133 to activate an interrupt. In the twenty-seventh embodiment (3), no ratio calculation is performed in interrupt processing.

FIG. 219 is a flow chart showing power-on ratio calculation (S_CAL_PWON) in step S2611 of FIG.
First, in step S2621, the stack pointer is saved. This process stores the stack pointer (SP register) stored in the stack area in the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 (address "F293(H)").
As described above, the ratio calculation is a program that is executed outside the usage area. Restore the stack pointer on return.
In the next step S2622, a stack pointer (outside the used area) is set. This process is a process of storing "F400 (H)" in the stack pointer (SP register).
In the next step S2623, the register is saved. This process is a process of saving various registers to the stack area (outside the used area).
Then, in step S2624, the upper address of RWM 53 is set in the Q register. This process is a process of storing "F2(H)" in the Q register.

In the next step S2625, ratio calculation control (S_CAL_CTL) is executed. This ratio calculation management is the same processing as in the twenty-seventh embodiment (1) (FIG. 214). Then, in the next step S2626, it is determined whether or not the number of calculations has become "0". When it is determined that the number of calculations is "0", the process proceeds to step S2627, and when it is determined that the number of calculations is not "0", the process returns to step S2625 to execute the ratio calculation.
Then, when the ratio calculation of the six items is finished and the flow advances to step S2627, the register is restored. This process is a process of restoring various registers saved in step S2623.
In the next step S2628, the stack pointer is restored. This process stores the stack pointer saved in step S2621, ie, the data stored in the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2, in the stack pointer (SP register). Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the twenty-seventh embodiment (3) (in FIG. 218, it shifts after the setting change processing is completed), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 188 in the twenty-sixth embodiment. .
In the twenty-seventh embodiment (3), as in the twenty-sixth embodiment, ratio calculation (ratio setting processing in step S2641) is executed during the main processing. This ratio setting process is the same as that of the twenty-seventh embodiment (2) (FIG. 217). That is, the ratio calculation control (S_CAL_CTL) (FIG. 214) is executed until the number of calculations reaches "0".
Also, each time the ratio set process is executed, the process proceeds to step S2642 to determine whether or not the number of calculations is "0". If it is determined that the value is not "0", the process returns to step S2190 to execute the ratio setting process (step S2641) again.
In the main processing of the twenty-seventh embodiment (3), the ratio calculation is performed in both the setting change processing and the main processing, and the ratio calculation is performed before the interrupt processing in the setting change processing. It is not necessary to set a setting change prohibition period as in the main process of 2) (FIG. 216).

Although the twenty-sixth and twenty-seventh embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the twenty-sixth and twenty-seventh embodiments are not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible. .
(1) In the twenty-sixth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 188 and 191, every game, count upper limit check (S_LIMIT_CHK) is performed. Therefore, the count upper limit flag is updated every game.
On the other hand, it is also possible to update the count upper limit flag only in the game in which the number of games played or the number of payouts reaches the upper limit.
In this case, in FIG. 192, first (before step S2251), the value of the count upper limit flag is determined, and when the D0 and D1 bits are "1", the count upper limit check process is terminated. .
In addition, without providing a count upper limit flag, it is determined whether or not the total number of games counter and the total payout (total) counter are 3 bytes full, and when they are 3 bytes full, it is determined that the count upper limit has been reached. is also possible. Examples of this method include the following a) first method and b) second method.

a) Method 1 Both the total game number counter and the total payout (cumulative) counter consist of 3 bytes. Here, the most significant byte is the Ath byte, and the lower two bytes are the Bth and Cth bytes (the least significant byte is the Cth byte).
Then, whether or not all of the A, B, and C bytes are full (3 bytes full ("FFFFFF(H)")) is calculated as follows.
First, AND operation is performed on the A-th byte and the B-th byte. Next, "FF(H)" is subtracted from the AND operation result. As a result, when it becomes "0" (zero flag = "1"), the next calculation is performed. If the zero flag is not equal to "1", it is determined that the 3 bytes are not full at that point, and the operation ends.
In the next operation, the AND operation is performed on the A-th byte and the C-th byte. Next, "FF(H)" is subtracted from the AND operation result. As a result, when "0" (zero flag="1"), it is determined that 3 bytes are full, and when zero flag ≠ "1", it is determined that 3 bytes are not full.

In the above calculation, if "FF(H)" and "FF(H)" are ANDed, the result of the calculation is "FF(H)". is subtracted, the zero flag=“1”.
Then, if the operation result of the A-th byte and B-th byte is zero flag="1" and the operation result of the A-th byte and C-th byte is zero flag="1", then the A-th byte and the B-th byte , and the C-th byte are both "FF(H)".
It should be noted that the above applies not only to the total number of games played counter, but also to the total payout (cumulative) counter.

b) Second method The B-th byte and the C-th byte, which are the lower two bytes, of the 3-byte counter are stored in, for example, the HL register. Then, "1" is added to the HL register value. When the carry flag=“1” as a result of this addition, the operation proceeds to the next operation, and when the carry flag ≠“1”, the operation ends at this point. This is because the carry flag ≠ "1" means that the HL register value is not "FF".
When the carry flag=“1”, the A-th byte, which is the upper 1 byte, is stored in the A register. Then, the carry flag=“1” is added to the A register. As a result, when the carry flag=“1”, it is determined that the 3 bytes are full, and when the carry flag ≠“1”, it is determined that the 3 bytes are not full.
If the calculation is performed as described above, it is necessary to perform the calculation each time it is determined whether or not the data is 3 bytes full.

(2) In the above embodiment, the ratio display switching time "about 5.0 seconds" is set to the number of interrupts "2144 (D)", and the blink switching time "about 0.3 seconds" is set to the number of interrupts "134 (D)”. As a result, when the identification seg or the ratio seg is blinking, it is possible to switch the ratio display content at the timing of switching from off to on.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display switching time may be set to the number of interrupts closest to "about 5.0 seconds", and the blink switching time may be set to the number of interrupts closest to "about 0.3 seconds". .
For example, the number of interrupts for counting the display switching time may be set to "2237 (D)" (2237×2.235≈4999.695 ms).
The number of interrupts closest to "about 0.3 seconds" at the time of flashing switching is "134 (D)", which is the same as in the twenty-sixth embodiment.

When setting in this way, the display switching time of 5.0 seconds may be reached immediately after the identification seg or ratio seg is switched from off to on. Then, for example, when switching to the next display immediately after switching from off to lighting, the display contents are switched after lighting for a moment.
In order to prevent this from happening (to improve the appearance and prevent people from thinking that it may be out of order), for example, when the time to switch from lighting to lighting comes, and the time to switch from lighting to lighting When it arrives, the remaining time of the display switching time is determined, and when the remaining time is, for example, 0.3 seconds or less, the flashing switching timer is not updated.

As a specific example, for example, when the identification seg or the ratio seg is blinking, when the remaining time of the display switching time becomes, for example, "0.3" seconds or less, the current time is displayed until the display switching time arrives. Maintain (extend) the lighting or extinguishing state of . Then, when the display switching time comes, the display is switched to the next ratio display (at the time of this switching, the flashing switching time is reset). Here, when the display switching time becomes "0" while maintaining the light-off state, the next ratio display may be started from the light-on state when blinking. On the other hand, when the lighting state is maintained and the display switching time becomes "0", when the next ratio display is to be blinked, the lighting state may be started from the non-lighting state.

(3) Contrary to the above example, the display switching time may be changed based on the flashing switching time. For example, as in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the flashing period is set to "0.6" seconds (lighting "0.3 seconds", turning off "0.3" seconds).
Then, when switching from lighting to lighting and switching from lighting to lighting, the remaining time of the display switching time is determined. Ending the ratio display and starting the next ratio display (resetting the display switching time) can be mentioned.
Here, when the ratio display is switched, if the next ratio display also satisfies the blinking condition, the lighting or extinguishing may be started. Further, when the previous ratio display ends with light off, the next ratio display may start with lighting, and when the previous ratio display ends with lighting, the next ratio display may start with light off.

(4) The range of clearing (initialization) when an RWM error occurs/does not occur after power-on shown in the twenty-sixth embodiment is an example, and is not limited to this.
For example, firstly, when the power is turned on, the RWM 53 address related to calculation and display (for example, "F210 (H)" to "F289 (H)") is cleared as the RWM clear range when it is not determined that the RWM is abnormal. The addresses of the RWM 53 related to timers (for example, after "F28A(H)") may be set in the clear range instead of being set in the range. In this case, after the RWM is cleared, the display starts from the advantageous section ratio. Also, the display time of the advantageous section ratio is the initial setting value (approximately 5 seconds).
Secondly, when the power is turned on, the RWM 53 address (for example, "F210 (H)" to "F292 (H)" related to calculation, display, and timer is used as the RWM clear range when it is not determined that the RWM is abnormal. ) may not be set in the clear range, and other addresses of the RWM 53 (for example, after "F293(H)") may be set in the clear range. In this case, the display does not necessarily start from the advantageous section ratio after the RWM is cleared. Specifically, the display starts from the display item that was displayed when the power was turned off. Also, the display time of the display item is not necessarily displayed for about 5 seconds. For example, when the power is turned off after "T" seconds have passed since the display of the character ratio (6000 times) started, after clearing the RWM, the display of the character ratio (6000 times) starts, and , the display time is "5-T" seconds.

(5) In the twenty-sixth embodiment, as the storage area of the RWM 53, the payout medal data (F040(H)) and the payout medal buffer (F041(H)) are provided. On the other hand, it is also possible to count the number of payouts using only the data of the number of payout medals without providing a buffer for the number of payout medals.
As described above, the paid-out medal count data is decremented by "1" each time the number of stored medals is added by one or the payout process of one medal is executed once.
Therefore, each time the process of adding one stored medal or paying out one medal is executed, the storage area for storing the number of payouts for ratio calculation may be incremented by "1".

(6) In the twenty-sixth embodiment, in the ratio calculation process (S_CAL_SET), the dividends in the tens place and the ones place are each multiplied by 10 (calculated value set (S_CAL_SET)). However, it is also possible to multiply the value of the dividend by 100 and repeatedly subtract the divisor until it becomes equal to or greater than "0" and less than the divisor.
Specifically, in the calculation of "Y (dividend) / X (divisor)",
a) Calculate “100×Y” by multiplying “Y” by 100 times.
b) By repeatedly subtracting “X” from “100×Y” and subtracting “X” from the value after subtraction when the value after subtraction is greater than or equal to “X”,
0≦(100×Y−X×R)<X
There is a method of calculating "R" (ratio) that satisfies.

(7) In the ratio calculation process (S_CAL_SET), a method other than the method shown in FIG. 202 is also possible as a method of setting 99%.
FIG. 221 is a flow chart showing another example of the processing after step S2400 in FIG. In FIG. 221, processes different from those in FIG. 202 are underlined under the step numbers.
In FIG. 221, after execution of the ratio calculation for the ones digit (S_CAL_EXE) at step S2400, the flow advances to step S2651 to set 99% as the ratio. Specifically, a process of storing "99(H)" in the RWM address corresponding to the calculated ratio is executed.

In the next step S2652, it is determined whether or not the calculated ratio is "99" or more. If the calculated ratio is "99" or "100", then "Yes". If it is determined that the calculated ratio is "99" or more, the process proceeds to step S2402, and if it is determined that it is not "99" or more, the process proceeds to step S2401. In step S2401, a calculation result buffer is acquired as described above. Therefore, when the calculated ratio is "99" or more, the ratio "99" set in step S2651 is maintained, and the process advances to step S2402 to save the calculation result buffer without performing step S2401 (acquisition of calculation result buffer). initialize. Subsequent processing is the same as in the twenty-sixth embodiment (FIG. 202).
221 (however, the processing of step S2407 is omitted) can also be applied to the twenty-seventh embodiment (1) (FIG. 215).

(8) In the twenty-sixth and twenty-seventh embodiments, for example, as shown in step S2390 in FIG. 202, when the divisor (denominator value) is "0", the ratio calculation is not executed. Here, in the calculated value set in step S2389, the zero flag=“1” so as not to execute the ratio calculation process when the divisor is “0”.
However, not limited to this, in the calculation value set (FIG. 203) in step S2389, before step S2411, it is determined whether or not the dividend (numerator value) is "0". When it is determined, the zero flag may be set to "1" (Note that when it is determined that the dividend is "0", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated without executing the processing after step S2411. ). As a result, when either the divisor or the dividend is "0" at the end of the calculation value set, the zero flag="1". Then, proceeding to step S2390 in FIG. 202, it is determined whether or not either the divisor or the dividend is "0", and if either is "0" (that is, when the zero flag="1") Alternatively, the process may proceed to step S2407 without performing the ratio calculations after step S2391.

(9) In the twenty-sixth embodiment, in step S2404 during the ratio calculation process (FIG. 202), a process of subtracting "A0(H)" from the calculated ratio is performed. %”.
On the other hand, it is also possible to determine whether the ratio is 100% before executing the ratio calculation process, and not to execute the ratio calculation process when it is judged to be 100%. . For example, the dividend (number to be divided) and the divisor (number to be divided) are compared to determine whether or not they match, and if they match, it can be determined that the ratio is 100%. However, it is determined whether at least one of the dividend and the divisor is "0", and if it is determined that at least one of the dividend and the divisor is "0", the ratio is determined not to be 100% (dividend or divisor). When at least one of the divisors is "0", the ratio is 0%.).
Therefore, when starting the ratio calculation process of FIG. 202, the following process is provided before the process of step S2381.

a) Compare the dividend (the number to be divided) and the divisor (the number to divide by) to determine whether they match. If it is determined that they match, proceed to the following b). If it is determined that they do not match, the process proceeds to step S2381 in FIG.
b) Determine whether the dividend is "0". If it is determined not to be "0", the process proceeds to the following c), and if it is determined to be "0", the process proceeds to step S2407 in FIG. 202 without performing the ratio calculation.
c) Determine if the divisor is "0". If it is determined not to be "0", the dividend and divisor match, and neither the dividend nor the divisor is "0". On the other hand, when it is determined to be "0", the process proceeds to step S2407 in FIG. 202 without performing the ratio calculation.
Note that the above process includes a determination as to whether or not the divisor is "0", so the process of step S2390 in FIG. 202 is unnecessary.

(10) In this embodiment, the storage area of the RWM 53 for storing the number of games (for example, the total number of games counter at address "F26D(H)") stores "1" each time the number of games is "1". was added. Similarly, every time one medal is paid out, "1" is added to the storage area of the RWM 53 for storing the number of payouts (for example, the total payout (total) counter at address "F27C(H)"). In this way, the number to be added to the number of games played and the number of payouts are the same. However, not limited to this, for example, for convenience of calculation, every time "1" is played and/or one medal is paid out, "2", "10", etc. It is also possible to store values other than "1". For example, in the number of games in the advantageous section in the first embodiment, "100 (D)" is added each time one game is played in the advantageous section. Thus, the number of games played or the number of payouts and the value added to the RWM 53 may not necessarily be the same value. Therefore, when adding the number of games, the value corresponding to the number of games should be added, and when adding the number of payouts, the value corresponding to the number of payouts should be added. In the following, for example, the original invention 52, etc., "corresponding value" means this.

(11) A display switching counter (1-byte storage area) may be provided instead of the storage area (address "F290(H)") for storing the display switching time. In this case, when the flashing switching time has elapsed, the flashing switching flag (address "F28F(H)") is updated and the display switching counter is updated (addition of "1"). For example, the display switching counter is an increment counter that circulates from "0" to "15 (D)". Control to update the number. Also, when "1" is added to the display switching counter while "15 (D)" is stored, control is performed so that "0" is stored. The reason why the control is performed in this manner is that "blinking switching time x 16 = display switching time". With such a configuration, the RWM storage area can be reduced. Furthermore, the blinking period and the display information can be synchronized.

(12) In the ratio setting process (for example, FIG. 191 in the twenty-sixth embodiment, FIG. 212 in the twenty-seventh embodiment (1), and FIG. 217 in the twenty-seventh embodiment (2)), the count upper limit check in step S2335 and step S2236 It is also possible to omit the judgment as to whether or not the number-of-games upper limit flag is on.
194, it is also possible not to execute the processing after step S2284 (if "Yes" in step S2282, execute step S2283 and then terminate the processing according to this flow chart). be.
When controlling as described above, the process is executed as follows.
First, in the number-of-games count in FIG. 193, it is determined whether or not the number-of-games upper limit flag is on before the process of step S2271 (substantially the same process as step S2236). Then, when it is determined that the number-of-games upper limit flag is ON, the number-of-games count is terminated.

In addition, in the game number count in FIG. 193, after executing step S2273, it is determined whether or not the carry flag is "1". When the carry flag is not "1", the count of the number of games is ended. On the other hand, when the carry flag is "1", the D0 bit (game count upper limit flag) of the count upper limit flag (address "F28B(H)") is set to "1". Here, when the carry flag becomes "1", "1" is added in step S2273 (count up) in FIG. It is time. In this case, a process of correcting the total number-of-games counter to a specific value ("FFFFFF (H)" in this case) is executed. Then, the count of the number of games is ended.
Here, the reason for correcting the total number-of-games counter to a specific value is that whether or not to flash the identification segment is determined according to whether or not 6000 or 175,000 games have been played. This is because the number-of-games counter is referred to. Therefore, the specific value to be stored in the total number of games counter does not necessarily need to be "FFFFFFFF (H)", but a value that indicates that the game has reached 175,000 times, for example, "F00000 (H)" (decimal number 15728640 (D)) or the like.

195, when it is judged as "Yes" in step S2291, it is judged whether or not the game number upper limit flag is ON, and when it is judged to be ON, the advantageous section game number When it is determined that the count is finished and it is off, the process proceeds to step S2292 and the subsequent steps.
By doing so, it is possible to prevent the value of the advantageous section game number count from being added when the total game number counter exceeds the upper limit value.

Furthermore, in the payout number counting of FIG. 196, it is possible not to provide the payout number upper limit buffer set in step S2304.
In this case, in setting the number of payouts in step S2303 in FIG. 196, after counting up in step S2322 in FIG. If the carry flag is not "1", set the D1 bit (upper limit flag of the number of payouts) of the count upper limit flag (address "F28B(H)") to "1", then payout End the number setting. Here, when the carry flag becomes "1", when the payout number is added to the total payout (cumulative) counter value in the count-up of step S2322 in FIG. ) is exceeded.
For example, when the total payout (cumulative) counter value in the "X" game is "FFFFFE (H)", it is assumed that a small win of 8 payouts is won. At this time, "000006 (H)" is stored in the total payout (cumulative) counter by counting up in step S2322. At this time, the carry flag becomes "1". In this case, the continuous bonus payout (cumulative) counter and the bonus payout (cumulative) counter after the game including the "X" game are not updated.
When configured in this way, the continuous role ratio (cumulative) data for the "X-1" game and the accessory ratio (cumulative) data are the data after the game including the "X" game. becomes. This is made possible by executing the same processing as the processing of steps S2581 to S2583 described in FIG. 215 of the twenty-seventh embodiment (1).
Note that the count upper limit flag must be stored in a storage area that is not cleared even when the setting change mode is entered.

(13) In the above-described embodiment, the winning probability of 1BB (1BBA and 1BBB) in the first embodiment (including single winning and double winning with other hands) is divided into normal section and advantageous section. However, it is also possible to set different winning probabilities between the normal section and the advantageous section (the performance of the accessory is increased during the advantageous section).
Specifically, the probability of winning a special role in the normal section (indicating the total value including single winning and double winning with other roles. Hereinafter, the same applies to the explanation of (11) and (12) below), For example, it is set to "1/250" (hereinafter also referred to as "normal probability" in the descriptions of (11) and (12)). Then, in the normal section, the winning probability ratio between 1BB and RB (newly provided) (hereinafter referred to as BR ratio) is set to, for example, "1:6" (RB is easier to win). It is assumed that the payout number expected value in the 1BB game exceeds the payout number expected value in the RB game.
After winning the special role in the normal section and finishing the special game, the game is shifted to the advantageous section (whether non-AT or AT is arbitrary). Then, in at least some of the advantageous sections, the winning probability of the special role is set higher than the normal probability (for example, it may be set to about "1/30". Hereinafter, (11) and (12) ) is also referred to as “high probability” in the description of ).

In this case, firstly, the winning probability of the special role is set to be high during the advantageous interval.
Second, in the advantageous section, set the winning probability of the first special role to a high probability A, set the winning probability of the second special role to a high probability B (B < A), and set the winning probability of the second special role to a high probability B (B < A). For example, the probability of winning a special combination is set to a high probability C (C<B) (hereinafter similarly A>B>C>D>...).
Furthermore, thirdly, the following method is mentioned.
When a special winning combination is won during a normal section, the player is shifted to an advantageous section and a first specific RT (limited RT) after finishing the special game. In the first specific RT, the BR ratio is set to "2:1" (1BB is easier to win). When the number of games of the first specific RT is completed without winning the special combination in the first specific RT, the first specific RT is shifted to the second specific RT. For the second specific RT, the BR ratio is set to "1:4", for example. As a result, RB is more likely to be won, so the second specific RT has a lower expected value for the number of medals to be paid out than the first specific RT. On the other hand, when a special role is won during the first specified RT and the special game is shifted to, the number of games of the first specified RT is reset and the first specified RT is started after the end of the special game.
From the finite number of games of the first specific RT and the winning probability of the special role during the first specific RT, the so-called loop rate (the probability of winning the special role before the number of games of the first specific RT is consumed) is calculated. Can be set.

Also, when the special combination is won during the second specified RT and the special game is ended, the game is shifted to the first specified RT on the condition that the termination condition of the advantageous section is not satisfied. By setting in this way, for example, if a special role is won during an advantageous section, the game can be shifted to the first specific RT again.
In addition, both when staying in the first specific RT and when staying in the second specific RT, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, such as when the upper limit of continuation of the advantageous section is reached, respectively, the first specific RT or the second specific RT 2 End the specific RT and shift to the normal section (RT for the normal section). Then, the winning probability of the special role is also the normal probability. Initializing all of the parameters for the advantageous section when transitioning to RT for the normal section is the same as in the third embodiment (for example, steps S445, S446, S447, and S471 in FIG. 44(d)). .

Furthermore, during the normal section, when the special role is not won (without going through the special game), and the transition is made to the advantageous section due to the winning of the rare role, etc., the first staying RT may be the first specific RT. , or may be a second specific RT.
Furthermore, as described above, when the winning probability of the special combination is set to a high probability in the advantageous section, for example, during the advantageous section and during the non-special game (when the role is not activated), the ball payout rate is set to "1". ”, it is possible to set the rate of increase in the number of balls released in the advantageous section to be lower than that in the normal section. However, as in the third embodiment, "advantageous section=AT" may of course be acceptable.

In addition, it is also possible to change the winning probability of the special role in the advantageous section depending on what kind of opportunity the transition is made from the normal section to the advantageous section. For example, in the normal section, it is relatively easy to shift to the advantageous section by winning a special combination (for example, the probability of "1/250" as described above). On the other hand, in the normal section, the probability of winning a rare combination (rare cherry, rare replay, etc.) and moving to the advantageous section without going through the special game is set to, for example, "1/16384" (extremely low probability). do. Then, when the normal section shifts to the advantageous section triggered by the winning of the special combination, the winning probability of the special combination is set to a high probability. On the other hand, when the normal section shifts to an advantageous section triggered by the winning of a rare role, the transition to a special RT is made, and the winning probability of 1BB is set to, for example, "1/20" (extremely high probability). is also possible.
Furthermore, when shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section triggered by the winning of the special role, the game after the special game is set to non-AT, and when the normal section shifts to the advantageous section triggered by the winning of the rare role can be set to AT from the first game in the advantageous section.

In addition, when shifting from a normal section to an advantageous section and setting the winning probability of the special role to a high probability, a) The winning probability of the AT is also set to a high probability only during the period in which the winning probability of the special role is set to a high probability. b) During the period when the probability of winning the special role is high, the probability of winning the AT is set to normal probability, c) Regardless of the period when the probability of winning the special role is set to high, the AT and setting the winning probability of.
Furthermore, when the winning probability of the special combination is set to a high probability after transitioning to the advantageous section, an upper limit (limiter) may be provided for the number of times the special combination is won during the advantageous section. For example, after moving to the advantageous section, the probability of winning the special role is set to a high probability, but when the special role is won, for example, five times, the special role will be won in the normal section from the next time onward even during the advantageous section. It may be set to the same degree as the probability or to a slightly higher degree.
Here, after shifting to the advantageous section, while the probability of winning the special role is high, the probability of winning the AT is set to normal probability, and after the period in which the probability of winning the special role is high, AT setting the winning probability to a high probability. Alternatively, on the contrary, when shifting to the advantageous section, the AT winning probability is set to a high probability at first, and when the number of winning times of AT, the number of games played, and the number of payouts exceed a predetermined threshold, AT It is also possible to set the probability of winning a special combination to be a normal probability, and set the probability of winning a special role to a high probability.

(14) In the modified example of (13) described above, the winning probability of the special combination is set to a high probability during the advantageous interval. However, it is not limited to this, and a combination of the normal section/advantageous section and the probability of winning a special role (normal probability/high probability) may be provided. for example,
Advantageous section and special role high probability winning section (section 1)
Advantageous section and special role normal probability winning section (section 2)
Normal section and special role high probability winning section (section 3)
Normal section and special role normal probability winning section (section 4) (so-called normal middle)
can be provided.
For example, in the case where 1BBA in FIG. 17 of the first embodiment is won alone during the normal section, if the number "20" is won, the transition to the advantageous section is made, but the number "10" is selected. If you win, you will not move to the advantageous section. In this case, when the number "20" is won, the game after the end of the special game is set to section 1 or section 2, and when the number "10" is won, the special game ends. Setting the subsequent game to section 3 or section 4 can be mentioned.
Furthermore, when transitioning to the advantageous section, various settings can be made for the conditions for transitioning from section 1 to section 2 and the conditions for transitioning from section 2 to section 1 . For example, winning or prize winning of a promotion (fall) role, RT transition, consumption of a predetermined number of games, promotion (or fall) lottery performed in each game can be mentioned.

(15) In the flowcharts shown in the twenty-sixth and twenty-seventh embodiments, the order of processing is not limited to the order shown in the drawings, and the order of processing can be changed if the order of processing can be changed. is also possible.
In addition, the twenty-sixth and twenty-seventh embodiments and the various modifications described above are not limited to being carried out independently, but can be carried out in combination as appropriate.

<28th Embodiment>
In the twenty-eighth embodiment, it is possible to check whether there is a failure in the acquisition number display LED 78 (digit 3, digit 4) that displays the push order instruction information, and whether there is a failure in the signal line that transmits the signal to the acquisition number display LED 78. It is what I did.

That is, in a situation where the number of acquired medals is displayed, in the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)", the upper digits of the number of acquired medals are displayed in digit 3, and the LED display counter value is "01000000". (B)”, the lower digits of the obtained number are displayed in digit 4 in the interrupt processing.
In addition, under the condition that the push order instruction information is displayed, in the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)", "=", which is a part of the push order instruction information, is displayed as the digit 3, In the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is "01000000 (B)", any one of "1" to "3", which is another part of the push order instruction information, is displayed on the digit 4.

Furthermore, in a situation where the setting value can be changed (during setting change), in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)", the seven segments A to G of the digit 3 are lit ( "8" is displayed in digit 3), and in the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is "01000000 (B)", the seven segments A to G of digit 4 are lit up ("8" in digit 4). ).
In this way, by lighting the seven segments A to G of the digits 3 and 4 during the setting change, the digits 3 and 4 displaying the pushing order instruction information in the instruction game section are not malfunctioning. , and digits 3 and 4 are not disturbed.

Also, during the setting change, for example, the seven segments A to G of the digit 3 light up, and of the seven segments of the digit 4, the six segments A and C to G light up. If segment B does not illuminate, it can be determined that segment B of digit 4 may be faulty.
Furthermore, during a setting change, for example, the six segments A to E and G of digit 3 are illuminated, segment F is not illuminated, and the six segments A to E and G of digit 4 are illuminated. If it illuminates but segment F does not illuminate, it is possible that not only is segment F of digits 3 and 4 faulty, but that the signal line sending the segment signal to segment F is faulty. Then you can judge.

The twenty-eighth embodiment will be described in more detail below.
In the twenty-eighth embodiment, the digits 1 to 5 and the circuit configuration for lighting them are the same as in the twentieth embodiment.
Here, although the content partially overlaps with the twentieth embodiment, the digits 1 to 5 and the circuit configuration for lighting them will be described.
As shown in FIG. 125(A), a stored number display LED 76 composed of digits 1 and 2, an acquired number display LED 78 composed of digits 3 and 4, and a set value display LED 73 composed of digit 5 are arranged. I have it.
Also, as shown in FIG. 126, digits 1-5 have seven segments, segments AG.

Furthermore, output ports 2 and 3 are provided on the main control board 50 .
Further, as shown in FIG. 128, output port 2 outputs digit 1 to 5 signals indicating which digit to light, and output port 3 outputs segment A indicating which segment to light. ~G signal is output.

Also, as shown in FIG. 129, IC2 and IC3 are provided on the main control board 50 .
Furthermore, IC2 is an IC for controlling digit 1-5 signals, and has an output port 2 composed of D0-D7 output terminals.
Further, IC3 is an IC related to control of the segment A to G signals, and has an output port 3 composed of D0 to D7 output terminals.

As shown in FIGS. 129 and 131, the digit 1 signal line is output from the D3 output terminal of the output port 2 of IC2 and is connected to the digit 1 drive signal line.
Similarly to the digit 1 signal line, the digit 2 to 5 signal lines are output from the D4 to D7 output terminals of the output port 2 of the IC 2 and connected to the digit 2 to 5 drive signal lines, respectively.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 129 and 131, the segment A signal line is output from the D0 output terminal of the output port 3 of IC3 and is connected to segment A of digits 1-5.
Similarly to the segment A signal line, the segment B to G signal lines are output from the D1 to D6 output terminals of the output port 3 of the IC 3 and connected to the segments B to G of the digits 1 to 5, respectively.
As a result, digits 1 to 5 are shared with segment A to G signals.

Also, for example, when a digit 3 signal is output from the D5 output terminal of the output port 2, segments A to G of digit 3 can be lit. At this time, for example, when the segment B signal is output from the D1 output terminal of output port 3 and the segment C signal is output from the D2 output terminal of output port 3, segments B and C of digit 3 are lit. This causes digit 3 to display a "1".

In the interrupt process, only one of the digits 1 to 5 is set to be illuminated, and the digit to be illuminated is switched sequentially for each interrupt process executed at a cycle of 2.235ms. To go. That is, dynamic lighting is executed.
In particular, in interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00001000 (B)", by outputting a signal of "00001000 (B)" from the output port 2, the digit 1 signal is output from the D3 output terminal of the output port 2. is output and digit 1 can be illuminated.

Similarly, in interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00010000 (B)", digit 2 can be lit, and in interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)", digit 3 is lit. It becomes possible.
Also, in interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "01000000 (B)", digit 4 can be lit, and in interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "10000000 (B)", digit 5 can be lit. becomes.

As shown in FIG. 132B, the LED display request flag is "01111111 (B)" during normal operation, "11100000 (B)" during setting change, and "11111000 (B)" during setting confirmation. ”.
In the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) shown in FIG. 134, an AND operation is performed on the LED display counter and the LED display request flag, and the digit corresponding to the result of the calculation is lit.

FIG. 222 shows the addresses, labels and contents of data stored in the RWM 53. FIG.
Note that the data shown in FIG. 222 is for use in the description of the twenty-eighth embodiment, and the data stored in the RWM 53 is not limited to these.

The address "F000(H)" is the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK).
As described in the twenty-fifth embodiment, when the setting value is "N", the setting value data "N-1" is stored in the setting value data storage area (_NB_RANK).
In this embodiment, it has set values "1" to "6". Therefore, any one of the setting value data "0" to "5" is stored in the setting value data storage area (_NB_RANK).
The set value display LED 73 displays "N" as the set value by adding "1" to the set value data "N-1" stored in the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK).

The address "F010(H)" is the reserved number data storage area (_NB_CREDIT), and in this embodiment, any value from "0" to "50" is stored as the reserved number data.
For example, when 50 medals are reserved, the reserved number data "50" is stored in the reserved number data storage area (_NB_CREDIT).

In the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00001000 (B)", the upper digit of the value (stored number of sheets) stored in the stored number data storage area (_NB_CREDIT) is digit 1 (reserved number display LED 76 upper digits).
Also, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00010000 (B)", the lower digit of the value (the number of accumulated coins) stored in the accumulated number data storage area (_NB_CREDIT) is displayed in digit 2.

The address "F011(H)" is the acquisition number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). In this embodiment, the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) stores the acquired number data, the setting change display data, or the pressing order instruction number.
At the time of payout of medals, any value of "0" to "9" is stored as the acquired number data in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT).

Also, during the setting change, "88" is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) as display data during setting change.
Furthermore, when instructing the pressing order (when notifying the pressing order of the stop switch 42 that is advantageous to the player in the instructed game section), the winning number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) stores the following as the pressing order instruction number. Any value of "A0(H)", "A1(H)", "A2(H)" or "A3(H)" is stored.

For example, when 9 medals are won and 9 medals are paid out, "0" is first stored in the winning number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) as the winning number data. After that, every time one medal is paid out, "1" is added to the value of the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). That is, the value of the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is updated according to the payout of medals, such as "0" → "1" → "2" → "3" → ... → "9". go. Then, when the ninth medal is paid out, the value of the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) becomes "9".

Then, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)", the upper digits of the value stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) are changed to digit 3 (the upper digits of the acquired number display LED 78). Is displayed. At this time, if the acquired number data is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT), the upper digit of the acquired number is displayed in digit 3, and if the setting change display data is stored, the setting is being changed. A value of "8" indicating that there is a push order instruction number is displayed in digit 3, and if the push order instruction number is stored, "=" is displayed in digit 3 (indicating that it is push order instruction information). be done.

Also, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "01000000 (B)", the lower digits of the value stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) are changed to digit 4 (lower digits of the acquired number display LED 78). Is displayed. At this time, if the winning number data is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT), the lower digit of the acquired number is displayed in digit 4, and if the setting change display data is stored, the setting is being changed. If the value of "8" indicating that there is a push order is displayed in digit 4 and the push order instruction number is stored, any value of "0" to "3" of the push order instruction information (indicating the push order) is displayed. Displayed in digit 4.

The address "F012 (H)" is the LED display counter value storage area (_CT_LED_DSP), and each time an interrupt process is performed, "00000001 (B)" → "00000010 (B)" → "00000100 (B)" → . . . →"10000000 (B)"→"00000000 (B)"→"00000001 (B)".
Address "F013(H)" is an LED display request flag storage area (_FL_LED_DSP), and as shown in FIG.

Address "F014(H)" is an error number storage area (_NB_ERROR).
When no recoverable error has occurred, "00 (H)" is stored in the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR).
When a recoverable error occurs, an error number corresponding to the type of recoverable error that has occurred is stored in the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR). In this embodiment, 10 types of errors shown in FIG. 222 are detected as recoverable errors. Note that recoverable errors are not limited to these.
The value of the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR) is maintained until the error is cleared. ” is stored.

For example, when an HP error (medal jam error) occurs, "0E(H)" ("14" in decimal) is stored as an error number in the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR). In this case, in the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)", the character "H" is displayed in digit 3 (higher digit of the acquired number display LED 78), and the LED display counter value is "01000000 ( B)”, the character “P” is displayed in the digit 4 (lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78). That is, from the value of "0E(H)" stored in the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR), the offset value for displaying the character "H" in digit 3 and the character "P" in digit 4 is calculated.

Address "F040 (H)" is a medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL)
, and in this embodiment, any value from "0" to "9" is stored as the medal payout number data.
In the present embodiment, the maximum number of medals to be paid out in one game is 9, so the data of the number of medals to be paid out is "0" to "9". The medal payout number data is "0" to "15".

Address "F041 (H)" is a medal payout data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL), and in this embodiment, like the medal payout data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) at address "F040", "0" to "9" Any value of is stored.
When a prize is determined, the values of both the medal payout data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) and the medal payout data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) are updated. At this time, the same value is stored at both addresses. For example, when a winning combination of 9 cards is won, "9" is stored in both addresses.

After that, the value of the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is decremented by "1" each time one medal is paid out, and becomes "0" when the medal payout is completed. That is, the value of the payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is changed according to the payout of medals, such as "9" → "8" → "7" → ... "2" → "1" → "0". will be updated over time.
On the other hand, the value of the medal payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) is not updated by the payout of medals, and is maintained until it is updated when winning is determined in the next game.

FIG. 223 is a diagram showing LED segment table 1 (TBL_SEG_DATA1) and LED segment table 2 (TBL_SEG_DATA2) in the twenty-eighth embodiment, which corresponds to the used area data table in FIG. 127 in the twentieth embodiment. .
In FIG. 223, unlike the data table within the use area shown in FIG. Same as data table.

FIG. 224 is a diagram showing the addresses of each data of the LED segment table 1 and the LED segment table 2 stored in the used area of the ROM 54. As shown in FIG.
The LED segment table 1 has a top address set to "1811(H)", and each data of the LED segment table 1 is stored in order from "1811(H)".
Also, the LED segment table 2 has the top address set to "1817(H)", and each data of the LED segment table 2 is stored in order from this "1817(H)".
Furthermore, LED segment table 1 and LED segment table 2 are stored at consecutive addresses.

As a result, when "1811(H)" is specified as the top address, each data of LED segment table 1 and LED segment table 2 can be represented by an offset value from the top address "1811(H)".
Also, when "1817(H)" is designated as the top address, each data in the LED segment table 2 can be represented by an offset value from the top address "1817(H)".

For example, when an H0 error (discharge sensor abnormality) occurs, the head address "1811 (H)" of the LED segment table 1 is specified. Also, from the error number "10(H)"("16" in decimal) of the H0 error, "1" is calculated as the upper digit offset value and "6" is calculated as the lower digit offset value.
By reading the address obtained by adding the offset value "1" of the upper digit to the top address "1811 (H)", that is, the data of "1812 (H)", "H" can be displayed in the digit 3. .
Similarly, by reading the address obtained by adding the lower digit offset value "6" to the top address "1811 (H)", that is, reading the data of "1817 (H)", it is possible to display "0" in digit 4. can.

FIG. 225 is a diagram showing the addresses of the pressing order instruction number table stored in the used area of the ROM 54, and corresponds to the address shown in FIG. 19 of the first embodiment.
The pushing order instruction number table has the leading address set to "1900(H)", and sequentially from this "1900(H)", the pushing order instruction numbers corresponding to the condition device numbers "0" to "30" are stored. ing.

For example, when winning the small winning combination B1 with the conditional device number "11", the conditional device number "11" is set as the offset value, and the offset value "11" is set to the top address "1900 (H)" of the pushing order instruction number table. By reading the added address, that is, the data of "190B(H)", it is possible to obtain the push order instruction number "A1(H)" corresponding to the condition device number "11".
Note that the pushing order instruction number (*1) when winning the minor winning combination A and the pushing order instruction number (*2) when winning the minor winning combination E1 and E2 are the same as in FIG. 19 of the first embodiment.

Next, information processing by the main control board 50 (main CPU 55) in the twenty-eighth embodiment will be described.
When the power switch 11 of the slot machine 10 is turned on, the main control board 50 executes program start processing.
Also, in the program start process, the signal of the door switch 15 is on (the front door is open), the signal of the setting door switch is on (the setting door is open), and the setting key switch 12 signal is on (the setting key is inserted and rotated 90 degrees clockwise), the process advances to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) shown in FIG. That is, when the power switch 11 is turned on while the setting key switch 12 is turned on, the setting is changed (setting change mode).

Furthermore, in the program start processing, when it is determined that the signal of the door switch 15 is off, the signal of the setting door switch is off, and the signal of the setting key switch 12 is off, the power-off recovery data is Determine whether the value is normal or not.
Then, when it is determined that the power failure recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to the power recovery process. In this power recovery process, after starting the interrupt process (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 133, the main process (M_MAIN) shown in FIG. ).
On the other hand, when it is determined that the power failure recovery data is not a normal value, an "E1" error (power failure recovery error) occurs, and the process proceeds to unrecoverable error process 1 (SS_ERROR_STOP1) shown in FIG.

If an "E1" error occurs and the process proceeds to unrecoverable error processing 1 (SS_ERROR_STOP1), the interrupt processing (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 133 is not executed, and therefore the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) shown in FIG. 134 is not executed either. . Then, when an "E1" error occurs, "E" is displayed in digit 3 and "1" is displayed in digit 4 by unrecoverable error processing 1 (SS_ERROR_STOP1) shown in FIG. Specifically, the process of displaying "E" as digit 3 and the process of displaying "1" as digit 4 are alternately and repeatedly executed at predetermined time intervals.
Furthermore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, the power switch 11 is turned off once. Then, by inserting the setting key and rotating it clockwise by 90 degrees, the setting key switch 12 is turned on, and in this state, the power switch 11 is turned on again. As a result, in the later-described setting change process (M_RANK_SET), the predetermined range of the RWM 53 is cleared and the "E1" error is released.

FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing setting change processing (M_RANK_SET).
First, in step S2121, a "predetermined range" is stored in a register as an initialization range within the use area of the RWM 53 ("F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in FIG. 124). Here, the "predetermined range" is the range to be initialized when it is determined that the power-off process has been executed normally, and at least the set value data (address "F000(H)") is initialized so as not to be initialized. Let the range be the “predetermined range”.
In addition to the set value data, the initialization range in which the game state (for example, RT state) and all or part of the winning flags are not initialized may be defined as the "predetermined range".

Next, proceeding to step S2122, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power failure recovery data is a normal value. When the power-off recovery data is determined to be a normal value, the process advances to step S2124 to maintain the storage of the "predetermined range" in step S2121. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2122 that the power-off restoration data is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S2123.
In step S<b>2123 , the main control board 50 stores “specific range” in the register as an initialization range within the use area of the RWM 53 . Here, the "specific range" is the range to be initialized when it is determined that the power failure is not normal. set.

Then, in step S2124, initialization of the predetermined range set in step S2121 or the specific range set in step S2123 (within the use area of the RWM 53) is started. In the next step S2125, it is determined whether or not the initialization started in step S2124 has ended. If it is determined that the initialization has ended, the process advances to step S2126.

In step S2126, the AF registers (A register and F register (flag register)) are saved. Although the AF register is originally intended to be saved in the F (flag) register, the AF register is saved for the convenience of the instruction. Then, in step S2127, a predetermined range is stored as an initialization range outside the use area of the RWM 53 (after "F200(H)" in FIG. 124). Here, the "predetermined range" is the range to be initialized when it is determined that the power-off process has been executed normally. The range varies depending on the specifications, etc.).

In the next step S2128, similarly to step S2122, it is determined whether or not the power-off restoration data is a normal value. When the power-off recovery data is determined to be a normal value, the process advances to step S2130 to maintain the storage of the "predetermined range" in step S2127. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2128 that the power-off restoration data is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S2129.

In step S<b>2129 , the main control board 50 stores “specific range” in the register as an initialization range outside the use area of the RWM 53 . Here, the "specific range" is the range to be initialized when it is determined that the power-off is not normal, and the entire range outside the use area after the address "F200" is set as the initialized range. Therefore, in this case, the ring buffer and the like are also initialized.
Then, proceeding to step S2130, initialization of the predetermined range set in step S2127 or the specific range set in step S2129 (outside the use area of the RWM 53) is started.

In the next step S2131, it is determined whether or not the initialization started in step S2130 has ended. When it is determined that the initialization is completed, the process proceeds to step S2132.
In step S2132, the AF register saved in step S2126 is restored. In the next step S2133, start setting of interrupt processing is performed. Since timer interrupt processing is used as interrupt processing in this embodiment, processing for setting the period of timer interrupt (“2.235 ms” in this embodiment) corresponds to this. After the processing of step S2133, interrupt processing is executed. In other words, the interrupt processing is not executed before the "interrupt activation".

In the next step S2134, an output request is set at the start of setting change. This process is a process of setting (storing) a control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in a register in order to inform the sub-control board 80 of starting the setting change process.
The "output request setting" is also executed in the process described below, but similar to this step S2134, the process of setting the control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in the register is performed. means. Further, the control command here means not only the command to be actually transmitted, but also the command that is the source of the command to be actually transmitted.
Next, proceeding to step S2135, the main control board 50 executes the control command set 1. FIG. This process is a process of storing the control command (the control command set in the register) to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in the control command buffer (RWM 53).

Next, proceeding to step S2136, the main control board 50 stores the waiting time in the BC register (a pair of registers consisting of a B register and a C register each capable of storing 8-bit data (1-byte data)). In this embodiment, the number of times of interrupt processing "224" (approximately 500 ms) is set as the standby time at the start of setting change. Next, the flow advances to step S2137 to execute 2-byte time waiting processing (wait processing) for starting the setting change. In the present embodiment, the CPU waits until the number of times of interrupt processing "224" is counted (until the set number of times of interrupt processing becomes "0" by subtracting "1" each time an interrupt process is performed). During this waiting time (during the 2-byte time waiting process), the setting change process does not advance, but the interrupt process is executed.

The reason why the main control board 50 side executes the 2-byte time waiting process (wait process) in step S2137 is that the initialization process of the RWM 83 on the sub control board 80 side takes time. In particular, the main control board 50 side cannot know whether the initialization process has been completed on the sub control board 80 side.

Therefore, while the sub-control board 80 side is still in the process of initialization, the main control board 50 side progresses, and the progress of the control processing of the main control board 50 and the progress of the control process of the sub-control board 80 are synchronized. You can prevent it from going out of sync.
That is, since the sub-control board 80 starts initialization of the RWM 83 after execution of the output request set and the control command set 1 at the start of the setting change, a sufficient time for completing the initialization of the RWM 83 is set as the wait time. There is a need to. As a result, after the initialization process of the RWM 83 is completed on the sub-control board 80 side, the main control board 50 side can proceed to the processes after step S4001.

It should be noted that the control command at the start of setting change set in steps S2134 and S2135 can execute interrupt processing even during the 2-byte time wait processing in step S2137. It is sent to the control board 80 . However, while the 2-byte time wait process is being executed in step S2137, the processes after step S4001 do not proceed (the setting change process does not advance).

After the 2-byte time waiting process in step S2137 ends, the process advances to step S4001 to store "88"("01011000(B)" in binary) indicating that the settings are being changed in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). Remember.
Next, proceeding to step S4002, "11100000 (B)" corresponding to the setting being changed is stored in the LED display request flag storage area (_FL_LED_DSP).

By the processing of step S4002, when interrupt processing is executed after this processing, lighting of digits 3 to 5 (acquisition number display LED 78 and set value display LED 73) becomes possible.
Specifically, in the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S4002, it becomes possible to display "8" for each of digits 3 and 4 ("88" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78), and digit 5 (set value display). The current set value can be displayed on the LED 73).
Note that the obtained number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) and the LED display request flag storage area (_FL_LED_DSP) have been initialized by the initialization processing in the use area of the RWM 53 in step S2124, so the values before step S4001 are " 0”.

Next, the process advances to step S2139 to execute an interrupt waiting process. This process is a process of waiting until interrupt processing is executed (2.235 ms has passed). The reason for providing this processing will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step S2140.
In step S2140, it is determined whether or not the operation of the setting switch 13 has been detected. Here, it is determined whether or not the setting switch 13 is turned on by determining the rise data of the input port including the setting switch 13 . When it is determined that the operation of the setting switch 13 has been detected, the process proceeds to step S2141, and when it is determined that the operation has not been detected, the process proceeds to step S2142.

In step S2141, the setting value (setting value data) is updated. Specifically, the value in the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK) is updated. Further, when the interrupt processing is executed after updating the setting value, the setting value after updating is displayed on the setting value display LED 73 .
As described above, when the setting value is "N", the setting value data "N-1" is stored in the setting value data storage area (_NB_RANK).
Therefore, when the set value data "N-1" is stored in the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK), "N" obtained by adding "1" to the set value data "N-1" is used as the set value. Displayed on digit 5 (set value display LED 73).

In the next step S2142, it is determined whether or not the operation of the start switch 41 has been detected. In this embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated during setting change, the setting value at that time is determined.
When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S2143, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S2139.

In the above processing, step S2139 (interrupt wait processing) is provided for clearing the rise data of the setting switch 13. FIG.
For example, when the process of step S2139 is not provided, if it is determined that the rising data of the setting switch 13 is ON in step S2140, the set value is updated in step S2141, and the start switch 41 is not ON in the next step S2142. If so, the flow advances to step S2140 to determine whether or not the rise data of the setting switch 13 is ON.

After it is determined to be ON in step S2140, if the interrupt process is executed even once, the rising data of the setting switch 13 is turned OFF. However, until the interrupt process is executed, it continues to be determined that the rise data of the setting switch 13 is ON in step S2140. As a result, the setting value continues to increase by two or more when the setting switch 13 is operated only once. Therefore, in step S2139, an interrupt waiting process is executed.

In step S2143, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 12 has been turned off. If it is determined that the setting key switch 12 has been turned off, the process advances to step S4003 to clear the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) (set the value to "0").
Next, proceeding to step S4004, "01111111 (B)" corresponding to normal mode is stored in the LED display request flag storage area (_FL_LED_DSP).

The display of the digits 3 and 4 (acquisition number display LED 78) changes from "88" to "00" by interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S4003.
Also, "0" is displayed for each of the digits 1 and 2 ("00" is displayed on the stored number display LED 76) by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S4004. As a result, the display of digits 1 to 4 (stored number display LED 76 and acquired number display LED 78) becomes "0000". Also, the digit 5 (set value display LED 73) is extinguished.
Incidentally, the digits 1 to 4 (stored number display LED 76 and acquired number display LED 78) may be extinguished.

Next, in step S2145, similarly to step S2134, an output request setting at the end of setting change is performed. This process is a process of setting a control command for terminating the setting change process and notifying the sub-control board 80 of the determined setting value.
Next, proceeding to step S2146, the main control board 50 executes the control command set 1 as in step S2135. Then, the process advances to step S2147 to shift to the main process (M_MAIN).

FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) processing.
In step S2171, a stack pointer is set. A stack pointer is an area of the RWM 53 that stores data at the time of power failure (for example, register values, instruction processing of main processing before interrupt processing, etc.). is the process of setting the register value to the initial value in the area of the RWM 53 .

In the next step S2172, game start set processing is performed. This process is a process of generating, updating, saving, etc. of the operating state flag.
In the next step S4011, the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is cleared (the value is set to "0"). For example, it is assumed that the winning number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) displayed the number of medals paid out in the previous game (the number of medals won by the player). In this case, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 becomes "00" by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S4011.

In the next step S2173, bet medals are read. This process is a process of reading the number of medals betted at the present time.
In the next step S2174, it is determined whether or not there are bet medals based on the number of bets read in step S2173.
When it is determined in step S2174 that there are bet medals, the process proceeds to step S2176, and when it is determined that there are no bet medals, the process proceeds to step S2175 to perform medal insertion waiting processing, and then proceeds to step S2176. In the medal insertion waiting process of step S2175, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 12 is on.

In step S2176, management processing of inserted medals is performed. This process is a process of determining whether or not the medals have been cleaned, whether or not the settlement switch 46 has been operated, and the like.
In the next step S2177, a soft random number update process is performed. This process is a process of updating (for example, adding "1" at a time) to processing random numbers (soft random numbers) for processing (computation processing) built-in random numbers (hard random numbers) used in the combination lottery means 61 . A soft random number is a 16-bit random number with a range of 0-65535. As an update method, a process of adding an interrupt count value (a count value (variable) incremented during interrupt processing) to the value before updating may be executed.

At the next step S2178, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S2179, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S2173. Even when the start switch 41 is operated, if the number of bets has not reached the prescribed number for the game, it is determined "No" in step S2178.

In step S2179, a process for accepting a start switch is executed. This process is a process of setting a setting change prohibition flag, setting an output request at the start of reel rotation, setting the number of times a medal insertion signal is output, and the like.
In step S2180, the combination lottery means 61 executes a combination lottery at the timing when the start switch 41 is operated, that is, when the operation signal of the start switch 41 is received. The random number (hard random number) at the time of winning lottery is obtained in step S2179. Then, in step S2180, the random number for processing is added to the obtained random number, and whether or not the random number after the addition is a random number corresponding to any winning combination is determined using the combination lottery table. process to determine

In the next step S4012, a push order instruction number setting process (M_ORD_INF) is executed.
In this process, when a game having an advantageous pushing order (for example, a game when winning a minor combination B group) occurs in the instructed game section, the pushing order instruction number is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) of the RWM 53. It is a process equal to.
After proceeding to step S4012, the process proceeds to the process of FIG. 228, which will be described later. Although the details will be described later, in a game having an advantageous pressing order, the pressing order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) by interrupt processing executed after this processing. be done.

In the next step S2181, reel rotation start preparation processing is executed. This process is a process of determining whether or not the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) has elapsed.
Next, proceeding to step S2182, the reel control means 65 starts rotating the reel 31. FIG. In the next step S2183, it is checked whether the reel 31 has been stopped. Here, it is detected whether or not the operation signal of the stop switch 42 is received, and when the operation signal is received, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the lottery result of the combination and the position of the reel 31. Control is performed to stop the reel 31 at the determined position.

In the next step S2184, the reel control means 65 checks whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped, and proceeds to step S2185.
In step S2185, it is determined whether or not all reels 31 have stopped. If it is determined that all reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S4013, and if it is determined that all reels 31 have not stopped, the process returns to step S2183. .

In step S4013, the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is cleared (the value is set to "0"). For example, in the instructed game section, it is assumed that the game has an advantageous push order, and the push order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed on the winning number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4). In this case, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 becomes "00" by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S4013.
Note that the acquisition number display LED 78 may be extinguished. Specifically, "00011111 (B)" may be stored in the LED display request flag storage area (_FL_LED_DSP), or "lights off" display data (00000000B) may be provided instead of "0" display data. good too.

In step S2186, symbol display determination (winning determination) is performed. Here, the prize determination means 66 determines whether or not the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination has stopped on the activated line.
In the next step S2187, it is determined whether or not a symbol display error has occurred. If so, the process advances to step S4014.
Here, since the reel 31 is stopped based on the stop position determination table, the reel 31 normally does not stop at a position other than the position determined by the stop position determination table. However, as a result of the symbol display determination, when a symbol (kicking away symbol) which should not be displayed on the active line is displayed, it is determined to be abnormal (“E5” error), and the return shown in FIG. 136 is performed. Execute impossible error processing 1 (SS_ERROR_STOP1).

When it is determined in step S2187 that no display error has occurred and the process proceeds to step S4014, a payout medal number update process is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.
In the next step S4015, the payout means 67 executes a medal payout process according to winning. This process is a process of paying out medals corresponding to a winning combination (small combination), and when the number of stored medals is less than "50", the number of stored medals is added until the number of stored medals reaches "50". When the accumulated number of medals reaches "50" or more, the hopper motor 36 is driven and the medals are paid out from the hopper 35 to the player. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

The process then advances to step S2190 to perform interrupt wait processing. This process is similar to step S2139 in FIG.
In the next step S2191, interrupt processing is prohibited. Interrupt processing is prohibited immediately after interrupt processing by the processing of steps S2190 and S2191.
In the next step S2192, the AF register is saved. This process is similar to step S2126 in FIG.

The flow then advances to step S2193 to execute ratio setting processing. This ratio setting process is a process executed outside the use area.
In the ratio setting process, the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9) displays the advantageous section ratio, continuous role ratio (6000 times), role ratio (6000 times), continuous role ratio (total), and role ratio. In order to display the (accumulated total), it is a process of updating various counter values, a process of calculating a ratio, and the like.

Then, in step S2194, the AF register saved in step S2192 is restored, and the interrupt is permitted (resume) in step S2195. In this way, when the ratio setting process is executed, the AF register is saved and the interrupt process is prohibited. The reason why interrupt processing is prohibited during execution of ratio set processing is that if interrupt processing enters while executing a program outside the usage area in the main processing, the program in the usage area and the program outside the usage area will be mixed. This is because the processing becomes complicated.

Next, the process advances to step S2196 to perform game end check processing. In this process, condition device flags (winning combination flag, winning flag) are cleared. Then, in step S2197, an output request is set when the game ends, and in the next step S2198, a control command is set 1. These processes are similar to steps S2134 and S2135 in FIG. 226, and are processes for setting control command data for transmitting to the sub-control board 80 that one game has ended.
When the process of step S2198 is completed, the process returns to the main process (step S2147).

FIG. 228 is a flow chart showing the push order instruction number setting process (M_ORD_INF) in step S4012 of FIG.
In step S4021, it is determined whether or not it is the instructed game section (AT).
Here, when it is determined that it is the instructed game section, the process proceeds to the next step S4022.
On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the instructed game section, the processing according to this flow chart is terminated. In this case, since the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is cleared in step S4011 of FIG. 227 and step S4026 is skipped, the value of the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) remains "0". Therefore, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) remains "00".

In step S4022, a condition device number is set. The condition device number determined in the winning lottery process in step S2180 of FIG. 227 is stored in the winning and replay condition device number storage area (_NB_CND_NOR) and the role condition device number storage area (_NB_CND_BNS) of the RWM 53. Then, in step S4022, the value of this winning and replay condition device number storage area (_NB_CND_NOR) is stored in the A register.
Next, the process advances to step S4023 to set a pressing order instruction number table. In step S4023, the head address "1900 (H)" of the push order instruction number table shown in FIG. 225 is stored in the HL register. As a result, the HL register value becomes "1900 (H)". Then, the process proceeds to the next step S4024.

Proceeding to step S4024, the designated address data is set. In step S4024, the value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is set as a new HL register value, and the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
That is, the data stored in the winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) is used as an offset value, and the data corresponding to the address obtained by adding the offset value to the head address of the pushing order instruction number table is obtained.

For example, when the minor winning combination B1 is won in the winning combination lottery process of step S2180 in FIG. 227, the conditional device number "11" of the minor winning combination B1 is stored in the winning and replay condition device number storage area (_NB_CND_NOR). Therefore, after the process of step S4022, the A register value becomes "11".
Further, the A register value "11" is added to the HL register value "1900 (H)" after the processing in step S4023 to obtain a new HL register value "190B (H)". Thus, it is possible to calculate the address of the memory area for the pressing order instruction number of the minor win B1.
Then, the push order instruction number "A1(H)" corresponding to the address "190B(H)" of the push order instruction number table is stored in the A register. As a result, the A register value after the process of step S4024 becomes "A1(H)".

Next, the process advances to step S4025 to store the push order instruction number in the RWM53. That is, the A register value is stored in the pressing order instruction number storage area in the RWM 53 .
In this way, by performing arithmetic processing using the data stored in the winning and replay condition device number storage area (_NB_CND_NOR) as an offset value, the push order instruction number corresponding to the condition device number is calculated and stored in the RWM 53. be able to.

In the next step S4026, the A register value (pressing order instruction number) is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
When the push order instruction number is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) in step S4026 of FIG. Information is displayed.
For example, it is assumed that "A2(H)" is stored as the push order instruction number in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). In this case, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in FIG. 134 calculates "10" as the offset value for the upper digits and "2" as the offset value for the lower digits from the push order instruction number "A2(H)". do.

Then, by reading the address obtained by adding the upper digit offset value "10" to the head address "1817 (H)" of the LED segment table 2, that is, the data of "1821 (H)", "=" is added to the digit 3. indicate.
Similarly, by reading the address obtained by adding the lower digit offset value "2" to the top address "1817 (H)" of the LED segment table 2, that is, reading the data of "1819 (H)", "2" is read in the digit 4. display.
In this way, the push order instruction information “=2” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 .

FIG. 229 is a flow chart showing the process of updating the number of medals to be paid out in step S4014 of FIG.
First, in step S4031, data on the number of medals to be paid out is obtained. Based on the display determination (winning determination) in step S2186 of FIG. 227, the winning combination (combination of symbols) can be specified, and the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the combination of symbols is read from the data table or the like.

In the next step S4032, the payout medal data obtained in step S4031 is saved (stored) in the payout medal data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) of the RWM 53. FIG.
Since the value of the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is "0" at the time of the process of step S4031, the process of writing new data is executed. For example, at the time of winning a one-card combination, the data value is updated from "0" to "1".
It is optional whether or not to perform the process of step S4031 when the winning combination with medal payout is not won. For example, there are a method of skipping step S4031 and a method of executing the process of step S4031 and writing the data value "0".

In the next step S4033, the medal payout number data acquired in step S4031 is saved (stored) in the medal payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) of the RWM 53. FIG.
Since the value written in the previous game remains in the medal payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL), write (overwrite) the medal payout number data ("0" if no medals are paid out) in the game. to run.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

In the process of updating the number of medals to be paid out shown in FIG. It becomes "0" at the end.
On the other hand, the value of the medal payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) stored in step S4033 is maintained (changed) until it is updated in the next game, that is, until the process of step S4033 is performed in the next game. Absent).

FIG. 230 is a flow chart showing medal payout processing (MS_WIN_PAY) due to winning in step S4015 of FIG.
First, in step S4041, data on the number of medals to be paid out is obtained. This process is a process of storing the value of the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) of the RWM 53 in the A register. As a result, data on the number of medals to be paid out is stored in the A register.

Next, the process advances to step S4042 to determine whether or not there is a payout of medals. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value (A register value) of the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is "0". When it is determined to be "0", that is, when it is determined that no medals have been paid out, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not "0", that is, when it is determined that medals will be paid out, the process proceeds to step S4043.

In step S4043, the stored number of sheets is read. Specifically, the value of the stored number data storage area (_NB_CREDIT) of the RWM 53 is obtained.
Next, proceeding to step S4044, it is determined whether or not the number of stored medals has reached the limit value. Specifically, when the stored number data obtained in step S4043 is "50", it is determined that the stored number has reached the limit value, and the process proceeds to step S4083. If there is, it is determined that the stored number of sheets has not reached the limit value, and the process proceeds to step S4045.

In step S4045, the standby time for adding accumulated medals is set. In this embodiment, in order to set approximately 100 ms as the wait time, the number of times of interrupt processing is set to "46" (46×2.235 ms=approximately 100 ms). Therefore, "00000000 (B)" is set as the B register value, and "00101110 (B)" is set as the C register value.
Next, the flow advances to step S4046 to execute 2-byte time wait processing. This process is a process of decrementing the BC register value for each interrupt process and waiting until it becomes "0".

When the 2-byte time waiting process in step S4046 ends, the process advances to step S4047 to execute the process of adding one to the number of stored sheets. Specifically, “1” is added to the value of the stored number data storage area (_NB_CREDIT) of the RWM 53 . Then, the display of the digits 1 and 2 (stored number display LED 76) is incremented by "1" by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S4047. For example, the display of the stored number display LED 76 changes from "08" to "09".
Further, when the process of step S4047 ends, the process proceeds to step S4049.

When the process proceeds from step S4044 to step S4048, one medal payout processing (processing for paying out actual medals from the hopper 35 to the player) is executed. By the above processing, the number of stored tokens is increased until the number of stored tokens reaches the limit value, and when the number of stored tokens reaches the limit, the processing of actually paying out medals from the hopper 35 is executed.

In step S4049, "1" is added to the value of the obtained number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) of the RWM 53. The display of the digits 3 and 4 (acquisition number display LED 78) is incremented by "1" by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S4049. For example, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 changes from "02" to "03".

In the next step S4050, "1" is subtracted from the value of the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) of the RWM53.
In step S4050, only the value of the payout medal data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is updated, and the value of the payout medal data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) is not updated.

Next, proceeding to step S4051, it is determined whether or not medal payout has been completed. This process is a process of determining whether or not the value of the updated medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) has become "0". When it is determined that the value of the payout medal data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is "0", the process according to this flowchart is terminated, and when it is determined that the value of the payout medal data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is not "0" returns to step S4043.

In the above payout process, when performing payout by adding one to the number of coins stored, a waiting time of about 100 ms is set by the processes of steps S4045 and S4046. As a result, the player can see that the display of the stored number display LED 76 counts up. For example, when the display of the stored number display LED 76 before the stored addition is "08" and 8 medals are added to the stored medals, "display "08" → 100 ms wait processing → display "09" → 100 ms wait processing → . . . → wait processing for 100 ms → display "16". On the other hand, if a standby time is not provided when one sheet is added to the stored number, the display will appear to change from "08" to "16" in an instant.
Then, as in the present embodiment, when adding the stored number of sheets, by executing a 2-byte time waiting process for each addition of one sheet, a payout sound ("plur...") output from the sub-control board 80 side ) and the count-up of the stored number of sheets can be synchronized.

On the other hand, when the stored number exceeds the maximum number of "50" and medals are actually paid out in the process of step S4048, the two-byte time waiting process of steps S4046 and S4047 is not provided.
This is because the hopper motor 36 is driven to actually pay out one medal, and it takes about 100 ms to pay out one medal. As a result, the payout time for one medal is approximately 100 ms, so when the actual payout of medals is performed, the two-byte time waiting process is not provided. Therefore, when actually paying out medals, it is possible to synchronize the payout sound output from the sub-control board 80 side without providing a two-byte time waiting process.

FIG. 231(1) is a diagram showing a state in which "88" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 during setting change (seven segments A to G of digits 3 and 4 are lit). be.
As described above, in step S4001 of the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in FIG. 226, "88 (D)" (binary number " 01011000(B)”) is stored, and in the next step S4002, “11100000(B)” corresponding to the setting being changed is stored in the LED display request flag storage area (_FL_LED_DSP) of the RWM 53 . Then, "88" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 by an interrupt process executed after this process.

Here, when "88(D)" is stored in the obtained number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT), in step S1447 of the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in FIG. D)” is obtained and stored in the A register.
Further, in step S1450 of FIG. 134, an operation is performed to divide the A register value "88(D)" by "10(D)", and the quotient "8(D)" is stored in the A register as the upper digit offset value. and the remainder "8(D)" is stored in the C register as the lower digit offset value.

Furthermore, in the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)", in step S1455 of FIG. By adding, "8" display data (address "181F(H)" in FIG. 224) is acquired as segment output data. Then, in step S1458, "8" is displayed in the digit 3 (the upper digit of the acquisition number display LED 78).

In the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "01000000 (B)", similarly to the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)", the LED display in FIG. By adding the lower digit offset value "8(D)" to the top address of the segment table 2, "8" display data is obtained as the segment output data. Then, in step S1458, "8" is displayed in digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78).

In this way, "88" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 during the setting change.
Also, the display of "88" continues until the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is cleared in step S4003 of the setting change processing in FIG. Then, when the winning number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is cleared, the display of the winning number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) changes from "88" to "00" by interrupt processing executed after this processing.

FIG. 231(2) is a diagram showing a state in which "=1" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) as the pushing order instruction information in the instruction game section.
As described above, when proceeding to the push order instruction number set process (M_ORD_INF) of step S4012 in the main process (M_MAIN) of FIG. The push order instruction number is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT).
Then, when the push order instruction number is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT), the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) by an interrupt process executed after this process. be.

For example, it is assumed that the push order instruction number "A3 (H)" is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). In this case, in step S1447 of the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in FIG. 134, "A3(H)" is acquired from the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) and stored in the A register.
Further, in step S1450 of FIG. 134, an operation is performed to divide the A register value "A3(H)" by "10(D)", and the upper digit offset value is "A(H)"("10(D) ”) is acquired and stored in the A register, and “3(H)” (“3(D)”) is acquired as the offset value for the lower digit and stored in the C register.

Furthermore, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)", in step S1455 of FIG. By adding, "=" display data (address "1821(H)" in FIG. 224) is obtained as segment output data. Then, in step S1458, "=", which is a part of the pressing order instruction information, is displayed in the digit 3 (upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78).

Also, in the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is "01000000 (B)", in step S1455 of FIG. By adding, "3" display data (address "181A(H)" in FIG. 224) is obtained as segment output data. Then, in step S1458, "3", which is another part of the pressing order instruction information, is displayed in digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78).

In this way, when a game having an advantageous pushing order is obtained in the instructed game section, the pushing order instruction information "=3" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. - 特許庁
Also, the display of the push order instruction information “=3” continues until the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is cleared in step S4013 of the main processing in FIG. Then, when the obtained number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is cleared, the display of the obtained number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) changes from "=3" to "00" by interrupt processing executed after this processing. .

FIG. 231(3) shows a state in which a "dE" error (opening of the front door), which is one of recoverable errors, is detected and "dE" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4). FIG. 4 is a diagram showing;
When the front door is opened, the door switch 15 is turned on. At this time, when it is detected that the door switch 15 has been turned on in the input port read processing of step S1407 in the interrupt processing of FIG. 133, an error number "dE ' and '35 (H)' corresponding to the error are stored (FIG. 222).

Then, when "35 (H)" is stored in the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR), an interrupt process executed after this process causes the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) to indicate a dE error " dE” is displayed.
Here, if "35 (H)" is stored in the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR), in step S1439 of the LED display control in FIG. is obtained and stored in the B register.

In step S1448 in FIG. 134, it is determined that an error is being displayed ("Yes") because the B register value is not "0", and in the next step S1449, the B register value is set in the A register, The start address of segment table 1 is set in the HL register.
Further, in step S1450 of FIG. 134, an operation is performed to divide the A register value "35(H)"("53(D)") by "10(D)", and the quotient "5(D)" It is stored in the A register as the digit offset value, and the remainder "3(D)" is stored in the C register as the lower digit offset value.

Then, in the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)", in step S1455 of FIG. By adding, "d" display data (address "1816(H)" in FIG. 224) is obtained as segment output data. Then, in step S1458, "d" is displayed in digit 3 (the upper digit of the acquisition number display LED 78).

Further, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "01000000 (B)", in step S1455 of FIG. By adding, "E" display data (address "1814 (H)" in FIG. 224) is obtained as segment output data. Then, in step S1458, "E" is displayed in digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78).

In this way, when the "dE" error occurs, "dE" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 . Further, the display of "dE" is not cleared only by closing the front door and turning off the door switch 15, but continues until the error is cleared.
When the door key is inserted into the keyhole of the front door and turned counterclockwise by 90 degrees, the reset switch 14 is turned on. At this time, when it is detected that the reset switch 14 has been turned on by the input port read processing of step S1407 in the interrupt processing of FIG. 00(H)” is stored (FIG. 222).

This will clear the error. Then, an interrupt process executed after this process returns the display of the win number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) from "dE" to the original display (for example, the win number "09").
In this way, when a recoverable error occurs, it is possible to recover from the error by removing the cause of the error and operating the reset switch 14 without turning on/off the power switch 11. .
The "dE" error may be canceled by closing the front door and turning off the door switch 15 .

FIG. 231(4) shows an "E1" error (an error indicating that the recovery from power failure was determined to be abnormal), which is one of the unrecoverable errors, and "E1" is the acquired number display LED 78 (digit 3 and 4) are diagrams showing the states displayed.
In the program start processing executed when the power switch 11 of the slot machine 10 is turned on, if it is determined that the power failure recovery data is not a normal value, an "E1" error occurs, and unrecoverable error processing shown in FIG. 136 is performed. Go to 1 (SS_ERROR_STOP1).

When proceeding to the unrecoverable error process 1, the interrupt process (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 133 is not executed, and therefore the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) shown in FIG. 134 is not executed either.
Then, when an "E1" error occurs, an unrecoverable error process 1 is performed to display "E" in the digit 3 and "1" in the digit 4. FIG.

When it is determined that an unrecoverable error has occurred, segment data for displaying the lower digits of the unrecoverable error that has occurred is stored in the L register before proceeding to unrecoverable error processing.
A segment for displaying the lower digit "1" of the "E1" error in the L register before moving to unrecoverable error processing 1 when it is determined that an "E1" error has occurred in the program start processing. Data "00000110(B)" is stored.

In step S1491 of FIG. 136, digit data "01000000(B)" for lighting digit 4 is stored in the H register.
Furthermore, in step S1492 of FIG. 136, the digit data "00100000(B)" for lighting the digit 3 is stored in the D register, and the upper digit "E" of the "E1" error is displayed in the E register. segment data "01111001 (B)" for

136, the data (digit signal) stored in the D register is output from the output port 2, and the data (segment signal) stored in the E register is output from the output port 3 at step S1497 in FIG. As a result, "E" is displayed in the digit 3 (upper digit of the acquisition number display LED 78).
In step S1501 of FIG. 136, the DE register value and the HL register value are exchanged, and in the next step S1502, as in step S1497, the data stored in the D register is output from the output port 2, and the output port 3 outputs the data stored in the E register. As a result, "1" is displayed in the digit 4 (lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78).

After that, the process of displaying "E" in digit 3 and the process of displaying "1" in digit 4 are alternately and repeatedly executed until the return process is performed.
Thus, when the "E1" error occurs, "E1" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. FIG.
When an unrecoverable error occurs, the power switch 11 is turned off once. Then, by inserting the setting key and rotating it clockwise by 90 degrees, the setting key switch 12 is turned on, and in this state, the power switch 11 is turned on again. As a result, the predetermined range of the RWM 53 is cleared by the initialization process in the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) of FIG. 226, and the return process is performed.

FIG. 231(5) shows a state in which the accumulated number display LED 76 (digits 1 and 2) displays the accumulated number "50" and the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) displays the acquired number "09". FIG. 4 is a diagram showing;
When the number of stored medals is 50, the stored number data “50” is stored in the stored number data storage area (_NB_CREDIT) of the RWM 53 .
Also, when the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals acquired by the player) is 9, the acquired number data “9” is finally stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) of the RWM 53 .

Further, when the reserved number data "50" is stored in the reserved number data storage area (_NB_CREDIT), in step S1443 of the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in FIG. 50” is obtained and stored in the A register. Proceeding to the next step S1444, the A register value "50" is divided by "10", the quotient "5" is stored in the A register as the offset value for the upper digits, and the remainder "0" is the lower digits. is stored in the C register as an offset value for

Then, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00001000 (B)", in step S1455 of FIG. As a result, "5" display data (address "181C(H)" in FIG. 224) is acquired as segment output data. Then, in step S1458, "5" is displayed in digit 1 (the upper digit of the stored number display LED 76).

In addition, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00010000 (B)", in step S1455 of FIG. As a result, "0" display data (address "1817(H)" in FIG. 224) is obtained as segment output data. Then, in step S1458, "0" is displayed in digit 2 (the lower digit of the stored number display LED 76).
In this way, "50" is displayed on the stored number display LED 76. FIG.

Also, when the acquired number data "9" is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT), in step S1447 of the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in FIG. 9" is retrieved and stored in the A register. 134, the A register value "9" is divided by "10", the quotient "0" is stored in the A register as the upper digit offset value, and the remainder "9" is stored. is stored in the C register as the lower digit offset value.

Then, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)", in step S1455 of FIG. As a result, "0" display data (address "1817(H)" in FIG. 224) is acquired as segment output data. Then, in step S1458, "0" is displayed in digit 3 (upper digit of the acquisition number display LED 78).

Further, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00010000 (B)", in step S1455 of FIG. As a result, "9" display data (address "1820(H)" in FIG. 224) is acquired as segment output data. Then, in step S1458, "9" is displayed in digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78).
In this way, "09" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. FIG.

Here, the operation information of the stop switch, which is advantageous to the player, is important information related to whether or not medals are to be paid out.
However, if the segments of the winning number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) are broken, or if there is a failure in the signal line that transmits signals to these segments, stop switch operation information that is advantageous to the player is acquired. The number display LED 78 may not display correctly, which may disadvantage the player.

Here, it is assumed that a small winning combination B5 is won in the instructed game section. At this time, if none of the segments are faulty and none of the signal lines that transmit signals to the segments are faulty, the acquisition number display LED 78 displays "=2" indicating the medium first stop. should be displayed (FIGS. 19 and 20).
But suppose, for example, segment E of digit 4 has failed, or the signal line carrying the signal to segment E has failed. In this case, if a small winning combination B5 is won in the designated game section, the segments A, B, D and G of the digit 4 are lit and the segments C, E and F are lit. In this case, whether "=2" indicating the middle first stop is displayed on the winning number display LED 78, or "=3" indicating the right first stop is displayed on the winning number display LED 78, the player does not know. cannot be distinguished.

A player who sees digit 4 with segments A, B, D and G lit and segments C, E and F unlit guesses that digit 4 is displaying "3" and Assume that the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing the first stop. In this case, the number of medals acquired by the player is 1 or 0 (FIG. 14), and if "=2" indicating the middle first stop was correctly displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, it would have been acquired. The player cannot acquire nine medals.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)" during the setting change, the seven segments A to G of the digit 3 are lit (the digit 3 is set to "8"). ”), and in the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”, seven segments A to G of digit 4 are lit (“8” is displayed on digit 4).

In this way, by lighting the seven segments A to G of the digits 3 and 4 during the setting change, the digits 3 and 4 displaying the pushing order instruction information during the instruction game section are not malfunctioning. and that the signal lines transmitting the segment signals to digits 3 and 4 are not disturbed.

Also, during the setting change, for example, the seven segments A to G of the digit 3 light up, and of the seven segments of the digit 4, the six segments A and C to G light up. If segment B does not illuminate, it can be determined that segment B of digit 4 may be defective.

Furthermore, during a setting change, for example, the six segments A to E and G of digit 3 are illuminated, segment F is not illuminated, and the six segments A to E and G of digit 4 are illuminated. If it illuminates but segment F does not illuminate, it is possible that not only is segment F of digits 3 and 4 faulty, but that the signal line sending the segment signal to segment F is faulty. Then you can judge. In particular, since the setting change is made by the hall clerk before the opening of the hall, the hall clerk can confirm whether there is a failure in the segment and whether there is a failure in the signal line before the opening of the hall. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the "dE" error occurs, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)", "d" is displayed in the digit 3, and the LED display counter value is "01000000 ( B)”, display “E” in digit 4 in the interrupt processing.

Here, when "d" is displayed in digit 3, segments B, C, D, E and G of digit 3 are illuminated. This makes it possible to confirm that these segments have not failed and that the signal lines that transmit segment signals to these segments have not failed.
When "E" is displayed for digit 4, segments A, D, E, F and G of digit 4 are lit. This makes it possible to confirm that these segments have not failed and that the signal lines that transmit segment signals to these segments have not failed.

Further, digits 3 and 4 are shared with segment A to G signals. Thus, by confirming that segments B, C, D, E and G of digit 3 are illuminated and segments A, D, E, F and G of digit 4 are illuminated, the segments A through G signals It can be seen that the part of the line that is common to digits 3 and 4 is free of faults.

Note that, of the segment A to G signal lines, the portion common to digits 3 and 4 is a branching portion where the signal line branches to digits 3 and 4 from the output port 3 (D0 to D7 output terminals of IC3). means up to
Further, among the segment A to G signal lines, the portion common to the digits 3 and 4 includes harnesses and connectors for connecting the main control board 50 and the display board 75 .
Therefore, by confirming that the segments B, C, D, E and G of digit 3 are illuminated and that the segments A, D, E, F and G of digit 4 are illuminated, the main control board 50 can display It can be confirmed that the harnesses and connectors for transmitting digit signals and segment signals to the board 75 are not damaged.

In particular, when the hall clerk opens the front door before or during the opening of the hall, for example, to replenish the hopper 35 with medals, the door switch 15 is turned on, and "dE" is displayed on the winning number display LED 78. Is displayed. Thus, before or during the opening of the hall, the hall clerk can confirm whether there is a failure in the segment and whether there is a failure in the signal line, so that the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.
Also, during setting confirmation, unlike during setting change, "88" is not displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, but if the front door is open, the door switch 15 remains on and the acquisition number display LED 78 continues to display "dE". As a result, the hall clerk can confirm whether there is a fault in the segment and whether there is a fault in the signal line, so that the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.

Further, when the setting is confirmed, the image display device 23 displays a "menu screen" which is one of the screens for the hall clerk. The menu screen displays items such as "volume setting" and "setting change history", as well as "current volume" and "date and time of last setting change". Then, when the item "setting change history" is selected by operating the cross key 24 and the menu button 25 is operated in this state, a "setting change history screen" is displayed on the image display device 23. FIG. On the setting change history screen, you can check the "date and time when the setting was changed" and "setting value after change" for multiple times.

In this way, while checking the settings, the set values can be checked while looking at the image display device 23 provided on the front side of the front door. It is easy to check whether is displayed correctly.
However, it is not preferable to display the setting values on the image display device 23 when the player can visually recognize the image display device 23. Therefore, when the setting is confirmed, the image display device 23 first displays the setting values. A menu screen with no values is displayed.
In a situation where the player can visually recognize the image display device 23 , the hall clerk can confirm the set value with the set value display LED 73 provided inside the slot machine 10 .

In addition, there are cases where a hall clerk opens the front door to change or confirm settings without permission. Furthermore, in order to prevent hall clerks from noticing such fraudulent acts, sub-control board 80 may be destroyed or power supply to sub-control board 80 may be cut off. may be done.
If the sub-control board 80 is destroyed or the power supply to the sub-control board 80 is cut off, the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22 and the image display device 23 do not operate, so an error is reported using these. Gone.

Here, if the sub-control board 80 is destroyed or the power supply to the sub-control board 80 is cut off, the production lamp 21, the speaker 22 and the image display device 23 will not operate. No notification will be given.
However, in the present embodiment, since the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, even if the sub-control board 80 is destroyed or the power supply to the sub-control board 80 is cut off, the person who commits the fraudulent act cannot will know the advantageous pushing order.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the opening of the front door is detected, "dE" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. FIG. Thus, even if the sub-control board 80 is destroyed or the power supply to the sub-control board 80 is cut off, the hall clerk can know that the front door has been opened.
Also, if the acquired number display LED 78 is destroyed, the acquired number display LED 78 will no longer display "dE", but the pressing order instruction information will also no longer be displayed. In this case, even a person who commits a fraudulent act cannot know an advantageous pushing order. Therefore, by displaying the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78, it is possible to prevent the acquired number display LED 78 from being destroyed.
In other words, by displaying both the error information and the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78, even if the sub-control board 80 is destroyed, the error information is displayed while preventing the acquisition number display LED 78 from being destroyed. can do.

In this embodiment, when an "E1" error occurs, interrupt processing is not executed. and a process of outputting a digit signal from output port 2 and outputting a segment signal from output port 3 so as to display "1" in digit 4 are alternately and repeatedly executed.

Here, when "E" is displayed in digit 3, segments A, D, E, F and G of digit 3 are lit. This makes it possible to confirm that these segments have not failed and that the signal lines that transmit segment signals to these segments have not failed.
Also, when "1" is displayed for digit 4, segments B and C of digit 4 are lit. This makes it possible to confirm that these segments have not failed and that the signal lines that transmit segment signals to these segments have not failed.

Further, since the segments A to G are shared by the digits 3 and 4, the segments A, D, E, F and G of the digit 3 light up, and the segments B and C of the digit 4 light up. By confirming this, it is possible to confirm that there is no fault in the portion common to digits 3 and 4 among the segment A to G signal lines.
That is, it can be confirmed that the harnesses and connectors for transmitting digit signals and segment signals from the main control board 50 to the display board 75 are not damaged.

In particular, when the power switch 11 is turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory, it is determined that the power failure return data is not a normal value in the program start processing. Therefore, when the power switch 11 is turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory, an "E1" error always occurs, and the process proceeds to unrecoverable error processing 1 (SS_ERROR_STOP1) in FIG.
Also, when an "E1" error occurs, after turning off the power switch 11 once, turn the setting key 90 degrees clockwise to turn on the setting key switch 12, and in this state, turn on the power switch 11 again. to As a result, the process proceeds to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET), the predetermined range of the RWM 53 is cleared, and the "E1" error is released.

As described above, when the power switch 11 is turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory, "E1" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. FIG. Further, when an operation for canceling the "E1" error is performed, the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) is performed, and "88" is displayed on the acquired number display LED78.
Thus, when the power switch 11 is turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory, the hall clerk can confirm whether there is a fault in the segment and whether there is a fault in the signal line, so that the player is not disadvantaged. be able to.
In particular, there is a possibility that harnesses and connectors for transmitting digit signals and segment signals will be damaged during transportation from a factory to a hall or installation in a hall. Therefore, confirming that "E1" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 when the power switch 11 is turned on for the first time is effective for confirming that there is no failure in the harness and connector. is.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00001000 (B)", the upper digit of the stored number is displayed in digit 1, and when the LED display counter value is "00010000 (B)" 2, the lower digit of the stored number of sheets is displayed in digit 2. Furthermore, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)", the upper digits of the number of acquired cards are displayed in digit 3, and in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "01000000 (B)", Display the lower digits of the acquired number on digit 4.

Here, if it can be confirmed that a numerical value from "0" to "2" is displayed in digit 1, it means that segments A to G of digit 1 are not malfunctioning, and that segment A to G signals are applied to digit 1. It can be confirmed that there is no failure in the transmission signal line. The same is true for digits 2-4.

In addition, since digits 1 to 4 are also used for segment A to G signals, by confirming that segments A to G of digit 1 are lit, digits 1 to 4 of the segment A to G signal lines can be 4, it can be confirmed that no failure has occurred. That is, it can be confirmed that the harnesses and connectors for transmitting digit signals and segment signals from the main control board 50 to the display board 75 are not damaged.

Here, when the player inserts medals from the medal slot 43 in a state where the number of stored medals is 0, the first three medals are not stored (credited) and are betted (bet) for the game. ), and the fourth and subsequent medals are reserved.
Therefore, for example, when the number of stored medals is 0, if the player inserts 5 medals from the medal slot 43, 2 medals are stored. and 2) changes like "00"→"01"→"02". As a result, numbers from "0" to "2" are sequentially displayed on the digit 2 (lower digits of the accumulated number display LED 76). , and that the signal lines transmitting the segment A to G signals to digits 1 to 4 are not damaged.

In addition, in a hall where 50 medals can be borrowed for 1,000 yen, when a player borrows 50 medals at the start of a game and inserts all of them from the medal slot 43, the number of stored medals is 47. . At this time, since numbers from "00" to "47" are sequentially displayed on the stored number display LED 76, the player confirms that the segments A to G of the digits 1 and 2 are out of order. and that the signal lines that transmit the segment A-G signals to digits 1-4 are unbroken.

<29th Embodiment>
The digit 5 is not provided in the twenty-ninth embodiment. When the number of medals to be obtained is displayed, the number of medals to be obtained is displayed in digits 3 and 4 (the number of medals to be obtained display LED 78). is displayed, and the setting value is displayed in digit 4 under the condition that the setting value can be changed.
Also in the twenty-ninth embodiment, similarly to the twenty-eighth embodiment, when a "dE" error occurs, "dE" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, and when an "E1" error occurs, "E1" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. ” is displayed.

Here, in the twenty-ninth embodiment, the digits 1 to 4 and the circuit configuration for lighting them are the same as in the twenty-first embodiment.
That is, as shown in FIG. 138, output port 3 outputs digits 1 to 4 and 6 to 9 signals, and output port 4 outputs segment A to G signals. Digits 1 to 4 are also used for segment A to G signals.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 139(B), in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00000001(B)", digit 1 can be lit, and when the LED display counter value is "00000010(B)" , the digit 2 can be illuminated. In the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00000100 (B)", digit 3 can be lit, and in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00001000 (B)", digit 4 can be lit. becomes.
In this manner, the digits to be lit are sequentially switched for each interrupt process. That is, dynamic lighting is executed.

FIG. 232 is a diagram showing addresses, labels, and contents of data stored in the RWM 53 in the twenty-ninth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 222 in the twenty-eighth embodiment.
In the twenty-eighth embodiment, while the setting is being changed, the display data during the setting change ("88") is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). , set value display data (any value from "1" to "6") is stored.
Storing the LED display request flag in the LED display request flag storage area (_FL_LED_DSP) is the same in the twenty-eighth embodiment and the twenty-ninth embodiment. and the twenty-ninth embodiment.
Other than the above, it is the same as FIG. 222 of the twenty-eighth embodiment.

FIG. 233 is a diagram showing the relationship between setting value data, setting value display data, and setting value display.
As described above, the set value data is stored in the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK).
Also, the set value display data is data obtained by adding "1" to the set value data, and is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) during the setting change.
When the set value is "N", set value data "N-1" is stored in the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK). Set value display data "N" is stored in (_NB_PAYOUT), and the set value "N" is displayed in digit 4 (lower digit of acquisition number display LED 78).

FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing setting change processing (M_RANK_SET) in the twenty-ninth embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 226 in the twenty-eighth embodiment.
In the flowcharts described below, the same step numbers are given to steps that execute the same processes as in the twenty-eighth embodiment, and duplicate descriptions are omitted. In addition, step numbers with different contents from those of the twenty-eighth embodiment are underlined.

Step S4101 corresponds to step S4001 in FIG. 226. Here, set value display data is generated and stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.
The next step S4102 is a step corresponding to step S4002 in FIG. 226. Here, "00001100(B)" corresponding to the setting being changed is stored in the LED display request flag storage area (_FL_LED_DSP).
The process of step S4102 enables lighting of digits 3 and 4 (acquisition number display LED 78). Then, the current set value is displayed in digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78) by interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S4102.

In step S4103, similarly to step S4101 described above, set value display data is generated and stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). A step corresponding to this step S4103 is not provided in FIG.
The next step S4104 is a step corresponding to step S4004 in FIG. 226. Here, "11111111(B)" corresponding to normal mode is stored in the LED display request flag storage area (_FL_LED_DSP).
Then, the display of the digits 1 to 4 (stored number display LED 76 and acquired number display LED 78) becomes "0000" by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S4104. Note that the stored number display LED 76 and the acquisition number display LED 78 may be turned off.
Other than the above, it is the same as the flowchart of FIG. 226 of the twenty-eighth embodiment.

FIG. 235 is a flow chart showing the setting value display data set processing in steps S4101 and S4103 of FIG.
First, in step S4111, the setting value data is acquired from the setting value data storage area (_NB_RANK), and in the next step S4112, "1" is added to the setting value data to generate the setting value display data. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S4413.
When proceeding to step S4113, the set value display data is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 236(1) is a diagram showing a state in which set values "1" to "6" are displayed in digit 4 (lower digit of acquisition number display LED 78) during setting change.
As described above, in step S4101 of the setting change process in FIG. 234, set value display data is generated and stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT), and in the next step S4102, the LED display request flag storage area ( _FL_LED_DSP) stores the LED display request flag "00001100 (B)" corresponding to the setting being changed. Then, the set value is displayed in digit 4 by interrupt processing executed after this processing.

Here, it is assumed that, for example, "6" is stored in the winning number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) as the set value display data. In this case, in the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) of FIG. 134, in step S1447, the set value display data "6" is acquired from the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) and stored in the A register. In step S1450, the set value display data "6" stored in the A register is divided by "10". "6" is stored in the C register as the lower digit offset value.

Furthermore, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00001000 (B)", in step S1455 of FIG. Thus, "6" display data (address "181D(H)" in FIG. 224) is obtained as segment output data. Then, in step S1458, "6" is displayed in digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78).

Also, in step S2140 of FIG. 234, when the operation of the setting switch 13 is detected, the process proceeds to step S2141, where the setting value data in the setting value data storage area (_NB_RANK) is updated. Value display data is generated and stored in the winning number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). Then, the updated set value is displayed in digit 4 by interrupt processing executed after this processing.

Further, after proceeding to step S2140 in FIG. 234, the processing of steps S2140 to S4103 is repeated until the operation of the start switch 41 is detected in step S2142. As a result, the display of digit 4 is switched in the order of "1"→"2"→...→"5"→"6"→"1"→... as shown in FIG.
In this way, the set value is displayed in digit 4 while the setting is being changed.
In addition, the display of the setting value continues until the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is cleared in step S4003 of the setting change processing in FIG. Then, when the acquisition number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is cleared, the display of digit 4 is changed from the set value (one of "1" to "6") by the interrupt processing executed after this processing. becomes "0".

FIG. 236(2) is a diagram showing a state in which the push order instruction information "=1" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 in the instruction game section. The processing for displaying the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is the same as in FIG. 231(2).
Also, FIG. 236(3) is a diagram showing a state in which the obtained number "09" is displayed on the obtained number display LED 78. FIG. The processing for displaying the number of acquired cards on the acquired number display LED 78 is the same as in FIG. 231(5).

Thus, in the twenty-ninth embodiment, during the setting change, the set value is displayed in the digit 4 (lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78) in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00001000 (B)". do.
During the setting change, the display (set value) of the digit 4 is changed from "1"→"2"→...→"5"→"6"→"1" each time the setting switch 13 is operated. → Switch to ….

Here, if it is confirmed that a numerical value from "2" to "4", for example, is displayed at digit 4, then segments A to G of digit 4 are not malfunctioning, and segments A to G signals to digit 4 It can be confirmed that there is no failure in the signal line that transmits the
In addition, since the digits 3 and 4 are shared by the segments A to G signals, by confirming that the segments A to G of the digit 4 are illuminated, the digits 3 and 4 of the segment A to G signal lines 4, it can be confirmed that no failure has occurred. That is, it can be confirmed that the harnesses and connectors for transmitting digit signals and segment signals from the main control board 50 to the display board 75 are not damaged. In particular, since the hall clerk can confirm when the set value is changed before the opening of the hall, the player is not disadvantaged.

<Modifications of the twenty-eighth and twenty-ninth embodiments>
Although the twenty-eighth and twenty-ninth embodiments have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the twenty-eighth embodiment, when a game with an advantageous pressing order occurs in the instructed game section, the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)" switches to digit 3 in the pressing order. ``='', which is part of the instruction information, is displayed, and in interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is ``01000000 (B)'', ``1'', which is another part of the push order instruction information, is displayed in digit 4. "3" was displayed. However, it is not limited to this.

(2) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-eighth embodiment, when a game having an advantageous pressing order occurs in the indicated game section, the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)" is executed to digit 3. may display the push order instruction information "1" to "3".
Digit 4 may be displayed as "0" or "=" in interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "01000000 (B)", or may be hidden (segments A to G turned off). ).

(3) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-eighth embodiment, when the push order instruction information "1" to "3" is displayed on the digit 3, when the LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)" during setting change, In interrupt processing, "8" may be displayed in digit 3 (segments A to G are lit).
As a result, it can be confirmed that the segments A to G of the digit 3 have not failed and that the signal lines transmitting the signals of the segments A to G to the digit 3 have not failed.

(4) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-eighth embodiment, when the push order instruction information "1" to "3" is displayed on the digit 3, the LED display counter value is "01000000 (B)" during setting change. In the interrupt process, "8" may be displayed in digit 4 (segments A to G lit).
As a result, by confirming that the segments A to G of the digit 4 are lit, it can be confirmed that there is no fault in the portion common to the digits 3 and 4 among the segment A to G signal lines.

(5) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-eighth embodiment, if the digit 3 displays the push order instruction information '1' to '3', the digit 3 may display a numerical value from '0' to '2'. .
Even in this way, it can be confirmed that the segments A to G of the digit 3 have not failed and that the signal lines transmitting the signals of the segments A to G to the digit 3 have not failed.

(6) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-eighth embodiment, even when the push order instruction information "1" to "3" is displayed on the digit 3, the LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)" when the "dE" error occurs. , digit 3 may be displayed as ``d'', and digit 4 may be displayed as ``E'' in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is ``01000000 (B)''.
Thus, by confirming that segments B, C, D, E and G of digit 3 are illuminated and segments A, D, E, F and G of digit 4 are illuminated, the segments A to G signals It can be seen that the portion of the line that is common to digits 3 and 4 is unobstructed.

(7) Processing to display "E" in digit 3 when "E1" error occurs, even when pressing order instruction information "1" to "3" is displayed in digit 3 in the circuit configuration of the 28th embodiment. and the process of displaying "1" in digit 4 may be alternately and repeatedly executed.
By confirming that segments A, D, E, F, and G of digit 3 are lit and that segments B and C of digit 4 are lit, digit 3 of the segment AG signal lines is lit. and 4, it can be confirmed that no failure has occurred.

(8) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-eighth embodiment, even when the push order instruction information "1" to "3" is displayed on the digit 3, the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00001000 (B)" , the upper digit of the stored number is displayed in digit 1, and the lower digit of the stored number is displayed in digit 2 in interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00010000 (B)". Also, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)", the upper digits of the number of acquired cards are displayed in digit 3, and in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "01000000 (B)", Display the lower digits of the acquired number on digit 4.
As a result, by confirming that the segments A to G for digits 1 to 4 are lit, it is confirmed that there is no failure in the common part of the digits 1 to 4 among the segment A to G signal lines. can.

(9) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-eighth embodiment, when a game with an advantageous pressing order occurs in the indicated game section, the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)" is executed to digit 3. or hide digit 3 (segments A to G are extinguished) and the LED display counter value is 01000000 (B). 1” to “3” may be displayed.

(10) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-eighth embodiment, when the push order instruction information "1" to "3" is displayed on the digit 4, the LED display counter value is "01000000 (B)" during setting change. In the interrupt process, "8" may be displayed in digit 4 (segments A to G lit).
As a result, it can be confirmed that the segments A to G of the digit 4 have not failed, and that the signal lines transmitting the signals of the segments A to G to the digit 4 have not failed.

(11) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-eighth embodiment, when the push order instruction information "1" to "3" is displayed on the digit 4, the LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)" during setting change. In interrupt processing, "8" may be displayed in digit 3 (segments A to G are lit).
As a result, by confirming that the segments A to G of the digit 3 are lit, it can be confirmed that there is no failure in the portion common to the digits 3 and 4 among the segment A to G signal lines.

(12) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-eighth embodiment, when pressing order instruction information "1" to "3" is displayed on digit 4, numerical values from "0" to "2" may be displayed on digit 4. .
Even in this way, it can be confirmed that the segments A to G of the digit 4 have not failed and that the signal lines transmitting the signals of the segments A to G to the digit 4 have not failed.

(13) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-eighth embodiment, even when the push order instruction information "1" to "3" is displayed on the digit 4, the LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)" when the "dE" error occurs. , digit 3 may be displayed as ``d'', and digit 4 may be displayed as ``E'' in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is ``01000000 (B)''.
Thus, by confirming that segments B, C, D, E and G of digit 3 are illuminated and segments A, D, E, F and G of digit 4 are illuminated, the segments A to G signals It can be seen that the portion of the line that is common to digits 3 and 4 is unobstructed.

(14) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-eighth embodiment, processing to display "E" in digit 3 when an "E1" error occurs, even when pressing sequence instruction information "1" to "3" is displayed in digit 4. and the process of displaying "1" in digit 4 may be alternately and repeatedly executed.
By confirming that segments A, D, E, F and G of digit 3 are lit and that segments B and C of digit 4 are lit, digit 3 of the segment A to G signal lines is lit. and 4, it can be confirmed that no failure has occurred.

(15) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-eighth embodiment, even when the push order instruction information "1" to "3" is displayed on the digit 4, interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00001000 (B)" , the upper digit of the stored number is displayed in digit 1, and the lower digit of the stored number is displayed in digit 2 in interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00010000 (B)". Also, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)", the upper digits of the number of acquired cards are displayed in digit 3, and in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "01000000 (B)", Display the lower digits of the acquired number on digit 4.
As a result, by confirming that the segments A to G for digits 1 to 4 are lit, it is confirmed that there is no failure in the common part of the digits 1 to 4 among the segment A to G signal lines. can.

(16) In the twenty-ninth embodiment, when a game with an advantageous pressing order occurs in the instructed game section, the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00000100 (B)" switches to digit 3 in the pressing order. ``='', which is part of the instruction information, is displayed, and in interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is ``00001000 (B)'', ``1'', which is another part of the push order instruction information, is displayed in digit 4. "3" was displayed. However, it is not limited to this.

(17) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-ninth embodiment, when a game with an advantageous pressing order occurs in the indicated game section, the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is "00000100 (B)" is executed to digit 3. may display the push order instruction information "1" to "3".
Digit 4 may be displayed as "0" or "=" in interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00001000 (B)", or may not be displayed (segments A to G are extinguished). ).

(18) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-ninth embodiment, when the push order instruction information "1" to "3" is displayed on the digit 3, the LED display counter value is "00001000 (B)" during setting change. The set value may be displayed in digit 4 in interrupt processing.
During the setting change, the display (set value) of the digit 4 is changed from "1"→"2"→...→"5"→"6"→"1" each time the setting switch 13 is operated. → Switch to ….

If it is confirmed that a numerical value from "2" to "4", for example, is displayed at digit 4, it means that segments A to G of digit 4 are not malfunctioning, and that segment A to G signals are being applied to digit 4. It can be confirmed that there is no failure in the transmission signal line.
In addition, since digits 3 and 4 are also used for segment A to G signals, by confirming that segments A to G of digit 4 are lit, digits 3 and 4 of the segment A to G signal lines are turned on. It can be confirmed that no failure has occurred in the common part in .

(19) In the circuit configuration of the 29th embodiment, when a game with an advantageous pushing order occurs in the indicated game section, the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00001000 (B)" is executed to digit 4. may display the push order instruction information "1" to "3".
Digit 3 may be displayed as "0" or may not be displayed (segments A to G are extinguished) in interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00000100 (B)". .

(20) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-ninth embodiment, when the push order instruction information "1" to "3" is displayed on the digit 4, when the LED display counter value is "00001000 (B)" during setting change, The set value may be displayed in digit 4 in interrupt processing.
During the setting change, the display (set value) of the digit 4 is changed from "1"→"2"→...→"5"→"6"→"1" each time the setting switch 13 is operated. → Switch to ….
If it is confirmed that a numerical value from "2" to "4", for example, is displayed at digit 4, it means that segments A to G of digit 4 are not malfunctioning, and that segment A to G signals are being applied to digit 4. It can be confirmed that there is no failure in the transmission signal line.

(21) In the twenty-ninth embodiment, the set value is displayed in digit 4 (lower digits of acquisition number display LED 78) during setting change. "0" may be displayed, "_" may be displayed (only segment D is lit), or not displayed (segments A to G are extinguished).

(22) In the twenty-eighth and twenty-ninth embodiments, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 225, there are three advantageous pushing orders: left first stop, middle first stop, and right first stop, There are four types of push order instruction numbers from "A0(H)" to "A3(H)", and there are four types of push order instruction information from "=0" to "=3". However, it is not limited to this.

(23) As shown in FIG. 237, nine types of advantageous pushing orders are provided, including three pushing orders such as left first stop and six pushing orders such as 123 (left center right), Ten types of "A0(H)" to "A9(H)" may be provided as the push order instruction numbers, and ten types of "=0" to "=9" may be provided as the push order instruction information.
Even in this case, by storing the push order instruction number in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT), the push order instruction information "=0" to "=9" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4). can do.

(24) In FIG. 237, the push order instruction number corresponding to left first stop is "A1(H)" and the push order instruction information is "=1". The instruction number may be "A1(H)" and the pressing order instruction information may be "=1".
Similarly, the pressing order instruction number corresponding to the left first stop may be set to "A7(H)" and the pressing order instruction information may be set to "=7".
In this manner, the relationship between the advantageous pressing order, the pressing order instruction number, and the pressing order instruction information can be appropriately set.

Specifically, for example, "1A(H)" to "9A(H)" may be set as the pressing order instruction numbers, and "1" to "9" may be displayed as the pressing order instruction information for the digit 3. FIG. At this time, digit 4 is not displayed (segments A to G are extinguished). In this case, it is necessary to provide non-display data "00000000 (B)" instead of "=" display data.
Further, for example, "A1(H)" to "A9(H)" may be set as the pushing order instruction numbers, and "1" to "9" may be displayed as the pushing order instruction information in the digit 4. FIG. At this time, digit 3 is not displayed (segments A to G are turned off). In this case also, it is necessary to provide non-display data "00000000 (B)" instead of "=" display data.

Furthermore, for example, the pressing order instruction numbers may be set to "1" to "9", and the pressing order instruction information may be displayed in digits 3 and 4 as "01" to "09". ``10'' to ``90'', and ``10'', ``20'', ``30'', . The sequence instruction numbers are "1A(H)" to "9A(H)", and the pressing sequence instruction information for the digits 3 and 4 is "1=", "2=", "3=" ... "8=". Or "9=" may be displayed.

(25) In the 28th and 29th embodiments, when there is no advantageous pressing order (pressing order instruction number "A0 (H)") in the instructed game section, the winning number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) Although the pressing order instruction information "=0" is displayed, the acquisition number display LED 78 may be hidden (segments A to G turned off) without displaying "=0".

(26) In the instructed game section, when the game has an advantageous push order, the push order instruction information is displayed in digit 3 (upper digit of win count display LED 78), and digit 4 (win count display LED 78). Information indicating the stop switch 42 to be operated next (next operation instruction information) may be displayed in the lower digits.
Of course, the next operation instruction information may be displayed on the digit 3, and the pressing order instruction information may be displayed on the digit 4, contrary to the above.

Here, regarding the pressing order instruction information, "left center right" is set to "1", "left to right center" is set to "2", "middle left to right" is set to "3", and "middle right to left" is set to "4". "Right left center" is set to "5", and "Right center left" is set to "6". Also, "left first stop" is set to "7", "middle first stop" is set to "8", and "right first stop" is set to "9".
Furthermore, regarding the next operation instruction information, "left" is set to "1", "middle" is set to "2", and "right" is set to "3". Furthermore, when there is no stop switch 42 to be operated next, the next operation instruction information is set to "0".

In this case, when the advantageous pressing order is "middle left and right" and the stop switch 42 to be operated next is "middle", "3" is displayed as the pressing order instruction information for digit 3, and digit 4 is next. "2" is displayed as the operation instruction information. At this time, "32" is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT).
Further, when the advantageous pressing order is "middle left and right" and the stop switch 42 to be operated next is "left", "3" is displayed as the pressing order instruction information for the digit 3, and the next operation is indicated for the digit 4. "1" is displayed as instruction information. At this time, "31" is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT).

Furthermore, when the advantageous pressing order is "right first stop" and the stop switch 42 to be operated next is "right", "9" is displayed as the pressing order instruction information for digit 3, and digit 4 is displayed. , "3" is displayed as the next operation instruction information. At this time, "93" is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT).
Furthermore, when the advantageous pressing order is "right first stop" and there is no stop switch 42 to be operated next, "9" is displayed as the pressing order instruction information for digit 3, and the next operation instruction is provided for digit 4. "0" is displayed as information. At this time, "90" is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT).
When there is no stop switch 42 to be operated next, the next operation instruction information may be "4" instead of "0". Also, the digits in which the next operation instruction information is displayed may be hidden (segments A to G are turned off).

(27) In the designated game section, when a game with an advantageous pushing order is obtained, the condition device number may be displayed on the acquired number display LEDs 78 (segments 3 and 4).
For example, in the instructed game section, when the small winning combination B2 with the condition device number "12" is won, in the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)", the digit 3 (higher order of the winning number display LED 78 digit) displays "1", which is the upper digit of the conditional device number "12", and digit 4 (lower digit of acquisition number display LED 78) is displayed in interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "01000000 (B)" ), "2", which is the lower digit of the condition device number "12", is displayed.

Also, in the instructed game section, when the replay B3 with the condition device number "4" is won, "0" is displayed in the digit 3 in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)". , the LED display counter value is "01000000 (B)" in the interrupt processing, the condition device number "3" is displayed in the digit 4.
In this way, when the conditional device number is one digit, "0" may be displayed in digit 3, but digit 3 may be hidden (segments A to G turned off).

Furthermore, when the conditional device number "0" is not won in the indicated game section, "0" may be displayed in digits 3 and 4 respectively, and both digits 3 and 4 are not displayed (segment A to G may be extinguished).
Furthermore, in the designated game section, when it becomes a conditional device without an advantageous pushing order, such as replay A (conditional device number "1") or small combination F (conditional device number "29"), digit 3 and 4 may display the condition device number, digits 3 and 4 may each display "0", and both digits 3 and 4 may be hidden (segments A to G turned off).

(28) In the instructed game section, when the game has an advantageous push order, the push order instruction number is displayed according to the lighting or extinguishing pattern of the segments A to G of the digit 4 (lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78). may be represented in binary.
In this case, the pressing order instruction numbers are "1" to "9" instead of "A1(H)" to "A9(H)".
It should be noted that, instead of the digit 4, the numeric value corresponding to the push order instruction number may be displayed in binary by the pattern of lighting or extinguishing of the segments A to G of the digit 3. FIG.

FIG. 238 is a diagram showing the relationship between segments AG and bits 0-6.
Segment A corresponds to bit 0 and segment B corresponds to bit 1, as shown in FIG. Similarly, segments C through G correspond to bits 2 through 6, respectively.
When the numerical value corresponding to the pushing order instruction number is expressed in binary, if bit 0 is "0", segment A of digit 4 is turned off, and if bit 0 is "1", digit 4 is turned off. segment A of is illuminated. The same is true for segments B to G.

FIG. 239 is a diagram showing the relationship between the pressing order instruction number, display data, display of digits, and advantageous pressing order.
As shown in FIG. 239, the push order instruction number "1(D)" is expressed in binary as "00000001(B)", which is used as display data (segment output data) for segments A to G of digit 4. When used, segment A of digit 4 can be illuminated and segments BG can be extinguished.
In this way, the push order instruction number can be represented by a binary number, and can be displayed by the lighting or extinguishing pattern of the segments A to G of the digit 4. FIG. In this case, LED segment table 1 (TBL_SEG_DATA1) and LED segment table 2 (TBL_SEG_DATA2) are not used. The same applies to the pressing order instruction numbers "2(D)" to "9(D)".

For example, assume that a minor win B12 is won in the indicated game section. The advantageous pressing order corresponding to the small win B12 is "right first stop", and the pressing order instruction number is "3(D)".
In this case, in the pressing order instruction number setting process (M_ORD_INF), the pressing order instruction number "3(D)" (binary "00000011(B)") corresponding to the won minor winning combination B12 is set to the pressing order instruction of the RWM 53. Store in the number storage area. In addition, the push order instruction number is not stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT).
In the LED display control (I_LED_OUT), in the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is "01000000 (B)" (the digit 4 signal is on), the push order stored in the push order instruction number storage area of the RWM 53 The instruction number "00000011(B)" is obtained as display data (segment output data) and output from the output port 3 (output port 4).

This allows segments A and B of digit 4 to be lit and segments C to G to be extinguished.
In this manner, a numerical value corresponding to the push order instruction number can be displayed in binary by the pattern of lighting or extinguishing of the segments A to G of the digit 4. FIG.
In addition, when the numeric value corresponding to the push order instruction number is displayed in binary for digit 4, digit 3 may be hidden (segments A to G turned off), and the next operation instruction information is displayed in binary. may

FIG. 240 is a diagram showing the relationship between next operation instruction information, display data, digit display, and stop switch 42 to be operated next.
As shown in FIG. 240, when the stop switch 42 to be operated next is on the left, the next operation instruction information is "1", which is expressed in binary as "00000001 (B)". Therefore, when the next operation instruction information "1" is displayed in binary at digit 3, segment A of digit 3 is lit and segments B to G are extinguished. The same applies to the next operation instruction information "2" to "4".
It should be noted that the numerical value corresponding to the pressing order instruction number may be displayed in binary not at digit 4 but at digit 3. In this case, the digit 4 may not be displayed (segments A to G may be turned off), and the next operation instruction information may be displayed in binary.

(29) In the instructed game section, when the game has an advantageous push order, the condition device number is set according to the pattern of lighting or extinguishing of segments A to G of digit 4 (lower digits of the acquired number display LED 78). It may be displayed in binary.
FIG. 241 is a diagram exemplifying the relationship between conditional device numbers, display data, display of digits, and advantageous pressing order for minor wins B1 to B12.
As shown in FIG. 241, the conditional device number of the minor winning combination B1 is "11", which is expressed in binary as "00001011 (B)". Therefore, when the conditional device number "11" is displayed in binary at digit 4, segments A, B and D of digit 4 are lit and segments C and EG are extinguished. The same applies to other condition device numbers.

Specifically, in the designated game section, when the condition device number "11" is won in the small combination B1, the condition device number "11" (binary "00001011 (B)"), RWM53 winning and replay Stored in the condition device number storage area (_NB_CND_NOR).
Then, in the LED display control (I_LED_OUT), in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "01000000 (B)" (the digit 4 signal is on), the prize winning and replay conditions are stored in the device number storage area (_NB_CND_NOR) of the RWM 53 The conditional device number "00001011(B)" is acquired as display data (segment output data) and output from the output port 3 (output port 4).

This allows segments A, B and D of digit 4 to be lit and segments C and EG to be extinguished.
In this way, the condition device number can be represented in binary by the pattern of illumination or extinguishment of segments AG of digit 4. FIG.

Further, when the condition device number is displayed in binary as digit 4, digit 3 may be hidden (segments A to G are turned off), and the next operation instruction information may be displayed in binary.
Furthermore, the conditional device number may be represented in binary at digit 3 instead of digit 4. In this case, the digit 4 may not be displayed (segments A to G may be turned off), and the next operation instruction information may be displayed in binary.

(30) In the twenty-eighth and twenty-ninth embodiments, in the same interrupt processing, the digits that can be lit are changed according to the LED display counter value. For example, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, in the same interrupt processing, when the LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)", digit 3 can be lit, and when the LED display counter value is "01000000 (B)" , digit 4 can be lit. However, the display control of the LEDs including the digits 3 and 4 is not limited to execution by the same interrupt processing.

For example, an interrupt process A is executed, and an interrupt process B is executed independently of the interrupt process A. That is, it executes a plurality of interrupt processes. In the interrupt processing A, the display of digit 3 is controlled, and in the interrupt processing B, the display of digit 4 is controlled. Thus, independent interrupt processing may control the display of LEDs containing digits three and four.

(31) In the twenty-eighth and twenty-ninth embodiments, the display of digits 3 and 4 is controlled by the unrecoverable error process 1 (SS_ERROR_STOP1) shown in FIG. 136 without executing interrupt processing when an unrecoverable error occurs. However, the LED display control at the time of an unrecoverable error is not limited to this.
For example, interrupt processing may be performed even on unrecoverable errors, and the interrupt processing may control the display of LEDs containing digits 3 and 4. FIG.
In this case, when an unrecoverable error occurs, an error number corresponding to the type of unrecoverable error that has occurred is stored in the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR) of the RWM 53 .

Specifically, when the "E1" error occurs, the error number "25(H)" of the "E1" error is stored in the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR) of the RWM 53 .
Also, in step S1439 of the LED display control in FIG. 134, the error number "25(H)" is acquired from the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR) and stored in the B register.
Furthermore, in step S1448 of FIG. 134, it is determined that an error is being displayed ("Yes") because the B register value is not "0", and in the next step S1449, the B register value is set in the A register, Set the top address of the LED segment table 1 to the HL register.

Further, in step S1450 of FIG. 134, an operation is executed to divide the A register value "25(H)"("37(D)") by "10(D)", and the quotient "3(D)" The offset value for digits is stored in the A register, and the remainder "7(D)" is stored in the C register as the offset value for lower digits.
Then, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)", in step S1455 of FIG. By adding, "E" display data (address "1814(H)" in FIG. 224) is obtained as segment output data. Then, in step S1458, "E" is displayed in digit 3 (upper digit of the acquisition number display LED 78).

In addition, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "01000000 (B)", in step S1455 of FIG. By adding, "1" display data (address "1818(H)" in FIG. 224) is acquired as segment output data. Then, in step S1458, "1" is displayed in digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78).
In this way, when the "E1" error occurs, "E1" can be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 by interrupt processing. The same applies to other unrecoverable errors.

(32) In the twenty-eighth embodiment, "88" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) during the setting change.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, "88" may be displayed on the stored number display LED 76 (digits 1 and 2) in addition to the acquired number display LED 78 during the setting change. In other words, "8888" may be displayed on the stored number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 1 to 4) during the setting change.

Specifically, for example, in the setting change process (M_RANK_SET), "88 (D)" (binary "01011000 ( B)”).
Also, during the setting change, "11111000 (B)" is stored as the LED display request flag in the LED display request flag storage area (_FL_LED_DSP) of the RWM 53 .
Then, "8888" is displayed on the stored number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 1 to 4) by the interrupt processing executed after these processings.

Further, for example, the stored number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 1 to 4) are dynamically lit, and the set value display LED 73 (digit 5) is statically lit. During the setting change, output port 2 outputs "01111000(B)" as a digit signal and output port 3 outputs "01111111(B)" as a segment signal for each interrupt process. As a result, it is possible to simultaneously display "8" in digits 1 to 4 for each interrupt process during setting change.
In the setting change process (M_RANK_SET), the digit signal "01111000(B)" may be output from the output port 2, and the segment signal "01111111(B)" may be output from the output port 3. .

(33) In the twenty-ninth embodiment, when the operation of the setting switch 13 is detected in step S2140 of FIG. , setting value display data is generated from the updated setting value data, and this is stored in the acquisition number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). However, it is not limited to this.

FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in the modified example of the twenty-ninth embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 234 of the twenty-ninth embodiment.
In the flowcharts described below, the same step numbers are assigned to steps that execute the same processes as in the twenty-ninth embodiment, and duplicate descriptions are omitted. In addition, step numbers with different contents from those of the twenty-ninth embodiment are underlined.

First, in FIG. 242, step S4121 is provided instead of steps S2141 and S4103 in FIG. In this step S4121, the set value display data (the value of the obtained number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT)) is updated.
For example, when the setting value display data "1" is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT), and the operation of the setting switch 13 is detected in step S2140, in step S4121, the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) _NB_PAYOUT) to store the set value display data "2".
Also, when the setting value display data "6" is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT), and the operation of the setting switch 13 is detected in step S2140, the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is processed in step S4121. _NB_PAYOUT) stores the set value display data “1”. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2142.

In FIG. 242, a new step S4122 is provided between steps S2142 and S2143. In this step S4122, the set value data (the value of the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK)) is updated.
For example, when the set value display data "1" is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) and the operation of the start switch 41 is detected in step S2142, the set value display data "1" is detected in step S4122. "0" obtained by subtracting "1" from "" is stored as setting value data in the setting value data storage area (_NB_RANK).
Also, when the set value display data "6" is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT), and the operation of the start switch 41 is detected in step S2142, the set value display data "6" is detected in step S4122. "5" obtained by subtracting "1" from "" is stored as setting value data in the setting value data storage area (_NB_RANK). Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2143.

(34) In the twenty-eighth and twenty-ninth embodiments, when the set value is "N", the set value data "N-1" is stored in the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK). However, it is not limited to this.
For example, when the setting value is "N", the setting value data "N" may be stored in the setting value data storage area (_NB_RANK). In this case, the setting value display data can be obtained without adding "1" to the setting value data. That is, when the set value data is "N", the set value display data is also "N".

(35) In the flowcharts shown in the twenty-eighth and twenty-ninth embodiments, the order of processing is not limited to the order shown in the drawings, and if the order of processing can be changed, the order of processing can be changed. is also possible.
(36) The twenty-eighth and twenty-ninth embodiments and the various modifications described above are not limited to being carried out independently, but can be carried out in combination as appropriate.

<Thirtieth Embodiment>
Next, a thirtieth embodiment will be described.
FIG. 243 is a diagram showing storage areas of the RWM 53 described in the thirtieth embodiment.
In FIG. 243, the advantageous section type flag (_NB_ADV_KND) is a flag indicating whether the current game section is a normal section, a standby section, or an advantageous section. This advantageous section type flag is substantially the same as the game section flag (address "F020(H)") shown in FIG. 182 in the twenty-sixth embodiment.
The advantageous section type flag has a value of "00000000 (B)" in the normal section, and the D0 bit becomes "1" when the normal section shifts to the advantageous section. Also, when the normal section shifts to the standby section, the D1 bit becomes "1". Furthermore, when shifting from the standby section to the advantageous section, the first bit "1" is shifted right by one. Furthermore, when shifting from the advantageous section to the normal section, the D0 bit is changed from "1" to "0".
The timing at which the advantageous section type flag is updated will be described later.

The advantageous section clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR) is "0" during the normal section and the standby section (details will be described later, but it will be "FFFF (H)" for a moment), and the transition to the advantageous section "1500 (D)" is set as the initial value (specific value). Also, the advantageous interval flag counter is set to be decremented by "1" per game not only during the advantageous interval but also during the normal interval or the standby interval. However, the minimum value is "0". For this reason, when the advantageous section clear counter (before subtraction) is "0" in the normal section or the standby section, if "1" is subtracted, a carry will occur ("FFFF (H)" will be generated). , and set to "0" if a digit is decremented. Therefore, during the normal section and the standby section, "1" is subtracted for each game, but "0" is maintained. In other words, when "0" is stored in the advantageous section clear counter, it is a normal section or a standby section (non-advantageous section).
Also, during the advantageous section, "1" is subtracted per game. For example, when "1500 (D)" is set as the initial value (specific value) as described above, the advantageous section clear counter becomes "1499 (D)" in the next game.
Note that the advantageous section clear counter stores an initial value of "1500 (D)" at maximum, and thus consists of 2 bytes. In other words, when a value other than "0" is stored in the advantageous interval clear counter, it is an advantageous interval.

The maximum payout notification flag (_FL_ADV_ORD) is "0" during the normal section and the standby section. Then, after moving to the advantageous section, when you first win the push order bell that allows you to get the maximum payout number in that slot machine (when activating the instruction function so that you can get the maximum payout number (correct push order is displayed) When doing)) becomes "00000001 (B)".
Here, taking the first embodiment as an example, the pressing order bell that can obtain the maximum number of payouts in the first embodiment is when a small winning combination B is won (see FIGS. 14 and 15. Correct pressing order 9 bells) payout.). Therefore, after moving to the advantageous section, when winning the small winning combination B and activating the instruction function, the maximum payout notification flag is updated to "1" at a predetermined timing.

Therefore, for example, when winning the small winning combination C in the first embodiment (in the order of pressing the correct answer, the number of payouts is 3), it does not correspond to the "maximum payout" here. In addition, even if an advantageous push order is displayed at the time of replay double winning, for example, it does not correspond to the "maximum payout" here. Furthermore, for example, in the first embodiment, a small winning combination F (payout of 10 coins) and a small winning combination G (payout of 9 coins) are won, and an effect is provided to suggest winning of the small winning combination F and small winning combination G, respectively. Even if it is output, it does not correspond to the "maximum payout" here.

This maximum payout notification flag is
a) winning a conditional device with an advantageous operating mode of the stop switch 42;
b) The winning conditional device is the conditional device with the largest number of payouts when the stop switch 42 is operated in an advantageous operation mode among the conditional devices having an advantageous operation mode,
c) When activating the instruction function during AT (when displaying push order instruction information)
is one of the conditions for updating from "0" to "1".

In addition, the maximum payout notification flag may become "1" even when the advantageous operation mode for the maximum payout is not displayed.
Examples of this include:
a) Winning a special role that does not have a set difference (including duplicate winning of a special role and other minor roles or replays), and based on the winning of that special role (from the time the special role was won In the case of shifting to the advantageous section, after winning the special role, after winning the special role, at a predetermined timing (when winning the special role, from the time the special role is won until the special role wins, time, at the start of the special game, during the special game, at the end of the special game, etc.), the maximum payout notification flag is updated to "1". That is, when shifting to the advantageous section based on the winning of the special combination, the maximum payout notification flag is updated to "1" based on the winning of the special combination.
b) After winning a rare small winning combination (for example, a small winning combination D, a small winning combination E1 in the first embodiment) and moving to an advantageous section, a special winning combination (a special winning combination with a set difference or no set difference (regardless of whether it is a special combination), after that, the maximum payout notification flag is updated to "1".
In the case of a) or b) above, the maximum payout notification flag is set to "1" in the thirtieth embodiment when a special combination is won. However, not limited to this, for example, when winning a special role, at a predetermined timing between winning a special role and winning a prize, during a special game, at the end of a special game, or at a predetermined timing after the end of a special game may

The maximum payout notification flag is a flag that is referred to when determining whether or not it is possible to end the advantageous section. When the maximum payout notification flag is "1", it is possible to end the advantageous section. Therefore, after shifting to the advantageous section, when the small winning combination B with the maximum payout is won, the instruction function is activated, and when the maximum payout notification flag becomes "1", the advantageous section can be terminated.
Also, as described above, when the maximum payout notification flag becomes "1" based on the winning of the special role, it is possible to end the advantageous section without activating the instruction function even once. .

When the maximum payout notification flag is "0", in principle, the advantageous section cannot be ended. After shifting to the advantageous section, the advantageous section is terminated after waiting for the maximum payout notification flag to be updated to "1".
However, when the maximum payout notification flag remains "0" and the maximum number of games played in the advantageous interval reaches "1500" games, that is, during the advantageous interval of 1500 games, the small winning combination B is won once. When there is not, even if the maximum payout notification flag is "0", the upper limit number of times "1500" of the number of games in the advantageous section is prioritized, and the advantageous section can be ended.
Also, when the maximum payout notification flag becomes "1" after shifting to the advantageous section, it is updated to "0" at the end of the advantageous section (based on the end of the advantageous section). In this embodiment, the timing of changing from "1" to "0" is set during the advantageous interval setting (M_ADV_SET; FIG. 246) in step S2724 in the game start set (MS_GAME_SET; FIG. 245), which will be described later. (M_RWM_CLEAR; FIG. 248) (these processes will be described later). In addition, the maximum payout notification flag may be updated to "0" in the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) (described later) or the like executed in the last game of the advantageous section without being limited to this.

The advantageous section display LED flag is a flag that becomes "0" when it is a normal section or a standby section (that is, when it is not an advantageous section) and becomes "1" when it is an advantageous section. Then, when the advantageous section display LED flag is "1", the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, and when the advantageous section display LED flag is "0", the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off.
Here, in the thirtieth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 142 (twenty-second embodiment), the advantageous section display LED 77 is displayed from segment 1P (decimal point (DP)) of digit 4a (lower digit of acquired number display LED 78). shall be configured.
Moving to the advantageous section and changing the advantageous section display LED flag from "0" to "1" is performed by the advantageous section setting (M_ADV_SET) in the game start set (MS_GAME_SET). Also, ending the advantageous section and changing the advantageous section display LED flag from "1" to "0" is done by RWM initialization (M_RWM_SET) during the advantageous section setting (M_ADV_SET) in the game start set (MS_GAME_SET). . Details of these processes will be described later.

The AT game number counter (_CT_ART) is a decrement counter that counts the number of AT (including ART) games, and is similar to the AT counter of the third embodiment (eg, FIG. 43).
Note that, unlike the advantageous section clear counter, when it reaches "0", subsequent counting (subtraction) is stopped.
The update (subtraction) of the AT game number counter during AT is immediately after the start switch 41 is operated during the main process (step S2702 in FIG. 244 described later).

In addition, in this embodiment, since the initial value of the number of AT games may exceed "255 (D)", a 2-byte counter is used. When the number of AT games is maximum "255 (D)" or less, it may be a 1-byte counter.
When starting AT (or when shifting to AT preparation), the initial value is set to the AT game number counter. The initial value may be a fixed value, or may be determined by a lottery or the like when AT is won. Moreover, after determining the initial value, the number of AT games may be updated to "0" without being changed thereafter. Alternatively, when it is decided to add the AT game number during AT (such as when winning in the addition lottery), the AT game number may be increased. In this case, the increment is added to the AT game number counter.

Also, in FIG. 243, the addresses of each data are not shown, but when they are arranged at consecutive addresses, for example,
F020 (H): Advantageous section type flag F021 (H) and F022 (H): Advantageous section clear counter F023 (H): Maximum payout notification flag F024 (H): Advantageous section display LED flag F025 (H) and F026 (H) ): AT game number counter Arranged in the storage area of the RWM 53 like this.
Also, some or all of them may not be consecutive addresses. for example,
F020 (H): Advantageous section type flag F021 (H) and F022 (H): Advantageous section clear counter F030 (H): Maximum payout notification flag F031 (H): Advantageous section display LED flag F032 (H) and F033 (H) ): AT game number counter Arrangement like this is also possible.
However, if the storage area consists of 2 bytes, such as the advantageous section clear counter and the AT game count counter, the upper digit storage area and the lower digit storage area are continuous for the convenience of calculation. An address is preferred.

FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing main processing in the thirtieth embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to the twenty-sixth embodiment shown in FIG. In FIG. 244, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 188, different step numbers are assigned to different or added processes, and the step numbers are underlined.
In FIG. 244, the game start set (M_GAME_SET) in step S2701 is processing corresponding to step S2172 in FIG. 188 (26th embodiment). In the game start set, at the end of the advantageous interval, clearing processing of data relating to the advantageous interval (data shown in FIG. 243) is executed. This processing will be described later.

Also, after accepting the start switch in step S2179, the process proceeds to step S2702 and updates the AT game number counter. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the AT game number counter described above when the AT is in progress. Therefore, this process is not executed in normal sections, standby sections, and advantageous sections during non-AT.
Further, during AT, whether or not to add the number of AT games is performed based on the combination lottery result of the combination lottery process in step S2180. For example, when a rare combination is won, the number of times AT is added to the game may be determined. Therefore, when the AT game number is added and the addition amount is added to the AT game number counter, it is executed after the process of step S2180 (illustration is omitted in FIG. 244).
It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, after the start switch reception (step S2179), AT game number counter update is performed in step S2702, but not limited to this, it may be performed after the role lottery process in step S2180.

Also, after the combination lottery process of step S2180, the process advances to step S2703 to update the advantageous section type. This process is a process shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later, and is a process of updating the value of the above-described advantageous section type flag according to any of the normal section, standby section, and advantageous section.
Next, the process advances to step S2704 to set the push order instruction number (M_ORD_INF). This processing corresponds to the pressing order instruction number setting of the twenty-eighth embodiment shown in FIG. This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. The pushing order instruction number setting is a process of generating pushing order instruction data and displaying the pushing order when the instruction function is activated in the game. Furthermore, in the thirtieth embodiment, the maximum payout notification flag described above may be updated during this process.

The game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) in step S2705 is a process corresponding to step S2196 in the twenty-sixth embodiment shown in FIG. In the thirtieth embodiment, in the game end check process, it is determined whether or not the advantageous interval is to be ended, and when the advantageous interval is to be ended, preparations are made to end the advantageous interval. Details of this processing will be described later (FIGS. 252 and 253).

FIG. 245 is a flow chart showing the game start set (M_GAME_SET) in step S2701 in FIG.
It should be noted that 1BB in the thirtieth embodiment is assumed to be a special combination that does not have a setting difference. Also, when 1BB is won, after the 1BB game ends, the game is shifted to the advantageous section. That is, at the same time that 1BB is won, the advantageous section is also won.

First, in step S2711, a game standby display time is set (stored in a predetermined storage area (not shown) of the RWM 53). In this embodiment, "26846" interrupts (≈60000 ms, ie, about 60 seconds (1 minute)) are set as the game standby display time. When the game standby display time is set in step S2701, the value is subtracted by "1" for each interrupt process from this point.

When the game standby display time becomes "0", the winning number data is cleared in step S2175 (waiting for medal insertion) in FIG. This process is a process of clearing the storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) of the winning number data at the address "F011 (H)" shown in FIG. 222 (28th embodiment).
As a result, "00" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. FIG. For example, even if the number of medals paid out to the game last time is "9" and the player completes the game by operating the settlement switch 46, "00" will be displayed after about one minute. be done. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of vacant machines by recognizing them as vacant machines by hall clerks and other players.
In addition, instead of displaying "00" on the acquired number display LED 78, the acquired number display LED 78 (upper digits and lower digits) may be extinguished, or the upper digits of the acquired number display LED 78 may be extinguished and the lower digits may be turned off. may display "0". In any case, it suffices if the display is executed so that the hall clerk or another player can recognize the empty table.

Next, the process advances to step S2712 to execute the process of initializing the pressing order instruction number. This processing is processing for clearing the storage area of the push order instruction number stored in the address of the RWM 53 .
In the next step S2713, the data of the symbol combination display flag is obtained. In this process, the symbol combination (data of the symbol combination display flag (not shown) provided in the RWM 53) on the active line after the reels 31 have stopped in the previous game is obtained.

In the next step S2714, it is determined whether or not the 1BB operation pattern is displayed. In this process, when the bit corresponding to 1BB in the data of the symbol combination display flag is "1", it is determined as "Yes", and when it is "0", it is determined as "No". When it is determined that the 1BB operation pattern is displayed, the process proceeds to step S2715, and when it is determined that it is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S2719.
Each bit of the symbol combination display flag is set so as to correspond to each bit of the operating state flag. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 182 (26th embodiment), since the D2 bit of the operating state flag of the address "F010 (H)" is the bit corresponding to 1BB, the bit corresponding to 1BB of the symbol combination display flag is also D2-bit.

In step S2715, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is in the waiting section. This judgment is made by judging the value of the advantageous section type flag in FIG. 243, and when the D1 bit is "1", it is judged to be the standby section. When it is determined that it is the waiting section, the process proceeds to step S2716, and when it is determined that it is not the waiting section, the process proceeds to step S2718.
In step S2716, the bit of the advantageous section type flag is shifted to the right by "1". i.e.
Before shift: 00000010 (B)
After shift: 00000001 (B)
becomes.
As a result, the advantageous section type flag is updated from the value indicating the waiting section to the value indicating the advantageous section.

Next, proceeding to step S2717, "1" is saved (stored) in the maximum payout notification flag. i.e.
Before saving (storing): 00000000 (B)
After saving (storing): 00000001 (B)
becomes.
As a result, the value of the maximum payout notification flag changes from the unnotified state to others, as shown in FIG.
In addition, when the maximum payout notification flag is already "1", when proceeding to the process of setting the maximum payout notification flag to "1" (for example, when proceeding to step S2812 in FIG. 251 described later), the maximum payout notification "1" is overwritten in the flag.
Through steps S2716 and S2717 described above, the advantageous interval type flag is updated (updated from the standby interval to the advantageous interval) and the maximum payout notification flag is updated (updated from unnotified to others) based on the winning of 1BB.

In step S2718, the number of obtainable coins at the time of 1BB operation (during 1BB game) is saved. This process is a process of storing the maximum number of wins that can be obtained in the 1BB game in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 . Then, the process proceeds to step S2719.
In the next step S2719, an operating state flag (_FL_ACTION) is generated. This operating state flag is the same as that shown in the twenty-sixth embodiment (address "F010(H)") in FIG. In this step S2719, the value of the operating state flag is generated based on the symbol combination display flag.
Furthermore, in the next step S2720, the operating state flag is saved (stored). This process is a process of storing the generated operating state flag (stored, for example, in the A register at this time) in the address "F010 (H)" of the RWM 53 . As a result, the operating state flag information up to that point is replaced with the operating state flag information updated in step S2720.
For example, when a combination of 1BB symbols is displayed (at the time of 1BB winning), the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB of the operating state flag changes from "0" to "1".

In the next step S2722, it is determined whether or not the RB operation has started. In the present embodiment, in the 1BB game, the RB operation flag is turned off (“0”) at the end of two games (or two wins), but when the end condition of the 1BB game is not met ( When the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB of the operation state flag is "1"), it is set to "1" in this game start set. If it is determined in step S2715 that the RB is in operation, the process proceeds to step S2723, and if it is determined that the RB is not in operation, the process proceeds to step S2724.

In the next step S2723, the number of games played and the number of prizes won when RB is activated are saved. In this process, "2 (H)" is saved (stored) in a storage area (not shown) of the number-of-games counter provided in the RWM 53 when the RB is activated, and when the RB is activated provided in the RWM 53 This is a process of saving (storing) "2(H)" in a storage area (not shown) of the number-of-winning-awards counter. Then, the process proceeds to step S2724.

Both the number-of-games counter when RB is activated and the number-of-wins counter when RB is activated are set to "2 (H)" as an initial value, and each time the number of games or the number of winnings increases by "1", A counter that is decremented by "1" each time. However, not limited to this, the initial value of these counter values is set to "0", and each time the number of games played or the number of wins increases by "1", the counter values are incremented by "1", and these counter values are set to "2 ( H)” may be determined.

In the next step S2724, advantageous section setting (M_ADV_SET) is performed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 246, which will be described later, and updates the advantageous section clear counter and the like.
Here, the advantageous interval clear counter is a counter that is decremented by "1" every game not only in the advantageous interval but also in all game intervals (normal interval, standby interval, and advantageous interval). In this respect, it differs from a counter that counts only during an advantageous interval like the advantageous interval counter shown in the third embodiment of FIG.
In step S501 shown in FIG. 46(e), the advantageous section counter value is updated ("1" is added), but since this process is executed only during the advantageous section, prior to this process, It is necessary to determine whether or not the current game is in the advantageous section. However, in the present embodiment, the advantageous interval clear counter is decremented by "1" every game without judging whether or not it is an advantageous interval, so the processing can be simplified accordingly. This makes it possible to reduce the program capacity (reduce the storage capacity of the ROM 54).
Even if the value of the advantageous section clear counter is subtracted by "1" every game in any game section, the value of the advantageous section clear counter is "0" in the normal section and the standby section. becomes.
Also, when the conditions for starting the advantageous section are satisfied, the value of the advantageous section clear counter is set to "1500 (D)". ” is updated to the subtracted value.
Then, when it becomes "0" by subtracting "1", it can be determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied.
Further, when there is a carry-down by subtracting "1", it can be determined that the previous game was in the normal section or the standby section.
In this way, program processing can be reduced (simplified).

In the next step S2725, based on the data of the symbol combination display flag acquired in step S2713, it is determined whether or not the replay symbol combination is displayed (whether the replay wins). When it is determined that the combination of symbols for replay has been displayed, the process proceeds to step S2716, and when it is determined that it has not been displayed, the process proceeds to step S2728.

In step S2726, the main control board 50 reads bet medals. This process is a process of reading the number of medals betted in the previous game. Next, the process advances to step S2727 to set automatic bet number data. This process is a process of updating the data in the automatic bet number storage area provided in the RWM 53 (storing "3 (H)").
The flow then advances to step S2728 to set an active state output request. In the next step S2729, control command set 1 is executed. Specifically, it transmits to the sub-control board 80 information indicating that the replay has been activated, that the 1BB has been activated, and the like. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

FIG. 246 is a flow chart showing advantageous section setting (M_ADV_SET) in step S2724 in FIG.
First, in the advantageous section clear counter RWM address set in step S2741, the address of the advantageous section clear counter shown in FIG. 243 is stored. Here, the advantageous section clear counter consists of 2 bytes, and stores lower byte data. Therefore, when the addresses of the advantageous section clear counter are, for example, "F021(H)" and "F022(H)", the lower byte address (F021(H)) is designated. Then, the lower byte data is stored in the HL register.

The flow then advances to step S2742 to execute a 2-byte countdown (M_W_CNT_DOWN). Here, a process of subtracting "1" from the value of the advantageous section clear counter is executed. The details will be described later (Fig. 247).
In this 2-byte countdown, when the operation result is "0" (that is, when the value before the operation was "1"), the zero flag becomes "1".
Also, in the 2-byte countdown, when a carry-down occurs as a result of the operation (that is, when the value before the operation was "0"), the carry flag becomes "1".

Here, the zero flag and carry flag will be explained.
An F (flag) register is provided as one of the registers (A register, H register, etc.) used in this embodiment. The F register, like other registers, consists of bits D0 to D7. A carry flag is assigned to the D0 bit, and a zero flag is assigned to the D6 bit.
The carry flag executes arithmetic processing (for example, addition processing, subtraction processing, logical product processing, logical sum processing, exclusive logical sum, etc.; the same shall apply hereinafter), and the result of the computation causes an overflow or a carry-down. sometimes "1". On the other hand, it becomes "0" when the arithmetic processing is executed and the result of the arithmetic operation does not cause overflow or undercarriage.
Further, the zero flag becomes "1" when the arithmetic processing is executed and the arithmetic result becomes "0". On the other hand, it becomes "0" when the arithmetic processing is executed and the arithmetic result does not become "0".

Next, proceeding to step S2743, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section clear counter before calculation is "0". This judgment is made by judging that the advantageous section clear counter before the calculation is "0" when the above-mentioned carry flag becomes "1" after the calculation of the 2-byte countdown, and when the carry flag is not "1". determines that the advantageous interval clear counter before calculation is not "0".
When it is determined that the advantageous section clear counter before calculation is "0", the process proceeds to step S2747, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S2744. Here, "the advantageous interval clear counter before calculation is "0"" indicates that the previous game was in the normal interval or the standby interval (non-advantageous interval).

In step S2744, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section clear counter after the 2-byte countdown calculation is "0". This determination is made by determining that the post-computation advantageous section clear counter is "0" when the above-mentioned zero flag becomes "1" after the computation, and determining that the post-computation advantageous section clear counter is "0", and when the zero flag is not "1", the post-computation advantageous section clear counter is determined to be "0". It is determined that the section clear counter is not "0". Here, "the post-computation advantageous interval clear counter is not "0"" indicates that the previous game and the current game are advantageous intervals.
If it is determined that the post-computation advantageous section clear counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S2745, and if it is determined that it is not "0", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. Here, "the post-calculation advantageous section clear counter is '0'" means that the previous game was in the advantageous section, but the current game is in the normal section (non-advantageous section) (from the advantageous section to the normal section). migration).
In step S2745, the number of RWM initialization bytes is set. This process stores the total number of initialization bytes in the B register. For example, when the number of initialization bytes is 20 (H), "20 (H)" is set to the B register value.

The process then advances to step S2746 to execute RWM initialization (M_RWM_CLEAR). This initialization is performed when the advantageous section clear counter value becomes "0" after subtracting "1" (that is, when the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied). is a process for initializing (clearing) the Therefore, the data (counters, flags, etc.) shown in FIG. 243, for example, are cleared. RWM initialization will be described later (FIG. 248).

Next, proceeding to step S2747, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section type flag is "1". This process determines whether or not the D0 bit of the advantageous section type flag is "1", determines "Yes" when it is "1", and determines "No" when it is not "1". . In other words, this process determines whether or not the conditions for transitioning from a normal section or a waiting section (non-advantageous section) to an advantageous section are satisfied.
If it is determined that the game section type flag is "1" (the conditions for shifting to the advantageous section are satisfied), the process proceeds to step S2748, and if it is not "1" (the conditions for shifting to the advantageous section are not satisfied) When it is determined, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S2748, the initial value is saved (stored) in the advantageous section clear counter. The initial value in this embodiment is set to "1500 (D)". Therefore, "DC(H)" is stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and "5(H)" is stored at the address indicated by adding "1" to the HL register value. Since "F021(H)" is stored in the HL register in step S2741 described above, the HL register value indicates the address of the lower bits of the advantageous section clear counter at step S2748.
therefore,
F021 (H) (Advantageous section clear counter lower byte): DC (H)
F022 (H) (Advantageous section clear counter upper byte): 5 (H)
becomes.
Note that "5DC(H)"="1500(D)".

Next, the process advances to step S2749 to save (store) "1" in the advantageous section display LED flag. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends. When "1" is stored in the advantageous section display LED flag in step S2749, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit when the digit 4a is lit in subsequent interrupt processing.
Here, LED display control for lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 will be described. The LED display control of the thirtieth embodiment can be explained using the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in FIG. 149 (22nd embodiment).

In FIG. 149, when the interrupt processing corresponds to interrupt "2" in FIG. Therefore, even if the advantageous section display LED flag is "1", the lighting process of the advantageous section display LED 77 is actually performed by dynamic lighting only when the interrupt is "2", and the interrupts "1" and "3" are executed. ˜“5”, step S1552 in FIG. 149 is not executed.

In the thirtieth embodiment, when proceeding to step S1552 in FIG. 149, it is referred to whether or not the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is "1". Then, when it is determined that the advantageous section display LED flag is "1", it is determined whether or not the digit to be lit in this interrupt process is digit 4. When the LED display counter value is "00001000 (B)", it is determined that digit 4 is on. In this case (when the advantageous section display LED flag is "1" and digit 4 is lit), the segment 1 data set in step S1551 and "10000000 (B)" are ORed and output. Set as segment 1 data for port 3. As a result, data is set that enables the segment 1P of the digit 4a (that is, the advantageous section display LED 77) to light up.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the advantageous section display LED flag is not "1", the OR operation described above is not executed, or the segment 1 data set in step S1551 and "00000000 (B)" are ORed. Set the data as segment 1 data for output port 3.

FIG. 247 is a flow chart showing the 2-byte countdown (M_W_CNT_DOWN) in step S2742 in FIG.
In the 2-byte countdown, 2-byte data subtraction in step S2761 is executed. This process is executed as follows.
When proceeding to step S2761, as described above, in step S2741 of FIG. 246, the HL register stores the low-order digit address of the advantageous section clear counter. Therefore, the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is the lower digit data of the advantageous section clear counter. The value stored at the address indicated by adding "1" to the HL register value is data of the upper digits of the advantageous section clear counter.
When the carry flag becomes "1" as a result of subtracting "1" (example 4 described later), "0" is stored in the address indicated by the HL register value, and "1" is stored in the HL register value. " is added to store "0" at the address indicated by the value. That is, "0" is stored in the upper byte of the advantageous section clear counter, and "0" is stored in the lower byte.

Specific examples are as follows.
(Example 1)
Data stored at the address of HL register value + 1 (upper digit): 05 (H)
Data stored at address of HL register value (lower digit): DC (H)
When , subtracting "1" gives
Data stored at the address of HL register value + 1 (upper digit): 05 (H)
Data stored at the address of the HL register value (lower digit): DB(H)
Thus, the carry flag=“0” and the zero flag=“0”.
(Example 2)
Data stored at the address of HL register value + 1 (upper digit): 01 (H)
Data stored at the address of the HL register value (lower digit): 00 (H)
When , subtracting "1" gives
Data stored at the address of HL register value + 1 (upper digit): 00 (H)
Data stored at the address of the HL register value (lower digit): FF (H)
Thus, the carry flag=“0” and the zero flag=“0”.

(Example 3)
Data stored at the address of HL register value + 1 (upper digit): 00 (H)
Data stored at the address of the HL register value (lower digit): 01 (H)
When , subtracting "1" gives
Data stored at the address of HL register value + 1 (upper digit): 00 (H)
Data stored at the address of the HL register value (lower digit): 00 (H)
Thus, carry flag=“0” and zero flag=“1”.
(Example 4)
Data stored at the address of HL register value + 1 (upper digit): 00 (H)
Data stored at the address of the HL register value (lower digit): 00 (H)
When , subtracting "1" gives
Data stored at the address of HL register value + 1 (upper digit): 00 (H)
Data stored at the address of the HL register value (lower digit): 00 (H)
Thus, the carry flag=“1” and the zero flag=“0”.

In this example 4, when "1" is actually subtracted, at that point a carry occurs (upper digit "FF(H)" and lower digit "FF(H)"), as described above. "0" is stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and "0" is stored at the address indicated by the value obtained by adding "1" to the HL register value. As a result, both the data (lower digits) stored at the address indicated by the HL register value and the data (upper digits) stored at the address indicated by adding "1" to the HL register value are "0". becomes.

FIG. 248 is a flow chart showing RWM initialization (M_RWM_CLEAR) in step S2746 in FIG.
Before this RWM initialization is executed, the number of initialization bytes is stored in the B register in step S2745 of FIG. In the above example, "20 (H)" is set to the B register value. The HL register stores the address of the lower byte of the advantageous section clear counter in step S2741 of FIG. In the above example, "F021(H)" is stored in the HL register.
In FIG. 248, in step S2771, RWM initialization data is set. In this process, the A register value and the A register value are XORed, and the result of the calculation is stored in the A register. As a result of this calculation, the A register value becomes "0 (H)".

Next, the flow advances to step S2772 to initialize the RWM. This process is a process of storing the A register value (that is, "0 (H)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. By this processing, the data of "F021(H)" to be initialized first becomes "0".
Next, the flow advances to step S2773 to change the RWM initialization address. This process is a process of adding "1" to the HL register value.
In the next step S2774, it is determined whether or not the initialization of the RWM has been completed. This process subtracts "1" from the B register value, determines whether or not the B register value after subtraction is "0", and terminates the RWM initialization when it is determined to be "0". Then judge.
When it is determined that the RWM initialization is finished, the processing according to this flowchart is finished. When it is determined that the RWM initialization is not finished (B register value ≠ "0"), the process returns to step S2772 to continue the initialization.

According to the above flow chart, the number of bytes corresponding to the number set in the B register is initialized. Also, initialization is performed in address order. Therefore, if the RWM addresses to be initialized at the end of the advantageous interval are arranged consecutively, the smallest address is specified first, and the number of bytes to be initialized is set in the B register, the initialization will be performed at the end of the advantageous interval. You can initialize any data that needs to be initialized.
Here, all of the five data shown in FIG. 243 are data to be initialized by this RWM initialization.
On the other hand, regardless of whether or not the advantageous interval has ended, data that will continue to be used in the next game after the advantageous interval has ended, such as setting value information (“F000 (H)” in the example of FIG. 182), RT The status number, the stored number data, the LED display counter (“F018(H)” in the example of FIG. 182), etc. are not subject to initialization.
Data to be initialized by RWM initialization is limited to data within the use area shown in the 20th and 26th embodiments, and data outside the use area is not to be initialized.

In the RWM initialization example of FIG. 248, the addresses of the data relating to the advantageous section to be initialized are arranged consecutively at the end of the advantageous section, and the address to be initialized is updated by "1" in step S2773. made it However, not limited to this, even if the addresses of the data to be initialized are not continuous, by creating a program that can individually specify the addresses of the data to be initialized, it is possible to determine the advantageous section to be initialized. Data can be initialized.

FIG. 249 is a flow chart showing the advantageous section type update in step S2703 in FIG.
First, in step S2781, it is determined whether or not the winning section has been won. It should be noted that any of the above-described embodiments may be applied to the winning of the advantageous section. For example, taking the first embodiment as an example, as shown in FIG. 17, there is a case in which the winning of the advantageous section is possible at the same time as the winning of the specific condition device. Alternatively, apart from the lottery for the condition device (role), for example, in FIG. If the lottery for the advantageous section is based on, for example, the first embodiment, it is a condition that there is no difference in the winning probability depending on the set value.

When it is determined in step S2781 that the advantageous section has been won, the process advances to step S2782, and when it is determined that the advantageous section has not been won, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S2782, it is determined whether or not to shift to the waiting section. It is possible to arbitrarily set whether to shift to the advantageous section or to the waiting section before starting the next game when winning the advantageous section. For example, taking FIG. 23 of the first embodiment as an example, as in FIG. It is judged that it will shift to the advantageous section without going through.

On the other hand, in FIG. 23, like "timing 2", when winning the special combination (1BBA) and winning the advantageous section, it is determined to shift to the standby section.
If it is determined in step S2782 to shift to the standby section, the process proceeds to step S2783, and if it is determined not to shift to the standby section (shift to the advantageous section), the process proceeds to step S2784.
In step S2783, the advantageous section type flag is updated (stored) to "00000010 (B)". Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
On the other hand, in step S2784, the advantageous section type flag is updated (stored) to "00000001 (B)". Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

In the above, when the process proceeds to step S2783 and the advantageous section type flag is updated (stored) to "00000010 (B)", in FIG. , the advantageous section type flag is shifted to the right by "1".
By this step S2716, the advantageous section type flag is
Before update: 00000010 (B) (indicates standby section)
After update: 00000001 (B) (indicates advantageous section)
becomes.

On the other hand, in the above, when the advantageous section type flag is updated (stored) to "00000001 (B)" in step S2784, the value of the advantageous section type flag is maintained until the advantageous section ends. .
Also, when the advantageous section ends, when the RWM initialization is executed in step S2746 of FIG. 246 described above, the advantageous section type flag is also initialized at this time. As a result, the advantageous section type flag becomes "00000000 (B)" and is updated to a value indicating a normal section.

FIG. 250 is a flow chart showing the push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF) in step S2704 in FIG.
The pressing order instruction number set has been described in FIG. 228 (28th embodiment), but will be described again in the 30th embodiment.
First, in step S2791, it is determined whether or not the operating condition of the instruction function is satisfied in the game. In this embodiment, when a conditional device having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 is won during AT or the like, it is determined that the operation condition of the instruction function is satisfied.
Here, whether or not it is in the AT is determined by reading the value of the AT game number counter, and when it is not "0", it is determined that the AT is in progress. In addition, as a method of determining whether or not AT is in progress, in addition to determining the value of the AT game counter, for example, an address of RWM for storing the main game state is provided, and the value of the main game state is AT. When the value corresponds to the inside, it is determined that the AT is in progress.
Also, as in the third embodiment, when "advantageous section = AT", when the advantageous section clear counter is a value other than "0", AT is in progress (the operation condition of the indication function is satisfied). can be judged.

Furthermore, not only during the AT, but also during the advantageous section and before the start of the AT (AT precursor, AT preparation, etc.), or even in a state where AT has not yet been decided (AT false precursor, CZ, etc.) It may be determined that the operation conditions of the indication function are satisfied. For example, there is a case where the maximum payout notification flag is "0" after shifting to the advantageous section. In such a case, the instruction function is activated when the first small winning combination B is won, and the maximum payout notification flag is set to "1" as soon as possible. This is because after that, the advantageous section can be terminated when the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied. Therefore, in step S2791, when the operation condition of the instruction function is satisfied,
(1) When it is in AT and wins a condition device having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 (2) When it is in an advantageous section and it is necessary to promote RT (for example, replay B in the first embodiment when elected to the group)
(3) After shifting to the advantageous section, in a state where AT has not yet started (AT precursor, AT preparation, AT false precursor, CZ, etc.), when the maximum payout notification flag is "0", a small winning combination B When you are elected to the group.

During AT, even if the maximum payout notification flag is already "1", it is determined that the operation condition of the instruction function is satisfied when a condition device having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is won.
On the other hand, when the maximum payout notification flag is still "0" in the case where the AT is not yet executed even though it is an advantageous section (the above-mentioned AT precursor, AT preparation, AT false precursor, CZ, etc.) , it is determined that the operation condition of the instruction function is satisfied when the minor winning group B is won. On the other hand, when the maximum payout notification flag is "1", it is determined that the operation condition of the instruction function is not satisfied even when the minor combination B group is won.
If it is determined in step S2791 that the condition for activating the instruction function is satisfied, the process advances to step S2792, and if it is determined that the condition for operation of the instruction function is not satisfied, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

In step S2792, a condition device number is set. 244, when the winning lottery is performed in step S2180, the conditional machine number won in the game is stored at a predetermined address of the RWM53. Then, in this step S2792, the value stored at this address is stored in the A register.
In addition, in the example of this flowchart, it is assumed that a small win B1 with the condition device number "11" in FIG. 14 is won. Therefore, "11 (D)", that is, "B (H)" is stored in the condition device number storage area and the A register of the RWM 53 .
Next, proceeding to step S2793, the maximum payout notification flag is updated. This processing will be described later.

In the next step S2794, a push order instruction number table is set. Taking the twenty-eighth embodiment of FIG. 225 as an example, this process is a process of storing the head address "1900 (H)" of the pressing order instruction number table in FIG. 225 in the HL register.
Next, the flow advances to step S2795 to set designated address data. In step S2795, the value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is set as a new HL register value, and the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.

That is, the data of the conditional device number stored in the RWM 53 is used as an offset value, and the data corresponding to the address obtained by adding the offset value to the top address of the pushing order instruction number table is acquired.
Therefore, since the HL register value at this time is "1900 (H)" as described above, the A register value "B (H)" is added to this value to obtain a new HL register value "190B ( H)”.
Then, as shown in FIG. 225, the pressing order instruction number "A1(H)" corresponding to the address "190B(H)" of the pressing order instruction number table is stored in the A register.

Next, the process advances to step S2796 to store the push order instruction number in the RWM53. That is, the A register value is stored in the pressing order instruction number storage area in the RWM 53 .
In the next step S2797, the A register value (pressing order instruction number) is stored in the acquired number data storage area. In the example of FIG. 222 (28th embodiment), it is stored at address "F011(H)". Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

In this step S2797, when the push order instruction number is stored in the storage area for the obtained number data, in the interrupt process executed after this process, the push order instruction is given to the obtained number display LED 78 at the lighting timing of the digits 3a and 4a. Information is displayed. For example, when the push order instruction number "A1(H)" is stored as described above, "=" is displayed for the digit 3a during the interrupt processing for lighting the digit 3a, and the interrupt processing for lighting the next digit 4a is performed. digit 4a is displayed as "1".

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2791 that the operation condition of the instruction function is not satisfied and the processing according to this flowchart is finished, the storage area for the winning number data is cleared in the game start set in step S2701 in FIG. Therefore, the value of the acquired number data storage area remains "0". Therefore, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 (digit 3a and digit 4a) remains "00".

FIG. 251 is a flow chart showing updating of the maximum payout notification flag in step S2793 in FIG.
First, in step S2811, it is determined whether or not a minor winning combination B (one of B1 to B12) has been won in the game. Before proceeding to this process, in step S2792, since the condition device number that was won in the game is stored in the A register, the A register value is the condition device number "11 (D)" to "22 (D )” (“0B(H)” to “16(H)”). If it is determined that the minor winning combination B has been won, the process proceeds to step S2812, and if it is determined that the minor winning combination B has not been won, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
When proceeding to step S2812, "1" is saved (stored) as the maximum payout notification flag. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

From FIGS. 250 and 251 described above, even during AT, the maximum payout notification flag does not become "1" unless the minor winning combination B is won. For example, even if a small winning combination C is won during AT and the order of pressing the correct answer is displayed by the operation of the instruction function, the maximum payout notification flag does not become "1".
Further, after AT is started, the maximum payout notification flag is set to "1" when the first minor combination B is won. Therefore, in subsequent ATs, the maximum payout notification flag "1" may be overwritten each time a small winning combination B is won, or once the maximum payout notification flag is set to "1", the During 250, step S2793 may be skipped.
Furthermore, in the thirtieth embodiment, when the small winning combination B is first won during the AT, the maximum payout is substantially processed before the pushing order instruction number is stored in the winning number data (step S2797 in FIG. 250). The notification flag is updated to "1". However, it is not limited to this, and the maximum payout notification flag may be updated to "1" after the push order instruction number is stored in the obtained number data, that is, after the push order instruction information is substantially displayed. good.

FIG. 252 is a flow chart showing the game end check process (M_GAME_SET) in step S2705 in FIG.
In the above-described various embodiments, there is a type in which an advantageous section is terminated at the same time when AT is terminated (for example, the third embodiment), and an advantageous section termination condition for an advantageous section even when AT is terminated is (e.g., fifth embodiment (example 2) shown in FIG. 61 (a9)) that does not end the advantageous section unless satisfying Suppose it is a thing.
First, in step S2821, it is determined whether or not the number of AT games is "0". This process is performed by determining whether or not the AT game number counter is "0". When it is determined that the number of AT games is "0", the process proceeds to step S2822, and when it is determined that the number of AT games is not "0", the process proceeds to step S2824.

In step S2822, it is determined whether or not the maximum payout notification flag is "1". This is because the advantageous interval can be ended if the maximum payout notification flag is "1", but the advantageous interval cannot be ended if it is not "1" (however, there are some exceptions as described later).
In step S2822, when it is determined that the maximum payout notification flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S2823, and when it is determined not to be "1", the process proceeds to step S2824.
In step S2823, advantageous section end preparation (M_ADVEND_STNBY) is executed. Details of this processing will be described later (FIG. 253).

In step S2824, processing for clearing the flag of the condition device is performed. This processing is processing for clearing conditions other than the conditional device for the special combination, and when it is determined that the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination has stopped on the effective line, the processing for clearing the conditional device for the special combination is also executed. In the next step S2825, processing for turning off the replay display LED is performed. This process corresponds to the process of setting the bit (for example, D3 bit) corresponding to replay of the medal management flag stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 to "0". The process then advances to step S2826 to clear the replay activation flag. Although not shown in the twenty-sixth embodiment of FIG. 182, for example, this process is a process of setting the bit corresponding to replay to "0" when the operating state flag has a bit corresponding to replay.

In the next step S2827, 1BB operation management is performed. This process is a process of judging whether or not conditions for ending the 1BB game are satisfied during the 1BB game. In the next step S2828, it is determined whether or not the RB is in operation. This process determines whether or not the D4 bit is "0" in the operating state flag shown in the twenty-sixth embodiment of FIG. If it is determined that it is time), the process advances to step S2829 to execute RB operation management, and if it is determined to be "0" (that is, when RB is not activated), the processing according to this flow chart ends.

FIG. 253 is a flow chart showing the advantageous section end preparation (M_ADVEND_STNBY) in step S2823 in FIG.
In FIG. 253, in step S2841, "1" is stored in the advantageous section clear counter. This process executes the following processes.
(1) Store "1 (H)" in the HL register. As a result, the H register value becomes "0 (H)" and the L register value becomes "1 (H)".
(2) Next, the L register value "1 (H)" is stored in the lower address of the advantageous section clear counter, and the H register value "0 (H)" is stored in the upper address.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends. As described above, the upper byte of the advantageous section clear counter is "00000000 (B)" and the lower byte is "00000001 (B)".

In addition, this advantageous section end preparation is executed at the time of the game end check as described above. is executed. In the advantageous interval setting (FIG. 246), “1” is subtracted from the advantageous interval clear counter value in steps S2741 and S2742, so the determination in step S2744 is “Yes”. As a result, the process proceeds to steps S2745 and S2746, and RWM initialization of the data relating to the advantageous section is executed.

The advantageous section clear counter is set to "1500 (D)" as an initial value (specific value) when shifting to the advantageous section, and is then decremented by "1" every game.
Further, in the thirtieth embodiment, since the specification is such that the advantageous section ends at the same time as the AT ends, preparations for ending the advantageous section are made when the number of AT games played becomes "0". For example, after shifting to the advantageous section, after playing "50" games, when shifting to AT of "100" games, the following counts are made. In addition, the following numerical values are all shown in decimal numbers.
a) When transitioning to an advantageous section Advantageous section clear counter: "1500"
AT game number counter: "0"
b) When shifting to AT Advantageous section clear counter: "1450"
AT game number counter: "100"
c) At the end of AT AT game number counter: "0"
Advantageous section clear counter: Updated from "1350" to "1" d) At the time of game start set after c) above AT game number counter: "0"
Advantageous section clear counter: "0"

By storing "1" in the advantageous interval clear counter through the above advantageous interval end preparations, it becomes unnecessary to store data indicating whether or not the advantageous interval end condition is satisfied at a predetermined address of the RWM 53 .
If the data indicating whether or not the termination condition of the advantageous section is satisfied is stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53, the capacity of the RWM 53 will be compressed accordingly.
Further, when the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied, a process of storing data indicating that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied in a predetermined address of the RWM 53 is required. Furthermore, it is necessary to read the data stored in the predetermined address every game and determine whether or not the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied. Therefore, that much program capacity is required, and the capacity of the ROM 54 is squeezed.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, simply by storing "1" in the advantageous interval clear counter in preparation for the end of the advantageous interval, the advantageous interval clear counter becomes "0" in the subsequent advantageous interval setting (Fig. 246). Therefore, the processing (clearing processing of the RWM 53) at the end of the advantageous section can be executed.

It should be noted that in FIG. 252, the determination of step S2821 is determined as "Yes" when the AT game number counter changes from "1" to "0" in the game (step S2702 in FIG. 244). I assume. Therefore, it is possible not to execute the processing of steps S2821 to S2823 in FIG. 252 when AT is not in progress.
However, even in the normal section, the process of step S2821 in FIG. 252 may be executed in each game, the process proceeds from step S2821 to step S2822, and when it is determined "No" in step S2822, the process proceeds to step S2824.

Further, in the flowchart of FIG. 252, when the maximum payout notification flag remains "0" and the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches "1500" which is the upper limit of continuation, the following occurs.
After shifting to the advantageous section, the advantageous section clear counter is decremented by "1" in the advantageous section setting (FIG. 246) during each game and game start set. Then, when the advantage zone clear counter becomes "0" as a result of the subtraction in the game, the determination in step S2744 in FIG. 246 becomes "Yes", so the RWM is initialized. As a result, the game is shifted to the normal section at the start of the game.
Therefore, in such a case, the advantageous section ends without going through the advantageous section end preparation shown in FIG.

Although the thirtieth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above description, and the following various modifications are possible.
(1) The subtraction of the game section clear counter is executed when the game is set to start, but immediately after the start switch is operated (for example, after step S2178 in FIG. A game end check process (step S2705 in FIG. 244) may be executed at any timing.
(2) In this embodiment, the value to be set in the advantageous section clear counter when transitioning to the advantageous section is set to "1500 (D)". This is based on the fact that the upper limit of the number of games played in the advantageous interval is "1500" and that "1" is subtracted per game in the advantageous interval. Therefore, the initial value to be set in the advantageous section clear counter is not necessarily limited to "1500 (D)". may be For example, "3000 (D)" may be set as an initial value in the advantageous section clear counter, and "1" may be subtracted each time one medal is paid out.

Further, the subtraction of "1" per game is not limited, and for example, "10 (D)" may be subtracted per game for convenience of calculation. In this case, for example, "15000 (D)" is set as the initial value of the advantageous section clear counter.
It should be noted that it is necessary to set the initial value of the advantageous section clear counter when shifting to the advantageous section after the timing of subtraction of the advantageous section clear counter.
That is, when the advantageous section clear counter value before subtraction processing is "0" and the advantageous section type flag is "1", the advantageous section clear counter is set to an initial value.

(3) In the advantageous section end preparation (FIG. 253), "1" is stored in the advantageous section clear counter. This is for setting the advantageous zone clear counter to "0" in the subsequent game start sets, as described above. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when it is determined at that point in time that the advantageous section (and AT) will end after "10" games, the value of the advantageous section clear counter is changed to "10 (D)" at that point. ” can be updated. Thus, in preparation for the end of the advantageous interval, the value of the advantageous interval clear counter is not always set to "1", but any value can be set.

(4) In this embodiment, the advantageous section clear counter value during the standby section is "0", and when the standby section transitions to the advantageous section, the advantageous section clear counter value is set to "1500 (D)". . However, not limited to this, for example, when winning the advantageous section in the normal section, set the advantageous section clear counter value to "1500 (D)", and when shifting from the normal section to the standby section, wait During the section, control may be performed so that the advantageous section clear counter value "1500 (D)" is maintained. For example, even during the waiting interval, the advantageous interval clear counter value is decremented by "1" every game, but only during the waiting interval, after that, a process of adding "1" may be added. As a result, when winning the advantageous section in the normal section, the advantageous section clear counter value can be uniformly set to "1500 (D)" at that time.

(5) In this embodiment, even if the maximum payout notification flag is "0" after winning the advantageous section, the advantageous section may be ended when 1BB is won. Here, there are various possibilities as to whether the advantageous section may be terminated even if the maximum payout notification flag is "0" when any special winning combination is won.
For example, for 1BB, RB, and 2BB (MB), when any one of them wins, the advantageous section may be terminated even if the maximum payout notification flag is "0". be done.
On the other hand, for SB (single bonus) and CB (challenge bonus), even if they win, the advantageous section cannot be ended unless the maximum payout notification flag is "1". .
Even if the maximum payout notification flag is "0", the advantageous interval clear counter reaches "0", in other words, when the advantageous interval continuation upper limit (the number of games played is 1500 games or the number of payouts is 3000). can end the advantageous interval.

(6) Although the advantageous section display LED flag is provided in the present embodiment, it is also possible not to provide the advantageous section display LED flag. For example, when the advantageous section clear counter is "0", control is performed so that the advantageous section display LED 77 is extinguished, and when the advantageous section clear counter is not "0" (however, "1" is subtracted from "0"). (Except for the time of "FFFF(H)"), control is performed so that the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.

When set in this manner, the advantageous interval display LED 77 lights up after the interrupt processing for lighting the digit 4a after the advantageous interval clear counter is updated from "0" to "1500 (D)". Therefore, in this case, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up in the interrupt process for lighting the digit 4a after step S2748 in FIG.
Also, after the transition to the advantageous section, the advantageous section clear counter changes from "1" to "0" in step S2742 in FIG. The display LED 77 is extinguished.

On the other hand, when the advantageous interval display LED 77 is lit based on the advantageous interval display LED flag as in the present embodiment, the advantageous interval display LED 77 is lit in the interrupt process for lighting the digit 4a after step S2749 in FIG.
Also, after shifting to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED flag changes from "1" to "0" in step S2746 in FIG. The advantageous section display LED 77 is extinguished in the interruption process.

(7) The advantageous section type flag is "00000000 (B)" for the normal section, "00000010 (B)" for the waiting section, and "00000001 (B)" for the advantageous section. However, not limited to these values, any value may be set as long as the normal section, standby section, and advantageous section can be determined. For example, "10 (D)" is set for the normal section, "11 (D)" is set for the standby section, and "12 (D)" is set for the advantageous section.
Further, in the present embodiment, when shifting from the standby section to the advantageous section, a process (shift instruction) is executed to shift the bit of the advantageous section type flag to the right by "1". However, in the advantageous section type flag, if the value of the standby section or advantageous section is set to an arbitrary value as described above, when transitioning from the standby section to the advantageous section, without using the shift command, the advantageous section A processing instruction may be executed in which the corresponding value is stored.

(8) The maximum payout notification flag is set to "0" when not notified, and set to "1" for others (notified, etc.). However, it is not limited to these values. For example, it is possible to set the value of "not notified" of the maximum payout notification flag to "1 (H)" and set the value of "others (notified, etc.)" to "FF (H)". In other words, any value may be used as long as it stores data that allows determination as to whether or not the advantageous section can be completed.

(9) RWM initialization (FIG. 248) in this embodiment designates the leading address in the address range to be initialized, and executes initialization in ascending order of addresses. However, it is also possible to designate the last address in the address range to be initialized and to decrement the address by "1" (initialize in descending order of addresses).

(10) In the example of updating the advantageous section type shown in FIG. 249, first, in step S2781, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section has been won, and then it is determined whether or not to shift to the waiting section. However, not limited to this, it is also possible to collectively update the advantageous section type flags to the waiting section or the advantageous section based on the winning condition device. For example, in FIG. 17, when it corresponds to "winning including 1BBA", the advantageous section type flag is updated to the waiting section (00000010 (B)), and "the set number of the small winning combination D "50" or "the small winning combination E1 For example, when the set number "250" is won, the advantageous section type flag is updated to the advantageous section (00000001 (B)).

(11) In the flowchart shown in the thirtieth embodiment, the order of processing is not limited to the order shown in the drawing, and if the order of processing can be changed, the order of processing can be changed. be.
(12) The thirtieth embodiment and the various modifications described above are not limited to being carried out independently, but can be carried out in combination as appropriate.

<31st Embodiment>
Next, the thirty-first embodiment will be described.
In the 31st embodiment, the description of the flowchart will mainly be made by taking the flowchart in the 30th embodiment as an example, but the flowchart in the 31st embodiment is meant to be limited to the flowchart in the 30th embodiment. not something to do.
The thirty-first embodiment includes a difference counter, and when the value of the difference counter (hereinafter abbreviated as "difference counter value") reaches a value that satisfies the conditions for ending the advantageous interval, the advantageous interval ends. It is something to do. Particularly, in the following embodiment, control is performed so that the advantageous section ends when the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)" (960 (H)).

Therefore, in the 31st embodiment, the advantageous section ends when either 1500 games are completed, the number of payouts reaches 3000, or the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)". . In other words, when the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)", even if the number of games in the advantageous section has not reached 1500 games or the number of payouts has not reached 3000, the advantageous section exit.
Although the details will be described later, the difference number counter value "2400 (D)" and the difference number "2400 sheets" in the advantageous section may or may not match.

The meanings of terms used in the thirty-first embodiment will be described below.
The “number of bets” is the number of bets at the start of a game, and is sometimes called “specified number” (see FIGS. 7 to 12) or “number of inputs”. However, even if medals are "thrown in", if the medals are stored without betting, the medals are not included in the number of bets.
“Automatic bet” refers to automatically betting the same number as the number of bets in the current game for the next game, based on the fact that the replay wins. Therefore, an automatic bet is also one of the bets.
The "number of payouts" refers to the number of profits given to the player when the symbol combination corresponding to the minor combination stops on the active line. It should be noted that the term "payout" means that the tokens are actually paid out from the hopper 35 by the token payout device, and that the accumulated number of medals is added as credits.

In addition, as will be described later, when a replay wins and automatic betting processing is executed, it is assumed that the same number of medals as the number of bets in the game in which the replay wins has been paid out, and the difference counter is updated. and a case in which the difference counter is updated assuming that no medals are paid out in the game.
In addition, for example, if the stipulated number for this game is "3", the replay wins in this game, and the stipulated number for the next game is "2", the bet number for this game is maintained at "3". Instead, the prescribed number of "2" for the next game may be automatically bet. Similarly, if the stipulated number for this game is ``2'', the replay wins in this game, and the stipulated number for the next game is ``3'', the bet number for this game is maintained at ``2''. Instead, the prescribed number of "3" for the next game may be automatically bet.
Therefore, when an automatic bet is made based on a win in the replay, the same number of bets as in the current game may not be betted.

Further, the “difference number” has the same meaning as the “difference number” described in “0045” of the first embodiment, and is a value calculated by “the number of payouts−the number of bets”. For example, when the number of payouts>the number of bets, such as the number of payouts of "9" and the number of bets of "3", the difference is a positive value ("+6" in this example). Further, when the number of payouts=the number of bets, such as the number of payouts of "3" and the number of bets of "3", the difference is "0". Furthermore, when the number of payouts<the number of bets, such as the number of payouts of "0" and the number of bets of "3", the difference is minus (-3 in this example).

In the 31st embodiment, the term "difference number" is used, but the term "difference number" does not mean that the game media are limited to medals. The same applies to the “number of bets” and the “number of payouts”.
In the thirty-first embodiment, the "number of bets" in the first embodiment will be referred to as the "number of bets", and the "number of payouts" in the first embodiment will be referred to as the "number of payouts".

As noted above, the difference number can be negative. However, in the computation inside the main CPU 55, a negative computation result is a carry down.
For example, in 1-byte data, based on the fact that the difference number is "-3", the value obtained by subtracting "3 (H)" from "0 (H)" is "FD (H)".
Thus, for example, when the number of bets is "3" and the number of payouts is "0", "-3" is the difference number and "FD(H)" is the difference number data. Therefore, "difference number ≠ difference number data".

In the thirty-first embodiment, a difference number counter is provided to store a value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference number data.
Here, the difference number counter does not simply store the accumulated value of the difference number data itself, but stores the "value corresponding" to the accumulated value of the difference number data. For example, as described above, when the difference number data becomes a value corresponding to a minus value, the value is corrected to "0 (H)" (this point will be described later). Therefore, "accumulated value of difference number data ≠ difference number counter value".
The difference number counter is an increment counter for determining whether or not the difference number data in the advantageous section exceeds "2400 (D)". Therefore, the difference number counter consists of a 2-byte storage area.

It is sufficient for the difference number counter to count the cumulative value of the difference number data at least during the advantageous section, and it is not necessary to count during the non-advantageous section (for example, the normal section).
Here, when updating the difference counter value on the condition that the game is in the advantageous section, it is necessary to perform a process for each game to determine whether the game is in the advantageous section. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the update of the difference number counter value is executed also during the non-advantageous section, for example, the normal section. In this way, the difference counter value can be updated without determining whether or not the game is in the advantageous section every game, so the processing can be simplified.

Furthermore, even when the difference number becomes negative in the game this time and the difference number data becomes data to be carried down, the difference number data is added to the difference number counter value to update the difference number counter value. However, if the result of the calculation is that the difference counter is the data that is carried down, the difference counter value is corrected to "0".
For example, when the difference number counter up to the previous game is "01 (H)" and the difference number data in the current game is "FD (H)" (difference = "-3"), in the current game When the difference number data is added to the difference number counter value, "FE(H)" is obtained. This value is data that has been carried down. Then, when the data is carried down, the difference counter value is corrected to "0". A method of determining whether or not a carry-over has occurred will be described later.

By updating the difference counter value in this manner, the difference counter value increases as the game progresses, for example, when the number of payouts is greater than the number of bets, that is, when the difference number is increasing. On the other hand, when the number of payouts is less than the number of bets, for example, in a game during a normal period, the difference counter value is increased by the number of payouts when a payout based on winning a small combination is made, but after that, the number of payouts is increased. falls below the number of bets, it eventually becomes "0".

To give a specific example (assuming that the differential number counter value before the first game is "0 (H)"),
1st game: When the number of bets is "3" and the number of payouts is "0", the difference is "-3", the difference counter value is "FD (H)", and the corrected difference counter is "0 (H)".
Second game: When the number of bets is "3" and the number of payouts is "9", the difference number is "+6" and the difference counter value is "6 (H)".
3rd game: When the number of bets is "3" and the number of payouts is "0", the difference is "-3" and the difference counter value is "3 (H)".
4th game: When the number of bets is "3" and the number of payouts is "1", the difference is "-2" and the difference counter value is "1 (H)".
5th game: When the number of bets is "3" and the number of payouts is "0", the difference is "-3", the difference counter value is "FE (H)", and the corrected difference counter is "0 (H)".
is updated as
Even if the difference counter value of the previous game is "0 (H)" and the difference counter value of the current game is "0 (H)", the difference counter value reflects the difference number of the game. is calculated again, this case also corresponds to "update" of the difference counter value.
Further, when the result of calculating the difference number data is "0 (H)", it is possible to omit the update of the difference number counter value.

254A and 254B are diagrams (slump graphs) for explaining the concept of the difference counter value, in which (a) shows Example 1 and (b) shows Example 2; In FIG. 254, the horizontal axis is the number of games played, and the vertical axis is the number of differences.
Example 1 shows an example in which the differential number initially progressed in the negative direction as the game progressed, but then turned upward in the middle of the game, for example, when an advantageous section (AT) started. Since the difference counter value is counted as "0" when the difference number becomes the lowest value in the progress of the game, the range indicated by the arrow in the figure is the amount of increase in the difference number by the difference counter. counted. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)", the advantageous section ends (the next game is controlled to be a normal section game).

The determination as to whether the difference counter value has exceeded "2400 (D)" is not limited to reading the difference counter value stored in the RWM 53. Determining the stored difference counter value is also included (same below).
Further, when it is determined whether or not "2400 (D)" has been exceeded based on the difference counter value temporarily stored in the register, when it is determined that "2400 (D)" has not been exceeded, The register difference counter value is stored (saved) in the RWM 53 . On the other hand, when it is judged that it exceeds "2400 (D)", the difference number counter value is not stored in the RWM 53, and the difference number counter value stored in the RWM 53 is controlled to be cleared. is also possible.

In example 2, as in example 1, the number of differences progressed in the negative direction as the game progressed, but from the middle of the game, for example, with the start of an advantageous section (AT), the difference number turned to increase. is shown. In Example 2, even when the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)", the accumulated difference value is not positive, but even in such a case, the advantageous section ends. . That is, irrespective of the cumulative value of the difference number accompanying the progress of the game so far, when the difference number counter value exceeds "2400 (D)" counting from the time when the difference number reaches the minimum value, the advantageous section (The next game is controlled to be a normal section game).

When the difference counter value is updated during the normal section, the difference counter value may exceed "2400 (D)" even during the normal section. For example, such a situation can occur when a special role is won many times and the special game is repeated. In such cases,
(1) A method of updating the difference number counter value as it is until the advantageous section starts;
(2) When "2400 (D)" is exceeded, a method of temporarily resetting the difference number counter value to "0" at that time.
For example, when the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)" during the advantageous interval, the processing is performed during the advantageous interval when the difference counter value is cleared based on the end of the advantageous interval. If the process is executed regardless of whether or not the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)" during the normal interval, it will be cleared.

On the other hand, if the processing for clearing the difference counter value is specific to the advantageous section, the difference counter value will not be cleared even if the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)" during the normal section. .
When starting the advantageous section (the first game of the advantageous section), the difference counter value is cleared (set to an initial value of "0"). Therefore, there is no problem whatever the value of the difference number counter before the start of the advantageous section.
Then, when the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)" during the advantageous section, or when the number of games reaches 1500 games, or when the number of payouts reaches 3000, the conditions for ending the advantageous section are set. When the condition is satisfied and the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the difference number counter value is cleared (initialized). The reason why the difference counter value is cleared at the end of the advantageous interval is to prevent the data (value) relating to the advantageous interval from being carried over to the normal interval when the advantageous interval ends and the normal game is started. Clearing of the difference number counter value is executed, for example, in step S2746 in FIG. 246 (thirtieth embodiment).

FIG. 255 is a diagram (slump flag) showing the relationship between the difference counter value and the advantageous interval, (a) showing example 1 and (b) showing example 2. FIG.
In Example 1, in the normal section, the difference number decreases as the game progresses, and the difference number further decreases from the time when the advantage section starts ("A" in the figure) until it progresses to "B" in the figure. example. In addition, AT does not start at the same time as the start of the advantageous section, and the beginning of the advantageous section is CZ, omen, AT preparation (for example, when the RT state is a low probability state, the RT state is changed from a low probability state to a high probability (While waiting for a replay to win), the difference may decrease even after the advantageous section starts. Further, even when AT is started, if the winning order bell continues to be difficult, the difference may decrease.

Since the difference counter value is initialized at the start of the advantageous section, it becomes "0" at "A" in the figure. In addition, as described above, the difference number counter value is maintained at "0" under the condition that the difference number is decreasing. Therefore, the difference counter value remains "0" from point "A" to point "B" in the figure.
Also, an example is shown in which the number of differences turned to increase from point "B". This also increases the difference number counter value. Then, when it is determined that the difference counter value has exceeded "2400 (D)" (when the point "C" is reached in the figure), it is determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied, and the advantageous section ends. (Moving to normal section).

In this way, the positive count by the difference number counter starts at the point when the difference number becomes the lowest value after the start of the advantageous section, not the difference number from the start of the advantageous section. Tokens will not be awarded to the player beyond the range where the number of balls is increased (the range from "B" to "C" in FIG. 255(a)). As a result, it is possible not to arouse the gambling spirit of the player.

The above point will be described more specifically with numerical examples.
For example, if the specification is such that AT is started by lottery after the start of the advantageous section, the difference number may decrease as the game progresses in the advantageous section and non-AT.
For example, assume that player X wins the advantageous section and the advantageous section starts, but AT does not start and the difference number becomes "-200" and the player gives up the game.
Next, it is assumed that when the player Y starts playing the game on the gaming machine and the difference becomes "-50", the AT is won and the AT is started. After starting the advantageous section, when the advantageous section (AT) is continued until the difference number exceeds "+2400", Player Y will be able to obtain "2400+250=2650" medals. .
Therefore, as described above, after starting the advantageous section, by setting the end condition as "from the time when the difference number reaches the minimum value to when it exceeds '+2400'", for example, other players can This prevents the possibility of being able to acquire such items, and does not arouse the gambling spirit.

Example 2 shown in FIG. 255(b) shows an example in which the number of differences decreases in the normal section, becomes positive at point "D" on the way, and furthermore, the advantageous section starts at point "E". In such a case, as described above, when the difference counter value is updated including the normal section, the difference counter value is positive immediately before "E" in the figure. However, at the start of the advantageous section (“E” in the figure), the difference counter value is initialized (cleared, ie, updated to “0”).
Therefore, the increment before the advantageous section (the increment from "D" to "E") is not counted by the difference number counter. Therefore, the difference counter continues to be positively counted from point "E", and when it exceeds "2400 (D)", the advantageous section ends.

FIG. 256 is a diagram showing the storage area of the RWM 53 related to the thirty-first embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 182 of the twenty-sixth embodiment (partially overlaps with FIG. 182). The thirty-first embodiment also has other storage areas in addition to the storage areas shown in FIG. 256, but the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 256, the action status flag (_FL_ACTION) at address "F010(H)" is of the same kind as shown in FIG. However, in FIG. 182 (the twenty-sixth embodiment), the operation state flag is used for the operation of the role product, but in the thirty-first embodiment, the replay is assigned to the D0 bit in order to determine the operation state of the replay (see FIG. 182). MB and CB have been deleted in the 182 operating status flags).
This operating state flag is updated in the game start setting process at step S2701 in FIG. 244 (step S2720 in FIG. 245). For example, in step S2719 of FIG. 245, the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag (to be described later) is read (same processing as step S2725), and when it is determined that the D0 bit is "1", the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped. Then, the D0 bit of the operation status flag is set to "1".
The replay operation status flag (D0 bit) is cleared at step S2826 during FIG. 252 (game end check processing).
Also, the action status flag of the accessory is cleared in step S2827 (flag of 1BB) or step S2829 (flag of RB) during FIG. 252 (game end check processing).

The symbol combination display flag (_FL_WIN) at the address "F030 (H)" is an area for storing the symbol combinations that are stopped and displayed. In this embodiment, Replay is assigned to the D0 bit and 1BB is assigned to the D2 bit. . That is, the replay and 1BB bits of the symbol combination display flag are assigned to the same bits as the replay and 1BB bits assigned to the operating state flag, respectively.
For example, when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to replay has stopped on the active line (when winning), the D0 bit is set to "1". The symbol combination display flag is updated in step S2186 (display determination) in FIG.

At step S2186 in FIG. 244, the prize determination means 66 determines whether or not the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination has stopped on the activated line. Then, the symbol combination display flag is updated according to the stopped symbol combination. For example, when it is determined that the replay symbol combination has stopped on the active line, the D0 bit of the symbol combination flag is set to "1".
Then, in the next game, for example, in the game start set process of FIG. 245, the symbol combination display flag is acquired (step S2713), and the operating state flag is updated (step S2720).
The symbol combination display flag is cleared at the start of the next game, for example, at step S2179 in FIG.

The automatic bet number data (_NB_REP_MEDAL) at the address "F031(H)" is an area for storing data indicating the number of medals to be automatically bet when winning a replay, and in this embodiment, "2" or "3" is stored. be done.
The bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) at the address "F032(H)" is an area for storing the bet number data in the game, and in this embodiment, any one of "0" to "3" is stored. be done.
Automatic bet number data is set in step S2727 in FIG. 245, for example.

Here, the processing of steps S2725 to S2727 in FIG. 245 will be explained again.
In step S2725, based on the data of the symbol combination display flag acquired in step S2713, it is determined whether or not the replay symbol combination is displayed (whether the replay wins). When it is determined that the replay symbol combination is displayed, the process proceeds to step S2726, and when it is determined that it is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S2728.

In step S2726, the main control board 50 reads bet medals. This process is a process of reading the number of medals betted in the previous game, and reads the value of the bet number data. Next, the process advances to step S2727 to set automatic bet number data. This process is a process of storing the value of the bet number data in the previous game in the automatic bet number data.

In FIG. 256, the payout amount data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) at address "F040(H)" and the payout amount data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) at address "F041(H)" are respectively the medal payout data of the twenty-sixth embodiment (FIG. 182). It is the same as the number data and medal payout number data buffer.
The payout number data and the payout number data buffer are updated, for example, in updating the number of payout medals in step S2188 in FIG. 244 of the thirtieth embodiment. The processing for updating the number of medals to be paid out is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 189(a) (26th embodiment).
Also, the payout number data is updated (subtracted) in step S2189 of FIG. On the other hand, the payout number data buffer is not updated until the payout number update process of step S2188 in FIG. 244 is executed in the next game.

That is, for example, even if a small winning combination is won in the game and the payout number data is updated in step S2188 in FIG. ) is done.
Here, the medal payout processing by winning in step S2189 will be described in more detail.
In the medal payout process for winning, first, it is determined whether or not there is medal payout. Before this process, payout number data is stored in a predetermined register, "1" is subtracted from the predetermined register value (payout number data), and it is determined whether or not the value after subtraction is "0". . When the value is "0", it is determined that there is no medal payout, and when it is not "0", it is determined that there is a medal payout.

When it is determined that medals will be paid out, next, the stored number is read. This process is a process of reading the value of stored number display data (address "F043(H)"), which will be described later. Next, based on the stored number display data that has been read, it is determined whether or not the stored number has reached the limit value. When the read storage number display data value is "50", it is determined that the storage number has reached the limit value, and when it is less than "50", it is determined that the storage number has not reached the limit value. .

When it is determined that the stored number is less than "50", the process of adding "1" to the stored number is executed. This process is a process of adding "1" to the stored number display data at the address "F043(H)".
On the other hand, when it is determined that the stored number is "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven and controlled, and the "1" medal payout process of actually paying out one medal is executed.
When the above-described process of adding "1" to the accumulated number of medals or paying out "1" medal is executed, the display of the acquired number is changed to "+1". This process is a process of adding "1" to the acquisition number data at the address "F042(H)", which will be described later.

Further, next, a process of subtracting "1" from the number-of-payouts data of the address "F032(H)" is performed. Next, it is determined whether or not the payout of medals has been completed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the updated payout number data has become "0". When it is judged that the payout number data is "0", the medal payout processing due to winning is terminated.

By repeating the above process, when winning a small winning combination, the win number data is incremented by "1" and the payout number data is decremented by "1". Therefore, in FIG. 244, the number-of-payouts data is "0" at the time of the game end check processing in step S2705. Therefore, when updating the difference counter value in the game end check process, when reading the payout number of the game, the value is read from the payout number data buffer.
However, if the difference counter value in the game can be updated before the payout number data is subtracted, the payout number of the game can be read by reading the payout number data. For example, in FIG. 244, if the difference counter value is updated between steps S2188 and S2189, the payout number can be read from the payout number data. In other words, it is possible to update the difference counter value without reading the value from the payout number data buffer.

In FIG. 256, acquisition number data (_NB_PAYOUT) at address "F042(H)" is an area for storing acquisition number data. When a small winning combination is won and medals are paid out, the winning number is stored in the winning number data. Based on this data, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 is controlled. For example, when the acquisition number data is "1", this data "1" is read and "01" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4).

Here, as for the payout number data of the address "F040(H)", "9" is stored when, for example, a 9-card hand is won, and "9" is stored when medals are paid out (including addition to credits). ]→“8”→“7”→ .
On the other hand, the acquisition number data of the address "F042(H)" is, for example, when a 9-card hand wins, "0"→"1"→"2"→"3"→...→"9" , is a counter that is incremented according to medal payout.
The display by the acquisition number display LED 78 is performed using the acquisition number data.

The storage number display data (_NB_CREDIT) of the address "F043(H)" stores data for displaying the storage number at that time on the storage number display LED 76 .
Here, in the present embodiment, the data itself is a hexadecimal value (H), but the value obtained by converting the stored number into a decimal number is stored. For example, when the stored number to be displayed is "29", the value "29(H)" is stored. In other words, "00101001(B)" is stored at address "F043(H)". As a result, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 of the address "F043(H)" are used to display the lower digits of the stored number ("9" in this example), and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are It is stored as data for displaying the upper digits of the stored number (“2” in this example). Note that in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the stored number is "50 (D)", so the data value to be stored is in the range of "0" to "50".

In this embodiment, the address of the RWM 53 for storing the stored number data itself is not provided, and the stored number display data is provided as the display data of the stored number display LED 76 . However, the stored number display data is the stored number data itself.

Next, specific update contents of the number of bets, the number of payouts, the difference number, the difference number data, and the difference number counter value will be described.
As described above, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay stops on the active line, automatic bets are made and the replay can be executed. There is a concept that the number of automatic bets at this time is the number of payouts and a concept that it is not the number of payouts.
FIG. 257 is a diagram for explaining the updated contents of the number of payouts, the difference number, the difference number data, and the difference number counter value.
Example 1 of (a) shows a concept of not using the automatic bet number as the payout number for the game and not using the automatic bet number as the bet number for the next game.
Example 2 of (b) shows the concept of setting the automatic bet number as the payout number of the game and setting the automatic bet number as the bet number of the next game.
In FIG. 257, the value of the difference number counter before the first game is "0 (H)". Also, in both Examples 1 and 2, it is assumed that the replay wins in the first game, and the 4-card small win wins in the second game.

In Example 1, the bet number is obtained by reading the bet number data. For example, in the first game, assuming that the game is started with three bets, "3" is stored in the bet number data, so this value is read and the bet number is set to "3".
Then, at the end of the first game, the payout number in the game is read from the payout number data buffer. Since the payout number data buffer is "0" when the replay wins, the payout number in the game is "0".
Therefore,
Number of bets = 3
Number of payouts = 0
Than,
Difference = -3
so that
Difference number data = FD (H) (down)
becomes.

Also, the difference number counter value is
Difference number counter value = 0 (H) + FD (H) = FD (H)
and updated.
When the most significant bit of the calculated difference counter value is "1" (details will be described later), it is determined that a carry-down has occurred, and correction is performed to return it to "0 (H)".
This will
Difference number counter value (before correction): FD (H)
Difference number counter value (after correction): 0 (H)
is calculated (updated).

Next, in the second game (current game), when the replay wins in the first game (previous game) and the specified number of the current game is "3", the automatic bet number data is "3". , and the bet number data for this game is "3". Therefore, when the bet number is read from the bet number data in the current game, it is "3", but by judging whether the D0 bit of the operating state flag is "0" or "1", the replay was won in the previous game. (whether or not the current game is during replay operation), and when it is determined that the replay was won in the previous game, the number of bets in the current game is calculated as "0".
By judging whether the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag, which is set at the end of the game, is "0" or "1", it is possible to determine whether or not the replay was won in the previous game (this game is during the replay operation). or not), and when it is determined that the replay was won in the previous game, the number of bets in the current game may be calculated as "0". In other words, based on the information that can determine whether or not the replay was won in the previous game, the number of bets for this game is calculated as "0", or the number of bets actually placed (in this example, " 3”) is used for calculation.

Further, when a small combination of 4 cards is won at the end of the game, the number-of-payout data buffer becomes "4".
Therefore,
Number of bets = 0
Number of payouts = 4
Than,
Difference number = +4
so that
Difference number data = 4 (H)
becomes.
Also, the difference number counter value is
Difference number counter value = 0 (H) + 4 (H) = 4 (H)
and updated.
Furthermore, since the most significant bit of the post-calculation difference counter value is "0", no correction is performed as described above.

In FIG. 257, (b) example 2 is a calculation method based on the idea that the number of payouts in a game in which a replay was won is the number of bets in the game, and the number of bets in the next game is the actual number of bets.
First, as for the number of bets, the number of bets data is read, and the read value is used as the number of bets when the difference counter value is updated. It is also possible to read automatic bet number data instead of bet number data.
The first game in Example 2 assumes that the game is started with the number of bets "3", and shows an example when the replay wins in this first game.

At the end of the game, the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag is read. Then, when the D0 bit is "1" (at the time of winning a replay), the value stored in the bet number data or automatic bet number data of the game is read, and the value is used as the difference number in the game (first game). This is the number of payouts when the counter value is updated. In this example, since "3" is stored in the bet number data or automatic bet number data at the end of the first game, the number of payouts when the difference counter value is updated is "3".
When the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag is "0" (when replay is not won), the value stored in the payout number data buffer is read, and the value is used as the difference counter value in the game (first game). The number of payouts at the time of renewal of

That is, by determining whether the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag set at the end of the game is "0" or "1", it is determined whether or not the replay is won in the current game. When it is determined that a prize has been won, the number of payouts is calculated as "the number of bets betted in the game this time". In other words, the number of payouts is calculated using the value of the "number of payouts data buffer", or the value betted in the current game (this In the example, it is determined whether to calculate using "bet number data").

Therefore,
Number of bets = 3
Number of payouts = 3
Than,
Difference number = 0
so that
Difference number data = 0 (H)
becomes.
Also, the difference number counter value is
Difference number counter value = 0 (H) + 0 (H) = 0 (H)
and updated.
Furthermore, since the most significant bit of the post-calculation difference counter value is "0", no correction is performed.

Next, in the second game, bet number data or automatic bet number data is read in the same manner as in the first game, and that value is used as the bet number for the second game.
For example, when the prescribed number for the second game is "3", the number of bets is "3".

Then, at the end of the second game, the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag is read. In this example, since the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag is determined to be "0", the value stored in the payout number data buffer is read. Since "4" is stored in the payout number data buffer, this value is read and the payout number of the second game is set to "4" when the difference number counter is updated.

Therefore,
Number of bets = 3
Number of payouts = 4
Than,
Difference number = +1
so that
Difference number data = 1 (H)
becomes.
Also, the difference number counter value is
Difference number counter value = 0 (H) + 1 (H) = 1 (H)
and updated.
Furthermore, since the most significant bit of the post-calculation difference counter value is "0", no correction is performed.

As is clear from Examples 1 and 2, depending on whether the automatic bet number at the time of winning the replay or the number of bets placed in the game at the time of winning the replay is used as the payout number, the second game (at the time of winning the replay) The difference number counter value for the next game is different. The reason for this result is that even if the difference number becomes "-3" in the first game of Example 1, the difference number counter value becomes "0 (H)" due to the correction. .
Either Example 1 or Example 2 may be used as the method for calculating the difference counter value. However, if the difference counter value is updated by the method of example 2, it is possible to prevent an increase in the difference counter value based on the replay win.
On the other hand, if the difference number counter value is updated by the method of example 1, it is not necessary to read the operation state flag and the symbol combination display flag when reading the number of bets and the number of payouts, which simplifies the calculation and reduces the program capacity. be able to.

In Example 2 of FIG. 257, the value of the symbol combination display flag was read when acquiring the number of payouts for updating the difference counter value. However, it is also possible to obtain the number of payouts for updating the difference counter value by reading the value of the operating state flag. In the thirtieth embodiment, the operating state flag is updated at the time of the game start setting of the next game of the game in which the replay was won. However, not limited to this, it is also possible to update the operation state flag for the next game during the game after the replay wins. In this case, after the operation state flag is updated, after determining whether the D0 bit of the operation state flag is "1" or "0", the number of payouts for updating the difference counter value is acquired, The difference number counter should be updated. In other words, based on the information that can determine whether or not the replay was won in the current game, in the game in which the replay did not win, the value stored in the payout number data buffer is used as the payout number for the current game. In the game in which the calculation is performed and the replay wins, it is determined whether the calculation is performed using the number of bets placed (“3” in this example).

258A and 258B are diagrams for explaining the update timing of the difference counter value, in which (a) shows example 1 and (b) shows example 2. FIG.
In the following description, the difference counter value is indicated by 2 bytes, and the number of inputs and the number of payouts are indicated by 1 byte. In addition, replays shall not win prizes.
Example 1 updates the difference counter value based on the number of bets when the start switch 41 is operated, and further updates the difference counter value based on the number of payouts when the game ends. Therefore, the difference counter value is updated twice in one game.

On the other hand, in Example 2, the difference counter value is not updated when the start switch 41 is operated, but is updated based on the number of bets and the number of payouts in the game at the end of the game.
In example 1 of (a) of FIG. 258, the specific timing of updating when the start switch 41 is operated is, for example, step S2702 after step S2178 in FIG. 244 (main processing of the thirtieth embodiment). Before and after the update of the AT game number counter in. The reason why the start switch 41 has been operated is that the difference counter value is updated after the number of bets in the game is determined.

When the start switch 41 is operated, the update is performed as "difference counter value=difference counter value-bet number". The bet number is read from the bet number data or the automatic bet number data. For example, in normal games, the number of bets is "3", so when the difference counter value before calculation is "0000 (H)", the difference counter value is obtained by subtracting "03 (H)". becomes "FFFD(H)".

Next, as the process (1) at the end of the game, the process of adding the number of payouts to the difference counter value is executed. As for the timing of this process, it is possible to provide a "difference number counter value update process based on the number of payouts" in step S2705 (game end check process) in the above-described FIG. 244 (main process of the thirtieth embodiment). .
This process is a process of reading the payout number from the payout number data buffer and adding it to the difference number counter value.

Next, as the process (2) at the end of the game, when the difference counter value is a value corresponding to a minus value, a correction is executed to set it to "0". By adding the number of payouts to the difference counter value before adding the number of payouts, the difference counter value does not become negative. However, since the number of bets is subtracted from the value of the difference counter at the start of the game, the number of bets is negative at this time, and there is a possibility that the number of payouts is still negative after addition of the number of payouts.

Whether or not the difference counter value is negative is determined by determining whether or not the most significant bit of the 2-byte data of the difference counter value is "1". When the most significant bit is "1", it is determined that the difference counter value is negative. For example, when the difference counter value is "FFFD (H)", it is "11111111/11111101 (B)" (a "/" is shown between the upper 8 bits and the lower 8 bits). Therefore, the most significant bit (leftmost bit) of the 16 bits is "1".

In order for the most significant bit to become "1" when the difference counter value is a positive value, the difference counter value must be "32768 (D)". Absent. When the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)", the advantageous section ends and the difference counter value becomes "0". This is because even if is increased, it is cleared at the start of the advantageous section.
Therefore, when the most significant bit of the difference number counter value is "1", the difference number counter value is a value when a carry occurs, and can be said to be a negative value.
When it is determined that the difference counter value is negative, the difference counter value is corrected to "0 (H)". Then, the corrected difference counter value is stored.

In Example 2 of FIG. 258, unlike Example 1, the difference number counter value is not updated when the start switch 41 is operated. In Example 2, the difference counter value is updated only when the game ends. When updating the difference counter value only at the end of the game, similar to Example 1, for example, step S2705 (game end set processing) in FIG. 244 is performed.

The processing procedure at that time is as follows.
As the processing of (1), the number of bets is subtracted from the number of payouts, and difference number data in the game is calculated. The number of bets is read from the number of bets data, and the number of payouts is read from the number of payouts data. A dedicated storage area (RWM 53) may be provided to store the difference number data calculated at this time. good.
Next, the difference number counter value is read from the RWM 53, and the difference number data (calculated above) is added from the difference number counter value. Then, the addition result is used as the difference number counter value.
Next, as the process of (2), it is determined whether or not the difference counter value is negative as in Example 1, and if it is negative, the difference counter value is corrected to "0 (H)". . Then, it is stored in the RWM 53 .

In Example 2, "the number of payouts - the number of bets (=difference number data)" is calculated first, and then the difference number data is added to the difference number counter value. However, not limited to
(1) Add the number of payouts to the difference counter value. Next, the number of bets is subtracted from the difference counter value.
or
(2) Subtract the bet number from the difference counter value. Next, the number of payouts is added to the difference counter value.
may be performed in the order of In this way, there is no need to temporarily store difference number data.

In addition, in the process of adding the number of payouts to the difference counter value, for example, when the number of payouts is "3", rather than adding "3" to the difference counter value at once, the above-described "1" addition processing or the like is performed. Similarly, repeating the addition of "1" to the difference counter value simplifies the program. In this case, the "difference number counter value update (addition) process" may be executed in step S2189 (medal payout process due to winning) in FIG.
Also, in the method of Example 2, it is necessary to read the number of bets at the end of the game.
Here, if the bet number data and the automatic bet number data are not cleared at the time of the difference counter value update process at the end of the game, the bet number data or the automatic bet number data are bet number (the bet number used to update the difference counter value) can be read.
On the other hand, if the bet number data and the automatic bet number data are cleared at the time of the difference counter value update process at the end of the game, the bet number data or the automatic bet number data is stored in the register or the like at the start of the game. It may be stored and held until the difference counter value is updated.

Next, the relationship between the calculation of the difference number counter value and the number of bytes of each data will be described.
As described above, the bet number data, the automatic bet number data, and the payout number data buffer are all 1-byte data. This is for counting the range of "0 to 15 (D)". On the other hand, the difference number counter consists of 2-byte data because it counts in the range of "0 to 2400 (D)". Therefore, although calculations between 1 bytes can be executed without any problem, correction may be required when calculating 2 bytes and 1 byte.

FIG. 259 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the calculation of the difference number counter value and the number of bytes of each data.
Example 1 shown in (a) of FIG. 259 is an example of a case where calculation is performed as in Example 1 of FIG. 258 . When the start switch 41 is operated, it is necessary to calculate "difference number counter value-bet number", but the difference number counter value is 2 bytes and the bet number is 1 byte. Here, for example, when the difference counter value before calculation is "0000 (H)" and the number of bets is "03 (H)", the difference counter value becomes "FFFD(H)". Therefore, no correction is required in this case.

Next, when calculating "difference number counter value + payout number" at the end of the game, for example, the difference number counter value before calculation is "FFFD (H)" and the payout number is "01 (H)". Then, the difference counter value becomes "FFFE(H)".
Then, as described above, when the difference counter value is negative, it is corrected to "0". Therefore, "FFFE(H)" is corrected to "0(H)".

Example 2 shown in FIG. 259(b) is an example in which the difference counter value is updated only at the end of the game like Example 2 in FIG.
First, "number of payouts - number of bets" (difference number data) is calculated. In this case, since both are 1-byte data, they can be calculated as they are. For example, when the number of payouts is "0" and the number of bets is "3", "number of payouts-number of bets" is "FD(H)".
Next, the calculation result of "number of payouts-number of bets" is converted into 2 bytes.
First, when the upper 1 byte of the operation result is "0", 1-byte data of "0x(H)" is converted into 2-byte data of "000x(H)". Also, when the upper 1 byte of the operation result is "1" like "Fx(H)", it is converted into 2-byte data "FFFx(H)".

Then, "number of payouts-number of bets" (2-byte data after correction) is added to the difference counter value (2-byte data) to calculate the updated difference counter value (2-byte data).
For example, when the difference counter value before calculation is “0” and the “number of payouts−number of bets” after correction is “1”, the difference counter value is “1”.
Further, when the difference counter value before calculation is "0" and the "number of payouts - number of bets" after correction is "FFFD (H)", the difference counter value is "FFFD (H)". Become.
Next, when the difference number counter value is negative (when the most significant bit is "1"), it is corrected to "0".
In the above example, when the difference number counter value is "1", it is not corrected and remains "1". On the other hand, when the difference number counter value is "FFFD(H)", it becomes "0" by correction.

As described above, in the method of example 1 in FIG. 259 (example 1 in FIG. 258), it is necessary to update the difference counter value when the start switch 41 is operated and when the game ends (twice in one game). . However, since the process of converting 1-byte data into 2-byte data is not required, it is possible to shorten the computation time.
On the other hand, in the method of example 2 in FIG. 259 (example 2 in FIG. 258), the update of the difference counter value is completed only at the end of the game. can be achieved. However, it is necessary to convert 1-byte data into 2-byte data.

In the thirty-first embodiment, when the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)", it is determined that the end conditions for the advantageous interval (AT) are met.
On the other hand, the sub-control board 80 can display the total number of acquisitions during AT on the image display device 23 (this display is hereinafter referred to as "sub-display"). In this case, when the total acquisition number displayed on the image display device 23 is an odd value, the difference number counter value may exceed "2400 (D)". Therefore, even if the total winning number displayed on the image display device 23 is an odd value, the advantageous section (AT) may have to be ended.
Specifically, "difference number counter value≧total acquisition number by sub-display".

FIG. 260 is a diagram showing the relationship between the difference number counter value and the sub display.
Examples 1 and 2 of FIG. 260 show an example of shifting to CZ (chance zone) of several games (for example, about 5 games) without immediately starting AT when shifting to the advantageous section. An example in which AT is started after the end of CZ is shown. In such cases, the CZ may or may not activate the indicating function. In addition, there may be a case where the pushing order bell is won during CZ and a case where it is not won. Therefore, during CZ, medals can be both increased and decreased.
Also, even after the shift to AT, the difference does not always increase from the beginning of the AT.

In Example 1 shown in FIG. 260(a), the slump graph [1] indicated by the solid line shows an example in which the number of differences decreases during CZ and increases from the time point when AT is started. In this case, since the minimum value of the difference counter is at the start of AT, the difference counter value and the total acquisition number by the sub-display match.
On the other hand, the slump graph [2] indicated by the dashed line shows an example in which the number of differences decreases until the time point "A" after the start of AT, and then increases.
Here, since the sub-display displays the total number of wins since the start of AT, it displays the total number of wins including the reduction in the number of differences from the start of AT to the time "A". The display of the total number of acquisitions from the start of AT to the time of "A" may be performed by displaying a negative value, or by displaying "0" but calculating as a negative value internally.

In the case of slump graph [2], the lowest value of the difference number counter is at time "A". Therefore, the difference counter value becomes positive from time "A". As a result, the difference number counter value and the total number acquired by the sub-display are different.
For example, when the difference number from the start of AT to the time of "A" is "-15", the total acquisition number by the sub-display when the difference number counter value reaches "2400 (D)" is " 2385 sheets". Therefore, the advantageous section (AT) ends before the total number of acquisitions by the sub display reaches "2400".

In the thirty-first embodiment, the main control board 50 transmits the difference counter value to the sub control board 80 every game (for example, by processing the control command set 1 in step S2198 in FIG. 244). Therefore, the sub-control board 80 can determine how long it will take to finish the advantageous section (AT). This makes it easier to adjust the start and end timings of the ending effect on the sub-control board 80 side.
Therefore, when the sub-control board 80 determines that the advantageous section (AT) will end before the total number of acquisitions in the sub-display reaches "2400", the sub-control board 80 notifies the player to that effect through the image display device 23. Notification is preferred. The contents of the notification include, for example, the following methods.

(1) As in the above example, when the advantageous section (AT) is scheduled to end when the total number of acquisitions on the sub display exceeds "2385", for example, the display of the total number of acquisitions is "2365". ', a message such as 'AT will end in 20 more cards' is displayed to notify the end timing of the advantageous section (AT).
(2) At a predetermined timing during the AT, for example, "This AT will end when the total number of wins reaches 2385."

(3) For example, when the total number of acquisitions exceeds "2300", the display of the total number of acquisitions by the image display device 23 is set to "??? sheets", and the total number of acquisitions is not displayed accurately. .
Furthermore, when "??? sheets" is displayed, an effect is output as if the end lottery for the AT is performed every game. For example, an effect such as a confrontation between the main character and the enemy character is output. Then, when the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)", there is a method of outputting an effect in which the main character loses (or wins) against the enemy character, and ending the AT.

Example 2 shown in FIG. 260(b) is an example in which the number of differences increases even during the CZ after the start of the advantageous section. In this case, since the start of the advantageous section (CZ) is the lowest value of the difference counter in the advantageous section, the difference counter value becomes positive from the start of the advantageous section.
On the other hand, the total acquisition number by the sub-display starts at the same time as the AT starts. Therefore, in this case also, as in Example 1, the difference number counter value exceeds "2400 (D)" before the total number of acquisitions by the sub-display reaches "2400". Therefore, an effect similar to that of Example 1 is output.
In addition, when medals increase during CZ, it is possible to include the increase in the total number of acquisitions in the sub-display during AT. If you set this way only when medals increase during CZ, the difference counter value (decimal number) and the total number of acquisitions in the sub-display will match, so the total number of acquisitions in the advantageous section (AT) will be "2400". The advantageous section (AT) can be terminated at the point in time when the "sheet" is exceeded.

Next, a new game feature when the advantageous section (AT) ends based on the difference counter value will be described.
As in the 31st embodiment, when the advantageous interval ends when the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)", when the advantageous interval (AT) ends with as few games as possible (hereinafter referred to as " Case 1”), and a case where the game is completed to nearly 1500 games, which is the upper limit number of continuous games in the advantageous section, while the difference counter value does not exceed “2400 (D)” (hereinafter referred to as “Case 2 ”).

Here, if the transition to the advantageous section does not occur without passing through the winning of a special role (special game) (for example, in the first embodiment, the winning of 1BBA is the condition for starting the advantageous section. Hereinafter referred to as "specification 1" ), and when it is possible to shift to the advantageous section only by winning a rare role (rare small role, rare replay) without winning a special role (for example, in the first embodiment, winning a small role E1 is advantageous A case where it is possible to shift to an interval, hereinafter referred to as "specification 2").
Here, in the case of specification 1, it is more advantageous to progress the game according to case 2.

Specifically, this is because it is necessary to wait for the winning of the special combination in the normal section (game state in which the number of differences decreases) when the advantageous section ends quickly and the winning of the next special combination is awaited. On the other hand, after starting the advantageous section (AT), the difference number counter value is quickly increased to near "2400 (D)", and after that, until the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches nearly 1500, the difference number is almost This is because if the state of maintaining the status quo is continued, it is possible to wait for the winning of the special combination without reducing the number of differences.

On the other hand, in the case of specification 2, it cannot be said unconditionally which of case 1 and case 2 is more advantageous. This is because, in a situation where the current difference is maintained while maintaining the advantageous section (AT) as in Case 2, the advantageous section (AT) is not won again.
However, as described above, in the gaming machine of specification 1, it is more advantageous to wait for the winning of the special combination while increasing the number of games in the advantageous section (AT). I will provide a.

FIG. 261 is a diagram showing an example of different notification modes in the thirty-first embodiment.
In the figure (a), when the advantageous section (AT) starts, and when the push order bell is won, the instruction function is activated and the push order instruction information is displayed on the winning number display LED 78 (FIGS. 20 and 26). In addition, the order of correct keystrokes is displayed on the image display device 23 (FIG. 26).
Then, until the difference counter reaches near "2400 (D)" (in the example of FIG. 261, it reaches "2350 (D)"), the above notification is executed. The notification by the sub-control board 80 in this case is referred to as "notification mode A". The notification mode A is the same notification mode as the notification described in the first embodiment.

Then, when the difference counter value exceeds "2350 (D)", the notification modes such as the correct keystroke order displayed by the image display device 23 (reported by the sub-control board 80) are changed from the notification mode A to the notification mode B. (notification mode B≠notification mode A). For example, in notification mode B, the image display area of the correct pressing order is smaller than in the reporting mode A, the colors used to notify the correct pressing order are different, and the position on the image display device 23 for notifying the correct pressing order are different, and the sound volume of the speaker 22 when outputting the correct keystroke order is low.
However, in both notification modes A and B, the correct pressing order itself to be reported is the same (it is not possible to report a pressing order other than the correct pressing order).
In addition, regardless of which of the notification modes A and B is to be notified, the operation of the instruction function executed on the main control board 50 side is the same, and the same push order instruction information ("display contents" in FIG. 20). 1”) is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.

Here, the notification of the order of pressing the correct answer by notification mode B indicates to the player that the difference number counter value is approaching "2400 (D)", that is, if the difference number continues to increase, the advantageous section (AT) will end. shall be notified to Therefore, when the notification mode A changes to the notification mode B, the player expects that the difference counter value will exceed "2400 (D)" in a short time (the advantageous interval (AT) will end in a short time). can know
In the example of FIG. 261, when the difference counter value reaches "2350 (D)", the notification mode is changed from the notification mode A to the notification mode B. It is possible to set various thresholds such as when exceeding "2300 (D)" and when exceeding "2380 (D)".

For a player who has a reason to want to end the advantageous section (AT) early, if the stop switch 42 is operated in accordance with the notified correct order of pressing in either notification mode A or B, the advantageous section (AT) can be completed in the shortest possible time. AT) can be terminated.
On the other hand, for a player who wants to make the number of games played in the advantageous section (AT) as long as possible, after the notification mode B is notified, by intentionally performing the pressing order different from the correct pressing order, It is possible to intentionally perform a small win or a dropout without winning a prize.

In the first embodiment, when the winning order of the bell is won, the high-ranked small combination is 9 pieces. Therefore, when the correct order of pressing is notified by the notification mode B, for example, the correct pressing order is about once every four times. If the stop switches 42 are operated in order, and the other stop switches 42 are operated in the incorrect pressing order (a pressing order different from the reported correct pressing order), it is considered that the difference can be maintained at the current state.
In the first embodiment, when the bell is won and the bell is won, there is a probability of "1/4" that one prize will be awarded, and a probability of "3/4" will be lost. , the expected value of the difference number in the game is "-2.75".

Therefore, for a player who wants to lengthen the advantageous section (AT) as much as possible, by proceeding with the game by operating the stop switch 42 as described above, the difference counter value can be maintained before "2400 (D)". The game can be played without reducing medals until reaching 1500 games, which is the upper limit number of continuations of the advantageous section. In other words, it is possible to wait for the winning of the special combination (BB) while maintaining the difference counter value before "2400 (D)" (maintaining the medals as they are).
It should be noted that the player will not be penalized for not operating the stop switch 42 according to the pressing order instruction information displayed by the operation of the instruction function and the correct pressing order displayed on the image display device 23. The absence is as described above (“0020”).

Moreover, when winning a special combination and shifting to a special game, the number of differences increases. For example, in the example of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, 150 coins are paid out for 1BBA game and 200 coins are paid out for 1BBB game, so the difference counter value is maintained before "2400 (D)". When 1BB is won and the game is shifted to 1BB game, the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)". Therefore, the advantageous section (AT) ends during the 1BB game.
In (a) of FIG. 261, the notification is made in the notification mode B, the BB is won under the situation where the difference number counter value is almost at the current position near "2350 (D)", and the difference number is played during the BB game. It shows an example in which the counter value exceeds "2400 (D)" and the advantageous section (AT) ends.

On the other hand, FIG. 261(b) shows an example in which the BB was not won even after the notification by the notification mode B was performed, even though the number of games played in the advantageous section reached nearly 1500 games. In this example, when the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches 1480 games, the notification mode B is switched to the notification mode A again. Switching from the notification mode B to the notification mode A informs the player that the number of games played in the advantageous section has approached 1500 games.
Then, when switching to the notification mode A, the player operates the stop switch 42 in the correct pressing order when winning the subsequent pressing order bell. As a result, in most cases, the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)" and the advantageous interval (AT) ends.
Incidentally, "1480 games" for switching from the notification mode B to the notification mode A is a standard, and various settings such as 1400 games, 1450 games, and 1470 games are possible.

Although the thirty-first embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above description, and the following various modifications are possible.
(1) The difference counter is an increment counter that counts up from the initial value "0 (H)". However, the present invention is not limited to this. First, it may be a decrement counter that counts down from a predetermined value such as "2400 (D)".
In this case, for example, when updating the difference number counter from the start of the advantageous section, "2400 (D)" is set at the start of the advantageous section. Then, when the difference counter value falls below "0 (H)", that is, when a carry occurs, it can be determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied.
Further, even when the difference counter value is counted down from "2400 (D)", the difference counter value may be updated every game including the normal section. In this case, a method of updating the difference counter value as it is even in the normal section, and a method of determining whether or not it is "2400 (D)" in each game in the normal section, and when it is determined that it is not "2400 (D)" and a method of setting the initial value "2400 (D)".

(2) In the thirty-first embodiment, the difference number is set to 2400 as the end condition of the advantageous section based on the difference number counter value. However, it is not limited to this, and various settings such as 2000 sheets, 2200 sheets, and 2500 sheets can be set.
In the 31st embodiment, the number of sheets is set to 2400 based on the following criteria.
Recently, there is a tendency to "do not exceed 150% payout rate in 1600 games". In this case, assuming that the number of bets for each game is 3 in 1600 games,
1600 x 3 = 4800 (total number of bets in 1500 games)
becomes.
Therefore, the number of payouts when the payout rate is 150% is
4800×1.5 (150%)=7200 sheets.
Therefore,
7200 (number of payouts) - 4800 (number of bets) = 2400 (number of differences)
becomes.
In other words, the fact that the difference number does not exceed 2400 means that the payout rate does not exceed 150% in 1600 games.

(3) After starting the advantageous section, the difference counter value will be set to "0 (H)" when the difference number reaches the lowest value, and the advantageous section can be continued until it exceeds "2400 (D)". and
However, after the start of the advantageous section, the point at which the number of differences becomes the lowest value may be set to "F6A0 (H)" corresponding to "-2400 (D)", and the count may be incremented from that point. Then, when a carry occurs and exceeds "0000 (H)", it may be determined that the advantageous section ends.

(4) In the thirty-first embodiment, it was determined that the condition for ending the advantageous section was met when the difference counter value exceeded "2400 (D)". It may be determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied when the time becomes (when the time reaches).
Also, when the difference counter is a decrement counter, the initial value is set to "2400 (D)", and when the value falls below "0 (H)" (when a digit is decremented), the termination condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. Alternatively, it may be determined that the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied when the value becomes "0 (H)" or less.

(5) In the thirtieth embodiment, the initial value of the advantageous section clear counter is set to "1500 (D)" and countdown is performed. The reason why the advantageous section clear counter is set in this way is that the initial value "1500 (D)" is set only at the start of the advantageous section, and after that, it continues to be decremented by "1" each time the game is played, and is changed from "1" to "0". , the program can be simplified (FIG. 246).
On the other hand, in the thirty-first embodiment, the initial value of the difference number counter is set to "0" and counted up until it exceeds "2400 (D)". This is because when correcting the difference counter value, correcting it to "0" simplifies the program, and for that reason, counting up is more convenient.
However, the advantageous section clear counter is not limited to counting down, and the difference number counter is not limited to counting up.

(6) The timing for setting the initial value (for example, "0") to the difference number counter can be set in various ways, such as at the time of game end check processing. It is preferable to set the initial value "0" to the difference number counter at a timing close to the timing of setting. This is to minimize the period during which there is a difference between the value of the advantageous section clear counter and the value of the difference counter.
For example, after the processing of step S2748 in FIG. 246 in the thirtieth embodiment, the initial value "0" is set to the difference number counter.

In the thirtieth embodiment, the advantageous zone clear counter is updated (subtracted by "1") at the start of the game (step S2724 in FIG. 245; step S2742 in FIG. 246). However, if the advantageous zone clear counter is updated at the start of the game and the difference counter value is updated at the end of the game (for example, the game end check process in FIG. 244), the update timing of both counters is is different. Specifically, the difference counter value is updated at the end of the game, and the advantageous zone clear counter is updated at the start of the next game.
Therefore, if the advantageous interval clear counter is updated, for example, during the game end check process, and the advantageous interval clear counter is updated (decremented by "1") and the difference counter is updated in successive steps, more preferred.

(7) In the sub-display during AT, the total number of wins during AT is displayed as an image. However, in addition to this, the difference number counter value received from the main control board 50 may be displayed together with the total acquisition number. For example, it is "total acquisition number XX, difference number XX". If the difference number (difference number counter value) is used as a reference and an effect or the like indicating the end of the advantageous interval (AT) is output, misunderstandings by the player can be reduced. Further, when the difference counter value is displayed, it may be displayed when the difference counter value exceeds a specific value (for example, remaining "100") or when it reaches or exceeds a specific value.
Also, a difference number indicator (e.g., the same as the management information display LED 74) electrically connected to the main control board 50 is provided so as to be visible from the outside, and the difference number counter value is displayed on this difference number indicator. is also possible.

(8) In the example of FIG. 261, the image display by the image display device 23 is made different between the notification mode A and the notification mode B. FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to make the notification mode the same, make the lighting pattern of the lamp 21 different, and/or make the sound from the speaker 22 different. Furthermore, it is possible to vary the lighting pattern of the lamp 21 and/or vary the sound from the speaker 22 at the same time that the image display by the image display device 23 is varied.

(9) In the thirty-first embodiment, once the advantageous interval is started, the advantageous interval continues until the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)". However, this is not the only option, and the number of differences, which is the condition for ending the advantageous section, may be determined by lottery or the like at each start of the advantageous section.
Also, when the advantageous interval start condition A is satisfied and the transition to the advantageous interval is made (for example, when 1BBA is won in the first embodiment), and when the advantageous interval start condition B (≠advantage interval start condition A) is satisfied and the transition is made to the advantageous interval It is also possible to change the number of differences, which is the condition for ending the advantageous section, depending on the time (for example, when winning a small winning combination E1 in the first embodiment).

(10) In the thirty-first embodiment, a storage area is provided for storing the difference counter value. On the other hand, the difference number data calculated by subtracting the number of bets from the number of payouts may or may not be provided in the RWM 53 . When the RWM 53 does not have a storage area for storing the difference number data, the difference number data may be stored in a register until the difference number counter value is calculated after the difference number data is calculated.
In FIG. 258, in the calculation of example 1, the process of subtracting the number of bets from the difference counter value and the process of adding the number of payouts to the difference counter value are performed. Since the difference number data is not calculated, it is not necessary to store the difference number data.

In addition, in the calculation of example 2 in FIG. 258, difference number data is calculated from "number of payouts - number of bets", and when difference number data is added to the difference number counter value, means for storing the calculated difference number data Is required. However, in Example 2, if "difference number counter value = difference number counter value + number of payouts" is calculated and "difference number counter value = difference number counter value - number of bets" is calculated, difference number data memory is unnecessary.

(11) In Example 1 of FIG. 258, when the difference counter value is calculated when the start switch 41 is operated and the difference counter value is calculated again when the game ends, the difference counter value is calculated when the start switch 41 is operated. After the calculation, the difference counter value may be stored in the RWM 53. However, if the calculated difference counter value can be stored in the register until the end of the game, it is stored until the end of the game (RWM 53 may not be stored). Then, at the end of the game, when the calculation of the difference counter value is completed (if the difference counter value is corrected to "0 (H)", the corrected difference counter value) is stored in the RWM 53. can be
Similarly, after completing the calculation of the difference counter value and before storing the difference counter value in the RWM 53, the difference counter value stored in the register is used to determine whether the difference counter value is the end condition of the advantageous section. After determining whether the value satisfies the condition, the difference counter value may be stored in the RWM 53 (if necessary, the corrected difference counter value may be stored in the RWM 53).
If the difference counter value calculated when the start switch 41 is operated is stored in the RWM 53, when the game ends (when the process of adding the payout number to the difference counter value is executed), processing to read the value again occurs. This is because the amount of processing increases.

(12) In the 31st embodiment, a slot machine was illustrated as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to, for example, a casino machine or an enclosed gaming machine (a medalless gaming machine).
(13) The thirty-first embodiment and the various modifications described above (including the contents of the first to thirtieth embodiments) are not limited to being implemented independently, and can be implemented in combination as appropriate. is.

<Thirty-Second Embodiment>
Next, the thirty-second embodiment will be described. First, in the thirty-second embodiment, common points and differences from the above-described first to thirty-first embodiments will be described.
<Common points>
In the thirty-second embodiment, as in the first embodiment and the like, an advantageous section display LED (also referred to as "advantageous section indicator" or simply "section indicator") 77 indicating an advantageous section is provided.
The advantageous section display LED 77 is composed of the lower digit segment DP of the stored number display LED 76 as in the first embodiment (FIG. 2), or the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78 as in the 22nd embodiment (FIG. 142). It may be composed of digit segments DP. However, it is not limited to this, and may be composed of the segments DP of the upper digits of the stored number display LED 76 or the acquired number display LED 78 . Alternatively, it may be composed of an independent dedicated light-emitting device (lamp) different from the stored number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 .

Also, as shown in FIG. 243 of the thirtieth embodiment, an advantageous section type flag (_NB_ADV_KND), an advantageous section clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR), an advantageous section display LED flag (_FL_ADV_LED), and an AT game count counter (_CT_ART) are provided. In addition, it does not mean that the information about the advantageous section is limited to these. For example, the main game state, which will be described later, is also included in the information regarding the advantageous section. On the other hand, the information about the advantageous section does not include the information indicating the RT state, the information about the setting value, the information about the number of credits, and the like.

<Differences>
In the first embodiment, as shown at timing 1 in FIG. 23, after the game in which the winning section is won ends (when all the reels 31 stop and medals are paid out, after the medals are paid out), settlement is made. The advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the switch 46 becomes operable.
Alternatively, as shown at timing 2 in FIG. 23, when shifting to the advantageous section based on the winning of the special role, after the winning special role is won, before the adjustment switch 46 becomes operable, the advantageous section The display LED 77 is turned on.
Therefore, at both timings 1 and 2, the advantageous section display LED 77 is always turned on when the game shifts to (has been) an advantageous section.

On the other hand, in the thirty-second embodiment, there are cases where the advantageous section display LED 77 is not lit even after shifting to the advantageous section.
For example, firstly, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on at the time of transition to the advantageous section, it may be turned on afterwards (during the advantageous section).
Secondly, in the case where the advantageous section display LED 77 is not lit when transitioning to the advantageous section, if the advantageous section end condition is met before the condition for lighting the advantageous section display LED 77, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on once. The advantageous section may end without turning on the light.
As in the other embodiments, the advantageous section display LED 77 may of course be turned on when shifting to the advantageous section.

Also, regardless of whether the advantageous interval display LED 77 lights up or not, when the advantageous interval starts, the initial value is set to the advantageous interval clear counter, and during the advantageous interval, the value is decremented by "1" every game. .
Furthermore, when the difference counter is provided as in the 31st embodiment, the difference counter is updated every game during the advantageous interval regardless of whether or not the advantageous interval display LED 77 lights up.

Then, when the advantageous section clear counter reaches "0" or when the difference counter reaches "2400 (D)", it is determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are met, and information about the advantageous section (for example, the above-mentioned information) is determined. Advantageous section type flag (_NB_ADV_KND), advantageous section clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR), advantageous section display LED flag (_FL_ADV_LED), AT game counter (_CT_ART), and difference counter) are initialized (cleared). Here, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is not lit during the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED flag remains "0". Initialization processing including the display LED flag is executed.

Here, in the initialization processing at the end of the advantageous interval, it is determined whether or not the advantageous interval display LED flag has been lit. It is also possible to exclude (_FL_ADV_LED).
However, even when the advantageous section display LED flag is not lit, that is, even when the advantageous section display LED flag is "0", it is uniformly subject to initialization processing. By doing so, it becomes unnecessary to determine whether or not the advantageous section display LED flag is "0" at the time of the initialization processing, so the initialization processing program can be simplified and the processing speed can be increased. .

Further, in the first embodiment, when shifting to the advantageous section, at least one small winning combination is played except when the number of games reaches 1500 games without winning the small winning combination B group even once during the advantageous section. When the B group is won (in a game in which the maximum number of payouts can be obtained), the correct pressing order is reported (instruction function is activated).
In the thirtieth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 243, there is provided a maximum payout notification flag (_FL_ADV_ORD) for determining whether or not the order of pressing the correct answer has been notified when the small winning group B is won in the advantageous section.

On the other hand, in the thirty-second embodiment, there is no condition of "reporting the order of pressing the correct answer at least once when winning the small winning combination B (activating the instruction function)" during the advantageous interval. That is, it is possible to end the advantageous section without notifying the correct pressing order even once (without activating the instruction function even once). Therefore, in the 32nd embodiment, there is no maximum payout notification flag (_FL_ADV_ORD).

Furthermore, in the 32nd embodiment, in a game state in which the interval Sim is in an advantageous interval and the interval Sim ball-out rate exceeds "1", the advantageous interval display LED 77 is turned on when the correct answer pressing order is notified.
Furthermore, once the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, the lighting is maintained during the advantageous section.
When the advantageous interval ends, more specifically, in the final game of the advantageous interval, for example, in FIG. lights out. As in the thirtieth embodiment, when the advantageous interval end condition is satisfied, the advantageous interval indication LED flag (_FL_ADV_LED) is initialized, and the advantageous interval indication LED 77 is extinguished in subsequent interrupt processing.

Here, as the "correct answer order",
a) Pushing order in which the maximum number of payouts can be obtained when winning a combination in which the maximum number of payouts can be obtained, such as when winning a small winning combination B. b) When winning a small winning combination of group C, although the maximum number of payouts cannot be obtained. , when the number of payouts differs depending on the combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed in the game, the pressing order in which the symbol combination with the highest number of payouts is stopped and displayed. d) There is a push order for winning a replay that does not demote the RT, like when winning the replay group C.
Then, as a condition for lighting the advantageous section display LED 77, the "notification of the order of pressing the correct answer" is as follows.
Notice a) is applicable, but notices b), c), and d) are not applicable Notices a) and b) are applicable, but notices c) and d) are not applicable a), b) , c), and d) may be specified. In the following description, it is assumed that the notification of the order of pressing the correct answer, which is the condition for lighting the advantageous section display LED 77, corresponds to the notification of a), but not to the notifications of b), c), and d).

Further, in the thirty-second embodiment, the lighting timing when the advantageous interval display LED 77 is lit in a game in which the correct pressing order is notified is, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated (more specifically, when the reel 31 starts rotating). After that, until the rotation of the reel 31 reaches a constant speed state).
However, it is not limited to this, and as other lighting timings,
a) Before the start switch 41 is operated (immediately before starting AT preparation, immediately before starting AT, etc.)
a) After the start switch 41 is operated, when all the reels 31 are in a constant speed state and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted,
a) when at least one reel 31 is stopped and at least one other reel 31 is spinning;
b) when all reels 31 are stopped,
c) After all the reels 31 have stopped (the relevant game is finished) and before the settlement switch 46 can be operated before the start of the next game.

However, when the advantageous interval display LED 77 is turned on in a game in which the order of pressing the correct answer is indicated, it is necessary to determine the winning combination in the game. be killed.
When the advantageous interval display LED 77 is turned on in a game in which the order of pressing the correct answer is indicated, it is after the start switch 41 is operated and the winning combination lottery is executed. The timing at which the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before reaching the constant speed state is the shortest timing.

"Interval Sim (simulation) ball output rate" means that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination always stops on the active line (for example, when winning the combination of "PB ≠ 1", the symbol combination corresponding to the stop on the active line), and when there are multiple types of symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination, the symbol combination that is most advantageous to the player 01 (9 bells)) is the payout rate when it is assumed that the ball is stopped on the active line.
Also, in the calculation of the section Sim ball payout rate, the ball payout (number of payouts) due to the operation of the accessory (such as 1BB operation) is not included.
Furthermore, in a game that wins a replay, the number of inputs is counted as "3" (when the prescribed number is "3") and the number of payouts is counted as "0". game), the number of inputs is "0" and the number of payouts is "x"("x" is the number of payouts in the game).

Furthermore, in the calculation of the section Sim ball payout rate, in a game in which a special combination and a minor combination are won in duplicate, the number of payouts for the game may be calculated as "0" on the assumption that the special combination wins. Alternatively, the calculation may be made on the assumption that a small winning combination will be won in the game. Furthermore, in a game in which a special combination and a minor combination are won in duplicate, the number of payouts for the game may be calculated on the assumption that both the special combination and the minor combination are won.

In addition, since the winning probability of at least one combination differs depending on the set value, the section Sim payout rate is calculated for each set value.
Here, in the present embodiment, if the game state (RT, accessory action) is the same, whether the section Sim ball output rate exceeds "1" or is equal to or less than "1" is usually determined by a set value does not change depending on In other words, when the game state A (RT, accessory operation) in which the interval Sim ball-out rate exceeds “1” at the highest setting (for example, set value 6), interval Sim It is designed to be in game state A (RT, accessory operation) in which the payout rate exceeds "1".

However, when the interval Sim ball output rate differs for each setting value, the interval Sim ball output rate is “1” or less when the low setting (for example, set value 1) is set, and when the high setting (for example, set value 6) , there may be a case where the section Sim ball output rate exceeds "1".
In this case, when the game state is set to high (the section Sim ball output rate exceeds "1"), it is determined that the advantageous section display LED 77 must be lit if the pressing order is notified during the advantageous section. is possible. That is, when the game state is set to low (the section Sim ball output rate is "1" or less), it is determined that the advantageous section display LED 77 does not need to be lit even if the pressing order is notified during the advantageous section. is possible.

Alternatively, when the interval Sim ball-out rate exceeds "1" for at least one set value, the game state is such that the interval Sim ball-out rate exceeds "1" regardless of how many set values are set. It is considered to be in a game state, and even if the setting is low in that game state (the section Sim ball output rate is "1" or less), if the pushing order is notified during the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 must be lit. It is possible to determine that

Furthermore, when the interval Sim ball output rate is equal to or less than "1" for at least one setting value, the gaming state is such that the interval Sim ball output rate is "1" regardless of the set value. Considering the following game state, even if the game state is set to high (section Sim ball output rate exceeds "1"), the advantageous section display LED 77 is displayed even if the pushing order is notified during the advantageous section It is possible to determine that it is not necessary to turn on the light.

The gaming state in which the section Sim ball-out rate exceeds “1” includes, for example, RT with a high probability of replay, RT with a high probability of a small combination, and action of a role (1BB, RB, MB, CB, SB, etc.).
Here, taking the first embodiment as an example, RT3 (high replay probability), 1BBA operation, and 1BBB operation are all gaming states in which the interval Sim ball output rate exceeds “1”.

Note that, in the first embodiment, the correct pressing order is not notified (the instruction function is not activated) while the accessory is in operation. However, for example, during an advantageous section, when a role having a correct pressing order is drawn by lottery during the operation of a role product in which the section Sim ball output rate exceeds "1", and the correct pressing order is notified (when the instruction function is activated) ), it is necessary to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 based on the notification of the order of pressing the correct answer. On the other hand, even if a winning combination with the correct pressing order is drawn during the operation of the role product in which the section Sim ball output rate exceeds "1" in the advantageous section, when the correct pressing order is not notified ( When the indicating function is not activated), it is optional to light up the advantageous section display LED 77 .

Further, in the first embodiment, with the RT3 set value of 6, assuming that the minor winning combination won in the game in which the special winning combination and the minor winning combination are duplicated does not win, the expected value of the number of payouts (theoretical value) is "approximately 3 .22 sheets. Therefore, the section Sim ball output rate is "3.22/3=approximately 1.07", which exceeds "1".
On the other hand, with the set value 6 for non-RT and RT2, assuming that the minor combination won in the game in which the special combination and the minor combination are won in duplicate does not win, the expected payout number (theoretical value) is "approximately 1. 97 sheets. Therefore, the section Sim ball output rate is "1.97/3=approximately 0.66", which is equal to or less than "1". Although the explanation is omitted, the payout rate is "1" or less even at the set value 6 of RT1 and RT4. Furthermore, the set value 1 is slightly lower than the set value 6 in the section Sim ball output rate. At RT3, even with the set value of 1, the section Sim ball output rate exceeds “1”.

As described above, taking the first embodiment as an example, the game state in which the section Sim ball-out rate exceeds "1" is RT3 and the action of the accessory (1BBA and 1BBB).
The other non-RT, RT1, RT2, and RT4 are game states in which the section Sim ball-out rate is "1" or less.

FIG. 262 is a diagram for explaining an example of lighting timing of the advantageous section display LED 77 during the advantageous section in the thirty-second embodiment. RT is the same as in the first embodiment (FIG. 22). In other words, the Sim ball payout rate for the non-RT, RT1, and RT2 sections is less than or equal to "1", and the Sim ball payout rate for the section RT3 exceeds "1."
Also, in FIG. 262, the instruction monitor (7-segment LED for displaying the pressing order instruction information) is assumed to be the lower digits of the acquired number display LED 78 . In the first embodiment, the upper digits and lower digits (two digits) of the acquired number display LED 78 are used to display the push order instruction information, but in the example of FIG. It is assumed that information is displayed. Furthermore, the indication monitor shall have a segment DP, and this segment DP will be explained as the advantageous section display LED 77 .
In FIG. 262, among the 7 segments, the dotted line indicates off and the solid line indicates on. Furthermore, in the advantageous section display LED 77 (segment DP), white (○) indicates off, and solid (●) indicates on.

First, in the normal section, even when the minor win group B (pressing order bell) is won, the correct pressing order cannot be notified (operation of the instruction function), so the pressing order instruction information is displayed. no. Moreover, since it is not an advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 does not light up.
In FIG. 262, the number of games played when shifting to the advantageous section is shown as 1G, 2G, . It is also assumed that the RT immediately after shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section is any of non-RT to RT2 (the section Sim ball output rate is "1" or less).
Even if the normal section shifts to the advantageous section, in the example of FIG. 262, the advantageous section display LED 77 remains in the off state. As in the first embodiment, it is of course possible to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 at the timing of transition to the advantageous section (that is, 1G in FIG. 262).

Next, in the 5th G, an example is shown in which "1" is displayed as the pressing order instruction information when winning the small winning combination B group. However, in the game in which the pressing order instruction information is displayed, the interval Sim ball output rate is "1" or less. Therefore, it is not necessary to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 . Therefore, in the example of FIG. 262, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not lit. Of course, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on at the timing of the 5G.

Also, FIG. 262 shows an example of transition to RT3 (game state in which the section Sim ball-out rate exceeds "1") at the 30th G. FIG.
In this example, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on at the time of transition to RT3. However, not limited to this, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on based on the transition to RT3.

Then, in the 35th G, an example is shown in which the small win group B is won and the order of pressing the correct answer is announced. In this case, since it corresponds to notification of the order of pressing the correct answer (operation of the instruction function) in a gaming state in which the section Sim ball-out rate exceeds "1", it is necessary to light the advantageous section display LED 77 . Therefore, in the 35th G, the pressing order instruction information "2" is displayed and the advantageous section display LED 77 (segment DP) is lit.

After lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 during the advantageous section, the lighting of the advantageous section display LED 77 is continued until the advantageous section ends (until the vehicle shifts to the normal section). After the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on once, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned off in the middle of the advantageous section.
Therefore, after lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 in the advantageous section, the state in which the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit is maintained in the subsequent advantageous section even if the game does not notify the order of pushing the correct answer. In FIG. 262, after shifting to the advantageous section, at the 40th G, the order of pressing the correct answer is not notified, but only the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.
In addition, even if it is in the advantageous section, even if the game state shifts to a game state where the section Sim ball output rate is "1" or less due to RT falling, etc., as long as it is in the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 remains lit.

Next, the main game state in the 32nd embodiment will be explained.
FIG. 263 is a diagram showing the transition of the main game state in the thirty-second embodiment.
The main game states (control states) such as the usual sign, CZ, and AT have been explained in FIG. 61 of the fifth embodiment, but will be explained again here.
The main game state in this embodiment is a concept different from RT, and is a game state whose transition is controlled by the main control board 50 in the same way as RT. The main game state of the present embodiment usually includes high accuracy (CZ (chance zone)), fake omen, main omen, AT preparation, and AT.

RT and the main game state may or may not be interlocked. For example, when the conditions for simultaneously satisfying the RT transition and the main game state transition are established, the RT transition is made and the main game state is also transitioned. On the other hand, when the RT transition condition is satisfied but the main game state transition condition is not satisfied, only the RT transitions while the main game state remains as it is. Conversely, when the conditions for transitioning to the main game state are satisfied but the conditions for transitioning to RT are not satisfied, only the main game state transitions while keeping RT.

Also, as shown in FIG. 263, the main game state is usually the main game state during the normal section. Therefore, the correct pressing order is not reported.
On the other hand, among the main game states, high probability other than normal, fake omen, main omen, AT preparation, and AT are game states in the advantageous section.

In the normal state of the main game, a lottery is made as to whether or not to shift to the advantageous section and AT. This lottery is executed based on the winning combination as shown in the first embodiment. However, it is not limited to this, and it is also possible to perform an independent lottery regardless of the winning combination. As a result, when the transfer lottery for the advantageous section is won, it is decided whether to shift to high accuracy, fake omen, or main omen (determined in two stages). Here, when winning the advantageous section and AT, it is decided to shift to high probability or this omen. When winning the advantageous section and AT and shifting to high probability, if the end condition of high probability is satisfied, it will shift to this omen. On the other hand, when the advantageous section is won but the AT is not won, the game shifts to a highly accurate or false sign. In this case, after transitioning to high probability, if the end condition of high probability is satisfied, it shifts to false sign.
Of course, when the advantageous section is won and the AT is won, it is also possible to shift to the omen without shifting to high accuracy. In addition, when the advantageous section is won but the AT is not won, it is possible to shift to a false sign without shifting to a high accuracy. Furthermore, it is also possible to determine the main game state together with the transfer lottery for the advantageous section (determine in one step). Specifically, it is possible to determine that the advantageous section and the AT are won as a result of the transfer lottery for the advantageous section.

In addition, when shifting to the fake omen or the main omen, the number of games of the bad omen and the main omen may be determined by lottery or the like, or may be determined to a predetermined number of games (for example, 32 games). good. The determined number of games is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 (for example, "prediction game number" provided in the RWM 53), and is subtracted by "1" each time the game is played. When the number of games of this sign is consumed, it shifts to normal or AT preparation respectively.
In addition, in order to determine whether or not the AT has been won, an "AT winning flag" is provided in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53, and "1" is set when the AT is won, and when the AT is not won. Store "0". Then, when the number of omen games becomes "0", the AT winning flag is referred to, when it is "1", it shifts to AT preparation, and when it is "0", it shifts to normal (advantageous section end and move to the normal section).

In addition, the main control board 50 transmits information on the number of precursor games and the AT winning flag to the sub control board 80 every game. As a result, the sub-control board 80 can output an effect corresponding to the number of omen games and the AT winning flag. Furthermore, the effect when the omen ends (the effect when shifting to normal or AT preparation) can be executed smoothly.

This sign is a main game state in which shifting to AT is confirmed, and after shifting to this sign, there is no shift to high probability, false sign, or normal. After this aura, it shifts to AT preparation (however, this is not limited to this, and after this aura ends, it may shift directly to AT without going through AT preparation. For example, the RT state after this aura ends When it is RT3, it may be directly shifted to AT without going through AT preparation.).
On the other hand, the false sign is a state in which the AT is not won even though it is in the advantageous section at the time of shifting to the false sign. However, the AT lottery is executed even during the false sign. For example, when a rare role (in FIG. 17, small role D or small role E1) is won, a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not to perform AT, and when it is determined to perform AT, the omen is changed from a gaze omen to a main omen. Alternatively, as indicated by the dotted arrow in FIG. 263, the false sign is terminated and the AT preparation is started (or the AT can be directly transitioned).

During preparation for AT is, in principle, a main game state that is shifted after the end of this precursor, and is a main game state before starting AT.
During the AT preparation, when the replay B group, the small winning combination B group and the small winning combination C group are won, the correct pressing order is notified. Here, when the AT preparation is already RT3 (the section Sim ball-out rate exceeds "1") and the order of pressing the correct answer is notified when a minor winning group B is won, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on as described above. light up. On the other hand, when the AT is in preparation but not RT3, the condition "the section Sim ball output rate exceeds '1'" is not satisfied. It is optional whether or not to allow

In principle, the AT of this embodiment is executed at RT3 (high probability of replay). Therefore, even if the AT is being prepared, for example, if it is other than RT3, replay B is performed as shown in FIGS. 18 and 22 of the first embodiment. It waits until the group is won, and when the replay B group is won, the correct answer pushing order (the pushing order for winning the replay 02) is announced. During RT2 and AT preparation, when the replay B group is won and the correct answer pressing order is notified, AT is started from the next game (main game state is updated to AT).

In this embodiment, even if the small win group B is not won and the order of pressing the correct answer is never notified, when the main game state shifts to AT preparation or AT, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit. to control. In addition, in the case of controlling to light up the advantageous section display LED 77 when shifting to AT, when winning the replay B group in RT2 and AT preparation, when the correct pushing order is notified, the correct pushing order is notified. , the advantageous section display LED 77 may be lit. Alternatively, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on after the RT2 game is finished, before the RT3 (AT) game is started, or when the RT3 (AT) game is started.

However, the condition for turning on the advantageous zone display LED 77 is ``announcement of the order of pressing the correct answer when winning a small win group B in a gaming state in which the section Sim ball output rate exceeds '1' (operation of the instruction function)'. , when the AT is started without satisfying the conditions, after the AT is started, "Information of the correct pressing order when the section Sim ball output rate exceeds '1' and the small winning group B is won (instruction function of course, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on when the condition of "operation of )" is satisfied.

Also, during RT2 and AT preparation, the replay B group was won and the correct pressing order was notified, but even when the stop switch 42 was not operated in the correct pressing order and the process did not proceed to RT3, AT to start. Then, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on in accordance with the timing of AT start. When the AT is started in the state of RT2, when the replay B group is won after that, the order of pressing the correct answer is reported again, and the process is shifted to RT3.
If the AT is started while RT2 is still on, the rate of ball output in the section Sim is "1" or less in RT2. As described above, it is preferable to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 at least after AT is started.). However, along with the transition to the main game state, control is performed so that the advantageous interval display LED 77 is lit (for example, in a storage area (advantageous interval display LED flag) for storing information indicating whether the advantageous interval display LED 77 is lit or extinguished) Processing for storing information indicating lighting, etc.) can reduce the processing load.

264 to 268 are diagrams (patterns 1 to 10) showing examples of advantageous intervals, main game states, and lighting timings of the advantageous interval display LEDs 77. FIG.
In FIG. 264, an example of pattern 1 shows an example of shifting from a normal section to an advantageous section when the main game state shifts from normal to high probability (section Sim payout rate is "1" or less). Furthermore, it is an example of ending the advantageous section without winning AT and without shifting to a sign after shifting to high accuracy. The case where it does not shift to an omen just by shifting to a high accuracy is, for example, a high accuracy is positioned in the CZ, and since the transition conditions of the omen (gase omen or this omen) were not satisfied during the CZ, the end condition of the CZ was set. For example, when the condition is satisfied, the transition is made to the normal (normal section) without transitioning to the sign.

Thus, it is not necessary to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 simply by shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section. Further, as described above, in the thirty-second embodiment, the advantageous section can be finished without notifying the order of pressing the correct answer even once (without activating the instruction function). You may be able to finish the advantageous section without

Pattern 2 in FIG. 264 shows an example in which, after a high-precision transition like pattern 1, a transition to a warning sign is made. It should be noted that, in pattern 2, a false omen, it is assumed that the order of pressing the correct answer is not notified and the section Sim ball output rate is "1" or less. Gaze omen is also an advantageous section as well as high accuracy. It has not been decided whether to move to a fake omen because it is not elected at the time of high accuracy, or whether to move to a gase omen or this omen when moving to high accuracy. There is a case where it shifts to a fake sign based on the lottery result.

It is not necessary to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 just by shifting to a false omen. Therefore, in the case of pattern 2, it is determined by lottery whether or not to light the advantageous section display LED 77 when shifting to a false omen. In this example, it is decided to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 with a probability of 15% (indicated by the dotted line in the drawing), and not to light up the advantageous section display LED 77 with a probability of 85% (indicated by the solid line in the drawing). to decide. That is, when shifting to a false sign, the probability of not lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 is set higher than the probability of lighting it. When it is decided to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 and the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, the lighting is maintained until the end of the advantageous section. Here, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on based on the fact that the prediction has shifted to a false omen, "In the game state in which the section Sim ball output rate exceeds '1', the order of pressing the correct answer is notified (the instruction function is activated. It is not lighted by satisfying the lighting condition of "lighting".

In pattern 2, when the advantageous interval display LED 77 is lit based on the transition to the false precursor, it is also possible to light the advantageous interval display LED 77 after the predetermined number of games have been played after the transition to the false precursor. Since the number of games of the false precursor is stored in the RWM 53 as described above, the lighting timing of the advantageous section display LED 77 can be controlled based on the number of remaining games of the false precursor. When the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit during the warning sign, the information of the advantageous zone display LED flag is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 every game after shifting to the warning sign. As a result, the sub-control board 80 outputs an effect with a low AT winning expectation before the advantageous interval display LED 77 is lit, and outputs an effect with a medium AT winning expectation after the advantageous interval display LED 77 is lit. becomes possible.
The main control board 50 may transmit the information of the advantageous zone display LED flag to the sub control board 80 every game during the advantageous zone. In this way, the transmission process can be uniformly performed without judging which main game state the player is staying in or whether or not the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit, so that the process can be simplified. .

Furthermore, the main control board 50 transmits information (for example, an AT win flag and information on the main game state) that can determine whether it is a false omen or a real omen, and an advantageous section display LED flag. If the information is transmitted, the sub-control board 80 can also output an effect suggesting the reliability of the omen (AT winning expectation) based on this information.
It should be noted that it may be determined in advance so that the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on only by shifting to the false sign. Alternatively, conversely, it may be determined in advance so that the advantageous section display LED 77 is always turned on when the transition is made to a false omen.

Pattern 3 in FIG. 265 is an example in which the order of pressing the correct answer is notified (the instruction function is activated) during the false precursor. In this example, it is assumed that the interval Sim ball payout rate of the false omen is "1" or less. Therefore, under this circumstance, it is not necessary to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 even if the order of pressing the correct keys is notified. In pattern 3 of FIG. 265, the solid line indicates the case where the advantageous interval display LED 77 is not lit even if the correct press order is notified, and the dotted line indicates the case where the advantageous interval display LED 77 is lit based on the notification of the correct press order. example.
Furthermore, when notifying the order of pressing the correct answer during a fake omen (the section Sim ball output rate is "1" or less), it may be determined by a lottery or the like whether or not to light the advantageous section display LED 77 . For example, there is a 25% probability of deciding to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77, and a 75% probability of deciding not to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77.
In pattern 3, an example is shown in which the correct pressing order is notified during a false omen, but for example, the probability of informing the correct pressing order may be set to "false omen<real omen". As a result, when the order of pressing the correct answer is notified during the omen, the AT can have a feeling of anticipation of winning the lottery.
Furthermore, when the section Sim ball output rate in the omen is "1" or less, the AT winning expectation when the correct pushing order is notified during the omen and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit is calculated as the correct pushing order. is reported and the advantageous section display LED 77 does not light up. As a result, when the order of pressing the correct answer is notified during the omen and the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up, the AT can have a feeling of anticipation of winning the lottery.

Pattern 4 in FIG. 265 shows an example of transition from high certainty to false omen. This fake sign shows an example in which the game state is initially in a game state in which the interval Sim ball-out rate is "1" or less, and the correct pressing order is notified in the game state in which the interval Sim ball-out rate is "1" or less. . Even if the correct answer pressing order is notified in the gaming state where the interval Sim ball-out rate is "1" or less, the advantageous interval display LED 77 does not necessarily have to be lit. Furthermore, in pattern 4, the game state is such that the interval Sim ball output rate exceeds "1" after the notification of the correct pressing order. It is not necessary to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 unless the correct answer pressing order is notified again in a gaming state in which the section Sim ball-out rate exceeds "1". Pattern 4 shows an example in which the advantageous section ends without lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 .

Pattern 5 in FIG. 266, like pattern 4, shows an example of transition from high probability to false portent. Unlike pattern 4, pattern 5 is an example in which the correct pressing order is notified after the game state in which the interval Sim ball-out rate exceeds "1". In this case, it is necessary to light the advantageous section display LED 77 when notifying the order of pressing the correct keys. Therefore, although the advantageous interval display LED 77 is not lit immediately after the shift to the false omen, the advantageous interval display LED 77 is illuminated based on the notification of the correct pressing order.
In pattern 5, after the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, the game state shifts to a game state in which the section Sim ball payout rate is "1" or less during the fake sign. Even in such a case, the advantageous section display LED 77 remains illuminated. After the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on once, it is necessary to keep the lighting up until the end of the advantageous section (it is not turned off before the end of the advantageous section).

Pattern 6 in FIG. 266 shows an example of shifting from high accuracy to main omen, and then shifting to AT during AT preparation. Then, pattern 6 is an example in which it is determined by lottery or the like whether or not to light up the advantageous section display LED 77 when shifting to the main omen. In pattern 6, it is determined with a probability of 70% that the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit when transitioning to the main sign, and it is decided that the advantageous section display LED 77 is not lit with a probability of 30% (at the time of transition to the main sign). do.

That is, when shifting to the main sign, the probability of deciding to light the advantageous section display LED 77 is set higher than the probability of deciding not to light it. As shown in pattern 2 in FIG. 264, the probability (15%) of deciding to light up the advantageous section display LED 77 when transitioning to a false omen is higher than the probability (15%) that the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit when transitioning to this omen. The decision probability (70%) is set higher. Thus, the reliability of the portent can be suggested by whether or not the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up when the state shifts to the portent.

In pattern 6, there is no problem even if it is set to "probability of lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 (for example, 40%)<probability of not lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 (for example, 60%)" at the time of transition to the main sign. . It suffices if "probability of lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 when transitioning to the main sign>probability of lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 when transitioning to the fake sign".
In addition, in the example of pattern 6, even if the advantageous section display LED 77 is not lit at the transition to this precursor (30%), the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit at the transition to AT preparation.
It should be noted that the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on at an arbitrary timing during the main precursor after shifting to the main precursor.
Further, it may be determined that the advantageous section display LED 77 is always turned on when shifting to the main sign. Alternatively, conversely, it may be determined that the advantageous section display LED 77 is not lit only by shifting to the present sign.

Pattern 7 in FIG. 267 shows an example in which the correct pressing order is notified during the present omen, but the advantageous section display LED 77 is not lit because the section Sim ball-out rate at that time was "1" or less. . In this way, even during this omen, if the section Sim ball-out rate is "1" or less, it is possible to turn off the advantageous section display LED 77 . Also, in this example, after notification of the order of pressing the correct answer, the game state in which the section Sim ball-out rate exceeds "1" is entered during the present sign, and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit when the transition is made to AT preparation. is shown.
When the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit based on the transition of the main game state, for example, in the example of pattern 7, after the main sign is finished (after all the reels 31 are stopped in the final game of the main sign), the AT is being prepared. Before the start switch 41 is operated when shifting to (before the first game during AT preparation is started), the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit.

Pattern 8 in FIG. 267 shows an example of transition from normal to main aura without going through high accuracy. Then, in this omen, the correct pressing order is notified, and the section Sim ball output rate when reporting the correct pressing order is an example exceeding "1". In this case, it is necessary to light up the advantageous section display LED 77 when the correct key pressing order is announced. Pattern 8 shows an example in which after the advantageous interval display LED 77 is turned on, the game state shifts to a game state in which the interval Sim ball-out rate is “1” or less while the present sign is continuing, but this case is also advantageous. The section display LED 77 remains lit.

Pattern 9 in FIG. 268 is an example of transitioning from normal to main omen without going through high accuracy. This is an example in which the LED 77 is lit. However, when the correct answer pressing order during AT preparation is notified, the game state is still such that the section Sim ball output rate is "1" or less. Therefore, the lighting of the advantageous section display LED 77 in this case is not based on notifying the correct pressing order in the gaming state in which the section Sim ball-out rate exceeds "1". An example of pattern 9 shows an example of shifting to a game state in which the section Sim ball output rate exceeds "1" at the start of AT.

Pattern 10 in FIG. 268 is the same as pattern 9 in the timing of the transition to the main game state and the notification of the order of pressing the correct answer. This shows an example of a game state in which the payout rate exceeds “1”. In this case, unlike pattern 9, it is necessary to turn on the advantageous zone display LED 77 when the correct pressing order is notified, because the zone Sim ball output rate exceeds "1".

As described above, during AT preparation, the pressing order is notified when the replay group B, small combination B group, or small combination C group is won. On the other hand, while the AT preparation is in progress, the section Sim ball output rate does not necessarily exceed "1" (when the section Sim ball output rate exceeds "1", the advantageous section display LED 77 is always displayed when the correct pushing order is announced. It must be lit), during AT preparation, it is decided that the AT will be shifted, and the player knows the AT shift from the effect. Therefore, when shifting to AT preparation, it is preferable to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 before shifting to AT.

Also, as a game feature of AT, there is a method of setting each set as a continuation type and selecting a continuation rate from a plurality of types by lottery or the like. In this case, when there are, for example, "x" and "y (y>x)" as the continuation rate, and the continuation rate "x" is selected, at a predetermined timing during AT preparation (for example, AT preparation At the start of AT preparation), the probability that the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up is increased, and when the continuation rate “y” is selected, at another predetermined timing different from the predetermined timing during AT preparation (for example, AT preparation For example, the probability that the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up is set high when the first correct answer pressing order is announced after the transition to the middle. By setting in this way, the continuation rate of AT can be suggested by the lighting timing of the advantageous section display LED 77 .

Also, as an AT game property, there is a method of selecting the number of AT games from a plurality of types by lottery or the like. In this case, for example, when the number of games is "x" and "y (y>x)", when the number of games "x" is selected, at a predetermined timing during AT preparation (for example, AT preparation When the number of games “y” is selected, the probability that the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up is increased, and at a predetermined timing different from the predetermined timing during AT preparation (for example, AT preparation For example, the probability that the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up is set high when the first correct answer pressing order is announced after the transition to the middle. With this setting, the number of AT games played can be indicated by the lighting timing of the advantageous section display LED 77 .

Furthermore, as shown at timing 2 in FIG. 23 of the first embodiment, when the transition to the advantageous section is made based on the winning of 1BB (feature actuation), the lighting timing of the advantageous section display LED 77 can be set arbitrarily. Can be set. for example,
a) When winning 1BBA b) When starting 1BBA game c) Any timing during 1BBA game (at the start of game, during rotation of reel 31, at the end of game, etc.)
d) At the end of 1BBA game (when the end condition of 1BBA game is satisfied)
e) When transitioning from 1BBA operation to non-RT in FIG. 22 f) During non-RT when transitioning from 1BBA operation in FIG.
h) During RT2 that transitioned from 1BBA operation via non-RT i) In RT2 that transitioned from 1BBA operation via non-RT, when replay group B was won (when the start switch 41 was operated, in other words, the role lottery after and before all reels 31 reach a constant speed)
j) At the end of RT2 that transitioned from 1BBA operation via non-RT (when replay 02 was won)
k) When ending RT2 that transitioned from 1BBA activation via non-RT and transitioning to RT3 (at the start of RT3)
etc.

In addition, as described above, when there is a case where the instruction function is activated during the 1BBA game, when the instruction function is activated, "in the game state where the interval Sim ball output rate exceeds "1", In that case, it is advantageous when the start switch 41 is operated (in other words, after the role lottery and before all the reels 31 reach a constant speed). The section display LED 77 is lit.

As described above, in the thirty-second embodiment, there are cases where the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit during the advantageous section and cases where the advantageous section display LED 77 is not lit during the advantageous section and the advantageous section ends. Further, the expected value of subsequent payouts is higher in the advantageous section in which the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit than in the advantageous section in which the advantageous section display LED 77 is not lit. This is because the advantageous section in which the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit has a high possibility of being the main sign, and there is a high possibility that the AT is being prepared after that or that the AT is in progress. On the other hand, the advantageous section in which the advantageous section display LED 77 is not lit has a high possibility of ending the advantageous section with high probability or false sign (low possibility of transition to AT preparation or AT).
Therefore, the player can use the presence or absence of lighting of the advantageous zone display LED 77 as a material for determining whether or not to continue the game.

However, if the advantageous interval display LED 77 is not lit, if the setting is such that almost no AT can be expected, the game lacks playability. Therefore, it is preferable to provide a case where the transition to the AT preparation is made after the sign that the advantageous section display LED 77 does not light up ends.
Similarly, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, if AT can be expected with a probability of almost 100%, the game lacks playability. Therefore, it is preferable to provide a case in which the advantageous section is ended and the normal section is started after the sign that the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on is finished.

Next, in the thirty-second embodiment, a specific example involving effects on the sub-control board 80 will be described.
<Specific example 1>
The main control board 50, as described above, has an omen counter that stores the number of omen games. Then, when the game shifts to an omen, the number of omen games is set and stored in an omen counter. During the omen, the main control board 50 updates (subtracts) the omen counter every game, and when the omen counter becomes "0", ends the omen, normal or highly accurate (when AT is not won), Or shift to AT preparation (when AT is elected).
The main control board 50, during the advantageous interval (at least when the main game state is during the omen or during the false omen), the information of each game, the omen counter, and the information of the AT winning flag (information indicating whether or not the AT has been won), Information on the main game state and the like are transmitted to the sub-control board 80 .

During the omen, the sub-control board 80 outputs an omen effect, a continuous effect, an AT winning announcement, etc., based on the received omen counter and AT winning flag and/or main game state information. Information that makes it possible to determine that the AT has been won when the omen counter reaches "0" (for example, the AT winning flag is "1", the main game state is "in omen", etc.) , that the main game state has been updated to "preparing for AT"), the notice that the AT has been won, and the transition performance to the preparation for AT are output. In this case, the main control board 50 lights the advantageous section display LED 77 when the precursor counter becomes "0". On the other hand, if the AT win flag is "0" when the omen counter reaches "0", the sub-control board 80 notifies that the AT has not been won, ends the omen, and normally ( or high accuracy) is output. In this case, the main control board 50 does not turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 .

Further, the advantageous interval display LED 77 is not limited to lighting when the omen counter reaches "0". There is a case where the display LED 77 is lit (when the AT winning flag is "1").
Here, the "predetermined conditions" include when winning the small win group B and notifying the order of pressing the correct answer, and when winning a lottery to determine whether or not to light up the advantageous section display LED 77, and the like. The lottery to determine whether or not to light the advantageous interval display LED 77 may or may not take into consideration the value of the precursor counter.
When considering the value of the omen counter, for example, the smaller the value of the omen counter, the higher the probability of winning the lottery for whether or not to light the advantageous interval display LED 77.
Further, a pattern such as that AT is determined when the advantageous interval display LED 77 is lit when the omen counter is at a specific value (for example, the omen counter is "7") may be provided. By doing so, it is possible to give a sense of anticipation to the game when the omen counter is "7".
Also, even if the advantageous interval display LED 77 is turned on before the precursor counter reaches "0", the precursor counter continues counting until it reaches "0" without being cleared. Then, the sub-control board 80 outputs an AT notification effect when the precursor counter becomes "0".

When the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the precursor counter reaches "0", the information of the advantageous section display LED flag is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. - 特許庁The main control board 50 may transmit the information of the advantageous interval display flag to the sub control board 80 every game. For example, when the received information of the advantageous interval display flag is information indicating lighting, the sub-control board 80 may output an AT win confirmation effect during the precursor effect. Also, the main control board 50 may transmit the information of the advantageous interval display flag when it changes from "0" to "1" instead of transmitting it every game.

Furthermore, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit during the omen, it may be set so that the lighting means AT winning (shift to AT preparation), or only the lighting of the advantageous section display LED 77 It may be set so as not to mean AT winning.
When lighting of the advantageous interval display LED 77 is set to indicate AT winning, the sub-control board 80 can output determination of AT winning based on the information of the advantageous interval display LED flag.

On the other hand, when the lighting of the advantageous interval display LED 77 does not necessarily mean AT winning, the sub-control board 80 sets the advantageous interval display LED flag to "0" based on the information of the advantageous interval display LED flag. When , it is possible to output the normal effect, and when the advantageous section display LED flag is "1", it is possible to output the effect that is hotter than the normal effect (high AT winning expectation).
Further, when the sub-control board 80 receives the value of the omen counter, the sub-control board 80 outputs an effect (number of remaining omen games) corresponding to the value of the omen counter, such as "remaining ○○ game" to the image display device 23, for example. Display is also possible. By configuring in this manner, the player can grasp at what value the precursor counter is when the advantageous interval display LED 77 is lit, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

Moreover, it is of course possible not to light up the advantageous section display LED 77 when the precursor counter reaches "0". In this case, after the end of the game in which the omen counter has become "0", during the time from the next game until the AT is being prepared or the AT starts (before the operation of the settlement switch 46 can be accepted), the advantageous section The display LED 77 is lit.

<Specific example 2>
A "CZ (advantageous zone)" is provided as a main game state. Here, in contrast to the "CZ (advantageous section)", the situation where the fake CZ (advantageous section) is disguised as a CZ (advantageous section) by a sub-control effect, and the main game state is "normal (normal section)". will be described as “CZ (normal section)” for convenience in order to compare with “CZ (advantageous section)”.
First, the player cannot determine whether the CZ is "CZ (normal section)" or "CZ (advantageous section)" unless the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up.
For example, during normal (normal section), an advantageous section shift lottery (CZ shift lottery) is performed. The CZ transition lottery is performed, for example, based on the winning combination. For example, in FIG. 17, when the small winning combination E1 with the registered number "250" is won, it is decided to shift to "CZ (advantageous zone)", and when the small winning combination E1 with the registered number "750" is won, the situation is due to sub-control. is set to "CZ (normal section)" (in this case, the main game state remains "normal (normal section)" and is not shifted).
Furthermore, when it is decided to shift to "CZ (advantageous section)", it is sorted by lottery or the like into "CZ (advantageous section and AT won)" and "CZ (advantageous section and AT not won)". Then, the main control board 50 transmits to the sub-control board 80 information (effect group number) corresponding to the winning lottery result and information (for example, main game state) as to which CZ was won.

Furthermore, the main control board 50
CZ (Normal section): Do not light up the advantageous section display LED 77 CZ (Advantageous section and AT not winning): Do not light up the advantageous section display LED 77 CZ (Advantageous section and AT winning): Set to light up the advantageous section display LED 77 .
In addition, not limited to the above, in CZ (advantageous section and AT non-winning), the advantageous section display LED 77 may be set to be lit.
Here, whether or not it is an advantageous section is determined by an advantageous section type flag. Also, when it is determined to be CZ (advantageous section and AT winning), the AT winning flag is set to "1". By judging the AT winning flag, it is possible to judge whether or not the AT winning has occurred.

Based on the above information, the sub-control board 80 changes the selection probability of the effects by, for example, changing the table for selecting the effects. For example, CZ (normal section), CZ (advantageous section and AT non-winning), CZ (advantageous section and AT winning) may have different effect selection tables, or some may be used as a common effect selection table. , and another part may be a different effect selection table for CZ (normal section), CZ (advantageous section and AT non-winning), and CZ (advantageous section and AT winning).

Then, for example, when it is CZ (normal section), it is set so that the effect with a high expectation of AT winning is not output or is output very rarely. Also, when it is CZ (advantageous section and AT non-winning), the output probability of the effect with high AT winning expectation is set to x (for example, 10%). Furthermore, when it is CZ (advantageous zone and AT winning), the output probability of the effect with high AT winning expectation is set to y (y>x, for example, 70%).
With this setting, the sub-control board 80 can output an effect that matches the CZ depending on which CZ it is.

Furthermore, when lighting the advantageous zone display LED 77 (for example, in the case of CZ (advantageous zone and AT winning)), the main control board 50 lights the advantageous zone display LED 77 by the end of the CZ. CZ sets the number of games in advance at the time of its start, similarly to the above-mentioned sign, provides a CZ game number counter in the RWM 53, and stores the remaining number of CZ games. Then, every game, the CZ game number counter is updated (decremented by "1"). When it is CZ (advantageous section and AT winning), until the CZ game number counter reaches "0", or until the next game starts when it becomes "0" (operation of settlement switch 46 can be accepted ), the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.
Furthermore, when lighting the advantageous interval display LED 77 before the end of CZ, an advantageous interval display LED flag is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . Based on the reception of this information, the sub-control board 80 can output an effect corresponding to the lighting of the advantageous zone display LED 77 (for example, an effect indicating that AT winning is confirmed).

Alternatively, for both CZ (advantageous section and AT non-winning) and CZ (advantageous section and AT winning), the advantageous section display LED 77 may be lit before the end of CZ. And when the CZ game number counter becomes "0", when it is CZ (advantageous section and AT non-winning), the advantageous section display LED flag is set to " 0”, the advantageous section display LED 77 is extinguished. In this way, it is possible to show the player whether or not the lighting of the advantageous zone display LED 77 is maintained in the final game of CZ as an effect.

<Specific example 3>
In the CZ (advantage zone) of the specific example 3, the pushing order guessing game is executed over a plurality of games, and AT is executed when a predetermined clear condition is satisfied.
The push order bells used in the push order guessing game are 6-choice push order bells, unlike the small win group B in the first embodiment. Further, as shown in FIG. 237 (modifications of the twenty-eighth and twenty-ninth embodiments), as the pressing order instruction information, the pressing order instruction information for six options (=4 to=9) and the pressing order information for three options. Forward instruction information (=1 to =3) is provided.
In the pressing order guessing game, when the pressing order bell (6 options) is won, the image display device 23 displays "?-?-?" is expected and the stop switch 42 is operated. In this case, the order of correct keystrokes is not displayed on the instruction monitor.
Then, when the correct order of pressing is guessed, or when the number of times of guessing the correct order of pressing reaches a predetermined number of times, it is determined that the predetermined clear condition is satisfied (the AT is executed).
Further, when winning a rare combination (for example, a small combination E1 in the first embodiment) or winning a special combination during the push order guessing game, the predetermined clear condition may be met.

During the pushing order guessing game, for example, when winning a chance combination (for example, a small combination D in the first embodiment), the selection is changed from 6 options to 2 options. For example, when the correct answer is "right and left middle" and the winning order bell is won, the image display device 23 displays "1-?-?" Predict whether the stop will be in the middle or right. When the pressing order guessing game has two options, for example, in the above example, the correct pressing order for the left first stop is notified, so the main control board 50 instructs the instruction monitor to indicate the left first stop. The corresponding pressing order instruction information (“=1” in FIG. 237) is displayed. In this way, a game in which a part of the correct pressing order is notified is also a game in which the instruction function is activated.

Even if the interval Sim ball output rate when CZ is started is "1" or less (for example, RT2 in the first embodiment), the push order guessing game is set to 2 options (a part of the correct push order is notified) After that, for example, a promotion replay (for example, replay 02 of the first embodiment) may be won and the game state may shift to a gaming state (for example, RT3 of the first embodiment) in which the interval Sim ball-out rate exceeds "1".
After transitioning to a game state in which the section Sim ball-out rate exceeds "1", when a two-choice pressing order guessing game (a game informing part of the correct pressing order) is executed, at least in that game, the advantageous section display LED 77 is displayed. should be lit. Therefore, in the case of executing a two-choice pressing order guessing game, if the advantageous section display LED 77 has not yet been turned on, it is determined whether or not the section Sim ball output rate exceeds "1". When it is determined that the rate exceeds "1", it is necessary to carry out a process of turning on the advantageous section display LED 77. FIG.
However, if the process is executed each time the two-option pressing order guessing game is executed, the process becomes complicated. Therefore, in the specific example 3, the advantageous interval display LED 77 is lit in advance at the time of transition to the CZ, or at least before the start of the pressing order guessing game.
In the pressing order guessing game, for example, when a chance winning combination (for example, the small winning combination D of the first embodiment) is won, the choice is changed from 6 to 2, but the correct pressing order is notified. good too.
In addition, in the rest of the game after informing the correct pushing order during CZ, when winning the pushing order bell, it may be changed from 6 choices to 2 choices, or the correct pushing order may be informed. can be By constructing in this manner, it is possible to set the game so that it is more advantageous for the player to win a rare winning combination (for example, a small winning combination E1 in the first embodiment) earlier during the CZ, thereby increasing the interest of the game. can increase

<Specific example 4>
When shifting from the normal section to the CZ (advantageous section), the CZ is continued until a predetermined number of games or a predetermined end condition is satisfied. When the CZ ends without winning an AT, it shifts to the normal section. In addition, during CZ, in FIG. 22, RT2 (a game state in which the section Sim ball-out rate is "1" or less) and RT3 (a game state in which the section Sim ball-out rate exceeds "1") there is

In the CZ, it is determined by a lottery or the like whether or not to report the order of pressing the correct answer (whether to operate the instruction function) when a small win group B is won. When it is decided to report the correct pressing order, the correct pressing order is reported.
Further, when the game in which the correct pressing order is notified is RT3, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit in the game in which the correct pressing order is notified. On the other hand, when the game in which the correct pressing order is notified is RT2, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not lit in the game in which the correct pressing order is notified. When the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up during CZ, AT is determined. In other words, when the correct pressing order is reported at RT2 (advantage zone display LED 77 is not illuminated), the AT is not determined, but when the correct pressing order is reported at RT3 (advantage zone display LED 77 is illuminated), AT is determined. and

Furthermore, it is also possible to set as follows.
As CZ, AT low probability, AT intermediate probability, and AT high probability are provided. When shifting from normal to CZ, the AT low probability, AT intermediate probability, or AT high probability is determined based on the winning combination that triggered the transition to CZ. In CZ, which has a low AT probability, it is decided not to report the order of pressing the correct answer even if the player wins the small win group B while staying at RT3. On the other hand, in CZ, which has a high probability of AT, when winning a small winning combination B group while staying at RT3, it is decided to notify the order of pressing the correct answer without fail. Also, in CZ, which is an AT intermediate probability, it is determined by lottery whether or not to report the correct pressing order when winning a small winning combination B group while staying at RT3.
Then, when notifying the order of pressing the correct answer in RT3 (section Sim ball output rate exceeds "1"), the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, and when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, the AT is determined. .

Although the thirty-second embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the thirty-second embodiment is not limited to the above content, and various modifications as described below are possible.
(1) The advantageous section display LED 77 is composed of an LED, but it does not necessarily have to be an LED as long as it satisfies the function of an advantageous section indicator. For example, various lamps such as fluorescent lamps and halogen lamps can be used.

(2) As described above, in the 32nd embodiment, in the advantageous interval, when the playing state in which the interval Sim ball-out rate exceeds "1", the advantageous interval display LED 77 is turned on when the correct answer pressing order is notified. The lighting conditions for the advantageous section display LED 77 are optional. Various lighting conditions can be set during the advantageous section, and the advantageous section display LED 77 can be lit whenever the lighting condition is satisfied.
On the other hand, it is also possible to set such that the advantageous section display LED 77 is not lit except "when notifying the order of pressing the correct answer under the gaming state in which the section Sim ball-out rate exceeds '1'".
Even if the player stays in a game state where the section Sim ball-out rate exceeds "1" after transitioning to the advantageous section, it is not necessary to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 unless the correct answer pressing order is notified. Further, after moving to the advantageous section, when staying in a game state where the section Sim ball-out rate is "1" or less, it is not necessary to light the advantageous section display LED 77 even when the correct pressing order is notified.

(3) "When notifying the order of pressing the correct answer under the game state in which the zone Sim ball-out rate exceeds "1" in the advantageous zone", as described above, the start switch 41 is operated (the game is is started), a winning combination lottery is performed (when a small winning combination B group is won), and the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on before all the reels 31 reach a constant speed state. However, the timing for lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 is not limited to the timing described above.
For example, after the game is over (when all the reels 31 are stopped and payout processing is completed), the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit before the adjustment switch 46 becomes operable. .
In addition, for example, a rare combination in which the “cherry” symbol stops is provided in the middle stage of the left reel 31 . After shifting to the advantageous section, when the rare combination is won, the advantageous section is displayed when the left reel 31 is stopped (that is, when the left reel 31 is stopped and the middle and right reels 31 are rotating). It is also possible to light the LED 77 . Furthermore, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on in such a case, it is also possible to set AT determination.

(4) In the present embodiment, RT3 is provided as a gaming state in which the section Sim payout rate exceeds “1”. However, as described above, other than RT, for example, when the accessory is in operation, the interval Sim ball output rate exceeds "1". Therefore, in the case where a lottery is performed by providing a pressing order bell like the small winning combination B group while the accessory is in operation, and the correct pressing order is reported when the pressing order bell is won, the correct pressing order is reported. The advantageous section display LED 77 is lit in the game to be played.
On the other hand, during the operation of the role, in the game state where the section Sim ball output rate exceeds "1", a lottery is performed by providing a pushing order bell like the small winning combination B group, and the correct answer is obtained when the pushing order bell is won. Even when the pressing order is reported, the advantageous section display LED 77 does not have to be lit in the game in which the correct pressing order is reported.

(5) In the case where the advantageous interval continues until the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)" as in the thirty-first embodiment, after starting the advantageous interval, as in example 1 of (a) in FIG. When the difference counter is "0" (between "A" and "B" in the figure), the advantageous section display LED 77 is not lit. After "B"), the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on.

(6) In the thirty-second embodiment, one of the conditions for lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 is "the game state in which the section Sim ball output rate exceeds '1'", but the present invention is not limited to this. A game state in which the payout rate is "1" or more may be used. That is, when the correct pressing order is notified in the game state in which the interval Sim ball-out rate is "1" or more, the advantageous interval display LED 77 is lit, but in the game state in which the interval Sim ball-out rate is less than "1", the correct-pressing order is indicated. When the order is notified, and when the correct answer pressing order is not notified in the game state in which the interval Sim payout rate is "1" or more, the advantageous interval display LED 77 may not be lit.

(7) Conventionally, the advantageous section display LED 77 was always lit during the advantageous section. Therefore, the testing agency that inspects the gaming machine can determine whether or not it is an advantageous section based on whether or not the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit.
However, in the thirty-second embodiment, there are cases where the advantageous interval display LED 77 does not light up even during the advantageous interval, so the testing institution cannot grasp whether the current game interval is the advantageous interval or the normal interval.
Therefore, it is preferable to make it possible to execute processing for outputting a test signal indicating the advantageous interval during the advantageous interval.
Here, the 'test signal' means that the slot machine 10 connects the slot machine 10 and the testing machine, and is transmitted from the slot machine 10 to the testing machine so that the slot machine 10 can ' It is a signal used to confirm whether the design conforms to the "rule". Here, the connection between the slot machine 10 and the testing machine is not limited to direct connection, but may be connected via an interface board for relay.
It should be noted that the output port for transmitting the test signal is removed when the slot machine 10 is shipped from the factory (set value in the hall).
For example, every game, based on the operation of the start switch 41, it is possible to execute processing for outputting the advantageous section type information as a test signal. Alternatively, a process for outputting the advantageous interval type information as a test signal can be executed during each game, from the end of the game to the start of the next game. In this case, the output processing of the test signal can be executed every game, so the processing for outputting information indicating not only the advantageous section but also the normal section and the waiting section can be executed.
Furthermore, when the conditions for transition from the normal section to the advantageous section are met (for example, after the end of the game in the normal section until the start of the game in the advantageous section), the advantageous section type information is tested. It is also possible to be executable to process for output as a signal. Similarly, when the transition condition from the advantageous section to the normal section is satisfied (for example, after the game in the advantageous section ends and before the game in the normal section starts), the advantageous section type information is tested. It is also possible to be executable to process for output as a signal.

(8) In the 32nd embodiment, a slot machine was illustrated as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to, for example, a casino machine or an enclosed gaming machine (medalless gaming machine).
(9) The 32nd embodiment and the various modifications described above (including the contents of the 1st to 31st embodiments) are not limited to being implemented independently, and can be implemented in combination as appropriate. is.

Next, thirty-third to thirty-seventh embodiments will be described.
In the thirty-third to thirty-seventh embodiments, the meanings of the terms are as follows. In addition, although the matter described in 1st Embodiment and the content partially overlap, they are demonstrated again in this embodiment.
A “bet” is a bet of medals (game media) to play a game. In order to bet medals, the bet switch 40 is operated to either insert actual medals from the medal slot 43 or bet the stored medals.
On the other hand, "credit" is different from the above-mentioned "bet", and refers to storing medals inside the slot machine 10 . As used herein, the term "credit" does not include "bet."
Furthermore, "throwing in" refers to betting or crediting medals.

“Maintenance” means that the player inserts medals from the medal insertion slot 43 (described later).
“Take care bet” means that the player bets on medals by taking care of the medals from the medal slot 43 .
“Cleaning credit” means that the player credits medals (adding credits) by cleaning the medals from the medal slot 43 .
“Bet medals” means the medals that are bet on.
“Reserved Medals” means Medals that are credited (reserved).

A "reserved bet" is a bet that a player operates a bet switch 40 (described later) to bet part or all of the credited medals within the range that can be betted in the game in order to play the game. It means to
"Automatic bet" means that when a replay wins in the previous game, the control processing of the slot machine 10 automatically bets the medals corresponding to the specified number of the game this time.
“Settlement” means paying out bet medals and/or accumulated medals to a player. In this embodiment, the settlement process is executed when the settlement switch 46 is operated.

“Payout” refers to paying out medals to a player based on winning a winning combination or paying out medals through the above settlement. When paying out medals to the player based on winning a role, the medals are stored as credits (adding the stored medals, in other words, updating the electronic data stored in the RWM 53 (described later)) and paying out. This includes both dispensing actual medals from a mouth (not shown). The payout of medals is controlled such that, for example, "50" is credited as the limit number of medals, and medals exceeding the credit number of "50" are actually paid out to the player.

“Game media (also referred to as “game value”)” are medals in the present embodiment, but in the case of an enclosed (ECO) gaming machine (also referred to as “management gaming machine”), for example, a game Electronic information (electronic medals, electronic data) is used as a medium. It should be noted that "electronic information" means that, for example, when money (banknotes) is inserted into a lending machine, it is converted into electronic information corresponding to the money, and part or all of the electronic information is used to play a game on a game machine. It is possible to credit the game machine as a game medium for performing.

Further, when the game medium is electronic information, "payout of medals" means crediting (adding) to a game medium credit device provided in the gaming machine. Therefore, "payout of medals" does not mean only that the medals are actually paid out from the hopper 35 (described later). addition) is also included.

``N-1'' game, ``N'' game, ``N+1'' game, . When it is a number, the game of the "N"th game is called "this time game". Also, the game of the "N-1"th game is referred to as the "previous game". Furthermore, the game of the "N+1"th game is referred to as the "next game".

FIG. 269 is a block diagram outlining the control of the slot machine 10, which is an example of the game machine in the 33rd to 37th embodiments. FIG. 269 is a block diagram common to the thirty-third to thirty-seventh embodiments.
A main control board 50 and a sub-control board 80 are provided as representative control boards provided in the slot machine 10 .
The main control board 50 has an input port 51 and an output port 52, and is equipped with an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, etc. (not meant to include only those shown in FIG. 269). The appearance of the main control board 50 and the fact that the main control board 50 is accommodated in the board case 16 will be described in the thirty-fourth embodiment (FIGS. 277 and 278).

In FIG. 269, the main control board 50 and the peripheral devices for progressing the game including operation switches such as the bet switch 40 are electrically connected via the input port 51 or the output port 52 . The input port 51 is a connection portion for inputting signals such as operation switches, and the output port 52 is a connection portion for transmitting signals to peripheral devices such as the motor 32 .
In FIG. 269, input peripherals are indicated by arrows from which signals from the peripherals are directed to the main control board 50, and output peripherals are indicated by arrows from the main control board 50 to the peripherals. (The same applies to the sub-control board 80).

The RWM 53 is a storage medium capable of storing (updating) various data (variables) based on the progress of the game.
The ROM 54 is a storage medium for storing programs and various data (for example, data table) necessary for progressing the game.
The main CPU 55 refers to a CPU (an IC having a calculation function) provided on the main control board 50, and executes programs and calculations necessary for the progress of the game. , and payout at the time of winning.

Further, on the main control board 50, an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55 and an MPU including registers are mounted. Note that the RWM 53 and ROM 54 may be provided externally in addition to being mounted inside the MPU.
An MPU including the RWM 83, the ROM 84, and the sub CPU 85 is also mounted on the sub control board 80, which will be described later. It should be noted that the RWM 83 and ROM 84 may be provided externally in addition to being mounted inside the MPU.

In FIG. 269, the medal inserted from the medal slot 43 is sent inside the medal selector.
The movement of medals inserted from the medal slot 43 within the medal selector will be described later with reference to FIG. 270 and the like.
As shown in FIG. 269, the medal selector is provided with a path sensor 43a, a blocker 45, and an insertion sensor 44 (a pair of insertion sensors 44a and 44b) (but not limited to these). These are electrically connected to the main control board 50 .
A medal inserted from the medal slot 43 is first detected by the path sensor 43a.

Furthermore, a blocker 45 is provided downstream of the passage sensor 43a. The blocker 45 permits/disallows insertion of medals, and when the insertion of medals is not permitted, forms a medal passage for returning the medals inserted from the medal insertion port 43 from the payout port. do. On the other hand, when the insertion of medals is permitted, a medal passage is formed to guide the medals inserted from the medal insertion port 43 to the hopper 35 . The blocker 45 is, for example, a switching member that forms a medal passage for guiding medals to the hopper 35 side by closing an opening (opening leading to a medal return opening) formed in a part of the medal passage in the medal selector. and an actuator for driving the switching member.

Here, the blocker 45 prohibits insertion of medals during the game (from the start of rotation of the reels 31 until all the reels 31 stop, and when the payout corresponding to the winning combination is completed in the case of a winning combination). do. That is, the blocker 45 permits insertion of medals at least when no game is played.

Further downstream of the blocker 45 in the medal selector, an insertion sensor (optical sensor) 44 is provided. The insertion sensor 44 is composed of a pair of insertion sensors 44a and 44b arranged at a predetermined distance in this embodiment. is configured to be detected by Then, based on the timing at which the pair of insertion sensors 44 are turned on/off, it is determined whether or not the correct medals have been inserted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 269, the main control board 50 includes, as operation switches operated by the player, a bet switch 40 (40a or 40b), a start switch 41, a (left, middle, right) stop switch 42, and a A settlement switch 46 is electrically connected.
Here, the "operation switch (or simply "switch")" is based on the operation of the operation body by the player (operator) (receiving an external force), switching the electrical signal on / off. It refers to a device (including electric circuits and/or electric parts), and does not limit the shape of an operation body operated by a player.

When the operation switch is in the off state, for example, light from the light emitting element continues to enter the light receiving element (while the light receiving element continues to detect light, the operation switch is in the off state). When the player or the like operates the operation switch (the operation body of the operation switch), the light from the light emitting element does not enter the light receiving element. When this state is detected, an electrical signal is sent to the main control board 50 indicating that the operation switch is turned on. Contrary to the above, when the operation switch is in the off state, the light from the light emitting element does not enter the light receiving element, and when the light from the light emitting element enters the light receiving element, the light is turned on. You may

In the present embodiment, the operating body of the start switch 41 is a lever (bar) shape (therefore also referred to as "start lever (switch) 41"), and includes a bed switch 40, a stop switch 42, and an adjustment switch. The operation body 46 is in the shape of a push button (for this reason, it is also referred to as "bet button (switch) 40", "stop button (switch) 42", and "settlement button (switch) 43"). In addition, in the fourth embodiment, which will be described later, the operation body of the stop switch 42 (the portion to be pushed by the player) will be referred to as "stop button 42a".

Although not shown in FIG. 269, an LED (light emitting means) is provided on the operation body of the operation switch and/or around or near it. When the operation of the operation switch is permitted, for example, an LED or the like corresponding to the operation switch emits blue light. By emitting red light from an LED or the like, the permission/non-permission state of the operation switch is indicated to the player.

Specifically, for example, when all the reels 31 are rotating and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted, the LEDs of all the stop switches 42 emit blue light to notify the player that the operation is possible. shown in When one stop switch 42 is operated, the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is controlled to be stopped. After that, the rest of the stop switches 42 become operable only when the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the reel 31 controlled to stop is terminated and the detection sensor 42e (the 36th sensor described later) of the operated stop switch 42 embodiment) is turned off. Therefore, during that time, the LEDs of all the stop switches 42 emit red light. When the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 ends and the detection sensor 42e corresponding to that stop switch 42 is turned off, the LED of the already operated stop switch 42 is turned off. The LEDs of the stop switches 42 that have not yet been operated, while still emitting red light, are caused to emit blue light.

The bet switch 40 is an operation switch operated by the player when betting the accumulated medals for the current game. In this embodiment, a 1-bet switch 40a for inserting one medal and a 3-bet switch 40b for inserting three (maximum number, specified number) medals are provided.
Note that a bet switch for betting two cards may be provided without being limited to this.

In addition, the specified number is determined in advance depending on, for example, when the accessory is not activated/when the accessory is activated. Concretely, it is set such that when the accessory is not activated, when the SB is activated, when the 1BB is activated, there are 3 sheets, and when the 2BB is activated, there are 2 sheets. Two medals can be inserted by operating the 1-bet switch 40a twice, and three medals can be inserted by operating it three times. Also, when the prescribed number is 3, operating the 3-bet switch 40b allows 3 medals to be inserted at once, and when the prescribed number is 2, operating the 3-bet switch 40b. Two medals can be inserted at a time. If the 3-bet switch 40b is operated when less than the prescribed number has already been betted, the bet processing is performed so that the number of bets is 3.

Also, the start switch 41 is an operation switch that is operated by the player when starting the reels 31 (all of the left, middle and right reels).
Furthermore, three stop switches 42 are provided corresponding to the three (left, middle, and right) reels 31, and are operation switches operated by the player when the corresponding reels 31 are to be stopped.
Further, the settlement switch 46 is an operation switch operated by the player when paying out (paying out) the medals betted and/or stored (credited) inside the slot machine 10 .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 269, a display substrate 75 is electrically connected to the main control substrate 50 . In practice, a relay board is provided between the main control board 50 and the display board 75, and the main control board 50 and the relay board, and the relay board and the display board 75 are connected. 269 omits illustration of the relay board. As described above, the main control board 50 and the display board 75 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, but another board may be interposed between them.
Furthermore, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected to each other by a harness or the like, but may be connected via another board (relay board or the like). For example, one or more other boards (relay boards, etc.) may be interposed between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 .

The display substrate 75 is mounted with a credit number display LED 76 and an acquired number display LED 78 .
The credit number display LED 76 is an LED for displaying the number of medals accumulated (credited) inside the slot machine 10, and is composed of two digits, upper digits and lower digits.

In addition, the winning number display LED 78 is an LED that displays the payout number (the player's winning number) when the combination is won, and is composed of two digits, upper digits and lower digits, similarly to the credit number display LED 76. .
Note that the acquired number display LED 78 may be controlled to be extinguished when there are no medals to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digits may be turned off and only the lower digits may be displayed as "0".

Also, the acquisition number display LED 78 normally displays the acquisition number, but functions as an LED that displays the content (type) of the error when an error occurs.
Furthermore, the acquired number display LED 78 functions as an LED for displaying pressing order instruction information (notifying an advantageous pressing order) in a game that notifies the pressing order during AT. Therefore, the acquired number display LED 78 in the present embodiment is an LED that also displays the acquired number, the error content, and the pressing order instruction information. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is of course possible to provide a dedicated LED or the like for displaying the pressing order instruction information.
It should be noted that, during AT, notification of an advantageous pressing order is also performed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub-control board 80 .

In FIG. 269, the main control board 50 is electrically connected to the motor (stepping motor in this embodiment) 32 of the pattern display device.
The symbol display device includes (three in this embodiment) reels 31 that display symbols, motors 32 that drive the respective reels 31 , and reel sensors 33 that detect the positions of the reels 31 .

The motor 32 serves as driving means for rotating the reels 31, is connected to the center of rotation of each reel 31, and is controlled by reel control means 65, which will be described later. Here, the reel 31 is composed of a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31. A stop switch 42 operated when the left reel 31 is stopped is the left stop switch 42, and when the middle reel 31 is stopped, a stop switch 42 is operated. The stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42 , and the stop switch 42 to be operated when stopping the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42 .

The reel 31 is ring-shaped, and a reel tape on which a plurality of kinds of patterns (symbols forming a combination of patterns corresponding to a role) are printed is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the reel 31 .
Also, each reel 31 is provided with one (or two or more) index. The index is provided in a convex shape, for example, on the peripheral side surface of the reel 31, and is used when detecting whether or not the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether or not it has made one revolution, and the like. Each index is detected by the reel sensor 33 . A signal from the reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50 . When the index detects (turns off) the reel sensor 33, the input signal is input to the main control board 50, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

In addition, the symbols on the reference position at the instant when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 are stored in the ROM 54 in advance. As a result, it is possible to detect the pattern on the reference position at the moment the index is detected. Furthermore, from the moment the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31, by driving the (stepping) motor 32 by how many pulses, the symbol counted from the symbol on the reference position can be stopped on the effective line. can be identified.

A medal payout device is electrically connected to the main control board 50 . The medal payout device includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 driven when the medals of the hopper 35 are paid out from the payout port, and a payout for detecting the paid out medals from the hopper motor 36. A sensor 37 is provided.

The medals that have been handled and received (determined to be normal) from the medal insertion slot 43 are formed to be accommodated in the hopper 35 .
The payout sensor (optical sensor) 37 consists of a pair of payout sensors 37a and 37b arranged at a predetermined distance in this embodiment. Then, when medals are paid out, the predetermined moving member (movable piece 39a in FIG. 275 to be described later) is moved by the medals. The payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned on/off by movement of a predetermined moving member. Based on whether the payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned on/off within the range of the predetermined time, it is determined whether or not the medals have been correctly paid out.

For example, when it is not detected that the pair of payout sensors 37 are ON even though the hopper motor 36 is being driven, it is determined that no medals have been paid out, and a hopper error (no medals) is detected.
On the other hand, when at least one of the payout sensors 37 continues to output the ON signal, it is detected that a medal jam has occurred.
Details of these operations will be described later with reference to FIGS.

When starting a game, the player inserts medals that have been credited in advance by operating the bet switch 40 (stored bet), or inserts medals from the medal insertion slot 43 (repair bet). When the start switch 41 is operated with the prescribed number of medals for the game being bet, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50 . When receiving this signal, the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 to be described later) performs a lottery by the combination lottery means 61, drives and controls all the motors 32, and rotates all the reels 31. Control to rotate. As the reels 31 are rotated by the motor 32 in this way, the symbols on the reels 31 are moved up and down within the display window at a predetermined speed.

By pressing the stop switch 42, the player stops the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50 . Upon receiving this signal, the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65, which will be described later) drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to the stop switch 42 so that the lottery result of the combination lottery means 61 (internal lottery The stop control of the reel 31 related to the motor 32 is performed so as to correspond to the result determined by means).

Then, the game result of the current game is displayed by the combination of symbols when all the reels 31 are stopped. Furthermore, when the combination of symbols corresponding to one of the winning combinations stops on the activated line (when the winning combination is won), the payout of medals corresponding to the winning combination is performed.

Next, a specific configuration of the main control board 50 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 269, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the following winning lottery means 61 and the like. Each means below in this embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the means shown in this embodiment.

The role lottery means 61 lotteries (determines and selects) winning numbers. Here, the "lottery of winning numbers by the role lottery means 61" is the same as the "internal lottery" in the regulations of the Entertainment Business Act (regulations regarding certification of gaming machines and model testing, etc.; hereinafter simply referred to as "rules"), The lottery result by the role lottery means 61 is the same as the "result determined by the internal lottery" in the rules. Therefore, the combination lottery means 61 is also called "internal lottery means 61" in accordance with the rules.
When the winning number is determined by the combination lottery means 61, the winning and replay condition device number and the accessory condition device number are determined based on the winning number, and the winning and replay condition device becomes operable in the game, In addition, the accessory condition device is determined. Therefore, the combination lottery means 61 is also called condition device number determination (lottery or selection) means, winning combination determination (lottery or selection) means, or the like.

The combination lottery means 61 includes, for example, a lottery random number generating means (hardware random number, software random number, etc.), a random number extracting means for extracting the random number generated by the random number generating means, and a random number extracted by the random number extracting means. winning number determination means for determining a winning number based on the winning number. Here, "based on the random number" means not only using the extracted random number directly, but also using the result of performing a predetermined operation on the extracted random number. Examples include using a result obtained by adding or subtracting a predetermined value, or using a result obtained by adding or subtracting another random value to an extracted random value.

The random number generating means generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, "0" to "65535" in decimal). The random number is, for example, a random number in which a counter that counts once every 200 n (nano) seconds continues to count the range of "0" to "65535" as one cycle. continue to count.

The random number extraction means extracts the random number generated by the random number generation means at a predetermined time, in this embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player. The judging means determines a winning number by checking a lottery table, which will be described later, based on the random number extracted by the random number extracting means.

The winning flag control means 62 controls ON/OFF of the winning flag corresponding to each winning combination based on the result of the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 . In this embodiment, a win flag is provided for each role for all the roles. Then, when any winning combination is won in the lottery by the combination lottery means 61, the winning flag of that combination is turned on (a winning flag is set). Note that the winning of a combination includes the case where there is one winning combination (single winning) and the case where there are multiple winning combinations (double winning).

The pressing order instruction number selection means 63 selects a pressing order instruction number (a number corresponding to the correct pressing order) based on the lottery result of the winning number by the role lottery means 61 (when the pressing order bell or the pressing order replay is won). decision).
The "pressing order" of the pressing order instruction number selected here means a pressing order (correct pressing order) that is advantageous for the player. For example, when the winning order of the bell is won, the order of pushing the high bell (correct order of pushing) indicates the winning order. In addition, at the time of replay duplicate winning, it refers to a pushing order that promotes to an advantageous RT or a pushing order that does not fall to a disadvantageous RT.

In this embodiment, each of the winning and replay condition device numbers is provided with a unique pressing order instruction number. It should be noted that each winning number may be provided with a unique pushing order instruction number.
Then, when winning the push order bell or push order replay during the AT, the main control board 50 displays the above-described acquired number display LED 78 with the push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number, specifically " =*” (“*”=1, 2, . . . ). Thus, the function of displaying push order indication information upon activation of a conditional device with an advantageous push order is also referred to as an indication function.
Also, when winning the push order bell or push order replay during AT, the main control board 50, at the start of the game (after the start switch 41 is operated and the winning number is determined), the sub control board 80, a command corresponding to the push order instruction number is transmitted.
By receiving the command, the sub-control board 80 can display the correct keystroke order on the image display device 23 as an image.

It should be noted that the push order instruction number selected by the main control board 50 can be transmitted to the sub control board 80 only during the advantageous section (AT). Therefore, even if a pressing order instruction number is selected by the pressing order instruction number selection means 63 in the normal section, the pressing order instruction number is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . Note that it is not necessary to select the push order instruction number in the normal section.

The effect group number selection means 64 selects a number to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80, which is a effect group number corresponding to the winning and replay condition device number.
Here, an effect group number corresponding to the winning and replay condition device number is predetermined. Then, when the winning number is determined by operating the start switch 41, the effect group number selection means 64 selects the effect group number corresponding to the winning and replay condition device number of the game, and the main control board 50 The selected effect group number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. - 特許庁The sub-control board 80 outputs an effect related to the winning combination based on the received effect group number. The effect group number is selected for each game and transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80, unlike the pressing order instruction number. Incidentally, the effect group number selection means 64 may select the effect group number corresponding to the winning number.

Also, the main control board 50 does not transmit the winning number of the game to the sub control board 80 . Therefore, the sub-control board 80 cannot know the winning number of the game. However, since the sub-control board 80 receives the effect group number every game, it is possible to output the effect based on the received effect group number. However, even when the pressing order bell or pressing order replay is won, the correct pressing order cannot be determined from the effect group number, so the sub-control board 80 does not notify the correct pressing order based on the effect group number. . On the other hand, during AT, when winning the push order bell or push order replay, the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number to the sub control board 80 . As a result, the sub-control board 80 can notify the correct pressing order based on the received pressing order instruction number.

The reel control means 65 controls all (three) reels 31 to start rotating when receiving a command to start rotating the reels 31, particularly when detecting the operation of the start switch 41 in this embodiment. .
Furthermore, after the win number is determined by the combination lottery means 61, the reel control means 65 refers to the on/off of the win flag in the current game, and refers to the stop position determination table corresponding to the on/off of the win flag. is selected, and when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the timing when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, and the motor 32 is operated Drive control is performed to stop the reel 31 at the determined position.

For example, in a game in which at least one winning flag is ON, the reel control means 65 validates a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination (a combination in which the winning flag is ON) within the range of stop control of the reels 31. The reels 31 are controlled to stop so that they can be stopped on the line, and the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to the combination other than the winning combination (the winning flag is turned off) is not stopped on the effective line.

Here, "within the range of stop control of the reel 31" means the time from the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 actually stops, or the amount of rotation of the reel 31 (the number of moving symbols (frames)). means within range.
In this embodiment, the reel 31 is rotated at a constant speed of about 80 times per minute.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is within 190 ms, except for a predetermined reel 31 (for example, the middle reel 31) during MB operation. is set to Thus, in the present embodiment, the maximum moving symbol number from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to 4 symbols, except for the predetermined reel 31 during MB operation.

On the other hand, for a predetermined reel 31 during MB operation, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set within 75 ms. Thus, for a predetermined reel 31 during MB operation, the maximum moving symbol number from the symbol at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to 1 symbol.

At the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, if any of the symbols within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 is a symbol to be stopped on a predetermined effective line, the stop switch 42 is operated. Then, the symbol is controlled to stop on a predetermined effective line.
That is, if the reels 31 are stopped immediately at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated, if the pattern of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number does not stop on the predetermined effective line, the reels 31 are not stopped until the reels 31 are stopped. By controlling the rotational movement of the reel 31 within the range of stop control, the symbol of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number is controlled to stop on a predetermined effective line as much as possible (pull-in stop control).

Conversely, if the reels 31 are stopped immediately at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated, and the symbol combination of the winning combination that does not correspond to the winning number is stopped on the effective line, the reels 31 are stopped when the reels 31 are stopped. By controlling the rotational movement of the reels 31 within the range of stop control, control is performed so as not to stop the symbol combination of the winning combination that does not correspond to the winning number on the effective line (kicking stop control).
Furthermore, in a game in which a plurality of winning combinations are won (for example, when the bell is won in the order of pressing), the order of priority of winning combinations is determined in advance according to the order of pressing the stop switch 42 and the operation timing of the stop switch 42. In accordance with a predetermined order of priority, the drawing-in stop control of the symbol associated with the highest priority combination is performed.

The winning judgment means 66 judges whether or not the symbol combination of the reels 31 stopped on the active line corresponds to any winning combination when the reels 31 are stopped.
Here, the winning determination means 66 does not actually detect whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has stopped on the activated line. Specifically, from the conditional device operated in the game, the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and / or the operation timing of the stop switch 42, the symbol combination that stops on the effective line before the reel 31 actually stops is set in advance. Alternatively, the symbol combination stopped on the activated line after the reels 31 are stopped is determined in advance.

The control command transmitting means 71 transmits information (control commands) necessary for the effects output by the sub-control board 80 to the sub-control board 80 .
The control commands include, for example, information when the bet switch 40 is operated, information when the start switch 41 is operated, and a pressing order instruction number (only during AT and when a winning number having a correct pressing order is won). , production group number, RT (game state) information, information when the stop switch 42 is operated, information on winning combination, information on advantageous section type, information on advantageous section clear counter, information on difference number counter, and the like. .
The advantageous section clear counter information and difference counter information may be configured so as not to be transmitted during the non-advantageous section (normal section) and transmitted (every game) during the advantageous section. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the number of control commands to the sub-control board 80 in the non-advantageous section. In addition, when it is an advantageous section, by transmitting the information of the advantageous section clear counter and the information of the difference number counter, the sub-control means 80 also determines the timing of transition from the advantageous section to the normal section (forcibly ends the advantageous section). It is possible to grasp the timing), and it is possible to execute an effect based on this information.

In FIG. 269, the sub-control board 80 controls the selection and output of effects (information) during the game and during the game standby.
Here, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (control command transmission means 71) is unidirectionally transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by parallel communication. Sends information (control commands) required for output.
The main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, and may be connected using optical communication means. Furthermore, both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to parallel communication, and may be serial communication, or both serial communication and parallel communication may be used.

Similar to the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like.
The sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to an effect peripheral device such as the following effect lamp 21 as shown in FIG. However, the peripheral devices for presentation are not limited to these.
The RWM 83 is a storage medium that can temporarily store data and the like taken in when the sub CPU 85 controls the effect.
In addition, the ROM 84 is a storage medium for storing a program, various data, etc. for performing a lottery related to an effect as data for effect.

The effect lamps 21 are made up of LEDs, for example, and light up in a predetermined pattern when predetermined conditions are met. The effect lamps 21 are arranged on the inner peripheral side of each reel 31 and are used to illuminate the patterns displayed on the reels 31 (three patterns that are vertically continuous and visible from the display window) from behind. Fluorescent lamps that illuminate symbols on the reels 31 from above, and frame lamps that are arranged in front of the front door of the slot machine 10 and blink when winning a winning combination are included.

Also, the speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when a predetermined condition is satisfied in order to perform various effects during the game.
Furthermore, the image display device 23 is composed of a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, etc., and displays various effects images during the game (correct pressing order, effects corresponding to the conditional devices that operate in the game, etc.). , and game information (such as the number of games played during the operation of the accessory, the number of games won during the advantageous section (AT), the number of winnings, etc.).

FIG. 270 is a diagram showing how the medal M inserted from the medal slot 43 passes through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b, and is a schematic diagram seen from the front. In FIG. 270, the inside of the medal selector is shown. Also, the medals M indicate M1 to M4 according to their positions. The position of M1 indicates the state where the medal M is placed on the medal placement portion 47c of the medal slot 43 (the state before being released). That is, at the position M1, the lowest point of the outer peripheral edge of the medal M and the upper surface of the medal placing portion 47c are in contact with each other when viewed from the front.
In addition, in FIG. 270 (and FIG. 272 to be described later), it is assumed that the entire substantially square portions displayed as the input sensors 44a and 44b are the light receiving and emitting ranges (sensor eyes) of the input sensors 44a and 44b, respectively. not the housing of the input sensors 44a and 44b).

Also, the position of M2 indicates the position at the moment when the medal M becomes invisible when viewed from the front. That is, the position M2 is a position where the highest point of the outer peripheral edge of the medal M and the upper surface of the medal placing portion 47c overlap. For example, assuming that the player releases the medal M when the medal M is at the position M1, the medal M drops from the position M1. Therefore, at the position of M2, it is released from the player's hand and is falling (moving) downstream.
It should be noted that the "upstream side" indicates the medal slot 43 side, and the "downstream side" indicates the side of the insertion sensor 44b (hopper 35 side). In terms of the positions of the medals M, the order is M1->M2->M3->M4 from the upstream side to the downstream side.

In the example of FIG. 270, the passage sensor 43a is arranged so that the medal M is detected by the passage sensor 43a when the medal M is positioned at M2.
Further, the position of M3 indicates the position at the moment (ON) when the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a. The position of M4 indicates the position at the moment (OFF) when the medal M is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b.

The medal insertion slot 43 is a portion for inserting medals M into the inside of the slot machine 10 (medal selector) when the player bets or credits the medals M as game media. The medal slot 43 includes a medal guard portion 43b and a medal placement portion 47c. The medal placing portion 47c has a substantially curved surface (having a slightly larger curvature than the peripheral edge of the medal M) extending in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the drawing so that a plurality of (up to about 10) stacked medals M can be placed at the same time. curved surface).

The approximately curved surface of the medal placing portion 47c and the surface of the medal guard portion 43b with which the medal M contacts (the surface visible in FIG. 270) are formed to intersect substantially perpendicularly.
Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 270, an opening through which one medal M can flow is provided at the intersection of the medal placing portion 47c and the medal guard portion 43b. When two medals M are stacked, the medal M does not drop from the opening, but when the thickness is one medal M, the medal M is formed to flow down from the opening. Therefore, the player places, for example, a plurality of stacked medals M on the medal placing portion 47c, presses the plurality of medals M in the direction of the medal guard portion 43b, and strengthens the pressing force. By weakening it, the medals M placed on the medal placing portion 47c can be dropped into the medal selector one by one through the opening.

When the medal M is inserted (released downward) from the medal insertion slot 43, the medal M flows down the passage in the medal selector. A passage sensor 43a, an insertion sensor 44a, and an insertion sensor 44b are provided in the medal selector from the upstream side. Furthermore, the above-described blocker 45 is provided between the path sensor 43a and the entry sensor 44a (under the entry sensor 44a in FIG. 270).

When the medal M enters the medal selector, it is first detected by the path sensor 43a. The path sensor 43a is a sensor provided for determining the presence or absence of medal jamming or fraud. Furthermore, when the medal M is no longer detected after the lapse of a predetermined time, it is determined that the operation is normal. On the other hand, if the passage sensor 43a continues to detect the medal M even after the predetermined time has elapsed after detecting the medal, it is determined that a medal retention error has occurred. Further, when the path sensor 43a detects the medal M and does not detect the medal M before a predetermined time elapses, it is determined that the medal M is illegally passed.

When the medal M flows down in the medal passage, it reaches the position of the blocker 45. - 特許庁The blocker 45 is arranged on the lower side of the medal passage. When the blocker 45 is in the ON state (the output port related to the blocker 45 among the output ports 52 is ON), the medal flow path is formed so that the medals M can be detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. In other words, it has the role of sending the medals M that have moved from the upstream side to the insertion sensors 44a and 44b without sending them out of the medal passage.

On the other hand, when it is in the OFF state (out of the output ports 52, the output port related to the blocker 45 is OFF), the blocker 45 moves so as to be displaced in the vertical direction with respect to the plane of the drawing in FIG. to form an opening (pitfall) in the medal passage. As a result, when the blocker 45 is in the OFF state, the medal M drops from this opening just before reaching M3 and is sent out of the medal passage (M5 in FIG. 270). The medal M dropped from this opening is returned to a medal return port (not shown) without being detected by the insertion sensor 44a.

For example, when the prescribed number of the game has already been betted and the number of credits has reached the upper limit, the blocker 45 is controlled to be in an OFF state because no more medals can be betted and credited. As a result, even if the medal M is inserted from the medal slot 43 in this state, it falls from the opening and is returned to the medal return slot.
On the other hand, when the blocker 45 is in the ON state, the opening is blocked by the blocker 45, so that the medals M flowing down in the medal passage pass over the blocker 45 and are detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. Can move sideways.

In this embodiment, the blockers 45 are arranged as shown in FIG. 270, but the arrangement is not limited to this. Regardless of whether the blocker 45 is on/off, the path sensor 43a can detect the medal M, and when the blocker 45 is on, the medal M can be guided to the insertion sensors 44a and 44b, and When the blocker 45 is in the OFF state, it is sufficient that the medals M can be sent to the medal return port without being detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. In other words, the blocker 45 should be positioned between the path sensor 43a and the entry sensor 44a.

Further, the path sensor 43a may be positioned upstream of the blocker 45, and is arranged at a position where the medals M inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 can be detected even when the blocker 45 is in the OFF state. All you have to do is Further, in FIG. 270, the path sensor 43a is arranged so that it can detect the medal M when the medal M is positioned at M2. It is also possible to arrange the path sensor 43a so as to detect the medal M when it moves to the right.

The inserted sensors 44a and 44b are sensors for detecting the medals M that have passed through the blocker 45, and these two sensors are installed with a predetermined distance therebetween. First, when the medal M reaches the position of M3, the insertion sensor 44a on the upstream side becomes capable of detecting the medal M (turns from off to on). When the medals M further flow down, the insertion sensor 44b next detects the medals M (turns from off to on). By determining the ON/OFF timing of these two insertion sensors 44a and 44b, it is determined whether or not the inserted medals M are normal. When the medal M reaches the position of M4, it is no longer detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. The medals M that have passed through the insertion sensors 44 a and 44 b are sent to the hopper 35 .

In FIG. 270, the medal selector is designed as follows.
First, when the medal M is at the position M2, that is, when the medal selector is viewed from the front, the medal M is positioned at M4, that is, at the moment when the insertion sensor 44b stops detecting the medal M, from the moment when the medal M becomes invisible. (in FIG. 270, the movement trajectory is indicated by a dotted line) is set to time T2. This value is obtained when the medal M is positioned at M1 and the hand is released from the medal M (with an initial speed of "0") and released downward. Therefore, the speed when the medal M is positioned at M2 exceeds "0".

Also, the acceleration of the medal M increases as it moves further downward from the position of M2. On the other hand, in FIG. 270, an impact member (not shown in FIG. 270) is provided at a portion where the medal passage bends from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction. When the medal M comes into contact with this impact member, the speed of the medal M is decelerated toward the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.
Then, the time from the moment the medal M is positioned at M3 (the moment when it is detected by the insertion sensor 44a) to the moment when it is positioned at M4 (the moment when it is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b) is set as time T3. .

<Thirty-third Embodiment (A)>
FIG. 271 is a diagram showing a time chart for explaining the thirty-third embodiment (A).
FIG. 271 shows voltage levels when the slot machine 10 is powered off (for example, when the power switch 11 is turned off or when a power failure occurs).
In FIG. 271, the voltage when the power supply is normally turned on is assumed to be the supply level V0. In the state of supply level V0, the slot machine 10 operates normally.

FIG. 271 shows an example in which a power failure occurred (an event in which power supply was cut off occurred) at time S11. In this embodiment, when a power failure occurs, the voltage drops to the power failure detection level V1 at time T0.
The time T0 from when the power failure occurs (time S11; supply level V0) to when the power failure is detected (time S12; power failure detection level V1) is at least 20 interrupts (1 interrupt time 2.235 ms x 20 interrupt = 44.7 ms) or longer.
A voltage monitoring device (power failure detection circuit) (not shown) is provided on the main control board 50 . When the power supply voltage drops below a predetermined power supply interruption detection level V1, a power supply interruption detection signal is input to a predetermined bit in the input port 51. By detecting whether or not the signal has been input, the power supply is detected. Detect disconnection.

When the voltage further drops from the power-off detection level V1 and becomes less than the driving voltage limit V2 of the main CPU 55, the main CPU 55 cannot be driven (the operation of the main CPU 55 cannot be guaranteed).
In the example of FIG. 271, at time S13, the voltage level reaches the drive voltage limit V2 of the main CPU 55, and then drops to Low. The main control board 50 cannot execute the power-off process when the voltage becomes less than the drive voltage limit V2. is set to

Power-off detection is executed in interrupt processing executed every 2.235 ms, but when power-off is detected two consecutive interrupts, power-off processing is executed in the next interrupt processing. Therefore, in FIG. 271, time S12 is the timing at which it is determined that the voltage is equal to or lower than the power-off detection level V1 two times in a row by interrupt processing, and that power-off has occurred. Then, power-off processing is executed in the next interrupt processing.
In addition, in the interrupt processing, the following processing is executed. First, it is determined whether or not a power cutoff has been detected, and when a power cutoff has been detected, the process proceeds to power cutoff processing (without transitioning to normal interrupt processing). In the power-off process, first, the output port 52 is turned off. The processing of turning off the output port 52 turns off the blocker 45 . In addition, stack pointer saving processing, power-off processing completion flag (flag for determining whether or not power-off has been performed normally) setting processing, RWM 53 checksum execution processing, RWM 53 write prohibition processing, etc. After sequential execution, it enters a reset wait state (loop processing state). This reset waiting state is designed so that no processing is performed.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 271, in the interrupt process subsequent to the interrupt process (time S12) in which the power-off is detected, the power-off process is executed and the blocker 45 is turned off.
It should be noted that the power-off process is not limited to being executed in the interrupt process subsequent to the interrupt process that detected the power-off, and the power-off process may be executed within the interrupt process that detected the power-off. In this case, "T1=S12-S11".

On the other hand, FIG. 271 also shows the medal positions (M2, M4) after the medals have been inserted. In FIG. 270, it is assumed that the player releases the medal M while the medal M is positioned at M1. In this case, the medal M falls at an initial speed of "0". As a result, the medal M is released into the medal selector. In FIG. 271, the time S11 at which the power failure occurred coincides with the time at which the medal M reaches the position of M2.

As shown in FIG. 270, the time from the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2 to the moment when the medal M is positioned at M4 is set to T2. It is assumed that the medal M is later positioned at M4.
In this case, the present embodiment is designed to satisfy the relationship "T2>T1".

Therefore, if the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the power cut-off process is executed before the medal M reaches M4, and the insertion sensor 44b stops detecting the medal M. Therefore, when a power failure occurs at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the medal M is sent to the medal return port (lower tray) without being detected by the insertion sensor 44b. Therefore, the medal M does not normally pass through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. Therefore, the medal M is swallowed, but after the power failure occurs (after time S11), the processing of adding "1" to the medal M (adding "1" to the bet or credit) is executed. not. This eliminates the possibility that the bet or credit processing will be executed after the power failure occurs.

For example, in the case where power failure occurs at the moment medal M is positioned at M2, when time T1 has elapsed (during power failure processing), when medal M is positioned immediately before M4 in FIG. 270 (medal M has passed the position of M3), the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a but not detected by the insertion sensor 44b, and the power is turned off.
Also, in the case where the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, when the time T1 has passed (at the time of power cut-off processing), the medal M is positioned upstream from the position of M3 in FIG. At that time, the medal M is turned off without being detected by either the insertion sensor 44a or the insertion sensor 44b.

Also, in FIG. 270, the time from the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2 to the moment when the medal M is positioned at M3 is time T2'.
In this case, it is preferable to design so as to satisfy the relationship "T2'>T1".
In the case where the above relationship is designed, if the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, when the medal M reaches M3, the blocker 45 is turned off by executing the power cut-off process. ing. Therefore, the medal M is sent out of the medal passage without being detected by the insertion sensor 44a, and sent to the medal return opening.

Here, the difference between the prior art and the thirty-third embodiment (A) will be described.
Conventionally, when the power interruption occurs at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the medal M has already passed the position of the insertion sensor 44b when the power interruption is detected and the blocker 45 is turned off. Therefore, after the power failure occurred, the medal "1" addition processing (betting processing or credit processing) was executed. However, it is not preferable to execute the medal addition process after power failure occurs. This is because all the processes related to the progress of the game should be stopped immediately after the power failure occurs.
Therefore, if configured as in the thirty-third embodiment (A), even if the player inserts the medal M from the medal insertion slot 43 and the power supply is interrupted at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2 (immediately after insertion), , the medal "1" addition processing is not executed, so the function of the slot machine 10 can be enhanced.

<Thirty-third Embodiment (B)>
The thirty-third embodiment (B) defines the relationship between the input sensors 44a and 44b and power off.
FIG. 272 is a front view showing the process from when the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a until it is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b. In FIG. 272, the direction of the arrow indicates the advancing (flowing down) direction of the medals M. As shown in FIG.
FIG. 272(a) shows the moment when the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a. At this time, the closing sensor 44a is turned on from off, and the closing sensor 44b remains off. This position corresponds to M3 in FIG.

Next, when the medal M advances to the left side in FIG. 272 and enters the state shown in FIG. become. Therefore, in FIG. 272(b), the input sensor 44a is on, and the input sensor 44b is turned on from off.
In FIG. 272, even when the inserted sensors 44a and 44b overlap the medal M, both the inserted sensors 44a and 44b and the medal M are indicated by solid lines. It does not represent the positional relationship of 44b. The insertion sensors 44a and 44b may be arranged on the front side or the back side of the medal M in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG.

When the medal M advances further and becomes the state of FIG. 272(c), the medal M is detected by both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. Therefore, the input sensor 44a in this case is on, and the input sensor 44b is also on.
Here, the diameter of the medal M is, for example, 25 millimeters (so-called 25 pies (φ)) in general specifications, and 30 millimeters (so-called 30 pies (φ)) in special specifications. Therefore, it is necessary to set the distance between the insertion sensors 44a and 44b so that the state of FIG. 272(c) can be obtained. Here, as will be described later, it is determined whether the state of FIG. determines whether or not to determine a medal insertion error. Therefore, the distance between the input sensors 44a and 44b also varies depending on how the time during which both the input sensors 44a and 44b are ON is set.

When the medal M further advances from the state of FIG. 272(c), the insertion sensor 44a stops detecting the medal M as shown in FIG. 272(d). In this case, the input sensor 44a is turned off from on at the moment, and the input sensor 44b remains on. When the medal M advances further, the insertion sensor 44b stops detecting the medal M as shown in FIG. 272(e). Therefore, in this case, the input sensor 44a remains off, and the input sensor 44b is turned off from on. The position of medal M in FIG. 272(e) corresponds to M4 in FIG.

FIG. 273 is a time chart showing ON/OFF of the input sensors 44a and 44b. In FIG. 273, time S21 is the moment when the closing sensor 44a turns on from off (the closing sensor 44b remains off), which corresponds to the timing of FIG. 272(a).
Next, let S22 be the moment (FIG. 272(b)) when the insertion sensor 44b detects the medal M (turns on from off). Furthermore, let S23 be the moment (FIG. 272(d)) when the inserted sensor 44a no longer detects the medal M (turned off from on). Further, the moment (FIG. 272(e)) when the inserted sensor 44b no longer detects the medal M (changed from on to off) is S24.

Here, if the time Ta (from time S21 to S23) during which the insertion sensor 44a detects the medal M is within the range of 6.705 ms (3 interrupts) or more and less than 185.505 ms (83 interrupts) (Condition 1), the main control board 50 judges that the medal M passes normally, and judges that the medal passes error when it is out of this range.

In addition, the time Tb (from time S22 to S23) during which both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the medal M is within a range of 4.47 ms (2 interruptions) or more and less than 118.455 ms (53 interruptions). If so (Condition 2), the main control board 50 determines that the medal M has passed normally, and if it is out of this range, it determines that there is a medal passing error.

Furthermore, if the time Tc (from time S22 to S24) during which the inserted sensor 44b detects the medal M is within the range of 6.705 ms (3 interrupts) or more and less than 185.505 ms (83 interrupts). (Condition 3), the main control board 50 judges that the medal M passes normally, and if it is out of this range, it is regarded as a medal passing error.
If all of the conditions 1 to 3 described above are satisfied, it is determined that the passage of the medal M is normal, and if at least one of the conditions is not satisfied, a medal passage error is determined.

Also, as shown in FIG. 273, when both the input sensors 44a and 44b are turned off (time S24), the input monitoring counter is decremented by "1".
Here, the insertion monitoring counter becomes "+1" when the passage sensor 43a described above detects the medal M, and when the medal passes through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b normally (both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are turned off). →When ON→OFF (that is, at time S24), the counter is decremented by "1". That is, during normal operation, "1" and "0" are repeated.
On the other hand, when the path sensor 43a does not detect the medal M, and only the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the passage of the medal, the insertion monitoring counter becomes "-1", and the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal passage error. do.

Further, when the path sensor 43a detects the medal M (insertion monitoring counter=“+1”) and the insertion sensors 44a and 44b do not detect the passage of the medal M, the path sensor 43a further detects the medal M. Then, when the insertion monitoring counter reaches a predetermined value of "2" or more, the main control board 50 determines that a medal jam error has occurred. For example, when the normal value of the insertion monitoring counter is set to "0" to "2", the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal clogging error when the insertion monitoring counter reaches "3" or more. be done.
The input monitoring counter is cleared when the blocker 45 is turned on from off.

In FIG. 273, at time S24, the insertion sensor 44b is turned off from ON, the insertion monitoring counter is decremented by "1", and when it is determined that the medal M has passed normally, the main control board 50 inserts the medal. Execute the transaction (bet transaction or credit transaction). For example, if the number of bets is less than the specified number at that time, the number of bets is added by "1". Specifically, when the prescribed number in the game is "3" and the bet number at that time is "0", the bet number is increased from "0" by adding "1" to the bet number. Update to "1".

At that time, if the number of bets has already reached the specified number and the number of credits has not reached the maximum number of "50", the number of credits is added to "1". For example, if the number of credits at that time is "10", the number of credits is updated to "11".
When the number of bets reaches the specified number and the number of credits reaches the maximum number of "50", the main control board 50 turns the blocker 45 off. Thereby, even if the medal M is inserted from the medal insertion slot 43, the medal M is returned. In other words, in that case, even if medals M are inserted, they are not detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.

In FIG. 273, in addition to the ON/OFF states of the input sensors 44a and 44b, the timings when the power failure occurs and when the power failure is detected are displayed. FIG. 273 shows examples 1 and 2, both of which are examples of the case where power failure occurs at the timing (time S21) when the input sensor 44a turns on from off.
Then, in Example 1, power failure is detected after time T1 has elapsed from time S21 when the power failure occurred. Here, in example 1, it is set to "T1>T3". Therefore, when the insertion sensor 44a detects the medal M at the moment when the power is cut off, when the power cut-off process is started, the "1" addition process for the medal M has already been executed.

Here, the time T3 from time S21 to S24 can be expressed as "Ta+Tc-Tb". Therefore, the minimum time for time T3 is 8.94 ms, which corresponds to 4 interrupts.
Also, the maximum time of time T3 corresponds to 113 interrupts and is "252.555 ms".
Then, in Example 1, it is set so that the power-off process is always executed after time S24 has elapsed. Therefore, for example, the time T1 from the occurrence of power failure (time S21) to the execution of power failure processing is set to be 114 interrupts or more.

With the above settings, even if the power is cut off at the moment when the insertion sensor 44a detects the medal M (time S21), the power cut-off process is executed after the "1" addition process for the medal M is executed. , the medal M is normally bet or credited. Therefore, swallowing of medals M can be prevented.

Further, Example 2 is an example in which the power-off process is executed before the medal M addition process of "1" is executed, contrary to Example 1. That is, in Example 2, the setting is made so as to satisfy the relationship "T1<T3".
Time T3 from time S21 to time S24 corresponds to four interrupts at the minimum time, as described above. Therefore, in order to satisfy the relationship of "T1<T3", it is necessary to execute power-off processing within three interrupts from the occurrence of power-off. However, since it is difficult to set the power-off processing to be executed within 3 interrupts from the occurrence of power-off, the minimum time of time Tc is set to be longer than 4 interrupts. For example, setting the minimum time of time Tc to 15 interrupts. If the time T1 from the occurrence of power failure (time S21) to the power failure process is set to about 10 interrupts, when the power failure occurs at time S21, the power failure process is executed before time S24. becomes possible.

After the power-off process is executed, the process of adding "1" to the medals M (bet or credit) is not executed. Therefore, in Example 2, even if the insertion sensor 44a detects the medal M at time S21 (when the power is cut off), the processing of adding "1" to the medal M1 is not executed. As a result, there is a demerit that the medal M is swallowed. , the power-off process can be executed as quickly as possible.

<Thirty-third Embodiment (C)>
The thirty-third embodiment (C) defines the relationship between the payout sensors 37a and 37b and power off.
When adding the medals to be paid out to the credits, the hopper motor 36 is not driven, and the credit number storage area provided in the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 is updated. Further, the value indicated by the credit number display LED 76 is updated so as to correspond to the credit number stored in the storage area.

When the medals are to be paid out after the number of credits has reached the upper limit value "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven to pay out the medals from the hopper 35 (discharge from the payout port). In this case, the payout sensors 37a and 37b are configured to detect ON/OFF each time one medal is paid out. When the on/off detection result by the payout sensors 37a and 37b is within the normal range, it is determined that one medal M has been correctly paid out, and when the detection result is not within the normal range, the medal M is not paid out correctly, and the main control board 50 judges that there is a medal payout error.

FIG. 274 is a plan view for explaining the operation when medals M are paid out from the medal payout device. Although not shown in FIG. 274, a hopper disk (substantially disk-shaped rotating disk) is attached to the bottom of the hopper 35 , and this hopper disk is rotated by driving the hopper motor 36 . A plurality of openings capable of holding the medals M are formed along the outer periphery of the hopper disc. The medal M in the hopper 35 is configured to enter the opening of the hopper disk. When the hopper motor 36 is driven in this state, the hopper disk rotates and the medals M held in the opening of the hopper disk are discharged one by one. A new medal M in the hopper 35 enters into the empty opening after the medal M is discharged.

In FIG. 274, the medal M positioned at M1 is shown immediately after being ejected from the opening of the hopper disc. Both the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b are parts constituting the medal payout device. The fixed shaft 38a is a shaft that does not move when the medals M are paid out. On the other hand, the movable shaft 38b is a shaft that reciprocates each time one medal M is paid out. In an unloaded state, the movable shaft 38b is arranged at the position indicated by the solid line in the drawing, and is fixed to the fixed shaft by a spring (not shown in FIG. 274, which corresponds to the spring 39b in FIG. 275 described later). 38a side is biased. The medal M (M1) immediately after being ejected from the opening of the hopper disk comes into contact with both the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b.
In addition, when the medal M is placed at the position (M1) indicated by the solid line in FIG. Narrower than diameter. Therefore, at this point, the medal M cannot pass through between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b.

The medal M ejected from the opening of the hopper disk is pushed out in the F1 direction in FIG. 274 . Then, when the pushing force in the F1 direction acts on the medal M, the medal M becomes movable in the F1 direction, and the pushing force pushes the movable shaft 38b in the F2 direction in the figure. Note that the fixed shaft 38a does not move. As a result, the movable shaft 38b moves in the F2 direction in the figure while maintaining the state of contact with the medal M. As shown in FIG. Further, the movable shaft 38b moves to a position where the medals M can pass between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b. In other words, the gap between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b becomes wider than the diameter of the medal M. The position of the movable shaft 38b at this time is indicated by a chain double-dashed line in the drawing.

As a result, the medal M passes through between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b and is ejected in the F1 direction (toward the medal payout port) in the drawing. The medal M at this time is indicated by a chain double-dashed line in FIG. 274 (M2). When the medal M is ejected, the force pushing the movable shaft 38b in the F2 direction is released. As a result, the movable shaft 38b is again returned to the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 274 by the force of the spring.

FIG. 275 is a plan view for explaining the on (detection)/off (non-detection) states of the payout sensors 37a and 37b when the medals M are paid out as described above in the medal payout device. FIG. 275 shows how the movable piece 39a moves in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(d)→(a) each time one medal M is paid out.

FIG. 275(a) shows the state of the movable piece 39a when the movable shaft 38b is arranged at the position indicated by the solid line (initial position) in FIG. The movable piece 39a is attached so as to be rotatable around the central axis in the drawing, and is biased clockwise by a spring 39b.
When the movable piece 39a is urged clockwise in the drawing, the movable shaft 38b in FIG. 274 is urged toward the fixed shaft 38a in the drawing.
In a state in which the movable piece 39a is biased clockwise in FIG. 275(a).

As shown in FIG. 275(a), payout sensors 37a (upper side in the drawing) and 37b (lower side in the drawing) are arranged on the left side of the movable piece 39a. The movable piece 39a is formed so as to extend toward the payout sensors 37a and 37b, and when it is stopped at the position shown in FIG. ing.
In FIG. 275, both of the payout sensors 37a and 37b show the housings of the sensors, and the light emitting/receiving parts (eyes of the sensors) are omitted from the illustration. In this respect, it is different from the insertion sensors 44a and 44b shown in FIGS.

Here, the dispensing sensor 37a is in the ON state (for example, FIG. 275(a)) when the movable piece 39a is detected, and is in the OFF state (for example, FIG. 275(b)) when the movable piece 39a is no longer detected. is set to be
Similarly, the dispensing sensor 37b is turned off (for example, FIG. 275(a)) when the movable piece 39a is not detected, and turned on (for example, FIG. 275(c)) when the movable piece 39a is detected. is set to
In the state of FIG. 275(a), the payout sensor 37a detects the movable piece 39a and is on, and the payout sensor 37b does not detect the movable piece 39a and is off.

As explained in FIG. 274, when a pushing force in the F1 direction in FIG. 274 acts on the medal M, the movable shaft 38b starts to move in the F2 direction in FIG. When moved, the movable piece 39a starts to rotate counterclockwise against the biasing force of the spring 39b in FIG. 275(a). When the movable piece 39a moves to the position shown in FIG. 275(b), the tip of the movable piece 39a comes out of the payout sensor 37a. As a result, the dispensing sensor 37a does not detect the movable piece 39a, and is turned off. Also, even if the movable piece 39a rotates to the position shown in FIG. 275(b), the tip of the movable piece 39a does not reach the payout sensor 37b. Therefore, in the state of FIG. 275(b), the payout sensor 37a is off and the payout sensor 37b is off.

In FIG. 274, when the movable shaft 38b moves further in the F2 direction and reaches the position indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. During 275, the movable piece 39a further rotates counterclockwise and reaches the position shown in FIG. 275(c). As a result, the tip of the movable piece 39a enters the payout sensor 37b, and the payout sensor 37b detects the movable piece 39a. Therefore, in the state of FIG. 275(c), the payout sensor 37a is in the OFF state and the payout sensor 37b is in the ON state.

In FIG. 274, when the medal M is further ejected from the position of M2, the force that urges the movable shaft 38b in the F2 direction in FIG. return. The return force at this time is due to the force of the spring 39b in FIG. As a result, the movable piece 39a rotates clockwise in FIG. 275, the tip of the movable piece 39a comes out of the payout sensor 37b, and the payout sensor 37b stops detecting the movable piece 39b. FIG. 275(d) shows the state at this time. In the state of FIG. 275(d), the payout sensor 37a is in the OFF state, and the payout sensor 37b is in the OFF state.

When the movable piece 39a further rotates clockwise, the tip of the movable piece 39a enters the payout sensor 37a, and the payout sensor 37a detects the movable piece 39a. This returns to the state (initial state) of FIG. 275(a). In the state of FIG. 275(a), as described above, the payout sensor 37a is on and the payout sensor 37b is off. When returning to this position, the movable shaft 38b returns to the solid line position in FIG.

FIG. 276 is a time chart showing ON/OFF of the payout sensors 37a and 37b.
In FIG. 276, it is assumed that the medal payout process has started and the hopper motor drive signal is on.
In FIG. 276, the state shown in FIG. 275(a) is before time S31. When time S31 is reached, the state shown in FIG. 275(b) is reached, and the payout sensor 37a is turned off (the payout sensor 37b is in the off state). Next, when time S32 is reached, the payout sensor 37b is turned on. This state is the state shown in FIG. 275(c). In FIG. 276, the time from time S31 to S32 is Td.

The state where the payout sensor 37a is off and the payout sensor 37b is on continues until time S33, at which time the payout sensor 37b is turned off. This state is the state shown in FIG. 275(d). In FIG. 276, the time from time S32 to S33 is Te. Then, when time S34 is reached, the state (initial position) of FIG. 275(a) is restored, and the payout sensor 37a is turned on. In FIG. 276, the time from time S32 to S34 is Tf.

In the payout process, the main control board 50 monitors the on/off time of the payout sensors 37a and 37b, and determines that a medal payout error has occurred when the time is not within a predetermined time range.
For example, in FIG. 276, time Td is set to less than 29.055 ms (13 interrupts). Therefore, after the payout sensor 37a is turned off, if the payout sensor 37b is turned on by the 12th interrupt, it is determined to be normal, but if the payout sensor 37b is not turned on by the 12th interrupt. If not, it is regarded as a medal payout error.

Also, the time Te during which the payout sensor 37a is off and the payout sensor 37b is on is set to 11.175 ms (5 interrupts) or more and less than 62.58 ms (28 interrupts). Therefore, when the time S32 is reached (when the payout sensor 37b is turned on), the time Te until the payout sensor 37b is turned off is monitored. , the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal payout error.

Furthermore, after the payout sensor 37b is turned on (time S32), the time Tf from when the payout sensor 37b is turned off to when the payout sensor 37a is turned on (time S34) is 11.175 ms (5 interrupts ) and less than 62.58 ms (28 interrupts). Therefore, at time S32 (when the payout sensor 37b is turned on), the payout sensor 37b is turned off and the time Tf until the payout sensor 37a is turned on is monitored. If the time is not within the predetermined time range, the main control board 50 determines that a medal payout error has occurred.

In addition, in FIG. 276, similarly to FIG. 271 and FIG. 273, the time from occurrence of power failure to power failure processing is also displayed.
First, it is assumed that a power failure occurs at the timing of time S31, that is, at the timing when the payout sensor 37a is turned off. In this case, in the example of FIG. 271, an example of detecting the power failure by the 20th interrupt was explained, but in the example of FIG. When T1 elapses), power-off is detected and power-off processing is set to be executed.

Here, since the maximum time (normal time) of the time "Td+Tf" is "12+27=39" interrupts, the time T1 from when the power is turned off until the power-off process is executed is set to 40 interrupts (89.4 ms), for example. set. With this setting, even if the power is cut off at the moment when the payout sensor 37a is turned off, the power cutoff process can be started after the payout process of one medal is normally completed. That is, it can be set to "(Td+Tf)<T1".

Conventionally, power outages (power outages, etc.) may occur during medal payout processing. In this case, depending on the timing of the medal payout process and the power shutdown, it may be determined that the medals have been paid out even though the medals have not been paid out, causing a loss to the player.
In contrast, in the thirty-third embodiment (C), medals can be paid out correctly even if the power is cut off during the medal payout process.

In particular, when the medal payout process is started, that is, even if the power is cut off at the timing of time S31 in FIG. Therefore, for example, when the payout sensor 37a is in the OFF state or at the timing when the payout sensor 37b is in the ON state, the power-off processing is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interruption of the medal payout process before the (one) medal payout process ends normally due to the execution of the power-off process in the middle of the medal payout process.

If the time T1 is set longer than necessary, there is a risk that the next medal payout process will be executed. Therefore, the power-off process is executed at least before the next medal payout process is executed. In FIG. 276, for example, assuming that the cycle of one medal payout process is time T4 and that the payout sensor 37a changes from the ON state to the OFF state at the timing of time S35, "T1<T4" is set.

<34th embodiment>
The thirty-fourth embodiment relates to gate traces formed on the board case of the main control board 50 .
In the prior art, the shape, size, position, and the like of the gate marks on the substrate case were determined by the mold designer when the mold was manufactured, solely for the convenience of mold manufacturing.
However, since the trace of the gate is an uneven surface, even if a hole is made aiming at the trace of the gate, there is a case where it cannot be visually recognized (not noticed).

If the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 is arranged directly below the trace of the gate, the main CPU 55 can be accessed by making a hole in the trace of the gate and passing a wire through the hole. be done). In particular, if the gate marks are shaped to be thinner than the other portions, it becomes easier to make a hole than the other portions.
Therefore, in the thirty-fourth embodiment, it is prevented that the gate mark of the substrate case is used to cheat.

FIG. 277 is an external perspective view showing the main control board 50 and the board case 16 (upper cover 57 and lower cover 58) in exploded form.
The substrate case 16 is composed of an upper cover 57 and a lower cover 58, both of which are (injection) molded products of transparent resin. Therefore, when the main control board 50 is accommodated inside, the state of the main control board 50 can be visually confirmed clearly from the outside of the board case 16 .

On the main control board 50, electronic components such as the above-described main CPU 55, management information display LED 74 (4-digit LED, also called "role ratio monitor"), set value display LED 73 are mounted. Although many electronic components such as the RWM 53 and ROM 54 are mounted on the main control board 50, they are not shown in FIG. Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 277, the main control board 50 is equipped with bet switches 40a and 40b, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a path sensor 43a in the medal selector, and failure confirmation LEDs for insertion sensors 44a and 44b. It is Note that the failure confirmation LED is not limited to this.
For example, the failure confirmation LED of the start switch 41 is extinguished when the start switch 41 is off, and is turned off when the start switch 41 is operated (when the start switch 41 is operated and the sensor detects that it is on). ), the LED is turned on (lit).

The failure confirmation LED of the start switch 41 and the failure confirmation LEDs of other operation switches and sensors, which will be described later, are extinguished when the operation switch is operated (when the sensor detects that it is on), and when it is off. It may be configured to light up.

In addition, two failure confirmation LEDs for the bed switches 40a and 40b are provided for the bed switches 40a and 40b, and are extinguished when the bed switch 40 is not operated. It is an LED that lights up when it receives the electrical signal at that time.
Furthermore, the path sensor 43a and the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are provided with a total of three failure confirmation LEDs for each sensor. LEDs.
Then, for example, the administrator operates the start switch 41 and confirms whether the failure check LED of the start switch 41 mounted on the main control board 50 is on/off, thereby determining whether the start switch 41 has failed (energized). can be confirmed. The same is true for other switches or sensors.

The failure confirmation LED may be turned on/off by operating the start switch 41 or the like when the front door is opened during normal operation (not during setting change and setting confirmation). . Alternatively, after the front door is opened and a door open error occurs, a predetermined operation may be performed to enable failure confirmation. Further, the light may be turned on/off by operating the start switch 41 or the like at all times (even during setting change or setting confirmation).

Also, the model number of the board is displayed (printed, etc.) on the main control board 50 . Although not shown in FIG. 277, model numbers and the like are similarly displayed on the upper surfaces of the RWM 53 and ROM 54 .
Further, screw holes 50a for passing screws are formed in the four corners of the main control board 50. As shown in FIG.
On the other hand, bosses 58c for screwing are formed at the four corners on the inner side of the lower surface of the lower cover 58. As shown in FIG. When the main control board 50 is placed on the lower cover 58, the screw holes 50a and the bosses 58c overlap, and screws are passed through the screw holes 50a and screwed to the bosses 58c, thereby fixing the main control board 50 to the lower case 58. can do.

When the upper cover 57 is placed on the lower cover 58 in this state, the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are formed in a shape that fits together (in FIG. 277, the specific shape of the fitting portion is omitted from illustration). ) Further, crimped portions 57a are provided on both left and right sides of the upper cover 57 in the figure. Similarly, crimped portions 58a are provided on the left and right sides of the lower cover 58 in the figure. In FIG. 277, illustration of the specific shape and detailed shape of the crimped portions 57a and 58b is omitted.

After the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted together and crimped using the crimped portions 57a and 58a, at least a portion of the crimped portions 57a and 58a must be destroyed (plastically deformed). The cover 57 and the lower cover 58 cannot be opened.
Thereby, the security of the main control board 50 can be ensured.

Further, as shown in FIG. 277, gate traces 57b are provided at two places on the outside of the upper surface of the upper cover 57. As shown in FIG. In the board case 16 (with the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 fitted together), the side on which the main control board 50 is accommodated is called the "inside", and the side exposed to the outside is called the "outside". .
In FIG. 277, the gate traces 57b are provided at two locations, but they may be provided at any number of locations.

Here, the "gate" is the sprue when resin (hot water) is poured into the mold during resin molding, and the gate mark is the mark that remains at the boundary between the gate and the molded product after resin molding. be.
When the board case 16 (upper cover 57, lower cover 58) has a shape as shown in FIG. 277, the mold for the case is a mold divided vertically in FIG. 277 to reduce cost. In the case of a multi-cavity mold, it is preferable to use a pin gate, and from the viewpoint of the fluidity of the resin (hot water), it is preferable to provide the gate near the center of the molded product. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the gate positions of the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are formed on the upper surface in FIG. 277, not on the side surface.

Furthermore, considering the cutting of the projections of the gate traces during molding, it is preferable to provide the gate traces on the outside.
As described above, the gate mark 57b of the upper cover 57 is provided on the outer side of the upper surface.
For the same reason as above, the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 is also provided on the outer side of the lower surface (the surface opposite to the visible surface in FIG. 277). In FIG. 277, the gate traces 58b of the lower cover 58 are provided at two locations like the gate traces 57b of the upper cover 57, but they may be provided at one location, or at three or more locations. good too.

In addition, when the resin (hot water) flows from the gate into the mold, if the resin (hot water) spreads unevenly in the mold and a cooling time difference occurs, the molded product may warp. Therefore, it is preferable to arrange the gate position of the molded product at a position where the resin (hot water) spreads uniformly in the mold. Furthermore, when gates are provided at a plurality of locations, it is preferable to make the distance from the end of the molded product to the gates and the distance between the gates as uniform as possible.

278 , (a) is a plan view showing the positional relationship between the gate marks 57b of the upper cover 57 and the gate marks 58b of the lower cover 58 of the board case 16 and the main control board 50. FIG. FIG. 278(a) shows a state in which the main control board 50 is accommodated in the board case 16 (a state in which the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower cover 58 and the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted together). ) is viewed from above. Also, the main control board 50 is shown as seen through from the upper surface side of the upper cover 57 .

Furthermore, (b) shows Example 1 of a cross-sectional view taken along AA in FIG. (a), and (c) shows Example 2 of a cross-sectional view taken along AA in FIG. indicates In these cross-sectional views, hatching is omitted from the viewpoint of ease of viewing the drawings.
As shown in FIG. 278(a), when the main control board 50 is accommodated in the board case 16, the vertical direction of the upper cover 57 (main control board 50 side) (directly below) from the two gate traces 57b is: The model number display, management information display LED 74, setting value display LED 73, and main CPU 55 (socket) are set so as not to be positioned. As described above, the RWM 53, ROM 54, and failure confirmation LED are also mounted on the main control board 50, but it is preferable that the gate mark 57b is not positioned directly above them.

The reasons for arranging the gate marks 57 as described above are as follows.
Even after the slot machine 10 is placed on the market, the main control board 50 needs to be visually checked to see if it has been tampered with. In particular, it is necessary to confirm whether or not the main CPU 55 and the like (including the RWM 53 and ROM 54; the same shall apply hereinafter) are conforming, and whether or not they have been altered by cheating. Furthermore, since the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 16 and the board case 16 is sealed as described above, it is necessary to visually confirm the main control board 50 from the outside of the board case 16. be.
The board case 16 housing the main control board 50 therein is mounted inside the housing of the slot machine 10, for example, inside the rear surface thereof. This is because the numerical values displayed by the set value display LED 73 and the management information display LED 74 are mounted at positions where they are easy to see.

Therefore, the administrator of the slot machine 10 is expected to view the board case 16 (main control board 50) from a direction perpendicular to the upper surface of the upper cover 57. FIG. That is, as shown in FIG. 278(a), it is considered that the board case 16 (main control board 50) is viewed. Therefore, if the main CPU 55 and the like are arranged in the vertical direction (directly below) the gate trace 57b, the gate trace 57 may interfere with the visibility. In particular, the information displayed (printed, etc.) on the upper surface of the main CPU 55 or the like is also made visible without impeding visibility.

Since the entire upper cover 57 is molded from a transparent resin, visibility is not completely hindered even if it is directly below the gate marks 57b. However, as shown in (b) and (c) in FIG. 278, the cross section of the gate trace 57b becomes an uneven surface. It is certain. In addition, in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 278(b), since the upper end surface of the protrusion 57d is a cut surface, it may be whitened or the like due to stress during cutting of the resin. Therefore, in this case as well, the visibility directly below the gate mark 57b is obstructed.

Moreover, since the upper surface of the upper cover 57 is transparent and has no irregularities except for the gate mark 57b, even if a hole is made by shoveling, it can be easily noticed visually.
On the other hand, the gate mark 57b is an uneven surface obtained by cutting the resin. Therefore, if the gate hole 57b is opened and then sealed with, for example, a resin material, it may not be possible to visually determine whether or not the gate mark 57b has been opened. For this reason, there is a possibility that a goto act using the gate mark 57b will be performed.

On the other hand, when a hole is made in the gate mark 57b, if the main CPU 55 and the like are positioned in the vertical direction (directly below) the gate mark 57b, it is easy for the player to cheat. Therefore, if the main CPU 55 and the like are not arranged in the vertical direction (directly below) the gate trace 57b, it becomes difficult to access the main CPU 55 and the like, and it is possible to make it difficult to do something.

In addition, since the model number displayed (printed, etc.) on the surface of the main control board 50 is also important information for checking whether there is any fraud, the model number display A gate trace 57b is prevented from being arranged right above the area. Furthermore, when the gate mark 57b exists directly above the model number display, in order to prevent unauthorized modification of the model number display by opening a hole in the gate mark 57b to access the inside of the substrate case 16, The gate marks 57b are not arranged right above the model number display.

Furthermore, it is necessary to see the numerical value displayed on the setting value display LED 73 when changing the setting or confirming the setting. Also, regarding the management information display LED 74, it is necessary to see the numerical values displayed in order to confirm whether the advantageous section ratio, the accessory ratio, and the like are within appropriate ranges. Therefore, the traces of the gate 57b are not arranged right above these LEDs. Furthermore, in the same manner as described above, holes are made in the gate traces 57b using the gate traces 57b so that the LEDs in the substrate case 16 can be accessed through the holes. The gate mark 57b is prevented from being arranged thereon.

Further, regarding the above-described failure confirmation LED, the administrator of the slot machine 10 operates the operation switch to confirm whether or not the failure confirmation LED corresponding to the operation switch lights up. For this reason, it is preferable that the gate mark 57b is not located right above the failure confirmation LED. In the same manner as described above, the failure check LED is not arranged in the vertical direction (directly below) the gate trace 57b to make it difficult for cheating to occur.

In FIG. 278, cross-sectional views of Example 1 shown in (b) and Example 2 shown in (c) have the same outer shape of the gate marks 57b. In Example 1 of (b), the inner side of the upper surface of the gate mark 57b remains flat. On the other hand, in example 2 of (c), the inside of the upper surface of the gate mark 57b is formed in a protruding shape (thickness).
The outside of the gate mark 57b has a protrusion 57d at its center and a depression 57c formed so as to sink into a cylindrical shape at its outer periphery. The boundary between the gate and the molded product is connected during molding, and this boundary is cut by a cutter when separating the molded product from the mold. Therefore, the upper end surface of the projection 57d is the cut surface by the cutter. There are two methods for cutting the boundary between the gate and the molded product: automatic cutting by a molding machine during injection, and cutting in a post-process.

Here, when cutting the boundary between the gate and the molded product, processing the cut surface into a completely smooth surface, in other words, making the height of the projection 57d almost "0" to a smooth surface reduces the cost. high and difficult. Therefore, the depression 57c is formed so that the projection 57d does not protrude above the upper surface of the upper cover 57 even if the projection 57d has some height. As a result, for example, when an assembling worker touches the upper cover 57, it is possible to prevent injury due to the projections 57d.

As shown in FIG. 278(b), when the recessed portion 57c is provided in the gate mark 57, the thickness of the upper cover 57 is reduced accordingly. In this way, if there is even a portion with a thin wall thickness, there is a risk that it will be easy to make a hole in the recessed portion 57c to gain access to the inside of the substrate case 16 .
Therefore, in example 2 of FIG. 278(c), a protrusion 57e is provided on the opposite side (inner side) of the upper surface outer side where the gate mark 57b is provided, and the thickness of the recessed portion 57c is prevented from becoming thin. there is If the projecting portion 57e is not provided to provide a thinned portion, it is possible to make it difficult to make a hole in the recessed portion 57c.

In addition, the protrusion 57e not only contributes to fraud countermeasures by preventing a portion of the thickness of the gate mark 57b from becoming thin, but also functions as a dimple (hot water pool) during molding. In FIG. 278 ((b)), when the resin (hot water) is injected from the gate (position corresponding to the protrusion 57d) of the mold, and the resin (hot water) collides with the inside of the upper surface, the resin (hot water) There is a risk that the flow will suddenly change and it will not be possible to flow stably. Therefore, by providing a dimple (hot water pool) at a position facing the tip of the gate, when the resin (hot water) is injected from the gate, it reduces the sudden change in the flow of the resin (hot water), (Hot water) becomes able to flow stably. The protrusion 57e may have various shapes such as a square cross section, a triangular cross section, a trapezoidal cross section (in the case of FIG. 278(c)), and a dome cross section. Any shape may be used as long as the shape can prevent this.

Regarding the visibility of the gate trace 57b in the vertical direction (directly below), a smooth lower side of the gate trace 57 is superior to an uneven shape. Therefore, the shape of FIG. 278(b) is superior to the shape of FIG. 278(c) in terms of visibility directly below the gate mark 57b. Also, the shape of FIG. 278(b) simplifies the shape of the mold as compared with the shape of FIG. lower cost).

Further, the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 is also provided on the outer side (lower side in FIG. 277). Furthermore, a protrusion 57d and a depression 57c shown in FIG. 278(b) are formed on the outside. This is because, as described above, it is convenient in terms of molding to provide the projection 57d and the recess 57c on the outside of the molded product.
Then, when the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower cover 58 , the pin positions of the main CPU 55 and the like of the main control board 50 are set so as not to be positioned in the vertical direction of the gate mark 58 b of the lower cover 58 . This is because a hole is made in the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 to prevent access to the pins of the main CPU 55 and the like.
278(c), the protrusion 57e of FIG. 278(c) faces the pin side of the main control board 50. Needless to say, the pins protruding from the lower surface side of the control board 50 and the protrusions 57e are formed so as not to interfere with each other (contact).

Further, as shown in FIG. 278(a), when the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted together, the gate marks 57b of the upper cover 57 and the gate marks 58b of the lower cover 58 overlap in the vertical direction. It is preferable to dispose (shift) so as not to In particular, when the gate traces 57b and 58b shown in FIG. By arranging the 57 and the lower cover 58 at positions that do not overlap each other, it is possible to prevent overlapping of parts that are likely to be targeted.
Further, when the gate mark 57b of the upper cover 57 and the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 overlap in the vertical direction, the position of the gate mark of the other cover can be known by just looking at one cover. turn into. In order to prevent this, the gate marks 57b of the upper cover 57 and the gate marks 58b of the lower cover 58 are arranged not to overlap in the vertical direction.

<35th embodiment>
In the thirty-fifth embodiment, when a command is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80, communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is temporarily disabled (disconnection). After that, when the communication is restored, or when the communication fails due to the influence of noise, etc.).
As described above, the control command transmitting means 71 of the main control board 50 transmits to the sub control board 80 commands such as the pressing order instruction number and the information of the operated stop switch 42 . Then, the sub-control board 80 outputs an effect based on the command received from the main control board 50, and updates the effect according to the operation of the operation switch during the game.

Here, there is a possibility that the connection between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 will be disconnected and communication will be disabled. Possible causes include poor contact and radio-controlled goto. When the sub control board 80 stops receiving commands from the main control board 50, the effect stops in the current state. Neither the main control board 50 nor the sub-control board 80 determines the presence or absence of disconnection in communication between them. Therefore, even if a disconnection occurs between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80, the main control board 50 can continue the game (operation of the bet switch 40, the start switch 41, and the stop switch 42). etc.) to continue the command transmission process to the sub-control board 80 . On the other hand, when the sub-control board 80 does not receive a command from the main control board 50, it maintains the rendering state at that time.
Even when the line between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is broken, for example, during AT, the main control board 50 operates the instruction function to display the number of acquisition LEDs 78 in the pressing order. Display instructional information. As a result, even when the sub-control board 80 does not function normally, the player can see the pressing order instruction information and operate the stop switches 42 in the correct pressing order.
Furthermore, since the player can compare the pressing order instruction information displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 with the effect content (correct pressing order) displayed as an image on the image display device 23, the information of the two is contradictory. If so, it can be known that the image display by the sub-control board 80 is defective.

For example, when a disconnection occurs in the middle of the "N"th game and the communication is restored in the middle of the "N+1"th game, the command transmitted from the main control board 50 can be received by the sub-control board 80. Occasionally, the presentation cannot be suddenly switched to the "N+1" game. Even when the communication is restored, the sub-control board 80 does not receive a command related to the operation of the start switch 41 (a command for notifying the start of the game), and notifies that the "N+1" game item has started. This is because it cannot be determined. Therefore, when the communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is disconnected and then restored, the player may be misunderstood depending on the content of the presentation.
Therefore, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, when the communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is disconnected and then restored, the performance is given a sense of incongruity while minimizing misunderstandings for the player. Outputs a rendition that does not exist.

279 shows the operation of the main control board 50 (described as "main operation" in FIG. 279) and the display of the effect by the sub control board 80 (described as "sub display" in FIG. 279) in the thirty-fifth embodiment. .), and shows five examples consisting of pattern 1 (example 1) to pattern 5 (example 5).
Patterns 1 to 5 each show an example in which communication becomes impossible (disconnection occurs) in the middle of the "N"th game, and communication is restored in the middle of the "N+1"th game.
In addition, in the main operation of FIG. 279, "bet" means when the bet switch 40 is operated and the specified number is effectively betted. Further, "start" means that the game is started by operating the start switch 41 after the specified number has been betted. Furthermore, for example, "right stop" means that the right stop switch 42 has been operated (the right reel 31 is stopped).

Further, in the sub-display, "pressing order effect" means, for example, in a game in which the pressing order bell or pressing order replay is won, the correct pressing order is displayed as an image. Specifically, for example, "right-left-middle display" means an effect for notifying that the correct pressing order is "right-left-middle". For example, "left middle display" is an effect after the left stop switch 42 is operated, indicating that the second stop switch to be operated is the left and the third to be operated the middle stop switch. It means a performance to inform.
Furthermore, for example, the "right stop effect" is a effect that the right stop switch 42 has been operated (the right reel 31 has stopped) when a command indicating that the right stop switch 42 has been operated is received. means.

In pattern 1, when the start switch 41 is operated in the "N" game, the main control board 50 draws a winning combination as described above. In this game, "right, left, middle" is an example of winning the pressing order bell, which is the correct pressing order. In this case, the main control board 50 transmits a pressing order instruction number (command) corresponding to the correct pressing order "right, left, middle" to the sub control board 80 during AT. When the sub-control board 80 receives this command, it outputs to the image display device 23 a pressing order presentation that displays the correct pressing order of "right, left, middle".
Although not shown, the main control board 50 displays the pressing order instruction information corresponding to the correct pressing order "right, left, middle" on the acquired number display LED 78 (operation of the instruction function).

Next, it is assumed that the player operates the right stop switch 42 as the first stop (right stop) after seeing the correct order of pressing. As a result, the right reel 31 stops and a command to that effect is sent to the sub-control board 80 . When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, it outputs an effect (right stop effect) in which the right stop switch 42 is operated (the right reel 31 is stopped), and displays the right-left middle display and the left middle display (in addition, other , such as "-left center", "x left center", etc.).
Pattern 1 shows an example in which a disconnection occurs after the right reel 31 stops and communication between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 becomes impossible (sub disconnection). That is, this is an example in which communication becomes impossible in the middle of a game.

Even if communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 becomes impossible (even if the sub-control board 80 does not function), the game can proceed. The example of pattern 1 shows an example in which the left and middle stop switches 42 are respectively operated (the left and middle reels 31 are stopped) after the disconnection occurs in the "N" game (left middle stop ).

Next, it is assumed that a bet operation for the "N+1" game is performed and the start switch 41 is operated. In the "N+1"th game, as in the "N"th game, "right, left, middle" shows an example of winning the push order bell (or push order replay), which is the correct push order. In addition, in the "N+1" game, similarly to the "N" game, an example is shown in which the stop switch 42 is operated in the right, left, middle pressing order. Any role lottery result may be used.

When winning the push order bell (or push order replay) having the correct push order in the "N+1" game, the main control board 50 displays the push order instruction information on the winning number display LED 78. - 特許庁Therefore, even if the image display device 23 does not display the image of the correct pressing order, the player can operate the stop switch 42 in the correct pressing order according to the pressing order instruction information displayed on the winning number display LED 78. Become.

In the "N+1" game, the player operates the right stop switch 42 first. After that, it is assumed that communication between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 is restored before the second left stop switch 42 is operated.
Accordingly, when the player operates the left stop switch 42 which is the second stop switch 42 , the command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . When the sub-control board 80 receives this command, it updates the image display so as to correspond to the received command. That is, an image indicating that the left stop has been performed is displayed (left stop effect). Here, the sub-control board 80 updates the effect that has already been displayed, that is, the effect of the "N"th game.

Therefore, actually, the second stop switch 42 (left) of the "N+1" game is operated, but the sub-control board 80 indicates that the second stop switch 42 (left) of the "N" game is Outputs the effect when operated. Since the second correct pressing order in the "N"th game is left, in this example, the operation is performed in the correct pressing order. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 outputs the left stop effect (the pressing order correct effect), and outputs the final middle display effect.

Then, in the "N+1" game, when the last middle stop switch 42 is operated, a command to that effect is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. - 特許庁When the sub-control board 80 receives this command, it outputs an effect corresponding to the third stop of the "N" game, that is, an intermediate stop effect.
In the "N+1" game, even if a combination having the correct order is won and the correct order is other than right, left, middle, under the situation of pattern 1, the effect is output as described above. be done. That is, in the "N+1" game, when the pressing order operated by the player is right, left, or middle, even if the pressing order corresponds to the incorrect pressing order, the pressing order fails as in pattern 2 described later. No performance is output.

Furthermore, in the "N+1" game, if a winning combination that does not have a correct pressing order is won, or if the winning combination is not won, if the pressing order operated by the player is right, left, middle, the above-mentioned The same effect is output as That is, even if the "N+1" game item does not have the correct pressing order, the sub-control board 80 indicates that the left stop switch 42 has been operated after the communication is restored (in the example of pattern 1). When the command is received, the left stop effect (pressing order correct effect) is output, and further, the middle display is output.

Next, when a bet for the "N+2" game is made and the "N+2" game is started by operating the start switch 41, the main control board 50 instructs the sub control board 80 to say " N+2" transmits a command corresponding to the start of the game. As a result, the sub-control board 80 outputs an effect at the start of the "N+2" game. Specifically, when the start switch 41 is operated, commands for the effect group number and the pressing order instruction number are transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . When the sub-control board 80 receives these commands, it performs a push order effect and a display of the correct push order as at the start of the "N" game.

As described above, in pattern 1, until the third stop of the "N+1" game, the sub-control board 80, based on the command received from the main control board 50 ("N+1" game), continue to output, and when the 'N+2' game is started, the 'N+2'game's effect is updated.
In addition, when the game ends, the main control board 50 may transmit a command indicating the number of winning coins to the sub-control board 80, and the sub-control board 80 may also display an image of the number of winning coins during the AT. In such a case, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command for the winning number at the end of the "N"th game, that is, during disconnection. ” The number of coins obtained at the end of the game will remain displayed. Then, when the communication is restored and the command for the winning number is received at the end of the "N+1" game, the sub-control board 80 updates the image display so that the number obtained at the end of the "N+1" game is displayed. .

In pattern 2, the main operation is the same as in pattern 1. Also, the disconnection timing is the same as pattern 1, but the communication recovery timing is different from pattern 2. FIG. Pattern 2 is an example in which communication is restored after the left stop, which is the second stop, in the "N+1" game.
In pattern 2, the main action and sub-display in the "N" game are the same as in pattern 1, so the description is omitted.
Next, in the "N+1" game, the stop switches 42 are operated in the order of right, left, middle, and communication is restored after the left second stop.

Immediately before the communication is restored, the sub-control board 80 is outputting the right stop effect for the "N" game item and the middle left display. In this state, communication is restored, and when the player operates the stop switch 42 (third stop) during the “N+1” game, the command is sent to the sub-control board 80 . When the sub-control board 80 receives a middle stop command while left middle display is being performed, it determines that the pressing order is incorrect and outputs a pressing order failure presentation. Note that, in the third embodiment, after the pressing order failure effect is output, the subsequent pressing order effect is not output.

In the "N + 1" game, when it is assumed that the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing the middle left and right, the communication is restored after the middle left stop, and the right stop command is sub-controlled by the right stop after that. Also when it is transmitted to the substrate 80, the pressing order failure effect is output in the same manner as described above. Since the sub-control board 80 is in the process of outputting the right stop effect and the left center display, if the right stop command is received at this time, it means that the same stop command has been received twice in one game. . Even in such a case, it is processed as failure in the pressing order without performing error notification or the like, and the effect is output.
When the "N+2" game is started in the same manner as in pattern 1, a command for starting the "N+2" game is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . Thereby, the sub-control board 80 starts the effect of the "N+2" game.

In pattern 3, the main action and sub-display of the "N"th game are the same as in pattern 1.
Pattern 3 shows an example in which communication is restored after the first stop right and the second stop in the "N+1" game. Therefore, in the "N+1" game, after communication is restored, a left stop command, which is the third stop, is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . Since the sub-control board 80 outputs the "left center display" for the "N" game, when the command for left stop is received in this state, it is judged as the correct pressing order. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 outputs a left stop effect (correct pressing order effect) and then outputs a middle display.

However, on the main control board 50 side, the "N+1" game ends with the left third stop. Next, when the game shifts to the "N+2" game, and a command for starting the "N+2" game is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, the sub-control board 80 receives the command and receives the "N+2" game. Switch to the performance at the start. Therefore, the left stop effect and middle display that have been output until then are cancelled. Also, even if a command for the start of the "N+2"th game is received while the middle display is being output, no error notification or the like is performed, and an effect for the start of the "N+2"th game is output according to the received command. .

Pattern 4 is an example of displaying the number of remaining games during AT in the sub-display. Also, in pattern 4, the main operation, disconnection timing, and communication recovery timing are the same as in pattern 3. FIG.
The main control board 50 transmits a command indicating the number of remaining AT games to the sub control board 80 at the start of each game. When the sub-control board 80 receives a command for the remaining number of AT games from the main control board 50, it updates the display of the remaining number of AT games. During the AT, the display of the number of remaining games is not performed independently, but is output together with pattern 3's pressing order effect.

In pattern 4, when the start switch 41 is operated (at the start of the game), the main control board 50 transmits a command indicating the number of remaining games during AT to the sub-control board 80 . Here, in the "N"th game, it is assumed that the number of AT remaining games is 10 games.
The sub control board 80 displays the number of remaining games during AT (10 remaining games) based on the command received from the main control board 50 at the start of the "N"th game.
Then, if the disconnection occurs in the middle of the "N" game, and the disconnection state continues at the start of the "N+1" game, the main control board 50, at the start (at the start) of the "N+1" game, Although processing for transmitting a command for the remaining number of games played during AT (9 games) is executed to the control board 80, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command (due to disconnection). Therefore, in the "N+1"th game, the "remaining 10 games" of the "N"th game remains displayed.

Then, when the communication is restored in the middle of the "N+1" game (after the left middle stop) and the game shifts to the "N+2" game, the main control board 50 changes to the sub control board 80 at the start of the "N+2" game. In response, a command for the number of remaining games (8 games) during AT is transmitted. When the sub-control board 80 receives this command, it updates the display of the remaining 10 games to the display of the remaining 8 games.

Pattern 5 is the same as pattern 4 in terms of the main action, disconnection timing, and communication recovery timing, but is an example in which the "N" game is the remaining AT game.
The main control board 50 transmits to the sub control board 80 a command indicating the number of remaining games during AT (one remaining game) at the start of the "N"th game (when the start switch 41 is operated). When the sub-control board 80 receives this command, it updates the display to one remaining game (from the display of two remaining games up to that point).
When disconnection occurs after the right stop of the "N" game, the main control board 50 determines that the number of remaining games during AT is 0 at the start of the "N+1" game (when the start switch 41 is operated). A command indicating that it is a game is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, but the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command (same as pattern 4). Therefore, at the start of the "N+1" game, the display indicating that there is one AT game remaining is continued.

Further, the sub-control board 80 outputs an AT end effect when ending the AT. The AT end effect is executed at the end of the game based on receiving (at the start of the game) a command indicating that the number of remaining games during the AT is 0 games.
However, in the example of pattern 5, the sub-control board 80 does not receive the command indicating that the number of remaining games during the AT is 0, so the AT end effect is not output. Therefore, even when the "N+1" games are finished, an effect indicating that there is one AT game remaining is output.

When the "N+1" game is completed and the "N+2" game is started, the main control board 50 sends a command indicating normal game (non-AT) to the sub control board 80 at the start of the "N+2" game. Send. Upon receipt of this command, the sub-control board 80 erases the display of "1 game remaining" and outputs normal (non-AT) effects.
At the end of the AT, an image such as "Pachinko/Pachislot is a game machine for moderate enjoyment" is displayed in order to prevent addiction. However, in the case of pattern 5, since the sub-display has not returned to normal at the end of the "N+1" game, the image display cannot be performed. Therefore, as a countermeasure against this, the game history is managed on the side of the sub-control board 80, and when the next game ("N+2" game in the example of FIG. The image display may be performed at the start of .

In the above patterns 1 to 5, when disconnection occurs in the "N" game, the sub-control board 80 continues to output the effect immediately before the disconnection in the "N" game until the communication is restored, and "N+1 ' When the communication is restored in the middle of the game, the continuation of the effect output as the 'N' game is output based on the command received at the 'N+1' game. Therefore, for example, in pattern 1, when a left stop command is received after communication is restored in the "N+1" game, regardless of whether the stop switch 42 was actually operated in the correct order, the correct answer is received. The pressing order effect is output.

On the other hand, in pattern 1, for example, in the "N+1"th game, if a command for intermediate stop is received after communication is restored, the order of pressing the effect output at that time, that is, the "N"th game Since the incorrect pressing order is displayed for the middle left display, the pressing order failure presentation is output regardless of whether the stop switch 42 is actually operated in the correct pressing order. However, even if the pushing order failure effect is output in the "N+1" game, if the player operates the stop switch 42 according to the correct pushing order in the "N+1" game, the symbols are advantageous to the player. Since the combination is stopped and displayed, the player is not disadvantaged.

As described above, when the communication is restored in the "N+1" game, in the "N+1" game, the effect that takes over the effect before disconnection ("N" game) is output, and the "N+2" game is output. Reset rendition at start (return to correct rendition). As a result, it is possible to minimize the output of an unnatural performance in both the game in which the disconnection occurs and the game in which the communication is restored, and to prevent the player from being misunderstood as much as possible.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 279, after the disconnection occurred in the "N" game, the communication was restored in the "N+1" game. 279 is the same as in FIG.
For example, if a disconnection occurs in the "N" game and communication is restored in the "N+a" game (a = "2" or more), the disconnection in the "N" game will continue until the "N+a-1" game. The effect just before the previous one continues to be output. Then, in the "N+a"th game in which the communication is restored, the continuation of the "N"th game effect in which the output has been continued is executed based on the command received after the communication is restored. Next, at the start of the "N+a+1" game, the effect (correct effect) at the start of the "N+a+1" game is updated.

<Thirty-sixth embodiment>
When the reel 31 is rotated and stopped, the motor 32 performs acceleration, constant speed, deceleration, and stop processing, all of which are in an excited state. Then, when the rotation of the motor 32 is stopped, the four phases are simultaneously excited for a predetermined time (time T11 to be described later) (hereinafter referred to as "four-phase excitation state").
The thirty-sixth embodiment relates to the time relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a of the stop switch 42 and the four-phase excitation state when the motor 32 is stopped.
FIG. 280 is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a and the detection sensor 42e in the thirty-sixth embodiment. It should be noted that hatching is omitted in FIG. 280 for ease of viewing. Also, FIG. 280 is a schematic diagram for explaining the fourth embodiment, and does not mean that the actual product has the structure shown in FIG. In FIG. 280, the process from when the stop button 42a is pushed to when it returns is illustrated in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(d). In the drawing, the upper side is the player's side, and the lower side is the inside of the slot machine 10 . In the drawing, the upper side of the front door 18 is the side seen from the player.
Furthermore, the line along which the detection sensor 42e detects the moving piece 42d is indicated by a dotted line. It is assumed that the moment when the tip of the moving piece 42d contacts the dotted line is the moment when the detecting sensor 42e detects the moving piece 42d.

In FIG. 280(a), the stop button 42a is the operating body of the stop switch 42, and is operated (pushed inside the slot machine 10) when the player turns on the stop switch 42. In FIG. The player side of the stop button 42a is arranged to protrude from the front door 18 provided on the front surface of the housing of the slot machine 10 by several millimeters. When viewed from the front of the player side, this portion has a substantially cylindrical shape. In the unloaded state, the stop button 42a is urged in the F3 direction (outward direction, player direction) in FIG. A player-side end of 42 a protrudes from the front door 18 . In this state, the bottom surface of the stop button 42a (hereinafter referred to as "flange-shaped portion") and the front door 18 are in contact with each other.
On the other hand, the stopper 42b is provided inside the front door 18 (inside the housing), and contacts the stop button 42a when the stop button 42a is pushed, prohibiting further movement of the stop button 42a. is.

A movable piece 42d that can be moved integrally with the stop button 42a is provided on the bottom side of the stop button 42a in the drawing. Furthermore, a detection sensor 42e for detecting the movement of the moving piece 42d is arranged directly below the moving piece 42d. In the no-load state shown in (a) of the drawing, when the stop button 42a is biased toward the front door 18 by the biasing force of the coil spring 42c, the tip (lower end in the drawing) of the moving piece 42d is It is arranged at a position away from the detection sensor 42e. Therefore, in the state of (a) in the drawing, the detection sensor 42e does not detect the moving piece 42d, and is in the OFF state.

Next, as shown in (b) of the drawing, when the player stops the rotation of the reels 31, the player pushes the stop button 42a in the F4 direction. As a result, the stop button 42a moves downward in the drawing against the biasing force of the coil spring 42c. When the stop button 42a moves downward in the drawing, the moving piece 42d integrated with the stop button 42a also moves downward in the drawing. As a result, the tip of the moving piece 42d enters the detection sensor 42e. Then, when the tip of the moving piece 42d contacts the dotted line of the detection sensor 42e, the detection sensor 42e is turned on from the off state. FIG. 280(b) shows the position of each member at the moment when the detection sensor 42e is turned on from the off state. At the moment the detection sensor 42e is turned on, the flange-like portion of the stop button 42a is not yet in contact with the stopper 42b, and there is a gap between the stop button 42a and the stopper 42b.

When the stop button 42a is pushed further from the state of FIG. 280(b), the flange-like portion of the stop button 42a comes into contact with the stopper 42c as shown in FIG. 280(c). This position is the deepest part when the stop button 42a is pushed. In addition, in the state of FIG. 280(c), the state in which the tip of the moving piece 42d is detected by the detection sensor 42e is maintained, so the detection sensor 42e is in the ON state.

When the player releases the stop button 42a from the state of FIG. 280(c) (excluding the force in the F4 direction in FIG. 280(c)), the stop button 42a is pushed by the urging force F3 of the coil spring 42c. A force is applied to return to the initial position. As a result, the stop button 42a and the moving piece 42d integrated with the stop button 42a move upward in the figure. As a result, the tip of the moving piece 42d is no longer in contact with the dotted line of the detection sensor 42e, and the detection sensor 42e changes from the ON state to the OFF state (Fig. 280(d)).

FIG. 280(d) shows the arrangement of each member at the moment when the detection sensor 42e is turned off from the on state. In the state of FIG. 280(d), the stop button 42a has not returned to the final position. When the stop button 42a is further released from the state of FIG. 280(d), the stop button 42a comes into contact with the flange-shaped portion of the front door 18, and the stop button 42a stops at this position. This state is the state shown in FIG. 280(a), which is the no-load state of the stop button 42a.
The state of FIG. 280(b) showing the timing at which the detection sensor 42e is turned on from the off state and the state of FIG. 280(d) showing the timing at which the detection sensor 42e is turned off from the on state are generally Although they are the same, there is no particular problem even if there is a slight deviation.

281A and 281B are time charts showing the relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a and the excitation state of the motor 32, etc., in the fourth embodiment, FIG. show.
In FIG. 281(a), the stop button 42a is at the initial position (FIG. 280(a)) in the no-load state, and the moment when the stop button 42a starts to be pressed is S41. S42 is the time when the stop button 42a is pushed and the detection sensor 42e is turned on from off, that is, when the state shown in FIG. 280(b) is reached. Further, the stop button 42a is pushed from that position, and the time when the stop button 42a reaches the deepest portion (the state shown in FIG. 280(c)) is S43. The times S41, S42, and S43 described above depend on the pressing speed of the player and are not constant. If the stop button 42a is pushed slowly, the time from time S41 to S43 is lengthened, and if the stop button 42a is pushed quickly, the time from time S41 to S43 is shortened.

Next, at time S44, the depression of the stop button 42a is released. It is assumed that the stop button 42a is positioned at the deepest position at time S44.
When the stop button 42a is released from being pushed, the spring force of the coil spring 42c acts to return the stop button 42a to the initial position as described above. It should be noted that the operator of the stop button 42a does not touch the stop button 42a from the moment the pressing of the stop button 42a is released.
Then, let S45 be the time when the detection sensor 42e is turned off from on, that is, when the state shown in FIG. 280(d) is reached. Here, the time from time S44 to time S45 is assumed to be T11.

The time T11 is a variable determined by the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke (travel distance) of the stop button 42a from the deepest position to the position where the detection sensor 42e is turned off. In Example 1 of (a), the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke of the stop button 42a are designed so that the time T11 is 100 ms.

On the other hand, when the turn-on of the stop switch 42 (specifically, the turn-on of the detection sensor 42e) is detected (in the state of FIG. 280(b)), the reel control means 65 controls the reel corresponding to the stop switch The stop control of 31 is executed, and the reel 31 is stopped at a position corresponding to the result of the combination lottery by the combination lottery means (the result determined by the internal lottery means). The time from when the stop control of the reel 31 is started (after the detection sensor 42e is turned on) to when the reel 31 is stopped is, as described above, (except for the predetermined reel 31 during the MB game). It is set within 190 ms (when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is 21, the number of moving frames is within 5, and when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is 20, the number of moving frames is within 4). Therefore, the time from the start of deceleration of the reel 31 to the stop of the reel 31 is not constant because it varies depending on the winning combination lottery result and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated.

Further, after the reel 31 is moved to the predetermined position, the reel control means 65 causes the motor 32 to be in a state in which four phases are simultaneously excited (brakes are being applied) for a predetermined period of time (the four-phase excitation state described above). ).
Here, the motor 32 in this embodiment is a four-phase stepping motor, and during rotation of the motor 32 (reel 31), for example, 1-2 phase excitation is performed (note that it is not limited to 1-2 phase excitation). Absent). Therefore, even while the motor 32 is rotating, there is one excitation state. When stopping the rotation of the motor 32, the four-phase excitation state is set.
When performing a bound stop after moving the reel 31 to a predetermined position (when making it appear that the reel 31 is vibrating at the stop position), for example, the 3-phase excitation state should be set instead of the 4-phase excitation state. is also possible.

The moment the motor 32 stops rotating, there is a risk that the motor 32 and the reel 31 will go over the desired stop position due to the inertia of the motor 32 and the reel 31 during rotation. By setting the four-phase excitation state and generating static torque, it is prevented from moving from the stop position by inertia. When the motor 32 is in the four-phase excitation state, acceptance of the next operation of the stop switch 42 is not permitted. At the time of the first or second stop, acceptance of the operation of the next stop switch 42 is permitted only when the detection sensor 42e of the operated stop switch 42 changes from the ON state to the OFF state (returns to the state shown in FIG. 280(d). ), and when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 whose rotational drive is stopped ends.

The reason for such control is as follows.
In order to hold the reel 31 at the stop position, the motor 32 is controlled to be in a four-phase excitation state. It's getting bigger. Therefore, in order to reduce this load, it is possible to accept the operation of the next stop button 42a after the four-phase excitation state of one motor 32 is finished.

In example 1 of FIG. 281(a), when the winning combination lottery result by the winning combination lottery means (the result determined by the internal lottery means) is a predetermined result (for example, when the bell is won in the order of pushing), the four-phase excitation state is established. The excitation time T12 from start to finish is set to 90 interrupts (2.235×90=201.15 ms). Here, the reason why the excitation time T12 in the four-phase excitation state is set to "90 interrupt" when the winning combination lottery result is a predetermined result is that the excitation time T12 is always constant regardless of the winning combination lottery result. It means that it is not necessarily

Therefore, in example 1 of the fourth embodiment, it is set to be "T11<T12".
Here, when the stop control of the reel 31 is started from time S42, the reel 31 is stopped within 190 ms. As described above, when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is "21", the number of moving frames during the stop control is within 5 frames (minimum of 1 frame), or when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is "20" Since the number of moving frames during the stop control is within 4 frames (minimum 1 frame), the reel 31 stops within about "40" to "190" ms from time S42.
On the other hand, the time from when the detection sensor 42e is turned on from the off state until the stop button 42e reaches the deepest position and the pressing force of the stop button 42e is released (time from time S42 to time S44) is , "40" to "180" ms. Therefore, the time when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 is started and the time S44 when the depression of the stop button 42a is released are close to each other (almost at the same time).

Therefore, in Example 1, the four-phase excitation state is started at the timing (time S44) when the depression of the stop button 42a is released. It is designed so that the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 ends (time T12 elapses). Therefore, when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 ends, it can be set so that the next operation of the stop button 42a can be accepted.
In this way, if the detection sensor 42e is designed to be turned off before the end of the four-phase excitation state, it is possible to permit acceptance of the next operation of the stop button 42a when the four-phase excitation state is ended. . This allows the game to proceed at high speed.

On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 281(b), from the moment when the stop button 42a that has reached the deepest position is released (time S44) until the detection sensor 42e turns off (at time S45). This is an example in which the time T11 (until arrival) is set to 300 ms. Therefore, the return time of the stop button 42a is three times longer than in Example 1. As described above, the return time of the stop button 42a can be set (adjusted) by the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke of the stop button 42a.

On the other hand, in example 2, the time T12 from the start to the end of the four-phase excitation state is set to 45 interrupts (100.575 ms).
In Example 2, as in Example 1, the four-phase excitation state is started at the moment (time S44) when the stop button 42a that has reached the deepest position is released. It is designed so that the detection sensor 42e is turned off after the excitation state ends. Therefore, when the detection sensor 42e is turned off, it can be set so that the next operation of the stop button 42a can be accepted.

In this way, by designing the four-phase excitation state to end when the detection sensor 42e is turned off, acceptance of the next operation of the stop button 42a is permitted when the detection sensor 42e is turned off. can do. This allows the game to proceed at high speed.
As described above, both Example 1 and Example 2 have advantages in terms of control.
Examples 1 and 2 of FIG. 281 show examples in which the time T12 from the start to the end of the four-phase excitation state is different. However, for example, when the four-phase excitation time T12 is a constant value, if "T11<T12", the next stop button 42a can be accepted when the four-phase excitation state ends. Therefore, when the four-phase excitation time T12 is a constant value, the game can be completed at a higher speed in Example 1.

<Thirty-seventh embodiment>
The thirty-seventh embodiment relates to the relationship between power on/off and program activation.
FIG. 282 is a time chart showing an outline of control in the fifth embodiment.
In FIG. 282, (a) is a diagram showing the state when the power is cut off after the main program (the program of the main control board 50) is activated. It is assumed that the power is turned on at time S51 and then turned off at time S55.
When the power is turned on at time S51 (when the power switch 11 is turned on in FIG. 269), power supply starts to both the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80, and the main control board 50 and The voltage level on the sub-control board 80 gradually increases and reaches the supply level V0 (the level when the power is on). In FIG. 282, the voltage supply level V0, the power failure detection level V1, and the drive voltage limit V2 are the same as in FIG. 271 (33rd embodiment (A)).

S52 is the time when the voltage levels of the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 reach the supply level V0 after the power is turned on at time S51. Thereafter, at time S53 when time T22 has elapsed from time S52, the sub-program by the sub-control board 80 is started. Thereafter, the main program by the main control board 50 is activated from time S54 when time T23 (T23>T22) has elapsed from time S52. In this way, the sub-program is started first and then the main program is started when the main control board 50 transmits the first command after power-on to the sub-control board 80. , the sub-control board 80 side to be able to receive the command.

Next, when a power failure (the power switch 11 is turned off, a power failure, or the like) occurs at time S55, the voltage levels of the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 gradually decrease. Even if the voltage level drops, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 can execute power-off processing if the voltage is equal to or higher than the drive voltage limit V2.
Also, when a power failure occurs at time S55, the voltage reaches the power failure detection level V1 at time T0 (20 interrupt) as in FIG. 271, and the power failure is detected (time S56). Further, after detection of the power-off, as in FIG. 271, power-off processing is executed, for example, after one interrupt. It is assumed that the power-off process ends at time S57.
After that, when time S58 is reached, the voltage drops below the drive voltage limit V2, and the program (process) cannot be executed. Therefore, control is performed so that the power-off process is completed before reaching time S58.

When the main program starts at time S54, the main CPU 55 is set, the RWM 53 is checked, whether or not the previous power-off was normal, confirmation of the state of the setting key switch, etc. are performed, and then interrupt processing is started. . When the setting key switch is off, the power failure recovery process (initialization of a predetermined range of the RWM 53, etc.) is executed after starting the interrupt process. On the other hand, when the setting key switch is on, the setting change process is started after the interrupt process is activated.
Then, as shown in FIG. 282(a), when the power is turned off after starting the main program, if the setting key switch is off, the power shutdown processing is executed after the power shutdown recovery processing is completed. do. This allows the program to terminate normally.
On the other hand, if the power is turned off after the main program is started, and the setting key switch is on, the power is turned off without starting the setting change process. This is because a problem may occur if the setting change process is executed after a power failure occurs.

In order to execute the main program normally, the setting of the main CPU 55 and the check of the RWM 53 are always executed even when the power failure is detected at the same time as the start of the main program.
Furthermore, after starting the main program, even if the power supply is turned off after that, the program is always executed until the interrupt start. This is for detecting a power failure in interrupt processing. As in the thirty-third embodiment (A), for example, at the "N"th interruption, a voltage drop (power interruption detection level V1) at which it is determined that a power interruption has occurred is detected, and the next "N+1" game is detected. However, when the voltage drop is detected, power cut is detected at the "N+1" interrupt (determined as power cut). Then, power-off processing is executed from the "N+2" interrupt.

In the example of FIG. 282(a), the main program is activated at time S54, and the power is turned off at time S55. However, even if the power is cut off at the same time as the time S54 (startup of the main program), the power cutoff process can be completed before the voltage reaches the driving voltage limit V2.
In FIG. 282(a), the time T21 from when the power is turned on (time S51) until the voltage reaches the supply level V0 (time S52) is when the voltage goes low after the power is cut (time S55). is set to be shorter than the time T24.
Also, the time T23 (the time from when the voltage reaches the supply level V0 to when the main program starts up) is set to be shorter than the time T24.

FIG. 282(b) shows an example of when the power is cut off before the main control board 50 starts the main program. In the example of FIG. 282(b), the power is turned on at time S51 and turned off at time S59. Here, time S59 is earlier than time S54 in FIG. 282(a). That is, after the power supply (supply level V0) necessary for starting the main program is supplied, the power supply is interrupted before the predetermined time (time T23) elapses (before the time S54 is reached), and the voltage drops. For example. In such cases, the main program will not start. Therefore, after that, the voltage gradually decreases, and finally the power supply becomes Low level.
In the example of FIG. 282(b), when the power is turned on again, it can be started normally.
Also, although not shown in FIG. 282, it is conceivable that the power failure occurs immediately after the subprogram is activated (after time S53) and before time S54 (before the main program is activated). be done.
When the power is turned off at the above timing, the subprogram executes the power-off processing of the subprogram. Then, it is possible to end the power-off processing of the subprogram before the voltage supplied to the sub-control board 80 reaches the driving voltage limit V2.
Further, since the power-off at the above timing is the power-off before the start of the main program, the main program is not started as described above.

Although the thirty-third to thirty-seventh embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In this embodiment, the passage sensor 43a is provided. This is because the passage sensor 43a is effective as an anti-fraud countermeasure as well as increasing the accuracy of medal insertion determination. However, the path sensor 43a may not be provided, and only a pair of insertion sensors 44a and 44b may be provided.

(2) In FIG. 270, the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are configured to detect the medals M moving substantially horizontally, but this is not the only option. For example, when the medal M is dropped substantially vertically downward, the insertion sensors 44a and 44b may detect the medal M. As shown in FIG.
(3) In FIG. 270, the blocker 45 is arranged on the lower surface side of the medal passage, but it is not limited to this. Any mechanism may be used as long as it has a function of ejecting the medal M out of the medal passage before the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a.
Also, as shown in FIG. 270, the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are shown to detect a slightly higher position than the central position of the medal M when viewed from the front, but the actual product may be configured in this manner. does not mean The insertion sensors 44a and 44b may be arranged in any manner as long as they are arranged so as to reliably detect the passing medals M.

(4) In FIG. 271, the time T2 is the time from the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2 to the moment when the medal M is positioned at M4, but it is not limited to this. For example, the medal M is positioned at M1 in FIG. 270, and the time from the moment the medal M is released until it reaches M4 is T2, and "T2>T1" may be set. Alternatively, the time required for the medal M to reach M4 from any predetermined position between M1 and M2 may be T2, and "T2>T1" may be set.

(5) In the thirty-third embodiment (A), when the power is turned off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the power is turned off until the medal M reaches M4. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the power cut-off process may be executed until the medal M reaches M3. That is, in this case, the medal M is not detected by the insertion sensor 44a due to the power-off processing.
Alternatively, when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the power cut-off process may be executed before the medal M reaches the insertion sensor 44b. In this case, the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a, but is not detected by the insertion sensor 44b, and the power-off process is executed.

(6) Furthermore, in the thirty-third embodiment (A), a power failure occurs at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, and the time T1 until the power failure is detected and the power failure process (blocker off) is executed. is set shorter than the time required for the medal M to reach the position where the blocker 45 is installed from the position of M2 (this time is referred to as "T2'"). With this setting, when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, when the medal M reaches the position of the blocker 45 from the position of M2, the blocker 45 is already turned off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the medal from passing through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.
In the above description, the position of the medal M2 may be the moment the hand is released at the position of M1, or a predetermined position between M1 and M2.

(7) As shown in FIG. 271, in the first embodiment (A), the power-off processing (blocker off) is executed in the interrupt processing subsequent to the interrupt processing in which the power-off is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set so that the power-off processing (blocker off) is executed after, for example, "2" to "5" interrupt processing counting from the interrupt processing that detected the power-off. Alternatively, power-off processing (blocker off) may be executed in interrupt processing that detects power-off.
(8) In the thirty-third embodiment (A) of FIG. 271, the time T0 for the voltage to reach the sustain level V1 from the supply level V0 when power failure occurs is set to 20 interrupts, but it is limited to this. Various settings can be made depending on the performance of the power supply.

(9) In the thirty-third embodiment (C) of FIG. 275, the payout sensors 37a and 37b detect the movable piece 39a when the medals M are paid out by the medal payout device. However, not limited to this, the payout sensors 37a and 37b may detect the medals M themselves to be paid out. For example, the payout sensors 37a and 37 may be arranged like the insertion sensors 44a and 44b shown in FIG. 272 to detect the passing of the medals M (to be paid out).

Further, when the payout sensors 37a and 37b are arranged in such a manner, when the medal M passes through the payout sensors 37a and 37b,
Payout sensor 37a ON, payout sensor 37b OFF (time S31')
Payout sensor 37a ON, payout sensor 37b ON (time S32')
Payout sensor 37a off, payout sensor 37b on (time S33')
Payout sensor 37a off, payout sensor 37b off (time S34')
follow the course of
Then, the time from time S31' to time S34' is set to be shorter than time T1 (the time from occurrence of power failure to execution of power failure processing).

(10) In the thirty-fourth embodiment, the gate mark 57b is formed so that the projection 57d and the depression 57c are on the outside. is also possible. The gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 is also the same. In this case, if the gate mark 57b is shaped as shown in FIG. On the other hand, if the shape shown in FIG.

(11) In the thirty-fourth embodiment, as an example of the board case 16, an example in which the main control board 50 is housed inside has been given. However, it is possible to apply the second embodiment not only to the main control board 50 but also to other control boards for which it is desired to prevent fraud, such as the board case of the sub-control board 80 . As shown in FIG. 269, the sub-control board 80 also includes the RWM 83, the ROM 54, the sub-CPU 85, and the like. For example, the CPU 85 is not arranged, and the RWM 83 and ROM 54 are also not arranged. Similarly, the model number display area of the sub-control board 80 should not overlap in the vertical direction (directly below) the trace of the gate.

(12) In the thirty-fifth embodiment, the pressing order effect during AT, the display of the operated stop switch 42 (stopped reel 31), and the remaining number of games during AT are given as examples. The third embodiment can be applied even in the case of displaying the number of obtained coins in a game (BB game, etc.) and the remaining number of obtainable coins.
For example, the acquired number at the start of the "N" game is "200", the acquired number at the start of the "N+1" game is "209", and the acquired number at the start of the "N+2" game is "218" sheets. In addition, the main control board 50 is assumed to transmit a command regarding the winning number to the sub control board 80 at the start of each game.
Then, as in the example shown in FIG. 279, it is assumed that disconnection occurs in the middle of the "N"th game, and communication is restored in the middle of the "N+1"th game.

In this case, the sub-control board 80 displays "200" as the winning number in the "N" game. Also, at the start of the "N+1" game, the command regarding the number of winning cards is not received (due to disconnection), so the display of the number of winning cards of "200" is maintained even in the "N+1" game. Next, when the sub-control board 80 receives a command regarding the number of wins at the start of the "N+2" game, it updates the display to the number of wins of "218" based on the command.

(13) FIG. 279 of the thirty-fifth embodiment shows an example in which the image display is returned to normal at the start of the "N+2" game. However, without being limited to this, the image display may be returned to normal after the “N+1” game is completely stopped or when a betting operation is performed after that. Alternatively, it is also possible to restore the image display to normal at a predetermined timing based on a command sent to the sub-control board 80 during or after full stop.

(14) In the thirty-fifth embodiment, for example, in the middle of the disconnected "N+1" game, there is a case where a lottery that adds (additional) the number of obtainable sheets during AT or the number of games played may be won. In this case, since the "N+1" game is disconnected, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command based on winning the additional lottery. Therefore, in this case, for example, at the start of the "N+2" game, the main control board 50 transmits a command indicating the result after the addition (addition) lottery, and at the start of the "N+2" game, the sub control board 80 Displaying game information (the number of obtainable numbers and the number of games played) after addition.

(15) In the thirty-fifth embodiment (FIG. 279), for example, when disconnection occurs after the right first stop of the "N" game, and communication is restored before the first stop switch 42 of the "N+1" game is operated. can be considered. Then, in the "N+1" game, it is assumed that the player makes the right first stop. In this case, when the sub-control board 80 receives the right first stop command at the "N+1" game, it means that it has received the stop command for the stop switch 42 that has already been operated, so it performs a pushing order failure presentation. Output. Then, at the time of the betting operation after the "N+1" game is completely stopped or at the start of the "N+2" game, the image display can be restored to the normal one.

(16) In the thirty-fifth embodiment (FIG. 279), in the case where the obtained number is displayed as an image during AT, the following method can be given as an example of the update processing of the obtained number of images before and after disconnection.
The main control board 50 transmits a command indicating the number of acquired coins to the sub control board 80 when there is a payout process. Here, when disconnection occurs in the middle of the "N" game, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the winning number of the "N" game. It is assumed that the sub-control board 80 displays "100" as the winning number during the AT immediately before the disconnection of the "N" game. In addition, the "N" game eye and the "N+1" game eye in AT are assumed to win 10 cards.
In this case, the number of coins acquired during the AT at the end of the "N"th game should originally be "110", but remains "100" (because the wire is broken). Then, it is assumed that the communication is restored in the middle of the "N+1" game. As a result, the sub-control board 80 can restore the winning number during the AT to the normal value based on the winning number command received during the payout process for the "N+1" game. Here, the value may be returned to the normal value at the time of the payout process of the "N+1" game, or may be returned to the normal value at the start of the "N+2" game as in the example of FIG. Further, it may be updated to "110" at the time of payout processing for the "N+1" game, and updated to "120" at the start of the "N+2" game.

(17) In the present embodiment, the slot machine 10 is illustrated as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to pachinko gaming machines, for example. In a pachinko machine, the starting gate (the winning gate that starts the pattern variation by the symbol variation display device and triggers the acquisition of random numbers for the jackpot lottery), the electronic chew winning gate (when the game ball wins, the next winning To make it easier, there is a prize opening that opens for a certain period of time and then closes.In addition, the electric chew is not limited to a tulip shape. be provided. The first embodiment (B) can be applied to these winning slots.

Specifically, for example, at the starting port, there are a winning sensor (a sensor that first detects a game ball that has entered the starting port) and an ejection sensor (a sensor that detects a game ball after it has been detected by the winning sensor). is provided. In addition, the attacker is provided with a V-winning sensor (a sensor that detects the game ball that has won the attacker's prize first) and an ejection sensor (a sensor that detects the game ball after being detected by the V-winning sensor). .
For example, in the case of the starting port, when power is cut off at the moment a game ball is detected by the winning sensor, the game ball is set to be detected by the ejection sensor before the power cut-off process is executed. As a result, even if the power supply is interrupted at the moment the game ball is detected by the winning sensor, the prize balls can be counted correctly. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the prize balls from not being paid out even though the game balls have entered the prize winning opening. The same applies to the attacker's V winning sensor and discharge sensor.

(18) In the present embodiment, the slot machine 10 is taken as an example of a game machine. (so-called "pachi-slot gaming machines"), but can also be applied to, for example, casino machines and sealed gaming machines (medal-less gaming machines) that do not use medals for games as game media.

Here, the sealed game machine (medal-less game machine) can eliminate the medal payout device (unit including hopper 35, hopper motor 36, and payout sensor 37) in FIG. 269, for example. Also, the medal slot 43 and the medal selector can be eliminated. Then, all the electronic medals (electronic game media) granted by winning a winning combination are stored in the credit amount display LED 76 . In this case, it is conceivable that the credit amount display LED 76 is composed of, for example, five digits (up to "99,999" electronic medals can be stored).
Except for the first embodiment, the present invention can be applied to such a casino machine or enclosed-type game machine (medal-less game machine).

<38th embodiment>
Next, the thirty-eighth embodiment will be described. The thirty-eighth embodiment relates to a trial shooting test of the slot machine 10. FIG.
In the following description of the thirty-eighth embodiment, "at the time of game start" corresponds to the process at the time of game start in step S2851 in FIG. 294(a) described later. Therefore, "at the start of the game" refers to the state before the operation of the start switch 41 or the start of rotation of the reels 31. FIG.
Also, "at the end of the game" corresponds to the process at the end of the game in step S2856 in FIG. 294(a) described later.

When the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment is a reel-type game machine installed in a No. 4 business office subject to the "Law Concerning Regulation of Entertainment Business, etc. and Optimization of Business, etc.", Security Communication Association It must conform to the type test conducted by (Hotsukyo).
In the model test, the slot machine 10 and the test-firing test machine are connected, signals are transmitted and received between the slot machine 10 and the test-firing test machine, and it is determined whether or not they are compatible.
FIG. 283 is a diagram showing an example of electrical connection between the slot machine 10 and the test firing tester 300 in the model test. The slot machine 10 and the test-firing tester 300 are connected via interface boards 401 and 402 so that signals can be transmitted and received.

Signals output from the slot machine 10 (however, a "startable lamp signal" described later is output from the interface board 401) to the test firing tester 300 are mainly (as described in the thirty-eighth embodiment) as follows. signals. Of course, the signal is not limited to these signals.
(1) Input Request Lamp Signal The input request lamp corresponds to the input display LED 79e (insert lamp) in FIG. 142 (22nd embodiment).
The input request lamp signal is a signal indicating whether or not medals can be inserted, and is always turned on while medals can be inserted (including during insertion). Then, when the start switch 41 is operated (it is detected that a "reel start switch signal", which will be described later, is turned on), it becomes impossible to insert medals, or the number of bets reaches the maximum specified number "3". , and when the number of credits reaches the maximum stored number of "50" and it becomes impossible to insert medals, it is turned off.
It should be noted that the input request lamp signal is turned off during the replay operation. Also, even during the replay operation, when the number of credits is not the upper limit, medals can be inserted (the blocker 45 permits the insertion of medals), and the insertion display LED 79d lights up. .

(2) Startable Lamp Signal The startable lamp corresponds to the game start display LED 79d in FIG. 142 (22nd embodiment).
The start-ready lamp signal means that the game can be started when the start switch 41 is operated (reel 31 (in FIG. 1, a symbol display device (also referred to as a “rotating device”)) is activated. It is a signal indicating whether or not the start switch 41 is operated, and is turned on when the game can be started (rotation of the reels 31 (operation of the symbol display device) is possible). , is turned off when it detects that a reel start switch signal (a signal indicating the operation of the start switch 41), which will be described later, is turned on.
In the trial firing test of this example, the startable lamp signal is generated and output by the interface board 401 instead of by the slot machine 10 for the sake of convenience. However, it is of course possible to output from the slot machine 10 without being limited to this.
When the number of bets (predetermined number) enabling the game to be started has been reached, the startable lamp signal is turned on.
Further, when the replay is activated (after the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed in the previous game), as described above, the entry request lamp signal is turned off, but the startable lamp signal is turned on.

(3) Re-gaming state identification signal The re-gaming state identification signal is a signal for identifying the fluctuation state when the winning (lottery) probability of replay (re-play role) has a performance that fluctuates other than "0". , which is a signal output for each gaming state (RT) with a different probability of winning a replay. Incidentally, when the winning probability of replay does not change, the replay state identification signal outputs "00 (H)" (all off state).
The re-gaming state identification signal consists of 1-byte data, and bit 0 is assigned to the re-gaming state identification signal 1, bit 1 to the re-gaming state identification signal 2, . Therefore, 255 kinds of signals from "00(H)" to "FF(H)" can be transmitted as the replay state identification signal.

(4) Condition device signal As described in the first embodiment (specification "0011"), the condition device includes the "accessory condition device" and the "win and replay condition device".
Therefore, the conditional device signal is a signal indicating the operating status (winning status) of the accessory conditional device or the winning and replay conditional device, and is a signal output according to the operating status (winning status) of the conditional device. . When the conditional device is not operating, the conditional device signal outputs "00 (H)" (all off).

The output method of the condition device signal includes the following three types.
1. Method 1
This method divides the conditional device signal into upper 4 bits and lower 4 bits. The lower 4 bits are assigned to the winning and replay condition device number, and the upper 4 bits are assigned to the accessory condition device number. As a result, 15 types (excluding "0") of accessory condition device signals and 15 types (excluding "0") of condition device signals as winning and replay condition device signals can be output.
2. Method 2
This is a system in which the condition device signal is time-divided and output once. By combining 6 bits consisting of bits 0 to 5, the winning and replay condition device number and the accessory condition device number are output at different timings. Bit 6 (D6 bit) is turned on when outputting the win and replay condition device signal. Bit 7 (D7 bit: most significant bit) is turned on when outputting a character condition device signal. By combining 6 bits, it is possible to output 63 types (excluding "0") as accessory condition device numbers and 63 types (excluding "0") as winning and replay condition device signals.
In the following description, "method 2" refers to this method.
3. Method 3
This is a method in which the output method of method 2 is partially improved. Specifically, in method 2, there were 63 types (excluding "0") as the accessory condition device number and 63 types (excluding "0") as the winning and replay condition device number, but the accessory condition device signal It is possible to output 4095 types (excluding "0") as condition device signals (excluding "0") and 4095 types (excluding "0") as winning and replay condition device signals.
Here, an example will be described in which the winning and replay condition device number is "127 (D)" and the role condition device number is "1 (D)" by the combination lottery means 61. FIG. First, "127(D)" is expressed in binary as "01111111(B)", and "1(D)" in binary is expressed as "00000001(B)".
Also, as in method 2, bit 6 of the condition device signal is turned on when outputting the winning and replay condition device signal, and bit 7 (most significant bit) of the condition device signal outputs the accessory condition device signal. turn it on when
Therefore, the conditional device signal when outputting the lower 6 bits of the accessory conditional device number is "10000001 (B)". Also, the condition device signal when outputting the lower 6 bits of the winning and replay condition number is "01111111 (B)".
Furthermore, the condition device signal when outputting the upper 2 bits (upper 6 bits) of the accessory condition device is "10000000 (B)". Furthermore, the condition device signal when outputting the upper 2 bits (upper 6 bits) of the winning and replay condition device is "01000001 (B)".
In the following description, "method 3" refers to this method.

(5) Advantageous interval signal This signal indicates whether or not the game is in the advantageous interval. It turns on (indicating that the game is in the advantageous interval) at the start of the advantageous interval, and ends the advantageous interval. Sometimes it turns off (indicating that the game is not in the advantageous section). When the advantageous section continues in a plurality of games, it remains on during the game (it does not turn off once between games).
It should be noted that, for example, when winning the advantageous section in the role lottery in the "N" game, the signal during the advantageous section remains OFF during the "N" game, and at the start of the "N+1" game. turn on.

(6) Replay signal This signal indicates whether or not a replay is in operation (a replay was won in the previous game and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay was stopped and displayed). It is turned on (indicating that the game is being replayed) at the start of the game to operate, and is turned off (indicating that the game is not being replayed) at the end of the game when the operation of the replay is completed.
It should be noted that, when the replay continues for a plurality of games, it remains on during the game (it does not turn off once between games).

(7) Accessory continuous actuating device signal This signal indicates whether or not the accessory continuous actuating device is in operation. It is turned off (indicating that the accessory continuous operation device is not operating) at the end of the game when the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is completed.
As described in the first embodiment (description "0012"), the role product continuous operating device includes the first type role product continuous operating device (1BB) related to the first type special role product, and the second type special A second type role product continuous operation device (2BB) related to the role product can be mentioned.
Therefore, the role product continuous operating device signal of the present embodiment includes the role product continuous operating device signal for the first class special role and the role product continuous operating device signal for the second special role. be done.

(8) Signal in Accessory As the accessory, as shown in the specification "0012", there are a first class special role (RB) and a second class special role (CB). Also, although not provided in the first embodiment, another role item includes a normal role item (SB).
The during-character-thing signal is a signal indicating whether or not these character-things are in operation. Specifically, the first class special function signal indicating that the first class special function (RB) is in operation, the second class special function signal indicating that the second class special function (CB) is in operation, the normal This is a normal character signal indicating that the character (SB) is in operation.
Each of these signals is turned on (indicating that the role is operating) at the start of the game when the action of the role starts, and turned off (indicating that the role is activated) at the end of the game when the action of the role ends. ).

(9) Phase Signal The phase signal is a signal indicating the phase of the motor (stepping motor) 32 associated with the left, middle and right reels 31, and is output while the motor 32 is being driven.
(10) Signals necessary for generating a symbol stop signal and stop symbol signals In this embodiment, the slot machine 10 outputs signals necessary for generating a symbol stop signal to the interface board 402, and the interface board 402 Then, a stop symbol signal or the like is output to the test-firing tester 300 .
The stop symbol signal indicates the pressing order (stopping order) and stop operation of the reels 31 in which the player can obtain the maximum payout rate in a gaming machine having a performance in which the winning probability of replay fluctuates other than "0". This is a signal for outputting the position, etc., at which the

On the other hand, the signals output from the test-firing tester 300 to the slot machine 10 mainly include the following signals (as described in the thirty-eighth embodiment). Of course, the signal is not limited to these signals.
In the trial shooting test, the operator does not operate the slot machine 10, and the signal corresponding to the player's operation, which is output from the trial shooting test machine 300, specifically, the insertion switch signal corresponding to the insertion of medals. , the reel start switch signal corresponding to the operation of the start switch 41, and the reel stop switch signal corresponding to the operation of the stop switch 42, the slot machine 10 inserts medals, operates the start switch 41, and operates the stop switch 42, respectively. Executes the processing corresponding to the operation of .

The closing switch signal, reel start switch signal, and reel stop switch signal are as follows.
(1) Insertion switch signal This is a signal indicating insertion of medals, and a 1-pulse signal is output to the slot machine 10 when one medal is inserted.
When the slot machine 10 receives one pulse of the insertion switch signal, it performs the same processing as when one medal is inserted.
In the present embodiment, medals are used as game media, but when the game media are game balls, the input switch signal is a signal indicating the insertion of game balls, and is a signal of one pulse for each game ball. to output

(2) Reel Start Switch Signal This is a signal for starting rotation of the reel 31 (activating the motor 32 and the symbol display device) and is output when the start ready lamp signal is on.
When the slot machine 10 receives the reel start switch signal, it performs the same processing as when the start switch 41 is operated.

(3) Reel stop switch signal This is a signal for stopping the rotation of the reel 31 (stopping the operation of the motor 32 and the symbol display device), and is output when the reel stop possible lamp signal is on.
In the above description, the description of the "reel stop possible ramp signal" is omitted, but the reel stop possible ramp signal is one of the signals output from the slot machine 10 to the test-firing tester 300. This signal indicates that the reel 31 is ready to be stopped, and is turned on when the reel 31 is ready to be stopped, and turned off when the reel stop switch signal is turned on.
In addition to the above, signals output from the test-firing tester 300 to the slot machine 10 include a payout switch signal, stop cancel switch signal, etc., but the description is omitted in this embodiment.

284 and 285 are diagrams showing data and the like stored in the RWM 53, which will be explained in the thirty-eighth embodiment. FIG. 256 is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 256 of the embodiment; The data shown in FIGS. 284 and 285 include data common to the above-described embodiment, but will be described again in this embodiment.

284 and 285, in FIG. 285, the minimum game time (_TM2_GAME) at address "F018(H)", the game standby display time (_TM2_BACK_OFF) at address "F01A(H)", and the The advantageous section clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR) and the difference number counter (_CT_MY) at address "F025(H)" are 2-byte storage areas. In FIGS. 284 and 285, storage areas other than the above are 1-byte storage areas.

In the thirty-eighth embodiment, as in the case of the twenty-second embodiment shown in FIG. 142, the state display LEDs 79 include a 1-bet display LED 79a, a 2-bet display LED 79b, a 3-bet display LED 79c, a game start display LED 79d, and an insert display LED 79e. , and a replay indication LED 79f.

Here, the game start display LED 79d is an LED that turns on (lights up) when the number of bets is a specified number (the number of bets that can be played) (step S2887 in FIG. 296 to be described later), and LED display data (to be described later). _PT_STS_LED) lights up when the D3 bit is on.
Then, when the start switch 41 is operated (when it is detected that the reel start switch signal is turned on), it turns off (lights out) (step S2892 in FIG. 297).

The throw-in display LED 79e is an LED that turns on (lights up) when medals can be put in (step S2868 in FIG. 295), and lights up when the D4 bit of the LED display data (_PT_STS_LED) is on.
Then, when the start switch 41 is operated (when it is detected that the reel start switch signal is on), it turns off (lights out) (step S2894 in FIG. 297).
It should be noted that during the replay operation, the input request lamp signal is not output even if the input display LED 79e is lit.

The replay display LED 79f is an LED that is turned on (lights up) in the replay operation state.
In this embodiment, the description of the turn-on/off processing of the replay display LED 79f is omitted in the flow chart, but the game start set processing of FIG. In step S2725, the replay display LED 79f is turned on (lit) when it is determined that the replay symbol is displayed in step S2725.
Further, when the replay operation is completed, the replay display LED 79f is turned off in step S2825 in the game end check process of FIG. 252 (30th embodiment) (corresponding to the game end process of FIG. 298 in the 38th embodiment). (turn off).

The data of the RWM 53 shown in FIGS. 284 and 285 are all storage areas within the used area as shown in the twentieth embodiment.
First, the LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP) at the address "F011(H)" is a storage area for storing data specifying the digit (LED) to be lit during the interrupt process.
The LED display counter of the thirty-eighth embodiment is the same as that shown in FIG. 148 of the twenty-second embodiment, and is a counter that makes one round with five interrupts. As shown in FIG. 148A, the relationship between the value of the LED display counter and the lighting timing of the LED is as follows (description of the management information display LED 74 and the set value display LED 73 is omitted. ).
Therefore, when the LED display counter reaches "00010000 (B)", the lighting timing of the status display LED 79 is reached.

00010000 (B): Status display LED 79 (game start display LED 79d, insertion display LED 79e, replay display LED 79f)
↓
00001000 (B): Lower digits of acquisition number display LED 78 and advantageous section display LED 77
↓
00000100 (B): Higher digits of acquisition number display LED 78 ↓
00000010 (B): Lower digit of stored number display LED 76 ↓
00000001 (B): Upper digits of stored number display LED 76 ↓
00000000 (B) → "00010000 (B)" by initialization
↓
00001000 (B) (back to top)

The LED display data (_PT_STS_LED) at the address "F012(H)" stores ON/OFF of the game start display LED 79d (D3), the insertion display LED 79e (D4), and the replay display LED 79f (D5) among the status display LEDs 79. This is a storage area for For example, in a state in which medals can be inserted before the start of a game, the D4 bit of the LED display data is "1", and the insertion display LED 79e can be lit. In this case, in the interruption process when the LED display counter reaches "00010000 (B)", the lighting process of the input display LED 79e is executed.

Similarly, when the game can be started, the D3 bit of the LED display data becomes "1", and the game start display LED 79d can be turned on. In this case, in the interruption process when the LED display counter reaches "00010000 (B)", the lighting process of the game start display LED 79d is executed.
Further, similarly, when the replay operation state is entered (the replay operation symbol is stopped and displayed), the D5 bit of the LED display data becomes "1", and the replay display LED 79f becomes ready to light. In this case, the lighting process of the replay display LED 79f is executed in the interrupt process when the LED display counter reaches "00010000(B)".

A replay operation state flag (_FL_REPLAY) at address "F013(H)" is a storage area for storing that replay is in operation. When the replay symbol combination is stopped and displayed at the end of the game, the replay operation state flag is turned on ("1"). Further, when the replay operation state flag is ON, a replay is performed, and the regame operation state flag is turned OFF ("0") at the end of the relevant game. In the present embodiment, "1" is stored when the replay operation state flag is ON. You can remember.
The operating state flag (_FL_ACTION) at the address "F014(H)" is a storage area for storing the operating state flags of the roles, and each role is assigned as shown in FIG. It can be determined whether or not the character is in operation by checking whether any bit corresponding to the character is "1". The operating state flag is updated in the game end processing (FIG. 298) in this embodiment.

The symbol combination display flag (_FL_WIN) at the address "F015 (H)" is a storage area for storing the symbol combinations that are stopped and displayed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2BB operating symbols, CB operating symbols, 1BB operating symbols, RB operating symbols, SB operating symbols, and replay operating symbols are assigned respectively. That is, the bit of the role product operating symbol of the symbol combination display flag is assigned to the same bit as the bit of the role assigned to the operating state flag.
For example, when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is stopped on the active line, the D2 bit is set to "1". The symbol combination display flag is updated when all the reels 31 are stopped and display determination is performed.
Also, the symbol combination display flag is cleared at the start of the next game, for example.

In FIG. 285, the conditional device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT) at address "F016 (H)", the waiting time for reel stop acceptance (_TM1_STOP) at address "F017 (H)", and the minimum game time (_TM2_GAME at address "F018 (H)" ), and the game standby display time (_TM2_BACK_OFF) at the address "F01A(H)" is a memory area for storing a timer value among the memory areas of the RWM 53 of the thirty-eighth embodiment.

The storage area for storing timer values in the thirty-eighth embodiment has a 1-byte timer storage area and a 2-byte timer storage area. The addresses of the multiple 1-byte timer storage areas are arranged consecutively. Similarly, the addresses of the multiple 2-byte timer storage areas are arranged consecutively. Furthermore, a 2-byte timer storage area is arranged contiguously with the 1-byte timer storage area. Furthermore, the 2-byte timer storage area has a 1-byte storage area for storing upper digits and a 1-byte storage area for storing lower digits, and the addresses of these two 1-byte storage areas are consecutive. there is

As described above, a 2-byte timer storage area is never arranged between two 1-byte timer storage areas. Similarly, no 1-byte timer storage area is placed between two 2-byte timer storage areas.
In the 2-byte timer storage area in the thirty-eighth embodiment, the smaller address value indicates the address of the lower digits, and the address obtained by adding "1" to the address value of the lower digits indicates the address of the upper digits. . For example, in FIG. 285, of the 2-byte timer storage area for the minimum game time (_TM2_GAME), the address "F018(H)" is the storage area for the lower digits, and the address "F019(H)" is the storage area for the upper digits. be.
In the thirty-eighth embodiment, two 1-byte timer storage areas and two 2-byte timer storage areas are exemplified for simplification of explanation, but the timer storage areas are limited to these. Instead, actually more timer storage areas are provided.

From the above, as shown in FIG. 285, the addresses of the storage area for storing the timer value are consecutively arranged from "F016(H)" to "F01B(H)". ing. Further, in the thirty-eighth embodiment, the leading address "F016(H)" is the reference address.
In the thirty-eighth embodiment, the reference address starts from the 1-byte timer storage area, and after two 1-byte timer storage areas are arranged consecutively, two 2-byte timer storage areas are arranged consecutively. there is Note that the reference address may start with the 2-byte timer storage area, followed by the 1-byte timer storage area.
All timer values shown in FIG. 285 are decremented (updated) in timer measurement of interrupt processing (step S2952 in FIG. 294(b)), which will be described later. That is, "1" is subtracted for each interrupt.

However, in FIG. 294(b), which will be described later, even when interrupt processing is executed, when a power failure is detected in step S2951, the timer measurement in step S2952 is not performed. is not always decremented (updated) by "1". Therefore, in this specification, each timer value shown in FIG. ” does not mean that
Further, instead of executing the timer measurement in step S2952 for each interrupt process, the timer measurement in step S2952 may be executed once when there are multiple interrupts. For example, when there are five interrupt processes, the timer measurement in step S2952 is executed once. In other words, the timer measurement in step S2952 only needs to be configured to be executed in each predetermined cycle, and by configuring in this way, it is possible to update each timer value in each predetermined cycle. Become.
As described above, by continuously arranging storage areas for storing timer values, it is possible to successively update all timer values in a simple manner by timer measurement (FIG. 301), which will be described later.

Further, in the MPU (one-chip microprocessor) instruction of this embodiment, subtraction processing can be performed with one instruction even with a 2-byte timer. The subtraction process of the 2-byte timer is programmed as follows.
"0100 (H)" → "1" subtraction → "00FF (H)"
"0001 (H)" → "1" subtraction → "0000 (H)"
"0000 (H)" → "1" subtraction → "0000 (H)"
In addition, the 1-byte timer is also
"10 (H)" → "1" subtraction → "0F (H)"
"01 (H)" → "1" subtraction → "00 (H)"
"00 (H)" → "1" subtraction → "00 (H)"
becomes.

In other words, when the subtraction process causes (has) a carry-down, it becomes "0000 (H)" (for 2 bytes) or "00 (H)" (for 1 byte).
Here, it is determined whether the value stored at the address to be subtracted is "0000(H)" or "00(H)". It is conceivable that the program does not execute the subtraction process when the value is "0000 (H)" or "00 (H)", but executes the subtraction process when the value is other than "0000 (H)" or "00 (H)". In this case, it is necessary to determine whether or not it is "0000(H)" or "00(H)" and, depending on the determination result, determine whether or not to execute subtraction processing. .
in particular,
a) determining whether the value before subtraction is "0";
b) Subtract "1" when determining that the value before subtraction is not "0";
c) If it is determined that the value before subtraction is "0", the process of subtracting "1" is not executed. However, this subtraction method increases the number of processing steps.

Furthermore,
a) subtract '1';
b) after the subtraction, determine whether the carry flag is "1";
c) When the carry flag is "1", there is a method of adding the value of the carry flag to the value after subtraction, but even this subtraction method increases the number of processing steps.
On the other hand, in the subtraction method of the thirty-eighth embodiment, even if "1" is subtracted from "0", no digits are shrunk and "0" is maintained. In this way, no matter what the value before subtraction is, it is one instruction (one step) that only subtracts "1". is unnecessary, and the process of adding the value of the carry flag after the subtraction is also unnecessary. By updating the count value in this way, the time required for updating the count value can be greatly shortened, and the program capacity can be simplified. The process of subtracting "1" from the 1-byte count value as described above is called "special 1-byte subtraction processing", and the process of subtracting "1" from the 2-byte count value is called "special 2-byte subtraction processing". can be called. In the following description, this may be referred to as "special 1-byte subtraction processing" and "special 2-byte subtraction processing" as appropriate.

The conditional device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT) at the address "F016 (H)" is a storage area for storing the timer value for measuring the output time of the conditional device signal. In step S2899), a predetermined initial value is stored, and thereafter decremented by "1" at each predetermined cycle (interrupt processing). Then, in the test signal management process (FIG. 304) during the interrupt process, the conditional device signal corresponding to the conditional device output time is output as the test signal.
In the following embodiments, the output of the condition device signal is exemplified by a method of time-divisionally outputting once (FIG. 288) and a method of time-divisionally outputting twice (FIG. 289).
Then, in the method (method 2) of time-sharing and outputting once, the initial value "30 (D)" is set as the condition device output time. In addition, in the method (method 3) of time-sharing and outputting twice, the initial value "55 (D)" is set as the condition device output time.

The reel stop acceptance waiting time (_TM1_STOP) of the address "F017 (H)" is for storing a timer value for measuring the waiting time after the stop switch 42 is operated until the next stop switch 42 is operated. storage area. A timer value "7 (D)" is set when the first or second stop switch 42 is operated, and "1" is subtracted at each predetermined cycle (interrupt processing).
When the timer value is not "0", the operation of the next stop switch 42 is not accepted (reel stop control is not performed even if the stop switch 42 is operated), and after the timer value becomes "0" accepts the operation of the next stop switch 42 (when the stop switch 42 is operated, reel stop control is performed).

The minimum game time (_TM2_GAME) at addresses "F018(H)" and "F019(H)" is a storage area for storing a timer that monitors the minimum game time for one game, and has an initial value of "1836 (D )” is set and is decremented by “1” at each predetermined cycle (interrupt processing). The minimum playing time in this embodiment is set to "4.1 seconds" (2.235ms×1836≈4100ms). Then, on the condition that "4.1" seconds have elapsed since the start of rotation of the reels 31 in the previous game, the rotation of the reels 31 in the current game is started. As a result, the time required for one game will not fall below "4.1" seconds.

The game standby display start time (_TM2_BACK_OFF) of addresses "F01A(H)" and "F01B(H)" is a storage area for storing a timer value for measuring the standby time until game standby display is performed. At the start of the game, an initial value of "26846 (D)" is set in order to count the number of interrupts "26846 (D)" (≈60000 ms, that is, approximately 60 seconds (1 minute)). Although this process is omitted in the flowchart of the thirty-eighth embodiment, "26846 (D)" is set in step S2711 of FIG. 245 (the thirtieth embodiment). In the thirty-eighth embodiment, similarly to the thirtieth embodiment, when the game standby display time is set at the start of the game, the value is subtracted by "1" at each predetermined cycle (interrupt processing) from this point.

Then, when the game standby display time becomes "0", the winning number data is cleared in step S2175 (waiting for medal insertion) in FIG. 244 (thirtieth embodiment). This process is a process of clearing the storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) of the winning number data at the address "F011 (H)" shown in FIG. 222 (28th embodiment).
When the acquired number data is cleared, the acquired number display LED 78 displays "00". For example, even if the number of medals paid out to the game last time is "9" and the player completes the game by operating the settlement switch 46, "00" will be displayed after about one minute. be done. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of vacant machines by recognizing them as vacant machines by hall clerks and other players.

In addition, instead of displaying "00" on the acquired number display LED 78, the acquired number display LED 78 (upper digits and lower digits) may be extinguished, or the upper digits of the acquired number display LED 78 may be extinguished and the lower digits may be turned off. may display "0". In any case, it suffices if the display is executed so that the hall clerk or another player can recognize the empty table.

In this embodiment, when a lottery for a winning combination is performed, a conditional device corresponding to the lottery result (winning number) becomes operable. The condition device has a winning and replay condition device (when winning a small winning combination or replay) that is not carried over to the next game, and an accessory condition device (when winning a special winning combination) that can be carried over to the next game.
When these conditional devices are activated, data corresponding to the conditional device numbers are stored in the accessory conditional device number and the winning and replay conditional device number.
The role condition device number (_NB_CND_BNS) of the address "F01C(H)" is a storage area for storing the number for managing the operating state of the role condition device. The number of the accessory condition device corresponding to is stored. The values stored here are used for selection of a stop position determination table used for stop control of the reels 31, selection of an advantageous section, AT lottery (and addition), selection of an effect group number, and the like.
Also, the winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) of the address "F01D (H)" is a storage area for storing the number for managing the operating state of the winning and replay condition device, and the lottery for the role was performed. After that, the winning and replay condition device numbers corresponding to the lottery results are stored.

The bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) at the address "F01E(H)" is a storage area for storing the number of medals bet, and in this embodiment, any one of "0" to "3" is stored.
The stored number data (_NB_CREDIT) of the address "F01F(H)" is a storage area for storing the number of stored medals (credits), and data for displaying the number of stored medals at that time on the stored number display LED 76. Remember.
In this embodiment, a value obtained by converting the stored number of sheets into a decimal number is stored. For example, when the stored number of sheets to be displayed is "29", the value "29 (H)" is stored. In other words, "00101001(B)" is stored. As a result, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 are used to display the lower digits of the stored number ("9" in this example), and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are used to display the higher digits of the stored number ("9" in this example). In this example, "2") is stored as data for displaying. Note that in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the stored number of sheets is "50", so the stored data value is in the range of "0" to "50 (D)".

The payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) of the address "F020(H)" is a storage area for storing the number of payouts when a small winning combination is won in the game and the number of payouts is determined. Then, when a small winning combination is won, the medal payout process is executed, and one medal is paid out (adding one to the number of stored medals, or actually paying out one medal (from the hopper 35)). "1" is subtracted each time. That is, it has a role as the number of times the payout process is executed. As a result, when the medal payout process is completed, the payout medal count data becomes "0".

The medal payout buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) at the address "F021(H)" is a buffer for storing the payout number when a small winning combination is won in the game and the payout number is determined, similar to the medal payout number data. storage area. Here, unlike the medal payout number data, the medal payout number buffer is not decremented for each medal payout process, and the initially stored value is maintained. Then, the value is maintained until the end of the next game. For example, when a small winning combination of 8 payouts is won in the game, "8 (H)" is stored in the medal payout buffer. is overwritten with "0".

The advantageous zone clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR) of addresses "F022(H)" and "F023(H)" is a storage area for storing a counter for managing the number of games played during the advantageous zone. As in the other embodiments described above, the upper limit of the number of games played in the advantageous section is set to "1500" games. A 2-byte storage area is provided to count "1500" at the maximum.
This advantageous section clear counter is the same as the advantageous section clear counter shown in the thirtieth embodiment (FIG. 243), for example.

The advantageous section type flag (_NB_ADV_KND) at address "F034(H)" is a storage area for storing a value for determining whether it is a normal section or an advantageous section. Note that no waiting section is provided in the thirty-eighth embodiment.
This advantageous section type flag is the same as the advantageous section type flag shown in, for example, the thirtieth embodiment (FIG. 243). When it is a normal section, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the advantageous section type flag, and when it is an advantageous section, "00000001 (B)" is stored in the advantageous section type flag.

The difference number counter (_CT_MY) of the addresses "F025(H)" and "F026(H)" is the same as the difference number counter of the thirty-first embodiment (Fig. 256), and the difference number data in the advantageous section is This is a storage area for storing an increment counter for determining whether or not "2400 (D)" has been exceeded. Therefore, the difference number counter consists of a 2-byte storage area. As in the thirty-first embodiment, when the difference number data becomes a value corresponding to a minus value, the value is corrected to "0 (H)" and stored (updated) in the difference number counter.

The replay state identification information flag (_FL_RT_INF) at the address "F027(H)" is a storage area for storing data indicating whether or not it is time to output the replay state identification signal. A value of "FF (H) (on)" is stored when the replay state identification signal is output, and a value of "00 (H) (off)" is stored otherwise.
The replay state identification information flag is turned on at the start of the game, and turned off at the start switch acceptance processing described later. In addition, it may be configured to be turned off after a predetermined period of time (for example, approximately 6 ms (three interrupts)) has elapsed.

The RT state number (_NB_RT_STS) of the address "F028(H)" is a storage area for storing a number for identifying which RT (replay state) is the current RT (replay state). For example, as shown in FIG. 22 (first embodiment), when the RT has non-RTs and RT1 to RT3, the RT number is "00000000 (B)" when it is a non-RT, and the RT number is "00000000 (B)" when it is RT1. "00000001(B)", . . .

Next, the on/off output timing of each signal described above will be described.
FIG. 286(a) is a time chart showing ON/OFF of the closing request lamp signal, the closing switch signal, the startable lamp signal, and the reel start switch signal. In FIG. 286(a), it is assumed that the number of credits is less than the upper limit "50". Also, in FIG. 286(a), it is assumed that the number of bets "1" is the prescribed number that allows the game to be started.
First, in the slot machine 10, when it becomes possible to insert medals, an insertion request lamp signal is turned on (output to the test firing tester 300).

When the closing request lamp signal is turned on, the test firing tester 300 can turn on the closing switch signal. As described above, the input switch signal is a pulse signal, and one pulse corresponds to one medal. Therefore, in this example, the insertion switch signal is turned on for only one pulse, which corresponds to insertion of one medal on the slot machine 10 side.

When the input switch signal is turned on and the specified number of games can be started is reached, the slot machine 10 turns on the startable lamp signal. This example shows an example in which the startable lamp signal is turned on while the closing switch signal is turned on.
Also, in the example of (a) in the figure, the game can be started with the prescribed number of "1", but the maximum prescribed number is "3" (up to three medals can be inserted). Therefore, in this case, the startable ramp signal is turned on, and the closing request ramp signal is also turned on.
In addition, in the example of (a) in the figure, even if the maximum specified number of the game is "1", when the credit number is less than the upper limit number of "50", medals can be inserted. The closing request lamp signal remains on.

The test firing tester 300 can turn on the reel start switch signal when the startable lamp signal is on. Note that "the reel start switch signal is (is) turned on" corresponds to that the start switch 41 is operated. Therefore, the description that "the reel start switch signal is (is) turned on" can be appropriately replaced with "the start switch 41 is (is) operated".
When the slot machine 10 detects that the reel start switch signal is turned on, it turns off the input request lamp signal and the startable lamp signal.
Here, the slot machine 10 turns off the input request lamp signal within 50 ms after detecting that the reel start switch signal is turned on. As a result, after detecting that the reel start switch signal is turned on (after the start switch 41 is operated), it is possible to quickly inform the test-firing tester 300 that medals cannot be inserted.

In addition, it is possible to eliminate the situation where the insertion request lamp signal remains on (in other words, the insertion display LED 79e remains illuminated) even though medals cannot be inserted. can.
Furthermore, when it is detected that the reel start switch signal is turned on, the startable lamp signal is turned off. In this example, the start ready lamp signal is turned off from on almost at the same timing as the reel start switch signal is turned off from on.

FIG. 286(b) is a time chart showing the input request ramp signal when the number of credits has reached the upper limit number "50" and the number of bets has reached the maximum specified number.
When the turn-on of the input switch signal is detected three times, the maximum prescribed number "3" is betted. When the number of credits is the upper limit value "50", no more tokens can be inserted. Therefore, the slot machine 10 turns off the input request ramp signal.

In this case, the turn-off timing of the input request lamp signal is within 50 ms after detection of the third turn-on of the input switch signal (turn-on when the number of bets reaches the maximum specified number). In this way, when it becomes impossible to insert medals any more, the injection request lamp signal can be quickly turned off, and the fact can be notified to the test-firing tester 300 .

Although not shown in (b) of the figure, the startable lamp signal remains on even after the closing request lamp signal has turned off. Then, similarly to (a) in the figure, when the ON of the reel start switch signal is detected, the start possible lamp signal is turned OFF.
In addition, since the input request lamp signal is turned on when it becomes possible to insert medals or the like, there is no time regulation for the timing of turning on.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the processing for outputting the closing request lamp signal as the test signal is executed.
On the other hand, it is also possible to output a signal based on lighting/non-lighting of the input display LED 79e. In this case, the process of extinguishing the insertion display LED 79e is executed within 50 ms after detecting that the reel start switch signal is turned on. In other words, when it is detected that the reel start switch signal is turned on, immediately (before executing a time-consuming process such as a lottery process), the process of extinguishing the input display LED 79e is executed.

If the process of turning off the insertion display LED 79e is immediately executed when the on of the reel start switch signal is detected, the insertion request lamp signal is turned off (off signal). Therefore, it is possible to turn off the closing request lamp signal within 50 ms from when the on of the reel start switch signal is detected.

FIG. 287 is a time chart showing ON/OFF of the replay state identification signal.
The replay state identification signal is output at the start of the game. After the output of the replay state identification signal is started, the input request lamp signal or the startable lamp signal is turned on after a set-up time of 2 ms or more has elapsed.
It should be noted that the input request lamp signal is turned on at the start of the game when the replay is not activated (when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay was not stop-displayed in the previous game). Also, the start possible lamp signal is turned on at the start of the game when the replay is activated (when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed in the previous game).

By setting such an output timing, it is possible to clearly distinguish between the replay state identification signal and the input request lamp signal or the startable lamp signal, and inform the test-firing tester 300 of them.
Also, when it detects that the reel start switch signal is on, it immediately turns off the replay state identification signal.
It should be noted that the replay state identification signal and the condition device signal, which will be described later, are set to be output via the same connector. Therefore, the replay state identification signal and the condition device signal cannot be output at the same time, and are output with a time lag.
Specifically, the replay state identification signal is output until the on-state of the reel start switch signal is detected, and when the on state of the reel start switch signal is detected, the re-play state identification signal is immediately turned off. Then, the condition device signal is output after detecting that the reel start switch signal is turned on, and after the combination lottery is performed and the condition device number is determined.

The replay state identification signal is a signal corresponding to the above-mentioned RT state number, consists of 8 bits, is represented by a combination of 8 bits (00 (H) to FF (H)), and is signaled for each winning probability of replay. , it is possible to output "00(H)" to "FF(H)" (256 types).
For example, when outputting a replay state identification signal of "BD (H)",
Bit 0:1 (replay state identification signal 1)
Bit 1:0 (replay state identification signal 2)
Bit 2: 1 (replay state identification signal 3)
Bit 3:1 (replay state identification signal 4)
Bit 4: 1 (replay state identification signal 5)
Bit 5: 1 (replay state identification signal 6)
Bit 6:0 (replay state identification signal 7)
Bit 7:0 (replay state identification signal 8)
becomes.

The replay state identification signal is an 8-bit test signal as described above, and the condition device signal, which will be described later, is also an 8-bit test signal. Therefore, the replaying state identification signal is output until the on of the reel start switch signal is detected, and when the on of the reel start switch signal is detected, the replaying state identification signal is immediately turned off.
On the other hand, the condition device signal is output after an interval of 10 ms or more after detecting that the reel start switch signal is turned on.
Thereby, the test-firing tester 300 can clearly distinguish both test signals. Specifically, after recognizing the replay state identification signal, it is possible to recognize the condition device signal after a predetermined period of time. possibility) can be reduced. In other words, it is possible to prevent the replay state identification signal and the condition device signal from being received at the same timing and making it impossible to identify which signal is which.

288 and 289 are time charts showing the output of conditional device signals. FIG. 288 shows a method (method 2) in which the conditional device signal is time-divided and output once, and FIG. 289 shows a method (method 3) in which the conditional device signal is time-divided and output twice.
In FIG. 288, when the on-state of the reel start switch signal is detected, the condition device signal is output after an interval of 10 ms or more from the time when the on-state is detected.
The condition device signals 1 to 6 are signals expressed from a combination of 6 bits (00 (H) to 3F (H)), and are winning and replay condition device signals or accessory condition device signals. Output at different times.

The condition device signal 7 is a signal that is turned on when the winning and replay condition device signals are output as the condition device signals 1 to 6, and is a signal for identifying output of the winning and replay condition device signals (identification signal ).
The conditional device signal 8 is a signal that is turned on when the accessory conditional device signals are output as the conditional device signals 1 to 6, and is a signal (identification signal) for identifying output of the accessory conditional device signal. be.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 288, after 10 ms has passed since the on detection of the reel start switch signal ([1] in the figure), condition device signals 1 to 6 (accessory condition device signals), and outputs a conditional device signal 8. The time during which the condition device signal 8 is output ([2] in the figure) is 20 ms (or longer). The hold time ([4] in the figure) of the conditional device signals 1 to 6 (accessory conditional device signals) with respect to the conditional device signal 8 is 10 ms (or longer).
Turn conditioned device signal 8 on, and when 20 ms has elapsed, turn conditioned device signal 8 off and turn conditioned device signal 7 on. The time during which the condition device signal 7 is ON ([3] in the figure) is 20 ms (or longer).
Furthermore, when the condition device signal 7 is turned on, the condition device signals 1 to 6 are output as winning and replay condition device signals. The hold time ([5] in the figure) of winning and replay condition device signals 1 to 6 with respect to the condition device signal 7 is 10 ms (or more).

In FIG. 288, for example, when a signal of "2D(H)" is output as a condition device signal,
Bits 0:1 (conditional device signal 1)
Bits 1:0 (conditional device signal 2)
Bits 2:1 (conditional device signal 3)
Bits 3:1 (conditional device signal 4)
Bits 4:0 (conditional device signal 5)
Bits 5:1 (conditional device signal 6)
becomes.

In the example of FIG. 288, the conditional device signals correspond to 64 types of conditional devices from "00(H)" to "3F(H)".
On the other hand, when the number of condition device types exceeds 64, the condition device signal is divided into upper and lower signals and output twice. FIG. 289 shows an output example of the condition device signal in this case.
Even when the conditional device signal is output twice, the conditional device signal 7 is a signal (identification signal) for identifying the winning and replay conditional device signal, and the conditional device signal 8 is the accessory It becomes a signal (identification signal) for identifying the condition device signal.
Therefore, the conditional device signal in one transmission is 6 bits (conditional device signals 1 to 6), similar to the method of outputting the conditional device signal once.

The output order of the condition device signals is as follows in the example of FIG.
(1) Accessory condition device signal lower (accessory lower)
Condition device signal 1: Accessory condition device signal bit 0
Condition device signal 2: Accessory condition device signal bit 1
Condition device signal 3: Accessory condition device signal bit 2
Condition device signal 4: Accessory condition device signal bit 3
Condition device signal 5: Accessory condition device signal bit 4
Condition device signal 6: Accessory condition device signal bit 5
(2) Winning and replay condition device signal lower (winning lower)
Conditional Device Signal 1: Win and Replay Conditional Device Signal Bit 0
Conditional Device Signal 2: Win and Replay Conditional Device Signal Bit 1
Conditional Device Signal 3: Win and Replay Conditional Device Signal Bit 2
Conditional Device Signal 4: Win and Replay Conditional Device Signal Bit 3
Conditional Device Signal 5: Win and Replay Conditional Device Signal Bit 4
Conditional Device Signal 6: Win and Replay Conditional Device Signal Bit 5

(3) Accessory condition device signal upper (accessory upper)
Condition device signal 1: Accessory condition device signal bit 6
Condition device signal 2: Accessory condition device signal bit 7
Conditional device signal 3: Accessory conditional device signal bit 8
Condition device signal 4: Accessory condition device signal bit 9
Condition device signal 5: Accessory condition device signal bit 10
Condition device signal 6: Accessory condition device signal bit 11
(4) Winning and replay condition device signal higher (winning higher)
Conditional Device Signal 1: Winning and Replay Conditional Device Signal Bit 6
Conditional Device Signal 2: Win and Replay Conditional Device Signal Bit 7
Conditional Device Signal 3: Win and Replay Conditional Device Signal Bit 8
Conditional Device Signal 4: Win and Replay Conditional Device Signal Bit 9
Conditional Device Signal 5: Win and Replay Conditional Device Signal Bit 10
Conditional Device Signal 6: Win and Replay Conditional Device Signal Bit 11
becomes.

In FIG. 289, after detecting that the reel start switch signal is turned on, after a time of 10 ms or more ([1] in the figure), the condition device signal 8 is turned on, and the condition device signals 1 to 6 (lower role ). The time during which the condition device signal 8 is ON ([2] in the figure) is 20 ms (or longer). Also, the hold time ([4] in the figure) of the condition device signals 1 to 6 with respect to the condition device signal 8 is 10 ms (or longer).
When 20 ms have passed since the conditioned device signal 8 was turned on, the conditioned device signal 8 is turned off and the conditioned device signal 7 is turned on. The time during which the condition device signal 7 is ON ([3] in the figure) is 20 ms (or longer).

Further, when the condition device signal 7 is turned on, the condition device signals 1 to 6 (lower winning prize) are output as winning and replay condition device signals. The hold time ([5] in the figure) of conditional device signals 1 to 6 with respect to conditional device signal 7 is 10 ms (or longer).
Then, when 20 ms have passed since the conditional device signal 7 was turned on, the conditional device signal 7 is turned off, the conditional device signal 8 is turned on, and the conditional device signals 1 to 6 (higher rank) are output. . The time during which the conditional device signal 8 is turned on ([2] in the figure) is 20 ms (or longer) as described above. Furthermore, the hold time ([4] in the figure) of the conditional device signals 1 to 6 (higher-ranking character) with respect to the conditional device signal 8 is 10 ms (or longer) as described above.

Further, when 20 ms have elapsed since the conditional device signal 8 was turned on, the conditional device signal 8 is turned off and the conditional device signal 7 is turned on. The time during which the condition device signal 7 is ON ([3] in the figure) is 20 ms (or longer).
When condition device signal 7 is turned on, condition device signals 1 to 6 (higher winning prizes) are output as winning and replay condition device signals. The hold time ([5] in the drawing) of the conditional device signals 1 to 6 (higher winning prizes) with respect to the conditional device signal 7 is 10 ms (or longer) as described above. After that, the output of the condition device signals 1 to 6 (higher winning prizes) is terminated, and the condition device signal 7 is turned off.

FIG. 290 is a time chart showing ON/OFF of the signal during the advantageous interval. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 244 of the thirtieth embodiment, after the combination lottery process in step S2180, the advantageous interval type flag is updated in the advantageous interval type update in step S2703 (FIG. 249).
When the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is won and the advantageous section type flag becomes a value corresponding to the advantageous section ("00000001 (B)" in this embodiment), the next game will be played in the advantageous section.
Then, as shown in FIG. 290(a), when the game is in the advantageous interval, the advantageous interval signal is turned on from the start of the game.

It should be noted that, as described in the thirty-second embodiment, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not always turned on even during the advantageous section. Therefore, based on the ON/OFF state of the advantageous interval display LED 77, specifically, when the value of the advantageous interval display LED flag shown in FIG. 243 (the thirtieth embodiment) is "00000001 (B)" It is not possible to turn on the medium signal.

In addition, the advantageous section type flag is updated when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section (for example, at the time of a winning combination lottery). is updated to a value corresponding to the section), it is not possible to refer to the advantageous section type flag and output the signal during the advantageous section. This is because, if an attempt is made to output the advantageous interval signal based on the value of the advantageous interval type flag, the advantageous interval signal will turn from off to on while the reel 31 is rotating.
For this reason, in this embodiment, the advantageous interval clear counter is referred to, and if the advantageous interval clear counter is other than "0", ON is output as the advantageous interval signal, and when the advantageous interval clear counter is "0" , outputs OFF as a signal during the advantageous interval. By configuring in this way, it is possible to accurately control the output of the signal during the advantageous interval. Further, since the value of the advantageous interval clear counter is referred to and the advantageous interval signal is output, there is no need to provide a new storage area for indicating ON/OFF of the advantageous interval signal in the RWM 53, which reduces the storage area of the RWM 53. It also has the effect of becoming efficient without any need.

However, not limited to this, a storage area indicating the output state of the signal during the advantageous interval is provided in the RWM 53, and when the value stored in this storage area is, for example, "1", ON is output as the signal during the advantageous interval, When it is "0", it is also possible to output "off" as a signal during the advantageous section.

In FIG. 290, when the signal during the advantageous section is turned on, after providing a setup time of 2 ms or more after the signal during the advantageous section is turned on, the input request lamp signal (when the replay is not activated) or start possible Turn on the lamp signal (replay operation).
Further, details will be explained with reference to FIG. 298, but whether or not the advantageous interval has ended is determined by advantageous interval clear counter management processing in the game end processing. data is initialized. Specifically, the advantageous section type flag is set to "0", and the advantageous section clear counter is set to "0". As a result, the non-advantageous section (normal section) starts from the start of the next game.

In FIG. 290(b), the signal during the advantageous section is turned off from the start of the non-advantageous section. Then, after turning off the signal during the advantageous interval, a setup period of 2 ms (or more) is provided, and the input request ramp signal (when replay is not activated) or startable ramp signal (when replay is activated) in the same manner as above. to turn on.
As described above, since the on/off timing of the advantageous section signal and the on/off timing of the injection request lamp signal or startable lamp signal are not at the same time, both signals are clearly distinguished and output to the test firing tester 300. be able to. Specifically, by having the test-firing test machine 300 reliably recognize whether or not it is in the advantageous section, the test-firing test machine 300 can then cause the game machine to perform an appropriate operation. In other words, unlike the case where the advantageous section signal and the injection request lamp signal or the startable lamp signal are output at the same timing, the signal related to the advantageous section signal is output first regardless of the processing order of the test firing tester 300. It is possible to execute the process, and it is possible to make the test-firing tester 300 first recognize whether or not it is in the advantageous section.

FIG. 291 is a time chart showing ON/OFF of the signal during continuous operation device for the first class special accessory.
In this embodiment, in the game end processing (FIG. 298 to be described later), it is determined whether or not the 1BB operation symbol is stopped and displayed, and when it is determined that the 1BB operation symbol is stopped and displayed, the 1BB operation state set a flag. When the operating state flag of 1BB is set, the "accessory continuous operation device for the first class special accessory" is in operation, and the "signal for continuous operation device for the first special accessory" is activated. to turn on.

When the operating state flag of 1BB is set, as shown in FIG. 291(a), from the start of the next game, the signal during continuous operation device for the first class special accessory is turned on.
Then, when the signal during continuous operation of the accessory related to the first type special accessory is turned on, the input request lamp signal is turned on after a setup time of 2ms (or more) is provided from the time it is turned on. do. Therefore, when the operation state flag of 1BB is ON, at the start of the game, the character product continuous operation device signal related to the first class special accessory is first turned on, and at least 2 ms after the signal is turned on. , the closing request lamp signal will not turn on.

At the end of the game, it is determined whether or not the operation of 1BB is completed, and when it is determined that the operation of 1BB is completed, the operation state flag corresponding to 1BB is turned off ("0"). Then, at the start of the next game, as shown in FIG. 291(b), the signal during continuous operation device for the first class special accessory is turned off. Furthermore, after a set-up time of 2 ms (or more) is provided from when the signal is turned off, the closing request lamp signal is turned on.
As described above, since the timings for turning on the role product continuous operation device signal and the input request lamp signal for the first type special role product do not occur at the same time, they can be clearly distinguished and output to the test firing tester 300. . Specifically, first, the test-firing test machine 300 reliably recognizes whether or not the accessory continuous actuating device related to the first-class special accessory is in operation, and then the test-firing test machine 300 determines whether it is suitable for the game machine. can be performed. In other words, unlike the case of outputting the role product continuous operating device signal and the input request lamp signal related to the first type special role product at the same timing, regardless of the processing order of the test firing tester 300, first, It is possible to execute processing related to the signal during continuous operation device for the first class special accessory, and it is possible to first determine whether the continuous operation device for the first class special accessory is in operation. can be recognized by the test firing tester 300.

Note that the time chart of FIG. 291 shows an example of the signal during continuous operation of the accessory related to the first type special accessory, but the present invention is not limited to this. Regarding the continuous operation device signal related to the second type special accessory that is turned on during operation, when the signal is turned on, after setting up 2 ms (or more) from the time it is turned on, Turn on the power-on request lamp signal. In addition, when turning off the signal during continuous operation of accessories related to the second type special accessories, turn on the input request lamp signal after setting up 2 ms (or more) after turning off the signal. do.

moreover,
1) A signal during the first class special function that turns on while the first class special function (RB) is in operation 2) A second class special function signal that is turned on while the second class special function (CB) is in operation Medium signal 3) The normal role medium signal, which is turned on while the normal role (SB) is in operation, is also turned on at the start of the game when the action of the role starts, and turned off at the start of the game when the action of the role ends. do.
Then, as shown in "Others" in FIG. 291, when any one of the above-mentioned three role-playing signals is turned on, a setup time of 2 ms (or more) is provided from the time the signal is turned on. Afterwards, the input request lamp signal (when the replay is not activated) or the start possible lamp signal (when the regame is activated) is turned on.
Also, when any one of the above 3 accessory signals is turned off, after a setup time of 2 ms (or more) has been provided from the time it is turned off, the input request lamp signal (when replay is not activated) or can be started Turn on the lamp signal (replay operation).

Such a setup time may be provided only when the signal during continuous operation of the accessory and/or the signal during the accessory is on. , a set-up time (two interruption waiting processes) is provided at the start of the game. By providing a uniform set-up time for all games, the burden of processing can be reduced. In other words, at the start of the game, it is possible to eliminate the process of determining whether or not the accessory continuous operation device signal or the accessory ongoing signal is on.
It should be noted that even if the set-up time is provided when the signal during continuous operation of the accessory or the signal during accessory is off, the minimum time is about 2 ms, so it is not at a level that causes a delay in the game, and the player can It is not something that can be perceived intuitively from the outside.

FIG. 292 is a time chart showing the relationship between the minimum game time, the fastest game time, and the setup time in the thirty-eighth embodiment.
Here, the "minimum game time T" is the minimum time from when the reels in the current game start rotating to when the reels in the next game start rotating, and is set to 4.1 seconds in this embodiment. ing. In order to manage this 4.1 seconds, the timer value "1836 (D)" is set to the minimum game time (_TM2_GAME) at the start of calculation, and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt processing (every 2.235 ms). Therefore, when "2.235×1836=4103.46ms" has passed, the reels 31 for the next game can be started to rotate.

The "fastest game time T'" is the (shortest) time required for one game when the player operates the operation switches (BET switch 40, start switch 41, stop switch 42) at the fastest speed. When the player operates (turns on) the start switch 41, the reels 31 start rotating. The reel 31 is in a constant speed state through an acceleration state, and when it is in the constant speed state, it becomes possible to accept the operation of the stop switch 42 . Here, the time required from the start of rotation of the reel 31 until it becomes possible to accept the operation of the stop switch 42, in other words, the acceleration processing time of the reel 31 is approximately 200 ms.

Next, it is assumed that the stop switch 42 is operated almost simultaneously with the moment when the stop switch 42 becomes ready to accept the operation. In other words, it is assumed that the time from when the reel 31 is in a constant speed state and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted to when the stop switch 42 is operated is "0".
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the reel control means 65 stops and controls the reels 31 so as to correspond to the result of the lottery. The stop switch 42 is operated, the reel 31 is decelerated, and the time until it stops is about 40 to 80 ms at the shortest (the number of moving symbols is "0" to "1"), and the longest (the number of moving symbols is " 4”) is 190 ms.

Furthermore, when the reel 31 stops, the motor 32 enters a four-phase excitation state (an operation necessary to keep the reel 31 at the stop position without overrunning the stop position). The 4-phase excitation state is executed, for example, 90 interrupts (90×2.235=201.25 ms). During the four-phase excitation state, acceptance of the next operation of the stop switch 42 is prohibited, and when the four-phase excitation state ends, the next operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted.
In this manner, after the reels 31 start rotating, the time from operating the three stop switches 42 to stopping all the reels 31 is approximately 2000 ms.

Also, when the symbol combination corresponding to the payout combination is stopped and the actual medals are paid out (excluding addition to the credits), it takes about 100 ms to pay out one medal. The time required to pay out 15 cards is approximately 1500 ms.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a setup time t of about 4 ms is provided after the medal payout process is completed. This set-up time t is provided at the start of the game, and after the set-up time t has elapsed, bets can be made and the start switch 41 can be operated. Although the details will be described later, the setup time t of about 4 ms is achieved by executing the interrupt waiting process twice (steps S2862 and S2863 in FIG. 295). Therefore, the setup time t depends on the timing of interrupt generation. ), it becomes "2 x 2.235 ms = 4.47 ms". Therefore, the setup time t is longer than 2.235 ms and shorter than 4.47 ms.

In the above, the relationship between the minimum game time T, the shortest game time T', and the setup time t is "T>T'+t". Therefore, when the game is finished with the fastest game time T', "T'+t" does not exceed the minimum game time T even if the set-up time t is provided at the start of the game. Therefore, the setup time t can be provided without affecting the minimum playing time T.

For this reason, for example, when the player completes the game at the fastest speed, "T'+t" does not exceed the minimum game time T, so the game can be completed within the minimum game time T by providing the set-up time t. It will never go away. As a result, even if the player wants to complete the game as soon as possible, for example, just before the hall closes, the progress of the game is not hindered by the set-up time t. In other words, the game can be continued in the minimum game time T even if the setup time t exists.

293 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the occurrence of power failure and test signals in the thirty-eighth embodiment; FIG.
FIG. 293(a) is a diagram showing a voltage drop after a power failure (for example, when the power switch is turned off or when a power failure occurs), and FIG. 271 (the thirty-third embodiment ( A)) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. In FIG. 293(a), the voltage drop from the time of power failure is shown by a straight line, but in reality the drop is gentle.
Note that the voltages and the number of interrupts shown in FIG. 293 are examples, and do not mean that they are limited to these values.

The voltage of the slot machine 10 when power is supplied is, for example, 12 (V), and if the power is cut off in this state, the voltage gradually drops. In the interrupt process, it is detected each time whether or not a power failure has occurred. Whether or not a power failure has occurred is determined by determining whether or not a power failure detection signal has been input to a predetermined bit in the input port 51 . In this embodiment, when the voltage becomes 5 (V) or less, a power-off detection signal is input.

In the example of FIG. 293( a ), the voltage becomes 5 (V) at the ninth interrupt after the occurrence of power failure, and the power failure detection signal is input to a predetermined bit in the input port 51 . Further, when the next 10th interrupt occurs, the voltage at this time becomes 4 (V), and the power failure detection signal is input to the predetermined bit in the input port 51 again. When the power-off detection signal is continuously input in two interruption processes, the main control board 50 determines that the power-off has occurred. When it is determined that power failure has occurred, power failure processing is executed in the interrupt processing.

As described above, the power-off process is executed after the 10th interrupt, that is, about 20 ms after the power-off occurs.
Here, when the voltage reaches 3 (V), it reaches the driving limit voltage of the main CPU 55, and the main CPU 55 cannot be driven (the operation of the main CPU 55 cannot be guaranteed). Therefore, the power-off process is controlled so as to end before the voltage of the main CPU 55 reaches the driving limit.

FIG. 293(b) is a time chart showing the relationship between the accessory continuous operating device in-process signal and the input request lamp signal for the first class special accessory, and corresponds to FIG. 291(a).
As shown in FIG. 291(a), when the signal during continuous operation device for the first class special accessory is turned on, the input request lamp signal is turned on after providing a setup time of 2 ms or more. However, in the example of FIG. 293(b), the setup time is set to about 4 ms.

As shown in FIG. 293(b), it is assumed that a power failure occurs at the moment when the signal during continuous operation device for the first class special accessory is turned on. In this case, as described above, power-off processing is executed in approximately 20 ms (approximately 10 interrupts). For this reason, even if the power is cut off at the moment when the signal during continuous operation device for the type 1 special accessory is turned on, the power cut-off process is started when the input request lamp signal is off. Therefore, power-off processing is executed after the power-on request lamp signal is turned on. Therefore, even if power failure occurs at the moment when the signal during continuous operation device for the first class special accessory is turned on, the input request lamp signal is reliably turned on (output to the test firing tester 300 )be able to.
By configuring in this way, for example, even if a power failure occurs after the symbol combination related to the accessory continuous operation device related to the first class special accessory is stopped and displayed, the first class special accessory It is possible to prevent the main CPU 55 from reaching the drive limit as much as possible before outputting the ON signal as the input request lamp signal, even though the processing for outputting ON as the signal during continuous operation of the accessory has been executed. can.
In other words, the test-firing tester 300 normally operates during the continuous operation device for the first class special accessory after the symbol combination for the continuous operation device for the first special accessory is stopped and displayed. A signal is received, and after the set-up time t elapses, a closing request lamp signal is received and regarded as normal. In this case, it is possible to prevent the test-firing tester 300 from considering an abnormality due to failure to receive the input request lamp signal.

Next, the flow of processing in the thirty-eighth embodiment will be described based on a flowchart.
FIG. 294 is a flow chart showing main processing ((a) in the figure) and interrupt processing ((b) in the figure) in the thirty-eighth embodiment.
The main processing is processing corresponding to the processing shown in, for example, FIG. 188 (26th embodiment) and FIG. 244 (30th embodiment), and FIG. It is a flow chart for doing. Therefore, the main processing of the 38th embodiment executes not only the processing shown in FIG. 294(a), but also other processing such as those shown in FIGS. Of course.

The interrupt process is, for example, a process corresponding to the process shown in FIG. 190 (the twenty-sixth embodiment), and FIG. Therefore, the interrupt processing of the thirty-eighth embodiment executes not only the processing shown in FIG. 294(b), but also other processing such as that shown in FIG. 190, of course. .

In the main process of FIG. 294(a), in step S2851, a game start process is executed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 295, which will be described later, and turns on the replay state identification information flag (_FL_RT_INF), turns on the insertion display LED 79e, and the like. This game start process is a process corresponding to the game start set process of FIG. 245 (the thirtieth embodiment), for example. The game start processing of the thirty-eighth embodiment is not limited to the processing shown in FIG. 295. For example, as shown in FIG. Various processes are executed, such as saving the number of winable cards when 1BB is activated, and saving the number of games played and the number of wins when RB is activated, but these processes are omitted.

In the next step S2853, start switch acceptance processing is executed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 296, which will be described later, and executes a turn-off process of the insertion display LED 79e, a turn-on process of the game start display LED 79d, and the like. The start switch acceptance process includes, for example, the medal insertion wait process at step S2175 and the medal management process at step S2716 in FIG. 244, but these processes are omitted in FIG. For example, in step S2174 of FIG. 244, it is determined whether or not medals have been inserted, but in the thirty-eighth embodiment, it is determined whether or not the input switch signal is ON.

The next step S2854 is the process of starting the rotation of the reel 31, and this process corresponds to the process of step S2182 in FIG. 244, for example.
The next step S2855 is processing for stopping the rotation of the reel 31, and this processing corresponds to the processing of steps S2183 to S2186 in FIG. 244, for example.
Next, the process advances to step S2856 to execute game end processing. This process is the process of FIG. 298, which will be described later, and executes the operation state flag clearing process, the advantageous section clear counter management process, and the like. The game end processing is processing corresponding to the game end check processing in FIG. 252 (the thirtieth embodiment).

In the thirtieth embodiment, the advantageous section is set on the condition that the maximum payout notification flag is "1" (at least once after shifting to the advantageous section, the correct pushing order is notified when the pushing order bell wins). It was to end. However, in the thirty-eighth embodiment, after shifting to the advantageous section, the advantageous section can be ended without informing the correct pushing order even once when the pushing order bell is won. Therefore, in the thirty-eighth embodiment, no maximum payout notification flag is provided (there is no maximum payout notification flag (_FL_ADV_ORD) in FIG. 243). Therefore, the process corresponding to step S2822 in FIG. 252 is not executed.

In the interrupt processing of FIG. 294(b), in step S2951, power-off processing is executed. As described above, the power-off process is a process of determining whether or not the power-off detection signal is on, and executes the process shown in FIG. 300, which will be described later. In the power-off process, for example, a power-off process completed flag is stored, a checksum is executed, etc., but these are omitted in FIG. It does not mean that only the processing shown in FIG. 300 is executed.

In the next step S2952, timer measurement is executed. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from various timer values (counter values), and is, for example, a process corresponding to step S1405 in FIG. 190 (26th embodiment).
In the next step S2953, LED display is performed. This processing is to perform lighting processing of the insertion display LED 79e and the game start display LED 79d according to the LED display counter, and is processing shown in FIG. 302 described later. The LED display is processing corresponding to the LED display control shown in FIG. 149 (22nd embodiment), for example. FIG. 302, which will be described later, mainly shows processing according to the thirty-eighth embodiment, and is not limited to the processing shown in FIG. 302. For example, other processing shown in FIG. 149 is also executed. processing is omitted.
Next, the process advances to step S2954 to perform test signal management. This process is a process of outputting various test signals to the test-firing tester 300, and is a process shown in FIGS. 303 and 304, which will be described later. In the market, there is no harness for outputting the test signal, so the test signal is not output. , the program is installed in the market with the program stored in the ROM 54 . In other words, even in the market, test signal management is executed by executing the program, but the test signal is not actually output.

FIG. 295 is a flow chart showing the game start process in step S2851 in FIG. 294(a).
First, in step S2861, the main control board 50 turns on the replay state identification information flag (_FL_RT_INF). This process is a process of storing the value "FF (H)" corresponding to the output of the replay state identification signal in the replay state identification information flag in FIG. In addition, although "FF (H)" is stored in the embodiment, it is possible to grasp whether or not the replay state identification signal is to be output (whether or not the condition device signal is to be output). Any value may be stored as long as it is information.
Next, proceeding to step S2862, the main control board 50 determines whether or not an interrupt process has occurred. This process is similar to the process shown in step S2190 (FIG. 189(b)) in FIG. 188 (26th embodiment). When interrupt processing has not occurred, it waits until interrupt processing occurs, and when it is determined that interrupt processing has occurred, the process advances to step S2863. In step S2863, the same processing as in step S2862 is executed again. When it is determined that interrupt processing has occurred, the process proceeds to step S2864.

Through steps S2862 and S2863 described above, standby processing (also referred to as "wait processing") for waiting until two interrupt processing occurs is executed. By means of steps S2862 and S2863, the waiting process of "4.47 ms" at maximum is executed, and this process corresponds to the setup time t at the start of the game in FIG. Note that the interrupt process is executed even while the standby process is being executed.
In this embodiment, steps S2862 and S2863 are configured to execute standby processing for waiting until two interrupt processing occurs. It may be about 5 times.
At the next step S2864, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the replay operation state flag (_FL_REPLAY) is on. In this process, it is determined whether or not the replay operation state flag in FIG. 284 is not "0", and when it is not "0", it is determined that the regame operation state flag is ON. When it is determined that the replay operation state flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S2867, and when it is determined to be ON, the process proceeds to step S2865.

In step S2865, the main control board 50 sets the specified number to the bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL). For example, when the specified number (bet number) in the previous game is "3" and the specified number in the current game is also "3", "3" is stored as the bet number data in FIG.
Next, proceeding to step S2866, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the stored number data (_NB_CREDIT) is "50 (D)". When it is determined that the stored number data is "50 (D)", that is, the upper limit number, the processing according to this flow chart ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not "50 (D)", the process proceeds to step S2867.

In step S2867, the main control board 50 turns on the blocker 45 (a state in which passage of medals is permitted). Next, the flow advances to step S2868 to turn on the input display LED 79e. This process is to set the D4 bit in the LED display data (_PT_STS_LED) to "1". Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
After the input display LED 79e is turned on in step S2868, the input display LED 79e is lit when the LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP) is "00010000 (B)" in interrupt processing. Therefore, for example, when the LED display counter is "00001000 (B)" at the moment when the input display LED 79e is turned on in step S2868, after four interrupts (when the LED display counter is "00010000 (B)") The throw-in display LED 79e lights up.

On the other hand, when the closing display LED 79e is turned on, in the next interrupt processing, the ON data of the closing request lamp signal is set in step S2994 in FIG. 303, and the test signal is output. In this manner, the closing request lamp signal can be turned on even before the closing indication LED 79e actually lights up in the interrupt process, so the closing request lamp signal is turned on based on the lighting of the closing indication LED 79e. Compared with the method, the input request lamp signal can be output to the test firing tester 300 more quickly.

FIG. 296 is a flow chart showing the processing at the start of medal reception in step S2852 in FIG. 294(a).
First, in step S2881, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the input switch signal is on. If it is determined that the input switch signal is on, the process proceeds to step S2882, and if it is determined that it is not on, the process proceeds to step S2886.
In step S2882, "1" is added to the bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL). Next, proceeding to step S2884, it is determined whether or not medals cannot be inserted. This determination is "Yes" when the number of bets reaches the maximum specified number and the number of credits reaches the upper limit number "50". When it is determined that medals cannot be inserted, the process proceeds to step S2884, and when it is determined that medals can be inserted, the process proceeds to step S2886.

At step S2884, the main control board 50 turns off the blocker 45 (a state in which passage of medals is not permitted). Next, the flow advances to step S2885 to turn off the input display LED 79e. This process is to set the D4 bit of the LED display data (_PT_STS_LED) to "0". Then, the process proceeds to step S2886.
In step S2886, it is determined whether or not the number-of-bets data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) has reached a specified number (the number of bets on which a game can be started). If it is determined to be the specified number, the process proceeds to step S2887, and if it is determined to be not the specified number, the process returns to step S2881.

In step S2887, the game start display LED 79d is turned on. This process is to set the D3 bit of the LED display data (_PT_STS_LED) to "1".
When the game start display LED 79d is turned on in step S2887, the start possible lamp signal is turned on. In other words, it is possible to output ON or OFF as a startable lamp signal based on the lighting of the game start display LED 79d (make it possible for the test firing tester 300 to grasp whether or not the start switch 41 can be operated). there is
In the next step S2888, the main control board 50 determines whether or not it has detected that the reel start switch signal has been turned on. When it is detected that the reel start switch signal is turned on, the processing according to this flowchart is ended, and the process advances to step S2853 (processing when the start switch is received) in FIG. 294(a). On the other hand, if it is determined that the reel start switch signal has not been turned on, the process returns to step S2881.

FIG. 297 is a flow chart showing the start switch acceptance process in step S2853 in FIG. 294(a).
In FIG. 296 described above, when "Yes" is determined in step S2888, the flow advances to this flowchart. is.
First, in step S2891, a random number value for the combination lottery is obtained. This process is, for example, the process of obtaining (extracting) a random number generated by the random number generating means in the combination lottery means 61 described in the first embodiment when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on). corresponds to It should be noted that at the time of step S2891, only the random number value is acquired, and winning determination based on the acquired random number value has not yet been executed.

Next, proceeding to step S2892, the main control board 50 turns off the game start display LED 79d. This process is to set the D3 bit in the LED display data (_PT_STS_LED) to "0". In the next step S2893, the main control board 50 turns off the blocker 45 (a state in which passage of medals is not permitted). This is because no medals are accepted after the reel 31 starts rotating.
In the next step S2894, the main control board 50 turns off the input display LED 79e. This process is to set the D4 bit in the LED display data (_PT_STS_LED) to "0". Therefore, the input display LED 79e can be turned off immediately after the blocker 45 is turned off.

Next, proceeding to step S2895, the main control board 50 turns off the replay state identification information flag (_FL_RT_INF). This process is a process of setting the replay state identification information flag to "0". It should be noted that the replay state identification information flag is turned on at step S2861 in FIG. 295 (when the game is started). In addition, in order to turn off the replay state identification signal (see FIG. 287) when the on of the reel start switch signal is detected, the replay state identification information flag to "0". When the replay state identification information flag becomes "0", the replay state identification signal is not output in the interrupt processing.

Next, proceeding to step S2896, the main control board 50 executes an internal lottery (determination of winning numbers based on random numbers) based on the random number value acquired in step S2891. Here, "based on the random number" means not only using the extracted random number directly, but also using the result of performing a predetermined operation on the extracted random number. Examples include using a result obtained by adding or subtracting a predetermined value, or using a result obtained by adding or subtracting another random value to an extracted random value. In this process, the determining means of the combination lottery means 61 described in the first embodiment checks the random number extracted by the random number extracting means against the lottery table to determine the winning number corresponding to the area to which the random number belongs. It is a process to It should be noted that the time required for the internal lottery in step S2896 varies depending on the type of the obtained random number and winning number, and the time may be longer.
In FIG. 188 (26th embodiment), random number acquisition and winning number determination are executed in step S2180. determination), the processes of steps S2892 to S2895 are executed. Thus, when the process shifts to the start switch acceptance process, the process of turning off the game start display LED 79d and the insertion display LED 79e is executed as soon as possible. As a result, as shown in FIG. 286(a), when it is detected that the reel start switch signal is turned on, the closing request lamp signal and the startable lamp signal can be turned off within 50 ms.

In the next step S2897, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the minimum playing time has passed. This process judges that the minimum game time has passed when the minimum game time (_TM2_GAME) is "0", and judges that the minimum game time has not passed when the value is other than "0". do. The minimum playing time is set in step S2898, which will be described later. That is, it is determined whether or not the minimum game time set in step S2898 has become "0" when proceeding to step S2897 of the next game.
When it is determined that the minimum playing time has passed, the process proceeds to step S2898, and when it is determined that the minimum playing time has not passed, it waits until the minimum playing time passes.

In step S2898, the minimum playing time is saved. This process is a process of storing "1836 (D)" in the minimum game time (_TM2_GAME). This minimum game time is decremented by "1" for each interrupt processing (timer measurement in FIG. 294(b)). Therefore, it becomes "0" when "2.235 ms×1836=4103.46 ms" has elapsed.

In the next step S2899, the condition device output time is set. This process is a process of storing a predetermined value in the condition device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT). Here, the "predetermined value" is "30 (D)" when the condition device signal is time-divided and output once (method 2) as shown in FIG. Also, as shown in FIG. 289, it is "55 (D)" when the conditional device signal is time-divided and output twice (method 3).
The condition device output time is decremented by "1" at each predetermined cycle (interrupt processing) (timer measurement (FIG. 301) in FIG. 294(b)). Then, in test signal management (FIG. 304 or FIG. 305) of interrupt processing, which will be described later, a conditional device signal corresponding to the conditional device output time is output. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
Here, when "30 (D)" is first stored as the condition device output time (Method 2), "1 (D)" is subtracted in the first timer measurement (FIG. 301) executed thereafter. As a result, it becomes "29(D)", and then proceeds to test signal management (FIGS. 303 and 304). Therefore, when "30 (D)" is first stored as the conditional device output time, the conditional device output time is "29 (D)" in the subsequent first test signal management.
When "55 (D)" is first stored as the condition device output time (Method 3), the same applies to the above. When "55 (D)" is stored, in the first timer measurement executed thereafter, "1 (D)" is subtracted to become "54 (D)", and then test signal management (FIG. 303 and go to FIG. 305). Therefore, when "55 (D)" is first stored as the conditional device output time, the conditional device output time is "54 (D)" in the subsequent first test signal management.

FIG. 298 is a flow chart showing the game end processing in step S2856 in FIG. 294(a). This flowchart is executed after all the reels 31 have stopped.
First, in step S2901, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the game is during 1BB operation. This determination is made by determining whether or not the D2 bit of the operating state flag (_FL_ACTION) is "1". If it is determined that 1BB is in operation, the process proceeds to step S2902, and if it is determined that 1BB is not in operation, the process proceeds to step S2906.

In step S2902, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the game satisfies the conditions for ending the 1BB operation. For example, as shown in the game start set process of FIG. 245 (the thirtieth embodiment), when the 1BB operation symbol is displayed, in step S2718, the obtainable number (for example, "300") at the time of 1BB operation is RWM53. (This process is omitted in FIG. 295.). This obtainable number is decremented each time a game is played and each time a payout is made, and when it becomes "0", it is determined that the 1BB operation end condition is satisfied. Therefore, in step S2902, the obtainable number of sheets during the 1BB operation is determined, and when the number is "0", it is determined that the conditions for ending the 1BB operation are satisfied. If it is determined that the 1BB operation termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2903, and if it is determined that the 1BB operation termination condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2904.
At step S2903, the main control board 50 clears the 1BB operating state flag and the RB operating state flag. This process is a process of updating the D2 bit and the D3 bit to "0" in the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION). Then, the process advances to step S2906.

When the process proceeds from step S2902 to step S2904, it is determined whether or not the game satisfies the condition for ending the RB operation. For example, as shown in the game start set process of FIG. 245 (the thirtieth embodiment), when it is determined in step S2722 that the RB operation has started, the process proceeds to step S2733, and the number of games played during the RB operation (for example, " 2" times) and the number of wins (for example, "2" times) are stored in the RWM 53 . During RB operation, these values are updated (decremented) when the update conditions are met. Then, when at least one of the number of games played and the number of wins during the RB operation becomes "0", it is determined that the conditions for ending the RB operation are satisfied. Therefore, in step S2904, the number of games played or the number of wins during the RB operation is determined, and when at least one of them is "0", it is determined that the condition for ending the RB operation is satisfied. If it is determined that the RB operation termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2905, and if it is determined that the RB operation termination condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2906.

At step S2905, the main control board 50 sets the RB operating state flag to "0". This process is a process of updating the D3 bit to "0" in the operating state flag (_FL_ACTION). Then, the process advances to step S2906.
At step S2906, the main control board 50 determines whether an interrupt process has occurred. This determination is the same processing as in step S2862 in FIG. 295 described above. In step S2906, the process waits until it is determined that interrupt processing has occurred, and when it is determined that interrupt processing has occurred, the process advances to step S2907. In step S2907, the same processing as in step S2906 is executed to wait until interrupt processing occurs, and when it is determined that interrupt processing has occurred, the process advances to step S2908.
By the above process, when the game ends, the standby process (steps S2906 and S2907, also referred to as "wait process") is executed to wait until two interruptions occur. Note that the interrupt process is executed even while the standby process is being executed.

Note that when the RB operating state flag is cleared in step S2905 of FIG. If not satisfied ("Yes" in step S2913), the RB operating state flag is turned on again (step S2914).

In the thirty-eighth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 303 and 304 or 305, which will be described later, a character object signal is output as a test signal. signal (the signal in which the RB state becomes "1") continues to be output. However, when the condition for ending the RB operation is satisfied, the RB operation state flag is cleared (becomes "0"), and in the interrupt processing of steps S2906 and S2907, a signal indicating that the RB is not in operation is used as a test signal (the RB state is "0"). ) is output. Thereafter, when the conditions for ending the 1BB operation are not satisfied, the RB operation state flag becomes "1" again as described above. (a signal that makes the RB state "1") is output.
As a result, the test signal relating to the RB operation can be correctly output to the test firing tester 300 .

Here, if the time during which the RB operating state flag is "0" is too short, when the test signal is output to the test firing tester 300 side, the RB operating state flag will be set at the test firing tester 300 side. It may not be possible to correctly detect that it is "0". Therefore, in the present embodiment, "0" is output as the test signal for the RB operation during the "2" interrupt.
Since the game end processing is the main processing, the main processing is stopped between steps S2906 and S2907. That is, even if the operation switch is operated, the operation is not accepted during this period. Here, if the output time of the test signal related to the RB operation is lengthened, the player can feel that the operation of the operation switch is not attached, that is, that the main process is stopped (freezes). It is thought that it can be felt in

On the other hand, if the standby period is set to "2" between interrupts (4.47 ms) as in the present embodiment, even if the main process is stopped, the player will feel uncomfortable Breaking the rhythm of doing) is considered to be rare. If the main processing is stopped for about "4.47" ms, it is considered that the player hardly feels that the main processing is stopped.
In the thirty-eighth embodiment, the waiting time for interrupt processing is provided "2" times, but the waiting time for interrupt processing is not limited to "1" time, or "3" to "5" times. It may be a standby time for interrupt processing of a certain degree. At this level, it is considered that the player hardly realizes that the main process has stopped.

After steps S2906 and S2907, the process proceeds to step S2908.
At step S2908, the main control board 50 clears the replay operation flag. This process is a process of setting the replay operation state flag (_FL_REPLAY) to "0". In this flowchart, the process of clearing the replay operation state flag is executed regardless of whether or not the replay operation is in progress. A process of clearing the replay operation state flag may be executed on the condition that the game is in operation.

In the next step S2909, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the replay pattern (replay) is (stopped) displayed in the game. This processing is determined by whether or not the D5 bit of the symbol combination display flag (_FL_WIN) is "1". When it is judged that the regame operation pattern is displayed, the process proceeds to step S2910, and when it is judged that the regame operation pattern is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S2911.

At step S2910, the main control board 50 turns on the replay operation flag. This processing is processing for setting the replay operation state flag (_FL_REPLAY) to "1". Then, the process proceeds to step S2911.
At step S2911, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the 1BB operation symbol is (stopped) displayed in the game. This processing is determined by whether or not the D2 bit of the symbol combination display flag (_FL_WIN) is "1". When it is determined that the 1BB operation pattern is displayed, the process proceeds to step S2912, and when it is determined that the 1BB operation pattern is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S2913.
At step S2912, the main control board 50 turns on the 1BB operation flag. This process is a process of setting the D2 bit of the operating state flag (_FL_ACTION) to "1". Then, the process advances to step S2913.

In step S2913, the main control board 50 determines whether the 1BB operating state flag is on (“1”) and the RB operating state flag is off (“0”). This process determines whether the D2 bit is "1" and the D3 bit is "0" in the action status flag (_FL_ACTION). If it is determined that the D2 bit of the operation status flag is "1" and the D3 bit is "0", the process proceeds to step S2914; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2915.

At step S2914, the main control board 50 sets the RB operating state flag. This process is a process of setting the D3 bit in the action status flag (_FL_ACTION) to "1". Then, the process advances to step S2915.
In step S2915, advantageous section clear counter management is executed. This process is a process of updating the advantageous section clear counter, etc., and is a process shown in FIG. 299 to be described later. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

FIG. 299 is a flow chart showing advantageous section clear counter management in step S2915 of FIG. In this embodiment, regardless of whether it is an advantageous section or a non-advantageous section (normal section), the advantageous section clear counter management is executed. However, it may be configured such that it is judged whether or not it is in the advantageous section, and the advantageous section clear counter management is executed only when it is in the advantageous section.
First, in step S2921, the address value of the advantageous section clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR) is stored in the HL register. Therefore, "F022(H)" is stored in the HL register.
In the next step S2922, "1" is subtracted from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register. The subtraction here is, for example, as follows.
"0100 (H)" → "1" subtraction → "00FF (H)"
"0001 (H)" → "1" subtraction → "0000 (H)" (zero flag = 1)
"0000 (H)" → "1" subtraction → "0000 (H)" (carry flag = 1)

As described above, even if "1" is subtracted from "0000(H)", there is no digit reduction, and "0000(H)" is maintained. In this way, no matter what the value before subtraction is, it is one instruction (one step) that only subtracts "1". is unnecessary, and the process of adding the value of the carry flag after the subtraction is also unnecessary. By updating the count value in this way, the time required for updating the count value can be greatly reduced. That is, the process of subtracting the advantageous section clear counter is also the above-mentioned special 2-byte subtraction process. Further, by configuring in this way, it is possible to determine whether or not it is in the advantageous interval from the value of the advantageous interval clear counter, and to determine whether or not the conditions for ending the advantageous interval are satisfied (for example, when the game in the advantageous interval reaches 1500 It is also possible to determine whether or not a game has been executed, whether or not an arbitrary end condition has been satisfied, etc.).

In the next step S2923, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the advantageous section clear counter value before subtraction is "0". This process is determined by whether or not the carry flag set by the subtraction process in step S2922 is "1".
If the carry flag is "1" (the value before subtraction is "0"), the process proceeds to step S2937; if the carry flag is not "1" (the value before subtraction is not "0") The process advances to step S2924. It should be noted that when the carry flag is "1" (when the value before subtraction is "0"), this game is not a game in the advantageous section (this game is a non-advantageous section game (normal section game) is).

At step S2924, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the subtraction result (after subtraction) at step S2922 is "0". This process is determined by whether or not the zero flag set by the subtraction process in step S2922 is "1". That is, it is determined whether or not the value before subtraction was "1".
When the zero flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S2936, and when the zero flag is not "1" (when the subtraction result is not "0"), the process proceeds to step S2925. When the zero flag is "1" (when the subtraction result is "0"), the game in the advantageous section in the current game ends (the next game is the game in the non-advantageous section (the game in the normal section). ) means that

In step S2925, the value of the payout medal buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) is acquired. This process is a process of reading the value of the medal payout number buffer and storing it in the A register.
In the next step S2926, the value of the difference number counter (_CT_MY) is acquired. This process is a process of reading the value of the difference number counter and storing it in the HL register.
In the next step S2727, a process of adding the number of payouts to the difference number counter is executed. This process is a process of adding the A register value (medal payout number buffer) to the HL register value (difference number counter) and storing the value after the addition in the HL register.

Next, the process advances to step S2928 to acquire the value of bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL). This process is a process of reading the value of the number-of-bets data and storing it in the A register.
In the next step S2929, it is determined whether or not the replay operation symbol is displayed in the game. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D5 bit of the symbol combination display flag (_FL_WIN) is "1". When it is judged that the regame operation pattern is displayed, the process proceeds to step S2930, and when it is judged that the regame operation pattern is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S2931.

In step S2930, the number of payouts at the time of display of the replay operation symbol is added to the difference number counter. Here, the number of payouts at the time of replay operation symbol display is the number of bets obtained in step S2928. Therefore, the A register value (bet number data) is added to the HL register value (difference number counter). Then, the process proceeds to step S2931. It should be noted that when the replay operation symbol is displayed, the payout number buffer is "0", so the difference counter does not change even by the process of step S2927.
In step S2931, the number of bets is subtracted from the difference counter. This process is a process of subtracting the A register value from the HL register value and storing the subtraction result in the HL register. Here, when the HL register value is less than "0", the carry flag becomes "1".

In the next step S2932, it is determined whether or not the subtraction result in step S2931 is less than "0". In this process, it is determined whether or not the carry flag has become "1" as a result of the subtraction in step S2931. move on. On the other hand, when the carry flag is not "1" (when the subtraction result is not less than "0"), the process proceeds to step S2934.

In step S2933, a process of clearing (setting to "0") the HL register value is executed. Then, in the next step S2934, the difference counter value is saved. This process is a process of storing the HL register value in the difference number counter (_CT_MY). Therefore, when the process proceeds to step S2934 via step S2933, the difference number counter becomes "0".
In the next step S2935, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the difference number counter exceeds the upper limit. The upper limit value of the difference number counter is set to "2400 (D)" in the thirty-eighth embodiment as in the thirty-first embodiment. In this process, a comparison operation is performed between the HL register value and "2401(D)". In this comparison operation, when the HL register value is larger, the carry flag becomes "0", and when the HL register value is smaller, the carry flag becomes "1". Therefore, when the carry flag is "1" (when the HL register value is smaller), it is determined that the upper limit value is not exceeded, and the processing according to this flowchart ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the upper limit is exceeded (when the carry flag is "0"), the process proceeds to step S2936. When the difference counter exceeds the upper limit value, the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied, as in the thirty-first embodiment.
In step S2936, the RWM 53 initializes (clears) the information (storage area) regarding the advantageous section. Similar to the information described in the thirtieth embodiment, the advantageous section clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR), the advantageous section type flag (_NB_ADV_KND), the difference counter (_CT_MY), and the information shown in FIG. ), the advantageous section LED display flag (_FL_ADV_LED) and the AT game number counter (_CT_ART). Furthermore, there is information on the main game state. As in the thirtieth embodiment, the information about the advantageous section does not include the RT state number (_NB_RT_STS), the LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP), and the like. Specifically, addresses "F011(H)" to "F015(H)" shown in FIG. 284, addresses "F016(H)" to "F021(H)" and "F027(H)" shown in FIG. " and "F028(H)" are not included.

For example, the initialization range of the RWM 53 does not include an area related to timer values (range of addresses "F016(H)" to "F01B(H)").
Assume here that the minimum game time (_TM2_GAME) is initialized. In that case, the minimum playing time becomes “0” due to the end of the advantageous section, and there is a risk that the minimum playing time of 4.1 seconds cannot be guaranteed (1 the game ends).
Also, for example, in FIG. 299, assume that the conditional device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT) is initialized in the case where the conditional device signal is output even after step S2936. In that case, the conditional device output time becomes "0" due to the end of the advantageous section, and the conditional device signal is divided for each time and is being output, but the game is still in progress. Therefore, "00000000 (B)" is output as the condition device signal, and there is a risk that the test firing test device 300 side may determine that there is an abnormality.

Furthermore, the initialization range of the RWM 53 does not include the LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP) (address "F011(H)").
For example, suppose we clear the LED display counter. In that case, the LED display counter becomes "0" due to the end of the advantageous section. Specifically, if the RWM 53 is initialized when the LED display counter is "00000010 (B)", the LED display counter would normally be updated to "00000001 (B)" in the next interrupt process. , the LED display counter becomes "00010000 (B)" even though it is possible to light the LED corresponding to the LED display counter (specifically, the upper digits of the stored number display LED 76). . As a result, the display of the LED whose LED display counter corresponds to "00000001(B)" is delayed, so that it may appear as if it is turned off for a moment.

Next, proceeding to step S2937, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the advantageous section type flag (_NB_ADV_KND) is "0" (normal section). When the advantageous section type flag is "0", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when the advantageous section type flag is not "0", especially when it is determined that the advantageous section type flag is "1" (advantageous section) in this embodiment, the process proceeds to step S2938. It should be noted that the reason why the advantageous interval type flag is "1" at this point is that the player wins the advantageous interval transition lottery in the game (for example, in FIG. When you win the winning number determined by ). It should be noted that it is also possible to determine in advance whether or not to transition to the advantageous section according to the winning number without executing the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section. In a broad sense, these can be referred to as "satisfying the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous section".

In step S2938, an initial value is set in an advantageous zone clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR). This process is a process of setting "1500 (D)" in the advantageous section clear counter. Here, "1500 (D)" is stored at the address indicated by the HL register value. Note that "F022(H)" is set in the HL register in step S2921. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

In the advantageous section clear counter management described above, the number of payouts is first added (step S2927), and then the number of bets is subtracted (step S2931). The reason for this processing is as follows.
For example, assume that the number of bets is "3 (D)" and the number of payouts is "9 (D)" when the difference counter is "2 (D)".
Here, when the number of bets is first subtracted from the difference number counter, it becomes "-1 (D) (actually, "FF (H)")" and the carry flag becomes "1". Then, when adding the number of payouts, "9 (D)" is added from "-1 (D) (actually, "FF (H)")", resulting in "8 (D)" and carry. The flag becomes "1" (indicating that carry occurs). Since the difference number of the game is "+6", the carry flag becomes "1" simply by adding the difference number "6(D)" to the difference number counter "2(D)" before updating. An irregular situation occurs. In other words, the process of step S2932 (whether the subtraction result is less than "0") cannot be determined by whether the carry flag is "1". If the determination is made based on whether or not the carry flag is "1", it will be determined "Yes" in step S2932 even though there is no carry-down, and the difference counter will be initialized in step S2933. It will set the value. The carry flag is set to "1" regardless of whether a carry or a carry occurs as a result of the subtraction.

On the other hand, when the difference number counter is "2 (D)", if the payout number "9 (D)" is added first, the difference number counter becomes "11 (D)", and then the bet number is subtracted. Then, it becomes "8 (D)". In this case, since no carry occurs, the carry flag is "0".
For the above reason, if the number of payouts is first added and then the number of bets is subtracted, the judgment processing in step S2932 can be executed by simple processing using the carry flag.

In addition, in the advantageous section clear counter management of this embodiment, the advantageous section clear counter subtraction process (step S2922) is first executed, and when the value before subtraction is "0" ("Yes" in step S2923) , that is, when it is a non-advantageous section), the process proceeds to step S2937 without executing the update processing of the difference counter (_CT_MY) (steps S2925 to S2935). Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether it is an advantageous section or a non-advantageous section, the advantageous section clear counter management is executed. Processing efficiency is improved by not executing processing. For this reason, the processing order is such that the advantageous section clear counter is subtracted first, and then the difference counter is updated. Of course, if you do not want to increase the processing efficiency (for example, it is determined whether it is in the advantageous section, and if it is in the advantageous section, the subtraction process of the advantageous section clear counter and the update process of the difference counter are executed. If so), it is also possible to execute the process of updating the difference number counter before the process of subtracting the advantageous section clear counter.

FIG. 300 is a flowchart showing power-off processing in step S2951 of FIG. 294(b).
First, in step S2961, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power-off detection signal was turned on in the previous interrupt process. Here, when the voltage becomes a predetermined value or less (5 (V) or less in the example of FIG. 293) by a voltage monitoring device (power failure detection circuit; not shown) provided on the main control board 50, Since a power-off detection signal is input to a predetermined bit of a predetermined input port 51, it is detected whether or not the signal has been input. Furthermore, when the power-off detection signal is turned on, it is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 .
When it is determined that the power-off detection signal is on in the previous interrupt processing, the process proceeds to step S2962, and when it is determined that it is not on, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

At step S2962, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power-off detection signal is on in the current interrupt process. When it is determined that the switch is not on, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is on, the flow advances to step S2963 to wait for reset. When the voltage reaches a predetermined value (recoverable voltage level), a reset signal is output from the voltage monitoring device (power-off detection circuit) provided on the main control board 50, and the state waits for the output of the reset signal. .

FIG. 301 is a flow chart showing the timer measurement shown in step S2952 in FIG. 294(b).
In step S3061, a measurement start timer address is set. Here, the measurement start timer address indicates the reference address. In the thirty-eighth embodiment, "F016(H)" in FIG. 285 is the reference address. Therefore, in step S3061, "F016 (H)" is set in the HL register.

Next, in step S3062, the number of 1-byte timers is set in the B register. The number of 1-byte timers indicates the number of 1-byte timers. As shown in FIG. 285, there are a total of two 1-byte timers, "F016(H)" and "F017(H)". Therefore, here, "2" is set in the B register.

In the next step S3063, the 1-byte timer value is updated. In this process, "1" is subtracted from the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value. For example, when "46 (D)" is stored in "F016 (H)", it becomes "45 (D)". Also, when the result of subtracting "1" causes a carry-down (that is, when the value before subtraction is "0"), "0" is stored.

A specific example is as follows.
(1) Example 1
F016(H)=10(H)
When , subtracting "1" gives
F016(H)=0F(H)
becomes.
(2) Example 2
F016(H)=01(H)
When , subtracting "1" gives
F016(H)=00(H)
becomes.
(3) Example 3
F016(H)=00(H)
When , subtracting "1" gives
F016(H)=00(H)
becomes.

The process then advances to step S3064 to set the next timer address. This process is a process of adding "1" to the HL register value.
In the next step S3065, it is determined whether or not the 1-byte timer measurement has ended. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the B register value and determining whether or not the B register value after the subtraction is "0". If the B register value after the subtraction is not "0", it is determined that the 1-byte timer measurement has not ended.
If it is determined that the 1-byte timer measurement has been completed, the process proceeds to step S3066, and if it is determined that the 1-byte timer measurement has not been completed, the process proceeds to step S3063.
By repeating the above steps S3063 to S3065, "1" is subtracted from all two 1-byte timers (however, as described above, if "0" is stored as the 1-byte timer value, "0" is maintained.).

In step S3066, the number of 2-byte timers is set in the B register. This processing is processing for setting the number of 2-byte timers in FIG. Since there are two 2-byte timers in the thirty-eighth embodiment, "2" is stored in the B register.
In the next step S3067, the 2-byte timer value is updated. In this process, "1" is subtracted from 2-byte data in which the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is the lower digit and the address value indicated by "HL register value+1" is the upper digit.

A specific example is as follows.
(1) Example 1
HL register value = F018 (H) (same below),
F018(H)=05(H)
F019(H)=01(H)
When , subtracting "1" gives
F018(H)=04(H)
F019(H)=01(H)
becomes.

(2) Example 2
F018(H)=00(H)
F019(H)=01(H)
When , subtracting "1" gives
F018(H)=FF(H)
F019(H)=00(H)
becomes.
(3) Example 3
F018(H)=50(H)
F019(H)=00(H)
When , subtracting "1" gives
F018(H)=4F(H)
F019(H)=00(H)
becomes.

(4) Example 4
F018(H)=01(H)
F019(H)=00(H)
When , subtracting "1" gives
F018(H)=00(H)
F019(H)=00(H)
becomes.
(5) Example 5
F018(H)=00(H)
F019(H)=00(H)
When , subtracting "1" gives
F018(H)=00(H)
F019(H)=00(H)
becomes.

In the next step S3068, the next timer address is set. This process adds "1" to the HL register value and then adds "1" to the HL register value. As a result, the HL register value is incremented by "2". In other words, since the address indicated by the HL register value is shifted by two, for example, when "F018(H)" has been specified until then, "F01A(H)" is specified by this operation.
In the next step S3069, it is determined whether or not the 2-byte timer measurement has ended. In this process, "1" is subtracted from the B register value, and when the B register value after the subtraction is not "0", it is determined that the 2-byte timer measurement has not ended. If it is determined that the 2-byte timer measurement has not ended, the process returns to step S3067, and if it is determined that the 2-byte timer measurement has ended, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
By repeating the above steps S3067 to S3069, "1" is subtracted from all two 2-byte timers (however, as described above, if "0" is stored as the 2-byte timer value, "0" is maintained.).
For example, assume that "03(H)" is stored in "F016(H)" and "00(H)" is stored in "F017(H)". At this time, as a result of executing the same special 1-byte subtraction process, "02(H)" is stored in "F016(H)" and "00(H)" is stored in "F017(H)". Become. Similarly, for the 2-byte timer consisting of ``F018(H)'' and ``F019(H)'', ``0010(H)'' and for the 2-byte timer consisting of ``F01A(H)'' and ``F01B(H)'', Assume that "0000(H)" is stored. At this time, as a result of executing the same special 2-byte subtraction process, the 2-byte timer consisting of ``F018(H)'' and ``F019(H)'' has ``000F(H)'', ``F01A(H)'' and `` "0000(H)" is stored in the 2-byte timer consisting of "F01B(H)".

As described above, by continuously arranging the addresses of the 1-byte timers, it is possible to sequentially update the timer values stored in the addresses of the 1-byte timers simply by looping the processing of steps S3063 to S3065.
Similarly, by continuously arranging the addresses of the 2-byte timers, the timer values stored at the addresses of the 2-byte timers can be sequentially updated simply by looping the processing of steps S3067 to S3069. As a result, the program capacity can be reduced in the timer update process.

In addition, the storage area of the 1-byte timer (F016(H) to F017(H)) and the storage area of the 2-byte timer (F018(H) to F01B(H)) are contiguous to store the address in the HL register. Only one processing (step S3061 in FIG. 301) is required, and thereafter, the HL register value is simply incremented by "+1" or "+2" (the HL register value is incremented by "+1" twice). Since it is possible to specify an address to update the timer value, it is possible to reduce the program capacity in the timer update process.
Specifically, the program for storing the address in the HL register is an instruction that requires 3 bytes as the storage area of the ROM 54, but the program for "+1" the HL register value is an instruction that requires only 1 byte as the storage area of the ROM 54. A program that adds 2 to the HL register value is an instruction that requires only 2 bytes as the storage area of the ROM 54 .

Note that the timer measurement is executed regardless of whether or not the interrupt waiting process is being executed in the main process. Therefore, even while the interrupt wait processing of steps S2862 and S2863 in FIG. 295 is being executed, the timer value is decremented by the timer measurement of the interrupt processing. As a result, the minimum game time (_TM2_GAME), for example, is subtracted at predetermined intervals (interrupt processing) even if the main processing is waiting for an interrupt.

FIG. 302 is a flow chart showing the LED display in step S2953 of FIG. 294(b).
In addition, in this flowchart, only the lighting processing of the insertion display LED 79e and the game start display LED 79d is shown, and description of other lighting control is omitted. However, in the LED display, lighting control of other LEDs is also performed as shown in FIG. 149 (22nd embodiment), for example.

In step S2981, the main control board 50 updates the LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP). The LED display counter of the thirty-eighth embodiment is updated by interrupt processing as follows.
00010000 (B)
↓
00001000 (B)
↓
00000100 (B)
↓
00000010 (B)
↓
00000001 (B)
↓
00010000 (B) (back to top)

In the next step S2982, the main control board 50 performs a process of turning off the input display LED 79e and the game start display LED 79d. This process corresponds to step S1541 in FIG. 149, and is a process of turning off the output ports 2 and 3 (see FIGS. 144 and 148A) corresponding to the input display LED 79e and the game start display LED 79d. . By outputting "00000000 (B)" (this data is also called "clear data") from the output ports 2 and 3, the output of the status display LED 79 is temporarily disabled. As a result, when switching the display of the LEDs, it is possible to prevent different LEDs from appearing to light up at the same time (overlaid display) even for a moment (prevention of afterimage). Note that "00000000(B)" may be output only from the output port 2, or "00000000(B)" may be output only from the output port 3.

Next, proceeding to step S2983, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the value of the LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP) is "00010000 (B)". If it is determined to be "00010000(B)", the process advances to step S2984, and if it is determined not to be "00010000(B)", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
Here, in the thirty-eighth embodiment, the lighting timing of the status display LED 79 is when the LED display counter is "00010000 (B)". This point is the same as that shown in FIG. 148(A) (22nd embodiment).

At step S2984, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the input display LED 79e is on. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D4 bit of the LED display data (_PT_STS_LED) is "1". When it is determined that the input display LED 79e is on, the process proceeds to step S2985, and when it is determined that it is not on, the process proceeds to step S2986.

In step S2985, lighting processing of the input display LED 79e is executed. This process outputs a digit 5 signal (00010000(B)) from output port 2 and outputs a segment 1E signal (00010000(B)) from output port 3 (see FIGS. 144 and 148(A)). As a result, the input display LED 79e lights up.
Next, proceeding to step S2986, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the game start display LED 79d is on. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D3 bit of the LED display data (_PT_STS_LED) is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that the game start display LED 79d is on. When it is determined that the game start display LED 79d is on, the process proceeds to step S2987, and when it is determined that it is not on, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S2987, lighting processing of the game start display LED 79d is executed. This processing outputs a digit 5 signal (00010000(B)) from output port 2 and a segment 1D signal (00001000(B)) from output port 3 (see FIGS. 144 and 148(A)). As a result, the game start display LED 79d lights up. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

FIGS. 303-305 are flowcharts showing test signal management in step S2954 in FIG. 294(b). FIG. 304 shows example 1 of the flowchart following FIG. 303, showing a method (method 2) of time-sharing and outputting the conditional device signal once. FIG. 305 shows example 2 of the flowchart following FIG. 303, showing a method (method 3) of time-sharing and outputting the conditional device signal twice.
First, in step S2991, the main control board 50 sets OFF data of the closing request lamp signal. The OFF data of the closing request lamp signal is "00000000 (B)". This data is stored in a predetermined register (eg, A register).

At the next step S2992, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the replay operation state flag (_FL_REPLAY) is on. In this process, the replay operation state flag is read, and when it is not "0", it is determined that the regame operation state flag is ON, and when it is "0", it is determined that the regame operation state flag is not ON. When it is determined that the replay operation state flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S2995, and when it is determined that it is not ON, the process proceeds to step S2993.

At step S2993, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the input display LED 79e is on. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D4 bit of the LED display data (_PT_STS_LED) is "1". When it is determined that the input display LED 79e is on, the process proceeds to step S2994, and when it is determined that it is not on, the process proceeds to step S2995.
In step S2994, ON data of the closing request lamp signal is set. In this embodiment, the ON data of the closing request lamp signal is "01000000 (B)" (6th bit is "1"). An OR operation is performed on this data and the data stored in the predetermined register, and the value after the operation is stored in the predetermined register. Then, the process advances to step S2995. When the data stored in the predetermined register is "00000000(B)", the process of simply storing "01000000(B)", which is the ON data of the turn-on request lamp signal, in the predetermined register. may be This is because in this case, even if the OR operation is omitted, the same result as when the OR operation is performed can be obtained.
As described above, when the replay operation state flag (_FL_REPLAY) is ON, the ON data of the input request lamp signal is not generated, so the input request lamp signal is not output.

In step S2995, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the advantageous section clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR) is "0". When it is determined that the advantageous section clear counter is not "0", the process proceeds to step S2996, and when it is determined to be "0", the process proceeds to step S2997.
In step S2996, ON data of the signal during the advantageous section is set. The ON data of the signal during the advantageous section is "10000000 (B)" (the 7th bit is "1"). An OR operation is performed on this data and the data stored in the predetermined register, and the operation result is stored in the predetermined register.

For example, when the ON data of the input request ramp signal is set in step S2993 and "01000000 (B)" is stored in the predetermined register, the ON data of the signal during the advantageous interval is "10000000 (B)". If there is, "11000000(B)" obtained by ORing "01000000(B)" and "10000000(B)" is stored in the predetermined register. Then, the process advances to step S2998.
On the other hand, in step S2997, OFF data of the signal during the advantageous interval is set. The OFF data of the signal during the advantageous interval is "00000000 (B)". An OR operation is performed on this data and the data stored in the predetermined register, and the operation result is stored in the predetermined register. Then, the process advances to step S2998. Since the OFF data of the signal during the advantageous period is "00000000(B)", the OR operation of this data and the data stored in the predetermined register may be omitted.

In step S2998, it is determined whether or not the replay state operation flag (_FL_REPLAY) is on. This determination is made by reading the value of the replay operation state flag, and when it is "0", it is determined that the regame operation state flag is not ON, and when it is not "0", it is determined that the regame operation state flag is ON. do. When it is determined that the replay operation state flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S2999, and when it is determined to be ON, the process proceeds to step S3000.
In step S2999, off data of the replaying signal is set. The OFF data of the signal during the advantageous interval is "00000000 (B)". An OR operation is performed on this data and the data stored in the predetermined register, and the operation result is stored in the predetermined register. Then, the process proceeds to step S3001. Note that the OR operation may be omitted as in step S2997.

On the other hand, in step S3000, ON data of the replaying signal is set. The ON data of the replaying signal is the value "20 (H)" (00100000 (B)) when the replaying state operation flag (_FL_REPLAY) is ON (see FIG. 284). An OR operation is performed on this data and the data stored in the predetermined register, and the operation result is stored in the predetermined register. For example, when the data stored in the predetermined data is "11000000 (B)", the value "11100000 (B)" obtained by ORing this value and the ON data "00100000 (B)" of the replaying signal )” in the predetermined register. Then, the process proceeds to step S3001.

In step S3001, signal data during the role is set from the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION). This process is a process of reading the data of the operating state flag, executing an OR operation with the data stored in the predetermined register, and storing the operation result in the predetermined register. When the data stored in the predetermined register is, for example, "11100000(B)" mentioned above, and the data of the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) is, for example, "00001100(B)" (1BB and RB in operation), "11101100(B)" obtained by ORing both data is stored in the predetermined register.

Next, when the condition device signal is time-divided and output once (method 2), the flow advances to step S3002 in FIG. 304 to output the data stored in the predetermined register as the test signal. By the above processing, as shown on the right side of step S3002, the 0th to 4th bits are the operating status flag signal, the 5th bit is the replaying signal, the 6th bit is the input request ramp signal, and the 7th bit is the advantageous section. A medium signal test signal is output. After outputting the test signal in step S3006, the predetermined register is cleared.
Next, proceeding to step S3003, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the replay state identification information flag (_FL_RT_INF) is on. When the replay state identification information flag is "0", it is determined that it is not ON, and the process proceeds to step S3006. On the other hand, when the replay state identification information flag is other than "0", it is determined that it is on, and the process proceeds to step S3004.

In step S3004, replay state identification signal data is set. This process is a process of reading the data of the RT state number (_NB_RT_STS) and storing it in the predetermined register. For example, when the current RT is RT1, the RT state number (_NB_RT_STS) is, for example, "00000001 (B)", so this data is read and stored in the predetermined register. Then, in step S3011, the data stored in the predetermined register is output as a replay state identification signal. This completes the processing according to this flowchart.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the replay state identification signal is not ON in step S3003 and the process proceeds to step S3005, the main control board 50 reads data of the conditional device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT), and according to the value of the conditional device output time , the process proceeds to steps S3006 to S3008. For example, when the condition device output time is a value of "29 (D)" to "25 (D)" or "0 (D)", the process proceeds to step S3006, and the data "00000000 (B)" is sent to the condition device signal. to set. "0" is output as the condition device signal for the signal output during [1] in FIG.
Here, the conditional device output time is between 5 interrupts (11.175 ms) and has a value of "29 (D)" to "25 (D)". As a result, it is possible to output "00000000 (B)" as the condition device signal for a minimum of 10 ms, as indicated by [1] in FIG. Therefore, after outputting the replay state identification signal, the condition device signal "00000000 (B)" is output for 5 interrupts (11.175 ms). It is possible to accurately grasp that it has been switched to the conditional device signal.
Since the main process continues even while the condition device signal "00000000(B)" is being output, the game is not delayed.

Also, when the condition device output time is between "24 (D)" and "13 (D)", the process advances to step S3007 to set the data of the accessory condition device signal.
Here, when setting the data of the role product condition device signal, the 0 to 5 bits of the role product condition device number are 0 to 5 bits, the 6 bit is "0", and the 7 bit is "1". data is stored in the predetermined register.

Furthermore, when the condition device output time is between "12 (D)" and "1 (D)", the process advances to step S3008 to set winning and replay condition device signal data.
Here, when setting the data of the winning and replay condition device signal, the 0 to 5 bits of the winning and replay condition device number are 0 to 5 bits, the 6th bit is "1", and the 7th bit is "0". ” is stored in the predetermined register.
Then, each advances to step S3009 to output the condition device signal as the test signal.

On the other hand, after step S3001 in FIG. 303, if the method (method 3) is to time-divide and output the conditional device signal twice, the process proceeds to step S3002 in FIG. Steps S3002 to S3004 are the same as steps S3002 to S3004 in FIG.
If it is determined in step S3003 that the replay state identification information flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S3010.
In step S3010, the main control board 50 reads the data of the conditional device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT), and proceeds to steps S3011 to S3015 according to the value of the conditional device output time. For example, when the conditional device output time is a value of "54 (D)" to "49 (D)" or "0 (D)", the process proceeds to step S3011, and the data of "00000000 (B)" is used as the conditional device signal. to set. Then, the process advances to step S3009 to output the data as a condition device signal. "0" is output as the condition device signal for the signal output during [1] in FIG.
Here, the conditional device output time is between 6 interrupts (13.41 ms), which is between "54 (D)" and "49 (D)". As a result, it is possible to output "00000000 (B)" as the condition device signal for a minimum of 10 ms, as indicated by [1] in FIG. Therefore, after outputting the re-gaming state identification signal, "00000000 (B)" is output as the condition device signal for 6 interrupts (13.41 ms). It is possible to accurately grasp that it has been switched to the conditional device signal.
Since the main process continues even while the condition device signal "00000000(B)" is being output, the game is not delayed.

Also, when the conditional device output time is between "48(D)" and "37(D)", the process advances to step S3012 to set the lower data of the accessory conditional device signal as the conditional device signal.
Here, when setting the lower data of the role product condition device signal, the 0 to 5 bits of the role product condition device number are 0 to 5 bits, the 6 bit is "0", and the 7 bit is "1". data is stored in the predetermined register.
Also, when the condition device output time is between "36 (D)" and "25 (D)", the process advances to step S3013 to set the lower data of the winning and replay condition device signal as the condition device signal.
Here, when setting the lower data of the winning and replay condition device signal, the 0 to 5 bits of the winning and replay condition device number are 0 to 5 bits, the 6 bit is "1", and the 7 bit is " 0” is stored in the predetermined register.

Furthermore, when the condition device output time is between "24 (D)" and "13 (D)", the process proceeds to step S3014, and the upper data of the accessory condition device signal is set as the condition device signal.
Here, when setting the upper data of the role product condition device signal, the 6th to 11th bits of the role product condition device number are set to the 0th to 5th bits, the 6th bit is "0", and the 7th bit is "1". data is stored in the predetermined register.

Furthermore, when the condition device output time is between "12 (D)" and "1 (D)", the process proceeds to step S3015, and the upper data of the winning and replay condition device signal is set as the condition device signal.
Here, when setting the upper data of the winning and replay condition device signal, the 0 to 5 bits are the 6 to 11 bits of the winning and replay condition device number, the 6th bit is "1", and the 7th bit is " 0” is stored in the predetermined register.
Then, each advances to step S3009 to output the condition device signal as the test signal.

In FIG. 304, "0" is output as the conditional device signal (step S3006. Here, except when the conditional device output time is "0"), as described above, five interrupts ie, "2.235 ms x 5 times = 11.175 ms".
Also, the time when the accessory condition device signal is output (step S3007) is between 12 interrupts, so it is "2.235 ms×12 times=26.82 ms".
Furthermore, the winning and replay condition device signal is output (step S3008) for 26.82 ms because it is between 12 interrupts like the accessory condition device signal.
Therefore, the hold time of [1] (10 ms minimum), the ON time of [2] and [3] (20 ms minimum), and the hold time of [4] and [5] (10 ms minimum) shown in FIG. is.

Similarly, in FIG. 305, "0" is output as the condition device signal (step S3011. Except when the condition device output time becomes "0"), as described above, six interrupts 2.235 ms×6 times=13.41 ms.
In addition, the lower data of the accessory condition device signal (step S3012), the lower data of the winning and replay condition device signal (step S3013), the upper data of the winning and replay condition device signal (step S3014), the upper data of the winning and replay condition device signal Since the data (step S3015) is output between 12 interrupts, it is "2.235 ms×12 times=26.82 ms".
Therefore, the hold time of [1] (10 ms minimum), the ON time of [2] and [3] (20 ms minimum), and the hold time of [4] and [5] (10 ms minimum) shown in FIG. is.

<Modification 1 of the 38th embodiment>
FIG. 306 is a flowchart showing modification 1 of the thirty-eighth embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. In FIG. 306, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG.
In FIG. 306, it is determined at step S2929 whether or not the replay operation symbol is displayed, and when it is determined that the regame operation symbol is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S2931, and the bet number is subtracted. In this way, the subsequent processing when it is determined that the replay operation symbol is not displayed is the same as that of the thirty-eighth embodiment (FIG. 299).
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2929 that the replay operation symbol has been displayed, the process proceeds to step S2935.

Therefore, in this case, steps S2930 to S2934 are skipped as shown in FIG. 299 (thirty-eighth embodiment). Specifically, when the replay operation symbol is displayed, the number of payouts (actually the number of bets) is not added and the number of bets is not subtracted. Therefore, it is unnecessary to determine whether the subtraction result is less than "0", and it is unnecessary to store the difference counter (_CT_MY).
In the thirty-eighth embodiment of FIG. 299, when the replay operation pattern is displayed, the number of bets is added as the number of payouts in step S2930, and the number of bets is subtracted in step S2931. For example, when the prescribed number of the game is "3", the process of adding "3" as the number of payouts and subtracting "3" as the number of bets is performed.
On the other hand, in Modification 1 of the 38th embodiment, these processes (addition of the number of payouts and subtraction of the number of bets) are eliminated. As a result, it is possible to simplify the calculation when displaying the replay operation symbols.
It should be noted that the process of step S2935 is executed even when the determination in step S2929 is "Yes". By doing so, even if an abnormal value is stored in the difference counter due to noise or the like at the end of the game, the result of step S2935 is "Yes", and the advantage section can be ended. . On the other hand, if such confirmation is unnecessary, the processing of this flowchart may be terminated.

<Modification 2 of the 38th embodiment>
FIG. 307 is a flowchart of game start processing showing Modification 2 of the 38th embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 295 of the 38th embodiment.
In FIG. 295 (thirty-eighth embodiment), after the replay state identification information flag (_FL_RT_INF) is turned on in step S2861, in steps S2862 and S2863, standby processing is performed until interrupt processing is executed twice. This is because, as shown in FIG. 287, after the replay state identification information is output at the start of the game, a set-up time of 2 ms or more is set before turning on the input request lamp signal or the start possible lamp signal. is. Specifically, when the closing display LED 79e is turned on in step S2868 in FIG. 295, a closing request lamp signal is output in subsequent interrupt processing (steps S2993 and S2994 in FIG. 303).
On the other hand, in the modification 2 of the thirty-eighth embodiment, the output of the test signal is controlled by the timer value without waiting for two interrupt processes.

As shown in FIG. 307, in step S2941 (instead of steps S2862 and S2863 in FIG. 295), the main control board 50 sets "2" as the test signal timer value. Although not shown, the RWM 53 is provided with a storage area for storing the test signal timer value.
Also, during the interrupt process of FIG. 294(b), the test signal timer value is subtracted in timer measurement in step S2952. Therefore, after the test signal timer value "2" is set in step S2941, the test signal timer value is updated to "1" in the next interrupt process, and the test signal timer value is set to "0" in the next interrupt process. Updated.

FIG. 308 is a flow chart showing test signal management in modification 2 of the thirty-eighth embodiment, and is a flow chart corresponding to FIG. 303 of the thirty-eighth embodiment. Note that the processing after step S3001 in FIG. 308 is the same as in FIG. 304 or 305 . In FIG. 308, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 303, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.
When the OFF data of the closing request lamp signal is set in step S2991, the process proceeds to step S3021.

In step S3021, the main control board 50 determines whether the test signal timer value is "0". When it is determined that the test signal timer value is not "0", the process proceeds to step S2995. Therefore, if the test signal timer value is not "0", the ON data of the closing request lamp signal is not set in step S2994. As a result, the closing request lamp signal is not turned on (not output).

In FIG. 307, when the replay state identification information flag is turned on at step S2861, the data of the replay state identification signal is set at step S3004 of FIG. In the next interrupt process, a replay state identification signal is output (step S3009).
However, if the test signal timer value is not "0", the ON data of the closing request lamp signal is not set in step S2994 in FIG. 308, so the closing request lamp signal is not output. The input request ramp signal is output when the test signal timer value becomes "0", that is, after two interrupts are executed after the test signal timer value is set.
Therefore, as in the thirty-eighth embodiment, after the replay state identification signal is output and the set-up time elapses, the input request lamp signal can be output (FIG. 287).

Also, when the automatic bet is made in the current game based on the stop display of the replay operation symbol in the previous game, the input request lamp signal is not output, and the game start display LED 79d in FIG. 296 is turned on. After that (after step S2887), a start ready ramp signal is output (FIG. 287).
Therefore, even in such a case, the startable lamp signal must be turned on after the set-up time has elapsed since the replay state identification signal was turned on.

Therefore, after the replay state identification information flag (_FL_RT_INF) is turned on (step S2861 in FIG. 295), a setup time (for example, at least 2ms) to elapse.
Alternatively, the reason why the start possible lamp signal is turned on (the game start display LED 79d is turned on) immediately after the start of the game is when the re-game operation pattern is displayed in the previous game, so step It is also possible to set the processing of S2866 to take 2 ms (or longer).

FIG. 309 is a flowchart showing an example of standby processing that does not use interrupt processing, and is processing showing an example of alternatives to steps S2862 and S2863 in FIG. available.).
In FIG. 295, in steps S2862 and S2863, the waiting process is executed by waiting for interrupt processing. However, not limited to this, it is also possible to execute standby processing that does not use interrupt processing.
In the example of FIG. 309, it is assumed that the clock frequency of the main CPU 55 is 16 MHz. In this case, the control time per state is
1/16M=0.0625μs
becomes.

In FIG. 309, in step S3051, the standby time is set in the HL register. The standby time set here is assumed to be "2666 (D)". It takes 10 states to set "2666(D)" in the HL register.
Next, in step S3052, "1" is subtracted from the standby time (HL register value). It takes 4 states to decrement the HL register value by "1".
Next, proceeding to step S3053, it is determined whether or not the waiting time (HL register value) has become "0". When the HL register value is not "0", the TZ flag (second zero flag) is "0".

Therefore, the determination here is whether or not the TZ flag is "0". When it is determined that the TZ flag is "0" (the HL register value is not "0"), the process returns to step S3052, and when it is determined that the TZ flag is not "0" (the HL register value is "0") terminates the standby process.
Here, eight states are required to determine that the TZ flag is "0" (the HL register value is not "0"). On the other hand, seven states are required to determine that the TZ flag is not "0" (the HL register value is "0").

From the above, the number of states required to reach the determination that the TZ flag is not "0" (the HL register value is "0") is
10+(4+8)×2665+(4+7)=32001
becomes.
Therefore,
32001×0.0625 μs=2.0000625 ms
becomes.

As a result, it takes about 2 ms from the start of the process of step S3051 to the determination of "Yes" in step S3053, so a standby process of 2 ms can be provided. Therefore, if this processing is performed twice, a setup time equivalent to that of steps S2862 and S2863 in FIG. 295 can be provided without using interrupt processing.

Although the thirty-eighth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) Although the output of the signal during the advantageous interval is executed based on the value of the advantageous interval clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR), it is not limited to this. For example, the RWM 53 may be provided with and stored in the RWM 53 with "advantageous interval signal data" indicating whether or not to turn on the signal during the advantageous interval. Then, in step S2995 in FIG. 303, it is determined whether or not the signal data during the advantageous section is "1", and if it is "1", ON data of the signal during the advantageous section is set.

(2) The input request lamp signal can also be output according to whether the blocker 45 is on or off. When the blocker 45 is on, medals can be inserted, so the insertion request lamp signal is turned on. When the blocker 45 is off, medals cannot be inserted, so the insertion request lamp signal is turned off.
As a result, for example, when the number of bets is the maximum specified number "3" and the number of credits is the upper limit number "50", the blocker 45 is turned off (step S2884 in FIG. 296). Turn off the lamp signal.

In addition, when the number of bets is the maximum prescribed number "3" and the number of credits is the upper limit number "50", when the settlement process is executed by operating the settlement switch 46, an input request is made again. The ramp signal may be turned on, or the closing request ramp signal may be kept off.
Also, when the start switch 41 is operated (when it is detected that the reel start switch signal is on), the blocker 45 is turned off (step S2893 in FIG. 297), so the closing request lamp signal is turned off.

(3) The standby process shown in steps S2906 and S2907 in FIG. 298 is uniformly executed in the thirty-eighth embodiment, but it is not limited to this, and may be executed only when the role product is activated or when the role product is terminated. Alternatively, it may be executed only when a specific role product operates or when a specific role product operation ends (for example, when RB operation ends).

(4) In FIG. 298, when the game is a replay, the replay operation state flag (_FL_REPLAY) is cleared at step S2908. However, when the regame operation pattern is stopped in the game, the regame operation state flag (_FL_REPLAY) is turned on again in step S2910.
Here, after the interrupt processing occurs in step S2907, the next interrupt processing is set to occur after step S2910.

Therefore, when the game is a replay, the replay operation state flag (_FL_REPLAY) is ON at step S2907, so the replaying signal is set at step S3000 in FIG. In addition, in the interrupt processing subsequent to the interrupt processing in step S2907, since the replay operation state flag (_FL_REPLAY) is turned on in step S2910 in FIG. 298, the replaying signal is set in step S3000 in FIG. be done.
In this way, when the re-game operation pattern continues in a plurality of games, the re-game signal is maintained on without being turned off between the games.

As described above, when the replay operation pattern continues in a plurality of games, the replaying signal remains ON.
On the other hand, the replay display LED 79f is turned off in the game end processing (game end check processing) and turned on in the game start processing (game start set processing) as described above, so that the interrupt processing is executed during this period. , when the LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP) is "00010000" (at the lighting timing of the status display LED 79), the replay display LED 79f does not light. Therefore, even if the replay is continuously activated in a plurality of games, the replay display LED 79f may appear to be extinguished for a moment. shall be referred to as "lighting").
In particular, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 142 and 148, digits 1a, 2a, 3a, 4a, and 5a are theoretically lit only once every five interrupts (dynamic lighting). ), such cases are also included in "lighting".

However, the replay display LED 79d is not limited to this, and the replay display LED 79d may continue to light up when the replay operation state continues over a plurality of games.
In order to do this, after the replay display LED 79f is turned off, it is necessary to prevent interrupt processing from entering before it is turned on again.

(5) The timer values of the RWM 53 are stored in the 1-byte timer storage area first and then in the 2-byte timer storage area in order of address, but this is not restrictive. may be provided with a 1-byte timer storage area.
For example, instead of FIG.
F016 (H) and F017 (H): Minimum game time (_TM2_GAME)
F018 (H) and F019 (H): Game standby display time (_TM2_BACK_OFF)
F01A (H): Condition device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT)
F01B (H): Reel stop acceptance waiting time (_TM1_STOP)
may be

In this case, there are the following two methods for timer subtraction.
As a first method, "F016 (H)" (reference address) is set in the first step S3061 in FIG. 301 for timer address setting. Next, the processing of steps S3066 to S3069 is executed. After the processing of step S3069 ends, the processing of steps S3062 to S3065 is executed.

As a second method, "F01B(H)" (reference address) is set in the timer address setting in the first step S3061. Then, in steps S3062 to S3065, update processing of the 1-byte timer is executed. Here, in the "next timer address set" in step S3064, "1" is subtracted from the HL register value.
When the process proceeds from step S3065 to S3066, 2-byte timer update processing is executed in steps S3066 to S3069. Here, in the "next timer address set" in step S3068, "2" is subtracted from the HL register value.
The above method can also correctly update the 1-byte timer and the 2-byte timer.

Furthermore, although the arrangement of RWM 53 is the same as in FIG. 285, it is also possible to start with updating the 2-byte timer.
Specifically, in FIG. 301, in step S3061, "F01A" is set as the reference address. Next, the flow advances to steps S3066 to S3069 to update the 2-byte timer. However, in the "next timer address set" of step S3068, "2" is subtracted from the HL register value.
After completing step S3069, the process proceeds to step S3062. Then, the 1-byte timer is updated in steps S3062 to S3065. However, in the "next timer address set" of step S3064, "1" is subtracted from the HL register value.
Such a method can also correctly update the 1-byte timer and the 2-byte timer.
Although two 1-byte timers and two 2-byte timers are provided in this embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and any number of 1-byte timers and 2-byte timers may be provided.

(6) As shown in the first embodiment (FIG. 38), the twenty-sixth embodiment (FIG. 181), etc., the slot machine 10
1) Advantageous section ratio 2) Continuous role ratio (6000 times)
3) Role ratio (6000 times)
4) Consecutive accessory ratio (cumulative)
5) Role ratio (cumulative)
Each ratio of is displayed.
However, instead of "1) Advantageous section ratio", or as the sixth item in addition to the ratio of the above five items, "instruction role ratio (total)"("instruction role ratio (total)") ) may be calculated and displayed.
In addition, in the case of setting the instructing role material ratio instead of the advantageous section ratio, it is sufficient to execute the calculation and display of the instructing role material ratio, and the calculation and display of the advantageous section ratio are unnecessary. The advantageous section ratio may not be calculated, but may be displayed (displayed as "00").

Here, the "instruction role ratio" is the sum of the number of payouts when the role is activated and the number of payouts in the instruction function operating game (meaning "informative game"; the same shall apply hereinafter). is the value divided by In a slot machine that does not have an accessory, the "instruction role ratio" is a value obtained by dividing the number of payouts in the instruction function operating game (informative game) by the total number of payouts.
Also, as in the twenty-sixth embodiment, when a value below the decimal point is generated as a result of the calculation of the ratio, the value below the decimal point is discarded.
Furthermore, the "number of payouts in the instruction function activation game" is based on the operation of the stop switch 42 in accordance with the pressing order displayed by the operation of the instruction function (for example, nine bells in the first embodiment). wins, "9" is added to the instructed role product counter (total) and the total payout (total) counter, which will be described later.

On the other hand, in the instruction function activation game, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a different pressing order than the displayed pressing order, and a low-level bell (one bell in the first embodiment) wins, the instruction accessory "1" is added to the counter (cumulative) and the total number of payouts (cumulative) counter.
Similarly, in the instruction function operation game, when the winning combination is missed (when the combination is not won) due to operating the stop switch 42 in a different pressing order than the displayed pressing order, the number of payouts is not added (or Execute the process of adding "0".). In other words, the values of the instructed accessory counter (cumulative) and the total number of payouts (cumulative) counter are the same as the values stored in the previous game.

In the first embodiment, only the push order bell is provided and the push order irrelevant bell is not provided. However, the push order irrelevant bell may be provided. A bell regardless of pressing order can stop and display a combination of symbols that will pay out a predetermined number (for example, the same number as when winning a high-level bell when winning the bell in the pressing order) regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is operated. It is a role to do.
Here, when the bell regardless of pressing order is won, there are cases where the pressing order is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 in the same manner as in the instruction function operating game, and where the pressing order is not displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 . Then, when the winning number display LED 78 displays the correct pressing order (whichever pressing order is displayed, the correct pressing order is displayed) at the time of winning the bell regardless of the pressing order, the instruction role counter (cumulative) and the total The number of payouts in the game is added to the number of payouts (total) counter (these counter values are updated).

On the other hand, when winning the bell regardless of pressing order, when the winning number display LED 78 does not display the correct pressing order (instructing function is not activated), the instruction accessory counter (total) is not updated. When the bell is won in any order of pushing and the bell in any order of pushing wins, the value corresponding to the number of payouts of the bell in any order of pushing is added to (updated) the total number of payouts (cumulative) counter. In this case, the sub-control board 80 may notify the correct key pressing order by image or sound.

Also, the instructed role product ratio (total) can be, for example, "7P.") as an identification segment (identification information) (see FIG. 181 (26th embodiment)). Therefore, when the instructed role ratio (total) is "55", "7P.55" is displayed on the role ratio monitor. Then, as in the twenty-sixth embodiment, when the instructed role product ratio (total) exceeds a specific value (for example, "70"), the ratio segment is blinked. Also, when the total number of games played is less than the reference number of games (for example, 175000 games), the identification segment is blinked (see FIG. 184).

In addition, the instruction role material ratio and other ratios may be calculated and displayed for each set value, but may be calculated and displayed as a sum without being divided for each set value.
If the ratio "for each set value" is displayed, each ratio in the game (cumulative value) with the set value 1, each ratio in the game (cumulative value) with the set value 2, . . . It refers to all of the ratios (thus, 36 in total) in the game (cumulative value) with a set value of 6.

Further, when calculating and displaying the instructed accessory ratio, the "total payout (cumulative) counter", "continuous accessory payout (cumulative) counter", "accessory In addition to the payout (cumulative) counter, an ʻinstruction part (cumulative) counter` is provided. In the example of FIG. 183, the "total payout (cumulative) counter", "continuous accessory payout (cumulative) counter", and "accessory payout (cumulative) counter" are all 3-byte storage areas. , the "instruction role (cumulative) counter" may also be a 3-byte storage area. However, it is not limited to this, and may be, for example, a 4-byte storage area.

Also, when the "total payout (cumulative) counter" reaches the upper limit value (in the case of a 3-byte storage area, when it becomes "FFFFFF (H)" (3 bytes full)), in other words, when the In 183, when the D1 bit (payout number upper limit flag) of the count upper limit flag (_SF_LIMIT_CNT) becomes "1", not only the "total payout (cumulative) counter" is updated, but also the "continuous accessory payout (cumulative) Counter", "Accessory payout (cumulative) counter", and "Instructed Accessory (cumulative) counter" are also suspended.
On the other hand, in FIG. 183, even if the D0 bit (game count upper limit flag) of the count upper limit flag (_SF_LIMIT_CNT) is "1", if the D1 bit (payout number upper limit flag) is not "1", The "total payout (cumulative) counter", "continuous accessory payout (cumulative) counter", "accessory payout (cumulative) counter", and "instructed accessory (cumulative) counter" are continuously updated.

(7) As shown in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) switches display items about every five seconds. is memorized, and when the power is turned on, the display of the item displayed immediately before is restored.
Here, when the power is turned on, a process for confirming that there is no segment abnormality (defect) in each LED (digits 6 to 9) of the management information display LED 74 may be executed. For example, after the power is turned on, for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), a process of lighting all the segments (processing of displaying "8888") is executed to indicate that there is no segment lighting failure, Return to ratio display. At this time, the DP segment may be configured to be illuminated at the same time (therefore, "8.8.8.8." is displayed), but the DP segment is configured not to be illuminated. good too.

(8) FIGS. 57 to 59 (fourth embodiment) show an example of outputting the external signal 2 indicating that the AT is in progress as the external signal.
On the other hand, as shown in the thirty-second embodiment, there are cases where the advantageous section display LED (section indicator) 77 does not light up even if the advantageous section is entered.
In this way, when the advantageous interval display LED 77 is not lit after shifting to the advantageous interval, the external signal indicating that the AT is in progress is not output even during the AT, and after the advantageous interval indication LED 77 is lit, Outputs an external signal indicating that AT is in progress.
If an external signal indicating that the AT is in progress is output before the advantageous interval display LED 77 lights up, the equipment in the hall (external) will be the first to be able to recognize that the advantageous interval (AT) is in progress. This is to prevent this.

(9) In the flowcharts of the thirty-eighth embodiment (including modifications), the content was explained from the viewpoint of the output of the test signal. This program will still run after
For example, in step S2881 in FIG. 296, it is determined whether or not the input switch signal is on. Actually, it is determined whether or not the insertion of medals (bet or credit) has been detected. When it is detected that a medal has been inserted, the determination is "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S2882.

Also, in FIG. 296, in step S2888, it is determined whether or not the reel start switch signal has been turned on. Actually, it is determined whether or not the operation of the start switch 41 has been detected. Then, when the operation of the start switch 41 is detected, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
Furthermore, the test signal management of interrupt processing (FIGS. 303, 304 or 305) is executed even after the slot machine 10 is installed in the hall. Since the slot machine 10 installed in the hall is not actually electrically connected to the test-firing tester 300 , no test signal is output to the test-firing tester 300 . However, by executing the test signal management of the interrupt process, the process for transmitting the test signal is executed for each interrupt process.

(10) In the present embodiment, the slot machine 10 is taken as an example of a game machine. (So-called "pachi-slot machines"), for example, casino machines and sealed game machines that do not use medals as game media (medal-less machines, controlled game machines) can be done. Note that the game machine also includes an enclosed game machine.

Here, an enclosed game machine (medal-less game machine) can eliminate, for example, a medal payout device (a unit including a hopper 35, a hopper motor 36, and a payout sensor 37). Also, the medal slot 43 and the medal selector can be eliminated. Then, all the electronic medals (electronic game media) granted by winning a winning combination are stored in the stored number display LED 76 . In this case, it is conceivable that the stored number display LED 76 is composed of, for example, five digits (up to "99,999" electronic medals can be stored).
The thirty-eighth embodiment can also be applied to such casino machines and sealed gaming machines (medalless gaming machines, management gaming machines).
(11) The thirty-eighth embodiment and the various modifications described above (including the contents of the first to thirty-seventh embodiments) are not limited to being implemented independently, and can be implemented in combination as appropriate. is.

<39th Embodiment>
Next, the thirty-ninth embodiment will be described. The thirty-ninth embodiment is an invention relating to advantageous section clear counter management (corresponding to FIGS. 299 and 306 in the thirty-eighth embodiment). In the thirty-ninth embodiment, the data stored in the RWM 53 are assumed to be the same as in the thirty-eighth embodiment (FIGS. 284 and 285). Also, the flowcharts other than the advantageous section clear counter management are the same as those of the thirty-eighth embodiment.
FIG. 310 is a flow chart showing example 1 of advantageous section clear counter management of the thirty-ninth embodiment, and is a flow chart corresponding to FIG. 299 of the thirty-eighth embodiment. In FIG. 310, steps that perform the same processing as in FIG. 299 are assigned the same step numbers, and descriptions thereof are omitted. Further, in FIG. 310 and FIGS. 311 to 313 described later, the step numbers of the processes different from those of the thirty-eighth embodiment or the processes different in order from those of the thirty-eighth embodiment are underlined.

The thirty-ninth embodiment includes a difference number counter as in the thirty-first and thirty-eighth embodiments. Here, the difference number counter will be explained again.
The difference number counter does not simply store the accumulated value of the difference number data itself, but stores the "value corresponding to" the accumulated value of the difference number data. Therefore, "accumulated value of difference number data ≠ difference number counter value".
Specifically, as shown in steps S3061 and S2933 of FIG. An initial value of "0 (H)" is set to the number counter value. In this way, the difference counter value never becomes negative, and the minimum value of the difference counter is "0 (H)".
During the non-advantageous section, the difference counter value "0 (H)" is maintained.
On the other hand, the difference counter value in the advantageous interval is determined based on the reference (“0”) of “when the number of medals acquired by the player decreases the most” when viewed through the entire advantageous interval, and the “maximum increase” from that reference. It indicates the number of differences up to "when".

310 differs from FIG. 299 (thirty-eighth embodiment) in step S3061. Other than that, it is the same as FIG.
Both FIG. 299 (38th embodiment) and FIG. 310 (39th embodiment) are common.
A register value=bet number data HL register value=difference number counter value.

Then, in step S2931, in order to subtract the number of bets, the A register value is subtracted from the HL register value, and the subtraction result is stored in the HL register. Note that when the HL register value is less than "0" in the subtraction in step S2931, the carry flag becomes "1".
Here, in step S2932 of FIG. 299, which is the thirty-eighth embodiment described above, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction in step S2931 is "0". In step S2932, it is determined whether or not the carry flag has become "1" as a result of the subtraction in step S2931. If the carry flag has become "1", it is determined that the subtraction result is less than "0". It was something to do.

In contrast, in the thirty-ninth embodiment, the calculation result in step S2931 is determined without referring to the value of the carry flag. Specifically, the following processing is executed.
In FIG. 310, after step S2931, in step S3061, it is determined whether or not the calculation result of step S2931 is less than "0". In this step S3061, the result of the operation in step S2931 is "0" depending on whether or not the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register (register that stores the upper digits) value is "1" among the HL register values. Determine whether or not it is less than

For example, in step S2931, the data before subtracting the number of bets is
A register value (bet number data) = 03 (H)
HL register value (difference number counter value) = 0000 (H)
Suppose that In this case, when the subtraction in step S2931 is executed,
HL register value = FFFD (H)
becomes.
therefore,
H register value = FF (H) (1111/1111 (B))
L register value = FD (H) (1111/1101 (B))
becomes.
Note that "/" indicates a delimiter for every 4 bits in binary notation.

The above example is for "HL register = 0000 (H)", but if HL register value ≠ "0000 (H)" and "A register value > HL register value", for example:
A register value = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0001 (H)
When the subtraction in step S2931 is executed,
HL register value = FFFE (H)
becomes.
therefore,
H register value = FF (H) (1111/1111 (B))
L register value = FE (H) (1111/1110 (B))
becomes.

Furthermore, when HL register value ≠ "0000 (H)" and "A register value < HL register value", for example, first,
A register value = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0100 (H) (256 (D))
When the subtraction in step S2931 is executed,
HL register value = 00FD (H)
becomes.
therefore,
H register value = 00 (H) (0000/0000 (B))
L register value = FD (H) (1111/1101 (B))
becomes.

Secondly,
A register value = 03 (H)
HL register value = 00FF (H) (255 (D))
When the subtraction in step S2931 is executed,
HL register value = 00FC (H)
becomes.
therefore,
H register value = 00 (H) (0000/0000 (B))
L register value = FC (H) (1111/1100 (B))
becomes.

Furthermore, thirdly,
A register value = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0960 (H) (2400 (D))
When the subtraction in step S2931 is executed,
HL register value = 095D (H)
becomes.
therefore,
H register value = 09 (H) (0000/1001 (B))
L register value = 5D (H) (0101/1101 (B))
becomes.

On the other hand, the upper limit value of the difference number counter is "2400 (D)" as in the thirty-first embodiment. Here, "2400 (D)" is
"0000/1001/0110/0000 (B)"
is.
Since the upper limit value of the difference counter is "2400 (D)", when a value exceeding "2400 (D)" is stored in the difference counter, it is determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied. A difference number counter is initialized (steps S2935 and S2936 in FIGS. 299 and 310).

For example, at the end of the game, the difference counter value reached "2400 (D)", but since it did not exceed "2400 (D)", it was determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section were not satisfied, and the next game was started. do. In the next game, the difference increases most when the number of bets is "1" and the number of payouts is "15 (D)". ”.
Therefore, the difference number counter value in this case is "2414 (D)".
Here, "2414 (D)" is
"0000/1001/0110/1110 (B)"
is.

Also, when the difference counter value reaches "2414 (D)", it exceeds "2400 (D)", so it is initialized in the game and becomes "0 (D)".
As described above, the maximum value that the difference number counter can take during the game is "2414 (D)", that is, "0000/1001/0110/1110 (B)".

In step S2931 of FIG. 310, when the HL register value is "2414 (D)",
H register value = 0000/1001 (B)
L register value = 0110/1110 (B)
, and the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value is "0".
Therefore, the D7 bit of the H register value is always "0" when the HL register value, that is, the difference counter value is in the range of "0(D)" to "2414(D)".

Therefore, the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value is always "0" and never becomes "1", except for the case of a carry down, which will be described later.
In order for the D7 bit of the H register value to become "1", the difference number counter value must be "32768 (D)". The advantageous section does not continue until it is reached.

On the other hand, as described above, before subtracting the number of bets in step S2931,
A register value (bet number data) = 03 (H)
HL register value (difference number counter) = 0000 (H)
, the HL register value becomes "FFFD (H)" when the subtraction in step S2931 is executed.
Here, "FFFD(H)" is
"1111/1111/1111/1101 (B)"
is.

therefore,
H register value = 1111/1111 (B)
L register value = 1111/1101 (B)
, and the D7 bit of the H register value becomes "1".
Similarly, before subtracting the number of bets in step S2931,
A register value (bet number data) = 03 (H)
HL register value (difference number counter) = 0002 (H)
, the HL register value becomes "FFFF (H)" when the subtraction in step S2931 is executed.

Here, "FFFF(H)" is
"1111/1111/1111/1111 (B)"
is.
therefore,
H register value = 1111/1111 (B)
L register value = 1111/1111 (B)
, and the D7 bit of the H register value becomes "1".
Thus, when a carry occurs, the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value becomes "1".

From the above, as a result of executing the subtraction of the number of bets in step S2931, the D7 bit of the H register value is "0" when no carryover occurs, and when a carryover occurs, the H register value The D7 bit is "1".
Therefore, in step S3061 in FIG. 310, when it is determined whether or not the operation result is less than "0", it is determined whether or not the D7 bit of the H register value at the time of step S3061 is "1". do. Then, when the D7 bit of the H register value is "1", it is determined that the operation result is less than "0".
When the D7 bit of the H register value is "1" (when the operation result is less than "0"), the process proceeds to step S2933. The process advances to step S2934.
The processing after step S2933 is the same as in FIG. 299 (the thirty-eighth embodiment), so the description is omitted.

As described above, in step S2932 of FIG. 299 (the thirty-eighth embodiment), it is determined whether the subtraction result is "0" by determining whether the carry flag is "1". On the other hand, in step S3061 of FIG. 310 (the thirty-ninth embodiment), it is determined whether or not the D7 bit of the H register value is "1" without referring to the carry flag. 0" can be determined.

As is clear from the above, even if the maximum value "2414 (D)" that the difference number counter value can take, it is not limited to the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value, but the D6 bit, D5 bit, and the D4 bit are also "0".
On the other hand, when a carry-down occurs in the difference counter value, not only the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value, but also the D6, D5 and D4 bits become "1".

Therefore, in step S3061 in FIG. 310, instead of determining whether the D7 bit of the H register value is "1", it may be determined whether the D6 bit is "1". , may determine whether the D5 bit is '1', and may determine whether the D4 bit is '1'. In either case, when the bit is "1", the operation result is less than "0", and when it is not "1", the operation result is not less than "0".

In the example of FIG. 310 and FIG. 312, which will be described later, in the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the difference counter is updated as "number of bets=number of payouts" (step S2930). Therefore, for example, when the number of bets in the game is "3" and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the number of payouts (in other words, the number of automatic bets) is set to "3" and the difference number counter is updated. do.
In this way, when referring to the "number of payouts", it does not only refer to the number of credits or the number of medals actually paid out, but also the number of automatic bets (in other words, , the number of bets for the game).
In other embodiments, the term "number of payouts" refers to the number of credits or the number of medals actually paid out. does not include

As shown in FIG. 257 (thirty-first embodiment) described above, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed,
(1) A calculation method (example 1 in FIG. 257) in which the number of bets in the game is set to "X", the number of payouts is set to "0", and the number of bets in the next game is set to "0";
(2) In the game, the number of bets is "X", the number of payouts is "X (the same number as the number of bets)", and when the prescribed number of the next game is "X", the number of bets is also "X". (Example 2 in FIG. 257) and .
Then, in the method of correcting the difference counter value to "0" when a carry occurs in the difference counter as in the present embodiment, if the calculation as in (1) above is performed, the difference number This will lead to an increase in the counter value.
On the other hand, by calculating as in (2) above, it is possible to prevent an increase in the differential number counter value based on the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the replay.

FIG. 311 is a flowchart showing example 2 of advantageous section clear counter management in the thirty-ninth embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG.
In the example of FIG. 311, similarly to the example of FIG. 306, when the symbol combination stopped in the game is a replay operation symbol, the process proceeds to step S2935.
FIG. 311 differs from FIG. 306 only in step S3061. Otherwise, it is the same as in FIG.
Furthermore, the processing of step S3061 is the same as the processing of step S3061 in FIG. That is, it is determined whether the operation result is less than "0" by determining whether the D7 bit (D6, D5, and D4 bits are also possible) of the H register value is "1".

In the example of FIG. 311, similarly to the example of FIG. 306, when the replay operation symbol is stopped and displayed ("Yes" in step S2929), the difference counter does not change. Specifically, when it is determined "Yes" in step S2929, the process proceeds to step S2935.
In FIG. 311, even in a game in which the replay operation symbols are stopped and displayed, the payout number buffer value ("0") is acquired in step S2925, and the payout number ("0") is added to the difference counter value in step S2927. Since the addition process is performed, the process itself for updating the difference counter is performed, but the difference counter value does not change. Further, even in a game in which the replay operation symbols are stopped and displayed, the bet number data is acquired in step S2928, but the subtraction of the bet number (step S2931) is not executed.

As described above, in the example of FIG. 311, when the replay operation symbol is stopped and displayed, the bet number subtraction process in step S2931 and the determination of whether or not the calculation result in step S3061 is less than "0" are performed. becomes unnecessary. Therefore, when the replay operation pattern is stopped and displayed, it is possible to speed up the process of managing the advantageous section clear counter.

306, also in FIG. 311, when the determination in step S2929 is "Yes", the process in step S2935 is executed. By doing so, even if an abnormal value is stored in the difference counter due to noise or the like at the end of the game, the result of step S2935 is "Yes", and the advantage section can be ended. . On the other hand, if such confirmation is unnecessary, the processing of this flowchart may be terminated when "Yes" is determined in step S2929.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 311, it is determined at the timing of step S2929 whether or not the replay operation symbol is stopped and displayed. In the game in which is displayed stopped, acquisition of the payout number buffer in step S2925, processing of adding the payout number to the difference number counter in step S2927, and processing of acquiring the number of bets in step S2928 are unnecessary, thereby speeding up the processing. be able to.

FIG. 312 is a flow chart showing example 3 of advantageous section clear counter management of the thirty-ninth embodiment. In FIG. 312, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. Although part of the description below overlaps with what has been described in the thirty-eighth embodiment, all processing will be described again.
At step S2921 in FIG. 312, the address value of the advantageous section clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR) is stored in the HL register. Therefore, "F022(H)" is stored in the HL register.

In the next step S2922, "1" is subtracted from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register. The subtraction here is, for example, as follows.
"1500 (D)" → "1" subtraction → "1499 (D)"
"256 (D)" → "1" subtraction → "255 (D)"
"1 (D)" → "1" subtraction → "0 (D)" (zero flag = 1)
"0 (D)" → "1" subtraction → "0 (D)" (carry flag = 1)
As described above, in the subtraction here, even if "1" is subtracted from "0(D)", no digits are tucked and "0(D)" is maintained. This subtraction processing is the special (2-byte) subtraction processing described above.

In the next step S2923, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the advantageous section clear counter value before subtraction is "0". This process is determined by whether or not the carry flag set by the subtraction process in step S2922 is "1".
If the carry flag is "1" (the value before subtraction is "0"), the process proceeds to step S2937; if the carry flag is not "1" (the value before subtraction is not "0") The process advances to step S2924. It should be noted that when the carry flag is "1" (when the value before subtraction is "0"), this game is not a game in an advantageous section (this game is a game in a non-advantageous section (normal section) is).

At step S2924, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the subtraction result (after subtraction) at step S2922 is "0". This process is determined by whether or not the zero flag set by the subtraction process in step S2922 is "1". That is, it is determined whether or not the value before subtraction was "1".
When the zero flag is "1" (when the subtraction result is "0"), the process proceeds to step S2936, and when the zero flag is not "1" (when the subtraction result is not "0"), the process proceeds to step S3062. When the zero flag is "1" (when the subtraction result is "0"), the game in the advantageous section of the current game ends (the next game is a game in the non-advantageous section (normal section)). ) means that

In step S3062, the main control board 50 acquires the number of bets. This process is a process of storing the bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) at the address "F01E(H)" in FIG. 285 in the A register.
Next, proceeding to step S3063, the main control board 50 acquires the difference number counter value. This process is the process of storing the difference number counter (_CT_24HGAME) of the address "F025(H)" in FIG. 285 in the HL register.

In the next step S3064, the main control board 50 subtracts the number of bets from the difference number counter. This process is a process of subtracting the A register value from the HL register value and storing the subtracted value in the HL register. for example,
A register value = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0000 (H)
, then the HL register value after subtraction is
HL register value = FFFD (H)
becomes.
This subtraction is normal subtraction processing, unlike the subtraction processing in step S2922. That is, when calculating "XY (both of X and Y are natural numbers)", when "X<Y", the calculation is performed so that a carry occurs. In this respect, it is different from the special arithmetic processing which is operated so as not to generate a carry even if "X<Y" when calculating "XY".

As another example of the subtraction in step S3064, for example, first,
A register value = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0002 (H)
when
HL register value = FFFF (H)
becomes.
Also, for example, secondly,
A register value = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0100 (H) (256 (D))
when
HL register value = 00FD (H)
becomes.

Furthermore, for example, thirdly,
A register value = 03 (H)
HL register value = 00FF (H) (255 (D))
when
HL register value = 00FC (H)
becomes.

In the next step S2929, it is determined whether or not the replay operation symbol is displayed in the game. In this process, in FIG. 284, it is judged whether or not the D5 bit is "1" in the symbol combination display flag (_FL_WIN) of the address "F015 (H)". is displayed. When it is determined that the replay operation symbol is displayed, the process proceeds to step S3066, and when it is determined that the regame operation symbol is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S3065.

In step S3065, the main control board 50 acquires the value of the medal payout buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL). This process is a process of reading the value of the payout medal buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) at the address "F021(H)" in FIG. 285 and storing it in the A register.

In the next step S3066, a process of adding the number of payouts to the difference number counter is executed. This process is a process of adding the A register value to the HL register value (difference number counter) and storing the added value in the HL register.
Here, when the process proceeds to step S3066 via step S3065 because the replay operation symbol is not displayed, the A register stores the value of the payout medal buffer stored in step S3065.
On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step S3066 without going through step S3065 because the replay operation symbol is displayed, the bet number stored in step S3062 is stored in the A register.

Specifically, it is as follows.
For example, first
A register value = 00 (H) (when the number of payouts is "0" in the game)
HL register value = FFFD (H)
when
HL register value = FFFD (H)
becomes.
Also, for example, secondly,
A register value = 03 (H) (when the number of payouts in the relevant game is "3", or when the replay operation symbol is displayed in the relevant game (when the number of bets is "3"))
HL register value = FFFD (H)
when
HL register value = 0000 (H)
becomes.

Furthermore, for example, thirdly,
A register value = 09 (H)
HL register value = FFFD (H)
when
HL register value = 0006 (H)
becomes.
Furthermore, for example, fourthly,
A register value = 03 (H)
HL register value = 00FE (H)
when
HL register value = 0101 (H)
becomes.

Next, proceeding to step S3061, it is determined whether or not the calculation result in step S3066 is less than "0". This process is similar to step S3061 in FIG. Therefore, among the HL register values after the addition in step S3066, it is determined whether or not the D7 bit of the H register is "1". to decide. When it is determined that the calculation result is less than "0", the process proceeds to step S2933, and when it is determined that the calculation result is not less than "0", the process proceeds to step S2934.

In step S2933, a process of clearing (setting to "0") the HL register value is executed. Then, in the next step S2934, the difference counter value is saved. This process is a process of storing the HL register value in the difference number counter. Therefore, when the process proceeds to step S2934 via step S2933, the difference number counter becomes "0".

Specifically, when the processes of step S3061 and steps S2933 and S2934 are executed, first, for example,
HL register value = FFFD (H)
Difference number counter = 0000 (H)
becomes.
Also, for example, secondly,
HL register value = 0000 (H)
Difference number counter = 0000 (H)
becomes.
Furthermore, for example, thirdly,
HL register value = 00FF (H)
Difference number counter = 00FF (H)
becomes.

In the next step S2935, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the difference number counter exceeds the upper limit. Since the upper limit value of the difference number counter is set to "2400 (D)" as described above, the processing here is to compare the HL register value with "2401 (D)". In this comparison operation, when the HL register value is larger, the carry flag becomes "0", and when the HL register value is smaller, the carry flag becomes "1". Therefore, when the carry flag is "1" (when the HL register value is smaller), it is determined that the upper limit value is not exceeded, and the processing according to this flowchart ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the upper limit is exceeded (when the carry flag is "0"), the process proceeds to step S2936. Note that when the difference counter exceeds the upper limit value, the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied, as in the thirty-first embodiment.
In step S2936, the RWM 53 initializes (clears) the information (storage area) regarding the advantageous section. 285, the advantageous section clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR), the advantageous section type flag (_NB_ADV_KND), the difference counter (_CT_24HGAME), and the advantageous section LED display flag (_FL_ADV_LED) and AT game number counter (_CT_ART) and the like. Furthermore, there is information on the main game state.

Note that the information on the advantageous interval (information to be initialized) does not include the LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP), the timer value area, the RT state number (_NB_RT_STS), etc. in FIGS. Specifically, addresses "F011(H)" to "F015(H)" shown in FIG. 284, addresses "F016(H)" to "F021(H)" and "F027(H)" shown in FIG. " and "F028(H)" are not included.

Next, proceeding to step S2937, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the advantageous section type flag (_NB_ADV_KND) is "0" (normal section). When the advantageous section type flag is "0", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when the advantageous section type flag is not "0", especially when it is determined that the advantageous section type flag is "1" (advantageous section) in this embodiment, the process proceeds to step S2938. It should be noted that the reason why the advantageous interval type flag is "1" at this point is that the player wins the advantageous interval transition lottery in the game (for example, in FIG. When you win the winning number determined by ). It should be noted that it is also possible to determine in advance whether or not to transition to the advantageous section according to the winning number without executing the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section. In a broad sense, these can be referred to as "satisfying the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous section".

In step S2938, an initial value is set in an advantageous zone clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR). This process is a process of setting "1500 (D)" in the advantageous section clear counter. Here, "1500 (D)" is stored at the address indicated by the HL register value. Note that "F022(H)" (see FIG. 285) is set in the HL register in step S2921. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

As described above, Example 3 of FIG. 312 first subtracts the number of bets from the difference number counter (step S3064), and then differs from FIGS. , the number of payouts is added to the difference number counter after the subtraction (step S3066).
Here, in the thirty-eighth embodiment (FIGS. 299 and 306), the number of payouts is first added (step S2927), and then the number of bets is subtracted (step S2931). This is done by, as mentioned above,
Example 1) When the number of bets is first subtracted from the value of the difference counter, if the result of the subtraction becomes negative (borrowing), the carry flag becomes "1", then the number of payouts is added to the difference counter and added. If the subsequent difference number counter becomes plus (carry up), the carry flag becomes "1".
Example 2) When the number of bets is first subtracted from the value of the difference counter, if the result of the subtraction does not become negative (lower digits), the carry flag becomes "0", and then the number of payouts is displayed in the difference counter. is added, the carry flag becomes "0".
Example 3) When the number of bets is first subtracted from the value of the difference counter, if the result of the subtraction is negative (downgrade), the carry flag becomes "1", and then the number of payouts is placed in the difference counter. If the difference counter after the addition does not become positive after the addition, the carry flag becomes "0".
In particular, in example 2) the carry flag is "0" when the difference counter is positive, and in example 3) the carry flag is "0" when the difference counter is negative. In example 3), since the difference number counter is negative, an accurate difference number cannot be calculated unless an initial value is set. Therefore, whether or not to set the initial value to the difference number counter cannot be determined based on whether or not the carry flag is "1".

On the other hand, in example 3 of FIG. 312, in the judgment of step S3061, it is not judged whether or not the carry flag is "1", but it is judged whether or not the D7 bit of the H register is "1". do. Therefore, even if the carry flag is "1" or "0" at the time of step S3061, there is no problem.
For the above reasons, even if the number of bets is first subtracted from the difference counter value and then the number of payouts is added, it is determined whether or not the D7 bit of the H register value is "1". Thus, it is possible to determine whether the operation result is less than "0" without being affected by the value of the carry flag.

Furthermore, in the examples of FIGS. 310 and 311, the payout number is first added to the difference counter value, and then the bet number is subtracted. Even in such a case, it is not determined whether the difference counter value is less than "0" based on the value of the carry flag. The value of the carry flag may have changed at the time of determination. In other words, when determining whether or not the subtraction result is less than "0" based on the value of the carry flag as in step S2932 in the thirty-eighth embodiment (FIGS. 299 and 306), the value of the carry flag is It is necessary to determine whether the result of the subtraction is less than "0" before it changes.
On the other hand, in the thirty-ninth embodiment, the value of the H register may not change at the time of step S3061, and the value of the carry flag may have changed at this time. In other words, other operations can be performed between steps S2931 and S3061 in FIGS. In FIG. 312 and in FIG. 313 described below, other operations can be performed between steps S3066 and S3061.

FIG. 313 is a flow chart showing Example 4 of advantageous section clear counter management in the thirty-ninth embodiment.
Example 4 in FIG. 313 is the same as example 3 in FIG. 312 in that the number of bets is first subtracted from the difference counter and then the number of payouts is added. Further, in example 4 of FIG. 313, when the replay operation symbol is displayed, it is judged whether or not the subtraction result is less than "0" (step S3061), and the initial value of the difference number counter when it is less than "0". This is the same as example 2 in FIG. 311 in that setting (step S2933) and saving the difference counter (step S2934) are not executed. Furthermore, as in FIG. 311, when it is determined that the replay operation pattern is displayed ("Yes" in step S2929), the processing of this flow chart may be terminated, as in FIG. .
Furthermore, as in Example 2 of FIG. 311, if the judgment of step S2929 is executed after step S2924, in the game in which the replay operation symbol is stopped and displayed, neither steps S3062 to S3064 nor the processing are required, thereby speeding up the processing. can be planned.

Next, control of advantageous sections in the thirty-ninth embodiment will be described.
The sub-control board 80 counts the difference number of sheets in the advantageous section and displays the image on the image display device 23 .
Here, when the game progresses in the order of advantageous interval (“N”th time)→normal interval→advantageous interval (“N+1”th time), the sub-control board 80 displays the advantageous interval (“N”th time) and the advantageous interval (“ N+1"th time) and the number of wins (difference number of coins) obtained in both cases may be displayed. In this case, the sub-control board 80 is provided with storage means (RWM 83) for storing the total number of acquired cards (difference number).

For example, the difference number is "2000" in the advantageous section ("N" time), then the difference number becomes "-100" in the normal section, and then the difference number is "N+1" in the advantageous section ("N+1" time). Assume that "1000" cards have been won.
In this case, the image display device 23 may display an image indicating that the total difference number is "2000-100+1000=2900". Alternatively, from the viewpoint of suppressing the gambling aspect, the upper limit of the display of the total difference number may be set to "2400". When the total difference in the number of sheets in the multiple advantageous sections exceeds "2400", instead of displaying the difference in the number of sheets, an image such as "Congratulations" or "Congratulations" may be displayed (Fig. 55 (example 2) is displayed as shown in FIG.

Alternatively, the difference number display such as "2400+" sheets, "2400 OVER" sheets, "EEEE" sheets, "Exploding", etc. can be used. If such a difference number display is performed, the player cannot know the exact difference number, but it is possible to inform the player that the accumulated difference number exceeds "2400" and to increase the gambling spirit. can be suppressed.
Alternatively, the difference number of sheets for each advantageous section may be displayed. For example, in the example above,
Advantageous section "N" times: 2000 images Advantageous section "N+1" times: 1000 images.

In addition, in the thirty-ninth embodiment, in order to meet the regulatory standards (prevent reaching the upper limit of the number of balls paid out in the regulations), based on the difference counter value, etc., an instruction during the advantageous section It controls the processing related to the function (AT addition lottery, etc.).
For example, one or a plurality of thresholds are provided when the upper limit value of the difference number counter (the value used as the condition for ending the advantageous section) is "2400 (D)". For example, the thresholds may be set to "1500 (D)" and "2000 (D)".
For example, in an add-on type slot machine 10 in which the number of AT games is added, the winning probability of the AT add-on lottery can be reduced as the difference counter value approaches "2400 (D)".

Specifically, it is assumed that the winning probability of the AT additional lottery when winning the rare role 1 is set to 50%, and the winning probability of the AT adding lottery when winning the rare role 2 is set to 25%. in this case,
(1) Difference counter value: 0 to 1500 (D)
Winning probability of additional lottery when winning 1 rare role: 50%
Winning probability of additional lottery when winning rare role 2: 30%
(2) Difference counter value: 1501 to 2000 (D)
Winning probability of additional lottery when winning 1 rare role: 30%
Winning probability of additional lottery when winning rare role 2: 20%
(3) Difference counter value: 2001 (D) or more Winning probability of additional lottery when winning 1 rare role: 15%
Winning probability of additional lottery when winning rare role 2: 10%
It can be set as follows.
If set in this way, the closer the difference counter value approaches the upper limit value of "2400 (D)" (the more the difference number increases), the more difficult it is for the number of AT games to be added, and the more the number of balls to be played out according to the rules. It can be easily accommodated inside.

Also, if the AT is a continuous type (for example, AT is set to 1 set of 50 games, a continuation lottery is executed when 1 set is consumed, and when the continuation lottery is won, 1 set (50 games) of AT is played again. execution), the continuation rate is lowered as the difference number counter value approaches "2400 (D)" (the difference number increases).
in particular,
Difference number counter value is 0 to 1500 (D): Continuation rate 70%
Difference counter value 1501-2000 (D): Continuation rate 55%
Difference counter value is 2001 (D) or more: Continuation rate 35%
It can be set as follows.

Furthermore, for example, the threshold value of the difference counter is set to "1500 (D)", and when the difference counter value becomes "1500 (D)" or more, the advantageous section and AT is changed to the advantageous section and non-AT ( non-announcement period), and when a predetermined return condition is satisfied, the transition to the advantageous section and AT is performed again.
For example, when the difference counter value becomes "1500 (D)" or more, the next game is shifted to non-AT,
a) When the difference counter value becomes less than a predetermined value (for example, "1400 (D)"),
b) When a predetermined number of games (for example, 30 games) have been played after shifting to non-AT,
c) When a predetermined winning number (for example, a winning number corresponding to a normal replay, a winning number corresponding to a predetermined rare combination, or a winning number corresponding to a pressing order bell, etc.) is won after shifting to a non-AT,
d) Returning to AT when the number of times a predetermined winning number has been won reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) after shifting to non-AT.

Instead of shifting from AT to non-AT, a first AT (original AT) and a second AT (quasi-AT) are provided, and when the difference counter value reaches a threshold, the first AT shifts to the second AT. , and when a predetermined return condition as described above is satisfied, the second AT may be returned to the first AT.
Here, the setting of the 1st AT and the 2nd AT includes, for example, the following method.
As a first method, the pressing order bell is a 6-choice bell, and the first AT notifies the correct pressing order (for example, "middle left, right", etc.) when the pressing order bell is won. On the other hand, in the second AT, when the pressing order bell is won, only the first stop is notified (for example, "?-1-?" indicating that the first stop is in progress). Alternatively, when the pressing order bell is won, the three options for the first stop may be changed to two options (for example, "?-x-?" indicating whether the first stop is left or right). However, when winning a push order replay or the like that may lead to a disadvantageous RT, the correct push order is reported even if it is the second AT.

As a second method, the first AT always (in other words, with a probability of 100%) notifies the correct pressing order when the pressing order bell is won. On the other hand, in the second AT, it is decided by lottery whether or not to inform the correct pushing order when the pushing order bell is won (for example, it is decided to inform with a probability of 50%). On the condition that the player wins the lottery, the order of pressing the correct answer may be notified. Alternatively, when the push order is notified in the game in which the push order bell is won, the push order is not notified in the game in which the push order bell is won in the next game and later games. Alternately, when the pushing order is notified in the game in which the pushing order bell is won, the pushing order is notified in the games in which the pushing order bell is won in the next game and later games a plurality of times (for example, three times). Switching between reporting and non-reporting of the pressing order, such as not performing However, when winning a push order replay or the like that may lead to a disadvantageous RT, the correct push order is reported even if it is the second AT.

Furthermore, in the above example, as the difference number counter value approaches the upper limit, it is set so that it becomes difficult to continue AT (it becomes difficult to increase the number of balls released). Based on the counter value, it may be set to make it difficult for AT to continue.
Specifically, the threshold for the advantageous section clear counter is set to "1200 (D)", and when the advantageous section clear counter value exceeds "1200 (D)",
a) Lower the odds of winning the AT top-up lottery,
b) make AT's recurring lottery winning odds lower than before;
c) Make it easier to transition from an advantageous section and AT to an advantageous section and non-AT (non-announcement period).

Similarly, for example, if the AT is of the continuous type, the number of AT continuations is stored in the RWM 53, and when the number of AT continuations exceeds a predetermined threshold value (for example, "10 (D)"), it For example, it is possible to set the AT so that it is difficult to continue (to set the winning probability of the continuation lottery low).
In addition, in the case of a type in which the number of AT games is added, the number of AT games is stored in the RWM 53, and the number of AT games becomes a predetermined threshold value (for example, "1000 (D)") or more. In some cases, the number of AT games may be made more difficult to be added than before (the winning probability of the additional lottery may be set low, or the number of games to be added may be set to be small).

Furthermore, in the case where the "advantageous section = AT" as in the third embodiment, by suppressing the consecutive chances of the AT, as a method of converging the ball output within the legal range, for example, the following method.
A counter (hereinafter referred to as "non-advantageous section counter") for counting the number of games played in a non-advantageous section (normal section, non-AT) is provided, and based on the value of the non-advantageous section counter, the game shifts to an advantageous section (AT). Decide whether or not
When the advantageous section ends, the storage area relating to the advantageous section is initialized (for example, step S2936 in FIG. 310), but in this case the non-advantageous section counter is also initialized.
Therefore, when the advantageous section ends and shifts to the non-advantageous section, the non-advantageous section counter value becomes "0". can be counted. By determining the non-advantageous interval counter value, it is possible to determine how many games have elapsed since the end of the advantageous interval (AT).

Then, when the non-advantageous section counter value is less than a threshold value (for example, "50 (D)"), it may be set to make it difficult to win the advantageous section (AT). As a result, it is possible to make it easier to converge the number of balls to be paid out within the legal range by reducing the excessive consecutive chances in the advantageous section (AT).
On the other hand, on the condition that the ball output converges within the legal range, for example, when the non-advantageous section counter value is less than a predetermined value, it is easy to win the advantageous section (AT) (easy to play consecutively) If set, it is also possible to provide a wave of payouts. For example, when the non-advantageous section counter value is within the range of "1" to "8(D)", it may be set to make it easier to win the advantageous section (AT).

<Fortieth Embodiment>
The 40th embodiment relates to the test pattern display of the ratio display (management information display LED, role ratio monitor) 74. FIG.
In the 40th embodiment, the "management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74" of the first embodiment etc. is referred to as a "ratio display device 74". Also, as shown in FIG. 181 (26th embodiment), in FIG. ) is called a “ratio segment”. Since "digit" has the same meaning as "LED", "digit" may also be referred to as "LED".

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 181,
Digit 6: LED corresponding to identification segment upper digit
Digit 7: LED corresponding to identification segment lower digit
Digit 8: LED corresponding to ratio segment high order digit
Digit 9: LED corresponding to ratio segment low order digit
is.
Furthermore, in the fortieth embodiment, each digit of the ratio indicator 74 is an 8-segment LED (7 segments with a decimal point) consisting of segments A to G and a segment DP, as shown in FIG. 4 (first embodiment). LEDs).

The display of the test pattern on the ratio indicator 74 is performed to confirm whether all segments (segments A to G and DP) are correctly lit and extinguished. Therefore, during the period (time) during which the test pattern is displayed, any segment is set to have a lighting state (a lighting period) and a lighting state (a lighting period). .
When the test pattern is displayed on the ratio indicator 74, it is displayed at one of the following timings.
(1) Within 5 seconds after power-on (2) Within 5 seconds after setting change start processing (3) Changing settings (mode, processing) (4) Checking settings (mode, processing) (5) RWM abnormal error

In the above, "from turning on the power" means, for example, that the program start (M_PRG_START) in FIG. , corresponds to when the interrupt process is activated in step S2162.
185 (the twenty-sixth embodiment) is started, the process proceeds to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S2112, and the setting change process in FIG. Middle corresponds to when interrupt processing is started in step S2133.
Although the test pattern is displayed on the ratio display 74 by interrupt processing, the test pattern may be displayed on the ratio display 74 without interrupt processing. In this case, the test pattern can be displayed after the power is turned on and before the interrupt process is activated.

186. Furthermore, "setting being changed" means that from the start of step S2112 in FIG. This refers to any timing before moving to main processing (M_MAIN).
Furthermore, "during confirmation of setting" refers to the period from when the setting key switch 12 is detected to be ON until when the setting key switch 12 is detected to be OFF during game standby. It should be noted that it is during waiting for medal insertion in step S2175 in FIG. Even if the setting key switch 12 is turned on at any other time (for example, while the reel 31 is rotating), the process does not shift to the setting confirming state.
Further, "under RWM abnormality error" indicates, for example, from when an RWM abnormality is detected when the power is turned on until the power is turned off.

Moreover, the test pattern is a display pattern that has a period during which any segment of any LED is lit and a period during which it is extinguished within a specific period.
Furthermore, as the test pattern of this embodiment, firstly, the display content is switched every second for 5 seconds. The time for which one display is maintained is not limited to 1 second, and the display time of the test pattern is not limited to 5 seconds.
Additionally, the test pattern may include secondly blinking all segments of all LEDs.

In addition, when the test pattern is displayed, all segments do not always have a lighting period and a lighting-out period.
For example, first, when the test pattern consists of 5 seconds, when the test pattern is displayed for 5 seconds, if all segments have a lighting period and a lighting-out period, within 5 seconds (for example, 2 seconds). When the test pattern is ended (for example, when the power switch 11 is turned off), not all segments have the lighting period and the lighting-out period during display of the test pattern.
Secondly, when the setting key switch 12 is turned on during game standby to shift to the setting confirmation state, and then the setting key switch 12 is turned off to end the setting confirmation state, the test pattern may be changed. It may be displayed for a moment, but that period alone does not necessarily have a lit period and an extinguished period for all segments.

However, when the test pattern is displayed within 5 seconds after the power is turned on, or when the test pattern is displayed within 5 seconds after the setting change start process, the power switch 11 is turned off before the entire test pattern is displayed. As long as there is no irregularity such as being turned off, all segments should have a lighting period and a non-lighting period during the display period of the test pattern.

FIG. 314 is a diagram showing Example 1 of the test pattern of the ratio indicator 74 in the 40th embodiment.
In the fortieth embodiment, in the drawing showing the test pattern, the lit segments are indicated by solid lines, and the unlit segments are indicated by dotted lines. In addition, the segment DP indicates the lighting state with a black circle, and indicates the lighting state with a white circle.

Further, in the following description, "." indicates that the segment DP is in the lit state, and "." indicates that the segment DP is in the extinguished state.
In FIG. 314, two types of test pattern LED displays are provided. One of them is "0." More specifically, in FIG. 3, segments A to F and DP are lit, and segment G is extinguished.

Another is "-.". More specifically, in FIG. 3, segment G is illuminated and segments A to F and DP are extinguished. Therefore, '0.' and '-.' have a reverse relationship in terms of the lit and unlit segments, respectively.
In the state of (a), both the identification seg and the ratio seg are displayed as "0.-.".

In Example 1 of FIG. 314, the display state shown in (a) is maintained for one second. Note that the count for one second can be measured by the number of interrupt processes. For example, when the display of (a) in the figure is started, "447 (D)" is set in the counter, "1" is subtracted for each interrupt processing, and when "0" is reached, (a) to end the display of Thus, the display of (a) can be maintained for "2.235×447=999.045ms".
When the display of (a) for about 1 second is finished, the display of (b) follows. In the display of (b), the LEDs for displaying "0." and "-." are exchanged with the display in (a). 7 and 9 are labeled as "0." This state continues for one second (447 interrupts) as in the case of (a).

The display contents of (a) and (b) above are switched and displayed every one second, and are executed for five seconds. Therefore, in FIG. 314, (c) and (e) are the same display contents as (a). (d) is the same display content as (b).
When the display of the test pattern (for 5 seconds) ends, the normal ratio display is performed. In FIG. 314, (f) shows an example of displaying "7.U.5.0." and the advantageous section ratio (total). The ratio display is the same as that shown in FIG. 181 (26th embodiment). Also, instead of the advantageous section ratio (cumulative), the instructed accessory ratio (cumulative) may be displayed. The instructed accessory ratio (total) is the same as that described in the thirty-eighth embodiment.

For each LED, if a period indicated as "0." and a period indicated as "-." A period during which the light is off can be provided. In the example of FIG. 314, for one second of (a) and one second of (b), for all segments (A to G and DP), it is possible to provide a lit period and an extinguished period. can. As a result, it is possible to easily visually determine a segment failure (cannot be turned on or turned off) for all segments. Therefore, although the test pattern in FIG. 314 is displayed for 5 seconds, the presence or absence of a segment defect can be confirmed in the first 2 seconds (display of 2 patterns).

In the case where the test pattern is displayed within 5 seconds after the power is turned on or the setting change start process is performed, the presence or absence of a segment failure may be confirmed using the entire time during which the test pattern is displayed. , as in the example of FIG. 314, during a part of the test pattern display period (first 2 seconds), for all segments (A to G and DP), the lighting period and the unlit period A period may be provided.
When displaying the ratio, neither the identification segment nor the ratio segment is displayed as "0.-." or as "-.0.". Therefore, there is no risk of confusion between the test pattern and the original ratio display.

FIG. 315 is a diagram showing Example 2 of the test pattern of the ratio indicator 74 in the 40th embodiment.
In example 1 of FIG. 314, the test pattern is displayed for 5 seconds, with display contents changed every second. Such a test pattern is suitable for display within 5 seconds after the power is turned on or within 5 seconds after the setting change start process, as described above.
On the other hand, Example 2 shown in FIG. 315 is suitable when the test pattern is displayed until a predetermined termination condition is satisfied, such as during setting change, setting confirmation, or RWM abnormal error.
It goes without saying that the test pattern in FIG. 314 may be used to display until a predetermined termination condition is satisfied. Similarly, the test pattern in FIG. 315 may of course be used when it is displayed within a predetermined period after the display start condition of the test pattern is satisfied.

In FIG. 315, "8.8.8.8." (for example, (a) in the figure), which is a state in which all segments of all LEDs are lit, and a state in which all segments of all LEDs are extinguished. "*.*.*.*."("*" indicates that segments A to G are turned off. The same shall apply hereinafter.) (for example, (b) in the figure) are alternately repeated. . In other words, it is a pattern that flashes "8.8.8.8.".
In the example of FIG. 315, the lit state of all segments shown in (a) is maintained for 0.3 seconds, and then the unlit state of all segments shown in (b) is maintained for 0.3 seconds. Then, by repeating the lighting state shown in (a) and the light-out state shown in (b), a flashing state is obtained.

In this embodiment, the blinking interval is set to 0.3 seconds. This follows the blinking interval when the identifying seg and the ratio seg blink when the predetermined conditions are met in the twenty-sixth embodiment. In the twenty-sixth embodiment, "134 (D)" is set as the initial value of the timer (address "F292 (H)" in FIG. 183), and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt processing so that the timer value becomes "0 , it is determined that the time has passed. By counting the number of interrupts "134", "299.49" ms can be counted.

In Example 2 shown in FIG. 315 as well, "8." can be provided. Therefore, the presence or absence of a segment failure (cannot be turned on or turned off) can be easily visually determined.
Further, when displaying the ratio, neither the identification seg nor the ratio seg is displayed as "8.8.". For example, when the ratio reaches 88%, the display blinks regardless of the ratio (see FIG. 184), in which case "8.8." On the other hand, for "8.8.", since the segment DP is also illuminated, the test pattern "8.8." can be distinguished from the ratio display "8.8.".

FIG. 316 is a diagram showing Example 3 of the test pattern of the ratio indicator 74 in the 40th embodiment. This example displays the same content on all LEDs. Also, only one segment is lit and the other segments are extinguished. The segments to be lit change over time in the order of segment A→segment B→segment C→ . . . →segment G→segment DP. The example in FIG. 316 shows an example of switching the segment to be lit every 0.5 seconds.

In the example of FIG. 316, the display interval is set to 0.5 seconds, but it is not limited to this and may be set to any number of seconds. )) to the lighting of the segment DP ((h) in the figure). If the lighting from (a) to (h) in the figure is to be performed in 5 seconds, the segment to be lit should be switched about every 0.7 seconds (about every 300 interrupts). As shown in FIG. 316, if the lighting is performed every 0.5 seconds, the lighting from (a) to (h) in the figure can be performed in 4 seconds.

Then, when the test pattern is displayed within 5 seconds after the power is turned on or within 5 seconds after the setting change start process, all the LEDs are turned off after lighting from (a) to (h) in the figure. Alternatively, ratio display is performed in the same manner as in normal times.
Also, when displaying the test pattern during setting change, setting confirmation, or RWM abnormal error, the lighting from (a) to (h) in the figure may be repeated until the test pattern display end condition is met. .

It should be noted that "satisfying the test pattern display termination condition" means that the OFF state of the setting key switch 12 is detected during setting change or setting confirmation. Further, when it is in the RWM abnormal error, it is when it is detected that the power switch 11 is turned off.
Even with the test pattern in FIG. 316, the display of the test patterns from (a) to (h) in the figure shows that all segments of all LEDs are on for a period of 0.5 seconds and extinguished. It is possible to provide a period (other than 0.5 seconds which is a lighting period).
Further, since the same content is displayed by all the four LEDs, it is possible to easily visually determine whether or not there is lighting failure in the segment.
Furthermore, if such a test pattern is displayed, it will not be confused with the content of the original ratio display.

FIG. 317 is a diagram showing Example 4 of the test pattern of the ratio indicator 74 in the 40th embodiment. In this example, the LEDs are lit one by one. Therefore, one LED is lit and the other three LEDs are extinguished. Then, the LEDs to be lit are switched.
In the example of FIG. 317, in (a), all segments of digit 9 (segments A to G and DP) are lit, and all segments of the other three digits 6 to 8 are extinguished. Then, for example, this lighting state is maintained for one second.

When one second has elapsed, next, as shown in (b) in the figure, all segments of digit 8 (segments A to G and DP) are lit, and other three digits 6, 7, and 9 are lit. Turn off all segments. Then, for example, this lighting state is maintained for one second.
In this manner, the four digits are sequentially lit. If one lighting time is set to 1 second, all segments of all LEDs can be lit in 4 seconds.

Then, when the test pattern is displayed within 5 seconds after the power is turned on or within 5 seconds after the setting change start process, all the LEDs are turned off after lighting from (a) to (d) in the figure. Alternatively, ratio display is performed in the same manner as in normal times.
Also, when displaying this test pattern during setting change, setting confirmation, RWM abnormal error, the lighting from (a) to (d) in the figure is repeated until the conditions for ending the display of the test pattern are met. good.

Even in the test pattern of FIG. 317, in the lighting from (a) to (d) in the figure, all segments of all LEDs are lit for a period of 1 second and extinguished for a period of 3 seconds. second) can be provided, it is possible to visually determine whether or not there is a segment defect for all segments.
In addition, if such a test pattern is displayed, it will not be confused with the content of the original ratio display.
Further, for the first second, digits 6 and 7 are extinguished, digits 8 and 9 are lit "8.8.", and for the next second digits 6 and 7 are "8.8." , and digits 8 and 9 are extinguished.
Also, for the first second, digits 6 and 8 are extinguished, digits 7 and 9 light "8.", and for the next one second digits 6 and 8 light "8." , digit 7 and digit 9 are extinguished.
It should be noted that it is possible to appropriately change which digit is lit or extinguished first. Further, by repeatedly executing the test, even if the inspector looks away for a moment, the test pattern is displayed again, thereby making the test more accurate. However, it does not necessarily have to be executed repeatedly.

FIG. 318 is a diagram showing Example 5 of the test pattern of the ratio indicator 74 in the 40th embodiment. This example shows an example in which the setting confirmation mode (also referred to as a setting confirmation mode) is entered while the ratio is being displayed, and the ratio display is resumed after the setting confirmation is completed.
In FIG. 318, (a) is an example displaying the continuous accessory ratio (6000 times) among the ratios.
The ratio display of the fortieth embodiment repeats (approximately 5 seconds each) shall be displayed.

Further, in the 40th embodiment, the storage area of the RWM 53 shown in FIGS. 182 and 183 (26th embodiment) is provided. In particular, FIG. 183 has a ratio display number of "F28E(H)", a display switching time of address "F290(H)", and a flashing switching time of address "F292(H)".
Furthermore, by executing ratio display preparation processing in the interrupt processing (step S2221 in FIG. 190) and updating the ratio display timer in this ratio display preparation processing (steps S2465 in FIG. 206 and FIG. 209), The display switching time, ratio display number, etc. are updated (steps S2511 and S2515 in FIG. 209).

In the figure, after about 5 seconds ("2144" interruption) have passed since the display of the continuous character ratio (6000 times) in (a) has passed, the display of the character ratio (6000 times) shown in (b) is started. switch. Then, in the example of FIG. 318, after about 3 seconds have passed since the display of the character product ratio (6000 times), it is assumed that the setting confirmation is in progress. When the ON state of the setting key switch 12 is detected during game standby (during non-betting), the setting is being confirmed.

A test pattern is displayed by the ratio indicator 74 during setting confirmation. Assume that the test pattern illustrated in FIG. 318 is shown in FIG. Therefore, the blinking display of "8.8.8.8." is repeated during the confirmation of the setting. During setting confirmation, interrupt processing is executed in the same manner as during game standby. However, in the example of FIG. 318, during the display of the test pattern, in FIG. ” shall not be updated. Therefore, rate display preparation (S_DSP_READY) of FIG. 206 (or at least rate display timer update (S_RATE_TIME) of FIG. 209) is not executed during the test pattern.
Even if the test pattern is displayed, the display switching time, blink switching time, and ratio display number data are maintained (not initialized).

When the setting key switch 12 is turned off, the process of confirming the settings is ended and the game standby state is entered. As a result, the ratio indicator 74 ends the display of the test pattern and restarts the ratio display ((e) in the figure). Also, when the ratio display is restarted, the display switching time is updated for each interrupt process.
Therefore, when the character ratio (6000 times) is displayed for about 3 seconds, the display is switched to the test pattern display, and when the display of the test pattern is finished and the ratio display is resumed, the ratio display number Data corresponding to the ratio (6000 times) is stored. Therefore, this data is read, and the ratio display of the character ratio (6000 times) is restarted.

Further, when the ratio display is restarted, the display switching time, the flashing switching time, and the ratio display number are updated in the interrupt processing thereafter. Therefore, when the ratio display of the character ratio (6000 times) is restarted, the display switching time of the address "F290 (H)" becomes "0" after about 2 seconds, and the ratio display of "F28E (H)". The number is updated to the data corresponding to the next item, the ratio of consecutive accessories (total). As a result, as shown in (f) in the drawing, the ratio of the continuous role product ratio (total) is displayed on the ratio display 74 .

Here, in the above example, during the display of the test pattern, the display switching time of address "F290(H)", the blinking switching time of address "F292(H)", and the ratio display number of address "F28E(H)" I tried not to update the data, but not limited to this,
a) All of the display switching time, blink switching time, and ratio display number are updated by interrupt processing even while the test pattern is being displayed.
b) During display of the test pattern, only some of the display switching time, blinking switching time, and ratio display number are not updated (other data are updated by interrupt processing).

c) When the display of the test pattern is started, some of the display switching time, flashing switching time, and ratio display number are initialized. In this case, other data may or may not be updated.
d) When the display of the test pattern is started, all the data of the display switching time, blink switching time and ratio display number are initialized.
It may be any of

The above will be described with specific examples. In the following example, the flashing switching time for address "F292(H)" is omitted. time is also preserved. On the other hand, when the display switching time of address "F290(H)" is initialized, the flashing switching time of address "F292(H)" is also initialized.
Also, in the following example, after 2 seconds have passed since the display of the character ratio (6000 times) (the third item) shown in FIG. , the setting confirmation is terminated 9 seconds after the setting confirmation is in progress (that is, the setting confirmation is in progress for 9 seconds), and the ratio display is restarted.

(1) Example 1
When updating all the data of display switching time, blinking switching time, and ratio display number during setting confirmation, it is as follows.
Just before transitioning during setting confirmation,
Ratio display number: 3
Display switching time: The value corresponds to the remaining 3 seconds.
And when the 9-second setting confirmation is finished,
Ratio display number: 5
Display switching time: The value corresponds to the remaining 4 seconds.
Therefore, when the display of the test pattern is finished and the ratio display is restarted, the fifth item, the character ratio (total), is displayed, and the display is continued for 4 seconds (after that, the (switched to section ratio or character instruction ratio). With this configuration, even when the display conditions of the test pattern are satisfied, the display switching time, the blinking switching time, and the ratio display number can be continuously updated, and the processing load can be reduced. can be mitigated.

(2) Example 2
When the display switching time and the like are initialized by executing the test pattern, but the ratio display number is maintained (not initialized), it is as follows.
Just before transitioning during setting confirmation,
Ratio display number: 3
Display switching time: A value corresponding to the remaining 3 seconds.
In this case, when the setting confirmation for 9 seconds is finished,
Ratio display number: 3 (maintains the value before transitioning during setting confirmation)
Display switching time: Value corresponding to remaining 5 seconds (set timer value "2144" by initialization)
becomes.
Therefore, when the display of the test pattern is terminated and the ratio display is resumed, the character ratio (6000 times) (the third item) is again displayed for 5 seconds. In this configuration, even if the test pattern end condition is satisfied after the test pattern display condition is satisfied, the information corresponding to the ratio display number when the test pattern display condition is satisfied is not displayed. It can be displayed for a predetermined time (5 seconds).

(3) Example 3
When the display switching time and the like are initialized by executing the test pattern and an update is performed by adding "1" to the ratio display number, the following is performed.
Just before transitioning during setting confirmation,
Ratio display number: 3
Display switching time: A value corresponding to the remaining 3 seconds.
In this case, when the setting confirmation for 9 seconds is completed,
Ratio display number: 4 (add "1" to the value before shifting during setting confirmation)
Display switching time: Value corresponding to remaining 5 seconds (set timer value "2144" by initialization)
becomes.
Therefore, when the display of the test pattern is finished and the ratio display is resumed, the display of the fourth item, the ratio of consecutive characters (accumulated), is started and this display is executed for about 5 seconds. With this configuration, even if the test pattern end condition is satisfied after the test pattern display condition is satisfied, the ratio display number next to the ratio display number when the test pattern display condition is satisfied is displayed. Information corresponding to the number can be displayed for a predetermined time (5 seconds).

(4) Example 4
When initializing all the data of display switching time, blinking switching time, and ratio display number, it is as follows.
Just before transitioning during setting confirmation,
Ratio display number: 3
Display switching time: A value corresponding to the remaining 3 seconds.
In this case, when the setting confirmation for 9 seconds is finished,
Ratio display number: 1 ("1" is set by initialization)
Display switching time: Value corresponding to remaining 5 seconds (set timer value "2144" by initialization)
becomes.
Therefore, when the display of the test pattern is terminated and the ratio display is resumed, the advantageous section ratio or the character item instruction ratio is displayed, and this display is executed for 5 seconds. In this configuration, even if the end condition of the test pattern is satisfied after the display condition of the test pattern is satisfied, display is started from the first item by setting the ratio display number to the initial value. can do.

FIG. 319 is a diagram showing Example 6 of the test pattern of the ratio indicator 74 in the 40th embodiment. This example shows an example in which an RWM abnormality error occurs during ratio display, and the RWM abnormality error is canceled after changing the setting.
In the figure, as shown in (a), it is assumed that an RWM abnormal error has occurred while displaying the continuous character ratio (6000 times). In this case, as described above, the ratio display 74 switches from the ratio display to the test pattern display. It is assumed that the test pattern in the example of FIG. 319 is a display of repeated blinking of "8.8.8.8." ((b) and (c) in the figure), as in FIG.

When an RWM abnormal error occurs, it becomes an "unrecoverable error" as shown in step S2199 of FIG. 188 (26th embodiment) and step S1420 of FIG. 190 (26th embodiment). An unrecoverable error is an error that cannot be recovered without turning off the power and going through the setting change process.
When an RWM abnormal error occurs, the power switch 11 is turned off, the setting key switch 12 is turned on, and then the power switch 11 is turned on. This clears the predetermined range of the RWM 53 (the entire range in FIGS. 182 and 183). Then, the setting value is set, and if there is no other error, the recovery process is performed.

After the RWM abnormal error occurs, the power is turned off, and when the power of the driving voltage of the main CPU 55 is no longer supplied to the main control board 50, the display of the test pattern ends.
When the power switch 11 is turned on while the setting key switch 12 is on, the setting change process is started. In this example, it is assumed that the test pattern shown in FIG. 314 is displayed for 5 seconds after the setting change process is started ((d) in the figure).
Then, when the setting value is set and the setting key switch 12 is turned off, the setting change processing is terminated and the game standby state is entered. When the setting change process is completed, the display of the test pattern is terminated and the ratio display is started ((e) in the figure).
Here, when the setting value is set within 5 seconds after the setting change process is started and the setting change process ends, the test pattern is displayed on the ratio display 74 all the time during the setting change process, and the setting change is completed. When the processing ends, the display on the ratio display 74 switches from the test pattern to the ratio display. Also, in the case that the test pattern is displayed on the ratio display 74 for 5 seconds from the start of the setting change process, if 2 seconds have passed since the setting change process was started, the setting change process is completed. Even during the game standby, the test pattern may be displayed on the ratio display device 74 for the remaining 3 seconds, and then the ratio display on the ratio display device 74 may be started.

Further, when the specification is such that the test pattern is kept displayed on the ratio display 74 during the setting change process, the test pattern is displayed on the ratio display 74 even after 5 seconds have passed since the setting change process. continue to be
Furthermore, in the case that the test pattern is displayed on the ratio display 74 for 5 seconds from the start of the setting change process, when 5 seconds have passed since the setting change process was started, the setting change process is in progress. However, the ratio display is started (the ratio display before the setting change may be started (started from the middle), or the ratio display may be started from the beginning). Therefore, in this case, there is no change in the display contents of the ratio indicator 74 before and after the end of the setting change process.

The test pattern is displayed on the ratio indicator 74 for 5 seconds from the start of the setting change process, and when 5 seconds have passed since the start of the setting change process, the ratio indicator 74 is completely extinguished (Fig. 319 ( The state shown in c) may be set).
In this case, the test pattern is displayed for 5 seconds from the start of the setting change process, and after 5 seconds the ratio indicator 74 is completely extinguished, and when the setting change process ends, the ratio display is started. Become. By configuring in this way, the boundary between the test pattern and the ratio display can be clarified.

Also, in the example of FIG. 319, the test pattern displayed at the time of the RWM abnormal error and the test pattern displayed during the setting change are different display contents, but the same test pattern is always displayed without being limited to this. There may be.
On the other hand, if different test patterns are displayed at power-on, during setting change, during setting confirmation, and during RWM abnormal error, the current situation can be grasped just by looking at the test pattern.

Although the thirty-ninth embodiment and the fortieth embodiment of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
A. Thirty-ninth Embodiment (1) In the examples of FIGS. 312 and 313, after the number of bets is subtracted from the value of the difference counter, the number of payouts is added to the value of the difference number counter, but this is not the only option. Alternatively, the number of bets may be subtracted after adding the number of payouts to the difference counter value.
(2) The advantageous zone clear counter management shown in the thirty-ninth embodiment is always executed as a process at the end of the game even if it is not during the advantageous zone. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to determine whether or not the game is in the advantageous interval at the end of the game, and execute the advantageous interval clear counter management only when it is determined that the game is in the advantageous interval.

B. 40th Embodiment (1) When an RWM abnormal error occurs, the RWM 53 initializes the entire range shown in FIGS. A storage area for storing data for calculating (in other words, data that becomes the denominator and numerator of the ratio) may not be initialized. For example, addresses "F210(H)" to "F282(H)" in FIGS. 182 and 183 do not need to be initialized. As a result, after the RWM abnormal error is removed, all the ratios can be calculated and displayed using the data stored in these storage means.

(2) When displaying the test pattern on the ratio display 74 , information on the test pattern may be displayed as an image on the image display device 23 or output from the speaker 22 .
For example, when a test pattern is displayed, using the speaker 22 and the image display device 23, information (explanation, commentary, etc.) as to what kind of test pattern should be displayed for normality (or abnormality) is provided. output.
It is also possible to output in advance what kind of test pattern is to be displayed by the speaker 22 and the image display device 23 during setting change or setting confirmation.

(3) A test pattern is displayed on the ratio display 74 during the setting change process, and after that, when the setting change process ends (when the setting key is turned and the setting key switch 12 is turned off), the test pattern is displayed. The display is ended, but when the setting is confirmed immediately (when the setting key is turned again and the setting key switch 12 is turned on), the test pattern is displayed again on the ratio indicator 74. - 特許庁
Here, the specification to display the test pattern for 5 seconds after the setting is being changed and for 5 seconds after the setting is being confirmed, or the test pattern is displayed for 5 seconds after the setting is being changed and during the setting confirmation It is assumed that it is a specification to display.

In this case, for example, firstly, when the setting key switch 12 is turned off four seconds after the setting is being changed to end the setting change, the test pattern is displayed all the time during the setting change. Furthermore, if the setting key switch 12 is turned off (end of setting change) and then turned on immediately to set the setting confirmation, five seconds after the setting confirmation is in progress. Or a test pattern is displayed during setting confirmation.
Note that when the setting key switch 12 is turned off during setting change (end of setting change), this state is maintained for one second, and then the setting key switch 12 is turned on (set confirmation is in progress). , the ratio is displayed on the ratio display 74 for the one second.

Secondly, when the setting key switch 12 is turned off 10 seconds after the setting is being changed to end the setting change, the test pattern is displayed for 5 seconds after the setting is being changed. After the elapse, the ratio indicator 74 is turned off, or normal ratio display is started.
When the setting key switch 12 is turned off 10 seconds after the setting is being changed, the ratio indicator 74 is extinguished or the ratio indicator 74 is extinguished, as is the case after 5 seconds have passed since the setting is being changed. displaying. Next, when the setting key switch 12 is turned on to check the setting, the test pattern is displayed on the ratio display 74 for 5 seconds from the time when the setting is being checked, or during the setting check.

(4) In this embodiment, the test pattern is displayed within 5 seconds after starting the setting change process. Here, for example, as shown in FIGS. 316 and 317, unless the test pattern is displayed for 4 seconds, it is not possible to check the lit state and extinguished state of all the segments.
On the other hand, if the setting change process is performed quickly, it can be completed in about two seconds. Therefore, if it is possible to check the ON state and OFF state of all segments of all LEDs by displaying the test pattern for 2 seconds, it is possible to check whether there is a defective segment of the ratio indicator 74 regardless of the setting change processing time. be able to.

For example, in FIG. 314, if (a) is lit for 1 second and (b) is lit for 1 second, it is possible to confirm whether or not all the segments of the ratio indicator 74 are faulty.
For example, in FIG. 315, if (a) is lit for 1 second and (b) is lit for 1 second, it is possible to check whether all the segments of the ratio indicator 74 are faulty.

(5) During setting confirmation, it is possible to shift from game standby. For example, in FIG. 188 (the twenty-sixth embodiment), in step S2175, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 12 is on. The confirmation of the settings continues until the OFF of the setting key switch 12 is detected.
In this way, it is possible to shift from game standby during setting confirmation, and it is not possible to shift to setting confirmation while the reel 31 is rotating, for example, after it is determined "Yes" in step S2178 in FIG. (By proceeding to step S2175 of the next game, it is possible to proceed during setting confirmation).
As described above, even if the setting key switch 12 is turned on while the reel 31 is rotating, the process does not shift to the setting confirmation state while the reel 31 is rotating. Therefore, no test pattern is displayed on the ratio indicator 74 in this case. After the setting key switch 12 is turned on while the reels 31 are rotating, after all the reels 31 are stopped (when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is not stopped and displayed (in other words, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped). When displayed)), it may be possible to make the transition possible during the confirmation of the setting. In this case, the test pattern may be displayed on the ratio indicator 74 as the setting is confirmed. With this configuration, if it is desired to display the test pattern on the ratio indicator 74 as soon as possible, it can be realized by turning on the setting key switch 12 while the reel 31 is rotating.

(6) After the test pattern is displayed on the ratio indicator 74 and the display of the test pattern is finished, when the next test pattern is displayed, the test pattern may be displayed from the beginning, or the test pattern may be displayed from the beginning. The display contents at the time of completion may be stored, and when the next test pattern is displayed, the display may be resumed from the time when the previous test pattern was completed.
For example, first, in FIG. 314, display of the test pattern is started with the display content of "0.-.0.-." When the display of the test pattern is started after the pattern has been completed, the display of the test pattern may be started again with the display contents of "0.-.0.-.".
Alternatively, when the display of the test pattern is started with the display content of "0.-.0.-." and the test pattern is terminated when "-.0.-.0." is displayed for 0.3 seconds , and then display "-.0.-.0." for 0.7 seconds and then display "0.-.0.-." be done.

(7) When two LEDs (for example, digits 6 and 7) of the ratio display 74 are considered as one set, in the test pattern, during a game or during a game standby (non-error), accumulation The information displayed by the number display LED 76, the information displayed by the acquisition number display LED 78 (including push order instruction information such as "=1"), and the information on the ratio originally displayed by the ratio display 74 are visually different. Information is preferably displayed.
For example, as shown in FIG. 314, displays such as "0.-." and "-.0." It is not displayed by the number display LED 78 or the ratio display 74. Also, "8.8." shown in FIG. 315 is the same. By setting the display content to be used only for the test pattern, it is possible to notify that the display content is the test pattern, and to prevent confusion with other displays.

(8) The display contents of the test pattern are not limited to those shown in the 40th embodiment, and various patterns are conceivable.
For example, firstly, in the ratio indicator 74, the contents displayed on the digits 6 and 7 and the contents displayed on the digits 8 and 9 are set to be the same. This is the example shown in FIG. 314, for example. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily check whether or not all segments of all LEDs are defective without increasing the number of segment patterns.
Secondly, digits 6 and 7 indicate the same content, and digits 8 and 9 indicate the same content. For example, it may be displayed as "0.0.-.-.". In this case, if the other display contents are set to "-.-.0.0.", the presence or absence of defects in all segments of all LEDs can be easily confirmed with two types of display (without increasing the segment pattern). It becomes possible.

Furthermore, thirdly, digits 6 and 9 indicate the same content, and digits 7 and 8 indicate the same content. For example, it may be displayed as "0.-.-.0.". In this case, if the other display contents are "-.0.0.-.", two types of display (without increasing the number of segment patterns) can be used to easily confirm the presence or absence of defects in all segments of all LEDs. It becomes possible.
Fourthly, all of the digits 6-9 indicate the same content. This is the example shown in FIGS. 315 and 316, for example.

(9) The main control board 50 detects a predetermined error (here, it means a recoverable error) even during setting change or setting confirmation. However, even if a predetermined error is detected during setting change or setting confirmation, the acquired number display LED 78 does not display the error. Also, the test pattern is displayed on the ratio indicator 74 during setting change or setting confirmation.
On the other hand, when changing settings or confirming settings ends, information corresponding to the detected error is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 . Also, the ratio indicator 74 starts the ratio display. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the test pattern from not being displayed due to the occurrence of a predetermined error.

(10) When shifting to the setting change mode, the test pattern is displayed for at least 5 seconds (however, it is not limited to 5 seconds and may be, for example, 10 seconds). good too. In this case, when the setting change mode is ended (the setting key switch 12 is turned off) when 3 seconds have passed since the mode was shifted to the setting change mode, the test pattern is displayed for 2 seconds thereafter.
In this case, if the setting key switch 12 is turned on again within 2 seconds (while the test pattern is being displayed) after ending the setting change mode and the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, the test pattern remains in the setting confirmation mode. But it keeps appearing.

Furthermore, in this case, display of the test pattern based on the setting confirmation mode may be started after displaying the test pattern for 5 seconds based on the start of the setting change mode. Alternatively, when shifting to the setting confirmation mode during display of the test pattern for 5 seconds based on the start of the setting change mode, the display of the test pattern for 5 seconds based on the start of the setting change mode ends and the setting confirmation mode is entered. display of a test pattern based on
Here, the test pattern for 5 seconds based on the start of the setting change mode and the test pattern based on the setting confirmation mode may have the same contents or different contents. If the contents are different, it is possible to determine whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being checked based on the test pattern, as described above.

On the other hand, it is assumed that the test pattern for 5 seconds based on the start of the setting change mode and the test pattern based on the setting confirmation mode have the same contents and are the test patterns shown in FIG. In this case, when the test pattern for 5 seconds based on the start of the setting change mode ends, the display content ("0.-.0.-.") shown in (e) in the figure is displayed, but the setting change mode When the test pattern for 5 seconds based on the start of is switched to the test pattern based on the setting confirmation mode, the test pattern based on the setting confirmation mode starts with the display contents shown in (a) in FIG. .-.0.-.” will continue for 2 seconds. Of course, this may be done, but the test pattern based on the setting confirmation mode in such a case is shown in FIG. You may start with the display content shown. As a result, even when the test pattern for 5 seconds based on the start of the setting change mode is switched to the test pattern based on the setting confirmation mode, "0.-.0.-." and "-.0.-.0." .” can be alternately switched every second.

Also, when the test pattern for 5 seconds based on the start of the setting change mode is being displayed, the power is turned off (before 5 seconds have passed) and the power is turned on again (while the setting key switch 12 is on). is turned on, the display of the test pattern for 5 seconds based on the start of the setting change mode is started again. Here, the contents of the test pattern display when the power is turned off are memorized so that they can be judged, and when the test pattern display for 5 seconds based on the start of the setting change mode is started again, the power is turned off. You may restart from the display of the test pattern when turned on. Alternatively, when the power is turned off and the display of the test pattern for 5 seconds is started again based on the start of the setting change mode, the test pattern may be displayed from the beginning.

From the above,
a) When an error is detected during setting change or setting confirmation Acquisition number display LED 78: Display corresponding to setting change or setting confirmation (for example, "88")
Ratio display 74: display of test pattern b) When an error is detected during setting change or after completion of setting confirmation Acquisition number display LED 78: displays error content Ratio display 74: displays ratio.

It should be noted that while the setting is being changed or the setting is being checked, a display corresponding to the setting being changed or the setting being checked may be performed on the stored number display LED 76 as well. Alternatively, the number of reserves may be displayed. However, similarly to the acquisition number display LED 78, even if an error is detected during setting change or setting confirmation, the stored number display LED 76 does not display error information.
Further, after the end of setting change or setting confirmation, error contents may be displayed on the stored number display LED 76 in the same manner as the acquired number display LED 78 . Alternatively, unlike the acquired number display LED 78, the stored number may be displayed on the stored number display LED 76 even when an error is detected.

<Appendix>
The invention described in the original specification, etc. of the present application (original invention) can be, for example, the following original inventions 1 to 100. The means and effects of the original invention are as follows. However, the inventions described in this specification are not meant to be limited to inventions 1 to 100 originally.

1. Original invention 1
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 1 The original invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function activation game can be executed by activating an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, in addition to managing ATs with a sub control board, it is known to manage ATs with a main control board (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section, which is a game section in which AT can be executed. Here, when an upper limit (for example, the upper limit number of games played) is set for the advantageous section, the upper limit of the advantageous section may be exceeded as a result of adding the number of games during the advantageous section and AT. In such a case, appropriate control is required.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to prevent the player from giving the impression that the game can be played beyond the upper limit when the upper limit of the advantageous section is exceeded by extending the instructed game section (AT). be.

(b) Means for Solving the Problem of Invention 1 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (third embodiment; example 2 in FIG. 55) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game at the time of winning a minor combination B group);
an instruction function activation game for activating an instruction function displaying the advantageous operation mode in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed;
an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections;
an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operating game is always executed in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch in the advantageous section or the execution frequency is increased;
game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instructed game section;
Effect control means (sub-control board 80) for outputting effects related to the instructed game section,
The game control means is
In the advantageous section, when the continuation upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section ends,
In the advantageous section, when the conditions for starting the instructed game section are met, the instructed game section is started,
In the designated game section, when the conditions for extension of the designated game section (addition of the number of games played) are satisfied, the designated game section can be extended,
Sending information (AT counter value, add-on counter value, upper limit counter value, etc.) about the instructed game section to the effect control means,
The production control means is
Based on the information received from the game control means, when the extension of the instructed game section does not exceed the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section, predetermined information (AT remaining game after addition) regarding the extension of the instructed game section number of times),
Based on the information received from the game control means, when the extension of the instructed game section exceeds the upper limit of continuation of the advantageous section, or after the instructed game section reaches the upper limit of continuation of the advantageous section, the extension of the indicated game section When determined, specific information different from the predetermined information ("Congratulations", "Congratulations", etc.) is displayed.

A second solution is that in the first solution,
The production control means is
Displaying, as the predetermined information, information that makes it possible to grasp how much the instructed game section has been extended (displaying the specific number of games played),
As the specific information, it is possible to grasp that some decision has been made regarding the extension of the instructed game section, but information that cannot be grasped about the degree of extension of the instructed game section is displayed (specific game number is displayed) do not do)
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of Original Invention 1 According to the original invention, when the indicated game section exceeds the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section, or after the indicated game section reaches the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section, the indicated game section To prevent a player from being misunderstood when an indicated game section continues beyond the upper limit of continuation of an advantageous section by not displaying predetermined information about the extension of the indicated game section when the extension is determined. be able to.

2. Original Invention 2
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 2 Same as original invention 1.
(b) Means for solving the problem of invention 2 (the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The original invention (third embodiment; example 3 in FIG. 55) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game at the time of winning a minor combination B group);
an instruction function activation game for activating an instruction function displaying the advantageous operation mode in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed;
an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections;
an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operating game is always executed in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch in the advantageous section or the execution frequency is increased;
game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instructed game section;
Effect control means (sub control board 80) for outputting the effect related to the instructed game section,
The game control means is
In the advantageous section, when the continuation upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section ends,
In the advantageous section, when the conditions for starting the instructed game section are met, the instructed game section is started,
In the designated game section, when the conditions for extension of the designated game section (addition of the number of games played) are satisfied, the designated game section can be extended,
Sending information (AT counter value, add-on counter value, upper limit counter value, etc.) about the instructed game section to the effect control means,
The effect control means, based on the information received from the game control means, when the instructed game section or the advantageous section reaches a predetermined threshold value (the total number of AT games played is 1500 games), the instructed game section is the advantageous section It is characterized in that it is possible to output a production (ending production) that suggests that the continuation upper limit of the game is approaching.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 2 According to the original invention, an effect is output that suggests that the indicated game section is approaching the upper limit of continuation of the advantageous section, so the indicated game section continues beyond the upper limit of continuation of the advantageous section. Players can be informed that they will not.

3. Original invention 3
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 3 Same as original invention 1.
(b) Means for solving the problem of invention 3 (the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The original invention (third embodiment; example 1 in FIG. 55) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game at the time of winning a minor combination B group);
an instruction function activation game for activating an instruction function displaying the advantageous operation mode in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed;
an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections;
an instruction game section (AT) in which an instruction function actuating game is always executed in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch in the advantageous section or the execution frequency is increased;
game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instructed game section;
Effect control means (sub control board 80) for outputting the effect related to the instructed game section,
The game control means is
In the advantageous section, when the continuation upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section ends,
In the advantageous section, when the conditions for starting the instructed game section are met, the instructed game section is started,
In the instructed game section, when the extension conditions for the instructed game section are satisfied, the instructed game section can be extended,
Sending information (AT counter value, add-on counter value, upper limit counter value, etc.) about the instructed game section to the effect control means,
The production control means is
Based on the information received from the game control means, when the extension of the instructed game section does not exceed the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section, information on the extension of the instructed game section (the number of AT remaining games after addition) is displayed. ,
Based on the information received from the game control means, when the extension of the instructed game section exceeds the upper limit of continuation of the advantageous section, or after the instructed game section reaches the upper limit of continuation of the advantageous section, the extension of the indicated game section When determined, it is characterized by not displaying information on the extension of the instructed game section (AT remaining game count after addition).

(c) Effect of Original Invention 3 According to the original invention, when the indicated game section exceeds the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section, or after the indicated game section reaches the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section, the indicated game section When the extension is determined, the information on the extension of the instructed game section is not displayed, so that the player can be prevented from being misunderstood if the instructed game section continues beyond the upper limit of continuation of the advantageous section.

4. Original Invention 4
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 4 Same as original invention 1.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 4 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (third embodiment; example 4 in FIG. 55) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game at the time of winning a minor combination B group);
an instruction function activation game for activating an instruction function displaying the advantageous operation mode in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed;
an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections;
an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operating game is always executed in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch in the advantageous section or the execution frequency is increased;
game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instructed game section;
Effect control means (sub control board 80) for outputting the effect related to the instructed game section,
The game control means is
In the advantageous section, when the continuation upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section ends,
In the advantageous section, when the conditions for starting the instructed game section are met, the instructed game section is started,
In the instructed game section, when the extension conditions for the instructed game section are satisfied, the instructed game section can be extended,
Sending information (AT counter value, add-on counter value, upper limit counter value, etc.) about the instructed game section to the effect control means,
The effect control means is characterized by displaying game information indicating that the instructed game section will not be executed beyond the upper limit of continuation of the advantageous section (such as "End in 10 more games").

A second solution is that in the first solution,
The effect control means, based on the information received from the game control means, when the indicated game section exceeds the upper limit of continuation of the advantageous section, or after the indicated game section reaches the upper limit of continuation of the advantageous section The game information is displayed when the extension of the instructed game section is determined.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 4 According to the original invention, it is possible to prevent a player from being misunderstood if the instructed game section continues beyond the upper limit of continuation of the advantageous section.

5. original invention 5
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 5 The original invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function activation game can be executed by activating an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, in addition to managing ATs with a sub control board, it is known to manage ATs with a main control board (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section, which is a game section in which AT can be executed. Here, when an upper limit (for example, the upper limit number of games played) is set in the advantageous section, as a result of adding the number of games during the advantageous section and AT, the upper limit of the advantageous section may be exceeded. need to be eliminated.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to prevent the instructed game section (AT, etc.) from exceeding the upper limit of the advantageous section.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 5 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (third embodiment; FIGS. 44 to 46) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game at the time of winning a minor combination B group);
an instruction function activation game for activating an instruction function displaying the advantageous operation mode in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed;
an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections;
an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operating game is always executed in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch in the advantageous section or the execution frequency is increased;
A game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instructed game section,
The game control means is
After starting the advantageous interval, when the advantageous interval continuation upper limit (1500 games) is reached (for example, when "Yes" in step S443 of FIG. 44), the advantageous interval is terminated,
In the advantageous section, when the conditions for starting the instructed game section are met, the instructed game section is started,
In the instructed game section, it is possible to decide whether to extend the instructed game section,
When it is decided to extend the instructed game section, when the instructed game section has reached the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section before the determination of the extension (for example, when "Yes" in step S451 of FIG. 44), It is characterized by clearing the decision result related to the extension.

(c) Effect of the original invention 5 According to the original invention, even if it is decided to extend the instructed game section, when the upper limit of continuation of the advantageous section is reached, the decision result related to the extension Since it is cleared, it is possible to prevent the instructed game section from exceeding the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section.

6. original invention 6
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 6 The original invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function activation game can be executed by activating an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, in addition to managing ATs with a sub control board, it is known to manage ATs with a main control board (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section, which is a game section in which AT can be executed. Here, when an upper limit (for example, the upper limit number of games played) is set for the advantageous section, the upper limit of the advantageous section may be exceeded as a result of adding the number of games during the advantageous section and AT.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to make it difficult for the instructed game section or the advantageous section to reach the upper limit of the advantageous section.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 6 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (third embodiment; FIGS. 47 to 49) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game at the time of winning a minor combination B group);
an instruction function activation game for activating an instruction function displaying the advantageous operation mode in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed;
an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections;
an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operating game is always executed in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch in the advantageous section or the execution frequency is increased;
A game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instructed game section,
The game control means is
After starting the advantageous section, when the upper limit of continuation of the advantageous section (1500 games) is reached, the advantageous section ends,
In the advantageous section, when the conditions for starting the instructed game section are met, the instructed game section is started,
In the instructed game section, it is possible to decide whether to extend the instructed game section,
Equipped with an extension determination table (lottery table A or B) used when determining the degree of extension of the instructed game section,
The extension decision table is
at least,
A first extension determination table (lottery table A in FIGS. 47 to 49);
a second extension determination table (lottery table B in FIGS. 47 to 49) in which the expected value of the degree of extension (addition number) to be determined is smaller than that of the first extension determination table;
The degree of extension is determined using the first extension determination table until the designated game section or advantageous section reaches a predetermined threshold (the number of AT games played is 1000 games), and the designated game section or advantageous section reaches the predetermined threshold. is reached, the degree of extension is determined using a second extension determination table.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 6 According to the original invention, when the instructed game section or the advantageous section reaches a predetermined threshold value, the degree of extension is determined using an extension determination table with a small expected value of the degree of extension. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the instructed game section to reach the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section.

7. original invention 7
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 7 Same as original invention 6.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 7 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (third embodiment; FIGS. 50 to 52) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game at the time of winning a minor combination B group);
an instruction function activation game for activating an instruction function displaying the advantageous operation mode in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed;
an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections;
an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operating game is always executed in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch in the advantageous section or the execution frequency is increased;
A game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instructed game section,
The game control means is
Equipped with role lottery means (61) for lottery of roles,
It is possible to determine whether or not to extend the designated game section based on the winning combination won in the combination lottery by the combination lottery means,
When the first winning combination (for example, small winning combination E1) is won in the winning combination lottery by the winning combination lottery means, the degree of extension (additional number) is higher than when winning the second winning combination (for example, small winning combination D). The expected value of
When the designated game section or the advantageous section has not reached a predetermined threshold value (the number of AT games played is 1000 games), when the first hand is won, the extension of the designated game section is made based on the winning of the first hand. Determine the degree (step S541 in FIGS. 50 to 52),
When the designated game section or the advantageous section does not reach the predetermined threshold value and the second combination is won, the degree of extension of the designated game section is determined based on the winning of the second combination,
When the designated game section or the advantageous section reaches the predetermined threshold value, when the first combination is won, the degree of extension of the designated game section is determined in the same manner as when the second combination is won (Fig. 50). ~ Step S543 in Fig. 52)
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of Original Invention 7 According to the original invention, when the designated game section or the advantageous section reaches a predetermined threshold value, the extension of the designated game section is reduced so that the expected value of the degree of extension determined becomes small. Since the degree is determined, it is possible to make it difficult for the instructed game section to reach the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section.

8. original invention 8
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 8 The original invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function activation game can be executed by activating an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, in addition to managing ATs with a sub control board, it is known to manage ATs with a main control board (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous interval, which is a game interval in which AT can be executed, and to provide an upper limit (for example, an upper limit of the number of games played) in the advantageous interval.
In addition, an external signal indicating AT is output during AT, and an external signal indicating special game is output during special game. are mixed, it is necessary to prevent the on/off timing of the external signal from becoming unnatural.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to prevent the on/off of the external signal indicating the instructed game section and the external signal indicating the special game from becoming unnatural when the advantageous section reaches the upper limit.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 8 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (fourth embodiment; FIG. 57) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game at the time of winning a minor combination B group);
an instruction function activation game for activating an instruction function displaying the advantageous operation mode in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed;
an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections;
an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operating game is always executed in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch in the advantageous section or the execution frequency is increased;
A game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instructed game section,
The game control means is
A role lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of roles including a special role (BB) for shifting to a special game (BB game);
and an external signal transmission means (70),
A special game is executed based on the winning of a special role by the role lottery means,
The external signal transmission means is
When the instructed game section is started, the first external signal (external signal 2) indicating the instructed game section is turned on, and when the instructed game section is finished, the first external signal is turned off,
When the special game is started, the second external signal (external signal 1) indicating the special game is turned on, and when the special game is finished, the second external signal is turned off,
When the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the instructed game section and not during the special game, the first external signal is turned off (example 1 in FIG. 57),
When the special role is won during the instructed game section and the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the special game, the first external signal and the second external signal are turned off when the special game ends (Fig. 57 example 2)
It is characterized by

A second solution is that in the first solution,
Equipped with an advantageous section display device (advantageous section display LED 77) indicating that it is an advantageous section,
When the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, the display indicating the advantageous section by the advantageous section display device is ended even during the special game (example 2 in FIG. 57).
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of Original Invention 8 According to the original invention, even when the special game crosses over the continuation upper limit of the advantageous interval, the first external signal indicating the instructed game interval can be turned off at a natural timing. .

9. original invention 9
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 9 The original invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function activation game can be executed by activating an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, in addition to managing ATs with a sub control board, it is known to manage ATs with a main control board (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous interval, which is a game interval in which AT can be executed, and to provide an upper limit (for example, an upper limit of the number of games played) in the advantageous interval.
Also, an external signal indicating AT is output during AT, but when AT is executed until reaching the upper limit of the advantageous section, how to control the external signal indicating AT is a problem. becomes.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to appropriately control the external signal indicating the instructed game section when the instructed game section is executed until the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 9 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (fourth embodiment; FIG. 58) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game at the time of winning a minor combination B group);
an instruction function activation game for activating an instruction function displaying the advantageous operation mode in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed;
an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections;
an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operating game is always executed in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch in the advantageous section or the execution frequency is increased;
A game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instructed game section,
The game control means comprises external signal transmission means (70),
The external signal transmission means is
When the instructed game section is started, a predetermined external signal indicating the instructed game section is turned on, and when the instructed game section is finished, the predetermined external signal is turned off,
The predetermined external signal is turned off when the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the instructed game section.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 9 According to the original invention, it is possible to match the time when the upper limit of continuation of the advantageous section is reached with the timing of turning off the predetermined external signal indicating the instructed game section.

10. original invention 10
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 10 The original invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function activation game can be executed by activating an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, in addition to managing ATs with a sub control board, it is known to manage ATs with a main control board (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous interval, which is a game interval in which AT can be executed, and to provide an upper limit (for example, an upper limit of the number of games played) in the advantageous interval.
In addition, an external signal indicating AT is output during AT, but this external signal, the start and end of the special game, and the time when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached are mixed, so the external signal It is necessary to prevent the on/off timing from becoming unnatural.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to prevent the turning on/off of an external signal indicating the upper limit of the advantageous section, the start and end of the special game, and the instructed game section from becoming unnatural.

(b) Means for Solving the Problem of the Original Invention 10 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (fourth embodiment; FIGS. 57 and 58) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game at the time of winning a minor combination B group);
an instruction function activation game for activating an instruction function displaying the advantageous operation mode in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed;
an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections;
an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operating game is always executed in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch in the advantageous section or the execution frequency is increased;
A game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instructed game section,
The game control means is
A role lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of roles including a special role (BB) for shifting to a special game (BB game);
and an external signal transmission means (70),
A special game is executed based on the winning of a special role by the role lottery means,
The external signal transmission means is
When the instructed game interval is started, a predetermined external signal (external signal 2) indicating the instructed game interval is turned on, and when the instructed game interval is ended, the predetermined external signal is turned off (example 1 in FIG. 57). ,
When the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the instructed game section and not during the special game, the predetermined external signal is turned off (Fig. 58),
When the special role is won during the instructed game section and the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the special game, the predetermined external signal is turned off when the special game ends (example 2 in FIG. 57).
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of the original invention 10 According to the original invention, the time when the upper limit of continuation of the advantageous section is reached, the time when the special game ends, and the timing of turning off the predetermined external signal indicating the instructed game section are matched. can be done.

11. original invention 11
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 11 The original invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function activation game can be executed by activating an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that ATs are managed by a main control board in addition to being managed by a sub control board (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section, which is a game section in which AT can be executed.
When such an advantageous section is provided, the question arises as to what triggers the AT to start and what triggers the AT to end.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to enable a wide range of game design by giving characteristics to the start and end timing of the indicated game section in the advantageous section.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 11 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (fifth embodiment; FIG. 60(a)) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game at the time of winning a minor combination B group);
an instruction function activation game for activating an instruction function displaying the advantageous operation mode in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed;
an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections;
an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operating game is always executed in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch in the advantageous section or the execution frequency is increased;
A game control means for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instructed game section,
The game control means comprises a combination lottery means (61) for performing a combination lottery,
As a lottery state (RT) in which a lottery is drawn by the role lottery means, a first lottery state (for example RT5) and a second lottery state (for example RT2) in which at least one replay role has a different winning probability are provided,
In the advantageous section and the first lottery state, the instructed game section can be executed,
In the designated game section and the first lottery state, when the predetermined condition is satisfied (50 games have been completed) and the state shifts to the second lottery state, both the advantageous section and the designated game section are completed. Characterized by

(c) Effect of Original Invention 11 According to the original invention, it is possible to start or end the advantageous section or the instructed game section with the transition of the lottery state as a trigger. This makes it possible to design a wide range of playability.

12. original invention 12
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 12 Same as original invention 11.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 12 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (fifth embodiment; FIG. 61) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game at the time of winning a minor combination B group);
an instruction function activation game for activating an instruction function displaying the advantageous operation mode in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed;
an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections;
an instruction game section (AT) in which an instruction function actuating game is always executed in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch in the advantageous section or the execution frequency is increased;
A game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instructed game section,
As the state controlled by the game control means, at least a first control state (precursor, CZ, AT, etc.) and a second control state (normal),
On the condition that it is an advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the first control state (precursor),
In the first control state (AT), start the instruction game section,
In the advantageous section and the first control state (AT pullback period, CZ, CZ pullback period), when the conditions for transition to the second control state (normal) are satisfied, the transition is made to the second control state and the advantageous section ends. characterized by
A second solution is that in the first solution,
In the first control state, which is the instructed game section, when the conditions for transition to the second control state are satisfied, the transition is made to the second control state, and both the advantageous section and the instructed game section are terminated. .

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 12 According to the original invention, it is possible to start or end the advantageous section or the instructed game section with the transition of the control state as a trigger. This makes it possible to design a wide range of playability.

13. original invention 13
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 13 Same as original invention 11.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 13 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (fifth embodiment; FIGS. 60 and 61) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game at the time of winning a minor combination B group);
an instruction function activation game for activating an instruction function displaying the advantageous operation mode in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed;
an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections;
an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operating game is always executed in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch in the advantageous section or the execution frequency is increased;
A game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instructed game section,
At least a first game state and a second game state are provided as game states (RT (lottery state), AT, CZ, precursor, normal (control state)) controlled by the game control means,
In the first game state (RT5 and AT), the advantageous section is executed and the instructed game section can be started,
The designated game section is started in the first game state, and when a predetermined number of games is played, the game state is shifted to the second game state (RT2 and normal) and the designated game section is finished.

A second solution is that in the first solution,
When the predetermined number of games has been played in the designated game section of the first game state, the game state is shifted to the second game state, and both the advantageous section and the designated game section are finished.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 13 According to the original invention, it is possible to start or end the instructed game section with the transition of the game state as a trigger. This makes it possible to design a wide range of playability.

14. original invention 14
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 14 The original invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function activation game can be executed by activating an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, in addition to managing ATs with a sub control board, it is known to manage ATs with a main control board (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous interval, which is a game interval in which AT can be executed, and to provide an upper limit (for example, an upper limit of the number of games played) in the advantageous interval.
However, the game feature of only ending when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached is insufficient for differentiation from other models.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to execute a game that is not bound by the upper limit of the advantageous section by enabling the advantageous section to be executed intermittently even in the advantageous section having the upper limit.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 14 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (sixth embodiment; FIG. 62) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game at the time of winning a minor combination B group);
an instruction function activation game for activating an instruction function displaying the advantageous operation mode in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed;
an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections;
an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operating game is always executed in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch in the advantageous section or the execution frequency is increased;
A game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instructed game section,
The game control means comprises a combination lottery means (61) for performing a combination lottery,
As lottery states in which the role lottery is performed by the role lottery means, a first lottery state (RT3), a second lottery state (RT6), and a third lottery state (for example, RT2) in which at least one replay role has a different winning probability ),
In the designated game section in the first lottery state, when a predetermined condition is satisfied before reaching the upper limit of continuation of the advantageous section (during replay 06 display), the state is shifted to the second lottery state, and the advantageous section and the designated game section are entered. and terminate both sides of the
In the second lottery state, the normal section is started, and it is determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (executing the "1/32" lottery),
In the normal section in the second lottery state, when the specific conditions for transitioning to the advantageous section are satisfied (when the lottery of "1/32" is won), it shifts to the advantageous section and transitions to the advantageous section. It is possible to start the instructed game section based on
When the specific condition is satisfied in the normal section in the third lottery state, the game is shifted to the advantageous section, but the instructed game section is not started based on the transition to the advantageous section.

The second solution (sixth embodiment; FIG. 62) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game at the time of winning a minor combination B group);
an instruction function activation game for activating an instruction function displaying the advantageous operation mode in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed;
an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections;
an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operating game is always executed in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch in the advantageous section or the execution frequency is increased;
A game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instructed game section,
The game control means comprises a combination lottery means (61) for performing a combination lottery,
As a lottery state in which the role lottery is performed by the role lottery means, a first lottery state (RT3), a second lottery state (RT6), and a third lottery state (non-RT ),
In the designated game section in the first lottery state, when a predetermined condition is satisfied before reaching the upper limit of continuation of the advantageous section (during replay 06 display), the state is shifted to the second lottery state, and the advantageous section and the designated game section are entered. terminate both of the
In the second lottery state, the normal section is started, and it is determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (executing the "1/32" lottery),
In the second lottery state, when the end condition of the second lottery state is satisfied (when 50 games have been played), the state is shifted to the third lottery state,
There is a case where it shifts to the third lottery state without going through the second lottery state,
Determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous section even in the normal section of the third lottery state shifted without going through the second lottery state,
When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section in the second lottery state, after that, the instructed game section can be started,
When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section without going through the second lottery state, the instructed game section is not started.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 14 According to the original invention, the instructed game section in the first lottery state is shifted to the second lottery state, the advantageous section and the instructed game section are terminated, and then the advantageous section is entered again. Since it is possible and the instructed game section can be started, a game can be executed without being constrained by the upper limit of the advantageous section.
In addition, by adding a condition that allows the instruction game section to start (fulfilling a specific condition in the second lottery state in the first solution means, passing through the second lottery state in the second solution means), It is possible to prevent the instructed game section from being likely to be executed more than necessary.

15. original invention 15
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 15 The original invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function activation game can be executed by activating an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that ATs are managed by a main control board in addition to being managed by a sub control board (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section, which is a game section in which AT can be executed. Also, it has been proposed to display to the player that it is an advantageous section during the advantageous section. Here, it is conceivable to provide a case where the advantageous section is started based on the winning of the special role. In this case, it is desired not to lower the player's expectations even during the special game.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to be able to continue to give the player a sense of anticipation even during the special game.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 15 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (eighth embodiment; FIGS. 64 and 65) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game at the time of winning a minor combination B group);
an instruction function activation game for activating an instruction function displaying the advantageous operation mode in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed;
an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections;
Advantageous section display means (advantageous section display LED 77) for displaying that it is an advantageous section;
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6);
A role lottery means (61) for lottery of a role;
A production control means (sub control board 80) that controls the output of production,
The role lottery means performs a lottery of roles so as to have a case of winning a special role (1BBA) for shifting to a special game (1BBA game),
The winning probability of the special role is the same for all set values,
It is possible to start the advantageous section based on winning the special role,
Winning a special role, shifting to a special game based on the stop of the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role,
If the advantageous section started based on winning the special role ends by the end of the special game (example 1 or example 2 in FIG. 64), and if it continues after the special game ends (in FIG. 65 Example 3) and
The effect control means is capable of outputting a continuous effect over a plurality of games with respect to the continuation of the advantageous section during the special game.

A second solution is that in the first solution,
The continuous effect is characterized in that it is a effect suggesting whether or not the advantageous section continues even after the special game ends.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 15 According to the original invention, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the advantageous section will continue until the end of the special game.

16. original invention 16
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 16 The original invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function activation game can be executed by activating an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, in addition to managing ATs with a sub control board, it is known to manage ATs with a main control board (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section, which is a game section in which AT can be executed. Also, it has been proposed to display to the player that it is an advantageous section during the advantageous section. Here, it is conceivable to provide a case where the advantageous section is started based on the winning of the special role. In this case, it is desired that the player's expectations are not lowered even after the special game is over.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to continue to give the player a sense of anticipation even after the end of the special game.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 16 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (eighth embodiment; FIG. 66) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game at the time of winning a minor combination B group);
an instruction function activation game for activating an instruction function displaying the advantageous operation mode in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed;
an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections;
Advantageous section display means (advantageous section display LED 77) for displaying that it is an advantageous section;
a means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining one of a plurality of setting values;
A role lottery means (61) for lottery of a role;
A production control means (sub control board 80) that controls the output of production,
The role lottery means performs a lottery of roles so as to have a case of winning a special role (1BBA) for shifting to a special game (1BBA game),
The winning probability of the special role is the same for all set values,
It is possible to start the advantageous section based on winning the special role,
Winning a special role, shifting to a special game based on the stop of the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role,
The advantageous section started based on the winning of the special role ends after the special game ends with a predetermined number of games (5 games) (example 4), and when continuing beyond the predetermined number of games (example 5) and
The effect control means is capable of outputting a predetermined effect relating to the continuation of the advantageous section in at least a part of the game of the predetermined number of times after the end of the special game.

A second solution is that in the first solution,
The predetermined effect is a effect that suggests whether or not the advantageous section continues even after the predetermined number of games has been played after the special game ends.

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 16 According to the original invention, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation as to whether or not the advantageous section will continue even after the special game ends.

17. original invention 17
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 17 The original invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function activation game can be executed by activating an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, in addition to managing ATs with a sub control board, it is known to manage ATs with a main control board (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-161344).
In recent years, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function activation game for activating an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch. Here, it is conceivable to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the special combination. In this case, the skill of the player cannot be demonstrated only by uniformly starting the advantageous section based on the winning of the special combination.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to make a difference in the profit relating to the advantageous section depending on the skill of the player when shifting to the advantageous section based on the winning of the special combination.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 17 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (the ninth embodiment (Fig. 67))
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game at the time of winning a minor combination B group);
an instruction function activation game for activating an instruction function displaying the advantageous operation mode in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed;
an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections;
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6);
A role lottery means (61) for lottery of roles,
The winning lottery means performs a lottery for a winning combination so as to have a specific winning (1BBA+small winning combination E1),
The specific win is a win including a special win (1BBA) that carries over the win to the next game until the combination of the symbols stops, and a predetermined win (small win E1) that does not carry over the win to the next game,
Winning probability of specific winning is the same for all set values,
When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section in the game (“N”th game) in which a specific win is made, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role does not stop, and the winning of the special role is carried over to the next game. , the advantage section is started from the game ("N+2" game) in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the special winning handover has become possible to stop.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 17 According to the original invention, in the first game in which it is decided to shift to the advantageous section and the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role can be stopped, the symbols corresponding to the special role are displayed. It is possible to make a difference in profit obtained in the advantageous section between the player who has stopped the combination and the player who has not been able to stop the combination. As a result, the profit obtained in the advantageous section can be varied according to the skill of the player.

18. original invention 18
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 18 The original invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function activation game can be executed by activating an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, in addition to managing ATs with a sub control board, it is known to manage ATs with a main control board (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section, which is a game section in which AT can be executed. Here, although it is possible to add AT based on the winning of a special combination that does not have a set difference, it is conceivable to prevent the addition of AT based on the winning of a special combination that has a set difference. ing.
However, if this is done, there is a problem that when winning a special role with a set difference during AT, the player cannot expect an increase in AT.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to make it possible to add an instruction game section (AT) even when winning a special role with a setting difference.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 18 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (tenth embodiment (Fig. 22))
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game at the time of winning a minor combination B group);
an instruction function activation game for activating an instruction function displaying the advantageous operation mode in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed;
an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections;
an instruction game section (AT) in which, in an advantageous section, an instruction function actuation game is always executed in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch or the execution frequency is increased;
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6);
A role lottery means (61) for lottery of roles,
The role lottery means performs a lottery for a role so as to have a chance of winning a special role (for example, 1BBA) for shifting to a special game (for example, 1BBA game),
Winning a special role, shifting to a special game based on the stop of the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role,
A first lottery state (RT2) and a second lottery state (RT3) in which the odds of winning at least one replay role are different are provided as lottery states in which the role lottery is performed by the role lottery means,
After the end of the special game, in order to shift to the second lottery state, it is necessary to go through the first lottery state,
When shifting to a special game based on winning a special role during the designated game section, the designated game section can be extended based on the transition from the first lottery state to the second lottery state after the end of the special game. year,
When the first lottery state is shifted to the second lottery state without shifting to the special game during the designated game section, the designated game section is not extended based on that.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 18 According to the original invention, it is possible to extend the indicated game section when the first lottery state shifts to the second lottery state on the condition that the special game is executed. . As a result, regardless of whether or not the winning special combination has a set difference, it is possible to extend the designated game section after the special game ends. Further, it is possible to set so that the instructed game section is not extended simply by shifting from the first lottery state to the second lottery state without going through the special game.

19. original invention 19
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 19 The original invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function activating game for activating an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that ATs are managed by a main control board in addition to being managed by a sub control board (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-161344).
In recent years, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function activation game for activating an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch. Here, it is desired to provide new playability using the instruction function operation game.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to provide a new playability by using the pointing function operation game.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 19 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (eleventh embodiment; FIG. 68) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game at the time of winning a minor combination B group);
an instruction function activation game for activating an instruction function displaying the advantageous operation mode in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed;
an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections;
an instruction game section (AT) in which, in an advantageous section, an instruction function actuation game is always executed in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch or the execution frequency is increased;
a means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining one of a plurality of setting values;
A role lottery means (61) for lottery of a role;
A production control means (sub control board 80) that controls the output of production,
The winning lottery means performs a winning lottery so as to have a chance of winning a predetermined winning combination (small winning combination E1),
The winning probability of the predetermined combination is the same for all set values,
When a predetermined combination is won in the combination lottery by the combination lottery means, the next game is shifted to an advantageous section,
The advantageous section that shifts based on the winning of the predetermined role is
A first advantageous section (example 1 in FIG. 68) in which at least one instruction function activation game is executed but no instruction game section is executed;
It has a second advantageous section (example 2 in FIG. 68) that executes the instructed game section,
The effect control means is characterized by outputting a continuous effect in an advantageous section shifted based on the winning of a predetermined combination.

A second solution is that in the first solution,
The effect control means is characterized by starting the continuous effect after one instruction function activation game is executed.
A third solution is, in the first or second solution,
The continuous effect is a effect suggesting whether the first advantageous section or the second advantageous section is selected.

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 19 According to the original invention, even if the transition to the advantageous section is made, the instructed game section is executed, or at least one instruction function activation game is executed but the designated game section is not executed. Therefore, even after the transition to the advantageous section, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being limited to just moving to/not moving to the advantageous section.

20. original invention 20
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 20 The original invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function activation game for activating an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, in addition to managing ATs with a sub control board, it is known to manage ATs with a main control board (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-161344).
In recent years, it has been considered to provide an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function activating game for activating an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch. Here, it is conceivable to set an upper limit for the advantageous section. On the other hand, even if it moves to the advantageous section, it is conceivable that the conditional device (role) having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch will not be won.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to achieve a balance between the end condition (including the upper limit) of the advantageous section and the execution of the instruction function activation game.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 20 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (11th embodiment; FIG. 69) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game at the time of winning a minor combination B group);
an instruction function activation game for activating an instruction function displaying the advantageous operation mode in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed;
an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections;
a means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining one of a plurality of setting values;
A role lottery means (61) for lottery of roles,
The winning lottery means performs a winning lottery so as to have a chance of winning a predetermined winning combination (small winning combination E1),
The winning probability of the predetermined combination is the same for all set values,
When a predetermined combination is won in the combination lottery by the combination lottery means, the next game may shift to an advantageous section,
In the advantageous section, when the predetermined end condition of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section ends,
In the advantageous section, when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section ends,
In the advantageous section, when there is no game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch until the predetermined termination condition is reached, the advantageous section is terminated until at least one indicating function activation game is executed. (Example 3 in FIG. 69), but when there is not even a single game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch until the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, the instruction function activation game is not executed. End the section (example 4 in FIG. 69)
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 20 According to the original invention, in the advantageous section, "at least one command function activation game is executed" and "when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section ends". You can strike a balance with

21. Original invention 21
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 21 The original invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function activation game can be executed by activating an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, in addition to managing ATs with a sub control board, it is known to manage ATs with a main control board (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-161344).
In recent years, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function activation game for activating an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch. Here, it is conceivable to set an upper limit for the advantageous section. Furthermore, it is conceivable that a special role is won during the advantageous section and the game shifts to a special game. In this case, if the upper limit of the advantageous interval is reached during execution of the special game, the advantageous interval ends at that point, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during execution of the special game.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 21 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (12th embodiment; FIG. 70) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game at the time of winning a minor combination B group);
an instruction function activation game for activating an instruction function displaying the advantageous operation mode in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed;
an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections;
a means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining one of a plurality of setting values;
A role lottery means (61) for lottery of a role;
A production control means (sub control board 80) that controls the output of production,
The role lottery means performs a lottery for a role so as to have a chance of winning a special role (for example, 1BBA) for shifting to a special game (for example, 1BBA game),
The production control means is
When a predetermined condition is satisfied in the advantageous section (for example, when the upper limit of the advantageous section is approached), a specific effect (ending effect) is started,
When the upper limit of the advantageous section (1500 games) is reached during the output of the specific effect, the advantageous section is terminated and the specific effect is terminated,
Even when the special role is won during the output of the specific effect and the transition to the special game is performed, the specific effect is continued,
When the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the special game and during the output of the specific performance, the advantageous section is terminated, but the specific performance is continued until the special game is completed.

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 21 According to the original invention, when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the special game, the advantageous section is terminated, but the output was made during the advantageous section until the special game was terminated. Continue the specific production. As a result, it is possible to prevent the sudden end of the specific effect in the advantageous section during the special game, and to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

22. original invention 22
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 22 The original invention relates to a slot machine having a plurality of lottery states in which at least one replay combination has a different winning probability.
In a conventional slot machine, in addition to managing ATs with a sub control board, it is known to manage ATs with a main control board (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-161344).
Also known are slot machines that shift the RT (lottery state) in order to execute AT, for example.
In the prior art, it is known that the RT transition is performed by, for example, winning a specific condition device and stopping the combination of specific symbols. However, there is a problem that the easiness of transition of RT may differ depending on the set value.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to prevent the ease of transition of RT from being affected by the set value.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 22 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (13th embodiment; FIG. 71) is
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6);
A role lottery means (61) for lottery of roles,
As a lottery state in which the role lottery is performed by the role lottery means, there are a first lottery state (RT2), a second lottery state (RT3) and a third lottery state (RT4) in which at least one replay role has a different winning probability. prepared,
said role lottery means, in the first lottery state, performs a lottery for a role so as to have a possibility of winning a specific role (replay B group);
When a specific combination is won in the first lottery state and the combination of predetermined symbols stops, the state shifts to the second lottery state,
The winning probability of the specific combination in the first lottery state is the same for all set values,
The role lottery means performs a lottery of roles so as to have a chance of winning a special role (for example, 1BBB) for shifting to a special game (for example, 1BBB game),
When a special role is won in any lottery state and the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role does not stop, the state shifts to the third lottery state,
The winning probability of the special role is characterized in that it differs according to the set value.

A second solution is that in the first solution,
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game at the time of winning a minor combination B group);
an instruction function activation game for activating an instruction function displaying the advantageous operation mode in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed;
an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections;
an instruction game section (AT) in which, in an advantageous section, an instruction function activation game is always executed in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, or the execution frequency is increased;
The instructed game section can be executed at least in the second lottery state,
When a special role is won during the instructed game section, it is necessary to go through the first lottery state in order to shift to the second lottery state after the special game ends.
After the end of the special game, the designated game section can be extended based on the transition from the first lottery state to the second lottery state.

A third solution is, in the first or second solution,
The instructed game section can be executed in the third lottery state,
The instruction game section is not extended when the instruction game section is in the third lottery state.

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 22 According to the original invention, since the winning probability of the specific combination that triggers the transition from the first lottery state to the second lottery state is the same for all set values, It is possible to prevent the influence of the set value on the easiness of shifting to the second lottery state.

23. original invention 23
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 23 Same as original invention 22.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 23 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (13th embodiment; FIG. 71) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game at the time of winning a minor combination B group);
an instruction function activation game for activating an instruction function displaying the advantageous operation mode in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed;
an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections;
an instruction game section (AT) in which, in an advantageous section, an instruction function actuation game is always executed in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch or the execution frequency is increased;
a means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining one of a plurality of setting values;
A role lottery means (61) for lottery of roles,
A first lottery state (RT2) and a second lottery state (RT3) in which at least one replay role has a different probability of winning are provided as a lottery state in which the role lottery is performed by the role lottery means,
The instructed game section can be executed at least in the second lottery state,
The role lottery means performs a lottery of roles so as to have a possibility of winning a specific replay role (replay C group) in the second lottery state,
When a specific replay combination is won in the second lottery state and the combination of predetermined symbols stops, the state shifts to the first lottery state,
The winning probability of a specific replay role in the second lottery state is the same for all set values,
The role lottery means performs a lottery so that a predetermined replay combination (replay A) may be won in the second lottery state,
Even if the predetermined re-game combination is won in the second lottery state and the combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined re-game combination stops, the state does not shift to the first lottery state,
The winning probability of the predetermined replay combination in the second lottery state is characterized in that it differs according to a set value.

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 23 According to the original invention, the probability of winning a specific replay role that triggers the transition of the lottery state is the same for all set values, so the ease of transition to the lottery state is the set value. can be made unaffected by Furthermore, in the second lottery state, the odds of winning a predetermined replay combination that does not trigger the transition to the lottery state are made different according to the set value. can do.

24. original invention 24
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 24 Same as original invention 22.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 24 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (13th embodiment; FIG. 71) is
A role lottery means (61) for lottery of a role;
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining one of a plurality of setting values,
A first lottery state (RT1) and a second lottery state (RT2) in which at least one replay role has a different winning probability are provided as a lottery state in which the role lottery is performed by the role lottery means,
When a predetermined condition is satisfied in the first lottery state, it shifts to the second lottery state,
said winning lottery means, in the first lottery state, performs a winning lottery so as to have a possibility of winning a first winning combination (small winning combination B group) having a possibility of satisfying said predetermined condition;
The winning probability of the first combination in the first lottery state is the same for all set values,
said role lottery means, in the first lottery state, performs a lottery of roles so as to have a possibility of winning a second role (minor role D) that has no possibility of fulfilling said predetermined conditions;
The winning probability of the second combination in the first lottery state differs according to the setting value,
said winning lottery means, in the first lottery state, performs a winning lottery so as to have a possibility of winning a third winning combination (minor winning combination E1) having no possibility of fulfilling said predetermined conditions;
The winning probability of the third combination in the first lottery state is the same for all set values,
D1 (9 coins) is the maximum payout when the combination of symbols corresponding to the first hand stops, D2 (15 coins) is the maximum payout when the combination of symbols corresponding to the second hand stops, and D2 (15 coins) when the combination of symbols corresponding to the second hand stops. When the maximum payout when the combination of corresponding symbols stops is D3 (2 cards),
D2>D1>D3
is characterized by satisfying

A second solution is that in the first solution,
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct order of pressing) of the stop switch (42) (a game when winning a minor combination B group);
an instruction function activation game for activating an instruction function displaying the advantageous operation mode in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
A normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed among the game sections,
Equipped with an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections,
It is characterized in that there is a possibility of shifting to an advantageous section when a third combination is won in a combination lottery by the combination lottery means during the normal section.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 24 According to the original invention, the probability of winning the first combination that has the possibility of transitioning to the second lottery state in the first lottery state is the same for all set values, so the first lottery state to the second lottery state is not affected by the set value.
Furthermore, since the winning probability of the second combination with the largest payout is made different according to the set value, the payout rate can be greatly changed according to the set value.

25. original invention 25
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 25 The original invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function activating game for activating an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, in addition to managing ATs with a sub control board, it is known to manage ATs with a main control board (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-161344).
In recent years, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function activation game for activating an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch. Here, it is conceivable to change the conditions for ending the advantageous section after starting the advantageous section. In addition, it is considered necessary to execute at least one instruction function activation game in the advantageous section.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to enable the advantageous section to end at an intended timing while making it possible to change the conditions for ending the advantageous section.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 25 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (14th embodiment; FIG. 72) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game at the time of winning a minor combination B group);
an instruction function activation game for activating an instruction function displaying the advantageous operation mode in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed;
and an advantageous section in which it is necessary to execute at least one instruction function activation game in the game section,
When the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous section are met in the normal section, transition to the advantageous section,
When a predetermined condition (advantageous interval extension condition) is satisfied during the advantageous interval, the end condition (30 games) of the advantageous interval up to that point is changed (50 games are added),
When the termination condition of the advantageous section is changed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition after at least one instruction function activation game is executed in the advantageous section, the instruction function activation game is played once after the termination condition is changed. It is possible to end the advantageous section without executing even once (example 1 in FIG. 72),
After shifting to the advantageous section and before executing the first instruction function activating game, when the termination condition of the advantageous section is changed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, at least once after changing the ending condition If the instruction function activation game is not executed, the advantageous section cannot be terminated even if the termination condition is satisfied (example 2 in FIG. 72).
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of the original invention 25 According to the original invention, after starting an advantageous section, it is possible to change the end condition of the advantageous section up to that point. can be made non-monotonic. In addition, while the end condition of the advantageous section can be changed, even if the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the instruction function activation game has not been executed even once. It is possible to suppress the inability to terminate.

26. original invention 26
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 26 The original invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function activation game can be executed by activating an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In a conventional slot machine, in addition to managing ATs with a sub control board, it is known to manage ATs with a main control board (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-161344).
In recent years, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function activation game for activating an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch. Here, it is conceivable to execute a freeze at the end of the advantageous section. However, if the freeze is uniformly executed even when the advantageous section ends without giving the player a sufficient profit, the player may feel uncomfortable.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to properly execute the freeze at the end of the advantageous interval.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 26 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (15th embodiment; FIG. 73) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (a game at the time of winning a minor combination B group);
an instruction function activation game for activating an instruction function displaying the advantageous operation mode in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed;
Equipped with an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections,
When the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous section are met in the normal section, transition to the advantageous section,
Having at least two types of first and second termination conditions as termination conditions for the advantageous section,
In the advantageous section with the first termination condition, the expected value of profit obtained during the advantageous section is larger than in the advantageous section with the second termination condition,
Freeze control means for controlling the freeze that temporarily stops the progress of the game,
The freeze control means does not freeze when the advantageous section ends under the second end condition (CZ end condition), and freezes when the advantageous section ends under the first end condition (AT end condition). It is characterized by executing

A second solution is that in the first solution,
During the freeze, the profit obtained during the advantageous section is displayed.

(c) Effect of the original invention 26 According to the original invention, when freezing is executed according to the expected value of profit obtained during the advantageous interval (when the expected value of profit obtained during the advantageous interval is large), By providing a case where the freeze is not executed (when the expected value of the profit obtained during the advantageous interval is small), the freeze can be appropriately executed at the end of the advantageous interval.

27. original invention 27
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 27 The original invention comprises an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function activation game for activating an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and shifts to this advantageous section. This relates to a slot machine in which the main control board side determines the effect.
Among conventional slot machines, there is known a slot machine in which a main control board side performs a lottery for a role and determines whether or not to display an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-150881 (see publication).
Here, if the main control board decides whether or not to display an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, data and programs for performing processing related to this decision are required. need capacity.
On the other hand, the memory capacity of the main control board has a certain limit.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function activation game that activates an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be executed, and that the main control board side is instructed to shift to this advantageous section. To appropriately perform processing related to determination to shift to an advantageous section within a fixed memory capacity in a slot machine determined by .

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 27 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 89) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a small winning combination B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function activating game for activating an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode (displaying pressing order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78);
A normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed in the game section;
an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections;
Winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random value,
As a winning number, it has a specific winning number (for example, "44" number) indicating that it will be a specific winning (for example, 1BBA and a small winning combination D) and that it will move to an advantageous section,
Predetermined storage means (storage area "_NB_CND_AT" of RWM 53) capable of storing information on transition to an advantageous section,
When the winning number determined by the winning number determination means is a specific winning number, and a value other than a predetermined value ("0") is stored in the predetermined storage means, the value is stored in the predetermined storage means. (if "No" in step S1044 of FIG. 89, step S1045 is skipped),
When the winning number determined by the winning number determination means is a specific winning number and a predetermined value is stored in the predetermined storage means, the value stored in the predetermined storage means can be updated. (If "Yes" in step S1044 of FIG. 89, proceed to the next step S1045 to store the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the storage area "_NB_CND_AT" of the RWM 53.)
It is characterized by

A second solution is that in the first solution,
Equipped with a specific storage means (storage area "_NB_CND_BNS" of RWM 53) capable of storing winning information for special roles,
When the winning number determined by the winning number determination means is a specific winning number and a value other than a specific value ("0") is stored in the specific storage means, a predetermined value is stored in the predetermined storage means. is stored, the value stored in the predetermined storage means is maintained (when step S1043 in FIG. 89 is "No", steps S1044 to S1046 are skipped, so the value of "_NB_CND_AT" is changed to " 0”, the value of “_NB_CND_AT” will be maintained.)
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of Original Invention 27 According to the original invention, when the winning number is determined to be the specific winning number, if a value other than the predetermined value is stored in the predetermined storage means, that value is maintained, When the predetermined value is stored, the value can be updated.
As a result, the winning number can be determined by the same process regardless of whether or not it is decided to move to the advantageous section. Decision-making can be done appropriately.

28. original invention 28
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 28 Same as original invention 27.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 28 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 89) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a small winning combination B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function activating game for activating an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode (displaying pressing order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78);
A normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed in the game section;
an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections;
Winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random value,
As a winning number, it has a specific winning number (for example, "44" number) indicating that it will be a specific winning (for example, 1BBA and a small winning combination D) and that it will move to an advantageous section,
a first storage means (storage area "_NB_CND_AT" of the RWM 53) capable of storing information on transition to the advantageous section;
A second storage means (storage area "_NB_CND_BNS" of RWM 53) capable of storing winning information for special roles,
When the winning number determined by the winning number determination means is a specific winning number, and a value other than a predetermined value ("0") is stored in the second storage means, the value is stored in the first storage means. (If "No" in step S1043 of FIG. 89, the value of "_NB_CND_AT" is maintained by skipping steps S1044 to S1046),
When the winning number determined by the winning number determination means is a specific winning number, the value stored in the first storage means can be updated when a predetermined value is stored in the second storage means. (If "Yes" in step S1043 of FIG. 89, the process proceeds to step S1044. If "Yes" at this time, the process proceeds to step S1045, so that the value of "_NB_CND_AT" can be updated.)
It is characterized by

A second solution is that in the first solution,
When the winning number determined by the winning number determination means is a specific winning number and a value other than the specific value ("0") is stored in the first storage means, a predetermined value is stored in the second storage means. is stored, the value stored in the first storage means is maintained (if "Yes" in step S1043 of FIG. 89 and proceeding to step S1044, if "No" in step S1044, will be skipped, so the value of "_NB_CND_AT" will be maintained)
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of Original Invention 28 According to the original invention, when the winning number is determined to be a specific winning number, if a value other than the predetermined value is stored in the second storage means, The stored value is maintained, and when a predetermined value is stored in the second storage means, the value stored in the first storage means can be updated.
As a result, the winning number can be determined by the same process regardless of whether the special role is won or not, and regardless of whether it is decided to shift to the advantageous section. Within the range, it is possible to appropriately perform the processing related to the decision to shift to the advantageous section.

29. original invention 29
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 29 Same as original invention 27.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 29 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 89) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a small winning combination B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function activating game for activating an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode (displaying pressing order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78);
A normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed in the game section;
an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections;
Winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random value,
As a winning number, it has a specific winning number (eg "43") indicating that it will win a special role (eg 1BBA) and that it will move to an advantageous section,
a first storage means (storage area "_NB_CND_AT" of the RWM 53) capable of storing information on transition to the advantageous section;
A second storage means (storage area "_NB_CND_BNS" of RWM 53) capable of storing winning information for special roles,
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, the information stored in the first storage means may be updated based on the information stored in the second storage means. (If "Yes" in step S1043 of FIG. 89 and "Yes" in step S1044, proceed to step S1045 to update the value of "_NB_CND_AT"),
After executing the processing related to updating the information stored in the first storage means, update the information stored in the second storage means (after updating the value of "_NB_CND_AT" in step S1045, " _NB_CND_BNS” value)
It is characterized by

The second solution (sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 89) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a small winning combination B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function activating game for activating an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode (displaying pressing order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78);
A normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed in the game section;
an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections;
Winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random value,
As a winning number, it has a specific winning number (for example, "44" number) indicating that it will be a specific winning (for example, 1BBA and a small winning combination D) and that it will move to an advantageous section,
Specific winning is a duplicate winning including a special role (for example 1BBA) and a specific role (for example small role D),
a first storage means (storage area "_NB_CND_AT" of the RWM 53) capable of storing information on transition to the advantageous section;
A second storage means (storage area "_NB_CND_BNS" of RWM 53) capable of storing winning information for special roles;
a third storage means (storage area "_NB_CND_NOR" of RWM 53) capable of storing winning information for a specific combination;
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, the information stored in the first storage means may be updated based on the information stored in the second storage means. (If "Yes" in step S1043 of FIG. 89 and "Yes" in step S1044, proceed to step S1045 to update the value of "_NB_CND_AT"),
After executing the processing related to updating the information stored in the first storage means, update the information stored in the second storage means and the third storage means (after updating the value of "_NB_CND_AT" in step S1045 , update the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" in step S1046, and update the value of "_NB_CND_NOR" in step S1047)
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of Original Invention 29 According to the original invention, when the winning number is determined to be the specific winning number, it is stored in the first storage means based on the information stored in the second storage means. A process for updating the information is executed, and then the information stored in the second storage means is updated.
Thereby, the winning number can be determined by the same process regardless of whether or not the special combination is won and whether or not it is decided to shift to the advantageous section.
In addition, even without having a flag indicating whether or not winning information of a special role is carried over, it is possible to determine whether a special role has been won in the current game or whether a special role has been won in the previous game.
Therefore, it is possible to appropriately perform the processing related to the decision to shift to the advantageous section within a certain memory capacity.

30. original invention 30
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 30 Same as original invention 27.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 30 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (modification of the 16th embodiment; FIG. 92) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a small winning combination B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function activating game for activating an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode (displaying pressing order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78);
A normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed in the game section;
an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections;
Winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random value,
As a winning number, it has a specific winning number (eg "43") indicating that it will win a special role (eg 1BBA) and that it will move to an advantageous section,
When you win a special role, carry over the winning information of the special role until the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role stops,
a first storage means (storage area "_NB_CND_AT" of the RWM 53) capable of storing information on transition to the advantageous section;
A second storage means (storage area "_NB_CND_BNS" of RWM 53) capable of storing winning information for special roles;
A third storage means (storage area "_FL_PRD_LOT" of RWM 53) capable of storing carryover information indicating that winning information for a special role is carried over,
The information stored in the second storage means may be updated based on the fact that the winning number determined by the winning number determination means is the specific winning number (if "Yes" in step S1073, update the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" in step S1074),
After executing the processing related to the update of the information stored in the second storage means, when the third storage means stores a predetermined value ("0"), the information stored in the first storage means is updated. It may be updated (in step S1073, it is determined whether or not the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is "0", and in step S1074, after updating the value of "_NB_CND_BNS", "0" is stored in "_FL_PRD_LOT" in step S1078). If so, update the value of "_NB_CND_AT" in step S1079)
It is characterized by

The second solution (modification of the 16th embodiment; FIG. 92) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a small winning combination B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function activating game for activating an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode (displaying pressing order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78);
A normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed in the game section;
an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections;
Winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random value,
As a winning number, it has a specific winning number (for example, "44" number) indicating that it will be a specific winning (for example, 1BBA and a small winning combination D) and that it will move to an advantageous section,
Specific winning is a duplicate winning including a special role (for example 1BBA) and a specific role (for example small role D),
When you win a special role, carry over the winning information of the special role until the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role stops,
a first storage means (storage area "_NB_CND_AT" of the RWM 53) capable of storing information on transition to the advantageous section;
A second storage means (storage area "_NB_CND_BNS" of RWM 53) capable of storing winning information for special roles;
a third storage means (storage area "_FL_PRD_LOT" of RWM 53) capable of storing carryover information indicating that winning information for a special role is carried over;
a fourth storage means (storage area "_NB_CND_NOR" of RWM 53) capable of storing winning information of a specific combination;
The information stored in the second storage means and the fourth storage means may be updated based on the fact that the winning number determined by the winning number determination means is the specific winning number ("Yes" in step S1073). , the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is updated in step S1074, and the value of "_NB_CND_NOR" is updated in step S1075),
After executing the processing related to updating the information stored in the second storage means and the fourth storage means, when the predetermined value is stored in the third storage means, the information stored in the first storage means is updated. There is a case of updating (in step S1073, it is determined whether or not the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is "0", in step S1074, the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is updated, and in step S1075, after updating the value of "_NB_CND_NOR", When "0" is stored in "_FL_PRD_LOT" in step S1078, the value of "_NB_CND_AT" is updated in step S1079)
It is characterized by

A third solution is, in the first or second solution,
When the winning number determined by the winning number determination means is a specific winning number, and a value other than the specific value ("0") is stored in the second storage means, the value is stored in the second storage means. It is characterized by maintaining the value of

(c) Effect of the original invention 30 According to the original invention, when the winning number is determined as the specific winning number, the process for updating the information stored in the second storage means is executed, and then, When the predetermined value is stored in the third storage means, the information stored in the first storage means is updated.
As a result, the winning number can be determined by the same process regardless of whether the special role is won or not, and regardless of whether it is decided to shift to the advantageous section. Within the range, it is possible to appropriately perform the processing related to the decision to shift to the advantageous section.
In addition, after executing the process for updating the information stored in the second storage means, the register storing the win information for the special combination can be used for other processes.

31. original invention 31
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 31 Same as original invention 27.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 31 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (17th embodiment; FIG. 99) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a small winning combination B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function activating game for activating an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode (displaying pressing order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78);
A normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed in the game section;
an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections;
Winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random value,
As the winning number, a specific winning number (for example, "38" to "42" that can execute a transition lottery (two-step lottery in FIG. 100 and a lottery without set difference in FIG. 101) that determines whether to move to the advantageous section number),
Predetermined storage means (storage area "_NB_CND_AT" of RWM 53) capable of storing information on transition to an advantageous section,
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, and a value other than a predetermined value ("0") is stored in the predetermined storage means, the transition lottery is not executed (Fig. When "No" in step S1114 of 99, steps S1115 and S1116 are skipped, and the two-step lottery is not executed)
It is characterized by

The second solution (17th embodiment; FIG. 99) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a small winning combination B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function activation game for activating an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode (displaying pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
A normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed in the game section;
an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections;
Winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random value,
As the winning number, a specific winning number (for example, "38" to "42" that can execute a transition lottery (two-step lottery in Fig. 100 and a lottery with no set difference in Fig. 101) that determines whether to move to the advantageous section number),
Predetermined storage means (storage area "_NB_CND_AT" of RWM 53) capable of storing information on transition to an advantageous section,
When the winning number determined by the winning number determination means is a specific winning number, and a value other than a predetermined value ("0") is stored in the predetermined storage means, the transfer lottery may be executed. , the value stored in the predetermined storage means is maintained.

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 31 According to the original invention, when the winning number is determined to be a specific winning number, if a value other than a predetermined value is stored in the predetermined storage means, whether to move to the advantageous section No transition lottery is performed to determine whether or not.
As a result, the winning number can be determined by the same process regardless of whether or not it is decided to move to the advantageous section. Decisions can be processed appropriately.

32. original invention 32
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 32 Same as original invention 27.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 32 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (17th embodiment; FIG. 99) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a small winning combination B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function activating game for activating an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode (displaying pressing order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78);
A normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed in the game section;
an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections;
Winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random value,
As the winning number, a specific winning number (for example, "38" to "42" that can execute a transition lottery (two-step lottery in FIG. 100 and a lottery without set difference in FIG. 101) that determines whether to move to the advantageous section number),
Equipped with a specific storage means (storage area "_NB_CND_BNS" of RWM 53) capable of storing winning information for a special role (for example, 1BBA),
If the winning number determined by the winning number determination means is a specific winning number, and a value other than a specific value ("0") is stored in the specific storage means, the transfer lottery is not executed (Fig. When "No" in step S1113 of 99, by skipping steps S1114 to S1116, two-stage lottery is not executed)
It is characterized by

The second solution (17th embodiment; FIG. 99) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a small winning combination B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function activating game for activating an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode (displaying pressing order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78);
A normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed in the game section;
an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections;
Winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random value,
As the winning number, a specific winning number (for example, "38" to "42" that can execute a transition lottery (two-step lottery in FIG. 100 and a lottery without set difference in FIG. 101) that determines whether to move to the advantageous section number),
a first storage means (storage area "_NB_CND_AT" of the RWM 53) capable of storing information on transition to the advantageous section;
A second storage means (storage area "_NB_CND_BNS" of RWM 53) capable of storing winning information of a special combination (for example, 1BBA);
When the winning number determined by the winning number determination means is a specific winning number, and a value other than the specific value ("0") is stored in the second storage means, even if the transfer lottery is executed. , maintaining the value stored in the first storage means.

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 32 According to the original invention, when the winning number is determined to be a specific winning number, if a value other than the specific value is stored in the specific storage means, whether to shift to the advantageous section No transition lottery is performed to determine whether or not.
As a result, regardless of whether or not a special role is won, the winning number including the specific winning number capable of executing the transfer lottery can be determined. It is possible to appropriately perform processing related to the decision to move to

33. Original invention 33
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 33 Same as original invention 27.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 33 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (17th embodiment; FIG. 99) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a small winning combination B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function activating game for activating an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode (displaying pressing order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78);
A normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed in the game section;
an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections;
Winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random value,
As the winning number, a specific winning number (for example, "38" to "40" that can execute a transition lottery (two-step lottery in FIG. 100 and a lottery without set difference in FIG. 101) that determines whether to move to the advantageous section number),
The specific winning number is a winning number indicating that you have won a special role (eg 1BBA),
Equipped with a predetermined storage means (storage area "_NB_CND_BNS" of RWM 53) capable of storing winning information for special roles,
A transfer lottery may be executed based on the fact that the winning number determined by the winning number determination means is a specific winning number (when the winning number is determined to be "38" to "40" , If "Yes" in step S1113, "Yes" in step S1114, and "No" in step S1115, a two-stage lottery is executed in step S1116),
After executing the processing related to the shift lottery, the winning information of the special combination is stored in the predetermined storage means (after the two-step lottery is executed in step S1116, the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is updated in step S1117).
It is characterized by

The second solution (17th embodiment; FIG. 99) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a small winning combination B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function activating game for activating an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode (displaying pressing order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78);
A normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed in the game section;
an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections;
Winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random value,
As the winning number, a specific winning number (for example, "39" or "40" that can execute a transition lottery (two-step lottery in FIG. 100 and a lottery with no set difference in FIG. 101) that determines whether to move to the advantageous section number),
The specific winning number is a winning number that indicates that a special role (for example, 1BBA) and a special role (small role D) have been won,
Predetermined storage means (storage area "_NB_CND_BNS" of RWM 53) capable of storing winning information for special roles;
a specific storage means (storage area "_NB_CND_NOR" of RWM 53) capable of storing winning information of a specific combination;
A transfer lottery may be executed based on the fact that the winning number determined by the winning number determination means is a specific winning number (when the winning number is determined to be "39" or "40" , If "Yes" in step S1113, "Yes" in step S1114, and "No" in step S1115, a two-stage lottery is executed in step S1116),
After executing the processing related to the transition lottery, the winning information of the special combination is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the winning information of the specific combination is stored in the specific storage means (after executing the two-stage lottery in step S1116, step The value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is updated in S1117, and the value of "_NB_CND_NOR" is updated in step S1119).
It is characterized by

A third solution is, in the first or second solution,
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, and the winning information of the special combination is stored in the predetermined storage means, the transfer lottery is not executed (at step S1113 in FIG. 99). When "No", steps S1114 to S1117 are skipped, so the two-stage lottery in step S1116 is not executed)
It is characterized by

The fourth solution is, in the first to third solutions,
Advantageous section information storage means (storage area "_NB_CND_BNS" of RWM 53) capable of storing information on transition to an advantageous section;
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, and the advantageous section information storage means stores information relating to transition to the advantageous section, the transition lottery is not executed (Fig. 99). When "No" in step S1114, steps S1115 and S1116 are skipped, so the two-stage lottery in step S1116 is not executed)
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of Original Invention 33 According to the original invention, when the winning number is determined to be the specific winning number, the transfer lottery can be executed. Then, after executing the processing related to the transfer lottery, the winning information of the special combination is stored in the predetermined storage means.
Thereby, even if there is no flag indicating whether or not the winning information of the special role is carried over, it is determined whether the special role was won in the game this time or the special role was won before the previous game, and the transition is made. It can be decided whether or not to run a lottery.
Therefore, it is possible to appropriately perform the processing related to the decision to shift to the advantageous section within a certain memory capacity.

34. original invention 34
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 34 Same as original invention 27.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 34 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (modification of the 17th embodiment; FIG. 103) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a small winning combination B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function activating game for activating an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode (displaying pressing order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78);
A normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed in the game section;
an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections;
Winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random value,
As the winning number, a specific winning number (for example, "38" to "40" that can execute a transition lottery (two-step lottery in FIG. 100 and a lottery without set difference in FIG. 101) that determines whether to move to the advantageous section number),
The specific winning number is a winning number indicating that you have won a special role (eg 1BBA),
When you win a special role, carry over the winning information of the special role until the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role stops,
A first storage means (storage area "_NB_CND_BNS" of RWM 53) capable of storing winning information for special roles;
A second storage means (storage area "_FL_PRD_LOT" of RWM 53) capable of storing carryover information indicating that winning information for a special role is carried over,
Based on the fact that the winning number determined by the winning number determination means is the specific winning number, the information stored in the first storage means is updated (the winning number is determined to be "38" to "40"). 103, the result is "Yes" in step S1153 of FIG. 103, and the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is updated in step S1154),
Based on the information stored in the second storage means, there is a case where the transition lottery is executed and a case where it is not executed (if "No" in step S1158 in FIG. Executed, and when "Yes" in step S1158, step S1116 is skipped, so the two-stage lottery in step S1116 is not executed)
It is characterized by

The second solution (modification of the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 103) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a small winning combination B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function activating game for activating an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode (displaying pressing order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78);
A normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed in the game section;
an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections;
Winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random value,
As the winning number, a specific winning number (for example, "39" or "40" that can execute a transition lottery (two-step lottery in FIG. 100 and a lottery with no set difference in FIG. 101) that determines whether to move to the advantageous section number),
The specific winning number is a winning number that indicates that a special role (for example, 1BBA) and a special role (small role D) have been won,
When you win a special role, carry over the winning information of the special role until the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role stops,
A first storage means (storage area "_NB_CND_BNS" of RWM 53) capable of storing winning information for special roles;
A second storage means (storage area "_FL_PRD_LOT" of RWM 53) capable of storing carryover information indicating that winning information for a special role is carried over;
a third storage means (storage area "_NB_CND_NOR" of RWM 53) capable of storing winning information for a specific combination;
Based on the fact that the winning number determined by the winning number determination means is the specific winning number, the information stored in the first storage means and the third storage means is updated (when the winning number is "38" to " 40”, the result is “Yes” in step S1153 of FIG. 103, the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is updated in step S1154, and the value of “_NB_CND_NOR” is updated in step S1155),
Based on the information stored in the second storage means, there is a case where the transition lottery is executed and a case where it is not executed (if "No" in step S1158 in FIG. Executed, and when "Yes" in step S1158, step S1116 is skipped, so the two-stage lottery in step S1116 is not executed)
It is characterized by

A third solution is, in the first or second solution,
When the winning number determined by the winning number determination means is a specific winning number, and the winning information of the special role is stored in the first storage means, the information stored in the first storage means is maintained. (If "No" in step S1153 of FIG. 103, the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is maintained by skipping step S1154.)
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of Original Invention 34 According to the original invention, when the winning number is determined as the specific winning number, the information stored in the first storage means is updated. Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, there are cases where the transfer lottery is executed and cases where it is not executed.
As a result, regardless of whether or not a special role is won, the winning number including the specific winning number capable of executing the transfer lottery can be determined. It is possible to appropriately perform processing related to the decision to move to
In addition, after updating the information stored in the first storage means, the register storing the winning information of the special combination can be used for other processing.

35. original invention 35
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 35 Same as original invention 27.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 35 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (18th embodiment; FIGS. 105 to 108) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a small winning combination B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function activation game for activating an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode (displaying pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
A normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed in the game section;
an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections;
Winning number determining means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number;
A lottery data table used when determining the winning number (all RT common lottery table (8) in FIG. 105 to all RT common lottery table (11) in FIG. 108),
Lottery data table
Winning number data indicating a winning number (for example, “@BBA”=“38”), probability data indicating a winning probability (for example, “10”), and advantageous interval data indicating transition to an advantageous interval (for example, “@LT_AT1 ”) and the first data group associated with (for example, 1BBA condition device lottery data in FIG. 106),
A second data group that associates winning number data (for example, "@BBA" = "38") with probability data (for example, "10") and does not associate advantageous section data (for example, 1BBA condition device lottery in FIG. 105 data) and
The first data group and the second data group are characterized by defining the same winning number data.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 35 According to the original invention, the same winning number is determined when using either the first data group or the second data group, but when the first data group is used, , it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, and when the second data group is used, it is determined not to shift to the advantageous section.
As a result, by performing a lottery using one lottery data table, it is possible to determine the winning number and to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section, so that the memory capacity can be kept within a certain range. , it is possible to appropriately perform the processing related to the decision to shift to the advantageous section.

36. original invention 36
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 36 Same as original invention 27.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 36 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (19th embodiment; FIG. 121) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a small winning combination B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function activating game for activating an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode (displaying pressing order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78);
A normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed in the game section;
an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections;
random number generating means;
Lottery lottery means (internal lottery 2 in FIG. 119 and condition device number set 6 in FIG. )When,
a transition lottery means (advantageous interval transition lottery in FIG. 121) that determines whether or not to transition to an advantageous interval based on the random value obtained from the random number generating means;
having a first game state (for example, RT1) and a second game state (for example, RT2) with different probabilities of winning a predetermined combination in the lottery by the combination lottery means;
The transition lottery means executes the transition lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied (not when the accessory is activated (“No” in step S1323 in FIG. 120) and not during the internal process (“Yes” in step S1324). ”), and when it is not an advantageous section (“Yes” in step S1325), proceed to step S1326 to execute an advantageous section transition lottery),
In the transition lottery, when the random number falls within a predetermined range, it is decided to transition to the advantageous section (when the random number falls within the range of "0" to "177", it is decided to transition to the advantageous section 2). However, when the random number falls within the range of "178" to "344", it is decided to move to the advantageous section 1),
The combination won by the combination lottery means when the random number falls within the predetermined range is the same in the first game state and the second game state (when the random number falls within the range of "0" to "344"). , All RT common lottery table (12) in FIG. 114 to All RT common lottery table (14) in FIG. 116 are used to determine the winning number. RT4 is the same)
It is characterized by

The second solution (modification of the nineteenth embodiment; FIG. 121) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a small winning combination B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function activating game for activating an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode (displaying pressing order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78);
A normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed in the game section;
an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections;
random number generating means;
Lottery lottery means (internal lottery 2 in FIG. 119 and condition device number set 6 in FIG. )When,
transition lottery means (advantageous interval transition lottery in FIG. 121) for determining whether or not to transition to the advantageous interval based on the random value obtained from the random number generating means; and predetermined storage means capable of storing information relating to transition to the advantageous interval. (storage area "_NB_CND_AT" of RWM 53) and
having a first game state (for example, RT1) and a second game state (for example, RT2) with different probabilities of winning a predetermined combination in the lottery by the combination lottery means;
The transition lottery means decides to transition to the advantageous section when the random number falls within a predetermined range (or to transition to the advantageous section 2 when the random number falls within the range of '0' to '177'). , and when the random number falls within the range of "178" to "344", it is decided to move to the advantageous section 1),
When the transition lottery is executed under the condition that the specific condition is satisfied, the information stored in the predetermined storage means is maintained (when the role product is activated ("Yes" in step S1356 in FIG. 123). ), when the internal medium flag is on (“Yes” in step S1357 of FIG. 123), and when the advantageous section number is not “0” (“No” in step S1358 of FIG. 123), In this case, even if the advantageous section transition lottery is executed, the advantageous section number is maintained by skipping step S1338 in FIG. ),
The combination won by the combination lottery means when the random number falls within the predetermined range is the same in the first game state and the second game state (when the random number falls within the range of "0" to "344"). , All RT common lottery table (12) in FIG. 114 to All RT common lottery table (14) in FIG. 116 are used to determine the winning number. RT4 is the same)
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 36 According to the original invention, based on one random value obtained from the random number generation means, the combination lottery means performs a lottery for a role, and the shift lottery means shifts to an advantageous section. It is decided whether or not to allow When the shift lottery means determines to shift to the advantageous section, the combination lottery means wins the same combination in the first game state and the second game state.
In this way, using one random value, it is possible to perform a lottery for a winning combination and to determine whether or not to shift to an advantageous interval. It is possible to appropriately perform processing related to the decision to transfer.

37. original invention 37
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 37 The original invention relates to a technique for outputting LED digit signals and segment signals from an output port in a gaming machine.
Dynamic lighting of a 7-segment display (7-segment) is conventionally known (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 09-225091).
For example, the above publication describes assignment of output ports for digit signals and segment signals.
Recently, it is being considered to mount a 7-segment capable of displaying an advantageous section ratio and the like on the main control board of a gaming machine (slot machine).
On the other hand, conventionally, game machines are provided with 7 segments for displaying the accumulated number, 7 segments for displaying the acquired number, and the like.
When the number of 7-segs increases in this way, the problem arises how to design the digit signal and segment signal of each 7-seg, and the output port.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to appropriately design digit (drive) signals, segment signals, and output ports to perform efficient signal output processing.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 37 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (twentieth embodiment; FIG. 128) is
A display unit that has a plurality of segments (segments A to P) that can be lit, and displays predetermined information (stored number, acquisition number, error information, push order instruction number, game state, or set value) by lighting the segments. a first display means having one or more (digits) (stored number display LED 76, acquired number display LED 78, status display LED 79, or set value display LED 73);
a second display means (management information display LED 74) having one or more of the display units;
a first output port (output port 2) capable of outputting a drive signal (digit signal) to the display section of the first display means;
a second output port (output port 4) capable of outputting a drive signal to the display section of the second display means;
a third output port (output port 3) capable of outputting a segment signal to the segments of the display portions of the first display means and the second display means;
a first output process (LED display control; FIG. 134) for outputting a drive signal from the first output port to the display section of the first display means and outputting a segment signal from the third output port to the segment;
a second output process (ratio display process; FIG. 135) for outputting a drive signal from the second output port to the display section of the second display means and outputting a segment signal from the third output port to the segment;
Clear signal output processing (steps S1431 and S1432 in FIG. 134) for outputting clear signals from the first output port, the second output port, and the third output port before the first output processing and the second output processing; and run
The time from the output timing of the clear signal to the output timing of the driving signal and the segment signal in the first output process (time from step S1431 and step S1432 to step S1458) is defined as "t1", and the second output from the output timing of the clear signal. The process is executed so that "t1 <t2", where "t2" is the time until the output timing of the drive signal and the segment signal in the process (the time from step S1431 and step S1432 to step S1487). and

A second solution is that in the first solution,
Equipped with a display counter (LED display counter; FIG. 132) that is updated at a predetermined timing,
A first output process is executed when the display counter has a first value, and a second output process is executed when the display counter has a second value (second value ≠ first value). do.

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 37 According to the original invention, the output port common to the first display means and the second display means is used to output the segment signal. signal) and segment signals can be output.
Further, when the first display means is a display means visible to the player and the second display means is a display means invisible to the player, the output processing of the first display means is performed before the second display means. Therefore, priority can be given to prevention of flickering of the first display means.
Further, according to the second solution, it is possible to execute the output processing to the first display means and the output process to the second display means using one display counter.

38. original invention 38
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 38 Same as original invention 37.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 38 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (21st embodiment; FIG. 138) is
A display unit (digit) that has a plurality of segments (segments A to P) that can be lit, and displays predetermined information (stored number, acquisition number, error information, push order instruction number, or game state) by lighting the segments. A first display means (stored number display LED 76, acquired number display LED 78, or status display LED 79) having one or more
a second display means (management information display LED 74) having one or more of the display units;
a first output port (output port 3) capable of outputting a drive signal (digit signal) to the display section of the first display means and the display section of the second display means;
a second output port (output port 4) capable of outputting a segment signal to the segment of the display portion of the first display means and the segment of the display portion of the second display means;
a first output process (LED display control; FIG. 140) for outputting a drive signal from the first output port to the display section of the first display means and outputting a segment signal from the second output port to the segment;
a second output process (ratio display process; FIG. 141) for outputting a drive signal from the first output port to the display section of the second display means and outputting a segment signal from the second output port to the segment;
Before the first output process and the second output process, a clear signal output process for outputting clear signals from the first output port and the second output port (step S1531 in FIG. 140) is executed,
The time from the output timing of the clear signal to the output timing of the drive signal and the segment signal in the first output process (time from step S1531 to step S1534) is defined as "t1", and the time from the output timing of the clear signal to the drive in the second output process. It is characterized in that the process is executed so that "t1<t2", where "t2" is the time until the output timing of the signal and the segment signal (the time from step S1531 to step S1487).

A second solution is that in the first solution,
Equipped with a display counter (LED display counter; FIG. 139 (B)) that is updated at a predetermined timing,
A first output process is executed when the display counter has a first value, and a second output process is executed when the display counter has a second value (second value ≠ first value). do.

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 38 In addition to the effect of the original invention 37, it is possible to reduce the number of output ports because the drive signal output port can be set to one and the segment signal output port can be set to one. can.

39. original invention 39
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 39 Same as original invention 37.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 39 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (22nd embodiment; FIG. 144) is
A display unit that has a plurality of segments (segments A to P) that can be lit, and displays predetermined information (stored number, acquisition number, error information, push order instruction number, game state, or set value) by lighting the segments. a first display means (stored number display LED 76, acquired number display LED 78, or status display LED 79) having one or more (digits);
a second display means (management information display LED 74) having one or more of the display units;
a first output port (output port 2) capable of outputting a drive signal (digit signal) to the display section of the first display means and the display section of the second display means;
a second output port (output port 3) capable of outputting segment signals (segment 1A to 1P signals) to the segments of the display portion of the first display means;
a third output port (output port 4) capable of outputting segment signals (segment 2A to 2P signals) to the segments of the display portion of the second display means;
a first output process (LED display control; FIG. 149) for outputting a drive signal from the first output port to the display section of the first display means and outputting a segment signal from the second output port to the segment;
a second output process (ratio display process; FIG. 150) for outputting a drive signal from the first output port to the display section of the second display means and outputting a segment signal from the third output port to the segment;
Clear signal output processing (steps S1541 and S1542 in FIG. 149) for outputting clear signals from the first output port, the second output port, and the third output port before the first output processing and the second output processing; and run
The time from the output timing of the clear signal to the output timing of the driving signal and the segment signal in the first output process (time from steps S1541 and S1542 to steps S1554 and S1555) is defined as "t1", and from the output timing of the clear signal When the time until the output timing of the drive signal and the segment signal in the second output process (time from step S1541 and step S1542 to step S1561) is "t2", the process is executed so that "t1<t2". It is characterized by

A second solution is that in the first solution,
Equipped with a display counter (LED display counter; FIG. 148) that is updated at a predetermined timing,
A first output process is executed when the display counter has a first value, and a second output process is executed when the display counter has a second value (second value ≠ first value). do.
(c) Effect of Original Invention 39 Same as Original Invention 37.

40. original invention 40
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 40 Same as original invention 37.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 40 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (24th embodiment; FIG. 154) is
A display unit that has a plurality of segments (segments A to P) that can be lit, and displays predetermined information (stored number, acquisition number, error information, push order instruction number, game state, or set value) by lighting the segments. a first display means having one or more (digits) (stored number display LED 76, acquired number display LED 78, status display LED 79, or set value display LED 73);
a second display means (management information display LED 74) having one or more of the display units;
a first output port (output port 3) capable of outputting a drive signal (digit signal) to the display section of the first display means;
a second output port (output port 6) capable of outputting a drive signal (digit signal) to the display section of the second display means;
a third output port (output port 4) capable of outputting a segment signal to the segment of the display portion of the first display means;
a fourth output port (output port 7) capable of outputting a segment signal to the segment of the display portion of the second display means;
a first output process (LED display control; FIG. 158) for outputting a drive signal from the first output port to the display section of the first display means and outputting a segment signal from the third output port to the segment;
a second output process (ratio display process; FIG. 159) for outputting a drive signal from the second output port to the display section of the second display means and outputting a segment signal from the fourth output port to the segment;
Clear signal output processing for outputting clear signals from the first output port, the second output port, the third output port, and the fourth output port before the first output processing and the second output processing (step S1571 in FIG. 158) and step S1572) and
The time from the output timing of the clear signal to the output timing of the drive signal and the segment signal in the first output process (time from steps S1571 and S1572 to steps S1576 and S1577) is defined as "t1", and from the output timing of the clear signal When the time until the output timing of the drive signal and the segment signal in the second output process (the time from step S1571 and step S1572 to step S1581) is "t2", the process is executed so that "t1<t2". It is characterized by

A second solution is that in the first solution,
Equipped with a display counter (LED display counter; FIG. 156) that is updated at a predetermined timing,
A first output process is executed when the display counter has a first value, and a second output process is executed when the display counter has a second value (second value ≠ first value). do.
(c) Effect of Original Invention 40 Same as Original Invention 37.

41. original invention 41
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 41 The original invention relates to a technique for outputting LED digit signals and segment signals from an output port in a gaming machine.
Dynamic lighting of a 7-segment display (7-segment) is conventionally known (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 09-225091).
For example, the above publication describes assignment of output ports for digit signals and segment signals.
Recently, it is being considered to mount a 7-segment capable of displaying an advantageous section ratio and the like on the main control board of a gaming machine (slot machine).
On the other hand, conventionally, game machines are provided with 7 segments for displaying the accumulated number, 7 segments for displaying the acquired number, and the like.
When the number of 7 segments increases in this way, the program becomes more complicated to control the lighting of each 7 segment.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to efficiently store and execute a program for controlling LED lighting.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 41 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
A display unit that has a plurality of segments (segments A to P) that can be lit, and displays predetermined information (stored number, acquisition number, error information, push order instruction number, game state, or set value) by lighting the segments. a first display means having one or more (digits) (stored number display LED 76, acquired number display LED 78, status display LED 79, or set value display LED 73);
a second display means (management information display LED 74) having one or more of the display units;
A first program (LED display control) for outputting a drive signal (digit signal) to the display section of the first display means and outputting a segment signal to the segment of the display section of the first display means is stored. 1 storage area (used area of ROM 54) and for outputting drive signals (digit signals) to the display section of the second display means and segment signals to the segments of the display section of the second display means; A storage means (ROM54) having a second storage area (outside the use area of ROM54) storing a second program (ratio display process),
After executing the first program, executing the second program,
Before outputting a drive signal to the display portion of the first display means and outputting a segment signal to the segments of the display portion of the first display means, outputting a clear signal to the first display means and the second display means. Clear signal output processing (eg, steps S1431 and S1432 during LED display control in FIG. 134) is provided.

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 41 According to the original invention, the programs for the first display means and the second display means are separately stored, and the second program is executed after the first program is executed. and execution can be performed efficiently.
Also, since the clear signal output process is executed when the first program is executed, it is possible to prevent afterimages.

42. original invention 42
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 42 The original invention relates to a technique for outputting LED digit signals and segment signals from an output port in a gaming machine.
Dynamic lighting of a 7-segment display is conventionally known (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 09-225091).
For example, the above publication describes assignment of output ports for digit signals and segment signals.
Recently, it is being considered to mount 7 segments (management information display LEDs) capable of displaying the advantageous section ratio and the like on the main control board of a gaming machine (slot machine).
On the other hand, the 7 segments are composed of segments A to G, and may further include segment P (also called segment DP), which is a dot segment.
If the management information display LED has a dot segment, the problem is how to use the dot segment.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to display specific information using dot segments.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 42 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution is
A first display unit (digit 7) and a second display unit (digit 6, 8, 9) and
A display counter (LED display counter) that is updated at a predetermined timing,
When it is time to turn on the first display unit according to the display counter, turn on the segments including the specific segment (segment P),
Preventing the specific segment of the second display unit from lighting at any timing of the display counter,
When a specific error (unrecoverable error 2) occurs, the update (interrupt) of the display counter is stopped, and specific error processing (unrecoverable error processing 2) is performed to light up the specific segment of the second display unit. It is characterized by executing

A second solution is that in the first solution,
The specific error processing is characterized by executing processing for lighting the specific segment of all the display units including the first display unit and the second display unit.
A third solution is, in the first or second solution,
A first storage area (within the use area of the ROM 54) for storing a program (for example, main processing) for executing game control processing, and a storage area separated from the first storage area for executing the specific error processing. It is characterized by comprising storage means (ROM 54) having a second storage area (outside the use area of ROM 54) for storing a program (unrecoverable error processing 2).

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 42 According to the original invention, different information can be displayed on the specific segment of the first display section and the specific segment of the second display section. In particular, it is possible to display a section of information by lighting a specific segment of the first display section. On the other hand, the occurrence of a specific error can be notified by lighting a specific segment of the second display unit.

43. original invention 43
(a) Problems to be solved by the original invention 43 It relates to a slot machine that decides.
Among conventional slot machines, there is known a slot machine in which a main control board side performs a lottery for a winning combination and determines whether or not to display an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-161344). (see publication).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section, which is a game section in which AT can be executed, and to display that it is an advantageous section by an advantageous section display device when shifting to the advantageous section.
Here, when a rare role is won, a transition to an advantageous section and a time not to transition to the advantageous section are provided, and in the game in which the rare combination is won, the transition to the advantageous section is made according to the content displayed by the advantageous section display device. The player will know whether or not to do so. In this case, it is not possible to maintain the player's expectation for AT execution by winning a rare combination.
On the other hand, if the AT is always executed when the rare combination is won, the winning of the rare combination means that the AT is executed, which makes the game monotonous.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is that, when a combination of specific symbols becomes a result of a lottery (winning a rare role) that makes it possible to stop, the expectation for the shift to the instruction game section (AT) is played over multiple games. to give to others.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 43 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (25th embodiment) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a small winning combination B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function is not activated,
an advantageous section in which the instruction function can be operated among the game sections;
an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function is always operated or the operation frequency is increased in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch in the advantageous section;
an advantageous section display device (advantageous section display LED 77) indicating that it is an advantageous section;
When a combination of predetermined symbols (a combination of symbols in which "watermelon" is aligned in a straight line diagonally upward to the right) becomes a stoppable lottery result (small win D winning), and a specific combination of symbols (left reel A lottery means (lottery lottery means 61) for performing a lottery so that there is a case where a combination of symbols in which "Cherry" stops in the middle left row when 31 is stopped) may result in a lottery result (small win E1 win) that can be stopped. prepared,
When the lottery means makes a lottery result that the combination of the predetermined symbols can be stopped, the advantageous section is shifted to and the advantageous section is displayed by the advantageous section display device; and when the advantageous section display device does not display that it is an advantageous section,
When the lottery means has a lottery result that the combination of the specific symbols can be stopped, it is always shifted to an advantageous section, and the advantageous section display device displays that it is an advantageous section,
When the lottery means makes a lottery result that the combination of the specific symbols can be stopped, the game is shifted to an advantageous section, and when the advantageous section is displayed by the advantageous section display device, the instructed game section is displayed. When it shifts to and when it does not shift to the instructed game section.

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 43 According to the original invention, when a lottery result that allows a specific combination of symbols to be stopped is obtained, the section is always shifted to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section is indicated by the advantageous section display device. display that In this case, there is a time to shift to the designated game section and a time to not shift to the designated game section, so when a lottery result is obtained in which the combination of specific symbols can be stopped, the shift to the designated game section is performed. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the game over a plurality of games.

44. original invention 44
(a) Problems to be solved by the original invention 44 It relates to a slot machine that decides.
Among conventional slot machines, there is known a slot machine in which a main control board side performs a lottery for a winning combination and determines whether or not to display an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-161344). (see publication).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section, which is a game section in which AT can be executed.
Here, each time the advantageous section ends, the ease of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is changed. If the easiness of transitioning to 2 is different, there is a risk of harming fairness among players.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to make the easiness of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section the same every time the advantageous section ends, and to change the set value when the advantageous section ends and when the set value is changed. And, the easiness of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section should be the same.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 44 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (25th embodiment) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a small winning combination B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function is not activated,
an advantageous section in which the instruction function can be operated among the game sections;
a first storage means (predetermined storage area of the RWM 53) for storing information about the advantageous section;
a means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining one of a plurality of setting values;
Second storage means for storing setting values (setting value data storage area (_NB_RANK) on RWM 53);
a role lottery means (61) for performing a lottery for a role so as to have a chance of winning a replay role;
A plurality of lottery states (RT states (non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, or RT4)) with different winning probabilities of at least one replay combination,
When the advantageous section ends, the first initialization process (initialization process at the end of the advantageous section) is executed,
When the setting value stored in the second storage means is changed, a second initialization process (initialization process at the time of setting change) is executed,
In the first initialization process, while maintaining the lottery state at the end of the advantageous section, shift to the normal section,
In the second initialization process, transition to a predetermined specific lottery state (non-RT), and transition to a normal section,
In the first initialization process and the second initialization process, by clearing the information about the advantageous section stored in the first storage means, when the first initialization process is executed and when the second initialization process is executed, It is characterized by shifting to the normal section in which the information on the advantageous section is the same as when it is executed.

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 44 According to the original invention, the information on the advantageous section is cleared in both the first initialization process executed when the advantageous section ends and the second initialization process executed when the setting is changed. As a result, every time the advantageous section ends, the ease of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section can be made the same. Since the easiness of transition from the section to the advantageous section can be made the same, fairness among the players can be ensured.

45. original invention 45
(a) Problems to be solved by the original invention 45 It relates to a slot machine that decides.
Among conventional slot machines, there is known a slot machine in which a main control board side performs a lottery for a winning combination and determines whether or not to display an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-161344). (see publication).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section, which is a game section in which AT can be executed.
Here, in slot machines, it is common that the higher the set value, the higher the probability of winning a special combination.
However, if it is possible to shift to an advantageous section when winning a special role, there is a risk that the difference in the player's advantage between the low setting and the high setting may become too large.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to prevent the difference in the player's advantage from becoming too large between the low setting and the high setting.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 45 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (25th embodiment) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a small winning combination B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function is not activated,
an advantageous section in which the instruction function can be operated among the game sections;
a means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining one of a plurality of setting values;
A role lottery means (61) for performing a lottery for a role so as to have a chance of winning a first special role (1BBA) and a second special role (1BBB) as a special role (1BB) for shifting to a special game. prepared,
When the first special role is won by the role lottery means, it is possible to shift to an advantageous section,
When the second special role is won by the role lottery means, it does not move to the advantageous section,
The winning probability of the first special role is set to be the same for all set values,
The probability of winning the second special role is set to increase as the set value increases. It is characterized by increasing as it becomes lower.

(c) Effect of the original invention 45 According to the original invention, the winning probability of the first special role that can shift to the advantageous section is the same for all set values, and the winning probability of the second special role that does not shift to the advantageous section is , increases as the set value increases. As a result, the probability of winning the special role (total of the first special role and the second special role) increases as the set value increases, and the probability of transition to the advantageous section when the special role is won is low. Since the level increases as the level increases, the difference in the player's advantage between the low setting and the high setting can be prevented from becoming too large.

46. original invention 46
(a) Problems to be solved by the original invention 46 It relates to a slot machine that decides.
Among conventional slot machines, there is known a slot machine in which a main control board side performs a lottery for a winning combination and determines whether or not to display an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-161344). (see publication).
Recently, it has become possible to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function that displays an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be activated, and furthermore, in the advantageous section, an instruction game section is provided in which the instruction function is always operated or the operation frequency is increased. Proposed.
Here, it is possible to provide an advantageous section having an instructed game section and an advantageous section not having an instructed game section. In order to pay out, it is preferable to suppress the payout of game media as much as possible in the advantageous section having no instructed game section.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to suppress the payout of game media as much as possible in an advantageous section having no designated game section.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 46 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (25th embodiment) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a small winning combination B group);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function is not activated,
an advantageous section in which the instruction function can be operated among the game sections;
a role lottery means (61) for performing a lottery for a role so as to have a chance of winning a special role (1BBA or 1BBB) for shifting to a special game,
when the indicating function is activated at least once in the advantageous interval, the advantageous interval can be terminated;
In the advantageous section, when a special combination is won by the winning combination lottery means before the first instruction function is activated, the advantageous section can be terminated without activating the instruction function,
After shifting to the advantageous section, the instruction function is not operated even if the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch until a specific condition is satisfied (one-time instruction operation condition: 15 games are completed). It is characterized by

(c) Effect of the original invention 46 According to the original invention, even if the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch until the specific condition is satisfied after moving to the advantageous section, the instruction function is not activated. It is possible to increase the probability of winning the special combination before the operation of the first indication function. As a result, it is possible to increase the probability of being able to finish the advantageous section without activating the instruction function, and furthermore, it is possible to suppress the payout of game media as much as possible in the advantageous section having no instructed game section. .

47. original invention 47
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 47 The original invention relates to a game machine capable of switching and displaying a plurality of types of game information at predetermined time intervals.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that stores an accumulated value of the number of payouts and displays a graph (so-called slump graph) showing the transition of the accumulated value of the number of payouts (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-125121).
However, the display in the above-described conventional technology is used by the player to confirm the number of payouts (balls paid out) of the gaming machine and to determine whether or not to play the game. It was not possible to judge whether or not the predetermined ratio was within the predetermined design value range.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to display game information that enables determination as to whether or not a predetermined ratio relating to paid balls, etc., is within a range of predetermined design values. Furthermore, in performing the display, it is necessary not to misunderstand that the device is out of order.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 47 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (26th embodiment) is
Multiple types (5 items) of game information (advantageous section ratio, continuous role ratio (6000 times), role ratio (6000 times), continuous role ratio (cumulative), role ratio (cumulative)) for a predetermined time ( Equipped with a display unit (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)) that can be switched and displayed every about 5 seconds,
In the display of the game information for the predetermined time, when the game information is lit up (for example, when the advantageous section ratio is displayed, the number of games played is "175000" or more and the ratio is less than "70"). When at least part of the game information is displayed blinking (for example, when displaying the advantageous section ratio, when the number of games played is less than "175000", the identification segment is blinked and the ratio is When it is "70" or more, the ratio segment is displayed blinking),
When blinking at least part of the game information, the lighting and extinguishing are alternately repeated every specific time (about 0.3 seconds),
When the next game information is displayed after the game information is displayed for the predetermined time, when at least part of the information of the next game information is blinked, the predetermined time is counted (the number of interrupts "2144"). count) (step S2511 in FIG. 209), and start counting the specific time (counting the number of interrupts "134") (step S2518 in FIG. 209)
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of Original Invention 47 According to the original invention, the timing for switching the display of the game information to the next game information can be matched with the blinking start timing when the game information is displayed blinking. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game information from turning on for a moment or turning off the game information for a moment, thereby preventing misunderstanding that the display unit is out of order.

48. original invention 48
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 48 Same as Original Invention 47.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 48 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (26th embodiment) is
Multiple types (5 items) of game information (advantageous section ratio, continuous role ratio (6000 times), role ratio (6000 times), continuous role ratio (cumulative), role ratio (cumulative)) for a predetermined time ( Equipped with a display unit (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)) that can be switched and displayed every about 5 seconds,
In the display of the game information for the predetermined time, when the game information is lit up (for example, when the advantageous section ratio is displayed, the number of games played is "175000" or more and the ratio is less than "70"). When at least part of the game information is displayed blinking (for example, when displaying the advantageous section ratio, when the number of games played is less than "175000", the identification segment is blinked and the ratio is When it is "70" or more, the ratio segment is displayed blinking),
When blinking at least part of the game information, the lighting and extinguishing are alternately repeated every specific time (about 0.3 seconds),
Interrupt processing (Fig. 190) can be executed at regular intervals (2.235 ms),
When the number of interrupts becomes "Y" (2144), it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed ("Yes" in step S2512 in FIG. 209),
When the number of interrupts reaches "X" (134), it is determined that the specific time has elapsed ("Yes" in step S2519 in FIG. 209),
Y = 2 x n x X ("n" is a natural number) (2144 = 2 x 8 x 134)
is set so as to satisfy
(c) Effect of Original Invention 48 Same as Original Invention 47.

49. original invention 49
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 49 The original invention relates to a game machine capable of switching and displaying a plurality of types of game information in a predetermined order at predetermined time intervals.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that stores an accumulated value of the number of payouts and displays a graph (so-called slump graph) showing the transition of the accumulated value of the number of payouts (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-125121).
However, the display in the above-described conventional technology is used by the player to confirm the number of payouts (outgoing balls) of the gaming machine and to determine whether or not to play the game. It was not possible to judge whether or not the predetermined ratio was within the predetermined design value range.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to provide a display that enables determination as to whether or not a predetermined ratio relating to paid balls, etc., is within a range of predetermined design values. Furthermore, appropriate processing for displaying the game information is executed when the power is normally turned on and when the setting change state is entered.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 49 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (26th embodiment) is
Multiple types (5 items) of game information (“1” advantageous section ratio, “2” continuous role ratio (6000 times), “3” role ratio (6000 times), “4” continuous role ratio (total) , “5” character ratio (total)) in a predetermined order (“1” → “2” → … → “5” → “1” → “2” → …) for a predetermined time (about 5 a display unit (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)) that can be switched and displayed every second,
a counter that counts the predetermined time (display switching time of address "F290 (H)"),
The power is turned off while the "n" (n≧2)th game information is being displayed (for example, when "n=2", the continuous role ratio (6000 times) is being displayed), and the setting key switch is turned off (initialization of the unused area in step S2158 in FIG. 187), the display of the "n"th game information and the counting of the predetermined time can be resumed,
When the power is turned off while the "n"th game information is being displayed and the power is turned on while the setting key switch is on (when proceeding to the setting change processing in FIG. 186), the counter is turned off. After the value is cleared (step S2130 in FIG. 186), display of the first game information (“1” advantageous section ratio) is started (step S2517 in FIG. 209), and counting of the predetermined time is started. (Step S2511 in FIG. 209)
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of the original invention 49 According to the original invention, the value of the counter is not initialized when the power is normally turned on (started up) without shifting to the setting change state, so the game information can be displayed from the state immediately before the power is turned off. can be resumed. On the other hand, when the setting change state is entered, the value of the counter is cleared, so the display of the first game information can be started. In this way, it is possible to appropriately perform processing for displaying game information when the power is turned on normally and when the setting change state is entered.

50. original invention 50
(a) Problems to be Solved by the Original Invention 50 The original invention relates to a game machine capable of switching and displaying a plurality of types of game information in a predetermined order at predetermined time intervals.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that stores an accumulated value of the number of payouts and displays a graph (so-called slump graph) showing the transition of the accumulated value of the number of payouts (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-125121).
However, the display in the above-described conventional technology is used by the player to confirm the number of payouts (outgoing balls) of the gaming machine and to determine whether or not to play the game. It was not possible to judge whether or not the predetermined ratio was within the predetermined design value range.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to display game information that enables determination as to whether or not a predetermined ratio of the number of balls, etc., is within a range of predetermined design values. Furthermore, in the case of shifting to the setting change state, appropriate processing for displaying game information is executed depending on whether or not specific conditions are met.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 50 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (26th embodiment) is
Multiple types (5 items) of game information (“1” advantageous section ratio, “2” continuous role ratio (6000 times), “3” role ratio (6000 times), “4” continuous role ratio (total) , “5” character ratio (total)) in a predetermined order (“1” → “2” → … → “5” → “1” → “2” → …) for a predetermined time (about 5 Equipped with a display unit (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)) that can be switched and displayed every second,
The game information has identification information (identification segment) and numerical information (ratio segment),
Numerical information storage area for storing numerical information in game information (advantageous section ratio data of address “F285 (H)” to role product ratio (total) data of address “F289 (H)”);
a counter that counts the predetermined time (display switching time of address "F290 (H)"),
The power is turned off while the "n" (n≧2)th game information is being displayed (for example, when "n=2", the continuous role ratio (6000 times) is being displayed), and the setting key switch When the power is turned on while the In step S2128 of 186, when "Yes" in step S2128)), based on the value stored in the numerical information storage area and the value of the counter, the "n"th game information is displayed and the predetermined time is counted. (without initializing the ratio display number of address "F28E (H)" and the display switching time of address "F290 (H)"),
When the power is turned off while the "n"th game information is being displayed, and the power is turned on while the setting key switch is on, the specific condition is not met (step When the checksum in S2104 is abnormal and/or when the power-off recovery is abnormal (“No” in step S2128 in FIG. 186)), the value stored in the numerical information storage area And after clearing the value of the counter (steps S2129 and S2130 in FIG. 186), the display of the first game information with numerical information as the initial value is started (step S2517 in FIG. 209), and the predetermined time start counting (step S2511 in FIG. 209)
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 50 According to the original invention, when shifting to the setting change state, the process for displaying the game information is appropriately performed depending on whether or not the specific conditions are satisfied. can be done. Also, even if the specific conditions are not met, the display of the first game information with numerical information as the initial value is started, so the fact that the specific conditions are not met (error) is not displayed. It is possible to immediately shift to the display of game information.

51. original invention 51
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 51 The original invention relates to a gaming machine capable of displaying a plurality of types of game information.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that stores an accumulated value of the number of payouts and displays a graph (so-called slump graph) showing the transition of the accumulated value of the number of payouts (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-125121).
However, the display in the above-described conventional technology is used by the player to confirm the number of payouts (outgoing balls) of the gaming machine and to determine whether or not to play the game. It was not possible to judge whether or not the predetermined ratio was within the predetermined design value range.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to display game information that enables determination as to whether or not a predetermined ratio of the number of balls, etc., is within a range of predetermined design values. Furthermore, when it is necessary to blink the game information, appropriate processing for the blinking display of the game information is executed according to the situation when the power is turned on.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 51 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (26th embodiment) is
Multiple types (5 items) of game information (advantageous section ratio, continuous role ratio (6000 times), role ratio (6000 times), continuous role ratio (cumulative), role ratio (cumulative)) can be displayed. Equipped with a display unit (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)),
When the game information is lit and displayed, and when at least part of the game information is blinked (see FIG. 184). blinking the identification segment),
When blinking at least part of the game information, the lighting and extinguishing are alternately repeated every specific time (about 0.3 seconds),
A counter (blinking switching time of address "F292 (H)") that counts the specific time is provided,
The power is turned off when at least part of the specific game information is blinking and the at least part of the information is off, and the power is turned on while the setting key switch is on. When (at the time of transition to the setting change state), the counting of the specific time is started, and the at least part of the specific game information is blinked so that the at least part of the information starts from lighting. (The address "F292(H)" of the RWM 53 is initialized at step S2130 in FIG. 186, and the initial value "134(D)" is set at step S2520 in FIG. 209.)
It is characterized by

The second solution (26th embodiment) is
Multiple types (5 items) of game information (advantageous section ratio, continuous role ratio (6000 times), role ratio (6000 times), continuous role ratio (cumulative), role ratio (cumulative)) can be displayed. Equipped with a display unit (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)),
The game information has identification information (identification segment) and numerical information (ratio segment),
When both the identification information and the numerical information are lit and displayed, and when at least one of the identification information and the numerical information is displayed blinking (see FIG. 184. For example, when the advantageous section ratio is displayed, the number of games played is "175000"). When the number is less than the number of times, the identification segment is blinked, and when the ratio is "70" or more, the ratio segment is blinked).
When blinking at least one of the identification information and numerical information, the lighting and extinguishing are alternately repeated every specific time (about 0.3 seconds),
A counter (blinking switching time of address "F292 (H)") that counts the specific time is provided,
When the power is turned off while at least one of the identification information and numerical information is blinking and at least one of the information is off, and the power is turned on with the setting key switch turned on. (At the time of transition to the setting change state), the counting of the specific time is started, and at least one of the identification information and the numerical information is displayed blinking so that the at least one of the information starts from lighting (Fig. 186 initializes the address "F292(H)" of the RWM 53 in step S2130 of FIG. 209, and sets the initial value "134" in step S2520 of FIG.
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of Original Invention 51 According to the original invention, game information can be checked more quickly. In addition, the count of the specific time before turning off the power is taken over to the setting change state, and when the display of the game information is started in the setting change state, it is possible to prevent the light from turning on for a moment and then turning off. . As a result, it is possible to prevent misunderstanding that the display unit is out of order.

52. original invention 52
(a) Problems to be Solved by the Original Invention 52 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that stores values corresponding to the total number of games played and the number of games played in a predetermined game section.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that stores an accumulated value of the number of payouts and displays a graph (so-called slump graph) showing the transition of the accumulated value of the number of payouts (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-125121).
However, the display in the above-described conventional technology is used by the player to confirm the number of payouts (balls paid out) of the gaming machine and to determine whether or not to play the game. It was not possible to determine the ratio (ratio) of the number of games played in a predetermined game section.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to make it possible to determine the ratio of the number of games played in a predetermined game interval to the total number of games played. Furthermore, when the ratio is calculated, it is controlled so as to obtain a correct value.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 52 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (26th embodiment) is
a first storage area (total number of games counter at address "F26D(H)") for storing a value corresponding to the total number of games;
a second storage area (advantageous section game number counter at address "F270 (H)") for storing a value corresponding to the number of games played in a predetermined game section (advantageous section);
A count upper limit flag in a third storage area (address "F28B(H)") that stores information indicating whether or not the value stored in the first storage area has reached a specific value (3 bytes full (FFFFFF(H))) D0th bit of ) and
determining whether or not the value stored in the first storage area has reached the specific value (step S2255 in FIG. 192),
When the value stored in the first storage area reaches the specified value, information indicating that the specified value has been reached is stored in the third storage area (steps S2256 and S2259),
When information indicating that the specific value has been reached is stored in the third storage area (when judged as "Yes" in step S2236 in FIG. 191), even during the predetermined game section , do not update the values stored in the first storage area and the second storage area (do not execute the processing of steps S2237 and S2238)
It is characterized by
A second solution is that in the first solution,
The specific value is an upper limit value (“FFFFFF (H)”) of a storage capacity (3 bytes) that can be stored in the first storage area.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 52 According to the original invention, it is possible to prevent the value from being updated even after the storage capacity of the first storage area is exceeded and overflow occurs. In particular, when the value stored in the first storage area has reached a specific value, the value in the second storage area is not updated, so unnecessary updating can be eliminated. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the number of games in a predetermined game section from being correctly calculated with respect to the total number of games by updating the value of the second storage area when the first storage area overflows. can do.

53. original invention 53
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 53 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that stores values corresponding to the total number of games played and the number of games played in a predetermined game section.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that stores an accumulated value of the number of payouts and displays a graph (so-called slump graph) showing the transition of the accumulated value of the number of payouts (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-125121).
However, the display in the above-described conventional technology is used by the player to confirm the number of payouts (balls paid out) of the gaming machine and to determine whether or not to play the game. It was not possible to determine the ratio of the number of payouts during the special game.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to make it possible to determine the ratio of the number of payouts during a special game to the total number of payouts of game media. Furthermore, when the ratio is calculated, it is controlled so as to obtain a correct value.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 53 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (26th embodiment) is
a first storage area (total payout (cumulative) counter at address “F27C(H)”) for storing a value corresponding to the total number of game media paid out;
A second storage area for storing a value corresponding to the number of game media paid out during a special game (at the time of activating a role or at the time of activating a continuous role) (continuous role payout (cumulative) counter at address “F27F (H)”; Or Accessory payout (cumulative) counter of address "F282 (H)"),
A count upper limit flag in a third storage area (address "F28B(H)") that stores information indicating whether or not the value stored in the first storage area has reached a specific value (3 bytes full (FFFFFF(H))) D1 bit of ) and
determining whether or not the value stored in the first storage area has reached the specific value (step S2255 in FIG. 192),
When the value stored in the first storage area reaches the specified value, information indicating that the specified value has been reached is stored in the third storage area (steps S2256 and S2259),
When the information indicating that the specific value has been reached is stored in the third storage area, even if the game medium is paid out during the special game, it is stored in the first storage area and the second storage area. Do not update the value (in FIG. 196, when it is determined “Yes” in step S2301, the processing of steps S2302 to S2304 is not performed. In addition, when it is determined “Yes” in step S2342 in FIG. , Steps S2343 to S2345 are not performed.)
It is characterized by
A second solution is that in the first solution,
The specific value is an upper limit value (“FFFFFF (H)”) of a storage capacity (3 bytes) that can be stored in the first storage area.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 53 According to the original invention, it is possible to prevent the value from being updated even after the storage capacity of the first storage area is exceeded and overflow occurs. In particular, when the value stored in the first storage area has reached a specific value, the value in the second storage area is not updated, so unnecessary updating can be eliminated. Furthermore, when the first memory area overflows, the value of the second memory area is updated to prevent the correct calculation of the number of payouts during the tobetsu game with respect to the total number of payouts. be able to.

54. original invention 54
(a) Problems to be Solved by the Original Invention 54 The original invention relates to a gaming machine capable of reading the number of game media to be paid out at a timing required for control processing.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that stores an accumulated value of the number of payouts and displays a graph (so-called slump graph) showing the transition of the accumulated value of the number of payouts (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-125121).
A method of simply updating the cumulative value of the number of game media paid out, as in the above-described conventional technique, is easy in terms of control.
On the other hand, in the gaming machine, when a small winning combination is won, the number of payouts corresponding to the small winning combination is stored in the RWM, and the number of payouts in the RWM is decremented by "1" every time one is paid out (including the addition of one stored coin). may be controlled to
In the case of performing such control, when all the game media have been paid out, the number of payouts stored in the RWM becomes "0". Therefore, after the payout of game media is completed, the number of payouts in the game cannot be read. For this reason, there is a problem that after the payout of game media is completed, the number of payouts in the game cannot be read and the ratio of the number of payouts of game media cannot be calculated.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to enable arithmetic processing such as a ratio related to the number of payouts of game media even after the payout of game media is completed.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 54 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (26th embodiment) is
A first storage area (address ``F040 (H)'' for storing the number of game media to be paid out) and a second storage area (address ``F041 (H)'' for storing the number of medals to be paid out). buffer),
The number of payouts stored in the first storage area is subtracted as the game media are paid out,
The number of payouts stored in the second storage area is maintained without being subtracted even when game media are paid out (FIG. 189, step S2213),
After executing the payout of the game media (step S2189 in FIG. 188), a predetermined game-related calculation (step S2193 in FIG. 188 and steps S2239 to S2241 in FIG. 191) is performed using the number of payouts of the game media in the game. , S2243) can be executed,
When executing the predetermined calculation, the number of payouts stored in the second storage area is used (Fig. 197)
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 54 According to the original invention, when executing the predetermined calculation after the payout process, the number of payouts stored in the second storage area is used. Can be executed at different times. Also, even when executing a predetermined calculation, it does not affect the payout process.

55. original invention 55
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 55 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that displays the payout ratio of game media.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that stores an accumulated value of the number of payouts and displays a graph (so-called slump graph) showing the transition of the accumulated value of the number of payouts (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-125121).
However, the display in the above-described conventional technology is used by the player to confirm the number of payouts of the gaming machine and to determine whether or not to play the game. It was not possible to judge whether it was within the range of
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to display a payout ratio that enables determination of whether or not it is within a predetermined range of design values. Furthermore, when the result of calculating the payout ratio becomes, for example, a value that cannot be displayed, the calculated payout ratio can be corrected.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 55 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (26th embodiment) is
a first storage area (total payout (cumulative) counter at address “F27C(H)”) for storing a value corresponding to the total number of game media paid out;
a second storage area for storing a value corresponding to the number of payouts of game media during a special game (for example, a character payout (cumulative) counter at address “F282 (H)”);
Based on the values stored in the first storage area and the second storage area, it is possible to calculate a payout ratio indicating the number of payouts of game media during the special game with respect to the total number of payouts of game media;
a third storage area for storing a value corresponding to the calculated payout ratio (for example, character product ratio (total) data at address “F289(H)”);
A display unit (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)) capable of displaying the payout ratio based on the value stored in the third storage area,
As a result of calculating the payout ratio, when the specific value (100%) is obtained, the specific value is changed to the correction value (99%) (step S2405 in FIG. 202), and the correction value is stored in the third storage area. The payout ratio can be displayed on the display section based on the correction value stored (step S2406) and stored in the third storage area.

A second solution is
a display unit (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9));
a first storage area (total payout (cumulative) counter at address “F27C(H)”) for storing a value corresponding to the total number of game media paid out;
a second storage area for storing a value corresponding to the number of payouts of game media during a special game (for example, a character payout (cumulative) counter at address “F282 (H)”);
When it is determined that the value stored in the first storage area matches the value stored in the second storage area and the value stored in the first storage area is not "0", the third storage area ( For example, the correction value (99 (H)) is stored in the character product ratio (cumulative) data of the address "F289 (H)", and the payout ratio is displayed on the display unit based on the correction value stored in the third storage area. It is characterized in that it can be displayed on

A third solution is
a display unit (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9));
a first storage area (total payout (cumulative) counter at address “F27C(H)”) for storing a value corresponding to the total number of game media paid out;
a second storage area for storing a value corresponding to the number of payouts of game media during a special game (for example, a character payout (cumulative) counter at address “F282 (H)”);
When it is determined that the value stored in the first storage area matches the value stored in the second storage area and the value stored in the second storage area is not "0", the third storage area ( For example, the correction value (99 (H)) is stored in the character product ratio (cumulative) data of the address "F289 (H)", and the payout ratio is displayed on the display unit based on the correction value stored in the third storage area. It is characterized in that it can be displayed on

(c) Effect of Original Invention 55 According to the original invention, since the payout ratio indicating the number of payouts during the special game with respect to the total number of payouts is displayed, it is easy to judge whether or not the payout ratio is an appropriate value. be able to.
Further, when the calculated payout ratio is a specific value, the payout ratio is changed to a correction value, so that the payout ratio can be set to a value suitable for display.
Furthermore, according to the second solution or the third solution, when the value stored in the first storage area or the second storage area is "0", it is prevented from being changed to the correction value. be able to.

56. original invention 56
(a) Problems to be Solved by the Original Invention 56 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that stores a value that enables calculation of the payout ratio of game media.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that stores an accumulated value of the number of payouts and displays a graph (so-called slump graph) showing the transition of the accumulated value of the number of payouts (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-125121).
However, the display in the above-described conventional technology is used by the player to confirm the number of payouts of the gaming machine and to determine whether or not to play the game. It was not possible to judge whether it was within the range of
In addition, the cumulative number of payouts cannot be stored infinitely, and since the storage capacity of the RWM is limited, it eventually reaches the upper limit. However, if no processing is performed when the upper limit value is reached, the storage area overflows and the correct value cannot be stored.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to store a value capable of calculating a payout ratio that can determine whether or not it is within a predetermined design value range. Furthermore, according to whether or not the stored number of payouts has reached the upper limit of the storage capacity of the storage area, it is possible to store a more correct value even after reaching the upper limit. .

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 56 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (26th embodiment) is
a first storage area (total payout (cumulative) counter at address “F27C(H)”) for storing a value corresponding to the total number of game media paid out;
a second storage area for storing a value corresponding to the number of payouts of game media during a special game (for example, a character payout (cumulative) counter at address “F282 (H)”);
When game media are paid out during the special game, updating the values of the first storage area and the second storage area,
If the value stored in the first storage area is added to the value corresponding to the number of payouts in the game, and if the upper limit of the storage capacity of the first storage area is not exceeded, the number of payouts in the game is added to the value stored in the first storage area. The value is added to the value stored in the first storage area (if proceeding to step S2322 in FIG. 197, proceeding to FIG. 194, in FIG. end the count-up),
When adding the value corresponding to the number of payouts in the game to the value stored in the first storage area exceeds the upper limit of the storage capacity of the first storage area (when "Yes" in step S2284 in FIG. 194) adds the value stored in the first storage area to the value stored in the first storage area to calculate the correction value (upper limit payout number buffer value in step S2286 in FIG. 194) that is the upper limit of the storage capacity of the first storage area, and Add the correction value to the first storage area and the second storage area (step S2287)
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 56 According to the original invention, since the total number of payouts and the value corresponding to the number of payouts during the special game are stored, the ratio of the number of payouts during the special game to the total number of payouts is calculated. and can be displayed. Further, when the value corresponding to the total number of payouts exceeds the upper limit value of the storage capacity of the first storage area, the upper limit value is stored, thereby preventing the first storage area from overflowing and storing a more correct value. can be kept

57. original invention 57
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 57 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that displays the payout ratio of game media.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that stores an accumulated value of the number of payouts and displays a graph (so-called slump graph) showing the transition of the accumulated value of the number of payouts (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-125121).
However, the display in the above-described conventional technology is used by the player to confirm the number of payouts of the gaming machine and to determine whether or not to play the game. It was not possible to judge whether it was within the range of
Furthermore, even if the number of payouts is an abnormal value during a specific number of games, it cannot be easily determined from only the graph showing the transition of the cumulative value of the number of payouts.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to store a value that enables calculation of a payout ratio that enables determination of whether or not the payout ratio is within a range of a predetermined design value during a predetermined number of games.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 57 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (26th embodiment) is
'X' (400) a first payout number storage area (total payout ring buffer of addresses 'F213(H)' to 'F22F(H)') for storing a value corresponding to the number of game media payouts during the number of games; ,
A second payout number storage area for storing a value corresponding to the number of game media payouts during a special game between "X" number of games (for example, the address "F24F(H)" to "F26B(H)" ring buffer) and
a third payout number storage area (total payout (6000 times) counter at address "F273(H)") for storing a value corresponding to the number of game medium payouts for the number of "X×Y" (6000) games;
A fourth payout number storage area (for example, an accessory payout (6000 times) counter at address "F279 (H)") that stores a value corresponding to the number of game media payouts during a special game for the number of "X×Y" games played )When,
A payout ratio storage area for storing a value corresponding to a payout ratio indicating the number of payouts of game media during a special game with respect to the total number of payouts of game media (for example, role ratio (6000 times) data at address “F287(H)” ) and ,
The first payout amount storage area and the second payout amount storage area are each provided with "Y" (15) pieces,
A value corresponding to the number of payouts of game media for the number of times of “X” games is stored in the “n” (“n”=1 to Y)-th first payout storage area (for example, total payout ring buffer 0) and the second payout storage area. When stored in the area (for example, accessory payout ring buffer 0), the value corresponding to the number of game media paid out during the next “X” number of games is “n+1” (where “n”=Y). stores in the (n+1)-th first payout storage area (for example, total payout ring buffer 1) and second payout storage area (for example, character payout ring buffer 1),
Based on the values stored in the third payout amount storage area and the fourth payout amount storage area for each "X" number of games, the number of payouts during the special game with respect to the total number of payouts during the "X×Y" number of games is calculated. Calculate a value corresponding to the indicated payout ratio (steps S2385 to S2400 in FIG. 202), update the value stored in the payout ratio storage area based on the calculation result (step S2406),
In the game in which the value stored in the payout ratio storage area is updated after the “X×Y” game,
a) The value corresponding to the number of payouts during the “X” number of games from before “X×Y−1” games (before 5999 games) to before “X×Y−X” games (before 5600 games) is stored. The value stored in the third payout storage area is obtained by subtracting the value "Z1" in the one payout storage area from the value stored in the third payout storage area (steps S2450 and S2452 in FIG. 205). is updated (step S2454),
b) The value corresponding to the number of payouts between the number of times of “X” games from “X×Y−1” (before 5999 games) to “X×Y−X” before games (before 5600 games) is stored. The value stored in the fourth payout storage area is obtained by subtracting the value "Z2" in the second payout storage area from the value stored in the fourth payout storage area (steps S2450 and S2452 in FIG. 205). is updated (step S2454)
It is characterized by

A second solution is that in the first solution,
After the "X×Y" game, the value "Z1" in the first payout amount storage area and the value "Z2" in the second payout amount storage area are cleared in the game in which the value stored in the payout ratio storage area is updated. (step S2453 in FIG. 205),
After the "X×Y" game, during the "X" number of games starting from the next game of the game in which the value stored in the payout ratio storage area is updated,
a) storing a value corresponding to the number of payouts of game media in the first number-of-payouts storage area cleared of the value "Z1";
b) A value corresponding to the number of payouts of game media during the special game is stored in the second payout amount storage area cleared with the value "Z2".

(c) Effect of the original invention 57 According to the original invention, using the "Y" number of the first storage area and the second storage area, every "X" number of games played, A payout ratio can be stored. This makes it possible to display the payout ratio by reading the payout ratio.

58. original invention 58
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 58 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that displays the payout ratio of game media.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that stores an accumulated value of the number of payouts and displays a graph (so-called slump graph) showing the transition of the accumulated value of the number of payouts (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-125121).
However, the display in the above-described conventional technology is used by the player to confirm the number of payouts of the gaming machine and to determine whether or not to play the game. It was not possible to judge whether it was within the range of
Also, for the so-called AT, similarly, it is not possible to judge whether or not the AT section for all game sections is within the predetermined design value range.
On the other hand, when calculating a ratio that can determine whether the number of payouts or AT is within the range of predetermined design values, if it is executed by a single-chip microprocessor unique to gaming machines, there is a risk that the calculation will take a long time. , there is a problem that if the operation time is long, it may affect other processes.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to use a one-chip microprocessor unique to gaming machines to calculate a ratio that can easily determine whether or not it is within a predetermined range of design values in a short amount of time. is.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 58 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (26th embodiment, etc.) is
a first storage area (total number of games counter at address "F26D(H)") for storing a value corresponding to the total number of games;
a second storage area (advantageous section game number counter at address "F270 (H)") for storing a value corresponding to the number of games played in a predetermined game section (advantageous section);
The value stored in the first storage area is "X",
The value stored in the second storage area is "Y"
When
a) Calculate “10×Y” by multiplying “Y” by 10 (in FIG. 202, set the calculated value in step S2389 (in FIG. 203, steps S2411 to S2413)),
b) By repeatedly subtracting "X" from "10 x Y" and subtracting "X" from the value after subtraction when the value after subtraction is greater than or equal to "X",
0≦(10×Y−X×R1)<X
Calculate "R1" that satisfies
c) When “10×Y−X×R1=Y′” is assumed, “10×Y′” is calculated by multiplying “Y′” by 10 (in FIG. 202, the calculated value set in step S2399 ( middle, steps S2411 to S2413)),
d) By repeatedly subtracting "X" from "10 x Y'" and subtracting "X" from the value after subtraction when the value after subtraction is greater than or equal to "X",
0≦(10×Y′−X×R2)<X
Calculate "R2" that satisfies
e) Calculate a specific ratio where the tens digit is "R1" and the ones digit is "R2" (step S2401 in FIG. 202)
It is characterized by

The second solution (26th embodiment, etc.) is
a first storage area (total number of games counter at address "F26D(H)") for storing a value corresponding to the total number of games;
a second storage area (advantageous section game number counter at address "F270 (H)") that stores a value corresponding to the number of games played in a predetermined game section;
The value stored in the first storage area is "X",
The value stored in the second storage area is "Y"
When
a) Calculate “10×Y” by multiplying “Y” by 10 (in FIG. 202, set the calculated value in step S2389 (in FIG. 203, steps S2411 to S2413)),
b) By repeatedly subtracting "X" from "10×Y" and subtracting "X" from the value after subtraction when the value after subtraction is greater than or equal to "X",
0≦(10×Y−X×R1)<X
Calculate "R1" that satisfies
c) When "10 x Y - X x R1 = Y'", when "Y' = 0", a specific ratio in which the tens digit is "R1" and the ones digit is "0" It is characterized by calculating

A third solution is, in the first or second solution,
Equipped with a display unit (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)) capable of displaying the calculated specific ratio,
When the calculation of the specific ratio results in a specific value (100%) ("Yes" in step S2404 in FIG. 202), the specific value is changed to a correction value (99%) (step S2405). and the correction value can be displayed on the display section as a specific ratio.

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 58 According to the original invention, the ratio can be calculated by dividing into the tens digit and the ones digit and repeating subtraction for each. As a result, it is possible to shorten the calculation time (processing time) and simplify the calculation, since the subtraction can be performed up to 20 times.

59. original invention 59
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 59 The original invention relates to a slot machine which has a display section having a plurality of segments and displays on the display section operation information of a stop switch that is advantageous to the player. .
In a conventional slot machine, the main control board side determines whether or not to notify the operation information of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player, and when it is decided to notify, the operation information is connected to the main control board. A slot machine displayed on a 7-segment display is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-150881).
Here, the operation information of the stop switch, which is advantageous to the player, is important information related to whether or not medals are to be paid out.
However, if a segment of the 7-segment display is out of order or a signal line for transmitting signals to the segment is faulty, the operation information of the stop switch, which is advantageous to the player, is not correctly displayed on the 7-segment display. Therefore, there is a risk that the player will be disadvantaged.
Therefore, the problem to be solved by the invention at the outset is to provide a slot machine having a display section (seven-segment display device) having a plurality of segments and displaying stop switch operation information advantageous to the player on the display section, To enable confirmation of the presence or absence of a failure in a segment and the presence or absence of a failure in a signal line that transmits a signal to the segment.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 59 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (28th embodiment) is
A first display portion (digit 3) and a second display portion (digit 4) having at least seven segments (segments A to G) that can be lit, and displaying predetermined information by lighting the segments,
In a situation where information about the number of acquired game media (the number of acquired medals) is displayed (when proceeding to medal payout processing due to winning in step S4015 in the main processing of FIG. 227), first interrupt processing (LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)"), the first digit (upper digit) of the information on the number of acquired game media is displayed on the first display unit, and the second interrupt process (when the LED display counter value is displaying the second digit (lower digit) of the information regarding the number of acquired game media on the second display unit in the interrupt processing at the time of "01000000 (B)";
In the situation where the operation information (pressing order instruction information) of the stop switch (42) that is advantageous to the player is displayed (when proceeding to the pressing order instruction number setting process of step S4012 in the main process of FIG. 227), at least: displaying at least part of the operation information on the first display unit in the first interrupt process;
In a situation where the setting value related to the player's advantage can be changed (when proceeding to steps S4001 and S4002 in the setting change processing of FIG. 226), at least the 7 It is characterized by lighting up individual segments.

A second solution is
A first display unit and a second display unit having at least seven segments that can be lit, and displaying predetermined information by lighting the segments;
In the first display unit and the second display unit, a segment signal indicating which segment is to be lit is shared,
In a situation where information about the number of acquired game media is to be displayed, a segment signal is output so as to display the first digit of the information regarding the number of acquired game media on the first display unit in the first interrupt process, outputting a segment signal so as to display the second digit of the information regarding the number of acquired game media in the interrupt process of 2 on the second display;
outputting a segment signal so as to display at least a part of the operation information on the first display unit in at least a first interrupt process in a situation where the operation information of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player is displayed;
A segment signal is output so as to light up at least seven segments of the second display unit in at least the second interrupt processing under conditions where the set value related to the player's advantage can be changed. and

A third solution is
A first display unit and a second display unit having at least seven segments that can be lit, and displaying predetermined information by lighting the segments;
In a situation where information about the number of acquired game media is displayed, the first digit of the information related to the number of acquired game media is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt process, and the game media is displayed in the second interrupt process. Display the second digit of the information on the number of acquisitions of on the second display unit,
displaying at least a part of the operation information on the second display unit in at least a second interrupt process in a situation where the operation information of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player is displayed;
It is characterized in that at least seven segments of the second display section are lit up in at least the second interrupt process in a situation where the set value related to the player's advantage can be changed.

A fourth solution is
A first display unit and a second display unit having at least seven segments that can be lit, and displaying predetermined information by lighting the segments;
In the first display unit and the second display unit, a segment signal indicating which segment is to be lit is shared,
In a situation where information about the number of acquired game media is to be displayed, a segment signal is output so as to display the first digit of the information regarding the number of acquired game media on the first display unit in the first interrupt process, outputting a segment signal so as to display the second digit of the information regarding the number of acquired game media in the interrupt process of 2 on the second display;
outputting a segment signal so as to display at least part of the operation information on the second display unit in at least a second interrupt process in a situation where stop switch operation information that is advantageous to the player is displayed;
A segment signal is output so as to light up at least seven segments of the first display unit in at least the first interrupt processing under conditions where the set value related to the player's advantage can be changed. and

A fifth solution is
A first display unit and a second display unit having at least seven segments that can be lit, and displaying predetermined information by lighting the segments;
In a situation where information about the number of acquired game media is displayed, the first digit of the information regarding the number of acquired game media is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt process, and the game media is displayed in the second interrupt process. Display the second digit of the information on the number of acquisitions of on the second display unit,
In a situation where stop switch operation information that is advantageous to the player is displayed, a part of the operation information is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt process, and the other operation information is displayed in the second interrupt process. part of is displayed on the second display unit,
In a situation where the set value related to the player's advantage can be changed, at least seven segments of the first display unit are lit up in the first interrupt process, and the second display unit has the light in the second interrupt process. It is characterized by lighting at least seven segments.

(c) Effect of the original invention 59 According to the original invention, by confirming whether or not the seven segments of the first display unit light up in a situation where the setting value can be changed, the first display unit It is possible to confirm whether or not there is a failure in the 7 segments of the first display unit and whether or not there is a failure in the signal line that transmits signals to the 7 segments that the first display unit has.

60. original invention 60
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 60 Same as original invention 59.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 60 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (29th embodiment) is
A first display unit (digit 3) and a second display unit (digit 4) having a plurality of segments (segments A to G) that can be lit, and displaying predetermined information by lighting the segments,
A segment signal (segment A to G signal) indicating which segment is to be lit is shared by the first display unit and the second display unit,
In a situation where information about the number of acquired game media (the number of acquired medals) is displayed (when proceeding to medal payout processing due to winning in step S4015 in the main processing of FIG. 227), first interrupt processing (LED display counter value is "00000100 (B)"), a segment signal is output so as to display the first digit (upper digit) of the information regarding the number of acquired game media on the first display unit, and the second A segment signal to display the second digit (lower digit) of information about the number of acquired game media on the second display unit in interrupt processing (interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00001000 (B)") and
In the situation where the operation information (pressing order instruction information) of the stop switch (42) that is advantageous to the player is displayed (when proceeding to the pressing order instruction number setting process of step S4012 in the main process of FIG. 227), at least: outputting a segment signal so as to display at least part of the operation information on the first display in the first interrupt process;
In a situation where the setting value related to the player's advantage can be changed (when proceeding to steps S4101 and S4102 in the setting change processing of FIG. 234), at least the information regarding the setting value (the setting value " 1” to “6”) is output on the second display unit.

A second solution is
A first display unit and a second display unit having a plurality of segments that can be lit, and displaying predetermined information by lighting the segments,
In a situation where information about the number of acquired game media is displayed, the first digit of the information related to the number of acquired game media is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt process, and the game media is displayed in the second interrupt process. Display the second digit of the information on the number of acquisitions of on the second display unit,
displaying at least a part of the operation information on the second display unit in at least a second interrupt process in a situation where the operation information of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player is displayed;
It is characterized in that, in a situation where the set value related to the player's advantage can be changed, at least the information about the set value is displayed on the second display section in the second interrupt process.

A third solution is
A first display unit and a second display unit having a plurality of segments that can be lit, and displaying predetermined information by lighting the segments,
In the first display unit and the second display unit, a segment signal indicating which segment is to be lit is shared,
In a situation where information about the number of acquired game media is to be displayed, a segment signal is output so as to display the first digit of the information regarding the number of acquired game media on the first display unit in the first interrupt process, outputting a segment signal so as to display the second digit of the information regarding the number of acquired game media in the interrupt process of 2 on the second display;
In a situation where stop switch operation information that is advantageous to the player is displayed, a segment signal is output so as to display part of the operation information on the first display unit in the first interrupt process, and the second outputting a segment signal so as to display another part of the operation information on the second display unit in the interrupt process;
In a situation where the set value related to the player's advantage can be changed, a segment signal is output so as to display information about the set value on the second display section in at least the second interrupt processing. .

(c) Effects of the Original Invention 60 According to the original invention, the segment signal is shared between the first display section and the second display section. Therefore, by confirming whether or not the segments of the first display section and the second display section are turned on, the first display section out of the signal lines for transmitting signals to the segments of the first display section and the second display section is turned on. It is possible to confirm whether or not there is a fault in the portion common to the display unit and the second display unit.
Also, by displaying the first digit of the information about the number of acquired game media on the first display unit, checking whether the segment of the first display unit lights up or not, the failure of the segment of the first display unit can be detected. and whether there is a fault in the signal line that transmits the signal to the segment of the first display unit.

61. original invention 61
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 61 Same as original invention 59.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 61 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (28th embodiment) is
A first display section (digit 1), a second display section (digit 2), a third display section (digit 3), and a fourth display unit (digit 4),
In the first display unit, second display unit, third display unit, and fourth display unit, a segment signal (segment A to G signal) indicating which segment is to be lit is shared,
Under the condition of displaying the information on the number of accumulated game media (the number of accumulated medals) (when proceeding to the main process of FIG. 227), at least the first interrupt process (the LED display counter value is "00001000 (B)" In the interrupt processing at the time of), a segment signal is output so as to display the first digit (upper digit) of the information regarding the number of stored game media on the first display unit, and the second interrupt processing (LED display counter value is "00010000 (B)"), outputting a segment signal so as to display the second digit (lower digit) of the information regarding the number of stored game media on the second display unit,
In a situation where information about the number of acquired game media (the number of acquired medals) is displayed (when proceeding to medal payout processing due to winning in step S4015 in the main processing of FIG. 227), at least the third interrupt processing (LED display In interrupt processing when the counter value is "00100000 (B)"), a segment signal is output so as to display the first digit (upper digit) of the information regarding the number of acquired game media on the third display unit; 4 (interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "01000000 (B)") so that the second digit (lower digit) of the information regarding the number of acquired game media is displayed on the fourth display unit, output a segment signal,
In the situation where the operation information (pressing order instruction information) of the stop switch (42) that is advantageous to the player is displayed (when proceeding to the pressing order instruction number setting process of step S4012 in the main process of FIG. 227), at least: A segment signal is output so as to display at least part of the operation information on the third display section in the third interrupt process.

A second solution is
A first display unit, a second display unit, a third display unit, and a fourth display unit having a plurality of segments that can be lit and displaying predetermined information by lighting the segments,
A segment signal indicating which segment is to be lit in the first display unit, the second display unit, the third display unit, and the fourth display unit is also used,
In a situation where information about the number of accumulated game media is displayed, at least a segment signal is output so that the first digit of the information about the number of accumulated game media is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt process. outputting a segment signal so as to display the second digit of the information regarding the number of the game media stored in the second interrupt process on the second display unit;
In a situation where information about the number of acquired game media is displayed, at least a segment signal is output so as to display the first digit of the information regarding the number of acquired game media on the third display in the third interrupt process. , outputting a segment signal so as to display the second digit of the information regarding the number of acquired game media in the fourth interrupt process on the fourth display unit;
Outputting a segment signal so as to display at least a part of the operation information on the fourth display section in the fourth interrupt processing under the condition that the operation information of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player is displayed. characterized by

A third solution is
A first display unit, a second display unit, a third display unit, and a fourth display unit having a plurality of segments that can be lit and displaying predetermined information by lighting the segments,
A segment signal indicating which segment is to be lit in the first display unit, the second display unit, the third display unit, and the fourth display unit is also used,
In a situation where information about the number of accumulated game media is displayed, at least a segment signal is output so that the first digit of the information about the number of accumulated game media is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt process. outputting a segment signal so as to display the second digit of the information regarding the number of the game media stored in the second interrupt process on the second display unit;
In a situation where information about the number of acquired game media is displayed, at least a segment signal is output so as to display the first digit of the information regarding the number of acquired game media on the third display in the third interrupt process. , outputting a segment signal so as to display the second digit of the information regarding the number of acquired game media in the fourth interrupt process on the fourth display unit;
In a situation where stop switch operation information that is advantageous to the player is displayed, a segment signal is output so as to display part of the operation information on the third display section in at least the third interrupt processing, 4, a segment signal is output so as to display another part of the operation information on the fourth display section.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 61 According to the original invention, the first to fourth display sections share the segment signal. Therefore, by confirming whether or not the segments of the first to fourth display portions are lit, the first display portion out of the signal lines for transmitting signals to the segments of the first to fourth display portions is turned on. It is possible to confirm whether or not there is a fault in the common portion of the first to fourth display portions.
Also, by displaying the first digit of the information about the number of acquired game media on the third display unit, it is possible to check whether the segment of the third display unit lights up or not. and whether there is a fault in the signal line that transmits the signal to the segment of the third display unit.

62. original invention 62
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 62 Same as original invention 59.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 62 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (28th embodiment) is
A first display unit (digit 3) and a second display unit (digit 4) having a plurality of segments (segments A to G) that can be lit, and displaying predetermined information by lighting the segments,
A segment signal (segment A to G signal) indicating which segment is to be lit is shared by the first display unit and the second display unit,
In a situation where information about the number of acquired game media (the number of acquired medals) is displayed (when proceeding to medal payout processing due to winning in step S4015 in the main processing of FIG. 227), first interrupt processing (LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)"), a segment signal is output so as to display the first digit (upper digit) of the information regarding the number of acquired game media on the first display unit, and the second A segment signal to display the second digit (lower digit) of information about the number of acquired game media on the second display unit in interrupt processing (interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "01000000 (B)") and
In the situation where the operation information (pressing order instruction information) of the stop switch (42) that is advantageous to the player is displayed (when proceeding to the pressing order instruction number setting process of step S4012 in the main process of FIG. 227), at least: outputting a segment signal so as to display at least part of the operation information on the first display in the first interrupt process;
In a situation where specific error information ("E1" error) is displayed (when an unrecoverable error occurs), part of the specific error information is displayed on the first display unit without executing interrupt processing. (error upper digit display output processing in step S1497 in unrecoverable error processing 1 in FIG. 136) and another part of the specific error information is displayed on the second display unit. 136 (the error lower digit display output process of step S1502 in the non-recoverable error process 1 of FIG. 136) is repeatedly executed.

A second solution is
A first display unit and a second display unit having a plurality of segments that can be lit, and displaying predetermined information by lighting the segments,
In the first display unit and the second display unit, a segment signal indicating which segment is to be lit is shared,
In a situation where information about the number of acquired game media is to be displayed, a segment signal is output so as to display the first digit of the information regarding the number of acquired game media on the first display unit in the first interrupt process, outputting a segment signal so as to display the second digit of the information regarding the number of acquired game media in the interrupt process of 2 on the second display;
outputting a segment signal so as to display at least part of the operation information on the second display unit in at least a second interrupt process in a situation where operation information of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player is displayed;
a process of outputting a segment signal so as to display a part of the specific error information on the first display unit without executing an interrupt process under the condition of displaying the specific error information; and the specific error information. and outputting the segment signal so as to display another part of the segment signal on the second display unit.

A third solution is
A first display unit and a second display unit having a plurality of segments that can be lit, and displaying predetermined information by lighting the segments,
In the first display unit and the second display unit, a segment signal indicating which segment is to be lit is shared,
In a situation where information about the number of acquired game media is to be displayed, a segment signal is output so as to display the first digit of the information regarding the number of acquired game media on the first display unit in the first interrupt process, outputting a segment signal so as to display the second digit of the information regarding the number of acquired game media in the interrupt process of 2 on the second display;
In a situation where stop switch operation information that is advantageous to the player is displayed, a segment signal is output so as to display part of the operation information on the first display unit in the first interrupt process, and the second outputting a segment signal so as to display another part of the operation information on the second display unit in the interrupt process;
a process of outputting a segment signal so as to display a part of the specific error information on the first display unit without executing an interrupt process under the condition of displaying the specific error information; and the specific error information. and outputting the segment signal so as to display another part of the segment signal on the second display unit.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 62 According to the original invention, the segment signal is shared between the first display section and the second display section. Therefore, by confirming whether or not the segments of the first display section and the second display section are turned on, the first display section out of the signal lines for transmitting signals to the segments of the first display section and the second display section is turned on. It is possible to confirm whether or not there is a fault in the portion common to the display unit and the second display unit.
Also, by displaying the first digit of the information about the number of acquired game media and part of the specific error information on the first display unit, it is possible to confirm whether or not the segment of the first display unit lights up. , whether there is a failure in the segment of the first display unit, and whether there is a failure in the signal line that transmits a signal to the segment of the first display unit.

63. original invention 63
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 63 Same as original invention 59.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 63 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (28th embodiment) is
A first display unit (digit 3) and a second display unit (digit 4) having a plurality of segments (segments A to G) that can be lit, and displaying predetermined information by lighting the segments,
A segment signal (segment A to G signal) indicating which segment is to be lit is shared by the first display unit and the second display unit,
In a situation where information about the number of acquired game media (the number of acquired medals) is displayed (when proceeding to medal payout processing due to winning in step S4015 in the main processing of FIG. 227), first interrupt processing (LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)"), a segment signal is output so as to display the first digit (upper digit) of the information regarding the number of acquired game media on the first display unit, and the second A segment signal to display the second digit (lower digit) of information about the number of acquired game media on the second display unit in interrupt processing (interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "01000000 (B)") and
In the situation where the operation information (pressing order instruction information) of the stop switch (42) that is advantageous to the player is displayed (when proceeding to the pressing order instruction number setting process of step S4012 in the main process of FIG. 227), at least: outputting a segment signal so as to display at least part of the operation information on the first display in the first interrupt process;
In a situation where predetermined error information ("dE" error) is displayed (when a recoverable error occurs), part of the predetermined error information is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt process. and outputting a segment signal so as to display another part of the predetermined error information on the second display section in the second interrupt process.

A second solution is
A first display unit and a second display unit having a plurality of segments that can be lit, and displaying predetermined information by lighting the segments,
In the first display unit and the second display unit, a segment signal indicating which segment is to be lit is shared,
In a situation where information about the number of acquired game media is to be displayed, a segment signal is output so as to display the first digit of the information regarding the number of acquired game media on the first display unit in the first interrupt process, outputting a segment signal so as to display the second digit of the information regarding the number of acquired game media in the interrupt process of 2 on the second display;
outputting a segment signal so as to display at least part of the operation information on the second display unit in at least a second interrupt process in a situation where stop switch operation information that is advantageous to the player is displayed;
In a situation where predetermined error information is displayed, a segment signal is output so as to display part of the predetermined error information on the first display in the first interrupt process, and the predetermined error information is displayed in the second interrupt process. and outputting a segment signal so as to display another part of the error information on the second display unit.

A third solution is
A first display unit and a second display unit having a plurality of segments that can be lit, and displaying predetermined information by lighting the segments,
In the first display unit and the second display unit, a segment signal indicating which segment is to be lit is shared,
In a situation where information about the number of acquired game media is to be displayed, a segment signal is output so as to display the first digit of the information regarding the number of acquired game media on the first display unit in the first interrupt process, outputting a segment signal so as to display the second digit of the information regarding the number of acquired game media in the interrupt process of 2 on the second display;
In a situation where stop switch operation information that is advantageous to the player is displayed, a segment signal is output so as to display part of the operation information on the first display unit in the first interrupt process, and the second outputting a segment signal so as to display another part of the operation information on the second display unit in the interrupt process;
In a situation where predetermined error information is displayed, a segment signal is output so as to display part of the predetermined error information on the first display in the first interrupt process, and the predetermined error information is displayed in the second interrupt process. and outputting a segment signal so as to display another part of the error information on the second display unit.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 63 According to the original invention, the segment signal is shared between the first display section and the second display section. Therefore, by confirming whether or not the segments of the first display section and the second display section are lit, the first display section out of the signal lines for transmitting signals to the segments of the first display section and the second display section is turned on. It is possible to confirm whether or not there is a fault in the portion common to the display unit and the second display unit.
Also, by displaying the first digit of the information about the number of game media acquired and part of the predetermined error information on the first display unit, it is possible to confirm whether or not the segment of the first display unit lights up. , the presence or absence of a fault in the segment of the first display, and the presence or absence of a fault in the signal line that transmits a signal to the segment of the first display.

64. original invention 64
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 64 In the prior art, a counter is required to count the advantageous modes. Therefore, it is necessary to execute a process of determining whether or not the game (current state) is in the advantageous mode, and a process of updating the counter when it is determined to be in the advantageous mode.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to simplify information processing by updating the advantageous section counter without determining whether or not it is an advantageous section.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 64 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (the thirtieth embodiment) is
Advantageous mode display means (acquisition number display LED 78) for displaying an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42);
a normal section (including a standby section) in which advantageous operation modes cannot be displayed by the advantageous mode display means;
an advantageous section in which an advantageous operation mode may be displayed by the advantageous mode display means;
Advantageous section information storage means (RWM 53) capable of storing information indicating an advantageous section (D0th bit of the advantageous section type flag);
Equipped with an advantageous section counter (advantageous section clear counter) and
When starting the advantageous interval, store a specific value (1500 (D)) in the advantageous interval counter,
Regardless of whether it is an advantageous interval or not, it is possible to subtract "1" from the advantageous interval counter at a predetermined timing (step S2742 in FIG. 246) based on the progress of the game,
After starting the advantageous section, when the value of the advantageous section counter becomes "0"("Yes" in step S2744 in FIG. 246), the advantageous section ends (step S2744 in FIG. 246). S2746),
As a result of subtracting "1" from the advantageous section counter, when a carry occurs, "0" is stored in the advantageous section counter (step S2761 in FIG. 247), and the advantageous section is stored in the advantageous section information storage means. 246, the value of the advantageous section counter is not changed from "0".

(c) Effect of the original invention 64 According to the original invention, the advantageous section counter can be updated without determining whether the section is an advantageous section.

65. original invention 65
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 65 Same as original invention 64.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 65 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (the thirtieth embodiment) is
Advantageous mode display means (acquisition number display LED 78) for displaying an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42);
a normal section (including a standby section) in which advantageous operation modes cannot be displayed by the advantageous mode display means;
an advantageous section in which an advantageous operation mode may be displayed by the advantageous mode display means;
Advantageous section information storage means (RWM 53) capable of storing information indicating an advantageous section (D0th bit of the advantageous section type flag);
Equipped with an advantageous section counter (advantageous section clear counter) and
Regardless of whether it is an advantageous interval or not, it is possible to subtract "1" from the advantageous interval counter at a predetermined timing (step S2742 in FIG. 246) based on the progress of the game,
As a result of subtracting "1" from the advantageous section counter, when a carry occurs, "0" is stored in the advantageous section counter (step S2761 in FIG. 247), and the advantageous section is stored in the advantageous section information storage means. When the information indicating is stored ("Yes" in step S2747 in FIG. 246), a specific value (1500 (D)) is stored in the advantageous section counter,
After starting the advantageous interval, when the value of the advantageous interval counter becomes "0"("Yes" in step S2744 in FIG. 246), the advantageous interval is terminated.
(c) Effect of original invention 65 Same as original invention 64.

66. original invention 66
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 66 Same as original invention 64.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 66 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (thirtieth embodiment) is
Advantageous mode display means (acquisition number display LED 78) for displaying an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42);
a normal section (including a standby section) in which advantageous operation modes cannot be displayed by the advantageous mode display means;
an advantageous section in which an advantageous operation mode may be displayed by the advantageous mode display means;
A waiting section that can be shifted before shifting to the advantageous section when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section;
waiting section information storage means (RWM 53) capable of storing information indicating a waiting section (the D1 bit of the advantageous section type flag);
Equipped with an advantageous section counter (advantageous section clear counter) and
When starting the advantageous interval, store a specific value (1500 (D)) in the advantageous interval counter,
Regardless of whether it is an advantageous interval or not, it is possible to subtract "1" from the advantageous interval counter at a predetermined timing (step S2742 in FIG. 246) based on the progress of the game,
After starting the advantageous interval, when the value of the advantageous interval counter becomes “0” (“Yes” in step S2744 in FIG. 246), the advantageous interval ends,
As a result of subtracting "1" from the advantageous interval counter, when a carry occurs, "0" is stored in the advantageous interval counter (step S2761 in FIG. 247), and the waiting interval is stored in the waiting interval information storage means. is stored, the value of the advantageous section counter is not changed from "0"("No" in step S2747 in FIG. 246).
It is characterized by
A second solution is that in the first solution,
Advantageous section information storage means (RWM 53) capable of storing information indicating an advantageous section (D0th bit of the advantageous section type flag),
As a result of subtracting "1" from the advantageous section counter, when a carry occurs, "0" is stored in the advantageous section counter (step S2761 in FIG. 247), and the advantageous section is stored in the advantageous section information storage means. If the indicated information is not stored, the value of the advantageous section counter is not changed from "0"("No" in step S2747 in FIG. 246).
It is characterized by
(c) Effect of original invention 66 Same as original invention 64.

67. original invention 67
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 67 Same as original invention 64.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 67 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (the thirtieth embodiment) is
Advantageous mode display means (acquisition number display LED 78) for displaying an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42);
a normal section (including a standby section) in which advantageous operation modes cannot be displayed by the advantageous mode display means;
an advantageous section in which an advantageous operation mode may be displayed by the advantageous mode display means;
Advantageous section information storage means (RWM 53) capable of storing information indicating an advantageous section (D0th bit of the advantageous section type flag);
Equipped with an advantageous section counter (advantageous section clear counter) and
When starting the advantageous interval, store a specific value (1500 (D)) in the advantageous interval counter,
Regardless of whether it is an advantageous interval or not, it is possible to subtract "1" from the advantageous interval counter at a predetermined timing (step S2742 in FIG. 246) based on the progress of the game,
When the result of subtracting "1" from the advantageous interval counter is "0"("Yes" in step S2744 in FIG. 246), at least the information stored in the advantageous interval information storage means is cleared ( Step S2746 in FIG. 246) is characterized by ending the advantageous section.
(c) Effect of Original Invention 67 According to the original invention, the advantageous section counter can be updated without determining whether or not it is an advantageous section. Also, the information stored in the advantageous section information storage means can be cleared at an appropriate timing when the advantageous section ends.

68. original invention 68
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 68 Same as original invention 64.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 68 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (the thirtieth embodiment) is
Advantageous mode display means (acquisition number display LED 78) for displaying an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42);
a normal section (including a standby section) in which advantageous operation modes cannot be displayed by the advantageous mode display means;
an advantageous section in which an advantageous operation mode may be displayed by the advantageous mode display means;
Advantageous section information storage means (RWM 53) capable of storing information indicating an advantageous section (D0th bit of the advantageous section type flag);
Equipped with an advantageous section counter (advantageous section clear counter) and
When starting the advantageous interval, store a specific value (1500 (D)) in the advantageous interval counter,
Regardless of whether it is an advantageous interval or not, it is possible to subtract "1" from the advantageous interval counter at a predetermined timing (step S2742 in FIG. 246) based on the progress of the game,
Before the value of the advantageous interval counter becomes "0", the condition for ending the advantageous interval may be satisfied;
When the conditions for ending the advantageous interval are satisfied before the value of the advantageous interval counter reaches "0", "1" is stored in the advantageous interval counter (step S2823 in FIG. 252), and then "1" is subtracted from the advantageous interval counter based on the execution of the game (step S2742 in FIG. 246), and the advantageous interval counter becomes "0"("Yes" in step S2744 in FIG. 246). (step S2746 in FIG. 246), and the advantageous section is terminated.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 68 According to the original invention, the advantageous section counter can be updated without determining whether or not it is an advantageous section. In addition, even when the advantageous section is terminated when the advantageous section counter is not "0", the advantageous section counter can be set to "0" and the information stored in the advantageous section information storage means can be cleared at appropriate timing.

69. original invention 69
(a) Problems to be Solved by the Original Invention 69 The original invention relates to a gaming machine in which an advantageous section can be ended based on the value of the difference counter.
In conventional gaming machines, there is known a technique of providing an advantageous interval and ending the advantageous interval when a maximum of 1500 games or 3000 payouts is reached (see Japanese Patent No. 6112524, for example).
However, in the conventional technique described above, if the advantageous interval is set to 1500 games or 3000 payouts at maximum, the advantageous interval becomes uniform.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to provide a gaming machine that enables the end of an advantageous section based on the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 69 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
A normal section in which an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) cannot be notified,
an advantageous section in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch may be notified;
a difference number counter that stores a value corresponding to the cumulative value of difference number data indicating the difference between the number of game media bets and the number of payouts (including addition to credits),
regardless of whether it is a normal section or an advantageous section, it is possible to execute a process of updating the difference number counter for each game,
Based on the start of the advantageous section, the value of the difference number counter is set to the initial value (0 (H)),
When the value of the difference counter in the advantageous interval reaches a value that satisfies the conditions for ending the advantageous interval (when it exceeds 2400 (D)), the advantageous interval is terminated.

(c) Effect of the original invention 69 According to the original invention, since the advantageous section can be ended based on the value of the difference counter, "the number of games played in the game section reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games). or when the number of payouts in the advantageous interval reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3000).
In addition, regardless of whether it is a normal section or an advantageous section, the value of the difference counter can be updated, and the value of the difference counter is set to the initial value based on the start of the advantageous section. It is not necessary to update the value of the difference number counter after judging whether or not there is, so that the processing can be simplified and the program capacity can be reduced.

70. original invention 70
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 70 Same as original invention 69.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 70 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
an advantageous section in which an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) may be notified;
a difference number counter that stores a value corresponding to the cumulative value of difference number data indicating the difference between the number of game media bets and the number of payouts (including addition to credits),
making it possible to execute a process of updating the difference counter for each game at least in the advantageous section;
In the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the number of payouts is set to "0" and the difference number counter is updated (example 1 in (a) of FIG. 257),
When the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed in the previous game, in the current game, the number of bets on the game media is set to "0" and the difference number counter is updated (example 1 in (a) of FIG. 257),
When the value of the difference counter in the advantageous interval reaches a value that satisfies the conditions for ending the advantageous interval (exceeds 2400 (D)), the advantageous interval is terminated.

(c) Effect of the original invention 70 According to the original invention, since the advantageous section can be ended based on the value of the difference counter, "the number of games played in the game section reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games). or when the number of payouts in the advantageous interval reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3000).
Also, since the number of payouts in the replay winning game and the number of bets in the next game are set to "0" and the value of the difference number counter is updated, the calculation can be simplified and the program capacity can be reduced.

71. original invention 71
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 71 Same as original invention 69.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 71 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
an advantageous section in which an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) may be notified;
a difference number counter that stores a value corresponding to the cumulative value of difference number data indicating the difference between the number of game media bets and the number of payouts (including addition to credits),
making it possible to execute a process of updating the difference counter for each game at least in the advantageous section;
In the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the number of bets or the number of automatic bets in the game is used as the number of payouts to update the difference number counter (example 2 in (b) of FIG. 257),
When the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed in the previous game, the number of automatic bets based on the stopped display of the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is set as the number of bets in the current game, and the difference number counter is updated (( in FIG. 257). b) Example 2),
When the value of the difference counter in the advantageous interval reaches a value that satisfies the conditions for ending the advantageous interval (when it exceeds 2400 (D)), the advantageous interval is terminated.

(c) Effect of the original invention 71 According to the original invention, since the advantageous section can be ended based on the value of the difference counter, "the number of games played in the game section reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games). or when the number of payouts in the advantageous interval reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3000).
Further, in a game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the number of bets or the number of automatic bets in the game is used as the number of payouts, and the value of the difference counter is updated. It is possible to prevent the value from increasing.

72. original invention 72
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 72 Same as original invention 69.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 72 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
an advantageous section in which an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) may be notified;
Payout number storage means (payout number data buffer) for storing the number of payouts of game media (including addition to credits) in the current game
When,
a difference number counter that stores a value corresponding to the cumulative value of difference number data indicating the difference between the number of game media bets and the number of payouts (including addition to credits),
making it possible to execute a process of updating the difference counter for each game at least in the advantageous section;
when the combination of symbols corresponding to the minor win is stopped and displayed, the payout number is stored in the payout number storage means;
In the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the small win is stopped and displayed, the difference number counter is updated based on the bet number of game media and the payout number stored in the payout number storage means (Fig. 257),
When the difference counter is updated based on the stopped display of the symbol combination corresponding to the minor win, the difference counter is incremented by "1" each time "1" game media are paid out, and
In a game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, a predetermined flag (symbol combination display flag) is updated based on the stopped display of the symbol combination corresponding to the replay,
In the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the difference number counter is updated based on the number of game media bets and the predetermined flag (example 2 in (b) of FIG. 257),
When the value of the difference counter in the advantageous interval reaches a value that satisfies the conditions for ending the advantageous interval (when it exceeds 2400 (D)), the advantageous interval is terminated.

(c) Effect of the original invention 72 According to the original invention, since the advantageous section can be ended based on the value of the difference counter, "the number of games played in the game section reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games). or when the number of payouts in the advantageous interval reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3000).
Further, since the value of the difference counter is updated based on the predetermined flag related to the winning of the replay, the value of the difference counter can be updated correctly even when there is no payout due to the winning of the replay.

73. original invention 73
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 73 Same as original invention 69.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 73 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
an advantageous section in which an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) may be notified;
a difference number counter that stores a value corresponding to the cumulative value of difference number data indicating the difference between the number of game media bets and the number of payouts (including addition to credits),
making it possible to execute a process of updating the difference counter for each game at least in the advantageous section;
When the specific bit (most significant bit) of the calculated value of the difference number counter is "1", the value of the difference number counter is set to the initial value (0 (H)) (FIG. 258),
The advantage section is ended when the value of the difference counter in the advantage section reaches a value that satisfies the condition for ending the advantage section.

(c) Effect of the original invention 73 According to the original invention, since the advantageous section can be ended based on the value of the difference counter, "the number of games played in the game section reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games). or when the number of payouts in the advantageous interval reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3000).
Moreover, when the value of the difference number counter is set to the initial value, it is only necessary to determine whether or not the most significant bit is "1", so the program can be simplified.

74. original invention 74
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 74 Same as original invention 69.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 74 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
an advantageous section in which an information game may be executed to notify an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42);
a difference number counter that stores a value corresponding to the cumulative value of difference number data indicating the difference between the number of game media bets and the number of payouts (including addition to credits);
Main control means (main control board 50) for controlling the progress of the game;
A sub-control means (sub-control board 80) for controlling the output of the production,
The main control means can execute a process of updating the difference number counter for each game in the advantageous section,
The difference counter counts positively from when the cumulative value of the difference count reaches the minimum value in the advantageous section,
The main control means can transmit the value of the difference number counter to the sub control means,
The sub-control means can display the total number of acquired game media based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition regarding execution of an information game (AT) (Fig. 260),
The advantage section is ended when the value of the difference counter in the advantage section reaches a value that satisfies the conditions for ending the advantage section.

(c) Effect of the original invention 74 According to the original invention, since the advantage section can be ended based on the value of the difference counter, "the number of games played in the game section reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games). or when the number of payouts in the advantageous interval reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3000).
In addition, since the difference counter counts positively from when the cumulative value of the difference becomes the lowest value in the advantageous section, the value of the difference counter and the game media executed by the sub-control means It may differ from the total number of acquisitions. However, since the main control means transmits the value of the difference counter to the sub-control means, the sub-control means, based on the value of the difference counter and the total number of winning It is possible to output a display etc. that is not given).

75. original invention 75
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 75 Same as original invention 69.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 75 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
An advantageous section in which an information game (AT) for informing an advantageous operation mode (correct order of pressing) of the stop switch (42) may be executed;
a difference number counter that stores a value corresponding to the cumulative value of difference number data indicating the difference between the number of gaming media bets and the number of payouts (including addition to credits);
Main control means (main control board 50) for controlling the progress of the game;
A sub-control means (sub-control board 80) that controls the output of the production,
The main control means can execute a process of updating the difference number counter for each game in the advantageous section,
The main control means can transmit the value of the difference number counter to the sub control means,
The sub-control means makes it possible to vary the notification mode when notifying the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch according to the value of the difference number counter in the notification game (Fig. 261),
The advantage section is ended when the value of the difference counter in the advantage section reaches a value that satisfies the conditions for ending the advantage section.

(c) Effect of the original invention 75 According to the original invention, since the advantage section can be ended based on the value of the difference counter, "the number of games played in the game section reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games). or when the number of payouts in the advantageous interval reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3000).
In addition, the sub-control means can vary the notification mode when notifying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch according to the value of the difference counter. When a value that satisfies is approached, it is possible to output a notification or the like to call the player's attention.

76. original invention 76
(a) Problems to be Solved by the Original Invention 76 The original invention relates to a gaming machine provided with an advantageous section display indicating an advantageous section.
In a conventional gaming machine, there is known a technique of lighting up an advantageous section indicator until the next game can be settled when winning the transfer lottery for the advantageous section (see, for example, Japanese Patent No. 6112524). ).
In the above-described prior art, if the advantageous zone indicator is lit up before the next game can be settled when the advantageous zone transition lottery is won, the advantageous zone indicator lights up uniformly. It was boring and lacked diversity.
Also, if the advantageous section indicator is not lit even if the advantageous section is entered, no consideration has been given as to how the processing at the end of the advantageous section should be performed.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to light the advantageous section indicator at an appropriate timing. Another object is to execute the processing at the end of the advantageous interval without being affected by whether or not the advantageous interval indicator is lit.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 76 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (32nd embodiment) is
an advantageous section capable of executing a notification game state (AT) for informing an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42);
an advantageous section indicator (advantageous section display LED 77) indicating that it is an advantageous section;
Storage means (advantageous interval display LED flag (Fig. 243)) for storing information on lighting or extinguishing of the advantageous interval indicator;
When the lighting condition of the advantageous interval display is satisfied (in a game in which the correct pressing order is notified in a situation where the interval Sim ball-out rate exceeds "1" in the advantageous interval), the advantageous interval indicator light up,
After shifting to the advantageous interval, there is a case where the termination condition of the advantageous interval is satisfied before the lighting condition of the advantageous interval indicator is satisfied (for example, pattern 1 in FIG. 264),
When the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, regardless of the information stored in the storage means, initialization processing of specific information relating to the advantageous section including the information stored in the storage means is executed (Fig. 246). RWM initialization of
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of the original invention 76 According to the original invention, even if it is an advantageous section, the advantageous section indicator may or may not light up, making it difficult to understand whether it is in an advantageous section. be able to. As a result, it is possible to provide a new playability using the lighting timing of the advantageous section indicator.
In addition, when the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied, the initialization process is uniformly executed regardless of the information stored in the storage means. It becomes unnecessary to judge whether or not the device is turned on. This makes it possible to simply execute the initialization process without increasing the capacity required for the initialization process.

77. original invention 77
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 77 The original invention relates to a gaming machine provided with an advantageous section display indicating an advantageous section.
In a conventional gaming machine, there is known a technique of lighting up an advantageous section indicator until the next game can be settled when winning the transfer lottery for the advantageous section (see, for example, Japanese Patent No. 6112524). ).
In the above-described prior art, if the advantageous zone indicator is lit up before the next game can be settled when the advantageous zone transition lottery is won, the advantageous zone indicator lights up uniformly. It was boring and lacked diversity.
In addition, when the advantageous zone indicator lights up, the player expects that the information game state (AT) may be executed, and thus there is a problem that it becomes difficult to stop the game.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to light the advantageous section indicator at an appropriate timing.
In addition, it is to provide the player with information for judging whether or not to continue the game by using the advantageous section display.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 77 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
an advantageous section capable of reporting an advantageous operation mode (correct order of pressing) of the stop switch (42);
Equipped with an advantageous section indicator (advantageous section display LED 77) indicating that it is an advantageous section,
As a game state in the advantageous section, at least a first game state (high probability) and a second game state (AT preparation) different from the first game state,
In the advantageous interval, at a predetermined timing before the game in the second game state is started (before the start switch 41 is operated), the advantageous interval indicator is lit (for example, pattern 7 in FIG. 267).
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 77 According to the original invention, in the first game state, the advantageous section indicator is not lit, so that the player cannot know whether the advantageous section is in progress or not.
Further, when the advantageous interval indicator is not illuminated, it can be determined that the player is not in the second game state at least. It can provide information for decision making.
On the other hand, in the first game state, it is also possible to output an effect as to whether or not the advantageous zone indicator lights up (for example, an effect as to whether to shift to the second game state).

78. original invention 78
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 78 Same as original invention 77.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 78 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
an advantageous section capable of executing a notification game state (AT) for informing an advantageous operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42);
Equipped with an advantageous section indicator (advantageous section display LED 77) indicating that it is an advantageous section,
When the lighting condition of the advantageous interval display is satisfied (in a game in which the correct pressing order is notified in a situation where the interval Sim ball-out rate exceeds "1" in the advantageous interval), the advantageous interval indicator light up,
Before the information game state is executed, the first game situation in which the advantageous zone indicator is lit (for example, the situation indicated by the solid line (70%) in pattern 6 in FIG. 266) ) and a second gaming situation in which the advantageous zone indicator is not lit (for example, the situation indicated by the solid line (85%) in pattern 2 in FIG. 264), the first gaming situation is characterized in that there is a higher possibility that the information game state will be executed.

(c) Effect of the Initial Invention 78 According to the initial invention, it is possible to ascertain the degree of expectation as to whether or not the information game state will be executed, from the presence or absence of lighting of the advantageous interval indicator.
In addition, it is possible to provide the player with information for determining whether or not to continue the game depending on whether or not the advantageous interval indicator is illuminated.
On the other hand, in the second game situation, it is also possible to output an effect of whether or not the advantageous zone indicator lights up (for example, an effect of whether to shift to the first game situation).

79. original invention 79
(a) Problems to be Solved by the Original Invention 79 The original invention relates to a game machine that does not execute processing related to game media after a power failure occurs.
In a conventional game machine, by turning off a blocker before executing backup processing as power-off processing, even if medals are inserted during execution of backup processing, the medals are returned to the player via the blocker. Therefore, there is known a technique of not performing the medal addition process (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-173832).
However, for example, if a power failure occurs at the moment a medal is inserted from the medal slot, the medal will pass through the blocker before the power shutdown process is executed, and the medal will be counted. It was possible. In terms of control, it is not preferable to execute the medal addition process (the medal bet process or the medal credit process) after the power failure.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to prevent addition processing of game media from being executed even when a power failure occurs substantially at the same time when game media are inserted from a game medium slot. .

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 79 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (33rd embodiment (A)) is
a game medium slot (medal slot 47);
It is provided in a passage (medal passage) for game media (medals) inserted from a game medium slot, and is in a state (on state) that permits passage of game media or a state (off state) that disallows passage of game media. ) controllable blocker (45);
Detection means A (insertion sensor 44a) and B (insertion sensor 44b) provided in the path of the game medium inserted from the game medium insertion port and capable of detecting the game medium (the detection means B is downstream of the detection means A). ) and
When an event occurs in which power supply is interrupted in a state in which the blocker is controlled to allow the passage of game media, the power supply interrupt event is detected, and the game media is removed. Let T1 (T1 in FIGS. 2 and 3) be the time until the blocker is controlled to a state in which passage is not permitted,
When the game medium is released from the game medium inlet into the gaming machine under the condition that the blocker is controlled to permit passage of the game medium, the game medium is invisible from the front of the gaming machine. From when it becomes possible (position M2 in FIG. 2) to when the game medium is detected by the detection means B and until the game medium is no longer detected by the detection means B (position M4 in FIG. 2) When the time is T2 (T2 in FIGS. 2 and 3),
T1<T2
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 79 According to the original invention, when game media are released into the gaming machine from the game medium slot and the game media become invisible from the front of the gaming machine, the power is cut off. In this case, until the detection means B stops detecting the game medium, the blocker is controlled so as to disallow passage of the game medium by detecting an event in which the supply of power is interrupted. , at least not detected by the detection means B.
Therefore, since the game media are not normally detected by the detection means A and B, the addition processing (betting processing and credit processing) of the game media is not executed. Therefore, even if the power is cut off when the game medium becomes invisible from the front of the gaming machine, that is, even if the power is cut immediately after the game medium is released into the gaming machine, the game You can choose not to accept media. As a result, it is possible to prevent the addition processing of the game media from being executed after the power failure occurs.

80. original invention 80
(a) Problems to be Solved by the Original Invention 80 The original invention relates to a gate mark of a substrate case in a game machine provided with a substrate case in which a control substrate is accommodated.
2. Description of the Related Art In a conventional gaming machine, a board case is known which accommodates a main control board inside. Here, since the substrate case is generally formed by molding, gate traces remain on the substrate case. A technique using this gate mark as a mark has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-042270).
However, the trace of the gate on the substrate case is unclear when viewed from the outside because it has a cut portion of the resin. Therefore, there is a problem that the inside of the main control board may be accessed by opening the gate marks.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to suppress the use of the gate traces of the substrate case.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 80 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (34th embodiment) is
a predetermined IC (main CPU 55) having an arithmetic function;
a control board (main control board 50) having the predetermined IC mounted on one surface (the surface facing the upper surface of the upper cover 57);
A substrate case (substrate case 56 consisting of an upper cover 57 and a lower cover 58) that has a plurality of surfaces (upper surface, side surface, etc.) and accommodates the control substrate,
The substrate case is formed so that the inside can be visually recognized,
A gate trace (57b) at the time of molding of the substrate case is arranged on a surface (outside the upper surface of the upper cover 57) that is outside the substrate case and faces the one surface of the control substrate,
It is characterized in that the predetermined IC of the control board is not positioned in the direction perpendicular to the surface facing the trace of the gate.

(c) Effect of the original invention 80 According to the original invention, since the predetermined IC on the control substrate is not positioned in the vertical direction of the gate trace of the substrate case, the gate trace is illegally opened to access the predetermined IC. can be prevented.
In addition, since there is no gate trace of the substrate case in the vertical direction of the predetermined IC on the control substrate, the predetermined IC can be visually confirmed without being blocked by the gate trace. Accordingly, it is possible to easily visually confirm whether or not a predetermined IC has been tampered with.

81. original invention 81
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 81 The original invention relates to a process when communication is restored from a disconnection after a disconnection occurs in communication between the main control board and the sub-control board.
2. Description of the Related Art In a conventional game machine, a game machine is known in which a command is transmitted from a main control board to a sub-control board, and the sub-control board controls an image display device or the like based on the received command.
Here, a technique is known in which the sub-control board compares the command received last time with the command received this time, and determines that command reception is abnormal based on the consistency of these received commands (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-226503).
However, when a command is transmitted from the main control board to the sub control board, disconnection may occur between the main control board and the sub control board. Then, when the communication is restored, there is a possibility that the sub-control board cannot output a normal effect.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to provide an appropriate presentation when communication is restored after disconnection occurs between the main control board and the sub-control board.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 81 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (35th embodiment) is
a main control board (50);
A sub-control board (80) that controls the performance based on the information received from the main control board,
The sub-control board can receive information on the operated stop switch (42) from the main control board,
In a predetermined game state (AT), the sub-control board can output an effect corresponding to the operation of the stop switch based on receiving information of the operated stop switch,
The sub-control board is
When a predetermined stop switch is operated in the "N" game in the predetermined game state, when information that the predetermined stop switch is operated is received, a predetermined stop switch corresponding to the operation of the predetermined stop switch is received. An effect (effect when the reel corresponding to the predetermined stop switch is stopped) is output, and then information from the main control board becomes unreceivable before all the remaining stop switches in the "N" game are operated. After that, at the "N+a" game, information from the main control board can be received, and thereafter, at the "N+a" game, information is received that a specific stop switch different from the predetermined stop switch has been operated. When, an effect corresponding to the operation of the specific stop switch and related to the predetermined effect (an effect following the predetermined effect, and an effect when the reel corresponding to the specific stop switch is stopped) is output. After that, when predetermined information is received in the "N+a+1" game, the effect of the "N+a+1" game is output based on the predetermined information.

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 81 According to the original invention, when the communication is restored in the middle of the "N+a" game, an effect related to the predetermined effect of the "N" game that has been output until then is output. Therefore, in the "N+a" game, an effect following the "N" game can be output. Since the normal performance is restored when the game shifts to the "N+a+1" game, the sudden change of the performance due to the return of communication during the "N+a" game can be eliminated. As a result, it is possible to output an effect that does not cause discomfort before and after the disconnection occurs.

82. original invention 82
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 82 The original invention relates to a gaming machine in which a stop switch can be operated at high speed.
In a conventional game machine, when a stop switch is operated, the reel corresponding to the stop switch is stopped at a predetermined position corresponding to the lottery result. After stopping the reel at a predetermined position, the motor is energized for a predetermined time. Here, when the operated stop switch is in the ON state or when the motor is in the excited state, the next stop switch operation is not accepted.
Here, there is a known technique that does not accept the stop operation even if the second stop switch is operated from the time the first stop switch is operated until the reel status becomes the stopped state ( For example, see JP-A-2017-093576).
However, in the conventional technology described above, there is a problem that the game cannot be completed at high speed if it takes a long time after the stop switch is operated until the next stop switch operation can be accepted.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to enable the stop switch to be operated at high speed.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 82 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (36th embodiment) is
a reel (31);
a motor (32) for rotating the reel;
Reel control means (65) for driving and controlling the motor to stop the rotation of the reel based on detection of the operation of the stop button (stop button 42a);
Internal lottery means (role lottery means 61) and
A sensor (detection sensor 42e) that detects the operation of the stop button is turned on until the stop button is pushed to the deepest part (the position shown in FIG. 12(c)), and when the stop button is released, the stop button is pushed. The button is configured to be movable to the initial position (the position shown in FIG. 12(a)) by the biasing force, and the sensor is turned off until the stop button moves to the initial position,
In a game in which the internal lottery means has determined a predetermined result, the stop button is operated for a predetermined reel at a predetermined timing under the condition that all the reels are rotated by the reel control means, and the predetermined result is obtained. After detecting that the sensor of the stop button for the reel is turned on, an excitation state (four-phase excitation state) for stopping the predetermined reel is set, and a predetermined time (T12 in FIG. 13) elapses after the excitation state. is configured to terminate the excitation state when
Let T1 (T11 in FIG. 13) be the time from the moment when the stop button pushed to the deepest part is released until the sensor is turned off, and let T2 be the predetermined time,
T1<T2
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of the original invention 82 According to the original invention, it was assumed that the start of excitation of the motor when the reel is stopped and the instant when the stop button pushed to the deepest position is released are the same. Sometimes the energized state ends after the sensor turns off. Therefore, the next operation of the stop button can be accepted at the timing when the excitation state of the motor ends.

83. original invention 83
(a) Problems to be Solved by Invention 83 Originally In a conventional gaming machine, an insertion request lamp (also called an "insert lamp", an "insertion display lamp", etc.) is provided, and when medals can be inserted, It is known to light up (for example, see "0059" in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-011864).
The player can confirm that medals can be inserted by looking at the insertion request lamp.
However, in the prior art, the lighting and extinguishing timings of the closing request lamp have not been sufficiently considered.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to appropriately execute the turn-on and turn-off processing of the turn-on request lamp.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 83 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (38th embodiment) is
an input request lamp (input display LED 79e) that can be lit when a game value (game medium, medal, game ball, etc.) can be input;
storage means (D4 bit of LED display data (_PT_STS_LED)) capable of storing information about the lamp requesting to turn on;
Based on the information stored in the storage means, the input request lamp can be controlled to light or not light,
Based on the fact that the start switch is operated under the condition that the prescribed number of gaming values are betted (“Yes” in step S2888 in FIG. 296), a random number for lottery is obtained (step S2891 in FIG. 297). After that, after storing the non-lighting information in the storage means (step S2894 in FIG. 297), a lottery can be executed based on the obtained random number (step S2896 in FIG. 297).
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 83 According to the original invention, when it becomes impossible to insert the game value, the non-lighting information is immediately stored in the storage means before executing the lottery. It is possible to eliminate the lighting of the input request lamp as much as possible even if the input of value becomes impossible.

84. original invention 84
(a) Problem to be initially solved by invention 84 In a conventional gaming machine, an input request indicating whether or not an input request lamp (also called an "insert lamp", an "input display LED", etc.) is lit. It is known to output a ramp signal (for example, see "0317" in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-011864).
However, in the prior art, sufficient consideration has not been given as to how to output the closing request ramp signal.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to appropriately output the closing request lamp signal.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 84 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (38th embodiment) is
an input request lamp (input display LED 79e) that can be lit when a game value (game medium, medal, game ball, etc.) can be input;
storage means (D4 bit of LED display data (_PT_STS_LED)) capable of storing information about the lamp requesting to turn on;
Processing for transmitting an input request lamp signal indicating whether the input of game value is requested (steps S2991 and S2994 in FIG. 303, and step S3002 in FIG. 304 or 305) can be executed. ,
When the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed and the number of credits is not the upper limit, information indicating lighting is stored in the storage means to enable lighting of the input request lamp (step S2868 in FIG. 295),
When the symbol combination corresponding to the replay indicates stop, even under the condition that the input request lamp is lit, an input request lamp signal indicating that the input of the game value is not requested is output. (if "Yes" in steps S2991 and S2992 in FIG. 303)
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 84 According to the original invention, even when the input request lamp is lit, when the input of game value is not requested, input of game value is requested. It is possible to inform the testing machine that the state is not in progress.

85. original invention 85
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 85 Same as original invention 83.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 85 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (38th embodiment) is
an input request lamp (input display LED 79e) that can be lit when a game value (game medium, medal, game ball, etc.) can be input;
storage means (D4 bit of LED display data (_PT_STS_LED)) capable of storing information about the lamp requesting to turn on;
Processing for transmitting an input request lamp signal indicating whether the input of game value is requested (steps S2991 and S2994 in FIG. 303, and step S3002 in FIG. 304 or 305) can be executed. ,
When the number of credits is not the upper limit under the condition that the maximum prescribed number of game values is betted, the information indicating lighting is stored in the storage means so that the input request lamp can be turned on (step S2868 in FIG. 295). ),
In a situation where the number of credits is the upper limit and the game value of the maximum specified number is betted, a process for outputting an input request lamp signal indicating that the input of the game value is not requested is executed. (If "Yes" in step S2866 in FIG. 295, step S2868 is skipped. In FIG. 303, after step S2991, the result is "No" in step S2993, so off data is set as the input request lamp signal. is done.)
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 85 According to the original invention, the number of credits is the upper limit, and in a situation where the maximum prescribed number of game values are betted, the testing machine is shown that it is not necessary to insert game values. can be notified.

86. original invention 86
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 86 Same as original invention 84.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 86 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (38th embodiment) is
an input request lamp (input display LED 79e) that can be lit when a game value (game medium, medal, game ball, etc.) can be input;
storage means (D4 bit of LED display data (_PT_STS_LED)) capable of storing information about the lamp requesting to turn on;
Processing for transmitting an input request lamp signal indicating whether the input of game value is requested (steps S2991 and S2994 in FIG. 303, and step S3002 in FIG. 304 or 305) can be executed. ,
As a prescribed number of gaming values, a maximum prescribed number (for example, "3") and a prescribed prescribed number (for example, "1") smaller than the maximum prescribed number,
Before the start switch is operated under the condition that the predetermined number of game values are betted, an input request lamp signal indicating that the input of the game value is requested is output. (step S2994 in FIG. 303 and S3002 in FIG. 304 or 305) can be executed, and game value is inserted based on the operation of the start switch (“Yes” in step S2888 in FIG. 296). (step S2894 in FIG. 297, step S2991 in FIG. 303, “No” in step S2993, step S3002 in FIG. 304 or FIG. 305) is executable, and
In the situation where the number of credits is the upper limit and the maximum prescribed number of game values is betted, and before the start switch is operated, the game value input is not requested. 296, step S2991 in FIG. 303, "No" in step S2993, step S3002 in FIG. and

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 86 According to the original invention, it is possible to output an appropriate closing request lamp signal before and after the operation of the specified number or the start switch.

87. original invention 87
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 87 In a conventional gaming machine, the game state at that time is determined by the BB signal, the RB game signal, and the replay game signal indicating BB, RB, and replay games, respectively. can be specified (for example, see "0319" in "Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-011864").
However, in the conventional technology, it was not possible to identify which RT is in the case of having multiple RT states.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to appropriately output a signal that can identify the RT state.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 87 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (38th embodiment) is
At a predetermined timing, processing for outputting a replay state identification signal for identifying the lottery state (RT state) related to replay (step S2861 in FIG. 295, FIG. 304, or steps S3003 and S3004 in FIG. 305) , S3009) can be executed,
In a situation where a specified number of game values have been bet, the processing for outputting the replay state identification signal can be terminated based on the fact that the start switch has been operated ("Yes" in step S2888 of FIG. 296). and (“No” in step S2895 in FIG. 297, step S3003 in FIG. 304 or 305),
After the processing of outputting the replay state identification signal is finished, the processing for outputting the test signal indicating OFF for a predetermined period (step S3006 in FIG. 304 or step S3011 in FIG. 305) can be executed, and then the lottery is performed. It is characterized by being able to execute processing for outputting a condition device signal relating to the result (steps S3007 and S3008 in FIG. 304 or steps S3012 to S3015 in FIG. 305).

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 87 According to the original invention 87, outputting the replay state identification signal enables the testing machine side to identify the lottery state related to the replay. Further, since the replay state identification signal and the condition device signal are output at different times, it is possible to clearly distinguish between the replay state identification signal and the condition device signal and output them.

88. original invention 88
(a) Problems to be Solved by the Original Invention 88 In a conventional gaming machine, a game state at that time can be determined by a BB signal, a RB game signal, and a replay game signal indicating BB, RB, and replay games, respectively. can be specified (for example, see "0319" in "Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-011864").
However, in the conventional technology, it was not possible to identify whether or not it is in the advantageous section.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to enable the appropriate output of a signal related to the advantageous section.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 88 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (38th embodiment) is
Equipped with an input request lamp (input display LED 79e) that can be lit when a game value (game medium, medal, game ball, etc.) can be input,
When a trigger for shifting from a non-advantageous section in which advantageous operation information (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) cannot be reported to an advantageous section in which advantageous operation information of the stop switch can be reported is satisfied, the advantageous section 303, step S2996 in FIG. 304 or step S3002 in FIG.
When the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is not stopped and displayed in the game that satisfies the opportunity to shift from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section, processing for outputting an advantageous section signal indicating the advantageous section is performed. After execution, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the input request lamp can be turned on (FIG. 290(a)).
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of Original Invention 88 According to the original invention, it is possible to inform the testing machine side that the advantageous section is in progress by outputting the advantageous section signal indicating the advantageous section. In addition, since the output start timing of the advantageous section signal and the timing at which the closing request lamp can be turned on are made different, the advantageous section signal indicating the advantageous section and the signal corresponding to the lighting of the closing request lamp are clearly distinguished. It is possible to distinguish between and output.

89. original invention 89
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 89 Same as original invention 88.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 89 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (38th embodiment) is
Equipped with a startable lamp (game start display LED 79d) that can be lit when a specified number of game values (game media, medals, game balls, etc.) are betted and the game can be started,
When a trigger for shifting from a non-advantageous section in which advantageous operation information (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) cannot be reported to an advantageous section in which advantageous operation information of the stop switch can be reported is satisfied, the advantageous section 303, step S2996 in FIG. 304 or step S3002 in FIG.
When the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed in a game in which the opportunity to shift from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section is satisfied, after executing the processing for outputting the advantageous section signal indicating the advantageous section. , after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the startable lamp can be turned on (FIG. 290(a)).
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of Original Invention 89 According to the original invention, it is possible to inform the testing machine side that the advantageous section is in progress by outputting the advantageous section signal indicating the advantageous section. Moreover, since the output start timings of the advantageous section signal and the startable ramp signal are made different, the advantageous section signal indicating the advantageous section and the startable ramp signal can be clearly distinguished and output.

90. original invention 90
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 90 Same as original invention 88.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 90 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (38th embodiment) is
Equipped with an input request lamp (input display LED 79e) that can be lit when a game value (game medium, medal, game ball, etc.) can be input,
When a trigger for shifting from a non-advantageous section in which advantageous operation information (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) cannot be reported to an advantageous section in which advantageous operation information of the stop switch can be reported is satisfied, the advantageous section 303, step S2996 in FIG. 303, step S3002 in FIG.
If the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is not stop-displayed in the game in which the conditions for ending the advantageous interval are satisfied, a process for outputting an advantageous interval signal indicating that it is not the advantageous interval is executed, and then a predetermined period of time is reached. After the passage of time, the input request lamp can be turned on (FIG. 290(b)).
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 90 According to the original invention, it is possible to notify the testing machine side that it is not in the advantageous section by outputting the advantageous section signal indicating that it is not in the advantageous section. In addition, since the output start timing of the advantageous section signal indicating that it is not an advantageous section and the timing at which the input request lamp can be turned on are made different, it corresponds to the advantageous section signal indicating that it is not an advantageous section and the lighting of the input request lamp. It is possible to clearly distinguish the signal from the signal to be output.

90. original invention 91
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 91 Same as original invention 88.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 91 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (38th embodiment) is
Equipped with a startable lamp (game start display LED 79d) that can be lit when a specified number of game values (game media, medals, game balls, etc.) are betted and the game can be started,
When a trigger for shifting from a non-advantageous section in which advantageous operation information (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) cannot be reported to an advantageous section in which advantageous operation information of the stop switch can be reported is satisfied, the advantageous section 303, step S2996 in FIG. 303, step S3002 in FIG.
In a game that satisfies the condition for ending the advantageous interval, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, after executing processing for outputting an advantageous interval signal indicating that it is not the advantageous interval, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. , enabling the startable lamp to light up (FIG. 290(b))
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 91 According to the original invention, it is possible to inform the testing machine side that it is not in the advantageous section by outputting the advantageous section signal indicating that it is not in the advantageous section. In addition, since the output start timing of the advantageous section signal indicating that it is not an advantageous section and the timing at which the startable lamp can be turned on are made different, it corresponds to the advantageous section signal indicating that it is not an advantageous section and the lighting of the startable lamp. It is possible to clearly distinguish the signal from the signal to be output.

92. original invention 92
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 92 Same as original invention 88.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 92 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (38th embodiment) is
Equipped with an advantageous section lamp (advantageous section display LED 77) that may be lit when it is an advantageous section capable of reporting advantageous operation information (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
Processing for outputting an advantageous section signal indicating an advantageous section when a trigger for shifting from a non-advantageous section in which advantageous operation information of the stop switch cannot be notified to an advantageous section is satisfied (step S2996 in FIG. 303) , Step S3002) of FIG. 304 or FIG. 305) can be executed,
There is a case where the advantageous section lamp is not lit even when the transition is made to the advantageous section,
In a game that transitions from an advantageous interval to a non-advantageous interval, processing for outputting an advantageous interval signal indicating that it is not an advantageous interval (step S2997 in FIG. 303, step S3002 in FIG. 304 or FIG. 305) can be executed. Characterized by

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 92 According to the original invention, when the advantageous interval is reached, an advantageous interval signal indicating that it is an advantageous interval is output, and at the same time, it is possible for the player to know whether it is an advantageous interval. It is possible to play a game without knowing.

93. original invention 93
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 93 Same as original invention 88.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 93 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (38th embodiment) is
Advantageous section lamps (advantageous section display LEDs 77) that may be lit in an advantageous section capable of reporting advantageous operation information (correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42);
a storage means (advantageous interval clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR)) capable of storing information about the number of games played in the advantageous interval;
A specific value (1500 (D)) can be stored in the storage means when a condition for transition to an advantageous section is satisfied;
The information stored in the storage means can be subtracted according to the execution of the game during the advantageous section (step S2922 in FIG. 299),
When the value stored in the storage means reaches a predetermined value (“0”), the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied (“Yes” in step S2924 of FIG. 299),
When the storage means is the predetermined value, a process for outputting an advantageous interval signal indicating that it is not an advantageous interval (step S2997 in FIG. 303, step S3002 in FIG. 304 or FIG. 305) can be executed, and If the storage means does not have the predetermined value, the processing for outputting an advantageous interval signal indicating an advantageous interval (step S2996 in FIG. 303, step S3002 in FIG. 304 or FIG. 305) can be executed. Characterized by

(c) Effect of the original invention 93 According to the original invention, it is possible to output an advantageous interval signal indicating that the advantageous interval is not or an advantageous interval signal indicating that it is an advantageous interval according to the information regarding the number of games played in the advantageous interval. . In addition, the advantageous section signal can be output without being based on information on whether the advantageous section lamp is on/off. This makes it possible to output an advantageous section signal indicating an advantageous section even when the advantageous section lamp is not lit, for example.

94. original invention 94
(a) Problems to be initially solved by invention 94 In a conventional game machine, when RB is continuously operated during 1BB operation, wait processing is executed when the RB operation flag is off, and RB is executed in interrupt processing during the wait processing. It is known to output a signal indicating that the operation flag is off (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-195624).
However, in the conventional technology, a program is required to execute wait processing when the RB operation is finished and wait processing when the RB operation is not finished, increasing the processing load. In addition, since the time required for one game varies depending on whether the wait process is executed or not, the player may feel uncomfortable.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to reduce the processing load of the program so that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 94 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (38th embodiment) is
Based on the fact that the conditions for starting the special game state (1BB operating state) are satisfied, the special game state can be started (step S2912 in FIG. 298),
In the special game state, it is possible to operate the special bonus (RB),
When the game ends, the waiting process for a predetermined period (steps S2906 and S2907 in FIG. 298) can be executed,
In the special game state, when the end condition of the special game state is not satisfied and the end condition of the operation of the special accessory is not satisfied (when "No" in step S2904 of FIG. 298), the predetermined period , the processing for outputting a test signal indicating that it is in a special game state and that a special accessory is operating (step S3001 in FIG. 303 and step S3002 in FIG. 304 or 305) can be executed. ,
In the special game state, when the end condition of the special game state is not satisfied and the end condition of the operation of the special accessory is satisfied (when "Yes" in step S2904 of FIG. 298), the predetermined period , the processing for outputting a test signal indicating that it is in the special game state and that the special accessory is not operating (step S3001 in FIG. 303 and step S3002 in FIG. 304 or 305) can be executed. It is characterized by

(c) Effect of the original invention 94 According to the original invention, the standby process is not executed only when the special accessory is activated, but the standby process is uniformly executed for all games, so the burden of program processing is increased. can be reduced. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

95. original invention 95
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 95 Same as original invention 83.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 95 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (38th embodiment) is
Equipped with an input request lamp (input display LED 79e) that can be lit when a game value (game medium, medal, game ball, etc.) can be input,
Processing for outputting a test signal indicating the start of a special game (1BB operation) (step S2912 in FIG. 298, step S3001 in FIG. 303) can be executed,
After executing processing for outputting a test signal indicating the start of a special game, after executing standby processing for a predetermined period (steps S2862 and S2863 in FIG. 295), the input request lamp can be lit (in FIG. 295 step S2868),
If an event occurs in which the supply of power is interrupted at the moment when the processing for outputting the test signal indicating the start of the special game is executed, the drive limit voltage of the CPU is set after enabling the input request lamp to light. (Fig. 293)
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 95 According to the original invention, it is possible to clearly distinguish between the test signal indicating the start of the special game and the signal relating to lighting of the insertion request lamp and to output them. Even if the power supply is interrupted at the moment when the processing for outputting the test signal indicating the start of the special game is executed, the time for outputting the signal related to lighting of the input request lamp is secured. can be done.

96. original invention 96
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 96 Same as original invention 83.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 95 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (38th embodiment) is
Equipped with an input request lamp (input display LED 79e) that can be lit when a game value (game medium, medal, game ball, etc.) can be input,
The game can be started on the condition that the minimum playing time T has passed,
In a game in which the special bonus (RB) is activated and in which a predetermined number of game values are awarded, a predetermined period of time t (steps S2862 and S2863 in FIG. 295) is set after the predetermined number of game values are awarded. After the elapse, the input request lamp can be turned on (step S2868 in FIG. 295),
In the game in which the special accessory is activated and in which the predetermined number of game values are awarded, the fastest game time when the game is completed at the fastest time is T',
T'+t<T
(Fig. 292)
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 96 According to the original invention, a predetermined period of time t is provided after a predetermined number of game values have been awarded until the insertion request lamp can be turned on. The burden can be reduced.
Further, when the player completes the game at the fastest speed, even if the predetermined period t is provided, the minimum game time T is not exceeded. can. As a result, the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.

97. original invention 97
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 97 The original invention relates to a gaming machine having a difference counter.
In a conventional game machine, it is known to provide an advantageous section in which the instruction function can be activated, and set the end condition of the advantageous section to 1500 games or 3000 payouts (see, for example, Japanese Patent No. 6112524). .
However, in the conventional technique described above, when the end condition of the advantageous section is set to 1500 games or 3000 payouts, the game value (medals) acquired by the player increases, and there is a risk that gambling will increase. .
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to make the game value obtainable by the player more appropriate.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 97 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (39th embodiment) is
A difference number counter (_SC_24HGAME) that stores a value corresponding to the cumulative value of difference number data indicating the difference between the number of game values (medals) bet and the number of payouts,
When the value of the difference counter reaches a predetermined value (exceeds "2400 (D)") in a predetermined game section (advantageous section), the predetermined game section can be terminated;
As a result of playing the game with the number of bets "X", when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the number of payouts is set to "X" and the difference number counter is updated (step S2930 in FIG. 310),
The number of payouts is added to the value stored in the difference number counter (step S2930), and the number of bets is subtracted (step S2931). The initial value (“0”) is stored in the difference number counter (step S2933)
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 97 According to the original invention, it is possible to finish the predetermined game section based on the value of the difference counter, so that the predetermined game section can be terminated based on the profit received by the player. can be terminated. As a result, the game value that the player can acquire can be made appropriate.
Further, when the game is played with the number of bets "X" and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the number of payouts is set to "X" and the difference counter is updated to make the difference counter value more appropriate. can be

98. original invention 98
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 98 Same as original invention 97.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 98 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (39th embodiment) is
A difference number counter (_SC_24HGAME) that stores a value corresponding to the cumulative value of difference number data indicating the difference between the number of game values (medals) bet and the number of payouts,
When the value of the difference counter reaches a predetermined value (exceeds "2400 (D)") in a predetermined game section (advantageous section), the predetermined game section can be terminated;
When the number of payouts is added to the value stored in the difference number counter (step S2927 in FIG. 311) and the number of bets is subtracted (step S2931) and there is a carry ("Yes" in step S3061) stores an initial value ("0") in the difference number counter (step S2933),
In the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the process of updating the difference counter (step S2934) is not executed.

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 97 According to the original invention, it is possible to finish the predetermined game section based on the value of the difference counter, so that the predetermined game section can be terminated based on the profit received by the player. can be terminated. As a result, the game value that the player can acquire can be made appropriate.
Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the difference number counter is not updated, so that the processing can be simplified and the processing time can be shortened.

99. original invention 99
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 99 Same as original invention 97.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 99 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (thirty-ninth embodiment) is
A difference number counter (_SC_24HGAME) that stores a value corresponding to the cumulative value of difference number data indicating the difference between the number of game values (medals) bet and the number of payouts,
When the value of the difference counter reaches a predetermined value (exceeds "2400 (D)") in a predetermined game section (advantageous section), the predetermined game section can be terminated;
The value stored in the difference number counter is stored in a predetermined register (step S3063 in FIG. 312), the bet number is subtracted from the value stored in the predetermined register (step S3064), and then the payout number (Step S3066), if the specific bit (D7 bit) of the value stored in the predetermined register is a predetermined value (“1”), the difference number counter is set to the initial value (“0 ”) is stored (step S2933)
It is characterized by
In addition, the second solution (thirty-ninth embodiment) is
A difference number counter (_SC_24HGAME) that stores a value corresponding to the cumulative value of difference number data indicating the difference between the number of game values (medals) bet and the number of payouts,
When the value of the difference counter reaches a predetermined value (exceeds "2400 (D)") in a predetermined game section (advantageous section), the predetermined game section can be terminated;
The value stored in the difference number counter is stored in a predetermined register (step S3063), the payout number is added to the value stored in the predetermined register (step S3066), and then the bet number is subtracted ( Step S3064) As a result, when the specific bit (D7 bit) of the value stored in the predetermined register is a predetermined value ("1"), the initial value ("0") is stored in the difference number counter. Yes (step S2933)
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 99 According to the original invention, it is possible to end a predetermined game interval based on the value of the difference counter. can be terminated. As a result, the game value that the player can acquire can be made appropriate.
Further, it is possible to determine whether or not the operation result is less than "0" depending on whether or not the specific bit of the value stored in the predetermined register is the predetermined value. It is possible to determine whether or not the calculation result is less than "0".

100. original invention 100
(a) Problems to be Solved by the Original Invention 100 The original invention relates to a gaming machine provided with a ratio indicator (role ratio monitor).
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a technique of providing a ratio display (role ratio monitor) in a gaming machine (slot machine) to display an advantageous section ratio, a role ratio, and the like (see, for example, Japanese Patent No. 6288159).
However, in the conventional technology described above, if the LED is out of order, there is a possibility that the correct ratio cannot be displayed. For example, if one of the segments of the LED fails to illuminate, a "6" may be displayed instead of, for example, an "8".
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to make it possible to easily discover a failure of a ratio indicator (role ratio monitor).

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 100 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (40th embodiment) is
Multiple types of ratios corresponding to game results (advantageous section ratio (or instruction role ratio), continuous role ratio (6000 times), role ratio (6000 times), continuous role ratio (total), role ratio ( Cumulative total)) display means (management information display LED (ratio indicator, role ratio monitor) 74) is provided,
The display means consists of a plurality of display units (digits 6 to 9),
The display unit consists of a plurality of segments (segments A to G and DP) that can be turned on and off,
When a predetermined start condition is satisfied (for example, when the power is turned on, when the setting change process is performed, when the setting confirmation process is performed, when an RWM abnormal error occurs), a predetermined period of time elapses (for example, within 5 seconds). Alternatively, a test pattern can be displayed on the display means instead of the ratio until a predetermined termination condition is satisfied (until the setting change process is completed, the setting confirmation process is completed, or the power is turned off) (for example, FIG. 314). , Figure 315, etc.),
The test pattern is within a specific period (1 second of (a) and 1 second of (b) in the example of FIG. 314, 0.3 seconds of (a) and 0.3 seconds of (b) in the example of FIG. 315). ), any segment of any display unit has a display pattern that has a lighting period and a non-lighting period.

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 100 According to the original invention, it can be confirmed by displaying the test pattern that all segments can be lit and extinguished. Therefore, it is possible to easily find a segment that cannot be lit or a segment that cannot be extinguished. As a result, ratio display can be performed correctly.

1 base portion 10 slot machine (gaming machine)
11 Power switch 12 Setting key switch 13 Setting switch 14 Reset switch 15 Door switch 16 Board case 16a Crimping part 17 Display window 18 Front door 21 Production lamp 22 Speaker 23 Image display device 24 Cross key 25 Menu button 31 Reel 32 Motor 33 Reel sensor 35 Hopper 36 Hopper motor 37 (37a, 37b) Payout sensor 38a Fixed shaft 38b Movable shaft 39a Movable piece 39b Spring 40a 1 bed switch 40b 3 bed switch 41 Start switch 42 Stop switch 42a Stop button 42b Stopper 42c Coil spring 42d Moving piece 42e Detection sensor 43 Medal slot 43a Passage sensor 43b Medal guard section 43c Medal placement section 44 (44a, 44b) Insertion sensor 45 Blocker 46 Settlement switch 50 (50A, 50B) Main control board (main control means)
50a screw hole 51 input port 52 output port 53 RWM
54 ROMs
55 Main CPU
57 Upper cover 57a Crimped portion 57b Gate mark 57c Hollow portion 57d Protrusion 57e Projection 58 Lower cover 58a Crimped portion 58b Gate mark 58c Boss 61 Role lottery means 62 Winning flag control means 63 Push order instruction number selection means 64 Effect group number selection means 65 Reel Control Means 66 Winning Judgment Means 67 Payout Means 68 RT Control Means 69 Advantageous Section Control Means 69a Advantageous Section Counter 69b Upper Limit Counter 70 External Signal Transmission Means 71 Control Command Transmission Means 72 Management Information Control Means 73 Set Value Display LED
74 management information display LED, ratio display 75 display board 76 accumulated number display LED, credit number display LED
77 Advantageous section display LED
78 Acquisition number display LED
79 Status display LED
79a 1 bet display LED
79b 2bet indicator LED
79c 3bet indicator LED
79d Game start display LED
79e Input indicator LED
79f Replay display LED
79g Production display LED
80 sub-control board (sub-control means)
81 Input port 82 Output port 83 RWM
84 ROMs
85 Sub CPU
91 effect output control means 100 external centralized terminal board 200 hall computer 300 test firing tester 401 interface board 402 interface board

Claims (1)

having a predetermined lamp that can be lit when a game medium can be betted;
As a game section, it has a normal section and an advantageous section,
In the normal section, there is no case of a predetermined game state,
In the advantageous section, the predetermined game state may occur,
If the value related to the total number of differences in the advantageous section exceeds a specific value, the advantageous section ends ,
Processing of outputting an advantageous interval signal indicating an advantageous interval as a test signal when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is not stopped and displayed in the game that satisfies the transition condition for shifting from the normal interval to the advantageous interval. and, after executing a process of outputting a replay lottery state identification signal indicating the lottery state of the internal lottery means as a test signal , executing a process of storing lighting information for lighting the predetermined lamp ,
Based on the fact that the lighting information for lighting the predetermined lamp is stored, a process of outputting a signal indicating that it is possible to bet a game medium as a test signal is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images